JP7487824B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, a lottery is held to determine whether a player will win a game, and if the lottery results in a win, control is executed that is advantageous to the player .

JP 2006-345901 A

In gaming machines like the one above, there is a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises a first determination means capable of executing a first determination for determining that a first condition has been established, a first specific control execution means capable of executing a first specific control indicating that a predetermined game advantageous to a player is likely to be executed in response to the first determination means determining that the first condition has been established, after a predetermined period set in accordance with the established first condition has elapsed, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination for determining that a second condition different from the first condition has been established, and a control different from the first specific control in response to the second determination means determining that the second condition has been established. and a second specific control execution means capable of executing a second specific control which controls the predetermined game to be advantageous to the player and indicates that the predetermined game is likely to be executed, and the gaming machine is configured such that, in a situation where the first condition and the second condition are not established, the degree of advantage of the predetermined game executed in accordance with the established first condition and the second condition is more likely to be higher if the second condition is established for the first time within the specified period set corresponding to the first condition that is established first, than if the first condition is established after the first second condition is established, and is configured to be able to execute the second judgment multiple times within the specified period .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , there are provided a first determination means capable of executing a first determination for determining that a first condition has been established, a first specific control execution means capable of executing a first specific control indicating that a predetermined game advantageous to a player is likely to be executed in response to the first determination means determining that the first condition has been established, after a predetermined period set in accordance with the established first condition has elapsed, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination for determining that a second condition different from the first condition has been established, and a control different from the first specific control in response to the second determination means determining that the second condition has been established, and a second specific control execution means capable of executing a second specific control indicating that the specified game advantageous to the player is likely to be executed, and the gaming machine is configured such that, in a situation where the first condition and the second condition are not established, the degree of advantage of the specified game executed in accordance with the established first condition and the second condition is more likely to be higher if the first of the second conditions is established within the specified period set corresponding to the first condition that is established, than if the first of the first condition is established after the first of the second condition is established, and is configured to be able to execute the second judgment multiple times within the specified period .

This has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. A front oblique view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. 13A and 13B are front oblique views of the variable winning device. FIG. FIG. An exploded front oblique view of the base plate, variable winning device, collection gutter and sorting device. An exploded rear oblique view of the base plate, variable winning device, collection gutter and sorting device. An exploded front oblique view of the variable winning device. An exploded rear oblique view of the variable winning device. FIG. FIG. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVI-XVI in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the distribution device along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the distribution device along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. A front view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in Figure 16. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type for special patterns, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and winnings for normal patterns. This is a diagram showing the changes over time in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate of the variable winning device and the operation pattern of the sliding displacement member of the distribution device in the first round for each jackpot type. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a first operating unit. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a first operating unit; FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit; A front view of the first operating unit in a performance standby state. A rear view of the first operating unit in a performance standby state. 41 is a side view of the first operating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40 . A front view of the first operating unit in an intermediate performance state. A rear view of the first operating unit in an intermediate performance state. FIG. 11 is a front view of the first operating unit in the extended state. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first operating unit in the extended state. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams showing the amount and angle of displacement of a supported member accompanying rotational displacement of a rotating member; 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams showing changes in angle accompanying rotation of a rotating member. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a rear case and a second operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of a rear case and a second operating unit. 28A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 33A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 30A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. 4A and 4B are front views of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inversion member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotation member. 57(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in Figure 57(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in Figure 57(b). 1A to 1C are front views of the performance device. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 5 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member, the driving mode of the drive motor, and the output of the detection sensor in a time series. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in Figure 28. 11A to 11D are schematic front views of the operational units for explaining examples of combined operations of the operational units in chronological order. 11A to 11D are schematic front views of the operational units for explaining examples of combined operations of the operational units in chronological order. FIG. A front view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line LXXV-LXXV in Figure 73. A cross-sectional view of the middle member, slide displacement member, lower member, and detection sensor of the sorting device taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in Figure 75. 1A to 1D are front perspective views of the inner member of the sorting device. 1 is a top view of the middle member, the state switching device, the sliding displacement member and the lower member. FIG. 78A is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member, and lower member taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG. 78, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member, and lower member taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. 78, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member, and lower member taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 78. 13A and 13B are side views of the slide displacement member and a ball resting on the upper surface of the ball guide portion. 81(a) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a rear view of the rotating member, and (c) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81(a). FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. 13A and 13B are rear views of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. 13 is a rear view of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. FIG. A front oblique view of the first decorative rotating member and the second decorative rotating member. 13A and 13B are schematic front views showing the guide slots, the rectangular box portion, and the decorative protrusion portion. 13A and 13B are schematic front views showing the guide slots, the rectangular box portion, and the protruding decorative portion. 1 is a schematic front view showing the guide slot, the rectangular box portion, and the protruding decorative portion. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along line XCIII-XCIII in Figure 85. FIG. 13 is a front view of the second operating unit in the extended state. A cross-sectional view of the second operating unit along line XCV-XCV in Figure 94. 1 is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a top-bottom inversion member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. FIG. 1 is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a top-bottom inversion member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. 1A is a front perspective view of an intermediate arm member, and FIG. 1B is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a third operating unit, illustrating the displacement of a metal bar and an intermediate arm member. FIG. 13 is a schematic front view of a third operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 4A is a rear view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member, and FIG. 4B is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. FIG. 13 is a front view of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is a front view of a third operating unit. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit along line CVI-CVI in Figure 105. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line CVII-CVII in Figure 104. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the second embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15 . 17A and 17B are cross-sectional views of the sorting device according to the third embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15 . 13A and 13B are schematic top views of the third flow path component, the probability change detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member, which are schematic views showing the configuration downstream of the third flow path component in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the special rate detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member taken along line CXIa-CXIa in Figure 110(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the special rate detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member taken along line CXIb-CXIb in Figure 110(b). 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of a sorting device according to a fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15 . A cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of a sorting device according to a seventh embodiment. A cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line CXV-CXV in Figure 114. FIG. 23 is a schematic front view showing a relationship between a guide elongated hole and a rotating member in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic front view showing a relationship between a guide elongated hole and a rotating member in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of a variable winning device provided in the front-view area of the game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that has won in the variable winning device in the first control example. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen in a first control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when a reach is achieved during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode during the execution of a normal pattern fluctuation during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a normal winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a chance zone is set during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the third pattern is temporarily stopped during a special variation performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the third pattern is restarted during a special variation performance executed while the special pattern 2 reserved ball displayed on the third pattern display device has been acquired in the first control example. This figure shows an example of the display mode when the third pattern is restarted in a special variable performance that is executed when the special pattern 2 reserved ball displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example has not been acquired. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half of the ending period of a special jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, (c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the second half of the ending period of a special jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the game state indication effect executed during the chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode displayed by the third pattern display device in the first control example, the normal state is set internally, and a normal state is set, during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period); (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period) in the first control example, the chance mode is set as the presentation mode displayed by the third pattern display device, the normal state is set internally, and a (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the operation presentation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during the operation presentation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when a first special pattern change is executed during the "Super Chance Mode" displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when a second special pattern change is executed during the "Super Chance Mode" displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation presentation is executed is set as the variation presentation of the third pattern in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation when a variation pattern in which a reach variation presentation is executed is set as the variation presentation of the third pattern in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation during the ending period for a normal jackpot in the first control example, (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation during the ending period for a special jackpot in the first control example, and (c) is a timing chart showing the flow when the ball does not flow down a specific area (V gate) during a special jackpot game in the first control example. 13A and 13B are timing charts showing the flow of the presentation mode set after the end of a big win game in the first control example. 13A and 13B are timing charts showing the flow of the content of the operation presentation during the chance mode in the first control example. A diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in a first control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of various counters in the first control example. 4A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and FIG. 4B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the special chart 1 jackpot table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the special chart 2 jackpot table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of a normal table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the table for special bonuses and time reductions set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the normal special chart 2 performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special bonus performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the continuous warning execution selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the V notification execution selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the button operation time performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving state selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the probability change state selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. FIG. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on in a first control example. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface A in the first control example, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram illustrating rear surfaces B to D in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display data table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table in the first control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern change process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing an abnormality process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a state command receiving process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. A flowchart showing the winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing special prize information command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the general map-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an ending process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. A flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 performance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 performance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the chance mode performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer formed on a pachinko machine in the second control example and the display screen, and (b) and (c) are figures showing an example of a display presentation executed when the display of the main pattern image layer is set to off and the display of the sub-pattern image layer is set to on in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the main sea pattern used when a sea image (sea background) is set in the second control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the main mountain image used when a mountain image (mountain background) is set in the second control example, (c) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the sub-pattern pre-stored in the character memory area in the second control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of image data corresponding to various images used for the main variable pattern in the second control example. A timing chart showing a schematic flow of the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern, sub-pattern) in the second control example. (a) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the change pattern used in the performance example in the second control example, (b) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the normal performance in the second control example, (c) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the reach line preview performance in the second control example, and (d) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the preview performance in which the direction of change of the sub-pattern in the second control example is different from normal. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device in a second control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display data table in a second control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing variable pattern command processing 2 executed by an MPU in a display control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer formed on a pachinko machine in a modified example of the second control example and the display screen, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a triple reach performance in a modified example of the second control example, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a triple reach state is reached due to the triple reach performance in a modified example of the second control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure near a specific winning port of the variable winning device of the gaming board of a pachinko machine in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that has won in the specific winning port in the third control example. A schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that enters a specific winning port in the third control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the third control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the big win control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing the winning process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a V round process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing the update process during a jackpot executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the fall lottery table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the button operation time performance selection 2 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the special state selection 2 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a fall-related processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. A figure showing an example of a display presentation in the second control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of the game board of a pachinko machine. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the ending screen of a jackpot game in the fifth control example. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during chance time in the fifth control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a presentation screen at the end of chance time in the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen displayed at the start of the pull-back zone in the fifth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen displayed when a time-saving win is won during the pull-back zone in the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during the extended time executed when a long time reduction is set in the fifth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the number of times the special pattern variation is executed during the long time reduction in the fifth control example reaches 9,900. A figure showing an example of a presentation screen for preparation time that is executed during the time-saving state after the chance time ends in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the background types displayed in the pull-back zone in the fifth control example and the content indicated by each background, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the types of suggestion aspects during the pull-back mode in the fifth control example and the suggestion content indicated by each suggestion aspect. A diagram showing a game flow in the fifth control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters in a fifth control example. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the 1st win random number 5 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the 2nd win random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the time-saving win random number 5 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 5 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example, (b) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the 5 table for the special chart 1 jackpot in the fifth control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the 5 table for the special chart 2 jackpot in the fifth control example. 5A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the five tables for selecting a variation pattern set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example, and FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the five tables for normal and second special variation in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the five tables for special rate and time reduction in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the five tables for time reduction type selection set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a pullback mode selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a suggested mode selection table set in the ROM of a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. A flowchart showing a status command receiving process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the normal state presentation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing a pullback mode setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the second special probability state presentation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing special chart 1 performance mode setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the chance time performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a variable display screen when the result of the special pattern 1 lottery is a jackpot win or a time-saving win in the normal state in the first modified example of the fifth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the result of the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) is a time-saving win in the normal state (low probability state for special patterns, low probability state for ordinary patterns) in the first modified example of the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during the time-saving state when the variable time of special chart 1 is set to 30 seconds in the normal state in the first variant of the fifth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the time-saving state in the first variant of the fifth control example has ended. A figure showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving win is won with special chart 2 reserved during the promotion chance zone in the first modified example of the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the time-saving random number 5a table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first variant of the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the time-saving type selection 5a table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first variant of the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 5a executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modified example of the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 5a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first modified example of the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 5a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first modified example of the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during the chance time acquisition effect executed when a jackpot that grants the first time-saving state is won in the special chart 1 drawing during the normal state in the second variant of the fifth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during the chance time acquisition effect executed when a time-saving state that grants the second time-saving state is won in the special chart 1 drawing during the normal state in the second variant of the fifth control example. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation pattern when a jackpot is won and a time-saving win in the second variant of the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving random number 5b table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second modified example of the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the jackpot 5b table in the second modified example of the fifth control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving type selection 5b table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second modified example of the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 5b executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second modified example of the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when time reduction A is set in the sixth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when time reduction B is set in the sixth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving win is made during the time-saving state in the sixth control example, and the remaining number of time-saving wins increases, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving win is made during the time-saving state in the sixth control example, and the remaining number of time-saving wins decreases. A diagram showing the game flow in the sixth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the 6 random number tables per time reduction set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the 6 time reduction type selection tables set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the six tables for the jackpot set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the sixth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing special chart 2 performance mode setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the mode-specific performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving B performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. A partially enlarged view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. A front oblique view of the V winning device in the seventh control example. A disassembled front oblique view of the V winning device in the seventh control example. This is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the seventh control example, viewed from the rear side. (a) is a schematic diagram of a plan view of the V winning opening of the V winning device in the seventh control example when the opening and closing door is closed, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a plan view of the V winning opening of the V winning device in the seventh control example when it is open. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving lottery result suggestion display is executed during the fluctuation of special chart 1 in the seventh control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving win is suggested during the fluctuation of special chart 1 in the seventh control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when indicating that the time-saving feature has not been won during the fluctuation of special chart 1 in the seventh control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a jackpot winning notification screen when a duplicate win has been won in the seventh control example. (a) is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern when both the time-saving lottery and the jackpot lottery are won in the seventh control example, (b) is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern when the time-saving lottery is won or the jackpot is not won in the seventh control example, and (c) is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern when the time-saving lottery is not won but the jackpot is won in the seventh control example. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters in the seventh control example. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first winning random number 7 table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the seventh control example, (b) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the first special pattern random number 7 table in the seventh control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the second special pattern random number 7 table in the seventh control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example, (b) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 7 table in the seventh control example, (c) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 7 table in the seventh control example, and (d) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the time-saving grant 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the small win type selection table 7 set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the variation pattern 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the normal variation pattern 7 table in the seventh control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving variable pattern table 7 in the seventh control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving random number 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving type selection 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example, and (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the lottery result notification mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. A diagram showing the game flow in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern determination process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win start setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win time-saving update process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the V inlet passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a V passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. This is a flowchart showing the small win control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. A flowchart showing special chart 1 performance mode setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example. A diagram showing a modified configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the eighth control example. 13A to 13B are diagrams showing a schematic diagram of the internal structure of a sorting unit 1064 of a pachinko machine in the eighth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when special pattern 2 reserve is consecutively obtained by overflow winning during an unfavorable time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during a normal pattern long win game displayed on the third pattern display device in the eighth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when suggesting the end of an unfavorable time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during the ending of a normal jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the eighth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the eighth control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing a jackpot type selection 8 table in the eighth control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing a time-saving random number 8 table in the eighth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of 8 tables for special rate and time reduction in the 8th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of 8 tables for time reduction type selection in the 8th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the pre-reading reservation mode selection table in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the start winning process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a state command receiving process 8 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in an eighth control example. A flowchart showing the normal state presentation setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the winning command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing special prize information command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing ending processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the LCD performance execution management process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the advance winning detection process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 9th control example. 13(a)-(b) are enlarged views showing the right side area of the game board of a pachinko machine in a ninth control example. 13(a)-(b) are enlarged views showing the right side area of the game board of a pachinko machine in a ninth control example. 13(a)-(b) are enlarged views showing the right side area of the game board of a pachinko machine in a ninth control example. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the normal winning game when the normal winning opening pattern A is set in the 9th control example. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the normal winning game when the normal winning opening pattern B is set in the 9th control example. A schematic diagram showing a game flow indicating the transition of the game state in the ninth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when a time-saving pattern is won in the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the ninth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during heaven mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the ninth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during space mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 9th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during challenge mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 9th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the 9th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 1st win random number 9 table in the 9th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table in the 9th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 9 table in the 9th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal map type selection 9 table in the 9th control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the ninth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the expectation level selection table in the 9th control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 9 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a ninth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a state command process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a game status update process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. A flowchart showing a time-saving related process 9 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a ninth control example. A flowchart showing a non-powered status management process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a ninth control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the tenth control example. An enlarged view showing the V winning device of a pachinko machine in the tenth control example. An enlarged view showing the V winning device of a pachinko machine in the tenth control example. An enlarged view showing the V winning device of a pachinko machine in the tenth control example. An enlarged view showing the V winning device of a pachinko machine in the tenth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a time-saving presentation screen after a special jackpot on special chart 1 during normal play, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during a special jackpot on special chart 2, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a final change screen during the super chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when the special pattern 2 reserve accumulates to MAX during the super chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a treasure chest opening presentation screen during super chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a final change screen during super chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example. A schematic diagram showing a game flow indicating the transition of the game state in the tenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the tenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number 10 table in the tenth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 1 random number 10 table, which is part of the first winning random number 10 table in the tenth control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 10 table, which is part of the first winning random number 10 table in the tenth control example. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection table 10 in the 10th control example. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a time-saving granting table in a tenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the final change performance selection table in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the notification target selection table in the tenth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. A flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in an eleventh control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a demo screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 11th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a screen during normal right-hit play displayed on the third pattern display device in the 11th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the 11th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 11 table in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 11 table in the 11th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 11 table in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving type selection 11 table in the 11th control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 11th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving limit update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the twelfth control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the 12th control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the 12th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the first winning random number 12 table in the 12th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the second winning random number 12 table in the 12th control example, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the time-saving winning random number 12 table in the 12th control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the small winning random number 12 table in the 12th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table in the 12th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot 12 table, which is part of the jackpot type selection 12 table in the 12th control example. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the Special Chart 2 Jackpot 12 Table, which is part of the Jackpot Type Selection 12 Table in the 12th control example. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection table 12 in the 12th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern 12 table in the 12th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal state fluctuation pattern table, which is part of the fluctuation pattern 12 table in the 12th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving state fluctuation pattern table, which is part of the fluctuation pattern 12 table in the 12th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for time-saving winning fluctuation state, which is part of the fluctuation pattern 12 table in the 12th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation start process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern determination process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the game status update process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation execution process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation stop processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the forced stop processing 12 of FIG. 1 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation start process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern determination process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the small prize lottery process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern change pattern selection process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation execution process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation stop processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the forced stop processing 12 of FIG. 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. This is a flowchart showing the special chart 2 small win stop processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving limit update process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1 to 71, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following explanation, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (rear) side with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Figure 1. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Figure 1, the top side will be referred to as the upper (upper) side, the bottom side will be referred to as the lower (lower) side, the right side will be referred to as the right (right) side, and the left side will be referred to as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see Figure 2, for example) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11, whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be detached from the back side. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top and extends out to the front, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks due to the built-in LEDs lighting up or blinking, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that a reach is being reached just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as an LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 on the left side that is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in Figure 2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, not shown in the upper half of the game area) and a windmill (not shown) on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, as well as rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 140, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows the player to see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, it is possible to shield various structures arranged on the outside of the center frame 86 from its front side to the rear side of the base plate 60 so that they cannot be seen by the player.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 2), which prevents a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, whereas when the ball has entered the second winning hole 140, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while the seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R special jackpot, a 4R special jackpot, and a 4R regular jackpot. The first pattern display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but also show a pattern according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. A "4R normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4, and is in a time-saving state for a specified number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot increases after the jackpot has ended as an added value, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (during a probability fluctuation), in other words, a state of play in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a probability fluctuation) includes a game state in which the probability of a jackpot increases for a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment), and the probability of a hit of the second pattern described below increases, making it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability fluctuation, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than during a probability fluctuation. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, but only the probability of a hit of the second pattern increases, making it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state when it is not in a special mode or time-saving mode (neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of hitting the second symbol has increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that a game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300 described later during the first round of a jackpot game, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in a high probability state for 100 fluctuations. Note that if it is not determined that a game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in a time-saving state for 100 fluctuations.

During the special rate or time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the electric device 140a (electric device) associated with the second winning port 140 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal times. When the electric device 140a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140 than when the electric device 140a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the winning probability of the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140 is opened and the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may be changed. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140 is opened and the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may not be changed, and only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the play area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the winning (initial winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 is fastened to the rear case 510 so as to fill the opening 511a of the rear case 510 described below, and the center frame 86 is arranged to frame the window portion of the base plate 60. In other words, when viewed from the front, the center frame 86 appears to be arranged to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81, but in reality, the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged separately in the front and rear.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 9 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4) to display, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom. Each symbol row is configured with a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during a special probability or time-saving mode than during normal game mode. As a result, during special probability and time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning lotteries can be held than during normal game mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning lottery, giving the player more opportunities to have the electric device 140a of the second winning slot 140 open. Therefore, during special probability and time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 140.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 140 during a special probability or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a special probability or time-saving period than during normal times, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display unit 80, and are configured to allow a portion of the ball launched onto the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the through gates 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, a "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the through gate 67 can be reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second pattern reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81.

The second pattern change display may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. The maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). The number of through gates 67 installed is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. The installation position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left or right of the variable display unit 80, but may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, the second pattern reserve lamp may not be turned on.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When the first winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 140 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on, and when the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

The first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 are also each one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning port. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be five.

An electric device 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. This electric device 140a is configured to be able to open and close, and is normally in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 140a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

As mentioned above, during the special rate and time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 140a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving period, the time that the electric device 140a is open is also longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate and time-saving period, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning slot 140 than during normal play.

The probability of a jackpot occurring when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 is the same as when a ball enters the second winning slot 140, regardless of whether the probability is low or high. However, the probability of a 15R special jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot occurring when a jackpot occurs is set to be higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second winning slot 140, and the ball is always capable of winning.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first winning opening 64, which does not have an electric device, by shooting the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by having the ball win at the first winning opening 64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery and aiming to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, during the special bonus period or the time-saving period, the electric device 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the through gate 67, making it easier to win at the second winning port 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the through gate 67 to open the electric device, and aiming for the ball to win at the second winning port 140 for a 15R special bonus jackpot.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since the game board 13 is configured symmetrically, it is possible to aim for the first winning slot 64 with a "right hit" and for the second winning slot 140 with a "left hit". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not require the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This eliminates the hassle of having to change the way the ball is shot.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is provided below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state as a special game state. In addition, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

The right corner of the lower side of the game board 13 is provided with an attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the outlet 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The outlets 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning hole 65a.

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a to the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b (see Figure 11) as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 and to retain (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. In addition, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include the drive motors 631, 731, 782, and 861.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the sound lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The sound lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the sound output from the sound output device 226 by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, and FIG. 6(a) and FIG. 6(b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 6(a) illustrates the closed state of the opening and closing plate 65b, in which the opening and closing plate 65b is closed to restrict the flow of balls down to the specific winning opening 65a, and FIG. 6(b) illustrates the open state of the opening and closing plate 65b, in which the opening and closing plate 65b is open to allow the flow of balls down to the specific winning opening 65a. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of FIG. 5 and FIG. 6.

The variable winning device 65 is formed so that when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)), the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 65b is inclined downward toward the rear side so that it can receive a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b and guide it to the specific winning opening 65a.

Since the electric device 140a is located above the center of the opening and closing plate 65b (see Figure 2), the balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b are limited to balls that stray from the electric device 140a and flow down. In other words, balls do not land on the opening and closing plate 65b in the center, but mainly in the parts on the outside of the electric device 140a. In other words, the placement of balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b is limited to positions closer to the outside of the opening and closing plate 65b.

However, this does not apply to the placement of the ball after it lands on the opening and closing plate 65b. In other words, depending on how the ball flows after it lands on the opening and closing plate 65b, it may end up being placed closer to the center of the opening and closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric prop 140a from the front side is curved to ensure space on the opening and closing plate 65b side (it is curved so that it juts out downward from the lower front end that faces the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) toward the rear side), so that the degree to which a ball that bounces near the left-right center of the opening and closing plate 65b collides with the front design member 141 and loses momentum can be reduced. This increases the likelihood that the ball will be positioned near the left-right center of the opening and closing plate 65b.

The center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower part of the front design member 141 may be located either forward or backward. In this embodiment, the radius of curvature in a side view is formed to be located at the lower front, making it possible to secure a larger space on the opening and closing plate 65b side. In addition, the front design member 141 is shaped so that the left and right width becomes smaller as it moves downward at the left and right ends, making it easier to secure space between the opening and closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

When the opening and closing plate 65b is in the open state, balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b are guided almost without exception to the specific winning opening 65a. In front of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is arranged at an upper and lower position that can guide the ball into the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right ends of the lower surface 163a so that a ball rolling to the left and right outside by the lower surface 163a can move over with less resistance. In order to reduce the flow resistance of a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b outside the left and right of this inclined flow lower surface 163a1, a guide plate portion 163a2 is formed on the left and right outside of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-shaped portion that extends forward and inward from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163, and the front end surface is formed as an inclined surface that is shifted rearward as it moves inward to the left and right.

As a result, when a ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b abuts against the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided down along the slope of the inclined surface, so that the ball can be guided with little resistance to the inclined flow-down surface 163a1. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts to close with a ball on it, even if the ball is positioned to the left or right outside the inclined flow-down surface 163a1, the degree to which the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b is hindered can be reduced.

In other words, it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunctions such as, for example, poor ball flow causing delays in closing the opening/closing plate 65b, or balls being swept backwards by the closing action of the opening/closing plate 65b bouncing off the rear wall of the receiving member 163 and striking the opening/closing plate 65b again, applying a load in the direction (forward) that causes the opening/closing plate 65b to open, causing the opening/closing plate 65b to open unintentionally.

When the opening and closing plate 65b moves from an open state to a closed state, the opening and closing plate 65b closes by rising up. In other words, a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning opening 65a by the movement of the opening and closing plate 65b, so that the ball does not move to the left or right of the ball resting on the opening and closing plate 65b, and almost all of the balls resting on the opening and closing plate 65b are guided to the specific winning opening 65a.

In this case, if the arrangement of the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b is on the outer left or right side, or if there are a large number of balls, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b may be delayed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the shapes of the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate portion 163a2 are designed in such a way that the flow of balls guided to the specific winning opening 65a is not stagnated, and the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be kept prompt.

In addition, instead of modifying the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rests in the open state is formed in a flat surface (see FIG. 6(b)). Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b first flows backward, and then flows left and right due to the effect of the shape of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, making it easier to avoid ball collisions on the opening/closing plate 65b.

In other words, even if multiple balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls will first move backward in parallel, preventing the balls from colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to when the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is shaped with a left-right inclined surface like the lower surface 163a, which creates a left-right flow in the rolling balls, the possibility of the balls moving irregularly on the opening/closing plate 65b can be reduced, making it possible to prevent unintended malfunctions.

The receiving member 163 is formed with abutment surfaces 163a3 that abut against the pivot tips at both left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, thereby improving the reproducibility of the positioning of the opening/closing plate 65b. The abutment surfaces 163a3 are formed in a pair on the left and right, and are designed to match the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b so that they can make surface contact rather than point contact. This makes it easier to stabilize the positioning of the opening/closing plate 65b, and by receiving the load at the time of abutment on the surface, stress concentration can be avoided, improving durability.

In addition, an auxiliary abutment surface 163a4 is formed on the underside of the abutment surface 163a3, and is formed in a surface shape that is approximately parallel to the opposing opening and closing plate 65b with a small gap between them. The auxiliary abutment surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in case the abutment between the abutment surface 163a3 and the opening and closing plate 65b becomes poor for some reason.

In this embodiment, a fixed member 161 that restricts the flow of the ball is disposed in front of the contact surface 163a3, and is configured so that the ball does not collide with the contact surface 163a3. However, for example, if the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface 163a3 is chipped, it may become impossible to maintain the repeatability of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front-to-rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b come into surface contact with the auxiliary contact surface 163a4, thereby maintaining the stability of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b. This improves the reproducibility of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening and closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since the contact surface portion 163a3 contacts the opening and closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal, there may be a disadvantage that loads are easily accumulated. However, since the area over which the load is distributed can be increased, the magnitude of the local load that the contact surface portion 163a3 receives due to contact with the opening and closing plate 65b can be reduced.

When the opening and closing plate 65b moves from an open state to a closed state, the game ball that is in the process of being received by the opening and closing plate 65b can be configured to be received in a manner that pushes it into the opening and closing plate 65b due to the shape of the front design member 141 described above.

In other words, if the ball comes into contact with the lower shape of the front design member 141 while being received (for example, while it is being sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b and the opening frame of the specific winning opening 65a and sliding sideways), the ball can be guided by the curved shape to flow down into the inside of the specific winning opening 65a. This makes it easier to prevent the ball that has deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b from falling down the front side of the third flow path component 336, making it easier to ensure visibility into the third flow path component 336.

When the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, balls do not land on the opening and closing plate 65b, so the placement of balls flowing down the front side of the opening and closing plate 65b when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state is limited to the outside on the left and right of the electric prop 140a.

Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the placement of the balls that flow down without being guided to the specific winning opening 65a can be limited to positions on the left and right outer side of the electric role device 140a. This ensures visibility below the electric role device 140a at positions on the left and right inner side of the left and right ends of the electric role device 140a.

Next, the configuration downstream of the specific winning port 65a (the side where the balls flow after passing through the specific winning port 65a) will be described. Figure 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and Figure 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. Note that Figures 7 and 8 show the configuration arranged on the base plate 60 with all components removed except for the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65.

As shown in FIG. 8, a collecting gutter 150 is provided at the rear of the variable winning device 65 on the rear side of the base plate 60, forming a path for directing balls that enter the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 2) to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The collecting gutter 150 has a grooved portion that forms a flow path, and the front side of the grooved portion that faces the base plate 60 is open. When this open portion is closed by the base plate 60, a path for flowing the balls to the ball discharge passage is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path section 151 that forms a flow path for balls that enter the first winning opening 64, a second flow path section 152 that forms a path for balls that enter the second winning opening 140, and a plurality of third flow path sections 153 that form flow paths on the left and right for balls that enter the general winning openings 63 located on both the left and right sides.

The first flow path section 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the first winning opening 64 to the lower left, and the second flow path section 152 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the second winning opening 140 to the lower right. The third flow path section 153 is configured as a flow path that extends below the general winning opening 63.

Therefore, while the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are positioned in the left-right center of the play area when viewed from the front, the flow of balls that enter the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is directed from the left-right center to the left-right outer side by the collecting gutter 150. This allows a space to be created below the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and this space can be used to position the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described below.

Figure 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300, and Figure 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300. Note that in Figures 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is shown, and other parts are omitted, and other components assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted, so that the base of the base plate 60 can be seen. Also, for ease of explanation, Figure 9 shows the center frame 86 assembled to the base plate 60.

The following describes the fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300. The variable winning device 65 is placed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is placed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The sorting device 300 has an insertion hole 311 at the top that is fastened to the variable winning device 65, and an insertion hole 331 at the left and right that is fastened to the collecting gutter 150. In other words, unlike the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 that are directly fixed to the base plate 60, the presence or absence of the sorting device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 in this embodiment can be used as is whether the sorting device 300 is installed or not. This allows the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 to be used in common regardless of whether the sorting device 300 is installed or not.

Next, the details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the game area through the specific winning port 65a, and the sorting device 300 constitutes a flow path along which the balls received by the variable winning device 65 flow. In this embodiment, the profits obtained by the player are controlled to change based on the detection results of the balls flowing through the flow path of the sorting device 300, and details will be described later.

11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like, a front design member 162 arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161 and fastened to the fixed member 161, a receiving member 163 arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161, fastened to the fixed member 161, and configured to be able to receive balls that have passed through the specific winning opening 65a, an intervening member 164 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened to the receiving member 163, and intervening as a connecting part with the sorting device 300, and a state switching device 165 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened to the receiving member 163, and configured to be able to switch the open/closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on whether or not electricity is applied.

The fixed member 161 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and its front side is flat except for the through holes for screw insertion, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, the rear side of the fixed member 161 is three-dimensional, projecting toward the rear side inside the thin-walled portion that abuts the base plate 60 on the outer periphery.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin portion is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately elliptical frame shape, and a through hole large enough to accommodate this boundary portion 161a is formed through the base plate 60. In other words, the boundary portion 161a is the portion that is inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

Inside the boundary 161a, a specific winning opening 65a and an extended support plate 161b are formed, which are configured as a pair of roughly T-shaped supports on the left and right, and include a horizontally elongated plate-like portion that extends rearward slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a and is parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a, and a vertically elongated plate-like portion that extends downward midway through the horizontally elongated plate-like portion.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the area behind the specific winning opening 65a and the flow path of the sorting device 300, which will be described later. The protruding support portion 161c protruding from the horizontally elongated plate portion of the extended support plate 161b, the protruding support portion 161d protruding from the vertically elongated plate portion of the extended support plate 161b, and the protruding support portion 161e protruding from the upper surface of the lower edge of the boundary portion 161a function as parts that support the sorting device 300, and will be described in detail later.

The symmetrical protrusion 161f, which is protruded symmetrically below the center of the specific winning opening 65a inside the boundary 161a, has the function of contacting the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 and guiding the balls as they flow down.

Multiple through holes 161g for inserting the fastening screws that are screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged on the inside and outside of the boundary portion 161a. Multiple fastened portions 161h having female threads for inserting the fastening screws that are inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged on the inside of the boundary portion 161a.

The fastening portion 161i, which has a female thread for threading the fastening screw inserted into the intervening member 164, is positioned outside the boundary portion 161a at the gap (center position from left to right) of the boundary portion 161a. In other words, the fastening portion 161i is disposed at the connection portion (see FIG. 9) between the through hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for inserting the second winning opening 140 and the electric role object 140a among the through holes formed in the base plate 60.

The front design component 162 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape to ensure a uniform distance from the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1). The balls are allowed to flow down within the area between the rear side of the front design component 162 and the front side of the fixed component 161.

The rear side of the front design member 162 is provided with a number of fastening portions 162a that are arranged in positions that match the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161 and have female threads that allow the fastening screws inserted into the through holes 161g to be screwed in, and a number of extension portions 162b, 162c that extend to the rear side in a shape that covers the fastening portions 162a from above.

The extensions 162b and 162c prevent the balls flowing between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a, thereby improving the durability of the fastened portion 162a.

Furthermore, by forming the upper surfaces of the extensions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces, it is possible to restrict the path of the balls flowing down. That is, by forming the upper surfaces of the extensions 162b (two locations on the left and right central sides) that are extended near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right outside, it is possible to prevent balls on the extensions 162b from flowing toward the specific winning opening 65a. That is, after the balls on the extensions 162b fall downward on the left and right outsides of the extensions 162b, they flow down along the inner rail 61 (see Figure 2) toward the outlet 71.

In addition, by forming the upper surfaces of the extension parts 162c (two parts on both the left and right ends) that extend to both the left and right ends as inclined surfaces that slope downwards toward the inside of the left and right sides, the flow path of the balls flowing on the extension parts 162c can be unified with the flow path of the balls on the extension parts 162b. This makes it possible to narrow the area in which the flowing balls are arranged compared to the number of balls flowing down (the ball arrangement density can be increased), and to secure areas where visibility is not obstructed by the balls (space where no flow path is formed).

The front design component 162 shown in FIG. 11 is blank and has good visibility on the back side, but the front design component 162 does not have to be blank. For example, the front side of the front design component 162 may be decorated by attaching a sticker with a pattern or character on it, or grooves may be dug in the front design component 162 with a geometric pattern, and the geometric pattern may be made visible by shining light into the grooves. The front design component 162 may also be blank or have the above-mentioned decorations added, and then be configured to be opaque.

The receiving member 163 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material in a horizontally elongated frame (or box) shape with the front side open, and includes the above-mentioned guide plate portion 163a2, the contact surface portion 163a3, the auxiliary contact surface 163a4, the lower surface portion 163a forming a flow-down surface inside the frame, the ball passing hole 163b arranged as a through hole through which the ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, a plurality of insertion holes 163c arranged at a position matching the fastening portion 161h of the fixed member 161 and through which fastening screws fastened to the fastening portion 161h are inserted from the back side, a pair of fastening portions 163d arranged on the left and right central sides as female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted into the intervening member 164 are screwed, and a plurality of fastening portions 163e having female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted into the state switching device 165 are screwed.

The lower surface 163a is formed as a left and right inclined surface that slopes downward to the left and right outward from the left and right central portions as apexes, and is provided with an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward to the rear at a position one step lower than the left and right outer ends of the left and right inclined surfaces, so that a ball flowing down the rear end of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 can pass through the ball passage hole 163b with little resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 that engages with the back side of the receiving member 163. In other words, the passage of the ball through the ball passage hole 163b is detected by the detection sensor SE1.

The intermediate member 164 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes a main body 164a having a light refracting surface that slopes downward toward the rear, a pair of insertion holes 164b formed through the upper side of the main body 164a and capable of receiving fastening screws screwed into the fastening portion 163d of the receiving member 163, a light emitting board 164c arranged above the insertion holes 164b and on which an LED is disposed, a pair of fastening portions 164d formed at both left and right ends of the lower end of the main body 164a with female threaded portions capable of receiving fastening screws inserted into the sorting device 300, and an insertion hole 164e formed through the upper side of the main body 164a and capable of receiving fastening screws screwed into the fastening portion 161i of the fixed member 161.

The light-emitting board 164c is disposed so that the surface on which the LEDs are arranged faces diagonally upward and forward, and in the assembled state, is positioned directly above the specific winning hole 65a when viewed from the front (see FIG. 6) and directly below the second winning hole 140. With this arrangement, the light from the light-emitting board 164c easily enters the field of vision of a player who is hoping for the ball to land in the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a and is gazing diagonally downward and backward at these locations.

Therefore, by controlling the LED of the light-emitting board 164c to light up when a ball has entered the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a, the player can easily know whether or not a ball has entered the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. This allows the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 to be more firmly fixed than when the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened to each other. In addition, the arrangement of the sorting device 300, which is connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164, can be stabilized, so that the relative positional deviation between the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300 can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion parts 165a through which fastening screws are inserted into the fastening part 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, a lower case part 165b formed in a deep box shape with a plurality of openings for wiring and heat dissipation and an open upper side, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case part 165b, a sliding part 165d that engages with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c and slides together with the plunger, a rotating part 165e that is rotatably supported by the lower case part 165b in such an arrangement that the rotating tip protrudes from the front end of the lower case part 165b and rotates with the sliding displacement of the sliding part 165d, and an upper cover part 165g that is fastened and fixed to the lower case part 165b by fastening screws inserted into a plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The tip of the rotating part 165e is recessed so that the rod-shaped part can engage with it, and the transmission protrusion 65c that protrudes rightward from the right end of the opening/closing plate 65b fits into this recess and engages with it. The transmission protrusion 65c is positioned eccentrically from the metal shaft rod part 65d that forms the rotation axis for the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b. By configuring it in this way, the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be caused to occur in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating part 165e.

Figures 13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. Figure 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from above, and Figure 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from below.

As shown in Figures 13 and 14, the sorting device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 164d of the intervening member 164 can be inserted therethrough, a middle member 330 that is fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and has a pair of insertion holes 331 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted therethrough, a substrate 350 that is housed between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 and has a light emitting means 351 such as an LED disposed on the front side, and a substrate 350 that is connected to the middle member 330 and the upper member 310. It is equipped with a state switching device 360 that is housed in a position between the member 310 and is configured to be able to switch states depending on whether or not electricity is applied, a sliding displacement member 370 that is arranged below the middle member 330 and slides back and forth between a front position and a rear position as the state switching device 360 switches states, and a lower member 380 that is arranged below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the sliding displacement member 370 between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 and has an insertion hole 381 formed therethrough that can insert a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150.

Before describing the details of the configuration of each part, we will provide an overview of the function of the sorting device 300. The sorting device 300 is a device that configures a flow path along which balls that pass through the ball passage hole 163b (see Figure 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flow.

The balls that pass through the ball passage hole 163b flow down through the interior of the upper member 310, the flow path configurations 334, 335, and 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the interior of the lower member 380, and the balls that flow down from the lower member 380 are discharged into the ball discharge path (not shown).

The balls flowing down inside the distribution device 300 are configured to be visible to the player, and depending on the way they flow down, it is not just a dramatic effect that pleases the player's eyes, but also has an effect related to the gaming profits, such as bringing about changes in the profits that the player can obtain.

Differences in the flow patterns of balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 are mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

As a result, the player's gaze will naturally tend to be focused on the location where the ball flows from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380 (where the slide displacement member 370 is located, as described below), so this embodiment is designed to accommodate this focus.

Next, the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be described in detail. The upper member 310 is a thin-walled member that is U-shaped when viewed from above and is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 formed therethrough to be able to receive balls, a pair of colored (red in this embodiment) transparent seal members 313 that are attached as markers, a pair of upper surface parts 314 that extend from the lower edge of the openings 312 along the outer periphery to the front side, a plurality of insertion tube parts 315 in which through holes are formed through which fastening screws that are screwed into the middle member 330 can be inserted, a fastening part 316 having a female thread through which the fastening screw inserted into the middle member 330 can be screwed, and the upper member 310. 10 from the underside, a pair of long front-rear projections 317 arranged side by side, a pair of inner left-right projections 318 arranged between the pair of long front-rear projections 317, a pair of outer left-right projections 319 arranged on the outer left-right sides of the pair of long front-rear projections 317, a pair of outer left-right projections 319 arranged on the outer left-right sides of the pair of long front-rear projections 317, and a storage recess 320 formed as a recess large enough to accommodate the upper part of the substrate 350.

The opening 312 is a passage-like portion (tunnel-like portion) that receives balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and allows them to flow downward, and its upper front edge is shaped as if it had been cut with an inclined surface so that it is flush with the back surface of the plate of the inclined detection sensor SE1 (see Figure 12). This allows the upper front edge of the opening 312 to come into contact with the back surface of the plate of the detection sensor SE1.

In addition, the opening 312 is formed with an opening size that does not allow the ball to enter the inside of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. This reduces the flow resistance when guiding the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b to the opening 312.

The sealing member 313 functions as a member that attracts the player's attention by receiving light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350 and becoming brightly visible, but details will be given later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is sloped to match the path that the ball takes below the upper member 310. The first upper surface portion 314a, which is located on the front side of the opening 312, is formed to slope downward as it approaches the front side, and the second upper surface portion 314b, which is connected to the front end of the first upper surface portion 314a and is located on the left and right inside, is formed to slope downward as it approaches the left and right inside. The left and right second upper surface portions 314b are configured so that the left and right distance between them is longer toward the front, thereby ensuring the player's visibility when viewing the ball through the second upper surface portions 314b.

The insertion tube portion 315 has a counterbore formed on the upper surface to receive the head of the fastening screw. Therefore, even though the fastening screw is inserted from above, it is easy to prevent the player from seeing the head of the fastening screw.

The insertion tube portion 315 is positioned to match the fastening portion 332d having a female thread formed in the inner member 330. In particular, the fastening portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion tube portion 315 also serves as a support portion that supports the rotating portion 363, as will be described in detail later.

The fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 is positioned with the screw portion facing upward and the screw head facing downward. Therefore, while the fastening portion 316 is positioned at the front, the screw head is not easily noticeable to a player viewing from diagonally above. This makes it possible to securely fasten the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 together while avoiding the fastening screw spoiling the appearance of the sorting device 300.

The reason why the fastening portion 316 is only formed on the right side is that since the insertion tube portion 315 is already arranged in two places on the rear side, one fastening position on the front side is sufficient, and although the screw head is facing downward and is not very noticeable, omitting it if unnecessary will improve the appearance of the sorting device 300. Note that the arrangement of the fastening portion 316 is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on the left side, or it may be arranged in a pair on the left and right.

The fastening portion 316 is positioned to avoid the path of the balls flowing down and to minimize any loss in appearance of the sorting device 300, as will be described in more detail below.

The undersides of the long front-rear projections 317, the inner left-right projections 318, and the outer left-right projections 319, which form each pair, are formed as curved surfaces that use the same point as a reference point and become lower the further away from that point. The curved surfaces of the long front-rear projections 317, the inner left-right projections 318, and the outer left-right projections 319 have different shapes, and the difference in shape is intended to control the way the ball flows down.

The middle member 330 includes the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (approximately box-shaped) with a lower bottom at the rear side, a pair of front frame portions 333 formed in a frame shape (approximately box-shaped) with a lower bottom at the front side, a pair of first flow path components 334 recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame portion 333 to form a flow path for the balls, a pair of second flow path components 335 connected to the front end of the first flow path components 334 to form a flow path for the balls and recessed in front of the front frame portion 333, and a pair of third flow path components 336 connected to the left and right inner ends of the second flow path components 335 to form a flow path for the balls and recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333.

The middle member 330 also includes a discharge hole 337 that is elongated from side to side and penetrates the lower base at the rear side of the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and functions as a discharge path for the balls; a partition plate portion 338 that is elongated in the front-rear direction and divides the discharge hole 337 and the third flow path component 336 into left and right parts; and a pair of alignment protrusions 339 that protrude from the lower surface at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 as elongated rectangular protrusions.

Unlike the front part which forms a path for the balls to flow down, the rear frame part 332 does not form a path for the balls to flow down, but is mainly configured as a part supporting the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame part 332 has an arrangement through hole 332a formed in the front end of the left-right center part in the vertical direction and configured to be able to arrange the slide displacement member 370, a guide hole 332b formed in the lower bottom part as a long through hole in the left-right direction and guiding the slide displacement of the guided part 362c of the state switching device 360, a plurality of fastened parts 332c having a female threaded part formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 can be screwed in, and a cylindrical fastened part 332d having a female threaded part at the upper tip into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion tube part 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed in.

The front frame portion 333 has a light diffusion treatment applied to the inside of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom, which reduces visibility of the rear side of the front frame portion 333. The front frame portion 333 is formed in a frame shape that is roughly square when viewed from above, and has an insertion hole 333a formed as a countersunk hole through which a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted.

The first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 are each parts that form the flow path of the balls, and are designed to have different flow directions and inclination angles of the balls, etc., but details will be given later.

The open portion 335a, which is open on the front side at the connection position between the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, is a gap that allows the symmetrical protrusion 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning device 65 to enter. In other words, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is positioned to enter the inside of the flow path through the open portion 335a so that it can abut against the balls flowing down the sorting device 300.

The discharge holes 337 are divided by a partition plate 338 and are configured as a pair on the left and right, and are formed with a size that allows the ball to be discharged in at least two ways. In other words, the left and right length is at least twice the diameter of the ball. In this embodiment, since multiple detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side on the lower member 380 arranged below the discharge holes 337, the shape of the discharge holes 337 can be designed to match the arrangement of the ball through holes of the detection sensors SE1.

The partition plate portion 338 not only separates the third flow path component 336 as described above, but also functions as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, as will be described in detail later. The alignment protrusion portion 339 is fitted into the protrusion portion 383a of the lower member 380 to prevent misalignment between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, as will be described in detail later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T shape with the lower portion 353 being longer in the left-right direction than the upper portion 352, and has a recessed portion 354 for positioning at the lower end on the left side of the lower portion 353.

The recessed portion 354 engages with a corresponding portion of the internal shape of the middle member 330 to determine the position in the left-right direction, the left-right long lower portion 353 is supported by being sandwiched from the front and rear by the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 to determine the position in the front-rear direction, and the upper portion 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent it from falling out upwards, thereby fixing the arrangement; details of the arrangement, together with the intention of the arrangement of the light emitting means 351, will be described later.

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the inner member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361, a sliding portion 362 that engages with the tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 for linear displacement in the left-right direction and slides together with the plunger, and a rotating portion 363 that is supported rotatably by being inserted into the fastened portion 332d on the left side and rotates in accordance with the sliding displacement of the sliding portion 362.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so that the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be received from above, a protruding portion 362b that protrudes to the right from the right side surface, and a guided portion 362c that protrudes downward from the center of the front and rear of the lower side surface and is formed with an oval cross section that is long in the left-right direction.

The disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above due to the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, so that the slide portion 362 can be prevented from falling off upward. Therefore, the position of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disk portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the inner member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disk portion 361a with adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is inserted into the guide hole 332b of the inner member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the sliding portion 362 from deviating from the left-right direction. In particular, in this embodiment, it is formed long in the left-right direction, so that the position of the sliding portion 362 can be maintained by engaging the guided portion 362c with the guide hole 332b. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be, for example, circular or rectangular.

The rotating part 363 is formed in a generally L-shape when viewed from above, and includes a support tube part 363a formed in a vertically long cylindrical shape at the connection part of the L-shape and having a through hole large enough to insert the fastened part 332d of the middle member 330, an upper cylindrical part 363b protruding upward from the short end of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the through hole of the protruding part 362b, and a lower cylindrical part 363c protruding downward from the long end of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the recessed part 378 of the sliding displacement member 370.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the rotating part 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder part 363a as a central axis. The displacement of this rotating part 363 occurs due to a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the plunger slides and the slide part 362 is displaced in the left-right direction by passing electricity through the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the upper cylindrical part 363b inserted into the through hole of the protruding part 362b is displaced, and the lower cylindrical part 363c is displaced accordingly, resulting in the displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

The sliding displacement member 370 is a member supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at a position between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and includes a thin plate portion 371 supported by being sandwiched from above and below between the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, upper protrusions 376 protruding upward from the thin plate portion 371 in a pair on the left and right, and a recessed portion 378 recessed at the protruding end of the protrusion protruding upward in the left-right center rearward of the upper protrusions 376 and formed to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

The thin plate portion 371 is provided with a pair of supported holes 371a formed on the left and right sides in the rear half, a recessed portion 372 recessed from the front end in the left and right center portion to a long length in the front-to-rear direction with a left-to-right width shorter than the spacing of the upper protrusions 376, a pair of lower protrusions 373 protruding downward in a protruding shape along the edge of the recessed portion 372, a plurality of upper and lower protrusions 374 protruding in both the up and down directions in a protruding shape along the left and right edges of the rear half, and a cylindrical protrusion 375 protruding downward from the rear end in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the long guide hole 386 of the lower member 380.

The lower protrusion 373 and the upper and lower protrusions 374 are intended to slide against the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 arranged above and below, and are protrusions for reducing the contact area with the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 compared to flat contact. By reducing the contact area, the displacement resistance of the sliding displacement member 370 can be reduced, and therefore the displacement speed of the sliding displacement member 370 can be prevented from slowing down.

The upper protrusion 376 is a columnar portion that is generally trapezoidal in front view, and is positioned so as to pass through the placement through-hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332. The width length of the gap on the left and right inner sides of the upper protrusion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper protrusion 376.

In other words, the upper protrusion 376 is arranged in the gap on the left and right inside to sandwich the partition plate 338, and is configured so that misalignment in the left and right direction is suppressed by abutting against the partition plate 338. This allows the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 to be well guided, and the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole that is long in the left-right direction so that it can accommodate the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 that is required to cause the sliding displacement member 370 to displace in the front-rear direction.

The protruding portion in which the recess 378 is formed is configured to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332, so that the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 can be easily inserted into the recess 378.

In this way, the shape of the placement through hole 332a is designed as a through hole whose shape includes the entire area in which the upper protruding portion 376, which is intended to be inserted, and the protruding portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed, are placed.

The lower member 380 includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 381, a plate-like portion 382 formed in a long, thin plate shape on the left and right, and a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape below the plate-like portion 382 that allows multiple detection sensors SE1 (four in this embodiment) to be arranged side by side on the left and right.

The sensor holding frame 389 is formed in a frame shape with openings on the rear side where the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and on the top and bottom sides through which the ball passes through the through-hole of the detection sensor SE1, and the other parts are closed.

The plate-shaped portion 382 has a through hole formed at a position that matches the through hole of the detection sensor SE1, just as the sensor holding frame portion 389 has a through hole formed in the up-down direction. The plate-shaped portion 382 has a protrusion portion 383 that protrudes upward in the front-rear direction at the intermediate position between the two detection sensors SE1 on the left and right inside, a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions spaced apart on the left and right, and a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions spaced apart on the left and right sides, and a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions rearward of the protrusion portion 383 and are fitted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370. It is equipped with a pair of guide protrusions 384 that protrude in an insertable position, a pair of guide protrusions 385 that are formed as long protrusions in the front-rear direction at both left and right positions outside the guide protrusions 384, a long guide hole 386 that extends in the same straight line as the protrusions 383 when viewed from above, a curved surface portion 387 that is formed in a curved surface shape that protrudes rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 that is formed through so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 332c of the inner member 330 can be inserted.

The protrusion 383 is formed as a protrusion with a left-right thickness that is slightly shorter than the left-right gap width of the recess 372 of the sliding displacement member 370, and the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged so that the recess 372 sandwiches the protrusion 383. In other words, the protrusion 383 functions as a guide that guides the forward/rearward displacement of the sliding displacement member 370.

The protrusions 383a are designed so that their left and right inner ends are in the same position as the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 are fitted into the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a in abutting engagement, so that the left and right position of the middle member 330 can be appropriately determined with respect to the lower member 380. At the same time, the back side of the front frame part of the lower member 380 (the part connecting the protrusions 383 and the protrusions 383a at the front end side) is abutted against the front side of the alignment protrusions 339, so that the front and rear position of the middle member 330 can be appropriately determined with respect to the lower member 380.

This makes it easier to avoid misalignment between the third flow path configuration portion 336, which is a component of the middle member 330, and the detection sensor SE1, which is a component of the lower member 380.

The guide protrusion 384 is formed in an oval shape that is long from side to side, and is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the sliding displacement member 370 to limit the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370. In other words, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the range in which the guide protrusion 384 is disposed inside the supported hole 371a.

This prevents the sliding displacement member 370 from colliding with the protruding portion 383, and therefore improves the durability of the protruding portion 383 compared to a configuration in which the forward displacement end is determined at the position where the sliding displacement member 370 collides with the protruding portion 383. As a result, the guiding effect of the protruding portion 383 can be maintained for a long period of time.

The guide protrusion 384 does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 even if it is broken, but functions as a part to prevent collision with the protrusion 383. Therefore, while the guide protrusion 384 is usually designed with a strength that allows it to be used for a set period (e.g., three years) without being broken, the strength of the guide protrusion 384 and the protrusion 383 may be designed in anticipation of the use in a state in which the protrusion 383 and the slide displacement member 370 collide after the guide protrusion 384 is broken. In other words, the life of the guide protrusion 384 may be set to less than the set period (e.g., two years), and the remaining period may be designed to withstand the strength of the protrusion 383. In this case, the freedom of design of the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the freedom of the shape can be improved.

The guide ribs 385 are arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left-right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370, and are formed so that the thin plate portion 371 can be placed in the gap. The displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left-right inner side of the guide ribs 385. This allows the sliding displacement member 370 to be displaced in the front-rear direction with little misalignment in the left-right direction.

The guide slot 386 is a slot formed with a width large enough to allow the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the sliding displacement member 370 to pass through. The direction of displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the front-rear direction by the cylindrical protrusion 375 being guided by the guide slot 386.

The curved surface portion 387 is an abutment surface for guiding the ball flowing down below the inner member 330. In this embodiment, it guides the ball that enters the outlet 71, but details will be described later.

The fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. This makes it possible to prevent the fastening screw from being conspicuously visible. The insertion hole 388 is also positioned on the left and right outer side and on the rear side of the area in which the multiple detection sensors SE1 are arranged. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 will block the view of the ball passing near the detection sensor SE1 or through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the sliding displacement member 370 is guided by a number of parts, namely the guide ridge 385 for the thin plate portion 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, the protrusion 383 for the recessed portion 372 and the lower protrusion 373, the guide long hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion 375, the partition plate portion 338 for the upper protrusion 376, etc., and displaces in the front-rear direction. This allows the load during guiding to be shared among a number of positions, preventing the load from being applied locally and avoiding damage to the sliding displacement member 370 and the guiding portion that guides the sliding displacement member 370.

As can be seen from this, the sliding displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by at least a plurality of members, the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, the sliding displacement member 370 has at least a pair of upper protrusions 376 guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 guided by the protrusion portion 383 of the lower member 380.

Therefore, if the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are poorly assembled and there is a large misalignment, the movement of the sliding displacement member 370 will be hindered. Here, since the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are parts that continuously configure the ball's flow path, it is preferable to keep the misalignment small, and by making the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 good, it is possible to ensure that the misalignment is small.

In other words, if the misalignment of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 will not be performed properly, and by detecting that the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is poor, it is possible to control the system to issue an error notification because there is a possibility that the relative positioning of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor.

This prevents the player from continuing to play with the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 in a poor relative positioning, reducing the possibility of the player suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be described in detail. Here, the configuration related to the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 and the configuration entering the flow path of the balls will be mainly described.

Figure 15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300, Figure 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVI-XVI in Figure 15, Figure 17 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15, and Figure 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15.

In the figures from Fig. 15 to Fig. 18, the opening and closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state in which it is disposed in the front position. First, the details of the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be described.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)), a ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b rolls on the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passing hole 163b. The ball that passes through the ball passing hole 163b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path component 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path component 334, the subsequent second flow path component 335, and the subsequent third flow path component 336 are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and the connected flow paths are formed into a spiral shape that forms an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path component 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the front side in the front-to-rear direction, the second flow path component 335 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down in a left-to-right direction rotated 90 degrees based on the flow direction of the ball flowing down the first flow path component 334, and the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the back side in the front-to-rear direction rotated 90 degrees in the same direction as the previous rotation direction based on the flow direction of the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335.

In this way, by forming the flow path into a spiral shape with a right-angled bend, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the flow velocity of the ball increases as it moves downstream. In more detail, the ball flows down the first flow path component 334 accelerating toward the front side, but the flow direction in the subsequent second flow path component 335 does not have a front-to-rear component, so it is possible to realize a flow pattern in which the influence of the acceleration in the first flow path component 334 is suppressed. Furthermore, in the third flow path component 336 following the second flow path component 335, the ball flows backward, which is the opposite of the acceleration direction in the first flow path component 334, so it is possible to realize a flow pattern in which the influence of the acceleration in the front-to-rear direction is suppressed.

Therefore, unlike a flow pattern in which the ball flows consistently in the same direction (e.g., to the left), it is easier to prevent the ball's flow speed from becoming excessively fast downstream. In other words, it is easier to make the ball's flow speed uniform throughout the entire flow path, which has the effect of keeping the player's attention on the ball high and making it easier to prevent the player from losing sight of the ball.

For example, it is also possible not to form the second flow path component 335, but forming the second flow path component 335 makes it easier to prevent clogging and backflow of the balls. If the second flow path component 335 is not formed (if the left-right length of the second flow path component 335 is 0), that is, if the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 are connected, it becomes necessary to reverse the flow direction of the balls by 180 degrees from the flow toward the front to the flow toward the rear at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the flow direction of the balls is large, and in particular the speed direction needs to be reversed back and forth, making it difficult to make the balls flow smoothly, and the balls are likely to become stuck, clogged, or backflow, which may cause malfunctions.

In contrast, as in this embodiment, if the flow direction switching angle is 90 degrees or less (90 degrees in this embodiment), the ball's speed direction does not reverse, so the ball can flow smoothly, making it easier to avoid the ball becoming stuck, clogging, or flowing back.

The flow path shape at the connection end of each flow path component 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, the above-mentioned symmetrical protrusion 161f is arranged as a part that guides the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow direction of the ball.

The symmetrical protrusions 161f are formed so that the portion located downstream of the ball is further back from the path of the ball than the portion located upstream of the ball. For example, the width of the opposing symmetrical protrusions 161f is longer than the width of the adjacent partition plate portions 338. In addition, the rear ends of the left and right ends of the opposing symmetrical protrusions 161f are positioned closer to the front than the flow path side of the second flow path configuration portion 335 near the open portion 335a (see FIG. 17).

This prevents the ball from being excessively decelerated or from flowing backwards when the ball collides with the symmetrical protrusion 161f.

In addition, at the connection end between the second flow path component 335 and the first flow path component 334, the side wall portion 334a is curved at the front left and right ends of the central member 330 and is formed as a portion that guides the flow of the ball by bending the flow direction of the ball.

In addition, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming part 334, a curved protrusion 334b is formed that protrudes upward from the downstream surface of the first flow path forming part 334 with a curved surface shape (see Figure 16) that descends toward the front side, and is formed as a part that guides the downstream flow of the ball in a manner that bends the downstream direction of the ball.

That is, the ball that passes through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first flow path forming part 334, and while flowing down, the ball abuts against the side wall part 334a, changing the flow direction, flows down the second flow path forming part 335, and while flowing down, the ball abuts against the symmetrical protrusion part 161f, changing the flow direction, flows down the third flow path forming part 336, and reaches the discharge hole 337.

The side wall portion 334a is formed in a shape that can be engaged with the protruding support portion 161d of the fixed member 161 and aligned. In other words, the side wall portion 334a is supported by being sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and misalignment in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 can be aligned in the left-right direction.

The longitudinal inclination angle and length ratio of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 will be described below. With regard to the longitudinal inclination angle, the first flow path component 334 has an inclination angle of approximately 7 degrees relative to the horizontal, the second flow path component 335 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal, and the third flow path component 336 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path component 334, and a slightly gentler common inclination angle is set in the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

Regarding length, each flow path component 334-336 is formed so that the front frame portion 333, which is formed with a square outer shape when viewed from above, forms the inner side, and a large square having the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame portion 333 forms the outer side. Here, in this embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the large square described above is 45 mm, forming a flow path with a width of 12 mm around the perimeter.

Therefore, for a normally used 11 mm diameter sphere, the clearance with the flow path is set to 1 mm total on both sides of the sphere, so the sphere flows down with almost no misalignment in the width direction. Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see Figure 2) and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) is set at approximately 19 mm, this is a small clearance, and misalignment of the sphere as it flows down can be suppressed.

Of the parts constituting the ends of each flow path component 334-336 arranged on a square surrounding the periphery of the square-shaped front frame portion 333, only the curved protrusion 334b constituting the upstream end of the first flow path component 334 is arranged inside (on the front side) the apex of the square, so the first flow path component 334 is shorter than the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

In terms of actual measurements when viewed from above, the flow paths formed by the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 are approximately the same length (33 mm center-to-center spacing of the spheres), and this length is approximately 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path component 334 (22 mm center-to-center spacing of the spheres).

The longitudinal inclination angle and length ratio of each of the flow path components 334-336 described above explain that the time required for a ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334-336 is not constant. In other words, the time it takes for a ball to pass through the first flow path component 334, which has the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length, is shorter than the time it takes for a ball to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, which have a gentler inclination angle and a path length 1.5 times longer.

In this embodiment, by configuring it in this manner, the ball can be displaced to the front side early on when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, and the ball's visibility can be reduced by being partially hidden by the non-transparent resin part of the detection sensor SE1, switching the state to one where the ball is closer to the player and has high visibility. This makes it easier to avoid situations where the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

Furthermore, when the visibility of the ball is high, the speed at which the ball flows down can be slowed down, eliminating the need for the player to quickly move their gaze toward the ball, reducing the gaming burden on the player who is focusing on the ball (eye strain caused by eye movement).

When focusing on a ball flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, which have thus increased visibility, the amount of displacement of the ball in a front-to-back direction when viewed from the front is smaller when the ball flows down the third flow path component 336 compared to when the ball flows down the second flow path component 335 in the left-to-right direction. Therefore, the playing burden on the player focusing on the ball can be minimized when focusing on the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In other words, since the lengths and inclination angles are equivalent, the time required for the ball to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path component 336 are equivalent, but since the amount of displacement of the ball when viewed from the front is different, the apparent flow speed of the ball (the displacement speed of the ball when viewed from the front) is slower for the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 than for the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335.

The only place where the ball's flow path changes is at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, where the player's burden is minimized and the player's attention is easily drawn to the ball, and in other areas the ball's flow path is the same for each of the flow path components 334 to 336. Therefore, the player's line of sight is naturally likely to be focused on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and the game burden on the player who focuses their gaze in this way can be effectively reduced.

In addition, in order to ensure the player's field of vision when focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, in this embodiment, an opening 335a is formed on the front side of the second flow path component 335 (see Figure 17), which makes it possible to prevent the flesh of the second flow path component 335 from obstructing the line of sight toward the third flow path component 336.

Furthermore, the symmetrical protrusion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a is formed only with the portion necessary for contacting and guiding the flowing ball, and the formation of shaped portions is omitted above and below it. In other words, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion on the top and bottom, and space is secured above and below it (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared to when the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed with thickness on the top and bottom, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336 will be obstructed by the symmetrical protrusion 161f, and visibility can be improved.

The third flow path component 336 is also configured so that balls that deviate from the opening/closing plate 65b and head toward the outlet 71 gather toward the field of view centered on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in this embodiment, balls that enter the outlet 71 flow downward below the third flow path component 336, come into contact with the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and are discharged downward.

Assuming that the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 are viewed from the diagonally upward front, the balls entering the outlet 71 will flow down the back side of the third flow path component 336. As a result, the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 and the balls entering the outlet 71 will be viewed overlapping from the front to the back, and the total number of balls entering the field of view focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 will be increased.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow path component 336, or whether the ball does not enter the specific winning port 65a and enters the out port 71, the ball will enter a field of view that draws attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, regardless of the ease with which the balls are directed toward the specific winning port 65a, i.e., the configuration of the nails set into the base plate 60 (the so-called quality of the gauge), the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (the part that attracts the player's attention) is positioned at a position that overlaps in the front-to-rear direction with the position where most of the shot balls (excluding balls that enter the other winning ports 63, 64, 140) gather. This allows the balls flowing down to efficiently guide the player's gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

As described above, visibility has been improved in positions closer to the front side, but in this embodiment, visibility in positions closer to the back side is reduced except for the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

For example, a light diffusion surface 333b is formed on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the inner member 330 in a shape similar to a prism to cause light diffusion. In FIG. 17, the area that appears sawtooth-like is the light diffusion surface 333b, which is formed on almost the entire inner circumference of the inner surface, from top to bottom.

When light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, making the entire surface appear to be shining, and while it is possible to make the surface appear to be shining brilliantly, the light blocks the view, making the visibility of the area behind it poor. According to this embodiment, visibility is poor when light is irradiated from the light-emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when light is not irradiated, visibility can be improved at least compared to when light is irradiated.

On the other hand, if there is an object blocking the light, the shadow of the object will be seen as a black dot, making its position easier to determine.

Surfaces similar to the light diffusion surface 333b are also formed in other areas. For example, light diffusion surface 319a is formed on the rear side of the left and right external protrusions 319, and light diffusion surface 332e is formed on the rear side of the front part of the rear frame portion 332 (see FIG. 17).

Examples of processed surfaces formed in a similar shape include light diffusion processed surface 314c, which is formed on the upper surface of a plate-like portion extending to the rear side of second upper surface portion 314b of upper member 310 and which covers front frame portion 333 of middle member 330 in the assembled state, and light diffusion processed surface 340, which is formed over the entire lower surface of the portion of middle member 330 that is forward of rear frame portion 332.

In this embodiment, due to these configurations, the flow paths formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow path components 334 to 336 have light diffusing surfaces formed on the back side, bottom side, inner surface of the spiral, and upper surface of the spiral, achieving the effect of changing visibility due to light irradiation.

When no light is irradiated onto the light diffusion surface, from the player's perspective looking at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 from the front side, the ball that has changed direction left or right from the third flow path component 336 is hidden by the front frame portion 333, making it immediately difficult to see.

Furthermore, even if a player tries to see the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held in the sensor holding frame 389 and fallen from the player's line of sight when viewed from diagonally above, the line of sight passes through the light diffusion surface 340, and light is irradiated onto the light diffusion surface 340, making it difficult to identify the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and fallen.

In this embodiment, as described below, the profit obtained by the player is controlled to change depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, in order to understand how the ball flows down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, it becomes necessary to check the behavior of the ball at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, which can further improve attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, it is possible to create a state in which the shadow of the ball is easily visible as a black spot. In this way, by switching between the presence and absence of light irradiation depending on the situation, it is possible to switch between good and bad visibility of the ball. Also, depending on whether or not a ball is placed in front of the black spot, it is possible to create a situation in which the black spot is hidden by the ball, and a situation in which the black spot is visible and not hidden by the ball.

As described above, the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed near each of the flow path components 334 to 336, but are consistently formed on the side that does not come into contact with the spheres flowing down the flow paths formed by each of the flow path components 334 to 336.

This prevents the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 from being scraped off by contact with the sphere, so the shape of the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be maintained for a long period of time, and the light diffusion effect can be maintained.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the ball from coming into contact with the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, which would hinder the ball's flow downward or slow it down. In addition, by ensuring visibility inside the flow path, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the ball from decreasing even while it is flowing down the flow path formed by each flow path component 334 to 336.

The light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the size of the prism, it is possible to create both the effect of light diffusion and the effect of decelerating the ball by colliding with it.

In the front frame portion 333 of the inner member 330, the formation of the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and there is a possibility that visibility will remain high without measures. Therefore, in this embodiment, the fastening screw is used to reduce visibility.

That is, the fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transparent, so that it can be used to conceal areas where it would be difficult to form the light diffusion surface 333b. When light is irradiated onto the front frame portion 333, the light diffusion surface 333b shines brilliantly, and in areas where the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted, the fastening screw reflects the light and shines, so that it is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front frame portion 333 when viewed from the front side, including areas where the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted.

The light-diffusing surface 332e of the inner member 330 is formed on the back side of each flow path component 334-336, and in addition to providing a brilliant glow, the purpose of this is to provide a function of concealing the board 350 and the state switching device 360 that are disposed on the back side. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is disposed on the back side of the board 350 (see FIG. 17), the board 350 acts as a screen, making it easier to prevent the state switching device 360 from being seen by the player.

The substrate 350 is housed in a manner that it is supported by the rear frame portion 332 of the inner member 330, but is positioned with a gap between it and the bottom of the rear frame portion 332 at the center from left to right, and the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in that gap (see FIG. 18). In other words, the substrate 350 is positioned so that the sliding displacement member 370 is sandwiched between it and the bottom of the rear frame portion 332.

In more detail, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower portion 353 is sandwiched from the front and rear by the rear frame portion 332 at the left and right ends (see FIG. 17). At this support point, the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 has a thick portion 332f (see FIG. 16), and near the left and right center position, a gap is created due to the absence of this thick portion, and the sliding displacement member 370 can be placed in this gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the storage recess 320 of the upper member 310 and is positioned opposite the light diffusion surface 164f formed on the intervening member 164 in the front-to-rear direction.

Therefore, by irradiating light from the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352, the light diffusing surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can have a brilliantly shining effect, and further, the visibility of the area on the back side of the intervening member 164 can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion surface 164f, and since the light diffusion surface 164f has a cross-sectional shape imitating a prism formed along the entire surface in the vertical direction, the light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as a light with a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it can be made to appear as if light is being emitted from above and below the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the light diffusion surface 164f is positioned at the center of the left and right of the receiving member 163. However, even if it is positioned behind the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 will obstruct the view and will not be clearly visible. Therefore, if it is formed within the gap between at least one pair of detection sensors SE1, a sufficient effect can be achieved.

The lower portion 353 of the substrate 350 is positioned so that light is directed toward the sealing member 313 and the portion below it through which the balls flow, as will be described in more detail below.

Next, referring to Figures 19 and 20, we will explain the switching of the flow path of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336 and its significance. In the explanation of Figures 19 and 20, Figures 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

Figure 19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15, and Figure 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. In Figures 19 and 20, when shown, the opening and closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state disposed in a rear position.

Here, we will explain the four detection sensors SE1 on the left and right sides supported by the sensor holding frame 389, the flow of the balls to each detection sensor SE1, and the function of each detection sensor SE1.

The four detection sensors SE1 are arranged symmetrically in two sets, and include a special chance detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12, which share the same function. The special chance detection sensor SE11 is arranged on the inside in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged on the outside in the left-right direction.

The function of these four detection sensors SE1 is different from that of the detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening and closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening and closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor that causes the payout of prize balls. In other words, when a ball that has entered a specific winning opening 65a is detected as having entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 for each detection) are paid out to the player by the payout control device 111 (see Figure 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389 does not function as a detection sensor that pays out prize balls, but rather as a detection sensor that detects balls entering the machine and changes the game state after the big win game ends.

As described later, in this embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 disposed in the sensor holding frame 389 is used to switch whether or not to transition to a high probability state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor to switch whether or not the next jackpot will be won.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the front position (see Figures 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is positioned so that the thin plate portion 371 covers the upper side of the probability change detection sensor SE11, preventing the ball from passing through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336 is guided by the upper protrusion portion 376 of the slide displacement member to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 that faces the ball is formed in an arc shape with a concave flow path side, so that the ball can flow smoothly toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position (see Figures 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 retreats rearward from above the probability change detection sensor SE11, allowing the ball to pass through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In other words, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the position (front position or rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through-hole of the special probability detection sensor SE11 during a jackpot game, the game state after that jackpot game is controlled to be the special probability state. In other words, when it is not detected that the ball has passed through the through-hole of the special probability detection sensor SE11, and it has only passed through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after that jackpot game is controlled to be the normal state (or time-saving state).

As described above, in this embodiment, two types of jackpots are prepared: a guaranteed jackpot and a normal jackpot. To achieve this, in this embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared for the sliding displacement member 370 for each type of jackpot.

In other words, in the case of a guaranteed jackpot, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operating pattern that allows the ball to easily pass through the through-hole of the guaranteed jackpot detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operating pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the through-hole of the guaranteed jackpot detection sensor SE11 and makes it easy for the ball to pass through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12; details of this control will be described later.

In this way, the placement of the sliding displacement members 370 is directly related to the profits that the player can obtain, and so the placement naturally attracts the player's attention. On the other hand, there have been quite a few instances of fraudulent attempts to illegally switch the placement of the sliding displacement members 370, and measures against this are considered important.

As a premise, the position of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360. In other words, when no current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are positioned on the right side by a biasing spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is positioned on the front side, so that the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left by electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the portion inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370) is displaced toward the rear side, thereby maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the rear position. This is the normal operating mode, and there is a one-to-one correspondence between the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

A person committing the above-mentioned fraudulent acts may, for example, insert a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the distribution device 300 through the ball dispensing opening or the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see Figure 1), and press the thin metal wire against the sliding displacement member 370, pushing the sliding displacement member 370 toward the back, thereby fraudulently creating a state in which a ball can enter the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged such that the thin plate portion 371 is disposed below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 18), so when a thin metal wire is passed through the third flow path forming portion 336 and pressed against the sliding displacement member 370, it is difficult to press the thin plate portion 371 against the front end portion, and the thin plate portion 371 is pressed against the upper protrusion portion 376. The front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion portion 376 is curved to release the load to the left and right sides as described above, so that even if the thin metal wire is pressed against it, the load can be released to the left and right sides, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the sliding displacement member 370 is improperly displaced to the rear position.

In addition, the path taken to reach the sliding displacement member 370 is not a straight line but a spiral, and the sliding displacement member 370 itself is located far away (approximately 10 cm) from the front side to the rear side of the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1), making it difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the sliding displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the design freedom of the configuration of the state switching device 360. That is, in the past, in order to deal with the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, the position of the sliding displacement member 370 was often maintained by mechanically devising (displacement regulation) the mechanism that transmits the driving force, and in such cases the configuration of the state switching device 360 was limited. In contrast, in this embodiment, by configuring the sliding displacement member 370 so that it is difficult to apply load to it in the first place, it is possible to partially omit the conditions required for the state switching device 360, and the design freedom of the state switching device 360 can be increased.

In addition, when a pressure load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 by using a thin metal wire threaded through the third flow path component 336, the thin metal wire itself will obstruct the flow of the ball down the third flow path component 336, making it difficult for the ball to reach the probability change detection sensor SE11.

As mentioned above, the profit a player can obtain varies greatly depending on whether the ball passes through the through-hole of the special bonus detection sensor SE11 or the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, so it is desirable to avoid erroneous balls as much as possible.

In conventional models, it was common to configure the system to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are permitted to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11. However, in this embodiment, no movable parts are provided to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are permitted to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11 (see Figures 19 and 20), and the system is configured to allow balls to enter the normal detection sensor SE12 as well.

Even with this configuration, if at least one of the 10 balls that flow down passes through the through hole of the special probability detection sensor SE11, the special probability state after the big win is ensured. Based on this concept, this embodiment omits the placement of the movable parts that open and close the normal detection sensor SE12, thereby reducing material costs and reducing product costs. Furthermore, not placing a movable part has the positive effect of eliminating the need for maintenance associated with breakdowns or malfunctions of the movable parts, and of extending the lifespan of the pachinko machine beyond the lifespan of the movable parts.

On the other hand, as a measure separate from the movable member, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 have been devised to guide the ball to the appropriate detection sensor SE1. In other words, the shape of the parts fixedly positioned inside the flow path (i.e., the protrusions 317, 318, 319) is used to realize a mechanism that prevents more balls than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position. This will be explained below.

First, the design of the flow path shape will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward at an angle of 5 degrees from the horizontal toward the center in the left-right direction (toward the partition plate portion 338) in the short direction (see FIG. 15).

This inclination angle is set to be the same angle and direction as the longitudinal inclination of the second flow path component 335, so that it is possible to reduce the bouncing of the ball (bouncing away from the partition plate portion 338) when the ball flows from the second flow path component 335 to the third flow path component 336.

This inclination in the short direction allows the positioning of the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 to be closer to the partition plate portion 338. Therefore, as the balls flow from the rear end of the third flow path component 336 to the detection sensor SE1 side, they can be positioned closer to the partition plate portion 338, reducing the possibility of the balls accidentally passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 positioned away from the partition plate portion 338) when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the short side of the lower bottom surface 336a, the flow paths formed by each flow path component 334-336 have a left-right path formed only by the second flow path component 335, and the inclination direction is toward the left-right center (toward the partition plate portion 338), so the left-right velocity occurs inward to the left and right. This also reduces the possibility of the ball erroneously passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 arranged away from the partition plate portion 338).

Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 will be described. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the first to be positioned adjacent to the ball that has flowed down the third flow path component 336. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the smallest of the protrusions 317, 318, 319, but are positioned closer to the front than the center of the detection sensor SE1 and closer to the front than the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370, so that they come into contact without fail with the ball that passes the rear end of the third flow path component 336 while sliding against the partition plate 338.

The protruding end surfaces of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are configured as curved surfaces that are concave downward when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the protrusion is formed to extend outward and downward to the left and right than the front end side of the protrusion, so that the front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, a ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and abuts against the left and right inner protrusions 318 receives a load in a direction that is a mixture of a left and right outward component and a downward component, and flows downward.

On the other hand, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are small, the load received from the left and right inner protrusions 318 alone does not determine whether the ball flows downward or outward, but rather functions solely as a momentum imparting force. Furthermore, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are positioned upstream of the slide displacement member 370, the momentum imparted to the ball occurs regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370.

The flow of the ball after it comes into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 will be explained in different cases. When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while coming into contact with the upper protrusion 376 and the front-rear long protrusion 317 (see Figure 18), and flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

The protruding end of the long front-rear protrusion 317 has the same purpose as the upper protrusion 376. That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the flow direction of the ball, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is approximately the same as the radius of curvature of the front side 376a of the upper protrusion 376. As a guideline, the upper protrusion 376 forms a curved surface that starts on the inner left and right sides and ends at a position rear of the center position of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 when viewed from above (see FIG. 17), while the long front-rear protrusion 317 forms a curved surface that starts on the ceiling surface of the flow path and ends at a position close to the end position (rear end position) of the front side 376a at the front position of the slide displacement member 370 when viewed from the left and right (see FIG. 18).

Here, the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward outward to the left and right, and the ball is forced outward to the left and right by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318, and uses that momentum to flow down in the outward left and right direction, allowing the ball to flow down smoothly.

Furthermore, left and right external protrusions 319 are formed above the ball flowing outward to the left and right, and ball bouncing is suppressed, allowing the ball to flow smoothly down the ball. Since the purpose of left and right external protrusions 319 is to suppress ball bouncing, rather than to change the direction the ball flows down, its shape is significantly different from front and rear long protrusions 317, and its protruding end is formed as a curved surface with a large radius of curvature that extends from above the special rate detection sensor SE11 to above the normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in this embodiment, the left and right external protrusions 319 are disposed closer to the front than the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (i.e., the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), so when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact in the vertical direction, the center of the ball is likely to be disposed rearward of the center of the thickness of the left and right external protrusions 319. Therefore, when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact in the vertical direction, a load having a rearward component is likely to be applied to the ball, which makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing back toward the front.

These configurations make it easier to prevent balls from clogging or flowing backwards when multiple balls are flowing downstream.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper protrusion portion 376 are retracted rearward of the long front-rear protrusion portion 317, so the ball abuts against the long front-rear protrusion portion 317 and flows.

The surface shape of the protruding end (curved surface) of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is shaped so that the normal passes through the center of the third flow path component 336, and the center of the thickness is located directly behind the center position of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so it is easy to apply a load to the ball that it comes into contact with that has a suppressed left-right component. This load functions as a load that flows the ball diagonally downward and forward, because the protruding tip of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is shaped like a concave curved surface (see Figure 20).

Therefore, if the ball does not go all the way to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner protrusions 318, it will be subjected to a load from the front and rear long protrusions 317 diagonally downward and flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11.

Depending on the location of impact with the front-rear long protrusions 317, there is a concern that the ball may bounce back to the front side (causing a backflow). However, in this embodiment, as described above, the ball is given momentum diagonally downward to the left and right by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318. Therefore, even if the ball bounces back to the front side, it will only collide with the rear end of the lower base of the third flow path component 336 (see Figure 20) or the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 (see Figure 19), making it easier to avoid the ball flowing back through the third flow path component 336.

What is unique about this embodiment is that even when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned at the rear and the ball flows toward the special rate detection sensor SE11, the ball is displaced outward to the left and right due to the load from the left and right inner protrusions 318, just as it is when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned at the front and the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12. The use of this will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be able to slide between a front position and a rear position. If the slide displacement member 370 performs a closing operation (movement from the rear position to the front position) while the ball is flowing down the third flow path component 336 toward the slide displacement member 370, a forward load may be applied to the ball, and a load may be applied in a direction (forward) that causes the ball to flow backward through the third flow path component 336.

To prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if the closing operation is controlled to be completed before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 during operation can be eliminated, thereby reducing the possibility of the ball flowing back.

In addition, by forming the front surface of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 as a curved surface facing outward to the left and right, and by positioning the left and right inner protrusions 318 so that they collide with all balls, it is possible to create an action of guiding the balls that reach the rear end of the third flow path component 336 outward to the left and right. This makes it difficult for the balls to flow back.

In addition, the opening movement of the sliding displacement member 370 (movement from the front position to the rear position) is not a movement in a direction opposite to the ball, but rather a movement away from the ball, so even if the movement is performed when the ball is resting on the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370, a load that pushes the ball back toward the front is unlikely to be generated. Therefore, even if the opening movement is controlled to be performed at any timing without taking into account the position of the ball, it is not thought to make it easier for the ball to flow back.

When the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the top surface of the sliding displacement member 370 (still in the early stages of flowing outward to the left or right), the opening action of the sliding displacement member 370 applies a load to the ball in a direction that suppresses the rotation (in the direction that causes the ball to roll backwards), so the rotation of the ball can be stopped, the flow of the ball can be halted, and it becomes easier to move into free fall.

As a result, when the sliding displacement member 370 opens while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is easier to prevent the ball from being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the momentum of its previous rolling, and it is easier to guide the ball to the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In the present embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 equipped with the above-mentioned sorting device 300, we will explain how the sorting device 300 looks from the player's point of view. Below, as an example, we will explain cases where the angle of the line of sight relative to the horizontal direction is different.

Figure 21 is a front view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, Figure 22 is a perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXII in Figure 16, and Figure 23 is a perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in Figure 16.

As a premise, a player operating the pachinko machine 10 can play in any posture he or she likes, except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, a player may play the game with his or her head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a line of sight that is horizontal or inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 22), or he or she may play the game by bringing his or her head closer to the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight that is inclined downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 23). In general, the former provides a wider field of view, but makes it difficult to notice small details, while the latter provides a narrower field of view, but makes it easier to notice small details within that field of view.

Figure 21 is shown as a reference, and the following explanation will be mainly made by comparing Figures 22 and 23. For convenience, Figures 21 to 23 show the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is shown in imaginary lines. Note that the light emitting means 351 are arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), but only the left half is shown to facilitate understanding. The function of the light emitting means 351 located at the top has been described above, so here we will explain the three light emitting means 351 in the left half located in the lower portion 353.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 irradiates light towards the seal member 313. As described above, the seal member 313 is formed in a red transparent color, so when light is irradiated from the light emitting means 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. This can increase the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings. As the seal member 313 is disposed directly above the third flow path forming portion 336 (see Figure 18), it can draw attention to the third flow path forming portion 336.

The light diffusion surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351 (see FIG. 18). This prevents the light from the light emitting means 351 from being visually stretched in the vertical direction by the light diffusion surface 332e, and allows the light to be concentrated around the sealing member 313.

Although there are no limitations to the light emission control, for example, during a jackpot game, in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, it is possible to control the light to be irradiated onto the sealing member 313, thereby drawing attention to the sealing member 313 and naturally guiding the gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 located below it.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to the positions directly above the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the light emitting means 351 is controlled so that when the ball enters the special chance detection sensor SE11, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the special chance detection sensor SE11 emits light, whereas when the ball enters the normal detection sensor SE12, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the normal detection sensor SE12 emits light, thereby notifying the player of the location where the ball has passed.

The light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed toward the light diffusion surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right center sides is arranged opposite the light diffusion surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides is arranged opposite the light diffusion surface 319a (see FIG. 17). The light diffusion surfaces 319a and 332e are formed across the top and bottom of each part.

Therefore, the position at which the light from the light emitting means 351 is visible is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a range that spreads vertically (visualized as a strip of light extending vertically). Therefore, as shown in Figures 21 to 23, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes.

The angle of the downward inclination from the horizontal in FIG. 22 (5 degrees) is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 can be seen. However, because the slide displacement member 370 displaces in the front-to-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the changes caused by the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 from this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 23, when viewed from a direction at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 is narrower, so it is more difficult to confirm the change in the flow pattern of the balls at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 compared to the view in Figure 22. However, in this field of view, it is easier to grasp the displacement of the upper protruding part 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 332a for placement of the inner member 330 is formed as an opening of a minimum size sufficient to pass the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370 through, so that the state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) placed inside the rear frame portion 332 can be hidden so as to be difficult to see.

During an actual jackpot game, multiple balls are guided to the specific winning port 65a during a round of play, and flow down each of the flow path components 334-336 in order. When multiple balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 at the same time, there is a possibility that the line of sight to the ball at the back will be obstructed by the ball at the front.

For example, when multiple spheres are placed in the third flow path configuration portion 336, the spheres are placed in the same position in FIG. 22. Therefore, the sphere in the front hides the sphere in the back.

In addition, when a ball normally flows toward the detection sensor SE12, it flows outward in the left-right direction from the rear end of the third flow path component 336. After it leaves the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction, visibility is reduced due to the light diffusion surface 333b of the front frame portion 333, so it is preferable to grasp the movement of the ball in the process of leaving the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction. However, if there is a ball (a ball that is slightly shifted left-right from the third flow path component 336) that flows from the downstream end position of the second flow path component 335 (position of ball P1) to the upstream end position of the third flow path component 336 (position of ball P2), the ball will hide the ball in the process of leaving the rear end of the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction.

In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can be grasped by visually checking whether the flow direction of the ball has switched to the left or right outside at the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336, and it is sufficient to pay attention to the inside and right edge periphery of the third flow path configuration part 336. In contrast, in this embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path configuration part 336 and the second flow path configuration part 335 on the upstream side in the line of sight, it is configured so that the ball can flow down a path that includes the inside and right edge periphery of the third flow path configuration part 336 (movement from the position of ball P1 to the position of ball P2). Therefore, depending on the position of the ball flowing down the upstream side, it may be difficult to grasp whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In addition, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the spheres flowing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and the spheres flowing through the second flow path component 335 are clearly separated in terms of their vertical arrangement, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the upstream spheres are obscured. On the other hand, because the vertical width of the flow path visible at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is narrow, the area of the spheres visible in the direction is smaller.

In particular, as described above, the ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 flows diagonally downward to the right regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370, and then the flow path switches between the direction toward the special bonus detection sensor SE11 and the direction toward the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, the area of the ball visible at the switching position is smaller than when the ball flows straight down or the flow direction of the ball switches to the right.

Other possible switching modes include cases where the switching position is located further upstream, such as when the ball's flow path switches between flowing straight down and to the right. For example, if the left and right inner protrusions 318 are not formed and the ball heading toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 flows straight down from the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336, the switching position will be at least a position behind the center line of the third flow path configuration part 336.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow path component 336, the ball falls below the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336 (falls by the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), and in addition to the effect of part of the ball being hidden by the third flow path component 336 itself, the ball is displaced to the left and right outward from the range visible through the third flow path component 336, so that part of the ball is hidden by the front frame portion 333.

As a result, the area visible from the player's point of view of the ball that has passed the rear end of the third flow path component 336 becomes smaller, making it difficult to determine which path the ball has flowed down. This further increases the attention to the ball flowing down near the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

In this way, according to this embodiment, advantages and disadvantages are set for each of the multiple directional views (see Figures 22 and 23) described as directional views for identifying the flow direction of the balls flowing down the rear end of the third flow path configuration 336. As a result, even when it comes to the way the sorting device 300 is viewed, the player is not required to play in a one-sided manner, but can be allowed to adjust and select the viewing method he or she prefers, and a variety of play styles can be provided, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game.

Ensuring the player's visibility can be achieved in various ways, but in this embodiment, in particular, by forming a gap between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, it is possible to create a state in which the roof portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is removed, making it easier to see the third flow path forming portion 336.

The following describes the visibility in the direction of view in Figures 22 and 23 on the front side of the sorting device 300. Although not shown in Figures 22 and 23, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 (see Figure 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, and the visibility is obstructed because the light transmitted is reduced due to the thickness of the members.

Because the area obstructed by the front design member 162 is narrower, it may be easier to see the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 when viewed in the direction of Figure 23 than when viewed in the direction of Figure 22.

The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are basically flat as described above and are configured to reduce the refraction of light (see FIG. 12). This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the distribution device 300 from being impaired.

Even in areas that cannot be made flat for functional reasons, they are formed to minimize the impact on visibility. For example, the protruding support sections 161c-161e for positioning and engaging the sorting device 300 are positioned outside the line of sight of the player looking at the flow path configuration sections 334-336 (upper rear, left and right outer sides, left and right downwards) so as not to block the line of sight of the player looking diagonally downwards.

For example, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed at the center height of the ball and is thin-walled to the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). This prevents the entire ball from being hidden even if the symmetrical protrusion 161f is positioned between the ball and the player's eyes, ensuring visibility of the ball flowing down the flow path configurations 334-336.

Balls that miss the specific winning hole 65a flow down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, and flow down toward the outlet 71. The effect on visibility of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 will be explained below.

Figures 22 and 23 show an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 when the opening and closing plate 65b is open. When the opening and closing plate 65b is open, balls flowing down from above the opening and closing plate 65b land on the opening and closing plate 65b and are guided toward the specific winning port 65a, so balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 are balls that deviate to the left or right of the opening and closing plate 65b. These balls flow down between the extension parts 162b and 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 to flow down toward the outlet 71.

As shown in Figures 22 and 23, from the player's point of view, the position of the balls flowing on the inner rail 61 is lower than each of the flow path components 334-336, making it easier to avoid a reduction in visibility of the balls flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336 due to the balls flowing on the inner rail 61.

On the other hand, the balls flowing down the inner rail 61 flow toward the left-right center of the play area at a gentle angle, just like the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335, so like the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335, it has the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the left-right center of the play area. This effect guides the player's gaze to the outlet 71 as well as to the third flow path component 336. In other words, because the outlet 71 and the third flow path component 336 are in the same left-right position (left-right center position), the player can move their gaze up and down to guide their gaze to a state where both the outlet 71 and the third flow path component 336 are visible.

Therefore, regardless of whether the balls shot toward the play area tend to enter the specific winning port 65a efficiently (meaning fewer wasted balls during a jackpot game) or whether balls frequently stray and flow down between the extensions 162b and 162c (meaning frequent wasted balls during a jackpot game), the flowing balls can have the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the third flow path configuration portion 336.

In other words, if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the player's gaze can be guided to the third flow path component 336 as the ball flows down the second flow path component 335, and if the ball misses the specific winning opening 65a, the player's gaze can be guided to the third flow path component 336 as the ball flows down the inner rail 61.

Balls heading toward the outlet 71 are usually wasted balls and have no effect on the game, but in this embodiment, by configuring it as described above, balls heading toward the outlet 71 can have the role of guiding the player's gaze toward the third flow path configuration section 336.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball may flow along the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and pass through the front side of the second flow path component 335, potentially reducing the visibility of the second flow path component 335.

On the other hand, according to the configuration of this embodiment in which the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a are arranged above the center position of the specific winning opening 65a, and the third flow path component 336 is arranged below the center position of the specific winning opening 65a, the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a can prevent the balls from flowing down, so that it is possible to prevent the balls from flowing down the front side of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the visibility of the third flow path component 336 and the surrounding area at its rear end is reduced due to balls flowing down the front side of the opening and closing plate 65b.

In this embodiment, the length of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 ensures the time it takes for a ball that enters the specific winning port 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370, but this avoids the problem of increasing the amount of space required for placement. That is, as shown in Figures 22 and 23, the placement distance between the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370, which serves as a guide for the placement of the third flow path configuration part 336, is made short from the player's line of sight.

Moreover, since the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned below and behind the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), when the player's line of sight is directed diagonally downward and rearward, which is a frequent line of sight as shown in FIG. 23, it appears as if the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned so close that its outline is embedded into the outline of the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the flow path of the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a, which is configured to be long from left to right, and passes through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 located at both left and right ends is collected below the center of the specific winning opening 65a via each of the symmetrical flow path components 334-336. This makes it possible to shorten the time it takes for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 compared to when the ball flows left and right down the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, the structure required for the ball's flow path can be made to have a shorter left and right length the further down it is, making it easier to place it near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61.

In particular, in this embodiment, the design concept is to position the specific winning opening 65a close to the outlet 71, and instead of a structure that causes the balls to flow directly downward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path component 335, a structure is adopted in which the balls flow backward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path component 335 through the third flow path component 336, making it possible to form the outlet 71 (an opening disposed on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface portion 387) directly below the second flow path component 335. This shortens the vertical distance between the specific winning opening 65a and the outlet 71.

In this way, by shortening the vertical and horizontal widths of the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 at the player's line of sight, the vertical width of the area occupied by the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 can be shortened in the design of a play area where the size when viewed from the front is limited to a certain standard, thereby improving the design freedom of the play area.

For example, as in this embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a can be positioned near the bottom end of the play area, so that the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in a left-right symmetrical play area.

Next, we will explain the flow of the balls after they enter the distribution device 300, and an example of the operation pattern of the movable parts (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) that takes this flow into account.

First, as a premise, a ball that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 in that order (see Figures 16 and 17). The time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334-336 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, it is designed so that the ball passes through each of the flow path components 334-336 in approximately 0.3 seconds.

In other words, after the ball enters the specific winning port 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow path component 334, 0.3 seconds to pass through the second flow path component 335, and 0.3 seconds to pass through the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, even if a ball enters the specific winning port 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, the ball is configured not to reach the detection sensor SE1 located at the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336 for 0.9 seconds. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, the ball does not approach the position of the slide displacement member 370 and cannot pass through either the special detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, so the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without worrying about the ball entering the prize by mistake.

For this reason, it is possible to eliminate the need for control (which involves unnatural operation of the opening and closing plate) that briefly opens the opening and closing plate at the start of a round R in order to prevent erroneous winning into the V winning sensor, as is commonly seen in pachinko machines equipped with a V-type probability attacker. This makes the operation of the opening and closing plate that opens and closes the specific winning port a natural operation, providing an environment in which players can enjoy playing with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine equipped with the V-type attacker in the above example, a ball that enters the V-type attacker immediately after it is opened is likely to result in an erroneous winning entry, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as described below, a ball that enters the V-type attacker immediately after it is opened can have a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the movement of the slide displacement member 370 with the ball), making it unnecessary to take measures to prevent the ball from entering the V-type attacker immediately after it is opened.

The time required for the ball to pass through can be set arbitrarily depending on the length and inclination of each flow path component 334-336, the shape of the inner wall of the flow path (whether it is smooth or uneven, etc.), etc.

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of ROM 202 in main control device 110, FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the big winning type in the special pattern, and FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal pattern.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the fixed value data described above.

The first win random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first win random number counter, which is updated periodically (e.g., every 2 msec). If the value of the first win random number counter obtained based on the start winning matches any of the determination values specified in the first win random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot with a special symbol.

The first win type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment values of the first win type counter C2 are specified in correspondence with each jackpot type and the type of winning slot that triggered the selection of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is judged to be a jackpot, the value of the first win type counter C2 obtained based on the start winning is compared with the first win type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special pattern 1 (drawing based on the ball entering first winning slot 64), the value of first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is associated with jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24(b)).

When a jackpot A1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the first operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in the operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "10 to 19" is associated with the big winning type A2 (see 202b2 in FIG. 24(b)).

When jackpot A2 is reached, four rounds of jackpot play are played in the first operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "20 to 39" is associated with the big winning B1 (see 202b3 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot B1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the second operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "40 to 49" is associated with the big winning type B2 (see 202b4 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot B2 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the second operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "50 to 79" is associated with the big winning type C1 (see 202b5 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot C1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in the operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99" is associated with a big winning type C2 (see 202b6 in FIG. 24(b)).

When a jackpot C2 is reached, four rounds of jackpot play are played in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

As described above, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special symbol 1 (a drawing based on a ball entering first winning slot 64), a four-round jackpot game is selected in either case. Therefore, a large number of prize balls cannot be expected compared to when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special symbol 2, which will be described later. On the other hand, a four-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than a fifteen-round jackpot game, so balls can be shot earlier in an attempt to win a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special pattern 2 (drawing based on the ball entering the second winning slot 140), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 99" is associated with jackpot a (see 202b7 in FIG. 24(b)).

When jackpot a is reached, 15 rounds of jackpot play are played in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

As described above, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special pattern 2 (a drawing based on a ball entering second winning port 140), 15 rounds of jackpot play are selected in either case. Therefore, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special pattern 2, a larger number of prize balls can be paid out compared to if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special pattern 1, and this can increase the motivation of the player to play the game to draw for special pattern 2 (a game in which a ball is fired to enter second winning port 140).

In addition, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to operation pattern X, there is little possibility that the player will be disadvantaged significantly even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern that has the disadvantage of slightly worsening the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 but the advantage of making it easier for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a, by setting the operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 for the jackpot in the lottery for special pattern 2 to the third operation pattern, the impact of the disadvantage can be reduced and only the advantage of being able to shorten the time required for the jackpot game can be highlighted.

In other words, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the jackpot game in the lottery for special pattern 2 will be drawn out, making it possible to realize a jackpot game that is pleasant for the player (good time efficiency in paying out prize balls).

The setting of the jackpot type for special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot type for special symbol 2 may be set in which the slide displacement member 370 is displaced and controlled by the operation pattern Y. This jackpot type may also be set at a small rate (for example, about 20%).

This can increase the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370, preventing the player from playing the jackpot game aimlessly. In other words, the player can visually confirm the displacement movement of the slide displacement member 370, and the timing of the displacement movement can make the player happy or sad, increasing the player's interest.

As described above, during the special symbol probability change, the probability of winning the normal symbol increases, the normal symbol fluctuation time becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric device 140a when the normal symbol wins becomes longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it is easier to get the ball into the second winning slot 140, so it is easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once the special symbol probability change state is reached, it is easier to get a special symbol jackpot, and the special symbol probability change state, which is more likely to become a jackpot a (a jackpot with a good profit balance) when a jackpot is reached, is more likely to be repeated, making it easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. This allows the player to play while strongly expecting to move to the special symbol probability change state, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24(c)). Also, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referenced to determine whether or not a normal symbol is a winning symbol. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is stipulated for each display mode.

Figure 25 shows the time-based changes in the operation pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operation pattern of the sliding displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines that a jackpot has been awarded in the special winning determination process, it starts controlling the jackpot game (of the determined type) after the special winning display (pattern changing presentation) has ended. Below, we will explain the operation control of the opening and closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the sliding displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 that is performed when a jackpot game is awarded. Note that in the explanation of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate.

In this control example, the driving mode differs depending on the type of jackpot only in the first round, and the driving mode is the same from the second round onwards. Therefore, the driving mode in the first round for each type of jackpot will be explained below.

In the case of a jackpot A1 or A2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state that allows balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operating pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 0.2 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, causing the opening and closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if game balls are continuously shot, and shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

The 0.2 second opening time in the first operating pattern is set to limit the number of balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a to one on either side while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This opening time is set to prevent multiple balls from entering the specific winning opening 65a in succession (hereinafter also referred to as "successive balls entering"), and is not intended to limit the number of balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a to one. In other words, even with an opening time of 0.2 seconds, it is possible that one ball will reach each side of the specific winning opening 65a, and that all balls will enter the specific winning opening 65a at the same time.

In the case of a big win A1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening and closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the drive control is performed so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the front position to the rear position at the same time that the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific winning port 65a passes through each flow path component 334-336 (see Figure 19), passes in front of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see Figure 20).

At this time, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side is limited to one, so visibility is not reduced by other balls. Therefore, the player can easily see the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the case of a big win A2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening and closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced from the front position to the rear position at the same time that the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state, and after 0.8 seconds has elapsed, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced from the rear position to the front position.

As described above, the time required for the ball to pass through each flow path component 334-336 (see FIG. 17) is set to approximately 0.9 seconds, so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370.

Therefore, a ball that enters the specific winning port 65a passes through each flow path component 334-336 (see Figure 17), passes above the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see Figure 17).

At this time, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side is limited to one, so visibility is not reduced by other balls. Therefore, the player can easily see the situation in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370, 0.8 seconds, is set based on the idea that this is a time shorter than the time it takes for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336, and a time longer than the time it takes for the ball to reach the third flow path component 336.

In other words, according to this embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path component 335 and reaches the third flow path component 336 in approximately 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning opening 65a, so even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the 0.2 second opening time of the opening/closing plate 65b, the sliding displacement member 370 can be displaced after the ball reaches the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, as long as a ball enters the specific winning port 65a, the movement of the sliding displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball placed in the third flow path configuration part 336 regardless of the timing of the ball's entry (see FIG. 22). This makes it possible to prevent the displacement movement of the sliding displacement member 370 from being conspicuous, and increases the attention to the ball flowing down each flow path configuration part 334-336 as a ball entering the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused before the ball reaches the third flow path configuration portion 336, so there is little possibility that the ball will block the line of sight, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, because the second flow path forming portion 335 is disposed close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and disposed further forward than the sliding displacement member 370, the player's gaze is likely to be drawn to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335. In other words, by drawing attention to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 (for example, by displaying "Pay attention to the flowing ball!" on the third pattern display device 81), it is possible to easily avoid the player seeing the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370.

In this embodiment, each flow path component 334-336 is configured to be separated in the center from the left to the right, so if the ball enters the specific winning port 65a on one side, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be seen without being blocked by the balls flowing down by focusing on the rear of the third flow path component 336 on the side where no balls are entering (see Figure 22).

In this way, in the case of a jackpot A1 or A2, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side is limited to one, which increases the attention to that ball and allows the player to easily see whether the ball passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of a jackpot B1 or B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state that allows balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operating pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 1.0 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, causing the opening and closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if game balls are continuously shot, and shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

The 1.0 second opening time in the second operation pattern is set as the time during which multiple balls can enter the specific winning opening 65a on either the left or right side while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This opening time is set to allow multiple balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a in succession on either the left or right side (hereinafter also referred to as "successive balls entering").

In this control example, the interval between ball launches is set to 0.6 seconds, so even if the interval between balls flowing down does not change from the time of launch, two balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b opens once in 1.0 seconds. On the other hand, because the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, it is possible to restrict the next ball from entering each of the flow path components 334-336 before the two balls have passed each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the case of a jackpot B1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In the case of a jackpot B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot B1, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a jackpot B2, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334-336 differs depending on whether there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side or two (or more). When there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, visibility is not reduced by other balls, so the player can easily see the ball passing through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two (or more) balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side, the upstream ball may be placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the downstream ball, which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. This can improve the attention of players who want to know whether the ball will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the case of a jackpot C1, jackpot C2, or jackpot a, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a, and the opening and closing plate 65b is made to operate for a long period of time up to the first operating time T1.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In this control example, the opening and closing plate 65b remains open during the first round of play R, so a situation may arise where multiple balls enter the specific winning hole 65a in succession on either the left or right side. On the other hand, the opening interval of the opening and closing plate 65b is not limited, so unlike the second operating pattern, it is possible that the next ball will enter each of the flow path components 334-336 before two balls have passed through each of the flow path components 334-336. Therefore, compared to the second operating pattern, the third operating pattern is more likely to cause a situation in which the visibility of a ball placed downstream of each of the flow path components 334-336 is reduced by a ball placed upstream.

In the case of a jackpot C1 or a, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In addition, in the case of a jackpot C2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot C1 or a, the ball that passes through each flow path configuration unit 334-336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a jackpot C2, the ball that passes through each flow path configuration unit 334-336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

In this way, the control mode is set to keep the opening and closing plate 65b in the open state regardless of whether the ball is passed through the special detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but because the time it takes for the ball to reach the sliding displacement member 370 is managed structurally, the possibility of the sliding displacement member 370 malfunctioning due to the ball getting caught can be eliminated.

At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334-336 differs depending on whether there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side or whether there are two balls. When there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, the visibility is not reduced by the other balls, so the player can easily see the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side, the upstream ball may be placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the downstream ball, which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. This can improve the attention of players who want to know whether the ball will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the third operating pattern, there is no restriction on the timing at which a ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a in the first round of play R, so compared to the second operating pattern, the arrangement of the balls in each flow path component 334-336 is more likely to become disorderly. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is more likely to decrease.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which balls can enter the specific winning port 65a has the effect of allowing the progress of the round game R to be carried out early. In other words, it is easier to quickly meet the round end condition (the passage of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the entry of a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) pachinko balls), and it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being drawn out.

In particular, when a jackpot of special symbol 2 is hit, the sliding displacement member 370 is driven and controlled in operation pattern X with a 100% probability, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, it is guaranteed that the ball will pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the sliding displacement member 370 is low to begin with.

Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, but priority is given to avoiding the jackpot game from being prolonged, thereby realizing the progress of the jackpot game in a short period of time and increasing the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Regardless of the type of jackpot, when the first round of round play R ends, the timer means controls the operation of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c to keep the opening and closing plate 65b closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and starts the second round of round play R after the first interval time Int1 has elapsed.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b from a closed state to an open state to open the specific winning opening 65a, causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time. From the second round onwards, the sliding displacement member 370 is constantly maintained in the front position, so that the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 and is discharged (see Figure 17).

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls have won) is met in the second round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

After that, just like the second round, the round games R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) are repeated with a first interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening and closing plate 65b moves between the closed state and the open state to open and close the specific winning hole 65a.

When the final round R of play ends, the timer means controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c to keep the opening and closing plate 65b closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed, and the big win game ends as the time elapses.

In this control example, the short-opening displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are performed only in the first round, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be performed in all rounds, or in rounds other than the first round (e.g., the third round, the eighth round, the twelfth round, etc.).

In this way, according to this control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening and closing plate 65b can be changed by changing the opening pattern (first to third operating patterns) of the opening and closing plate 65b, and the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 located downstream of each of the flow path configurations 334 to 336 and the third flow path configuration 336 can be changed. This can motivate a player who pays attention to the ball passing through the detection sensor SE1 located downstream of the third flow path configuration 336 to devise a way to launch the ball.

For example, a decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur when multiple balls are placed simultaneously in each of the flow path components 334-336, so the decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1 can be suppressed by intentionally increasing the interval between ball launches as necessary (for example, in the jackpot type of the second or third operation pattern). Note that in the first operation pattern, balls entering the specific winning hole 65a are restricted, so that a decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1 can be avoided regardless of the launch mode.

On the other hand, if the interval between ball launches is increased, the time it takes for the specified number of balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a will be extended, which may result in prolonged round game R. In other words, the player can select how to play round game R between a game mode that prioritizes visibility of detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding prolonged round game R.

For example, in order to visually confirm the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, a short period (e.g., 1.0 second) may be allowed to pass after the start of the round game R, allowing the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball is placed in the third flow path component 336 at the timing when the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 occurs (0.8 seconds after the start of the round game R in the case of operation pattern Y), and therefore it is possible to avoid the displacement action of the slide displacement member 370 being blocked by the ball.

On the other hand, if there is a delay before the balls are released, the time it takes for the specified number of balls to enter the specific winning port 65a will be extended, which may result in the round game R being prolonged. In other words, the player can select how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding prolongation of the round game R.

For example, according to this embodiment, each flow path component 334-336 and slide displacement member 370 are configured symmetrically, and balls can be inserted through the specific winning hole 65a from either the left or right side.

In other words, for example, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved by maintaining the above-mentioned launch pattern that widens the interval between ball launches or the launch pattern that allows a delay before the ball is launched when the ball lands on the left side, and launching the ball in any launch pattern when the ball lands on the right side.

Specifically, the balls aimed at the specific winning port 65a can be shot to the left and right in a shooting pattern in which at least the first ball is shot to the right, some balls (for example, the second ball) are shot to the left, and the remaining balls are shot to the right.

In this case, by focusing on the balls flowing down the left flow path rather than on the balls flowing down the right flow path of each flow path component 334-336, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the balls flowing down the left flow path pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 while avoiding having your line of sight blocked by other balls. In addition, in this case, since balls are constantly being shot toward the right side of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid an extension of the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, and it is possible to avoid the round game R becoming protracted.

The purpose of shooting the balls left and right is not to limit the number of balls that enter the left flow path to one. In particular, it is sufficient to limit the number of balls placed in each of the left flow path components 334-336 to one during the approximately 0.9 seconds it takes for a certain ball to pass through the left flow path, and during the rest of the time, it is sufficient to shoot the balls so that they enter the left and right flow paths at will.

This makes it possible to prevent balls heading toward the specific winning opening 65a from colliding with each other and spilling to the outside of the specific winning opening 65a to the left or right, even in cases where the open width above the specific winning opening 65a is not long as in this embodiment (for example, when the ball's entry path is limited to a small number of paths due to the arrangement of the electric device 140a or the nail arrangement (see Figure 2)). Note that although the nail arrangement in Figure 2 is asymmetrical, it may also be symmetrical.

Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 that is fastened to the rear side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is a unit that is fastened to the base plate 60 (see Figure 2) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

Figure 26 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and Figure 27 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. Note that in Figure 27, the liquid crystal display device (variable display unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is shown as being visible through the opening 511a. Also, Figure 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of Figures 26 and 27.

The operating unit 500 includes a rear case 510 formed in a box shape with the front side open from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed to a size that corresponds to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (i.e., capable of dividing the display area of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front).

The rear case 510 is provided as a flat plate extending from the front end of the outer wall 512 along the rear surface of the game board 13 (e.g., arranged parallel to the rear surface), and includes a support plate portion 513 that provides surface support for the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2).

The support plate portion 513 has a positioning protrusion 513a that protrudes toward the front side and has a shape that can fit into a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a number of insertion holes 513b that are drilled so that fastening screws that are fastened to the base plate 60 can be inserted through them.

The rear case 510 is positioned relative to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60, thereby fixing the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 together, thereby improving the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500.

The shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a protrusion with an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the mating recess of the base plate 60 (circular or oval in this embodiment), or it may be a protrusion with a shape (even smaller outer shape) that increases the mating gap in consideration of workability during assembly. Furthermore, if the inner shape of the mating recess is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a will also be rectangular correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed inside. That is, the operation unit 500 comprises a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 disposed on the inside right part of the rear case 510, a second operation unit 700 disposed on the inside lower part of the rear case 510, and a third operation unit 800 disposed on the inside upper part of the rear case 510. In addition, on the inside left part of the rear case 510, a substrate having light emitting means such as LEDs, and a diffusion decorative plate LB1 disposed to cover the substrate from the front side, formed of a light-transmitting material, and having a light diffusion processing formed over the entire surface are disposed.

Specifically, the first operating unit 600 is disposed to the right of the opening 511a, the second operating unit 700 is disposed below the opening 511a, and the third operating unit 800 is disposed above the opening 511a, all of which are disposed on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510. First, an overview of the operation control of the operating unit 500 will be described.

Figures 28 to 35 are front views of the operating unit 500, showing an example of the operation of the operating unit 500. Figure 28 illustrates each operating unit 600-800 in a performance standby state, Figure 29 illustrates the state in which the first operating unit 600 has changed from the performance standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state, and Figure 30 illustrates the state in which the second operating unit 700 has changed from the performance standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state.

Note that in FIG. 30, the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in a state in which the surface facing the front of the covering member 787 is different from the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIG. 29.

In Figures 28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is shown in phantom lines. Inside, the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the rear side can be clearly seen, but outside the center frame 86, even though the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin material, the view is likely to be obstructed by the nails arranged on the base plate 60, the various winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., and the through gate 67 (see Figure 2). Therefore, for example, when arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in Figure 28, the visibility of each operating unit 600 to 800 when viewed from the front is likely to be reduced.

The frame shape of the center frame 86 differs from that shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operating unit 500, but its role is the same. In addition, the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 is curved downward on the front side of the third operating unit 800, but it is not curved downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86, but a circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed on the inner frame side of the center frame 86 so as to cover the third operating unit 800 from the front. Therefore, the role of rolling a ball placed on the upper side of the center frame 86 to both the left and right is the same as that shown in FIG. 2, and the upper frame part (upper outer frame part) of the actual center frame 86 is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the third operating unit 800 from left to right.

Figures 31 and 32 show the state in which the third operating unit 800 has changed from the standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state. In Figure 31, the first decorative member 870 faces forward, showing the individual combined state of the third operating unit 800, while in Figure 32, the second decorative member 880 faces forward, showing the combined state of the third operating unit 800.

The displacement that switches between the state of FIG. 31 and the state of FIG. 32 occurs in a displacement mode that combines linear displacement and rotational displacement, so if it is executed when the third operating unit 800 is in a performance standby state, the surrounding decorative members will collide with the decorative members 870 and 880, causing a malfunction, so it is executed when the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

In other words, in this embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state (or in a state in which it has been displaced downward from the performance standby state to an extent sufficient to avoid a collision between the decorative members 870, 880) and is in a state in which the displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is permitted in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), and is then controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) to perform a reverse displacement (switching rotation operation), as will be described in more detail below.

Figure 33 shows the third operating unit 800 in an extended state and the second operating unit 700 in an intermediate performance state displaced slightly lower than the extended state, Figure 34 shows the state in which the first operating unit 600 has displaced from the state in Figure 33 to the intermediate performance state, and Figure 35 shows the state in which the third operating unit 800 has displaced from the state in Figure 33 to a performance standby state and the first operating unit 600 has displaced to the extended state.

28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third operating unit 800 partially overlaps with the displacement trajectory of the first operating unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second operating unit 700 in a front view. Therefore, for example, when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), if the first operating unit 600 or the second operating unit 700 changes state from the performance standby state, there is a possibility of a collision.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the standby state is controlled so as to be executable on condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the standby state, and the state change of the third operation unit 800 from the standby state is controlled so as to be executable on condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the standby state, thereby making it possible to prevent the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 from overlapping when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the placement of the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 (it is possible to allow the front-to-back positions to overlap).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the state change of the second operating unit 700 to the extended state is controlled so as to be executable on the condition that the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in a performance standby state, and the position of the second operating unit 700 when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state is set to an intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), thereby preventing the second operating unit 700 from overlapping with the other operating units 600, 800 in a front view. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the positioning of each operating unit 600 to 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be tolerated).

In particular, the function of the second operating unit 700 as a performance device is improved by configuring multiple viewing states of the second operating unit 700, including a state in which it is viewed in a protruding state closer to the opening 511a, and a state in which it is viewed in a state in which it is slightly receding from the opening 511a but positioned close to the third operating unit 800.

As shown in Figures 28 to 35, the first operating unit 600 is displaced on the right side of the third pattern display device 81. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operating unit 600 has a box-shaped member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the box-shaped member 661 has a first performance surface 661a that faces diagonally left in a performance standby state, a second performance surface 661b formed on the back side of the first performance surface 661a, and a third performance surface 661c that is adjacent to the first performance surface 661a and the second performance surface 661b. Each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, letters, etc.

When the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state for presentation, the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned to the right of the third pattern display device 81, in a location where visibility from the front side is likely to be reduced due to the positioning of the center frame 86. However, the first presentation surface 661a is oriented diagonally toward the player (the surface on the near side is tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L side with arrow F-B as the reference), so that visibility of the first presentation surface 661a at the player's line of sight when viewing the second decorative rotating member 660 from inside the frame of the opening between the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86 in a diagonal direction through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the second decorative rotating member 660 extends in front of the third pattern display device 81, facing directly toward the player viewing the inside of the center frame 86. In this case, the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented so that the second presentation surface 661b faces directly ahead, improving the visibility of the second presentation surface 661b at the player's line of sight viewing the second decorative rotating member 660.

In this way, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch between the presentation surfaces 661a-661c that are visible to the player depending on its position, and is also configured to be able to switch its posture depending on its position in order to improve the visibility of each presentation surface 661a-661c that is visible to the player.

In other words, it is not limited to a planar change in posture parallel to the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1), but is designed to have an angle change that is intentional in relation to the player's line of sight. That is, the closer to the center of the frame of the center frame 86, the easier it is for the player's line of sight to be in the front-to-back direction and to be directly facing the display surface, so visibility can be improved by having the display surface facing forward (in the direction of arrow F), but on the other hand, the closer to the frame of the center frame 86, the easier it is for the player's line of sight to be at an angle, so visibility can be improved by making the display surface at an angle to be directly facing the line of sight.

As the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced, the protruding decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction with it. The protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front of the board, and is positioned in the upper right corner of the rear case 510 and hidden from view by the player when the first operating unit 600 is in the performance standby state (see Figure 28) and intermediate performance state (see Figure 34).

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state (see Figure 28), the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned inside the center frame 86 so that it overlaps with the right edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 from the front when viewed from the front, making it visible to the player.

In this state, the right edge of the exterior shape of the protruding decorative portion 652b is located to the right of the right edge of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by utilizing the decoration on the front side of the board of the protruding decorative portion 652b, a display effect can be created that gives the player the illusion that the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is expanding.

In more detail, the right edge of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible is defined by the first operating unit 600, and when the first operating unit 600 is in a performance standby state, the left edge of the first performance surface 661a of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the right end RE1 of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible roughly coincide with each other.

In contrast, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the protruding decorative part 652b is positioned so that it extends beyond the right end RE1 of the area to the right. Therefore, by relating or matching the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the decoration on the front of the board of the protruding decorative part 652b, the player can visually perceive as if the display area of the third pattern display device 81 has expanded beyond the right end RE1 of the area. This makes it possible to realize a surprising presentation.

Examples of matching the above-mentioned display and decoration include, for example, displaying polka dots on the third pattern display device 81 and decorating the front of the plate of the protruding decorative section 652b with a similar polka dot pattern, or writing a certain number on the front of the plate of the protruding decorative section 652b in the same font as the number displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, the number to notify the winner of a lottery).

Examples of associating the above-mentioned display with decoration include, for example, a case in which six of the seven colors that make up the rainbow are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the front plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is colored with the remaining color, or a case in which a wooden stick is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with its right end aligned with the right edge of the area RE1 and the front plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with a flame-like decoration, thereby evoking the image of a fire when the first operating unit 600 is in the protruding state.

The presentation mode of the overhang decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type, and multiple types of presentation modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the overhang decorative portion 652b. The light-emitting means for changing the brightness of the overhang decorative portion 652b will be described later.

In addition, by arranging a small liquid crystal device with a display surface on the front side instead of the protruding decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in multiple types, thereby avoiding restrictions on the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when the display area is expanded beyond the right end RE1 of the area.

The object associated with the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to a display, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on a member of the second operating unit 700 (e.g., covering member 787), or the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (decoration of the first covering portion 875, decoration of the second covering portion 885) formed on a member of the third operating unit 800 (e.g., first decorative member 870, second decorative member 880).

Figure 36 is a front perspective view of the first action unit 600, and Figure 37 is a rear perspective view of the first action unit 600. The first action unit 600 is configured in a complex displacement manner in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the protruding decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is displaced relative to the second decorative rotating member 660, allowing the player to visually see the different appearances before and after the displacement.

Figure 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and Figure 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600.

As shown in Figures 38 and 39, the first operating unit 600 includes a fixed means 610 fastened to the rear case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed means 610, a drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620, a supported member 640 having one end rotatably supported on the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, a first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably arranged on the other end of the supported member 640, a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650, and a decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610.

The fixing means 610 includes a base member 611 arranged facing the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 from the front to the rear, and a front cover member 612 arranged on the front side of the base member 611 and fastened to the base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611 and the front cover member 612.

The front cover member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, a support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 on the inside of the fixing portion 614, and a guide long hole 616 formed as a long hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640.

The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape that is a mixture of straight and curved sections, the details and function of which will be described later.

The rotating member 620 includes a main body 621 formed in a long plate shape, a cylindrical portion 622 disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 and fitted and supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610, a transmission long hole 623 formed in the middle of the main body 621 as a long hole extending in a linear direction, a circular through hole 624 drilled as a circular hole in the drilling direction parallel to the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 622 at the other end (upper end) of the main body 621, and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through hole 624.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured so that one arm abuts against the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm abuts against a protruding piece of the front cover member 612, and is configured to generate a biasing force in a direction that raises the rotating member 620 (clockwise when viewed from the front).

When the cylindrical portion 622 is supported, the support fastening portion 615 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 622, and a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread portion formed at the tip of the support fastening portion 615. This allows the rotating member 620 to be supported by the support fastening portion 615 so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission long hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed, as will be described in detail later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding to the rear side through a through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, a transmission gear 633 journaled on the cylindrical portion 613b of the front cover member 612 while meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam 634 journaled on the cylindrical portion 613c of the front cover member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633.

When the cylindrical parts 613b, 613c are inserted through the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, fastening screws are screwed into the female threads formed at the tips of the cylindrical parts 613b, 613c. As a result, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are axially supported on the front cover member 612 so that they cannot fall off.

The front cover member 612 is formed with an arc-shaped hole 613d that penetrates along an arc centered on the tubular portion 613c, and a cylindrical portion 634a that protrudes cylindrically from the front side at an eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member having a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and has the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 634a and an extension portion 634b that extends in a plate shape in the outer diameter direction from an angular position that includes the cylindrical portion 634a.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d, and its front side is inserted into the transmission slot 623 of the rotating member 620. Here, the width length of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission slot 623 is designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. This makes it possible to reduce the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides through the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission slot 623.

The extension portion 634b is configured to be able to enter the detection groove of the photocoupler type detection sensor KS1, which is fastened and fixed to the front cover member 612. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) to grasp the position of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading the change in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes a long main body 641, a tubular portion 642 protruding from the rear side of the main body 641 with a cylindrical cross section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, a tubular portion 643 protruding parallel to the tubular portion 642, an intermediate gear 644 formed so as to be able to mesh with the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being supported by the tubular portion 643, a bottomed tubular portion 645 formed in a large-diameter tube with a perforated bottom on the rear side of the intermediate gear 644, and an extended support portion 646 extended toward the front side at the end opposite the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is located.

The above-mentioned configuration allows for the transmission of driving force through meshing between the gear teeth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 in response to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

When the cylindrical parts 642, 643 are inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, fastening screws are screwed into the female threads formed at the tips of the cylindrical parts 642, 643. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are axially supported on the main body part 641 of the supported member 640 so that they cannot fall off.

The bottomed tubular portion 645 has a rear side of the bottom disposed close to the front edge of the front cover member 612, and is provided with an opening 645a formed in the peripheral surface so that the intermediate gear 644 can mesh with the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 on the front side of the bottom, and an insertion hole 645b formed in a circle centered on the tubular center and through which the cylindrical support portion 651a can be inserted. Details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotating member 660, and will be described in detail later.

The first decorative rotating member 650 includes a main body member 651 that forms an orthogonal rotation axis, a front rotating member 652 that is supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, an electric decoration board 653 that is fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b of the front rotating member 652 and has a light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side, a rear rotating member 654 that is coaxial with the front rotating member 652 and fastened to the rear side, a wiring receiving member 655 that is fastened to the main body member 651 from the front side and forms a cylindrical space for wiring, a front decorative portion 656 that is arranged on the front side of the wiring receiving member 655 and fastened by screwing in a fastening screw that is inserted into the main body member 651 from the back side, and an axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 that is supported on the outside of the cylindrical portion formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

The main body member 651 has a cylindrical support portion 651a that extends cylindrically from the back side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female threads 651b formed at the diameter position of the tip, and has a notch portion 651c that is cut out so as to reduce the wall portion on one side of a plane that passes through the female threads 651b.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the cutout portion 651c functions as an opening to secure an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is inserted, in order from the base end, through the center hole of the front rotating member 652, the center hole of the rear rotating member 654, the insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and the guide elongated hole 616 of the front cover member 612, and is fastened and fixed by threading a fastening screw inserted into the dish-shaped cover portion C2 into the female threaded portion 651b at the tip.

That is, the cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the collar C1 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 are supported coaxially on the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction, and are configured to be displaceable along the guide elongated hole 616.

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 has an opening C2a formed in part of its circumference, and in the assembled state, this opening C2a is positioned opposite the notch portion 651c of the main body member 651, forming a path for electrical wiring.

Some of this electrical wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and is guided into the inside of the second decorative rotating member 660, where the terminals are connected to a connector arranged on the illumination board 662. The remaining wiring passes through the gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (the gap formed on the upper side, i.e., the side that faces the main body member 651 on the upper and lower opposite sides of the semi-cylindrical portion 655a), and is guided to the back of the protruding decorative portion 652b, where the terminals are connected to the connector on the illumination board 653.

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear end, and these gear teeth 654a are formed so that they can mesh with the intermediate gear 644. Note that the gear teeth 654a are formed along a portion of the circumference, rather than along the entire circumference, in a position sufficient for the operation described below.

The front rotating member 652 has gear teeth 652a formed as a bevel gear and a protruding decorative part 652b that protrudes radially outward. An illumination board 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the protruding decorative part 652b, and light from a light-emitting means arranged on the illumination board 653 can be used to light up or flash the protruding decorative part 652b.

The front rotating member 652 is fastened to the rear rotating member 654, so that the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate together.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is rotatably supported on a circular cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portion 651d of the main body member 651 and the semi-cylindrical portion 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and has gear teeth 657a formed as a bevel gear that can mesh with the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652. That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are interlocked, but the details of their operation will be described later. Note that the gear teeth 652a, 657a are formed along a portion of the circumference, rather than along the entire circumference, in an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

The second decorative rotating member 660 comprises a box-shaped member 661 fastened to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, an electric decoration board 662 fastened to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a wiring retaining plate 663 disposed between the box-shaped member 661 and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and fastened to the tip of the semi-cylindrical portion 651d, 655a.

In this embodiment, the illumination board 662 also undergoes a rotational displacement in conjunction with the rotation of the box-shaped member 661 described below. This may cause the electrical wiring passing between the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a to become twisted or disorganized when being guided into the connector of the illumination board 662. However, the function of the wiring retaining plate 663, which has a through hole for temporarily retaining the wiring, is to prevent the wiring from becoming twisted or disorganized.

In this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the illumination board 662, it is unavoidable that the electrical wiring will become twisted. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not generated by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that reverses at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, so it is possible to avoid excessive strain on the electrical wiring or the electrical wiring becoming twisted and broken.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis (the rotation axis formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a) that is parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side having the longest side.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so that it cannot fall off, with the wiring retaining plate 663 functioning as a retainer. The second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, so that the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from coming off the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The illuminated board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the board coincides with the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661. On the thickness-wise side of the illuminated board 662, the first performance surface 661a is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the front side and whose optical axis faces in the thickness direction, the second performance surface 661b is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the back side and whose optical axis faces in the thickness direction, and the third performance surface 661c is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second performance surface 661b) and whose optical axis faces in the width direction.

In this way, the light emitting means arranged on the illumination board 662 functions to individually illuminate each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c, but since the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c is arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second performance surface 661b), when the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c (the surface facing upwards) is illuminated in a state in which the second performance surface 661b is positioned on the front side (the extended state of the first operating unit 600), the second performance surface 661b can be illuminated by light that travels at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

In other words, unlike when LEDs are placed behind the illumination board 662, the light can be prevented from being hidden by the illumination board 662, so the light illuminating the third performance surface 661c can also illuminate the second performance surface 661b. This makes it possible to increase the variety of performance patterns that illuminate the second performance surface 661b, and improve the brightness of the second performance surface 661b during a light-emitting performance.

The decorative fixing member 670 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and has decorative letters and figures formed thereon so that they can be seen by the player, and is equipped with an illuminated board 671 that shines light diagonally forward and to the left from its back side. The decorative fixing member 670 is fixedly positioned on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player's line of sight towards the decorative fixing member 670 is always tilted diagonally to the right. In other words, by tilting the direction of the light emitted from the illuminated board 671 to the left, the light can be illuminated on the side where the player's eyes are likely to be located.

The decorative fixing member 670 has a lower edge and a right edge that are raised toward the rear side, and a front-to-rear gap is formed between the upper edge and the left edge and the front cover member 612. This front-to-rear gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 passes when tilting and displacing.

Figure 40 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in a standby state, Figure 41 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in a standby state, and Figure 42 is a side view of the first operating unit 600 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in Figure 40. Note that the base member 611 (see Figure 38) and fastening screws are omitted from the illustration to make it easier to understand the shape.

In the standby state for performance, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (e.g. parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce the displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to displace while sliding along the transmission long hole 623. In other words, when the displacement starts, there is no assistance from inertia compared to during the displacement, and the driving force that needs to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to be large, but by configuring to reduce the displacement resistance as in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 when the displacement starts.

The same is also true for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the extended state (see FIG. 45). That is, in this embodiment, the displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (i.e., the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed so that the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a arranged in the transmission long hole 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (the position for the performance waiting state and the position for the extended state) is along (e.g., parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 when the rotating member 620 starts to displace from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with each other from both sides of the intermediate gear 644. In this embodiment, the radius R1 of the gear teeth 625 and the radius R2 of the gear teeth 654a are designed to be the same length, so the rotation angle of the gear teeth 625 relative to the intermediate gear 644 and the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 relative to the intermediate gear 644 are the same.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 can be configured to be variable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 mesh with the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is transmitted to the second decorative rotating member 660, which is perpendicular to the rotation axis.

The rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652. In other words, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are configured to be the same (gear ratio is 1), so the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

Next, the displacement of the first operating unit 600 from the standby state will be explained in chronological order. Figure 43 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate state, and Figure 44 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate state. Figure 45 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state, and Figure 46 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state. Note that the base member 611 and fastening screws are omitted from the illustration to make the shape easier to understand.

Between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees, and between the intermediate performance state and the extended state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 26 degrees.

In the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented so that the narrow third performance surface 661c faces the front. In the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second performance surface 661b is configured to face the front (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide slot 616 has a straight portion 616a formed on a straight line extending vertically from the upper end, and a curved portion 616b connected to the lower end of the straight portion 616a and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape).

When the first operating unit 600 is in the intermediate performance state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end of the straight section 616a, i.e., at the connection between the straight section 616a and the curved section 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end of the curved section 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of axis O1 between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state is a linear displacement along the straight line portion 616a, and the displacement of axis O1 between the intermediate performance state and the extended state is a curved displacement along the curved line portion 616b.

The first operating unit 600 is configured to be able to change state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is arranged on the base end side of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving a driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 are driven by the displacement of the rotating member 620.

Therefore, without any countermeasures, the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide slot 616 may cause a large displacement resistance between the guide slot 616 and the rotating member 620. However, in this embodiment, this is suppressed by configuring the guide slot 616 so that its longitudinal direction is aligned with the displacement direction of the rotating member 620.

For example, the displacement of the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state (Figure 41) is a displacement that tilts downward, and the guide long hole 616 is also formed to extend downward. Also, for example, the displacement of the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the extended state (see Figure 46) is a displacement that rises diagonally upward to the right, and the guide long hole 616 is also formed to extend diagonally upward to the right.

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616, it is possible to suppress the displacement resistance of the portion (and axis O1) that displaces inside the guide slot 616.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram showing the displacement amount and displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and FIG. 48(a) and FIG. 48(b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven side of the supported member 640 when the rotating member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. Note that the positive and negative values are shown as positive downward displacement amounts and negative upward displacement amounts, and in FIG. 48(b), the values in FIG. 48(a) are shown as bar graphs.

In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support positions of the supported member 640 as the rotating member 620 rotates is illustrated at 10 degree intervals as the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and the rotating member 620 in the extended state of the first operating unit 600 is illustrated in solid lines.

In FIG. 47, the angle θ is illustrated as the angle between the line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and the line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622.

The guide elongated hole 616 functions as a long hole that guides the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed. The displacement in the guide elongated hole 616 is caused by the displacement of the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640, which is connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620. Therefore, hereinafter, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the driving side of the supported member 640, and the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

The outline of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 is explained below. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 occurs as a result of the sum of the vertical displacement of the rotating tip (the driving side of the supported member 640) caused by the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 caused by the posture change of the supported member 640.

In the performance standby state, the supported member 640 is in a vertical position, and the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction (the position of the rotating arm is within a range of 45 degrees left and right from the vertical). In other words, the conditions for the displacement in the up-down direction to be small are met in two ways.

In the extended state, both of these are reversed, and the conditions for large vertical displacement are doubled. Therefore, the configuration is prone to a situation where the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and high at the end of the downward displacement.

Next, the details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be described. The displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the extended state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

Therefore, if the guide slot 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may fall with force. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is preferable to stop the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate performance state (a midway position of the tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

In this embodiment, the shape of the guide slot 616 is such that a curved section 616b is combined below the straight section 616a. This increases the displacement resistance on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced down the straight section 616a due to its own weight and enters the curved section 616b. This makes it easier to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from falling too fast beyond the position in the intermediate performance state.

The displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the linear portion 616a will be explained. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the driven side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the performance standby state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is located to the right of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate performance state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is located to the left of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 tilts and displaces without changing direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 reciprocates in the vertical direction.

This allows the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 to be kept small compared to the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that while the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the linear portion 616a, the supported member 640 appears to the player as if it is rotating around the driven side of the supported member 640.

According to this displacement mode, a sliding displacement in the left-right direction can be generated by utilizing the run-up caused by the rotational displacement centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, so the load required for the displacement can be kept low compared to when the entire supported member 640 is caused to slide in the left-right direction from the start of the displacement. Therefore, the load required when the supported member 640 starts to operate can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be lowered. This allows the cost of the drive motor 631 to be reduced.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is kept small, the displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured in association with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and the rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 based on the driving part of the supported member 640 is maintained counterclockwise when viewed from the rear (the direction is not switched). As a result, as described above, the direction of the change in posture of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 are maintained without being switched (reversed).

This makes it possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are moving back and forth (returning), and allows the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 to be a forceful displacement.

Even in a situation where the displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the driving part of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component and is a displacement in the direction along the direction of gravity (downward), so the load required to start displacing the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be lowered. This makes it possible to reduce the cost of the drive motor 631.

The action caused by the curved portion 616b will now be described. The state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned at the connection between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned at the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the angle width range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG. 48.

First, as a premise, there is no need to use curved portions in the guide slot 616. In other words, the guide slot 616 may be configured with only straight portions, regardless of whether or not it uses any bending portions to increase the displacement resistance in the intermediate performance state as described above.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the curved portion 616b is deliberately used to prevent the speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This is explained below.

Whether guided by the straight portion 616a or the curved portion 616b, when the driven side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 displaces downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces downward.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, the curved portion 616b is formed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided to be displaced in a direction (rightward) opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driving side of the supported member 640, and the curved portion 616b is formed in the lower half of the curved portion 616b so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided to be displaced in a direction (leftward) that follows the displacement direction (leftward) of the driving side of the supported member 640.

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 becomes large (at the start of tilting), the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is swung left and right, ensuring a high displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640.

This makes it possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the displacement end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. In other words, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced up and down along an arbitrary path from a specific initial position to a terminal position, if the time required for displacement is the same, the result of integrating the speed in the up and down direction will be the same, so if the displacement starts slowly, the displacement speed will increase at the end.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 47 for comparison, the displacement speed gradually increases from the start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, and reaches a maximum at the displacement end (displacement bottom end) of the supported member 640. In other words, compared to the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide long hole 616 during the period when the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the displacement bottom end, the vertical displacement amount UE1 of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period is larger.

Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis line OE1, the driven side of the supported member 640 may bounce back, which may adversely affect the performance of the first operating unit 600 if the performance is to stop the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by adopting a curved portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is also allocated to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, thereby making the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 uniform.

In this case, uniformity does not only mean making the speed uniform over the entire range of displacement, but also includes limiting the range of speed. In particular, in this embodiment, during tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases at the start of entry into the curved portion 616b, and the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually decreases after entry into the lower half of the curved portion 616b begins.

In other words, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the supported member 640 from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side of the curved section 616b, i.e., the amount of displacement required per unit time, the amount of displacement required to lift the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time at the start of driving when the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raised up), can be reduced, thereby reducing the burden on the drive motor 631.

Next, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described with reference to Figure 49. Figure 49 is a schematic diagram showing the change in angle θ [degrees] accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620.

The angle θ can be regarded as the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 around the circular through hole 624, and is directly linked to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. In other words, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is determined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

In this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth 652a and the gear tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are both set to 1. Therefore, the angle θ and the rotation angle with the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are the same, and therefore the change in the angle θ can be understood as a change in the posture of the second decorative rotating member 660.

The change in angle θ is 45 degrees from the standby state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 44), and 90 degrees from the intermediate state of the first operating unit 600 to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 46).

When in the standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a position where the first performance surface 661a is tilted 45 degrees to the left (the third performance surface 661c is tilted 45 degrees to the right), so that each time the state is switched between the intermediate performance state and the extended state in sequence as the angle θ changes, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third performance surface 661c faces the front (see Figure 43), and then the second performance surface 661b faces the front (see Figure 45).

The setting of the angle θ is achieved by designing the guide elongated hole 616 to determine the position of the supported member 640. In other words, in this embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is designed to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the position of the second decorative rotating member 660 according to the angle θ.

As a result, even if the detection sensor KS1 is only a sensor that detects the position of the rotating member 620, as in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 based on the output of the detection sensor KS1.

In other words, if the extension 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operating unit 600 is in a performance standby state (see Figure 41), and the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 and the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 from that state.

Here, the amount of change in angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when determining the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not sufficient to obtain a numerical value by proportional calculation from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631. This also makes it possible to avoid the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 being constant even when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed. This will be explained below.

The change in angle θ is roughly the same as the change in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. That is, compared to the angle change from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees), the angle change from the intermediate performance state to the extended state is roughly larger (approximately 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned in the upper half of the curved section 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate performance state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved section 616b, and eventually becomes lower than the level of the angle change from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state (reduced to about 7 degrees).

In this way, by configuring the angle θ relative to the rotation of the rotating member 620 per unit angle to vary, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be similarly configured to vary. That is, in a range where the value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be small, making it easier to maintain its posture, while in a range where the value of the angle θ is large, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be large, making it easier to quickly change the surface facing the player (presentation surfaces 661a to 661c).

The above-mentioned configuration allows the displacement movement of the second decorative rotating member 660 to be varied. As described above, the displacement movement of the second decorative rotating member 660 simultaneously involves a change in position and posture associated with the displacement of the supported member 640, and a rotational displacement about the rotation axis formed at the center of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement around the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a becomes noticeably large when the driven side of the supported member 640 moves from the straight portion 616a of the guide slot 616 into the curved portion 616b.

In other words, during tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate performance state is reached, and even if the second decorative rotating member 660 moves up and down (bounces back) slightly from the position on the driven side of the supported member 640 in the intermediate performance state, the second decorative rotating member 660 can be maintained in a state in which the third performance surface 661c faces the front side (see Figure 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate performance state, the rotational speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases when the rotating member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the change in posture in the rotational direction is clearly visible. In other words, the player can visually see that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantly rotating and displaced.

In this embodiment, since the second presentation surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 faces the front side at the rotation end (lower displacement end) of the rotating member 620 and is viewed as a single unit when positioned closely adjacent to the decorative fixing member 670 (see Figure 28), it is desirable to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from bouncing back upward when the rotating member 620 is positioned at the lower displacement end.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by configuring the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 as described above, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform, so that it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive when the rotating member 620 is positioned at the lower displacement end, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In addition to the uniform displacement speed, the arrangement of the central portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (e.g., the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 643) is configured to be closest to the support fastening portion 615, which serves as the rotation axis of the rotating member 620. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation tip of the rotating member 620 from becoming unruly due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660, which are supported on the rotation tip side of the rotating member 620, and stabilizes the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

In addition, the lower half of the curved section 616b is configured to suitably impede displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower displacement end of the rotating member 620 in the direction of bouncing back (upper left direction) around the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620. That is, the lower half of the curved section 616b has a short side direction that slopes upward and left, and since it is possible to suppress displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction, it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In other words, in this embodiment, the direction of displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in response to the displacement of the driving side of the supported member 640 is different from the direction of displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driving side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of its displacement.

If there was no guide, the former would be expected to displace downward and left along the displacement direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 (the rotation direction of the rotating member 620); however, in this embodiment, by being guided by the long guide hole 616, it is slightly deflected left and right in the direction along the long guide hole 616 and displaces downward.

On the other hand, the latter is a circular orbit centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, so the displacement direction is not along the guide elongated hole 616 but along the short direction of the guide elongated hole 616. This makes it possible to suppress the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 and prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

The following describes the characteristics of the displacement of the pivoting member 620 in the rising direction. When the first operating unit 600 changes state from the extended state to the performance standby state, the pivoting member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 (i.e., the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) is mainly used to raise and displace the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660 arranged on the supported member 640, and to rotate the second decorative rotating member 660.

In other words, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660, the less load is required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

As shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, the angle θ proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is designed to be at a minimum value when the rotating member 620 starts to rotate from the extended state of the first operating unit 600. This makes it possible to reduce the load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

At the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660, which is centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640, is positioned in a position that is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 (facing in the vertical direction).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as the inertial force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be generated as a load in which the rotating member 620 is twisted around the longitudinal axis, and the rotating member 620 can withstand this load with only slight localized elastic displacement by distributing it in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to when the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in a front view, it is easier to avoid a situation in which the rotating member 620 breaks. In addition, excessive elastic deformation of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front cover member 612, and the front cover member 612 can be configured to withstand loads that the rotating member 620 cannot withstand by elastically deforming, thereby preventing damage to the rotating member 620.

The displacement of the overhanging decorative part 652b will be explained. The overhanging decorative part 652b is a member that rotates and displaces around the axis O1, and its rotation angle corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even if the change in position of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when changing from a performance standby state to an overhanging state, the overhanging decorative part 652b will rotate if the angle θ changes.

The change in angle θ from the performance standby state to the protruding state is approximately 135 degrees, and the protruding decorative part 652b rotates approximately 45 degrees. Here, when the protruding decorative part 652b rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise from the performance standby state, it feels like it will collide with the other operating units 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see Figure 28). However, in this embodiment, the supported member 640, which is the basis for the rotation of the protruding decorative part 652b, itself changes its posture in a manner that rotates clockwise, so it is possible to avoid collision with the other operating units 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members).

In other words, by configuring the protruding decorative portion 652b to be displaceable based on the supported member 640, the space required for the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, if the overhanging decorative part 652b is a part that is fixedly positioned based on the supported member 640 when the first operating unit 600 is in the overhanging state, when the supported member 640 changes from its overhanging state position to its performance standby state position, the overhanging decorative part 652b may overhang to the upper left of the supported member 640, potentially causing a negative effect on the performance, such as colliding with another operating unit 800 or partially obscuring the overhang display on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the protruding decorative part 652b rotates and displaces in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the driving side of the supported member 640, based on the driven side of the supported member 640, so that when the supported member 640 protrudes toward the third pattern display device 81, it protrudes in tandem, and when the supported member 640 displaces to the side retreating from the third pattern display device 81, it retracts in tandem. Therefore, the position of the protruding decorative part 652b in the retracted state can be formed on the side away from the third pattern display device 81.

The rotation angle of the protruding decorative portion 652b relative to the supported member 640 from the player's point of view can be calculated from the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640. In other words, it is 45 degrees, which is the difference between the change in angle θ of approximately 135 degrees and the change in posture angle of the supported member 640 of approximately 90 degrees.

In this embodiment, the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be equal regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into angles a1, a2 below the horizontal line and angles b1, b2 above the horizontal line, the difference between the angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640 is calculated as ((a1+b1)-(a2+b2))-(b1-b2)=(a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the protruding decorative part 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when the rotating member 620 is rotated and displaced at a constant angular velocity, the angular velocity of rotation of the protruding decorative part 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 is constant, even though the displacement speed of the supported member 640 is not constant.

This allows the player to visually perceive the protruding decorative portion 652b arranged on the supported member 640 as if it were being driven at a constant angular velocity by a drive means other than the drive motor 631 that drives the rotating member 620.

By configuring it in this way, the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b relative to the supported member 640 can be made to appear, from the player's point of view, as if there were sections of sliding movement and sections of rotational movement, and the displacement mode of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode, as if it were not mechanical.

This effect can be achieved by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 into separate sections where the posture change is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, and sections where the posture change is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction. In other words, the protruding decorative portion 652b rotates relative to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and from the player's point of view, the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b is influenced by the side that is dominant as the displacement of the supported member 640.

Therefore, in sections where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the protruding decorative part 652b can be visually perceived as undergoing a rotational displacement, and in sections where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the protruding decorative part 652b can be visually perceived as undergoing a sliding displacement.

As described above, the rotating member 620 can be rotated to form a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, and an extended state, and although a case has been described in which it is displaced from one displacement end point to the other displacement end point, the drive direction may be switched so that it is displaced in the opposite direction at a midpoint in the displacement range.

For example, after rotating the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state, the drive direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed to control the rotation to return to the performance standby state. In this case, since the rotating member 620 needs to be stopped midway down, it may be necessary to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in order to ensure an accurate stopping position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) tends to increase near the intermediate performance state compared to the performance standby state. As described above, the magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660.

Therefore, near the intermediate performance state where the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, a larger portion of the driving force is allocated to the second decorative rotating member 660, and therefore the portion allocated to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 can be relatively reduced, automatically suppressing the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

In other words, as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, making it easier to stop the rotating member 620 near the intermediate performance state without having to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in advance.

Next, the second operating unit 700 will be described. The second operating unit 700 is an operating unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and its states are mainly switched between a performance standby state (see FIG. 28) in which it retreats below the opening 511a to ensure the field of view of the player looking at the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 28), a protruding state (see FIG. 30) in which it is positioned in front of the third pattern display device 81 and attracts attention, and an intermediate performance state (see FIG. 35) that is a state between the two.

Figure 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700, and Figure 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700. In Figures 50 and 51, the peripheral components of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 are mainly shown in an exploded state, and the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is shown in a non-exploded state.

As shown in Figures 50 and 51, the second operating unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 fastened to the lower right corner of the rear case 510, a pivoting arm member 720 disposed between the right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510 and pivotable about the cylindrical protrusion 511b of the rear case 510, a drive transmission device 730 configured to transmit a driving force to the pivoting arm member 720, and a lifting plate member 740 to which the tip of the pivoting arm member 720 is guidably connected and which is configured to be capable of being lifted and lowered. The lifting/lowering plate member 740 is provided with a left rear plate member 750 fastened to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the rear side thereof, a set of front support members 760 that are configured as a left-right pair and fastened to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750, a blind decorative member 768 that is fastened to the rear case 510 on the front side of the metal bar 702, and a lifting/lowering reversal performance device 770 that is configured to be displaceable in a manner that combines lifting/lowering displacement and forward/rearward displacement on the lifting/lowering plate member 740 and the front support member 760.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support part 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, a gap forming part 712 that is recessed from the rear side at the left edge and forms a gap between the rear case 510, a plurality of detection sensors 713 (three in this embodiment) that are arranged to detect the position of the detection part 735 of the drive transmission device 730, a front upper inclined part 714 that is inclined in a manner that the further it goes upward at the front side of the left side and is formed so as to be able to guide the rotating cylinder part 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and a plurality of fastening parts 718 that form female threaded parts into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The detection sensors 713 are multiple photocoupler type sensors that are spaced apart so that the detection grooves are positioned at positions where the detectable parts 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 is arranged to match the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for performance, the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state, and the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch its output depending on whether the second operating unit 700 is in a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, or an extended state, and the audio lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operating unit 700 from the output result.

The pivot arm member 720 is supported by a cylindrical protrusion 511b that protrudes cylindrically from the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 to the front side, and is formed as a long plate in a L-shape when viewed from the front. The support tube 722 protrudes cylindrically backward from the bent part of the main body 721, and has an inner peripheral shape formed to a size that allows the cylindrical protrusion 511b to be inserted therethrough. The long hole 723 is formed in the long hole shape at the right end of the main body 721, and the left end of the main body 721 is formed in the long hole shape. It is provided with a cylindrical fastening portion 724 that protrudes cylindrically toward the front (in a direction parallel to the protruding direction of the cylindrical protrusion 711a) and has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, a cylindrical fastening portion 725 that protrudes cylindrically toward the rear at an intermediate position between the cylindrical fastening portion 724 and the support tube portion 722 and has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, and a torsion spring SP2 that is wrapped around the support tube portion 722 and applies a biasing force to the main body portion 721 in an upward direction (a direction lifting the left side) between the rear case 510.

A step is formed on the left side of the main body 721 so that it is shifted toward the front side compared to the base end side of the support tube 722, and the support plate 701 is disposed in the gap formed on the rear side by the step.

The support plate 701 is a plate-like part that is fastened to the bottom wall part 511 of the rear case 510, and has an arc-shaped long hole part 701a that is drilled so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastening part 725. A fastening screw is inserted through the long hole part 701a with a ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched therebetween, and is screwed into the cylindrical fastening part 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is supported on the support plate 701 via the cylindrical fastening part 725 so as not to fall off.

The support plate 701 is fastened to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, so that the left side of the pivot arm member 720 is restricted from moving away from the rear case 510 toward the front side. This prevents the pivot arm member 720 from being displaced toward the front side due to a load applied to the left side of the pivot arm member 720, so that the displacement of the pivot arm member 720 can be stably supported.

The right side of the main body 721 is disposed in the gap between the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712. In other words, the forward/rearward displacement of the right side of the main body 721 is restricted by the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

The long hole portion 723 is formed in a shape in which a straight line passing through the center of the width and extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support tube portion 722. Therefore, when the load applied to the long hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, the component of the load in the rotation direction of the pivot arm member 720 is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits a driving force through the long hole portion 723 of the pivot arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 fastened and fixed from the front side to the right front plate member 710, a drive gear 732 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 731, a transmission gear 733 meshed with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshed with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are each supported by a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 711a that protrude cylindrically from the back side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusions 711a, and fastening screws that are inserted into the shaft holes of the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 can be screwed in. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are supported by the cylindrical protrusions 711a so that they cannot fall off.

The transmission support part 711 includes the cylindrical protrusion 711a described above and an arc-shaped hole 711b that is drilled in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical protrusion 711a that supports the gear cam member 734.

The gear cam member 734 includes a detectable portion 735 that protrudes toward the front side in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft portion and is formed so as to be insertable into the arc hole 711b, an extension portion 736 that extends to have a longer diameter than the gear portion, and a cylindrical protrusion portion 736a that protrudes cylindrically from the tip of the extension portion 736 toward the rear side.

The detected portion 735 is formed so that it can be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and is configured as a part that enables the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) to detect the position of the gear cam member 734 based on the output from the detection sensor 713.

The cylindrical protrusion 736a is formed so that it can be inserted into the long hole 723 of the pivot arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is transmitted to the pivot arm member 720 via the long hole 723.

A female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusion 736a, and a fastening screw that is inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed in. When this fastening screw is screwed in and fixed, the pivot arm member 720 is connected to the cylindrical protrusion 736a in an undetachable manner.

The lift plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down in response to the rotation of the pivot arm member 720, and is equipped with a guided member 741 that is arranged on the left end side and guided in the up and down direction, and a horizontally elongated member 742 that is fastened and fixed to the lower end side of the guided member 741 and is long in the left and right directions.

The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal rod 702, which is fixed to the rear case 510 with its longitudinal direction aligned vertically, can be inserted therethrough, allowing for vertical displacement along the metal rod 702. The tips of the protrusions protruding from both the left and right sides of the guided member 741 toward the rear side come into contact with the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, thereby restricting the axial rotation of the guided member 741 and stabilizing the position of the guided member 741.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontally elongated member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is also stabilized.

The horizontal member 742 includes a long hole 743 that is drilled in the shape of a long oval with a vertical width that allows the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the pivoting arm member 720 to be inserted, a cylindrical portion 744 that protrudes cylindrically toward the front side above the long hole 743, and a pair of guide portions 745 that are disposed below the bottom at positions equidistant to the left and right of the cylindrical portion 744.

The fastening screw, which is inserted through the long hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched therebetween, is screwed into the cylindrical fastening portion 724, so that the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720 via the cylindrical fastening portion 724 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion through which the insertion tube portion 773 of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is inserted, and which supports the lifting/reversing performance device 770 in a state in which the lifting/reversing performance device 770 can be displaced forward and backward. In other words, the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is not fixed to the lifting/reversing plate member 740, but is disposed on the front side of the lifting/reversing plate member 740 in a manner in which the lifting/reversing performance device 770 can be displaced forward and backward based on the lifting/reversing plate member 740.

A coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wrap around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion tube portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction that pulls the lift plate member 740 and the lift reversal performance device 770 apart.

The guide portion 745 is made up of a pair of left and right guide portions, and includes a long plate portion 745a extending from front to back, and a rotating cylinder portion 745b rotatably supported on a pair of front and rear shaft portions that protrude outwardly to the left and right from the plate portion 745a.

The rotating cylinder section 745b rotates when the above-mentioned lifting/reversing performance device 770 moves forward and backward, and functions as a part that guides the forward and backward movement, but details will be described later.

The left rear plate member 750, like the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, has a front upper inclined portion 751 formed on the front side of the right side in a manner that the further upward it approaches the front side, and is formed so as to be able to guide the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and a number of fastening portions 752 formed with female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The concealing decorative member 768 comprises a three-dimensional decorative portion 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate is disposed on the rear side of the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a to which an LED is fixed on the front side, so that the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated by the light emitted from the LED.

The front support members 760 each include a fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a receiving inclined portion 762 arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761 and inclined toward the front side as the back surface of the plate moves upward.

The fixing plate 761 is a plate that is fastened to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by inserting a fastening screw that is inserted from the front side into the insertion hole and threaded into the corresponding female thread portion.

In this fixed position, the receiving inclination portion 762 is positioned in front of the front upper inclination portions 714, 751. That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving inclination portion 762 and the front upper inclination portions 714, 751, and the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is guided along this guide path, so that the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is configured to lift and lower while displacing in the front-to-rear direction. This lifting and lowering displacement is explained below.

Figure 52(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIa-LIIa in Figure 28, and Figure 52(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIb-LIIb in Figure 28. Figures 52(a) and 52(b) show the second operation unit 700 in a standby state for performance.

Figure 53(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in Figure 33, and Figure 53(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in Figure 33. Figures 53(a) and 53(b) show intermediate performance states of the second operating unit 700.

Figure 54(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIVa-LIVa in Figure 30, and Figure 54(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIVb-LIVb in Figure 30. Figures 54(a) and 54(b) show the extended state of the second operating unit 700.

The lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 shown in Figures 52 to 54 occurs when the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The transmission of driving force during the lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will be described. In this description, Figures 28, 30, and 33 will be referred to as appropriate.

When the drive force transmission starts from the performance standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protrusion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is designed to be parallel to the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, so that the displacement resistance that occurs when the gear cam member 734 starts to rotate can be suppressed. The same thing is also true in the extended state.

On the other hand, in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 30), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, so that the displacement resistance that the gear cam member 734 receives in the rotational direction from the pivot arm member 720 is maximized, making it easier to stop the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734.

As shown in Figures 52 to 54, the lifting and reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is arranged on the rear side below the center frame 86, and is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-to-rear direction as it is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is reduced by a configuration in which the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is guided by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, and by a configuration in which the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 are guided by the rotating cylinder portion 745b of the lifting and reversing plate member 740.

In other words, the pair of rotating cylinder sections 774e are designed to be aligned parallel to the inclination angles of the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 (the front upper inclined portion 751 is located on the left side not shown in FIG. 52, see FIG. 56), which are arranged symmetrically. By the rotating cylinder section 774e rolling around the center of the cylindrical section 774d, the displacement resistance of the main body member 771, which displaces along the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, can be reduced.

Furthermore, by arranging the rotating cylinder parts 745b aligned in the front-rear direction, the front rotating cylinder part 745b is designed to be positioned slightly upward, which helps to suppress tilting displacement of the main body member 771, thereby preventing the rotating cylinder part 774e from applying excessive load to the receiving inclined part 762 and the front upper inclined parts 714, 751.

In other words, in this embodiment, the performance device 780 is designed so that its center of gravity (position of the axis of rotation) is located slightly forward of the front-to-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is constantly biased in a forward tilt direction by gravity. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are prone to displacement such that the front side drops and the rear side rises.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b that is disposed adjacent to the first horizontal plate 774b when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b descends is disposed slightly upward, and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b that is disposed adjacent to the second horizontal plate 774c when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c ascends is disposed slightly downward. Therefore, forward tilt displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b can stably roll between the first horizontal plate 774b because there is a gap between the front rotating cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c, and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b can stably roll between the first horizontal plate 774b and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b because there is a gap between the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b. This allows the rotating cylinder portion 745b to roll normally, and reduces the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The displacement of the lift-up/down reversing device 770 toward the front side is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the geometrical guidance described above. Therefore, the displacement resistance of the forward/backward displacement can be reduced during the upward displacement in which the lift-up/down reversing device 770 is displaced toward the front side compared to the downward displacement.

The up and down displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is performed by the driving force of the drive motor 731, which is divided into vertical displacement and front-to-rear displacement. In the vertical displacement, the burden of upward displacement is relatively large due to the need to counter gravity, but in this case, the forward-to-rear displacement can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the driving force required to lift the lifting and reversing performance device 770 from becoming excessive.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so that it is its natural length in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 53) of the second operating unit 700. In other words, when the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 is positioned lower than the position in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction that assists the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 caused by the driving force of the drive motor 731, whereas when the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 is positioned higher than the position in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770.

This makes it easier to maintain the position of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 in the intermediate performance state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven from the performance standby state of the second operating unit 700 and then controlled to be stopped so as to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, even if the stopping timing is slightly earlier than ideal, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 can displace the second operating unit 700 so as to move it closer to the intermediate performance state.

For example, when the stop control is performed in a similar manner, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal, the second operating unit 700 will descend under its own weight, and this descent due to its own weight will be suppressed by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2, so that the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate performance state and maintained in its position.

In addition, for example, when the drive motor 731 is driven and controlled from the extended state of the second operating unit 700, and the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, if the lifting and reversing performance device 770 passes the intermediate performance state downward, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance, making it easier to prevent a large downward displacement beyond the intermediate performance state. And even after the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is applied, so that the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate performance state.

Here, we will explain the effect of the lift-and-reverse effect device 770, which is displaced forward and backward in response to lift-and-reverse displacement. As a premise, a movable device is known that can be switched between a state in which it attracts the player's attention by displacing in and out of a frame bounded by a center frame 86, and a state in which it retreats from the player's field of vision.

Most of these movable gadgets are designed with an emphasis on how they look when placed inside the center frame 86, and when they are retracted to the outside of the center frame 86, appearance is often not taken into consideration, under the assumption that they will not attract the player's attention.

However, recently, the distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 has been increased, and the line of sight reaches the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (the rear position of the play area) at the edge of the field of vision when passing through the inside of the center frame 86 and looking at the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, if the appearance of the movable props retracted to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 is poor, it may reduce the player's interest.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, decorative surfaces are formed not only on the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also on the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and top and bottom sides (first secondary decorative surface 787a2 and second secondary decorative surface 787b2 in FIG. 52), and the displacement direction of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is set to a line that starts from the player side (front side) as it approaches the back side (sloping downward as it approaches the rear), that is, along the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of vision, so that each decorative surface can easily fit within the player's field of vision.

This allows each decorative surface of the covering member 787 to be comfortably within the player's field of vision. Details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the decorations (figures, patterns, letters, pictures, etc.) formed on the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 or second main decorative surface 787b1, first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 54) that is visible to the player in the extended state (see FIG. 54) and the upper side (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2, first sub-decorative surface 787a2 in FIG. 52) that is visible to the player in the performance standby state (see FIG. 52) are formed as decorations that are related to each other.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first minor decorative surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration that is related to each other, the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second minor decorative surface 787b2 are formed as a second decoration that is related to each other, and the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as decorations that are different from each other.

The decoration formed on the upper surface is positioned in the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 26) located behind it when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for a performance, so it is easily visible when the player moves their gaze to switch between paying attention to the ball flowing down the play area formed outside the center frame 86 (see Figure 2) and paying attention to the display performance unfolding on the third pattern display device 81.

Therefore, the content of the decoration (notification content, for example, "Chance" or "Big Win") that is visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the extended state can be visible to the player through the upper surface of the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state.

This allows the third pattern display device 81 to be displaced to a standby state for easier viewing, while the covering member 787, which is positioned so as not to be conspicuous, can continue to attract the player's attention.

In addition, as described below, the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player, so that the content of the decorative surface visible to the player in the extended state can be different.

For example, if the lifting and reversing display device 770 is placed in a display standby state before the player can see the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (because the player misses it or the operating speed is too fast), and the content of the decorative surface can only be seen from the front side, most of the front side will be hidden by the game board 13 in the display standby state, and the player will be forced to focus on the liquid crystal display displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, reducing his or her ability to focus on the covering member 787.

On the other hand, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be seen from the top side, as in this embodiment, the player can visually check the lifting and reversing performance device 770 in the performance standby state and understand the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, "chance" or "jackpot") that were visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the extended state.

As a result, for players who miss the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state, the content notified by the state of the covering member 787 can be continuously notified by the visible decorative surface of the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state. This makes it possible to maintain high attention to the covering member 787 regardless of the state, such as the performance standby state or the extended state.

In this embodiment, the forward/rearward displacement of the lifting/reversing effect device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is configured as a displacement from a state in which it is positioned on the rear side of the rear end surface of the play area to a position forward of the rear end surface of the play area.

As shown in FIG. 52, when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state, the front of the covering member 787 faces the back of the plate of the center frame 86, and the center frame 86 has a flow path forming portion 86a formed to protrude toward the covering member 787.

The flow path forming portion 86a is a portion that forms the rear portion of the guide flow path for guiding the ball that has flown down the lower rolling surface of the center frame 86 from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 after reaching the lower edge of the center frame 86, to the first winning opening 64 disposed in the play area by swinging the ball backward once and then forward again (see FIG. 9). In other words, the flow path forming portion 86a positions the rear end surface BE1 of the play area rearward of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2).

Because a ball that flows down the flow path forming portion 86a has a high probability of entering the first winning port 64, the flow path forming portion 86a attracts a lot of attention, and especially when the ball flies into the inside of the center frame 86, the flow path forming portion 86a is likely to attract the player's attention. In the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), the performance device 780 is disposed directly behind the flow path forming portion 86a, making it easy to configure a state in which the performance device 780 in the performance standby state comes into the player's field of vision.

When the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state, the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52(a)), when the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53(a)), and when the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

In other words, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time is displaced toward the front so as to enter a front-to-rear position that is the same as the front-to-rear position of the play area. Therefore, it can be made to appear to the player that the covering member 787 has climbed onto the center frame 86 and is moving toward the front (approaching the player).

In addition, when the second operating unit 700 is raised and lowered, the performance device 780 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction, and the front-to-rear position of its front end face is configured to match (coincide) with the front-to-rear position of the second performance surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 in the extended state of the first operating unit 600.

As a result, the front-to-back positions of the second performance surface 661b (see Figure 29) of the first operating unit 600 and the performance device 780 (Figure 30) of the second operating unit 700, which are positioned close to each other when viewed from the front in the extended state, are aligned, making it easier to visually recognize them as a single unit.

On the other hand, the longitudinal position of the performance device 780 is lowered further back in the intermediate performance state and the performance standby state than in the extended state, so that the box-shaped member 661 of the first operating unit 600 and the performance device 780 can be easily viewed separately (independently) compared to the extended state.

The lifting and reversing performance device 770 includes a main body member 771 that is connected and supported by the lifting plate member 740, and a performance device 780 that is configured to be displaceable based on the main body member 771. Next, the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 55 and 56.

Figure 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the lift-and-reverse performance device 770, and Figure 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lift-and-reverse performance device 770. Note that Figures 50 and 51 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of Figures 55 and 56.

The main body member 771 includes a lower long portion 772 formed long in the left-right direction, a cylindrical insertion tube portion 773 that protrudes from the left-right center position of the lower long portion 772 toward the back side, a pair of guide extension portions 774 that extend from both left and right ends of the lower long portion 772 to the back side, an upper long portion 775 that is formed integrally with the left-right center position of the lower long portion 772 and formed long in the left-right direction by a connecting portion that extends up and down, a plurality of guide portions 776 that are arranged on both left and right sides of the upper long portion 775 toward the back side and are configured to be able to guide the linear plate member 784 of the performance device 780 in the left-right direction, a transmission device holding plate 777 that is fastened and fixed from the back side to the left-right center of the upper long portion 775 and can support the drive transmission device, and a light-emitting performance means 778 that is fastened and fixed to the front sides of the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775.

The insertion tube portion 773 is a portion that is inserted into the inner circumference of the cylindrical portion 744 of the lifting plate member 740, and is formed with a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide on the inner circumference of the cylindrical portion 744, and the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction by the sliding. In other words, by inserting the insertion tube portion 773 into the cylindrical portion 744, it is possible to suppress the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-to-rear direction with respect to the lifting plate member 740.

The guide extension 774 includes a vertical plate 774a whose width faces the up-down direction, a first horizontal plate 774b connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a whose width faces the left-right direction, a second horizontal plate 774c connected to the vertical plate 774a below the first horizontal plate 774b whose width faces the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), a pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d protruding outward from the left and right outer surfaces of the vertical plate 774a, and a rotating cylindrical portion 774e rotatably supported by the cylindrical portions 774d.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width so that it extends more inwardly to the left and right than the widthwise ends of the first horizontal plate 774b. This widthwise extension is vertically opposed to the lower bottom of the lifting plate member 740 in the assembled state, and the mutual abutment suppresses the tilting displacement in which the guide extension portion 774 falls forward. In other words, by ensuring a width such that the second horizontal plate 774c is vertically opposed to the lower bottom of the lifting plate member 740, it is possible to suppress the tilting displacement in which the main body member 771 falls forward based on the lifting plate member 740.

The pair of cylindrical portions 774d are not aligned vertically, but the upper cylindrical portion 774d is shifted forward compared to the lower cylindrical portion 774d. This shift is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 and the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d are parallel (see FIG. 52(a)). In other words, by arranging the pair of cylindrical portions 774d parallel to the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e can be simultaneously abutted against the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762. This allows the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e to roll stably, making it easier to avoid localized loads.

The guide portion 776 includes a plurality of cylindrical portions 776a arranged on both the left and right sides in a vertically aligned pair and having female threads formed on the inner circumference, and a plurality of anti-disengagement plate portions 776b fastened to connect the pair of left and right cylindrical portions 776a.

The fall prevention plate portion 776b has insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the multiple cylindrical portions 776a, and is fastened to the cylindrical portion 776a by inserting fastening screws into the insertion holes from the rear side and screwing them into the cylindrical portion 776a, and functions as a part for preventing the linear plate member 784 from falling off, but details will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b drilled in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position where the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, a cylindrical protrusion portion 777c that protrudes cylindrically from the front side below the insertion hole 777b, a pair of insertion holes 777d drilled at both upper and lower end positions so that fastening screws can be inserted, and a wiring fastener member 777e that is fastened and fixed to the back side.

The cylindrical protrusion 777c has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, and when the fastening screw is screwed into it while it is inserted into the transmission gear 781b, it supports the up-down inversion member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The through hole 777d is designed to allow the insertion of a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion 775a formed in the corresponding portion of the upper long portion 775, and the transmission device holding plate 777 is fastened and fixed to the upper long portion 775 by the fastening screw.

The wiring retaining member 777e is a part that holds and secures the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in the gap between it and the transmission device retaining plate 777, but by forming it into a shape that follows the outer frame of the transmission device retaining plate 777, it is also possible to improve the overall rigidity of the transmission device retaining plate 777.

The light-emitting means 778 is equipped with two elongated plate-shaped electric lighting boards 778a, one above the other, on the left and right sides of which light-emitting elements such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and a light-diffusing member 778b, which is a plate member made of a light-transmitting resin material arranged on the front side of the electric lighting boards 778a and on which a light-diffusing process is performed.

The upper illumination board 778a is equipped with a pair of detection sensors 778d arranged on the back side, one above the other. The detection sensors 778d are photocoupler type detection devices, and are configured to be able to detect the position of the up-down inversion member 781 of the performance device 780 by arranging an arc-shaped protrusion 781d in the detection groove, as described in detail below.

The lower light diffusion member 778b has multiple fastening portions formed on the back side, and fastening screws are inserted from the back side into insertion holes drilled in the lower long portion 772 at corresponding positions to the fastening portions, thereby fastening and fixing the fastening screws so that they are not noticeable.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusion member 778b has through holes 778c on both the left and right sides for inserting fastening screws, and the fastening screws are inserted into the through holes 778c from the front side and screwed into the female threaded portion 775b of the upper long portion 775, thereby fastening and fixing the upper light diffusion member 778b.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, and may be noticeable without any countermeasures. However, in this embodiment, as described below, the covering member 787 is positioned to always cover the front side of the insertion hole 778c, so that the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

Therefore, even if the head of the fastening screw is designed to face the front, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw is conspicuous and adversely affects the performance. In other words, by designing the covering member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, it is possible to increase the design freedom of the insertion direction of the fastening screw.

The performance device 780 is a device in which an outer portion is arranged around the upper long portion 775 and is configured to be displaceable, and includes an up-down inversion member 781 pivotally supported on the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777, a drive motor 782 having a drive gear 782a fixed to a drive shaft that transmits a driving force to the transmission gear 781b of the up-down inversion member 781, a pair of intermediate arm members 783 whose one end is pivotally supported on each of the two longitudinal ends of the up-down inversion member 781, and a pair of intermediate arm members 783 whose other end is pivotally supported and whose displacement in the left-right direction is guided by the guide portion 776. It comprises a pair of linear motion plate members 784, a pair of axial rotation members 785 arranged between the linear motion plate members 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) on a rotation axis extending in the left-right direction, a pair of axial support members 786 that axially support the axial rotation members 785 together with the linear motion plate members 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed to the left and right outer tip portions of the axial rotation members 785 with the phase fixed so that they cannot fall off, and covering members 787 arranged in front of and behind the end plate members 785d and formed with left and right lengths that cover the left and right sides of the upper long portion 775.

The upside-down member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b that protrudes in a gear-like shape from the rear side of the center of the main body plate portion 781a, a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c that protrude cylindrically from both ends of the main body plate portion 781a in the long direction toward the rear side, and an arc-shaped protrusion 781d that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b and protrudes from the front side of the main body plate portion 781a.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole in the center that extends in the front-rear direction, and the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into this circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the tip side, so that the up-down inversion member 781 is axially supported on the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with it, thereby rotating the up-down inversion member 781. In other words, the up-down inversion member 781 can be rotated by energizing the drive motor 782.

The cylindrical protrusion 781c supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end of the intermediate arm member 783 where the one-side support hole 783a is formed displaces in accordance with the cylindrical protrusion 781c, which displaces as the up-down inversion member 781 rotates.

The arc-shaped protrusion 781d is formed so that it can be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light-emitting performance means 778. In other words, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d can be placed in either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the position of the upside-down member 781 can be determined between two positions in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a position in between (a position in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is not positioned in either of the detection grooves of the pair of detection sensors 778d).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long rod shape (narrow plate shape) and includes a one-side support hole 783a drilled at one end and supported by a cylindrical protrusion 781c, a cylindrical other-side cylindrical portion 783b formed with its inner periphery penetrating at the other end opposite the one-side support hole 783a, and a bevel tooth portion 783c formed as an umbrella-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.

A female screw is formed on the inner circumference of the cylindrical protrusion 781c, and a fastening screw is inserted into the female screw and passed through the one-side support hole 783a from the rear side. This allows the intermediate arm member 783 to be pivotally supported by the upside-down member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and includes a cylindrical protrusion portion 784a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, an arc-shaped plate portion 784b that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, a pair of long hole portions 784c that are drilled in an elliptical shape extending parallel to the left-right direction on both the upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged in parallel in a pair above and below at a position between the long hole portions 784c and protrude on the back side, and a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged in parallel to each other in a pair above and below at a position between the long hole portions 784c and protrude on the back side, and a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged ... It is equipped with a pair of protruding portions 784e formed as protruding portions extending in the front-rear direction on the opposing sides, a pair of fastening portions 784f arranged in a cylindrical shape that opens on the rear side at the end of the support plate portion 784d and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference side, a placement hole 784g formed between the cylindrical protruding portion 784a and the support plate portion 784d, a ring holding half portion 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between the pivot member 786, and a magnet holding half portion 784i formed in a square box shape so as to be able to hold a magnet Mg between the pivot member 786.

The cylindrical protrusion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, has a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b, and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference. That is, a fastening screw inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b from the back side is screwed into the female thread of the cylindrical protrusion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 784a so that it cannot fall off.

The arc-shaped plate portion 784b is formed in an arc shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arc-shaped plate portion 784b is disposed close to the other-side cylindrical portion 783b so as to face each other radially in the assembled state, limiting the tilt displacement of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b relative to the rotation axis. This makes it possible to stabilize the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 around the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.

The long hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and a fastening screw is inserted from the back side into the insertion hole of the fall prevention plate portion 776b and screwed into the female thread formed in the cylindrical portion 776a, so that the linear plate member 784 is supported on the main body member 771 so that it cannot fall off.

In this supported state (assembled state), the linear plate member 784 is slidably displaceable along the direction in which the long hole portion 784c is formed. In other words, the linear plate member 784 is configured to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-shaped portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotation member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement, and the protrusion portion 784e functions as a protrusion for determining the left-right arrangement of the metal rod 785a, but details will be described later.

The placement hole 784g is an opening to avoid interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785, but details will be described later.

The shaft rotating member 785 is a member arranged in a pair on the left and right and supported by the linear plate member 784, and includes a metal rod 785a formed in an approximately cylindrical shape from a metal material, a recessed groove portion 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 785a, a bevel tooth member 785c arranged on the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, in which bevel teeth (bevel gears) that mesh with the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 are formed, an end plate member 785d arranged on the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, a ring-shaped metal member 785e arranged around the metal rod 785a of the end plate member 785d in a manner that it is raised from the end plate member 785d, and a rotational position stabilization portion 785f that is a portion protruding from the left and right inner parts of the end plate member 785d and in which a metal screw is screwed and fixed to a female screw portion formed inside.

The metal rod 785a is disposed between a pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear plate member 784, and the protrusion portion 784e is disposed to enter the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured with a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide with the protrusion portion 784e, and is configured with a dimensional relationship that restricts left-right displacement with respect to the protrusion portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be slightly longer than the left-right width of the protrusion portion 784e, the diameter of the deep part of the groove of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e, and the diameter of the part where the recessed groove portion 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e.

This allows the metal rod 785a to be supported on the back side of the linear plate member 784 in a manner that allows it to rotate about its axis and prevents it from displacing in the left-right direction.

The bevel tooth member 785c is positioned so that it enters the placement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. When the bevel tooth member 785c is partially inserted into the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 is assembled from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 so that the bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c.

In this assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the placement hole 784g, but since the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear plate member 784, it cannot fall off toward the front side, and its displacement toward the rear side is restricted by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner circumferential shape that corresponds to the non-circular shape (e.g., D-shaped cross section) of the tip of the metal rod 785a, and the inner circumferential shape and the tip of the metal rod 785a are formed with a dimensional relationship that allows for an interference fit, thereby being fixed in place.

The method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, it may be a method of fastening using an adhesive or the like, or a method of fastening the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a by forming a female thread at the tip of the metal rod 785a and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d into the female thread, or other methods may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half 784h of the linear plate member 784. By holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e and configuring the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d supporting the metal rod 785a to be in sliding contact with the inner periphery of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, it is possible to make the center of rotation of the end plate member 785d coincide with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel tooth member 785c, and to reduce the load generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a.

The rotational position stabilization portion 785f functions as a part that attracts the metal screw to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and includes an insertion hole 786a drilled to allow the fastening screw to be screwed into the fastened portion 784f to be inserted therethrough, a ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e between the ring holding half 784h of the linear plate member 784, and a magnet holding half 786c formed in a rectangular box shape capable of holding a magnet Mg between the magnet holding half 784i of the linear plate member 784.

When the fastening screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole 786a is screwed into the fastened portion 784f to assemble the linear plate member 784 and the pivot member 786, the metal rod 785a is prevented from falling off the plate portion of the pivot member 786 to the back side, the ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The covering members 787 are a pair of left and right components formed in a box shape with openings on the inside left and right sides, fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the axial rotation member 785, and decorations consisting of figures, patterns, letters, pictures, etc. that can be interpreted in different ways are formed on the opposite sides.

That is, the covering member 787 comprises a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface visible to the player in the protruding state (see FIG. 54), a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the reverse side thereof, a first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 formed on the side visible to the player when the first main decorative surface 787a1 is positioned on the front side and is in a performance standby state (see FIG. 52), and a second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 formed on the reverse side thereof. Note that the second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 is formed on the side visible to the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is positioned on the front side and is in a performance standby state (see FIG. 52).

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed from two front and rear members fastened to the end plate member 785d, and formed in an approximately box-like shape with the left and right inner sides open in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). It has multiple extension parts 787c extending toward each of the left and right members, and recessed parts 787d recessed between the extension parts 787c so as to retreat to the left and right outer sides.

The extensions 787c are formed so that their ends abut or are disposed close to each other when the covering members 787 are disposed close to each other (see FIG. 26). This allows the pair of left and right covering members 787 to be visually recognized as a single unit.

The recessed portion 787d is a portion for visibly opening up the circular portion located at the center of the light diffusion member 778b of the light-emitting performance means 778 and the arc plate portion at the upper center of the left and right of the upper long portion 775 when the covering member 787 is in a close arrangement state (see Figure 26), and is recessed in a shape that at least avoids interference with these portions.

The covering member 787 is formed so that its state can be switched between a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see Figures 29 and 52), and a state in which the second main decorative surface 787b1 faces the front and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see Figure 30) in response to the operation of the performance device 780. First, the mechanism that constitutes the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785. In FIG. 57(a), the upside-down member 781 is shown in a vertical arrangement state (also called an upright vertical arrangement state) in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and in FIG. 57(b), the upside-down member 781 is shown in a state in which it has rotated about 24 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front about the cylindrical protrusions 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). Note that in FIG. 57(a) and FIG. 57(b), the end plate member 785d of the left axial rotation member 785 and the right axial rotation member 785 are omitted from the illustration in order to make it easier to understand.

In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in a state where it enters the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). In the inverted vertical arrangement state where the upside-down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in a state where it enters the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d.

In other words, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to switch depending on whether the upside-down member 781 is in an upright vertical position or an inverted vertical position, and the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of the performance device 780 from the output of the detection sensor 778d.

As shown in Figures 57(a) and 57(b), when the upside-down member 781 is rotated, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this posture change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the axial rotation member 785, and the amount of left-right displacement of the other cylindrical portion 783b corresponds to the amount of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 and the axial rotation member 785.

Here, we will explain the order in which rotational displacement and left-right displacement (linear displacement) occur. These displacements do not occur simultaneously and to the same extent, and there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is greater.

First, to give an overview, the up-down inversion member 781, intermediate arm member 783, and linear plate member 784 are configured as a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the up-down inversion member 781 rotates around the cylindrical protrusion 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, which is journaled on the cylindrical protrusion 781c of the up-down inversion member 781, moves in parallel along the movement axis HL1 that passes through the center of the cylindrical protrusion 777c when viewed from the front, so that the displacement direction of the linear plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is restricted. The pair of left and right linear plate members 784 simultaneously move in opposite directions along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 until it rotates approximately 24 degrees from the vertical position shown in FIG. 57(a). Length L1 is illustrated as half the width of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 (the length between the left-right center and the left-right width ends).

In addition, due to the change in state from FIG. 57(a) to FIG. 57(b), the change in posture around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise when viewed from the front, which is less than half the 15 degrees that is the angle between adjacent teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Because the bevel tooth member 785c is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, the transmission of load (meshing transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c occurs at opposing positions in the front-to-rear direction, i.e., on the movement axis HL1 when viewed from the front.

Figure 58(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inverted member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in Figure 57(a), and Figure 58(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inverted member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in Figure 57(b).

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 (displaced upward in FIG. 58(b)). Note that in FIG. 58(b), for ease of understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are shown as overlapping, and this overlap width is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the driving force is transmitted, causing the axial rotation member 785 to rotate and displace. While the up-down inversion member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 57(a), the right axial rotation member 785 rotates in the backward rotation direction, and the left axial rotation member 785 rotates in the forward rotation direction.

When the upside-down member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other cylindrical portion 783b, and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 rotates 180 degrees accordingly. In other words, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is configured to be twice the rotation angle around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

The amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that may occur due to pressure caused by displacement from the state of FIG. 58(a) to the state of FIG. 58(b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear teeth, and is not enough to reliably rotate the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c. In other words, it is less than the amount of displacement until the abutting representative tooth rotates to the arrangement of the adjacent teeth (the amount of displacement required for a 30 degree rotation, since the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are arranged in 12 equal parts).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c, but in this embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are formed from a resin material, the displacement accompanied by the pressure is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, and the orientation of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 in the rotational direction is maintained from the state shown in FIG. 57(a) to the state shown in FIG. 57(b).

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and bevel tooth member 785c occurs when the driving force transmitted to the intermediate arm member 783 via the up-down inversion member 781 is opposed by the attractive force generated by the magnet Mg on the rotational position stabilization portion 785f (see FIG. 54) of the shaft rotation member 785.

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilization portion 785f so as to restrict the right-side shaft rotating member 785 from rotating backward, and the right-side shaft rotating member 785 receives a biasing force from the magnet Mg in the forward rotation direction. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the right-side shaft rotating member 785 to the rotational displacement.

For the left-side axial rotation member 785, the rotational position stabilization portion 785f is disposed in front of the end plate member 785d, as on the right side, while the magnet Mg is disposed on the upper side, the opposite of the right side (see FIG. 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilization portion 785f, and the left-side axial rotation member 785 receives a backward biasing force from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left-side axial rotation member 785.

In this embodiment, the attractive force of the magnet Mg is designed to generate a load that exceeds the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c until the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 from the state shown in FIG. 57(a).

As a result, elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c occurs so as to absorb the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58(b). If the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c will rotate beyond the attractive force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg will be separated from the metal screw of the rotational position stabilization portion 785f, causing an extreme decrease in magnetic force. The intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, released from the attractive force of the magnet Mg, will undergo rotational displacement while elastically recovering.

As a result, when rotation starts, the elastic recovery increases the momentum of the axial rotation member 785 in the rotational direction, and the rotation speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This increase in rotation speed occurs not only in the axial rotation member 785, but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the axial rotation member 785.

This allows the movement of the covering member 787 to be adjusted without changing the drive speed of the drive motor 782, improving the performance effect of the covering member 787 while reducing the burden on the control design of the drive motor 782.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the timing at which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 occurs due to the attractive force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts to rotate.

The rotational position stabilization parts 785f that receive the attractive force of the magnet Mg are configured as a pair, one above the other; when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front, one of the rotational position stabilization parts 785f is positioned close to the magnet Mg and receives the attractive force (see FIG. 52(b)), and when the orientation is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front, the other (see FIG. 52(b), the upper) rotational position stabilization part 785f is positioned close to the magnet Mg and receives the attractive force.

In other words, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see Figures 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg effectively acts to limit the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785. Therefore, when displacing from the close arrangement state, the magnetic force can cause the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 to be delayed regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

In other words, between the state shown in FIG. 58(a) and the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction is greater than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the up-down inversion member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in front view beyond FIG. 57(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction settles down, and rotational displacement occurs.

According to this embodiment, the slider crank mechanism is used as described above, and so the same action occurs. That is, near the vertical position, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction, so the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation is small. Therefore, the left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 is large and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the up-down inversion member 781 is tilted closer to the left-right direction, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and larger in the up-down direction, so the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 becomes smaller and the amount of rotation becomes larger. Therefore, the left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 becomes smaller and the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 becomes larger.

Therefore, in the rotational movement of the upside-down member 781, which starts from a vertically disposed state and ends in a vertically disposed state, first the degree of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases, then the degree of rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 increases, and again the degree of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases.

By generating linear displacement and rotational displacement in this order, it is possible to prevent the extension portion 787c of the covering member 787 from colliding with the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Next, the change in the appearance of the covering member 787 will be described.

Figures 59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the performance device 780. Figures 59(a) to 59(c) show the inversion operation of the lift-and-lower inversion performance device 770 in chronological order. Figure 59(a) shows the performance device 780 in an upright vertical position with the upside-down member 781 in an upright position, Figure 59(b) shows the performance device 780 when the upside-down member 781 has been rotated 90 degrees from the vertical position, and Figure 59(c) shows the performance device 780 in an inverted vertical position with the upside-down member 781 in an inverted position.

The upside-down member 781 changes its state from the upright vertical position (see FIG. 57(a)) to the inverted vertical position by rotating 180 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front. In the inverted vertical position, the orientation of the covering member 787 is inverted 180 degrees based on the upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)). This switches the decorative surface visible to the player (see FIG. 59(c)).

The upside-down vertical position is returned to the upright vertical position (see FIG. 57(a)) by rotating the upside-down inversion member 781 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Therefore, the inversion operation can repeatedly switch between the state shown in FIG. 59(a) and the state shown in FIG. 59(c) each time the drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) is driven while reversing the direction so as to rotate the upside-down inversion member 781 180 degrees.

As described above, while the upside-down member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 57(a), the axial rotation member 785 rotates 180 degrees by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 783c. Here, based on the rotation direction of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right axial rotation member 785 rotates in the backward direction, and the left axial rotation member 785 rotates in the forward direction. In other words, the pair of axial rotation members 785 arranged on the left and right and the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d rotate in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the intermediate position, the right covering member 787 faces the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 toward the front, and the left covering member 787 faces the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 toward the front (see FIG. 59(b)).

This makes it possible to prevent the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the right covering member 787 from being viewed in unison during rotational displacement of the covering member 787.

Therefore, the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be intentionally made to have misaligned content on the left and right, and the content of the decorative surface can be configured to be difficult for the player to recognize, so the amount of information provided to the player by the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be reduced.

This reduces the player's focus on the covering member 787 during rotational displacement. In addition, when the rotational displacement stops, the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1), which has the effect of making it easier for the player to maintain their gaze on the covering member 787 until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops.

The rotational displacement is performed with the second operating unit 700 in the extended state (see Figure 54), but when this rotational displacement stops and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1), the performance device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 30), and in this state it is unlikely that attention will be drawn to the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2).

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operating unit 700, the view of the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) will be blocked by the third operating unit 800.

On the other hand, when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state for presentation (see FIG. 52) and the presentation device 780 is positioned below the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) becomes more easily visible to the player.

In this way, in the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is prevented from being seen together during rotational displacement in the extended state, and prevented from facing the player, so that it does not draw attention to itself, but is formed as a side that can be noticed by the player in the performance standby state.

This allows the appearance of the second operation unit 700 to change depending on the placement, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the performance is excessively poor compared to the cost of placing the second operation unit 700 (occupying space, the burden of hiding it well).

After the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 are rotated and displaced, the rotational position stabilization portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)), thereby stabilizing the position of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

In this embodiment, the metal member that is attracted to the magnet Mg is composed of a metal screw, which reduces material costs and improves maintainability compared to designing a dedicated metal member.

As described above, the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by linear displacement in the left-right direction, so the arrangement of the performance device 780 capable of performing the rotational displacement is limited. That is, when the second operating unit 700 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) or the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), performing the rotational displacement causes the decorative members such as the right front plate member 710, the left rear plate member 750, and the front support member 760 arranged on the left and right, and the three-dimensional decorative part 768a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof, to collide with the covering member 787.

On the other hand, when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state (see FIG. 30), space is secured in the left-right direction, making it possible to perform rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is controlled so as to be executable on the premise that it is determined from the output of the detection sensor 713 that the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state. This allows the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 to occur normally.

The extensions 787c are arranged close to each other when the upside-down member 781 is in the vertical position, and in this position, are arranged facing the front and rear of the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotated from this position about a rotation axis extending in the left-right direction, the extensions 787c collide with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, causing a malfunction.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extensions 787c are arranged close to each other creates the effect of allowing the pair of left and right covering members 787 to be viewed as one, and as this is a configuration necessary for the presentation, it is preferable that it can be maintained.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 in advance before rotational displacement (see FIG. 57). The linear displacement of length L1 allows the extension 787c to be retracted from the front-rear position of the connection portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, and the problem of collision between the extension 787c and the connection portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772 can be avoided.

In addition, by configuring the rotational displacement in this manner, no rotational displacement occurs (or is limited) in the length L1 while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and rotational displacement occurs in the remaining length L2, so that the amount of left-right displacement of the covering member 787 during rotation can be kept small.

This makes it possible to keep the attention of the covering member 787 low and to make the rotational displacement less noticeable compared to when the position of the covering member 787 changes significantly during rotation, and therefore allows the decorative surfaces 787a1-787b2 to be designed without regard for appearance during rotational displacement, thereby improving design freedom.

The timing at which the covering member 787 starts to rotate can be set arbitrarily by designing the attractive force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, even if a design change occurs to increase the left-right width of the connecting portion between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771, the configuration of the performance device 780 can be kept the same, but by changing the magnet Mg to a magnet with a stronger attractive force, it is possible to avoid collision between the connecting portion and the extension portion 787c, as in this embodiment.

As shown by the imaginary lines in Figure 59, the insertion hole 778c is positioned so that it is always hidden by the covering member 787. This prevents the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c from being visible to the player, and prevents the fastening screw from reducing the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the decorations (figures, patterns, designs, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same on the left and right covering members 787, so the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical to match the left and right decorations.

In other words, since the fastening screw is inserted through the insertion hole 778c, it becomes impossible to place an LED on the illumination board 787a at that position (see Figure 55). Also, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, it is easy to see it as being dark during the lighting effect.

Therefore, it is desirable to position the insertion holes 778c in the decorations on the left and right, avoiding areas that need to be brightly lit and conspicuous, and as a result, the placement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical.

It is of course permissible to arrange the insertion holes 778c symmetrically. In particular, if the decorations of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are identical, there is no disadvantage to arranging the insertion holes 778c symmetrically, and the design of the illumination board 778a can be made easier.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is displaced linearly left and right during the inversion operation of the lift-down inversion performance device 770, and even when the vicinity of the center of the light diffusion member 778b is not surrounded by the extension portion 787c, the mechanical parts such as the up-down inversion member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear plate member 784 are hidden so as not to be visible.

In other words, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b located at the front, and the vertical width of the linear plate member 784 is designed to fit within the vertical width of the left and right long portions of the upper long portion 775 located at the front. In addition, the up-down inversion member 781 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper long portion 775 located at the front, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that its displacement trajectory fits within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b.

This allows the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the performance device 780 to be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and made invisible, thereby preventing a reduction in the performance effect due to the appearance of the performance device 780 during the reversal operation.

Returning to FIG. 26 for further explanation, the third operating unit 800 is a unit that is positioned above the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the performance standby state, is supported at the tip of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the rear case 510, and is configured to be capable of being lifted and lowered as the lifting arm members 801 are driven in the vertical direction.

Figure 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and Figure 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that Figures 60 and 61 show the portion that constitutes the displacement of the third operating unit 800, and omit the illustration of the decorative members 870, 880 that serve as decorative parts arranged on the outside.

60 and 61, the third operating unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by a lifting arm member 801, a fixed cylindrical member 820 having a cylindrical portion 821 fastened to the center of the held member 810, an inner rotating member 830 journaled on the cylindrical portion 821 with the cylindrical portion 821 inserted into the inner periphery, an outer rotating member 840 journaled on the main body portion 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted into the inner periphery, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and a drive transmission device 860 having a plurality of gear members housed in the held member 810 and for transmitting a drive force for displacing the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

The held member 810 comprises a disk-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated cover member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 includes a tube fixing portion 812 recessed in the center to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, with insertion holes for inserting fastening screws for fixing and through holes for inserting electrical wiring, a detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with its detection groove facing the side capable of receiving the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840, a motor holding portion 814 which holds the drive motor 861, a number of cylindrical protrusions 815 protruding from the front side as a cylindrical portion which axially supports the transmission gear 863 so that it cannot fall off, and a number of double cylindrical protrusions 816 protruding from the front side as a double cylindrical portion which axially supports the load response gear 865 so that it cannot fall off.

The perforated cover member 817 has a circular hole 818 drilled in the front-rear direction in the center. The circular hole 818 is designed with dimensions such that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 protrude inward from its inner peripheral edge when viewed from the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 comprises the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed on the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate-shaped illumination board 823 fastened to the circular plate portion 822 and having light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side, a light-transmitting decorative member 824 made of a light-transmitting resin material and shaped like an umbrella (or bowl) so as to be able to cover the illumination board 823 from the front side, and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 821 on the circular plate portion 822 side and configured to be able to slide with the cylindrical portion 821.

The cylindrical portion 821 has a female thread formed at the tip on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the tube fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female thread, thereby fastening and fixing the fixed cylindrical member 820 to the held member 810 so that it cannot rotate.

The cylindrical portion 821 is formed with an axial through hole on the inner circumference side, and the electrical wiring inserted into the through hole of the tube fixing portion 812 is routed through this through hole to the front side and connected to a connector arranged behind the illumination board 823.

The illumination board 823 is equipped with LEDs consisting of inner light-emitting parts 823a that are placed at the vertices of a pentagon and at a central position equidistant from those vertices, and outer light-emitting parts 823b that are placed at 15 equally spaced locations on the circumference. The inner light-emitting parts 823a are composed of LEDs whose optical axis faces the front (forward), and the outer light-emitting parts 823b are composed of LEDs whose optical axis faces radially outward (diameter direction).

The outer light-emitting unit 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As described below, the light emitted from the outer light-emitting unit 823b is irradiated onto the plated parts 871a of the first decorative members 870, which are arranged in close proximity to each other at equal intervals on the circumference, so that each first decorative member 870 is irradiated with light from three LEDs.

The outer light-emitting unit 823b is fixedly arranged on the illumination board 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate around the center of the circle as an axis, but since the outer light-emitting unit 823b and the first decorative member 870 are arranged at equal intervals on the same axis of the circle, light from the same number of LEDs (three in this embodiment) can always be irradiated onto each first decorative member 870, regardless of the orientation of the first decorative member 870 in the rotational direction.

This makes it possible to suppress changes in the amount of light LD1 irradiated to the first decorative member 870 during the rotation operation.

The sliding member 825 is configured so that its inner diameter side can slide on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, while its outer diameter side can slide on the circular flange-shaped portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830.

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side and a cylindrical portion that protrudes rearward from the inner diameter end of the flange-shaped portion, but the outer diameter of this cylindrical portion is formed slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, so that it is slidably fitted inside the inner rotating member 830.

By interposing the sliding member 825 between them, direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 that is configured to be rotatable around it is prevented. In addition, by disposing the sliding member 825 on the side that has the advantage in terms of strength, that is, the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and the circular flange portion 831a side of the main body portion 831, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 or the inner rotating member 830 will be damaged or deformed due to the load generated during sliding or when sliding is poor (when the displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive).

The inner rotating member 830 comprises a cylindrical main body 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end, a plurality of metal rods 832 fastened to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a at five equal circumferential positions around the main body 831 with their long lengths aligned radially, a plurality of linear motion members 833 formed so that the metal rods 832 can be inserted therethrough and configured to be linearly displaceable while being guided by the metal rods 832, and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported at the radially outer portions of the linear motion members 833.

The main body 831 comprises the circular flange portion 831a described above, a number of sliding ridges 831b extending rearward in a ridge-like manner from the circular flange portion 831a as a base end at intermediate angular positions (five locations) between adjacent metal bars 832, and a number of recesses 831c formed at intervals in the circumferential direction at the end opposite the circular flange portion 831a.

The sliding protrusion 831b is configured to be slidable along the inner curved surface of the main body 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and the protruding tip is formed in a semicircular cross section to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and thus reduce contact friction.

As described above, the sliding ridge 831b is positioned at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent metal bars 832, or in other words, on the opposite side of the metal bar 832 (a position shifted by 180 degrees) with respect to the central axis of the outer rotating member 840.

As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 during the switching rotation operation described below and the outer rotating member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is journaled is subjected to a load that displaces it radially outward, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be received by the sliding protrusion portion 831b, so the contact area between the inner circumferential surface of the outer rotating member 840 and the outer circumferential surface of the inner rotating member 830 can be maintained low.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central ring gear 864 is inserted. By arranging the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, the relative rotation between them is disabled, and the rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be made to match.

The linear motion member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 833a, 833b that are spaced apart from each other in the linear motion direction and that protrude cylindrically toward the rear, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c that is formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 based on the cylindrical protrusions 833a, 833b and is inserted into the rotating member 834, and a recessed groove 833d that is recessed in the circumferential direction at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c.

The recessed groove 833d is located on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and functions as a displacement regulating groove that prevents the rotating member 834 from falling off in the radially outward direction by slidingly fitting the protruding portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 that are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 onto the outside, as will be described in detail later.

The rotating member 834 has a bevel gear-shaped bevel tooth portion 834a and a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 834b that protrude cylindrically parallel to the linear motion direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed around the entire circumference, but is formed over the 3/4 circumference (approximately 270 degrees) required for operation.

The cylindrical protrusion 834b has a female thread formed on the inner circumference, and functions to fasten the decorative members 870, 880 to the rotating member 834 by screwing in the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880, as will be described in detail below.

The outer rotating member 840 comprises a cylindrical main body 841, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) extension arms 842 extending radially outward at five equal circumferential positions around the main body 841, gear teeth 843 formed on the outer periphery along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841, and a detection target 844 extending radially outward from the main body 841 in a position that allows it to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

The extension arm 842 has a cylindrical portion 842a that extends parallel to the central axis of the main body 841, and a female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 842a. When a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread while the cylindrical portion 842a is inserted into the base end rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported on the extension arm 842 so that it cannot fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are arranged to be able to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, and function as a part that switches between the presence and absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, as will be described in detail later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a long member and includes a base end rod portion 851 whose one end is supported by the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, a thickened portion 852 which is thickened toward the front side at the other end of the base end rod portion 851, a tip end rod portion 853 which extends parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base end rod portion 851 from the front end of the thickened portion 852, and a rotation transmission portion 854 which is formed with gear teeth at the end of the tip end rod portion 853.

The rotation transmission part 854 is a part that links with the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834, and includes a supported hole 854a that is formed with a dimensional relationship that allows the cylindrical protrusion 833a to rotate with respect to each other when inserted therethrough, a guide hole 854b that is an elongated hole drilled in an arc shape centered on the supported hole 854a and that guides the cylindrical protrusion 833b when inserted therethrough, and a bevel gear part 854c that is formed in a bevel gear shape with the supported hole 854a as the central axis and that forms a bevel gear by meshing with the bevel gear part 834a of the rotating member 834.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 fastened to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, a plurality of transmission gears 863 supported on the cylindrical protrusion portion 815 so as not to fall off and meshed to be able to transmit a driving force via the drive gear 862, a central ring gear 864 meshed with the transmission gear 863, a pair of load response gears 865 positioned forward of the central ring gear 864 and supported on the double cylindrical protrusion portion 816 so as not to fall off, and a torque limiter 866 supported on the double cylinder of the double cylindrical protrusion portion 816 on the back side of the load response gear 865 and whose resistance is variable according to the load in the rotational direction applied to the load response gear 865.

The central ring gear 864 is formed in an annular shape, and is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted into its inner periphery. The central ring gear 864 is provided with a transmission protrusion 864a that protrudes from the bottom plate portion to the front side in a position and shape that corresponds to the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830 so that the central ring gear 864 can be inserted into the recessed portion 831c, and a support ring portion 864b that protrudes from the bottom plate portion to the front side in a coaxial double ring shape that is disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission protrusion 864a.

In the assembled state, with the transmission projection 864a inserted into the recess 831c, the rear end of the body 831 of the inner rotating member 830 is fitted into the gap between the support annular portions 864b with a dimensional relationship of intermediate fit or a dimensional relationship of interference fit. This allows the central annular gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 to rotate integrally.

The arrangement of the recessed portions 831c and the transmission protrusions 864a is not limited in any way. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or they may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If they are spaced equally, they can be assembled by matching the arrangement of the transmission projections 864a and the recesses 831c without having to consider the posture of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, which allows for quick assembly. In the present embodiment, where the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (the same at 72 degree intervals), it is considered that there is little impact from the posture of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 shifting during assembly, so it is effective to have them spaced equally.

If the intervals are unequal, the assembly process requires an additional step of aligning the central annular gear 864 with the inner rotating member 830 before assembly; however, the positioning of the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c can be used to align the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864.

The load response gear 865 is arranged so that it can mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840. A torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, so that the load response gear 865 can be switched between a state in which rotation is permitted and a state in which rotation is restricted (limited) depending on the magnitude of the rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, and the outer rotating member 840.

In other words, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and release the transmission of the driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In this embodiment, a device that transmits driving force in one direction (one-way torque limiter) is configured as a pair with the transmission direction reversed, and the torque limiter 866 is configured to switch the driving force transmission in both directions with good responsiveness.

Figure 62 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third action unit 800, and Figure 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third action unit 800. Note that Figures 62 and 63 show decorative parts of the third action unit 800, and omit the illustration of parts that configure the displacement.

As shown in Figures 62 and 63, the third operating unit 800 comprises the inner rotating member 830 described above, a first decorative member 870 that is fastened to the cylindrical protrusion 834b of the inner rotating member 830 and covers one side of the cylindrical protrusion 834b, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened to the cylindrical protrusion 834b and covers the cylindrical protrusion 834b from the opposite side of the first decorative member 870.

The first decorative member 870 comprises a first skeletal portion 871 that is formed so as to be fastened to the cylindrical protrusion portion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 that is formed so as to cover one side of the first skeletal portion 871.

The first skeletal portion 871 is entirely plated and is configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covered portion 875 is made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and its surface is decorated with figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc."), and when the surface is facing forward, the designs, etc. are visible to the player.

In this embodiment, each of the multiple (five) first covered portions 875 has an independent pattern or the like drawn on it. Therefore, by changing the first covered portion 875 that emits strong light through the light emission control of the illumination board 823, or by changing the arrangement of the first covered portions 875, it is possible to vary the pattern or the like that attracts the player's attention.

For example, if the third pattern display device 81 is controlled to perform a display presentation that draws the player's attention to which first covered portion 875 will stop on the third pattern display device 81 side, and at the same time the inner rotating member 830 is controlled to rotate, the first covered portion 875 on the third pattern display device 81 side can be continuously changed in accordance with the rotation, so that the player's gaze can be focused on the first covered portion 875 for the period until the rotation stops.

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeletal portion 881 that is formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protrusion portion 834b, and a second covering portion 885 that is formed to cover the other side of the second skeletal portion 881.

The second skeleton portion 881 has a retaining piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering portion 885 so that it cannot fall off.

A metal screw is screwed into the second covering part 885 at a position (close position) where the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second covering part 885 acts, and the magnet Mg2 is attracted to this metal screw, thereby ensuring the integrity of the second covering part 885 in the combined state (particularly the combined state, see Figure 32).

The second covered portion 885 has a figure, pattern, or character design (hereinafter also referred to as "design, etc.") drawn on its surface, and when the surface is facing forward, the design, etc. is visible to the player.

In this embodiment, the patterns etc. drawn on the multiple (in this embodiment, five) second covering portions 885 are configured so that the multiple (at least two and up to five) second covering portions 885 are grouped together, and each second covering portion 885 is decorated to form part of a circular body so that when the five second covering portions 885 are combined, they are visually recognized as a "circular body" when viewed from the front.

The pattern drawn on the second covering portion 885 is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, the pattern is designed so that the content that can be grasped from the second covering portion 885 in a united state does not change significantly even if the arrangement of the second decorative member 880 in the rotation direction is different. In other words, the pattern does not have clear top, bottom, left, or right, and is designed to have an inconspicuous change in external shape even when rotated (in this embodiment, a circular shape).

Therefore, if the second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other, the presentation performance can be improved when the second covering portions 885 are visually recognized by the player. In this respect, in this embodiment, the second covering portions 885 are firmly integrated by the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, so that the presentation performance in the combined state when the second covering portions 885 are positioned on the front side can be improved.

In addition, in each second covering portion 885, a magnet Mg2 is disposed on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the opposite side. When the orientation of the second covering portion 885 is reversed front to back by the switching rotation operation described below, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in the front view is also reversed accordingly.

Even in this case, the metal screw that each magnet Mg2 attracts is simply replaced with a metal screw that is screwed into the adjacent second covering portion 885 on the opposite side, and since the five second covering portions 885 are arranged in a circular ring shape, there is no change in the degree of attraction when integrated.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not contain a magnet. This makes the strength of the integration on the first covering portion 875 side slightly weaker, but this is done to avoid any deterioration in the presentation performance.

In other words, because the first covering portions 875 are each painted with an independent pattern, the degree of integration in the combined state is weak, and even if the positioning of the first decorative member 870 shifts slightly, there is no possibility that the player will not be able to recognize the pattern. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the performance of the effects that utilize the patterns painted on the first covering portions 875.

Furthermore, because the strength of the integration on the first covering part 875 side is weakened, the arrangement of the combined first covering parts 875 can be shifted due to vibrations that occur with the lifting and lowering displacement (and then stopping) and vibrations that occur with the rotational displacement (and then stopping) as an integral rotation operation or a switching rotation operation. This makes it possible to displace the first covering part 875 in a displacement manner that was not possible with conventional machines in which the first covering part 875 is not a divided body but is composed of a single circular member, thereby improving the presentation effect of the presentation provided by the first covering part 875.

In view of the above, in the combined state in which multiple decorative members 870, 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces forward is also referred to as the individual combined state (see FIG. 31), and the state in which the second decorative member 880 faces forward is also referred to as the united state (see FIG. 32). Next, the operation for switching between the individual combined state and the united state will be described.

Figures 64(a), 64(b), 65(a) and 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figures 66(a), 66(b), 67(a) and 67(b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

Figures 64 to 67 show in chronological order the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 caused by the driving force of the drive motor 861 (see Figure 60) being transmitted and the inner rotating member 830 rotating relative to the outer rotating member 840.

That is, the diagrams are illustrated in chronological order from rear and front views, showing how the inner rotating member 830 rotates 45 degrees at a time from the individual combined state (Figures 64(a) and 66(a)).

In addition, in Figures 64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is depicted as a virtual position line 832F, and the change in the angle of the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. In addition, the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individual combined state (Figures 64 (a) and 66 (a)) is illustrated as angle θ31.

As shown in Figures 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise from the individual combined state when viewed from the front (see Figure 66) (this rotational movement is also referred to below as the "switching rotational movement"), the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is permitted, and therefore the inner rotating member 830 is permitted to rotate relative to the outer rotating member 840. In this embodiment, the position of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see Figure 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

Therefore, in Figures 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 rotates and displaces around the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

From the configuration between the above-mentioned components, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and since the cylindrical protrusion 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a, a change in the position of the supported hole 854a corresponds to a change in the position of the linear motion member 833.

As shown in Figures 64 and 65, the rotation transmission part 854 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and is displaced in the circumferential direction at the same time, so the rotating member 834 supported by the rotation transmission part 854 is also displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and is displaced in the circumferential direction at the same time. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear moving member 833 is displaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes circumferential displacement, the arrangement of the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the decorative members 870, 880 fastened thereto are not fixed even at the radial end position, and the circumferential displacement can be maintained. Therefore, compared to a case where the displacement is completed only by radial linear displacement (for example, the reversal operation described above with the second operating unit 700), the presentation effect during the switching rotation operation can be maintained at a high level.

In contrast, in the above-mentioned reversal operation of the second operating unit 700, a rotational operation with high acceleration is generated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58), thereby weakening the impression that the position of the covering member 787 at the outer displacement end in the linear direction (see FIG. 59(b)) is fixed.

In other words, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased, and even in a situation where a period in which the change in left-right position is small continues at the end of the left-right outward displacement (a period near the dead point of the slider crank), the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased to maintain a high dramatic effect due to the operation of the covering member 787.

Since the switching rotation operation includes radial displacement, it is possible that radial loads will be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, causing the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 to shift. However, in this embodiment, the radial loads on the intermediate arm member 850 are generated equally at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) around the rotation axis, so that the loads cancel each other out. This makes it possible to suppress deviations in the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, making it easier to perform the switching rotation operation normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (expansion/contraction displacement) in the rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 occurs while being accompanied by a circumferential rotation. Therefore, in order to avoid collisions with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 is controlled so that it can be executed when the output of the detection sensor that determines the posture of the lifting arm member 801 indicates that the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

In addition, with the above-mentioned displacement of the rotation transmission part 854, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 fastened to the rotating member 834 are also displaced radially around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and, at the same time, displaced circumferentially.

When the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the bevel teeth portion 854c (see Figures 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel teeth portion 834a (see Figure 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 rotate around the metal rod 832 as an axis.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32, which is the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 based on the imaginary position line 832F. In addition, the direction of rotation is set to the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the radially outer side of the imaginary position line 832F, since the angle θ32 increases as it moves away from the imaginary position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the rotating member 834 is positioned on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60).

When rotating together, the rotating member 834 is in a position where either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, so that when the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 becomes the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in this embodiment) as the maximum value of the angle θ31 due to the rotation of the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment), the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 rotates half a circle (180 degrees).

In other words, the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates around the metal rod 832 is configured to be twice the angle of rotation around the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the action of the magnet Mg of the second operating unit 700 described above, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) does not produce an action that retards the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832.

In other words, the magnet Mg2 generates an adhesive force between itself and the adjacent second decorative member 880, and as the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 with the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, a gap is generated between the adjacent second decorative members 880, and the adhesive force can be lost.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement around the metal rod 832 begins, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and there is no effect of slowing down the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832.

This makes it possible to reduce the driving force required to rotate and displace the decorative members 870 and 880. In other words, the driving force required of the drive motor 861 can be reduced, making it possible to miniaturize the drive motor 861.

Furthermore, the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 can be started quickly and ended early, so that the player's attention to the rotational displacement around the metal rod 832 can be reduced.

The rapidity at the start of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870, 880 relative to the rotational angle of the inner rotating member 830 so that it is not constant.

For example, in the process of rotating the intermediate arm member 850, if the rotation angle of the imaginary position line 832F (the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830) from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is in a contracted position and can rotate together is 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), and if the imaginary position line 832F rotates a further 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 27 degrees (see FIG. 67(a)).

In other words, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate from a state in which the two can rotate together than during the rotation. This makes it possible to suppress the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 is used to rotate the inner rotating member 830, turn the intermediate arm member 850, and rotate the decorative members 870, 880. However, due to the above-described configuration, the driving force required to rotate the decorative members 870, 880 can be reduced when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate from a state in which they can rotate together, so that it is possible to avoid placing an excessively large burden on the drive motor 861 when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate.

In addition, the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832 occurs while shifting in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, so the visibility of the decorative members 870, 880 during the rotational displacement can be kept low. This reduces the possibility that the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880 (for example, the connecting surface between the first covering portion 875 and the second covering portion 885) are visible, and improves the design freedom of the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880.

When performing the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps with the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 when viewed from the front. It also overlaps with the extension arm portion 842 adjacent to the extension arm portion 842 on which the cylindrical portion 842a on which it is supported is disposed. Therefore, without measures, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 will collide with the surrounding parts.

In contrast, in this embodiment, collisions are avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. That is, by positioning the tip side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 rearward of the base side rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the base side rod portion 851 and the tip side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be made to overlap front to back, thereby avoiding collisions during the switching rotation operation.

In addition, by arranging the base end rod portion 851 in front of the extended arm portion 842 and the tip end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 in rear of the extended arm portion 842, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged in front of and behind the extended arm portion 842 during the switching rotation operation, and collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

64 to 67 show a case where the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 relative to the outer rotating member 840 is a direction that allows the intermediate arm member 850 to rotate (counterclockwise as viewed from the front in the individual combined state, see FIG. 66). In this case, the gear teeth 843 engage with the load response gear 865, which generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, and resistance is received, limiting the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840.

On the other hand, if the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the reverse direction described above (clockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individual combined state), or if the rotation in the direction that allows the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individual combined state) continues even after the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which its rotation is restricted (for example, it reaches a combined state from an individual combined state), a load that exceeds the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that restricts the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, the position maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously.

In other words, regardless of the direction of rotation, when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, if the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in a direction that continues to restrict the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870, and the second decorative member 880 rotate together while maintaining their combined state (this rotational movement is also referred to below as the "integral rotational movement").

The integral rotation occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, and in this embodiment, occurs when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are combined and positioned close to each other.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation action in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the radial expansion direction, there is no need to consider collisions with surrounding decorative members, so the integral rotation action can be performed in the performance standby state of the third operation unit 800. Therefore, in this embodiment, the integral rotation action is controlled so that it can be performed regardless of the position of the third operation unit 800.

In this embodiment, as described above, the driving force of a single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) can perform a switching rotation operation accompanied by radially expanding displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880, and a unitary rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 without radially expanding displacement. Either operation can be performed in either drive direction, but the operations have priority, and any operation cannot be instantly performed in any rotation direction.

For example, from the state shown in FIG. 64(a) and FIG. 66(a), a switching rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and an integral rotation operation can be performed by continuing the rotation in this state. Also, an integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front, but an integral rotation operation cannot be performed immediately by rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

In addition, for example, if the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front from the state shown in Figures 64(a) and 66(a) and the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which its rotation is restricted, and then the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (reverse) as viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation is performed again, and it is not possible to immediately perform the integral rotation operation in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front.

In this manner, the operating mode of the third operating unit 800 in this embodiment changes the relative displacement of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 depending on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted in the rotation direction of the drive motor 861.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled so as to be able to determine whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861, and based on the determination result, it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 is described below.

Figure 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the driving state of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in a chronological order. As shown in Figure 68, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) controls the third operation unit 800 to alternate between normal and reversed performances.

When performing a flip performance, an action that includes a switching rotation action is performed, and when performing a normal performance, an action that does not include a switching rotation action is performed. This is to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from colliding with the surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation action.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power outage or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the third operating unit 800 is extended and then the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed, and after the state of the moving parts is determined from the output of the detection sensor 813, the control for normal performance is executed. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870, 880 collide with surrounding decorative members, even if the state of the moving parts cannot be determined from the output of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on.

The drive directions of the drive motor 861 are shown as forward rotation and reverse rotation. Forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which a united rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a))), and reverse rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which a switching rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state).

First, we will explain the drive control during normal performance before the reversal performance. During this normal performance, the third operating unit 800 is in an individual combined state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotational motion of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is always a united rotational motion.

Since no switching rotational movement occurs, no collisions with surrounding decorative members occur, and the position of the third operating unit 800 can be switched to a performance standby state or an extended state at any time. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is being raised and lowered by the up and down movement of the lifting arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be controlled to rotate together at the same time as the lifting and lowering movement.

Naturally, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together when the position of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the lifting arm member 801 may be raised and lowered when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 stop rotating together.

Since the drive motor 861 has a forward rotation direction only, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detectable portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. By determining this output switch, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the position of the outer rotating member 840 as the initial position, and by setting multiple types of drive time from this initial position, the outer rotating member 840 can be controlled to stop in any position.

Next, the drive control during the reversal performance will be described. First, during the reversal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating forward until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched to determine that the detected part 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. By driving in reverse rotation, the third operating unit 800 executes a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained.

If the drive motor 861 continues to be driven in the same rotation direction, a united state is reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 begin to rotate together. After the start of the united rotation, the outer rotating member 840 also begins to rotate in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so that the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 have begun to rotate together due to the switch in the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation has begun, the drive motor 861 stops or only reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is always an integral rotation operation. Since no switching rotation operation occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members can occur, and the position of the third operating unit 800 can be switched to a performance standby state or an extended state at any time.

Since the drive motor 861 can only drive in reverse, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the position of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from a reverse performance to a normal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward in advance, and the third operating unit 800 is put into an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating in the reverse direction until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched to determine that the detected part 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in the forward direction. When the drive is in the forward direction, the third operating unit 800 executes a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained.

Next, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate together. After the start of the rotational movement, the outer rotating member 840 starts to rotate, causing the detected portion 844 to move away from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 to be switched. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 have started to rotate together due to the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation starts, the performance transitions back to normal. The restrictions on drive control during this normal performance are the same as those described for the normal performance that preceded the above-mentioned reverse performance.

In this way, according to this embodiment, a single detection sensor 813 can be used to determine the switching of the rotation mode of the third operating unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and to determine the reference rotation angle of the outer rotating member 840. Therefore, the number of detection sensors 813 required can be reduced compared to when individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be performed by switching the drive direction of the drive motor 861 to the opposite direction from a state in which the integral rotation operation continues or a state in which the rotation is stopped. In other words, regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the united combined state.

Therefore, when controlling the action presentation to switch to a united state at the timing of a jackpot announcement, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot has been announced based on the position of the first decorative member 870.

Furthermore, as described above, the decoration in the united state is designed so that what is perceived by the player does not vary significantly depending on the arrangement of the rotational direction of the second decorative member 880. In other words, even if the arrangement of the rotational direction of the decorative members 870, 880 is different at the start of the switching rotation operation, the content that is perceived by the player as the united state at the end of the switching rotation operation can be the same.

Therefore, unlike when the patterns in the united state differ depending on the arrangement in the rotation direction, the integral rotation action for adjusting the position after reaching the united state can be omitted, so the drive control until the jackpot announcement can be the same regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state.

In this way, in this embodiment, both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation can be realized in both the forward and reverse rotation directions of the drive motor 861. Therefore, compared to a case where the operation mode is fixed between forward and reverse rotation, a wide variety of performance modes can be realized with a single drive motor 861.

Figure 69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in Figure 28. As shown in Figure 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end, where the tube fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is located, to the front end, where the illumination board 823 is located, and electrical wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, with terminals connected to a connector disposed on the illumination board 823. Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, allowing the LEDs disposed on the illumination board 823 to be controlled to emit light.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light-emitting portion 823a of the illumination board 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824a that bulges toward the front side at the center side of the translucent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a part that is visible to the player at the center of the circle on which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged when the decorative members 870, 880 are combined.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b of the illumination board 823 is irradiated to the inside of the decorative members 870, 880 (first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged in the front, and acts to illuminate the decorative members 870, 880 from the inside.

In this embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual combined state (see FIG. 69) in which the decorative member 870 is positioned at the front, and a combined state (see FIG. 32) in which the decorative member 880 is positioned at the front, so that the light LD1 can be switched between illuminating the decorative member 870 and illuminating the decorative member 880.

In the individual combined state (see FIG. 69), the light LD1 is reflected toward the front side by the plated portion 871a of the first skeleton portion 871, and the direction of the light LD1 is switched to the front side. This allows most of the light LD1 to be emitted toward the first covering portion 875, and the brightness of the first covering portion 875 when the light LD1 is emitted can be improved.

In this embodiment, the illumination board 823 is fixedly positioned, and the decorative members 870, 880 are configured to rotate around it, so the relationship between the irradiation direction of the light LD1 and the arrangement of the decorative members 870, 880 can change with the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880. For example, if the light LD1 is irradiated to the center of the plated portion 871a during rotation, the light LD1 irradiated from the same LED may be irradiated to a position shifted from the center of the plated portion 871a. Therefore, without measures, the degree of brightness of the first covering portion 875 by the light LD1 is likely to change with the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880, and it may be difficult to perform a performance in which the decorative members 870, 880 rotate together while emitting light at a constant brightness.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the shape of the plated portion 871a, which is configured to be able to reflect the light LD1, is concave, the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illumination substrate 823, and the center of the concave shape is designed to be located near the center of the first covering portion 875 when viewed from the front.

The light LD1 is positioned so that its optical axis faces the outer diameter direction of the circle on which the outer light-emitting portion 823b is positioned. As a result, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plated portion 871a and travels toward the center of the radius of curvature, illuminating the vicinity of the center of each of the first covering portions 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the plating portion 871a based on the outer light emitting portion 823b, the multiple lights LD1 can be reflected to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering portion 875. This allows light to be irradiated stably near the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875, so that the first covering portion 875 can be viewed with uniform brightness even during integral rotation.

Furthermore, the first framework portion 871 is a portion that is plated in the same manner as the plating process on the plating portion 871a, and has an outer plating portion 871b that is disposed outside the first covering portion 875 in a front view. The light LD1 is also reflected by the outer plating portion 871b in the same manner as the plating portion 871a, but since the outer plating portion 871b is disposed further back than the plating portion 871a, the degree of light intensity of the outer plating portion 871b can be weakened.

This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the light perceived outside the first covering portion 875 is too strong, causing the player to feel dazzled and reducing visibility inside the frame of the first covering portion 875.

The illuminated board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but the joints are not completely blocked, so not all of the light from the outer light-emitting part 823b is irradiated to the inside.

First, a gap VA1 is formed between the member edge 875a of the first covering portion 875 and the member edge 885a of the second covering portion 885, which is disposed opposite the member edge 875a, such that the internal structure can be seen in FIG. 69. The outer plating portion 871b protrudes through this gap VA1 to the outside of the frame of the first covering portion 875, so that the light LD1 that passes through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

In addition, a large gap VA2 is formed between the outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875, which is arranged opposite the metal rod 832, and the outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885, the gap exceeding the area required to avoid interference with the metal rod 832.

The gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of, first, avoiding collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, thereby ensuring that the length of the metal rod 832 is sufficient, and ensuring that the metal rod 832 can guide the linear displacement of the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834.

Secondly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring an assembly path for the fastening screw that is inserted into the skeletal parts 871, 881 and screwed into the cylindrical protrusion 834b of the rotating member 834 to fasten and fix the decorative members 870, 880 to the rotating member 834.

Thirdly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring a light path for the light that passes through the transparent parts of the framework 871, 881. Because the decorative members 870, 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light that passes through the gap VA and travels outward is visually recognized as light that passes through equal intervals on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle.

Therefore, by performing the integral rotational operation of the decorative members 870, 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can be rotated in the same manner. This makes it possible to perform a light-emitting effect in which the light radiating radially from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800 is visible in a rotating light-emitting state, without the need to control the lighting state of the light from the outer light-emitting portion 823b (for example, by keeping all the lights on).

In the combined state (see FIG. 32), the entire second skeletal portion 881 is made of a translucent resin material, which suppresses the reflection of light LD1 by the second skeletal portion 881.

As a result, only the light (weak light) of the light LD1 that is far from the optical axis is irradiated within the frame of the second covering portion 885, so the intensity of the light emitted by the second covering portion 885 can be weakened. On the other hand, the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, so the intensity of the light radiating out radially from the center of rotation of the third operating unit 800 can be improved.

A light diffusion decorative portion 885c is formed from a colored (in this embodiment, the color of the circular body is set to an arbitrary color) light-transmitting resin material and is arranged around the circumference of the frame of the second covering portion 885, with light diffusion processing formed on the inside. Therefore, of the light LD1, the light that is incident on the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is refracted, and acts to cause the entire light diffusion decorative portion 885c to emit surface light.

This surface emission makes it possible to homogenize the light that is viewed through the light-diffusing decorative parts 885c arranged in the circumferential direction, creating the effect that each of the light-diffusing decorative parts 885c of the five second decorative members 880 is viewed as a single unit by the player.

As mentioned above, the more firmly the second covering portions 885 can be integrated together, the better the presentation performance when the second covering portions 885 are visually recognized by the player. This integration can be achieved by making the light-diffusing decorative portion 885c visually appear as if it is continuously connected in the circumferential direction. This therefore improves the presentation performance in the combined state when the second covering portions 885 are positioned on the front side.

The outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832, and the end face 885b1 that is adjacent to (contacts) the outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875 protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 based on the plane on which the metal rod 832 is disposed.

As a result, when the third operating unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the united state (see FIG. 32), the degree to which the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 located on the rear side comes into the player's field of vision can be reduced, thereby reducing the impact on the presentation.

This makes it easier to prevent the color of the first covering part 875 from coming into view when the frame of the first covering part 875 and the frame of the second covering part 885 are colored in different colors and the second covering part 885 is positioned in front.

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state by itself in a combined state (see FIG. 32), there are more gaps around the third operating unit 800 than when the other operating units 600, 700 are both in an extended state (see FIG. 33, F9), making it easier for the line of sight to pass through when viewing the third operating unit 800 from an oblique direction. Therefore, without any measures, the side of the third operating unit 800 is visible, which can easily reduce the presentation effect.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, in the united state, the end face 885b1 of the second covering portion 885 is positioned rearward from the center of the front-to-rear width of the side surface, so that even if the side surface of the third operating unit 800 is visible when viewed from an oblique direction, most of the side surface can be seen as part of the second covering portion 885, and the degree to which the first covering portion 875 is visible can be reduced. As a result, in the united state, the second covering portion 885 can be made easier to see than the first covering portion 875, improving the presentation effect.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual combined state and the combined state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830, causing the inner rotating member 830 to rotate, while the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is stopped by the load from the torque limiter 866.

Although the sliding ridge 831b is used to reduce the contact area, if the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 will be large, and the allowable load transmission value of the torque limiter 866 will have to be increased, which tends to hinder miniaturization of the torque limiter 866.

For this reason, it is preferable to suppress the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830. To this end, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the only support points between the inner rotating member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 are the front end that contacts the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central ring gear 864, and a gap is provided in other areas. This makes it possible to reduce the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830, making it easier to reduce the displacement resistance.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened to the central ring gear 864, a stopper is considered necessary to suppress forward displacement based on the central ring gear 864, and the sliding member 825 performs the function of this stopper. In other words, the sliding member 825 can receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in a direction pushing it forward, but the front surface of the sliding member 825 abuts against the short diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 at the front and rear.

The short diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back side of the circular plate portion 822 as a circular protrusion whose outer diameter is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and the protrusion portion 822b is formed in a circular shape at its outermost diameter portion, protruding from the back side with a semicircular cross section.

This protrusion 822b abuts against the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, so the contact area can be reduced compared to when the entire back surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. This reduces the displacement resistance in the rotational direction of the inner rotating member 830.

In addition, since no fastening screws are used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864, it is possible to reduce the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that would be expected if the weight of the fastening screws were to increase.

The following describes how the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are fixed to the rotating member 834. When explaining this fixing, refer to Figures 62 and 63 as appropriate.

The first decorative member 870 can be fixed to the rotating member 834 by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 872 of the first skeletal member 871 into the female thread of the fastened portion 876 formed at the rear of the frame of the first covering portion 875 to fasten and fix the first covering portion 875 to the first skeletal member 871, and then inserting the protruding portion 873 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the first skeletal member 871 into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted outside), and screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

The second decorative member 880 can be fixed to the rotating member 834 by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeletal member 881 into the female thread of the fastened portion 886 formed at the rear of the frame of the second covering portion 885 to fasten the second covering portion 885 to the second skeletal member 881, and then inserting the protruding portion 883 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the second skeletal member 881 into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted outside), and screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be configured to undergo linear or rotational displacement in response to linear or rotational displacement of the rotating member 834.

During the fixing process, the projections 873, 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the linear motion member 833, thereby defining the arrangement of the skeletal parts 871, 881 on the linear motion member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832), and preventing the skeletal parts 871, 881 from falling off the linear motion member 833.

The skeletal parts 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, so that the position of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 (the position of the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction) is similarly defined, and it is possible to prevent the rotating member 834 from falling off the linear moving member 833.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when assembling the rotating member 834 to the linear moving member 833, the portion that determines the position of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 is formed on the skeletal portions 871, 881 that are fixed to the rotating member 834, and therefore, unlike when the portion that determines the position on the linear moving member 833 is formed on the rotating member 834 itself, the labor hours for assembly and disassembly can be reduced.

In other words, for example, when disassembling, by removing the fastening screws fastening the skeletal parts 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834, not only can the restrictions on the arrangement of the skeletal parts 871 and 881 on the linear moving member 833 be released, but also the restrictions on the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 can be released. This can improve work efficiency.

The combined operations of the operational units 600 to 800 will be described with reference to Figs. 70 and 71. Figs. 70(a) to 70(d) and Figs. 71(a) to 71(d) are schematic front views of the operational unit 500 that chronologically explain examples of combined operations of the operational units 600 to 800. In the explanation of Figs. 70 and 71, Figs. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

In Figures 70 and 71, the decorations on each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operating unit 600, each of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operating unit 700, and each of the covering portions 875, 885 of the third operating unit 800 are illustrated in a schematic manner so as to be identifiable using letters or the like.

That is, the word "Normal" is displayed vertically on the first presentation surface 661a, the word "Activate" is displayed horizontally on the second presentation surface 661b, and the symbol "!" is displayed along the longitudinal direction on the third presentation surface 661c.

The first main decorative surface 787a1 is illustrated with the words "Start of war," the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 with the words "A crisis is an opportunity," the second main decorative surface 787b1 with the words "Attack," and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 with the words "Patience!?".

In addition, different alphanumeric characters ("I" to "V") corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covered portion 875, and five "circle" symbols are illustrated together in the second covered portion 885.

In Figure 70(a), each of the operating units 600 to 800 is placed in a standby state for performance (see Figure 28). Note that above the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

In addition, in FIG. 70(b), the first operating unit 600 is in an intermediate performance state, the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate performance state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

By executing the integral rotational motion of the third operating unit 800, the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged adjacent to the second operating unit 700 can be replaced one after another. In addition, by placing the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate performance state while the integral rotational motion continues or after it has stopped, the third performance surface 661c can be protruded inside the center frame 86, making the movements of the operating units 600 to 800 more lively.

For example, when the third presentation surface 661c is visible, the presentation can be controlled to increase the likelihood of winning the lottery, thereby increasing the interest of the player who sees the operation of the first operation unit 600.

When the integral rotational movement is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operating unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 arranged in close proximity to the second operating unit 700 can be viewed as an integrated unit.

This can increase the attention to the first decorative member 870 that is placed close to the second operation unit 700, and by starting a display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 on the third pattern display device 81 while returning the third operation unit 800 to a standby state for effect, the player's gaze can be smoothly guided to the third pattern display device 81.

The first decorative member 870 to be drawn to is not limited to the first decorative member 870 arranged in close proximity to the second operating unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light-emitting unit 823b (see FIG. 60) arranged to be able to irradiate light to the first decorative member 870, it is possible to draw attention to any first decorative member 870 by turning on the LED that irradiates light LD1 toward the first decorative member 870 to be drawn to and turning off the other LEDs.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched while the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870.

When switching the LED lighting pattern in accordance with the integral rotational movement of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit may be switched sequentially in the rotational direction, allowing the player to visually recognize that the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotating and displacing along a coaxial circle. Alternatively, the LEDs to be lit may be fixed, and the first decorative member 870 to be irradiated with light may be switched by utilizing the fact that each first decorative member 870 reaches the position where the light is irradiated from that LED in sequence by the integral rotational movement of the first decorative member 870.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), the second decorative rotating member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operating unit 600 both have vertically elongated decorations, allowing them to be viewed as a single unit. In particular, the front side of the decorative fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction, similar to the first performance surface 661a in the performance standby state, enhancing the effect of being viewed as a single unit.

On the other hand, when the state shown in Figure 71 (a) is reached, in addition to the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 being displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 during the intermediate process shown in Figure 70 (b), the second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operating unit 600 has a horizontally elongated decoration, so that the sense of unity with the decorative fixing member 670 is reduced, and now it can be visually recognized as being integrated with the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700, which also has a horizontally elongated decoration.

Figure 35 shows the intermediate performance state of the second operating unit 700, but if the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state as shown in Figure 71 (a), the vertical distance between the covering member 787 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can be further reduced, enhancing the effect of them being visually perceived as a single unit.

At this time, the protruding decorative portion 652b protrudes to a visible position, and the above-mentioned effect of making the right edge of the third pattern display device 81 appear to be expanding further to the right than the right end RE1 of the area prevents the player from feeling cramped even if the second presentation surface 661b is positioned closer to the right edge.

This also allows the player to see that the second performance surface 661b is positioned toward the center of the third pattern display device 81, similar to the second main decorative surface 787b1, thereby enhancing the effect of the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second performance surface 661b being viewed as a single unit.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the protruding decorative portion 652b with content related to the decoration of the second performance surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the effect of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second performance surface 661b and the protruding decorative portion 652b being visually perceived as a single unit can be enhanced.

In Figures 70(c) and 70(d), the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in a performance standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state. The reversal operation of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in Figure 70(d), but since the second decorative rotating member 660 is not positioned on the left or right outside of the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700 when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the reversal operation of the covering member 787 (see Figure 59) can be performed even when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state.

As mentioned above, when the covering member 787 is flipped over, the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 on the left and right are faced forward, making them non-distinguishable. However, as shown in Figure 70(d), the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 may be combined to make the content discernible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 70(d), the player can discern the meaning of "Pinch!?", and by stopping the driving of the second action unit 700 in this state, the player can focus his/her attention on the subsequent movement of the second action unit 700, thereby focusing the player's gaze on the second action unit 700.

For example, when it is desired to notify that the lottery result is a loss, the state of FIG. 70(d) is controlled to return to FIG. 70(c), and when it is desired to notify that the lottery result is still not to be notified or that the lottery result is a big win, the state of FIG. 70(d) is controlled to continue to be inverted to the state shown in FIG. 71(a), thereby drawing the player's attention to the second operating unit 700.

In FIG. 71(a), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an extended state, and the third operating unit 800 is in a standby state for performance. Note that above the second operating unit 700, the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second performance surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are positioned close to each other, and the characters written on each are both written horizontally, making it easy for the player to see them as one. Furthermore, the content has a series of meanings, including "attack activated," making it even easier for the player to see them as one.

When the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state (see FIG. 70(a)), the first performance surface 661a and the decorative fixing member 670 are positioned close to each other, and the characters written on each are both written vertically, making it easy for the player to see them as one. Furthermore, the content of the characters is related to "normal time," making it even easier for the player to see them as one.

In this way, in this embodiment, each presentation surface 661a, 661b of the first operating unit 600 is configured to be viewed as one with the side surface of a different member (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). This can improve the presentation effect.

In Figures 71(b) to 71(d), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in a standby state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. The state shown in Figure 71(b) and the state shown in Figure 71(c) differ in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 due to the third operating unit 800 performing a unitary rotation action. On the other hand, no matter which state the switching rotation action is performed from, it can be visually recognized by the player as the same united state (see Figure 71(d)).

In other words, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front, the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870. As a result, when the operation control of the third operation unit 800 is set to notify the player of a jackpot by executing a switching rotation operation at the end of the display performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the patterns are changing, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot will be notified from the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

In other words, regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 at the end of the display performance (whether it is in the state shown in FIG. 71(b) or the state shown in FIG. 71(c)), the player's sense of anticipation as to whether or not they will win the jackpot can be maintained in the same way. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operating unit 800 can be maintained at a high level.

As described above, each of the operation units 600-800 can be formed so that the decoration is either visible alone or in combination with other units. Therefore, the decoration formed on each of the operation units 600-800 is not complete for each operation unit 600-800 alone, but is designed as a decoration that is related to each of the operation units 600-800.

Whether or not the drive control of each of the operational units 600-800 can be performed is affected by the positioning of the other units. In other words, if the drive of each of the operational units 600-800 is performed at an inappropriate time, the component operations may collide and cause a malfunction, so drive control is performed only after determining the positioning of the components of the other units.

For example, the first operating unit 600 is controlled to change to the extended state when the second operating unit 700 is in any state and the third operating unit 800 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

The change of the first operation unit 600 to the intermediate performance state is controlled so that the state of the second operation unit 700 can be any, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be any, and the rotation operation is executed when it is determined that a switching rotation operation is not occurring.

The second operating unit 700 is controlled to change to the extended state when the first operating unit 600 is in any state and the third operating unit 800 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

The change of the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate performance state is controlled so that the state of the first operation unit 600 can be any, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be any, and the rotation operation is executed when it is determined that a switching rotation operation is not occurring.

The control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and rotation is not performed or only a unitary rotational movement occurs is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state.

The control by which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and the switching rotation operation occurs is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in a performance standby state and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

As mentioned above, the drive control of each operating unit 600 to 800 is not possible at any time, but is controlled so that it is executed after determining the arrangement of the components of the other units.

Next, the details of the sorting device 300 in the first embodiment will be described. In describing the details of the sorting device 300, reference will be made as appropriate to Figures 1 to 25. First, an example of the decoration applied to the front design member 162 will be described.

Figure 72 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 300. The difference between Figure 72 and Figure 5 above is that the front design member 162 has a light-transmitting window 162d.

As shown in FIG. 72, the front design component 162 arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300 has a front panel formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and a window portion 162d is formed in the central area of the front panel as an area with higher light transmittance than the peripheral area.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting seal member SL1, the central area of which is cut out to match the shape of the window portion 162d, is attached to the front plate of the front design member 162. With this configuration, the front-to-rear thickness of the window portion 162d is thinner than the front-to-rear thickness of the area around it where the seal member SL1 is attached, and since it is possible to vary the degree to which light transmits through the front design member 162, it is possible to increase the light transmittance of the window portion 162d.

The window portion 162d is formed with the primary objective of improving the visibility of the sorting device 300, taking into consideration that when a player looks at the sorting device 300, his or her line of sight passes through the plate portion of the front design member 162, and the secondary objective is to eliminate the dissatisfaction expressed by players that they are unable to grasp the flow pattern of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300. In other words, the window portion 162d is formed with a shape and size that takes into consideration the shape of the sorting device 300.

The means for forming the window portion 162d as a portion having higher light transmittance than the surrounding area is not limited in any way, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, a light guide plate may be placed on the plate portion of the front design member 162, or multiple groove patterns may be formed to perform the same function as a light guide plate, so that the appearance of the front design member 162 changes for each light emission pattern of the light emitting means such as LEDs, or a pattern or design may be drawn directly on the front design member 162, or the area corresponding to the window portion 162d of the front design member 162 may be formed as an opening.

The shape of the window portion 162d is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 72, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a band shape extending left and right with the same vertical width, or it may be a shape that omits the part extending outward left and right so that the horizontal width is equal to the horizontal width of the range that protrudes upward (a pentagonal shape like home base), or it may be a shape that follows the shape of the front plate edge of the front design member 162.

Although the window portion 162d is formed as a single area, this is not limiting and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the highly light-transmitting area may be formed by a combination of multiple locations separated by lattice-like or ladder-like sections, the area may be partitioned by multiple aligned small windows, or the area may be partitioned by a disorderly arrangement of window portions. The shape of the window portion may also be variable.

The surface shape of the sealing member SL1 is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a surface shape formed with many projections and recesses, such as a surface shape formed by embossing, or the surface may have many grooves or protrusions, or it may be formed as a smooth surface.

The surface shape of the window portion 162d is preferably formed as a smooth surface, but any shape that ensures higher light transmittance than the surrounding area (corresponding to the formation area of the sealing member SL1) may be used, and various shapes may be adopted in addition to shapes similar to the surface shape of the sealing member SL1 described above.

Figure 73 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. The difference between Figure 73 and the content shown in Figure 21 above is that a light-transmitting window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162.

As shown in FIG. 73, the window portion 162d is formed in a symmetrical shape and includes a main window portion 162d1 that is short vertically and long horizontally, and a sub-window portion 162d2 that is formed above the central portion horizontally of the main window portion 162d1.

In this embodiment, the main window portion 162d1 and the sub-window portion 162d2 are formed from a colorless and transparent resin material and are maintained in a state of high light transmittance. The shape of each portion is described in detail below.

The main window portion 162d1 is designed so that the outer edge shape in a front view is sufficient to ensure visibility of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed with a vertical width equivalent to the vertical width of the spherical passages of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, and is formed into a V-shape that slopes upward toward the left and right outside in accordance with the inclination of the second flow path component 335.

This allows the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 to be contained inside the main window portion 162d1 when viewed from the front, thereby improving the visibility of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

The left and right ends of the main window portion 162d1 are set near the center of the left and right width of the first flow path forming portion 334 (see FIG. 17), which is formed at the same left and right positions as the ball passage hole 163b. In other words, the entire outer wall of the first flow path forming portion 334 is not visible through the main window portion 162d1, and in particular, the visibility of the side wall portion 334a is reduced.

This allows for greater freedom in designing the shape of the side wall 334a compared to when a design is required that will be visible to players, such as when an attractive shape is required.

The outer edge shape of the secondary window portion 162d2 in a front view is designed to be sufficient to ensure visibility of the sealing member 313 illuminated by the light from the light emitting means 351. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed in a rectangular shape that covers the sealing member 313.

This not only improves the visibility of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, but also makes it easy for the player to grasp the state of the sealing member 313 illuminated by the light-emitting means 351, whose lighting timing is controlled based on the manner in which the ball flows down, providing the player with a comfortable gameplay experience.

Figure 74 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in Figure 16, and Figure 75 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along the line LXXV-LXXV in Figure 73. Figures 74 and 75 differ from the contents shown in Figures 23 and 18 above in that a light-transmitting window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162.

As shown in FIG. 74, when the sorting device 300 is viewed from above (at an angle), a portion of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 located at the front position is visible below the opening/closing plate 65b.

In contrast, when the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear position, the upper protrusion 376 is hidden behind the opening and closing plate 65b when viewed from the direction shown in FIG. 74. Therefore, as long as the upper protrusion 376 is visible, the player can easily predict whether the ball that has flowed down the third flow path component 336 will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

The field of view toward the upper protrusion 376 is also well ensured by the fact that the inner surface 314b1 of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes outward to the left and right as it approaches the front side.

In other words, the second upper surface portion 314b functions as a ceiling surface that prevents balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 from bouncing up, while the inner surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface to avoid unnecessary obstruction of the view to the upper protrusion portion 376.

The fact that the inner surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface compensates for the disadvantage of the upper surface 314 being configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward as it approaches the front. When the upper surface 314 is configured as an inclined surface as described above, the projected area of the upper surface 314 when viewed from above (angled direction) as shown in FIG. 74 can be increased, which has the advantage of making it easier to improve the presentation effect of the presentation in which light is visible through the light diffusion processed surface 314c of the upper surface 314. However, there is a disadvantage in that the larger projected area of the upper surface 314 may increase the area over which balls flowing below it are hidden from the player's view.

In other words, while the upper surface 314 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward as it approaches the front, this is advantageous for the light effects, but may be detrimental to the visibility of the balls as they flow down.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the inner surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes outward to the left and right, thereby reducing the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 at the point where the ball enters the third flow path portion 336 from the second flow path portion 335, thereby improving the visibility of the ball flowing down under the upper surface portion 314.

As shown in FIG. 74, when the sorting device 300 is viewed from below (at an angle), the sealing member 313 cannot be seen from inside the secondary window 162d2. Therefore, without any measures, the player will be forced to adjust the position of their eyes or the angle of their line of sight so that the sealing member 313 is visible in order to visually check its condition, which may hinder a comfortable gameplay experience.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the straight line LL1, which serves as the optical axis of the light-emitting means 351 that directs light toward the sealing member 313, passes through the sealing member 313 and the sub-window portion 162d2, and therefore a portion of the light emitted from the light-emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 after passing through the sealing member 313. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the light-emitting means 351 on the straight line LL1 is lit or not by looking at the sub-window portion 162d2.

Since the sealing member 313 is not light-diffusing, it has a weak effect of stopping the progression of light from the light-emitting means 351, allowing the light to reach the sub-window 162d2 sufficiently. As a result, when the light-emitting means 351 is turned on, the red light of the sealing member 313 reaches the sub-window 162d2, causing the sub-window 162d2 to glow red.

This makes it easier to see the difference from the colorless and transparent state of the secondary window 162d2 before the light reaches it, making it easier for the player to know whether the light emitting means 351 is lit or not. The sealing member 313 (or the wall portion on which the sealing member 313 is arranged) may be provided with a light diffusion treatment. In this case, it is easier to make the sealing member 313 emit light evenly.

As shown in FIG. 75, the straight line LL1 is positioned (at a height position) so as not to overlap with the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration part 336. In other words, the straight line LL1 is positioned above the range in which the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration part 336 can be positioned.

In addition, the straight line LL1 is positioned so as not to overlap with the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a. In other words, the straight line LL1 is positioned below the lower surface portion 163a on which the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a rests.

Furthermore, as described above, between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, the flow of the ball is hindered by the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7), so the flow range of the ball is shifted to the left and right outside the left and right width of the front design member 141. Therefore, the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 is also prevented from overlapping with the straight line LL1.

Therefore, by arranging balls flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 (e.g., the play area), balls that have entered the specific winning port 65a, and balls flowing down the sorting device 300 (e.g., the third flow path component 336) on the straight line LL1, it is possible to avoid a situation in which light is reflected and refracted by the balls. This allows the light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 to stably reach the secondary window portion 162d2 regardless of the manner in which the balls flow down.

The placement of the sealing member 313 in this embodiment may be to the player's advantage if the sealing member 313 remains difficult to see unless the player changes his or her line of sight.

For example, in a configuration where the sealing member 313 is always within the field of view, light enters the player's eyes every time the light emitting means 351 emits light, which may be dazzling to some players. However, by positioning the light emitting means 351 so that it is difficult to see, as in this embodiment, the glare felt by the player can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the case where the light from the light emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the range where it intersects with the straight line LL1, the fixed member 161 may be provided with a light diffusion treatment to prevent the light from reaching the sub-window portion 162d2.

In this case, it can be configured so that it is difficult to know whether the light emitting means 351 is lit toward the seal member 313 unless the line of sight is changed from the state shown in FIG. 74 to look directly at the seal member 313. Therefore, even if the player does not want to know whether the ball has entered the probability change detection sensor SE11 as a gaming preference, the purpose can be achieved by maintaining the line of sight shown in FIG. 74, and the gaming burden on such a player can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the sub-window portion 162d2 is formed from a smooth surface shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sub-window portion 162d2 may be formed so that at least one of the front and back surfaces is subjected to light diffusion processing, or a bubble portion is provided inside to facilitate light diffusion.

In this case, the light that reaches the sub-window 162d2 is diffused, so that the area of the light that is visible through the sub-window 162d2 can be increased. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the sub-window 162d2 is illuminated.

So far, we have explained the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the light-emitting means 351 that direct light toward the sealing member 313, that is, the LEDs arranged on the straight line LL1. Next, we will explain the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the light-emitting means 351 that are arranged in four locations on the left and right at the bottom row.

Figure 76 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, slide displacement member 370, lower member 380, and detection sensor SE1 of the sorting device 300 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in Figure 75. In Figure 76, the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 is shown by imaginary lines.

In the following explanation, the LEDs arranged on the inner left and right sides of the bottom row of the light-emitting means 351 will be referred to as inner light-emitting means 351c, and the LEDs arranged on the outer left and right sides of the bottom row will be referred to as outer light-emitting means 351d.

First, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the inner light-emitting means 351c is positioned inside the light diffusion surface 332e. Therefore, when light is emitted from the inner light-emitting means 351c, a light-emitting effect is produced in which the light diffusion surface 332e formed over a range extending to the left and right is illuminated.

This light emission effect is performed on the rear side of the branch point BP1 (see Figure 75, a long space that runs continuously from the rear end of the third flow path component 336) where the flow of balls branches off between the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12.

Therefore, when the inner light-emitting means 351c is lit and the ball flows through the branch point BP1, the location where the ball is positioned in front of the light-diffusing surface 332e, which emits light in a range from left to right, is visible as a shadow, and the player can easily understand how the ball has flowed by visually checking the displacement of the shadow.

The optical axis of the inner light-emitting means 351c passes through the long front-rear protrusion 317 (see FIG. 75). The optical axis does not pass through the left and right inner protrusions 318, but the arrangement allows light near the optical axis to pass through, and the protruding ends of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are curved when viewed in the front-rear and up-down directions.

As a result, a portion of the light emitted from the inner light-emitting means 351 is refracted by the curved shape of the front-to-rear long protrusion 317 and the left-to-right inner protrusion 318, and travels diagonally downward toward the front, and this light can reach the light-diffusing surface 340 (see Figure 75).

Since the light diffusion surface 340 is formed over the entire area of the lower side of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 14), the visibility of the space below the lower bottom surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be reduced by allowing light to reach the light diffusion surface 340. This makes it easier to distinguish between a sphere flowing down the inside of the third flow path forming portion 336 and an out sphere that passes through the outlet 71 (see FIG. 75) and flows down the underside of the third flow path forming portion 336.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the outer light-emitting means 351d is located outside (above) the light diffusion surface 332e and inside the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b. Therefore, when light is irradiated from the outer light-emitting means 351d, a light-emitting effect is produced in which the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated.

This light emission effect is performed above and in front of the branch point BP1 (see Figure 75, a long space that runs continuously from the rear end of the third flow path component 336) where the flow of balls branches off between the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12.

Therefore, when the outer light-emitting means 351d is lit and a ball passes through the branch point BP1, the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b above and in front of the ball will emit light, and the ball passing through the branch point BP1 will be hidden by the light diffusion surface 333b (see Figure 17), making it difficult for the player to understand how the ball passed through the branch point BP1.

In addition, the light diffusion surface 333b is formed from top to bottom, and the light diffusion surface 314c of the upper surface portion 314 is disposed above it (see FIG. 73). Therefore, in addition to making the branch point BP1 difficult to see when viewed from the front to back, the light emitted by the light diffusion surface 314c can also make the branch point BP1 difficult to see when viewed from above at an angle looking into the light diffusion surface 333b (see FIG. 74).

The light diffusion surface 333b is formed from top to bottom, and light diffusion surface 340 is disposed below it, and this light diffusion surface 340 is formed on the lower back surface of the second flow path component 335 (see FIG. 14). Therefore, apart from the effect of making it difficult to see the branch point BP1 when viewed from the front to back, the lower surface of the second flow path component 335 is illuminated, and as the ball flows down the second flow path component 335, a shadow is created by the ball blocking the light (light diffused by light diffusion surface 340), making it easier for the player to understand that the ball is flowing down.

Here, the light diffusion surface 333b is disposed in front of the branch point BP1 (see Figures 17 and 75). Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion surface 333b, a situation may occur in which the light is obscured by the sphere. In this embodiment, however, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-to-rear direction) of the outer light emitting means 351d is disposed outside (above) the range in which the sphere flows down the branch point BP1 (see Figure 76), so it is possible to avoid a situation in which the light is obscured by the sphere disposed at the branch point BP1.

Therefore, regardless of the flow pattern of the balls inside the sorting device 300, the light diffusion surface 333b can be brightly illuminated by illuminating the outer light emitting means 351d. When the light diffusion surface 333b is illuminated, the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 (see FIG. 17) located in front of it block the light, creating a shadow, making it easier for the player to grasp the flow pattern of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335.

In this embodiment, a structure is used to smooth the flow of the balls downward as a measure to prevent the light from being blocked by the balls placed at the branch point BP1. This structure will be explained.

When the ball reaches the branch point BP1 and flows down, if the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position (see FIG. 20), it flows straight down and passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11, and if the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position (see FIG. 18), it flows down to the left and right sides along the inclination of the ball guide portion 371b and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

When the ball flows down with the sliding displacement member 370 positioned in the front position, the through-hole edge 382a of the plate-shaped part 382 supporting the left and right outer ends of the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged to connect the left and right outer edges of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the left and right inner edges of the normal detection sensor SE12, and the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outside. Therefore, the ball that reaches the upper surface of the through-hole edge 382a is configured to easily flow down to the left and right outside.

This makes it easier to prevent the ball, which starts to flow down the inclination of the ball guide portion 371b to the left and right, from flowing back to the left and right inward or bouncing after being bridged to the through-hole edge portion 382a, and allows the ball to flow down smoothly.

The light diffusion surface 319a is disposed inside the front-to-rear width of the branch point BP1. Therefore, a situation in which a sphere is placed on the rear side of the light diffusion surface 319a cannot occur, so the situation in which the light is obscured by the sphere is unlikely to occur regardless of the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion surface 319a.

In this way, the inner light-emitting means 351c and the outer light-emitting means 351d are not simply arranged offset to the left and right, but are designed with an intentional difference in the positional relationship between the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b arranged in different front-to-back positions in front of them and the optical axes of the light-emitting means 351c, 351d. By making the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b that the light from the light-emitting means 351c, 351d reaches different positions, the front-to-back positions at which the light reaches, is diffused, and is visible can be made different.

In the above explanation, the case where the inner light-emitting means 351c is illuminated and the case where the outer light-emitting means 351d is illuminated are explained separately, and the explanation was given on the assumption that the light-emitting means 351c, 351d on the opposite side are turned off. However, in actuality, the light emission control of each of the light-emitting means 351c, 351d is not performed one by one, and control modes such as both being turned on or both being turned off may also occur. Below, the light emission control patterns and how the internal flow path of the sorting device 300 appears at that time are explained.

Figures 77(a) to 77(d) are front perspective views of the inner member 330 of the sorting device 300. In Figures 77(a) to 77(d), in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the lines of the light diffusing surface is omitted, and different combinations of the light emitting means 351c and 351d being turned on and off are illustrated, and the areas that are brightly lit by the light from the light emitting means 351c and 351d are illustrated with a crosshatched pattern.

That is, FIG. 77(a) illustrates a state in which both light-emitting means 351c and 351d are turned off, FIG. 77(b) illustrates an inner light-emitting state in which the inner light-emitting means 351c is turned on and the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned off, FIG. 77(c) illustrates an outer light-emitting state in which the inner light-emitting means 351c is turned off and the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned on, and FIG. 77(d) illustrates a state in which both light-emitting means 351c and 351d are turned on.

As shown in Figure 77(a), when both lights are off, the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b are not illuminated, and although visibility is ensured on the rear side, the player is given a dull impression. In particular, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the balls flowing above the third flow path component 336 and the out balls flowing down the rear (lower) side of the third flow path component 336.

When the inside is lit, as shown in FIG. 77(b), the light diffusion surface 340 on the lower side of the third flow path component 336 is illuminated, thereby maintaining high visibility of the balls flowing above the third flow path component 336 and reducing visibility of the out balls flowing down the back side (lower side) of the third flow path component 336.

Furthermore, because the light diffusion surface 332e is illuminated on the rear side of the branch point BP1, the visibility of the flow of the balls at the branch point BP1 can be improved. Moreover, the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b arranged in front of the light diffusion surface 332e are kept in an unilluminated state, so that the branch point BP1 can be prevented from being blinded by light.

In other words, when the inside is lit, the area from the third flow path configuration portion 336 to the branch point BP1 is illuminated with light, and the line of sight to see the branch point BP1 also passes through the front frame portion 333, making it easier for the player to grasp the flow pattern of the balls at the branch point BP1. Also, because the light is lit on the points that require attention in grasping the flow pattern of the balls, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will miss the points of interest, and it is possible to reduce the stress of the player while playing the game.

A light-diffusing surface 333b is formed over the entire inner surface of the front frame portion 333 (see Figure 13), making it difficult for the player to see through the front frame portion 333 to see behind them.

When looking through the front frame portion 333 to see behind, when looking in the front-to-back direction, you see through two side surfaces of the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 that are arranged opposite each other at the front and rear, so since there are many plates that need to be seen through, it is even more difficult to see the back side.

The same can be said for a player who tries to see through to the back of the front frame portion 333 with a line of sight that is inclined from the inside left and right to the outside left and right (a line of sight that is inclined from the center position on the front left and right toward the normal detection sensor SE12).

In other words, in this embodiment, the light diffusion surface 333b is formed along the inside of the rectangular tube shape, and the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 and the left and right inner side surfaces (the side surfaces facing the partition plate portion 338) are located on this inclined line of sight. Therefore, since there are many plates through which it is necessary to see through, it is even more difficult to see the rear side.

In this way, the front frame portion 333 makes it difficult to see through to the rear side of the front frame portion 333 not only when viewed from the front-to-rear direction, but also when viewed from an oblique direction.

When the outside light is on, as shown in FIG. 77(c), the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated, so the balls that flow outward to the left and right at the branch point BP1 are hidden by the light, reducing the visibility of the flowing balls.

On the other hand, the light diffusion surface 340 formed on the rear (lower) side of the second flow path component 335 is illuminated, improving the visibility of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335. In other words, when the external lighting is on, improving the visibility of the balls flowing on the front side has the effect of increasing the player's attention, but the visibility of the branch point BP1 itself is reduced.

In both lighting states, as shown in FIG. 77(d), the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b are illuminated over a wide area. The situation in which light is lit is a combination of the inside lighting state and the outside lighting state, and the effects of both can be produced, but they do not always complement each other with advantageous effects.

For example, because the light diffusion surface 333b is illuminated, the feature that the spheres flowing to the left and right outside the branch point BP1 are hidden by light is inherited from the external lighting state. Therefore, in order to increase the visibility of the branch point BP1, it is optimal to maintain the internal lighting state.

Various control modes for turning on and off the light emitting means 351c, 351d are exemplified. For example, in a round game where there is a possibility that a ball will enter the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 76) during a jackpot game, control may be performed to configure an inner lighting state so that the player can easily notice the branch point BP1, and in other round games, control may be performed to configure an outer lighting state or both lighting states to make the overall light brighter.

Also, for example, the control may be such that both lights are switched on and both lights are switched off, regardless of the type of round of play.

The timing of lighting the light emitting means 351c, 351d is not limited to round play, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the light emitting means 351c, 351d may be controlled to light up after the reach is upright during the pattern change, or the light emitting means 351c, 351d may be controlled to light up when it is detected that a ball has entered the winning hole 63, 64, 140, 65a or the through gate 67.

Returning to Figure 75 from Figure 73, the configuration for optimizing the flow of balls near the specific winning opening 65a will be described in detail again. As shown in Figure 73, the upper surface of the extension portion 162b located on the left and right outer sides of the opening and closing plate 65b is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outer sides.

Therefore, regardless of whether the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open or closed state, balls that have deviated to the left or right outside of the opening/closing plate 65b and landed on the upper surface of the extension part 162b can be diverted to the left or right outside (the side opposite the side where the opening/closing plate 65b is located), so it is possible to prevent balls on the extension part 162b from flowing down past the front side of the specific winning opening 65a.

As a result, the majority of the balls flowing down to the outlet 71 can be made to roll on the inner rail 61, which makes it possible to prevent the balls from bouncing up (bouncing high) near the outlet 71. This makes it possible to prevent the main window portion 162d1 and the third flow path component 336 located behind it from being obscured by the bouncing up balls, thereby reducing visibility.

As shown in FIG. 74, the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b in the open/closed state is formed as a flat surface extending in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second flow path component 335 is inclined downward toward the left-right center (the partition plate portion 338 side).

Therefore, the closer to the left-right center, the longer the vertical distance between the opening/closing plate 65b and the second flow path component 335, making it easier to distinguish between a ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b and a ball flowing from the second flow path component 335 toward the third flow path component 336.

As shown in Figure 74, the opening and closing plate 65b is shaped to funnel all balls placed on the upper surface into the specific winning opening 65a without any leakage, but various design features have been implemented to prevent the flow of balls from being delayed.

For example, first, the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 is a plate-shaped portion that comes into contact with the ball flowing rearward from the upper side surfaces of the left and right ends of the opening and closing plate 65b, and guides the ball inward to the left and right. The guide plate portion 163a2 is not a plate-shaped portion that extends horizontally, but is formed as a plate-shaped portion that extends in a direction that slopes downward to the left and right inward in accordance with the vertical displacement of the ball flowing from the opening and closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163.

In other words, the front end of the guide plate portion 163a2 is formed as an inclined surface that is positioned further back as it moves inward on the left and right, and extends in a slanted direction so that the left and right inner parts where the ball that is handed over to the receiving member 163, which has a lower floor than the opening and closing plate 65b, comes into contact are positioned lower than the left and right outer ends where the ball resting on the opening and closing plate 65b comes into contact.

This makes it possible to stabilize the contact position of the ball that contacts the guide plate portion 163a2 (contact height over the entire length of the ball), and to guide the ball smoothly. In this embodiment, the position of the guide plate portion 163a2 is designed in relation to the opening/closing plate 65b and the floor surface of the receiving member 163 so that the ball can contact the guide plate portion 163a2 at the center height over the entire length of the ball.

For example, secondly, the height relationship between the rear end of the upper side of the opening/closing plate 65b (the base end side of the rotation) and the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163 is configured to be reversed midway. That is, at the center position in the left-right direction where the height position of the lower surface 163a is the highest, the height position of the opening/closing plate 65b is lower, but the lower surface 163a slopes downward toward the left and right, and is configured to be reversed up and down at a pair of switching positions EP1 on the outside in the left-right width direction.

In this embodiment, the switching position EP1 has the property of being a position that switches the flow pattern of the balls between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163, and is designed to be a position on the same plane as the left and right inner surfaces of the front frame portion 333 (the side surfaces facing the partition plate portion 338) (directly above the front frame portion 333 in Figure 74).

In the left and right inner range of the switching position EP1 (the range between the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), the ball's rolling from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 is suppressed due to the relationship between the upper and lower positions of the ball's rolling surface, while the ball can roll from the receiving member 163 to the opening/closing plate 65b with little resistance.

For example, even if a ball bounces backward near the center position of the opening/closing plate 65b, collides with the receiving member 163 (on its inner rear surface) and bounces forward again, the ball can be prevented from climbing up from the opening/closing plate 65b onto the receiving member 163 after the ball stops bouncing and begins to roll.

The ball that rolls from the opening/closing plate 65b towards the receiving member 163 does not ride up onto the receiving member 163, but when the ball starts to come into contact with the lower surface 163a, the ball is swept outward to the left and right along the left and right inclination of the lower surface 163a.

The ball is unlikely to fall near the center of the left and right sides of the opening and closing plate 65b because the front design member 141 (see Figure 7) prevents the ball from falling, so it can be said that the ball is also unlikely to bounce. However, balls may bounce due to collisions between balls.

In the left and right outer range of switching position EP1 (the range outside the pair of left and right switching positions EP1 to the left and right (the side where ball passage hole 163b is located)), the ball is restricted from rolling from the receiving member 163 to the opening and closing plate 65b due to the relationship between the vertical positions of the ball rolling surface, while the ball can roll from the opening and closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 with little resistance. For example, even if a ball rolling on the lower surface 163a is accelerated forward due to a collision with another ball or vibration of the gaming machine, the ball can be prevented from flowing back toward the opening and closing plate 65b.

To summarize the description of the switching position EP1, the range in which the ball can roll forward from the receiving member 163 side is limited to the range between a pair of switching positions EP1, which prevents the ball from flowing back near the ball passage hole 163b and allows the ball to flow smoothly downward, thereby preventing the ball from becoming stuck.

In addition, the ball's backward rolling from the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 does not begin to flow backward and then switch to a left-right flow, but rather rolls along a diagonal straight line connecting the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 and the ball passage hole 163b.

In other words, instead of flowing along paths that intersect at right angles, such as in the front-to-back and left-to-right directions, the balls can flow along the hypotenuse that connects the ends of a front-to-back line and a left-to-right line, one end of which is located in the same position, thereby shortening the path along which the balls roll (this is equivalent to the length of the hypotenuse being shorter than the sum of the lengths of the other two sides of a right triangle).

Furthermore, compared to when balls tend to flow backwards between the left and right positions of the opening and closing plate 65b, this embodiment is configured so that balls tend to flow forwards in the range between a pair of switching positions EP1, making it easier to avoid the flow of balls becoming stagnant even when multiple balls enter the receiving member 163 at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 75, the receiving member 163 is not formed in the ranges on the left and right outside of the pair of switching positions EP1 (see FIG. 16), but has an upper surface portion 163f formed in a plate shape that slopes upward to leave a space in front of the range on the left and right center side of the pair of switching positions EP1.

The upper surface portion 163f is a device designed to lower the possibility of balls becoming stuck in the area between the pair of switching positions EP1 by raising the position of the lower surface portion 163a, and the upper surface portion 163f ensures that the vertical width of the space in which the balls are placed is sufficient.

This makes it possible to prevent ball jamming in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, and to avoid the ball becoming caught between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 when the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to close with a ball on it.

The symmetrical protrusion 161f extends left and right in a direction that follows the inclination angle of the second flow path component 335 (a direction inclined 5 degrees from the horizontal), and is disposed at a position that abuts the ball at the center height position of the entire length of the ball rolling on the second flow path component 335 (a position 5.5 mm higher than the floor bottom of the second flow path component 335).

As a result, when the thickness of the symmetrical protrusion 161f is minimized to ensure the visibility of the branch point BP1, the ball abuts against the symmetrical protrusion 161f at a position that is off the center height of the ball, allowing the ball to roll more smoothly compared to when a load in the direction of lifting the ball or pressing the ball against the floor is applied to the ball from the symmetrical protrusion 161f.

If reduced visibility of branch point BP1 is acceptable, the thickness of symmetrical protrusion 161f can be made approximately the full length of the sphere to prevent the symmetrical protrusion 161f from contacting the sphere at a position that is off center height.

Next, the sliding displacement member 370 and its surrounding structure will be described in detail. Figure 78 is a top view of the middle member 330, state switching device 360, sliding displacement member 370, and lower member 380. In Figure 78, to facilitate understanding, the middle member 330 is shown as transparent with imaginary lines, and the sliding displacement member 370 disposed below the middle member 330 can be seen through.

The sliding displacement member 370 is a member that slides and displaces in the forward and backward directions at the branch point BP1, but its front end does not come into contact with the side of the discharge hole 337 that it faces even in the front position (see Figure 78), and a gap is maintained. The gap is formed to be short enough to prevent the ball from entering the probability change detection sensor SE11.

This achieves the goal of preventing the ball from entering the chance change detection sensor SE11 while avoiding the front end of the slide displacement member 370 being scraped or deformed by contact with the side of the discharge hole 337.

In addition, the front end of the sliding displacement member 370, i.e., the front end of the thin plate portion 371, is inclined so that the position shifts rearward as it moves outward to the left and right. This makes it easier to prevent the ball from being pinched and stuck between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side of the discharge hole 337.

In other words, even if a ball is caught between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side of the discharge hole 337, the front end of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface, so the load acting on the ball has a directional component toward the left and right outside, and the ball can be pushed outward to the left and right. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from clogging.

Next, referring to Figure 79, we will explain the innovations in guiding the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370. Because the player's profits can change depending on the positioning of the sliding displacement member 370, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 must be reproducible (stable) and smooth.

Figure 79(a) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in Figure 78, Figure 79(b) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in Figure 78, and Figure 79(c) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in Figure 78. In the explanation of Figure 79, Figures 13 and 14 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 on the front side of the upper protrusion portion 376 is formed as an inclined surface that is positioned lower toward the left and right outer sides, and the balls can flow along this inclination. In this embodiment, in order to stabilize the flow of the balls rolling along this inclined surface, it is configured to suppress changes in the posture of the slide displacement member 370 that would change the inclination of the inclined surface.

That is, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370 is supported not only at both the left and right ends, but also at the lower protrusion portion 373 against the plate-like portion 382 of the lower member 380. This allows each of the pair of ball guide portions 371b, which are divided into left and right portions by the recessed portion 372, to be supported from below on both the left and right sides (supported by both ends), thereby suppressing changes in the posture of the sliding displacement member 370.

In other words, even if the load applied by the balls to the pair of left and right ball guide sections 371b is different (even if an unbalanced number of balls are placed on the balls), each ball guide section 371b is supported at both the left and right ends, so that tilting to the left and right of the ball guide sections 371b and the sliding displacement member 370 (displacement in the rotational direction around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction) can be suppressed.

In addition, the partition plate 338 is disposed on the upper side of the edge of the recessed portion 372, so that the upward displacement is restricted. In other words, the lifting movement of the sliding displacement member 370 and the tilt displacement in the backward tilt direction can be suppressed.

This makes it easier to maintain the proper posture of the sliding displacement member 370, suppresses the resistance to displacement in the forward and backward directions, and prevents malfunction of the sliding displacement member 370.

The ball guide portion 371b is a plate-like portion formed on the protruding base end side of the upper protruding portion 376, and the upper surface on which the ball can roll is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outside.

The contact between the ball guide portion 371b and the protrusion portion 383 is configured to be point contact. That is, in this embodiment, a pair of semi-spherical protrusions 372a protrude from the recessed portion 372 toward the protrusion portion 383, and when the gap is filled, the semi-spherical protrusions 372a and the protrusion portion 383 are configured to be in point contact.

As described above, the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, on which the ball can roll, is formed as an inclined surface that slopes in the left-right direction, so that the load applied to the ball guide portion 371b by the weight of the ball is resolved into an up-down component and a left-right component, and the left-right component can displace the sliding displacement member 370 in the left-right direction (a direction that intersects with the front-rear direction, which is the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370).

At this time, while it is preferable to reduce the left-right gap between the recessed portion 372 of the sliding displacement member 370 and the protruding portion 383, as this makes it easier to stabilize the left-right position of the ball guide portion 371b, it also makes it easier for contact friction to occur, which may result in functional problems.

For example, when the sliding displacement member 370 is displaced in the forward/backward direction while the ball is resting on the ball guide portion 371b, excessively large contact friction may result in poor forward/backward displacement (e.g., no displacement may occur).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the semispherical protrusion 372a and the ridge 383 are configured to make point contact, so the area over which frictional force occurs can be reduced, and contact friction can be kept small. This allows the sliding displacement member 370 to be smoothly displaced in the forward and backward directions even when the ball is resting on the ball guide portion 371b.

In particular, the forward/backward displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 when a ball is placed on the ball guide portion 371b is a displacement operation that switches the state from one in which the ball cannot enter the probability change detection sensor SE11 to one in which the ball can enter the probability change detection sensor SE11, so by executing this displacement operation well, it is possible to avoid the player suffering any disadvantages.

Furthermore, by setting the displacement speed of this displacement operation to a high speed, it is possible to produce an effect of changing the rotation of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the forward and backward directions.

Figures 80(a) and 80(b) are side views of the slide displacement member 370 and a ball resting on the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b. Figure 80(a) illustrates a state in which the ball is resting on the slide displacement member 370 in the front position, and Figure 80(b) illustrates a state in which the slide displacement member 370 has been displaced to the rear position. In Figures 80(a) and 80(b), an example of the rotation direction of the ball is illustrated by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the ball rolls backward and reaches the slide displacement member 370 with the ball rotating in a forward direction. When the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13) is driven so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced forward or backward to the rear position while the ball is resting on the slide displacement member 370, the load applied to the ball from the slide displacement member 370 acts to reverse the ball's rotation direction (guiding direction) (backward direction).

This makes it possible to suppress the rotation of the ball, so that the ball can be easily subjected to the action of gravity, making it easier for the ball to fall straight down. Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is driven with a ball resting on it, it is possible to create a configuration in which the ball can easily flow down to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

The long front-rear projection 317 has the function of guiding the ball that has reached the branch point BP1 toward the slide displacement member 370. In other words, the long front-rear projection 317 does not only have the function of guiding the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11, but is configured as a shape that can appropriately guide the ball regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370 that is placed upstream of the probability change detection sensor SE11.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the rear position, the ball that abuts against the long front-rear protrusion 317 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 due to the path configuration. At this time, the curve at the end of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is made into an approximately arc shape with a front-rear width longer than the up-down width (see Figure 18), so the abutting ball is subjected to a load whose downward component is greater than the forward component. This makes it possible to prevent the ball that abuts against the long front-rear protrusion 317 from bouncing back in the front-rear direction and flowing backward through the third flow path configuration part 336.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the front position, the direction in which the ball flows down is left to the shape of the slide displacement member 370. In this embodiment, the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 forms a curved surface that curves outward to the left and right, so the ball is guided outward to the left and right along this curve.

When the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the forward position, if a ball moving forward and backward collides with the sliding displacement member 370 with its momentum, the sliding displacement member 370 may be pushed backwards by the load of the collision, and the state may switch to one in which the ball can pass to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the ball abuts against the front-rear long protrusion 317 before colliding with the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370, correcting the ball's speed direction downward. Therefore, the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 due to the load from the ball is mainly downward, making it easier to avoid the sliding displacement member 370 being pushed backward.

In addition, because the load applied by the ball in the direction of displacing the slide displacement member 370 rearward is reduced, the biasing force (the biasing force of the return spring of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13)) for maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the front position can be reduced, and the electromagnetic force that drives the plunger against that biasing force can be reduced. As a result, the design freedom of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be improved.

Even if the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position while a ball is placed at the branch point BP1, it is easy to prevent the ball from flowing back.

The left and right inner protrusions 318 come into contact with the ball forward of the front displacement end position of the upper protrusion 376, and the momentum of the ball is directed downward outward to the left and right. Furthermore, the momentum of the ball is directed downward by the front-to-rear long protrusions 317. This reduces the forward and rearward speed of the ball, stabilizing the position due to inertia caused by its own weight, and making it difficult for the ball to flow back under the load applied by the sliding displacement member 370.

Furthermore, the ball comes into contact with the upper protrusion 376 when it is lower than the height position at which it comes into contact with the front-rear long protrusion 317. However, when the ball is lowered enough to come into contact with the upper protrusion 376 (see FIG. 80(a)), the point at which the ball comes into contact is the ball guide 371b, which is located at a lower position than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336. As a result, even if the ball is displaced forward due to a load in the front-rear direction from the upper protrusion 376, a considerable amount of energy is required to get from the upper side of the ball guide 371b to the lower bottom surface 336a, so the degree of backflow of the ball can be reduced.

The front end of the upper protrusion 376 on the partition plate 338 side is formed at an acute angle, so the flat surface does not collide head-on with the ball in the front-to-rear direction (see FIG. 78). In other words, the load applied to the ball from the upper protrusion 376 is large in the left-to-right direction and small in the front-to-rear direction.

This allows the ball that comes into contact with the upper protrusion 376 to flow smoothly outward to the left and right, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball gets caught between the upper protrusion 376 and the front side of the discharge hole 337, causing malfunction, when the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace from the rear position to the front position with a ball placed at the branch point BP1.

Referring back to Figures 78, 79(b), and 79(c), the explanation will be given below. Since the slide displacement member 370 is configured to protrude toward the branch point BP1 (front side), there is a possibility that the slide displacement member 370 may be displaced in a forward tilt direction due to the weight of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the portion formed rearward of the upper protrusion 376, i.e., the portion formed on both the left and right sides with the upper and lower protrusions 374 extending from front to rear, has a sufficient front-to-rear width and is configured to be able to abut against the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 over that front-to-rear width. This makes it possible to prevent the sliding displacement member 370 from tilting forward.

In addition, because the upper and lower protrusions 374 are long in the front-to-rear direction, when a load is applied to tilt the sliding displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction, the load applied to the rear frame portion 332 can be prevented from concentrating at one point. This makes it possible to suppress deformation of the sliding displacement member 370 (increasing rigidity).

In addition, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at a front position where the ball can rest on the ball guide portion 371b, the front side of the protrusion portion (hereinafter also referred to as protrusion portion 378a) in which the recessed portion 378 is formed abuts against the rear side of the partition plate portion 338.

In other words, the front position of the slide displacement member 370 is set as a position where the front side of the protrusion 378a abuts against the rear side of the partition plate 338. For this purpose, the rear side of the partition plate 338 does not have a light diffusion surface, and the surfaces that are arranged opposite the protrusion 378a at the front and rear and can abut against each other are formed as flat surfaces. This makes it possible to stabilize the position of the slide displacement member 370 in the front position.

The lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is disposed inside the recessed portion 378, so that the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 transmitted via the lower cylindrical portion 363c is applied to the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 via the front flesh portion of the protruding portion 378a.

In this way, since the driving force is transmitted to the center of the left and right of the sliding displacement member 370, the driving force can be transmitted to the sliding displacement member 370 in a well-balanced manner. In other words, it is easy to prevent the sliding displacement member 370 from shifting in the rotational direction about the vertical axis when displacing in the forward and backward directions.

Furthermore, the front side of the protrusion 378a is pressed against the rear side of the partition plate 338, making it easier to correct the position of the slide displacement member 370 in the rotational direction around the vertical axis.

Here, when maintaining or returning the position of the sliding displacement member 370 by abutting the partition plate portion 338 with the hemispherical protrusion portion 372a, the contact area between the partition plate portion 338 and the hemispherical protrusion portion 372a is small, so the load is applied locally, which may deteriorate the durability of the hemispherical protrusion portion 372a.

In contrast, in this embodiment, even if the slide displacement member 370 has a rotational positional deviation about the vertical axis before the front surface of the protrusion 378a is pressed against the rear surface of the partition plate 338, the transmission of the driving force can eliminate the positional deviation of the slide displacement member 370 as the front surface of the protrusion 378a comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the partition plate 338, and the slide displacement member 370 can be corrected to the correct position.

The partition plate portion 338 against the protrusion portion 378a serves the purpose of aligning the sliding displacement member 370 by abutting against it when it is displaced in the forward and backward directions, and also functions as a portion that bears the load applied to the sliding displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction.

In other words, when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the forward position, if a load is generated in a direction that changes the posture of the sliding displacement member 370 in a forward tilt direction due to the weight of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b, when the protruding portion 378a begins to displace (displace in a forward tilt direction) within the allowable gap of the sliding displacement member 370, the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338.

In this case, resistance is applied in the opposite direction from the rear side of the partition plate portion 338 to the protruding portion 378a, suppressing the displacement of the protruding portion 378a, thereby suppressing the change in the posture of the sliding displacement member 370.

Next, we will explain the details of each operating unit 600, 700, and 800 that were not explained in detail. First, we will explain the rotating member 620 as a detailed explanation of the first operating unit 600.

Figure 81(a) is a front view of the rotating member 620, Figure 81(b) is a rear view of the rotating member 620, and Figure 81(c) is a side view of the rotating member 620 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIc in Figure 81(a).

Furthermore, FIG. 82 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 83 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600. In FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which displaces along the guide elongated hole 616, is shown positioned at the right end of the displacement range.

As shown in Figures 81(a) to 81(c), the rotating member 620 is designed to have an asymmetric shape in relation to the load applied to the rotating member 620 when performing an operation. Details of the rotating member 620 and the action on the rotating member 620 are described below.

The main body 621 of the rotating member 620 has a first side 621a, a second side 621b, and a third side 621c as flat sides that receive a load when stopped. The first side 621a, the second side 621b, and the third side 621c are formed in order from closest to the cylindrical portion 622.

The first side surface 621a is a side surface formed on the tilting displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that can abut on the base end protrusion 617a that protrudes from the front cover member 612 toward the front side with a U-shaped cross section (the shape is designed in relation to the base end protrusion 617a). The displacement of the first side surface 621a is restricted by the base end protrusion 617a, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 45 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range).

The second side surface 621b is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that can abut on the tip side protrusion 617b that protrudes from the front cover member 612 toward the front side with a U-shaped cross section (the shape is designed in relation to the tip side protrusion 617b). The displacement of the second side surface 621b is restricted by the tip side protrusion 617b, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range).

The third side surface 621c is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that allows it to come into contact with the rectangular box portion 618, which is formed in a roughly rectangular box shape on the front side of the front cover member 612 (its shape is designed in relation to the rectangular box portion 618). The displacement of the third side surface 621c is restricted by the rectangular box portion 618, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of its displaceable range).

In this way, at the displacement end of the rotating member 620, each side surface 621a to 621c of the rotating member 620 abuts against a corresponding portion of the front cover member 612, restricting the displacement. In particular, multiple abutment points are formed at the displacement end of the rising side of the rotating member 620.

The purpose of forming multiple contact points in this way is to distribute the rotational load received at the time of contact among multiple points, and to suppress deformation of the rotating member 620 in the front-to-rear direction by distributing the front-to-rear load that may occur on the rotating member 620 among multiple points.

Examples of loads in the forward and backward directions that may occur on the rotating member 620 include a load in the forward direction caused by the weight of the second decorative rotating member 660, and a torsional load caused by inertia when the second decorative rotating member 660 stops rotating (a load in the rotational direction around the longitudinal axis of the rotating member 620).

In particular, since the load in the forward falling direction is a load in the forward tilt direction with the tubular portion 622 as the fulcrum, by taking the force moment into consideration, the load generated at the abutment position where the load is received becomes smaller as the abutment position is farther away from the tubular portion 622. With the aim of reducing the load generated at the abutment position, the second side surface 621b and the third side surface 621c are formed at positions away from the tubular portion 622.

The main body 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a recessed portion 621d formed in a direction retracting from the driving motor 631 to avoid interference with the driving motor 631, and a thickened portion 621e formed by increasing the thickness to include the range that includes the recessed portion 621d and that abuts against the base end protrusion 617a as a rotating portion centered on the cylindrical portion 622.

The base end of the rotating member 620 is narrowed by the recess 621d, so there is a possibility that it may break due to impact load without any countermeasures. However, the thickened portion 621e offsets the effect of the recess 621d on strength. This makes it easier to avoid breakage of the rotating member 620.

Furthermore, the thickened portion 621e is formed in a range that includes a portion that can come into contact with the base end protrusion 617a, thereby improving the durability of the rotating member 620 against impact loads that may occur between the rotating member 620 and the base end protrusion 617a.

Figure 84 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and Figure 85 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600. Figures 84 and 85 show the state in which the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1.

The extension portion 634b is formed with a width (circumferential length) that is three or more times longer than the width of the detection sensor KS1 when viewed from the rear. Here, making the width of the extension portion 634b sufficiently long has a structural purpose in addition to the purpose of using it for detection.

In other words, in this embodiment, the supported member 640 is connected to the front side of the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged in front of the supported member 640. Therefore, a load can be applied to the rotating member 620 in the forward falling direction. If no countermeasure is taken, the rotating member 620 may bend and deform in the front-to-rear direction, which may cause malfunction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the extension 634b, which is disposed opposite the back surface of the fixed means 610, is formed in a wide shape behind the cylindrical portion 634a connected to the rotating member 620. This allows the load applied from the extension 634b to the fixed means 610 via the cylindrical portion 634a in the forward tilt direction of the rotating member 620 to be received over a wide angle range of the arc-shaped hole 613d (a large area over which the load is generated can be ensured). This reduces the load received per unit area, making it possible to prevent damage to the extension 634b while suppressing the forward tilt displacement of the rotating member 620.

In this embodiment, while a structural advantage can be achieved by ensuring a long width of the extension portion 634b, the structure is designed so that even in a control mode in which the drive of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction is stopped when the end of the extension portion 634b is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 84), the rotating member 620 reaches the terminal position on the initial position side (see FIG. 40) due to a load such as inertia.

For example, first, the inertial force of each component is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to a terminal position on the initial position side. Not only the inertial force associated with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 itself, but also the inertial force associated with the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 rotated clockwise around the axis O1 as viewed from behind is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to a terminal position on the initial position side (a direction that rotates the rotating member 620 counterclockwise as viewed from behind).

For example, secondly, the center of gravity of the front rotating member 652 (which in this embodiment is the same as the center of the protruding decorative portion 652b) which is arranged to operate integrally with the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a constituting the gear mechanism via the intermediate gear 644 is positioned at a position away from the vertical position of the axis O1 serving as the rotation axis of the gear teeth 654a to the left and right.

Therefore, the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in a direction that rotates the gear teeth 654a. In this embodiment, the gear teeth 654a are subjected to a load in a direction that rotates counterclockwise when viewed from behind due to the weight of the front rotating member 652.

This load is transmitted in sequence to the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth portion 625, and a load in the direction of rotation counterclockwise in rear view is applied to the rotating member 620 via the gear teeth portion 625. In other words, as a load different from the inertia of the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, a load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to the terminal position on the initial position side.

In this way, due to the inertial load acting on the rotating member 620 and the load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652, a load that rotates the rotating member 620 is generated even after the power supply to the drive motor 631 is cut off.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85, even if the drive motor 631 is controlled to be de-energized when the extension portion 634b is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 and the rotating member 620 has not yet reached the displacement end position, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 continues due to the above-mentioned load, and the rotating member 620 can be caused to reach the displacement end position on the initial position side (see FIG. 40).

Figures 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b) and 88 are rear views of the guide slot 616, the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the detection sensor KS1 and the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634.

Figures 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b) and 88 show in chronological order the rotational movement of the transmission gear cam 634 starting from the performance standby state of the first operating unit 600.

Note that Figure 86(a) corresponds to the performance standby state of the first operating unit 600, Figure 86(b) corresponds to the state shown in Figure 85, Figure 87(a) corresponds to the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600, Figure 87(b) corresponds to the state shown in Figure 83, and Figure 88 corresponds to the extended state of the first operating unit 600.

The arrangement of the electrical wiring passing through the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will now be described. The electrical wiring 618d, the end of which is fixed to a connector 618c arranged on a board housed in the rectangular box portion 618, is arranged to pass through the opening C2a and enter the second decorative rotating member 660.

The electrical wiring 618d is arranged to bypass the underside of the partition 619 that protrudes from the front cover member 612 toward the base member 611 (see FIG. 39) and enter the opening C2a. The electrical wiring 618b is configured with a length that takes into account the movement trajectory of the dish-shaped cover portion C2 that has the opening C2a, and is arranged between the connector 618c and the opening C2a so that it bends under its own weight.

The partition 619 has pillars 619a formed at both the top and bottom ends, and a plate-like portion 619b that protrudes in a long plate shape to connect the pillars 619a. The pillars 619a and the plate portion 619b abut against the front side of the base member 611.

A female screw is formed on the inside of the columnar portion 619a, and a fastening screw is screwed through an opening drilled in the base member 611 in an arrangement corresponding to the columnar portion 619a, thereby fastening and fixing the base member 611 and the front cover member 612. In other words, the partition portion 619 not only serves to restrict the position of the electrical wiring 618d, but also ensures the rigidity of the base member 611 and the front cover member 612.

Next, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d will be described, with particular attention paid to the movement of the opening C2a. First, the description will focus on the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which begins in Figure 86(a). The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is downwardly displaced in the time sequence of Figures 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88.

When moving from the performance standby state (see FIG. 86(a)) to the state where the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 86(b)), the vertical arrangement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 does not change significantly, but the arrangement of the opening C2a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from behind.

This allows the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a to be moved away from the partition 619 before the dish-shaped lid portion C2 begins to move downward in earnest, thereby preventing the electrical wiring 618d from becoming pinched between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition 619 during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In particular, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 are closest to each other (see FIG. 87(b)), the opening C2a is oriented so as to face the side (downward) where the electrical wiring 618d is retracted from the partition portion 619.

This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from being pinched between the partition 619, so even if the dish-shaped lid C2 is designed to be positioned close to the partition 619, it is possible to avoid problems such as the electrical wiring 618d being broken.

As shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the orientation of the opening C2a is continuously rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. At the lower displacement end of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the opening C2a faces the opposite side (lower side) of the connector 618c, and is intentionally configured so that downward slack occurs in the electrical wiring 618d. This makes it possible to ensure the length of the electrical wiring 618d itself while avoiding unnecessary slack in the electrical wiring at the displacement end position (for example, flapping due to slack in the front-to-rear direction).

Furthermore, the length of the electrical wiring 618d is designed to be long enough so that it does not come into contact with the extension portion 634b during operation of the first operating unit 600. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the electrical wiring 618d comes into contact with the extension portion 634b and receives a load, even without providing a partition between the extension portion 634b and the electrical wiring 618d.

In this embodiment, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is closest to the transmission gear cam 634 (see Figure 88), the extension portion 634b is positioned away from the connector 618c (positioned on the opposite side of the connector 618c with respect to the rotation axis of the transmission gear cam 634 as the reference), so a large area can be secured for positioning the electrical wiring 618d while avoiding contact with the extension portion 634b, thereby improving the design freedom of the length of the electrical wiring 618d.

Next, the following description focuses on the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which begins in Figure 88. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is upwardly displaced in the time sequence of Figure 88, Figure 87(b), Figure 87(a), Figure 86(b), and Figure 86(a).

When the dish-shaped lid C2 is displaced upward, the opening C2a does not face the partition 619 from the lower end position (see FIG. 88) until the dish-shaped lid C2 is closest to the partition 619, but faces downward. This allows the dish-shaped lid C2 to be displaced upward while ensuring downward slack in the electrical wiring 618d.

Even after the dish-shaped lid portion C2 passes the lower end of the partition portion 619, the opening C2a rotates gradually while still maintaining its downward facing state (the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a is aligned along the longitudinal direction of the partition portion 619) (see FIG. 87(a)).

Then, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is sufficiently separated from the partition portion 619, the opening C2a is rotated to a position facing the partition portion 619 (see Figures 86(a) and 86(b)), and the electrical wiring 618d is positioned so as to enter (be housed) between the partition portion 619 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from being broken by sandwiching it between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619, and also reduces the load on the electrical wiring 618d caused by the vertical displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In other words, the position of the opening C2a is changed in accordance with the relative position of the partition 619 and the dish-shaped lid C2, thereby restricting the position of the electrical wiring 618d and preventing the electrical wiring 618d from being positioned between the dish-shaped lid C2 and the partition 619 when the gap between the dish-shaped lid C2 and the partition 619 becomes narrow, thereby suppressing the load on the electrical wiring 618d.

As a result, compared to when the electrical wiring 618d is arranged at an arbitrary position, the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be designed to be arranged close to each other, improving the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In addition, the restriction on the placement of the electrical wiring 618d is achieved not by using a separate member such as a cable tie, but by the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. As described above, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is a member used to fasten and fix the first decorative rotating member 650 to the main body member 651, but it is also used to restrict the placement of the electrical wiring 618d.

This eliminates the need for a dedicated member such as a cable tie to bundle the electrical wiring 618d. Furthermore, unlike cable ties, the orientation of the opening C2a can be changed so that the electrical wiring 618d can be placed on the appropriate side corresponding to the placement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, making it easier to avoid situations where the electrical wiring 618d becomes taut or bent.

In this embodiment, the opening C2a is formed as a sector-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately 110. Because the opening C2a is formed as a wide opening, the degree of freedom in the shape adopted for the portion (connection terminal, etc.) of the electrical wiring 618d that passes through the opening C2a can be improved.

Next, we will explain the arrangement structure of the electrical wiring 618d, which is arranged on the front side of the opening C2a. Figure 89 is a front perspective view of the first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660.

In Figure 89, only the parts necessary for explanation are shown, and the other parts are omitted. That is, the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the electric decoration board 662 and the wiring retaining plate 663 of the second decorative rotating member 660 are shown with solid lines, and to facilitate understanding, the box-shaped member 661 is shown with imaginary lines so that the inside can be seen.

In addition, Fig. 89 shows an example of the arrangement of electrical wiring 618d, and shows the dish-shaped lid portion C2 having an opening C2a through which the electrical wiring 618d is inserted. The electrical wiring 618d is shown branching between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 into a wiring connected to a terminal of the illumination board 653 (see Fig. 41) and a wiring connected to a terminal of the illumination board 662.

As shown in FIG. 89, the wiring retaining plate 663 is a disk-shaped member with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and includes a wiring insertion slot 663a that is drilled in the shape of a long hole through which the electrical wiring 618d can be inserted, and a pair of insertion holes 663b that are drilled on both sides of the insertion slot 663a as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, so that the wiring retaining plate 663 can prevent the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 (see FIG. 39) from falling off the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is screwed into the female threads formed on the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This causes the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a to be fixed together.

In this way, the wiring retaining plate 663 has both the function of preventing the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 from falling off and the function of fixing the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a together. In addition, the wiring retaining plate 663 has the function of temporarily retaining the electrical wiring 618d.

As shown in FIG. 89, the electrical wiring 618d passes through the inside of the long wiring insertion hole 663a of the wiring retaining plate 663, and is temporarily held in a manner that suppresses displacement by being clamped. In this embodiment, the rotational movement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not an operation of one or more rotations, but an operation of less than half a rotation (a rotational movement of about 135 degrees) performed in a reciprocating direction, so that the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to rotate multiple times and not cause a situation in which the electrical wiring 618d is twisted off.

The load (torsional load) applied to the electrical wiring 618d when the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates is thought to be large near the wiring insertion slot 663a where twisting is likely to occur, but in this embodiment, the wiring insertion slot 663a is formed in a long hole shape, and the electrical wiring 618d is temporarily held by being clamped in the wiring insertion slot 663a, so displacement of the electrical wiring 618d within the long hole shape is permitted.

Therefore, even if an overload in the torsional direction occurs in the electrical wiring 618d, the load can be released by displacing the electrical wiring 618d within the long wiring insertion hole 663a. This improves the durability of the electrical wiring 618d.

The relationship between the twist direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the direction of the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be described. Since the main body member 651 rotates integrally with the rotational movement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 is twisted in the rotational direction of the main body member 651. In other words, a counterclockwise twist occurs when viewed from behind as the rotating member 620 rotates and displaces in the tilting direction.

As the pivoting member 620 is pivoted in the tilting direction, the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is also pivoted counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, thereby reducing the load on the electrical wiring 618d caused by twisting (improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d).

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 rotates while being displaced vertically along the guide slot 616. Here, in the time series from Figure 86(a) to Figure 88, the electrical wiring 618d changes from a state in which there is a large amount of slack between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 to a state in which there is a small amount of slack.

Correspondingly, the rotation of the illumination board 662 is configured as an operation that changes the state of the electrical wiring 618d from a state in which the terminal on the illumination board 662 side of the electrical wiring 618d is located on the rear side (main body member 651 side) (see FIG. 89) to a state in which the terminal is located on the front side (wire receiving member 655 side). Therefore, the state of the electrical wiring 618d can be changed in a manner that pulls it toward the front side.

That is, in the time sequence from Figure 86 (a) to Figure 88, the state of the electrical wiring 618d inside the main body member 651 changes from a state in which the electrical wiring 618d is largely loose (a state in which the terminal on the side of the electrical wiring board 662 is located on the rear side) to a state in which the electrical wiring 618d is little loose (a state in which the terminal on the side of the electrical wiring board 662 is located on the front side).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the relationship between the amount of slack is reversed (balanced) between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the relationship inside the main body member 651. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d as the first operating unit 600 operates.

The relationship between the twist direction of the electrical wiring 618d in the portion disposed inside the main body member 651 and the twist direction of the electrical wiring 618d in the portion disposed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 will be explained.

In the time sequence of operations shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 twists counterclockwise when viewed from behind, while the portion of the electrical wiring 618d arranged between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 twists in the rotational direction of the illumination board 662 (counterclockwise when viewed from below in Figure 89 (viewed from the direction looking at the insertion hole 663b from the illumination board 662 side)). In other words, they twist in opposite directions.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring 618d is designed to be twisted to a minimum when the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state, and twisted to a maximum when the electrical wiring 618d is in an extended state.

As a result, in a state where a large amount of slack in the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a is unlikely to cause problems (standby state, see FIG. 86(a)), the electrical wiring 618d is deliberately left slack to reduce the load on the electrical wiring 618d, while in a state where it is preferable to reduce the slack in the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a (extended state, see FIG. 88), the twisting caused by the rotational movement of the main body member 651, the wiring receiving member 655, and the illumination board 662 is maximized to suppress slack in the electrical wiring 618d (suppress the displacement of the electrical wiring 618d).

In this way, as a means of improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d, it is configured to switch between a state in which twisting is minimized and sufficient slack is generated, and a state in which twisting reduces slack and avoids contact between the surrounding components (e.g., extension portion 634b) and the electrical wiring 618d.

As another embodiment, in the time series of operations shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the rotation direction of the illumination board 662 may be configured in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from below in Figure 89 (viewed from the direction looking at the insertion hole 663b from the illumination board 662 side)). In this case, the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d due to the rotational operation of the illumination board 662 are the same, so the twisting deformation of the electrical wiring 618d can be offset.

Next, the characteristics of the protruding decorative portion 652b in the operation of the first operating unit 600 will be described. Figures 90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b) and 92 are schematic front views showing the guide slot 616, the rectangular box portion 618 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

In Figures 90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b) and 92, the outer shapes of the guide slot 616 and rectangular box section 618 are illustrated diagrammatically, and the displacement of the protruding decorative section 652b from the standby state of the first operating unit 600 is illustrated in chronological order, with the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 omitted for ease of understanding.

Figure 90(a) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the standby state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 40), Figure 90(b) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the state in which the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see Figure 84), Figure 91(a) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the intermediate operating state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 43), Figure 91(b) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 displaced along the guide elongated hole 616 is positioned at the right end of the displacement range (see Figure 82), and Figure 92 illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 45).

In the performance standby state (see FIG. 90(a)), the overhanging decorative portion 652b is positioned to the right so that it overlaps with the rectangular box portion 618 when viewed from above. This allows the overhanging decorative portion 652b to be positioned outside the player's field of vision (see FIG. 28). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is positioned behind the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2) in the performance standby state, which reduces the visibility of the overhanging decorative portion 652b since the line of sight is easily blocked by the outer edge member 73.

On the other hand, if the overhang decorative portion 652b is displaced downward while being positioned to the right so as to overlap with the rectangular box portion 618 when viewed from above, the overhang decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 will collide, causing a malfunction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the posture of the overhanging decorative part 652b is changed prior to or in conjunction with the downward displacement of the overhanging decorative part 652b (see Figures 90(b) and 91(a)). This posture change occurs as a rotational movement in a direction away from the rectangular box part 618 (diagonally upward and left when viewed from the front, a rotational direction about the axis O1), making it easier to avoid collision between the overhanging decorative part 652b and the rectangular box part 618.

In this embodiment, this change in posture causes the protruding decorative portion 652b to retreat from the upper position of the rectangular box portion 618 (see Figure 91 (a)), after which the full downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the protruding decorative portion 652b begins.

The downward displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b occurs in conjunction with the downward displacement of the axis O1. During the downward displacement, the axis O1 is displaced in a direction (to the right) approaching the rectangular box part 618 along the shape of the guide long hole 616 (see Figure 91 (b)), and therefore there is a possibility that the protruding decorative part 652b may collide with the rectangular box part 618.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rectangular box portion 618 has a recessed portion 618a formed on the left side surface that is recessed along the shape of the guide elongated hole 616. In particular, the recessed portion 618a is formed at the location where the guide elongated hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are closest to each other, that is, at a position to the right of the right end portion of the guide elongated hole 616. In this way, the design of the shape of the rectangular box portion 618 is considered with one objective in mind, which is to avoid collision between the front rotating member 652 and the rectangular box portion 618.

Furthermore, as the axis O1 is displaced downward, the posture of the overhanging decorative part 652b continues to change, so that the overhanging decorative part 652b can be displaced in a direction retracting from the rectangular box part 618. In this embodiment, when displacing from FIG. 91(a) to FIG. 91(b), the overhanging decorative part 652b is designed so that its leftward displacement dimension XL1 (retraction distance) is equal to or greater than the rightward displacement dimension XR1 of the axis O1. This makes it possible to avoid collision between the overhanging decorative part 652b and the rectangular box part 618.

In the state shown in Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the left-right displacement of axis O1 and the left-right displacement caused by the change in posture of the protruding decorative part 652b are in opposite directions and cancel each other out, so the left-right displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b is kept small.

In contrast, in the states shown in Figures 91(b) to 92, the left-right displacement of axis O1 and the left-right displacement caused by the change in posture of the protruding decorative part 652b are in the same direction on the left and right, so that the displacements are superimposed, resulting in a larger amount of left-right displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b.

As a result, even though the posture change of the protruding decorative part 652b always involves a rotational movement around the axis O1, it appears to the player that the protruding decorative part 652b is being guided to displace up and down with a small left-right displacement (narrow displacement trajectory) from Figure 90(a) to Figure 91(b), and to make a large left-right displacement from Figure 91(b) to Figure 92.

Therefore, it is possible to create a difference between the structure (component shape) that guides the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the structure that is expected from the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b as seen by the player. This makes it possible to create a surprising effect.

In other words, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be made to appear to the player as if the overhanging decorative portion 652b were popping out from the right side of the rectangular box portion 618 to the left. Therefore, in an area that is narrow and where left-right displacement would be insufficient, such as the left and right sides of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 30), the player can be made to see an unexpected displacement popping out to the left and right, thereby increasing the attention to the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

For convenience, the left-right displacement of axis O1 is compared with the left-right displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, axis O1 is a rotation axis that is part of the configuration of the first operating unit 600, so the left-right displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which is configured to be rotatable around this rotation axis, has the same meaning as the left-right displacement of axis O1. Therefore, the above explanation may be understood as a comparison between the left-right displacement of dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the left-right displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b.

Figure 93 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit 600 taken along line XCIII-XCIII in Figure 85. Figure 93 shows a cross-sectional view in a plane passing through axis O1 and the rotation axis of the intermediate gear 644. As shown in Figure 93, the rear rotating member 654 is disposed in the bottomed cylindrical portion 645 from the front side, while the intermediate gear 644 is disposed in the main body portion 641 from the rear side, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 mesh at the location where the opening 645a is formed and communicates.

As shown in FIG. 93, the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and the inner diameter of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is smaller than the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663, so that the axial displacement of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 can be restricted by the wiring retaining plate 663.

In this embodiment, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is disposed with a small gap between the step formed in the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a at the axial base end side (upper side in FIG. 93) and the wire retaining plate 663. This prevents the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 from falling off and stabilizes the positioning of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 in the central axial direction of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a.

The fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is screwed into the female threads formed on the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This causes the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a to be fixed together.

As shown in Figure 93, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned rearward compared to the second decorative rotating member 660, and is therefore positioned closer to the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) in the front-to-rear direction compared to the second decorative rotating member 660. In other words, it is positioned closer to the opening 511a (see Figure 26) in which the third pattern display device 81 is positioned in the front-to-rear direction.

As a result, compared to when the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b are positioned at a distance, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned so as to overlap the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 29), making it easier to create the illusion that the display area is being expanded to the right to the player.

In particular, when the protruding decorative portion 652b and the second decorative rotating member 660 are viewed simultaneously (see, for example, FIG. 29), the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned away from the third pattern display device 81 toward the front and is easily viewed independently of the display of the third pattern display device. This, in turn, accentuates the effect of making the protruding decorative portion 652b, which is positioned close to the third pattern display device 81 from the front side, appear to the player as part of the display (creating the illusion).

In other words, by providing one particularly conspicuous object (corresponding to the second decorative rotating member 660), the degree of distinction of the other components (corresponding to the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b) is reduced. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

The protruding decorative portion 652b is made from hard resin and its shape cannot be changed during construction. However, the appearance (color, brightness, etc.) of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be changed by controlling the light emission mode (color, brightness, etc.) of the light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board 653.

Therefore, by changing the light emission mode of the light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board 653 to match the video displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the protruding decorative part 652b is positioned so as to overlap with the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 29), making it easier to create the illusion that the display area is being expanded to the right for the player.

Next, the second operating unit 700 will be described in detail. Figure 94 is a front view of the second operating unit 700 in the extended state, and Figure 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along line XCV-XCV in Figure 94.

As described above, the second operating unit 700 is configured so that the vertical displacement and the forward/backward displacement occur synchronously during the sliding displacement (sliding displacement in the forward/backward direction at an angle), and is designed so that the displacement occurs smoothly so that the forward/backward displacement is not overly noticeable.

For example, in the sliding displacement of the second operating unit 700, the obliquely tilted displacement in the forward and backward directions is not composed of a single displacement, but is composed of a combination of a displacement in the up-down direction and a displacement in the forward and backward directions.

That is, first, the lifting plate member 740 connected to the pivot arm member 720 is guided by the metal bar 702 at the left end so as to move up and down in the longitudinal direction (up and down direction) of the metal bar 702. At the left end, the left side rear plate member 750 and the blind decorative member 768 are also arranged in front and behind the lifting plate member 740, preventing the lifting plate member 740 from freely moving in the front and back direction. This makes it possible to restrict the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 740 to the up and down direction.

The right side of the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the pivot arm member 720. The right end of the lifting plate member 740 is not supported by a fixed member (a member fixed to the rear case 510), but is indirectly supported by a fixed member (upper front inclined portions 714, 751 and receiving inclined portion 762) via the performance device 780 (see FIG. 54). This prevents the right end of the lifting plate member 740 from freely displacing in the front-to-rear direction, and limits the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 740 to the up-down direction.

The performance device 780 supported by the lifting plate member 740 is guided by the cylindrical portion 744 (see FIG. 50) so as to be displaced in the front-to-rear direction. In this way, to achieve a diagonally inclined sliding displacement in the front-to-rear direction, the guidance of the displacement of the lifting plate member 740 and performance device 780 as components is configured separately for the direction of gravity and the horizontal direction.

This makes it easier to configure the system to maintain low displacement resistance compared to a configuration that guides the system in the forward and backward directions at an angle.

The extension state of the second operating unit 700 illustrated in Figures 94 and 95 is a state in which it is possible to control the second operating unit 700 to perform a displacement (see Figure 57) that switches the state of the covering member 787. That is, in this embodiment, in other extension states (for example, the performance standby state of the second operating unit 700 (see Figure 28) or the intermediate performance state of the second operating unit 700 (see Figure 33)), the second operating unit 700 is controlled so as not to perform a displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787.

By controlling in this manner, even if the right side front plate member 710 and the left side rear plate member 750 are configured to be disposed at positions that overlap with the left and right positions reached by the left and right ends of the covering member 787 when a displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is performed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the covering member 787 collides with the right side front plate member 710 or the left side rear plate member 750. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the placement of the right side front plate member 710 and the left side rear plate member 750.

The following describes the ingenuity of the configuration of the performance device 780 in relation to the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787. First, the drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) that generates the driving force for the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is located at the left-right center position of the performance device 780 (a position where the center is located directly above the center of the insertion tube portion 773 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 744).

This not only prevents the attitude of the performance device 780 from tilting left or right due to the weight of the drive motor 782, but also stabilizes the left-right balance of the driving force generated by the drive motor 782.

Furthermore, in the extended state (see FIG. 95) of the second operating unit 700 capable of performing a displacement to switch the state of the covering member 787, the left-right position of the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the pivoting arm member 720 supporting the lifting plate member 740 is set to be equal to the left-right center position of the performance device 780 or to the right side.

In this way, while the support for the right side of the lifting plate member 740 is provided only by the pivoting arm member 720, which allows the cylindrical fastened portion 724 as a support position to be displaced in the left-right direction, when it is expected that the position or posture of the performance device 780 is likely to change, that is, when a displacement is made to switch the state of the covering member 787, the position of the cylindrical fastened portion 724 is set to be equal to the left-right center position of the performance device 780 or to a position to the right, thereby stabilizing the position or posture of the performance device 780.

Note that the control to execute the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is performed only when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, but after the state of the covering member 787 has been switched, it is possible to control the state of the second operating unit 700 to change to a performance standby state or an intermediate performance state.

That is, for example, in order to switch the state of the covering member 787 from the standby state of the second operating unit 700 and to place the second operating unit 700 in an intermediate performance state, the second operating unit 700 is first placed in an extended state, a displacement is performed to switch the state of the covering member 787, and then the second operating unit 700 is controlled to be displaced downward to change to the intermediate performance state.

As shown in FIG. 95, the light diffusion member 778b is formed long in the left-right direction so that it overlaps with the inner ends of a pair of front support members 760 when viewed in the front-to-rear direction. This makes it possible to hide the rotating cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) supported by the front support members 760 from being seen by the player, thereby preventing the player from understanding that the presentation device 780 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction by understanding the position and shape of the rotating cylinder portion 774e.

Furthermore, when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, the light diffusion member 778b is seen overlapping in a left-right line with the fixedly positioned three-dimensional decorative portion 768a when viewed from the front (see FIG. 94). In this state, the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a are arranged along the lower edge of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front, across the left-right length of the lower edge.

A board with an LED fixed to the front side is disposed on the back side of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, and the light emitted from the corresponding LED can be used to create a light-emitting effect of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a. This light-emitting effect can make the bottom edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 appear to be separated by light, or make the bottom edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 appear to be brightened by light.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, the light diffusion member 778b can be configured to function both as a member that hides the rotating cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) and as a member that performs a light-emitting effect in conjunction with the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a.

As shown in FIG. 95, the horizontal member 742 is provided with a covering cover 742a that is provided behind the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a and covers the area (left side area) away from the rear of the light diffusion member 778b with a space on the front side.

The covering cover 742a is a member for concealment formed across the vertical width of the horizontal member 742, and is arranged so that electrical wiring can be passed through the gap between the covering cover 742a and the horizontal member 742. That is, the electrical wiring for supplying electricity to the performance device 780 is guided from the rear of the concealing decorative member 768 through the gap between the covering cover 742a and the horizontal member 742 to the performance device 780 side, and is connected to the drive motor 782, the illumination board 778a, the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56), etc.

At this time, in front of the electrical wiring, not only the covering cover 742a but also the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative part 768a are arranged overlapping each other, which is a configuration that easily blocks the player's line of sight and makes it easier to prevent the electrical wiring from being visible to the player.

In other words, by placing the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, which are originally arranged for light production, in front of the path of the electrical wiring to function as a screen for the electrical wiring, the size of the covering cover 742a required to screen the electrical wiring can be kept to a minimum.

In addition, since the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a is fixed in position, it does not overlap the horizontal member 742 in the front-to-back direction when in the standby state (see FIG. 31) or in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), and therefore cannot be used to conceal electrical wiring.

Taking this into consideration, in this embodiment, the formation range of the horizontal member 742 is set to the range outside the light diffusion member 778b when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to conceal the electrical wiring with the horizontal member 742 and the light diffusion member 778, so that the electrical wiring can be prevented from being seen by the player regardless of the state of the second operating unit 700 (standby state, intermediate state, extended state).

96 and 97 are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inversion member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785. FIG. 96 illustrates the up-down inversion member 781 in a horizontal arrangement state in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same straight line extending in the left-right direction, and FIG. 97 illustrates the up-down inversion member 781 in an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(c)).

The pair of intermediate arm members 783 are not formed in the same shape, but have curved portions 783d that are curved upward from the lower surface when the inverted member 781 is horizontally disposed. The curved portions 783d are curved so as to protrude in a direction retracting from the drive gear 782a in order to avoid collision between the intermediate arm members 783 and the drive gear 782a when the inverted member 781 is vertically disposed.

Figure 98 is a front perspective view of the lift-and-reverse performance device 770. In Figure 98, the outer shape of the covering member 787 is shown in imaginary lines so that the inside can be seen through the covering member.

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnet Mg is placed near both the left and right ends of the pair of covering members 787, rather than on the side where the pair of covering members 787 are placed close to each other. Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg does not act to directly combine the covering members 787 together, but acts independently on each of the pair of covering members 787.

This makes it possible to prevent, for example, a malfunction of one covering member 787 from causing the other covering member 787 to malfunction as well.

In addition, for example, when the pair of covering members 787 start to move apart in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent magnetic force from acting in the opposite direction to the left-right displacement. In other words, when the up-down inversion member 781 starts to rotate from the upright vertical position, it is possible to delay the timing at which the magnetic force acts.

This makes it possible to suppress the change in the load applied to the covering members 787 by the magnets Mg when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction, so that it is easier to avoid situations in which the covering members 787 vibrate due to a sudden change in magnetic force or the displacement becomes unstable, causing malfunctions, when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction, compared to when it is necessary to remove the magnet's adhesion when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction.

As shown in Figure 98, the magnets Mg are arranged on opposite sides in the left and right directions, and the effect of this will be explained below. The rotational position stabilization parts 785f, to which the metal screws that come into contact with the magnets Mg and are loaded with magnetic force are fixed, are arranged on the same side in the front-to-back direction (the front side when the up-down inversion member 781 is in the upright vertical position, see Figure 55). Therefore, the direction of the load generated by the magnets Mg in relation to the metal screws is the same in the front-to-back direction on both the left and right sides.

In more detail, for example, when the upside-down member 781 changes from an upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)) to an inverted vertical position (see FIG. 59(c)), the covering member 787 on the left side as viewed from the front rotates in the forward direction, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side) is displaced forward, resulting in a forward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force, while the covering member 787 on the right side as viewed from the front rotates in the backward direction, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side) is displaced forward, resulting in a forward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force.

For example, when the upside-down member 781 changes from an inverted vertical position (see FIG. 59(c)) to an upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)), the covering member 787 on the left side as viewed from the front rotates backwards, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side) is displaced backwards, resulting in a rearward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force, while the covering member 787 on the right side as viewed from the front rotates forwards, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side) is displaced backwards, resulting in a rearward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force.

In this way, the direction of the load generated by the magnet Mg between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 and linear plate member 784 that support the covering member 787 while maintaining its posture is configured to be the same on both the left and right sides.

Here, when a load is generated in the opposite front-to-back direction on both the left and right sides (for example, when the magnet Mg on the left side is placed in a lower position, so that the magnets Mg on both the left and right sides are placed in a lower position, and the design is changed so that the rotational position stabilization portion 785f of the left axial rotation member 785 is placed on the rear side of the magnet Mg in the upright vertical position), the mode of displacement given to the lifting and reversing performance device 770 by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled away from their adhering state becomes a mode in which the lifting and reversing performance device 770 rotates on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.

In this case, the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is likely to vibrate in the rotational direction on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction. In particular, in a configuration like this embodiment, in which the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 96) elastically deforms in the process of removing the magnet Mg from its attraction, and the covering member 787 is vigorously rotated using the elastic recovery of the bevel tooth member 785c after the magnet Mg is removed from its attraction, it is expected that the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is likely to vibrate in the rotational direction on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, it may become difficult to release the load from the lifting/reversing performance device 770, which may result in damage to the lifting/reversing performance device 770 or a decrease in the durability of the lifting/reversing performance device 770. Therefore, measures are considered necessary to stabilize the displacement of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 over the long term.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from their adsorbed state, the direction of the load generated between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 and linear plate member 784 that support the covering member 787 while maintaining their posture is configured to be the same in the front-to-back direction on both the left and right sides, so that the mode of displacement given to the lifting and reversing performance device 770 by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from their adsorbed state can be a mode in which the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is displaced in the front-to-back direction.

This can be easily offset by the displacement of the lifting and reversing device 770 (displacement having a forward and backward component), and damage to the lifting and reversing device 770 caused by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled away from their adhering state can be avoided.

In the second operating unit 700, the direction of the sliding displacement of the performance device 780 (a direction having a vertical component and a front-to-rear component, i.e., a direction in a plane perpendicular to the left-to-right direction) is perpendicular to the direction in which the displacement starts (left-to-right direction) from a state in which the covering members 787 are arranged close to each other (a vertical arrangement state of the upside-down members 781).

This makes it easier to avoid one displacement occurring due to the inertia of the other displacement. For example, when a sliding displacement of the performance device 780 is performed, it makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the covering members 787 unintentionally start to displace from a state in which they are positioned close to each other (displacement in a direction away from each other).

Next, the details of the third operating unit 800 will be described again. First, the details of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described. Figure 99(a) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850, and Figure 99(b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850.

As shown in Figures 99(a) and 99(b), the intermediate arm member 850 has a characteristic shape in which the axial position of the long rod portion changes at the thickened portion 852.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), the thickened portion 852 is disposed opposite the tip rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating member 850, and includes a base end reinforcing portion 852a disposed opposite the tip rod portion 853, and a recessed portion 852b formed by hollowing out the front side along the axial direction.

The base end reinforcement portion 852a is hollowed out in the same way as the recessed portion 852b, but the relative hollowing amount is small, and it is designed to have a large deformation resistance. This makes it possible to avoid excessive deformation even if it comes into contact with the tip rod portion 853, which is formed on the rotating tip side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force during rotation is likely to be large.

The recessed portion 852b acts to weaken the deformation resistance of the elastic deformation of the thickened portion 852. This ensures the flexibility of the thickened portion 852 and improves the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

A curved portion 852c is formed on both short side surfaces of the thickened portion 852. The curved portion 852c is formed from a shape that can smoothly receive the curved portion 854d formed on the rotation base end side of the rotation transmission portion 854 formed on the end of the tip side rod portion 853 of the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in the combined state.

In this embodiment, the rotation direction of the intermediate arm members 850 when adjacent intermediate arm members 850 rotate to be positioned close to each other is reversed between the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a)) and the combined state, so which of the short side surfaces of the intermediate arm members 850 is positioned close to the curved portion 854d depends on which combined state is configured.

On this premise, since the curved portion 852c is formed on both sides, it can smoothly accept the curved portion 854d in any combined state. This allows for a smooth transition to the combined state.

In addition, by designing the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d so that they can come into surface contact with each other, it is possible to prevent excessive load from being locally generated between the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d in the combined state, thereby improving the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

The third operating unit 800 is configured to be movable up and down by the lifting arm member 801, but the direction of the lifting and lowering displacement is not necessarily perpendicular to the direction in which the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834 start to move from the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the imaginary position line 832F recognized as the displacement start direction of the rotating member 834 is set in a different direction at 72 degree intervals, so that the displacement start direction of all the rotating members 834 cannot be perpendicular to the direction of the upward and downward displacement.

As a result, there is a possibility that an unintended rotational motion (integral rotational motion or switching rotational motion) may occur due to the load or inertia that occurs when the third operating unit 800 is raised or lowered. We will explain the measures taken to prevent this malfunction.

Figure 100 is a schematic diagram of the third operating unit 800, which shows the displacement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850.

In FIG. 100, the imaginary position line 832F of the metal rod 832 is shown to include the imaginary position line 832F that extends downward in the individual combined state, and the imaginary position line 832F that has rotated counterclockwise in front view until the angle between the imaginary position line 832F and the longitudinal direction of the intermediate arm member 850 changes by 0.5 degrees.

In other words, in Figure 100, the angle θ51 is shown as 45 degrees, and the angle θ52 is shown as 44.5 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 100, the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to allow the rotating member 834 to slide along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 while suppressing the rotational movement of the rotating member 834 at the start of the switching rotation movement.

The amount of change in angles θ51 and θ52 in FIG. 100 refers to the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 relative to the metal rod 832, and corresponds to the angle at which meshing rotation of the bevel tooth portions 834a and 854c (see FIG. 61) occurs.

Here, backlash (gap) is essential to keep the gear teeth meshing upright, and the rotational responsiveness changes depending on how large or small this gap is set. There are various options for setting the backlash, but in this embodiment, the backlash is set to 0.5 degrees.

In other words, before the angle θ51 in the combined state changes to angle θ52, the backlash (gap) is filled and meshing rotation does not begin. Meanwhile, the rotating tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 slides radially outward of the third operating unit 800 along the virtual position line 832F.

In other words, when the switching rotation operation from the combined state (individually combined state) begins, the rotational movement of the rotating member 834 is suppressed, and mainly sliding movement occurs along the metal rod 832.

Figure 101 is a schematic front view of the third operating unit 800. In explaining Figure 101, Figure 100 is referred to as appropriate. Figure 101 illustrates the third operating unit 800 in an integrated state, and illustrates the torque limiter 866 and magnet Mg2 that generate a resistance force against the displacement of the third operating unit 800.

Here, the rotating member 834 is configured not to rotate even if the inner rotating member 830 rotates slightly relative to the outer rotating member 840 (for example, a rotation of about 5 degrees (see FIG. 100)).

As a result, even in a configuration in which magnet Mg2 is used to maintain the combined state of multiple first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 as in this embodiment, and an attractive force is generated in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 from the combined state can be limited to linear displacement, making it easier to maintain the combination due to the magnetic force of magnet Mg2.

In other words, when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate around the metal rod 832 at the start of displacement from the combined state, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic force, and therefore the magnetic force is likely to disappear. In contrast, in this embodiment, the displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 at the start of displacement from the combined state is only along the plane on which the five magnets Mg2 are arranged (displacement in the sliding direction along the metal rod 832), and therefore the combined state due to the magnetic force is easily maintained.

This makes it easier to maintain the combined state of the multiple first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 even if the inner rotating member 830 unintentionally rotates slightly (e.g., rotates about 5 degrees) due to the influence of an unintended load or the like.

As shown in FIG. 101, the torque limiter 866 is configured such that when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied, the connection is cut and a switching rotation DR1 occurs to reduce resistance (spin), and when the torque limiter 866 is configured such that when the torque limiter 866 is configured in the reverse direction, an idling rotation AR1 occurs to reduce resistance (spin). The torque limiter 866 is configured with a pair of opposite forward and reverse rotations.

In more detail, in this embodiment, the left torque limiter 866 is configured to generate a switching rotation DR1 in which resistance is generated until the applied load reaches an allowable value when the allowable value is exceeded, and to generate an idling rotation AR1 in which the load is idling when the left torque limiter 866 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front.

The right-side torque limiter 866 is configured to generate an idling rotation AR1 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, while it generates resistance in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front until the applied load reaches an allowable value, and generates a switching rotation DR1 in the idling direction when the allowable value is exceeded.

In this way, a set of torque limiters 866 function as safety clutches in different rotation directions, making it possible to perform switch rotation operations in both directions as described above.

Furthermore, when no load in the rotational direction that exceeds the allowable value is applied, resistance in both forward and reverse directions is applied to the outer rotating member 840 via the load response gear 865 (see FIG. 61) attached to the torque limiter 866, so that the rotational movement of the outer rotating member 840 that may occur due to unintended loads (the inertial force of vertical displacement or the impact force when the door is opened or closed) can be suppressed. Therefore, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 can be maintained by a set of torque limiters 866.

As shown in FIG. 101, the magnet Mg2 is fixed to one side of the second covering portion 885 in the width direction, and is arranged concentrically when the five second covering portions 885 are combined into a ring shape. The magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force between itself and the metal screw Nj2 fixed to the adjacent second covering portion 885 arranged in close proximity.

By configuring in this manner, compared to when magnets Mg2 are disposed on both sides of a specific second covering portion 885 in the width direction (i.e., when both second covering portions 885 disposed adjacent to a specific second covering portion 885 on both sides receive a biasing force from magnets Mg2 in a direction toward the specific second covering portion 885), it is possible to prevent the gaps between the second covering portions 885 in the combined state from becoming larger at positions away from the specific second covering portion 885, and to make the gaps between all adjacent second covering portions 885 uniform.

As described above, the displacement of the second decorative member 880 from the combined state is configured as a sliding movement radially outward, and by the time the rotational movement around the metal rod 832 begins, the two members have moved apart to such an extent that the combination caused by the magnetic force is released (see FIG. 100). Since the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 acts in a direction that shortens the circumference of the concentric circle in which the second decorative member 880 is aligned (in a direction toward the center of the concentric circle), it becomes a resistance force to the sliding movement radially outward of the second decorative member 880.

In addition, because this resistance force is generated with equal magnitude from each direction dividing 360 degrees into five equal parts, the load that the third operating unit 800 receives from the magnet Mg2 can be balanced. In other words, it is easier to stabilize the positioning of the third operating unit 800 compared to when the magnetic force Mg2 acts non-uniformly.

The shape of all five second decorative members 880 is the same, and the arrangement of the magnets Mg2 is also the same, so the front-to-back positions of each magnet Mg2 are the same. This makes it possible to prevent the magnetic force of the magnets Mg2 from applying a load having a front-to-back component to the second decorative members 880, making it easier to avoid a situation in which a magnetic force is generated in the front-to-back direction when starting to move from the combined state or just before reaching the combined state, causing the second decorative members 880 to vibrate in the front-to-back direction.

Figure 102 is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. In Figure 102, the arrangement state corresponding to the individual combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 is illustrated, and for ease of understanding, the intermediate arm member 850 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and the outer rotating member 840 arranged on the rear side can be seen.

As shown in FIG. 102, in this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to have at least one portion that restricts rotation in one direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 102), and in most cases, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted in two portions. The configuration for restricting the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described below.

First, there is the abutment protrusion 845 that protrudes radially outward from the outer circumferential surface of the main body 841 of the outer rotating member 840. The abutment protrusion 845 is formed in a shape that tapers radially outward at the intermediate angular position between the adjacent extension arms 842, and the inside is hollowed out in a direction parallel to the axial direction of the main body 841.

This abutment protrusion 845 is positioned opposite the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotational direction of the intermediate arm member 850 and is positioned so as to be able to abut against the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850, thereby preventing over-rotation of the intermediate arm member 850.

The thickened portion 852 has a reduced deformation resistance to elastic deformation due to the recessed portion 852b (see FIG. 99(a)). Similarly, the abutting protrusion 845 is hollowed out. As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced at high speed and the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 collides with the abutting protrusion 845, the load generated at that time can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the abutting protrusion 845 and the thickened portion 852, so that damage to the abutting protrusion 845 and the thickened portion 852 can be avoided.

The abutment protrusion 845 is not disposed at all intermediate angular positions of the extension arm 842, but is omitted at the angular positions where the detectable portion 844 is formed. This shifts the positions of the abutment protrusion 845 and the detectable portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction, and the removal direction of the molding die for the outer rotating member 840 can be set to the axial direction of the main body 841. This simplifies the design of the molding die.

Thus, in this embodiment, the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted in exchange for simplification of the design of the molding die, but in this embodiment, a base end side reinforcement portion 852a is formed in the thickened portion 852 as a second configuration for restricting the rotation of the rotating arm member 850.

The base end reinforcement portion 852a is arranged opposite the tip end rod portion 853 (see FIG. 99(a)) in the rotational direction of the adjacent pivot member 850 and is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the tip end rod portion 853 when it over-rotates, thereby preventing over-rotation of the intermediate arm member 850.

The base end reinforcement portion 852a is hollowed out in the same way as the recessed portion 852b, but the relative hollowing amount is small and designed to increase deformation resistance. This makes it possible to avoid excessive deformation even if it comes into contact with the rotating tip side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force during rotation is likely to be large.

The curved portion 852c is designed to be able to come into surface contact with the curved portion 854d, which can prevent excessive load from being locally generated between the curved portions 852c and 854d in the combined state, thereby improving the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

In this way, when the abutment protrusions 845 are arranged opposite each other, the displacement of the pivot arm member 850 is restricted from over-rotating by a configuration that allows the curved shaped portion 852c of adjacent pivot arm members 850 to abut against the curved shaped portion 854d and the base end reinforcement portion 852a of adjacent pivot arm members 850 to abut against the tip end rod portion 853 in addition to abutting against the abutment protrusions 845.

On the other hand, even if the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted, the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d of adjacent rotating arm members 850 can be abutted against each other, or the base end reinforcement portion 852a and the tip end rod portion 853 of adjacent rotating arm members 850 can be abutted against each other, thereby preventing over-rotation of the rotating arm members 850.

These abutment configurations are configured so that the five rotating arm members 850 are related to each other (arranged in a circular manner). Therefore, at first glance, it may seem as if the load at the time of abutment is concentrated because the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 in one location is omitted and there is little configuration that restricts rotation only for the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to that omitted location, but in reality, the interaction of the five rotating arm members 850 allows the load at the time of abutment to be distributed.

This makes it possible to prevent the durability of a single pivot arm member 850 (the pivot arm member 850 corresponding to the portion where the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted) from decreasing drastically.

Furthermore, the formation of the annular plate portion 846, which extends in an annular plate shape from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 on a single plane along the rear end of the abutting protrusion portion 845, is omitted in the area that overlaps with the detected portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction, similar to the abutting protrusion portion 845.

The omission of the annular plate portion 846 can be explained as a trade-off for making the design of the molding die easier, as with the omission of the abutment protrusion portion 845 described above, but the effect of the annular plate portion 846 is realized by the adjacent pivot arm member 850 (the structure supporting it) even in the area where the annular plate portion 846 is omitted.

That is, the effect of the annular plate portion 846 can be explained as the correction of the misalignment of the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850. That is, even if the position of the tip of the rotating arm member 850 is unintentionally misaligned front-rear when the rotating arm member 850 is displaced radially outward (see FIG. 65(a)) from the combined state (see FIG. 64(a)) and returns to the combined state, the rear side surface of the base end rod portion 851 (see FIG. 99(b)) is arranged opposite the annular plate portion 846 and is capable of abutting against it, so that the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by the abutment.

This effect cannot be achieved if the annular plate portion 846 is omitted, since there is no contact with the annular plate portion 846. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rear side surface of the tip rod portion 853 of the rotating arm member 850 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842. Therefore, even if the position of the tip of the rotating arm member 850 is shifted forward or backward, the rear side surface of the tip rod portion 853 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842 and can abut against it, so that the forward or backward position of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by this abutment.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the extension arm portion 842 is configured to produce the same effect as the annular plate portion 846. This allows the effect of correcting the front-to-rear arrangement of the rotating arm member 850 to be produced for all of the rotating arm members 850, even while omitting the formation of part of the annular plate portion 846.

Figure 103(a) is a rear view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figure 103(b) is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. Figures 103(a) and 103(b) show the relative positions of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 in a combined state.

The state shown in FIG. 103(a) corresponds to a state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 65(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (a state in which the switching rotation operation is completed), and the state shown in FIG. 103(b) corresponds to a state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 67(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (a state in which the switching rotation operation is completed).

When comparing the combined state with the individual combined state (see Fig. 64(a) and Fig. 66(a)), there are differences such as the short side of the intermediate arm member 850 close to the outer rotating member 840 being reversed, so that the curved portion 852c that abuts against the abutment protrusion 845 is on the opposite side, and the curved portion 852c that abuts against the curved portion 854d is reversed.

To accommodate this difference, the abutment protrusion 845 is linearly symmetrical in front view with respect to the radial direction of the main body 841, and the pair of curved portions 852c and 854d are linearly symmetrical in front view with respect to the longitudinal line of the intermediate arm member 850 (the straight line connecting the pivot base end and the supported hole 854a).

Furthermore, the curved shape of the abutment protrusion 845 and the curved shape of the curved shape portion 854d are designed to be similarly curved to match the shape of the curved shape portion 852c. This allows the combination state to be configured with the same engagement relationship whether in the individual combined state or in the combined state.

In addition, in the combined state, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 is configured in a positional relationship in which it is sandwiched from both sides between the abutting protrusion 845 and the curved portion 854d. This makes it possible to prevent the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 from being displaced in either rotation direction, making it easier to maintain the state of the intermediate arm member 850 and easier to maintain the combined state.

Figures 104 and 105 are front views of the third operating unit 800. Figure 104 illustrates a state in which the decorative members 870, 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position (a state intermediate between the individual combined state and the united state), and Figure 105 illustrates the united state.

Figure 106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line CVI-CVI in Figure 105, and Figure 107 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line CVII-CVII in Figure 104. As a configuration of the third operating unit 800, the front-to-rear arrangement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be set arbitrarily.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is positioned on the front side of the metal bar 832, the player will be able to see the metal bar 832 through the intermediate arm member 850, which reduces the visibility of the metal bar 832. In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 106 and 107, the metal bar 832 is positioned on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850.

With this arrangement, the metal bar 832 as a support member functions as a shielding member that partially hides the intermediate arm member 850. This makes it possible to prevent the intermediate arm member 850, which is a functional member rather than a decorative member, from standing out, and improves the appearance of the third operating unit 800.

When exposed (see FIG. 104), the metal rod 832 also functions as a performance member that reflects light due to the gloss of its surface, improving the performance effect of the light emitted from the outer light-emitting part 823b (see FIG. 107). In other words, the metal rod 832 can be used as a reflective member for light performance.

If the intermediate arm member 850 were placed on the front side of the metal bar 832, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 would block the light entering the player's eyes. However, in this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is placed on the back side of the metal bar 832, so it is possible to avoid the intermediate arm member 850 blocking the light and causing an unsightly appearance.

In this way, in this embodiment, the range in which the light effects are performed can be expanded by configuring the metal rod 832 to reflect light in the mid-switching rotation operation in which the metal rod 832 is exposed (see Figures 104 and 107). That is, the reflected light can be made visible to the player not only in the range behind the translucent decorative member 824 where the illumination board 823 (see Figure 60) is arranged, but also in the range ER1 (see Figure 104) where the metal rod 832, which is arranged to protrude radially outward from the translucent decorative member 824 when viewed from the front, is exposed and visible.

As a light receiving portion, the bulge 824a has a light diffusion shape portion 824b (see Figures 106 and 107) on its inner circumferential surface, in which a light diffusion shape is formed in a circular ring shape. The light irradiated from the inner light emitting portion 823a can be irradiated onto the light diffusion shape portion 824b, and the light diffusion shape portion 824b that receives the light shines brightly in a circular ring shape.

As a result, the light diffusion shape portion 824b is visible as a bright ring not only when the decorative members 870, 880 are combined, but also during the switching rotation operation in which the circular arrangement of the decorative members 870, 880 is released, making it easier to maintain the dramatic effect that utilizes the circular shape of the third operating unit 800.

As shown in Figures 104 and 105, the translucent decorative member 824 has not only a bulge 824a that is visible in the combined state, but also an extension 824c that extends radially outward from the bulge 824a when viewed from the front.

When the extension 824c is in the combined state, it is hidden by the decorative members 870 and 880, and therefore does not function as a decorative part, but it does have the effect of concealing the mechanism during the switching rotation operation shown in FIG. 104.

That is, as shown in Figures 104 and 107, the extension portion 824c is formed to be large enough to cover and conceal parts of the mechanism that are difficult to use for presentation, such as the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 and the extension arm portion 842 of the outer rotating member 840 (see Figure 61).

And because the decorative pattern is applied not only to the bulge 824a but also to the front side of the extension 824c, the decorative pattern can be seen in the area where the mechanism is hidden and concealed, improving the presentation effect.

An example of drive control of the third operating unit 800 will be described. First, the relationship between the lifting and lowering displacement of the third operating unit 800 caused by the lifting and lowering arm member 801 being driven and controlled, and the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 caused by the drive motor 861 being driven and controlled will be described.

According to this embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is configured to be able to perform the vertical displacement and rotational displacement independently. However, for example, due to the inertial load generated when the third operating unit 800 is vertically displaced, a rotational displacement may occur in the third operating unit 800 in conjunction with the vertical displacement. In this case, the third operating unit 800 may change its posture or the combined state of the third operating unit 800 may be released (the decorative members 870, 880 may be displaced radially outward against the attractive force of the magnet Mg2), which may reduce the presentation effect.

To avoid this, for example, the vertical displacement of the third operating unit 800 and the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 (particularly, the integral rotational movement) may be controlled to be performed simultaneously.

This allows the player to see the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 as it moves up and down as a dramatic action, preventing a decline in the dramatic effect. Furthermore, while the integral rotational action continues, a load continues to be applied in a direction that displaces the decorative members 870, 880 radially inward (see FIG. 101), so it is possible to prevent the combined state of the third operating unit 800 from being released.

In addition, even if control is not performed to simultaneously perform the lifting and lowering displacement and the rotational displacement, the third operating unit 800 may be controlled to adjust the orientation of the third operating unit 800 in advance in the rotational direction so that the orientation of the third operating unit 800 is such that the rotating arm member 850 is less likely to be displaced by the lifting and lowering displacement.

In this embodiment, a change in the detection mode of the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 by the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 68) means that the rotation mode of the inner rotating member 830 is being performed as a unitary rotation operation. Therefore, based on this premise, it is assumed that the detection mode of the detection sensor 813 and the control of the third operating unit 800 will be designed in association with each other.

This premise is based on the fact that the switching rotation operation is performed in a state where the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained (a state where the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are not interlocked). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid any state where this premise may be violated.

In this embodiment, when the inner rotating member 830 is rotationally controlled by the driving force of the drive motor 861, the resistance applied by the torque limiter 866 acts to suppress the rotation of the outer rotating member 840, thereby maintaining the position of the outer rotating member 840.

Therefore, for example, when the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 increases during the switching rotation operation, and the operating resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 increases, if the resistance exceeds the resistance applied by the torque limiter, the outer rotating member 840 and the inner rotating member 830 may work together, making it impossible to properly perform the switching rotation operation.

In contrast, this embodiment is configured to reduce resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850.

For example, the direction of displacement of the rotating tip of the intermediate arm member 850 that displaces the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834 from the combined state is along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832. In other words, since the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of the metal rod 832, it is possible to make it difficult for resistance to the rotation of the metal rod 832 to occur, and it is possible to keep the resistance generated between the metal rod 832 and the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 small.

When the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834 are positioned at their radially outer end positions (see FIG. 104), the displacement direction of the rotation tip side (e.g., the supported hole 854a) of the intermediate arm member 850 is aligned with the rotation direction of the metal rod 832, so that it is easy to create a state in which the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 move in parallel, especially when the speed is insufficient. In this case, the switching rotation operation is not performed properly.

In contrast, this embodiment employs a control mode in which, once the switching rotation operation has begun, driving continues at a sufficient speed until the combined state is reached. When the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834 are positioned at the outer radial end positions (see FIG. 104), the decorative members 870 and 880 are subjected to inertia such that they rotate around the metal rod 832.

Due to the effect of this inertia, the rotating member 834 fastened to the decorative members 870 and 880 rotates, and the bevel teeth portion 834a and the bevel teeth portion 854c rotate in mesh with each other, so that the rotating tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 passes through the radially outer end position and rotates radially inward (see Figures 65(b) and 67(b)).

When the intermediate arm member 850 is out of its radially outer end position, the tip of the intermediate arm member 850 is more likely to move in a direction along the metal rod 832, making it easier to reduce resistance to the rotational movement of the metal rod 832.

In this way, in this embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced by designing the relationship between the members and the drive control.

During the switching rotation operation, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained and the position of the detected part 844 does not change, so the end timing of the switching rotation operation cannot be determined by a change in the detection state of the detected part 844 by the detection sensor 813.

For example, the control to stop the drive motor 861 when the combined state is reached can be achieved by setting a drive time necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation in advance and controlling the drive to stop at that drive time; however, depending on the degree of resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850, the amount of displacement may differ even if the drive time is the same, and the drive may stop before the combined state is reached. In this case, the presentation effect may be reduced.

In response to this, instead of a control mode that stops the drive motor 861 when the combined state is reached, a control may be adopted in which it is determined that the switching rotation operation has ended and the integral rotation operation has begun when the detection state of the detected part 844 by the detection sensor 813 has changed (see FIG. 68), and the drive motor 861 is stopped after this determination. This control makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor 861 is stopped when the decorative members 870, 880 have not yet reached the combined state after the switching rotation operation has been performed.

As described above, the switching rotation operation is performed in the extended state of the third operating unit 800 as drive control, but the integral rotation operation can be performed regardless of the state of the third operating unit 800.

Since the switching rotation operation can be performed regardless of the position of the rotation direction of the third operating unit 800 as a drive control, as described above in FIG. 68, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot will be announced. In other words, the switching rotation operation can be performed not only from a state in which the detectable portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 66(a)), but also from a state in which the detectable portion 844 is not arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

However, unlike when the switching rotation operation is performed while the detectable portion 844 is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change from the end of the switching rotation operation until the detectable portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so it is necessary to devise a control mode.

For example, the switching rotation operation may be performed for a drive period that is preset as a drive period necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation, regardless of the output of the detection sensor 813, or the drive motor 861 may be controlled to continue driving until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

In the latter case, after the switching rotation operation is completed, the operation mode shifts to a united rotation operation, and the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so that it can be determined that the switching rotation operation has already ended and the decorative members 870, 880 are in a combined state.

On the other hand, if the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change even though the drive motor 861 has been driven for a time sufficient to transition from a switching rotation operation to a unitary rotation operation and for the detected portion 844 to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, it can be determined that a malfunction has occurred in the third operating unit 800 based on the output of the detection sensor 813.

In the latter case, a switching rotation operation is performed from any rotational position of the third operating unit 800, and while the united state (see FIG. 32) is maintained, driving continues until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

As described above, when the third operating unit 800 is in a united assembly state, the appearance is unlikely to change even if the rotational arrangement is different. Therefore, even if the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 is continued until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in the united assembly state, it is easy to avoid a decrease in the presentation effect.

Furthermore, when controlling to return from the reverse performance shown in FIG. 68 to the normal performance, the detectable portion 844 is already positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so the period until the output of the detection sensor 813 changes after the switch rotation operation is completed can be minimized. In other words, a short drive period is sufficient for the detectable portion 844, which is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, to retreat from the detection groove, so the length required for control to return from the reverse performance to the normal performance can be minimized.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the degree of freedom of the rotational arrangement of the third operating unit 800, which initiates the switching rotation action to switch from a normal performance to a reverse performance, is improved, and while the return action may normally be prolonged, the switching rotation action from a reverse performance as a return action to a normal performance is shortened.

In other words, by performing part of the return operation to correct the difference in the rotational position of the third operating unit 800 (the rotational displacement until the detected part 844 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813) in a united state in which the appearance is unlikely to change even if the rotational position is different, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the performance effect of the third operating unit 800 during the return operation.

Furthermore, by performing part of the return operation in advance, it is possible to shorten the time required for the remaining return operation, which is the switching rotation operation.

A comprehensive explanation will be given of the configurations that are commonly adopted by multiple operating units 600, 700, and 800, including the reasons for the differences in how they are adopted.

First, as a first cross-sectional explanation, we will review the configuration of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 that are commonly used in each of the operating units 600, 700, and 800, and explain the reasons for the differences in their adoption (number of sensors, shape of the detected piece, etc.).

The detection sensor KS1 of the first operating unit 600 is a detection device for detecting the position of the first operating unit 600, and the extension portion 634b can enter the detection groove. The first operating unit 600 is equipped with only one detection sensor KS1 (see Figure 41). The multiple displacement members, namely the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, the protruding decorative portion 652b, and the second decorative rotating member 660, are configured so that the position and position of the other displacement members are determined when the position of the rotating member 620 is determined, so that the position and position of the multiple displacement members can be determined based on the detection result of the single detection sensor KS1. This makes it possible to reduce the number of detection devices.

The detection sensor 713 of the second operating unit 700 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the gear cam member 734 of the second operating unit 700, and the detection target portion 735 can enter the detection groove. There are three detection devices for the second operating unit 700 to detect the posture of the gear cam member 734 (see FIG. 50), which respectively correspond to the performance standby state, intermediate performance state, and extended state of the second operating unit 700.

The detection sensor 713 that determines the standby state is required to determine whether the device has returned to its initial position. The detection sensor 713 that determines the extension state is required to determine whether the device has reached the end position of the upward displacement, as well as to determine whether the device has performed a reversal operation of the lift-down reversal device 770 and whether it has shifted position due to the influence of unintended loads. The detection sensor 713 that determines the intermediate state is required to determine whether the device has reached the up or down position in the intermediate state, as well as to determine whether it has shifted position due to the influence of unintended loads. The reversal operation and the influence of unintended loads will be explained in order below.

First, the inversion operation will be described. The second operation unit 700 is configured to enable not only the up and down displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 that occurs in conjunction with the rotational operation of the gear cam member 734, but also the inversion operation of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 (see FIG. 59).

Since the reversal operation may cause the lifting and reversing performance device 770 to be displaced in the vertical direction, if only a single detection sensor 713 (a detection device that determines the performance standby state) is used, for example, it may not be possible to determine the vertical positional deviation in the extended state or intermediate performance state, and the performance operation may not be performed properly.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the second operating unit 700 is provided with a detection sensor 713 that corresponds to the standby state, intermediate state, and extended state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to determine that the lifting/reversing performance device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction by performing an inversion operation of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 in the extended state, and by rotating the drive motor 731 in a direction that properly corrects the attitude of the gear cam member 734 (to the extended state) based on this determination result, it is possible to properly maintain the position of the lifting/reversing performance device 770.

In this embodiment, the reversing operation is permitted only when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state (when the gear cam member 734 is at the end of the operation), so that the positional deviation during the reversing operation can be easily corrected by simply rotating the gear cam member 734 towards the end of the operation.

Next, the effect of unintended load will be described. In the second operating unit 700, in addition to the vertical displacement of the lifting plate member 740 that occurs in conjunction with the pivoting arm member 720 that rotates due to the rotational movement of the gear cam member 734, there is also a vertical displacement of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 based on the lifting plate member 740 to displace to a forward/backward position corresponding to the vertical position of the lifting plate member 740 (see Figures 52 to 54).

As a result, as the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction by the load applied in the front-to-rear width direction of the gaming machine, the up-down positions of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 and the lifting plate member 740 fluctuate, which may cause the attitude of the gear cam member 734 to change. Examples of loads applied in the front-to-rear width direction of the gaming machine include impact loads when a player hits the gaming machine, and loads when opening and closing the front frame 14.

Since the load in the front-to-rear width direction may cause the lifting/reversing performance device 770 to be displaced in the vertical direction, if only a single detection sensor 713 (a detection device that determines the performance standby state) is used, for example, it may not be possible to determine the vertical positional deviation in the extended state or intermediate performance state, and the lifting/reversing performance device 770 may not be able to be maintained in the correct position.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the second operating unit 700 is provided with a detection sensor 713 corresponding to the standby state, intermediate state, and extended state of the performance. Therefore, for example, when a load in the front-to-rear width direction is applied to the gaming machine in the intermediate performance state, and the vertical positions of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 and the lifting/reversing plate member 740 change, the posture of the gear cam member 734 changes in conjunction with the load, so that it is possible to determine that the lifting/reversing performance device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction, and by rotating the drive motor 731 in a direction that properly corrects the posture of the gear cam member 734 (to the intermediate performance state) based on this determination result, it is possible to properly maintain the position of the lifting/reversing performance device 770.

When the detected portion 735 of the gear cam member 734 is positioned on the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, and it is determined that the detected portion 735 has come off the detection sensor 713 due to an unintended load, in this embodiment, although it is not possible to determine in which direction the detected portion 735 has come off, the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven in a direction that first displaces the performance device 780 downward. This makes it possible to prevent a collision between the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800.

In this embodiment, if this drive causes the detectable part 735 to again enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, it is understood that the displacement of the detectable part 735 due to the unintended load has occurred in the direction of upward displacement of the performance device 780, and if the drive is stopped at that point, the effect caused by the unintended load can be offset.

Furthermore, if this drive causes the detectable portion 735 to enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the performance standby state without entering the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, it is understood that the displacement of the detectable portion 735 due to the unintended load has occurred on the side that displaces the performance device 780 downward. If the drive is continued so as to displace it upward again and the drive is stopped when the detectable portion 735 enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, the effect caused by the unintended load can be offset.

The detected portion 735 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 does not have a structural purpose as described for the extension portion 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 713. This makes it possible to improve the resolution for detecting the position of the gear cam member 734.

The detection sensor 778d is a detection device for detecting the posture of the upside-down member 781 of the second operating unit 700, and the arc-shaped protrusion 781d can enter the detection groove. There are two detection devices for the second operating unit 700 to detect the posture of the upside-down member 781 (see FIG. 56), which correspond to the upright vertical arrangement state and the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781, respectively.

The second operating unit 700 is in a combined state in which the pair of covering members 787 arranged on the left and right sides are close to each other when the upside-down member 781 is in an upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)) or in an inverted vertical position (see FIG. 59(c)).

For example, if only a single detection sensor 778d (a detection device that inverts the upright vertical arrangement state of the upright inverted member 781) is employed, it is possible to determine the deviation of the upright inverted member 781 from the upright vertical arrangement state, and it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 782 so as to maintain the combined state of the covering member 787 based on the determination result. On the other hand, since it is not possible to determine the deviation of the upright inverted member 781 from the inverted vertical arrangement state, even if the combined state of the covering member 787 in the inverted vertical arrangement state changes due to an unintended load, poor control, or the like, the change in state cannot be determined by the detection sensor 778d, and the combined state will continue to be released, which is not desirable from the perspective of presentation.

In contrast to this, according to this embodiment, a detection sensor 778d is provided that corresponds to the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781 and the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781. Therefore, regardless of whether the upright vertical arrangement state or the inverted vertical arrangement state is present, the detection sensor 778d can determine that a state change from the combined state has occurred, and the covering member 787 can be returned to the combined state by controlling the drive motor 782 to return to the combined state based on the determination result. This can improve the presentation effect of the second operating unit 700.

The arc-shaped protrusion 781d that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d does not have a structural purpose as described for the extension 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 778d. This improves the resolution for detecting the position of the upside-down member 781.

The detection sensor 813 of the third operating unit 800 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840 of the third operating unit 800, and the detection groove allows the detected part 844 to enter (see FIG. 60). The third operating unit 800 has one detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840, and this single detection device is used (shared) to determine the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 itself and the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 when the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 has stopped (switching rotation operation).

The detected portion 844 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 does not have a structural purpose as described for the extension portion 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 813. This makes it possible to improve the resolution for detecting the position of the outer rotating member 840.

The detection sensor 813 is arranged for the purpose of detecting the position of the outer rotating member 840, and there is only one of them, so it is insufficient to determine the deviation of the decorative members 870, 880 from the combined state. For example, even if a displacement occurs that releases the combined state when the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in a position in which the detection target portion 844 is not positioned on the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor 813 cannot determine this.

For this reason, rather than determining whether there has been a deviation from the combined state and then controlling the return to the combined state, it is considered preferable to control the drive motor 861 to rotate for a fixed time (e.g., a short time) at fixed time intervals in a direction that returns the decorative members 870, 880 to the combined state (a direction that rotates the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front in the individual combined state (see Figure 66 (a)), and a direction that rotates the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the united state (see Figure 103 (b))).

With this control, even if the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 is unexpectedly released, the decorative members 870, 880 can be returned to the combined state by driving the drive motor 861 at regular time intervals, so that it is possible to prevent the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 from being maintained in a released state for a long period of time.

As a second cross-sectional explanation, the function of magnets Mg and Mg2 will be explained. As mentioned above, in the second operating unit 700, magnet Mg functions to maintain the position of covering member 787, and in the third operating unit 800, magnet Mg2 functions to maintain the combined state of decorative members 870 and 880. Similar technologies are used, but the design concepts for the direction of the load generated by magnets Mg and Mg2 are different, which will be explained here.

The second operating unit 700 is designed so that the direction of the magnetic force generated between the magnets Mg and the metal screws arranged on the left and right sides is aligned in the front-to-back direction at both the left and right positions. In other words, the line of action of the magnetic force is designed to be parallel to a plane perpendicular to the metal rod 785a that serves as the axis of rotation of the rotating operation of the covering member 787.

In this case, compared to when the magnetic force of the magnets Mg is generated in the axial direction of the metal rods 785a, the degree (magnitude) of the magnetic force generated as resistance to the sliding displacement of the covering members 787 moving toward and away from each other can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the operating resistance of the covering members 787 when they start to operate.

On the other hand, the third operating unit 800 is designed so that the direction of the line of action of the magnetic force generated between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 arranged in the decorative member 880 is arranged on a plane parallel to the plane on which the five metal rods 832, which serve as the rotation axis of the rotational movement of the decorative member 880, are arranged (a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830).

In this case, the degree to which the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 applies a load in the direction of rotation to the decorative members 870, 880 can be reduced, making it easier to avoid malfunctions that would otherwise occur when the decorative members 870, 880 wobble in the direction of rotation due to magnetic force.

As a third cross-sectional explanation, we will explain the presentation that allows the display on the display device such as the third pattern display device 81 and the operating units 600, 700, and 800 to be viewed as a single unit.

In the first operating unit 600, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned so that it appears to overlap with the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 29). Therefore, for example, by displaying a position corresponding to the position of the protruding decorative portion 652b near the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make the display area and the protruding decorative portion 652b easier to see as a unified display performance.

In the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is positioned at the same height between the inner lower edge of the center frame 86 and the lower edge of the opening 511a (see Figures 26 and 52). Therefore, for example, by displaying a position corresponding to the position of the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 near the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make the display area and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 easier to view as a unified display performance.

In the third operating unit 800, each first covered portion 875 that is visible to the player in the individual combined state is decorated differently, and in the extended state, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is positioned to surround it when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the first covered portion 875 is positioned in a range close to the first covered portion 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make it easier to view the display area and the first covered portion 875 as a unified display performance.

In addition, if the third operating unit 800 is driven and controlled to rotate as a unit, it becomes possible to execute a roulette-like operation in which each first covered portion 875 rotates. Even in this case, for example, by moving the display so as to run parallel to the first covered portion 875 in a range close to the first covered portion 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make it easier to visually recognize the display area and the first covered portion 875 as a unified display effect.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 108. In the first embodiment, the internal shapes of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 are fixed, but the sorting device 2300 of the second embodiment is equipped with a first flow path configuration part 2334 whose internal shape is variable. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

When describing the first flow path component 2334 as an alternative to the first flow path component 334 in the first embodiment, the configuration disposed on the right side is illustrated and described, but the configuration disposed on the left side can also be the first flow path component 2334. In addition, the configurations may be different between the left and right sides, such that only one of the left and right sides is the first flow path component 2334 and the other is the first flow path component 334.

Figure 108 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 2300 in the second embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in Figure 15. As shown in Figure 108, the first flow path component 2334 of the sorting device 2300 includes a through hole 2410 drilled in the front-rear direction at the bottom of the curved protrusion 334b, a slide member 2420 guided along the through hole 2410 so as to be able to slide back and forth, and a solenoid 2430 disposed inside the rear frame portion 332 so as to be able to generate a driving force for sliding the slide member 2420.

In FIG. 108, the front position FP of the slide member 2420 when the solenoid 2430 is in a non-energized state is shown by a solid line. When the solenoid 2430 is energized, the driving force of the solenoid 2430 causes the slide member 2420 to slide to the rear position RP.

In this embodiment, in the front arrangement FP of the slide member 2420, the upper side of the slide member 2420 is configured to protrude inward (upward) from the bottom surface 2334c, which is the bottom surface of the fixed flow path and on which the balls can roll, and in the rear arrangement RP, the upper side of the slide member 2420 is configured not to protrude inward (upward) from the bottom surface 2334c.

That is, in the front position FP of the slide member 2420, the ball abuts against the upper surface of the slide member 2420, and in the rear position RP of the slide member 2420, the slide member 2420 and the ball do not abut.

The upper surface of the slide member 2420 is formed as a plane parallel to the bottom surface 2334c. Therefore, even if the slide member 2420 slides while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334c, the effect on the flow of the ball can be kept small.

The downward flow direction of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334c is diagonally downward toward the front, and the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 is the front-to-back direction, so the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 is along the downward flow direction of the ball. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 affects the strength of the ball's rotation.

The ball rolls on bottom surface 2334c facing forward, so that it rotates in a forward rolling direction in the direction of travel (forward). When solenoid 2430 is de-energized (see FIG. 108), and current is applied to solenoid 2430, causing slide member 2420 to slide from front arrangement FP to rear arrangement RP, a rearward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the ball rolling on the upper surface of slide member 2420. This accelerates the forward rolling rotation of the ball, increasing the degree of rotation of the ball and increasing the rolling speed of the ball.

On the other hand, when the solenoid 2430 is changed from an energized state to a non-energized state (see FIG. 108), causing the slide member 2420 to slide from the rear arrangement RP to the front arrangement FP, a forward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334b via the upper surface of the slide member 2420. As a result, the forward rotation of the ball is decelerated, the degree of rotation of the ball can be reduced, and the rolling speed of the ball can be slowed down.

Furthermore, since the vertical position of the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 in the front arrangement FP is higher than the vertical position of the bottom surface 2334b, in addition to the frictional force from the slide member 2420, a load is generated in a direction pushing the ball upward. Therefore, the vertical speed of the ball rolling downward can be reduced, and the flow speed of the ball can be decelerated.

In this way, according to this embodiment, by executing control to cause a sliding displacement of the sliding member 2420 while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334b, it is possible to change the flow speed of the ball flowing down inside the sorting device 2300. This makes it possible to variably control the time from when the ball passes through the ball passing hole 163b until it reaches the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 74).

In this embodiment, the slide member 2420 is positioned behind the second flow path component 335, making it difficult for the player to understand the state in which the ball is being affected by the slide member 2420.

In other words, the ball comes into contact with the slide member 2420 before it is introduced into the second flow path component 335, which is easily visible to the player and likely to attract attention, making it difficult for the player to grasp how the ball is being given rotation or displaced vertically. This reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player as he or she watches the ball flow down the second flow path component 335.

In this embodiment, when the slide member 2420 is displaced while a ball is positioned above the bottom surface 2334c, a contact load is applied, whereas a ball passing above the bottom surface 2334c before or after the displacement of the slide member 2420 (when stopped) is not subjected to a contact load with the slide member 2420.

Therefore, the flow pattern (rotation, change in rotation, flow speed, change in flow speed, etc.) can be made different between the ball placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is in operation and the ball placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is stopped.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109. In the first embodiment, the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side, but in the allocation device 3300 of the third embodiment, the special rate detection sensor SE11 is moved to the rear of the normal detection sensor SE12, so that the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front and rear. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

As an example of a change in the position of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, the explanation will be given to the right of the center, but the configuration on the left side of the left and right can be designed as desired. For example, on the left side, the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 can be arranged side by side as in the first embodiment, so that the positions of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are different on the left and right of the sorting device 3300, or on the left side, they can be arranged side by side, as described in detail below, so that the positions of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are symmetrical on the left and right of the sorting device 3300.

Figures 109(a) and 109(b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 3300 in the third embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. Figure 109(a) illustrates a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see Figure 17) is de-energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the front position, and Figure 109(b) illustrates a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position.

In addition, in Figures 109(a) and 109(b), the guide path of the ball after it flows through the third flow path component 336 is shown by imaginary lines. In this way, the guide path of the ball is changed depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

As shown in Figures 109(a) and 109(b), the middle member 3330 of the distribution device 3300 has a rear frame portion 3332 that defines the ball guide path to the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, and is configured in a shape that is open so that balls can be received from the left side.

The sliding displacement member 3370 is configured to be able to slide between a front position and a rear position. The rear position of the sliding displacement member 3370 (see FIG. 109(b)) is set as a position where the right end of the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 and the rear inner surface of the opening 3332g formed in the rear frame portion 3332 as the entrance of the path that guides the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11 are aligned on the left and right (or the right end of the front side surface 376a is positioned slightly forward).

By setting the position of the slide displacement member 3370 in this manner, if the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the front position, the ball that passes through the third flow path component 336 is caused to flow to the right while abutting against the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12; on the other hand, if the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the ball that passes through the third flow path component 336 is caused to flow to the right while abutting against the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370, and passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In other words, the flow path of the ball passing through the normal detection sensor SE12 and the flow path of the ball passing through the special chance detection sensor SE11 are both configured as flow paths that flow to the right after passing through the third flow path configuration section 336. The only difference is the forward and backward position where the ball flows to the right.

As a result, it is difficult for a player looking at the third flow path configuration portion 336 from the front to determine whether the ball has flowed to the special bonus detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

The slide displacement member 3370 includes a pair of rod-shaped guide portions 3371c extending from the front end of the thin plate portion 371 toward the front side in a rod shape, an upper front protrusion portion 3376b formed integrally with the upper protrusion portion 376, and an upper lateral protrusion portion 3376c formed integrally with the upper protrusion portion 376.

The upper surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, and is formed in a pair on the left and right sides of the center of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. It penetrates the front side of the discharge hole 337 and is configured so that it can be stored on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path component 336.

In other words, when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the front position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is positioned on the underside of the third flow path component 336 and does not come into contact with the ball, and when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is disposed across the front-to-rear gap between the front side surface of the discharge hole 337 and the ball guide portion 371b.

By configuring the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c in this manner, when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the lower left and right parts of the ball can be supported by the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, and the ball can be bridged to the sliding displacement member 3370.

This makes it easier to prevent the ball from flowing down toward the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position. In other words, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c makes it easier to prevent the ball from being erroneously guided down.

In addition, the ball that has passed through the third flow path component 336 is positioned on the upper surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, which is formed flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, thereby making it possible to avoid a frontal collision between the ball and the ball guide portion 371b in the front-to-rear direction. In other words, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball collides head-on with the ball guide portion 371b, causing the ball to flow backward forward, or a situation in which the ball gets caught between the front surface of the ball guide portion 371b and the front surface of the discharge hole 337, causing malfunction.

The upper front protrusion 3376b is a shaped portion that is similar to the front-to-rear long protrusion 317 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment and is integrally formed with the upper protrusion 376 in the same relative position as the relative position at the front position of the sliding displacement member 370 in the first embodiment.

The upper lateral protrusion 3376c is a shaped portion that is similar to the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment and is integrally formed with the upper front protrusion 3376b in the same relative position as the front position of the sliding displacement member 370 in the first embodiment.

As a result, the action of the upper front protrusion 3376b and the upper side protrusion 3376c on the ball they come into contact with occurs as an action on the ball flowing down near the upper protrusion 376, regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

In other words, unlike when the front-rear long protrusion 317 and the left-right inner protrusion 318 (see FIG. 18) are fixed in position, when the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the protrusions 3376b and 3376c can eliminate the effect of urging a ball that has reached the forward position of the upper protrusion 376 toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 110 and 111. In the first embodiment, the special probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side, but in the allocation device 4300 of the fourth embodiment, the position of the normal detection sensor SE12 is moved to the rear of the special probability detection sensor SE11, so that the special probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front and rear. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 110(a) and 110(b) are schematic top views of the third flow path component 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370, which show the configuration of the downstream side of the third flow path component 336 in the fourth embodiment.

Figure 111(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 taken along the line CXIa-CXIa in Figure 110(a), and Figure 111(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 taken along the line CXIb-CXIb in Figure 110(b). In Figure 111(b), the upper abutment portion 4373 is omitted for ease of understanding.

The sliding displacement member 4370 is configured to block either the special rate detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 so that the ball cannot pass through, and to open the other to allow the ball to pass through. It is equipped with a front sliding member 4371 that slides left and right above the special rate detection sensor SE11, and a rear sliding member 4375 that slides left and right above the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front slide member 4371 and the rear slide member 4375 slide in opposite directions to each other by the driving force of the solenoid. That is, when changing from the front open state shown in FIG. 110(a) and FIG. 111(a) to the rear open state shown in FIG. 110(b) and FIG. 111(b), the front slide member 4371 slides to the left and the rear slide member 4375 slides to the right.

The front slide member 4371 includes a slide plate 4372 that is arranged to cover the upper part of the probability change detection sensor SE11, and an upper abutment part 4373 that is formed in a shape similar to that of the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 17), and is integrally formed by a connecting part (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4372 and the upper abutment part 4373 slide and displace integrally.

The upper surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372 is flush with the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336, and is formed as an inclined plane with the same inclination in the front-to-rear direction (see FIG. 111(b)). Therefore, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the inclination of the upper surface 4372a allows the ball rolling on the upper surface 4372a to flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12. On the other hand, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the ball that has passed the lower bottom surface 336a comes into contact with the upper abutment portion 4373 and is subjected to a load, causing it to flow downward (to the lower right).

Therefore, when the front slide member 4371 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, it comes into contact with the ball at different points and is configured to change state so as to guide (flow) the ball in different directions.

The rear slide member 4375 includes a slide plate 4376 that is arranged so as to cover the upper part of the normal detection sensor SE12, and an upper abutment part 4377 that is formed in a shape similar to that of the front-rear long protrusion part 317 (see FIG. 17), and is integrally formed by a connecting part (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4376 and the upper abutment part 4377 slide and displace integrally.

The upper surface 4376a of the slide plate 4376 is an inclined plane formed from a shape that is the opposite of the upper surface 4372a (see FIG. 111(a)). Therefore, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the inclination of the upper surface 4376a allows the ball placed on the upper surface 4376a to flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the ball that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a and the upper surface 6372a comes into contact with the upper abutment portion 4377 and is subjected to a load, causing it to flow downward.

Therefore, the rear slide member 4375 is configured so that when the front open state and the rear open state change, it comes into contact with the ball at different points and changes state to guide (flow) the ball in different directions.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible that a ball that has passed backwards above the probability change detection sensor SE11 may return above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 again, thereby improving attention to the ball that has passed through the third flow path configuration portion 336.

As an example of how the ball returns to above the probability change detection sensor SE11, a solenoid may be driven to change state from the rear open state to the front open state when the ball passes backwards over the upper surface 4372a. In this case, the ball will run onto the upper surface 4376a before passing through the normal detection sensor SE12, and will flow backward along the slope of the upper surface 4376a, returning to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this way, when the timing of the ball passing through the third flow path component 336 coincides with the timing of the slide displacement member 4370 being driven, the ball is configured to return to the side of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, compared to gaming machines configured so that a ball that passes above the probability change detection sensor SE11 downstream does not pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11, attention to the ball after passing through the third flow path component 336 and the timing of the slide displacement member 4370 being driven can be improved.

Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 112. In the first embodiment, the flow path of the balls is common up to the third flow path component 336, and the branch point BP1 is located behind the third flow path component 336. However, in the sorting device 5300 of the fifth embodiment, a slide displacement member 5370 is disposed upstream of the third flow path component 336, and the flow path of the balls changes upstream of the third flow path component 336. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 112(a) and 112(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting device 5300 in the fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. Figure 112(a) shows a state in which the sliding displacement member 5370 is positioned on the right side and the ball is guided by the sliding displacement member 5370 to the special detection sensor SE11, while Figure 112(b) shows a state in which the sliding displacement member 5370 is positioned on the left side and the ball is guided by the sliding displacement member 5370 to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In addition, in Figures 112(a) and 112(b), the guide path of the ball after it flows through the first flow path component 334 is shown by imaginary lines. In this way, the guide path of the ball is changed depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 5370.

The sliding displacement member 5370 is configured to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown), and includes a thin plate portion 5371 that forms the rolling surface of the ball, and an upper protruding portion 5376 that protrudes upward from the upper surface of the thin plate portion 5371.

The thin plate portion 5371 is formed thin enough that the ball that has passed through the first flow path component 334 can ride up on it. The left side surface 5376a of the upper protrusion portion 5376 that faces the ball is formed in an arc shape with a concave flow path side, so that the ball can be smoothly guided backward.

In this embodiment, as with the sorting device 5300, the path along which the balls flow is long from front to back, and a configuration is adopted in which the visibility of balls flowing down the front side is higher than that of balls flowing down the rear side, while the sliding displacement member 5370 is positioned on the front side where the visibility of the balls is higher, making it easier for the player to distinguish the manner in which the balls flow down (path along which the balls flow down)

In this embodiment, when the slide displacement member 5370 is positioned at the right side, the entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is not particularly blocked, and the structure allows balls to enter. On the other hand, balls flowing downstream on the upstream side of the entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 flow toward the front side while flowing downstream through the first flow path configuration portion 334.

As a result, immediately after passing through the first flow path configuration portion 334, a velocity in the opposite direction, namely backward, is unlikely to occur, making it difficult for the ball to enter the entrance to the path to the normal detection sensor SE11. Therefore, in this embodiment, a component for blocking the entrance to the path to the normal detection sensor SE11 is omitted, thereby reducing material costs.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113. In the first embodiment, the left and right flow paths are separated by the partition plate portion 338, and the flow paths do not merge. However, in the sorting device 6300 of the sixth embodiment, a merged flow path 6341 extending rightward from the downstream side of the curved protrusion 334b on the left is connected to the third flow path forming portion 336 on the right. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 113 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. As shown in Figure 113, the flow path on the right side of the sorting device 6300 is formed from flow path components 334 to 336, similar to the first embodiment.

On the other hand, the left flow path of the sorting device 6300 is formed from a merging flow path 6341 that extends in a straight line to the right from a point on the front side of the curved protrusion 334b with a space for one ball, and this merging flow path 6341 is connected to the third flow path component 336 as the right flow path. Therefore, in this embodiment, the balls flowing down the right flow path and the balls flowing down the left flow path merge at the connection point JP1 where the flow paths are connected, and the balls may collide with each other.

The merging flow path 6341 has a raised floor 6342 at the lower end of the flow path. The raised floor 6342 is formed as a floor surface at a position higher than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336. This allows a difference in height between the balls flowing from the merging flow path 6341 to the connection point JP1 and the balls flowing down the right flow path and into the third flow path component 336, thereby reducing the degree of backflow that occurs when the balls collide with each other.

The contact between the balls at the connection point JP1 can delay the flow of the balls compared to when the balls do not contact each other. This makes it possible to change the time it takes for a ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see Figure 16) to reach the branch point BP1 depending on whether the balls contact each other or not.

The operation timing of the sliding displacement member 370 is set to a constant operation from the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b, regardless of the ball's entry state, so by changing the timing at which the ball reaches the branch point BP1, it is possible to make the ball reach the branch point BP1 when the sliding displacement member 370 is in a different position.

The premise for balls to come into contact with each other is that the balls merge and that there are balls flowing down the merging flow path 6341. If the player wants to make contact between the balls, he or she can play by adjusting the firing strength so that the balls enter each of the pair of ball passing holes 163b on the left and right (see Figure 74). If the player wants to avoid contact between the balls, he or she can play by adjusting the firing strength so that the balls enter only the ball passing hole 163b on one side (the right side).

According to this embodiment, adjusting the ball launch strength is related to whether or not the ball makes contact at the connection point JP1, and is related to the state of the slide displacement member 370 at the time the ball reaches the branch point BP1, so it directly affects the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to adjust the ball launch strength.

In addition, according to this embodiment, contact at the connection point JP1 is closely related to the formation of a series of balls. In other words, two balls that come into contact at the connection point JP1 can be made to flow down to the branch point BP1 while being placed close to each other.

Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 114 and 115. In the first embodiment, the case was described where the flow path to the branch point BP1 was only the flow path formed by the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336, but the sorting device 7300 of the seventh embodiment is configured so that the balls can flow down to the branch point BP1 without passing through the first flow path configuration part 334 and the second flow path configuration part 335. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 114 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, and Figure 115 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 7300 taken along line CXV-CXV in Figure 114. As shown in Figures 114 and 115, the sorting device 7300 has a ball passing hole 7163b formed in an opening at approximately the center in the left-right direction in addition to the ball passing hole 163b as a path through which balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a can pass.

The ball passage hole 7163b is formed as a ball passage opening for the detection sensor SE71, which has the same function as the detection sensor SE1, which is used to detect balls entering the variable winning device 65 and to detect the timing to change the state of the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state when a specified number of balls have entered.

A cylindrical flow path 7164 is disposed downstream of the ball passing hole 7163b, and extends with a rectangular cylindrical cross section in a direction that slopes downward toward the rear. The cylindrical flow path 7164 is formed large enough to allow balls to flow down inside, and its end portion extends to the upper front side of the branch point BP1. In other words, the ball that passes through the ball passing hole 7163b is configured to flow down inside the cylindrical flow path 7164 and reach the branch point BP1.

The length of time required for the ball to pass through the cylindrical flow path 7164 is set to be shorter than the length of time required for the ball to pass through the flow path components 334-336, and is set to be equal to the length of time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path component 334.

Therefore, for example, when the sorting device 7300 is driven and controlled with the above-mentioned operation pattern Y (see FIG. 25), as described above, a ball that passes through the ball passing hole 163b and passes through the flow path configuration parts 334-336 can only reach the branch point BP1 after the slide displacement member 370 has returned to its front position, whereas a ball that passes through the ball passing hole 7163b and flows down the cylindrical flow path 7164 may reach the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position.

In particular, a ball that passes through the ball passage hole 7163b immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b changes to the open state is likely to reach the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position.

In other words, even if the driving control pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is the same, the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a can be configured to pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or not depending on whether the ball passes through the ball passing hole 163b or the ball passing hole 7163b. This can improve the player's attention to the flow of the ball inside the specific winning opening 65a.

As shown in FIG. 114, the cylindrical flow path 7164 is positioned to prevent the cylindrical flow path 7164 from reducing the visibility of the branch point BP1, the sliding displacement member 370, and the flow path components 334-336 when viewed from a general viewing direction during play.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the visibility of the branch point BP1 is maintained high, while the number of flow paths through which the ball is guided to the branch point BP1 is increased, which increases the variety of the length of time it takes for the ball to reach the branch point BP1, thereby improving the player's attention to the specific winning port 65a.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116. In the first embodiment, the long guide hole 616 of the first operating unit 600 connects the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b at one location, and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connecting position to switch the displacement direction of the axis O1. In the first operating unit 8600 of the eighth embodiment, the long guide hole 8616 is connected at multiple locations (two locations), and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connecting position to switch the displacement direction of the displacement direction O1. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 116 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 8616 and the rotating member 620 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in Figure 116, the guide elongated hole 8616 is bent twice to the left and right below the linear portion 616a.

That is, the guide slot 8616 includes a straight portion 616a, a first curved portion 8616b connected to the lower end of the straight portion 616a and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape), and a second curved portion 8616c connected to the lower end of the first curved portion 8616b and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape) whose center of curvature radius is opposite to that of the first curved portion 8616b.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end position of the straight portion 616a, i.e., at the connection between the straight portion 616a and the first curved portion 8616b, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched, and the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (slowed down).

In addition, when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end of the first curved portion 8616b, i.e., at the connection between the first curved portion 8616b and the second curved portion 8616c, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched, and the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (slowed down).

In this way, since it is possible to configure multiple intermediate positions at which it is easy to stop the axis O1, it is possible to increase the variety (variations) of stopping postures of the second decorative rotating member 660 (see Figure 43) that is stopped midway by stopping the axis O1 midway.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117. In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 of the first operating unit 600 is configured with a single path. However, in the first operating unit 9600 of the ninth embodiment, the guide slot 9616 has a first path configured with a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b, and a second path connected to the right side of the first path. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 117 is a front schematic diagram showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 9616 and the rotating member 620 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in Figure 117, the guide elongated hole 9616 has a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b like the guide elongated hole 616 in the first embodiment, and also has an angle maintaining portion 9616c that extends obliquely to the right from the connection point between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, and a connection portion 9616d that extends from the right end of the angle maintaining portion 9616c toward the curved portion 616b and is connected to a midpoint of the curved portion 616b.

The angle maintaining portion 9616c is formed in the same direction as the displacement trajectory of the axis O1 when it is assumed that the axis O1 is displaced while maintaining the angle θ when the rotating member 620 is rotated in the tilting direction from a state in which the axis O1 is disposed at the connection point between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b (see Figures 43 and 44).

In this way, the angle θ is maintained while the axis O1 is displaced through the angle maintaining portion 9616c, so the rotational orientation of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is maintained in such a manner that the third performance surface 661c faces forward (see Figure 43).

In other words, when the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c as the rotating member 620 rotates and displaces, the rotational mode of the box-shaped member 661, which rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction, is such that the third performance surface 661c can maintain a position facing forward over the formation length (formation angle width) of the angle maintaining portion 9616c.

When the axis O1 is displaced at the connecting portion 9616d, the change in angle θ accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620 is permitted, so the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620.

On the other hand, even if the tilt angle of the rotating member 620 is the same, the magnitude of the angle θ when the axis O1 is positioned on the curved portion 616b is different from the magnitude of the angle θ when the axis O1 is positioned on the connecting portion 9616d. Therefore, by making the path along which the axis O1 is displaced different between the left and right, it is possible to make the intermediate posture of the box-shaped member 661 that is linked to the rotation of the rotating member 620 different.

In addition, regardless of whether the path along which the axis O1 moves is to the left or right, there is only one angle θ when the axis O1 is located at the upper end of the range of possible displacement, and one angle θ when the axis O1 is located at the lower end, so the position of the box-shaped member 661 can be maintained when the axis O1 is located at the upper or lower end of the range of possible displacement (see Figures 40 and 45).

In other words, in this embodiment, when the axis O1 is positioned between the ends (midway position) of the displaceable range, it is possible to generate multiple types of arrangements of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 (see Figures 43 and 44) related to the arrangement of the axis O1, and multiple types of displacement speeds of the supported member 640 and rotation speeds of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 related to the displacement speed of the axis O1.

The guide slot 9616 is merely configured with multiple paths and does not have a mechanism for limiting the path along which the axis O1 can be displaced. This makes it possible to avoid malfunctions caused by a malfunction of the path limiting mechanism and to reduce product costs by simplifying the configuration.

On the other hand, the branching of the displacement path of the axis O1 can be controlled by the direction of the load applied to the axis O1 via the rotating member 620. This will be explained below. First, the case where the rotating member 620 is rotated and displaced in the tilting direction will be explained.

First, when the axis O1 is displaced along the left path (straight line portion 616a and curved line portion 616b), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is controlled so that the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 does not stop midway.

In this case, the axis O1 enters the curved portion 616b due to the inertia of the displacement along the direction in which the straight portion 616a extends (the up-down direction), and displaces to the lower end position of the guide slot 9616.

Secondly, when the axis O1 is displaced along the right path (angle maintaining portion 9616c and connecting portion 9616d), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is driven and controlled to stop or decelerate the rotating member 620 when the axis O1 is positioned at the connecting point of the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, and then the drive motor 631 is driven and controlled again in the same direction.

In this case, the inertia of the displacement along the direction in which the straight portion 616a extends (the up-down direction) is reduced, so the choice of whether the axis O1 will displace along the left path or the right path is made based on the side with less displacement resistance.

Here, when the axis O1 enters the angle maintaining portion 9616c, the magnitude of the angle θ is maintained, so there is no need to transmit the driving force to the intermediate gear 644 (see FIG. 44) that rotates in mesh with the rotating member 620, or to a member downstream of the intermediate gear 644 in the transmission of the driving force. In other words, because there is less displacement resistance, the axis O1 can enter the angle maintaining portion 9616b side.

In this way, in this embodiment, in drive control of the tilting direction of the rotating member 620, the drive motor 631 can be controlled to stop midway or not, allowing the path along which the axis O1 is displaced to be selected.

When the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction, the axis O1 receives a load from the rotating member 620 in the diagonal upper right direction, so that the axis O1 is unlikely to be displaced so as to enter the connecting portion 9616d, and the axis O1 can be displaced upward along the curved portion 616b.

In this embodiment, the connection point between the connecting portion 9616d and the curved portion 616b is set at a midpoint of the curved portion 616b, so that the right side surface of the curved portion 616b is formed as a surface that slopes upward and to the left and is located to the upper right of the axis O1, which is located at the bottom end position of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from displacing upward (bouncing back) along a circle centered on the circular through hole 624.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is in no way limited to the above embodiment, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with some or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the balls are first caused to flow toward the front by the sorting device 300, and then flow backwards, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, it is also possible to ensure the time required for the balls to flow downward by forming multiple bends in the path or a deceleration protrusion that decelerates the balls, without forming a portion that causes the balls to flow toward the front.

In the above first embodiment, the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 is described as being curved, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and any shape can be used as long as it can block the flow of balls by contact. For example, it may be configured as an inclined flat surface, or may be formed with many small protrusions protruding from a flat surface, so that an irregular load is applied to the colliding ball.

In the above first embodiment, a ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a flows down the sorting device 300 primarily through the flow path components 334 to 336 in order, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, an opening penetrating downwards may be formed in the center of the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, allowing the ball to flow directly into the third flow path component 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one at a time, they do not pass through the opening, but when multiple balls enter the specific winning opening 65a together, the balls may be configured to pass through the opening. In this case, the time it takes for the balls to reach the sliding displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a pass through the opening or not.

In the first embodiment, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning opening 65a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path configuration section 335. In this case, the order of the first flow path configuration section 334 and the second flow path configuration section 335 may be reversed. In other words, when the ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, the branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the left and right directions, or the branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the front and back directions (flowing down toward the front side).

In the first embodiment, the flow path direction and inclination of each flow path component 334-336 were described as features of the sorting device 300 alone, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when installing the pachinko machine 10 on an island, the flow path direction and inclination may be designed taking into account the "laying down" that is performed on a daily basis.

"Laying down" refers to installing the pachinko machine 10 in a tilted position in the front-to-rear direction, rather than in a vertical position. Normally, pachinko machines are installed in a position (laying down) tilted backwards by about 1 degree (four-five rin). Compared to the explanation of the sorting device 300 alone (not laying down) above, when considering an installation angle of about 1 degree, the meaning of the inclination of the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 336, which have a tilt in the front-to-rear direction, changes.

In other words, as described above, the sorting device 300 alone is designed so that the first flow path component 334 is inclined downward from the horizontal by 7 degrees to the front, and the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward from the horizontal by 5 degrees to the rear, but when the installation angle is considered, both the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 form flow paths that are inclined downward by 6 degrees. On the other hand, the second flow path component 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, so it is less affected by the installation angle and can be considered to be inclined at about 5 degrees, as described above.

In this case, the acceleration of the balls flowing down through the sorting device 300 is the same in the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336, and the acceleration is slightly smaller in the second flow path component 335. This allows the speed at which the balls flow down in the left and right directions to be slowed down, making it easier for the player to see the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335. Also, since the first flow path component 334 remains shorter than the third flow path component 336, the balls can pass through the first flow path component 334 in a shorter time than they pass through the third flow path component 336.

In this way, the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the laying of the pachinko machine 10 because it has flow paths in the front-to-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each flow path component 334, 336 is made smaller than the laying angle (approximately 1 degree), the flow direction of the balls in the flow path components 334, 336 will change (reverse) depending on the quality of the laying (angle setting), so the inclination angle needs to be set to an angle larger than the laying angle.

In addition, if the flow path inside the sorting device 300 is configured to allow the balls to flow in the forward and backward directions and is visible, it may be possible to determine the degree of tilt of the pachinko machine 10 from slight differences in the flow speed of the balls flowing down the path. If it is desired to allow the degree of tilt to be determined, the sorting device 300 should be configured so that the flow path is easily visible.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, in order to prevent the degree of "rest" from being understood from slight differences in the speed at which the ball flows down, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are arranged to surround the front periphery of each flow path component 334-336, the variable winning device 65 is arranged to cover the upper side, and the light diffusion surface 340 is arranged to reduce visibility on the lower side.

In this way, the visibility of the balls flowing down each flow path component 334-336 is made poor except at the player's normal line of sight (a range of 0 degrees to approximately 30 degrees from the front). This makes it possible to avoid the degree of "rest" of the pachinko machine 10 being understood by comparing the flow speed of the balls flowing down each flow path component 334-336.

In the first embodiment, the inclination of the first flow path component 334 is greater than the inclination of the third flow path component 336, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the relationship of the inclinations may be reversed, or the inclinations may be the same.

In addition, each of the flow path configuration sections 334 to 336 has been described as a straight flow path that is bent to form a spiral flow path, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may have a meandering shape, or may have a flow path that is bent in a staircase shape.

In addition, the flow paths are configured to be bent at right angles at the connection points of each flow path configuration section 334-336, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow paths may be bent at acute angles or obtuse angles at the connection points. Also, a crane may be used as each of the flow path configuration sections 334-336.

In the first embodiment, the third flow path component 336 is designed so that the time required for a ball to pass through it is 0.3 seconds, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the third flow path component 336 may be designed so that the time required for the ball to pass through it is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). This allows the balls flowing upstream down the third flow path component 336 to function as a screen for the balls flowing downstream down the third flow path component 336, even if the balls enter the sorting device 300 while maintaining the launch interval (0.6 seconds).

In the first embodiment, the flow time of the ball is ensured by ensuring the path length of the flow path components 334-336, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, it is also possible to provide long, alternating ridges that protrude from both inner walls of the path up to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction that intersects with the flow direction of the game ball, and to configure the ball to decelerate by colliding with these ridges. This makes it possible to ensure the flow time of the ball without increasing the path length.

The deceleration ridges may be evenly arranged over the entire range of the path up to the slide displacement member 370, or may be unevenly arranged. For example, by forming no ridges on the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 335, and forming ridges only on the third flow path component 336, the balls can be made to quickly reach the third flow path component 336 while flowing slowly down the third flow path component 336.

The protrusions may be provided in a direction such that they protrude alternately from the left and right directions toward the inside of the path along the ball's flow path, or they may be provided in a direction that protrudes upward from the bottom at a specified interval.

When protruding from the left and right, the load applied to the ball from the protrusion has a left and right component, so it is preferable to consider the placement so that this load does not erroneously guide the ball to the normal detection sensor SE12. For example, at the position closest to the sliding displacement member 370, by protruding from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inner portions, the load from the protrusions is directed not toward the normal detection sensor SE12 but toward the partition plate portion 338, making it easier to avoid the ball being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

When protruding from below to above, the protrusion itself may function as a screen for the sliding displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the formation height and formation position taking into account the player's line of sight.

The protrusions may be formed so that they can move in and out. In this case, they may be able to block the flow of the ball when in the protruding state, and resume the flow of the ball when in the retracted state.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the slide displacement member 370 is covered by the balls flowing down the front side is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be placed in front of the sorting device 300, and the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 may be covered by this decorative member. This decorative member may be driven, or may be operated by the weight of the balls.

In addition, the case where the ball provides a screen is not limited to the case where the ball is placed on the front side. For example, if a mirror is placed on the back side of the sliding displacement member 370 and the state of the sliding displacement member 370 is visually confirmed using the reflection of the mirror, the screen function can be achieved by placing the ball between the sliding displacement member 370 and the mirror.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which the balls that reach the slide displacement member 370 are concealed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning opening 64 may be positioned behind the play area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning opening 64 may be concealed, or the other general winning openings 63 may be concealed.

In the above first embodiment, the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 are described as being formed from linear flow paths capable of guiding balls one by one, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be formed as meandering flow paths, or flow paths that branch into multiple paths, or they may be configured to have different flow path widths, with balls more likely to remain in the areas where the flow path width is large.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which a blindfolding effect is created by the balls heading toward the slide displacement member 370, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging balls that have entered the other winning holes 63, 64, 65, and 140 may be arranged in front of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, arranged so as to intersect at the front side), and the slide displacement member 370 may be blindfolded by the discharge path and the balls arranged on the discharge path.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which balls that enter the specific winning port 65a flow exclusively through the first flow path component 334 to the second flow path component 335 side (the near side), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism that distributes balls may be disposed downstream of the specific winning port 65a, and the distribution mechanism may select balls that flow to the second flow path component 335 side, so that some of the balls flow to the second flow path component 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be one that is displaced by the weight of the balls, or may be driven by a drive device to perform a certain operation from the opening and closing of the opening and closing plate 65b, or may be controlled to operate in a certain pattern from the power-on of the pachinko machine.

When controlling the drive, for example, the balls may be controlled to flow to the second flow path component 335 side when the type of winning ball changes. For example, when a ball enters a specific winning port 65a and the number of balls that enter exceeds the count number (10 balls/round) (excess winning), the balls may be configured to flow to the second flow path component 335 side. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 side can be compared with the number of excess winning balls paid out, allowing the player to quickly grasp the additional profit that can be obtained. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

Also, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down the distribution device 300, if a ball enters when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is four (full), the ball may be configured to flow to the second flow path configuration section 335 side. In this case, by visually checking the ball flowing on the second flow path configuration section 335 side, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols 1 is full. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

If the displacement is caused by the weight of the ball, a predetermined action may be repeated each time a ball arrives, or it may be configured to perform a different action depending on the number of arriving balls. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the balls may not flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335, and when two or more balls enter the specific winning openings 65a together, the balls may flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335. The reverse may also be possible.

Furthermore, these operating modes may be the same downstream of the detection sensors SE1 arranged in a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right.

Here, if it takes a long time for the balls to flow down from the specific winning opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370, the long ball discharge time may result in the game being drawn out. For this reason, for example, the above-mentioned distribution mechanism may be used to cause the first certain balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a to flow down the second flow path configuration part 335, and subsequent balls may be discharged without passing through the second flow path configuration part 335. This eliminates the need to wait for the count number of balls to finish flowing down the flow path configuration parts 334-336, and therefore the length between rounds can be set to be short.

In the first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is disposed below the third pattern display device 81, and the balls are directed toward the front near the bottom end of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the specific winning port 65a may be disposed above the bottom edge of the third pattern display device 81, and the flow path components 334-336 of the distribution device 300 may be disposed adjacent to the third pattern display device 81 or toward the front of the display area when viewed from the front.

In this case, the line of sight for viewing the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 can be directed toward the display area of the third pattern display device 81. In this case, by associating the amount of profit the player can obtain from the flow of the balls down the sorting device 300 with the content of the notification on the LCD display, the player can easily know whether the profit he or she has obtained is large or small by checking the display.

In addition, although a case has been described in which the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 are seen in a position shifted downward in front view with respect to the balls rolling on the third flow path component 336, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 may be configured in an arrangement relationship such that they are seen overlapping, without being shifted up or down in front view with respect to the balls rolling on the third flow path component 336. In this case, not only the balls that have entered the sorting device 300, but also the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 can function as a screen for the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In the above first embodiment, the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370 is described as switching the slide displacement member 370 to the front position at a time when the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a cannot reach it, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to switch to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the forward flow ball that reaches the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds have passed can be made to enter the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that follows the forward flow ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds has passed will enter the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

If the trailing ball is positioned to blind the forward flow ball, the player will not be able to see when the forward flow ball's flow changes (downward) toward the special chance detection sensor SE11, because the trailing ball will hide it. Furthermore, since the trailing ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, the player is likely to believe that the ball has not entered the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through-hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, which improves the presentation effect of the display in gaming machines that maintain the player's sense of anticipation by displaying the time-saving state and the probability variation state in the same way.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which a ball that collides with the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not flow to the normal detection sensor SE12 side due to the load caused by the collision alone, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flow path upstream of the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured so that the speed and rotation of the ball before being guided to the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured in multiple types (for example, by arranging a crane or widening the path width to increase the freedom of the ball's flow direction), and it can be configured so that the ball can be guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the load caused by the collision with the left and right inner protrusions 318 alone depending on the difference in the speed and rotation of the ball.

In the above first embodiment, the sliding displacement member 370 and each of the protruding portions 317 to 319 are formed as separate bodies, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the protruding portions 317 to 319 may be integrally formed with the sliding displacement member 370. In other words, at least one of the protruding portions 317 to 319 may protrude from the upper protruding portion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is described as operation pattern Y, which takes into account the possibility of being hidden by the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to incorporate control that causes the LED of the light-emitting means 351 to emit light when it is hidden by the ball.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by the shape of the guide slot 616 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width length of the guide slot 616 to form an external phase of the gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed by using magnetic force or the biasing force of a coil spring.

In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 is configured to have a shape that is bent at an intermediate position, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slot may be configured to have a shape that is bent multiple times. In this case, multiple positions can be formed where the resistance to the vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

The shape of the guide slot 616 may also be designed for the purpose of varying the magnitude of the change in angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620. For example, the guide slot 616 may be formed in a shape capable of guiding the supported member 640 so as to partially form a range in which the magnitude of the angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620 can be maintained.

In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 is fixed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a plurality of guide slots 616 may be formed through which the axis O1 can move, and the guide slot 616 through which the axis O1 is guided may be switched by a predetermined switching means (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that is switched by contacting the rotating member 620), or the guide slot 616 may be configured to be shape-changeable.

In the first embodiment described above, a configuration was described in which the first performance surface 661a faces diagonally forward and left when the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned to the right of the third pattern display device 81, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the performance surface may be configured to face diagonally forward and right when positioned to the left of the third pattern display device 81, or the performance surface may be configured to face diagonally forward and upward (downward) when positioned below (upper) the third pattern display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged at the base end of the displacement, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and a linearly displaceable member may be arranged at the base end of the displacement. On the other hand, using the rotating member 620 instead of a linearly displaceable member functions favorably in ensuring the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

For example, when a laterally sliding member is fixed to the driven side of the supported member 640, the angles that affect the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are limited to angles above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.). In contrast, when the rotating member 620 is used, not only angles above the horizontal but also angles below the horizontal (angle b1, etc.) can be used. Regardless of this advantageous effect, a linearly sliding member may be connected to the driven side of the supported member 640.

In the above first embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped, and decorations are applied to three sides that intersect at right angles, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and each side may be configured to be controlled to stop in a position facing forward.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch between displays that are easily viewed as one with the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700.

In the first embodiment, the rotation axis of the rotating member 620 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can intersect at a right angle, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 may be configured with a component in the front-to-rear direction as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the above first embodiment, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is set to make it easier to maintain the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet may be arranged near the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and this magnet may be configured to generate an adhesive force between itself and a magnet arranged on the right front plate member 710, so that this adhesive force is easily generated when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state.

In addition, for example, the inclined portions 751, 762 may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape, rather than being formed linearly. In addition, when using the coil spring CS2, the spring is not limited to a spring that generates a biasing force only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, and may be configured to generate a biasing force in response to the extension displacement of the coil spring CS2.

In the above first embodiment, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c are elastically deformed to maintain the position of the shaft rotating member 785 until the attractive force of the magnet Mg is exceeded, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of elastic deformation of the gear, a tolerance may be set for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support tube that supports the shaft.

In the first embodiment, the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front side from the rear end of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may protrude forward by downward displacement. In this case, it may go beyond the upper edge of the center frame 86 from below to the front, or it may protrude forward from above the play area (for example, above the front frame 14).

In the first embodiment described above, the rotation of the covering member 787 is in the opposite direction, so that the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 are not visible together, thereby reducing the distinguishing ability, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 may rotate facing outward to the left and right, rather than facing the front side. Also, even if they rotate in the same direction, they may be configured to rotate at different rotation angles.

In the first embodiment described above, the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800 are configured to rotate (reverse) the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member 834 using the rotation angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in a single stroke in the metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 and a protruding piece protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotation timing of the rotating member 834 can be determined depending on the design of the groove.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which control is performed such that it is determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation when the output of the detection sensor 813 changes from a state in which the detectable portion 844 is arranged on the detection sensor 813, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the drive direction of the drive motor 861 is reversed with the detectable portion 844 not arranged on the detection sensor 813, it may be determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation by detecting that the detectable portion 844 has entered the detection sensor 813.

In the first embodiment, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are configured to differ in places, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be disposed on both decorative members 870 and 880, or both decorative members 870 and 880 may be plated.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by providing a torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. Note that in the case of an oil damper, resistance continues to be generated at all times regardless of switching of the operating mode, so a torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotation direction after the operating mode is switched to the integral rotation operation, making it easier to achieve high-speed rotation after switching to the integral rotation operation.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plating portion 871a has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During the integral rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833. However, when the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the tip side (outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 during the switching rotation operation, the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 is exposed, so that the light LD1 can be reflected.

In the first embodiment described above, the lower bottom surface of the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward to the left and right inward, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the first flow path component 334 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left and right direction, or may be configured to be inclined downward to the left and right inward. The former is more effective at reducing the momentum of the ball toward the second flow path component 335 than the latter.

In addition, for example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the second flow path component 335 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) in the front-to-rear direction, or may be configured to be inclined downward toward the rear. The former is more effective at reducing the momentum of the ball toward the third flow path component 336 than the latter.

In addition, although the third flow path component 336 has been described as having a rolling surface (bottom surface) that slopes downward inward in the left-right direction, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path component 336 may be configured to be non-sloping in the left-right direction (parallel to the horizontal plane). In this case, the degree to which the balls are biased toward the partition plate portion 338 decreases, so the degree of damage to the partition plate portion 338 due to collisions and friction with the balls can be kept low.

In the first embodiment, the optical axis of the outer light-emitting means 351d is arranged outside the trajectory of the ball passing through the branching point, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the optical axis of the outer light-emitting means 351d may be configured to pass inside the trajectory of the ball passing through the branching point (by lowering the arrangement position). In this case, when the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned on, the ball passing through the branching point overlaps with the optical axis of the outer light-emitting means 351d, so that the light can be configured to be reflected to the back side, and a state in which the light does not reach the light diffusion surface 333b (dark state) can be achieved.

In other words, the outer light-emitting means 351d remains lit, and the manner in which the ball flows down at the branching point can be correlated with the brightness of the light diffusion surface 333b (and the light diffusion surfaces 314c and 340 illuminated by the light diffused from the light diffusion surface 333b). Since each of the light diffusion surfaces 314c, 333b, and 340 has a larger area (projected area) at the player's line of sight than the ball, the player can easily grasp the manner in which the ball flows down at the branching point.

In the above first embodiment, the timing for controlling the illumination of the light emitting means 351 was described as during a jackpot game, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination may be controlled due to the detection of a win in the winning slots 63, 64, 140, etc., or due to an input operation of the frame button 22, or due to the occurrence of a win exceeding a prescribed number (the number of winning balls that determines the end of a round of play in a jackpot game, the maximum number of pending changes based on balls entering the winning slots 64, 140).

In the above first embodiment, if the operation of the sliding displacement member 370 is defective, the assembly position of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is defective, and therefore, by checking the operation of the sliding displacement member 370, the quality of the assembly of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 can be determined during the manufacturing stage. However, this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a detection sensor that detects the position of the sliding displacement member 370 may be provided to detect the operation of the sliding displacement member 370 during operation. In this case, if the positional relationship between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 becomes misaligned due to repeated operation or the influence of some external force, even if this does not appear during the manufacturing stage, the occurrence of the misalignment can be determined by the malfunction of the sliding displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 that switches the direction of the ball flow at the branch point BP1 is a linear displacement in the forward and backward directions, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a rotational movement (e.g., a roulette type), or a shape that makes the ball flow irregularly (e.g., a funnel-shaped crane) may be provided so that the ball can flow in multiple directions.

In the first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is used as a device for switching whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be used as a device for guiding the ball to the starting winning port (winning port 64, 140), or as a device for guiding the ball to the specific winning port 65a, or as a device for guiding the ball to other winning ports or winning areas.

In the first embodiment, the sorting device 300 is placed in the lower corner of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sorting device 300 may be placed in the upper corner of the play area (e.g., above the center frame 86), or in the left or right corner (outside the left or right edges of the center frame 86), or in the center of the play area. For example, when placed in the upper corner of the play area, the line of sight of the player looking at the sorting device 300 is inclined diagonally upward from the horizontal plane, so the downstream balls can be configured to hide the upstream balls in the flow path portion that slopes downward toward the front side.

In addition, the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 may be configured to have a structure with an inclination that is reversed front to back, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged near the fixed member 161.

In the above first embodiment, the shape of the window portion 162d is described as being designed based on the shape of the flow path configuration portions 335, 336 in a front view and the arrangement of the seal member 313, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be such that (only) the slide displacement member 370 is visible from the player's line of sight (viewed diagonally downward), or the shape may be such that the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is reduced. Also, the shape may be such that the slide displacement member 370 is visible from either the front or rear position and not visible from the other.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the flow path components 334 to 336 are configured as a pair on the left and right sides so that they do not merge, which reduces the number of balls that enter one flow path (disperses the balls), making it easier to avoid ball clogging, while allowing the sliding displacement member 370 to switch the paths of any of the balls that have passed through each flow path.

In this regard, the shape of the window portion 162d may be such that only one of the pair of left and right components of the slide displacement member 370 (e.g., ball guide portion 371b, upper protrusion portion 376) is visible and the other is not. In this case, the player can predict the path of the ball on the side that is not visible, which increases the player's interest.

In the above first embodiment, the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 from the state where the ball can land on the ball guiding portion 371b is set to the backward direction (the forward direction of the ball's travel direction flowing down the third flow path component 336), and the sliding suppresses the ball's forward rotation, thereby suppressing the amount of rotation just before the ball falls, making it appear to the player that the ball is temporarily stopped, but this is not necessarily limited to the above.

For example, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from a state in which the ball can rest on the ball guide portion 371b may be configured to be a forward direction (the opposite direction to the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336).

That is, the ball guide portion 371b is displaced forward, and the ball guide portion 371b enters the lower side of the third flow path component 336, thereby enabling the probability change detection sensor SE11 to be opened. The upper protrusion portion 376 is constructed separately from the ball guide portion 371b, and is positioned so that it protrudes toward the branch point BP1 side when the ball can land on the ball guide portion 371b. When the ball guide portion 371b is displaced to a state where the ball cannot land on it, the upper protrusion portion 376 displaces in the opposite direction at the same time as the displacement of the ball guide portion 371b, ensuring a passage for the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this case, the ball's forward rotation can be accelerated by the sliding of the ball guide portion 371b against the ball as it slides, increasing the amount of rotation just before the ball falls, making it appear to the player that the ball has fallen instantly (smoothly).

In the first embodiment described above, the rotating member 620 is controlled in such a way that the power supply to the drive motor 631 is cut off when the extension portion 634b is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, taking into consideration the inertial load applied to the rotating member 620 after the power supply to the drive motor 631 is cut off, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the detection sensor KS1 detects that the extension portion 634b is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, the drive power of the drive motor 631 may be reduced and the drive motor 631 may be rotated weakly for a short period of time before being stopped. This allows the rotating member 620 to reliably reach the displacement end position (the position for the performance standby state).

In the above first embodiment, the grooves of the front-upper inclined portions 714, 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 of the second operating unit 700 are described as being made up of straight inclined grooves, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by making the grooves have a partial curve, such as curving forward at the lower end, the displacement of the performance device 780 can be a displacement mode that combines up-down sliding displacement, forward-backward sliding displacement, and forward-backward posture displacement.

The grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 may have various shapes. For example, they may be V-shaped (or inverted V-shaped) when viewed from the left and right, or may be curved in an S-shape.

In the above first embodiment, the reversing operation of the second operating unit 700 is described as being performed by delaying the start timing of the reversing operation using magnetic force, thereby displacing the members to avoid collision between each other (for example, the main body member 771 and the covering member 787, the drive motor 782 and the covering member 787), but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a design method may be used that avoids collision between the components by setting the number of gears between the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785.

In the above first embodiment, the second operating unit 700 is described as being in an extended state at the upper end position, with the tip of the pivot arm member 720 positioned at a left-right position that coincides with the left-right center of the performance device 780, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by positioning the tip of the pivot arm member 720 to the right of the left-right center of the performance device 780, a long support position distance can be ensured between the metal bar 702 supporting the left side of the lifting plate member 740 and the pivot arm member 720 supporting the right side of the lifting plate member 740. This allows the lifting plate member 740 to be stably supported.

In the above third operating unit 800, the bulge 824a is configured as a part that remains unchanged in shape and is visible to the player regardless of whether the decorative members 870, 880 are in an individual combined state or a combined state, and in both the individual combined state and the combined state, the bulge 824a is visible to the player as a part (central part). This explains the case where the bulge 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885 are designed to have shapes that minimize discomfort with each other, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a display device (segment display device or liquid crystal display device) may be disposed in a positional relationship in which the display unit is disposed in front of the bulge portion 824a. In this case, unlike when the visibility of the bulge portion 824a is changed by changing the irradiation mode (brightness or color) of the light from the inner light-emitting portion 823a, the object visible in the bulge portion 824a can be changed by switching the display mode of the display unit, thereby improving the freedom of presentation.

Also, for example, the shape of the covering portion 875, 885 of either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 may be redesigned to extend toward the center of the circular shape in the combined state, and the extended portion may be configured to cover the bulge portion 824a. In this case, in either the individual combined state or the combined state, the bulge portion 824a can be hidden so that it is not visible to the player, thereby reducing the degree of restriction on the design freedom of the bulge portion 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885.

In the first embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is described as having multiple decorative members 870, 880 that are attracted to each other by magnetic force, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the combined state may be maintained by a load caused by a concave-convex engagement, or the combined state may be maintained by the biasing force of a spring member.

In the above first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is realized by setting the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 of the third operating unit 800 to be smaller than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting an operating mode that creates momentum, the switching rotation operation can be realized even when the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is equal to or greater than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866.

As an example of an operation mode that creates momentum, rotation control in the reverse direction may be used as a preparatory operation (preparatory movement). In this case, a reaction force can be applied to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880, and a load can be generated in a direction that throws the intermediate arm member 850 radially outward from the position in the combined state. This makes it easier to release the magnetic attraction.

In the first embodiment, as a measure to suppress wobbling during the switching rotation operation of the third operating unit 800, a case was described in which the decorative members 870, 880 are configured to cause radial displacement before the reversing operation, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the magnet Mg2 is configured to be arranged so that the line of action of the magnetic force can be written on the plane on which the metal rod 832 as the rotation axis of the reversing operation is arranged, even if the reversing operation occurs before the radial displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 from the combined state, the magnetic force generated between the multiple (five) decorative members 870, 880 occurs on the same plane, so that wobbling generated in the third operating unit 800 during the switching rotation operation can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment described above, the switching rotation operation is configured in such a way that the decorative members 870, 880 are rotated 180 degrees, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be configured to be combined again with a 120-degree rotation operation. In this case, it is possible to perform an action presentation in which the side visible when viewed from the front of the decorative members 870, 880 is the same before and after the switching rotation operation, but the angle at which the covering portions 875, 885 are visible is different (for example, 60 degrees to the right before the operation and 60 degrees to the left after the operation).

In addition, the structure of the multiple intermediate arm members 850 may be configured so that, for example, the lengths are not common, or the formation range or shape of the bevel tooth portion 854c is not common, so that decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure the combined state by a 180-degree inversion operation and decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure the combined state by a 120-degree inversion operation coexist in the switching rotation operation. For example, of the five decorative members 870, 880, one decorative member 870, 880 may be configured to be inverted 120 degrees in the switching rotation operation, and the other (four) decorative members 870, 880 may be configured to be inverted 180 degrees in the switching rotation operation.

The angle of the reversal operation in the switching rotation operation can be set arbitrarily. It can be 180 degrees or 120 degrees as mentioned above, or it can be set to 0 degrees, 360 degrees, or any angle between 0 degrees and 360 degrees.

In the first embodiment, the torque limiters 866 are arranged in a pair, one on the left and one on the right, in asymmetric positions above the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, they may be arranged in symmetric positions, both of the pair of torque limiters 866 may be arranged on the left, right or lower side of the outer rotating member 840, or they may be arranged on opposing sides (directly opposite sides) across the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which multiple (five in the first embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 are configured with a common shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shapes of the supported holes 854a and guide holes 854b in which the linear motion members 833 that slide along the metal rod 832 are disposed may be made different, so that the start timing of the sliding displacement along the metal rod 832 differs between the linear motion members 833.

For example, by mixing an intermediate arm member 850 in which the design has been modified to form the supported hole 854a as a long hole or a hole with a large diameter, and the shape of the guide hole 854b has been correspondingly modified, it is possible to provide a difference in the timing at which the linear member 833 starts to move during the switching rotation operation.

This allows the decorative members 870, 880, which are fastened to the rotating member 834 connected to the linear member 833, to have a difference in the timing of their radial outward displacement from the combined state, so that the attracted portions of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 can be separated in the shear direction (radial direction).

In this case, the load required to remove the suction can be reduced, so the driving force required for the drive motor 862 can be reduced and the positioning of the third operating unit 800 can be stabilized.

It is not necessary that the displacement mode that causes displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) in the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 occurs every time. For example, the displacement mode that causes displacement in the shear direction may be configured to occur when a switching rotation operation is performed from the combined state (forward path), but not to occur when the combined state is reached by the switching rotation operation (return path).

For example, by configuring the design of the intermediate arm member 850 so that the displacement mode is different between the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 rotates from the combined state (the state in which the rotating tip is located on the rotating shaft side of the inner rotating member 830) to the state in which the decorative members 870, 880 are located at the outermost diameter position, and the state in which the intermediate arm part i850 rotates from the state in which the decorative members 870, 880 are located at the outermost diameter position to the combined state, it is possible to selectively generate a displacement mode that generates a displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) in the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2.

In the first embodiment, the number of detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, 813 for each operation unit 600, 700, 800 is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of one detection sensor KS1, multiple detection sensors KS1 may be configured to be arranged at positions where they can detect the extension portion 634b, and instead of three detection sensors 713, two or less or four or more detection sensors 713 may be used. Note that an example of the arrangement of the detection sensor KS1 is a position where it can detect the extension portion 634b in the intermediate performance state or the extended state of the first operation unit 600.

Also, for example, only one of the two detection sensors 778d may be used, or instead of one detection sensor 813, multiple detection sensors 813 may be arranged in positions that can detect the detected portion 844. For example, five detection sensors 813 may be arranged at equal intervals on the circumference to determine the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state of the third operating unit 800 in five different ways (five different patterns depending on the direction of rotation).

In the second embodiment above, a case was described in which the ball continues to roll regardless of the position of the slide member 2420, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 in the front position FP and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314 of the upper member 310 may be configured to be the same length as the diameter of the ball. In this case, when the slide member 2420 is in the front position FP, the ball can be sandwiched between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314, which enhances the deceleration effect of the ball and makes it easier for the ball to become stuck.

In the second embodiment described above, there is no description of forming a protrusion on the inside of the first flow path forming portion 2334, but the first flow path forming portion 2334 may be configured to have a protrusion for decelerating the ball. In this case, the height of the protrusion may be set to a height that abuts either the ball resting on the slide member 2420 in the front position FP or the ball resting on the bottom surface 2334c when the slide member 2420 is in the rear position BP, but does not abut the other. In this case, the deceleration effect of the protrusion can be generated when the slide member 2420 is in either the front position FP state or the rear position BP state.

In the above third embodiment, the sliding displacement member 3370 is described as being formed integrally with the thin plate portion 371 and the upper front protrusion portion 3376b and the upper lateral protrusion portion 3376c, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper front protrusion portion 3376b and the upper lateral protrusion portion 3376c, which are separate members, may appear and disappear in the vertical direction in accordance with the timing at which the thin plate portion 371 is positioned at the front position and the rear position, thereby forming a state in which the ball is abutted and a state in which it is not abutted.

The front-to-rear arrangement of the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is not limited in any way, but placing the special chance detection sensor SE11 at the rear, as in this embodiment, makes it easier to avoid erroneous winning into the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In the fourth embodiment, the sliding plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373, and the sliding plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally formed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, these may be configured as separate members and configured to operate synchronously (linked) by matching the timing. In addition, they may be configured to slide in the forward and backward directions.

In the above fourth embodiment, when the slide members 4371, 4375 slide and displace when the ball passes rearward over the upper surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372, the ball is returned to the front due to the inclination of the upper surface 4376a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional ball entry detection sensor may be arranged behind the slide plate 4372 in the front open state.

In this case, it can be configured so that only the ball that was on the slide plate 4372 when the state changed from the rear open state to the front open state is guided to the additional ball entry detection sensor. The greater the benefit that the player can obtain by the ball entering the additional ball entry detection sensor (for example, the acquisition of multiple jackpots or the acquisition of the right to move to a higher probability state, which is greater than the right obtained by the ball entering the probability change detection sensor SE11), the greater the attention paid to the ball that has passed through the third flow path configuration portion 336.

In the sixth embodiment, the flow path from the raised floor 6342 at the downstream end of the merging flow path 6341 is configured as a flow path along the left-right direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a curved flow path with the connection point JP1 side facing backward near the raised floor 6342. This allows both the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the raised floor 6342 and the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the second flow path configuration part 335 to have a backward velocity component, and it is possible to prevent backflow from occurring due to collision between them.

The connection point JP1 may be configured to be located at the center of the left and right of the sorting device 6300. The flow path components 334-336 may also be configured to have a structure with an inclination that is reversed front to back, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and normal detection sensor SE12 may be configured to be located near the fixed member 161. In this case, it is easier for the balls to gather at the connection point JP1 and then flow down to the front, improving the attention to the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 6300.

In the above ninth embodiment, the guide elongated hole 9616 is configured as a branched elongated hole, and the way in which the axis O1 passes through the guide elongated hole 9616 is changed depending on how a load is applied to the axis O1. However, this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the guide elongated hole 9616 may be switched. That is, in the guide elongated hole 9616, only the straight portion 616a is always configured as a long hole, and the curved portion 616b, the angle maintaining portion 9616c, and the connecting portion 9616d may be configured to alternate between being configured as a long hole and being blocked. In this case, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced along an incorrect path, and therefore to prevent the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

For example, the long guide hole 9616 having a branch may be configured to include a switching valve that limits the displacement path of the axis O1 by blocking one of the paths. In this case, while the shape of the long guide hole 9616 is fixed, the switching valve can limit the displacement path of the axis O1, preventing the axis O1 from displacing along an incorrect path, thereby preventing the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from displacing in an unintended manner.

<First control example>
Hereinafter, control examples of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to Fig. 118 to Fig. 87, a control example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first control example. Fig. 118 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, Fig. 119 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, Fig. 120 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of a variable winning device 65 provided in the front view area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 118, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 118), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 119) having numerous ball entry ports 63, 64, 640 through which numerous nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 137) that launches balls into the front area (game area) of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. The details of the numerous ball entry ports provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 118) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top and extends to the front, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 118), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 21). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 119) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks by lighting or blinking the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 118), is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 119) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operation handle 51 includes a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the period of pressing, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the rotation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the rotation amount, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, so that the ball is shot into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. In addition, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off. In other words, in this control example, the control device has a launching means for launching the ball into the game area formed on the game board 13, and a launch strength varying means for varying the launch strength based on the rotation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51. This allows the player to perform the action of firing a ball using the firing means and the action of varying the firing strength of the ball, simply by operating the operating handle 51. Therefore, the operation of firing a ball toward a specific play area among the play areas formed on the game board 13 can be performed with one hand, and the player can play the game without imposing an excessive burden on him/her.

In this control example, the firing strength is varied based on the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a firing strength selection button may be provided that allows the player to select the firing strength, and the firing means may fire the ball at a firing strength that corresponds to the operation result (selection result) of the firing strength selection button.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 119, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, a general ball entrance 63, a first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, a normal pattern starter gate (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 118). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can see various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 118) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 119.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 118) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 137) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of FIG. 119) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of FIG. 119) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

A first pattern display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. This first pattern display device 37 is arranged so that it is covered by the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the play area) of the game board 13, which is made of transparent resin (e.g., ABS), and is configured so that the launched ball does not collide with the first pattern display device 37.

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs and a seven-segment display as light-emitting means. The first pattern display device 37 displays according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20), and mainly displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this control example, the first pattern display device 37 is configured to be operable when a ball enters (wins) the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In other words, the first pattern display device 37 is a display means for showing the results of the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. In this control example, a pachinko machine 10 having two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is used, so the results of the two types of special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) are displayed on the first symbol display device 37. However, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 has only one type of special symbol (first special symbol), a display area corresponding to one type of special symbol can be provided on the first symbol display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 also uses LEDs to indicate the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, normal state, time-saving state, or probability change state) by the lighting state, whether the special symbol (first symbol) is changing (dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols to show the lottery result) by the lighting state, whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, a symbol corresponding to a jackpot that is unfavorable to the player, or a miss symbol by the lighting state, and indicates the number of reserved balls by the lighting state, and displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors using a 7-segment display device. It is also configured to be able to indicate by the lighting state that the change of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted). The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light-emitting colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the light-emitting colors. In this control example, various game states are indicated by a combination of light emission colors from the light-emitting means (7-segment display device), but any configuration that allows the player to distinguish various game states will suffice. For example, various game states may be indicated by varying the length of the period when the light-emitting means is on and off (blinking pattern).

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is held when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (a prize is won). Then, in the lottery for the special symbols, a judgment is made as to whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery). Here, based on the judgment that a jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed, which is a special game state advantageous to the player.

When a jackpot game is played, the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is in an open state where it is easy to enter the ball, and a game is played in which many prize balls can be won in a short period of time by entering the specific winning port 65a. This jackpot game is played (if) after the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed as a stop (confirmed display), and the jackpot game period is set to include an opening period of a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) (a period in which a closed state is set so that it is difficult for balls to enter the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65), a round game period in which the open state is set, an interval period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) until the next round game starts after one round game period has ended, and an ending period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) after the last round game period has ended.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special pattern indicating a jackpot win is displayed as a static display (confirmed display), preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction in time with the timing when the specific winning port 65a opens during the jackpot game, making it possible to play the jackpot game smoothly. In addition, this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, making it possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting an ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a new lottery for a special symbol from being held immediately after the last round of play ends, so that preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction for the game to be played after the jackpot game ends, allowing for a smooth switch between games.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, multiple types of jackpot games can be executed, and the number of rounds played during the jackpot game (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not a jackpot has been won by drawing special patterns, but also in the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time of winning.

The length of each period (opening period, round period, ending period) of the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol may be set to a different length depending on the game state set at the time of the jackpot win and the type of jackpot won. For example, if a jackpot is won in which the game content executed after the jackpot game ends is set to a different game content than the game content at the time of the jackpot win, the ending period of that jackpot game (e.g., 10 seconds) can be set to be longer than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds), and a performance can be configured to be executed that informs the player in advance of the game content executed after the jackpot game ends during that ending period. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, if a player wins a jackpot where the game content at the time of the jackpot win and the game content executed after the jackpot play end are the same, it is advisable to configure the ending period of that jackpot (e.g., 1 second) to be shorter than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds). This allows the player to play efficiently.

In addition, without using a configuration that actually distinguishes between the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content executed after the jackpot game ends, for example, the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends can be predefined based on the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time the jackpot is won, and the ending period of each jackpot game can be predefined according to the predefined content.

A specific explanation will be given later, but the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured to be able to set three types of game states by combining two states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the lottery for special symbols (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for special symbols) and two states with different probabilities of winning the lottery for normal symbols (high probability state for normal symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) which will be described later. Specifically, it is configured to be able to set a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and a probability-changing state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). Both the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are configured so that it is easier to win in a high probability state than in a low probability state, so of the multiple game states that can be set on the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the high probability state is the game state in which it is easier to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery than in other game states, and the high probability state and the time-saving state are the game states in which it is easier to win a jackpot in the normal symbol lottery than in other game states.

In addition, if the normal symbol lottery is won, a winning game (normal symbol winning game) is executed in which the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed. Specifically, the electric role 640 attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened, and a normal symbol winning game is executed in which a state in which it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640 is provided. Therefore, when the probability change state and the time-saving state, that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol, are set, the game state is more likely to execute the special symbol lottery than other game states. Furthermore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed (dynamic display period) is more likely to be set to a shorter period than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, when the probability change state and the time-saving state, that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol, are set, the special symbol lottery can be executed in a shorter period than other game states, and the game state is more likely to execute a new special symbol lottery.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, a specific area is provided in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during a jackpot game, and a high probability state of a special pattern can be set after the jackpot game ends only if the ball passes through the specific area during the jackpot game. Then, depending on the type of jackpot won, a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game) and a jackpot game in which the ball is unlikely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game (unfavorable jackpot game) can be executed. Hereinafter, an advantageous jackpot game, i.e., a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game, will be referred to as a variable jackpot game, and a jackpot in which a variable jackpot game is executed will be referred to as a variable jackpot. Also, an unfavorable jackpot game, i.e., a jackpot game in which the ball is unlikely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game, will be referred to as a normal jackpot game, and a jackpot in which a normal jackpot game is executed will be referred to as a normal jackpot.

In this control example, if the special symbol lottery does not result in a jackpot, it is determined to be a miss and no special prize is awarded to the player. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, in some cases where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a miss rather than a jackpot as described above, a small prize game may be executed in which the player is given fewer special prizes than the jackpot described above (for example, a special prize to open the variable winning device 65 for only one round). The first symbol display device 37 not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not (whether it is a small prize or not) as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but if it is a jackpot, a pattern according to the type of jackpot is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 119, the explanation will be continued. On the lower left side of the play area formed on the surface of the playboard 13, there are arranged a plurality of left general ball entrances 63a, through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display of a special pattern executed by the first pattern display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a normal pattern (second pattern) triggered by the passage of a ball through the normal pattern start gate (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three pattern rows (Z1 to Z3) are displayed, one above, one in the middle, and one below (see FIG. 230(a)). The third patterns (decorative patterns that change in response to the changing display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) or the second special pattern (special pattern 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 are each composed of 10 main patterns with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9". These third patterns are scrolled horizontally for each pattern row, so that the third patterns are variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 of this control example displays decoratively in response to the display of the first pattern display device 37, while the display of the game state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20) is performed by the first pattern display device 37. Instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like.

As shown in FIG. 122(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main pattern sz is formed using different types of characters (fish, etc.) for each identification information that resembles a number. In this way, by using characters that correspond to each identification information, the player can be visually notified of the lottery result of the special pattern, allowing the player to play in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main patterns are lined up (for example, "777"), and the jackpot game occurs after the variable display ends. In other words, the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a pattern to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern by the main control device 110.

The main display area Dm displays three pattern rows, Z1, Z2, and Z3, at the top, middle, and bottom. The above-mentioned third patterns are displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the display changes by scrolling left and right periodically for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

Specifically, the upper pattern row Z1 is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and is configured to scroll from right to left as the pattern row changes, while the middle pattern row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and are configured to scroll from right to left as the pattern row changes. Furthermore, in each pattern row, sub-patterns (blank patterns) fz that do not indicate the results of the special pattern lottery are also formed between the main patterns sz. In Figure 122(b), the blank patterns (sub-patterns) fz are displayed using patterns that resemble triangles.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), the main display area Dm has three active lines L1-L3 formed in the vertical direction, and two active lines L4, L5 formed in the diagonal direction. When each of the pattern rows Z1-Z3 is stopped and displayed, if the third pattern (main pattern sz) stops on the active line in a combination of jackpot patterns (in this control example, a combination of the same main patterns), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), in this control example, each pay line (L1-L5) is formed to include the pattern display positions of each of the pattern columns Z1-Z3, so that the lottery result of the corresponding special pattern can be difficult to understand until all of the pattern columns Z1-Z3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the changing display of the third pattern executed in the main display area Dm can be interesting until the last pattern column (middle pattern column V2 in this control example) is stopped and displayed.

In this control example, among the three symbol rows (Z1 to Z3) described above, a specific symbol row (symbol row Z2), i.e., the symbol row among the multiple symbol rows in which the variable display is stopped last, is configured to have a greater number of main symbols than the other symbol rows. Specifically, the number of main symbols with a specific number (e.g., the number "4") is made greater than the other symbol rows. As a result, when the identification information imitating a specific number is in a reach state, the number of jackpot symbols (identification information imitating a specific number) passing on the pay line can be increased compared to when the other identification information is in a reach state, allowing the player to visually predict that there is a high chance of winning the jackpot.

The manner of displaying the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. The patterns displayed in the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a pattern combining an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third pattern. Furthermore, the area in which the third pattern is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific performance is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the variable display area of the third pattern may be made smaller or moved to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), so that it is difficult for the player to know whether the third pattern is changing or not. In addition, the change of the third pattern may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) during the period in which the special pattern is changing, and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special pattern and the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the second special pattern are configured to be the same (including differences to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing between them), but the display mode or display area of the third pattern may be made different to correspond to the type of special pattern that is varying.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 122(b). As shown in FIG. 122(b), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area in which identification information (fourth symbol) is displayed to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is being drawn (changing), and the lottery result), and is configured so that the fourth symbol (fourth symbol of special symbol 1) to indicate the lottery status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), or the fourth symbol (fourth symbol of special symbol 2) to indicate the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

The small display area Dm2 is an area where identification information is displayed to show the lottery status of the normal symbol (whether the lottery is in progress (changing) or not, and the lottery result), and the fourth symbol (normal symbol fourth symbol) to show the lottery status of the normal symbol (normal symbol) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, the lottery status of the special symbol and the lottery status of the normal symbol can be notified to the player. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode imitating figures such as a circle and a cross, and the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 122(b)) to indicate the state in which the special symbol is changing, and the fourth symbol is displayed in a stationary manner in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see the small display area Dm2 in FIG. 122(b)) to indicate the result of the lottery for the special symbol. However, without being limited to this, for example, a display mode using a number as the fourth symbol or a display mode showing multiple colors may be used to indicate that the special symbol is changing by a display mode that changes numbers or colors, and a display mode showing a specific symbol or color may be displayed in a stationary manner to indicate the result of the lottery for the special symbol.

In addition, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the selection status of the special symbol (whether or not it is being selected (changing), and the selection result), but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to only notify whether or not the special symbol is being selected (changing). Also, as shown in FIG. 122(b), in this control example, a fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1) in which the fourth symbol is displayed to indicate the selection status of the special symbol is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm, and a regular fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm2) in which the regular fourth symbol is displayed to indicate the selection status of the regular symbol is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, but the position and size of this fourth symbol display area may be changed depending on the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed in the center part of the main display area Dm.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the area in which the variable presentation is performed from being restricted by the fourth pattern display area or the regular fourth pattern display area, which would reduce the presentation effect. In this case, it is also possible to remove the fourth pattern display area or the regular fourth pattern display area from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and configure it so that the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using a light-emitting means (such as an LED) provided in the variable display device unit 80.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is configured to display reserved patterns corresponding to the number of acquired rights (reserved memory) for the special pattern lottery. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the first pattern display device 37 is performing a variable display or a winning game is being performed, that is, in a state in which a new special pattern lottery cannot be performed, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the number of ball entrances is reserved up to a maximum of four times for each ball entrance. The reserved patterns displayed in the sub-display area Ds are displayed in the same number as the number of reserved ball entrances. In this embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls stored for balls entering the first ball entrance 64 is set to four, and the maximum number of reserved balls stored for balls entering the second ball entrance 640 is set to four, so a maximum of eight reserved patterns are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122(b), the sub-display area Ds is divided into an active area Ds1a and a standby area Ds1b. The standby area Ds1b is an area for displaying reserved patterns in a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls of special patterns, and eight pedestals hr1 to hr8 corresponding to the maximum number of reserved balls that can be stored (8 balls) are displayed in order from the left. Then, when a reserved ball of a special pattern is acquired, the reserved pattern is displayed on the lowest-numbered pedestal among the eight pedestals hr1 to hr8 that does not display a reserved pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 122(b), four reserved balls of the first special pattern are stored in the reserved memory, and in the waiting area Ds1b, four reserved patterns (hz1 to hz4) in a display mode (white circles) corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special pattern (special pattern 1 reserved ball) are displayed on the first base hr1 to the fourth base hr4.

The active area Ds1a is a display area in which the reserved symbol that was displayed in response to the currently active special symbol change is shifted and displayed, and the active reserved symbol hz0 is displayed on the active base hr0. In other words, when a new special symbol change is started, the reserved symbol hz1 that was displayed on the base hr1 of the waiting area Ds1b is shifted to the base hr0 of the active area Ds1a and displayed. By configuring it in this way, for example, when a preview performance (for example, a performance that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol) that indicates the expectation of a jackpot win for the reserved symbol displayed in the waiting area Ds1b is performed, the player can easily tell that a special symbol change corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the preview performance was performed is being performed.

In addition, by making it possible to display the reserved pattern that corresponds to the currently running special pattern change, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved pattern can also be performed on the reserved pattern that corresponds to the currently running special pattern change, so that the player can play the game while expecting the display mode of the reserved pattern to be changed for a longer period of time than if the reserved pattern that corresponds to the currently running special pattern change is not displayed.

In this control example, the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the secondary display area Ds allows the player to distinguish whether the displayed reserved pattern is a reserved pattern indicating a reserved ball of the first special pattern (special pattern 1 reserved pattern) or a reserved pattern indicating a reserved ball of the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved pattern), with the special pattern 1 reserved pattern being displayed as a white circle (see FIG. 122(b)) and the special pattern 2 reserved pattern being displayed as a black circle (see FIG. 124(a)). This allows the player to grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of special pattern, making it easier for the player to decide whether or not to continue playing to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64 based on the display content of the reserved pattern.

As shown in FIG. 122(b), this control example is configured to display reserved patterns in a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to each special pattern, and to execute a special pattern lottery using reserved balls corresponding to the reserved patterns displayed on the lower numbered pedestal (the lowest numbered pedestal is pedestal hr1). In other words, the reserved patterns are displayed in the order in which they are used in the special pattern lottery, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the reserved patterns may be displayed in the order in which the reserved balls were acquired, and consumption order information may be attached to each reserved pattern to indicate the order in which they are used in the special pattern lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player of which reserved pattern the reserved ball acquired at which time corresponds to which reserved pattern.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 122(b), a maximum of eight reserved patterns can be displayed side-by-side, but this is not limited to this, and the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 1 and the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 2 may be configured to be displayed separately. In this case, for example, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to obtain the reserved pattern of special pattern 2 is set, the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 1 may be displayed more prominently than the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 2, and when a game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which it is easy to obtain the reserved pattern of special pattern 2 is set, the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 2 may be displayed more prominently than the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 1.

In the tenth control example, as described with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical, and the same game result is awarded when playing right-handed and when playing left-handed, so it is not displayed. However, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set a game method in which right-handed play is more advantageous than left-handed play and a game method in which left-handed play is more advantageous than right-handed play according to the set game state, for example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a guide display mode to guide the player in the direction to shoot the ball (game direction). By configuring it in this way, the player can easily understand which area of the game board the ball should be shot towards just by visually checking the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area, so that a game machine that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

To explain in more detail, the guidance display area may be configured to display a "right hit" display mode for instructing the player to play right-handed games, and a "left hit" display mode for instructing the player to play left-handed games. The "right hit" display mode may be displayed during a game state in which right-handed games are advantageous to the player, such as a probability change state, a time-saving state, and during a jackpot game, and the "left hit" display mode may be displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) after the end of right-handed games. In addition, when it is detected that right-handed games are being played during a game state in which left-handed games are advantageous to the player, that is, during a normal state, the "left hit" display mode may be displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds). In addition, the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 described in each of the above control examples may be appropriately displayed.

<About the performance content of the first control example>
Next, referring to Figs. 123 to 131, characteristic performance contents among various performance contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of this first control example will be described. First, referring to Fig. 123(a), a display screen when a reach is established in a normal state will be described. Fig. 123(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a reach state is reached in a normal state (normal state). In this control example, the third symbols to be displayed variably are displayed in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2, and when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are displayed as a part of the combination of the third symbols indicating a jackpot win on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see Fig. 122(a)), the reach state is reached, and the effective line on which the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are displayed as a part of the combination of the third symbols indicating a jackpot win is set as the reach effective line, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed variably. After the ready state is reached, the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to variably display each identification information (third symbol) at a slow speed that allows the player to view it (a speed at which it takes about 0.5 seconds for one main symbol (third symbol resembling a number) to move).

As described above, in this control example, the middle pattern row has 10 main patterns (one each of the main patterns numbered "1" to "3" and "5" to "9", and two main patterns numbered "4"), so when the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed in a slow-moving manner, it takes 5 seconds (0.5 x 10) to complete one revolution. The middle pattern row Z2, which is displayed in a slow-moving manner, is then displayed as it is. Alternatively, it is configured to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on the establishment of a specific transition condition.

Furthermore, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 123(a), even if the reach state is reached with any third pattern (in FIG. 123(a), the identification information imitating the number "9" (the third pattern imitating a crab)), the slow-speed variable display is executed so that the identification information imitating the number "1" (the third pattern imitating an octopus) is first visible in the middle pattern row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)) that is displayed in a variable manner during the reach state.

In addition, in this control example, the presentation mode of the variable presentation is configured to be variable depending on the variation mode of the middle pattern row Z2 after the reach state is reached, and is configured to be able to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) when, for example, the middle pattern row Z2 completes one revolution after the reach state is reached (5 seconds after the slow variation display is executed) or when it completes two revolutions (10 seconds after the slow variation display is executed). Therefore, as in this control example, by unifying the identification information of the middle pattern row Z2 that is first visible after the reach state is reached, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand at what point in time the presentation mode (reach mode) will be changed.

In this control example, the timing of changing to a different presentation mode (reach mode) is set to the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one revolution or two revolutions after the reach state is reached, but is not limited thereto. For example, it may be configured to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) at the timing when the identification information (identical information identical to the identification information in the reach stop) that is a combination indicating a jackpot passes the reach effective line after the reach state is reached, or when the identification information shifted by one from the identification information that is a combination indicating a jackpot passes the reach effective line. In this way, by configuring to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on the specific identification information corresponding to the type of identification information in the reach stop passing the reach effective line, it is possible to provide a relationship for the player between the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a combination that is a jackpot and the timing when it changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode). Specifically, if the system is configured so that identification information that results in a combination indicating a jackpot after the reach state is reached (identification information that is the same as the identification information that is stopped when the reach state is reached) changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode) when it passes the reach effective line, the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed stopped in a combination that results in a jackpot and the timing when it changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode) can be made to overlap for the player, so that the player can pay close attention to the changing presentation with great anticipation when the identification information that results in a combination indicating a jackpot (identification information that is the same as the identification information that is stopped when the reach state is reached) approaches the reach effective line.

As described above, in this control example, the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to vary at a slow speed so that a specific identification state (a third symbol that resembles the number "1") is first visible no matter which third symbol is used to reach the reach state. Therefore, for example, if the final combination of third symbols to be stopped and displayed is a combination that is shifted by one type from the combination of third symbols that results in a jackpot (one frame off reach) (if the final stop display mode is determined in advance), a new problem occurs in that the period from when the reach state is reached until all of the third symbols are stopped and displayed (until the final stop display mode is stopped and displayed) differs depending on the type of third symbol that results in the reach state.

Specifically, when the third symbol imitating the number "1" is reached, the middle symbol row Z2 displays the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol in a slow-speed fluctuation manner, so it takes 5.5 seconds (first lap) or 10.5 seconds (second lap) from the time the reach state is reached to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 one frame away from the reach state as the final stop display mode, and when the third symbol imitating the number "6" is reached, the middle symbol row Z2 displays the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol in a slow-speed fluctuation manner, so it takes 8 seconds (first lap) or 13 seconds (second lap) from the time the reach state is reached to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 one frame away from the reach state as the final stop display mode.

Therefore, in order to achieve a reach state with different types of third symbols in a fluctuation pattern in which the same fluctuation time is set, it was necessary to execute a process that calculates backwards from the timing when the third symbol stops and displays to set the timing when the reach state will occur. In other words, there was a problem in that a reach effect was reduced because the period from the fluctuation start timing to the reaching state was changed depending on the type of third symbol that was in the reach state, resulting in an inconsistent reach effect.

In contrast, in this control example, the main control unit 110 determines the variation time of the first pattern to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery when the special pattern lottery is executed, and notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the determined variation time by the variation pattern command. The voice lamp control unit 113 selects a variation display performance of a performance period that matches the variation time notified by the variation pattern command, and executes the variation display performance of the third pattern in synchronization with the variation display of the first pattern. The variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating the basic variation time and an added time command indicating the variation time to be added, and is configured to vary the type of the third pattern that is in a reach state based on the length of the variation time included in the added time command. More specifically, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the added time. On the other hand, if a fluctuation pattern of a 37-second fluctuation time is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the base time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the added time. In other words, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to identify that the fluctuation type is 7 seconds longer than the base time based on the notified content of the added time command. This makes it possible to set the type of third pattern that will be in a reach state simply by checking the content of the added time command.

Next, referring to FIG. 123(b) to FIG. 126, the performance contents related to the second special symbol variation (lottery) executed when the normal state is set will be described. First, referring to FIG. 123(b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the normal symbol variation in which a winning symbol is selected in the normal state will be described. FIG. 123(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed during the execution of the normal symbol variation in which a winning symbol is selected in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 123(b), when the normal symbol variation is executed, a variation display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that the normal symbol variation is being executed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating the electric role 640 that is opened in the normal symbol winning game is displayed therein, and a highlight display (indicated by six lines in the figure) is executed to notify the player that the small display area Dm3 has been formed. In addition, since the situation shown in FIG. 123(b) is during the execution of the normal symbol variation that has won, the icon displayed in the small display area Dm3 is in a display mode that imitates the electric role 640 in the closed state. By configuring it in this way, the player can predict that the normal symbol winning game will be executed soon, which can increase the interest of the game.

In FIG. 123(b), an example is given of a normal symbol variation in which a winning symbol is being played, but the small display area Dm3 is formed during a part of the normal symbol variation in which the lottery result is a loss (for example, a 1/100 probability of a loss variation), and an effect (fake effect) is executed in which an icon resembling the electric device 640 is displayed. In this case, a performance mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears before the normal symbol variation (loss variation) being performed stops and is displayed. By configuring in this way, even if the normal symbol lottery does not result in a winning symbol, a performance display in which the small display area Dm3 is formed is executed, so that the player can play while expecting that a normal symbol winning game will be executed. In addition, in FIG. 123(b), an example is given of an effect suggesting the start of a normal symbol winning game by displaying an icon resembling the electric device 640 in the small display area Dm3, but this is not limited to this, and for example, a comment suggesting the start of a normal symbol winning game may be displayed in a part of the sub-display area Ds or the main display area Dm.

Also, the display mode of the third symbol variation display being executed in the main display area Dm may be used to suggest the start of a normal symbol winning game. In this case, only when the special symbol variation is being executed while the normal symbol variation is being executed, the performance suggesting that the normal symbol winning game will be executed will be executed, so for example, the ball will pass through the through gate 67, which is easier to enter than the first ball entrance 64, which is the trigger for the execution of the special symbol lottery, and the result of the normal symbol lottery will not be suggested in advance to a player who is only executing the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, a special privilege (execution of a performance suggesting the result of the normal symbol lottery in advance) can be given to a player who is playing a normal game in which both the special symbol variation and the normal symbol variation are executed. Similarly, the performance using the small display area Dm3 used in this control example may be set as an execution condition that the special symbol variation is being executed, or that the game of launching the ball is being executed continuously.

In addition, the expectation level of the suggestive effect suggesting the start of a normal winning game may be varied depending on the game being played. For example, when playing normally, if a suggestive effect suggesting the start of a normal winning game is executed, the normal winning game is executed almost 100% of the time, and when playing a game in which only a normal pattern lottery is executed without executing a special pattern lottery (stop-hit game), that is, when playing normally, the normal winning game is executed only about 10% of the time even if a suggestive effect suggesting the start of a normal winning game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player playing a stop-hit game to grasp the start timing of a normal winning game based on the suggested effect that is executed, and a penalty can be imposed.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, a maximum of four lottery rights for normal symbols can be reserved, and when a new lottery right (normal symbol reservation) is acquired, the result of the normal symbol lottery using the acquired lottery right can be determined in advance. A command (information) indicating the result of the preliminary determination can be output to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, a suggestive performance that suggests that a normal symbol winning game will be played soon can be executed before the normal symbol variation that has been won is executed, that is, from the stage where a normal symbol reservation that has been acquired as a pre-determination result is a winning one. In this case, it is preferable to configure the suggestive performance to be executed in a performance mode that is more difficult for the player to understand than the suggestive performance shown in FIG. 123 (b). For example, the suggestive performance can be executed in the same performance mode as the performance that suggests the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently executed special symbol variation, or the pre-determination result for the acquired special symbol reservation, and the executed suggestive performance can be configured to notify the player only that a situation favorable to the player will soon come.

In this way, the greater the divergence between the timing of the actual execution of a normal winning game and the timing of the suggestive effect, the more difficult it becomes for the player to understand the presentation mode of the suggestive effect intended to indicate that a normal winning game will be executed, and by extension, the more difficult it becomes for the player to understand that the target of the suggestive effect is a normal winning game, thereby increasing the interest of the game when the suggestive effect is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 124(a), the contents of the presentation when a normal winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during the normal state will be described. FIG. 124(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the presentation displayed when a normal winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during normal time (in the normal state). In this control example, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is designed to be 1/100, and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation executed in the low probability state of the normal pattern is designed to be 10 seconds. And, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, it is configured so that about 1/2 of the balls shot pass through the through gate 67 in both the case of right-hand play and the case of left-hand play. In addition, it is configured so that a maximum of four lottery rights for normal patterns (normal pattern reservation) can be stored.

In other words, while playing in the normal state, the normal pattern lottery is continuously executed, and the normal pattern winning is won at a rate of about once every 1000 seconds. Furthermore, when a normal pattern winning is won in the normal state, a normal pattern winning game (long opening winning) is executed in which the electric role 640 is opened for 5 seconds. Also, as shown in FIG. 119, since the electric role 640 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 simply by continuing the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 during a normal pattern winning game during a low probability state of a normal pattern that occurs with a low probability.

When a normal symbol lottery is won in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 124(a), the identification information (symbols) are displayed in the small display area Dm2 in a combination (two circles in the figure) that indicates that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win, and the normal symbol winning game is executed. Then, the comment "Aim for the electric chute" is displayed at the top of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating the open electric chute (electric device 640) is displayed in the small display area Dm3. Note that the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery are configured to be executed in parallel (overlapped), so the display of the third symbol change that is executed in response to the special symbol change and the display of the fourth symbol change that is executed in the small display area Dm1 continue to be executed during the normal symbol winning game.

In addition, in the waiting area Ds1b of the secondary display area Ds, the special symbol 2 reserved pattern (shown as a black circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved balls) acquired based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is displayed (to the left of the waiting area Ds1b) in priority to the special symbol 1 reserved pattern (shown as a white circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved balls) acquired. In other words, the state shown in FIG. 124(a) shows the state after four or more balls have entered the second ball entrance 640 during a normal game, and the state after the maximum number of four special symbol 2 reserved balls has been acquired.

In this control example, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol, so the lottery for the special symbol 2 reserved ball acquired later is executed with priority over the special symbol 1 reserved ball acquired earlier. By configuring it in this way, when a normal winning game is executed during the normal state and multiple special symbol 2 reserved balls are acquired, it becomes possible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol consecutively with priority, so that a period during which the lottery for the second special symbol is executed can be set as an advantageous period (chance zone) that is advantageous to the player, and a dedicated presentation can be executed, providing the player with a presentation that is easy to understand.

In this control example, the waiting area Ds1b is configured to display the acquired special reserved ball 1 and special reserved ball 2 side by side (up to 8 balls are displayed). For example, if a special reserved ball display area that displays only the special reserved ball 1 and a special reserved ball display area that displays only the special reserved ball 2 are used, if a reserved ball of the second special pattern for which the special pattern lottery is executed first is not acquired, the special reserved ball display area is displayed more prominently than the special reserved ball display area, and if a reserved ball of the second special pattern is acquired, the special reserved ball display area is displayed more prominently than the special reserved ball display area. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player whether the lottery for the first special pattern or the lottery for the second special pattern will be executed next.

The display screen shown in FIG. 124(a) is configured to continue to be displayed until the end of the normal winning game in the normal state or the start of the second special symbol variation in the normal state. In other words, even during a normal winning game, if the second special symbol variation starts, the chance zone presentation described later with reference to FIG. 124(b) is executed. On the other hand, if the second special symbol variation does not start even when the end of the normal winning game is reached, for example, if a normal winning game (5 seconds) is executed while a first special symbol variation with a long variation time (for example, 60 seconds) is being executed, the words "Chance Zone Waiting" are displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm, and when the currently executed first special symbol variation ends, a waiting screen is displayed to inform the player that the second special symbol variation will start.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 124(a), when a normal symbol winning game is executed during the first special symbol variation, the third symbol variation effect (indicated by three arrows in the figure) executed in the main display area Dm in response to the first special symbol variation being executed is continuously displayed, while a part of the main display area Dm (small display area Dm3 formed in the lower right in the figure) is notified that a normal symbol winning game is being executed. In this case, it is preferable to configure the size of the display area used to display that a normal symbol winning game has been executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol variation being executed to be variable. For example, if the first special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot winning, it is preferable to form the small display area Dm3 smaller than the example shown in FIG. 124(a) or to configure it so that the small display area Dm3 is not formed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the reduction in visibility of the third symbol variation effect indicating a jackpot winning due to the formation of the small display area Dm3. In addition, when a normal winning game is started without the small display area Dm3 being formed, the player can be notified that the special pattern change (first special pattern change) being executed is a big win change, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the operating status of the electric role device 640 even in a state where the small display area Dm3 has not notified that a normal winning game has been executed. When using such a configuration, it is preferable to configure it so that the same presentation mode as a big win change is executed even in some cases where the special pattern change being executed is not a big win change (it is a miss change).

On the other hand, if the special pattern change (first special pattern change) being executed is a miss change, or if no special pattern change is being executed, the small display area Dm3 may be formed larger than the example shown in FIG. 124(a), or the entire main display area Dm may be used to display that a regular winning game has been executed.

In other words, when multiple pieces of information (lottery results and winning game status) need to be displayed overlappingly within the limited display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is sufficient to configure the display so that information that is advantageous to the player is displayed preferentially, and various display modes may be displayed based on the technical concept. In this case, the information that is advantageous to the player may differ. For example, some players consider information indicating that they have won a jackpot in a special symbol lottery to be advantageous, while other players consider a performance with a lower appearance rate to be advantageous rather than the result of the special symbol lottery to be advantageous. Therefore, it is preferable to provide an operation means that the player can operate, and an advantage degree selection means that allows the player to arbitrarily select the advantage degree of various pieces of information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation of the operation means, and to configure the display mode corresponding to the various pieces of information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to be set based on the advantage degree selected by the advantage degree selection means. This allows various pieces of information to be displayed in a display mode that is less likely to cause discomfort to the player.

Next, the performance contents in the chance zone where the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state will be described with reference to Fig. 124(b) to Fig. 126. Fig. 124(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance contents executed when the chance zone is set. As shown in Fig. 124(b), when the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state, the comment "Entering the chance zone" is displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm. This chance zone is an advantageous period set for the period until all the reserved special symbols 2 acquired during the normal state are consumed, and is basically configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the period from the start of the first second special symbol lottery (variation) to the end of the last second special symbol lottery (variation). This makes it possible to easily inform the player that the current advantageous period is in progress.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, if a jackpot is won during the chance zone, the text "High probability of winning a chance" is displayed as a guide display mode to indicate that the chance state can be acquired with a high probability. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, but the system is configured so that the chance state is more likely to be set after the jackpot game ends if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery than if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, during the normal state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the chance zone period in which the second special symbol lottery is executed is a period in which it is easier to win a jackpot that results in a chance state than periods other than the chance zone in the normal state, so that the text "High probability of winning a chance state" is displayed as a guide display mode to indicate that the chance state can be acquired with a high probability, as shown in FIG. 124(b).

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, during this chance zone, a pseudo-change performance is executed to make it look like multiple special symbol changes have been executed during one special symbol change (second special symbol change). Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 124(a)) showing the reserved memory number of special symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is hidden, and the reserved number of special symbols 1 (in the figure, "2" indicating that the reserved number of special symbols 1 is two) is displayed in the small display area Ds11 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and the reserved number of special symbols 2 (in the figure, "3" indicating that the reserved number of special symbols 2 is three) is displayed in the small display area Ds12.

As shown in FIG. 124(b), the display mode displayed in the small display area Ds11 and Ds12 is configured to be more difficult for the player to see than the display mode displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 124(a)) of the sub-display area Ds, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special symbols during the chance zone. Therefore, when a pseudo-variable performance is executed during the chance zone, it is possible to make the player think that multiple special symbol lotteries (variations) have actually been executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect. In this control example, the number of reserved special symbols is displayed using a part of the main display area Dm (small display areas Ds11 and Ds12), but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the number of reserved special symbols not to be notified to the player during the chance zone, or to configure the number of reserved special symbols to be notified in an area other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, an LED provided in the variable display unit 80). Furthermore, it is sufficient to configure the number of reserved special figures to be difficult for the player to distinguish, for example, it is possible to switch from a display mode using numbers that allows the player to easily distinguish the number of reserved special figures to a display mode that changes color to correspond to each reserved special figure number. In this case, even if the player can easily grasp the display mode for indicating the reserved special figures, it is possible to prevent the current reserved special figure number from being easily distinguished, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as this control example.

Also, as shown in FIG. 124(b), a rabbit-like character 1801 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, indicating that the second special symbol is currently fluctuating. As described above, the special symbol lottery (variation) and the normal symbol lottery (variation) are executed in parallel (overlap), so the period during which the normal symbol winning game is executed may overlap with the first special symbol fluctuating period (see FIG. 124(a)) or may not overlap. If the normal symbol winning game is executed during the fluctuating period of the first special symbol, the second special symbol lottery is executed after the first special symbol fluctuating period is over, and if it does not overlap with the fluctuating period of the first special symbol, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the normal symbol winning game (during the normal symbol winning game). In other words, the timing of the second special symbol lottery will differ depending on the state of the first special symbol when a normal winning game is executed, which creates a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to accurately determine whether the currently executed special symbol change is the first special symbol change or the second special symbol change.

In contrast, in this control example, when the second special pattern change is executed, the character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, so the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner whether the currently executed special pattern change is the first special pattern change or the second special pattern change.

Next, referring to Fig. 125(a) and Fig. 126, the contents of the pseudo-variable performance (special variable performance) among the variable performances executed during the chance zone will be explained. Fig. 125(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during a special variable performance, Fig. 125(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is restarted in a special variable performance executed in a state where the special symbol 2 reserved ball has been acquired, and Fig. 126 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is restarted in a special variable performance executed in a state where the special symbol 2 reserved ball has not been acquired.

Here, the contents of the special variation presentation (pseudo variation presentation) will be explained. This special variation presentation is a variation presentation in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) during the variation period of one second special symbol variation, and then restarted, and is a pseudo variation presentation that makes the player think that multiple special symbol variations have been performed. First, a reach presentation is performed using the first half period (about 10 seconds) of the special variation presentation, and at the end of the first half period, as shown in FIG. 125(a), the third symbol is temporarily stopped (in the figure, the third symbol is displayed with a wavy line) in a combination indicating a miss (displayed as "353" in the figure). At this timing, that is, at the end of the first half period of the special variation presentation, the word "unfortunate" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, suggesting that the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, and the player is configured to think that the second special symbol lottery of one performed during the chance zone was a miss. In other words, during the first half of the special variable performance, a special first half performance is executed in which the reach performance that gives hope for a big win is stopped (provisionally stopped) with a performance result indicating a miss.

After that, in the latter half of the special variation performance (about 30 seconds), a variation performance (special latter half performance) that restarts the temporarily stopped third pattern is executed. This special latter half performance is configured to change its performance mode depending on the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired. For example, when the reserved special symbol 2 ball is secured, the special latter half performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation in the chance zone as shown in FIG. 125 (b), and when the reserved special symbol 2 ball is not secured, the special latter half performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed after the chance zone ends as shown in FIG. 126. In other words, in this control example, as a special variation performance, the type of special symbol variation executed after the second special symbol variation being executed ends is determined based on the reserved special symbol number, and the performance mode of the special latter half performance is set in a performance mode corresponding to the determination result. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel more strongly that multiple special symbol variations have been executed during one second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the special latter half performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the second special pattern change in the chance zone (see FIG. 125(b)), the number of times the third pattern is temporarily stopped during the latter half period is configured to be different according to the number of reserved special patterns 2 that have already been acquired. Although detailed explanations are omitted, when the special variation performance is executed, if neither the reserved special pattern 2 ball nor the reserved special pattern 1 ball is secured, the temporary stop display of the third pattern shown in FIG. 125(a) is not executed, and one variation performance (a variation performance in which the third pattern is not temporarily stopped even once) is executed using the entire variation period of the second special pattern change. As a result, the above-mentioned special variation performance is executed only when the reserved special pattern number is secured, so that it is more likely that multiple special pattern changes have been executed during one second special pattern change.

In addition, only when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a performance mode is set in which the number of provisional stops of the third symbol executed during the latter half period is different from the number of reserved special symbols already acquired. Therefore, for example, if the third symbol is provisionally stopped five or more times, the player can expect that the second special symbol variation being executed has won the jackpot. As described above, in this control example, since it is difficult for the player to distinguish between a case in which the third symbol is provisionally stopped and a case in which it is stopped, it is difficult to accurately determine the number of provisional stops. Therefore, it is possible to mix the number of provisional stop displays and the number of stop displays to make the player think that the provisional stop display has been performed five or more times, or to make the player think that some of the provisional stop displays are stopped displays, and that the number of provisional stop displays has not reached five even though the provisional stop display has actually been performed five or more times, thereby providing the player with the fun of predicting the performance result.

Note that other configurations may be used as the presentation mode of the special variation presentation. For example, a display mode indicating the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation may be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to allow the player to easily grasp the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation, or at least a part of the presentation mode of the special variation presentation (e.g., background color, third pattern effect, etc.) may be gradually changed depending on the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation. Also, a display mode indicating the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped (e.g., 1st time, 2nd time) may be temporarily displayed at the timing when the temporarily stopped third pattern is redisplayed.

As shown in FIG. 126, if the special variation effect is executed without securing the reserved ball for special symbol 2, the words "Chance Zone Ended" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a display mode indicating that the chance zone has ended, and the variation display of the third symbol executed in the primary display area Dm becomes a variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation (a variation display in which the third symbol varies horizontally) as a special latter half effect. Therefore, after making the player believe that the chance zone has ended, the result of the special variation effect, i.e., the lottery result for the second special symbol, is stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, the above-mentioned special variation effect is executed in some of the second special symbol variations during the normal state, and in the rest, one variation effect is executed for one second special symbol variation. Therefore, when multiple (up to four) special symbol 2 reserved balls are acquired during a normal symbol win game, it is possible to prevent the special variation effect from being executed for an unnecessarily long time.

Next, referring to FIG. 127, the contents of the presentation executed during the jackpot ending period in this control example will be described. FIG. 127(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the first half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game, FIG. 127(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the first half of the ending period of a special jackpot game, FIG. 127(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game, and FIG. 127(d) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the second half of the ending period of a special jackpot game.

In this control example, if the jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won during the normal state is a jackpot game (high probability jackpot game) in which a high probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is easily set, the jackpot ending period is set longer than in the case of a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which a high probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is not easily set. Specifically, the jackpot ending period is set to 17 seconds for the high probability jackpot game, and 15 seconds for the normal jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner during the ending period (before the high probability state is set) that the game content will change significantly through the jackpot game (transition from the normal state to the high probability state). In addition, the content of the game to be executed after the jackpot game can be notified to the player by using a long ending period.

In addition, as described above, in this control example, even if a special jackpot game is being played, the special jackpot state is not set unless the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 is allowed to flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120). Therefore, if the ball cannot be allowed to flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v during a special jackpot game, the special jackpot state is not set after the special jackpot game ends, and the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, just like in a normal jackpot game.

In this case, if a notification effect indicating that a probability variable state will be set is executed during the ending period of a probability variable jackpot game, the content of the notification effect will differ from the actual game state that will be set, causing dissatisfaction for the player. Furthermore, if the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period of a probability variable jackpot game (17 seconds) is switched to the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period of a normal jackpot game (15 seconds), the length of the actual ending period and the length of the presentation period of the notification effect will differ, resulting in a notification effect that feels strange to the player.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a uniform period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of jackpot game. The presentation mode of the notification presentation executed in the second half period is determined according to the game state set after the jackpot game ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127, when a normal jackpot game is executed, the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period is to display the words "Chance mode 100 times" for the first half period (8 seconds) to indicate that a time-saving state will be set (see FIG. 127(a)), and then, for the second half period (7 seconds), if a jackpot is won during the time-saving state (if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery), a notification effect is executed in which the words "Win and super chance get during chance mode" are displayed as a game guide mode to indicate that a probability variable state is likely to be set (see FIG. 127(c)).

On the other hand, when a sure-win game is being played, the notification effect executed during the sure-win ending period is to display the words "Super Chance Mode 100 Times" (see FIG. 127(b)) during the first half period (10 seconds) to indicate that a sure-win state will be set, and then, to display the words "Be careful not to forget to take your card" (see FIG. 127(d)) during the second half period (7 seconds) as a warning that is not directly related to the game content.

In this control example, the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period described above is configured to be preset at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. This eliminates the need to execute the process to determine the presentation mode of the notification effect every time during the jackpot game, when various control processes are executed, thereby reducing the processing load of the control processes executed during the jackpot game.

Here, we will explain the case where the ball cannot flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game even though a guaranteed jackpot game has been executed. In this case, among the display modes shown in FIG. 127(b), a process is executed to make the word "Super" invisible, and a process is executed to switch the notification effect executed in the latter half (7 seconds) of the jackpot ending period to the notification effect executed in the latter half (7 seconds) of the normal jackpot game ending period (see FIG. 127(c)).

More specifically, the display mode shown in FIG. 127(a) is different between the display layer on which the word "Super" is displayed and the display layer on which the word "100 chance modes" is displayed, and the display instruction for the display layer on which the word "Super" is displayed can be switched based on the result of determining whether or not the ball was able to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game. This makes it possible to execute a notification effect corresponding to the result of determining whether or not the ball was able to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game by simple control processing. Furthermore, since the presentation mode is switched during the latter half of the jackpot ending period, which is set to the same length, the presentation mode of the notification effect can be switched without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

In this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is different depending on the jackpot type, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be the same for all jackpot types. In this control example, the latter half of the jackpot ending period is set as a period of the same length for all jackpot types, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be the same for all jackpot types. In addition, if there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all of the jackpot types. For example, the first half of the jackpot period for jackpot type A and jackpot type B may be the same length, and the second half of the jackpot period for jackpot type B and jackpot type C may be the same length.

In addition, in this control example, the ending period is set to a different length depending on the type of jackpot won, but this is not limited to this, and the length of the ending period may be configured to vary depending on the game result during the jackpot game.

Next, the contents of the effects executed during the chance mode will be described with reference to Figures 128 to 130. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that the high probability state of the normal pattern is set 100 times after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special pattern is set 50 times after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, it is configured so that it can be set to execute a V notification effect that notifies the player that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and to not execute a V notification effect.

If the V notification effect is executed during a jackpot game, a presentation mode (special chance mode) is set to notify the player that a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) has been set after the jackpot game ends, and if the V notification effect is not executed during a jackpot game, that is, if the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, or if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v but the V notification effect is not executed, a presentation mode (chance mode) is set in which it is difficult for the player to know whether or not a high probability state has been set after the jackpot game ends.

When the chance mode is set as the presentation mode, the words "Chance mode in progress" are displayed above the main display area Dm, and a remaining period notification mode is displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds to indicate the period until the high probability state of the normal pattern ends (see FIG. 128(a)). The example shown in FIG. 128(a) shows a state in which the 20th special pattern variation has been performed since the chance mode was set, and the words "80 times" are displayed as the remaining period notification mode, indicating that the chance mode will end if 80 more special pattern variations are performed.

In this way, when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the current game state is a high probability state or a time-saving state from the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player can play while expecting that the current game state is a game state (high probability state) that is advantageous to the player.

Also, only if the V notification effect is not executed during a jackpot game, the chance mode can be set as the presentation mode even if the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. This prevents the player from being confused by the chance mode being set after the jackpot game ends, even though the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, i.e., the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, if the V notification effect is executed to notify that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, the super chance mode is set as the presentation mode to indicate that the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

In this control example, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game but the V notification display is not executed, the chance mode is set as the display mode after the jackpot game ends. However, without being limited to this, the present invention may be configured to set the super chance mode in some cases where the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game but the V notification display is not executed. In this case, for example, at the end of the jackpot game (after it becomes impossible (difficult) to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the current jackpot game), it is preferable to determine whether the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the current jackpot game and whether the V notification effect was executed, and in some cases (when a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery) where the determination result indicates that the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v and the determination result indicates that the V notification effect was not executed, a display mode (FIG. 127(b) and FIG. 127(d)) indicating that a special probability state is set during the ending period of the jackpot game is displayed, and the super chance mode is set as the presentation mode after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring it in this way, even if the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, the possibility of the Super Chance Mode being set remains, so the player can continue playing with a sense of anticipation until the jackpot game ends.

As explained above, in this control example, when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode to be set after the end of a big win game, the game state may be set to either the time-saving state or the probability variable state. Regardless of which game state is set, the remaining period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern will continue is displayed. In other words, the gaming machine is configured to be able to set a first advantageous gaming state (high probability state) and a second advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) as advantageous gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state as gaming states that are set after the end of a jackpot game, the first advantageous gaming state continues for a predetermined first period (the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times), and the second advantageous gaming state continues for a second period longer than the above-mentioned first period (the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times), and after the first advantageous gaming state is set after the end of a jackpot game, if the first period has elapsed, the second advantageous gaming state is set until the second period has elapsed, and if the second period has elapsed, the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a remaining period notification to indicate the remaining period until the advantageous gaming state ends (second period), regardless of whether the high probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily notify the player of the period during which a favorable game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state will continue. Furthermore, in this control example, when the remaining period of the second period (remaining period of the chance mode) is set, a game state indication effect for informing the player whether the current game state is a probability bonus state or a time-saving state can be executed using the remaining period notification notification mode (display mode).

Here, referring to FIG. 128(b), the contents of the game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode will be described. FIG. 128(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode. As shown in FIG. 128(b), when a chance mode is set in a state where a certain notification condition is met, a game state suggestion effect (displayed in a white display mode in FIG. 128(b)) in which the display mode of the remaining period notification displayed in the small display area Ds2 is changed is executed. Then, the comment "Big win expectation UP" is displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting which game state is set among the advantageous game states while notifying the player of the period until the advantageous game state advantageous to the player ends. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 128(b) can be displayed when the currently executing special pattern change is a jackpot change, or when the acquired reserved ball for special pattern 2 contains information about winning a jackpot, during the period in the chance mode when a high probability state can be set (within the period after the end of the jackpot game until 50 special pattern changes have been executed).

By configuring it in this way, during the chance mode, which indicates the period during which a favorable game state advantageous to the player will continue, various information more advantageous to the player (information indicating that a high probability state has been set, information regarding a jackpot win) can be displayed using the same display format, providing an easy-to-understand presentation for the player. Also, even if a time-saving state is actually set, a display format that is likely to be displayed when a high probability state has been set based on a jackpot win can be displayed, making the player believe that a high probability state has been set at a rate higher than the design value, which has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to play.

Note that the configuration may be such that the effects during the chance mode are executed using a different technical concept from the technical concept of the present control example described above. For example, when the chance mode is set during the high probability state, if a jackpot is won, or if the acquired reserved ball for special chart 2 contains information about winning a jackpot, a suggestive effect may be executed to suggest that the currently set game state is a time-saving state (for example, an effect in which the display mode of the remaining time notification is displayed in a different display mode (kanji numeral display mode) from that shown in Fig. 128(a) and (b). This allows the player to think that he or she has won a jackpot during a time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the high probability state in an advantageous game state, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play. In addition, the percentage of times the high probability state has been set in the game history can be made to appear lower than it actually is, allowing the player to play while having a higher expectation that the high probability state will be set in the next jackpot game.

As described above with reference to Figs. 128(a) and (b), in this first control example, the display mode of the remaining period notification mode for indicating the duration (remaining period) of the chance mode is changed to suggest the currently set game state to the player, so that a player who is carefully watching the remaining period of the chance mode can easily understand the game state suggestion effect that suggests the currently set game state. However, the game state suggestion effect may be executed using a mode other than the remaining period notification mode. For example, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to display a first display mode (e.g., the word "chance") that is more likely to be displayed when the probability variable state is set than when the time-saving state is set, or a second display mode (e.g., the word "pinch") that is more likely to be displayed when the time-saving state is set than when the probability variable state is set, or the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may be changed to execute the game state suggestion effect.

In this first control example, both the high probability state of the special pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern are configured to end when the number of times the special pattern variation is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, so as shown in Figures 128 (a) and (b), the display mode of the remaining period notification that notifies the remaining period for which the chance mode will continue (the remaining period for which the high probability state of the special pattern or the high probability state of the normal pattern may continue) is used to suggest the current game state. However, for example, the above-mentioned chance mode configuration may also be used in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured so that the high probability state of the special pattern will continue until the next jackpot game is executed. In this case, when a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set as the duration of the chance mode, the remaining period until the high probability state of the normal symbols ends (the period until the time-saving state ends) is notified by a remaining period notification, and when the remaining period notified by the remaining period notification has elapsed, if the time-saving state is set, a presentation is executed to notify that the normal state has been transitioned to, and if a probability variable state is set, a presentation can be executed in which the word "Congratulations" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the high probability state of the special symbols will continue until the next big win is played, that is, a display mode indicating that the remaining period for which the probability variable state will continue is the period until the next big win, and the word "Congratulations" may be displayed if a predetermined notification condition is met during the period in which the chance mode is set.

In other words, instead of the remaining period notification mode (see FIG. 128(a)) that is updated from time to time in accordance with the remaining period of the chance mode, which is updated each time a special symbol lottery is executed, a display mode that only indicates that the remaining period of the chance mode exists, that is, a remaining period notification mode that does not indicate the number of remaining times that the special symbol can be drawn during the chance mode, such as the remaining period notification mode shown in FIG. 128(a), may be used, or a remaining period notification mode that can roughly notify the remaining period of the chance mode by varying the display mode (for example, varying the display color) in accordance with the remaining period of the chance mode may be used. Furthermore, a configuration may be made in which multiple remaining period notification modes can be displayed, and the display modes of the multiple displayed remaining period notification modes can be combined to allow the player to grasp the remaining period of the chance mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 129 and FIG. 130, the contents of the effects executed when the player operates the operation means during the chance mode will be described. In this control example, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (see FIG. 119), various effects (operation effects) can be executed based on the operation contents and operation timing. Although detailed explanations are omitted, the operation effects are configured to execute an operation effect that changes the background image displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, an instruction notification is executed to have the player operate the frame button 22 as part of the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and when the player operates the frame button 22, an operation effect that executes an effect in a different mode from when the player does not operate the frame button 22, and an operation effect for livening up the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, etc. are executed. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play games other than the action of firing balls, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early.

Here, among the above-mentioned operation effects, the contents of various operation effects executed during the chance mode will be explained. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, but in this control example, when a favorable game state (time-saving state, probability change state) is set, a different change time can be selected according to the number of special symbol changes since the favorable game state was set. Specifically, the period from the first to the twentieth time that the number of special symbol changes since the favorable game state was set is the first period (high-speed change period) in which a short change time (e.g., 5 seconds) is likely to be selected, the period from the 21st to the 49th time is the second period in which a change time longer than the first period (e.g., 10 to 30 seconds) is likely to be set, and only the 50th time is the specific period in which a specific change time (e.g., 20 seconds) is set, and the period from the 51st to the 100th time is the third period in which a change time similar to that of the second period (e.g., 10 to 30 seconds) is likely to be set.

In other words, during the specified period (first period) after the chance mode is set, i.e., during the specified period after the end of the jackpot game, special symbol variations are likely to be performed in a short variation time, so if a jackpot is won during this first period, it is possible to make it easier to play multiple jackpot games at short intervals. This makes it possible for the player to think that the next jackpot game was played as part of the previous jackpot game, which increases the player's interest in the game.

In the second and third periods described above, it is configured so that special symbol fluctuations with shorter fluctuation times are more likely to be executed than when the normal state is set, and special symbol fluctuations with longer fluctuation times are more likely to be executed than in the first period. This makes it possible to ensure a period during the chance mode during one special symbol fluctuation during which a suggestive effect is executed to suggest whether the currently set game state is a time-saving state or a high probability state. Also, in the specific period (the 50th special symbol fluctuation after the advantageous game state is set), a special symbol fluctuation of a specific fluctuation time (20 seconds) is always executed, and a suggestive effect of 20 seconds is executed to suggest to the player whether or not the high probability state has been set (is set).

In this way, by allowing the selection of different change times depending on the number of times the special pattern changes are performed, it is possible to execute the performance for each change number using an appropriate period of time.

Figure 129(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (normal fluctuation period) when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode and the normal state is set internally, and Figure 129(b) is a schematic diagram showing the presentation mode when the frame button 22 is operated during the display presentation shown in Figure 129(a). In this control example, during the normal fluctuation period in the chance mode, the player can arbitrarily select the background image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and by the player pressing (operating) the frame button 22, the sea background (sea mode) and the mountain background (mountain mode) are displayed alternately.

As shown in FIG. 129(a), when the background image can be switched, an icon HR10 resembling a framed button 22 is displayed at the bottom right of the main display area Dm in a display mode indicating that it is operable (in the figure, an arrow is displayed pointing in the direction of button depression), and the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds displays the words "sea mode", indicating that sea mode is currently set. When the player operates the framed button 22 in this state, the display switches from "sea mode" to "mountain mode", as shown in FIG. 129(b).

Next, referring to FIG. 130, the contents of the operation presentation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode will be explained. In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period (the period from when the time-saving state and the probability change state are set to when the 20th special pattern fluctuation ends), the background image is not switched (is difficult to switch). In other words, during the high-speed fluctuation period in which a short fluctuation time (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time for one special pattern fluctuation, if the background image is switched, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 will change frequently, making it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery. Therefore, the background image is not switched (is difficult to switch). However, if all the player's operations on the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period are invalidated, there is a problem that the player's motivation to play will decrease.

Therefore, in this control example, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, a different effect is executed instead of switching the background image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(a), during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode, the words "Special Mode" are displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and the player is notified that the current period is the high-speed fluctuation period. During this "Special Mode", regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery, a special pattern fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is executed, and the third pattern fluctuation effect is also executed in a "Special Mode"-only fluctuation effect. Also, during the "Special Mode", the icon HR10 is displayed in the lower right corner of the main display area Dm, and when the player presses the frame button 22, a game state suggestion effect is executed in which the display mode of the remaining time notification displayed in the small display area Ds2 is changed, as shown in FIG. 130(b).

In this way, even if the player performs the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), the content of the operation effect to be executed can be varied depending on the timing of the operation, which can motivate the player to play by operating the frame button 22 at various times. Also, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 129(a) or FIG. 130(a), the same guide display (icon HR10) is used to guide the player to operate (press) the frame button 22, and when the player performs the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), the content of the operation effect to be executed is varied depending on the timing of the operation. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to know what kind of operation effect will be executed until the player actually operates (presses) the frame button 22, which can motivate the player to operate the frame button 22 more.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, but in this control example, multiple operation effects can be executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, and the rate at which each operation effect is selected varies depending on the set game state. In other words, it is possible to predict whether the currently set game state is a sure-win state or a time-saving state based on the appearance rate of each operation effect executed during the high-speed fluctuation period. Therefore, even if the same operation effect is executed repeatedly during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Furthermore, in this control example, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the background image is switched when the frame button 22 is pressed only if a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, when the reserved ball (special pattern 2 reserved ball) of the second special pattern acquired during the high-speed fluctuation period contains information on winning a jackpot, a special variation effect is executed using the variation time of the special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserved ball containing the information on winning a jackpot and the special pattern change executed before the special pattern change (the special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserved ball acquired before the special pattern 2 reserved ball containing the information on winning a jackpot). When the player presses the frame button 22 in a state where the conditions for executing the special variation effect are satisfied, the background image is switched from the currently displayed background image (e.g., sea mode) to a dedicated special background image (e.g., space mode). In other words, when the background image is switched based on the player pressing the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, the expectation of winning a jackpot increases, and the player can be made to actively press the frame button 22.

In addition, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the background image can be switched by performing a special operation (long press) on the frame button 22. This special operation (long press) is determined to have been performed when the player presses the frame button 22 continuously for two seconds, and the period until the operation is determined to have been performed is longer than that of a normal operation (press) on the frame button 22. Therefore, since this operation is difficult to perform frequently compared to a normal operation (press), even if the background image switching display is configured to be executable, it is possible to suppress the background image from being switched frequently. Note that in this control example, a long press operation is used as a special operation with a longer operation time than a normal operation, but this is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the frame button 22, an operation means having multiple operation units (e.g., a cross key) may be provided as the operation means, and a special operation performed by operating the multiple operation units in a predetermined order may be specified.

Next, referring to FIG. 131, the effects executed during the "Super Chance Mode" in which the player is notified that a special probability state has been set will be described. FIG. 131(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects executed when a first special symbol variation is executed during the "Super Chance Mode", and FIG. 131(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects executed when a second special symbol variation is executed during the "Super Chance Mode".

In this control example, when a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed. Then, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the high probability state is set with a high probability (a high probability jackpot game that can easily cause the ball to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game is always executed). Then, the high probability state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

In other words, once the high probability state is set, as long as a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery before the specified number of special pattern lotteries (50 times) have been performed (the jackpot probability in the high probability state for special patterns is 1/50), the high probability state can be looped with high probability. This makes it possible for a player playing during the high probability state to play with enthusiasm in the hope of winning the jackpot in the second special pattern lottery as soon as possible.

On the other hand, even if the probability variable state is set, for example, if a probability variable jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state and the probability variable state is set immediately after the jackpot game ends, that is, in a state in which the probability variable state is set and the special pattern 2 reserved ball is not acquired and the special pattern 1 reserved ball is acquired, the first special pattern lottery is executed. In this control example, as described above, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is executed 100% of the time, whereas when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is executed 50% of the time, and the remaining 50% is normal jackpot game. In other words, even if the probability variable state is set, if a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, it may not be possible to loop the probability variable state.

In this way, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the high probability state, and the player quickly determines that the jackpot is a jackpot type (normal jackpot) for which a normal jackpot game is executed, the player's motivation to play may decrease. Therefore, in this control example, as a variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed during the high probability state, a double reach effect is easily executed, which is a variation effect in which the third symbol (identification information with an odd number) corresponding to the high probability jackpot and the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot are simultaneously in a reach state. More specifically, if a normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state, the above-mentioned double reach effect is always executed (see FIG. 131(a)).

This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a reach effect in which only the third pattern (identification information with an even number) corresponding to a normal jackpot is in reach when a normal jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed during the special jackpot state, and to prevent players from predicting in advance that they will win a normal jackpot during the period in which the special patterns are changing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 131(a), in this control example, during "Super Chance Mode", small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed in the same way as during the above-mentioned "Chance Mode", making it difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special symbols. And, the words "Super Chance Mode" are displayed above the main display area Dm as a display mode to inform the player that they are currently in a special chance state.

Here, in the super chance mode, when the double reach shown in FIG. 131(a) (a variable presentation in which the third symbol (identification information with the number 1) corresponding to a sure jackpot and the third symbol (identification information with the number 2) corresponding to a normal jackpot are simultaneously in a reach state) is executed, there is a risk that the player will easily understand that the special symbol change being executed is the first special symbol change, so in this control example, the double reach presentation shown in FIG. 131(a) can also be executed in the variable presentation executed in response to the second special symbol change. In other words, the double reach presentation using the third symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot can be executed in the variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in which a sure jackpot game is always executed when a jackpot is won.

By configuring it in this way, even if the double reach effect shown in Figure 127 (a) is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily distinguish whether the special pattern change being executed is the first special pattern change or the second special pattern change.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a double reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the selection of the second special symbol, an effect is executed in which the type of third symbol that reaches the reach state when the middle symbol row Z2 completes one revolution is changed to the third symbol (identification information with the number 1 and identification information with the number 9) corresponding to a special jackpot, as shown in FIG. 131(b) (promotion effect to a special double reach).

By configuring it in this way, if the currently running special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the player can be notified in advance that a guaranteed jackpot game will be played. Also, even if a double reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the player can be made to play while expecting that it will be upgraded to a guaranteed double reach midway through.

In this control example, as a variable condition for changing (promoting) the ongoing double reach effect to a sure-win double reach effect, a variable condition is set that is established when the change pattern of the middle symbol Z2 becomes a predetermined pattern (one lap has passed). However, without being limited to this, for example, a variable condition may be set that is established when the third symbol corresponding to the reach state (the third symbol that is the combination that results in a jackpot) as the third symbol displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 passes through the reach effective line, or a variable condition may be set that is established when the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player is a specific operation result.

In addition, in this control example, the type of the third symbol in the reach state is changed when the variable condition is satisfied, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the number of third symbols in the reach state may be increased. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 131(a), the blank symbols (shown as triangles in the figure) may be erased, and "3.2.1" is displayed from the left as the upper symbol row Z1, and "1.2.3" is displayed from the left as the lower symbol row Z3, in order to execute a triple reach effect. Even in this case, the triple reach effect can increase the number of reaches of the third symbol corresponding to the special jackpot compared to the double reach effect, so that the player can be visually notified that there is a high possibility of winning the special jackpot in this special symbol lottery.

In addition, the above-mentioned technical concept may be applied to the variable presentation executed during the normal state. For example, when a variable condition is established during a normal single reach presentation in which only the third symbol (identification information with an even number attached) corresponding to a normal jackpot is in the reach state, the type of third symbol in the reach state may be switched to the type of third symbol corresponding to a sure-variable jackpot, or the number of third symbols in the reach state may be increased. This allows the player to play while expecting a more favorable presentation result to be provided until the variable presentation ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 132, the relationship between the special symbol variation pattern selected in this control example and the performance mode to be executed will be explained. FIG. 132(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the performance when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation performance is executed is set as the variation performance of the third symbol, and FIG. 132(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the performance when a variation pattern in which a reach variation performance is executed is set as the variation performance of the third symbol.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 25, but in this control example, a fluctuation pattern that combines the basic time and the added time is defined as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery. The period that corresponds to the basic time is configured as a common fluctuation pattern, and the period that corresponds to the added time is configured as a specific fluctuation pattern.

In other words, in this control example, the third pattern change presentation executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to show the result of the special pattern lottery is configured to vary the period from when the reach state is displayed until the third pattern is stopped and displayed depending on the type of third pattern that will be in the reach state. The third pattern that corresponds to the time set as the added time is set as the third pattern that will be in the reach state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to standardize the third pattern change presentation (the third pattern change presentation that is executed in accordance with the basic time) that is executed during the specified period from when the third pattern starts to change.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132(a), in the case of a non-reach variation presentation, since no additional time is set, a common variation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the upper pattern row Z1 is displayed stationary when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the third pattern variation presentation (for example, when 5 seconds have elapsed), and one second later the lower pattern row Z3 is displayed stationary in a display mode in which a reach state does not occur on the active line, and two seconds later the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed stationary in a display mode in which the lottery result is a miss. After that, after a one-second display period (determination time), the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is displayed as a definite result.

As shown in FIG. 132(b), when a reach variation presentation is executed, a basic time (30 seconds) is set, and the presentation mode from when the reach state is reached until 5 seconds have elapsed is set as the common variation pattern for 30 seconds. In other words, the presentation mode from when the reach state is reached until the middle symbol row Z2 completes one revolution is set as the common variation pattern. After that, the presentation mode (reach pattern, stopping symbol) according to the added time is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 133, the presentation mode of the ending presentation executed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be explained. FIG. 133(a) shows the flow of presentation during the ending period for a normal jackpot, and FIG. 133(b) shows the flow of presentation during the ending period for a special jackpot, and FIG. 133(c) shows the flow when the ball does not flow down a specific area (V gate) during a special jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 133, in this control example, the ending period (ED period) is different for normal jackpots and special jackpots, with the ED period set to 15 seconds for normal jackpots and 17 seconds for special jackpots. The ending performance is then divided into a first half period and a second half period (see Figure 127).

In this control example, the presentation mode for the ending period is set at the start of the jackpot game, and whether or not a V has been won during the jackpot period (whether or not the ball has flowed down to a specific gate) is determined at the start of the ending period (ED period), and the ending display mode is switched based on the result of this determination.

First, referring to FIG. 133(a), the content of the presentation during the ending period of a jackpot game when a normal jackpot game is played will be described. In this control example, in order to prevent the various processes executed during a jackpot game from becoming complicated and the processing load during the jackpot game from increasing, the presentation mode of the presentation (ending display presentation) executed during the ending period of the jackpot game is determined before the round game (game in which prize balls can be obtained) during the jackpot game is executed (before the start of the jackpot game or during the opening period of the jackpot game).

When a normal jackpot game is played, the display mode of the ending performance (see Figs. 127(a) and (c)) is set to indicate to the player that a "chance mode" will be set (a time-saving state will be set) after the jackpot game ends before the opening period of the jackpot game ends. In a normal jackpot game, since the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, a previously set ending performance is executed as the ending performance of the jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 133(b) and FIG. 133(c), the contents of the presentation during the ending period of the jackpot game when the probability variable jackpot game is executed will be explained. When the probability variable jackpot game is executed, a judgment is made as to whether or not to execute the V notification presentation during the jackpot game before the opening period of the jackpot game ends, and the presentation mode of the ending presentation is determined based on the judgment result. Specifically, when a round game (V round game) in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed, a judgment is made as to whether or not to execute a V notification presentation in which a guide announcement that guides the player to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v and a V passing announcement that informs the player that the ball has actually passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v are executed, and if it is determined that the V notification presentation is executed, a display mode (see FIG. 127(b) and (d)) is set to indicate to the player that the "super chance mode" will be set (the probability variable state is set) after the end of the jackpot game as the ending presentation. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V notification effect will not be executed, a display mode is set as the ending effect to inform the player that a "Chance Mode" will be set after the big win game ends (a display mode in which the "Super" display is deleted from the display mode in FIG. 127(b) and FIG. 127(c)).

When the V notification performance is executed, a guide notification is executed in which the comment "Aim for V" and a schematic diagram showing the position of the specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable winning device 65 are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in time with the start of the V round (first round) game. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, a V passing notification is executed in which the comment "V acquired!!" is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) despite the execution of the guide notification, an emphasis guide notification is executed to more emphasize the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v to the player. Then, if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v before the V round game ends, the above-mentioned V passing notification is executed, and if the V round game ends without the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the words "Too bad you didn't get a V!" are displayed.

After that, when the ending period of the jackpot game arrives, a judgment is made as to whether or not to replace the display mode of the ending performance that has been set in advance, based on the actual game results of the V round game. Here, as described above, when it is determined that the V notification performance is to be executed at the start of the jackpot game, a display mode indicating that the "Super Chance Mode" is set as the ending performance (see Fig. 127 (b) and (d)) is set in advance, so if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, the ending performance is executed without switching the display mode of the ending performance. On the other hand, if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, a time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, so a process (replacement process) is executed to switch the display mode of the ending performance to a display mode indicating that the "Chance Mode" is set, and the ending performance is executed in the display mode after the replacement (the display mode in Fig. 127 (b) with the display of "Super" deleted, see Fig. 127 (c)).

In addition, if the V notification effect is not executed, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, as in the normal jackpot game, and the jackpot game is executed in which it is not possible to know from the various effects displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 that the V round game is being executed and that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Then, regardless of whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, the ending effect is executed in a preset display mode. This makes it possible to provide a state in which a "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game, even though a probability variable state is actually set.

Furthermore, when the "chance mode" is set while the probability variable state is set, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game (during the probability variable jackpot game), so that it is difficult to know in advance that the probability variable state will be set by the effect during the jackpot game. In this control example, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the jackpot game where the V notification effect is not executed, the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends, even though the probability variable state is actually set. However, without being limited to this, for example, even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v while the V notification effect is being executed, the V passing notification may not be executed at a predetermined rate, and even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the "chance mode" may be set after the jackpot game ends if the V passing notification is not executed. In this case, it is also preferable to configure the V notification effect to be executable even when the normal jackpot game is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily create an event in which the V-pass notification is not executed even though the V notification effect has been executed, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable about the "chance mode" being set after the end of a jackpot game in which the V notification effect has been executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 134, the flow of the presentation mode set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, after the end of the jackpot game, a high probability state of the normal pattern is set for a predetermined first specific period (the period until the special pattern variation is executed 100 times). Then, if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, a high probability state of the special pattern is set for a predetermined second specific period (the period until the special pattern variation is executed 50 times) after the end of the jackpot game. Then, if the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a time-saving state (low probability state of the special pattern, high probability state of the normal pattern), the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode (see FIG. 134(b)). In addition, if the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), the presentation mode set after the end of the jackpot game is different depending on the presentation content during the jackpot game (depending on the presence or absence of a V notification presentation). As shown in FIG. 134(a), if it is notified that a high probability state will be set during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), that is, if the display mode of entering the "Super Chance Mode" (see FIG. 127(b)) is displayed as the ending presentation, the "Super Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode (see display a in FIG. 134(a)). If it is not notified that a high probability state will be set during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), that is, if the display mode of entering the "Chance Mode" (see FIG. 127(a)) is displayed as the ending presentation, the "Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode (see display b in FIG. 134(a)).

As shown in display a in Figure 134(a), when "Super Chance Mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game, the "Super Chance Mode" will continue until the high probability state ends, and when the game state transitions from the high probability state to a time-saving state, the display will switch to "Chance Mode". In this case, while the "Super Chance Mode" is set, as shown in Figure 131(a), the period until the high probability state ends (up to 50 times) is displayed as the remaining period in the small display area Ds2. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player of the period during which the game state most advantageous to him will continue. In addition to the display contents shown in FIG. 131(a), a pre-notification effect may be configured to be executed to notify the player in advance that the time-saving state will be set 50 times after the high probability state ends. For example, when the remaining period mode (in FIG. 131(a), "49 times" is displayed in white) indicating the remaining period of the high probability state displayed in the small display area Ds2 becomes less than a predetermined period (for example, "10 times" or less), the remaining period mode indicating the number of times (50 times) that the time-saving state will continue to be set later may be displayed in a different display mode (for example, "50 times" is displayed in black) from the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the high probability state. This allows the player to be notified in advance that a game state (time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state will be set even after the high probability state ends.

Also, when the "Super Chance Mode" is set, the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the high probability state and the remaining period mode (100 times) indicating the remaining period of the time-saving state may be displayed, and each time a special symbol variation is executed, each remaining period mode may be subtracted by 1. Alternatively, the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the high probability state and the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the time-saving state that is set after the high probability state ends may be displayed, and the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the high probability state may be subtracted first, and when the remaining period of the high probability state becomes 0 and the time-saving state is entered, the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the time-saving state may be subtracted. Even in this configuration, it is possible to notify a player playing in the high probability state in advance that a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state will be set after the high probability state ends.

Next, the effects during the chance mode will be explained using display b in FIG. 134(a) and FIG. 134(b). In this control example, the chance mode is set as the effect mode in some cases when the high probability state is set and when the time-saving state is set. Then, during the chance mode, as described above with reference to FIG. 128, a game state suggestion effect is executed that changes the notification mode of the remaining time notification. This game state suggestion effect is set so that it appears more frequently in the chance mode during the high probability state than in the chance mode during the time-saving state.

Next, the contents of the operation presentation during the chance mode will be described with reference to FIG. 135. In this control example, the presentation mode of the operation presentation (the presentation performed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player) during the chance mode is configured to be variable according to the operation timing and operation method of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player, and the set game state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135(a), during the chance mode when the time-saving state is set, when the button PUSH "normal push" is executed as the operation method, during the high-speed change period until the special pattern change is executed 20 times, the operation presentation of "reach suggestion" which suggests whether the change presentation being executed will be in a reach state during the third pattern change, or "state suggestion" which suggests the currently set game state is configured to be executable, and thereafter (after the number of times the special pattern changes 21 times or later), the operation presentation of "background mode transition" which transitions the background mode is configured to be executable. In addition, as an operation method, when a button is pressed and held for a long time, "long press", during the high-speed change period until the 20th special pattern change is performed, a "background mode transition" operation effect that changes the background mode can be executed, and during the period from 21 to 50 special pattern changes (second period), a "state suggestion" operation effect that suggests the currently set game state can be executed, and thereafter (after the 51st special pattern change), a "past state suggestion" operation effect can be executed to suggest the game state that was set in the past (at the time when the "chance mode" was set (after the end of the jackpot game)).

As shown in FIG. 135(b), during the chance mode when the probability bonus state is set, if the button push "normal push" is executed as an operation method, during the high-speed fluctuation period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 20 times, the operation effect of "reach suggestion" which suggests whether the fluctuation effect being executed will be in a reach state during the third symbol fluctuation, "state suggestion" which suggests the currently set game state, or "background mode transition" which transitions the background mode can be executed, and during the period from 21 to 50 times of the special symbol fluctuation (second period), the operation effect of "background mode transition" or "state suggestion" can be executed, and thereafter (after the special symbol fluctuation is 51 times or later), the operation effect of "background mode transition" can be executed. In addition, if the button is pressed and held "long press" as an operation method, the operation effect of "background mode transition" which transitions the background mode can be executed regardless of the number of times of the special symbol fluctuation.

As explained above, in this control example, when the time-saving state is set or when the probability bonus state is set, a "chance mode" can be set as a presentation mode, and the duration of the chance mode (100 time-savings) is divided into multiple periods according to the number of special pattern variations executed during the chance mode, and the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) is configured to differ for each set game state and period. As a result, when the chance mode is set, it becomes possible for the player to predict the currently set game state based on the content of the operation presentation executed by the operation presentation, and therefore it is possible to execute a game that motivates the player to operate the operation means.

As explained above, in this control example, the predetermined period after the end of a jackpot game is the high-speed fluctuation period, and even if a "normal press" operation is performed on the frame button 22, the operation presentation of "transition to background mode" is less likely to be executed than in other periods. However, the high-speed fluctuation period (the period during which transition to background mode is less likely to occur) may be set at other times. For example, the period until the end of one special pattern fluctuation executed after the end of a jackpot game may be set as the normal time-saving fluctuation period, and the period from the execution of the second special pattern fluctuation after the end of a jackpot game to the execution of the twentieth special pattern fluctuation may be set as the high-speed fluctuation period.

By configuring it in this way, for example, during the first special pattern changing period after the end of a jackpot game, a comment such as "You won't be able to change the background mode from the next change! Choose your desired background now" can be displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a notice mode to notify the player that a high-speed changing period will be set, preventing the player from suddenly entering a period during which the background mode cannot be changed (high-speed changing period), preventing the player from playing in the desired background mode, and reducing their motivation to play. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the device to display comments such as "Chance mode may be in a high-speed state! Don't give up!" and "When the display mode of the remaining number of times changes, it's your chance!" as a guide mode to explain the game content of the "chance mode" to the player during the one special pattern changing period after the end of a jackpot game.

In addition, in the case where the high-speed fluctuation period is set from the first special pattern fluctuation after the end of the jackpot, as in this first control example, the background mode during the "chance mode" can be selected during the playing period of the jackpot game executed before the high-speed fluctuation period is set (for example, during the ending period of the jackpot game), and when the "chance mode" is set, the player can be notified that the background mode cannot be changed for a specified period (high-speed fluctuation period).

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will continue. The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this control example, a "circle" symbol), a winning game (normal winning game) is executed in which the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change (regular symbol change time) is different depending on the probability state (low probability state, high probability state) of the normal symbol that is set. When the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is set, the regular symbol change time is set to 10 seconds, and when the high probability state (probability change state, time-saving state) of the normal symbol is set, the regular symbol change time is set to 3 seconds. This makes it possible to greatly deviate the frequency with which the regular symbol winning game is executed in the low probability state of the normal symbol from the frequency with which the regular symbol winning game is executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol. In other words, the regular symbol changing time can be shortened in the high probability state of the normal symbol compared to the low probability state of the normal symbol, thereby increasing the number of regular symbol lotteries (regular symbol lotteries) that can be executed per unit time, and further making it easier to win in the executed regular symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a regular symbol winning game when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, while making it easy to execute a regular symbol winning game when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

In this control example, the normal symbol fluctuation time and winning probability are set to be more favorable to the player in the high probability state of the normal symbol than in the low probability state of the normal symbol, but this is not limited to this, and only one of them may be configured to be more favorable to the player. For example, regardless of the probability state of the normal symbol, the same normal symbol fluctuation time (e.g., 3 seconds) may be set, and only the winning probability may be different. This prevents, for example, a pachinko machine 10 configured so that the time it takes for the normal symbol variation display (normal symbol variation time) is longer during the normal state than during the time-saving state in order to make it difficult to play a normal symbol winning game during a low probability state for normal symbols (normal state), when the game state transitions from the normal state (low probability state for normal symbols) in which a normal symbol winning game (normal symbol winning game) is difficult to play to the time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) in which a normal symbol winning game is easy to play, from transitioning to the time-saving state during the execution of a long period of normal symbol variation (normal symbol winning game that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state) during the normal state, resulting in a long period during which a normal symbol lottery is not executed during the time-saving state being set, despite the time-saving state being set.

As described above with reference to Figure 2, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has various devices arranged in the game area of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is configured so that there is no difference (is unlikely to be any difference) in the game value obtained by the player whether a game is played in which the ball flows down to the left side area formed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (left-hand play) or a game in which the ball flows down to the right side area (right-hand play). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, various devices are arranged symmetrically with respect to the perpendicular line at the center of the game board 13. In the lower area of the variable display unit 80, there are a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter and trigger a lottery for a first special symbol, a second ball entrance 640 located below the first ball entrance 64 and through which a ball can enter and trigger a lottery for a second special symbol, an electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 and opened in a normal winning game that is executed when a winning lottery for a normal symbol is won, and a variable winning device 65 located below the second ball entrance 640 and opened in a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery.

A ball shot by left-handed play flows down the left side area and half of the balls pass through the through gate 67 provided in the left side area. Both balls that pass through the through gate 67 and balls that do not pass through the through gate 67 flow down toward the first ball entrance 64 provided in the lower area by nails planted in the game board 13. Here, balls that flow straight down between the nails enter one of the two general ball entrances 63. In this control example, it is configured so that about 1/50 of the balls that flow down the left side area enter one of the two general ball entrances 63, and if a ball enters the general ball entrance 63, 10 prize balls (bonus) are awarded.

The first ball entrance 64 is configured so that one ball can enter the first ball entrance 64 at a rate of 1 in 15 balls, and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, four balls are paid out as prize balls. The second ball entrance 640 is configured so that when the electric device 640 is closed (shown in white in FIG. 2), almost no balls enter the first ball entrance 640, and when the electric device 640 is open (shown in black in FIG. 2), one ball enters the first ball entrance 640 at a rate of about one in two balls that are launched in left-handed play and flow down the left side area, and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 640, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. The variable winning device 65 is configured so that almost no balls enter the first ball entrance 640 when a jackpot game is not being played, and when a jackpot game is being played, two balls enter the first ball entrance 640 at a rate of about two in three balls, and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 640, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, we will explain the variable winning device 65. This variable winning device 65 is a variable ball entry means that is opened during a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and is configured so that a high probability state for the special symbol can be set after the jackpot game ends when a ball that enters the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game passes through a specific area (V-gate) provided in the internal area of the variable winning device 65.

Depending on the type of jackpot won, it is possible to execute a jackpot game in which the ball that enters the variable winning device 65 easily passes through the specific area (V gate) (high probability jackpot game) and a jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass through (normal jackpot game). In this control example, a jackpot game in which the ball that enters the variable winning device 65 easily passes through the specific area (V gate), that is, a jackpot (game) in which the ball can easily flow down to the specific area (V gate) if normal play is performed during the jackpot game, is referred to as a high probability jackpot (game), and a jackpot game in which the ball that enters the variable winning device 65 has difficulty passing through the specific gate, that is, a jackpot (game) in which it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area (V gate) even if normal play is performed during the jackpot game, is referred to as a normal jackpot (game).

As described above, even if a high probability jackpot game is played, if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) during the jackpot game, the high probability state (high probability state) of the special pattern will not be set after the jackpot game ends. In other words, in this control example, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is not determined at the time when the jackpot game is played. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, the round game (V round game) that is the easiest to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) is played in the round game played in the first round of the jackpot game. Therefore, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends cannot be determined until this V round game ends. In this way, by configuring the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends based on the game result during the jackpot game, the player can play to win various benefits (prize balls, high probability state of special patterns) in the jackpot game, which can increase the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when using the above-mentioned configuration, it is not possible to set in advance (for example, at the start of the jackpot game) the presentation mode of the notification effect for notifying the player of the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends (for example, the presentation mode of the jackpot ending period), and the presentation mode of the notification effect must be set during the jackpot game, when control processing related to ball output and control processing related to display are executed closely, resulting in a problem that the control processing of the pachinko machine 10 becomes complicated.

In contrast, in this control example, when a guaranteed jackpot game is played, a presentation mode indicating that a guaranteed jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the presentation mode of the notification effect, and a determination is made as to whether or not to switch the presentation mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) just before the notification effect is played (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), and if the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate), the notification effect of the presentation mode set in advance is executed, and only if the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate), the presentation mode of the notification effect is switched. In this way, when normal play is performed during a jackpot game, the presentation mode of the notification effect is set in advance assuming a game state that is likely to be set after the jackpot game ends, and the presentation mode of the notification effect is switched only if it is determined that an unexpected game state will be set, thereby reducing the frequency with which control processing is executed to set the presentation mode of the notification effect during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the special jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and the special jackpot game, which is advantageous to the player, is configured to have a longer ending period than the normal jackpot game. This makes it possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends (during the jackpot game) before the special jackpot state is actually set. On the other hand, if the special jackpot state is not set after the jackpot game ends, informing the player of this for a long period of time would only cause discomfort to the player, so the ending period is configured to be shorter.

In this way, if the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the special jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, when the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the special jackpot game, simply executing a process to switch the presentation mode of the jackpot ending period to the presentation mode executed during the ending period of the normal jackpot game would result in a problem that an unnatural notification presentation would be executed during the ending period because the lengths of the ending periods are different. Also, if a dedicated presentation mode that is set only when the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the special jackpot game is prepared in advance, image data (presentation data) for that presentation mode must be stored in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in advance, which increases the storage capacity.

In contrast, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half and a second half, and the length of the second half is set to the same length regardless of the type of jackpot (high probability jackpot, normal jackpot), and if the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V-gate) during a high probability jackpot game, only the presentation mode corresponding to the second half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the presentation mode set for the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game. This makes it possible to execute a notification presentation that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable, without providing a dedicated presentation mode that is used only when the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V-gate) during a high probability jackpot game.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a common length regardless of the type of jackpot, so that the presentation mode of the notification presentation executed when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) during a guaranteed jackpot game is switched and set. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is possible to configure it so that a notification presentation executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period can be executed by executing a notification presentation from the final round period of the jackpot game, or it is possible to configure it so that a round presentation executed during the final round period of the jackpot game is continuously executed for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set, and then a notification presentation is executed to execute a notification presentation for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is sufficient to configure the amount of bonuses that a player can obtain between left-handed play and right-handed play so that there is no large discrepancy between left-handed play and right-handed play. For example, the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the left side area can be made smaller than the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the right side area, and the proportion of balls entering the first ball entrance port 64 can be made higher in left-handed play than in right-handed play, making it more difficult to obtain prize balls in left-handed play than in right-handed play, but making it easier to execute the first special pattern lottery, and making it easier to obtain prize balls in right-handed play than in left-handed play, but making it more difficult to execute the first special pattern lottery. When configured in this way, during the normal state, i.e., while playing a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the player can play in any manner of his choice, and in a game in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (play in a time-saving state or a special probability state), right-handed play can be more advantageous to the player than left-handed play.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to both the left side area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80 and the right side area (right side area) of the variable display unit 80, and the through gate 67 in the left side area is configured to allow 1/2 of the balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 to pass through. The through gate 67 in the right side area is configured to allow 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right side area of the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After this winning lottery for the second symbol, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, a "×" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the above-mentioned second symbol reserved lamp 84. There is one second symbol reserved lamp 84 for the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this control example, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of a ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one time, but may be set to two or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of normal pattern start ports (through gates) 67 that are assembled is not limited to one, but may be multiple (e.g., two). In addition, the assembly position of the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the right of the variable display device unit 80. In addition, in this control example, most of the balls flowing down the left area of the game board 13 when played from the left are configured to pass through the through gate 67, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that only some of the balls pass through the through gate 67.

Returning to FIG. 2 for further explanation, a variable winning device 65 with an opening width of approximately 50 mm is disposed below the variable display unit 80 (below the electric device 640) so that both balls launched by left-handed play and flowing down the left side area, and balls launched by right-handed play and flowing down the right side area, can win. In this way, by providing a variable winning device 65 with a wide opening width, both balls that flow down the left side of the electric device 640 when played from the left, and balls that flow down the right side of the electric device 640 when played from the right, can win in the variable winning device 65.

Now, referring to FIG. 120, the specific configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 120(a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 120(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that has won in the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 120(a), a guide member 65d is provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the ball that has flowed down over the open/close door 65b and won in the specific winning port 65a is configured to flow down in the left and right directions.

Specifically, a ball that flows down the left area and enters the specific winning port 65a from the left side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the left guide flow path 65d1 on the left slope of the guide member 65d and is guided to the first opening 65a1. Furthermore, a ball that flows down the right area and enters the specific winning port 65a from the right side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the right guide flow path 65d2 on the right slope of the guide member 65d and is guided to the second opening 65a2.

Below the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2, a ball detection sensor (65s1, 65s2) is provided to detect a ball that has won the variable winning device 65. When the ball detection sensor detects a ball, a payout control is executed to pay out 15 balls as prize balls. In this way, by providing an opening (first opening 65a1) through which a ball that has flowed down the left area and won the variable winning device 65 can pass, and an opening (second opening 65b1) through which a ball that has flowed down the right area and won the variable winning device 65 can pass, and by providing a ball detection sensor for each opening, it is possible to play the game without any difference whether the player plays left-handed or right-handed during a jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 120(b), the flow of the ball that enters the specific winning port 65a will be described. As shown in FIG. 120(b), the ball that passes through the first opening 65a1 passes through the first ball detection sensor 65s1, flows down the first flow path 65e1 and the second flow path 65e2 on the guide path 65e, and then flows down either the third flow path 65e3 or the fourth flow path 65e4 depending on the switching state of the switching valve 65y.

The downstream end of the third flow path 65e3 is provided with an outlet 65h1, and the balls that flow down the third flow path 65e3 enter the outlet 65h and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Although not shown, a ball detection sensor is provided in the discharge path through which the balls that enter the outlet 65h1 flow down, and is configured to be able to count the number of balls that enter the outlet 65h1.

A specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the fourth flow path 65e4, and an outlet 65h2 is provided at the downstream end through which balls that have passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v enter. The specific area (V gate) is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the passing ball, and if it is detected that a ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v within a specified period during a jackpot game, the detection result is stored, and when the jackpot game ends, the stored result is referenced to set the game state after the jackpot game ends.

Here, the operation of the switching valve 65y during a jackpot game will be explained. The switching valve 65y is a variable member driven by a V solenoid 209a (see FIG. 137), not shown, and is configured to maintain a closed state (see FIG. 120(b)) for allowing balls that have flowed down the second flow path 65e2 to flow down to the third flow path 65e3 when the V solenoid 209a is not energized (off state), and to maintain an open state for allowing balls that have flowed down the second flow path 65e2 to flow down to the fourth flow path 65e4 when the V solenoid 209a is energized (on state).

This V solenoid 209a is normally in an OFF state, and is controlled to be ON only for a predetermined period during a jackpot game. Specifically, it is controlled to be ON when a specific round game (first round game) among the multiple round games executed during a jackpot game is started, and to be OFF when the specific round game (first round game) ends, or when the play time of the specific round game has elapsed a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds). In other words, the switching valve 65y is configured to be switched as part of the jackpot control executed during a jackpot game.

This configuration allows the ball to enter the variable winning device 65 only when a jackpot game is being played (when jackpot control is being played), and also allows the ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 to flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v. In addition, the bonus (setting of a high probability state for a special symbol) that is awarded based on the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v is configured to be awarded at the end of the jackpot game (processing executed at the end of the jackpot game), so that even if fraudulent activity is committed by passing a ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v at any time other than during a jackpot game, the bonus will not be awarded to the player.

In this control example, the jackpot control process executed during the jackpot game is configured to execute a switching control for switching the switching valve 65y according to a predetermined rule based on the timing when a specific round game is started, but the switching control may be configured to be executed based on other triggers. For example, the switching control may be executed when the jackpot game starts, or when the opening period of the jackpot game ends, or when the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game is measured and the measurement result becomes a specific number. In addition, when the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 becomes a specific number, the number of balls in the entire jackpot game may be the discrimination target, or the number of balls in each round game may be the discrimination target. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing during the jackpot game a state in which it is easy to pass the balls to the specific area (V gate) is set.

Furthermore, the length of the opening period set when a jackpot game is executed and the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door 65b may be configured to differ for each type of jackpot. By configuring in this way, even if the same switching control is executed on the switching valve 65y regardless of the type of jackpot, it is possible to execute a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to reach the specific area (V-gate) 65v during the period in which a state in which it is easy for the ball to pass through to the specific area (V-gate) and a jackpot game in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through can be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 121, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described. FIG. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example. As shown in FIG. 121, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each function, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc., as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 21). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 137). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Regarding the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 136, the flow of the game in this control example will be described. Fig. 136 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. As shown in Fig. 136, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to set three types of game states as game states: normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and is configured to set the normal state in the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, or the state after the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 operated (pressed)).

During the normal state, a game is played that mainly involves the selection of a first special symbol, which is executed by inserting a ball into the first ball entrance 64. In the normal state, in which a low probability state for the special symbol is set, the probability of winning a jackpot for the special symbol is set to 1/200, and when a jackpot is won, either "jackpot A" (selection rate 1/2) or "jackpot B" (selection rate 1/2) is selected as the jackpot type. When "jackpot A" is selected, a jackpot game (high probability jackpot game) in which it is easy to pass the ball into the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game is played, and when "jackpot B" is selected, a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult to pass the ball into the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game is played.

If the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. This high probability state ends when the number of times the special symbol lottery (variable) has been performed reaches 50 times, or when a jackpot is won, and the game state transitions to another game state. Specifically, if the number of times the special symbol lottery has been performed reaches 50 times while the high probability state is set, the game state transitions from the high probability state to a time-saving state before the 51st special symbol lottery is performed. In this control example, the process of transitioning the gaming state from the probability variable state to the time-saving state is configured to be executed when the special pattern variation corresponding to the 50th special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, but the 51st special pattern lottery need not be executed in a state in which a high probability state for the special pattern is set. For example, the gaming state may be transitioned immediately after the 50th special pattern lottery is executed (at the start of the 50th special pattern variation), or immediately before the 51st special pattern lottery is executed (at a timing when the execution conditions for the 51st special pattern lottery are met but the special pattern lottery has not been executed).

The special probability state is a state with a high probability of winning normal symbols, so the electric device 640 is more likely to open when a normal symbol is hit than in the normal state, which is a state with a low probability of winning normal symbols, and play is mainly based on the selection of the second special symbol. In the special probability state, where a high probability state of the special symbol is set, the probability of a jackpot for the special symbol is set to 1/50, and if a jackpot is won in the selection of the second special symbol, one of the following jackpot types will be selected: "jackpot C" (selection rate 3/10), "jackpot D" (selection rate 4/10), or "jackpot E" (selection rate 3/10).

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which 4 rounds of probability variable jackpot play are played, "Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which 7 rounds of probability variable jackpot play are played, and "Jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which 16 rounds of probability variable jackpot play are played. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, probability variable jackpot play will always be played. Therefore, in terms of the probability of playing probability variable jackpot play, the second special pattern lottery is a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery.

In addition, details will be described later with reference to FIG. 141, but in this control example, if a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, 7 rounds of play are always executed, and if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, an average of 8.8 rounds of play (4 rounds is 30%, 7 rounds is 40%, and 16 rounds is 30%) are executed. Therefore, in terms of the average number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game, the second special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery. Note that, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, there is a possibility that 4 rounds of play will be executed, so the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game will be the smallest when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery. Therefore, in terms of the minimum number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game, the first special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery.

Next, the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) will be explained. If the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state wins "jackpot B", if the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the high probability state exceeds 50, or if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the high probability jackpot game, the time-saving state is set. This time-saving state is configured to disappear until the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 100, or if a jackpot is won before reaching 100. In other words, if the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game (if jackpot B is won), the time-saving state is set for the period from the end of the jackpot game to the execution of 100 special symbol variations (the number of time-saving times is set to 100). On the other hand, if the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the high probability state exceeds 50, the number of time-saving times is set to 50 after the high probability state ends.

During this time-saving state, the game state is set to a high probability state for normal symbols, similar to the above-mentioned probability state, so the electric device 640 is more likely to open, and the game state is one in which the second special symbol lottery is primarily executed. Also, the lottery probability for the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. In other words, in terms of the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery, the time-saving state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the special symbol lottery is executed with a lower probability of winning than in the high probability state, and the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery is the same as in the high probability state. In other words, in terms of the probability of winning the jackpot through the special symbol lottery, the time-saving state is a game state that is less favorable to the player than the high probability state. Note that in this control example, the high probability state and the time-saving state are configured so that the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery is the same, but this is not limited to this. For example, the change time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state and the change time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state may be different, and for example, the special symbol change may be executed in a shorter change time during the high probability state than during the normal state.

<Electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 137. Fig. 137 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special symbols, drawing normal symbols, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, setting the display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display on the third symbol display device 81. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, referring to FIG. 138, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are described. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to draw special symbols, draw normal symbols, set the display on the first symbol display device 37, set the display on the second symbol display device 83, and set the display on the third symbol display device 81.

The first winning random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols and to set the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 uses the following: the first winning type counter C1 used to draw the special symbols, the first winning type counter C2 used to select the big winning type of the special symbols, the stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbols, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern.

The second winning random number counter C4 is used to select the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the normal symbol fluctuation pattern are used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and they are loop counters that return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 156), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 167), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to balls entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4), and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to balls entering the second ball entrance 640 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4). The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 64.

When the conditions for starting the special pattern (conditions for changing) are met, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, or the various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, which contain information about the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern type for which the next lottery will be executed, are shifted to the special pattern execution area, and the special pattern change based on the various stored values begins.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which there are two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), but this is not limited to this, and there may be only one type of special symbol. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area for the corresponding special symbol type are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and special symbol variation based on the various stored values is initiated. By configuring in this way, even in a pachinko machine 10 that uses multiple special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be smoothly executed.

Furthermore, as in this control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has multiple special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), it may be configured so that the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. This makes it possible to execute the next special symbol variation promptly when the start conditions for each special symbol are met.

In addition, in this control example, the lottery results for the special symbols are configured to be either a big win or a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in some cases where the lottery results for the special symbols are misses, the player may win a small win that can be awarded a smaller bonus than when the big win is won (a bonus different from when the big win is won). By configuring in this way, even if the big win is not won, an opportunity to award a bonus to the player can be provided, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In this case, a small win type counter can be provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the value of the small win type counter obtained can be configured to be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and can be configured to be referenced when the lottery for the special symbols is executed.

In addition, if the special pattern lottery allows a small jackpot to be won, the game state transition content based on winning a big jackpot and the game state transition content based on winning a small jackpot may be configured to be different. For example, when a big jackpot is won, the game state may be transitioned to the normal state at the start of the big jackpot game, and a new game state may be set after the big jackpot game ends based on the set big jackpot type. When a small jackpot is won, the game state at the time of winning the small jackpot is maintained and a small jackpot game is executed, and the game state does not transition even after the small jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the presence or absence of a transition in the game state and the content of the transition depending on the type of winning (big win, small win), providing a wide variety of games.

In addition, in this embodiment, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b that corresponds to the ball entering (passing through) the through gate 67, which is made up of four reserved areas (first reserved areas), and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

When the normal symbol start condition (change condition) is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the normal symbol change based on the various stored values is initiated.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 138. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one in sequence within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 999) and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 167).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and a jackpot for the special pattern is determined when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202a.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 140(a). FIG. 140(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first winning random number table 202a is a table that defines the random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols.

Specifically, the first win random number table 202a specifies different values for determining a jackpot depending on the game state (probability state of the special symbol). As shown in FIG. 140(a), for a game state in which the special symbol has a low probability of winning (normal state, time-saving state), the first win random number counter C1 has a value of "0 to 4" as the jackpot determination value, and the other values ("5 to 999") are specified as the loss determination value. Also, for a game state in which the special symbol has a high probability of winning (high probability state), the first win random number counter C1 has a value of "0 to 19" as the jackpot determination value, and the other values ("20 to 999") are specified as the loss determination value. In other words, since the update range of the first winning random number table 202a is 1000 numbers from "0 to 999," the probability of a jackpot being determined in a low probability state for special symbols is 1/200 (5 out of 1000), and the probability of a jackpot being determined in a high probability state for special symbols is 1/50 (20 out of 1000).

In this control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state, but the invention is not limited to this and the probability of winning a jackpot may be the same regardless of the game state, or three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability for special symbols may be different for up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, or simply, the special symbol state may be set to three or more types, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, in this control example, two types of lottery results, "big win" and "loss", are determined as the lottery results for the special symbols. In addition, a "small win" may be determined as a third lottery result as a type of "loss". When this "small win" is won, a small win game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a shorter period (one round) than the "big win". By configuring in this way, a small amount of bonus (prize balls) can be awarded to the player when the big win is not won. Note that when a "small win" is a type of "loss", it is possible to award the player with prize balls from the small win game, but since the big win has not been won, it is preferable to configure the process of changing the game state (setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) not to be executed. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the bonus awarded to the player based on the big win and the bonus awarded to the player based on the small win.

As described above, if it is configured so that a "small win" can be won as a result of the special pattern lottery, the first win random number table 202a can be configured to specify the value of the first win random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small win". By configuring it in this way, the big win lottery and small win lottery for the special pattern can be executed in the same process, so the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced compared to when the big win lottery and small win lottery are executed in different processes. In addition, it is possible to prevent a big win and a small win from being won in the same special pattern lottery.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to refer to the first win type selection table 202c to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 141.

Figure 141 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in Figure 141 (a), this jackpot type selection table 202d has a special jackpot 1 table 202d1 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, and a special jackpot 2 table 202d2 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol.

First, the contents of the special 1 jackpot table 202d1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 141(b). FIG. 141(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special 1 jackpot table 202d1. As described above, the special 1 jackpot table 202d1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special pattern, and different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the acquired first jackpot type counter C2.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (update range "0-99") is set to "0-49" and "jackpot A" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot A", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the special win type counter C2, 50 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot A." Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

As shown in FIG. 241(b), a "jackpot B" is defined as a jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7, a normal jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot B", it is defined that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "15 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 50 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot B." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot B" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

In other words, the two jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery have the same number of rounds of jackpot play, but differ in the ease with which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot play, and are configured so that a jackpot play is executed in which it is easier for the ball to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot play with "jackpot A" than with "jackpot B." Therefore, "jackpot A" is a more advantageous jackpot type than "jackpot B."

Next, the contents stipulated in the special 2 jackpot table 202d2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 241(c). FIG. 241(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special 2 jackpot table 202d2. This special 2 jackpot table 202d2 is a data table that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery and the jackpot type is selected.

As shown in FIG. 241(c), the special symbol 2 jackpot table 202d2 in this first control example specifies three jackpot types for the second special symbol (special symbol 2): "jackpot C" to "jackpot E."

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the special jackpot type counter C2 is set to a value in the range of "0 to 29" and the jackpot type "jackpot C" is specified to correspond to the jackpot type. This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 4, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot C", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the special win type counter C2, 30 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot C." Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C" will be determined is 30% (30/100).

As shown in FIG. 241(c), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "30 to 69" and the "jackpot D" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot D", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 40 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot D", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C" will be determined is 40% (40/100).

As shown in FIG. 241(c), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "70 to 99" and "jackpot E" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 16, a certain jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the certain jackpot counter 203i is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the certain jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the certain jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot E", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 30 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot E", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot E" will be determined is 30% (30/100).

In other words, the three jackpot types (jackpot C, jackpot D, jackpot E) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery all result in a guaranteed jackpot game, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game differs, with "jackpot E," which results in the most rounds of game, being the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, and "jackpot A" being the least advantageous jackpot type for the player.

As explained above, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a guaranteed jackpot game will be played, making it a more advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends, compared to the first special pattern lottery, which has a 50% chance of playing a guaranteed jackpot game. Also, in terms of the number of rounds played during a jackpot game, i.e., the number of prize balls that can be won during a jackpot game, the second special pattern lottery has a higher maximum number that can be won, and the second special pattern lottery has a lower minimum number that can be won. Also, the second special pattern lottery has a higher average number of prize balls that can be won.

Therefore, in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained under the minimum conditions, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous, and in other respects, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous. Note that, in this control example, the jackpot types shown in FIG. 241 are specified, but this is not limited to this, and various jackpot types may be set based on the same technical ideas as the jackpot types that can be set in each of the control examples described above.

In this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the same number of rounds of jackpot play is executed for all jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to allow a different number of rounds of play to be executed depending on the jackpot type selected. In addition, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol, the time-saving state is set for the same period (100 times of time-saving) after the jackpot play ends for all jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured so that the time-saving state is not set for some jackpot wins (some of the jackpot types that are set), or the number of time-saving times (time-saving end conditions) is different depending on the jackpot type. Furthermore, depending on the jackpot type selected, there may be a jackpot type in which the time-saving state is set at the end of the jackpot play, and a jackpot type in which the normal state is set.

Returning to FIG. 138, the explanation continues. The dynamic type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The dynamic type counter CS1 determines the rough display mode (variation time) of so-called short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, super reach, etc. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the dynamic type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 167) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. In addition, a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 142) that stores random number values that determine one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 142(a), the variation pattern selection table 202b defines a normal table 202b1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a special probability/time-saving table 202b2 used when the special probability state or time-saving state is set. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the data table used to select the variation pattern is different depending on the game state, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected can be different depending on the game state.

Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b will be explained with reference to Fig. 142(b) and Fig. 143. Fig. 142(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202b1. This normal table 202b1 is a data table that is referenced when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and is defined so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot than when it is a miss, and different variation patterns are defined depending on the type of special symbol drawn and the result of the special symbol lottery that was executed.

First, the normal table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 142(b). FIG. 142(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal table 202b1. In the normal table 202b1, various variation patterns are defined in correspondence with the results of the lottery for the special symbols, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, when the type of the special symbol (pattern type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result of the hit/miss determination is a big hit, and the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", a normal (reach) with a variation time of 33 to 42 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an added time of 3 to 12 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Although detailed explanation will be omitted, in this control example, the added time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds depending on the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. For example, when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0", the added time is "3 seconds", when it is "1", the added time is "3.5 seconds", when it is "2", the added time is "4 seconds", when it is "3", the added time is "4.5 seconds", when it is "3", the added time is "5 seconds", when it is "4", when it is "5.5 seconds", when it is "5", when it is "6 seconds", when it is "6". When it is "6", the added time is "6.5 seconds". , if the number is "7", the additional time is "7 seconds", if the number is "8", the additional time is "7.5 seconds", if the number is "9-11", the additional time is "8 seconds", if the number is "12", the additional time is "8.5 seconds", if the number is "13", the additional time is "9 seconds", if the number is "14", the additional time is "9.5 seconds", if the number is "15", the additional time is "10 seconds", if the number is "16", the additional time is "10.5 seconds", if the number is "17", the additional time is "11 seconds", if the number is "18", the additional time is "11.5 seconds", and if the number is "19", the additional time is "12 seconds".

When a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating the addition time are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, a variation pattern (normal reach) is set based on the information contained in the basic command, and a reach pattern (type of third pattern) is set based on the information contained in the addition command. As a result, even if the type of third pattern in the middle pattern row Z2 that is first visible to the player when a reach state is reached is configured to always be a specific third pattern (a third pattern with the number 1 in this control example), a reach performance can be executed with various types of third patterns without varying the period from when the variation performance is executed to when the reach state is reached.

In addition, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", a Super (Reach) with a variation time of 43 to 52 seconds is specified as the variation pattern. When this Super is decided, a combination command indicating a base time of 30 seconds and an added time of either 13 to 22 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. In this control example, the added time is configured to be set in more detail in 0.5 second increments depending on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, and as the content is the same as the normal pattern described above, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

In this control example, the presentation mode of the reach presentation can be changed according to the information (number of seconds) included in the addition command. Specifically, if the number of seconds included in the addition command is between 3 and 12 seconds, a normal reach presentation (a presentation in which the middle symbol column Z2 moves around one revolution and then stops) is executed, whereas if the number of seconds is between 13 and 22 seconds, a super reach presentation (a presentation in which the middle symbol column Z2 moves around two revolutions and then stops) is executed.

By configuring in this manner, for example, in a case where a variable performance is executed in the same performance mode during an initial specified period, and then a variable performance in which the performance mode branches is executed, it is possible to set the period during which the same performance mode is executed based on a basic command (a command including information indicating a basic time), and set the variable performance after the branching based on an addition command (a command including information indicating an added time). Therefore, for example, even if the overall variable time is the same, different variable performances can be easily set on the audio lamp control device 113 side by simply changing the proportion of the variable time that is accounted for by the basic time and the proportion indicated by the added time.

In this control example, the basic time (30 seconds) when a normal reach is executed and the basic time (30 seconds) when a super reach is executed are the same, and the presentation style of the reach presentation is changed according to the length of the variable time set as the added time, but without being limited to this, the basic time for a normal reach may be set to 30 seconds and the basic time for a super reach to 40 seconds, and the added time may be selected from the range of "3 to 12 seconds" just to determine the type of third pattern.

Next, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds is specified as the variation pattern. When this SP is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 55 seconds and an added time of 35 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when SP is determined, a performance is executed in which the variation performance of the third pattern that has once reached the reach state is switched to another variation performance, so even if the type of the third pattern in the middle pattern column Z2 that is first visible to the player when the reach state is reached is always configured to be a specific third pattern (in this control example, the third pattern with the number 1 added), the display order of the third pattern in the middle pattern column Z2 can be changed in the middle of the variation to correspond to the third pattern that will finally stop without giving the player a sense of incongruity, so there is no need to set the type of the third pattern that will reach the reach state by changing the added time, as in the above-mentioned normal and super.

Similarly, when the symbol type is special symbol 1 and the hit/miss judgment result is a miss, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", a miss with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this miss is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 8 seconds and an added time of 0 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Here, if a miss is determined, a fluctuation performance of the third symbol is executed in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a miss without entering a reach state. Therefore, there is no need to set the added time.

In addition, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", a variation pattern of a reach-miss with a variation time of 33 to 52 seconds is specified. When this reach-miss is determined, a combination command indicating a base time of 30 seconds and an added time of 3 to 22 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. In this control example, the added time is configured to be set in more detail in 0.5 second units according to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, and the content is the same as the normal pattern described above, so a detailed description is omitted. In other words, even if the lottery result is a miss, the same variation pattern command as when the lottery result is a win is set. In addition, when the lottery result is a miss, it is necessary to set the type of the third pattern to be stopped and displayed so that the third pattern to be finally stopped and displayed is a combination other than that of a jackpot, so that the voice lamp control device 113 performs a correction process so that the third pattern is set to a third pattern that is shifted by one from the setting content of the third pattern type based on the addition command referenced when a win is obtained. This makes it easy to set a presentation mode in which, when a reach miss presentation is executed, the third symbol is displayed stopped near the third symbol that is a jackpot combination (miss stop display).

On the other hand, if the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot, and if the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99", a special reach with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 10 seconds and an added time of 30 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Also, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "100 to 198", a special reach with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 10 seconds and an added time of 0 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command.

Here, in this control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, as described above with reference to Fig. 124(b) to Fig. 126, the variation performance in the chance zone is executed. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating a basic time (10 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating an additional time (30 seconds) are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern (special variation) is set based on the information included in the basic command, and the special reach is set based on the information included in the addition command. More specifically, when a basic command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds is notified as the variation pattern command of the second special symbol in the normal state, the performance mode of the special variation performance in which the third symbol varies vertically is set as shown in Fig. 124(b). Then, the performance mode in which the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state (temporary stop display) is set at the timing when the basic time has elapsed, as shown in Fig. 125(a). Then, when an addition command indicating an additional time of 0 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is a special miss), the third symbol is displayed as it is and the variation performance is ended.

On the other hand, if an addition command indicating an addition time of 30 seconds is received (if the fluctuation pattern is a special reach), a fluctuation effect is set in which the temporarily stopped third symbol is restarted, as shown in Figure 125 (b) and Figure 126.

Next, the contents of the probability variable/time-saving table 202b2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the probability variable/time-saving table 202b2. This probability variable/time-saving table 202b2 is a data table that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern when the probability variable state or time-saving state is set, and each variation pattern is defined so that a different variation pattern is selected depending on the type of special symbol, the number of variations (the number of times the special symbol has changed since the end of the jackpot game), the result of the special symbol lottery, and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1.

Here, in this control example, a high probability state (high probability state or time-saving state) for normal symbols is always set after the end of a jackpot game. The high probability state for normal symbols that has been set is configured to continue until a time-saving end condition is met. In this control example, the time-saving end conditions are a first time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times that special symbol variations have been executed since the high probability state for normal symbols was set reaches 100, and a second time-saving end condition that is met when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed when the high probability state for normal symbols is set. When either of the time-saving end conditions is met, a transition from the high probability state for normal symbols to the low probability state for normal symbols occurs.

During this high probability state of normal symbols (high probability state, time-saving state), it is set up so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than during the low probability state of normal symbols (normal state). This makes it possible to increase the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time, providing players with an efficient game (lottery game for special symbols).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143, during the period in which the number of times the special symbol changes from the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to "1 to 20 times", regardless of the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol lottery, and the value of the acquired change type counter CS1, a change pattern with a change time of "5 seconds" (short change) is selected. In other words, the predetermined period from the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the period until the special symbol changes 20 times) becomes a high-speed change period (first period) in which the special symbol lottery is executed with a change time shorter than other periods. By setting this high-speed change period, it is possible to make the next jackpot game easier to execute in a short period of time after the end of the jackpot game, so that the player can think that the next jackpot game has been executed in relation to the first jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, during this high-speed change period, a change pattern with a change time of "5 seconds" is always selected, so it is possible to easily set the performance period of the performance (continuous performance) that spans multiple special symbol lotteries.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability state for normal symbols), it is highly likely that the reserved ball for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved ball) will not have been acquired at the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on the jackpot win, so a special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is likely to be executed using the reserved ball for the first special symbol that has already been acquired (special symbol 1 reserved ball), and if a jackpot is won in the normal state where a probability bonus state or time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) is set, it is highly likely that the reserved ball for the special symbol 2 will have been acquired at the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on the jackpot win, so a special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is likely to be executed using the reserved ball for the special symbol 2.

In this way, immediately after the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, a special pattern lottery for any pattern type (first special pattern, second special pattern) can be executed, so as shown in FIG. 143, the same variation pattern is selected regardless of the pattern type for a predetermined period after the high probability state of the normal pattern is set (the period until 20 special pattern variations have been executed). This allows the same special pattern variation to be executed regardless of which pattern type a special pattern lottery is executed, making it easier to set the performance period for a performance (continuous performance) that spans multiple special pattern lotteries.

As described above with reference to FIG. 119, this control example is configured so that when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, both the balls shot by left-handed play and the balls shot by right-handed play reach the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of one in two balls, so that the special pattern lottery can be executed without interruption just by continuing to execute the game of shooting balls during the high probability state of the normal pattern. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the period until the high-speed fluctuation period ends, that is, 100 seconds, which is the period until the 20th special pattern fluctuation ends (5 seconds x 20 times), is set in advance as the high-speed fluctuation period, and a continuous performance of 100 seconds can be easily executed as a continuous performance spanning 20 special pattern lotteries. In this case, only when a jackpot is won during the high-speed fluctuation period, a switching process for switching the performance mode of the continuous performance already set can be executed, and the process for executing the performance during the high-speed fluctuation period can be simplified.

In addition, a determination means may be provided to determine whether or not to temporarily stop the 100-second continuous performance set during the high-speed fluctuation period, and if it is determined that the period from when the currently executing special pattern fluctuation is stopped and the next special pattern fluctuation is executed is longer than a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second), that is, if it is determined that the special pattern fluctuation has been interrupted, a process to temporarily stop the currently executing continuous performance may be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the continuous performance from progressing ahead even if the player leaves the seat during the high-speed fluctuation period. In addition, an operation means (e.g., frame button 22) that can be operated by the player may be provided, and if a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means, a process to temporarily stop the currently executing continuous performance may be executed.

In this control example, the same fluctuation time (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected during the high-speed fluctuation period, but this is not limited to this, and a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time other than 5 seconds is set may be selected. In this case, it is preferable to make it easier to set a fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot win than when the jackpot win is not won. By configuring in this way, it is easier to lengthen the period from when the presentation mode of the previously set 100-second continuous presentation is switched to when the special pattern indicating a jackpot win is stopped and displayed, so that the jackpot win can be announced in a presentation mode that allows the player to fully understand the lottery result, and the presentation effect can be improved.

In addition, instead of setting the continuous performance mode all at once for the time (100 seconds) expected as the high-speed fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period (100 seconds) can be divided into multiple periods, and, for example, the first continuous performance to be executed during the first high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds) can be set at the start timing of the high-speed fluctuation period (first high-speed fluctuation period), and the second continuous performance to be executed during the second high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds) can be set at the start timing of the second high-speed fluctuation period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a performance mode (the performance mode for the latter half of the continuous performance period) that is not executed when a jackpot is won in the first half of the high-speed fluctuation period is set in advance.

Furthermore, it is not necessary to execute the continuous performance for the entire high-speed fluctuation period, and the continuous performance may be executed only during a specific first period of the high-speed fluctuation period (for example, the period from the 10th to the 20th fluctuation of the special pattern fluctuations (total of 20) executed during the high-speed fluctuation period).

Returning to FIG. 143, the explanation continues. If the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates after the end of the big win game) is "21 times to 49 times (second period)", and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, in the entire range, a fluctuation pattern (win) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected, and if the lottery result is "miss", a fluctuation pattern (long miss) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 179", and a fluctuation pattern (short miss) with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is selected for the range of "180 to 198".

In this control example, when a high probability state (high probability state, time-saving state) of a normal pattern is set, the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed, and during the second period in which 21 or more special pattern variations have been executed since the high probability state of a normal pattern was set, the second special pattern lottery is likely to be executed as long as the game is continued. However, as described above in FIG. 119, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a game board 13 structure that allows balls to enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 regardless of whether the game is played from the left or right, so that, for example, if the game is interrupted during the high probability state or time-saving state, the first special pattern lottery may be executed after the game is resumed.

As described above, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, unlike when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, there is a possibility (50% chance of winning) that a normal jackpot game will be played, and when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in a game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly played, the lottery result will be unfavorable to the player among the jackpot wins. In addition, in this control example, in the variable performance (variable performance using the third symbol) performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the presence or absence of a jackpot win, the type of jackpot can also be suggested to the player. For example, when the main symbol sz with an odd number is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win, it suggests a jackpot win in which a high probability jackpot game will be played, and when the main symbol sz with an even number is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win, it suggests a jackpot win in which a normal jackpot game will be played.

Therefore, in the case where a reach state (a state in which a part of the main pattern sz, which is a combination indicating a jackpot winning in which a normal jackpot game is played, is displayed as a stopped state and the remaining pattern row is displayed as a moving state) is created with the even-numbered main pattern sz in the variable performance executed during the probability change state or the time-saving state, the player is made to think that he/she won an unfavorable jackpot from the point before the special pattern change is displayed as a stopped state, and the player's motivation to play is reduced. Therefore, in this control example, in the case where a jackpot winning in which a normal jackpot game is played is won in the first special pattern lottery in the game state (probability change state, time-saving state) in which the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed, a variable performance (double reach performance) is always executed in which both the main pattern sz with an odd number and the main pattern sz with an even number are in a reach state, as shown in FIG. 131(a). This prevents the player from thinking that they have won an unfavorable jackpot before the special symbol variation stops and is displayed.

To execute this double reach effect, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the second period, a variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected. If the above-mentioned double reach effect, which is a variation effect executed during the probability change state or the time-saving state, were executed only when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the player would know that the first special symbol has won the jackpot at the time the double reach effect was executed. Therefore, in this control example, a variation pattern (30-second variation time) for executing the double reach effect is selected for some cases (approximately 80%) where the first special symbol lottery is a miss, some cases (approximately 25%) where the second special symbol lottery is a miss, and some cases (approximately 5%) where the second special symbol lottery is a miss.

By configuring it in this way, when a double reach effect is executed during a sure chance state or a time-saving state, it becomes difficult to tell whether the corresponding special symbol drawing is for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and it also becomes difficult to tell whether the drawing result is a jackpot or not, allowing the player to play with a sense of anticipation until the result of the double reach effect is displayed.

Furthermore, because the double reach effect is also configured to be executed for the second special symbol lottery, which always results in a guaranteed jackpot game being executed if a jackpot is won, it is easier to create an effect indicating that a jackpot has been won for which a guaranteed jackpot game is executed for the entire double reach effect (an effect in which the main symbols sz with odd numbers stop in a combination indicating a jackpot win) compared to when the double reach effect is executed only for the first special symbol lottery. This increases the expectation for a guaranteed jackpot game when the double reach effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 143, the explanation will continue. When the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol will fluctuate after the end of the big win game) is "50 times (specific period)", a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "20 seconds" (medium fluctuation) is selected, regardless of the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In this control example, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game, a high probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends. As the conditions for ending the high probability state of the special pattern, a first high probability end condition is established when the number of times the special pattern variation is executed reaches 50 times, and a second high probability end condition is established when a jackpot with a special pattern is won while the high probability state of the special pattern is set. When either of the high probability end conditions is established, the game is configured to transition from the high probability state of the special pattern to a low probability state of the special pattern.

In other words, depending on the game results during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, a guaranteed bonus state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be set until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 50, and then a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be set until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 50, or a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be set until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100 after the jackpot game ends.

The display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to execute a game state indication effect to indicate to the player the currently set game state. For example, when a V notification effect is executed to notify the player that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a notification effect (super chance mode effect) is executed to notify the player that the current game state is in a special probability state, and when the presentation mode during a jackpot game is set so that a V notification effect is not executed even if the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a common effect (chance mode effect) is executed to make it difficult to tell whether the current game state is in a special probability state.

When the Super Chance Mode effect is being executed, the special symbol fluctuation 50 times (specific period) will end the special symbol fluctuation state, so a 20-second fluctuation time set for the 50th special symbol fluctuation is used to execute an effect indicating that the special symbol fluctuation state will end and that the chance mode (time-saving) will then be set. Also, when the chance mode is being executed, an effect is executed that indicates whether or not the special symbol fluctuation state was set during the specific period.

In this way, when executing an information notification effect that notifies the player of information other than the lottery result of the special pattern (information to inform the player that the game state is changing or information to suggest the game state that was previously set) using the special pattern change period to show the lottery result of the special pattern during a specific period, by fixing the change time of the selected special pattern change, it is possible to reduce the variation in the presentation style (including the presentation time) of the information notification effect to notify the player of information other than the lottery result of the special pattern.

In this control example, the execution period of the special pattern change (the 50th special pattern change after the end of the jackpot) that ends the high probability state is set as the specific period, and the change time of the special pattern change is fixed at "20 seconds", but it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set the execution period of the 45th to 52nd special pattern changes after the end of the jackpot as the specific period (the period for which a fixed change time is selected) including before and after the special pattern change that ends the high probability state, and to configure it so that the information notification performance can be executed using the change time of the special pattern change executed during that specific period.

The presentation mode of the information notification effect may be changed depending on the result of the special pattern lottery carried out during the specific period described above. For example, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the presentation mode may be changed to one that does not notify information indicating that the special probability state is ending, or, regardless of the game state that is actually set, the presentation mode may be changed to one that indicates that the game state previously set (the game state set after the end of the previous jackpot game) is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a time-saving state).

In addition, the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during a specific period may be varied depending on the results of the special symbol lottery. For example, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the timing of the execution of the information notification effect may be delayed compared to when a jackpot is not won. This makes it possible to interest players not only in the content of the information notification effect, but also in the execution timing, thereby enhancing the effect of the presentation.

Also, as in the above example, if the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during a specific period is varied depending on the result of a special pattern lottery, the information notification effect may be set to be executed at a specific timing in advance, and if the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the specific period is a predetermined result (e.g., a jackpot), the timing at which the information notification effect is executed may be varied from the above-mentioned specific timing, or the timing at which the information notification effect is executed may not be set in advance, and one execution timing may be determined from multiple execution timings depending on the result of a special pattern lottery executed during a specific period.

Next, when the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates after the end of the jackpot game) is "51 times to 100 times (third period)", and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, in the entire range, a fluctuation pattern (win) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected, and when the lottery result is "miss", a fluctuation pattern (long miss) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 179", and a fluctuation pattern (second super fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "60 seconds" is selected for the range of "180 to 198".

This third period is a period during which the game state is in a time-saving state. In other words, even if a probability-changing state is set after the end of a jackpot game, this is a period during which the probability-changing end condition is met and the time-saving state is set. During this third period, as with the second period described above, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, but the first special symbol lottery is executed depending on the game method executed. Since executing the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than executing the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery executed during this third period is configured to be more likely to select a variation pattern with a long variation time. As a result, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed during the third period of the time-saving state, the first special symbol variation is executed with a variation pattern with a long variation time, making it easier to obtain reserved balls for the second special symbol during that time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the first special symbol lottery from being executed frequently during the time-saving state.

In addition, during this third period, the double reach effect (see Figure 131) is executed in the same way as during the second period described above, so that the variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected in the case of a jackpot win in the first special pattern lottery, some of the miss wins, and some of the jackpot wins and miss wins in the second special pattern lottery.

Next, we will explain the content of the various variation patterns stipulated for the second special symbol lottery when the special bonus state or time-saving state is set.

As shown in FIG. 143, when the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the number of changes (the number of times the special symbol changes after the end of the jackpot game) is "1 to 20 times (first period)", a change pattern with a change time of "5 seconds" (short change) is selected, regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) and the acquired value of the change type counter CS1. In other words, during the first period, the same change pattern (5-second change) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed.

Next, if the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuations are executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "21 times to 49 times (second period)" and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" (second short fluctuation) is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 149", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "150 to 198". If the lottery result is "lose", it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" (second short fluctuation) is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 191", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "192 to 198".

During the second period, which is a high probability state (probability state, time-saving state) of normal symbols in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, a variation pattern with a "10 second" variation time is selected, except for the variation pattern in which the above-mentioned double reach performance is executed (a variation pattern with a 30 second variation time). In other words, the second special symbol variation is configured to end in a short period of time when the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640, and the second special symbol lottery is executed efficiently. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 when the special symbol 2 reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit, allowing the player to play in a comfortable manner.

In this control example, the short-term fluctuation time is set to "10 seconds," but this fluctuation time may be set to be even shorter. In this case, it is preferable to set a time (e.g., 3 seconds) longer than the interval (approximately 1.2 seconds) that it takes for a ball launched into the game board 13 to reach the second ball entrance 640. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 decreases even though the player is continuously launching balls, resulting in the first special symbol lottery, which is set as a lower priority than the second special symbol lottery, being executed.

Next, when the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuations are executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "50 times (specific period)", regardless of the lottery result (the lottery result of the special symbol) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "20 seconds" (medium fluctuation) is selected. The fluctuation pattern set during this specific period is the same as the fluctuation pattern selected in response to the first special symbol lottery described above, so a detailed explanation of it will be omitted.

Next, if the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates after the end of the big win game) is "51 times to 100 times (third period)", and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" (second short fluctuation) is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 149", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "150 to 198", and if the lottery result is "lose", it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" (short fluctuation) is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 191", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "192 to 198".

As explained above, in this first control example, the variation pattern selection table 202b has a normal table 202b1 and a special chance/time-saving table 202b2, and is configured to change the data table referenced when selecting a variation pattern depending on the set game state. This makes it possible to change the type of variation pattern selected depending on the set game state, and to show the player the results of the special pattern lottery in a variety of variation patterns, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the same data table (probability change/time-saving table 202b2) is referenced to select the variation pattern when the game state is set to the probability change state and when the time-saving state is set. Therefore, when the "chance mode" is set, which is a presentation mode that makes it difficult for the player to know whether the time-saving state or the probability change state is set, the type of variation pattern selected in response to the special pattern lottery executed can be used to prevent the player from understanding the set game state. Note that in this control example, the data table referenced when selecting the variation pattern during the probability change state and the data table referenced when selecting the variation pattern during the time-saving state are the same, but this is not limited to the above, and different data tables may be referenced.

In this case, it is advisable to provide a data table for high probability variation, which is referenced when selecting a variation pattern during the high probability variation state, and a data table for time-saving, which is referenced when selecting a variation pattern during the time-saving state, and provide a specific variation pattern that is specified only in one of the data tables as a type of variation pattern that is selected with a small probability (for example, 5%). This allows the player to grasp the currently set game state based on the type of variation pattern selected only when a specific variation pattern is selected.

In addition, the probability of each variation pattern being selected may be different between the data table for the probability variation mode and the data table for the time-saving mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the currently set game state by analyzing the bias in the variation patterns selected for the special symbol lottery performed during the "chance mode."

As described above, in this control example, the data table referenced when selecting the variation pattern is different depending on the game state that is set. However, the data table referenced may be selected based on conditions other than the game state. For example, when a time-saving state is set after a jackpot game ends, the data table referenced when selecting a variation pattern during the same time-saving state may be different based on the game state that was set when the previous jackpot was won, the jackpot type (stop display mode of the special symbol) that was set when the previous jackpot was won, the display mode of the third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and whether or not the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65V during the jackpot game (whether or not a V was won).

In this case, when setting a command (variation pattern command) indicating the selected variation pattern, it is advisable to configure it so that a command containing information indicating the type of the referenced data table (variation pattern selection table) is set. This makes it possible for the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving a variation pattern command, to determine the circumstances under which the current game state was set, in addition to the type of variation pattern currently set. Therefore, based on the received variation pattern command, it can determine that, for example, even though a guaranteed jackpot game was played, the ball was not able to enter the V and a time-saving state was set, and a dedicated presentation mode (for example, a "regret mode") can be set.

Returning to FIG. 138, the explanation continues. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 299). When the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by a second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning that is set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is a winning symbol. In addition, this second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for a low probability of a normal symbol and one for a high probability of a normal symbol winning that is higher than the low probability, and each type contains a different number of random numbers that result in a big win. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of a winning symbol is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

The contents stipulated in this second winning random number table 202c will be explained with reference to FIG. 140(b). FIG. 140(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 140(b), when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, a normal winning is stipulated when the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is a value of "0 to 2", and when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, a normal winning is stipulated when the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 149".

In other words, in this control example, when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is set to a low probability. As a result, in this embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed play) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state for normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state for normal symbols, it is possible to make it difficult to win a normal symbol win during the normal state, making it difficult for a normal symbol win game to be executed during the normal state and for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to execute a normal symbol win game based on a win of a normal symbol during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this control example, different lengths of fluctuation time are set as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation to indicate the result of the normal pattern lottery depending on the set game state, and a longer fluctuation time (e.g., 10 seconds) is set when a low probability state of the normal pattern is set than when a high probability state of the normal pattern is set. In this way, by varying the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery and the length of the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation depending on the game state, it is possible to easily set a game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which it is easy to win the normal pattern lottery and enter the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, in this control example, if a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where a low probability state for normal symbols is set is won, a normal symbol winning game can be executed in which the electric device 640 is opened in an operating mode (long opening) that allows multiple balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640, so that no matter what game state is set, the possibility of the second special symbol lottery being executed can be left open for the player, improving the interest of the game.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once for each timer interrupt processing (see Figure 156) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see Figure 167).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Returning to Fig. 137, the explanation will continue. The ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined in correspondence with the various counters shown in Fig. 138. Now, with reference to Fig. 139(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. Fig. 139(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 139(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has at least a first win random number table 202a, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, a second win random number table 202c, and a big win type selection table 202d. Note that the first win random number table 202a, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, the second win random number table 202c, and the big win type selection table 202d have been described above when explaining the various counters shown in FIG. 138, so their explanation will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 137, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 138, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 167) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 166) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 165) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

As shown in FIG. 139(b), the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game status storage area 203g, a time-saving counter 203h, a special chance counter 203i, a jackpot start flag 203j, a jackpot in progress flag 203k, a special chance setting flag 203m, a special chance passing counter 203n, a winning number counter 203o, a remaining ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a special chance active flag 203r, a special chance active timer 203s, a discharge number counter 203t, and a miscellaneous memory area 203z.

The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on balls entering the first ball entry port 64 (initial winning), up to the upper limit number (four in this control example).

The second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on balls entering the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning), up to the upper limit number (four in this control example).

The special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a memory area in which various counter values for starting the display of the special symbol variation are stored, and when the special symbol stops varying, if various counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area. In this control example, since the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in priority to the first special symbol lottery, if various counter values are stored in both the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the various counter values stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area and stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) store the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) upon detection of the start winning. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), it obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3, and CS1 from the counter buffer and stores them in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, when it detects that a ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), it obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3, and CS1 from the counter buffer and stores them in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the special pattern variation (lottery), in order to execute processes such as the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81, the data corresponding to one of the start winnings (counter values C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b described above is shifted to this special pattern reserved ball execution area. Note that in this embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c is a storage area in which the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) is stored when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (start winning). When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), it obtains the value of the second winning random number counter C4 from the counter buffer and stores it in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c has four reserved areas so that data (counter C4 value) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. The data of the reserved balls is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c in the order in which they passed through the through gate 67 (start winning), starting from the reserved area with the earliest data to be consumed.

In addition, when the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is time to start the execution of the normal symbol variable display performance based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and it is a memory for storing data (counter C4 value) to be referenced in processing such as the normal symbol winning lottery and the setting of the display (variable pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start the execution of the normal pattern variable display performance, it shifts the data corresponding to one start winning among the data corresponding to each start winning (the value of the second winning random number counter C4) stored in the above-mentioned normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c to this normal pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) in order to execute processes such as the winning lottery and the display settings of the second pattern display device 83. In this embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performance (variable display performance performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to a maximum of four times based on the winning of the first ball entrance 64 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) that is executed periodically every 2 milliseconds. The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. Meanwhile, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by one each time a variable display performance is executed.

The value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a first special pattern reserved ball count command output from the main control device 110 when the counter value is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning). The first special pattern reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time an initial winning is detected and the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is incremented by one.

The second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performance (variable display performance performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to a maximum of four times based on the winning of the second ball entrance 640 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) that is executed periodically every 2 milliseconds. The second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the counter up to a maximum value of four. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by one each time a variable display performance is executed.

The value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a second special pattern reserved ball count command output from the main control device 110 when the counter value is stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning). The second special pattern reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time an initial winning is detected and the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is incremented by one.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 refers to the data stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) in the special pattern jackpot determination process (see S301 in FIG. 158), and performs a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determines the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the first pattern display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type.

The variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special pattern variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation display performance based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display performed by the second pattern display device 83 up to one time based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 (hereinafter referred to as "initial winning") detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. This normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added up to the maximum value (see S904 in FIG. 164). On the other hand, the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a variable display of a normal pattern is executed (see S805 in FIG. 163).

The game status storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game status, and stores the game status corresponding to the game status (setting status of the time-saving counter 203h, setting status of the special probability counter 203i) that will be set after the end of the big win game. Specifically, when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 and the value of the special probability counter 203i is 0, the normal status is stored; when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 and the value of the special probability counter 203i is 0, the time-saving status is stored; and when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 and the value of the special probability counter 203i is greater than 0, the special probability status is stored.

Furthermore, when a jackpot game is being played, the system is configured to store a winning game state (jackpot state) indicating that a jackpot game is being played, and type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being played. In addition, the system is configured to store regular winning game in-play information indicating that a regular winning game is being played.

Then, a status command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game status storage area 203g, and the status command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output status command and temporarily stores it in the slave status setting area 223g.

The information stored in this game status storage area 203g is configured to be able to be retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and is configured to set a status command corresponding to the information stored in the game status storage area 203g during the start-up process (see FIG. 166) that is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

This allows the audio and lamp control device 113 to determine the current game status even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason.

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for indicating the state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set, and is set to a value corresponding to the state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set. After the end of a jackpot game, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot that was won is set in this time-saving counter 203h (see S2103 in FIG. 170). When a jackpot game is won, the counter is cleared to 0. As a result, a high probability state for normal symbols is not set during a jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player during a jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted based on the special pattern lottery (variation). When the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0, the high probability state of the normal pattern ends and a transition to a low probability state of the normal pattern occurs. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the high probability state of the normal pattern may be configured to continue until the next jackpot game is played (until a jackpot is won). In this case, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to be set to "10000".

In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for terminating the high probability state of the normal pattern and the condition for decrementing the value of the time-saving counter 203h are set only as a condition for decrementing the value of the time-saving counter 203h based on the number of times the special pattern is drawn (varied). However, without being limited to this, for example, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to be decremented when a termination condition that can be established depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control unit 110 is established. Specifically, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to be decremented when the lottery result of each pattern lottery executed in a state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special miss win), or when the result of the normal pattern lottery is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special normal win win).

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by one at a time, but the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be decremented multiple times (for example, by 2) in a lump depending on the type of termination condition that has been met, or the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be decremented so that it becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time-saving counter 203h. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state will continue, and to make the player interested in playing during the time-saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for terminating the time-saving state may be varied depending on the fulfillment of the conditions for setting the time-saving state (jackpot type). This allows players to not only play a jackpot game, but also to become interested in the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot game that has been played, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The probability change counter 203i is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set, and a value corresponding to the state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set is set. A value is set in this probability change counter 203i after the end of a jackpot game based on the ball passing through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game (see S2102 in FIG. 170). If a jackpot game is won, the counter is cleared to 0. As a result, a high probability state of a special symbol is not set during a jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the probability counter 203i is set, and the value of the probability counter 203i is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (variation). When the value of the probability counter 203i becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol ends and a transition to a low probability state of the special symbol occurs. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the high probability state of the special symbol may be configured to continue until the next jackpot game is played (until a jackpot is won). In this case, the value of the probability counter 203i may be configured to be set to "10000".

In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for terminating the high probability state of the special symbol and the condition for decrementing the value of the probability counter 203i are set only as a condition for decrementing the value of the probability counter 203i based on the number of times the special symbol is drawn (varied), but this is not limited thereto. For example, the value of the probability counter 203i may be decremented when a termination condition that can be established depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is established. Specifically, the value of the probability counter 203i may be decremented when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special miss win), or when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special normal win win).

Furthermore, the value set in the probability change counter 203i may be different based on the type of jackpot that was won and the passing status of the ball into the specific area (V gate) 65v. Similarly to the above-mentioned content of subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203h, the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be subtracted based on conditions other than the number of times the special pattern changes. When the subtraction condition for subtracting the value of the probability change counter 203i is established, the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be subtracted multiple times at once. This makes it difficult for the player to know how long the high probability state of the special pattern will continue, so that the player can keep an eye on the results of the special pattern lottery that is executed during the high probability state of the special pattern without getting bored.

In addition, in this control example, the condition for terminating the probability change state, that is, the condition for decrementing the value of the probability change counter 203i, is set only as a condition for decrementing the value of the probability change counter 203i based on the number of times the special symbol lottery (variation) is performed. However, without being limited to this, for example, when a termination condition that can be established depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is established, the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be decremented. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special miss win), or when the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special normal win), the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be decremented, or the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be decremented based on the ball entering a specific ball entrance (e.g., the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, etc.).

In addition, in this control example, the value of the special probability counter 203i is decremented by one, but it may be configured to decrement multiple values of the special probability counter 203i at once (for example, 2) depending on the type of termination condition that is met, or it may be configured to decrement the value of the special probability counter 203i so that it becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the special probability counter 203i. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the special probability state will continue, and to make the player interested in playing during the special probability state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the high probability state may be varied depending on the content of the conditions for setting the high probability state (jackpot type). This allows the player to not only play a jackpot game, but also to become interested in the jackpot type corresponding to the played jackpot game, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

The jackpot start flag 203j is a flag that indicates whether or not to start a jackpot. If this jackpot start flag 203j is on, it means that it is time to start a jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not time to start a jackpot. This jackpot start flag 203j is set on when it is time to end the variable display that indicates a jackpot. In addition, the jackpot start flag 203j is set off when the start of a jackpot is set (see S1903 in FIG. 168).

The jackpot flag 203k is a flag that indicates whether or not a jackpot game (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203k is on, it means that a jackpot game is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a jackpot game is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203k is set to on when a jackpot game (special game state) starts after a special symbol is selected as a jackpot (see S1903 in FIG. 168). It is also set to off when the jackpot game (special game state) ends (see S2105 in FIG. 170). Then, in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 157), the jackpot flag 203k is referenced to determine whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 157).

The probability change setting flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not the game state is to be changed to the probability change state after a jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is to be set to the probability change state is determined by whether or not a ball has entered (flowed down) into a specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120) provided in the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game. Here, when it is detected that a ball has entered (flowed down) into this specific area (V gate) 65v (passing through the probability change switch provided in the specific area (V gate) 65v), the probability change setting flag 203m is set to ON (see S2215 in FIG. 171). On the other hand, this probability change setting flag 203m is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game (see S2105 in FIG. 170). In addition, this probability change setting flag 203m is backed up when the power is turned off, and when it is restored (when the power is turned on), it is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off. It is also set to off when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

If the special chance setting flag 203m is set to on when the power is turned on, it may be configured to determine whether the special chance setting flag 203m was passed before the power was turned off, and if it is determined that the special chance setting flag 203m was passed, the special chance setting flag 203m may be set to on and the game may be restored. In this case, whether the special chance setting flag was passed before the power was turned off can be determined by whether the special chance passing counter 203n, which will be described later, is greater than 0. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine fraud such as rewriting only the special chance setting flag 203m to on and turning the power back on while the power is off, thereby reducing damage to the game establishment.

The special chance passing counter 203n is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the special chance switch (flowed down a specific area) during one round during a jackpot game (one round of a jackpot in this embodiment). The sum of the special chance passing counter 203n and the discharge number counter 203t described later can be used to determine whether all balls that have won in the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged. The special chance passing counter 203n is updated by adding one each time a ball passes through the special chance switch (flows down a specific area). After executing a process to determine whether the number of balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of balls discharged, the counter is reset to the initial value "0". The special chance passing counter 203n is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, the counter is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203o is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won in the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round of a big win game, and is updated by incrementing by one when a win in the specific winning port 65a is detected. On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is reset to the initial value "0" after determining whether the number of balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203o) matches the number of balls dispensed (the total value of the dispense number counter 203t and the special chance passing counter 203n). The value of this winning number counter 203o is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203p is a flag that indicates whether or not it is the ball discharge period after one round has ended and the specific winning port 65a has closed. When this remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to on, it means that it is the ball discharge period. While this remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to on, the remaining ball timer 203q, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203q is a counter for determining the time since the specific winning port 65a was closed, and is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203q is a counter for determining whether the time required for the winning balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed when a preset round ends and the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is closed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203q in advance. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203q (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), a determination is made as to whether the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 and the number of balls discharged match. If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification is issued to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are stuck in the variable winning device 65.

If the number of winning balls and the number of balls dispensed do not match, a dedicated flag may be set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the special probability setting flag 203m may not be set to ON even if the game ball passes through the special probability switch. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the special probability state from being improperly granted.

The high probability valid flag 203r is a flag for determining whether or not the passage (entry) of a game ball that passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v is valid after the switching valve 65y has been switched to a configuration that does not allow balls to be allocated to the specific area (V gate) 65v. When this high probability valid flag 203r is set to on, it indicates that it is a normal period for game balls to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v.

The special chance valid timer 203s is a counter for counting the time since the special chance valid flag 203r described above is set to ON. This special chance valid timer 203s can determine the period required for a ball to pass through the special chance switch normally after the switching valve 65y is switched to a configuration in which the ball cannot flow down the specific area (V gate) 65v. In this embodiment, the time required for a game ball that has reached the switching valve 65y to pass through the special chance switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit of the special chance valid timer 203s is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v after that, it is determined to be illegal and is not determined to have passed.

This makes it possible to prevent damage caused by fraud, such as illegally putting a gaming ball into a specific area (V gate) 65v (V area) and passing through the special probability switch, or using a piano wire or the like to push the gaming ball up from below the special probability switch and pass it through, or using radio waves or the like to cause the magnetic sensor to erroneously detect that the ball has passed through.

The dispensed ball counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of game balls dispensed from the variable winning device 65 in one round. This dispensed ball counter 203t is reset to an initial value of 0 after it is determined that the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dispensed balls.

Other memory area 203z stores other data necessary for playing the game, counters, flags, etc.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating the driving parts for performance provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a device drive command may be sent to the other device 228 to drive a device for effects (not shown), a voice output command may be set to cause the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22, or a lamp output command may be set to cause the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 144(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a normal special chart 2 performance selection table 222b, a special chance performance selection table 222c, a continuous preview execution selection table 222d, a V notification execution selection table 222e, and a button operation performance selection table 222f.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation patterns of each variation pattern type (complete miss, reach miss, various reaches, etc.) are set in a counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/lose judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to general information such as the variation time and variation pattern type. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, and suppresses the problem of players getting bored early on.

In this control example, a variation effect (see FIG. 123) is executed in which the third pattern is displayed by scrolling horizontally on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the special pattern variation being executed. In this variation effect, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/loss determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection, so that the player can play (special pattern game) while predicting whether the current special pattern variation will result in a jackpot win by visually checking the variation effect executed on the third pattern display device 81.

The normal special symbol 2 effect selection table 222b is a data table that is referenced when selecting the effect mode of the third symbol when a variation pattern with an additional time of 30 seconds is selected from among the second special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set, and different effect modes (effect contents) are specified according to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (win/lose determination result), the number of reserved special symbols 2, the number of reserved special symbols 1, and the value of the effect counter 223f.

In this control example, when the normal state is set and a win is won in the normal symbol lottery, the electric device 640 opens for 5 seconds to play a normal symbol winning game. The system is configured so that the second special symbol lottery can be played by inserting a ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal symbol winning game. In other words, in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to play the second special symbol lottery, if a predetermined execution condition is met (if a normal symbol winning game is won), it is configured so that it is easier to obtain the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved ball) (easier to insert a ball into the second ball entrance 640) for a predetermined period (during the normal symbol winning game period).

In the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, as shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 142(b)), a variation pattern with a variation time of "10 seconds" and a variation pattern with a variation time of "40 seconds" can be selected, and when the second special symbol lottery in which the variation pattern with a variation time of "40 seconds" is set is executed, the presentation mode of the variation presentation is set by referring to the normal special symbol 2 presentation selection table 222b.

Now, referring to FIG. 145, the contents of the normal special symbol 2 performance selection table 222b will be explained. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the contents of the normal special symbol 2 performance selection table 222b. This normal special symbol 2 performance selection table 222b is a data table that is referenced when selecting the performance mode of the third symbol variation performance when a variation pattern with an additional time of 30 seconds is selected from among the second special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set, and different performance modes (performance contents) are specified according to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (win/lose judgment result), the number of reserved special symbols 2, the number of reserved special symbols 1, and the value of the performance counter 223f.

As shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 142(b)), in this control example, when the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, a common miss reach effect is executed in correspondence with the base time (10 seconds) (see FIG. 125(a)), and then, a pseudo-variation effect (see FIGS. 125(b) to 126) is executed during the added time (30 seconds) as the effect content (effect mode) selected by referring to the normal special symbol 2 effect selection table 222b.

Specifically, if the lottery result is a jackpot and the number of reserved special charts 2 is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 79" with a fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 3 effect" and a range of "80 to 99" with a fluctuation pattern of "special pseudo 2 effect." If the number of reserved special charts 2 is 2, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 99" with a fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 2 effect." If the number of reserved special charts 2 is 1, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 89" with a fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 1 effect" and a range of "90 to 99" with a fluctuation pattern of "special pseudo 4 effect."

In addition, if the lottery result is a jackpot and the number of reserved special charts 2 is 0, a "special end effect" will be set if the number of reserved special charts 1 is 1 to 4, and a "pseudo none effect" will be set if the number of reserved special charts 1 is 0.

If the lottery result is a miss, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 3 effect", if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 2, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 2 effect", if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 1, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 1 effect", and if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 0, "no pseudo effect" is specified.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when setting the presentation mode of the pseudo-variable presentation of the second special symbol, the presence or absence of the reserved number of special symbols 2 and the reserved number of special symbols 1 is determined, and the pseudo-variable presentation is executed in a presentation mode corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed next. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier to think that the pseudo-variable presentation executed during one special symbol variation period is a variation presentation corresponding to the next special symbol variation.

Furthermore, since the number of pseudo fluctuations (the number of temporary stops of the third symbol) executed in the pseudo fluctuation performance is configured to correspond to the number of reserved special symbols 2 already acquired, it is possible to make the player believe that all of the reserved special symbols 2 acquired during the normal symbol winning game executed in the normal state have been used. Therefore, when a pseudo fluctuation performance in which a jackpot is won is executed, it is possible to make the player believe that he or she has won a jackpot as a result of acquiring many reserved special symbols 2 during the normal symbol winning game executed in the normal state. Also, when a pseudo fluctuation performance in which a miss is won is executed, it is possible to make the player believe that all of the reserved special symbols 2 have been used up, and then a fluctuation performance using the reserved special symbols 2 is executed (as the chance zone continues), so it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance.

In addition, this control example has pseudo-variation effects (special pseudo 2 effect, pseudo 4 effect) that are set only when a jackpot is won, so players can be interested in the number of pseudo-variations executed in the pseudo-variation effects and the number of reserved special charts 2.

Next, the contents of the special probability variation performance selection table 222c will be explained with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special probability variation performance selection table 222c. This special probability variation performance selection table 222c is a data table that is referenced when setting a variation performance when a variation pattern with a base time of 30 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the special probability variation state (time-saving state), i.e., during the high probability state of the normal symbol. This special probability variation performance selection table 222c is referenced when setting the presentation mode of the variation performance for the special symbol variation to be executed, and is set in the "Super Chance Mode" which is a presentation mode that notifies the player that the special probability variation state is in progress (S5005: Yes in FIG. 183) in the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 183) executed in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and the variation time (basic variation time) of the variation pattern to be executed this time is "30 seconds". It is referenced when the time period for the currently executed variation pattern (basic variation time) is "30 seconds" (S5114 in FIG. 184: Yes) (S5112 in FIG. 184: Yes) and the variation time (basic variation time) is "30 seconds" (S5114 in FIG. 184: Yes) during the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184) executed in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182).

In this control example, when the first special pattern lottery is executed in a high probability state for normal patterns, in order to prevent a situation from occurring in which the player realizes that he or she has won a jackpot that can only be won in the first special pattern lottery (a jackpot that results in a normal jackpot game being played) before the lottery result of the first special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a double reach effect is executed in which both the third pattern (third pattern with an even number) indicating a jackpot that results in a normal jackpot game being played, and the third pattern (third pattern with an odd number) indicating a jackpot that results in a special jackpot game being played, are in a reach state.

Furthermore, in order to make it difficult for the player to know that the special symbol lottery being executed is the first special symbol lottery when the above-mentioned double reach effect is executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol or the time-saving state, the above-mentioned double reach effect is also executed in the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, which always executes the high probability jackpot game when a jackpot is won. In addition, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation executed in the state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set are both configured to be able to select a variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds", and the double reach effect is executed when this "30 seconds" variation pattern is selected. In this way, regardless of the type of special symbol, the same variation time (30 seconds) is set and the double reach effect is executed as the same variation effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the type of the special symbol variation being executed by the variable effect being executed, and by sharing the performance data used for the variable effect, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the performance data used for various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 146, the special chance performance selection table 222c specifies different performance modes depending on the symbol type (special symbol type), the lottery result (the result of the special symbol lottery), and the value of the performance counter 223f. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is a special chance jackpot (jackpot A), a "special chance single reach" is specified for the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 49" and a "double reach" is specified for the range of "50 to 99." When it is a normal jackpot (jackpot B), a "double reach" is specified, and when it is a miss, a "non-reach" is specified.

In addition, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a jackpot, a "special double reach" is set in the range of "0 to 49" on the performance counter 223f, and a "double reach" is set in the range of "50 to 99". If the result is a miss, a "double reach" is set in the range of "0 to 4" on the performance counter 223f, a "double reach" is set in the range of "5 to 10", and a "non-reach" is set in the range of "11 to 99".

By configuring it in this way, whether the first special symbol lottery is executed in the probability bonus state or the second special symbol lottery is executed, a "double reach" (a reach effect in which two or more third symbols, including the third symbol corresponding to a normal win, are in a reach state, as shown in FIG. 131(a)) will be executed, making it difficult for the player to tell which third symbol change effect is being executed corresponding to which special symbol lottery when a "double reach" is executed.

When "special double reach" is set, the presentation mode of "double reach" is set first, and then a reach presentation is executed in which the presentation mode changes to "probable double reach" as shown in FIG. 131(b). Therefore, even if "double reach" is executed in response to the first special symbol lottery, the player can play the game while expecting it to be upgraded to "probable double reach" midway through. Note that in this "special double reach", the timing at which the presentation mode of the reach presentation changes is when the middle symbol row Z2 has completed one or two revolutions, but this is not limited to this, and the presentation mode may be changed based on the timing at which the player operates the operation button 22.

When the second special symbol change is executed during normal state, if a change pattern (special miss) with a change time of "10 seconds (base time 10 seconds, added time 0 seconds)" is selected, the miss reach presentation shown in FIG. 125(a) is executed, and then the third symbol is displayed still in a display mode indicating a miss. On the other hand, if a change pattern (special win) with a change time of "10 seconds (base time 10 seconds, added time 0 seconds)" is selected, then after the symbol changes for 10 seconds, the third symbol is displayed still in a display mode indicating a jackpot win (for example, "777").

In this way, by providing a special variation pattern in which a number of variation effects are executed in a single special pattern variation period, and a normal variation pattern in which one variation effect is executed in a single special pattern variation period, as variation effects corresponding to the second special pattern variation executed during the normal state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell when a new second special pattern variation has been executed, allowing the player to play while hoping that the chance zone will continue.

In addition, the more variable effects (including simulated effects) that are executed during the chance zone, the higher the chance of winning the jackpot, so players can play while hoping that the chance zone will continue for a long time.

In addition, in this control example, the normal variation pattern variation time (10 seconds) is set to be the same as the pseudo variation time (10 seconds) of one execution of the special variation pattern in which multiple pseudo variation effects are executed during one special pattern variation period. For example, when a second special pattern variation executed in the normal variation pattern is executed after a second special pattern variation executed in the special variation pattern, a 10-second variation effect is repeatedly executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether a pseudo variation effect is being repeatedly executed as a special variation pattern or whether a special variation pattern and a normal variation pattern are being executed consecutively. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing a new second special pattern variation is executed, so that the player can play while hoping that the chance zone will continue.

In this control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of "40" seconds is selected as the second special symbol variation during the normal state, the variation performance of the special variation pattern is executed. However, without being limited to this, a variation time other than "40 seconds" may be selectable as the variation time corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the normal state. Also, in this control example, the pseudo variation time, which is part of the variation performance of the special variation pattern, is basically fixed at 10 seconds, and when the expectation of a jackpot is high, the pseudo variation performance is more likely to be executed for a length other than 10 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to have the player play while expecting that the execution period of one variation performance will be longer.

Returning to FIG. 144(a), we continue the explanation. The continuous preview execution selection table 222d is a data table that is referenced when determining whether or not to establish the execution conditions for a continuous preview performance that is executed across multiple periods of special pattern variation, based on the winning information (whether or not a jackpot has been won) contained in the winning information command received from the main control device 110. When the execution conditions for the continuous preview performance are established here, a special effective time is set that determines whether operation of the frame button 22 is valid. Then, if the frame button 22 is operated within the special effective time, the continuous preview performance is executed.

When this continuous preview performance is executed, the background mode changes to a different background mode (sky mode) from the normal background mode (sea mode, mountain mode), and a continuous performance is executed using the period until the result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the winning information for which the execution condition is satisfied is displayed. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, during the high speed fluctuation period (the period from when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set to when the 20th special pattern fluctuation is executed), the background mode is configured to be less likely to change based on the operation of the frame button 22 compared to other periods. Even during such a high speed fluctuation period, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.

Also, unlike normal background mode transitions, it is possible to execute a background mode transition that increases the expectation of winning the jackpot, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, during high-speed variation periods, the variation time of the special pattern variation is likely to be shorter than in other periods, so if the background mode is transitioned as in other periods, there is a risk of missing the results of the important special pattern lottery, and so the system is configured to make it difficult to transition to background mode. However, when transitioning to background mode based on the execution of continuous preview performances, continuous preview performances are executed using the variation time of multiple special pattern variations, so the results of the continuous preview performances are not displayed immediately after the background mode transition. Therefore, even if a background mode transition is executed, a performance that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during a high-speed fluctuation period, an effect (operation effect) other than background mode transition can be executed, and the configuration is such that the player is motivated to operate the frame button 22 even during the high-speed fluctuation period, thereby preventing early boredom with the game. Among these, by executing a background mode transition based on the establishment of the execution conditions for the continuous preview effect, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect and increase the interest of the game.

Now, referring to FIG. 147(a), the contents of the continuous preview execution selection table 222d will be described. FIG. 147(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the continuous preview execution selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 147(a), the continuous preview execution selection table 222d specifies whether or not the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met in correspondence with the lottery result (lottery result of the special pattern) included in the received winning information, the number of reserved special patterns 2 (the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern), and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a "jackpot", the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 79", "continuous preview available" is set, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met, and in the range of "80 to 198", "continuous preview not available" is set, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are not met. Also, when the number of reserved special charts 2 is "4", the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "continuous preview available" is set, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met, and in the range of "150 to 198", "continuous preview not available" is set, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are not met.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is a "miss", the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 194", "no consecutive notice" is specified, where the execution conditions for the consecutive notice performance are not met, and in the range of "195 to 198", "consecutive notice" is specified, where the execution conditions for the consecutive notice performance are met. Also, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is "4", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "no consecutive notice" is specified, where the execution conditions for the consecutive notice performance are not met, and in the range of "190 to 198", "consecutive notice" is specified, where the execution conditions for the consecutive notice performance are met.

As described above, in this control example, the more the number of reserved special symbols 2, the easier it is to establish the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance, and further, the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are more likely to be established when the lottery result for the special symbol is a jackpot than when it is a miss. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player eager to play (a game in which the ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640) in order to execute the continuous preview performance, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, it is configured so that the more the number of reserved special symbols 2, the higher the expectation of a jackpot when the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are established. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous preview performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, it is possible to make the player eager to play (a game in which the ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640), and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In this control example, when a winning information command (winning information command for a special symbol) is received from the main control device 110, the continuous preview execution selection table 222d is referenced to determine (determine) only whether the execution conditions for the continuous preview performance are met. Even if the execution conditions for the continuous preview performance are met, the continuous preview performance is not executed at that point, and is executed when the frame button 22 is operated within a specific period after the execution conditions are met. As a result, when multiple balls enter the second ball entrance 640 during one special symbol variation period and multiple winning information commands are received, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the winning information that is the subject of the execution conditions being met. Therefore, when a continuous preview performance is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the continuous preview performance will continue, and it is possible to prevent the content of the continuous preview performance from becoming monotonous.

As described above, this control example is configured not to notify (suggest) the player that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance have been met, but this is not limited to this and it may be configured to execute a notification (suggestion) performance to notify (suggest) the player that the conditions for execution have been met. For example, it may be configured to notify (suggest) the player that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance have been met by displaying the word "Waiting" in the secondary display area Ds. By configuring it in this way, when a notification (suggestion) performance is executed, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 to execute the consecutive preview performance, which can increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 129(a), an icon HR10 resembling a frame button 22 is displayed at the lower right of the main display area Dm as a valid period notification mode capable of notifying the player that a valid period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 by the player has been set (that the valid period is in progress), but it is configured so that it is not possible (or difficult) to determine from the display mode of the icon HR10 whether a special valid time has been set, which is set when the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met, or whether a normal valid time has been set. With this configuration, the player is motivated to operate the frame button 22 to execute the continuous preview performance, since the player does not know whether the continuous preview performance or the normal operation performance will be executed until he or she operates the frame button 22.

Unlike the configuration of this control example, the display mode of the icon HR10 may be configured to allow the player to determine whether the currently set effective period is the special effective period or the normal effective period, or the timing at which the icon HR10 is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to allow the player to determine whether the currently set effective period is the special effective period or the normal effective period. In addition, the period during which the special effective period is set may be different from the period during which the normal effective period is set (for example, 3 seconds after the special pattern variation begins), and the player may not be notified (suggested) that the special effective period has been set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the frame button 22 should be operated to execute the continuous notice performance, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22. Similarly, in the case where the display mode is configured not to notify (suggest) that the special effective period is set, only the performance that notifies (suggests) that the execution conditions for the continuous notice performance have been established (for example, displaying the characters "Waiting" in the sub-display area Ds) may be executable. This makes it possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being operated unnecessarily when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are not met. In addition, when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are met and the frame button 22 is operated outside of the special effective time, a notification display may be displayed to inform the player that the special effective time is currently outside (for example, a display of "Not now" in the secondary display area Ds), or a guide display may be displayed to inform the player of the special effective time (for example, a display of "Please press again in 2 seconds" in the secondary display area Ds).

In addition, in this control example, when a winning information command containing winning information for the second special symbol is received, processing is performed to establish the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance by referring to the consecutive preview performance table 222d, but this is not limited to this, and the consecutive preview performance may also be configured to be established when a winning information command containing winning information for the first special symbol is received.

Returning to FIG. 144, the explanation will be given. The V notification execution selection table 222e is a data table that is referenced when deciding whether or not to execute a V notification performance during a jackpot game. In this control example, a specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during a jackpot game, and when a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, a high probability state (probability state) of a special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends. Then, depending on the type of jackpot game to be executed, a jackpot game in which the ball is more likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game (probability jackpot game) and a jackpot game in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game than the probability jackpot game (normal jackpot game) are executable.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(b), a switching valve 65y is provided in the variable winning device 65, and depending on the position of the switching valve 65y, the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is allocated to a third flow path 65e3 that is impossible (difficult) to pass through the specific area (V-gate) 65v, and a fourth flow path 65e4 that can pass through the specific area (V-gate) 65v. This switching valve 65y is controlled so that it is switched to a position that allows the ball to be allocated to the fourth flow path 65e4 only during the first round of play when a guaranteed big win game is executed.

The V notification effect is an effect that can execute the following for a player playing a jackpot game: a V guidance effect that informs a player playing a jackpot game of the period (V period) during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v and the game method for aiming at the specific area (V gate) 65v; a V period effect that informs the player that the current time is a V period; a V success effect that informs the player that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period; and a V failure effect that informs the player that the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period. By executing this V notification effect, when a high probability jackpot game is played, the player can easily play a game to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v, and since the player is informed that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that a high probability state will be set after the jackpot game ends.

Here, in this control example, after a normal jackpot game is executed, a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the time-saving state is set, a "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode (see FIG. 134). Furthermore, the "chance mode" is also set in some cases where a probability variable state is set after the end of a jackpot game. This allows the player to play while expecting a probability variable state, since the possibility of a probability variable state being set internally can be left even when a "chance mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game. However, if a V notification presentation is executed during a jackpot game, it is easy to know whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and as a result, if the "chance mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game, even if the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the player may have a mistrust that the probability variable state has disappeared. In particular, in a pachinko machine 10 like this control example, where the condition for ending the special variable state is met when the special symbol variation is executed 50 times, the special variable state ends without winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, so there is a strong risk that the player will think that the special variable state was not set even though the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v.

In this control example, a process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a V notification effect during a jackpot game, and the presence or absence of a V notification effect during a jackpot game is determined based on the result of the process. Then, during a jackpot game in which a V notification effect is not executed, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v (if a special probability state is set after the jackpot game ends), a "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends. This configuration makes it difficult for the player to determine whether a special probability state is set internally, so that a player playing the "chance mode" can play in the hope that a special probability state has been set, without causing distrust to the player.

Now, referring to FIG. 147(b), the contents of the V notification execution selection table 222e will be explained. FIG. 147(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the V notification execution selection table 222e. This V notification execution selection table 222e is referenced when determining whether or not to execute a V notification presentation during the current jackpot game (S4704 in FIG. 180) when it is determined that it is time to start a special jackpot game (S4701 in FIG. 180: Yes) in the jackpot-related processing (see S4218 in FIG. 180) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 174) of the sound lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 147(b), the V notification execution selection table 222e specifies whether or not to execute a V notification effect (the result of the determination as to whether or not to execute a V notification effect) in accordance with the jackpot type (the jackpot type that won the jackpot) corresponding to the jackpot game being executed this time and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "V notification yes" indicating that the V notification effect will be executed is specified, and when the acquired value is in the range of "150 to 198", "V notification no" indicating that the V notification effect will not be executed is specified. In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C, D, E", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "V notification yes" is specified, and when the acquired value is in the range of "190 to 198", "V notification no" is specified.

When a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, in which a special jackpot game is executed, the V notification effect is executed about 75% of the time. Here, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, 50% of the time it will be a special jackpot game ("jackpot A"), and the remaining 50% of the time it will be a normal jackpot game ("jackpot B"). Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game in about 37.5% of cases, and the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game in about 62.5% of cases. Also, it is configured so that the probability of a special jackpot game being executed among the cases where the V notification effect is not executed is about 20%.

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery and the jackpot type "jackpot C, D, E" is set, in which a jackpot game with a high probability of being played is set, the V notification effect is executed about 90% of the time. Here, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, it is configured to always be a jackpot game with a high probability of being played ("jackpot C, D, E"). Therefore, in reality, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a jackpot game without a V notification effect is executed about 10% of the time. In this way, by providing a case where the V notification effect is not executed even for a jackpot win in the second special pattern lottery, which always executes a jackpot game with a high probability of being played, the percentage of times when the game state is in a high probability state can be increased when the V notification effect is not executed, that is, when the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, the ratio of V notification effects being executed is different between winning a jackpot ("jackpot A") in which a special jackpot game is executed in the first special pattern lottery and winning a jackpot ("jackpot C, D, E") in which a special jackpot game is executed in the second special pattern lottery. Specifically, the first special pattern lottery, which makes it difficult to execute a special jackpot game, is configured to make it more difficult to execute a V notification effect when a special jackpot game is executed, compared to the second special pattern lottery, which makes it easier to execute a special jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the frequency with which a V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game can be increased, making it easier for the player to have a sense of expectation even when a "chance mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game based on the first special pattern lottery, in which a normal jackpot game can be executed.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 147(b), the execution rate of the V notification effect is varied depending on the type of jackpot, but the execution rate of the V notification effect may also be varied depending on other factors. For example, the execution rate of the V notification effect may be varied depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the execution rate of the V notification effect may be varied depending on the number of times a jackpot is won without transitioning to the normal state (the so-called number of consecutive wins), or the execution rate of the V notification effect may be varied depending on the operation result of the player operating the frame button 22. By varying the execution rate of the V notification effect depending on various conditions in this way, multiple apparent probability rates (the rate at which the V notification effect is executed in all jackpot wins) can be set, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this control example, the above-mentioned V notification effect is configured to be executable only when a guaranteed jackpot game is executed, that is, when a jackpot game in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed, but it is not limited to this, and the V notification effect may also be configured to be executable when a normal jackpot game is executed. In this case, the V notification effect is executed in accordance with the timing when the V period (the period in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v) is set in the guaranteed jackpot game (the timing when the round game of the first round is executed), and finally, a V failure effect is executed to notify that the ball did not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period. Furthermore, if the V failure effect is executed despite normal play during the jackpot game, for example, a V failure effect may be executed even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the guaranteed jackpot game, and a "chance mode" may be set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this control example, a pattern can be set in which the V notification effect is not executed during the guaranteed jackpot game whether the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the V notification effect is always executed when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, which always executes the guaranteed jackpot game when a jackpot is won.

Returning to FIG. 144(a), the explanation will be continued. The button operation time presentation selection table 222f is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, which is the operating means, when the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode, and is referenced (see S5315 in FIG. 186) when it is determined that a valid operation has been executed on the frame button 22 during the chance mode in the frame button input monitoring/presentation process (see S4107 in FIG. 186) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113. In this way, by varying the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed when the player operates the frame button 22 by referring to the button operation time presentation selection table 222f, it is possible to provide the player with a wide variety of operation presentations.

Now, with reference to FIG. 148(a), the contents of the button operation effect selection table 222f will be explained. FIG. 148(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the button operation effect selection table 222f. As shown in FIG. 148(a), the button operation effect selection table 222f defines a time-saving state selection table 222f1 that is referenced when the time-saving state is set, and a special probability state selection table 223f2 that is referenced when the special probability state is set.

In this control example, the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode when the time-saving state is set and in some cases when the probability variable state is set. A common variation presentation is executed during the "chance mode" regardless of the set game state. Furthermore, when the probability variable state is set and when the time-saving state is set, the variation pattern (variation time) is selected by referring to the same variation pattern table (probability variable/time-saving table 202b2). This makes it difficult to know whether the currently set game state is the probability variable state or the time-saving state from the special pattern variation executed during the "chance mode" and the variation presentation of the third pattern executed in response to the special pattern variation, so that the player can play while expecting that the current game state is the probability variable state.

However, if a player playing the "Chance mode" is not provided with information suggesting the currently set game state, there is a problem that the player will quickly become bored with playing in the "Chance mode". Therefore, in this control example, multiple types of operation effects are configured to be executable during the "Chance mode", and the execution rate of each operation effect is configured to vary depending on the set game state. In other words, the types of operation effects that can be executed are the same, but by varying the rate at which each operation effect is selected, it is possible to predict the current game state based on the multiple operation effects that are actually executed. This provides the player with the fun of predicting the game state.

The presentation mode of the operation presentation executed when the normal state is set, the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed during the "Super Chance Mode" which is a presentation mode that notifies that a special state is set, and the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed as part of the variable presentation are also configured to determine and execute one of multiple types of presentation modes, but detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the time-saving state selection table 223f1 defined in the operation effect selection table 222f will be explained with reference to FIG. 148(b). FIG. 148(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving state selection table 223f1. This time-saving state selection table 223f1 is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the operation effect during the "chance mode" in which the time-saving state is set, and it defines different presentation modes of the operation effect depending on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, the type of operation method performed by the player on the frame button 22, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148(b), when the operation timing is during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "none" indicates that the operation effect is not executed, in the range of "150 to 189", "reach suggestion" indicates an effect that suggests whether the ongoing fluctuation effect will be in a reach state during the third pattern fluctuation, and in the range of "190 to 198", "state suggestion" indicates an effect to suggest the currently set game state. Also, when the operation method is "long push", "background mode transition" indicates that the background mode will be transitioned to the range of "0 to 198" is specified for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

In this control example, multiple operation methods are set that the player can execute with the frame button 22, including a "normal press" that is determined when the frame button 22 is pressed for less than two seconds, and a "long press" that is determined when the frame button 22 is pressed for two seconds or more. Different operation effects are executed depending on the operation method used by the player. This allows the player to execute various operation effects by selecting the operation method of their choice. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In this control example, the above-mentioned two types of operation methods are used as the operation methods that the player can operate, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an operation means other than the frame button 22 (e.g., a second frame button) and a different operation presentation may be selected depending on the type of frame button pressed by the player. Alternatively, a plurality of operation methods may be set in accordance with the order of operations performed on a plurality of operation means within a predetermined period of time (e.g., two seconds). Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a "normal press" is determined when the player presses the frame button 22, and then, if the pressed state continues for a predetermined period of time (e.g., two seconds), an additional determination is made that it is a "long press," thereby executing an operation presentation dedicated to a "long press."

Furthermore, as operation means that can be operated by the player, in addition to the configuration of the frame button 22 that the player can press, operation means consisting of a lever member that the player can tilt up, down, left, right, and the like, or a rotating member that the player can rotate may be provided. Also, instead of the player directly operating a member, an operation means (such as a touch sensor) may be provided that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed by providing a proximity sensor with a predetermined detection area and having the proximity sensor detect a hand that has entered the detection area, and any operation means that allows the player to perform a predetermined operation at will and allows the player to select different operation methods depending on the content of the operation may be provided.

In addition, in this control example, a configuration having two types of operation methods, "normal press" and "long press", has been described, but this is not limited to this, and three or more types of operation methods may be provided, or only one type of operation method may be provided. Here, if only one type of operation method is provided, it may be configured so that different operation presentations are executed depending on the interval at which the operation is executed. This makes it possible to allow the player to select from a variety of operation presentations, even if there is only one type of operation method itself.

Returning to FIG. 148(b), we will continue to explain the contents of the time-saving state selection table 223f1. When the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is "normal press", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode will be switched to is specified. Also, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "state suggestion" indicating a presentation to suggest the currently set game state is specified.

If the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol change), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, if the operation timing is within the normal time-saving change period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode will be switched to is specified. Also, if the operation method is "long push", "past state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the game state that was set in the past (at the time when "chance mode" was set (after the end of the jackpot game)) is specified in the range of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f "0 to 198".

Next, referring to FIG. 149, the contents of the probability variable state selection table 223f2 defined in the operation time effect selection table 222f will be explained. FIG. 149 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability variable state selection table 223f2. This probability variable state selection table 223f2 is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the operation effect during the "chance mode" in which the probability variable state is set, and it defines different presentation modes of the operation effect depending on the timing when the frame button 22 is operated, the type of operation method performed by the player on the frame button 22, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, when the operation timing is during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 119", "none" indicates that the operation effect is not executed, in the range of "120 to 139", "reach suggestion" indicates an effect that suggests whether the ongoing fluctuation effect will be in a reach state during the third pattern fluctuation, in the range of "140 to 189", "state suggestion" indicates an effect to suggest the currently set game state, and in the range of "190 to 198", "background mode transition" indicates that the background mode will be transitioned. Also, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicates that the background mode will be transitioned.

In addition, when the operation timing is during the normal time-saving variable period (second period), the operation method is "normal press", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 169", "background mode transition" indicating a transition to background mode is specified, and in the range of "170 to 198", "state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the currently set game state is specified. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the currently set game state is specified.

If the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol change), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, if the operation timing is within the normal time-saving change period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode will be switched to is specified. Also, if the operation method is "long push", "past state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the game state that was set in the past (at the time when "chance mode" was set (after the end of the jackpot game)) is specified in the range of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f "0 to 198".

As explained above, when the "Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode after the end of a big win game, the presentation mode of the operation presentation is selected by referring to different data tables for the time-saving state and the probability bonus state, and the ratio at which each presentation mode is selected varies depending on the set game state. This makes it possible for the player to predict the currently set game state based on the presentation mode of the operation presentation to be executed, which makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22.

In addition, among multiple game states (probability bonus state, time-saving state) in which a "chance mode" can be set as a presentation mode at a specific operation timing, a presentation mode (advantageous presentation mode) that is likely to be executed when a favorable game state (probability bonus state) that is advantageous to the player is set is provided, for example, with a "state suggestion" operation presentation executed by a "normal press" during the "first period." This allows the player to play while building up a sense of expectation that a favorable game state has been set when the "state suggestion" operation presentation is executed by a "normal press" during the "first period."

Furthermore, since the operation effect can be executed multiple times during the "first period", the more times the operation effect is executed in the advantageous performance mode described above during the "first period", the higher the expectation that an advantageous game state will be set, which makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22.

In addition, at a specific operation timing, among multiple game states (probable bonus state, time-saving state) in which the "chance mode" can be set as the presentation mode, a presentation mode (confirmed presentation mode) is executed only when an advantageous game state (probable bonus state) that is advantageous to the player is set. For example, an operation presentation of "background mode transition" executed by "normal press" during the "first period" is set as a presentation mode (confirmed presentation mode), so that when the operation presentation of "background mode transition" is executed by "normal press" during the "first period", it is possible to know that an advantageous game state has been set.

In addition, as the advantageous presentation mode and the confirmed presentation mode described above, presentation modes that can be selected under other conditions (for example, "normal press" during the "second period") are used. More specifically, the "state suggestion" presentation mode is configured so that when it is executed by "normal press" during the "first period", the expectation that a special state is set is high, and when it is executed by "normal press" during the "second period", the expectation that a time-saving state is set is high. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of playing while analyzing which presentation mode was used to execute the operation presentation during which period when the "chance mode" is set.

Above, with reference to Figures 148 and 149, the contents of the presentation modes of the operation presentation that can be selected when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22), and the contents of the data table (button operation presentation selection table 222f) that is referenced when making the selection have been explained. In this first control example, however, different data tables are referenced depending on the set game state. Each data table specifies the same presentation mode with a different selection ratio. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the current game state just from the presentation mode of the executed operation presentation, but by executing multiple operation presentations, it is possible to grasp the current game state by grasping the selection ratio of each presentation mode. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play by executing the operation presentation multiple times.

In this control example, different data tables are referenced depending on the set game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to reference different data tables and select the presentation mode of the operation presentation based on the currently set game state and the currently set presentation mode. In this way, when a probability variable state is set, different operation presentations can be executed when the presentation mode is set to "super chance mode" and when it is set to "chance mode."

Here, when "Super Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode, for example, there is no need to execute a "State Suggestion" presentation mode that suggests that the current game state has been set. Instead, it is better to specify a "Reach Suggestion" presentation mode or a "Preview Suggestion" presentation mode that suggests whether or not the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b contains information indicating a specific lottery result (a big win or a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of more than a predetermined time is set). This makes it possible to motivate the player to execute the operation presentation even when "Super Chance Mode" is set.

Furthermore, the type of data table (button operation time effect selection table 222f) for selecting the effect mode of the operation effect may be configured to differ depending on the game state when the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot (stop display mode of the special pattern), the stop display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, or the presence or absence of a V win during the jackpot game.

In this case, for example, when the time-saving state is set as the game state and the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode, the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed during the "chance mode" can be made different between the case where the "chance mode" is set after the end of a normal jackpot game and the case where the ball cannot enter the V during a special jackpot game and the "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, during the "chance mode" in which the time-saving state is set after the end of a special jackpot game, it is preferable to specify a presentation mode of "past jackpot type suggestion" that suggests that the previous jackpot game was a special jackpot game. This makes it possible to make the player think that a special jackpot state is set even though the time-saving state is actually set. In addition, it is also possible to specify a presentation mode of "past game history notification" that notifies the player that a V was not entered even though the previous jackpot game was a special jackpot game. This makes it easier to change the content of the game to be executed in the future.

Next, referring to FIG. 144(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 144(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes at least a command memory area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special symbol change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a performance counter 223f, a subordinate state setting area 223g, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h, a special performance in progress flag 223i, a V winning flag 223j, a V performance execution flag 223k, a V notification flag 223m, a time reduction counter 223n, a special continuous notice flag 223o, a performance mode memory area 223p, a continuous notice in progress flag 223q, a SW effective time counter 223r, a special effective time counter 223s, an operation counter 223t, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The command memory area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 are temporarily stored until the processing for those commands is executed. In detail, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area 223a is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes that command and performs processing according to that command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four reserved areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols, and the winning information contained in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 is stored in each of these areas, starting from the first area. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the audio lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results for the reserved balls, etc., before the balls start to change.

In this control example, a maximum of four reserved balls of the first special pattern and a maximum of four reserved balls of the second special pattern can be reserved and stored, so that four reserved areas for the first special pattern and four reserved areas for the second special pattern are formed in the winning information storage area 223b. In this control example, the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern are not performed simultaneously, and when a new special pattern drawing is performed while there are reserved balls of the first special pattern and reserved balls of the second special pattern, the oldest stored winning information (the winning information stored in the first area) in the reserved area of the second special pattern is moved to the execution area. Then, each winning information stored in the second area to the fourth area is shifted to the reserved area with the next lower number. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that the drawing of the second special pattern is performed with priority over the drawing of the first special pattern.

...

The special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting a value corresponding to the reserved ball number command sent from the main control unit 110, and has a first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c1 for counting the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern, and a second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c2 for counting the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern. In other words, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special pattern is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control unit 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls for each special pattern based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is increased by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is decreased in the main control unit 110 to perform a new lottery for the first special pattern, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball number command (reserved ball number command for special pattern 1) indicating the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d after the addition or subtraction to the voice lamp control unit 113. Also, when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is increased by a ball entering the second ball entrance 640, or when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is decreased in the main control unit 110 to perform a new lottery for the second special pattern, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball number command (reserved ball number command for special pattern 2) indicating the value of the reserved ball number counter 203e after the addition or subtraction to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command (special pattern 1 reserved ball number command, special pattern 2 reserved ball number command) transmitted from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command and stores it in the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c (first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c1, second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c2). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c is used to display the reserved patterns. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c, and transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c.

When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of the image so that the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number equal to the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 (see FIG. 122 (b)) of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223d is changed in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the values of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the execution of the special pattern lottery is pending.

The special pattern change start flag 223d is initially set to off when the power is turned on, and is set to on when a special pattern change pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is received to notify the change pattern of the special pattern. On the other hand, it is turned off when the change display setting is made in the third pattern display device 81. The special pattern change start flag 223d has a first special pattern change start flag 223d1 corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second special pattern change start flag 223d2 corresponding to the second special pattern, and is set to on or off according to the type of special pattern indicated by the special pattern change pattern command sent from the main control unit 110.

The special symbol stop type selection flag 223e is set to on when a stop type command that notifies the special symbol variable stop type output from the main control unit 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display setting is made in the third symbol display device 81. The special symbol stop type selection flag 223e has a first special symbol stop type selection flag 223e1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special symbol stop type selection flag 223e2 corresponding to the second special symbol, and is set to on or off according to the type of special symbol included in the stop type command (special symbol stop type command) sent from the main control unit 110.

The performance counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various performances, etc., and is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 198". It is updated by adding 1 each time the main process is executed. Although detailed explanation is omitted, this performance counter 223f is composed of multiple counters, each of which is specified to have a different update rule. Each counter is configured to perform a counter update process each time the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. When multiple types of variation pattern selection or various performance selection processes are executed within the execution interval of the main process, the performance counter 223f is configured to obtain different counter values and execute the process. This makes it possible to suppress the selection of various performances using the same value of the performance counter 223f, even if a process using the value of the performance counter 223f is executed multiple times at the same timing (within the same cycle of the main process).

In the slave state setting area 223g, data corresponding to the state command output from the master control device 110 is set. The current game state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 by the data set in the slave state setting area 223g. The state setting command is also output from the master control device 110 when the power is turned on, and the backed-up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the slave state setting area 223g has a current game state storage area that stores the currently set game state, and a past game state storage area that stores the game state that was set before the current game state was set, and is configured to be able to calculate the process through which the current game state was set. As a result, for example, when a time-saving state is set, it is possible to determine whether the time-saving state was set after the end of a jackpot game, or whether a probability variable state was set after the end of a jackpot game and then the time-saving state was set when the probability variable end condition was established, and to execute a performance based on the determination result (a past state suggestion performance to suggest the past game state to the player). In addition, the secondary state setting area 223g is configured to store game states such as the normal state, the probability change state, and the time-saving state, as well as the jackpot game state and the normal jackpot game state.

The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223h is a counter for counting a value corresponding to the normal symbol reserved ball count command sent from the main control unit 110, and its value is added or subtracted in synchronization with the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f for counting the number of reserved balls of normal symbols stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. Note that the details are omitted here because the only difference between the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c described above is that the target has been changed from special symbols to normal symbols, and the rest is the same.

The special effect flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol change is executed during the normal state, and is set to ON when the conditions for executing the second special symbol change during the normal state are met. Specifically, it is set to ON when the second special symbol change is executed during the normal state, or when the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired while the first special symbol change is being executed. And, it is set to OFF when the first special symbol change is executed while the special effect flag 223i is set to ON, that is, when the special symbol 2 reservation is 0. In this control example, a "chance zone" effect (see FIG. 124(b)) is executed to indicate the period during which the special effect flag 223i is set to ON.

The V winning flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, and is set to ON when the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Specifically, when a V winning command is set in the main control device 110 (see S2216 in FIG. 171), the V winning command is transmitted. Then, when it is determined that a V winning command has been received (S4407: Yes in FIG. 177) in the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the voice lamp control device 113, the V winning flag 223j is set to ON.

This V winning flag 112j is referenced (S4801 in FIG. 181) in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), and it is determined whether the ball passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v (won a V win) during the current jackpot game. Then, if it is determined that the flag is set to ON in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) (S4801 in FIG. 181: Yes), it is set to OFF.

In this control example, a V notification effect can be executed as an effect for passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during a jackpot game, and the effect mode executed at the time of V winning (at the end of a V round) and at the end of a jackpot game can be changed depending on whether or not a V winning has occurred. Furthermore, the effect mode at the time of V winning and the effect mode at the end of a jackpot game can be changed depending on whether or not a V notification effect has been executed. In this way, in order to enable the effect that is variably set based on the presence or absence of a V winning to be executed at a timing (at the end) different from the time of a V winning, the presence or absence of a V winning can be determined based on the setting status of the V winning flag 112j.

The V performance execution flag 223k is a flag for indicating that a V notification performance will be executed during a jackpot game, and is set to ON when it is determined that a V notification performance will be executed during a jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), if it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received (S4701 in FIG. 180: Yes) and the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot (S4703 in FIG. 180: No), the V notification execution selection table 222e is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V notification performance. Then, if it is determined that a V notification performance will be executed (S4705 in FIG. 180: Yes), it is set to ON (see S4706 in FIG. 180).

Then, in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), if the V winning flag 112j is not set on, i.e., if no V winning occurs during jackpot play, it is referenced (S4802 in FIG. 181), and if it is determined that it is set on (S4802 in FIG. 181: Yes), a process is executed to switch the presentation mode of the ending presentation (S4804 in FIG. 181), and then it is set to off (S1804 in FIG. 181).

In this control example, when a guaranteed jackpot game is played, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a V notification effect during the jackpot game, and when a decision is made to execute a V notification effect, a presentation mode (see Figs. 127(b) and (d)) is set as the presentation mode during the ending period at that time to indicate that a guaranteed jackpot state will be set. In other words, when a V notification effect is executed during a guaranteed jackpot game, the player is notified of this when a V wins, so a presentation mode (see Figs. 127(b) and (d)) is set to indicate to the player that a guaranteed jackpot state will be set even in the ending presentation executed during the ending period. Therefore, if a V win is not achieved during a jackpot game, a process is executed to switch the presentation mode of the ending presentation to a presentation mode (see Figs. 127(a) and (c)) to indicate that a time-saving state will be set.

On the other hand, if the V notification effect is not executed during a guaranteed jackpot game, even if a V is won, the player is not notified of this fact, and the effect mode for the ending effect is preset to indicate that a time-saving state will be set (see Figures 127 (a) and (c)). Therefore, even if a V is not won during a jackpot game, there is no need to execute a process to switch the effect mode for the ending effect.

The time-saving counter 223n is a counter for measuring the period during which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and is set to a predetermined value ("100" in this control example) when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of a jackpot game). When a special symbol variation is executed while the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the time-saving counter 223n becomes "0", it is determined that a transition has occurred to a low probability state of normal symbols. In addition, the system is configured to determine the detailed period during the high probability state of normal symbols based on the value of the time-saving counter 223n.

The special consecutive preview flag 223o is a flag for indicating that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are met during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period) in which the "chance mode" is set as the performance mode, and is set to ON when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are met. When this special consecutive preview flag 223o is set to ON, a special effective period is set in which operations on the operating means can be effectively identified, and if a specific operation is performed on the operating means during that special effective period, the consecutive preview performance is executed.

Specifically, in the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177), which is part of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the voice lamp control device 113, when a special symbol winning information command (a winning information command corresponding to a special symbol) is received, the special symbol winning information command process (see S4406 in FIG. 178) is executed. If it is determined that the current period is a high-speed fluctuation period (the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 75) (S4502 in FIG. 178: Yes), and if it is determined that a continuous preview performance is to be executed by referring to the continuous preview execution selection table 222d (S4506 in FIG. 178: Yes), it is set to on (S4507 in FIG. 178).

Then, in the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184) for selecting the variation presentation corresponding to the second special symbol variation, the chance mode presentation setting process (see S5116 in FIG. 185) which is executed when "chance mode" is set, references the setting status of the special consecutive notice flag 223o (S5210 in FIG. 185), and if it is set to on, a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the special effective time timer 223s as the special effective period during which operation on the frame button 22 can be effectively determined (S5211 in FIG. 181), and then it is set to off.

In this way, a special effective period is set in which operations on the operating means are determined to be valid only when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are met, and the consecutive preview performance can be executed only when the player executes a specific operation on the operating means within the special effective period, which makes it possible to motivate the player to play in order to execute the consecutive preview performance. In addition, by varying the notification mode of the notification performance that notifies the player of multiple pieces of information for executing the consecutive preview performance (information indicating whether the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are met, information indicating the period during which the special effective period is set (the set period), and information indicating the operation content performed on the operating means to execute the consecutive preview performance), the difficulty of executing the consecutive preview performance can be easily variably adjusted.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are more likely to be met when (or when) a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery. This can motivate the player to play the game and execute the continuous preview performance. In addition, when the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met and the player executes a specific operation on the operating means outside of the special effective period, it is preferable to configure the system so that a notification effect is executed to inform the player of the timing when the special effective period will be set. This can motivate the player to operate the operating means, and can prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

The performance mode memory area 223p is a memory area in which various performance modes set during the high probability state of normal symbols are stored, and different performance modes are stored according to the value of the time-saving counter 223n. When determining the current performance mode, the stored performance mode is read out. Specifically, in the chance mode performance setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is read out (S5201 in FIG. 185), and the performance mode (high-speed period (high-speed fluctuation period), normal first period (first period), normal second period (second period)) corresponding to the read value is set and stored. When the high probability state of normal symbols transitions to a low probability state, the stored information is cleared.

The continuous preview in progress flag 223q is a flag for indicating that a continuous preview performance is set as the variable performance of the third pattern, and is set to ON when the continuous preview performance is being executed. Then, in the chance mode performance setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185), the setting status is determined (S5208 in FIG. 185), and if it is set to ON (S5208 in FIG. 185: Yes), the performance mode corresponding to the continuous preview performance is determined. Then, when the continuous preview performance has ended, it is set to OFF. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a different performance mode that does not correspond to the continuous preview performance from being set in a new variable performance executed during the continuous preview performance.

The SW valid time timer 223r is a timer for measuring the valid operation period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 set within the variable display period of the third pattern, and is configured so that when the valid operation period is set, a value corresponding to the length of the valid operation period is set, and the value is subtracted as time passes. Then, if the player operates the frame button 22 during the valid operation period, the value is cleared to 0. In this way, by setting the valid operation period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22, it is possible to prevent excessive execution of the effects (operation effects) that are executed when the operating means (frame button 22) is operated.

In this control example, only the frame button 22 is provided as the operation means that the player can operate. However, if multiple operation means, such as a second operation means, are provided in addition to the frame button 22 (first operation means), different operation valid periods may be set for each operation means. In that case, by providing a SW valid time timer 223r for each operation means, it is possible to set overlapping operation valid periods for each operation means.

The special effective time timer 223s is a timer for measuring the operation effective period (special operation effective period) for validly determining an operation on the frame button 22, which is set only when the chance mode effect setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185) is executed with the special continuous notice flag 223o set to ON. When the special operation effective time is set, a value corresponding to the length of the special operation effective time is set, and the value is subtracted as time passes. Then, in the frame button input monitoring and effect process (see S4107 in FIG. 186), it is determined whether or not it is within the special operation effective period (S5306 in FIG. 186), and if it is determined that it is within the effective time (S5306 in FIG. 186: Yes), the operation of the frame button 22 is treated as valid. In this control example, different operation effects are executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the normal operation effective period (the period when the value of the SW effective time timer 223r is greater than 0) and when the frame button 22 is operated during the special operation effective period (the period when the value of the special effective time timer 223s is greater than 0). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated during the special operation effective period, a continuous preview effect spanning a plurality of special pattern change periods from the next special pattern change to the end of the target special pattern change is executed. When the continuous preview effect is executed, the background mode is configured to transition to a dedicated background mode (heaven mode). Therefore, during the period when the background mode transition is suppressed by the normal operation of the frame button 22, the player can be made to have a higher expectation of winning the jackpot just by executing the background mode transition.

The operation counter 223t is a counter for measuring the period during which the player presses the frame button 22, and the counter value is updated over time while the player is measuring and pressing the frame button 22. Based on the value measured by this operation counter 223t, the type of operation performed by the player on the frame button 22 is determined (see S5313 in FIG. 186).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Returning to FIG. 137 for further explanation, the display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The voice lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 121) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to Fig. 150 to Fig. 155. Fig. 150 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is also connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with different lottery probabilities for a special jackpot or different numbers of prize balls paid out for one special jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

Below, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command is set in the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the occurrence of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory generally has the problem of slow read speed, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on multiple pages, data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-contiguous data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. Thus, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the commands that make up the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, this may deteriorate the processing performance of the display control device 114.

In this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As described below, the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands that make up the control program without delay. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated presentations.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, which are connected to the image controller 237.

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 that stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 that stores data for images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The NAND flash memory has the characteristic of being able to obtain a large storage capacity in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character memory area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control programs and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads out the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc., and outputs the data to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also performs known data address conversion so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, including error bits. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Furthermore, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the bad data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the bad data blocks, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without having to consider the address positions of the bad data blocks, which differ in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If the data is not set, the buffer RAM 234c reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily sets it in the buffer RAM 234c. The ROM controller 234b then performs a known error correction process and outputs the data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is made up of two banks, and one page's worth of data from the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. This allows the ROM controller 234b to, for example, output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page's worth of data, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237, from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or image controller 237. This improves the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 when reading it out.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. This NOR ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program memory area 234d1 that stores, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 executes this boot program first after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program memory area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) from the instruction to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e., one page of the NAND type flash memory 234a) of this boot program. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads out from the buffer RAM 234c the instruction code at the corresponding address from the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this control example, the reason why not all of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but rather a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the command that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to NAND flash memories in that when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND type flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the command code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND type flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. And, because of the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, which results in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of commands from the command to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR type ROM 234d, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (command code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the command code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start up the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if a control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program is programmed to transfer the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., the control programs excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and the fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 in a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Then, the MPU 231 first transfers and stores the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released.

Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the address of the internal bus being specified as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, after the system reset is released, when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control programs from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads out the control programs transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed to set the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

This remaining boot program executes a process of transferring all the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) from the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a that corresponds to the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) that is executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 187) is completed is set.

The MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, and all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instructions to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of character ROM 234 associated with the shortened time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see FIG. 155) sent from the MPU 231, and displays the drawn image in one of the first and second frame buffers 236b and 236c, which will be described later, while outputting the image information for one frame previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process for this one frame of an image and the display process for this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes drawing processing of the next frame of image and also executes processing to display the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at image drawing and display processing intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing are completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also performs processing to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Images are drawn using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described below, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As described below, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image. However, when drawing an image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise be caused by providing the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a consisting of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (start address of the source storage) and the end address (end address of the source storage) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, the destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the end address of the source storage.

In accordance with the various information in this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a long period of time to be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, which makes it impossible to use the video RAMs 235 and 236 for the image drawing process, and as a result, prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

In addition, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so that the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily determined, simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used to hold image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without being overwritten while the power is on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, as well as a power-on variable image area 235b and a third design area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that displays the lottery results performed in the main control device 110 by a variable presentation when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the special ball entry port 64.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 187).

Now, referring to Figure 151, the image that changes when the power is turned on will be described. Figure 151 is an explanatory diagram that explains the image that is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on.

Immediately after power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, and then transfers the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 151(a) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a.

At this time, when the display control device 114 receives a display pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a command to start the change, the display control device 114 alternately displays a power-on change image with a "○" pattern in the lower right position on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 151(b), and a power-on change image with a "×" pattern in the same position as the "○" pattern, as shown in FIG. 151(c), during the change period. Then, the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is determined from the display pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the change pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, and if it is a "jackpot for the special pattern", the image shown in FIG. 151(b) is displayed for a certain period after the change performance stops, and if it is a "miss for the special pattern", the image shown in FIG. 151(c) is displayed for a certain period after the change performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, since players can recognize that some processing is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, they can wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operational checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of operational checks from deteriorating.

In addition, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the special ball entrance 64, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw a power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is always resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to alternately display the images shown in Figures 151 (b) and (c) on the third pattern display device 81. This allows a simple variable presentation to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, the player can be sure that a lottery has been drawn by the simple variable presentation, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, so if a ball is detected entering the special ball entry port 64 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable performance can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 150, the explanation will continue. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, referring to FIG. 152, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be explained. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, with FIG. 152(a) showing rear A corresponding to the "town stage" and FIG. 152(b) showing rears B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", "river stage", and "sky stage".

As shown in FIG. 152, the back images corresponding to each of the backs A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234, and are all longer horizontally than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereafter referred to as "scrolling images") are all configured so that the back surface images continue at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d and between positions a and a' are configured with images that cover the horizontal width of the display area, and after the images between positions c and d are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the images between positions a and a' are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the back surface images are scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 first sets the corresponding back image between position a and position a' as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, over time, the display area is moved from left to right relative to the scrolling image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, when the display area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the image from position a to position a'. Thus, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection as if they flow to the left.

On the other hand, the rear image on rear side E is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... over time. Specifically, on rear side E, an image of a mountain towering over the island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with their positions fixed. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky above the mountain changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the "Island Stage", an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed as the initial back image of back E. Then, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to a vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has passed, a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time has passed, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually turns from black to white, and then changes to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, a repeating back image returning to the back image indicating a morning glow is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c for each rear image will be described. As shown in FIG. 152(a), the entire range of rear image A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, i.e., all image data corresponding to positions a to d, is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Usually, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the "city stage," is displayed, so by keeping all image data of rear image A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. This reduces the processing load on the display control device 114.

On the other hand, for back side B, which corresponds to the "forest stage", back side C, which corresponds to the "river stage", and back side D, which corresponds to the "sky stage", only a portion of the back side, i.e., image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, is stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as shown in FIG. 152(b). Also, image data corresponding to back side E, which corresponds to the island stage, is stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process after power is turned on, and remains resident.

To instantly change the rear image, it would be ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235, but doing so would require a very large capacity RAM to be used for the resident video RAM 235, which could lead to increased costs.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a', and image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, including the initial position, is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when a change of stage is decided by lottery at the start of the change, the initial position of the backs B to D can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the display can be made to scroll or change color over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the backs B to D, the increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

The range of positions a to b for the backs B to D is set so that, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled from left to right using image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. This allows the image data from position b' to position d to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled, so that after the range from position a to position b is scrolled using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled without delay using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 to display it on the third pattern display device 81.

Similarly, for rear surface E, the range of image data is set so that after the image in the initial position is displayed, the image data for the remaining image can be transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236 while the image is being displayed using image data resident in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235. This allows image data corresponding to the remaining image to be transferred to normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that after the image is displayed using image data resident in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, the remaining images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 sequentially over time using image data corresponding to the rear surface image stored in normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, for rear sides B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 150) of the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to rear images from being overwritten by other image data, so that the rear images can be displayed reliably.

In addition, in the rear side B to D, the image data stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap with each other, with the image data corresponding to the image between position b' and position b being stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from position b' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, so that the rear side image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

Furthermore, the MPU 231 uses image data from the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions c and d is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. Next, the MPU 231 uses image data from the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions a and a' is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling in a smooth connection, as if flowing to the left.

Returning to FIG. 150, the explanation will be continued. The third pattern area 235d is an area for storing the third pattern used in the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, the third pattern area 235d stores image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns numbered "0" to "9" which are the third patterns. As a result, when performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the variable performance is not immediately started on the third pattern display device 81 after a ball has entered the special ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, even though the variable performance has been started on the first pattern display device 37.

In addition, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to main patterns that are not numbered "0" to "9", such as main patterns consisting of a rear pattern such as a wooden box, and main patterns consisting of a rear pattern and additional patterns imitating characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet, are also stored. These image data are used for a demo performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with a start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable performance stopped. As a result, when a demo performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a main pattern without a number is displayed as the third pattern in the demo performance. Therefore, a player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in a demo state by visually recognizing the main pattern without a number from the display image of the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, in this control example, the third pattern is configured to be displayed in a different display manner depending on the background mode (back image) that is set. Therefore, each time the background mode is switched, the display image data of the third pattern corresponding to the background mode after the switch is stored in the third pattern area 235d. This eliminates the need to store image data for all third patterns corresponding to all background modes in the third pattern area 235d, thereby reducing memory capacity.

In this control example, the player can switch the background mode by operating the operation means (frame button 22), so there are cases where the background mode is changed multiple times in a short period of time. Therefore, in this control example, the image data corresponding to the previous background mode is not erased from the third pattern area 235d for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the background mode is switched. This makes it possible to prevent the process of storing image data in the third pattern area 235d from being cumbersomely executed, even if an event occurs in which the background mode is frequently switched. Also, the third pattern storage area 235d may be configured to store image data of multiple third patterns corresponding to multiple background modes in advance.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a "boy", an "old man", and a "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these are resident in the character design area 235e. When the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads the image data that is resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character design can be changed instantly even if a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error together with the type of error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 can instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so that even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into multiple sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the type of image data should be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an instruction to draw an image and an instruction to transfer image data simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of an image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of an image in that frame buffer, and while displaying an image in one of the frame buffers, reads out one frame of image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of an image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the one frame of image that has been read out on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of DRAM. This work RAM 233 has at least a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The data table storage area 233b is an area that stores a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance that is displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance that is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, we will explain the details of the various data tables. First, a display data table is prepared for each presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to variable presentations, opening presentations, round presentations, ending presentations, and demo presentations are prepared.

The variable performance is an effect that is started in the third pattern display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command that indicates the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating a miss is finally stopped and displayed, whereas if the stop type of the variable performance is either jackpot A or jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating the respective jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is intended to inform the player that the pachinko machine 10 will soon transition to a special game state and that the large opening, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, while the round effect is intended to inform the player of the number of rounds that will soon begin. The ending effect is intended to inform the player that the special game state has ended.

As described above, the demo effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, but the next variable effect associated with a start winning does not start. The third symbol, consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening performance, round performance, ending performance, and demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable performance, will have one table per variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Now, with reference to FIG. 153, the display data table will be described in detail. FIG. 153 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed during that time, corresponding to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, according to the sprite type.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to that magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when a sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through the image. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing information for each sprite is specified for each address as the drawing content for one frame, which is specified for each address: one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and text. Information about effects and characters is specified as one or more pieces according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image. This rear type contains information specifying whether to display one of rears A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "town stage," "forest stage," "river stage," "sky stage," or "island stage"), or whether to display a rear image different from rears A to E. In addition, when specifying that a rear image different from rears A to E is to be displayed, the rear type also contains information specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 231 determines that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed based on the back face type, it determines the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among back faces A to E as the drawing target, and also determines the range of back face images to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a back face image different from back faces A to E is to be displayed, it determines the back face image to be displayed from the back face type.

In this control example, a case will be described in which only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table, but instead, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to that rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third patterns (Pattern 1, Pattern 2, ...), pattern type offset information is recorded as pattern type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern. The reason offset information is determined rather than the type of third pattern directly is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a specified time has elapsed records the offset information from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third symbol, and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, so that the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed. While the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed, the third pattern is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player cannot recognize the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 153) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be specified by that display data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and a drawing list (see FIG. 155) is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the drawing of the image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 can change the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

If, as in conventional pachinko machines, a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, a large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing the program, which becomes more complex and expansive as the variety of performance images increases, and this may limit the processing power of the display control device 114 and result in a limit to the diversification of controllable performance images. In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, so a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The reason why the display data table is prepared in accordance with each performance mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and the drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is because the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning in the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above. In this way, the configuration of preparing a display data table in accordance with each performance mode, setting a display data table buffer according to the performance mode to be displayed, and creating a drawing list frame by frame according to the set data table can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each performance, and as described above, the transfer data information and transfer timing are specified for transferring image data of sprites used in the performance specified in the display data table that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If all image data for sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, then no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and describes the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter referred to as the "image data to be transferred") that should start being transferred at the time indicated by that address (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in Figure 154 correspond to this). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in the transfer data table in correspondence with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, null data is specified, which means that there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (this corresponds to address "0002H" in Figure 154).

The transfer data information includes the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As with the display data table, the first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 154) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc., and if a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table exists, it reads the transfer data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 155) described later is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 154, when pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and sends the drawing list after the addition to image controller 237. On the other hand, when pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no image data to be transferred and transfer should begin thereafter, and the transfer data information is not added to the generated drawing list, and the drawing list is sent to image controller 237.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in image storage area 236a without fail. Then, the image data stored in that image storage area 236a can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in that display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address, is specified in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be specified so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Figures 151 (a) to (c). This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see Figure 187) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S6005 in Figure 187). Then, when all resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S7605 in Figure 199 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 189(b)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 189(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 190 to 195) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 196 to 198) are executed so that various images are displayed in response to commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

The simple image display flag 233c is also referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing (see S7501 in FIG. 199(a)). If the simple image display flag 233c is on, resident target image data exists that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 199(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 200) is executed to transfer the image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 155) that describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see FIG. 155) for each frame that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that if all the image data of the sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared, and the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, if the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is specified (i.e., if no null data is specified), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to a drawing list (see FIG. 155) that is described below and that contains the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame.

As a result, if the drawing list received from the MPU 231 contains transfer data information, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. Here, as described above, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specified address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address from which the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, during the display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 189(b)) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 198) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 155) described below, and also obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used to draw a sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. This makes it possible to read images required for display from the character ROM 234 without delay in advance and transfer them to the normal video RAM 236, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Now, referring to FIG. 155, the details of the drawing list will be described. FIG. 155 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 155, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as the back image used in one frame's image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), the character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, composition processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter specification information in a manner specified by the information, and then performs various processing on the standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read from the various video RAMs, and draws the image obtained by performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address for the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type identified from the contents of other images. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data for that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the backmost side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the frontmost side.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in transfer data table buffer 233e, MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area in image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred should be stored) to the end of the drawing list. When the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area in character ROM 234 (area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) in image storage area 236a in normal video RAM 236.

The timing counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When the MPU 231 stores a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, it sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on that display data table. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of image are completed, each time the display setting process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) is executed by the MPU 231, the timing counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 196). As a result, when the value of the timing counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the presentation.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is a flag indicating the storage status, for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, of whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred that corresponds to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 200) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on," indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off."

When the MPU 231 transfers image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, it refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and determines whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 200). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, it sets a transfer instruction for that image data (see S7714 in FIG. 200) and causes the image controller 237 to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary transfers from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"); if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Information on this specified drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 201).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is displayed on the designated drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 executes a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading out previously displayed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and transferring the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see S6306 in FIG. 189(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. If this rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when a rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 195(a)). In addition, this rear image change flag 233w is referenced in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 200), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 200). This makes it possible to display a rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or the performance mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag that indicates the rear image type that is set. This flag is, for example, composed of one byte, and each bit corresponds to each rear image type. If any bit of this rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear image type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current rear image type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that rear image A is set. When a rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit of this rear image discrimination flag 233x that corresponds to the rear image notified by the command is set to on (see S7002 in FIG. 195(a)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. This rear image discrimination flag 233x makes it easy to identify the currently set rear image type.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag that indicates whether or not a demo is being performed. When the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that a demo is being performed, and when it is off, it means that a demo is not being performed. In the display setting process (see FIG. 196), the demo display flag 233y is set on when a demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S7221 in FIG. 196), and is set off when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S6505 in FIG. 191(a), S6705 in FIG. 192(a), S6805 in FIG. 192(b), and S6905 in FIG. 193). The demo display flag 233y makes it easy to determine whether or not a demo is currently being performed.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmation display effect is being performed. Here, the confirmation display effect indicates an effect in which the stopped pattern is displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variable pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The confirmation display flag 233z is set on when the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 196) (S7214 in FIG. 196), and is set off when a display data table other than the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S6505 in FIG. 191(a), S6705 in FIG. 192(a), S6805 in FIG. 192(b), and S6905 in FIG. 193). This confirmation display flag 233z makes it easy to determine whether or not a confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding control processing executed by the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 156 to 172. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly divided into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

As described above, in this first control example, when both the lottery right for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved) and the lottery right for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) are stored, the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed. In addition, by passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65V arranged in the variable winning device 65 while the jackpot game is being executed, a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, as an end condition for terminating the probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, in addition to the end condition that is established when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, an end condition that is established when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) is set.

Figure 156 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the second win random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the second win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, and 999, respectively, in this control example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a special pattern change process is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and also sets the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81. After that, a start winning process is executed in response to the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 (start winning) or the entry of a ball into the second ball entry port 640 (start winning) (S105). Details of the special pattern change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figures 157 to 162.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (S106), is executed, and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 163 and FIG. 164. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 157, the special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change process (S104). The special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 157) performs various judgments (win/lose judgments) and determinations of the special symbol based on each acquired counter value, controls the first symbol display device 37 to be able to display the variable display in the variable display mode determined by a predetermined control, sets various commands to execute the variable display performance of the third and fourth symbols in the third symbol display device 81, and controls to stop and display in a display mode that shows the judgment result (win/lose judgment result). Below, the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 157) will be described.

In this special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently being hit (a jackpot game is in progress) (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is on. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot is currently being hit (a jackpot game is in progress) (S201: Yes), this process is terminated.

In the process of S201, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in a jackpot (a jackpot game is in progress) (S201: No), it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (change) can be executed, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved variable display times based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1) and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved variable display times based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2) are obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on, and then the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d obtained in the process of S203 is greater than 0 (S210).

In the process of S210, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S210: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S210, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (i.e., 1 or more) (S210: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S212). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process described later executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S212, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted in the same manner as the process of S207 (S213), and the process proceeds to the process of S208. In the process of S208, which is executed after the process of S207 or S213, a special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S208), and then a special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S209), after which the process ends. Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158 and FIG. 159.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S214). If the change time has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S215), and then this process is terminated. In the process of S215, the value of the change time counter for measuring the change time of the special pattern is updated, and the display of the first pattern display device 81 is updated corresponding to the updated value of the change time counter. In this change time counter, a value indicating the change time corresponding to the change pattern selected in the special pattern change pattern selection process (S209) is set at the start timing of the special pattern change, and thereafter, it is updated (decremented) each time the process of S215 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S214 that the change time has elapsed (S214: Yes), that is, if the value of the change time counter updated in the process of S215 is 0, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (S216). The stop symbols are set in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209). When this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) is executed, a lottery for special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol jackpot has been awarded is determined based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if a special symbol jackpot has been awarded, one of the jackpots A to E is determined based on the value of the first winning type counter C2.

In this control example, in the case of jackpot A, the blue LED is turned on in the first pattern display device 37, in the case of jackpot B, the red LED is turned on, in the case of jackpot C, the green LED is turned on, and in the case of jackpot D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, in the case of a miss, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that the LEDs are turned off when the next variation display starts, but they may be turned on for only a few seconds after the variation stops.

After the process of S216 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 starts, it is determined whether the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process is a special symbol jackpot (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S218), the time reduction counter 203h and the probability change counter 203i are cleared (set to 0) (S219), and the process proceeds to S220. When the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON by the process of S218, if the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 113) of the main process executed by the main control device 110 is executed, the process branches to S1901: Yes and an opening command is set (S1902). As a result, the jackpot performance is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S217, if the current lottery result is a miss for the special symbol (S217: No), the processes of S218 and S219 are skipped, and an update process is executed (S221), and then the process proceeds to S220.

The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during external output processing (S1801) of the main processing executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it acquires the game status contained in the status command. This allows the status grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 to match the actual status of the pachinko machine 10. In the processing of S220, a special chart confirmation command is set (S220), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 158, the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (S208).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S301). Then, based on the first jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 140(a)), it is determined whether the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 matches the jackpot determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S302).

After completing the process of S302, it is next determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (S303), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (S303: Yes), the lottery result of the special pattern is set to a jackpot (S304), and the jackpot special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the obtained value of the win type counter C2 (S305), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S303 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S303: No), a losing special pattern is set on the first pattern display device 37 (S306), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 159, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, i.e., whether a special symbol jackpot has been set (S401).

If it is determined in the process of S401 that a jackpot with a special symbol is set (S401: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202d (see Figs. 141(a)-(c)) and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (S402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S403), and the variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to the current game state (normal state, latent state, high probability state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read (S404).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S403 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S404 (S405), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S405 (S406). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110 (see S1801 in FIG. 167).

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the special symbol stop pattern is set (S407), the start of the special symbol fluctuation is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S408), a value indicating the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is set to the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S409), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S407 includes information indicating the type of the stopping pattern indicating the result of this special symbol fluctuation, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not result in a reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main process (FIG. 167) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss (S401: No), the process of S402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.

Next, referring to FIG. 160, the contents of the update process (S221) executed in the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 15) will be explained. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the update process (S221). This update process (S221) is a process that is executed when the change time of the special symbol change has elapsed (when the change stops), and processes are executed to update the remaining period of the period during which the high probability change state is set to continue and to update the remaining period of the period during which the time-saving state is set to continue.

When the update process (S221) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability counter 203i is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state of a special pattern (S501). If it is determined that the value of the probability counter 203i is greater than 0 (S501: Yes), the value of the probability counter 203i is decremented by 1 (updated) (S502). Then, it is determined whether the updated value of the probability counter 203i is 0 (S503). If it is determined that it is 0 (S503: Yes), a time-saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. Also, if it is determined that the value of the probability counter 203i is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S501 (S501: No), the current state is not a high probability state of a special pattern, so the process skips the above-mentioned processes of S502 to S504 for updating the value of the probability counter 203i and proceeds to the process of S505.

In addition, in the process of S503, if the value of the special chance counter 203i is not 0, i.e., the value of the special chance counter 203i is greater than 0 and the special chance state (high probability state of special symbols) continues (S503: No), the process of S504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S505.

In the process of S505, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, and if it is determined that it is greater than 0, i.e., if the current state is a high probability state of a normal pattern (S505: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S506), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h after the decrement is 0 (S507). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 in the process of S507, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S508), and the value of the probability change counter 203i, the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and a state command indicating the current game state are set (S509), and this process ends. Furthermore, if it is determined in the process of S505 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S505: No), or if it is determined in the process of S507 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (S507: No), the process proceeds directly to S509.

Next, referring to FIG. 161, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 156) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161) is a process that determines whether a ball has entered either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (start winning), and if a start winning has occurred, stores the acquired counter values in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, up to the reserved upper limit number (maximum of four in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640).

In addition, when the counter values acquired based on the reserved balls are stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, a process (so-called pre-reading process) is executed to predict the win/loss judgment result and the selected variation pattern in advance based on the counter values stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161) will be explained below.

In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, which is the first starting port (start winning) (S601). Here, the ball's entry into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (a start winning has occurred) (S601: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is obtained (S602), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S603).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64 is currently less than the upper limit of four (i.e., whether the number of reserved balls has not yet reached the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than four (S603: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d is incremented by one (S604), and a reserved ball count command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved lottery rights for the first special symbol) (S605).

Then, the various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, variable type counter CS1) are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and each is reserved (stored) in the corresponding reserved ball number memory area of the first special pattern reserved ball execution area of RAM203 (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

In addition, if the process of S601 determines that a ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or if the process of S603 determines that the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64 is currently at the upper limit (S603: No), the process of incrementing the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is skipped and the process proceeds to S607.

Next, the processes from S607 to S612 differ only in that the processes performed for the entry of a ball into the first starting hole (first ball entry hole 64) in the processes from S601 to S606 are the same as those performed for the entry of a ball into the second ball entry hole 640, and therefore a detailed explanation will be omitted.

After executing steps S601 to S612, the pre-reading process is executed (S613) and this process ends.

This pre-reading process (S613) will be described later with reference to FIG. 162, but a process is executed to determine the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. from each counter value newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. In this control example, the process is configured to execute the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a new start winning occurs, the process may be configured to execute the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. for all reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b.

In addition, in this control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, that is, when the right to draw a special pattern is newly acquired, the content of the lottery right for the special pattern (winning information) is determined in advance, but this is not limited to this, and the content of the lottery right for the special pattern (winning information) may be determined in advance, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67 or depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern.

As described above, in this control example, when the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d or the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is added, the pre-reading process (S613) is executed based on the added winning information (winning information). However, without being limited to this, for example, when the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is determined to be the upper limit number (4) in the process of S603 (S603: No), that is, when a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 when the reserved ball number of the special pattern has reached the upper limit, the pre-reading process (S613) may be executed. This allows the player to continue playing in order to execute the pre-reading process even when the reserved ball number of the special pattern has reached the upper limit. In addition, since added value can be added when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with a special pattern has reached the upper limit, it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with a special pattern has reached the upper limit.

Next, referring to FIG. 162, we will explain the look-ahead process (S613), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161). FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S613).

In the pre-read process (S613 in FIG. 162), first, various counter values, such as the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1, are read from the storage area newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b (S701). Then, the read data is stored in the empty storage area in the pre-read reserved storage area that has the smallest winning order (S702).

Next, the result of the hit/miss judgment is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the read-ahead reserved memory area. Note that here, both the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a low probability state and the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a high probability state are determined. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) and the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information, making it difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special pattern) that will be set at the time when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot or not (S703). If it is determined that the result is a jackpot (S703: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the jackpot type and fluctuation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S704), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S703 is that it is not a jackpot (S703: No), a winning command is set that includes information that can identify a miss win and a variation pattern based on the various counter values that have been read (S705), and then this process ends.

The winning command set in the processing of S704 or S705 is set to include, in addition to the information indicating the winning/losing judgment result described above (information that has a different meaning depending on the winning/losing judgment result), information indicating the values of the various counter values read out by the processing of S701 as common information. The winning command set in this processing is then output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S1801) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 167).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, it can execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from normal) based on various information contained in the winning command, or a preview pattern or the like is displayed before the change starts to suggest to the player the result of the winning or losing judgment.

In this control example, since there is only one probability state for the special pattern (low probability state for the special pattern), the information to be set in the winning command (win/lose judgment result) can be set regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine that has multiple probability states for the special pattern (high probability state for the special pattern, low probability state for the special pattern), the winning/lose judgment result for the high probability state of the special pattern and the winning/lose judgment result for the low probability state of the special pattern can be distinguished, and the winning command can be set based on the results of each judgment. Alternatively, a judgment value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that is judged to be a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state can be specified, and the winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern can be set only when that judgment value is read.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the audio lamp control device 113 only if it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot has been reached, so that a sense of anticipation of a jackpot can be created for special pattern changes that do not involve a pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, the game state when the lottery for the special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be accurately determined, and a win/lose judgment may be performed based on the game state. In this case, the determination is possible by configuring the selection of the fluctuation pattern to be selected to be constant regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation, rather than varying the selection of the fluctuation pattern depending on the number of reserved balls. When performing a look-ahead, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the order of fluctuation until the reserved balls start to fluctuate based on the reserved and memorized information.

In addition, in this control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, a read-ahead process is executed based on the winning information, and a win/lose judgment is predicted in advance during the read-ahead process. However, without being limited to this, in the read-ahead process of the main control unit 110, information indicating the contents (counter values) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be set as a winning command, and the winning/lose judgment result may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control unit 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and if it is determined that a look-ahead performance should be executed, to analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control device 110 (prediction of the winning/losing determination result). As a result, if the look-ahead performance is not executed, specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the winning/losing determination result) is not executed, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary control from being executed in the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the results of a look-ahead process that was executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 163, the normal symbol change process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change process (S106). The normal symbol change process (S106) is a process for controlling the change display of the second symbol (normal symbol) and the opening time of the electric role 640a, and is a process for executing various processes related to the normal symbol change (lottery) (process for executing the normal symbol change, process for setting the change mode (change time) of the normal symbol change to be executed, process for updating the normal symbol change being executed, process for stopping the normal symbol change, and process for determining the game content of the normal symbol winning game to be executed when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win).

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 163), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S801). The normal symbol (second symbol) winning period includes the period from when the second symbol display device 83 displays a win (when the winning symbol is displayed stationary) to when the electric roler 640a is being controlled to open and close (until the winning game ends). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S801: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (S801: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern on the second pattern display device 83 is displaying a changing pattern (S802). If it is determined that the normal pattern is not displaying a changing pattern, that is, if it is determined that a new normal pattern change (lottery) can be executed (S802: No), then the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203f is obtained (S803), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S804).

If it is determined in the process of S804 that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is 0 (S804: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is greater than 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S805). In other words, if it is determined in the process of S804 that the condition for executing a new normal pattern variation (winning information to be used for the normal pattern variation is reserved and stored) is met, the value of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is decremented by 1 to execute the normal pattern variation using the reserved and stored winning information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S806). In the process of S806, the data stored in normal symbol reserved 1 to normal symbol reserved 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted from normal symbol reserved 1 to the execution area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S807).

Next, it is determined whether the time-saving counter 203h is on, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols (S808). If it is determined that the time-saving counter 203h is set to on (S808: Yes), a win/lose determination result (lottery result) is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202c (see FIG. 140(b)) for high probability (S809), and processing proceeds to S811. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203h is off (S808: No), a win/lose determination result is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202c (see FIG. 140(b)) for low probability (S810), and processing proceeds to S811.

In the process of S811, it is determined whether the current normal pattern change (lottery) is a win (S811), and if it is determined to be a win (S811: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode when a win occurs, is set (S812), and the process proceeds to S814. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S811 that the current normal pattern change (lottery) is not a win (a loss), the display mode of "×", which is the display mode when a loss occurs, is set (S813), and the process proceeds to S814.

In the process of S814, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) by referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S814). If it is determined that the game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S814: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S815) and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S814: No), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds (S816) and this process is terminated.

In this control example, as described above, the normal pattern fluctuation time is varied depending on the probability state of the normal pattern that is set, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to always set the fluctuation time to 3 seconds regardless of the set game state. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state switches, specifically at the timing of the end of the jackpot game when the game state switches from the normal state (low probability state of normal pattern) where a long fluctuation time is generally likely to be set to the time-saving state (high probability state of normal pattern) where a short fluctuation time is likely to be set, a normal pattern fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is executed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the normal pattern lottery is not executed during the time-saving state even though the time-saving state is set.

The method of setting the normal symbol fluctuation time is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and the fluctuation time may be varied according to the game state, the number of reserved normal symbol balls, or the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example, the normal symbol fluctuation time may be variably set based on the set probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f (number of reserved normal symbols). Furthermore, the ease of ball entry into the second ball entry port 640 may be varied depending on the set normal symbol fluctuation time.

In this way, by configuring the ease of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 to be variable depending on the length of time the normal pattern is set to change, the ease of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can be easily changed depending on the game status, creating a variety of gameplay features.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S802 that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not being displayed in a changing manner (S802: No), it is determined whether the time for changing the normal pattern being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S817), and if it is determined that the time for changing has not elapsed (S817: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S817 that the variation time has elapsed (S817: Yes), the second pattern display device 83 is set to display a stopped display (S818). In the process of S818, if the current normal pattern lottery is a winning combination, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display a "○" pattern stopped (illuminated). On the other hand, if the normal pattern lottery is a losing combination, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display a "X" pattern stopped (illuminated). In other words, a setting is made to display the display mode set in the process of S812 or S813 described above stopped.

When the stop display is set by processing S818, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stop (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing S812 or processing S813.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the current lottery for the normal symbol is a win (S819). If it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is not a win (a miss) (S819: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a win (S819: Yes), it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) by referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S820), and if it is determined that the current game state is in the time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) (S820: Yes), the game content for the normal symbol winning game is set to the opening time of the electric roler 640a for 1 second x 2 times (opening operation) (S823), and the process proceeds to S822.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S820 that the game is not in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S820: No), the game content for the normal symbol winning game is set to the opening time of the electric device 640a for 5 seconds x 1 time (opening operation) (S821), and the process proceeds to S822.

In the process of S822, the start of opening and closing control of the electric role object 640a is set based on the scenario set in the process of S821 or S823 (S822), and this process ends.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a in this control example will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the winning/losing determination of the normal symbol is performed based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing when the winning/losing determination of the normal symbol is made (the timing when the processing of S808 to S811 is performed), and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set (the timing when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the processing of S817).

That is, in this control example, the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol and the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol. Therefore, depending on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol that is executed in parallel while the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol is being executed, there may be cases where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is a hit or miss, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a.

In such a situation, for example, if the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern set at the timing of the normal pattern hit/fail judgment, there is a problem that the electric role 640a will open long (an opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set) when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Therefore, in this control example, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern at the timing for setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is determined, and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the determination result. This makes it possible to open the electric role 640a in an opening pattern that corresponds to the set game state.

In this control example, the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern is performed based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a that is moved in the winning game of the normal pattern. However, without being limited to this, for example, only when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a that is moved in the winning game of the normal pattern, the electric role 640a may be configured to open long, or the opening pattern of the electric role 640a may be configured to be set based on the game state set at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, various information (result of the normal pattern lottery, normal pattern change time, normal pattern winning scenario, etc.) determined in the normal pattern change process (see S106 in FIG. 108) is set as a command indicating the content of each information, and output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 167).

Next, the contents of the through gate passing process (S107) will be explained with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (see S164). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and is a process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, and, if the ball has passed through, acquiring the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area. In addition, it is a process for acquiring the lottery result (winning/losing judgment result) in advance using the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C5 before the actual winning/losing judgment is executed (before the winning/losing judgment (see S811) is executed in the normal pattern variation process (see S106 in FIG. 163)).

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 (S901: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is obtained (S902), and it is then determined whether the obtained value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 4 (whether the number of reserved balls for normal patterns has reached the upper limit) (S903).

In the process of S903, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is greater than 4 (the upper limit value of 4) (S903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is not greater than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f (S904), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c (S905), the lottery result is obtained in advance based on the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 140(b)) (S906), a winning information command for normal patterns including the normal winning judgment result (preliminary judgment result obtained in the process of S906) is set (S907), and this process ends.

The winning information command for the normal symbol set in the process of S907 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the same process as the winning information command indicating the preliminary determination result of the special symbol set in each of the control examples described above. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine in advance the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the lottery right for the normal symbol that is reserved and to execute a performance based on the preliminary determination result.

Specifically, in a state where the chance zone is set, that is, in a state where the second special symbol lottery is being executed based on the execution of a normal symbol winning game during the normal state, if the received normal symbol winning information command contains information indicating a win of the normal symbol, it is possible to execute an effect that continues the chance zone until the next normal symbol winning game is executed. In this case, even if all the second special symbol lotteries are completed and the first special symbol lottery is executed before the next normal symbol winning game is executed, it is preferable to configure the variable effect executed in response to the first special symbol lottery to be set to a performance mode corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (for example, a performance mode in which the third symbol is changed in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 124(b)), rather than a performance mode corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (for example, a performance mode in which the third symbol is changed in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 122(b)). By configuring in this way, when multiple normal symbol winning games are executed within a predetermined period in the normal state, the chance zone can be set for a long period of time, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, if the chance zone does not end despite the second special symbol lottery being executed a predetermined number of times after the chance zone is set, the player can understand that the next regular winning game will be executed soon, so the player can be interested in the number of second special symbol lotteries executed during the chance zone. In addition, in this control example, a pseudo-variable effect is executed in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped multiple times as a variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of times the second special symbol lottery has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting when the chance zone will end or whether the chance zone is in an extended period.

Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information on the occurrence of a power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the information on the occurrence of the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the information on the occurrence of the power outage (S1601), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout/firing control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 166, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on to the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This startup process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the startup process (Fig. 166), first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if it is not stored (S1705: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S1712.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1706). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S1712. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on and RAM data is to be initialized, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed.

Similarly, if power failure occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), RAM 203 initialization processing (S1713, S1714) is executed. In the RAM initialization processing (S1713, S1714), the used area of RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and then the initial value of RAM 203 is set (S1714). After execution of RAM 203 initialization processing, the process proceeds to S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power outage information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1707: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S1708) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power was cut off (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, a performance permission command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit various performances to be executed (S1710). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 167, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is roughly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process (see FIG. 167), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special pattern change process (see FIG. 157) or the start winning process (see FIG. 161) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process (S1801 in FIG. 167), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and are used as information for setting various effects (changing effects, decorative effects, etc.) displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the big win control process (see FIG. 158) are sent to the voice and lamp control device 113. Furthermore, various commands set in other control processes are sent to the voice and lamp control device 113. In addition, when a ball is to be fired, a ball firing signal is sent to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then, if a jackpot state of a special pattern is reached, a command is set to execute a jackpot performance in the sound lamp control device 113, and jackpot control processing is executed to open the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S1804).

Details of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described later with reference to Figures 168 to 172, but in this jackpot control process (S1804), the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter referred to as the winning hole, etc.) is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a). Then, when either of these conditions is met, the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) is closed. The opening and closing of this winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. Note that in this control example, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (S1806). In the electric role opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric role is set by the process of S822 in the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the opening/closing control of the electric role is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric role continues until the end of the period set by the processes of S821 and S823 in the normal pattern change process.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B (S1807). In the first pattern display update process, when a change pattern is set by the special pattern change pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), the change display according to the change pattern is started in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B. In this control example, for example, if the currently lit LED of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process, when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the special pattern change pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159) ends, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B is terminated, and the stopped pattern is displayed (illuminated) in a stopped state in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B in the display mode set in S407 of the special pattern change pattern selection process (see S209 in FIG. 159).

Furthermore, in this control example, when one special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol), the other special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a miss (miss symbol), and the stop display for this purpose is also executed.

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device (S1808). In the second pattern display update process, when the second pattern change time is set by the process of S815 and S816 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the second pattern display device starts a change display. As a result, the second pattern display device performs a change display in which the "○" pattern and the "×" pattern as the second pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second pattern display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second pattern display device is set by the process of S818 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the change display being executed in the second pattern display device is terminated, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) on the second pattern display device in a display mode set by the process of S812 or S813 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163).

After that, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1809), and if information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S1809: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1810), and if the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and each process from S1801 onwards described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1810: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812) until the specified time is reached, i.e., within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process.

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 999 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as in the processing of S1811 (S1812). Note that in this processing of S1812, the value of the general fluctuation type counter CS2 is also updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1808 changes depending on the game state, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first win random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second win random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the normal variation type counter CS2 can also be randomly updated. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the process contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special and normal patterns, and it is possible to suppress the execution of fraudulent play targeting the timing at which the judgment value corresponding to a win is obtained.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S1809 (S1809: Yes), the power is interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 165 is executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S1813 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S1813), and a power off command indicating that the power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S1814). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S1815), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of S1809 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in S1801 to S1808, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from the power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (FIG. 166, S1701), so that the processing can be started from the processing of S1801. Therefore, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be explained with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main control device 110, and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning port 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203j is on or not (S1901). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is on (S1901: Yes), the opening command for the jackpot is set (S1902), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to off, and the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to on (S1903), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is off in the process of S1901 (S1901: No), it is next determined whether or not the special pattern jackpot is currently in progress (i.e., whether the jackpot in progress flag 203k is on) (S1904). If it is determined that the jackpot is not currently in progress (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is off) in the process of S1904 (S1904: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1904 that the current jackpot is in progress (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is on) (S1904: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is time to start a new round (S1905).

If it is determined in the process of S1905 that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed to set the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds (S1906), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 114.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1905 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1905: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S1907). Here, in this control example, when the final round of the jackpot has ended, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (S1907: Yes), an ending command is set (S1908) and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, an ending performance indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third pattern display device 81.

In this first control example, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, a process is executed to determine the type of jackpot using the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 141(a)) (S402 in FIG. 159), and an ending period corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set. Therefore, in the process of S1908, a display ending command corresponding to the length of the ending period determined corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Note that, instead of setting the length of the ending period when a jackpot is won as in this first control example, the length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined depending on whether or not a V win occurs during the jackpot game (whether or not the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65V)).

Specifically, in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), when it is determined that the ending period has started (the final round has ended), it is determined whether a V has been won during this jackpot game (whether the special probability setting flag 203m is set on), and if it is determined that the special probability setting flag 203m is set on, it sets the ending period of the jackpot game to 17 seconds in order to display a 17-second ending (see FIG. 127(b) and (d)) indicating that a special probability state has been set, and if it is determined that the special probability setting flag 203m is not set on, it sets the ending period of the jackpot game to 15 seconds in order to display a 15-second ending (see FIG. 127(a) and (c)) indicating that a time-saving state has been set.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that can vary the game state set after the end of a jackpot game depending on the game results during the jackpot game, it is possible to set an ending period that corresponds to the game state that is actually set.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the ending period of the jackpot game is made different depending on the game result during the jackpot game, the ending period of the jackpot game can be determined at any time between the determination of the game result during the jackpot game and the start of the ending period. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of this first control example, after the first round of round play ends (after the round play in which the ball can enter a specific area (V gate 65V) ends), it may be determined whether or not a V has been entered, and based on the result of this determination, the ending period of the jackpot game may be set to the period during which the round games from the second round to the final round are being played.

In addition, in the above example, the length of the ending period is set based on whether or not a V is won during the jackpot game. Alternatively, for example, the ending period of the jackpot game can be set in advance based on the type of jackpot that is won, as in this first control example. Specifically, an ending period of 17 seconds is set in advance when a special jackpot is won, and 15 seconds is set in advance when a normal jackpot is won. If it becomes necessary to change the length of the ending period based on the game results during the jackpot game, that is, if a special jackpot game is played but a V cannot be won during the jackpot game, the length of the preset ending period can be changed. By configuring in this way, the frequency with which the length of the ending period is set during the jackpot game can be reduced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1907 that the timing is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (S1907: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909). Here, the end timing of the jackpot refers to the case where the execution period of the ending performance has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S1909 that the timing is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909: Yes), a jackpot end process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends is executed (S1910), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 170. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1909 that the timing is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1909: No), a winning process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning port 65a is executed (S1911), an abnormality process for determining whether the ball that entered the specific winning port 65a was discharged normally is executed (S1912), and then this process ends. Details of the winning process and the abnormality process will be described later with reference to FIG. 171 and FIG. 172.

Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1906) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1906). This jackpot operation setting process (S1906) is executed during the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 169) is started, it is first determined whether it is time to start one round (S2001). If it is determined in the process of S2001 that it is time to start one round (S2001: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the switching valve 65y (V solenoid 209a) is set (S2002), and the opening pattern of the specific winning port 65a corresponding to the type of jackpot is set (S2003).

Although detailed explanations will be omitted here, in this control example, among the round games executed multiple times during one jackpot game, the content of the round game executed in a specific round number (first round) is made different depending on the jackpot type. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (variable jackpot), a round game is executed as the first round of round game in which the switching valve 65y is operated to make it easier for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of the ball flowing down to the specific area (V gate 65V) only during a specific period of time during a jackpot game that is executed over a long period of time, so that the player can play during the jackpot game without losing concentration.

In this control example, when the first round of the high probability jackpot game is executed, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to execute a V notification effect in which the characters "Aim for V" are displayed as a notification mode to inform the player that it is a chance period for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). This makes it possible to easily inform the player of a specific period during the long-term jackpot game in which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). Furthermore, based on the detection means detecting that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V), the characters "VGET" are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as a notification mode to inform the player that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V). This makes it possible to easily inform the player that the conditions for setting the high probability state after the jackpot game is completed are met.

The notification mode of the above-mentioned guidance notification may be varied depending on whether a condition is met. For example, the color of the text "Aim for V" may be varied based on the elapsed time of a specific period in which the ball is likely to flow down to a specific gate, or the remaining time, or the size of the display area may be varied, or the text may be changed to something more emphatic (for example, "Aim for V quickly"). This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not fire the ball in a situation in which it is likely to flow down to a specific area (V gate 65V).

In addition, in this control example, a switching valve 65y is provided as a V-type device for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the variable winning device 65, and the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y can be changed to set a period in which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific gate and a period in which it is difficult to flow down to the specific gate. However, without being limited to this, for example, the switching valve 65y may be configured to operate with a common operation pattern from the start of the jackpot game, and the timing at which the specific winning port 65a is opened may be changed depending on the type of jackpot, so that a period in which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) and a period in which it is difficult to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) can be set. This makes it possible to standardize the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y, so that even if the operation content of the switching valve 65y is understood, it is difficult for the player to know whether the current jackpot game is a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to pass through to the specific area (V gate 65V). In addition, since the operation content of the switching valve 65y can be unified, the load on the V solenoid 209a can be reduced, and the failure of the V-type device (switching valve 65y) can be suppressed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2001 that the current round is not the first round (S2001: No), the processes of S2002 and S2003 are skipped, the opening of the normal specific winning port 65a is set (S2004), and the process proceeds to S2005. In the process of S2005, a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S2005), and the process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to update the display content of the third pattern display device 81 according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 169), the specific winning port 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the specific area (V gate 65V) can be set to allow the ball to pass through in the first round. As a result, in jackpots A, C to E, the player can simply shoot the ball in the first round and the ball will almost certainly pass through the specific area (V gate 65V), so a special probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S1910). This jackpot end process (S1910) is executed in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end process (S1910), first, it is determined whether the special chance setting flag 203m is on (S2101). If it is determined in the process of S2101 that the special chance setting flag 203m is on (S2101: Yes), this means that the ball passed through the V-gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot, so the value of the special chance counter 203i is set to 50 (S2102) and processing proceeds to S2103. On the other hand, if the special chance setting flag 203m is off in the process of S2101 (S2101: No), processing skips S2102 and proceeds to processing S2103.

In the process of S2103, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S2103), and then a state command is set based on the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the value of the probability change counter 203i (S2104). The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, it updates the slave state setting area 223g according to the game state notified by the state command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the jackpot flag 203k and the probability change setting flag 203m are set to OFF (S2105), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 170), the game state after the jackpot end can be accurately set depending on whether or not the ball passed through the V-gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot game.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1911) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S1911). This winning process (S1911) is executed as part of the big win control process (see FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for carrying out control in response to a win at a specific winning port 65a.

In this winning process (S1911), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the valid round period (S2201). Here, the valid round period is the period during which a round of play is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning port 65a is opened until the end of the interval period. In the process of S2201, if the current time is not the valid round period (S2201: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the current time is the valid round period (S2201: Yes), it is then determined whether a win at the specific winning port 65a has been detected (S2202), and if a win at the specific winning port 65a has been detected (S2202: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203o is updated by adding 1 (S2203), a winning command indicating that a win at the specific winning port 65a has been detected is set (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2202 that a win at the specific winning port 65a has not been detected (S2202: No), the processes of S2203 and S2204 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2205.

In the process of S2205, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203o is 10 or more (S2205), and if the value of the winning number counter 203o is 10 or more (S2205: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 9 or less (S2205: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S2206), and if the round time has elapsed (S2206: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. In the process of S2206, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of each round of play of the current jackpot. In this control example, the end conditions for the round game are met by the same round time elapse and number of winnings regardless of the type of jackpot or number of rounds, but this is not limited to the above, and the end conditions for the round game may be different depending on the type of jackpot, or the end conditions for the round game may be different depending on the number of rounds played.

In the process of S2207, the specific winning port 65a is set to be closed (S2207), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning port 65a has been set to be closed is set (S2208). Next, it is determined whether the current closing of the specific winning port 65a is due to the end of one round (S2209), and if it is determined that the current closing is due to the end of one round (S2209: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to OFF (S2210), and the process proceeds to S2211. On the other hand, in the process of S2209, if it is determined that the current closing of the specific winning port 65a is due to the end of a round other than the first round (S2209: No), since the flow path solenoid (probable win solenoid) 2665k is not set to ON, the process of S2210 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2212.

In the process of S2211, the remaining ball timer flag 203p, the special chance active flag 203r, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2211), and the process proceeds to S2212. Also, if the value of the winning number counter 203o is determined to be 9 or less in the process of S2205 (S2205: No), and if it is determined in the process of S2206 that the round time has not elapsed (S2206: No), the processes of S2207 to S2211 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2212.

In the process of S2212, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is on (S2212), and if the round end flag 203 is off (S2212: No), the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that the round end flag 203 is on (S2212: Yes), it is then determined whether the special chance active flag 203r is on (S2217). In the process of S2217, if the special chance active flag 203r is off (S2217: No), the process ends as is.

On the other hand, if the special chance valid flag 203r is on (S2217: No), 1 is added to the value of the special chance valid timer 203s (S2218), and then it is determined whether the value of the special chance valid timer 203s is the upper limit (S2219). If the value of the special chance valid timer 203s is not the upper limit (S2219: No), the process proceeds to S2213, where the ball passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) is monitored and the special chance setting flag 203m is updated. As a result, if the special chance valid timer 203s is not the upper limit, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V), so the special chance state can be set taking into account the time it takes for the ball to clear. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the special chance state from being granted by illegally passing the ball through the specific area (V gate 65V).

On the other hand, if the value of the special chance active timer 203s is the upper limit (S2219: Yes), the special chance active flag 203r and the round end flag 203 are set to off (S2220), the value of the special chance active timer 203s is reset (S2221), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S2213, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213), and if the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special chance passing counter 203n (S2214), the special chance setting flag 203m is set to ON (S2215), a V winning command is set (S2216), and this process ends.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1912). This abnormality processing (S1912) is a process executed during the big win control process (see FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for determining whether the ball that entered the specific winning port 65a was discharged normally.

In the abnormality processing (S1912), first, it is determined whether the current time is the valid period for the round (S2301), and if it is not the valid period for the round (S2301: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is the valid period for the round (S2301: Yes), it is then determined whether the ball has passed through the discharge port 65h1 (S2302). In the processing of this S2302, it is determined whether the ball discharge port switch (not shown) capable of detecting a ball that has passed through the discharge port 65h1 (see FIG. 120(b)) has detected the passage of the ball.

If it is determined in the process of S2302 that the ball has passed through the discharge outlet 65h1 (S2302: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203t is incremented by 1 (S2303), and the process proceeds to S2304. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the ball has not passed through the discharge outlet 65h1 (S2302: No), the process skips S2303 and proceeds to S2304.

In the process of S2304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S2304). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203p is off (S2304: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S2304: Yes), since it is the ball removal period, the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is updated by adding 1 (S2305). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit value (S2306), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is not the upper limit value (S2306: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit (S2306: Yes), it then determines whether the number of dispensed balls (the sum of the value of the special chance passing counter 203n and the value of the dispensed ball number counter 203t) matches the number of winning balls (the value of the winning ball number counter 203o) (S2307).

If it is determined in the process of S2307 that the number of dispensed balls does not match the number of winning balls (S2307: No), an error command is set (S2308) and the process proceeds to S2309. When the error command is received by the voice and lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, the text "Number of winning balls does not match" is displayed) and an error signal is output to the hall computer. This makes it possible to suppress fraudulent behavior in which balls are illegally allowed to flow into the fourth flow path 65e and pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during the period when the fourth flow path 65e4 (see FIG. 120(b)) is closed (the period when the switching valve 65y is closed).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2307 that the number of dispensed balls matches the number of winning balls (S2307: Yes), the process of S2308 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2309. In the process of S2309, the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to OFF (S2309), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is reset (S2310). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203o, the dispensed number counter 203t, and the special chance passing counter 203n are each reset (S2311), and this process ends.

By executing this abnormality processing (see Figure 172), it is possible to detect and notify early on of malfunctions that may cause balls that have entered the specific winning port 65a to be unable to be discharged normally, such as due to ball clogging inside the variable winning device 65.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 173 to Fig. 186, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, referring to FIG. 173, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the execution of the power-off processing of S4117 (see FIG. 174) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 174, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives information on the occurrence of a power outage from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 174), it executes the power-off processing of S4117. Before the execution of such a power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S4117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S4117 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S4003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes) and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S4117 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No) and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S4002: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S4117 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 119). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, so the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (S4009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if the power-off flag is off and S4008 is reached, the process goes from S4004 to S4006 and reaches S4008 because the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or the process was started because only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010, where the initial value of RAM 223 is set (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S4004 to S4006 and then to S4008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up process is started, the data in the working area of RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that control of voice lamp control device 113 can continue.

Next, referring to FIG. 174, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the start of the main processing or since the processing of S4101 was executed last time (S4101). If 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S4101: No), the processing of S4102 to S4111 is not performed and the processing proceeds to S4112. The reason for determining whether or not 1 millisecond has passed in the processing of S4101 is that, while S4102 to S4111 are processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S4112 and the variable display setting processing of S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control unit 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S4112 at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable display performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination processing.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, a command output process is executed to send various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 to the display control device 114 (S4102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process is a process for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then a process for updating the display of the number of reserved balls is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the settings are sent as commands to the display control device 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring/effect process monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and sets up a corresponding effect when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated. Details of this frame button input monitoring/effect process (S4107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 186.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, then the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S4109, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S4110), and then the performance update process is executed (S4111). After executing the process of S4111, the process moves to S4112. In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing/output process of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81.

After processing of S4111, a command determination process (S4112) is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control unit 110, and the process proceeds to S4113. Details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 175.

In the processing of S4113, in order to display a variable display performance on the third pattern display device 81, a variable display setting process is executed, which is a process of generating a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 and setting the command to be sent to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 182.

After the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). Information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (S4116), and the power outage processing is executed (S4117). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and the processing then loops infinitely. In the power outage processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The stored information on the occurrence of a power outage is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S4115: No), the process returns to the process of S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if the RAM is determined to be destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a store clerk or the like to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, referring to FIG. 175, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. The command determination process (S4112) will be described in detail below.

When the command determination process (S4112) is executed, first, it is determined whether a status command has been received (S4201), and if it is determined that a status command has been received (S4201: Yes), a status command reception process (S4202) is executed and this process is terminated. This status command reception process (S4202) receives a status command indicating the current game state, sets a mode presentation mode corresponding to the game state, and sets a display command for displaying the corresponding presentation mode (for example, a back image) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when a status command indicating a probability change state is received, a display command corresponding to the super chance mode shown in FIG. 131 is set, and when a status command indicating a time-saving state is received, a display command corresponding to the chance mode shown in FIG. 128 is set. Details of the game state that is actually set and the switching control of the presentation mode in the executed mode presentation will be described later. Details of this status command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 176.

If it is determined in the processing of S4201 that a status command has not been received (S4201: No), it is then determined whether a special chart fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4203). If it is determined that a special chart fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special chart fluctuation start flag 223d corresponding to the received special chart fluctuation pattern command is set to on (S4204), and the fluctuation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S4205). Then, this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S4203 that a special chart change pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), it is then determined whether a special chart stop type command has been received (S4206). If it is determined that a special chart stop type command has been received (S4206: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e (first special chart stop type flag 223e1, second special chart stop type flag 223e2) corresponding to the received special chart stop type command is set to on (S4207), and the stop type is extracted from the received command (S4208). Then, this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S4206 that the special symbol stop type command has not been received (S4206: No), then it is determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). If it is determined that a reserved ball number command has been received (S4209: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and the corresponding value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h (S4210). Specifically, when a reserved ball number command for a special symbol is received, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (i.e., the reserved ball number of the special symbol variable display) are extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

In addition, when a reserved ball count command for a normal pattern is received, the value of the reserved ball count counter 203f for normal patterns in the main control unit 110 contained in the reserved ball count command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variable display of normal patterns) is extracted, and the value of the reserved ball count counter 223h for normal patterns provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is updated to match the extracted counter value.

The reserved ball count command is sent from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the various ball entry ports (first ball entry port 64, second ball entry port 640, through gate 67) (initial entry) and the values of the various reserved ball count counters are incremented, or when various variable start processes are executed and the values of the various reserved ball count counters are decremented. Therefore, at the time of initial entry or each time the variable display is set, the values of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c and the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 223h of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to the values of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d, the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e, and the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203f of the main control unit 110 by the processing of S4210.

Therefore, even if the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 223c in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 becomes misaligned with the values of the various reserved ball counters 203d, 203e, 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., if a reserved ball number command is notified at the time of initial winning or when the variable display is set, that is, when the various reserved ball numbers are changed, the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the values of the various reserved ball counters of the main control device 110, the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d, the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e, and the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S4209 that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4209: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4211). If it is determined in the process of S4211 that a winning command has been received (S4211: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S4212) and this process is terminated. This winning command process (S4212) analyzes the pattern type (special pattern, normal pattern) corresponding to the winning information contained in the received winning information command, stores (stores) the analysis result in the corresponding memory area (winning information storage area 223b in RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113), and performs a process to execute a performance (pre-reading performance) based on the received winning information. The details of the winning command process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 177.

If it is determined in the process of S4211 that a winning command has not been received (S4211: No), it is then determined whether a pattern determination command has been received (S4213). If it is determined that a pattern determination command has been received (S4213: Yes), the stop display of the third pattern is set (S4214), and this process ends. If it is determined that a stop command has not been received (S4213: No), it is then determined whether a normal map-related command has been received (S4215). If it is determined that a normal map-related command has been received (S4215: Yes), normal map-related processing is executed (S4216), and then this process ends. A detailed explanation of executing normal map-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 124.

If it is determined in the processing of S4215 that a normal game-related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received (S4217). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (S4217: Yes), jackpot-related processing is executed (S4218), and then this processing is terminated. Note that a detailed explanation of the jackpot-related processing (S4218) will be given later with reference to FIG. 180. On the other hand, if it is determined that a jackpot-related command has not been received (S4217: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4219), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 176, the status command receiving process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing this status command receiving process (S4202). This status command receiving process (S4202) is executed within the command determination process (see FIG. 175) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and executes processing to set different display modes displayed on the third pattern display device 81 depending on the set game status. Details of the status command receiving process (S4202) will be described below.

When the status command reception process (S4202) is executed, it is first determined whether the currently set game status will be changed (S4301). Here, it is determined whether the game status set in the slave status setting area 223g differs from the game status indicated by the currently received status command. In the process of S4301, if it is determined that there is no change in the game status (S4301: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that there is a change in the game status (S4301: Yes), it is determined whether the changed game status is normal (S4302).

If it is determined in the process of S4302 that the game state after the change is normal (if the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: Yes), a display command indicating normal mode is set (S4303), and the process proceeds to S4304.

In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the currently received state command is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: No), it then determines whether the game state after the change is the time-shortened state (S4306), and if it is determined that the game state is the time-shortened state (if the currently received state command is a command indicating the time-shortened state) (S4306: Yes), the value of the time-shortened counter 223n is set to 100 (S4307), a display command indicating the chance mode is set (S4308), and the process proceeds to S4304.

If it is determined in the processing of S4306 that the game state is not in a time-saving state (S4306: No), then it is determined whether or not the V notification flag 223m is on (S4309). If the V notification flag 223m is off (S4309: No), the processing proceeds to S4308 described above. If the V notification flag 223m is on (S4309: Yes), the V notification flag 223m is set to off (S4310), a display command indicating the super chance mode is set (S4311), and the processing proceeds to S4304.

In the process of S4304, the game status set in the current status area of the slave status setting area 223g is set in the past status area (S4304), the game status corresponding to the information indicated by the received status command is set in the current status area of the slave status setting area 223g (S4305), and this process is terminated.

Here, the display control device 114 is notified of the commands set in the processing of S4308 and S4311, and the variable performance display during the normal state is executed. Thus, in this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set the type (mode, background) of various display modes to be displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110, and to output a command indicating the type to the display control device 114.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to, for example, eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable performance display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In other words, by simply outputting to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variable pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, it is possible to set display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variable pattern based on the type command and common command received on the display control device 114 side. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113.

As described above, when the display control device 114 is configured to set the display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by combining multiple commands received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the display data after setting to the voice lamp control device 113, and a discrimination means is provided to discriminate whether the confirmation information received on the voice lamp control device 113 is appropriate. If the discrimination result is determined to be inappropriate, a simplified display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the display data already set are rewritten to the simplified display data.

By configuring in this way, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not set appropriate display data for various commands received from the main control device 110, it is possible to set simplified display data showing appropriate information and display a variable performance display based on the simplified display data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a variable performance display with content different from the actual game result (the lottery result of the special pattern) from being executed, which reduces the player's motivation to play. In addition, as the above-mentioned simplified display data, for example, display data that displays a special mode that does not correspond to any game state (for example, a mode with a black background) or display data that executes a variable display of the fourth pattern, which has a smaller amount of data than the display data used for normal variable performance display, can be used.

In this control example, the above-mentioned configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to set a display variation pattern command based on the current game state and the received variation pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 177, the contents of the winning command processing (see S4212) executed in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command processing (S4212). This winning command processing (S4212) is processing executed when a winning command (winning information command) is received from the main control device 110 when the right to draw a special symbol is acquired, a regular symbol winning information command is set when the right to draw a regular symbol is acquired, or a V winning command is received when the ball flows down (passes through) a specific gate (high probability switch) during a jackpot game.

When the winning command process (S4212) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (S4401), and it is determined whether the currently received command is a winning information command for a normal symbol (S4402). If it is determined that it is a winning information command for a normal symbol (S4402: Yes), it is determined whether the received command contains winning information (winning information for a normal symbol) (S4403). If it is determined that there is winning information (S4403: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state for a normal symbol (S4404).

If it is determined that the current state is not a high probability state for normal symbols, that is, the normal state (S4404: No), the player has acquired the right to draw a normal symbol lottery that will win a normal symbol during the normal state, and there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set, so a display command is set to suggest the long opening of the electric chute (S4405) and the process proceeds to S4406. When the display command is set in the process of S4405, it is notified to the display control device 114 with the same control content as the various display commands set in the control process of the other sound lamp control devices, and a suggestion effect is executed (for example, an effect that teases whether or not a small display area Dm3 will be formed in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) that suggests that a normal symbol hit game will be played during the normal state and the electric role 640a will be long-opened (opened for 5 seconds).

In this control example, the above-mentioned suggestive effects are executed only when the player has acquired the right to draw a normal pattern lottery that will result in a normal winning combination during normal play. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also preferable to execute the above-mentioned suggestive effects when it is determined that the normal winning information command contains winning information indicating a specific losing win. This makes it possible to set whether a normal winning combination will be executed when the suggestive effect is executed, or not, allowing the player to play while predicting the game content that will be executed in the future.

In addition, in this control example, the suggestive effect is executed when the player acquires the right to draw a normal pattern lottery that will win a normal pattern during the normal state. In addition to this configuration, a pre-game state process may be executed to determine whether the game state is normal or not at the time when the game actually plays a normal pattern, that is, the time when the game corresponding to the normal pattern winning information command indicating a normal pattern win is executed (the time when the game plays a normal pattern), based on the pre-determination result of the special pattern lottery being executed or the special pattern lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and if it is determined to be normal, the suggestive effect described above is executed. This makes it possible to more accurately indicate that a chance zone will be set.

Returning to FIG. 177 for further explanation, if it is determined in the process of S4402 that a winning information command for normal maps has not been received (S4402: No), if it is determined in the process of S4403 that there is no winning information (S4403: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4404 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4404: Yes), the process also moves to the process of S4406.

In the process of S4406, the special prize information command process is executed (S4406), and the process proceeds to S4407. Details of this special prize information command process (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG. 178.

In the processing of S4407, it is determined whether the command received this time is a V winning command (a command (see S2216) that is set when the ball flows down to the sure win switch (specific gate) during the winning processing (see S1911 in FIG. 171)) (S4407), and if it is a V winning command (S4407: Yes), the V winning flag 223j is set to on (S4408) and processing proceeds to S4409. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4407 that a V winning command has not been received (S4407: No), processing proceeds to S4413.

In the process of S4409, it is determined whether or not the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4409). If the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4409: Yes), the V performance execution flag 223k is set to off (S4410), a display command for notifying a V winning is set (S4411), the V notification flag 223m is set to on (S4412), and the process proceeds to S4413. Also, in the process of S4409, if the V performance execution flag 223k is off (S4409: No), the process proceeds to S4413.

In the processing of S4413, other processing is executed (S4413), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 178, the contents of the special prize information command processing (S4406) executed in the prize command processing (S4212 in FIG. 177) will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special prize information command processing (S4406).

When the special winning information command process (S4406) is executed, first, the current game state is extracted based on the information set in the slave state setting area 223g (S4501), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 75 (S4502). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 75 (S4502: Yes), it is then determined whether the special consecutive notice flag 223o is on (S4503). If it is determined that the special consecutive notice flag 223o is off (S4503: No), the consecutive notice execution selection table 222d (Fig. 147 (a)) is used to select the presence or absence of consecutive notice (S4504), and then it is determined whether consecutive notices are being executed (S4505). If it is determined that consecutive notices are being executed (S4505: Yes), the special consecutive notice flag 223o is set to on (S4506), and the process proceeds to S4507.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S4502 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 75 or less (S4502: No), if it is determined in the process of S4503 that the special consecutive notice flag 223o is on (S4503: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4505 that a consecutive notice is not being executed (S4505: No), the process proceeds to S4507.

In the process of S4507, a display command is set based on the information contained in the received special prize information command (S4507), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 179, the contents of the normal symbol related processing (S4216) executed in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol related processing (S4216). This normal symbol related processing (S4216) is processing that is executed when a normal symbol variation pattern command indicating that a normal symbol lottery has been executed from the main control device 110, a normal symbol win start command indicating that a normal symbol win game has started, or a normal symbol win end command indicating that a normal symbol win game has ended is received.

When the normal map related process (S4216) is executed, first, it is determined whether a normal map variation pattern command has been received (S4601), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4601: Yes), a display normal map variation start command is set (S4602), and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0, i.e., whether the normal pattern is in a high probability state (S4603). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4603: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4603: No), it is determined whether the normal map variation pattern command received this time is a normal map variation pattern command corresponding to the normal pattern lottery that has won the normal map (S4604), and if it is determined that the normal map has not won (S4604: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a normal winning has been won (S4604: Yes), since this is a normal winning variation that results in a long opening winning, a display command indicating that a long opening is waiting is set (S4605), and this process ends. By setting the display command in the process of S4605, the display mode shown in FIG. 123(b) is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. This allows the player to easily predict that there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set soon.

In this control example, a process is used to display the display mode shown in FIG. 123(b) (the display mode forming the small display area Dm3) based on whether or not the normal pattern variation is a winning variation. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to display the display mode shown in FIG. 123(b) (the display mode forming the small display area Dm3) for a specific normal pattern miss variation (for example, a part of a normal pattern miss variation in which the same variation time as the normal pattern win variation is set).

The size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may be varied depending on the content of the variation effect (third pattern variation effect) corresponding to the currently executed special pattern variation. For example, when a variation effect with a high expectation of a jackpot (e.g., a reach effect) is being executed in the third pattern variation effect, the display content may be varied so that the display area of the small display area Dm3 is smaller than when a variation effect with a high expectation of a jackpot (e.g., a reach effect) is not being executed. In this way, by variably controlling the display content by providing a relationship between the variation effect suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation effect suggesting the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, which are executed independently, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by being provided with too much game information unnecessarily, and to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Returning to FIG. 179, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4601 that the normal pattern variation command has not been received (S4601: No), then it is determined whether the normal pattern win start command has been received (S466). If it is determined that the normal pattern win start command has been received (S4606: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607). If it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4607: No), a display command indicating that a long opening is in progress is set (S4608), and this process is terminated. By setting the display command in the process of S4608, the display mode shown in FIG. 124(a) is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. This allows the player to easily understand that a long opening win is being executed. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4607 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607: Yes), the process of S4608 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In the process of S4606, if it is determined that a normal winning start command has not been received (S4606: No), it is determined whether a normal winning end command has been received (S4609). If it is determined that a normal winning end command has been received (S4609: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4610). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 0 (S4610: No), it is then determined whether the value of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 223h is 1 or greater (S4611). If it is determined that it is 1 or greater (S4611: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect in progress flag 223i is set on (S4612). If it is determined that it is not set on (S4612: No), a display command indicating entry into the chance zone is set (S4613), the special effect in progress flag 223i is set off (S4614), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the process of S4610 to S4612 determines that the determination result is other than the above-mentioned determination result, the process ends.

Next, the contents of the jackpot-related process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related process (S4218). The jackpot-related process (S4218) performs processing to cause the third pattern display device 81 to execute a presentation display corresponding to the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won, and when a jackpot is won, processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S4218), first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S4701). If it is determined to be a jackpot start command (S4701: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S4702). The jackpot start command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the jackpot start command for display, it displays an effect suggesting the start of a jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4703), and if it is determined to be a normal jackpot (S4703: Yes), an ending display mode indicating that a chance mode has been entered (time-saving state is set) is set (S4708), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (S4703: No), that is, if it is determined to be a sure-win jackpot, the V notification execution selection table 222e (FIG. 147(b)) is used to select whether or not to execute a V notification effect (S4704), and then it is determined whether or not there is a V notification effect (S4705). If it is determined that there is a V notification effect (S4705: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223k is set to ON (S4706), an ending display mode indicating that a super chance mode has been entered (sure-win state is set) is set (S4707), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4705 that there is no V notification effect (S4705: No), the processing proceeds to the processing of S4708 described above.

In other words, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 141, different lengths of ending periods are set according to the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability jackpot), and the ending display mode (see FIG. 133) corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed this time is set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game starts. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to execute display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period when various controls (variable display control of jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control to display information indicating the number of prize balls acquired or control to display information indicating the number of rounds being played) and prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls according to the number of balls won into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game) are frequently executed, so the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In this control example, the process for setting the ending display mode is executed at the start of the jackpot game, but it is not limited to this. The ending display mode may be set during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol when it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed, or may be configured to be set using the remaining period of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113, which is executed during a period of the jackpot game period when there is little control processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4701 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4701: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S4709). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (S4709: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the round number (S4710), and it is determined whether the current round number is 1 round (V round) (S4711). If it is determined that there is 1 round (V round) (S4711: Yes), it is determined whether the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4712). If it is determined that the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4712: Yes), a display command is set to notify of a V win (S4713), and this processing ends. Furthermore, if the process of S4711 determines that the current round number is not 1 round (V round), i.e., that a round of play other than the first round will begin (S4711: No), or if the process of S4712 determines that the V performance execution flag 223k is off (S4712: No), this process is also terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S4709 that the number of rounds command has not been received (S4709: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (S4714), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4714: Yes), ending processing is executed (S4715) and this processing ends. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4786 that the ending command has not been received (S4714: No), this processing ends as it is.

Next, the ending process (S4715) will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S4715). This ending process (S4715) is executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the jackpot-related process described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180), and executes processing to finally determine the ending display mode to be executed during the ending period.

When the ending process (S4715) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4801), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4801: Yes), the V winning flag 223j is set to OFF (S4805), and the execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode that has already been set is set (S4804), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the V winning flag 223j is not set to ON (S4801: No), it is determined whether the V performance execution flag 223k is ON (S4802), and if it is determined that the V performance execution flag 223k is OFF (S4802: No), the process proceeds directly to S4804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4802 that the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4802: Yes), a display switching command is set to switch the display mode for the latter half (7 seconds) of the ending period (S4803), and the processing proceeds to S4804.

When the display switching command is set in the processing of S4803, the display control device 114 is notified, and processing is executed to switch the display mode for the latter half of the ending period, which was previously set in response to the setting of the high probability state (see FIG. 236(d)), to the display mode corresponding to the setting of the time-saving state (see FIG. 236(c)). In this control example, the display period for the display mode that is switched based on this display switching command is constant (7 seconds), so the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113) will be explained with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 1827 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a variable display pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variable display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether the special chart 1 variable start flag 223d1 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4901). Then, if it is determined that the special chart 1 variable start flag 223d1 is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4901: No), since the variable pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S4905. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 variable start flag 223d1 is on (S4901: Yes), the special chart 1 variable start flag 223d1 is set to off (S4902), and then the special chart 1 performance mode setting process is executed to generate a display variable pattern command based on the acquired variable pattern type for notifying the display control device 114 (S4903), and the data corresponding to the first special pattern in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905. Details of the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S4903) will be described later with reference to FIG. 183.

In the process of S4905, it is determined whether the special pattern 2 change start flag 223d2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4905). If it is determined that the special pattern 2 change start flag 223d2 is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4905: No), the change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S4909. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 change start flag 223d2 is on (S4905: Yes), the special pattern 2 change start flag 223d2 is set to off (S4906), and then the special pattern 2 performance mode setting process is executed (S4907), the data corresponding to the second special pattern among the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909. Details of the special pattern 2 performance mode setting process (S4907) will be described later with reference to FIG. 184.

In the process of S4909, it is determined whether the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4909). Then, if it is determined that the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4909: No), since the change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is on (S4909: Yes), the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 that is set to on is set to off (S4910), and then the display special chart 1 or special chart 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S4911), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (S4903) will be explained with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (S4903). This special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (S4903) is executed when setting the variable presentation of the first special symbol in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the set game state.

When the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S4903) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5001). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5002), a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving counter 223n after the decrement (S5003), and the process proceeds to S5004. If it is determined in the process of S5001 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 0 (S5001: No), the processes of S5002 and S5003 are skipped and the process proceeds to S5004.

In the process of S5004, the presentation mode stored in the presentation mode storage area 223p is read (S5004), and then it is determined whether or not it is the super chance mode (S5005). If it is determined that it is the super chance mode (S5005: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S5006), and it is determined whether the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S5007). If it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S5007: Yes), the presentation mode (presentation content) is determined based on the probability variation selection table 222c (see FIG. 29) (S5008), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S5009), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic variation time is not 30 seconds (S5007: No), the process proceeds to S5011.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5005 that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5005: No), then it is determined whether or not the mode is the chance mode (S5010). If it is determined that the mode is not the chance mode (S5010: No), the performance mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5011), and the process proceeds to the processing of S5009 described above. If it is determined in the processing of S5010 that the mode is the chance mode (S5010: Yes), the chance mode performance setting process is executed (S5012), and the process proceeds to the processing of S5009. Details of the chance mode performance setting process (S5012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907) will be explained with reference to FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907). This special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907) is executed when setting the variable presentation of the second special symbol in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the set game state.

When the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907) is executed, first it is determined whether the current game state is normal (S5101), and if it is determined to be normal (S5101: Yes), a display command indicating entry into the chance zone is set (S5102), then the special presentation in progress flag 223i is set to on (S5103), the presentation mode is determined based on the normal special chart 2 presentation selection table 222b (see FIG. 145) (S5104), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S5105), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the state is not normal (S5101: No), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5106), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5106: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5107), a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving counter 223n after the decrement (S5108), and the process proceeds to S5109. If it is determined in the process of S5106 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 0 (S5106: No), the processes of S5107 and S5108 are skipped and the process proceeds to S5109.

In the process of S5109, the presentation mode stored in the presentation mode storage area 223p is read (S5109), and then it is determined whether or not it is the super chance mode (S5110). If it is determined that it is the super chance mode (S5110: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S5111), and it is determined whether or not the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S5112). If it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S5112: Yes), the presentation mode (presentation content) is determined based on the probability variation selection table 222c (see FIG. 146) (S5113), the above-mentioned process of S5105 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic variation time is not 30 seconds (S5112: No), the process proceeds to S5115.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5110 that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5110: No), the chance mode performance setting processing is executed (S5114 (S5012)), and the process proceeds to S5115. Details of the chance mode performance setting processing (S5114 (S5012)) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

In the process of S5115, the presentation mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5115), the process of S5105 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 185, the chance mode performance setting process (S5012 (S5114)) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the chance mode performance setting process (S5012 (S5114)) executed in the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 183) and the special chart 2 performance mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184).

In the chance mode performance setting process (S5012 (S5114)), first, the value of the time-saving counter 223n is read (S5201), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n read is 99 or not (S5202). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 99 (S5202: Yes), a high-speed period is set in the performance mode memory area 223p (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5202, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is not 99 (S5202: No), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n read is 79 or not (S5204). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 79 (S5204: Yes), a normal first period is set in the performance mode memory area 223p (S5205), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5204, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is not 79 (S5204: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n that was read is 49 (S5206). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 49 (S5206: Yes), the normal second period is set in the performance mode memory area 223p (S5207), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5206, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is not 49 (S5206: No), the process of S5207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5208.

In the process of S5208, it is determined whether the continuous notice in progress flag 223q is on (S5208). If it is determined that the continuous notice in progress flag 223q is on (S5208: Yes), the continuous performance mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variable pattern command is determined (S5209), and the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5208, if it is determined that the continuous notice in progress flag 223q is off (S5208: No), it is determined whether the special continuous notice flag 223o is on (S5210). If it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is on (S5210: Yes), a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set to the special effective time timer (S5211), the special continuous notice flag 223o is set to off (S5212), and the process proceeds to S5213. Even if it is determined in the processing of S5210 that the special consecutive notice flag 223o is off (S5210: No), the processing proceeds to S5213.

In the process of S5213, the presentation mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5213), and the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5214, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S5214), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 186, the frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S4107). This frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S4107) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display command based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute a presentation (operation presentation) according to the player's operation to enhance the presentation effect in the third pattern display device 81.

In this control example, the frame button 22 can be operated by a player in a plurality of operation methods. Specifically, the frame button 22 can be distinguished between a "normal press" in which the frame button 22 is pressed for a short time (less than 2 seconds) and a "long press" in which the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time (more than 2 seconds). Different operation effects can be executed according to the distinguished operation content. This allows the player to operate the frame button 22 in a variety of operation methods to execute various operation effects, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early. In this control example, two types of operation methods are used as distinguishable operation methods, but this is not limited to this, and one type of operation method or three or more types may be provided. In this control example, the operation means that the player can operate is one type of the frame button 22, but this is not limited to this, and multiple operation means that the player can operate may be provided. The distinguishable operation methods may be determined not only by operations on individual operation means, but also by a combination of operation contents executed on multiple operation means. In addition, when multiple operating means are provided (for example, a first operating means and a second operating means), the system may be configured to determine that the same operation has been performed (the same operation method) when a first operation is performed on the first operating means and when a second operation is performed on the second operating means. By configuring in this way, for example, when the position of the first operating means and the position of the second operating means are separated, the player can select the operating means that is easy to operate and enjoy operating the game.

In the frame button input monitoring and performance process (S4107 in FIG. 186), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is greater than 0, i.e., whether the SW effective time is set (whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223r is greater than 0) (S5301). Note that this SW effective time is set corresponding to each variation pattern when a variation pattern performance using the frame button 22 is selected. If it is determined that the SW effective time is set (S5301: Yes), a value corresponding to the elapsed time is subtracted from the value of the SW effective time counter 223r (S5302), and the process proceeds to S5303. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the value of the SW effective time counter 223r is 0 (S5301: No), the process of S5302 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5303.

In the process of S5303, it is determined whether the value of the special effective time timer is greater than 0 (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the special effective time timer is greater than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the special effective time timer is subtracted (S5304) and the process proceeds to S5305. If it is determined that the value of the special effective time timer is 0 (S5303: No), the process of S5304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5305.

In the process of S5305, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 223t is greater than 0 (S5305). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 223t is 0 (S5305: No), it is then determined whether it is within the valid time (S5306). If it is determined that it is within the valid time (S5306: Yes), it is then determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307: Yes), a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the value of the operation counter 223t (S5308), and the process proceeds to S5309. If it is determined that it is not within the valid time in the process of S5306 (S5306: No) or if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed in the process of S5307 (S5307: No), the process of S5308 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5305 that the value of the operating counter 223t is 1 or more (S5305: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310: Yes), the value of the operating counter 223t is decremented (S5312), and it is determined whether or not the decremented value of the operating counter 223t is 0 (S5313). If it is determined that the decremented value of the operating counter 223t is 0 (S5313: Yes), the processing proceeds to S5314. If it is determined that the decremented value of the operating counter 223t is not 0 (S5313: No), the processing proceeds to S5309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5310 that the frame button 22 is not being pressed (S5310: No), the value of the operation counter 223t is cleared (S5311), and the processing proceeds to S5314.

In the process of S5314, it is determined whether or not the current state is chance mode (S5314). If it is determined that the current state is chance mode (S5314: Yes), the effect to be executed is selected using the button operation effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 148) (S5315), and the process proceeds to S5309.

If it is determined in the process of S5314 that the current mode is not the chance mode (S5314: No), a button effect corresponding to the current operation method and the effect being executed is set (S5316), and the process proceeds to S5309. In the process of S5309, other button processing (such as changing the background) is executed.

Although omitted in the frame button input monitoring/performance process (S4107) described above with reference to FIG. 186, in this control example, the SW effective time and special effective time are configured so that the remaining period becomes 0 at the time when operation of the frame button 22 is accepted. In other words, the number of times that the operation performance is executed during the period in which each effective time is set is configured to be one. This makes it possible to prevent the operation performance from being executed excessively.

The processing of the SW effective time and the remaining special effective time is not limited to this, and for example, if a valid time of 10 seconds is set, and operation of the frame button 22 is accepted within a predetermined period (for example, within 1 second) after the valid time is set, a new valid time may be set during the special pattern change period (S5310: No, S5313: Yes in FIG. 186). By configuring in this way, the number of operation effects executed during one special pattern change period can be varied depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22.

<Regarding control process of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Fig. 187 to Fig. 201. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 187, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute the initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following flow. When the power supply unit 115 supplies power to the display control unit 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231, using its hardware configuration, sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. The MPU 231 then fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

If all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 will consume a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This increases the time it takes to start up the MPU 231, resulting in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, are stored in NOR ROM 234d. Since NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, when address "0000H" is specified from MPU 231 via bus line 240 after system reset is released, character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in first program storage area 234d1 of NOR ROM 234d in buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to MPU 231. Therefore, since MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H" in a short time after specifying address "0000H", main processing can be started in MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Now, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed during the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

However, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will deteriorate even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, a process is executed in which the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S6101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program memory area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND type flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in accordance with the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a (S6103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) to be executed after the end of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 187) (S6105), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, and the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and makes it easy to execute diversified and complex performances using the auxiliary performance unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 188, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 are configured to include all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 may be part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of control programs including all remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the process of transferring a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated multiple times, including the processes of S6101 and S6102, and then execute the processes of S6103 to S6105.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In addition, in this control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all of the boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without executing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and therefore reduces the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. This allows the MPU 231 to start controlling the auxiliary performance unit, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 187. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and for the I/O devices, etc. Also, processes such as clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 are performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction is complete, image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231 indicating the end of transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction, it may write transfer end information indicating the end of transfer to a register or a partial area of built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. MPU 231 may then read information from this register or partial area of built-in memory at any time and detect the writing of transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is then retained so that it is not overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a resident image transfer setting process is executed in which the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process described below (see FIG. 199(a)) (see S7502 in FIG. 199(a)).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 189(b)) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the display control device 114 is displaying the power-on main image on the third pattern display device 81, it can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, and so can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the use of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234 prevents the efficiency of operation checks from deteriorating.

In addition, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 transfers the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power is turned on. Therefore, if the player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a ball enters the special ball entrance 64 (initial winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given by the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, i.e., if a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image can be displayed immediately during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the transfer takes time, so the power-on main image continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, so that the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by the processing of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to FIG. 189(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 189(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 189(b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 189(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is identified, a drawing list of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, we will first explain the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing, and then explain the details of each process with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 189(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S6301: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so in order to display a normal performance image on the third pattern display device 81 instead of the power-on image, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable performance, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that state is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 190 to 195.

In the display setting process (S6303), the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically identified based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. In addition, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 196 to 198.

After the display setting process (S6303) is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which was specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simplified display setting process (S6309), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and even when a continuous preview command or a back image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the forwarding setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 199 and 200.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, a drawing list as shown in FIG. 155 is generated from the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305), and this drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process in accordance with the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 201.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S6307 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) for determining the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B, front and rear miss reach, reach other than front and rear miss, complete miss) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed to cause the power-on image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the processing proceeds to S6304.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figures 190 to 195. First, Figure 190 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

As shown in FIG. 190, in this command determination process, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S6402) to notify the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed in the ON state, and then the type of each command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 191(a). FIG. 191(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation presentation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, the main control unit 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, so two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are never received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display fluctuation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a change presentation having a shorter change time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110, the next display change pattern command will be received from the main control device 110 while a change presentation according to the set change display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a different change display will suddenly begin, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d as in this control example, even if the main control unit 110 has actually instructed a change presentation with a longer change time than the set display data table, as described below, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed after the change presentation according to the display data table buffer 233d has ended and until the next display pattern command is received from the main control unit 110, so that the player can continue to watch the change of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When this variable pattern command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, and specifies the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the processing of S6502 extracts the transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process, the timing counter 233h, in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, is used to time the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table has ended, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control unit 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 190. If it is determined in the processing of S6404 that there is no variation pattern command for display (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a stop type command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6406), and if there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 191(b). FIG. 191(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (one of big win A-G, small win A-C, reach miss, or complete miss) is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) is executed, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set on (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is described as type information for identifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is identified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by S6603, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to this identified third pattern is stored is identified. The image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that the main control device 110 always judges the start of fluctuations at least a few seconds apart, so it will never receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display stop type commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be a complete miss, and the stop type table is determined. As a result, the stop pattern corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" were set, the third pattern display device 81 would display a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" even if the actual result was a "miss for the special pattern," which could lead the player to mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine 10 had a "special pattern jackpot," thereby reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, by setting a stopping pattern corresponding to a complete miss as in this control example, if the actual result was a "special pattern jackpot," the pachinko machine 10 would be a "special pattern jackpot" even if the third pattern display device 81 displayed a stopping pattern that was a complete miss, which would delight the player.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for display (S6408: Yes), the opening command processing is executed (S6409) and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 192(a). FIG. 192(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command processing executes processing corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Then, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the timing counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a round number command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and if there is a round number command for display (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 192(b). FIG. 192(b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing executes processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6802).

Then, based on the number of rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6805), the number of rounds command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 190 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no round number command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and if there is an ending command for display (S6412: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S6413), and processing returns to S6401.

Now, with reference to FIG. 193, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing executes processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending performance indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6905), ending command processing is terminated, and processing returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a fluctuation stop command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and if there is a fluctuation stop command for display (S6414: Yes), fluctuation stop command processing is executed (S6415), and the processing returns to S6401.

Now, referring to FIG. 194(a), the details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 194(a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This display fluctuation stop command indicates a display stop command (normal stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 182), i.e., at the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern of each special pattern in the main control device 110 (the timing when the main control device 110 sets the stop command).

In the fluctuation stop command processing, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6934). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a display notification command (S6416: Yes), notification command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the notification command processing (S6417) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 194(b). FIG. 194(b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing executes processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command is a process that is executed when the display control device 114 receives a display notification command output to the display control device 114 from among the various notification commands that are set when the voice lamp control device 113 receives commands to indicate various abnormal conditions set by the main control device 110.

In notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6954). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6955), the notification command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

In this control example, the display control device 114 is configured to determine only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third pattern display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, it may also be configured to receive related commands other than display commands, such as light emission commands, voice output commands, and role-driving commands, and output the related commands to the corresponding control device with the addition of information indicating the data content (display mode) set by the processing of the display control device 114.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a rear image change command (S6418: Yes), rear image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 195(a). FIG. 195(a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing executes processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w, which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the rear image change resulting from receiving a rear image change command in the on state, is set to on (S7001). Then, of the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each rear image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to on, and the bits corresponding to the other rear image types are set to off (S7002), after which the rear image change command process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is on, the changed rear image type is identified from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified in the display data table that either back surface A or B is to be displayed based on the back surface type of the back surface image specified in the display data table, the type of back surface image to be displayed at that time is identified from the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002, and further, the range of the back surface image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which image data corresponding to that range of the back surface image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This change in the rear image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 190. If it is determined in the processing of S6418 that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and if there is an error command (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the processing returns to S6401.

Now, with reference to FIG. 195(b), the error command processing (S6421) will be described in detail. FIG. 195(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag is set to ON, which indicates that an error has occurred when in the ON state (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S7102), the error command processing is terminated, and the process returns to command judgment processing.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102, and a process is executed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing players and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 190. If it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is again determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S6308), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)), is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, i.e., the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 191(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 191(b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, while other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to those commands.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 191(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S6502, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figs. 196 to 198. Fig. 196 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

As shown in FIG. 196, in this display setting process, first it is determined whether the new command flag is on or not (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, i.e., it is off (S7201: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped and the process moves to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by the processes of S7203 to S7204.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Now, with reference to FIG. 197, the warning image setting process will be described in detail. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for expanding image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying warning images of errors corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to on on the third pattern display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is identified based on this expanded warning image data, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after processing S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302) and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 196. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Also, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is written at address "0000H" and the actual data of each table is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order starting from address "0001H".

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timing counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7405), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third pattern display device 81 can be made to repeatedly display demo performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to FIG. 196, the explanation will continue. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7206 together with the warning image expanded earlier, the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, the value of the timing counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233h after decrement is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the timing counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), this means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the confirmation display, so first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7210), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the confirmation display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag, which indicates that the confirmation display is being performed in the on state, is set on (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S7215), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In this way, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the final display performance of the stopped patterns in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting a separate program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the processing of S7215 is used to identify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is recorded until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change based on the data table. In the task processing (S6304), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is identified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by S7215 until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less as the confirmation display performance ends, and therefore, after a certain time has elapsed since the end of the confirmation display performance, processing is performed to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display a demo performance.

First, the demo display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and the demo display flag, which indicates that a demo performance is being performed when it is on, is set to on (S7221), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variable pattern command indicating the start of the next variable performance is not received after the final display performance has ended, the drawing content can be set so that a demo performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the processing of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), this means that a demo performance is performed after the final display performance has ended, and that the demo performance has ended, so the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, various settings are made so that the demo performance will start again, as described above, by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189 (b)). However, in the simple display setting processing, after the performance time of the power-on variable image has ended, a process is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that one of the images of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is to be displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined time.

Next, with reference to Figs. 199 and 200, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, Fig. 199(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. This sets a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 199(b).

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7501 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., it is off (S7501: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 200.

Next, referring to FIG. 199(b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 199(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601). If a transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In this process of S7602, after an instruction to transfer image data has been sent to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Also, if the result of processing in S7601 indicates that a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the processing of S7603, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information on the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

If all resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605) and this processing is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)), instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 189(b)), the command determination processing (see FIG. 190 to FIG. 195) and the display setting processing (see FIG. 196 to FIG. 198) are executed, so that the drawing of the normal image is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 200) (see S7501: No in FIG. 199(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and power-on variable image that have already been transferred during the main processing. The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process remains resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as the back image, the third pattern, the character pattern, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time to displaying some image on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 200, we will explain the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S7703), and further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the processing of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but is Null data (S7702: No), the processing of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S7705. In the processing of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S7705), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the processing of S7706, after setting an instruction to transfer image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the processing of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), image transfer processing is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the processing proceeds to S7707. Also, if the result of the processing of S7705 shows that an instruction to transfer image data has not been set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7705: No), the processing proceeds to S7707.

In the processing of S7707, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or not (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data that should be transferred is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S7708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether the background image change flag 233w is on or not (S7709). Then, if the background image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), image data that should be transferred is not present, so the normal image transfer setting processing ends.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed, so the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), and then, of the rear image discrimination flags 233x provided for each rear image type, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x that is on is identified, and this image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x that is on is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). This determination in the process of S7713 is made by referencing the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of the processing of S7713 is that the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being transferred unnecessarily from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing burden on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7713 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is complete, it transmits a transfer end signal to the MPU 231.

After processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on," and by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236. Also, if the rear image is changed based on receipt of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, image data used for that rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this control example, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 for the image data to be transferred in accordance with the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

In this case, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

Next, referring to FIG. 201, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, a drawing list (FIG. 155) is generated (S7801) from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of that sprite is stored are identified for each sprite, and the parameters required for that sprite determined in the task process are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites that should be placed furthest behind the sprites that should be placed in the foreground in one frame of image, and a drawing list is generated by describing, in the rearranged sprite order, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprites are stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprites as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. Also, if a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are sent to the image controller (S7802). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands them by overwriting them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and the image data stored from the source start address to the source end address are read out of character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is transferred sequentially to the area of normal video RAM 236 indicated by the destination start address. The image data stored in this normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously displayed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image displayed in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being displayed, an image displayed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the processing of S7802, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to the V interrupt processing. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image are completed. As a result, when the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of image at a certain timing, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, each time every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

As explained above, in this first control example, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured not to be executed in overlap (parallel), and the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol. And, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be executed in which the lottery for the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Furthermore, the ease of executing the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to vary depending on the set game state. Specifically, in order to make it easier to obtain the lottery right for the second special symbol when a high probability state of the normal symbol is set (time-saving state, probability-changing state) than when a low probability state of the normal symbol is set (normal state), the lottery right for the second special symbol is configured to be obtained when a ball enters the ball entrance (second ball entrance 640) accompanied by an electric device 640a that is opened in a winning game (normal winning game) executed when a normal symbol is hit. In other words, when playing in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the lottery for the first special symbol is configured to be executed more easily than the lottery for the second special symbol, and the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set upon winning a jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol, and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery for the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the lottery for the first special symbol, is executed. By configuring it in this way, the degree of advantage given to the player can be made to differ greatly depending on the game state that is set, so that the player can be motivated to play in the hope that a game state that is highly advantageous to the player will be set.

In addition, if a normal symbol lottery, which is executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, is won, a normal symbol winning game in which the electric device 640 is opened for 5 seconds can be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a period during which it is easier to temporarily execute the second special symbol lottery even in the normal state, which is a game state that is unfavorable to the player, so that a player playing in the normal state can execute a game aiming to win the special symbol lottery jackpot and a game aiming to win the normal symbol lottery, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early on.

Furthermore, in this control example, the presentation mode of the special symbol 2 variable performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights for the stored second special symbol, that is, the number of special symbol 2 reserved. Specifically, as the presentation mode of the special symbol 2 variable performance executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a pseudo-miss variable performance indicating that the lottery result is a miss is executed in the first half of the variable performance, and in the second half of the variable performance, a pseudo-win variable performance indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot is executed by restarting the third symbol stopped (provisionally stopped) in the pseudo-miss variable performance, and the number of times that the third symbol temporarily stops (provisionally stopped) in the pseudo-win variable performance is configured to be variable in response to the number of special symbol 2 reserved. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a variable performance in which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped multiple times until the third symbol is stopped (confirmed) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In other words, it is possible to make the player believe that they have won the jackpot after multiple second special symbol drawings.

As a result, even if a jackpot is won with the special symbol 2 reserve used in the first second special symbol lottery among multiple special symbol 2 reserves acquired during normal symbol play, the player can be made to believe that the jackpot was won because multiple special symbol 2 reserves were acquired during normal symbol play, which makes it possible for the player to play with more enthusiasm to acquire the special symbol 2 reserve during normal symbol play.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols 2 is 0 when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the above-mentioned pseudo winning variation performance is configured to execute a variation performance that imitates the variation performance displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the first special symbol lottery is executed (the performance mode of the special symbol 1 variation performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the first special symbol lottery). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special symbol 2 variation performance from being repeated in a pseudo manner when the reserved special symbol 2 has not been acquired, making it difficult for the player to recognize that a pseudo variation performance is being executed. In addition, after the pseudo variation performance that imitates the special symbol 1 variation performance is executed, the third symbol is stopped (confirmed) in a combination that indicates that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery, so it is possible to execute a variation performance that is unexpected for the player.

In this control example, when a special jackpot game is played, a presentation mode indicating that a special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the presentation mode of the notification effect, and just before the notification effect is played (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), a determination is made as to whether or not to switch the presentation mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to a specific gate, and if the ball is flowing down the specific gate, the notification effect of the presentation mode set in advance is played, and only when the ball is not flowing down the specific gate, the presentation mode of the notification effect is switched.

Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different for a special jackpot and a normal jackpot, and a special jackpot that is more advantageous to the player is set to have a longer ending period than a normal jackpot. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that a special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot play ends before the special jackpot state is actually set. On the other hand, if a special jackpot state is not set after the jackpot play ends, informing the player of this for a long period of time would only cause discomfort to the player, so the ending period is made shorter.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is different between a special jackpot and a normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game, simply executing a process to switch the presentation mode of the jackpot ending period to the presentation mode executed during the ending period of a normal jackpot game causes a problem that an unnatural notification presentation is executed during the ending period because the length of the ending period is different. Also, if a special presentation mode that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game is prepared in advance, it is necessary to store image data (presentation data) for that presentation mode in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in advance, which increases the storage capacity.

In contrast, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to the same length regardless of the type of jackpot, and if the ball cannot be made to flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game, only the presentation mode corresponding to the second half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the presentation mode set for the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game. This makes it possible to execute a notification presentation that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable, without providing a dedicated presentation mode that is used only when the ball cannot be made to flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to the same length regardless of the type of jackpot, so that the presentation mode of the notification presentation that is executed when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a guaranteed jackpot game is switched and set. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is possible to configure it so that a notification presentation that is executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period can be executed by executing a notification presentation from the final round period of the jackpot game, or it is possible to configure it so that a round presentation that is executed during the final round period of the jackpot game is continuously executed for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set, and then a notification presentation is executed to execute a notification presentation for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

This V winning device 2650 is configured in the same manner as the V winning device 2650 of the eighth control example described above (see Figures 194 to 196), and therefore the same reference numerals are used and detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration of the right area of the variable display unit 80 and the rate at which balls that flow down the right area enter the through gate 67, the general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650 are the same as those of the left area described above, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted. As described above, in this control example, regardless of the set game state, and therefore regardless of whether a jackpot game is being played or not, the same privilege is awarded whether the player plays a right-handed game or a left-handed game. Therefore, the player can play in any game method that suits his mood.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 230, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is sufficient to configure the amount of bonuses that a player can obtain between left-handed play and right-handed play so that there is no large discrepancy between left-handed play and right-handed play. For example, the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the left side area can be made smaller than the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the right side area, and the proportion of balls entering the first ball entrance port 64 can be made higher in left-handed play than in right-handed play, making it more difficult to obtain prize balls in left-handed play than in right-handed play, but making it easier to execute the first special pattern lottery, and making it easier to obtain prize balls in right-handed play than in left-handed play, but making it more difficult to execute the first special pattern lottery. When configured in this way, during the normal state, i.e., while playing a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the player can play in any manner of his choice, and in a game in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (play in a time-saving state or a special probability state), right-handed play can be more advantageous to the player than left-handed play.

In each of the above control examples, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control unit 110 (i.e., when it increases or decreases, respectively), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control unit 110. In addition, the voice lamp control unit 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110. This reduces the number of times the main control unit 110 transmits reserved number commands to the voice lamp control unit 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control unit 113 receives reserved number commands, respectively, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113.

In each of the above control examples, the first ball entrance 64 is set to a maximum of four entries, and the through gate 67 is set to a maximum of one passage, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this and may be set to three or less, or five or more (e.g., eight). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37 to notify the number of reserved balls.

As shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be performed by moving and displaying the pattern vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern. In addition, the display mode of the dynamic display of the third pattern to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative pattern to indicate the lottery result of the normal pattern may be configured to be set using common image data held by the display control device 114, for example, so that the player cannot easily distinguish between them.

In each of the above control examples, the third pattern display for showing the player the lottery results for each pattern is performed by one display means (third pattern display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main pattern that is highlighted to the player among the third patterns, and for displaying the secondary patterns. In addition, the display means may be configured as a configuration other than a liquid crystal display.

In each of the above control examples, a left-hand hit game that targets the left area of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a game state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. However, the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state. For example, a left-hand hit game that targets the left area of the game board 13 may be executed in the normal state, and a right-hand hit game that targets the right area of the game board 13 may be executed in the time-saving state. Also, a left-hand hit game may be executed during the time-saving state, and a right-hand hit game may be executed during the normal state.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a left-hand hit game that targets the left area of the game board 13 is executed regardless of which game state is set or whether a jackpot game is set, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to execute a right-hand hit game when a time-saving state is set or during a jackpot game, and execute a left-hand hit game only during a normal state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to easily understand whether or not the state is favorable to the player depending on the game method to be executed (right-hand hit game, left-hand hit game).

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, a frame button 22 is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player, and when the player presses it, it is determined that the operating means has been operated; however, other configurations may also be used, such as an operating means configured in the shape of a lever that can determine when the player tilts it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor type operating means that can determine when the player has operated it by contacting or approaching it, or a wireless type operating means that can determine when it has been operated by emitting a specified radio wave. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used as a performance operation means for varying the performance mode of the performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation, but it is sufficient if the performance mode of various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 can be varied based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 may be electrically connected to the display control device 114, or a control device may be provided that can input an output signal from the operation means (frame button 22) and generate a performance setting signal that can be output to the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. By configuring in this way, even if multiple performance operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the multiple performance operation means can be centrally managed, so that the performance mode can be smoothly set in response to the player's operation of the performance operation means.

Furthermore, in the first control example described above, when a favorable game state (high probability state, time-saving state) is set after the end of a jackpot game, a high-speed fluctuation period during which a short fluctuation time is selected can be set for a predetermined period (until 20 special symbol fluctuations have been performed), and during that high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode transition effect is not (is unlikely to be) executed when the frame button 22 is operated. This makes it possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect during a period during which a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected, making it difficult for the player to grasp the stopped display mode of the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery.

In addition, in the first control example, when the first operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, i.e., when the normal state is set, an operation that executes a background mode transition effect ("normal press") is performed, an operation effect with a different presentation mode from the background mode transition effect is executed. This makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22 even during the high-speed fluctuation period, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this first control example, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, a background mode transition effect can be executed by executing a second operation ("long press") other than the first operation ("normal press") described above. With this configuration, a background mode transition effect can be provided to a player who attempts to execute a background mode transition effect while knowing that the stopped display mode of the third pattern will become difficult to grasp. In this first control example, the period required to determine that the second operation has been executed is longer than the period required to determine that the first operation has been executed. This reduces the frequency with which the background mode transition effect is executed, thereby preventing the stopped display mode of the third pattern from becoming excessively difficult to grasp.

In addition, as in this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is not met, the first operation process is executed by performing a first operation on the operating means, but when a predetermined condition is met, the first operation process is not executed (is difficult to execute) even if the first operation is performed on the operating means. This technical idea may be used in other technologies. For example, a volume adjustment process that adjusts the volume of the sound output from the pachinko machine 10, or a brightness adjustment process that adjusts the brightness of a liquid crystal display when a liquid crystal display is used as the third pattern display device 81, may be applied as the above-mentioned first operation process, and the first operation process may be made executable when a predetermined condition is not met (for example, when a special pattern variation is not being executed), and made difficult to execute when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a special pattern variation is being executed).

In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined conditions may be configured to be not only the presence or absence of special pattern changes, but also conditions that are met when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, or conditions that are met during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, if a predetermined condition is met and the above-mentioned first operation is executed, it is preferable to configure the machine to execute a second operation process different from the first operation process (for example, a process to notify the player that the first operation process will not be executed). This allows the player to easily understand that the first operation process will not be executed. However, without being limited to this, the machine may also be configured to execute a different operation presentation that is not related to the first operation process.

In addition, even if the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied, it is preferable to configure the above-mentioned first operation processing to be executed by executing a second operation different from the first operation, as in this control example. Also, in this first control example, the first operation and the second operation are configured to be executable by differentiating the operation method for one operation means (frame button 22), but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the pachinko machine 10 to have multiple operation means, to make the first operation executable by operating the first operation means (for example, the frame button 22), and to make the second operation executable by operating the second operation means (for example, a frame button provided other than the frame button 22). Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure the second operation to be more difficult to execute than the first operation, for example, to arrange the first operation means on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 where the player can always operate it, and arrange the second operation means on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 121) where the player has difficulty operating it.

Furthermore, when the first and second operating means described above are provided, the first valid operation determination period for determining whether an operation on the first operating means is valid and the second valid operation determination period for determining whether an operation on the second operating means is valid may be set to the same period, or different periods may be set. When the valid operation determination periods are set to the same period, the process of determining the valid periods can be simplified. When different periods are set, the period for determining whether an operation is valid differs depending on the type of operating means used, so that the player can be motivated to play by operating various operating means at various times.

The first control example described above is configured to be able to set a normal state and multiple advantageous game states (high probability state, time-saving state) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and when one of the advantageous game states is set, the player is notified of the period (remaining period) until the next time the normal state is set, rather than the period until the set game state ends.

Here, conventionally, when a favorable game state (for example, a sure-win state or a time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, there are devices that notify the player of the period during which that favorable game state will continue (the number of times the special pattern will change). Specifically, there are devices that display "100 times" as the remaining period display mode indicating the period during which the favorable game state will continue, and subtract one from the value of the remaining period display mode each time a special pattern lottery is executed. This allows the player to easily grasp how many more times the special pattern lottery can be executed during the currently set favorable game state.

In addition, some recent gaming machines allow players to set multiple types of advantageous game states that are advantageous to them, and some allow players to set advantageous game states to normal advantageous game states (e.g., time-saving state) and the most advantageous game state (e.g., special state) that is even more advantageous than the first advantageous game state.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, when the game state transitions from the most advantageous game state to the normal advantageous game state, the player is notified of the remaining period display mode to indicate the period for which the most advantageous game state will continue, and then, when the normal advantageous game state is set, the player is notified using the remaining period display mode to indicate the period for which the normal advantageous game state will continue.

In other words, when the most advantageous game state is set, it is possible to allow the player to understand the period (remaining period) for which the most advantageous game state will continue, but the player cannot understand what type of game state will be set after the most advantageous game state ends, or how long the game state set after the most advantageous game state ends will continue.

As a result, when the most advantageous gaming state ends, the player cannot know whether a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the most advantageous gaming state will be set, or whether a gaming state that is less advantageous to the player than the most advantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) will be set, which creates a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to know what they should aim for while playing in the most advantageous gaming state.

In contrast, as described above, in this control example, when multiple types of advantageous game states are set in succession, the advantageous game state remaining period display mode is configured to be displayed for the period until the multiple types of advantageous game states end, that is, the period until the normal state is next set. By configuring it in this way, when different types of advantageous game states are set in succession, the advantageous state remaining period display mode is displayed to straddle the advantageous game states that are set in succession, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in this first control example, when the remaining period of one advantageous game state period spanning multiple consecutively set advantageous game states (high probability game state, time-saving game state) is notified, a presentation can be executed that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the currently set game state is a high probability game state or a time-saving game state. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult to understand the game state that is set during the advantageous game state period, the player can play while hoping that a more advantageous game state has been set.

In this first control example, when the remaining period of one advantageous game state spanning multiple consecutively set advantageous game states (high probability state, time-saving state) is notified, a suggestive effect that can suggest the currently set game state or a game state that was previously set can be executed. This makes it possible to interest the player in the content of the suggestive effect executed during the game state period.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the operation presentation can be executed in multiple presentation modes during the advantageous game state period, and the selection ratio of each presentation mode is varied according to the set game state. Therefore, the player can predict the current game state based on the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed during the advantageous game state period, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. Also, since the selection ratio of each presentation mode is simply varied according to the set game state, the prediction accuracy can be improved as the number of operation presentations executed during the advantageous game state period is increased. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means (frame button 22). In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 149, when the frame button 22 is operated during the "chance mode" and "reach suggestion" is selected as the presentation mode of the operation presentation, a "reach suggestion" presentation is executed to suggest to the player whether the special pattern change being executed will be in a reach state, and if so, the reach line or reach pattern. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to determine whether there is winning information that will be in a reach state among the winning information related to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and to notify the player that a second special pattern change that will be in a reach state will be executed based on the determination result before the second special pattern change is executed. In this way, the presentation effect can be further enhanced by expanding the presentation target of the operation presentation to not only the special pattern change being executed but also to the reserved special pattern change (special pattern change to be executed in the future).

In the first control example described above, the player operates the frame button 22 to switch to the background mode or to execute a presentation showing the result of the special symbol lottery. However, as a function that can be executed by the player operating the operating means, for example, a volume adjustment function that adjusts the volume output from the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 137) of the pachinko machine 10, or a brightness adjustment function that adjusts the brightness on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 formed by a liquid crystal display may be used. As with the background mode transition described above, the volume adjustment function and brightness adjustment function may also be configured to be less likely to be executed when a predetermined condition is met, specifically, when a period (high-speed change period) in which a short change time is likely to be selected as the change time for the special symbol change is set, than when other periods are set.

In the first control example described above, the background mode transition can be executed even while the high-speed fluctuation period is set, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured so that the background mode transition is not executed at all. Also, in the first control example described above, a first period in which a specific presentation mode (background mode transition) is likely to be executed as an operation presentation executed by operating the operating means, and a second period in which it is less likely to be executed than the first period are provided, but it may be configured so that three or more periods with different rates at which the operation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode can be set.

<Second control example>
Next, the second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 202 to Fig. 210. The second control example differs from the first control example described above in that the configuration for displaying various images on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and the control contents are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description is omitted.

In the first control example described above, each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 described above with reference to FIG. 122(b) was configured to be displayed on one image layer. In contrast, the second control example differs in that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz that make up each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are configured to be displayed on different image layers. And, by controlling the display of the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz displayed on different image layers in synchronization, it is possible to variably display each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in the same way as the first control example described above.

Here, conventionally, there have been machines that change the display of a third symbol as identification information to show the result of the special symbol lottery. Also, there have been machines that execute various effects (changing effects) while the third symbol is being changed, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while hoping for a jackpot win.

Some common gaming machines execute a pattern change display using multiple (e.g., three) pattern rows formed by multiple tertiary symbols (e.g., tertiary symbols numbered 1 to 9), and execute an effect that increases the likelihood of a big win (e.g., a reach effect) when a predetermined tertiary symbol is stopped and displayed in the remaining pattern rows except for the first pattern row. However, in conventional gaming machines, a change display is executed in which only the change speed of the change display is changed, without changing the order of the symbols that form the pattern row. Therefore, there was a problem in that it was not possible to enhance the effect of the change display using the change display of the pattern row.

It has also been proposed to increase the variety of the variable display by placing identification information (sub-patterns) other than identification information (main pattern) for showing the results of the special pattern lottery in one pattern row. However, even with this configuration, there is a problem in that the effect of the variable display cannot be improved by simply varying the variable display speed of the pattern row formed by the main pattern and sub-pattern.

Furthermore, some machines prepare multiple pattern rows with different arrangements and types of main and sub-patterns in advance, and when a specific variable performance is executed, the pattern row itself is changed to enhance the effect of the variable performance. However, since it is necessary to execute control to change and display different pattern rows according to the variable performance executed, there is a problem that the display control becomes complicated.

In contrast, in this control example, the pattern string display is configured to be executed using multiple image layers. Specifically, the main and sub-patterns that make up the pattern string are configured to be displayed on separate image layers. Then, during normal times, the main and sub-patterns are synchronized and displayed in a variable manner, so that the various patterns that make up the pattern string are displayed in a specific arrangement (see FIG. 122(b)), while the variable display contents of the main and sub-patterns are made different, so that the pattern string can be displayed in a manner other than the specific pattern arrangement.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily display the third symbols in a variable manner other than the specific pattern arrangement while using image data of the third symbols (main and sub-symbols) that form a specific symbol row, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Now, referring to FIG. 202, the display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 202(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer and the display screen formed in the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example, FIG. 202(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect executed when the display of the main symbol image layer sr is set to OFF and the display of the sub-symbol image layer fr is set to ON, and FIG. 202(c) is a diagram showing an example of the result of the display effect of FIG. 202(b).

As shown in FIG. 202(a), in this second control example, the main pattern image layer sr, on which the main pattern sz is displayed, and the sub-pattern image layer fr, on which the sub-pattern fz is displayed, are formed to overlap, and the main pattern image layer sr is configured to be positioned in front of the sub-pattern image layer fr (closer to the player's line of sight). Note that in FIG. 202(a), only the main pattern image layer sr and the sub-pattern fz are shown, but in reality, each image layer (layer) that displays various images displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is superimposed.

Specifically, as described in the drawing list described above with reference to FIG. 155, each image layer is formed corresponding to each sprite, such as the background image used in one frame image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern). In addition, in areas where display images overlap, the display image displayed on the image layer in the foreground is given priority for visibility.

In this second control example configured in this manner, when the main pattern sz displayed on the main pattern image layer sr and the sub-pattern fz displayed on the sub-pattern image layer fr are both displayed in a variable manner, the main pattern sz is displayed in priority to the sub-pattern fz, so that the identification information (main pattern sz) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is hidden by the identification information (sub-pattern fz) that does not indicate the result of the special pattern lottery, making it difficult for the player to see the result of the special pattern lottery. In addition, since there is no need to control the variable display so that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz do not overlap in order to make it easier for the player to see the result of the special pattern lottery, the variable display control can be simplified and the variable display of the main pattern sz can be executed by making maximum use of the limited display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 202(a), the main pattern layer sr is arranged in front of the sub-pattern layer fr, and the main pattern sz is displayed in priority over the sub-pattern fz. However, this is not limited to this, and the sub-pattern layer fr may be arranged in front of the main pattern layer sr, so that the sub-pattern fz is displayed in priority over the main pattern sz. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the display state of the main pattern sz while each pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is being displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery until the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is displayed in a stopped manner, so that the third pattern variable performance that keeps players excited until the end can be executed.

Next, referring to Figures 202(b) and 202(c), the variable presentation executed by the display control for each pattern image layer will be explained. As described above, in this control example, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz that make up the pattern row can be displayed independently. Furthermore, the display image set for each image layer can be set to be displayed or not. In other words, while internally executing the display control for each image layer, the display or non-display (on, off) can be set for the image layer itself.

Figure 202 (b) shows an example of a display screen when the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to OFF and the display of the sub-pattern layer fr is set to ON, and only the sub-pattern fz of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Then, the sub-pattern fz is displayed stationary in the sub-display area Ds, and the words "Reach line notice start" are displayed, indicating that a reach line notice performance has been performed to notify the player of the reach line that will be effective in this third pattern change, by stopping and displaying the sub-pattern fz before the main pattern sz is displayed. After that, the performance result according to the stopping position of the sub-pattern fz is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 202(c), the sub-symbol fz is displayed as a diamond shape, and the words "Double Reach Confirmed" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a presentation result indicating that the winning state will be reached on the winning lines L4 and L5 (see FIG. 122). Then, when this reach line notice presentation ends, the display of the main symbol layer sr is set to ON, and a variable presentation is performed to suggest to the player what type of main symbol sz will be that will be reached on the winning lines L4 and L5 (see FIG. 122), and then a double reach presentation (see FIG. 131) is performed.

In this way, in this second control example, it is possible to execute the variable display of the main pattern sz and the variable display of the sub-pattern fz differently, so that the sub-pattern fz is first variable displayed to inform the player of the location where the main pattern sz is stopped, and then the main pattern sz is variable displayed to inform the type of main pattern sz that will be in a reach state. Therefore, the performance results of the third pattern variable performance, which shows the result of the special pattern lottery, can be shown to the player in stages, providing an easy-to-understand performance.

In the reach line preview performance described with reference to Figs. 202(b) and (c), only the stop display position of the main pattern sz is notified to the player in advance by the stop display position of the sub-pattern fz. In addition to this, for example, the arrangement of the stopped and displayed sub-pattern fz may be configured to indicate the type of the stopped and displayed main pattern sz, that is, the result of the special pattern lottery. Specifically, for example, when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed in all areas other than the area that forms the pay line L2 (see Fig. 122(a)) as the result of the reach line preview performance, it is preferable to configure it so that a specific combination of main patterns sz (for example, the combination "3.4.1" from the top) is stopped and displayed on the pay line L2 (see Fig. 122(a)).

When a specific combination of main symbols sz is displayed in a stopped state, the display of the third symbols may be restarted to execute a change effect that increases the likelihood of winning a jackpot (a so-called pseudo consecutive change effect), or a winning game (a jackpot game or a small jackpot game) may be executed. By configuring it in this way, when a reach line advance notice effect is executed, the player can be made more interested in the result of the effect.

Furthermore, in the case where a reach line preview performance in which only the sub-pattern fz is displayed first is executed, in order to make it easy for the player to understand whether the current reach line preview performance is a performance that notifies the player in advance of only the stop display position of the main pattern sz or also the type of the main pattern sz that will be stopped and displayed, for example, after the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 202(c)), the performance result of the current reach line preview performance can be notified by the type of display form (for example, a graphic display that connects each of the sub-patterns fz with a line) formed using each of the stopped and displayed sub-patterns fz. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 202(c) (a state in which the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed in a diamond shape), if a diamond shape is displayed, the performance result of the current reach line preview performance indicates in advance the stop position of the main pattern sz, and if a heart shape that connects the four sub-patterns fz is displayed, the player can be notified that the performance indicates in advance that a specific main pattern sz will be stopped and displayed.

In this way, by executing an effect (advance notification of the effect result) using the sub-pattern fz that is stopped and displayed between the time when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and the time when the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed, the result of the variable effect (variable effect using the third pattern) for showing the result of the special pattern lottery can be shown to the player in a more gradual manner, so that the player can continue to be interested in the variable effect being executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 203, the contents of the various designs pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 will be described. In this control example, similar to the first control example described above, a back image for an ocean background and a back image for a mountain background can be set as the back image. Specifically, when a background mode transition is executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, the currently set back image (e.g., an ocean background) is switched to a back image that is not currently set (e.g., a mountain background).

Furthermore, this second control example is configured to change the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz) depending on the type of rear image that is set (displayed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to variably display the main pattern sz in a display mode that depends on the type of rear image, thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the rear image is switched.

Here, the contents of the image data of the main pattern sz displayed corresponding to the back image will be explained with reference to Fig. 203(a) and Fig. 203(b). Fig. 203(a) is a schematic diagram showing the image data of the main pattern for the sea used when the sea image (sea background) is set, and Fig. 203(b) is a schematic diagram showing the image data of the main image for the mountain used when the mountain image (mountain background) is set. Each of these image data is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 or when the background mode transition is executed, the corresponding image data is read out from the character memory area 234a2 and stored in the third pattern area 235d or the third pattern row area 235g of the resident video RAM 235. The process of reading out image data corresponding to each symbol and storing it in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 is the same as in the first control example described above, so a detailed description of this will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 203(a), image data corresponding to the marine main pattern sz stores image data (D1-D9) showing main patterns with numbers "1-9" added to nine types of patterns (octopus, porcupine fish, turtle, shark, shrimp, anglerfish, dugong, angelfish, crab). This main pattern image data D1-D9 is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 in correspondence with the order in which it is actually displayed. Therefore, when reading out image data corresponding to the main pattern, it is sufficient to read out the image data in order starting from D1 and store it in the third pattern area 235d.

In addition, in this second control example, the pattern row Z1 and the pattern row Z3 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the pattern row that is displayed in a stopped state when the reel state is reached, are formed of nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9), while the pattern row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the pattern row that is displayed in a variable manner during the reel state, is configured to be formed of ten main patterns. Specifically, the pattern row Z2 is configured to be formed of ten main patterns, which are the nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9) that form the above-mentioned pattern row Z1, plus a modified main pattern (main pattern corresponding to image data DA) with the number 4 added to the shark pattern. The pattern row Z2 is configured to be displayed in a variable manner so that the main pattern sz with the number 9 added passes, followed by the main pattern sz with the number 4 added, and then the main pattern sz with the number 1 added passes. This allows a specific type of main pattern sz (in this control example, a main pattern with the number 4) to pass multiple times before the variable display of the pattern row completes one revolution, so that if a ready-to-win state is established for that specific type of main pattern sz, it is possible to visually suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot (the probability that the main pattern sz that is the combination for a jackpot will be stopped and displayed on the winning line in the ready-to-win state). This allows the player to pay attention to which type of main pattern sz will establish the ready-to-win state, enhancing the presentation effect.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 203(b), image data corresponding to the mountain main pattern sz stores image data (D1-D9) showing main patterns with numbers "1-9" added to nine types of pattern patterns (elephant, lion, dugong, rhinoceros, peacock, bear, wild boar, mouse, snake). This main pattern image data D1-D9 is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 in correspondence with the order in which it is actually displayed. Therefore, when reading out image data corresponding to the main pattern, it is sufficient to read out the image data in order starting from image data D1 and store it in the third pattern area 235d.

As in the case where the sea background is displayed, the pattern row Z1 and the pattern row Z3 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the pattern row that is stopped and displayed when the game is in a reach state, are formed of nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9), whereas the pattern row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the pattern row that is displayed variably during the reach state, is configured to be formed of ten main patterns. Specifically, the pattern row Z2 is configured to be formed of ten main patterns, which are the nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9) that form the above-mentioned pattern row Z1, plus a modified main pattern (main pattern corresponding to image data DA) with the number 4 added to the rhinoceros pattern. The pattern row Z2 is configured to be displayed variably so that the main pattern sz with the number 9 passes, followed by the main pattern sz with the number 4, and then the main pattern sz with the number 1 passes. This allows a specific type of main pattern sz (in this control example, a main pattern with the number 4) to pass multiple times before the variable display of the pattern row completes one revolution, so that if a ready-to-win state is established for that specific type of main pattern sz, it is possible to visually suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot (the probability that the main pattern sz that is the combination for a jackpot will be stopped and displayed on the winning line in the ready-to-win state). This allows the player to pay attention to which type of main pattern sz will establish the ready-to-win state, enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, in this second control example, the image data corresponding to the main pattern sz described above is read from the character memory area 234a2 and stored in the third pattern row area 235g as pattern row data for displaying the pattern row. In other words, the main pattern row image data (image data in which each main pattern sz is displayed at intervals skipping the display position of the sub-pattern fz) corresponding to the main pattern among the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is generated for each pattern row and stored in the third pattern row area 235g. Then, the main pattern sz is variably displayed on the main pattern image layer sr using this main pattern row image data. By configuring in this way, the amount of image data used for display control can be reduced compared to variably displaying image data for each pattern unit, thereby reducing the processing load of the display control.

As described above, in this second control example, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz of each pattern forming the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are configured to be able to be displayed in a variable manner independently. Therefore, even if the multiple main patterns sz of each pattern row are formed from a single image data (main pattern row image data) and displayed in a variable manner, various variable displays can be executed by varying the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz. Therefore, even if the number of image data used for display control is reduced, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being reduced.

Furthermore, for the main pattern sz, which is identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern among the third patterns forming each pattern row, variable display is performed on a pattern row basis using the main pattern row image data, and for the sub-pattern fz, which is identification information that does not indicate the lottery result of the special pattern, variable display is performed on a pattern row basis. Therefore, various variable performances can be performed by varying the content of the variable display of the sub-pattern fz without changing the content of the variable display of the main pattern sz, which indicates the lottery result of the special pattern. In other words, in diversifying the variable display performance of the third pattern, the main pattern sz, whose display mode of the stop display is predetermined, can perform various variable performances by varying the content of the variable display of the sub-pattern fz while executing a predetermined variable display. Therefore, the variable display performance of the third pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern can be easily and reliably made to have a wide variety of contents.

In this second control example, all the main patterns sz that form the pattern row are configured to have one image data (main pattern row image data), but this is not limited to this. Of all the main patterns sz (main patterns sz numbered 1 to 9), normal main pattern row image data that generates only the pattern rows of some of the main patterns sz (for example, normal main patterns sz numbered with even numbers) and special probability main pattern row image data that generates only the pattern rows of the remaining main patterns sz (for example, special probability main patterns sz numbered with odd numbers) may be stored in the third pattern row area 235g, and the stored image data may be used to variably display the main patterns sz on the main pattern image layer sr.

In this case, for example, when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, that is, when a combination indicating a jackpot is displayed using odd-numbered main patterns sz, it is possible to vary the content of the variable display using normal main pattern row image data while only the variable display using the variable main pattern row image data is executed as a predetermined variable display. Specifically, the variable display using normal main pattern row image data may be executed faster than the variable display using the variable main pattern row image data, so that the player can only see the odd-numbered main pattern sz. This makes it possible to notify the player that the third pattern change this time is a state in which only the variable main pattern sz is displayed, and only the variable main pattern sz is displayed, that is, the normal pattern (main pattern with an even number) is not displayed, and the player cannot win a normal jackpot.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the image data forming the main pattern sz is generated separately into normal main pattern row image data and special probability main pattern row image data, the normal main pattern image layer (layer) that displays the normal main pattern using the normal main pattern row image data and the special probability main pattern image layer (layer) that displays the special probability main pattern using the special probability main pattern row image data may be configured to be different, and depending on the result of the special pattern lottery, it may be configured to determine whether or not to display the main pattern sz displayed on the normal main pattern image layer or the special probability main pattern layer (whether or not to enable (turn on) the display of each image layer). Furthermore, as in the first control example described above, it may be configured to execute variable display control using image data for each pattern unit without generating pattern row image data that forms the pattern row.

Next, the contents of the image data of the sub-symbol fz will be described with reference to FIG. 203(c). FIG. 203(c) is a schematic diagram showing the image data of the sub-symbol fz pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2. This image data is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 or when the background mode transition is executed, the corresponding image data is read from the character memory area 234a2 and stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235. Note that the contents of the process of reading image data corresponding to each symbol and the process of storing it in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 are the same as those in the first control example described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 203(c), the character memory area 234a2 of this second control example stores at least image data SD1 of a normal sub-pattern fz (see FIG. 122(b)) imitating a triangular mark, image data SD2 of a sub-pattern fz for a preview performance imitating bubbles, and image data SD3 of a special sub-pattern fz imitating the number 16 as image data of the sub-pattern fz. Note that although omitted in FIG. 202(c), the sub-pattern fz for the preview performance is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode, and the sub-pattern fz for the preview performance imitating bubbles shown in FIG. 202(c) is the sub-pattern fz used when the sea background is set. Therefore, the character memory area 234a2 also stores image data (not shown) of a sub-pattern fz for a preview performance imitating leaves (not shown) as a sub-pattern fz used when the mountain background is set.

Here, in this second control example, among the third patterns variably displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, only the sub-pattern fz that does not indicate the result of the special pattern lottery is configured to be displayed on the sub-pattern image layer fr, and the sub-pattern fz can be displayed variably on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 independently of the main pattern sz variably displayed in a predetermined variability pattern (variability time, stop display position) on the main pattern image layer sr. Therefore, various variability effects using the sub-pattern fz can be easily executed without changing the variability display content of the main pattern sz. In addition, when various variability effects using the sub-pattern fz are executed, even if a part of it is displayed overlapping with the main pattern sz, the main pattern image layer sr is arranged to be displayed preferentially over the sub-pattern image layer fr, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult for the player to see the main pattern sz.

In this second control example, in addition to the reach line preview effect described with reference to Fig. 202(b) and Fig. 202(c), various other preview effects can be executed as a variation effect using the sub-pattern fz. For example, a preview effect at the start of variation in which the sub-pattern fz is switched to a display mode for a preview effect using image data SD2 and the main pattern sz is displayed to change in the opposite direction (rightward) to the direction of change (for example, leftward) of the main pattern sz when the third pattern starts to change, or a jackpot type suggestion effect in which a part of the sub-pattern fz is switched to a special display mode using image data SD3 and a jackpot type suggestion effect that suggests a jackpot type according to the number and arrangement of the sub-pattern fz (sub-pattern fz that resembles the number 16) of the special display mode that is stopped and displayed when the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) stops changing can be executed.

In this way, by making it possible to execute various variable effects using identification information (sub-pattern fz) that is different from identification information (main pattern sz) that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery and that can be variably displayed during the period in which identification information (main pattern sz) that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery is being variably displayed, it is possible to have the player pay attention to the variably displayed sub-pattern fz as well.

In addition, in this second control example, unlike the variable display control of the main pattern sz, the variable display control of the sub-pattern fz is configured to be executed on a pattern basis, so that it is possible to easily execute control to switch the display mode of only some of the multiple sub-patterns fz formed in each pattern row Z1 to Z3 (for example, only the vicinity of the main pattern sz that is finally stopped and displayed) to a display mode for variable performance. Also, normally, it is possible to display two or more sub-patterns fz displayed between the main patterns sz, or to prevent only some of the sub-patterns fz from being displayed.

The timing for changing the display mode of the sub-symbol fz may be the timing when the special symbol variation starts, or the timing when the special symbol indicating a big win is displayed in a stopped state.

Finally, referring to FIG. 203(d), the contents of each image data used for the variable main pattern in this second control example will be explained. FIG. 203(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of image data corresponding to various images used for the variable main pattern. This variable main pattern refers to the 10th main pattern provided in pattern row Z2, i.e., the pattern row that is variably displayed during a reach state, and is the main pattern for which image data DA is used among the main pattern display data stored in the character memory area 234a2.

Conventionally, there are machines that display a variable representation (third symbol) to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery, and when a specific symbol is displayed in a static form, indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In this case, a variable performance is executed to induce the player to wonder whether the statically displayed symbol will be the specific symbol. Generally, a variable performance is executed using multiple symbol rows in which multiple types of symbol are formed in a specific order. Specifically, a variable performance is executed using multiple symbol rows in which multiple symbol pieces (for example, main symbol sz) with the numbers 1 to 9 are formed in a specific order.

In a gaming machine configured in this way, in order to enhance the presentation effect of the third pattern variation, a variation presentation is executed in which the display mode of the third pattern during the variation display is varied. However, when varying the identification information (third pattern) during the variation display, if the numbers 1 to 9 attached to the identification information, i.e., the specific information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, are changed, for example, even if the variation display is executed using nine third patterns each having the numbers 1 to 9, if the third pattern having the number 5 attached is switched to the third pattern having the number 6 attached during the variation, the third pattern having the number 6 attached will disappear, and there is a risk that the player will become suspicious that the result of the special pattern lottery has been changed during the variation display of the third pattern.

For example, if a variable display is performed using nine third symbols numbered 1 to 9, and then a new third symbol numbered 6 is added midway, switching to a variable display using a total of ten third symbols, it is necessary to execute display control to deal with the increase in the number of third symbols being displayed midway, which could make the control content more difficult.

In contrast, in this control example, pattern row Z2 is formed by 10 main patterns, including each main pattern numbered 1 to 9 and a change main pattern. This makes it possible to change the display mode of the main patterns without changing the number of main patterns that form the pattern row, while leaving the various patterns numbered 1 to 9. Furthermore, even if the display mode of the change main patterns is changed to various display modes, the number of main patterns that form pattern row Z2 does not change, so display control of pattern row Z2 can be easily executed.

203(d), the character memory area 234a2 of this second control example stores at least image data DA1 of a normal main pattern sz with the number 4, image data DA2 of a normal main pattern sz with the number 7, image data DA3 of a V main pattern sz imitating the letter V, image data DA4 of a special main pattern sz imitating the number 16, and image data DA4 of a regrettable main pattern sz imitating a cross, as image data of the change main pattern. Although omitted in FIG. 202(d), the normal main pattern sz is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode, and the normal main pattern sz imitating a "shark" and the normal main pattern sz imitating a "dugong" shown in FIG. 202(d) are main patterns sz used when the ocean background is set. Therefore, the character memory area 234a2 also stores in advance image data (not shown) of a normal main pattern sz (not shown) that resembles a "rhino" or a "wild boar" as the normal main pattern sz used when a mountain background is set.

Here, in the variable display performance of the third pattern under normal circumstances, the change main pattern using image data DA1 is configured to be displayed in pattern row Z2, and in some cases when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, or in a very small number of cases when a losing win is won in the special pattern lottery, the change main pattern using image data DA2 is configured to be displayed in pattern row Z2. That is, during normal play, the altered main pattern sz resembling a "shark" with the number 4 attached is displayed in a variable manner, so that five main patterns (main patterns with even numbers) suggesting a normal jackpot win and five main patterns (main patterns with odd numbers) indicating a guaranteed jackpot win are displayed, for a total of 10 main patterns to form the pattern row Z2. However, in some cases where a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, or in a very small number of cases where a jackpot is won but not won in the special pattern lottery, the altered main pattern sz resembling a "dugong" with the number 7 attached is displayed in a variable manner, so that four main patterns (main patterns with even numbers) suggesting a normal jackpot win and six main patterns (main patterns with odd numbers) indicating a guaranteed jackpot win are displayed, for a total of 10 main patterns to form the pattern row Z2.

This makes the player feel hopeful that he or she may have won a jackpot (high probability jackpot) that is favorable to the player in the currently running special pattern lottery. The condition for using the main alteration pattern sz that resembles a "dugong" with the number 7 should be that it is more likely to be established when the special pattern lottery results in a jackpot than when it is otherwise (a miss), and it may be configured so that it is not used when the special pattern lottery results in a miss. It may also be configured so that, among the jackpot wins in the special pattern lottery, it is more likely to be used when a high probability jackpot is won than when a normal jackpot is won. This makes it possible to associate the apparent number of each type of main pattern (even and odd numbers) with the probability of winning a high probability jackpot, providing an easy-to-understand game.

The V main pattern sz shown in image data DA3 is a display mode that is not displayed under normal circumstances, and is displayed as a change main pattern when a special condition is met during the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern). This V main pattern sz is used as a general-purpose main pattern that becomes a combination indicating a jackpot win when it is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the reach state, regardless of the type of main pattern sz that becomes the reach state. By using the general-purpose main pattern in this way, for example, even if the main pattern that becomes a combination that will result in a jackpot win passes over the effective line of the reach state, it can be expected that the third pattern (main pattern) will be stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot win without waiting for the pattern row Z2 to go around again.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the third symbol variable display performance, when a double reach state is reached with the normal main symbol (main symbol sz with an even number) and the probability variable main symbol (main symbol sz with an odd number), if the V main symbol is displayed stationary on the effective line of each overlapping reach state, it is preferable to configure it so that the main symbol that is advantageous to the player indicates that a jackpot has been won. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful even if the V main symbol is displayed in a variable manner when a double reach state is reached. Furthermore, in this control example, the V main symbol is used as a general-purpose main symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a combination indicating a jackpot is displayed using the V main symbol, the V main symbol may be used as a symbol indicating a duplicate jackpot, indicating that in addition to the jackpot game being executed this time, the right to execute at least one more jackpot game has already been acquired (there is winning information indicating a jackpot win in the reserved special symbol that is stored), or the V main symbol may be configured to indicate that the right to execute multiple jackpot games has already been acquired simply by displaying it in a variable manner. By configuring it in this way, when the V main symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the player can play the game with a greater sense of expectation.

Next, the special main pattern sz shown in the image data DA4 and the unfortunate main pattern sz shown in the image data DA5 are not used during the variable display of the third pattern, but are used in the promotion effect that can be executed after the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win. Here, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, an advantageous jackpot game (probable jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable jackpot game (normal jackpot game) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous jackpot game are configured to be executable. For example, when a probable jackpot is won, in a part (or all) of the cases where a jackpot is won in a combination using a normal main pattern sz (main pattern sz with an even number) that suggests that a normal jackpot game will be played, a promotion effect is configured to be executable to change the type of the stopped and displayed main pattern sz to a probable main pattern sz (main pattern sz with an odd number).

During this promotion effect, the main pattern sz is not used to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery (jackpot, miss), but is used to indicate whether the currently won jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot or a normal jackpot. Therefore, the special main pattern sz shown in the image data DA4 indicating a guaranteed jackpot, or the unfortunate main pattern sz shown in the image data DA5 indicating a normal jackpot, is set as the change main pattern. In this way, by changing the display mode of the change main pattern in accordance with the timing at which the content to be notified to the player changes using the main pattern sz, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that is easy to understand.

In this second control example, the type of main pattern sz displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win by the promotion effect is promoted from the normal main pattern sz to the guaranteed bonus main pattern sz. However, without being limited to this, for example, the number of rounds (number of rounds) played during a jackpot game may be promoted from a main pattern indicating a small number of rounds to a main pattern indicating a larger number of rounds. In this case, multiple image data may be prepared as the change main pattern in a display mode that suggests the number of rounds that may be played, and the display mode of the change main pattern may be determined using the corresponding image data according to the type of jackpot that has actually been won.

In addition, in this control example, the main pattern column image data of the pattern column Z2 is generated using nine main patterns sz numbered 1 to 9 and the above-mentioned change main pattern sz, and stored in the third pattern column area 235g. However, this is not limited to this, and the change main pattern sz may be stored in the third pattern column area 235d without being included in the main pattern column image data, and variable display control may be performed on a pattern basis in the same way as the sub-pattern fz. By configuring in this way, the display mode of the change main pattern sz in the pattern column Z2 that has been set once can be easily changed.

Also, a change main pattern image layer sr1 on which the change main pattern sz is displayed may be arranged separately from the main pattern image layer sr on which the main pattern sz is displayed, and the change main pattern image layer sr1 may be used to display the change main pattern sz. In this case, since the change main pattern sz is displayed only in the pattern row Z2, it is preferable to arrange the change main pattern image layer sr1 so that the display area of the pattern row Z2 is the only display area, and the change main pattern image layer sr1 is arranged in a position where it is displayed with lower priority than the main pattern image layer sr and with higher priority than the sub-pattern image layer fr. This prevents the change main pattern sz from being hidden by the sub-pattern fz, and allows the change main pattern sz to be displayed without interfering with the display of the main pattern sz.

The image data described above with reference to Figures 203(a) to (d) is part of the image data showing the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) stored in the character memory area 234a2, and in fact other image data is also stored. For example, each of the image data stored as main pattern display data stores image data corresponding to a display mode showing a different action (e.g., a display mode in which the target creature is surprised or happy), and when the result of the special pattern lottery is a specific lottery result (e.g., a jackpot), the display mode of the stopped and displayed third pattern (main pattern sz) can be changed by replacing the image data.

Specifically, when the third symbol indicating a jackpot is displayed in a stopped state (when the "Dugong" with the number 7 is displayed in a normal display state), the display is switched to a special display state in which the "Dugong" with the number 7 has a surprised expression. This makes it possible to inform the player that he or she has won the jackpot by the display state of the third symbol. In addition, the image data corresponding to this special display state may be configured to be used for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.2 seconds) after the third symbol variation begins, and an effect may be executed to suggest to the player that he or she has won the jackpot in the special symbol lottery immediately after the third symbol variation begins.

Next, referring to FIG. 204, the flow of the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) in this second control example will be explained. FIG. 204 is a diagram that shows a schematic diagram of the relationship between the variable display performance of the third pattern and the display contents of the pattern row displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. In FIG. 204, a variable pattern with a variable time of 60 seconds, which indicates a jackpot win, is used as an example of the third pattern variable performance.

As shown in FIG. 204, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command indicating the start of special pattern variation, it determines the variation display mode of the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz based on the currently received variation pattern (command). Specifically, in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113, it determines whether or not there will be a preview performance, whether or not there will be a reach performance, and the stop pattern, and sets the corresponding display command. After that, in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 174) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113, it sends the set display command to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), the display control device 114 executes a command determination process (see S6302 in FIG. 190) in a variable pattern command process 2 (see S6455 in FIG. 209) to analyze the received display command (variable pattern command), determine a variable display table based on the analysis result, read image data (main pattern row image data) of the main pattern row using the main pattern sz corresponding to the currently set background mode from the third pattern row area 235g, read image data corresponding to the sub-pattern fz corresponding to the currently set background mode from the third pattern row area 235g, generate a display image, and display it on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

The normal variation period is set for 10 seconds after the third symbol variation performance is executed. This normal variation period is the period during which all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a varying manner, and is set as the period during which the player can execute a background mode transition by operating the frame button 22. If a background mode transition is executed during this normal variation period, control is executed such that each of the main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz symbols displayed in a display mode corresponding to the background mode is switched to a display mode corresponding to the post-transition background mode.

After that, when the pattern row Z1 and the pattern row Z3 are displayed in a stopped state and reach is reached, a reach variation period of 40 seconds is set, and a reach performance is executed that suggests (tells) whether the result of the lottery of the special pattern this time is a jackpot. During this reach variation period, the background mode transition is not executed, and when the frame button 22 is operated, a decorative performance is executed in which the light emission state of various decorative LEDs mounted on the pachinko machine 10 is changed. In addition, in a part of the reach performance, an operation performance is executed in which an effective period (SW effective period) that effectively determines the operation of the frame button 22 is set, and when the frame button 22 is operated within the set effective period, a performance that is not executed when the frame button 22 is not operated is executed. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated, a definite notification that notifies the player that the special pattern lottery this time has been a jackpot win, and a suggestive notification that indicates that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot win are executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate a player who wants to quickly grasp the result of the lottery of the special pattern to operate the frame button 22. In addition, because there are effects that cannot be seen unless the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effects, players who want to see a variety of effects are motivated to operate the frame button 22.

As described above, the background mode transition is not executed during the reach fluctuation period, so that the background mode is not switched during the reach effect that suggests (teasing) that the result of the current special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and the display mode of the third symbol is also switched accordingly, which can prevent the reach effect from being difficult for the player to understand. In addition, since the operation effect is executed during the reach fluctuation period when the background mode transition is not executed, it is possible to make the player actively operate the frame button 22, even if it is configured to be possible to set a fluctuation effect (so-called hidden operation effect) that does not notify the player of the SW valid period set in the operation effect.

In this case, it is advisable to set a notification mode on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to notify the player that a period in which background mode transition is not being executed (for example, displaying a comment such as "The background mode will not change even if you press the button during a reach"), or to set a notification mode to notify the player that a hidden operation effect is being executed (for example, displaying a comment such as "If you press the button at any point during a reach, a special effect will be executed"). This allows the player to execute the operation effect with peace of mind.

Then, at the timing when the reach fluctuation period ends, among the combinations of main patterns sz that indicate a jackpot win, the third pattern is stopped and displayed with a combination of normal main patterns sz (main patterns sz with even numbers), and then a promotion effect is executed to promote the normal main patterns sz that have won the jackpot to a probability variable main pattern (main patterns sz with odd numbers). When this promotion effect is executed, it is determined whether the current jackpot win is a probability variable jackpot or not, and based on the result of the determination, the display mode of the sub-pattern fz and the display mode of the change main pattern sz among the main patterns sz are determined. Then, the promotion effect using the pattern row for the promotion effect is executed using the promotion fluctuation period (10 seconds).

Here, as the pattern sequence for the promotion effect, for example, if the display mode of the change main pattern sz is a display mode using image data DA4 (see FIG. 203(d)) and the display mode of the sub-pattern fz is a display mode using image data SD3 (see FIG. 203(c)), in addition to the normal high probability main pattern sz (main pattern sz with an odd number), many patterns indicating that the player has won an advantageous jackpot that is advantageous to the player can be displayed, so that the player can be visually notified that there is a high possibility of being promoted to a high probability jackpot with this promotion effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 205, the content of the variable performance executed in this second control example will be explained. FIG. 205 shows an example of the variable performance of the third pattern executed for the same variable pattern command, where FIG. 202(a) is a diagram that shows the flow of the variable pattern used in the example, FIG. 202(b) is a diagram that shows the flow of the normal performance, FIG. 202(c) is a diagram that shows the flow of the reach line notice performance (see FIG. 202(b)), and FIG. 202(d) is a diagram that shows the flow of the notice performance in which the variable direction of the sub-pattern fz is different from normal.

As shown in FIG. 205(a), when the main control device 110 sets a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds, the voice lamp control device 113 sets a display variation pattern command for executing a reach performance. Furthermore, various advance notice performances using the sub-pattern fz are executed using the period until the reach performance is executed. As described above, in this second control example, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz that form each pattern row are configured to be independently variable and displayable, so that various variation performances (advance notice performances) can be executed by varying only the variation pattern of the sub-pattern fz while displaying the main pattern sz in a specific variation pattern according to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

Specifically, in the performance A shown in FIG. 205(b), similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, a third pattern change display (see FIG. 202(a)) is executed in which the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are synchronized, showing the normal pattern in which a reach state is reached. In this way, by controlling the display to synchronize the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz, which are displayed in a changing manner independently, it is possible to give the appearance that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed in a changing manner as one pattern row.

Next, in the performance B shown in FIG. 205(c), the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to off (set to hidden) for a predetermined period (15 seconds) from the start of the third pattern change, during which a reach line notice performance is executed that stops the display of the change of the sub-pattern fz. In other words, the same display control as in 205(a) described above is executed for the main pattern sz, but since the main pattern layer sr is set to hidden in the first half of the normal change period (15 seconds), the player cannot see the change display of the main pattern sz.

Then, the sub-pattern fz is displayed in a variable manner during the first half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds) (see FIG. 202(b)), and the sub-pattern fz is displayed in a static manner at the end of the first half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds), thereby displaying the position where the main pattern sz is displayed in a static manner in the current third pattern fluctuation display (see FIG. 202(c)). After that, when the second half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds) begins, the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to on (set to display), and the main pattern sz is displayed in a variable manner during the second half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds), and the reach state is reached 30 seconds after the fluctuation starts, just like in FIG. 205(b).

In other words, when the effect B shown in FIG. 205(c) is executed, that is, when the reach line notice effect is executed, the position where the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed can be notified to the player before the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed, so it becomes possible to know in advance (15 seconds after the start of the third pattern change) whether the current third pattern change display will be a double reach, a single reach, or not a reach. Therefore, compared to the normal pattern (see FIG. 205(b)) in which it takes 30 seconds to know whether it will be a reach or not, if the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed in a position where the main pattern sz cannot be in a reach state, the period during which the player has excessive expectations can be shortened.

In addition, when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main pattern sz can be in a reach state, the player can enjoy the remaining variation time while anticipating which main pattern sz will be in a reach state. Note that in this second control example, when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main pattern sz can be in a reach state, it is configured to always be in a reach state, so the player can easily determine whether or not the current third pattern variation will be in a reach state based on the timing of the stop display of the sub-pattern fz.

Finally, in the performance C shown in FIG. 205(d), a normal display is executed for the main pattern sz as in the performance A described above, and a different performance from performance A is executed for the sub-pattern fz only for a predetermined period (3 seconds) from the start of the change. Specifically, a display mode using image data SD2 (see FIG. 203(c)) is set as the display mode for the sub-pattern fz displayed at the start of the change, and a sub-pattern reverse change display is executed to change the sub-pattern fz in the opposite direction (rightward) to the change display direction of the main pattern (leftward), and then a change display using the normal sub-pattern fz is executed in synchronization with the change display of the main pattern sz.

As shown in the presentation pattern C, by making the direction of change in the main pattern sz and the direction of change in the sub-pattern fz different at the timing when the third pattern change display starts, a surprising presentation can be presented to the player; in other words, for a player who recognizes that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are formed in the same pattern row and only change in the same direction, the sub-pattern fz is displayed changeably in an unexpected manner, providing a surprising presentation.

As explained above, in this second control example, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are configured to be independently variable and can be displayed, the variable display mode of the main pattern sz is set in response to a variable pattern command that is set based on the lottery result of the special pattern, and various variable performances can be executed by varying only the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz without varying the variable display mode of the main pattern sz. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the variable display result of the main pattern sz differs from the lottery result of the special pattern.

In addition, when the sub-pattern fz is displayed first, for example, the sub-pattern fz may be enlarged and displayed so that the sub-pattern fz covers the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and during that time, the display position of the main pattern sz and the pattern type may be changed.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 206 to Fig. 208. Fig. 206 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The pachinko machine 10 of this second control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in that the contents of the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 have been changed, and a third pattern row area 235g has been added to the resident video RAM 235. Other than that, it is the same as the first control example described above. The same components are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As described above with reference to FIG. 203, the character storage area 234a2 of this second control example differs from the character storage area 234a2 of the first control example in that the image data D1-D9 of the main pattern display data corresponding to each background mode, the image data SD1-SD3 of the sub-pattern display data, and the image data DA1-DA5 of the change main pattern display data are stored in the character storage area 234a2, but the other image data stored therein are the same. Note that the details of the image data newly stored in this second control example have been described above with reference to FIG. 203, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The third pattern column area 235g is a memory area for reading out multiple image data of the main pattern sz stored in the character memory area 234a2, generating one image data (main pattern column image data) as a pattern column in advance, and storing the generated main pattern column image data. When the main pattern sz is to be displayed variably on the main pattern image layer sr, the main pattern column image data stored in this third pattern column area 235g is read out, and the main pattern sz is variably displayed by variably setting the display position coordinates based on the drawing contents specified in the display data table. By configuring in this way, the number of image data used when displaying the main pattern sz variably can be reduced compared to when image data generated on a main pattern sz basis is used, thereby reducing the processing load of the display control.

Next, referring to FIG. 207, the contents of the display data table used in the pachinko machine 10 of this second control example will be described. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time in correspondence with an address expressed as one unit of time (20 milliseconds in this control example) during which one frame of image is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. The pachinko machine 10 of this second control example differs from the display data table in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 153) in that the drawing contents for the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) are different, but otherwise is the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 207, the drawing contents of the display data table specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame of image, and also specify drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as the display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the sprite type.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image. This rear type contains information specifying whether to display either rear A or B corresponding to the background mode selected by the player (either "sea mode" or "mountain mode"), or whether to display a rear image different from rears A and B. In addition, when specifying that a rear image different from rears A and B is to be displayed, the rear type also contains information specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 231 determines that either back face A or B is to be displayed based on the back face type, it determines the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery out of back faces A and B as the drawing target, and also determines the range of the back face image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a back face image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, it determines the back face image to be displayed from the back face type.

In this control example, a case will be described in which only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table, but instead, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to that rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

Next, the types of sprites for displaying the third symbols (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. First, the sub-symbols (sub-symbol 1, sub-symbol 2, ...) are set with display position coordinates indicating the stop position of each sub-symbol fz stopped and displayed in the previous variable performance. This allows the variable performance to start from the stop position of the sub-symbol fz in the previous variable performance. As shown in FIG. 202(a), unlike the main symbol sz, the sub-symbol fz is not assigned a unique number, and all sub-symbols fz are displayed in a common display mode. Therefore, by simply setting the display position coordinates indicating the position of each sub-symbol fz stopped and displayed in the previous variable performance, the variable performance can be easily started from the stop position of the sub-symbol fz in the previous variable performance.

...

In the former case, the sub-pattern fz is displayed in the display mode to be used in the current variable performance before the variable performance starts, i.e., when the sub-pattern fz is stopped, so the player can understand the content of the variable performance to be executed in advance, enhancing the performance effect. In the latter case, the display mode of the sub-pattern fz can be changed at a timing that is difficult for the player to notice, so the display mode of the sub-pattern fz can be changed smoothly without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, among the types of sprites for displaying the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) on the third pattern display device 81, the sprite for displaying the main pattern sz will be described. The main pattern columns (main pattern column 1, main pattern column 2, ...) store pattern column type offset information as pattern column type information for specifying the main pattern sz of the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference in the numbers attached to each main pattern sz. The reason for specifying the offset information rather than directly specifying the type of the main pattern sz is that the display of the main pattern sz in the variable performance changes depending on the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopped pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the change until a predetermined time has passed describes the offset information from the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopped pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

Since each main pattern sz is assigned a unique number, the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 are managed by the number assigned to the main pattern sz. Also, by expressing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to each main pattern sz, the main pattern sz to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the main pattern sz is displayed in a rapidly varying manner. While the main pattern sz is displayed in a rapidly varying manner, the main pattern sz is not visible to the player. During that time, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers of the main pattern sz is interrupted, the player can be prevented from noticing the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

Furthermore, in this second control example, the image data of each main pattern sz displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be one image data (main pattern row image data) per pattern row. For example, for each main pattern sz with the numbers 1 to 9 attached that are variably displayed in the pattern row Z1, the main pattern sz with the number 3 attached is the head of the image data, and then the main pattern row image data is generated with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-patterns fz are displayed) so that the numbers attached to the main patterns sz are in the order of "3 → 2 → 1 → 9 → 8 → 7 → 6 → 5 → 4" and stored in the third pattern row area 235g. Then, by varying the display position coordinates of the main pattern row image data based on the passage of time, an image in which only the main patterns sz that form the pattern row Z1 are variably displayed is displayed on the main pattern image layer sr. The size (coordinate range) of the display area formed on the main pattern layer sr is set to a size that does not allow all images contained in the main pattern column image data to be displayed, and is set to a size that allows a maximum of three main patterns sz to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 202(a).

Therefore, based on the offset information included in the pattern row type offset information, the type of main pattern sz to be displayed on the main pattern image layer sr is specified, the display range of the main pattern row image data is determined corresponding to the position where the specified main pattern sz should be displayed, and the display of each main pattern sz is executed in that display range. In this way, when executing a variable display without changing the arrangement relationship of the main pattern sz, as in the first control example described above, image data is provided for each main pattern sz, and the pattern type of each main pattern sz to be displayed when starting the current variable performance is specified based on the offset information of the stop pattern of the main pattern sz in the previous variable performance, and then, depending on the content of the variable performance to be executed, the display control process is more easily reduced when a pattern row image data in which multiple main patterns sz are specified in a predetermined order and with a predetermined interval is generated, and the variable performance is executed using the pattern row image data, rather than setting the display position (display position coordinates) of the image data of each main pattern sz synchronously and variably according to the content of the variable performance to be executed.

When the display control method of the second control example is used, it is difficult to change the arrangement of the main patterns sz or to change the spacing between the main patterns sz. In that case, it is better to execute display control to variably display each main pattern sz using image data corresponding to each main pattern sz as in the first control example described above. In addition, the configuration of the first control example described above and the configuration of the second control example may be combined to use image data in units of patterns only for a specific main pattern sz, and to use main pattern row image data for multiple main patterns other than the specific main pattern. In this case, it is easy to execute control to change the image data used for a specific main pattern or to change the degree of change in the display position (variable display speed), and it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control when variably displaying multiple main patterns sz for multiple main patterns sz that are always displayed with synchronized variable display content without executing special display control.

In this second control example, in which one image data (main pattern row image data) is generated for each pattern row, different drawing contents are set for each of pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 (for each pattern row), and for pattern row Z2, for each main pattern sz with the variably displayed numbers 1 to 9, the main pattern sz with the number 4 attached is at the beginning of the image data, and then main pattern row image data is generated with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-patterns fz are displayed) so that the numbers attached to the main patterns sz are in the order "4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 1 → 2 → 3", and stored in the third pattern row area 235g. In addition, for the pattern row Z3, for each main pattern sz with the variably displayed numbers 1 to 9, the main pattern sz with the number 1 is at the beginning of the image data, and then the numbers attached to the main patterns sz are in the order "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9", so that main pattern row image data is generated with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-patterns fz are displayed) and stored in the third pattern row area 235g.

By controlling the display so that all of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed variably to the left using the main pattern column image data corresponding to each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 configured in this way, only the main pattern sz displayed in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is displayed variably on the main pattern image layer sr. As described above, the type of main pattern sz located at the beginning of the main pattern column image data is different for each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. As a result, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (initial state), the main patterns sz numbered "3.4.1" are displayed stationary from the top at the center position of the third pattern display device 81, i.e., on the pay line L2 (see FIG. 122(a)). In other words, by configuring the numbers attached to the main patterns sz at the beginning of each main pattern string image data to be different, in the initial state where no variable pattern command has been received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display combinations of main patterns sz that are different from the combination that will result in a jackpot simply by setting the initial display so that the beginning of the main pattern string image data forming each of the pattern strings Z1 to Z3 is on the active line L2, simplifying the display control in the initial state.

Next, the contents of the drawing list in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. This drawing list differs from the drawing list of the first control example described above (see FIG. 155) in that the type of sprite for displaying the third pattern has been changed, but is otherwise the same. Detailed descriptions of the same contents will be omitted.

The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 208, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as the background image, sub-pattern (sub-pattern 1, sub-pattern 2, ...), main pattern row (main pattern row 1, main pattern row 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern) used in one frame's image. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 retrieves the image data for that sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address.

In other words, the drawing instruction contents for the image of the sub-pattern fz include information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the type of RAM in which the image data is stored, and an address indicating the image data to be used for the current drawing instruction from among the multiple image data SD1 to SD3 (see FIG. 203 (c)) corresponding to the sub-pattern fz stored in the third pattern area 235d. Also, the drawing instruction contents for the image of the main pattern sz include information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the type of RAM in which the image data is stored, and an address indicating the image data to be used for the current drawing instruction from among the multiple image data (main pattern row image data) corresponding to the main pattern row stored in the third pattern row area 235g.

<Regarding the control process in the second control example>
Next, the control process contents in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 209 and Fig. 210. This second control example differs from the above-mentioned first control example in that the control process contents executed by the display control device 114 are different. In addition, the type contents of the performance mode of the variable performance set by the voice lamp control device 113 are also different. The rest of the contents are the same, and the same contents are assigned the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In this second control example, the content of the variable performance mode of the third pattern set by the voice lamp control device 113 is different, and specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 205, it is configured so that display commands can be set to execute various variable performances only for the sub-pattern fz of the third pattern. However, the method of setting the display commands corresponding to the variable performance is the same as the variable display setting process of the first control example described above (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and only the specific setting content is different, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the content of the various variable performances executed for the sub-pattern fz executed in this second control example has been described above with reference to FIG. 205, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the control process executed by the display control device 114 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the variable pattern command process 2 (S6455). This variable pattern command process 2 (S6455) executes a process corresponding to the display variable pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and differs from the variable pattern command process executed by the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above (see S6405 in FIG. 191) in that a process is added to determine the type of the change main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz used during the current variable performance and store them in various storage areas of the resident video RAM 235. Since the other process contents are the same, the same reference numerals are used for the same process contents and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the variable pattern command process 2 (S6455), first, the selected variable pattern command (display variable pattern command) is analyzed (S6501), and it is determined whether the current variable pattern command is a variable pattern command for indicating a big win (a variable pattern command selected when a big win is won in the special pattern lottery executed by the main control device 110) (S6551). If it is determined that the current variable pattern command is a big win (S6551: Yes), it is then determined whether the current variable pattern command for display contains information indicating the performance mode of the promotion performance (S6552), and if it is determined that the information indicating the performance mode of the promotion performance is contained (S6552: Yes), a change main pattern corresponding to the command is determined as the change main pattern of the promotion-only pattern row, and stored in the third pattern row area, and the process proceeds to S6554. Also, if in the process of S6551 it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a big win fluctuation, or if in the process of S6552 it is determined that the promotion effect will not be executed, then the process proceeds to S6554, where based on the information analyzed in the process of S6501 it is determined whether the currently received fluctuation pattern contains information for executing a preview effect (see FIG. 205) using the sub-pattern fz, and if it is determined that the preview effect of the sub-pattern fz will be executed (S6554 in FIG. 209: Yes), the display mode of the sub-pattern fz to be used in the current sub-pattern preview effect is determined, and image data corresponding to the determined display mode is read from the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 and stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 (S6555).

Then, a variation display data table corresponding to the received variation pattern command is determined, a display variation pattern for 0 is set, and the process of S6502 to S6505 is executed, which is the same as the variation pattern command process (see S6405 in FIG. 191) executed by the display control device 114 in the first control example described above, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the rear image change command process 2 (S6469) will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the rear image change command process 2. This rear image change command process 2 (S6469) differs from the above-mentioned rear image change command process (see S6419 in FIG. 195(a)) in that when the rear image change flag 233w is set to on, a process is added to determine the type of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) corresponding to the changed rear image (background mode) and store it in the third pattern area 235d and the third pattern row area 235g. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used for the same processes and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the rear image change command process 2 (S6469) is executed, first, the rear image change flag 233w is set to ON (S7001), the type of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) corresponding to the changed rear image (background mode) is determined, and image data corresponding to the determined type is stored in the third pattern area 235d and the third pattern row area 235g (S7002). After that, the rear image discrimination flag 223x corresponding to the changed rear image type is set to ON (S7051), and this process is terminated.

<Modification of the second control example>
Next, a modified example of the second control example described above will be explained with reference to Fig. 211. In the second control example described above, the main pattern sz constituting the third pattern is displayed (drawn) on the main pattern image layer sr, and the sub-pattern fz is displayed (drawn) on the sub-pattern image layer fr. By synchronizing the display contents of the main pattern image layer sr and the display contents of the sub-pattern image layer fr, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed in a regular, variable manner in a specific order. Furthermore, by variably setting only the display control contents for the sub-pattern fz, various variable performances can be performed without varying the variable display contents for the main pattern sz for showing the result of the special pattern lottery.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is displayed (drawn) on one image layer, as in the first control example described above, and further, it differs in that it is configured to provide multiple (two) image layers for displaying (drawing) the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz). And it differs in that it is configured to be able to execute a special variable performance by varying the display control content of the third pattern displayed on the two image layers (third pattern image A, third pattern image B). The rest of the content is the same as the second control example described above, and a detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

Figure 211(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer formed on a pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of this second control example and the display screen, Figure 211(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a triple reach performance, and Figure 202(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a triple reach state is reached due to the triple reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 211(a), in a modified example of the second control example, the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern image layer B are overlapped as the image layers on which the third pattern is displayed, and the third pattern image layer A is configured to be positioned in front of the third pattern image layer B (closer from the player's line of sight). Note that while only the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern image layer B are labeled in FIG. 211(a), in reality, each image layer (layer) that displays various images displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is superimposed.

Then, by synchronizing the variable display of the third pattern for the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern image layer B, it is possible to execute a variable display that appears to be identical to the variable display of the third pattern shown with reference to Figure 125 (b) in the first control example described above.

In this modified example configured in this manner, similar to the second control example described above, the third pattern displayed on the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern displayed on the third pattern image layer B can be independently controlled for variable display, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 211(b), when the third pattern displayed on the third pattern image layer B is in a single reach for "9", it is possible to continue the third pattern variation on the third pattern image layer A. In this state, depending on the result of the third pattern variation on the third pattern image layer A, the number of third patterns in a reach state increases, and the words "Reach! Promotion Chance" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

As shown in FIG. 211(c), when a double reach of "1" and "9" is achieved in the third pattern displayed on the third pattern layer A, it appears as a "triple reach" where three third patterns are in a reach state. In this way, by displaying the third patterns in overlapping and variable form using multiple layers, it is possible to easily execute a variable presentation that requires display control to change the order of the pattern rows of each third pattern when displaying the third patterns in a variable form on one layer, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In this way, when the variable display of the third pattern is made different for multiple third pattern layers, for example, the third pattern displayed on the layer on the side displayed with priority (third pattern layer A) is set as the true third pattern for showing the result of the special pattern lottery, and the third pattern displayed on the non-priority side layer (third pattern layer B) is set as the decorative third pattern, and the variable pattern of the third pattern on the third pattern layer A is determined based on the variable pattern set based on the lottery result of the special pattern (variation pattern set by the main control device 110), and the voice lamp control device 113 determines the variable performance content of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern layer B based on the determined variable pattern of the third pattern on the third pattern layer A (based on the presence or absence of a jackpot win or the type of reach). And, it is preferable to configure so that different variable display control is executed between the third pattern layer A and the third pattern layer B when a jackpot win is won in the special pattern lottery than when it is not.

In addition, in this modified example, a change presentation in which the change display of the third pattern image layer A and the change display of the third pattern image layer B are completely different has been described, but this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to execute a change presentation in which the change start timing is shifted by 0.2 seconds, and then during the high speed change of the third pattern, a change presentation in which the change display content is synchronized is executed. In this way, by making the change display of the third pattern image layer A and the change display of the third pattern image layer B different for only a part of the change presentation, a slight sense of discomfort can be given to the player, allowing the player to make a better selection of the change display.

As explained above, in the second control example and the modified example of the second control example described above, various display controls are performed on each of the third patterns (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, which are composed of patterns including a main pattern sz having identification information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery. However, patterns other than the patterns (third patterns) of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be provided as long as they are dynamically displayed so that the display areas overlap on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

For example, during the execution of the third pattern change, a special pattern not included in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be dynamically displayed in a display area that overlaps with the display area of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. Also, the above-mentioned special pattern may be dynamically displayed during the period in which the third pattern change is being executed, and may be configured to start dynamically displaying the special pattern during the execution of the third pattern change, or to stop displaying or hide the special pattern during the execution of the third pattern change.

Even in this configuration, the variable display mode (variation pattern) of the main symbol sz can be determined based on the results of the special symbol lottery, and it is possible to set a variation pattern for the special symbol for presentation, similar to the sub-symbol fz described above. Furthermore, since the above-mentioned special symbol is not a symbol in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, unlike the sub-symbol fz, the player will not feel uncomfortable even if it is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start or stop timing of the third symbol variation. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the types of variation patterns that can be set more than the sub-symbol fz, and the presentation effect can be further improved.

The dynamic display mode of the special pattern may be configured to be different from the dynamic display mode of the third pattern described above. For example, if the dynamic display direction of the third pattern is to the left (to the left from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)), the dynamic display direction of the special pattern may be configured to be a different direction from the dynamic display direction of the third pattern (for example, to the right from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)). This makes it possible to easily notify the player that the dynamic display of the special pattern has been executed, even if the special pattern is dynamically displayed in a display area overlapping with the display area of the third pattern variable display during the period in which the third pattern variable display is being executed.

In the above example, the dynamic display direction of the special pattern is the exact opposite direction to the dynamic display direction of the third pattern, but it is sufficient if the dynamic display direction is different. For example, instead of the left-right direction, it may be an up-down direction (a direction moving up and down from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)), a front-back direction (a direction moving from the back side to the front side, or from the front side to the back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)), or a diagonal direction (a direction moving diagonally with an angle of less than 90 degrees shifted from the movement line indicating the movement direction). Furthermore, in the above example, a pattern in which the dynamic display direction of the third pattern and the dynamic display direction of the special pattern are different has been described in order to clearly notify that the variable display of the special pattern has been executed during the third pattern change, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to clearly notify that the variable display of the special pattern has been executed during the third pattern change by making the size of the dynamically displayed third pattern and the size of the special pattern different. Furthermore, it may be configured to dynamically display the special symbol before the third symbol change is executed, or to dynamically display the special symbol after the third symbol change is statically displayed (including a display state in which the symbol is swaying to an extent that is difficult for the player to distinguish).

On the other hand, as a technical idea opposite to the above example, the dynamic display direction and size of each pattern (third pattern, special pattern) may be configured to be the same in order to notify in an unnoticeable manner that the dynamic display of the special pattern has been executed during the third pattern change. By configuring it in this way, it is not possible to know that the dynamic display of the special pattern has been executed unless the player pays close attention to the various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that players who want to know that the dynamic display of the special pattern has been executed can continue to be interested in the various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

As mentioned above, unlike the third symbol, the special symbol does not have to be displayed all the time, and therefore does not indicate the result of the lottery for the special symbol according to the display mode when it is stopped like the third symbol. For example, the dynamic display of the special symbol may be started to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the lottery result for the special symbol is a jackpot. In this way, by varying the timing at which information indicating the result of the lottery for the special symbol is provided (dynamic display start timing, stopped display timing) according to the type of dynamically displayed symbol, the timing at which the player should pay attention can be varied according to the various dynamically displayed symbols, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, when a special pattern is used that indicates a high possibility of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery by starting the dynamic display in this way, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to display at least a part of the special pattern as a standby display mode that suggests that the dynamic display will be executed. For example, when a special pattern in a display mode in which multiple fish are in a school is used as the special pattern, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to display only the fish displayed near the front of the special pattern in the moving direction side. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to play while hoping that the dynamic display of the special pattern will start. In this case, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to display not all of the display mode indicating the special pattern, but a part of it. This makes it possible to suppress the misconception that the special pattern is already being dynamically displayed when the special pattern is displayed as a standby display mode.

In the second control example described above, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz forming the third pattern are configured to be displayed on different image layers, and the display control contents executed for each image layer are made different to make the variable display mode of the main pattern sz and the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz different. In addition to this, for example, a first sub-pattern image layer and a second sub-pattern image layer may be provided as image layers capable of displaying the sub-pattern fz, and the sub-pattern fz displayed on the first sub-pattern image layer and the sub-pattern fz displayed on the second sub-pattern image layer may be configured to be displayed overlapping each other, or only one of them may be displayed. In addition, the display control may be performed so that the stop display positions of the sub-pattern fz displayed on multiple display layers are made different, and then the reach line notice performance shown in FIG. 202(b) is executed to further limit the position where the main pattern sz is stopped.

In the second control example described above, the display image layers for displaying one pattern (main pattern sz) and the other patterns (sub-pattern fz) that make up each pattern row Z1 to Z3 are different, and display control can be performed on each display image layer, making it possible to perform various variable effects. However, as long as different display controls can be performed for each type of pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) that forms the pattern row of the third pattern that is variably displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, they may be displayed on the same display image layer. In this case, when the display objects displayed as a result of each display control overlap, it is necessary to specify in advance which display object is to be displayed, which makes the display control process more complicated, but it is possible to achieve the same effect as each of the effects described in the second control example above.

In addition, even when a configuration is used in which the results of multiple display controls are displayed on the same display layer, the various display control processes described in the above-mentioned second control example may be executed for various patterns including patterns other than the multiple pattern types (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) that make up pattern row Z1 to Z3, i.e., patterns other than the third pattern that are dynamically displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in response to the display of the changing special pattern (for example, decorative patterns that are dynamically displayed for a specified period during the special pattern change to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is highly likely to be a specific result (a jackpot win)).

In the second control example described above, when a background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect, the display mode of the main pattern sz is switched to a display mode corresponding to the switched background mode. However, when a background mode transition effect is executed, not only the display mode of the main pattern sz but also the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be switched. In this case, image data corresponding to each background mode is stored as image data of the sub-pattern fz stored in the character memory area 234a2, and when the background mode is switched, image data corresponding to the switched background mode is read out and stored in the third pattern area 235d.

In addition, when a background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect, the result of the ongoing special symbol lottery may be determined, and the type of sub-symbol fz to be displayed after the background mode is switched may be determined based on the determination result. Specifically, a display mode imitating the number 16 or a display mode imitating a "V" may be provided as a type of sub-symbol fz that is more likely to be determined when the ongoing special symbol lottery results in a jackpot win than when the jackpot win is not won. By configuring in this way, the result of the special symbol lottery can be easily predicted by executing the background mode transition effect and switching the background mode before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, so that the player can be encouraged to actively execute the operation effect.

Furthermore, the possibility that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a jackpot winning may be varied depending on the combination of the background mode that is set and the type of sub-pattern fz that is displayed. For example, when the type of sub-pattern fz (display mode for sea mode) that is normally used in the first presentation mode (sea mode) is used in the second presentation mode (mountain mode), it may be configured to indicate that there is a high possibility that the special pattern lottery being held will be a jackpot winning. In this way, by executing a presentation that combines the background mode and the type of sub-pattern fz, a variety of presentations can be executed without increasing the number of types of sub-pattern fz.

In addition, in this control example, when a background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect, a process is executed to change the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz). In addition, the number and positions of the valid lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 122(a)) formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may also be changed.

Furthermore, when the reach line preview effect shown in Figs. 202(a) and (b) is executed and the sub-pattern fz is displayed frozen (see Fig. 202(b)), the stopped display position of the main pattern sz notified in the reach line preview effect may be changed. In this case, the stopped display position of the main pattern sz may be changed more easily when the result of the ongoing special pattern lottery is a jackpot win than when it is not a jackpot win, or conversely, the stopped display position of the main pattern sz may be changed more easily when it is not a jackpot win than when it is a jackpot win.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 212 to Fig. 222. In the above-mentioned first control example, a specific area (V gate 65v) is formed in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during a big win game, and when the game ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v) during a big win game, a high probability state is set after the big win game ends.

As shown in Figure 120, balls that enter the wide (opening width 50 mm) large prize opening 65a are collected in one place using the first flow path 65e1 and the fifth flow path 65e5, and are then allowed to flow down the second flow path 65e2, allowing them to reach the V-gate 65v. However, in the configuration of the variable winning device 65 in the first control example described above, the timing at which a ball can reach the V-gate 65 differs from the timing at which a ball enters the variable winning device 65 from the timing at which the ball can enter the variable winning device 65 in the case where a ball that has entered from the left side of the variable winning device 65 (upstream side of the first flow path 65e1), i.e., a ball shot by left-handed play flows down the left area and then enters the variable winning device 65, and the timing at which a ball can reach the V-gate 65 in the case where a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 in the case where a ball shot by right-handed play flows down the right area and then enters the variable winning device 65, so that when a sure-variable jackpot game is played, whether left-handed play or right-handed play is performed, the switching valve 65y needs to be positioned for a long period of time in a state in which the ball can flow down the fourth flow path 65e4 so that the ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 can reach the V-gate 65v. Furthermore, by lengthening the period during which a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 can pass through the V gate 65v, it is also necessary to lengthen the period (V valid period) during which it is effective to determine whether the ball has passed through the V gate 65v (specific area), which creates the problem that it becomes difficult to detect fraudulent behavior during jackpot play, i.e., the act of passing the ball through the V gate 65V (specific area) through fraudulent play.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example is configured so that the time it takes for a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 to pass through the specific area is approximately the same in cases where a ball shot by left-handed play flows down the left area and then enters the variable winning device 65, and in cases where a ball shot by right-handed play flows down the right area and then enters the variable winning device 65. This configuration makes it possible to shorten the length of the period (V valid period) during which it is effective to determine whether a ball has passed through the specific area, making it easier to discover fraudulent behavior during jackpot play, i.e., the act of passing a ball through the V gate 65V (specific area) through fraudulent play.

As described above, the third control example differs from the first control example described above in that the configuration within the variable winning device 65 has been changed and the content of the switching control of the switching valve 65y provided within the variable winning device 65 has been changed, but the rest of the content is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 212. Fig. 212 is a front view showing a schematic of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example. As shown in Fig. 212, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example differs from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above (see Fig. 119) in that the arrangement of the nail members planted in the lower area of the electric role 640 is different. Specifically, in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, nails are planted so that balls that have flowed down the left area or the right area can win evenly in the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, whereas in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example, multiple nail members are planted in a V-shape below the electric device 640 so that balls that have flowed down the left area can easily win on the left side of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, and balls that have flowed down the right area can easily win on the right side of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

In other words, in this third control example, a variable winning device 65 is provided with a specific winning opening 65a with a wide opening width so that both balls that flow down the left side area when played from the left and balls that flow down the right side area when played from the right can win, and an electric device 640 is provided above the center of the variable winning device 65 as a winning prevention member to prevent balls from winning near the center of the specific winning opening 65a in the opening width direction, and multiple nail members are planted in a V-shape as guide members to guide balls to win near both ends of the specific winning opening 65a in the opening width direction.

This configuration can promote ball entry near both ends of the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, regardless of whether right-handed play or left-handed play is performed during a jackpot game. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 213, but the variable winning device 65 of this third control example is configured so that its internal structure is symmetrical (symmetrical when the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a is viewed left and right), and by making the entry position of the ball into the specific winning opening 65a a symmetrical position, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of errors in the time it takes for a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a to pass through each area (e.g., a specific area) within the variable winning device 65.

Next, referring to FIG. 213, the internal structure of the variable winning device 65 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example will be described. FIG. 213(a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the variable winning device 65 near the specific winning hole 65a, and FIG. 213(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of the ball that wins the specific winning hole 65a.

The variable winning device 65 of this third control example is also configured in the same way as the variable winning device 65 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 120), so that the balls received by the opening and closing door 65b, which is in an open state during a big win game state, are guided by the guide member 65d to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2 provided at both ends of the specific winning port 65a. Then, the balls that flow down the first opening 65a1 pass through the ball detection sensor 65s1 (see FIG. 213(b)), and a payout control is executed in which 15 balls are paid out as prize balls. Similarly, the balls that flow down the second opening 65a2 pass through the ball detection sensor 65s2 (see FIG. 213(b)), and a payout control is executed in which 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

As described above with reference to FIG. 212, in this third control example, the ball is configured to be less likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a from near the center, so that the balls received by the open door 65b can be smoothly guided to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2. This prevents the number of winning balls before flowing down the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2 from increasing, which can lead to ball clogging, and also prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a winning ball is not paid out despite having entered the specific winning opening 65a (the ball does not pass through the ball detection sensors 65s1, 65s2).

As shown in Figure 213 (b), the variable winning device 65 of this third control example is significantly different from the variable winning device 65 used in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 120 (b)) in that the path along which a ball that has entered a specific winning port 65a (a ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or the ball detection sensor 65s2) is guided to the discharge port 65 is configured symmetrically.

First, the ball that passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 flows down the first flow path 65r1 toward the switching valve 65y, and as shown in FIG. 213(b), when the switching valve 65y is in a closed state (a state in which the V-gate 65V protrudes to block the flow path in which it is arranged), the ball flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y and is guided to the first discharge port 65h1. The time (ta) required for the ball to flow down the first flow path 65r1 is configured to be about 2 seconds. Similarly, the ball that passed through the ball detection sensor 65s2 flows down the second flow path 65r2 toward the switching valve 65y, and as shown in FIG. 213(b), when the switching valve 65y is in a closed state (a state in which the V-gate 65V protrudes to block the flow path in which it is arranged), the ball flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y and is guided to the second discharge port 65h2. The time (tb) required for the ball to flow down the second flow path 65r2 is also configured to be approximately 2 seconds, the same as the time ta mentioned above.

In other words, in this third control example, a ball that enters near the left end of the specific winning port 65a when played from the left and passes through the first opening 65a1, and a ball that enters near the right end of the specific winning port 65a when played from the right and passes through the second opening 65a2, are configured to flow down through the same position over a period of time before reaching the switching valve 65y.

When the switching valve 65y is closed (submerged so that the ball can pass through the flow path in which the V-gate 65V is disposed), as shown in FIG. 214, the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 65r1 passes through the submerged switching valve 65y (shown by a dotted line in FIG. 214), passes through the first V-gate 65v1, and flows into the third outlet 65h3. The ball that has flowed down the second flow path 65r2 also passes through the submerged switching valve 65y, passes through the second V-gate 65V2, and flows into the fourth outlet 65h4.

In this third control example, when the number of balls entering the variable winning device 65 (the cumulative number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2) reaches a predetermined number, the switching valve 65y is switched from a closed state (see FIG. 213(b)) to an open state (see FIG. 214). The time required for the number of balls entering the variable winning device 65 to reach a predetermined number and for the switching valve 65y to open (about 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the time required for the predetermined number of balls to pass through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or the ball detection sensor 65s2 and reach the switching valve 65y (about 2 seconds). Therefore, the above-mentioned predetermined number of balls are configured to be able to pass through the V-gate 65V as is. Therefore, when the switching valve 65y is in the open state, the balls can be reliably allowed to flow down to a specific area (V-gate 65V).

The structure of the variable winning device 65 in this third control example is the same as the structure of the sorting device 300 (see FIG. 13) in the first embodiment described above, but for ease of explanation, it is shown in a simplified diagram as shown in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214. Therefore, the detailed configuration of the variable winning device 65 in this third control example is of course the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 215 and Fig. 216. The third control example differs from the first control example described above in that the contents of the big win control executed during the big win game are different, and the various processing contents based on the difference are different, but the rest is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. Specifically, the difference is that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, but the rest of the configuration is the same.

Now, with reference to FIG. 215, the configuration of the RAM 203 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this third control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. 215, the RAM 203 in this third control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 139(b)) in that a V period timer 203ca has been added, but otherwise is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The V period timer 203ca is for measuring the period during which the switching valve 65y is in an open state so that the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65v), and is set to a predetermined time (5 seconds) when the conditions for allowing the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65v) are met. The value of the V period timer 203ca is updated in the jackpot update process (see S1954 in FIG. 220) executed in the jackpot control process 3 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) of the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main control device 110, and the switching valve 65y is switched to the closed state when the V period has elapsed (the value of the V period timer 203ca becomes 0).

In this third control example, when it is determined that the number of balls entering the specific winning port 65a (the number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1, 65s2) is a predetermined number (2) during a specific round play (the first round play) during a guaranteed jackpot play, the V condition that allows the balls to pass through to the specific area (V gate 65v) is met, and the switching valve 65y is switched to an open state for a predetermined period (5 seconds).

In other words, the switching valve 65y is not controlled based on the time that has elapsed since the start of the jackpot game, but is controlled based on the number of balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the open state period of the switching valve 65y ends during a period in which the balls were not able to enter the variable winning device 65 despite the jackpot game being played normally, and the balls cannot pass through to the specific area (V-gate 65v).

Furthermore, in this third control example, the period (approximately 0.5 seconds) required for the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state after the V condition is satisfied is shorter than the period (approximately 2 seconds) required for a ball that satisfies the V condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state, i.e., the ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or 65s2 for the specified number (2nd ball) to reach the switching valve 65y, and at least a ball that satisfies the V condition is configured to be able to pass through the specific area (V gate 65v). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably pass the ball into the specific area (V gate 65v) when the V condition is satisfied.

In this control example, the V condition is satisfied and the state in which the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state is continued for a predetermined period (5 seconds). That is, the end condition for terminating the open state of the switching valve 65y is only the period lapse end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period has passed, but it is not limited to this. For example, a V passage end condition that is satisfied when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65v) may be set, or a round end condition that is satisfied when the end condition of the V round game (first round round game) is satisfied, or when a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds required for a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 during the V round to reach any of the outlets 65h) has passed since the end condition of the V round game is satisfied may be set. In this way, various end conditions may be set, and the open state of the switching valve 65y may be switched to the closed state when any of the end conditions is satisfied first. This makes it possible to minimize the period during which the switching valve 65y is open, thereby preventing the ball from passing through the specific area (V-gate 65v) unnecessarily. This reduces the possibility that the ball will collide with the ball detection sensor installed in the V-gate 65v and physically destroy the ball detection sensor.

Next, referring to FIG. 216, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third control example will be described. FIG. 216 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 216, the RAM 223 in this third control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 144(b)) in that a V timer 223ca has been added, but otherwise is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The V timer 223ca is a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the period during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65v) (period during which a V win is possible) is set, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a V period command set by the main control device 110 when the period during which a V win is possible, a value corresponding to a predetermined period (3 seconds) is set. The value of the V timer 223ca continues to be updated (decremented) until the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v), and when the value becomes 0 (when the predetermined period has passed), an emphasized guidance announcement is issued that emphasizes the guidance for a V win.

In other words, the period during which a V win is possible is set to a maximum of 5 seconds, and the emphasized notification is configured to be executed when 3 seconds have passed since the period during which a V win is possible is set. Here, as described above, normally, the ball that has satisfied the V condition is configured to directly enter the V win, and the time required for the ball that has satisfied the V condition to enter the V win is configured to be approximately 2 seconds. In other words, when the value of the V timer 223ca reaches 0, it is considered that the ball that has satisfied the V condition has not entered the V win. Therefore, since it is necessary to aim for a V win using an additional ball, the emphasized notification is configured to be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a V win cannot be achieved due to the game content of the player, even though the period during which a V win is possible has been set.

In this control example, the emphasis guide notification is executed based on the time elapsed since the V condition was satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the emphasis guide standby notification may be executed when it is detected that the ball that satisfied the V condition has passed through an area that does not have a specific area (V gate 65v) (for example, a flow path having an outlet 65h1 (see FIG. 213(b))). In addition, in this control example, the emphasis guide notification is executed as described above when it is detected that the ball that triggered the switching valve 65y to be switched to the open state has not passed through the specific area (V gate 65v). Alternatively, the emphasis guide notification may be executed to notify the outside that an abnormality (for example, a ball jam) has occurred in the flow path inside the variable winning device 65.

In addition, in this control example, when the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detect the entry of a predetermined number of balls (the second ball), the switching control is executed to immediately switch the switching valve 65y to the open state. In this case, the ball (the first winning ball) that entered the variable winning device 65 before the predetermined number of balls (the second ball) may be guided to the switching valve 65y in the open state and pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). Therefore, when the entry of the predetermined number of balls (the second ball) is detected, a waiting time (about 1.5 seconds) may be set taking into account the time (about 2 seconds) until the second winning ball reaches the switching valve 65y, and the switching valve 65y may be controlled to switch to the open state after the waiting time has elapsed. This makes it easier to pass only the ball that triggered the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state to the specific area (V gate 65V).

Furthermore, in this control example, the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65v) during one jackpot play, setting a high probability state for the special symbol after the jackpot play ends, and the bonus given to the player (provision of a high probability state for the special symbol) does not change even if multiple balls pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot play. In addition, for example, when using a pachinko machine 10 in which the content of the bonus given to the player varies depending on the number of balls that pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during a jackpot play, it is possible to prevent excessive balls from passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) by setting the above-mentioned waiting time.

When using a pachinko machine 10 in which the contents of the bonus given to the player are varied according to the number of balls that pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during a jackpot game, for example, the number of winning balls (V winning condition) that triggers the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state may be varied according to the type of jackpot won, the waiting time from when the winning number of balls that triggers the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state enters the variable winning device 65 until the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state may be varied, or the condition for switching the switching valve 65y from the open state to the closed state (V ending condition) may be varied.

Specifically, in order to make it easier for multiple balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game, it is preferable to set a small number of balls as the V winning condition, so that the period from when the jackpot game is executed until the V winning condition is established can be shortened, so that a long jackpot game can be executed while the V winning condition is established, and it is easier to pass multiple balls through the specific area (V gate 65V). The waiting time may also be shortened. This allows balls that entered the variable winning device 65 before the ball that established the V winning condition (balls flowing down the first flow path 65r1 and the second flow path 65r2) to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). Furthermore, the V ending condition may be configured to be established based on the elapsed time regardless of the number of balls passing through the specific area (V gate 65V). By configuring it in this way, when a big win that gives the player an advantage is executed, the player can play with enthusiasm, trying to get as many balls as possible to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V).

On the other hand, for jackpot games that are disadvantageous to the player, in order to make it difficult for multiple balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game, it is advisable to set a large number of balls as the V entry condition, set a long waiting time, or set the V end condition to be met when one ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) or to be met after a period of time has elapsed that makes it difficult for a ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) (for example, 0.1 seconds have elapsed).

By configuring in this way, the expectation that the ball will pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during a jackpot game can be greatly varied depending on the type of jackpot game being played. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide a normal flow path and a special flow path that can cause the ball to flow down toward the switching valve 65y in a shorter period of time than the normal flow path as ball flow paths within the variable winning device 65. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a delaying means (e.g., a crane) in the special flow path that delays the flow of the balls, so that the balls discharged from the special flow path are more likely to be discharged in a chain than the balls discharged from the normal flow path.

In this case, if the timing when the switching valve 65y opens coincides with the timing when the balls are discharged from the special flow path, it is possible to make it easier for many balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the player can select whether the balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 are made to flow more easily down the normal flow path or the special flow path. For example, when a left-handed game is played, it is preferable to configure the system so that the balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 are made to flow more easily down the normal flow path than the special flow path, and when a right-handed game is played, it is preferable to configure the system so that the balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 are made to flow more easily down the special flow path than the normal flow path. In this case, during the jackpot game, a game guide display may be executed using the display surface of the third symbol display device to inform the player that the left-hand hit game is a stable game in which it is easy to pass one ball into the specific area (V gate 65V), and that the right-hand hit game is a challenge game in which it is difficult to pass a ball into the specific area (V gate 65V), but if the timing is right, a large number of balls can pass into the specific area (V gate 65V). In addition, a storage means may be provided to store whether the left-hand hit game or the right-hand hit game was executed in the past jackpot game, specifically, to determine which of the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detected more balls during the jackpot game, and to determine the game method during the jackpot game based on the determination result and store the result, and a history display may be executed to display the game method stored in the storage means and the game result during the jackpot game (the number of balls passing into the specific area (V gate 65V)) as a past history.

This allows the player to enjoy the fun of selecting the game method to be executed during the big win game. In the above control example, the bonus granted when passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) is a high probability state of a special pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, the right to a lottery that is likely to result in a lottery that is advantageous to the player may be granted, or a second big win game different from the big win game may be granted. In this case, it is preferable to provide a grant right storage means that can store the rights to which the above-mentioned bonus is granted up to a predetermined number. This makes it possible to reliably grant bonuses under the condition of a predetermined number, even if multiple grant rights are acquired in a short period of time. In addition, in this control example, the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 during the big win game is described, but this is not limited to this. For example, in some cases where the lottery result is other than a big win in the lottery of a special pattern, a small win that opens the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time may be set, and the above-mentioned configuration may be used for the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 during the small win game that is executed when the small win is won. In addition, the above-mentioned configuration may be used for a variable ball entry means (e.g., the electric device 640) that allows the ball to enter a winning game that is executed when a winning normal symbol is selected in the lottery.

In addition, in this control example, all balls that pass through the switching valve 65y in the open state are configured to be able to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V), but this is not limited thereto, and a distribution member may be provided so that some of the balls that pass through the switching valve 65y in the open state can pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). In addition, in this control example, the switching valve 65y that switches the flow path through which the balls flow down among the multiple flow paths is used as a variable means that can be changed between a first state in which it is easy to pass the ball to the specific area (V gate 65V) and a second state in which it is difficult to pass the ball, but the configuration of the variable means is not limited thereto, and for example, a variable means that can be changed between a retention position in which the ball is retained for a predetermined period and an open position in which the ball is not retained, and that retains the ball for a predetermined period to make it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) within a period that effectively determines the passage of the ball to the specific area (V gate 65V) may be provided. In addition, multiple variable means may be provided in the variable winning device 65.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 217 to Fig. 220, the control process contents of the main control device in this third control example will be described. In this third control example, the difference from the first control example described above is that the big win control process (see S1804 in Fig. 168) is replaced with the big win control process 3 (see S1854 in Fig. 217), and the winning process (see S1911 in Fig. 171) is replaced with the winning process 3 (see S1953 in Fig. 218), but otherwise it is the same. The same control process contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, the contents of jackpot control process 3 (S1854) will be explained with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot control process 3 (S1854). This jackpot control process 3 (S1854) differs from the above-mentioned jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168) in that the control contents executed at the start of a jackpot and the control contents executed when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game have been changed, and further, a control content that updates the value of the V period timer 203ca during a jackpot game has been added. The rest of the contents are the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot control process 3 (S1854) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S1901), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S1901: Yes), then an opening command is set (S1902), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF, and the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON (S1903), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the jackpot start flag 203j is not set to ON (S1901: No), then it is determined whether the jackpot is currently being played (whether the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON) (S1904), and if it is determined that the jackpot is not being played (S1904: No), this process ends as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of S1904 that a jackpot is being played (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON) (S1904: Yes), it is then determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1905). If it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes), the specific winning port 65a is set to open (S1951), a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S1952), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1905 that it is not the time to start a new round (S1905: No), the process of S1907 to S1910 is executed, which is the same as the jackpot control process of the first control example described above (see S1804 in FIG. 168), and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S1909 that it is not the time to end the jackpot (S1909: No), then the winning process 3 is executed (S1953), and then the abnormality process is executed (S1912), and then the jackpot update process is executed (S1954), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of winning process 3 (S1953) executed in jackpot control process 3 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) will be explained with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning process 3 (S1953). This winning process 3 (S1953) differs from the winning process of the first control example described above (S1911 in FIG. 171) in that the control process contents during the V round (one round) in which the switching valve 65y can be in the open state are different, but otherwise it is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations of the contents will be omitted.

When the winning process 3 (S1953) is executed, first, the processes S2201 to S2204 are executed, which are the same as the winning process of the first control example described above (S1911 in FIG. 171). When the process of S2204 is completed, or when it is determined in the process of S2202 that the ball has not entered the specific winning hole 65a (S2202: No), the V round process is executed (S2251). Details of this V round process (S2251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 219, but when the first round of round play (V round play) is executed, a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the switching valve 65y.

After the V round processing (S2251) is completed, the processing of S2205 to S2208 and S2211 to S2221, which are the same as the winning processing described above (see S1911 in FIG. 171), is executed, and then this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the V round processing (S2251) executed in the winning processing 3 (see S1953 in FIG. 218) will be explained with reference to FIG. 219. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V round processing (S2251).

When the V round process (S2251) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time is one round (V round) (S2401), and if it is determined that the current time is not one round (S2401: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is one round (S2401: Yes), it is next determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203o is "2", that is, whether the number of winning balls into the variable winning device 65 during the first round of round play is "2" (S2402), and if it is determined that it is "2" (S2402: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to ON (S2403), a V period command indicating the period during which a V winning is possible (the period during which a ball can be guided to a specific area (V gate 65V)) is set (S2404), and a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set to the V period timer 203ca (S2405), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2402 that the value of the winning number counter 203o is not "2" (S2402: No), this processing ends.

As explained above, in this control example, when the number of balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 during a specific round of play executed during a jackpot game meets a predetermined condition (when the number of winning balls becomes two), a control process is executed to switch the switching valve 65y to an open state so that the balls can easily pass through the specific area (V-gate 65v). This makes it possible to prevent the switching valve 65y from switching to an open state when no balls have entered the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game.

In this control example, only a specific round (first round) during a jackpot game is configured to be a V round in which the switching valve 65y can be switched to an open state, but this is not limited to this, and multiple rounds may be configured to be set as V rounds in which the switching valve 65y can be switched to an open state. In this case, in the V round process (S2251), the number of rounds of a newly executed round game is determined, and it is determined whether the round game of the determined number of rounds is a V round.

Then, when a V round is determined, the state of the switching valve 65y can be controlled based on the value of the winning number counter 203o during that V round. In this case, the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON (the condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state) can be different for each of the multiple V rounds.

In addition, when a V-round game is being played, a notification means may be provided that notifies the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the game content until the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON is met. For example, when a V-round game is started, a V-round notification indicating that the current round game is a V-round and a required number of wins notification indicating the number of wins required until the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON is met may be executed. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play by trying to get the ball to pass through a specific area.

Next, the contents of the jackpot update process (S1954) will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a flow chart that shows a schematic of the contents of the jackpot update process (S1954). In this jackpot update process (S1954), processing is executed to update the value of the V period timer 203ca that is set during jackpot play.

When the jackpot update process (S1954) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the V period timer 203ca is greater than 0, i.e., whether the V solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1961). If it is determined that the value of the V period timer 203ca is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S1961: No), this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S1961 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is greater than 0 (S1961: Yes), then the value of the V period timer is updated (S1962), and it is determined whether the updated value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S1963). If it is determined that the value is not 0 (S1963: No), it is not the time to turn off the solenoid 209a, so this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1963 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S1963: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to OFF (S1964), a command indicating the end of the V period is set (S1965), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 221 and Fig. 222, the control process contents of the voice lamp control device in this third control example will be described. In this third control example, the difference from the first control example described above is that the big win related process 3 (see S4258 in Fig. 221) is executed instead of the big win related process (see S4218 in Fig. 180), and the performance update process 3 (see S4151 in Fig. 222) is executed instead of the performance update process (see S4111 in Fig. 174), but otherwise it is the same. The same control process contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 221, the contents of jackpot-related process 3 (S4258) will be explained. This jackpot-related process 3 (S4258) differs from the jackpot-related process (S4218) of the first control example described above in that it adds control process contents that are executed when a V period command is received from the main control unit 110, but is otherwise the same. Identical contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When jackpot-related process 3 (S4258) is executed, first, the same processes of S4701 to S1713 as those of the jackpot-related process described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180) are executed. Then, in the process of S4709, if it is determined that the round count command has not been received (S4709: No), it is next determined whether a V period command has been received (S4751). If it is determined that a V period command has been received (S4752: Yes), a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set to the V timer 223ca, and this process is terminated.

Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4751 that a V period command has not been received (S4751: No), the processing of S4714 to S1715, which is the same as the jackpot-related processing described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180), is then executed, and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the effect update process 3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 3. This effect update process 3 is configured to be able to execute a process for updating the value of the V timer 223ca set during a jackpot game, and a process for setting the effect mode when the value of the V timer 223ca becomes 0.

As shown in FIG. 222, when performance update process 3 is executed, first it is determined whether the value of V timer 223ca is greater than 0 (S5401). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S5401: Yes), then the value of V period timer 203ca is updated (S5402), and it is determined whether the updated value of V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403).

If it is determined in the processing of S5403 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403: Yes), it is then determined whether the V performance execution flag 223k is set to ON (S5404). In other words, if a V notification performance is being executed during the currently executing jackpot game, a display command is set to highlight the V winning notification (S5405), and the number of updates for various other counters and timers is executed, and this processing ends.

As explained above, in this third control example, the variable winning device 65 is placed at a location where a win is possible whether playing with a right-hand or left-hand shot, and further, regardless of which playing method is used to shoot the ball, the system is configured so that there is no significant difference in the time from when the ball wins to when it reaches the switching valve 65y. Therefore, during a jackpot game, the period (V effective period) for effectively detecting that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate 65v) is not set unnecessarily long, and the jackpot game can be played smoothly. Also, by shortening the V effective period, it is easier to monitor the act of passing the ball into a specific area through fraudulent play.

In addition, since the switching control of the switching valve 65y is configured to be executed based on the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65, it is possible to prevent the switching valve 65y from being opened in a state where the balls cannot win the variable winning device 65 due to ball clogging that occurs during a jackpot game. In this control example, the number of winning balls is measured on a round-by-round basis, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined measurement result, the switching valve 65y is configured to be opened for a predetermined period within the round game period. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to execute control to switch the switching valve 65y to the open state when the cumulative value of the number of winnings since the start of a jackpot game, the cumulative value of the number of winnings since a predetermined measurement condition is established during a jackpot game, or the cumulative value of the number of winnings in multiple jackpot games reaches a predetermined measurement result.

In addition, the maximum length of time that the switching valve 65y is open does not need to be limited to the period until the end of a round of play, but may be configured so that the switching valve 65y remains open, for example, spanning over to the next round of play to be executed.

In addition, in this third control example, as shown in FIG. 213(b), one switching valve 65y is configured to block both the first V gate 65v1 and the second V gate 65V2, but this is not limited to this. Two switching valves 65y may be provided to block each V gate, and for example, when the ball detection sensor 65s1 detects a predetermined number of winning balls, only the switching valve covering the first V gate 65V1 may be opened, and when the ball detection sensor 65s2 detects a predetermined number of winning balls, only the switching valve covering the second V gate 65V2 may be opened. This makes it possible to reduce the range of switching valves that are open, thereby preventing balls from passing through the V gate 65V unnecessarily.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 223 to Fig. 231. This fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed, and the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Also, the fourth control example differs in that the control contents executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed. The rest of the contents are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the first control example described above, after the end of a jackpot game, a probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) or a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be set as an advantageous game state favorable to the player. If the probability variable state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the probability variable state continues until 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed, and then the time-saving state is set until 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed, that is, until the number of special symbol lotteries since the end of the jackpot game reaches 100. On the other hand, if the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the time-saving state is configured to continue until 100 special symbols have been performed.

In other words, in the first control example described above, no matter which advantageous game state (high probability state, time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the advantageous game state is configured to continue until the special pattern lottery is executed 100 times, unless a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery. Then, when an advantageous game state (high probability state, time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the player is notified of the period until the advantageous game state ends, that is, the period until the normal state that is disadvantageous to the player is set (see FIG. 128(a)).

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that has multiple advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state, it is possible to make the player aware of the period until an unfavorable game state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set, rather than the period until the currently set advantageous game state (high probability state or time-saving state) ends. Therefore, compared to a case in which the player is notified of the period until the currently set advantageous game state (e.g., high probability state) ends, that is, the period until the high probability state ends and the time-saving state ends, it is possible to make the player aware in advance of the period during which the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player will continue, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the first control example described above, the period during which the more favorable of the multiple favorable game states (high probability state, time-saving state) continues is predetermined to be the period during which 50 special symbol lotteries are executed, and during the period from the end of the jackpot game until 50 special symbol lotteries are executed, a suggestion effect can be executed that can suggest to the player whether the currently set game state is a high probability state or a time-saving state (see FIG. 128(b)). As a result, in a pachinko machine 10 that notifies the player of the period until the next unfavorable game state is set when a favorable game state is set, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting which of the multiple favorable game states the currently set game state is.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth control example, when a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set after a jackpot game ends, a lottery (so-called fall lottery) can be executed to transition the high probability state of the special symbols to a low probability state, and when the fall lottery is won, the game state is transitioned from the high probability state to a time-saving state. In other words, in the above-mentioned first control example, when a high probability state is set, the high probability state is configured to continue until 50 special symbol lotteries have been executed, but in this fourth control example, if the fall lottery is won before 50 special symbol lotteries have been executed, the high probability state is configured to end at that point.

By configuring it in this way, even if the player understands that a special probability state has been set by the suggestive effects executed during the period when a favorable game state has been set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the special probability state will continue, so that the player can pay more attention to the content of the suggestive effects that are executed.

In addition, in this fourth control example, the suggestive effects executed during the period in which the advantageous game state is set are configured to suggest not only the currently set game state, but also the timing when the special state ends due to winning the drop lottery.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 223 to Fig. 226. The fourth control example is significantly different from the first control example described above in that a lottery (falling lottery) for shifting a high probability state of a special symbol to a low probability state can be executed, and is different in that a configuration for executing the falling lottery is added.

First, referring to FIG. 223, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this fourth control example will be described. FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 223, the ROM 202 in this fourth control example differs from the ROM 202 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 139(a)) in that part of the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d has been changed and a new drop lottery table 202da has been added, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described, focusing mainly on the differences from the first control example. In this fourth control example, the contents of the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are different from those in the first control example described above. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 224(a), but the value set in the time-saving counter 203h is different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type selected, that is, the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. This makes it possible to vary the length of the period during which the advantageous game state (probability change state or time-saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game continues. Therefore, when the advantageous game state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the length of the period during which the advantageous game state continues. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the notification performance for notifying the player of the period during which the advantageous game state continues (the remaining period until the disadvantageous game state is set).

Now, referring to FIG. 224(a), we will explain the contents of the special symbol 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd, which is referenced to select the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) in this control example. FIG. 224(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special symbol 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2.

As shown in FIG. 224(a), the special chart 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2 specifies jackpot types that have different values for the time-saving counter 203h set after the jackpot game ends, depending on the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter c2 and the game state at the time of the win. In other words, the length of time that the advantageous game state (high probability state or time-saving state) that is set after the jackpot game ends varies depending on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won.

Specifically, for the jackpot type, when the acquired first jackpot type counter C2 value is in the range of "0 to 29", if the game state at the time of winning is normal or time-saving, the time-saving counter 203h is set to "50", and when the game state is high probability, the time-saving counter 203i is set to "100". For the jackpot type, when the acquired first jackpot type counter C2 value is in the range of "30 to 69", if the game state at the time of winning is normal or time-saving, the time-saving counter 203h is set to "50", and when the game state is high probability, the time-saving counter 203i is set to "100". However, if the probability of winning is high, the time-saving counter 203h is set to "90" and the probability of winning counter 203i is set to "50" as a "jackpot D." If the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "70 to 99," the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" if the game state at the time of winning is normal or the time-saving state, and if the probability of winning is high, the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the probability of winning counter 203i is set to "50."

The details of the round game that is executed in response to each jackpot type, the value set in the probability change counter 203i defined in the special jackpot 2 table 202dd2, and the ending period (S) are the same as those in the special jackpot 2 table 202d2 described above, so a detailed description of them will be omitted.

As explained above, in this fourth control example, the duration of the time-saving state is varied depending on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot was won and the game state when the jackpot was won. For example, when jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type, if the jackpot was won in the time-saving state, "100" is set in the time-saving counter 203h, and if the jackpot was won in the probability variable state, "90" is set. Therefore, after the jackpot game that is executed when jackpot D is selected ends, the player can know whether the game state at the time of the previous jackpot win was in the probability variable state or the time-saving state depending on the display mode of the remaining period notification mode displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81.

By configuring it in this way, the pachinko machine 10 has multiple types of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and in the pachinko machine 10 that executes a notification effect that can notify the player only that an advantageous game state has been set, without specifically notifying the player of the currently set game state, if the player wins a jackpot during an advantageous game state, the player can subsequently ascertain in which game state the jackpot was won. This allows the player to predict future games based on past game results, making the game more interesting.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 224(a), the value set in the time-saving counter 203h is varied according to the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, so that the player can predict the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot based on the display content of the remaining time notification mode (mode of notifying the remaining time until the end of the favorable game state) displayed after the end of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, even if a different value is set in the time-saving counter 203h, the display mode of the remaining time notification mode displayed after the end of the jackpot game may be made common (for example, displaying "70"), and when the number of times that the special pattern lottery is executed during the favorable game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the display mode of the remaining time notification mode may be variably displayed in accordance with the actual value of the time-saving counter 203h.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to allow the player to grasp the game state that was set when the previous jackpot was won after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, during an advantageous game state, the player can be made to simultaneously play a game aiming to win a jackpot and a game to grasp the game state that was set in the past, and this makes it possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game during the advantageous game state.

In addition, in this control example, the value set in the time-saving counter 203h is varied according to the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, and the display content of the remaining time notification mode (mode of notifying the remaining time until the end of the advantageous game state) displayed after the end of the jackpot game allows the player to predict the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot. However, the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot may be suggested at other times as long as the timing allows the player to grasp the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot after the fact. For example, the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot may be notified to the player by a jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game. In this case, a presentation may be executed that directly notifies the player of the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, or a presentation may be executed that suggests the duration of the advantageous game state that will be set after the end of the jackpot game.

Returning to FIG. 223, the explanation will continue. The fall lottery table 202da is a data table in which the judgment value of the fall lottery counter Cd1, which will be described later, is stored. If the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 obtained when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (at the time of initial winning) matches any of the judgment values specified in the fall lottery table 202da, it is set to transition to a low probability state of the special pattern (to fall).

Here, the contents of the fall lottery table 202da will be explained with reference to FIG. 224(b). FIG. 224(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fall lottery table 202da. As shown in FIG. 224(b), the fall lottery table 202da specifies two judgment values, "0, 1", as judgment values that are judged as a fall in the special symbol's high probability state. Here, the fall lottery counter Cd1 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 999". Of the 1000 possible values of the fall lottery counter Cd1, there are two judgment values that are judged as a fall, so the probability of falling (transitioning to a low probability state of the special symbol) in the special symbol's high probability state is 1/500.

In addition, in the fall lottery table 202da in this control example, only the judgment value for judging whether or not a fall will occur in the special symbol's high probability state (judgment value for the special symbol's high probability state) is specified, and no judgment value for the special symbol's low probability state is specified. This is because it is a waste of processing to judge whether or not to transition to the special symbol's low probability state when the special symbol's low probability state is already in effect.

In this control example, the drop lottery table 202da is compared with the drop lottery counter Cd1, which is updated periodically, to determine whether or not to transition (drop) from the special symbol high probability state to the special symbol low probability state. In other words, the timing of transition from the high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), which is the most advantageous state for the player among the advantageous game states, to the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), which is one of the advantageous game states but is more disadvantageous to the player than the high probability state, can be made random. This allows the player to play while expecting the high probability state to continue as long as possible.

In this control example, after the jackpot game ends, the maximum duration (50 times) of the high probability state of the special symbol is determined by the value of the probability change counter 203i, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to continue for a period longer than the maximum duration (50 times). In other words, based on the lottery result of the fall lottery, no matter when the high probability state of the special symbol transitions (falls) to a low probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, the game state transitions from the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) to the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), so the player does not know the timing of winning the fall lottery based on the frequency of playing the normal symbol win game.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, during a favorable game state (high probability state of normal symbols), it is difficult for the player to know whether the current game state is a probability variable state or a time-saving state, so it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the content of the suggestive effects that retroactively suggest the game state that was set at the time of winning the jackpot.

In this control example, whether or not there will be a transition (fall) from a high probability state of a special pattern to a low probability state of a special pattern was determined by lottery (determination), but a transition to another state may also be determined by lottery (determination). For example, whether or not there will be a transition from a high probability state of a normal pattern to a low probability state of a normal pattern may be determined by a lottery executed for each change. This makes it possible to randomize how long the advantageous game state will continue, so that players can play in the hope that the advantageous game state will continue for each change. Also, for example, it may be possible to configure it so that it is possible to determine by lottery whether or not there will be a transition from a low probability state of a special pattern to a high probability state of a special pattern.

In addition, in this control example, the above-mentioned falling lottery is configured to be executed every time a special pattern lottery is performed, but this is not limited thereto. For example, the ease of executing the falling lottery may be varied depending on the type of special pattern for which the special pattern lottery is executed. For example, the falling lottery may be configured to be executed more easily when a second special pattern lottery, which is mainly executed during a high probability state of normal patterns, is performed than when a first special pattern lottery is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a high probability state of special patterns transitions to a low probability state due to a falling lottery executed based on the first special pattern lottery being performed, making it difficult for the player to play advantageously.

In addition, a number of times determination means for determining the number of times the fall lottery is executed at the execution timing of the fall lottery may be provided, and the number of times the fall lottery is executed when the execution trigger of the fall lottery is established may be configured to be different. In this case, it is preferable to design the range of the number of times determined by the number of times determination means to be "0 to 5", and the average value to be 1 time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to separate the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed from the number of times the fall lottery is executed, so that it is more difficult to understand at what timing the high probability state of the special pattern transitions to a low probability state. In this case, it is preferable to provide a suggestion means capable of suggesting the number of times determined by the number of times determination means (the number of times the fall lottery is executed), and to suggest to the player a period in which it is easy to fall (a period in which multiple times are determined by the number of times determination means) and a period in which it is difficult to fall (a period in which 0 times are determined by the number of times determination means). In this way, it is possible to play while predicting the presence or absence of a fall based on the contents of the suggestion by the suggestion means.

Furthermore, in this control example, the execution of the special pattern lottery is used as the trigger for executing the fall lottery, but this is not limited to this. For example, the fall lottery may be configured to be executed when the normal pattern lottery is executed, or the fall lottery may be configured to be executed when the ball enters a specific winning hole (for example, the general ball entry hole 63) provided on the game board 13.

Next, referring to FIG. 225, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described. As described above, this fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that it has a fall lottery function. It also differs in that the various performance contents set by the voice lamp control device 113 are configured to be able to execute performances based on the results of the fall lottery. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same contents are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions are omitted.

Figure 225(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, and Figure 225(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example.

First, the configuration of ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. 225(a). As shown in FIG. 2254(a), this fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that it provides button operation performance selection 2 table 222df instead of button operation performance selection table 222f (see FIG. 148), but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the button operation effect selection 2 table 222df will be explained with reference to FIG. 226(a). FIG. 226(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the button operation effect selection 2 table 222df. As shown in FIG. 226(a), this fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the data table referenced when the special probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game has been changed from the special probability state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) to the special probability state selection 2 table 222df2, but otherwise is the same.

Here, the contents stipulated in the probability change state selection 2 table 222df2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 226(b). FIG. 226(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the probability change state selection 2 table 222df2. Like the probability change state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) described above, this probability change state selection 2 table 222df2 is a data table that is referenced when selecting the presentation mode to be executed as the operation presentation when the probability change state is set after the end of the big win game, and differs from the probability change state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) in that the lottery result of the fall lottery has been added to the factors for selecting the presentation mode of the operation presentation, that a presentation mode that can suggest information based on the lottery result of the fall lottery can be selected, and that the selection ratio of each presentation mode has been partially changed. The rest of the contents are the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

In the probability change state selection 2 table 222df2, as in the probability change state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) described above, the timing and operation method when the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means), the acquired value of the performance counter 223f, and the setting status of the short fall flag 223da, which is set based on the lottery result of the fall lottery, are specified as the performance mode to be executed as an operation performance. The details of this short fall flag 223da will be described later, but it is a flag that indicates that the duration of the probability change state is a predetermined period (for example, the number of special pattern lotteries is 20 or less) due to winning the fall lottery, and is set to ON if the probability change state ends in a short period of time.

The area in the probability variable state selection 2 table 222df2 that is referenced when the short fall flag 223da is set to off has the same contents as those in the probability variable state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Here, we will specifically explain the contents of the areas that are referenced when the short fall flag 223da is set to on.

When the short fall flag 223da is set to on, during the first period (period when the number of special pattern changes is 1 to 20) in which the operation timing is a high-speed change period, the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "none" indicating that the operation effect is not executed, in the range of "150 to 189", "reach suggestion" indicating an effect that suggests whether the executing change effect will be in a reach state during the third pattern change, in the range of "140 to 189", "state suggestion" indicating an effect to suggest the currently set game state, and in the range of "190 to 198", "state suggestion" indicating an effect to suggest the currently set game state. In addition, when the operation method is "long push", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is transitioned is specified.

In addition, when the operation timing is within the normal time-saving variable period (second period), the operation method is "normal press", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "background mode transition" indicating a transition to background mode is specified, and in the range of "190 to 198", "state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the currently set game state is specified. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the currently set game state is specified.

And, when the operation timing is in a specific period (during the 50th special pattern change), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, when the operation timing is in the normal time-saving change period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode will be switched to, and in the range of "190 to 198", "early fall notification" indicating an effect to notify that the probability change state was set after the previous big win game ended, but the fall lottery was won early and the game was switched to the time-saving state, is specified. Also, when the operation method is "long push", "past state suggestion" indicating an effect to suggest the game state that was set in the past (at the time when the "chance mode" was set (after the big win game ended)) is specified in the range of "0 to 198" of the acquired effect counter 223f.

As with the first control example described above, the various operation effects in this fourth control example may be based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, rather than on the lottery results for the special pattern variation executed this time. For example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b may be used to determine in advance the timing of winning the drop lottery, and the operation effects may be configured to be executable based on the determination results. Specifically, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read in the order in which the special pattern lottery is executed, and it is determined whether the information indicating the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 included in each winning information indicates a value that wins the drop lottery. In this case, information corresponding to the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 that wins the drop lottery may be stored in advance in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the determination may be performed based on the stored information and the information indicating the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 included in the winning information.

In this control example, where the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b has the winning order of the special symbol lottery decided, that is, the second special symbol lottery is executed in priority to the first special symbol lottery, if there is no winning information for the second special symbol lottery that will win the drop lottery, a process is executed to calculate the remaining change time of the currently running special symbol change and the change time of the special symbol change corresponding to each of the winning information of the second special symbol lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and the period during which the drop lottery cannot be won, that is, the period during which the probability change state continues (the most advantageous period), is determined. Then, a most advantageous period suggestion presentation mode that notifies the player of the determined most advantageous period can be executed as an operation presentation.

By configuring in this way, the period during which the player will not win the drop lottery can be suggested (informed) to the player, allowing the player to play with peace of mind. In addition, the display mode of this most advantageous period suggestion can be configured to display at least a portion of the total time of each variable time resulting as the most advantageous period. This allows the player to understand at least the duration of the most advantageous period. In addition, by displaying the most advantageous period as a time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many times the special pattern lottery can be executed during the most advantageous period, so that even in a pachinko machine 10 in which a variation pattern with a longer variation time is set to have a higher possibility of winning the jackpot, a novel gameplay can be provided in which the player is made to expect that a short variation time will be set as the variation pattern of the special pattern variation.

As described above, when the operation performance is executed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the operation performance may be executed immediately after the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means), or the operation performance may be executed at the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means) and the special pattern variation is newly started in the state where the performance mode of the operation performance is determined. In this case, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player has been accepted, and a notification means for notifying that a waiting period until the operation performance is executed is in progress. This can prevent the player from feeling suspicious about the fact that the operation performance is not executed despite the operation of the frame button 22. In addition, in the performance that notifies the player of the most advantageous period, the most advantageous period may be displayed not in time as described above, but in the number of times that the special pattern variation is executed. In addition, if it is determined that the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b contains winning information indicating that the drop-out lottery will be won, the system may be configured to calculate the period until the drop-out lottery is won and the high probability state of the special pattern transitions to a low probability state, and to execute a presentation suggesting that the drop-out lottery will be won or a presentation suggesting the remaining period until the high probability state of the special pattern ends.

<Regarding the control process in the fourth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 227 to Fig. 229, the control process contents executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this fourth control example that are different from the first control example described above will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this fourth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above in that it has a falling lottery function as described above and that the duration of the game state set after the end of the big win game has been changed, and the control contents relating to these differences are different. Specifically, the control contents of the main control device in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above are different in that the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S258 in FIG. 227) is executed instead of the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158), the pre-reading process 4 (see S653 in FIG. 228) is executed instead of the pre-reading process (see S613 in FIG. 162), and the jackpot end process 4 (see S1960 in FIG. 229) is executed instead of the jackpot end process (see S1910 in FIG. 170), but are otherwise the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S258) will be explained with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S258). When this special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S258) is executed, the same process of S301 as the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) is executed, and then it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203i is greater than 0 (S351). Here, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203i is not greater than 0, that is, the special symbol is not in a high probability state (S351: No), the same processes of S302 to S307 as the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the process of S351 determines that the value of the probability bonus counter 203i is greater than 0, i.e., that there is a high probability of a special symbol (S351: Yes), then the acquired value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 is compared with the value specified in the fall lottery table 202da (S352), and it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won (S353).

If it is determined that the drop lottery has been won (S353: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203i is reset to 0 (S354), a drop command is set to indicate that the high probability state of the special symbol has transitioned to a low probability state (S355), and the same processes of S302 to S307 as the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) are executed, and this process ends. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed with the low probability state of the special symbol set. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S353 that the drop lottery has not been won (S353: No), the processes of S353 to S355 are skipped, and the same processes of S302 to S307 as the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) are executed, and this process ends. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed with the high probability state of the special symbol set.

As explained above, in this fourth control example, when the conditions for executing the special pattern lottery are met (when special pattern jackpot determination process 4 (see S258 in Figure 227) has been executed), the drop-out lottery is executed before the special pattern lottery is actually executed. By configuring it in this way, the special pattern lottery can be executed immediately in response to the result of the drop-out lottery, providing players with a fair game.

The timing of the fall lottery and the timing of the special symbol lottery may be configured to be different from that of this control example. For example, the fall lottery may be configured to be executed after the special symbol lottery is executed. In this case, the special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the fall lottery is executed immediately thereafter. Therefore, by the time the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the high probability state of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (by the time the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed), an event occurs in which the fall lottery is won and the low probability state of the special symbol is set. When such a state occurs, for example, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to execute a fall notification effect to indicate that the currently executed special symbol variation is the last variation in which the special symbol lottery was executed in the high probability state, and that the next special symbol lottery will be executed in the low probability state of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay more attention to the result of the special symbol variation being executed.

In addition, in this control example, when the drop lottery is won, a process is executed to transition the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state before the next special symbol lottery is executed, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the drop lottery is won, the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol continues may be subtracted by 2 or more (the value of the probability change counter 203i is subtracted by 2 or more), or the remaining number of times that the special symbol lottery may be executed during the high probability state of the special symbol is set to a predetermined number (for example, 2 times). Even in such a case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the most advantageous game state (probability change state) will continue due to winning the drop lottery, so that the player can play with a sense of tension.

In this control example, if the drop-out lottery is not won, i.e., if the high probability state of the special pattern continues, no effect is executed to suggest or inform the player of this, making it difficult for the player to understand the period during which the high probability state of the special pattern continues (the period during which it continues); however, without being limited to this, the system may be configured to inform the player of some cases in which the drop-out lottery is not won. In this case, for example, the fall lottery table 202da may be configured to specify not only the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 that is determined to be a win (fall), but also a value that is determined to be a specific miss (for example, 998,999), and when the value is determined to be such, a command indicating a specific miss may be set to execute an effect to indicate to the player that the result of the fall lottery is a specific miss. Alternatively, a command may be set to indicate that the result of the fall lottery is a miss, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating that the result of the fall lottery is a miss, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to execute an effect indicating that the result of the fall lottery is a miss, and if it is determined that an effect should be executed based on the lottery, a miss effect may be executed.

Next, the contents of pre-reading process 4 (S653) in this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the contents of pre-reading process 4 (S653). This pre-reading process 4 (S653) differs from the pre-reading process (see S613 in FIG. 162) executed in the first control example described above in that the types of counters read out in the process of reading out the various counters stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage areas (first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) are different, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

When pre-reading process 4 (S653) is executed, the first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, fall selection counter Cd1, and change type counter CS1 newly stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area (first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) are read (S751), and then the same processes of S702 to S705 as those executed in the pre-reading process executed in the first control example described above (see S613 in FIG. 162) are executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this fourth control example, in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 161), when a new lottery right for a special pattern (special pattern reserved) is acquired (when new winning information is stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area), the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 is also read out in the pre-read process 4 (S653) that is executed, and a winning command including the acquired value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 is set and can be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. This makes it possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to determine whether the acquired special pattern reserved balls contain information indicating the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 that will win the fall lottery. Therefore, it is possible to execute a suggestive performance that suggests the period until the fall lottery is won.

Next, the contents of jackpot end process 4 (S1960) will be explained with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end process 4 (S1960). This jackpot end process 4 (S1960) differs from the jackpot end process of the first control example described above (see S1910 in FIG. 170) in that the processing contents for setting the value of the time-saving counter 203h are different, but the rest of the contents are the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations are omitted.

When jackpot end process 4 (S1960) is executed, first, the same processes of S2101 and S2102 as those of the jackpot end process of the first control example described above (see S1910 in FIG. 170) are executed, then the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and a value corresponding to the jackpot type are set in the time-saving counter 203h (S2153), a state command is set based on the currently set value of the special probability counter 203i and the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S2104), the jackpot in progress flag 203k and the special probability setting flag 203m are set to off (S2105), and this process ends.

The processing content of S2153 will now be described in detail. In this control example, the game status storage area 203g is configured to be able to temporarily store the current game status, the game status set at the time of the previous jackpot win, and the jackpot type to be selected in the event of a jackpot win. When the processing of S2153 is executed, the game status at the time of the jackpot win and the jackpot type stored in the game status storage area 203g are read out, and the value specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d is set in the time-saving counter 203h.

In this control example, the value to be set in the time-saving counter 203h is determined when the jackpot end process 4 is executed, that is, when all rounds of play during the jackpot game are completed. By configuring it in this way, the value to be set in the time-saving counter 203h can be varied depending on whether or not a setting condition that can be satisfied during a round of play in a jackpot game, for example, a setting condition that is satisfied when a specific area (V gate 65V) is passed during a round game (V round game), is satisfied.

Regardless of the configuration used in this control example, for example, when the jackpot game starts or when the type of jackpot that has been won is selected, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be determined based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and a value according to the determined content may be set in the jackpot end process 4 (see S1960). By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to hold information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot during the jackpot game period, so that the memory capacity can be reduced.

Next, referring to Figures 230 and 231, the control processing contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example are described below with respect to those executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. This fourth control example is significantly different from the first control example described above in that a fall lottery is executed, and the control processing contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 also differ in that processing related to the fall lottery is executed.

Specifically, the difference is that command determination process 4 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) is executed instead of command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175). Since the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions are omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process 4 (S4162) will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (S4162). As shown in FIG. 230, in this command determination process 4 (S4162), when it is determined that a big win-related command has not been received (S4217: No), it is then determined whether a fall command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4251), and when it is determined that a fall command has been received (S4251: Yes), the fall-related process (S4252) is executed. Note that, when it is determined that a fall command has not been received in the process of S4251 (S4251: No), or after the fall-related process (S4252) has been executed, the same process of S4219 as the command determination process (S4112) of the first control example described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 231, the contents of the fall-related process (S4252) executed in command determination process 4 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall-related process (S4252). This fall-related process (S4252) is a process executed when a fall command (see S355 in FIG. 227) is received, which is set when it is determined that the fall lottery has been won in the fall lottery executed by the main control device 110 (see S352, S353 in FIG. 227), and is intended to execute a process for determining the timing at which the fall command was received (the timing at which the high probability state of the special pattern ended).

When the fall-related process (S4252) is executed, first, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is read (S5501), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 80 or more (S5502). The value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times (the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the high probability state of normal symbols) set after the end of the jackpot game, and is decremented by one each time a special symbol lottery is executed. For example, if the number of time-saving times is set to 100 after the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won before the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 20. In other words, in the process of S5502, it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won early despite the high probability state of special symbols being set.

If it is determined in the process of S5502 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 80 or more (S5502: Yes), the short fall flag 223da is set to ON (S5503), the time-saving state is set in the slave state setting area 223g (S5504), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5502 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 80 or more (S5502: No), the process of S5503 is skipped, the process of S5504 is executed, and this process ends.

By setting the short fall flag 223da on in the processing of S5503, the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (see S4107 in FIG. 186) determines that the frame button 22 has been operated during chance mode, and when selecting the presentation mode by referring to the probability change state selection 2 table 222df2 (FIG. 226(b)), a different data table than when the short fall flag 223da is set off is referenced to select the presentation mode. This allows the player to know the result of the fall lottery after the fact based on the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

<Example of the second control>
Next, referring to Fig. 232, among the third pattern variation performances executed in the above-mentioned second control example, the reverse variation display performance (see Fig. 205(d)) which is a performance in which the variation direction of the sub-pattern fz is different from the variation direction of the main pattern sz will be described. Fig. 232 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed during the reverse variation display performance.

As described above, in the second control example, the main pattern sz, which includes identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern, and the sub-pattern fz, which is different from the main pattern sz, are configured to be independently displayable and controllable. For example, as shown in FIG. 202(b), the sub-pattern fz is displayed before the main pattern sz is displayed, and then the sub-pattern fz is displayed before the main pattern sz is displayed stationary, thereby enabling a reach line notice effect to be executed that notifies the player of only the stationary display position of the main pattern sz. In addition, as shown in FIG. 205(d), a reverse display effect is configured to be executed in which the sub-pattern fz is displayed stationary for a predetermined period (3 seconds) in a direction different from the direction of the main pattern sz in accordance with the start timing of the special pattern change.

The contents of this reverse variable display effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 232. First, a variable pattern command for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is sent from the main control device 110. Then, when the variable pattern command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, a process for determining the performance mode of the variable performance executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 (variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182)) is executed to determine the performance mode (variable pattern) for the main pattern sz. This makes it possible to reliably set the performance mode of the main pattern sz, which is the identification information (identification pattern) for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern, based on the result of the special pattern lottery executed by the main control device 110. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main pattern sz for indicating a lottery result different from the result of the special pattern lottery actually executed from being stopped and displayed.

After that, a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz based on the presentation mode of the main pattern sz determined by the sound lamp control device 113. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a presentation mode that results in a reach state has been set as the presentation mode for the main pattern sz, and if it is determined that a presentation mode that results in a reach state has been set, a process is executed to select the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz. Note that, if a presentation mode that results in a reach state has not been set as the presentation mode for the main pattern sz, a variation pattern corresponding to the presentation mode set for the main pattern sz is set for the sub-pattern fz. This allows the sub-pattern fz to be displayed in a variably synchronized manner with the main pattern sz, which is displayed in a variably manner in a presentation mode (variable pattern) set based on the lottery result of the special pattern. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed in a variably manner as if they were a pattern row arranged in a specific order.

In the above example, when the performance mode for the main pattern sz is in a reach state, the process for selecting the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a performance mode that is a specific reach state (e.g., a super reach state) is set among the reach states, the process for selecting the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz may be executed. In some cases where the performance mode set for the main pattern sz is in a non-reach state, the process for selecting the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz may be executed. In other words, when the performance mode of the main pattern sz is set in a performance mode that indicates that the result of the special pattern lottery is likely to be a jackpot, it is sufficient to configure the process for selecting the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz to be easy to execute. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot just by setting (executing) a performance mode different from the normal performance mode (the performance mode synchronized with the performance mode of the main pattern sz) as the sub-pattern fz.

In the above example, when the process of selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is not executed, the presentation mode (synchronous presentation mode) corresponding to the presentation mode of the main pattern sz is set for the sub-pattern fz, and the presentation of the sub-pattern fz is synchronized with the presentation of the main pattern sz. As a result, the sub-pattern fz is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 to follow the display of the main pattern sz, so that the same display as the display of the third pattern in the first control example described above (see FIG. 122(b)) is executed. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the multiple main patterns sz and the multiple sub-patterns fz are displayed in a predetermined order (1 (main pattern sz) → triangle mark (sub-pattern fz) → 2 (main pattern sz) → ...) as shown in FIG. 122(b).

Therefore, when the presentation mode of the main pattern sz and the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz are set differently, a presentation that is unexpected for the player can be provided, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. Also, since the process for setting the presentation mode for the main pattern sz and the process for setting the presentation mode for the sub-pattern fz are set differently, the process for displaying the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz in a non-synchronized pattern can be easily executed. In other words, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to set the presentation mode (variation pattern) for all tertiary symbols (main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz) as in the first control example described above, when setting a presentation mode (variation pattern) in which only the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz is varied, it is necessary to set a presentation mode (variation pattern) in which only the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz is varied for all tertiary symbols (main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz); however, by configuring the presentation mode for the main symbol sz and the presentation mode for the sub-symbol fz to be independently configurable as in the second control example, it is only necessary to variably set the presentation mode for the sub-symbol fz, and the processing for setting the presentation mode for the tertiary symbols can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 232, the explanation will be continued. When the process of selecting the presentation mode of the sub-symbol fz is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win or not, and the presentation mode of the sub-symbol fz is selected by referring to the determination result using a sub-symbol presentation selection table (not shown). Here, the sub-symbol presentation selection table (not shown) specifies the presentation mode of the sub-symbol fz at a predetermined ratio in correspondence with the result of the special symbol lottery and the presentation mode set for the main symbol sz. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a "big win" and "double reach" is set as the presentation mode of the main symbol sz, it is specified that "reach line notice presentation" is selected 60% of the time, "reverse variable display presentation" is selected 20% of the time, and "no sub-symbol presentation" is selected 20% of the time.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot" and "single reach" is set as the presentation mode of the main symbol sz, there is a 20% chance that a "reach line notice presentation" will be selected, a 20% chance that a "reverse fluctuation display presentation" will be selected, and a 60% chance that "no secondary symbol presentation" will be selected.

Furthermore, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a "miss" and "double reach" is set as the presentation mode of the main symbol sz, then it is stipulated that "reverse fluctuation display presentation" will be selected 40% of the time, and "no secondary symbol presentation" will be selected 60% of the time, and if "single reach" is set as the presentation mode of the main symbol sz, then it is stipulated that "reach line notice presentation" will be selected 5% of the time, "reverse fluctuation display presentation" will be selected 5% of the time, and "no secondary symbol presentation" will be selected 90% of the time.

When the "reverse variable display effect" is selected using the sub-symbol effect selection table (not shown) thus defined, a display mode selection process is then executed to select the display mode of the sub-symbol fz. In this display mode selection process, a process is executed to select the display mode of the sub-symbol fz to be used in the current third symbol variable effect (the performance mode of the sub-symbol fz), and the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is selected according to the result of the special symbol lottery and the set jackpot type. The display mode of the sub-symbol fz that can be selected here is the display mode stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, which was described with reference to FIG. 203(c) in the second control example described above.

In other words, in the display mode selection process executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a display sub-pattern mode command (display command) for specifying the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is set, and when the display control device 114 receives the set display sub-pattern mode command (display command), a process is executed to read out the corresponding image data from the character memory area 234a2.

In the display mode selection process, as shown in FIG. 203(c), for example, one of the display modes SD1 of the "triangle mark" which is the normal display mode of the sub-pattern fz, the display mode SD2 imitating "bubbles" which indicates a high probability of winning, and the display mode SD3 imitating the "number 16" which indicates that a favorable jackpot game (16 rounds) advantageous to the player will be played if the jackpot is won is selected. The display mode SD2 is easier to select when the result of the current special pattern lottery is a jackpot than when the result is not a jackpot (miss). Furthermore, the display mode SD3 is easier to select when a favorable jackpot game is played based on the result of the current special pattern lottery than when a favorable jackpot game is not played (when a jackpot is not won, or when a jackpot is won but a jackpot game other than the favorable jackpot game is played).

This configuration has the effect of making the player interested in both the presentation mode set for the sub-pattern fz and the display mode set for the sub-pattern fz, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Figure 232 shows a state in which the "reverse variable display effect" is executed as the effect mode of the sub-pattern fz, and the display mode SD2 imitating "bubbles" is set as the display mode of the sub-pattern fz, and the "reverse variable display effect" is executed in which the main pattern sz is displayed to vary leftward from the viewpoint of Figure 232, and the sub-pattern fz is displayed to vary rightward from the viewpoint of Figure 232. In this way, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed to vary in opposite directions as the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that a variable effect with a sense of surprise can be provided to the player. Furthermore, as an effect mode using the sub-pattern fz, the sub-pattern fz is displayed to vary in a variable display direction different from the variable display direction of the main pattern sz, so that the player can be easily informed that the effect mode of the sub-pattern fz is different from the normal effect mode.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 232, all sub-symbols fz displayed on the display surface are displayed in the display mode SD2 that imitates a "bubble" selected by the above-mentioned display mode selection process, but this is not limited to this, and only the display mode of one of the multiple sub-symbols fz may be changed. In this case, it may be configured so that only the display mode of the sub-symbol fz arranged near the main symbol sz that is finally stopped and displayed can be easily changed to the display mode selected by the above-mentioned display mode selection process. This makes it easier to predict the stopped display mode of the main symbol sz based on the display mode of the sub-symbol fz.

In addition, the display screen shown in FIG. 232 shows an example in which all sub-patterns fz displayed on the display surface are the same size, but the size (magnification ratio), rotation angle, translucency value, etc. of the sub-patterns fz may be set to be different. In this case, it is sufficient to change the values specified in the display data table (see FIG. 207) for displaying each sub-pattern fz.

In addition, FIG. 232 shows an example in which the display mode of the sub-pattern fz switches from the normal "triangle mark" display mode SD1 to a display mode imitating a "bubble" SD2 at the timing when the third pattern change starts, and a reverse change display performance is executed, but this is not limited to the above. The display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be switched in the period from when the previous third pattern change is stopped and displayed until the current third pattern change starts, as a timing before the third pattern change starts, or the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be switched in the period from when the current third pattern change starts until it stops.

When the process of switching the display mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed during the period from when the previous third pattern change is stopped to when the current third pattern change is started, for example, it may be configured to analyze whether it is included in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b by a pre-reading process, and to change the display mode of the sub-pattern fz that is stopped when the next special pattern lottery (change) to be executed results in a specific lottery result (for example, a big win). In this case, the display mode used for the variation performance of the sub-pattern fz to be executed next is determined before the performance mode of the main pattern sz to indicate the lottery result of the next special pattern lottery (change) to be executed is set. In this way, by using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the timing of notifying the player of each mode used for the performance mode of the third pattern change to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery can be made different, so that the player can be interested in the third pattern change performance to be executed.

In addition, when a process for switching the display mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed during the period from when the current third pattern change starts to when it stops, the sub-pattern fz may be displayed in the display mode before the switch at the time when the third pattern change starts, or the sub-pattern fz may be configured to be displayed after the process for switching the display mode is executed.

<Switching control of the switching valve executed during a big win game>
In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as explained using the jackpot operation setting process (see S1906 in FIG. 169) and the V round process (see S2251 in FIG. 219), when it is determined that a specific round game (V round game) has started, the control process for the switching valve 65y (see FIG. 120(b) or FIG. 213(b)) is executed. In other words, the specific round game (V round game) is executed only when the jackpot game to be executed is a sure-variable jackpot game, and the specific round (V round game) is not executed when the jackpot game is a normal jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it was possible to suppress the ball from entering the V (passing through to the specific area (V gate 65V)) during the normal jackpot game, but since it is necessary to change the content of the control process for the switching valve 65y depending on the type of jackpot game to be executed, there was a problem that the processing load during the jackpot game was increased.

Therefore, a control process other than the control process contents for the switching valve 65y used in each of the above control examples may be used. For example, a V-round game is also executed in a normal jackpot game, but the conditions for ending the V-round game may be different from those in a guaranteed jackpot game, so that balls cannot enter the variable winning device 65 during the V-round game. In addition, as in the fourth control example in which the above-mentioned V-round process (see S2251 in FIG. 219) is executed, when the switching valve 65y is controlled based on the number of winning balls after the V-round game is executed, the number of winning balls for controlling the switching valve 65y in a normal jackpot game may be set to a number greater than the number of winning balls for ending the V-round game (for example, 10 balls), so that the switching control of the switching valve 65y is not executed.

The control contents (switching conditions) of the switching valve 65y may be set to be the same for both the special jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) during the normal jackpot game, the passage may not be processed effectively. In other words, even if the ball passes through the specific area during the normal jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol may not be set during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, regardless of the type of jackpot game, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the jackpot game (since the opening period of the jackpot game has been set), switching control is executed so that the switching valve 65y is in an open state for a predetermined period of time, and the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 65b during the jackpot game is configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot game, thereby making it possible to configure the probability of winning a V prize different for each type of jackpot game.

In the second control example and the modified example of the second control example described above, both the presentation mode (variation pattern) of the main pattern sz and the presentation mode (variation pattern) of the sub-pattern fz are configured to be set (selected) by the voice lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, the presentation mode (variation pattern) may be configured to be set by the display control device 114. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that only the presentation mode of the main pattern sz, which indicates the result of the special pattern lottery, is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is set by the display control device 114.

The second control example and a modified example of the second control example have been explained above, but when setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation that dynamically displays various patterns executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, it is sufficient that the presentation mode is set independently for each type of dynamically displayed pattern and the display control is executed independently, and a configuration other than that shown in the above-mentioned control example may be used.

For example, multiple display layers for displaying the sub-pattern fz may be provided, and the sub-pattern fz may be overlapped and variably displayed, as in the modified example of the second control example described above with reference to FIG. 211.

In addition, multiple display layers are provided, and display priorities are set for each layer. When the display modes displayed on the display layers overlap on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the display mode displayed on the layer with the highest priority is displayed so that it is visible to the player. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, a display layer without a priority may be provided, and the display modes displayed on multiple display layers may be displayed overlappingly on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. In this case, for example, when executing the "reverse variable display performance" referred to in FIG. 232, the display may be controlled (semi-transparency value and magnification rate of each sub-pattern are set) so that an overlapping sub-pattern is displayed in which a sub-pattern fz imitating a "bubble" is displayed within the sub-pattern fz of a "triangle mark", and the display may be displayed in a display mode that suggests in advance that the display mode of the sub-pattern fz will change from a "triangle mark" to a "bubble".

As explained above, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, the game state can be set to a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and two types of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state can be set to a special probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). Furthermore, the time-saving state is set after the special probability state ends.

When an advantageous game state is set, the system is configured to notify the player of the period until the next normal state is set; for example, when a high probability game state is set, the period until the time-saving state that is set after the high probability game state ends and the normal state is set, is the duration of the advantageous game state. By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified of the period until the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player ends, rather than the period until the currently set game state ends, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

In addition, when a period during which multiple advantageous game states continue in succession is notified as the duration of one advantageous game state, the content and frequency of the various effects executed by the third pattern display device 81 are configured to allow the player to grasp the detailed game state that is currently set. By configuring it in this way, the player can predict the current game state while being aware of the period until the normal state is set, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, of the multiple advantageous game states, the most advantageous game state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player is set first, and then the normal advantageous game state (time-saving state) that is less advantageous than the most advantageous game state (high probability state) is set; however, any configuration is acceptable as long as multiple advantageous game states can be set in succession, and for example, in addition to the normal state, high probability state, and time-saving state, a potential state (high probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns) is also set as game states, and in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that the potential state is more advantageous to the player than the high probability state, the game states (high probability state, time-saving state, potential state) in which the special pattern or normal pattern is in a high probability state become advantageous game states that are advantageous to the player. The value of the probability-change counter 203i, which indicates the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues, is configured to be set to be greater than the value of the time-saving counter 203h, which indicates the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues.

In the pachinko machine 10 thus configured, for example, by configuring the value of the probability change counter 203i to be "100" and the value of the time-saving counter 203h to be "50" as a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game, the probability change state is set as the advantageous game state after the end of the jackpot game, and then the potential probability state is set. Even in such a case, as in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, it is preferable to notify the period during which multiple advantageous game states continue in succession, that is, the period until the potential probability state set after the probability change state ends, as the duration of one advantageous game state. Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure the device to be capable of executing a transition suggestion performance that can suggest to the player whether or not the currently set game state may transition to another game state during the duration of the advantageous game state. This allows the player to understand only that there is a possibility of transitioning to another game state during the advantageous game state, and therefore provides the player with the fun of predicting the content of the game to be executed during the advantageous game state. Furthermore, if there is a possibility that the currently set game state will transition to another game state during the duration of the advantageous game state, the system may be configured to execute an advantageous transition suggestion display that can suggest whether the game state after the transition will be more advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the system may be configured to execute a suggestion display that suggests the timing at which the game state will transition during the advantageous game state. By configuring the system in this way, the player can enjoy playing during the period until the normal state is set while still knowing the period.

In the first and fourth control examples described above, the advantageous game state is ended when a jackpot is won during an advantageous game state. However, the most advantageous game state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player is set first among the multiple advantageous game states, and then the normal advantageous game state (time-saving state) that is less advantageous to the player than the most advantageous game state (high probability state) is set. Therefore, winning a jackpot during an advantageous game state is not disadvantageous to the player. However, in a pachinko machine 10 configured such that the normal advantageous game state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player is set first among the multiple advantageous game states, and then the most advantageous game state (latent probability state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal advantageous game state (high probability state) is set, it may be more advantageous for the player to have the most advantageous game state set without winning a jackpot than to have a jackpot win during the normal advantageous game state.

Therefore, it is preferable to configure the system so that a period effect is executed that allows the player to distinguish between periods in which winning a jackpot as a result of the special pattern lottery executed during the advantageous game state is advantageous to the player and periods in which it is disadvantageous to the player. This allows the player to pay close attention to the results of the special pattern lottery based on the contents identified by the period effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player if set during a normal advantageous game state and a jackpot type that is not disadvantageous to the player even if set during a normal advantageous game state as the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, it may be configured to execute an effect that suggests whether or not the jackpot is advantageous to the player based on the contents of the period effect and the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won. This allows the player to be interested not only in the game of aiming to win a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, but also in the timing of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won.

In the first control example described above, one of multiple (two) types of advantageous game states (high probability state, time-saving state) is set after the jackpot game ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that a normal state can be set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to have the player play in the hope that an advantageous game state will be set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in the first control example described above, a presentation mode (super chance mode) that notifies the player that a high probability state has been set after the end of the jackpot game, and a presentation mode (chance mode) that notifies the player that a favorable game state (high probability state or time-saving state) that is more favorable to the player than the normal state has been set after the end of the jackpot game are set according to the presentation result of the jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game. This makes it possible to prevent meaningless presentations from being executed in which a chance mode is set after the end of the jackpot game, despite the notification that a high probability state will be set after the end of the jackpot game being displayed in the jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game.

For the technology of the first control example configured in this way, for example, a presentation mode selection means is provided that allows the player to arbitrarily select the presentation mode to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and by making any presentation mode selectable in advance by the presentation mode selection means, the presentation mode of the jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game and the presentation mode to be set after the end of the jackpot game may be set in accordance with the content selected by the presentation mode selection means. Specifically, the presentation mode selection means is configured to select between a "full notification mode" that notifies the game state to be actually set and a "chance notification mode" that notifies only that a favorable game state has been set as the presentation mode to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and the player can select either presentation mode by operating the operation means (frame button 22) during the period when the special symbol lottery is not being executed on the pachinko machine 10.

A storage means is provided for temporarily storing the presentation mode selected by the player, and information for identifying the presentation mode stored in the storage means is displayed on a portion of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (e.g., the sub-display area Ds), so that the currently set presentation mode is always identifiable by the player. Then, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the presentation mode stored in the storage means is read out. For example, when the "complete notification mode" is stored in the storage means, a V notification effect is executed as a jackpot game effect to inform the player that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during the jackpot game, and when the ball actually passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, an ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that a high probability state will be set after the jackpot game ends (see Figs. 127(b) and 127(d)). When the ball does not pass through the specific area, an ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that a time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends (see Figs. 127(a) and 127(c)). When a high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, a "super chance mode" (see Fig. 131(a)) indicating that the current game state is a high probability state is set, and when a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, a "chance mode" (see Fig. 128(a)) indicating that the current game state is a time-saving state is set. By configuring it in this way, the player can be reliably notified of the game state that will be set, and whether or not a V win has occurred, which is the trigger for determining the game state.

On the other hand, if the "chance notification mode" is stored in the storage means, the V notification effect described above is not executed as a jackpot game effect, and the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends regardless of the game state to be set. By configuring in this way, the player can play without being notified of the game state to be set and the presence or absence of a V win, which is the trigger for determining the game state. If the presentation mode selection means has not selected a presentation mode, the "initial mode" is stored in the storage means, as in the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, and as in the first control example described above, whether or not to execute a V notification effect during a jackpot game is determined by lottery, a jackpot game effect based on the lottery result is executed, and the presentation mode after the jackpot game ends is set based on the presentation result of the jackpot game effect.

This configuration allows players to seamlessly choose the presentation mode they desire, preventing them from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Furthermore, as a means for selecting various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10, a performance frequency selection means may be provided that allows the player to arbitrarily select the selection ratio of various performance modes (see FIG. 148) that are selected for the operation effects executed when the chance mode is selected. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a performance frequency selection means that allows the player to select the selection ratio so that the selection ratio of various performance modes selected when the probability bonus state is set and when the time-saving state is set can be greatly deviated or the difference in the selection ratio can be made small. Even when such a configuration is used, any performance mode desired by the player can be provided without any sense of discomfort, preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In the above-described first to fourth control examples, a pachinko machine 10 has been described that is configured so that a high probability state (high probability state) of a special symbol is set after the end of a jackpot game when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65V) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. In this way, as a configuration that can provide a player with a special game different from the bonus game based on the ball passing through a specific area while a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is being executed, For example, if a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, which is a lottery result different from the big prize, a second bonus game (small prize game) different from the bonus game (jackpot game) can be played, and a specific area can be provided through which a ball can pass that enters the variable ball entry means (which may be variable entry device 65, or another entry device may be provided separately) that opens during the second bonus game, and if the ball passes through the specific area during the second bonus game, a bonus game (jackpot game) can be played after the second bonus game (small prize game) has ended.

As a configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-mentioned control examples, as shown in FIG. 233, regardless of which game state is set, a game ball can be entered into the first ball entrance 64, which can trigger the execution of a first special pattern lottery, by performing a left-handed play, and a game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640, which can trigger the execution of a second special pattern lottery, by performing a right-handed play.

<Fifth control example>
Next, the fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 234 to Fig. 270. The fifth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 have been partially changed, and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. Also, the fifth control example differs in that the control contents executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. The rest of the contents are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the first control example described above, the game state can be set to a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), or a probability-change state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and the probability state of each symbol (special symbols, normal symbols) can be shifted from a low probability state to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game described above and when other end conditions (for example, an end condition that is met when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed reaches a predetermined number of times) are met, the probability state of each symbol (special symbols, normal symbols) can be shifted from a high probability state to a low probability state.

In other words, the system was configured so that unless a jackpot was won in the special pattern lottery, the opportunity to shift the probability state of each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) from a low probability state to a high probability state would not be established. In the first control example configured in this way, the jackpot game in which many prize balls can be awarded to the player and the setting of a high probability state (high probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) in which a lottery advantageous to the player is likely to be executed are both executed based on winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, so that a variety of benefits can be awarded to players who win a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, and players can be motivated to play with the aim of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery.

However, in the first control example described above, the probability state of each symbol can be shifted to a high probability state only when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. This causes a problem in that players who have not won a jackpot in the special symbol lottery are not given the bonus, and players who have not won a jackpot for a long period of time lose their motivation to play.

In contrast to this, in this fifth control example, a trigger other than a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery is provided as a trigger for transitioning the probability state of the normal pattern from a low probability state to a high probability state, and the system is configured so that a trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established in some lottery results (misses) in which the result of the special pattern lottery is different from a jackpot win.

In other words, even players who do not win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery can be given a bonus that is different from the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, in one special pattern lottery, the lottery result in which the jackpot game is executed and the lottery result in which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) is set can be provided to the player separately, making it easier to diversify the types of lottery results that are advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in this fifth control example, the ease with which a trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is established varies depending on the game state that is set. Specifically, when the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the game state, it is configured to be possible to determine whether or not a time-saving win (whether or not a trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is established) in addition to whether or not a jackpot has been won when a special symbol lottery is executed, and when a game state other than the normal state is set, it is configured to be possible to determine only whether or not a jackpot has been won when a special symbol lottery is executed.

By configuring it in this way, when the normal state is set, the triggers for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern are set to be the triggers that can be established when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery and the triggers that can be established when a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery, and in game states other than the normal state, the triggers for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern are set to be the triggers that can be established when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery. In other words, the normal state, where it is possible to determine whether or not a time-saving win has been won, is configured to have more triggers set for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern than game states other than the normal state.

As a result, the normal state, in which each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) is set to a low probability state and which is the game state in which it is most difficult to win in each symbol lottery (a game state that is disadvantageous to the player), makes it easier to set a high probability state for the normal symbol than other game states, and can increase the motivation of players playing in the normal state.

In addition, in this fifth control example, the game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set is configured to make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery than the game state (normal state, second high probability state) in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved) is configured to be memorizable (reserved and memorizable) up to a predetermined number (4). And, the game is configured to make it easier to win the time-saving lottery in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery.

In other words, when the game state transitions from any game state (probability bonus state, time-saving state) in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set to the normal state (when the game state transitions from an advantageous to an unfavorable game state for the player), the game is configured to make it easier to win the time-saving state if a second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state after the transition based on the execution right for the second special symbol lottery that was reserved and stored during the high probability state for normal symbols before the transition.

By configuring it in this way, even if the game state has shifted from favorable to unfavorable to the player, the player can be made to execute a special symbol lottery for a predetermined period of time that makes it easier for the player to return to a favorable game state, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing significantly when the normal state, which is a game state that is unfavorable to the player, is set. Also, in order to execute more second special symbol lotteries during the normal state, it is possible to motivate the player to play to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 until the last moment when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends, in order to end the high probability state of the normal symbol when the upper limit (4) of the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (reserved special symbol 2) has been acquired.

In the first control example described above, the high probability state of the normal symbol was set only based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, after the jackpot game ends, a high probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) or a time-saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) can be set as an advantageous game state favorable to the player. If the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state continues until 50 special symbol lotteries are performed, and then the time-saving state is set until 50 special symbol lotteries are performed, that is, until the number of special symbol lotteries since the jackpot game ends reaches 100. On the other hand, if the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving state is configured to continue until 100 special symbol lotteries are performed.

In contrast to this, in the fifth control example, as described above, in addition to when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the high probability state of the normal pattern can be set when a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery, and the ease of establishing the end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is different between the high probability state of the normal pattern (first time-saving) that is set based on winning a jackpot and the high probability state of the normal pattern (second time-saving) that is set based on winning the time-saving win.

Specifically, the number of time-saving times set as the end condition for the second time-saving is configured to be greater than the number of time-saving times set as the end condition for the first time-saving. In this way, when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set, it is possible to set a high probability state for a normal pattern with a different degree of advantage depending on the setting trigger (the trigger for setting the high probability state for a normal pattern). This makes it possible to interest the player not only in whether or not a high probability state for a normal pattern is set, but also in the game process of what trigger sets the high probability state for a normal pattern, making it easier for the player to continue playing.

In this fifth control example, the ease of achieving the time-saving end condition (number of time-saving times) is varied in order to vary the degree of advantage of the bonus given to the player in the high probability state of normal patterns, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to vary the ease of obtaining the reserved memory for the second special pattern lottery (opening pattern of the electric role 640a) between when the first time-saving is set and when the second time-saving is set, or to vary the degree of advantage of the bonus given when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery during the high probability state of normal patterns (for example, the number of prize balls given during jackpot play or the type of game state set after the jackpot play ends).

First, referring to FIG. 234, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 234 is a front view of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 234, the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example is significantly different from the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 119) in that the through gate 67 provided in the left area of the game board 13 (the area to the left of the variable display unit 80) has been removed, and the second ball entrance 640 to which the electric device 640a is attached and the variable winning device 65 that allows the game ball to win at least when a jackpot game is executed are arranged in different positions. Also, it is different in that the internal configuration of the variable winning device 65 has been changed. The rest of the contents are the same as those in the first control example described above, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 234, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the through gate 67, which is the ball entry port for establishing the chance to draw a lottery for a normal symbol, is arranged only in the right area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to draw a lottery for a normal symbol while playing a left-handed game in which the game ball is shot toward the left area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and enters the first ball entry port (winning port) 64.

The first ball entrance 64 is disposed below the variable display unit 80. The variable display unit 80 is disposed so as to divide the game area on the game board 13 into left and right, with a left flow path (left area) through which game balls can flow formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80, and a right flow path (right area) through which game balls can flow formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Game balls that flow down the left flow path (area) do not flow down the right flow path (area), and game balls that flow down the right flow path (area) do not flow down the left flow path (area).

Below the variable display unit 80, a lower area (common area) is formed in which both the game balls that have flowed down the left flow path (area) and the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path (area) can flow down, and an outlet 66 is provided at the bottom of the lower area (the bottom of the game board 13). The first ball entrance 64 is located at a position where both the game balls that have flowed down the left flow path and the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path can enter. In addition, it is possible to configure it so that only the game balls that flow down the left flow path can enter the first ball entrance 64, different from the configuration of the fifth control example. By configuring it in this way, when a right-hand hit game is performed in which the game ball flows down to the right area, for example, when a game is performed in which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 by a right-hand hit game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the first special pattern lottery is executed.

The second ball entrance 640 is located at a position where game balls that have flowed down the right flow path can enter more easily than game balls that have flowed down the left flow path. The second ball entrance 640 has a horizontally long rectangular opening formed in the game board 13, a flow path through which game balls can flow down, and a photosensor that detects game balls that have entered the opening is provided. An electric device 640a is provided on the front side of the opening as a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate that can close the opening, and an opening solenoid (not shown) is provided to drive the opening and closing to the front side with the opening and closing plate as an axis. The opening of the second ball entrance 640 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter or it is difficult to enter. When a normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric device 640a downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state that makes it easier for the ball to enter the opening of the second ball entrance 640, and the device operates to repeat this open state and the normal closed state a predetermined number of times determined by the game state.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (special symbol lottery) is held when a winning ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. In the special symbol lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery) and whether or not a time-saving win has been won to set a high probability state for normal symbols (time-saving lottery), and is configured to determine the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been won (if a jackpot has been won), and to determine the type of time-saving win if a time-saving win has been won.

In this fifth control example, different jackpot types are defined for the first special symbol that triggers a lottery when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second special symbol that triggers a lottery when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and a 16R sure-win jackpot (jackpot A5) and a 6R sure-win jackpot (jackpot B5) are defined for the first special symbol. Also, a 16R sure-win jackpot (jackpot A5), a 6R sure-win jackpot (jackpot C5), and a 6R sure-win jackpot (jackpot D5) are defined for the second special symbol. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only show whether the lottery result is a jackpot as the stopping symbol after the fluctuation ends, but also show a symbol according to the jackpot type if it is a jackpot.

Here, "16R Probability Jackpot (Jackpot A5)" refers to a jackpot type in which a maximum of 16 rounds of jackpot play is played, and a probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends. In this fifth control example, different periods can be set as the period during which the high probability state of the special symbols continues (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period). For jackpot A5, the special symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 60 times until the 60th special symbol change stops, and the normal symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 60 times until the 60th special symbol change stops.

In other words, for the jackpot A5, the same conditions (60th special symbol change stop) are stipulated for the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period. Therefore, when the jackpot type is set to A5, a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the 60th special symbol change is stopped and displayed during the high probability state, both the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period end and the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set. By configuring it in this way, the game state transitions directly from the game state in which the high probability state for normal symbols is set to the normal state, making it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery based on the lottery right for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) acquired during the high probability state for normal symbols in the normal state.

"6R Probable Jackpot (Jackpot B5)" is a type of jackpot in which a maximum of 6 rounds of jackpot play is played, and a probable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends. The end condition for this jackpot B5 to end the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period is the same as that of the above-mentioned jackpot A5 (the condition that is met when the 60th special symbol variation is stopped and displayed). In other words, jackpot B5 is a jackpot type that differs from jackpot A5 only in the number of rounds (number of rounds) played during the jackpot play.

As described above, in the fifth control example, in the normal state, which is a state in which the probability of a normal symbol is low, it is configured so that it is difficult to make the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640, so that a left-handed play is performed in the normal state to make the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 and to execute the first special symbol lottery. Then, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, either jackpot A or jackpot B is set as the jackpot type. In other words, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, which is mainly executed in the normal state, a jackpot game with a different number of rounds according to the set jackpot type is executed, and a probability variable state with the same end condition is set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, regardless of which jackpot type is set, the player can play under the same conditions after the jackpot game ends. Note that in this fifth control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a jackpot type that differs only in the number of rounds of the jackpot game can be set, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the type of game state that is set after the jackpot game ends to be different depending on the jackpot type that is set, or to configure the end conditions for the same game state to be different. In addition, it is also possible to configure the content of the jackpot game (number of rounds, etc.) and the content of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends (game state type, end conditions) to be different.

In this case, the types of the first benefit (a jackpot game) and the second benefit (a high probability state of a normal symbol) that are granted to a player based on a jackpot win of a special symbol may be predefined from a jackpot type corresponding to a combination in which the first and second benefits are most advantageous to the player to a jackpot type corresponding to a combination in which the first and second benefits are most disadvantageous to the player, and one of the jackpot types may be set when a jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage of the benefit that can be granted after winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery can be made to differ greatly based on the jackpot type that is set, so that the player can be interested in the jackpot types that are set. In order to prevent a large difference in the advantageous degree of the bonus given based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, for example, a jackpot type that combines a first bonus with a low advantageous degree and a second bonus with a high advantageous degree, or a jackpot type that combines a first bonus with a high advantageous degree and a second bonus with a low advantageous degree, that is, a jackpot type other than the jackpot type in which the advantageous degrees of the first bonus and the second bonus defined for the jackpot type are both high or low, may be predefined, and one of the multiple defined jackpot types may be set.

"6R Probability Jackpot (Jackpot C5)" is a type of jackpot in which a maximum of 6 rounds of jackpot play is played, and a probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends. In this fifth control example, different periods can be set as the period during which the high probability state of the special symbols continues (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period). For jackpot C5, the special symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 60 times until the 60th special symbol change stops, and the normal symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 56 times until the 56th special symbol change stops.

In other words, the jackpot C5 specifies different end conditions for ending the special high probability period (high probability end condition) and the normal high probability period (time-saving end condition), and is configured so that the time-saving end condition is met before the high probability end condition is met. Therefore, when the jackpot type is set to jackpot C5, the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the 56th special pattern variation is stopped and displayed during the high probability state, the normal high probability period ends before the special high probability period, and the second high probability state (high probability state of special pattern, low probability state of normal pattern) is set. Then, when the fourth special pattern variation is stopped and displayed after the second high probability state is set (a total of 60 times after the jackpot game ends), the time-saving end condition is met, and the game state transitions to set the normal state.

Here, the period when the probability variable state is set is a game state in which it is easy to acquire the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved) because a high probability state of normal patterns is set, and is a game period during which the player is made to play with a right hand, whereas the period when the second probability variable state is set is a game state in which it is difficult to acquire the special pattern 2 reserved, as in the normal state, because a low probability state of normal patterns is set. Therefore, it is a game period during which the player is made to play with a left hand. In other words, when the probability variable state transitions to the second probability variable state, the second special pattern lottery based on the special pattern 2 reserved acquired during the probability variable state will be executed during the second probability variable state. In this fifth control example, the second special symbol drawing is executed with priority over the first special symbol drawing, and a maximum of four reserved special symbols 2 can be stored. Therefore, even if the player transitions from the special symbol state to the second special symbol state after the maximum number (four) of reserved special symbols 2 has been acquired, four second special symbol drawing will be executed until the second special symbol state ends (until the high probability of special symbol period ends), and the number of reserved special symbols 2 stored at the time the game state transitions from the second special symbol state to the normal state will be zero.

In other words, when jackpot C is set as the jackpot type, a normal pattern high probability period (probability change state) is set after the jackpot game ends, during which the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed, but a game is executed in which it is difficult to execute the second special pattern lottery based on the reserved special pattern 2 acquired during the normal pattern high probability period in the normal state. Therefore, compared to jackpot B, which is the same jackpot type in that the same jackpot game is executed and a probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, this is a jackpot type that is less favorable than jackpot B in terms of the ease of executing the second special pattern lottery when the special pattern high probability period and normal pattern high probability period end and the normal state is set.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this fifth control example, the same presentation mode (pullback mode) is set when the high probability state ends and the second high probability state is set, and when the high probability state ends and the normal state is set. In other words, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the second high probability state or the normal state is set after the high probability state ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the second special pattern lottery executed after the normal high probability period ends was executed during the normal state or the second high probability state, and therefore it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the executed second special pattern lottery can win the time-saving lottery (whether the time-saving lottery is being executed).

Therefore, even if the second probability change state is set, players can play while hoping for a time-saving win.

In addition, in this fifth control example, the jackpot type C5 has a jackpot type in which the end conditions are specified so that the regular pattern high probability period (period during which the high probability state of the regular pattern continues) ends before the special pattern high probability period (period during which the high probability state of the special pattern continues) after the special pattern high probability period is set, and the second special pattern state (high probability state of the special pattern, low probability state of the regular pattern) is entered. Specifically, the jackpot type C5 has a special pattern 2 reserved obtained during the special pattern state, which is set to the second special pattern state. The period from the end of the normal high probability period to the end of the special high probability period (period during which the second probability variable state continues) is set to the period during which the special pattern variation is executed four times so that all of the special pattern variations are consumed during the period (high probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state in which the special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery) based on the acquired reserved special pattern 2 is executed is different depending on the game state (normal state, second probability variable state, etc.) that is set after the probability variable state. In other words, a configuration that can vary the number of times the special pattern lottery that can be executed in a favorable game state (normal state) that is advantageous to the player can be used as the game state in which the special pattern lottery is executed based on the acquired reserved special pattern.

For example, a jackpot type may be set in which the end condition for the normal high probability period is 58 special pattern changes and the end condition for the normal high probability period is 60 special pattern changes, so that a part of the reserved special pattern 2 acquired during the high probability state is consumed during the second high probability state (high probability state of special pattern, low probability state of normal pattern) and the remaining reserved special pattern 2 is consumed during the normal state. In this case, if the high probability period ends with the maximum number of reserved special pattern 2 acquired during the high probability state and the second high probability state is entered, two reserved special pattern 2 will be consumed during the second high probability state, and the second special pattern lottery based on the remaining two reserved special pattern 2 can be executed in the normal state. In this way, when each end condition is specified so that the high probability period ends before the high probability period when the high probability state is set, the number of times the second special pattern lottery can be executed in the normal state can be changed simply by changing the difference between each end condition.

In addition, in this fifth control example, when there is both a reserved memory of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved) and a reserved memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved), the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in priority over the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, as described above, the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reserved acquired during the probability change state is executed in priority regardless of whether or not there is a special symbol 1 reserved (whether or not there is a special symbol 1 reserved acquired before the special symbol 2 reserved). When the game state in which it is easy to acquire the special symbol 2 reserved (high probability state of normal symbols) ends, that is, immediately after the game state in which it is difficult to acquire the special symbol 2 reserved (low probability state of normal symbols) is set, the number of special symbols 2 reserved decreases, but this is not limited to this. The first special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 1 reserved and the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reserved may be configured to be executed according to the order in which each special symbol reserved was acquired.

"6R Probability Jackpot (Jackpot D5)" is a type of jackpot in which a maximum of 6 rounds of jackpot play is played, and a probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends. In this fifth control example, different periods can be set as the period during which the high probability state of the special symbols continues (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period). For jackpot D5, the special symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 60 times until the 60th special symbol change stops, and the normal symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 65 times until the 65th special symbol change stops.

In other words, the jackpot D5 specifies different end conditions for ending the special high probability period (high probability end condition) and the normal high probability period (time-saving end condition), and is configured so that the high probability end condition is met before the time-saving end condition is met. Therefore, when the jackpot type is set to jackpot D5, the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the 60th special pattern variation is stopped and displayed during the high probability state, the special high probability period ends before the normal high probability period, and the time-saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) is set. Then, when the 5th special pattern variation is stopped and displayed after the time-saving state is set (a total of 65 times after the jackpot game ends), the time-saving end condition is met, and the game state transitions to set the normal state.

The period during which the time-saving state is set is a high probability state for normal symbols, just like the probability state, so it is a game state in which it is easy to acquire the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reservation), and is a game period during which the player is made to play with a right hand. In other words, when the probability state transitions to the time-saving state, the player is made to continue to play with a right hand and play a game to acquire the special symbol 2 reservation. And, in this fifth control example, the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, and since the system is configured to be able to store up to four special symbol 2 reservations, the number of special symbol 2 reservations stored at the time of transition from the time-saving state to the normal state after the maximum number of special symbol 2 reservations (four) have been acquired will be four.

In other words, when jackpot D5 is set as the jackpot type, a normal symbol high probability period (probability change state) is set after the jackpot game ends, during which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and a game that makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery in the normal state based on the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the normal symbol high probability period is executed, just like jackpot B5. Therefore, the same jackpot game is executed, and the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, and then the special symbol high probability period and normal symbol high probability period end, and in terms of the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery in the normal state set, it is as advantageous as jackpot B5.

In the time-saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set to a lower probability (1/300) compared to the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, so the time-saving state is a game state in which it is more difficult to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery than in the probability of winning a jackpot. Therefore, in the jackpot B5 that transitions from the probability of winning a jackpot to the normal state, during the final period of the special symbol change that is executed during the probability of winning a jackpot, a performance (change performance) to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been won in the change and a notification (notification performance) to encourage players to acquire the maximum number of reserved special symbols 2 during the probability of winning a jackpot must be executed in overlapping order, and there is a problem that performances with different purposes are executed in overlapping order, resulting in performances that are difficult for players to understand.

In contrast, if the end conditions of the special pattern high probability period and the normal pattern high probability period are specified so that the probability state transitions to the time-saving state and then transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state, as in the case of the jackpot D5, only the effect (change effect) for indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won in the change can be executed during the final change period of the special pattern executed during the probability state, so that the player can easily focus on the special pattern lottery executed during the high probability state of the special pattern (special pattern high probability period), that is, the change effect for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery with a high expectation of winning the jackpot. Then, by executing a guide notification (notification effect) to encourage the player to acquire the special pattern 2 reservation up to the upper limit during the final change of the time-saving state, it is possible to make it difficult for the period during which the change effect for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery with a high expectation of winning the jackpot to be executed and the period during which the notification effect for encouraging the player to acquire the special pattern 2 reservation up to the upper limit to overlap during the normal pattern high probability period.

Therefore, the jackpot D5 is an advantageous jackpot type compared to the jackpot B5 in terms of the clarity of the effects that are executed.

During the high probability state of the normal symbol (normal symbol high probability period), not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time for which the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol). When the electric device 640a is in an open state (open state), it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than when the electric device 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the time-saving state, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the special symbol lottery is held can be increased.

In the time-saving state, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 640a opens in one hit may be increased compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning the second pattern may not be changed, and at least one of the time the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens in one hit may be changed. In the time-saving state, the time the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens in one hit may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second pattern may be changed to be increased compared to the normal state.

In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes (ball entry holes) 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 (start winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the normal pattern start hole (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 242), so that, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entry 640 is activated (released) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the second symbol to change is set to be shorter during the time-saving mode than during the normal game mode. As a result, during the time-saving mode, the second symbol changes and is displayed in a short time, so that the winning lottery (the number of times the second symbol changes and is displayed) can be held more than during the normal game mode. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric device 640a of the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, during the time-saving mode, it is possible to make it easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. In addition, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, four balls are paid out to the player as prize balls to the upper tray 17, so that it is easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. This allows the player to play while suppressing the reduction in the number of balls he or she has, and allows the lottery for special symbols to be held during the time-saving mode while suppressing the investment for lending additional balls.

Note that if the state is made such that it is easier for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during time-saving by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during time-saving than during normal play, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to the game board in the area of the right flow path of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow some of the balls that are launched onto the game board and flow down the left side of the game board to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, an "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second symbol reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second symbol reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this control example, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of normal pattern start ports (through gates) 67 that are assembled is not limited to one, but may be multiple (e.g., two). In addition, the assembly position of the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left of the variable display unit 80. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the second pattern reserved lamp may not be lit.

A first ball entrance 64 is provided below the variable display unit 80, through which a ball can enter. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first prize entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. In this embodiment, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate (through gate) 67, no prize ball is paid out, but the invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls, such as one ball.

The first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are also prize entrances through which four balls are paid out when a ball enters the prize entrance. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be different, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640. This electric device 640a is configured to be able to open and close, and is usually in a closed state, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, the electric device 640a opens, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

As mentioned above, during the time-saving mode, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving mode, the time that the electric device 640a is open is longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the time-saving mode, it is possible to create an environment in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than during normal play.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, in the second special symbol lottery executed when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a time-saving state can be granted as a bonus other than winning the jackpot in a specific game state (normal state). In other words, in some cases where the result of the second special symbol lottery is other than winning the jackpot (miss), a bonus of setting the time-saving state can be granted after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery executes a special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery executed when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64.

In other words, the player can play the game while hoping that a high probability state of normal symbols will be set, which will make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery.

Next, referring to Figures 235 to 239, the content of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this fifth control example will be explained. This fifth control example is significantly different from the first control example described above in that, in addition to winning the jackpot, a time-saving win is also provided as a result of the special pattern lottery, and here, the effects related to the time-saving win will be mainly explained. Note that a detailed explanation of the elements (display modes) that are the same as those in the first control example described above will be omitted.

235(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 235(a), when a jackpot game is executed, a rabbit-like character 801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an effect is executed to congratulate the player on the award (jackpot game). During a jackpot game, the third symbol indicating that a jackpot has been won is continuously displayed as a stopped symbol in the small display area Dm1 formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm, and in the example shown in FIG. 235(a), the third symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the display mode of "777". This small display area Dm1 is an area in which the third symbol that is displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special symbol is displayed, and while the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner indicating that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Also, to the left of the main display area Dm1, there are formed a small display area Dm4 in which a guide notification mode is displayed to guide the player on how to play during a jackpot game, a small display area Dm5 in which a round number notification mode is displayed to notify the player of the current round number (number of rounds played), and a small display area Dm6 in which acquisition information is displayed to show a value corresponding to the number of winning balls acquired in games that are continuously played without going through the normal state. In the example shown in FIG. 235(a), the words "Right Hit" are displayed in the small display area Dm4, "2 Rounds" in the small display area Dm5, and "140P" in the small display area Dm6.

In other words, the display guides the player to play right-hand during a jackpot play, notifies the player that the second round of the jackpot play is currently being played, and shows that the number of prize balls won in this jackpot play is 140. In this way, by configuring the display to display information about a jackpot play, the playing method during the jackpot play, and information about the prizes won, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game experience.

Then, when all the rounds during the jackpot game are over and the ending period of the jackpot game is set, an ending screen is displayed to suggest to the player in advance the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 235(b). FIG. 235(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. The example shown in FIG. 235(b) shows a display screen that notifies the player that a performance corresponding to a probability change state (chance time) will be set after the jackpot game ends, and that the period of the chance time will be 56 times (56 special pattern changes). Then, in the center of the main display area Dm1, a display mode in which the character 801 continues to run from left to right is displayed as a display mode to notify the player in advance of the performance content executed during the chance time.

In this way, by using a portion of the time before the high probability state is actually set (during the jackpot game) to inform the player that the high probability state will be set after the jackpot game ends, the duration of the set high probability state, and an explanation of the performance content that will be executed during the high probability state, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy for the player to understand, as it is possible to allow the player to understand in advance the content of the game that will be executed in the future.

Next, the contents of the chance time effect executed during the probability change state will be explained with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during chance time, and FIG. 236(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the final change of chance time. During chance time, the character 801 continues to run in the main display area Dm1, and an effect is executed in which a big win is announced by catching the V icon 801v displayed on the screen. As described above, during the probability change state, a high probability state of normal patterns is set, so a game in which a right-hand hit game is used to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 and a second special pattern lottery is executed (right-hand hit game), which is an advantageous game method for the player.

Therefore, "Right Hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4 to guide players to play with a right hit. Then, a remaining period notification mode is displayed in the small display area Dm7 to indicate the period until the chance time ends. In FIG. 236(a), the words "50 remaining" are displayed as a display mode to indicate that there are 50 remaining special pattern variations that can be performed before the chance time ends.

Here, Chance Time is an effect that is executed in response to the probability variable state, and the timing at which Chance Time ends is the timing at which the probability variable state ends. Here, in this fifth control example, depending on the type of probability variable jackpot in which the probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, after the probability variable state ends, there are cases where a normal state is set (jackpot A5, B5), a second probability variable state is set (jackpot C5), or a time-saving state is set (jackpot D5). Regardless of which type of jackpot is set, the effect screen at the end of Chance Time shown in FIG. 236(b) is displayed during the special pattern change that ends the probability variable state (final special pattern change in the probability variable state).

The example shown in FIG. 236(b) shows an example of a presentation screen at the end of the chance time when the second probability state or normal state, that is, the high probability state of the normal pattern transitions to a low probability state with the end of the probability state, is entered after the probability state ends. In the main display area Dm1, a comment "Enter pullback mode after the chance time ends" is displayed to indicate that the low probability state of the normal pattern is set. Then, as a game guidance mode encouraging the player to acquire the maximum number of reserved special pattern 2 during the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues, that is, during the period in which it is easy to acquire reserved special pattern 2, a comment "Hit to the right to accumulate reserved numbers" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and a small display area Dm9 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm to show the number of reserved special pattern 2 that has already been acquired.

In the small display area Dm9, reserved icons that can inform the player of the upper limit of the special chart 2 reserved that can be acquired and the number of reserved special charts 2 that have been acquired are displayed, and the first reserved icon h1 is displayed corresponding to the first reserved special chart 2, the second reserved icon h2 is displayed corresponding to the second reserved special chart 2, the third reserved icon h3 is displayed corresponding to the third reserved special chart 2, and the fourth reserved icon h4 is displayed corresponding to the fourth reserved special chart 2. In FIG. 236(b), since three reserved special charts 2 have been acquired, the first reserved icon h1, the second reserved icon h2, and the third reserved icon h3 are displayed in a display mode (black in the figure) to indicate that they have been acquired, and the fourth reserved icon h4 is displayed in a display mode (white in the figure) to indicate that they have not been acquired. This makes it possible to easily inform the player whether or not the upper limit of reserved special charts 2 has been acquired.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, when all four reserved icons displayed in the small display area Dm9 have been acquired, that is, when the maximum number (four) of reserved special symbols 2 has been acquired during the final variation of the special symbol in the probability variation state, no new reserved special symbols 2 can be acquired even if the player continues playing right-handed, and since this is the final variation of the special symbol in the probability variation state, the reserved special symbols 2 are not consumed during the probability variation state. Therefore, even if the player continues playing right-handed, a display mode (e.g., "MAX") is displayed in the small display area Dm9 to indicate that the maximum number of reserved special symbols 2 has been acquired, and the text "Right hit" displayed in the small display area Dm4 is displayed in a different display mode from the display mode before the maximum number of reserved special symbols 2 was acquired, and a display mode (e.g., the text size is reduced) that indicates the low need for right-handed play is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to continue playing right-handed in vain.

The pull-back mode is an effect that is set in response to the period during which the second special symbol lottery is executed in a low probability state for normal symbols (normal state, second probability state). In this fifth control example, it is configured so that the time-saving win can be achieved in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). In other words, during the pull-back mode, not only the jackpot win but also the special symbol lottery with the possibility of winning the time-saving win is executed, thereby increasing the possibility of the time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) being set.

Next, referring to FIG. 237, the content of the effects executed during the pullback mode will be explained. FIG. 237(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the pullback mode starts, and FIG. 237(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a time-saving win occurs during the pullback mode.

When the pull-back mode is set, as shown in FIG. 237(a), treasure chests 810a to 810d are displayed in a number corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired, and an effect is executed in which the treasure chests are opened in accordance with the change in the second special symbol. Then, an effect is executed in which a display mode showing the lottery result of the corresponding second special symbol appears from within the treasure chest.

When the pull-back mode begins, the secondary display area Ds displays the following comments to explain the effects during the pull-back mode: "If 'V' comes out of the treasure chest, you win the jackpot; if 'Time' comes out, you get a time-saving bonus" and "Open the treasure chest."

In the fifth control example, the change time of the second special symbol change executed during the pull-back mode is configured to be determined regardless of the number of second special symbol changes executed during the pull-back mode, and an effect of opening one treasure chest is executed for the change period of one second special symbol change, but this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be possible to execute an effect of opening one treasure chest using the change times of all second special symbol changes executed during the pull-back mode, and if the lottery result of even one of the second special symbol changes executed during the pull-back mode is a jackpot or time-saving win, an effect to show the lottery result may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of changes of the second special symbol changes executed during the pull-back mode.

In addition, in this fifth control example, the pull-back mode is set when either the normal state in which the time-saving lottery is actually executed, or the second special probability state in which the time-saving lottery is not executed is set, that is, when the game state transitions from the special probability state to a game state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set (normal state, second special probability state). In other words, in the pull-back mode when the second special probability state is set, a performance in which "time" does not appear from the treasure chest is executed as a performance result.

In this way, by configuring the game to execute the same presentation (pull-back mode) in a game state in which a time-saving lottery can be executed and in a game state in which a time-saving lottery cannot be executed (is difficult), it is possible to set in advance a pull-back mode in which a presentation result indicating a time-saving win is likely to be displayed and a pull-back mode in which a presentation result indicating a time-saving win is unlikely to be displayed as the presentation result of the pull-back mode. In this case, it is possible to suggest to the player whether the pull-back mode currently set is a pull-back mode in which a presentation result indicating a time-saving win is likely to be displayed (advantageous pull-back mode) or a pull-back mode in which a presentation result indicating a time-saving win is unlikely to be displayed (unfavorable pull-back mode).

In this fifth control example, the type of background displayed during the pull-back mode can be used to suggest to the player whether the pull-back mode being executed this time is an advantageous pull-back mode or not, and the display screen shown in FIG. 237(a) displays a background image that resembles "heaven" as the background type to suggest that the advantageous pull-back mode is highly likely.

In other words, in this fifth control example, the background type of the pull-back mode can be determined according to the set game state without reading ahead (pre-determining) the results of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved special pattern 2 that has already been acquired. By configuring it in this way, no matter what background type of background image is displayed, it is possible to make it easier to keep the possibility of winning the time-saving win or the jackpot, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

If the time-saving bonus is won during the pull-back mode, the effect shown in FIG. 237(b) is executed. FIG. 237(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the time-saving bonus is won in the third second special symbol drawing during the pull-back mode, where a treasure box 810a and a treasure box 810b are displayed with a cross mark as a history display mode to indicate that the second special symbol variation has already been performed twice, and an effect is executed in which a display mode appears from a treasure box 810c indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol variation being performed (the third second special symbol variation) is a time-saving bonus, and "Time" x 10000" is displayed as a display mode to indicate that the lottery result is a time-saving bonus and the number of time-saving bonuses granted is "10000 times", that is, in effect, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) will be granted until the next big win is won. Additionally, the bottom right side of the main display area Dm can clearly display the remaining number of second special pattern lotteries that can be performed during the pullback mode, including the second special pattern variation that is currently being performed.

Next, the content of the performance that is executed when the time-saving win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the pull-back mode will be explained. In this fifth control example, the system is configured so that the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues (normal symbol high probability period) is more likely to be set longer (the normal symbol high probability period is less likely to end) when the time-saving win is won in the special symbol lottery compared to when the probability variable state is set based on winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, in some cases of winning the time-saving win, the system is configured to be able to set a time-saving state (long time-saving) in which the normal symbol high probability period continues until the number of times the special symbol fluctuation has been executed reaches 10,000 without winning a jackpot.

Then, if the time-saving is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the pull-back mode and the long time-saving is set, the presentation screen shown in FIG. 238(a) is displayed. FIG. 238(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the extended time executed when the long time-saving is set. When the long time-saving is set, the jackpot is almost always won in the special symbol lottery before the number of times the special symbol fluctuation is executed reaches 10,000 times, so as shown in FIG. 238(a), when the long time-saving is set, "infinite (shown as a symbol in the figure)" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a remaining period notification mode to indicate the remaining period of the normal symbol high probability period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues.

This configuration allows the player to play during the time-saving state without worrying about the remaining period of the normal high probability period, and it also eliminates the need to provide an area in the small display area Dm7 capable of displaying a five-digit number, allowing the small display area Dm7 to be made smaller, allowing the display area of the main display area Dm to be effectively used for other effects. In addition, the secondary display area Ds displays the comment "Keep hitting to the right until the next jackpot" as a notification to inform the player that the time-saving state (normal high probability period) will continue until the next jackpot is won.

When a long time-saving feature is set, the time-saving state will almost always continue until the next big win, based on probability. However, if the number of special symbol changes exceeds 10,000 times without a big win after the long time-saving feature is set, the high probability period of normal symbols will end, and the content displayed on the display screen will differ from the actual gameplay, causing distrust among players. Therefore, if the number of special symbol changes executed after the long time-saving feature is set exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 9,850 times), the display screen during the long time-saving feature is configured to be different.

Figure 238 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the number of times that special pattern variations have been performed during the long time reduction has reached 9900 times. As shown in Figure 238 (b), when the number of times that special pattern variations have been performed since the long time reduction was set exceeds a predetermined number of times, "100 times remaining" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a remaining period notification mode to indicate the remaining period of the normal high probability period, and a performance mode in which the character 801 runs with a tired expression is displayed in the main display area Dm. By configuring in this way, even if a normal high probability period in which the time reduction state can actually continue until the next big win is set, if a situation occurs in which the normal high probability period may actually end, the specific remaining period can be notified to the player, and a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Next, referring to FIG. 239, the contents of the presentation when the time-saving state is set after the chance time ends will be explained. FIG. 239 is a diagram showing an example of a preparation time presentation screen executed during the time-saving state after the chance time ends. As described above, when the type of the special jackpot is set to jackpot D5, the special jackpot state transitions to the time-saving state, and the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state. During the time-saving state, the preparation time presentation is executed. This preparation time is a presentation executed during the period in which the time-saving state is set, and during the period of the final special pattern change in the time-saving state, a mode is displayed that encourages the player to acquire the special pattern 2 reservation up to the upper limit, similar to the final special pattern change in the special jackpot state shown in FIG. 236(b) described above.

Next, the content of the background types displayed during the pull back mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 240(a). FIG. 240(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the background types displayed during the pull back mode and the content indicated by each background.

As shown in FIG. 240(a), in this fifth control example, four background types (heaven, night, evening, day) can be displayed as background types during the pull-back mode. And, depending on the type of background displayed, the player can be suggested the expectation of a special prize (jackpot, time-saving win) during this pull-back mode.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 250, but in this fifth control example, when setting the pull-back mode (when transitioning from the special probability state to the second special probability state or to the normal state), one of four mode types can be determined based on the number of reserved special charts 2 that have been acquired, the type of game state after the transition, and whether or not a jackpot or time-saving win has been won in the reserved state, and the background type corresponding to the determined mode type can be displayed as the background during the pull-back mode.

The mode types during the pullback mode are defined so that the expectation of the bonus is different, and there are four mode types from mode A, which is the most advantageous to the player, to mode D, which is the least advantageous to the player. "Mode A" is a mode in which the possibility of winning a jackpot or time-saving win during the pullback mode is extremely high, and "heaven" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, when a background imitating heaven is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, it is possible to easily make the player understand that there is a high possibility that some bonus will be granted by the time the pullback mode ends. Next, "Mode B" is a mode in which there is the second highest possibility of winning a jackpot or time-saving win during the pullback mode, and "night" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, when a background imitating night is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, it is possible to easily make the player understand that there is a second highest possibility of winning some bonus by the time the pullback mode ends. "Mode C" is a mode in which there is the third highest possibility of winning a jackpot or time-saving win during the pullback mode, and "evening" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, when a background simulating evening is displayed as the background during the pull-back mode, it is possible to make the player more easily understand that there is a slightly higher possibility that some kind of bonus will be awarded before the pull-back mode ends. Finally, "Mode D" is a mode in which there is a low possibility of winning the jackpot or time-saving win during the pull-back mode, and "daytime" is specified as the corresponding background type. In other words, when a background simulating daytime is displayed as the background during the pull-back mode, it is possible to make the player more easily understand that there is a low possibility that some kind of bonus will be awarded before the pull-back mode ends.

In addition, in this fifth control example, if the number of reserved special symbols 2 at the time of entering the pull-back mode is not the upper limit, the high mode mode type is not selected. Furthermore, if the number of reserved special symbols 2 at the time of entering the pull-back mode is not the upper limit, the mode type is determined without determining whether or not a time-saving lottery is executed in the second special pattern lottery executed during the pull-back mode. In other words, in order to make it easier to predict the mode type of the pull-back mode, it is necessary to transition to the pull-back mode when the upper limit number of reserved special symbols 2 has been acquired.

By configuring it this way, players can be motivated to play in an attempt to obtain up to the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 when in a special bonus state or a time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 240(b), the suggestion modes for indicating the lottery results of the second special symbol variation executed during the pull-back mode will be described. FIG. 240(b) is a diagram showing the types of suggestion modes during the pull-back mode and the relationship between the suggestion contents indicated by each suggestion mode. As shown in FIG. 240(b), as the suggestion modes during the pull-back mode, suggestion modes (Suggestion A to Suggestion D) that change the display mode of the treasure chest (see FIG. 237) or change the display mode of the character 801 until the treasure chest is opened are set with reference to the suggestion mode selection table 222db (see FIG. 251) described later.

Specifically, the suggestion types can be set to "Suggestion A" or "Suggestion B" depending on the expected probability of winning the jackpot or time-saving bonus during the corresponding fluctuation, and the suggestion types can be set to "Suggestion C" or "Suggestion D" depending on the set game state.

When "Suggestion A" is selected, a treasure chest of a different color (gold) than usual is displayed as the display mode of the treasure chest 810c displayed during the pullback mode (see FIG. 237(b)). When a gold treasure chest corresponding to this "Suggestion A" is displayed, it suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that the player has won the jackpot or time-saving feature during the corresponding variation. When "Suggestion B" is selected, a larger treasure chest than usual is displayed as the display mode of the treasure chest 810c displayed during the pullback mode (see FIG. 237(b)). When a gold treasure chest corresponding to this "Suggestion B" is displayed, it suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that the player has won the jackpot or time-saving feature during the corresponding variation. Note that the configuration is such that there is a higher possibility of winning the jackpot or time-saving feature when "Suggestion A" is selected than when "Suggestion B" is selected.

When "Suggestion C" and "Suggestion D" are selected, the character 801 displayed during the pullback mode (see FIG. 237(b)) is displayed with an ornament, and the character 801 is displayed in a different manner from normal. The currently set game state is suggested to the player according to the type of ornament displayed.

When "Suggestion C" is selected, as shown in FIG. 237(b), an ornament 801w resembling an angel's halo is displayed on the character 801, suggesting to the player that the currently set game state is likely to be normal, and when "Suggestion D" is selected, an icon resembling the word "chance" is displayed above the character 801's head, suggesting to the player that the game state is likely to be normal. Note that the system is configured so that the normal state is more likely to be set when "Suggestion C" is selected than when "Suggestion D" is selected.

In this way, in this fifth control example, the mode type of the pull-back mode is determined according to the game situation at the time the pull-back mode is set, and the suggestive mode for the special pattern variation executed during the pull-back mode is determined. By determining the mode type and the suggestive mode type in a combined manner, it becomes possible for the player to more accurately predict the current game situation. This makes it possible to arouse interest in the various presentation modes being executed for the player.

<Game flow in the fifth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 241, the game flow in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 241 is a diagram showing the game flow in the fifth control example, that is, the flow of transition of the game state. As shown in FIG. 241, in the fifth control example, the game state can be set to the normal state (special pattern 1 normal, special pattern 2 normal), time-saving state (first time-saving, second time-saving), probability variable state, and second probability variable state, and various game states can be set according to the result of the jackpot judgment in the special pattern lottery and the result of the time-saving winning judgment.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 242 to Fig. 251. Fig. 242 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. Note that, among the electrical configuration in this fifth control example, the description of the same contents as the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned first control example (see Fig. 137) will be omitted.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing a jackpot, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special symbols, drawing normal symbols, setting the display in the first symbol display device 37, setting the display in the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display in the third symbol display device 81. Various counters for controlling these processes are provided in the RAM 203. Here, referring to FIG. 243, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram showing the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to draw special symbols, draw normal symbols, set the display in the first symbol display device 37, set the display in the second symbol display device 83, and set the display in the third symbol display device 81.

The first winning random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols and the settings for the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 use the following: the first winning type counter C2 used to select the type of big win for the special symbol; the stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the type of stop for a miss in the special symbol; the initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1; the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern; and the time-saving type selection counter CC1 used to select the time-saving type when a time-saving win is won.

The second winning random number counter C4 is used to select the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the normal symbol fluctuation pattern are used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and they are loop counters that return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 156), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 167), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to balls entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4), and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to balls entering the second ball entrance 640 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4). The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 and the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the variable type counter CS1, and the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640.

When the conditions for starting the special pattern (variation conditions) are met, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b that contain information about the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern type for which the next lottery will be executed are shifted to the special pattern execution area, and the special pattern variation based on the various stored values begins.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which there are two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), but this is not limited to this, and there may be only one type of special symbol. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area for the corresponding special symbol type are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and special symbol variation based on the various stored values is initiated. By configuring in this way, even in a pachinko machine 10 that uses multiple special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be smoothly executed.

Furthermore, as in this control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has multiple special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), it may be configured so that the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. This makes it possible to execute the next special symbol variation promptly when the start conditions for each special symbol are met.

In the fifth control example, the jackpot winning judgment value and the time-saving winning judgment value are different so that the time-saving winning can be achieved when the jackpot is not won as a result of the special pattern lottery, but this is not limited to this, and the jackpot winning judgment value and the time-saving winning judgment value may be configured to overlap at least in part. By configuring in this way, the lottery results of only winning the jackpot, only winning the time-saving winning, and overlapping winning of both the jackpot winning and the time-saving winning can be provided to the player depending on the acquired judgment value (the value of the first win random number counter C1). In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that a more advantageous benefit is given to the player in the case of overlapping winning than in the case of winning only one of the two, and for example, it is preferable to configure the time-saving state set based on overlapping winning to be more difficult to end than the time-saving state set based on the other winning.

By configuring it in this way, players can play in the hope of winning multiple times.

In addition, in this control example, in addition to the lottery results of the special symbol being a big win or a miss, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, it is configured to be possible to set a time-saving state (a state with a high probability of a normal symbol) without executing a winning game. However, without being limited to this, for example, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, it may be possible to win a small prize that can be awarded to the player with a smaller bonus than when the big win is won (a bonus different from when the big win is won). By configuring in this way, even if the big win is not won, it is possible to provide an opportunity to award a bonus to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. In this case, a small prize type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the value of the acquired small prize type counter can be configured to be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and can be configured to be referenced when the lottery for the special symbol is executed.

In addition, if the special pattern lottery allows a small jackpot to be won, the game state transition content based on winning a big jackpot and the game state transition content based on winning a small jackpot may be configured to be different. For example, when a big jackpot is won, the game state may be transitioned to the normal state at the start of the big jackpot game, and a new game state may be set after the big jackpot game ends based on the set big jackpot type. When a small jackpot is won, the game state at the time of winning the small jackpot is maintained and a small jackpot game is executed, and the game state does not transition even after the small jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, the presence or absence of a transition in the game state and the content of the transition can be varied depending on the type of win (big win, small win), so it is possible to provide a wide variety of games. In addition, it may be configured so that one special pattern lottery can have four possible results: a big win, a small win, a time-saving win, and a miss, and the bonus that can be won in the special pattern lottery may be different depending on the type of special pattern.

In this case, for example, a jackpot win and a time-saving win can be specified as the bonuses that can be awarded when a first special pattern lottery is executed, and a jackpot win and a small bonus win can be specified as the bonuses that can be awarded when a second special pattern lottery is executed. In addition, when the same game state is set, the player can select the type of special pattern lottery to be executed by selecting the direction in which the game ball is fired (by selecting left-handed play or right-handed play). By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to select the type of bonus (additional bonus) other than a jackpot win.

In addition, in this embodiment, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b that corresponds to the ball entering (passing through) the through gate 67, which is made up of four reserved areas (first reserved areas), and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

When the normal symbol start condition (change condition) is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the normal symbol change based on the various stored values is initiated.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 243. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 899) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 899 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 899). In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 899. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 110 is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 167).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the first winning random number 5 table 202da stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and a jackpot for the special pattern is determined when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number 5 table 202da. In addition, the value of the random number that will result in a time-saving win in the special pattern lottery is set by the time-saving win random number 5 table 202de stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and if the value of the first win random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that will result in a time-saving win set by the time-saving win random number 5 table 202da, it is determined that a time-saving win has occurred.

Now, referring to FIG. 245(a), the first winning random number 5 table 202da will be described. FIG. 245(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 5 table 202da. This first winning random number 5 table 202da is a table that defines the random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols.

Specifically, the first hit random number 5 table 202da specifies different judgment values for determining a jackpot depending on the game state (probability state of the special symbol). As shown in FIG. 245(a), for the low probability state of the special symbol as the game state (normal state, time-saving state), the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is specified as "0 to 2" as the jackpot judgment value, and the other values ("3 to 899") are specified as the miss judgment value. Also, for the high probability state of the special symbol as the game state (probability state), the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is specified as "0 to 14" as the jackpot judgment value, and the other values ("15 to 899") are specified as the miss judgment value. In other words, the update range of the 1st Win Random Number 5 table 202da is 900 numbers from "0 to 899", so in the low probability state of the special pattern, the probability of a jackpot being determined is 1/300 (3 out of 900), and in the high probability state of the special pattern, the probability of a jackpot being determined is 1/60 (15 out of 900).

In this control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state, but the invention is not limited to this and the probability of winning a jackpot may be the same regardless of the game state, or three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability for special symbols may be different for up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, or simply, the special symbol state may be set to three or more types, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to the two types of lottery results of "jackpot" and "miss", a "time-saving win" is also determined as a result of the lottery for the special symbols. Here, the time-saving win random number 5 table 202de will be explained with reference to FIG. 245(c). FIG. 245(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving win random number 5 table 202de. This time-saving win random number 5 table 202de is a table that stipulates the random value (determination value) that is used to determine a time-saving win in the lottery for the special symbols.

Specifically, the time-saving random number 5 table 202de specifies different judgment values for determining a time-saving win depending on the special symbol type and the game state. As shown in FIG. 245(a), for the first special symbol as a special symbol type, no judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) corresponding to a time-saving win is specified. Also, for the second special symbol as a special symbol type, a judgment value corresponding to a time-saving win is specified only when the game state is a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and no judgment value corresponding to a time-saving win is specified when the game state is other than the normal state (high probability state, second high probability state, time-saving state).

For the second special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set as the game state, the value of the first winning random number counter C1, "51-200", is specified as the time-saving winning judgment value, and the other values ("3-50, 201-899") are specified as the loss judgment value. Note that, as will be described in detail later, this time-saving winning random number 5 table 202de is referenced when the result of the jackpot judgment executed with reference to the first winning random number 5 table 202da is "loss", so it is referenced when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is a value other than the value of the first winning random number counter C1 ("0-2") that is determined to be a jackpot.

Therefore, the update range of the 1st Winning Random Number 5 table 202da is 900 numbers from "0 to 899", so in the low probability state of the special pattern, the probability of being determined as a jackpot is 1/300 (3 out of 900), and the probability of being determined as a time-saving win is 1/6 (150 out of 900).

In other words, the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state has a 3/900 chance of winning the jackpot, a 150/900 chance of winning the time-saving feature, and a 747/900 chance of losing, making it a special symbol lottery that is less likely to result in a loss (more likely to award a special prize) compared to the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state (897/900 chance of losing).

In this control example, the determination of whether or not the time-saving win has been made is made only in a specific game state (normal state) and in a special pattern lottery of a specific special pattern type (second special pattern), but this is not limited to this and the determination of whether or not the time-saving win has been made may be made for any special pattern type. Furthermore, the determination of whether or not the time-saving win has been made may be made even when a game state other than the normal state is set, and for example, the determination of whether or not the time-saving win has been made may be made in the second special pattern lottery that is executed in a state in which a low probability state (second special state) for normal patterns is set. By configuring in this way, the determination of whether or not the time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) can always be made in the second special pattern lottery that is executed during the pull-back mode (see FIG. 237).

In this case, it is a good idea to set different probabilities of winning the time-saving lottery performed during the normal state and the time-saving lottery performed during the second special probability state, and configure it so that it is easier to win the time-saving lottery when the normal state is set than when the second special probability state is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the time-saving lottery in the normal state (low probability state for special patterns) where the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is lower than in the second special probability state (high probability state for special patterns), and therefore to prevent players from playing games that are excessively disadvantageous to them.

In addition, without being limited to this, the second probability variable state may be configured to have a higher probability of winning the time-saving feature than the normal state. In this case, the probability of winning the time-saving feature can also be increased in a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery is set to a high probability (high probability state of special patterns), so the special pattern lottery performed during the second probability variable state can have a higher probability of resulting in a lottery result that grants some kind of special benefit (jackpot, time-saving feature) (probability of not winning a losing feature) than a special pattern lottery performed during the probability variable state.

Furthermore, in this fifth control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed only when a specific game state is in effect and a specific special symbol lottery is executed, so the probability of winning the time-saving lottery is always fixed. However, if the time-saving lottery is configured to be executed under different conditions (special symbol type, game state), the probability of winning the time-saving lottery may be configured to differ according to the trigger for the time-saving lottery.

In addition to the trigger for the time-saving lottery, the probability of winning the time-saving lottery may be increased, for example, when the number of times that the special pattern changes without changing the game state exceeds a predetermined number of times.

In addition, a "small win" may be determined as a type of "loss" as the third lottery result. If the "small win" is won, a small win game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for a period (one round) shorter than that of the "big win 5" may be executed. By configuring in this way, a small amount of bonus (prize balls) can be awarded to the player when the big win is not won. Note that, when a "small win" is a type of "loss", it is possible to award prize balls to the player through the small win game, but since the big win has not been won, it is preferable to configure the process of changing the game state (setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) not to be executed. This allows a clear difference between the bonus awarded to the player based on the big win and the bonus awarded to the player based on the small win.

In addition, in this control example, three types of lottery results, "big win", "loss" and "time-saving win", are determined as the lottery results for the special symbols. In addition, a "small win" may be determined as a fourth lottery result as a type of "loss". When this "small win" is won, a small win game is executed in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for a period (one round) shorter than that of the "big win". By configuring in this way, a small amount of bonus (prize balls) can be awarded to the player when the big win is not won. Note that when a "small win" is a type of "loss", it is possible to award the player with prize balls from the small win game, but since the big win has not been won, it is preferable to configure the process of changing the game state (setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) not to be executed. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the bonus awarded to the player based on the big win and the bonus awarded to the player based on the small win.

As described above, if it is configured so that a "small win" can be won as a result of the special pattern lottery, the first win random number table 202a can be configured to specify the value of the first win random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small win". By configuring it in this way, the big win lottery and small win lottery for the special pattern can be executed in the same process, so the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced compared to when the big win lottery and small win lottery are executed in different processes. Also, it is possible to prevent a big win and a small win from being won in the same special pattern lottery.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won, by referring to the first win type selection 5 table 202dc. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd will be explained with reference to FIG. 246(a).

Figure 246 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd. As shown in Figure 246 (a), this jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd has a special 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, and a special 2 jackpot 5 table 202dd2 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol.

First, the contents of the special 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 246(b). FIG. 246(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1. As described above, the special 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, and different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the acquired first jackpot type counter C2. Note that the detailed contents defined in each data table have been described above and will be omitted here.

Returning to FIG. 243, the explanation continues. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the rough display mode (variation time) of so-called short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, super reach, etc. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 167) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. In addition, the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db (see FIG. 247), which stores random number values that determine one of the variation times of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1, is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db will be explained with reference to FIG. 247. FIG. 247(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db. As shown in FIG. 247(a), the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db defines the normal/second probability variation 5 table 202db1, which is used when the normal state or the second probability variation state is set as the game state, and the probability variation/time-saving 5 table 202db2, which is used when the probability variation state or the time-saving state is set. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the data table used to select the variation pattern is different depending on the game state, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected depending on the game state can be different.

Next, the detailed contents of each table stipulated in the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db will be explained with reference to FIG. 247(b) and FIG. 248(a). FIG. 247(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the normal/second probability change 5 table 202db1. This normal/second probability change 5 table 202db1 is a data table referenced when the game state is set to the normal state or the second probability change state, that is, the low probability state of the normal pattern, and is stipulated so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win than when it is a miss, and different variation patterns are stipulated according to the type of special pattern for which the lottery was executed and the result of the special pattern lottery executed. In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern is a time-saving win (part of a miss), it is stipulated so that the same variation time as when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win is more likely to be selected than when the lottery result of the special pattern is a miss (other than a time-saving win).

First, referring to FIG. 247(b), the normal/second probability change 5 table 202db1 will be described. FIG. 247(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal/second probability change 5 table 202db1. In the normal/second probability change 5 table 202db1, various variation patterns are defined in accordance with the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, when the type of the special symbol (pattern type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit/miss judgment result is a big hit, and the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", a normal (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Also, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", a super (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. Furthermore, when the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", a fluctuation pattern of SP (reach) with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is specified. In other words, even if the fluctuation time is the same as 30 seconds, different fluctuation patterns can be selected depending on the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1. In this way, by configuring the main control device 110 to be able to select different fluctuation patterns for the same fluctuation time, it is possible to simplify the process for determining the fluctuation presentation on the voice lamp control device 113 side that receives the command indicating the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, depending on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, an additional time may be added in addition to the basic time. In the case where an additional time is added, the total time obtained by adding the basic time and the additional time is set as the variation time, and a command indicating the basic time and a command indicating the additional time are output. In this case, when determining the additional time to be added, the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 may be used, or the value of a dedicated counter used to select the additional time may be obtained. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (e.g., 30 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating the additional time are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, a variation pattern (normal reach) may be set based on the information included in the basic command, and a reach pattern (type of third pattern) may be set based on the information included in the addition command. As a result, even if the type of third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 that becomes visible to the player first when a reach state is reached is configured to always be a specific third symbol (in this control example, a third symbol with the number 1), the reach state can be executed with various types of third symbols without varying the period from when the variable effect is executed to when the reach state is reached.

Similarly, if the symbol type is special symbol 1 and the win/loss judgment result is a miss, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", a miss with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern, and if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", a miss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern.

On the other hand, if the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot, and if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 149", a Super (reach) with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this Super is determined, a command indicating a base time of 30 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Also, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "150 to 198", a SP (reach) with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern.

If the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss (time-saving), that is, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a time-saving win and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 169", a Super (reach) with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this Super is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Also, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", a SP (reach) with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern.

If the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", the fluctuation pattern is stipulated as a reach miss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds. Also, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 198", the fluctuation pattern is stipulated as a miss with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds.

Next, the contents of the 5 table for special probability and time saving 202db2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 248(a). FIG. 248(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the 5 table for special probability and time saving 202db2. The 5 table for special probability and time saving 202db2 is a data table that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern when a special probability state or time saving state is set, and each variation pattern is defined so that a different variation pattern is selected depending on the set game state, the type of special symbol, the number of variations (the number of times the special symbol has changed since the end of the jackpot game), the result of the special symbol lottery, and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1.

Here, in this fifth control example, a high probability state (probability change state) of normal symbols is always set after the end of a jackpot game. The high probability state of normal symbols that has been set is configured to continue until a time-saving end condition is met. In this fifth control example, the time-saving end conditions are a first time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times that special symbol variations have been executed since the high probability state of normal symbols was set reaches a predetermined number, and a second time-saving end condition that is met when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed while the high probability state of normal symbols is set. When either of the time-saving end conditions is met, a transition is made from the high probability state of normal symbols to the low probability state of normal symbols.

The number of times the special pattern change is performed (time-saving times), which is set as the first time-saving end condition, is varied depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if jackpot A5 or B5 is set as the type of jackpot, the first time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern change is performed reaches 60 (time-saving times 60), if jackpot C5 is set, the first time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern change is performed reaches 56 (time-saving times 56), and if jackpot D5 is set, the first time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern change is performed reaches 65 (time-saving times 65).

In addition, in this fifth control example, in some cases where the special pattern lottery does not result in a jackpot (miss), a time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) can be set (time-saving winning is possible), and the first time-saving end condition is made different depending on the time-saving type that is set when the time-saving win is won. For example, when time-saving type A is set, the first time-saving end condition is met (time-saving number of times 10,000) when the special pattern fluctuation has been performed 10,000 times, and when time-saving type B is set, the first time-saving end condition is met (time-saving number of times 100) when the special pattern fluctuation has been performed 100 times.

Even when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, different variation patterns are selected depending on the game state and time-saving type. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily execute a variation presentation that corresponds to the set game state and time-saving type.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 248(a), when the time-saving type is "time-saving after jackpot", that is, when a high probability state of normal symbols is set based on winning a jackpot, during the period when the number of special symbol variations is "1 to 60", regardless of the type of special symbol, a variation pattern with a variation time of "15 seconds" (middle variation) is selected for a winning lottery result (win/lose judgment result) regardless of the value of the variation type selection counter CS1. Also, for a losing lottery result (win/lose judgment result), a variation pattern with a variation time of "5 seconds" (short variation) is specified for the range of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 value of "0 to 189", and a variation pattern with a variation time of "15 seconds" (middle variation) is specified for the range of "190 to 198".

In addition, during the period when the number of special symbol changes is between 61 and 65, a change pattern (special change) with a change time of "5 seconds" is specified, regardless of the type of special symbol, the lottery result, or the acquired value of the change type selection counter CS1.

Here, the period when the number of times the special symbol changes is "61 to 65 times" is referenced when the jackpot type is set to jackpot D5, that is, when a 5-spin time-saving state is set after the high probability state ends. During this time-saving state, the preparation time (see Figure 239) is performed, and a constant variation time (5 seconds) is always set regardless of the win/loss judgment result. Therefore, since the entire preparation time period can be fixed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the remaining time until the pull-back mode is set.

The display screen during preparation time has been described above with reference to FIG. 239, but in addition to the display mode shown in FIG. 239, it may be configured to be able to notify the remaining period (number of seconds) of the preparation time. For example, when the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired meets the conditions for ending the preparation time (time-saving state), it is good to configure it so that the display screen displays the remaining number of times that the special symbols can be changed during the time-saving state plus 5 seconds. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the timing when the preparation time ends and the pull-back mode is set.

Furthermore, if the remaining period of the preparation time is configured to be notifiable, it may be configured to execute an effect that can suggest to the player in advance the period of the notified remaining period that corresponds to the final change of the special symbol during the time-saving state, that is, the period during which it is confirmed that the acquired reserved special symbol 2 will not be consumed again during the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the period during which the final change of the special symbol during the preparation time will be executed.

On the other hand, when the set time-saving type is "Time-saving A" and the pattern type (special pattern type) is special pattern 1 (first special pattern), regardless of the number of changes (number of special pattern changes), the lottery result (special pattern lottery result), and the acquired value of the change type selection counter CS1, a change pattern with a change time of "20 seconds" (long change) is specified, and when the pattern type is special pattern 2 (second special pattern), during the period when the number of special pattern changes is "1 to 99 times", a change pattern with a change time of "15 seconds" (middle change) is selected for the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) regardless of the value of the change type selection counter CS1. Also, for the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) of a loss, a change pattern with a change time of "5 seconds" (short change) is specified for the acquired change type selection counter CS1 value range of "0 to 189", and a change pattern with a change time of "15 seconds" (middle change) is specified for the range of "190 to 198". And for the number of times of special pattern fluctuation "100 times", a fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" is prescribed, regardless of the lottery result (special pattern lottery result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1. Furthermore, for the number of times of special pattern fluctuation "101 times to 200 times", a fluctuation pattern (ultra-short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "2 seconds" is prescribed, regardless of the lottery result (special pattern lottery result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, and for the number of times of special pattern fluctuation "201 times to 10,000 times", a fluctuation pattern (special short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "0.5 seconds" is prescribed, regardless of the lottery result (special pattern lottery result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1.

In addition, when the set time-saving type is "Time-saving B" and the pattern type (special pattern type) is special pattern 1 (first special pattern), a "20-second" change pattern (long change) is specified regardless of the change count (special pattern change count), the lottery result (special pattern lottery result), and the acquired value of the change type selection counter CS1. In addition, when the pattern type is special pattern 2 (second special pattern), during the period when the special pattern change count is "1 to 99 times," a "15-second" change pattern (middle change) is selected for the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) regardless of the value of the change type selection counter CS1. In addition, for the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) of a loss, a "5-second" change pattern (short change) is specified for the acquired change type selection counter CS1 value range of "0 to 189," and a "15-second" change pattern (middle change) is specified for the value of "190 to 198." And when the number of times the special symbol changes is "100 times," a change pattern (special change) with a change time of "10 seconds" is specified, regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) or the acquired value of the change type selection counter CS1.

As described above, in this fifth control example, when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special pattern lottery (when the time-saving state is set without playing the jackpot), the change pattern is selected with the same content until the special pattern change is executed 100 times, regardless of the type of time-saving state that is set. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the type of time-saving state that is set based on the change pattern of the special pattern change executed during the time-saving state. Furthermore, for the 100th special pattern change, a change pattern with a change time of 10 seconds is selected, regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery. Here, in this fifth control example, when the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving type can be set to time-saving A or time-saving B, and when time-saving A is set, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, and when time-saving B is set, the number of time-saving times is set to 100.

When the time-saving state is set based on winning the special pattern lottery, the fluctuation period of the 100th special pattern fluctuation is used to execute a performance (continuation performance) to indicate whether the time-saving state will end (whether the time-saving type is time-saving type A or time-saving type B). In other words, no matter which type of time-saving is set and no matter what the lottery result of the fluctuation is, a fluctuation pattern of a fixed number of seconds (10 seconds) is selected, making it easier to execute the continuation performance.

When time-saving A is set, the time-saving state will continue until a maximum of 10,000 special symbol lotteries have been performed, but since a low probability state for special symbols is set during the time-saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, in which it is easier to perform a special symbol lottery than in the normal state, there are cases where special symbol lotteries continue to be performed without winning a jackpot. In this case, during the time-saving state, it is possible to frequently enter game balls into the second ball entrance 640 by playing from the right and win prize balls, so it is unlikely that a situation will occur in which the player's balls are significantly reduced, but there is a risk that the time until the next jackpot is extended, and a player with a limited playing time will be forced to give up playing during the time-saving state.

Therefore, in this fifth control example, the more times the special pattern lotteries are executed during the time-saving state, the more likely it is that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time will be selected. This configuration can improve the time efficiency of play when many special pattern lotteries are executed during the time-saving state without winning a jackpot. In addition, since the system is configured so that the shortened variation time is less likely to be selected during the period from when the time-saving state is set until a predetermined number (100) of special pattern lotteries are executed, it can be prevented that multiple jackpot games are executed in a short period of time, resulting in an excessive number of prize balls being provided to the player in a short period of time.

Returning to FIG. 243, the explanation will be continued. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 299). When the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Note that the configuration of the second winning random number table 202c is the same as that of the first control example described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The time-saving type selection counter CC1 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a time-saving win is won in the special symbol lottery, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In this control example, the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 is used to select the time-saving type when a time-saving win is won, by referring to the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df. Here, the contents of the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df will be explained with reference to FIG. 248(b).

Figure 248 (b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df. In this time-saving type selection 5 table 202df, different time-saving types are defined for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1. Specifically, the time-saving type "time-saving A" is defined for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in the range "0 to 89", and the time-saving type "time-saving B" is defined for the range "90 to 99".

Here, when "time-saving A" is set as the time-saving type, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 10,000, and when "time-saving B" is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100. In other words, time-saving A is a time-saving state with 10,000 time-saving times, and time-saving B is a time-saving state with 100 time-saving times.

Returning to Fig. 242, we will continue the explanation. ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined in correspondence with the various counters shown in Fig. 243. Here, with reference to Fig. 244(a), we will explain the contents of ROM 202 of main control device 110 in pachinko machine 10 of this fifth control example. Fig. 244(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of ROM 202 of main control device 110 in pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

As shown in FIG. 244(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has at least the first win random number 5 table 202da, the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 202db, the second win random number 5 table 202dc, the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd, the time-saving random number 5 table 202de, and the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df. Note that the first win random number table 202a, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, the second win random number table 202c, the jackpot type selection table 202d, the time-saving random number 5 table 202de, and the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df have been described above when explaining the various counters shown in FIG. 243, so their explanation will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 242, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 243, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on due to the recovery from the power outage; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 167) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 166) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 165) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 244(b), the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game status storage area 203g, a time-saving counter 203h, a probability-change counter 203i, a jackpot start flag 203j, a jackpot in progress flag 203k, and a miscellaneous memory area 203z. Note that the contents of the above-mentioned storage areas, counters, and flags are the same as those in the first control example described above, and therefore the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating the driving parts for performance provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a device drive command may be sent to the other device 228 to drive a device for effects (not shown), a voice output command may be set to cause the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22, or a lamp output command may be set to cause the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be explained. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example differs from the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 144(a)) in that the normal special chart 2 performance selection table 222b, the special chance performance selection table 222c, the continuous notice execution selection table 222d, the V notification execution selection table 222e, and the button operation performance selection table 222f have been deleted, and the pullback mode selection table 222da and the suggestion mode selection table 222db have been added, but otherwise they are the same. The same symbols are used for the same elements, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The pullback mode selection table 222da is a data table referenced when selecting a mode type in the pullback mode, which is a presentation mode executed in response to a game state (normal state, second special probability state) that is set when a termination condition (time-saving termination condition) that terminates the high probability state of the normal pattern is satisfied while the special probability state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set. Four types of mode types (backgrounds) are specified in response to the number of reserved special patterns 2 (reserved memory number of second special patterns) when the time-saving termination condition is satisfied in the special probability state, the value of the time-saving lottery counter 223db, the presence or absence of a jackpot in the reserved pattern (in the special pattern 2 reserved pattern), the presence or absence of a time-saving win in the reserved pattern (in the special pattern 2 reserved pattern), and the value of the presentation counter 223f.

Specifically, if the number of reserved special figures 2 is "4", that is, the maximum number of reserved special figures 2 is acquired, the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db is "4", and the reserved jackpot is "yes", regardless of whether or not the reserved jackpot has won the time-saving lottery, "mode A" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 49", and "mode B" is specified for the range of "50 to 99". Also, if the reserved jackpot is "no" and the reserved jackpot has won the time-saving lottery, "mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 79", and "mode A" is specified for the range of "80 to 99". If the reserved jackpot has "no" and the reserved jackpot has won the time-saving lottery, "mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 19", "mode C" is specified for the range of "20 to 59", and "mode D" is specified for the range of "60 to 99".

In addition, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is "4", that is, the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 has been acquired, the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db is "0", and there is a jackpot in the reserved lottery, "Mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 59", and "Mode C" is specified for the range of "60 to 99", regardless of whether there is a time-saving win in the reserved lottery. If there is no jackpot in the reserved lottery, "Mode C" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 79", and "Mode B" is specified for the range of "80 to 99", regardless of whether there is a time-saving win in the reserved lottery.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is "1 to 3", that is, when the upper limit number of reserved special figures 2 has not been acquired, regardless of the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db, if there is a jackpot in the reserved jackpot, "mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 19", "mode C" is specified for the range of "20 to 59", and "mode D" is specified for the range of "60 to 99", regardless of whether there is a time-saving win in the reserved jackpot. If there is no jackpot in the reserved jackpot, if there is a time-saving win in the reserved jackpot, "mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 49", and "mode D" is specified for the range of "50 to 99". If there is no time-saving win in the reserved jackpot, "mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 19", and "mode D" is specified for the range of "20 to 99".

The detailed contents have been described above with reference to FIG. 240(b), so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but the four types of mode types (mode A to mode D) selected with reference to the pull-back mode selection table 222da are specified so that they have different expectations of granting a bonus to the player, with mode A being the most advantageous mode type to the player (highest expectation of granting a bonus (jackpot, time-saving win) during pull-back mode), mode B being the next most advantageous mode type, followed by mode C and mode D, in that order, and the contents of the pull-back mode selection table 222da are specified so that each mode type is selected so that the expectation of granting a bonus decreases in that order.

Furthermore, the mode type selected is configured to vary greatly depending on the number of reserved special charts 2 at the time when the special bonus state ends. If the number of reserved special charts 2 at the time when the special bonus state ends is not the upper limit number, the mode type that is most advantageous to the player (mode A) is not selected (is less likely to be selected), regardless of the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db or the results of the pre-reading of the reserved special charts 2 (whether or not there is a jackpot or time-saving win).

By configuring it in this way, the player can be encouraged to actively play from the right so that the number of reserved special symbols 2 reaches the upper limit in an attempt to predict the result of the second special symbol lottery that is executed during the pull-back mode.

The suggestion mode selection table 222db is a data table that is referenced when selecting the suggestion mode to be displayed in the variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the pull-back mode, and different types of suggestion modes are defined corresponding to the set mode type, the lottery result of the variation, and the value of the effect counter 223f.

Next, referring to FIG. 249(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 249(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a command memory area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c, a special symbol change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a performance counter 223f, a slave state setting area 223g, a normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223h, a time-saving counter 223da, a time-saving lottery count counter 223db, a mode type storage area 223dc, a long time-saving flag 223dd, an initial setting flag 223de, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The contents of the command memory area 223a, the winning information storage area 223b, the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c, the special symbol change start flag 223d, the stop type selection flag 223e, the performance counter 223f, the slave state setting area 223g, and the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223h are the same as those of the first control example described above, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The time-saving counter 223da is a counter for measuring the period during which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and is set to a predetermined value when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of a big win game, or after the display of the stopped special symbol variation that won the time-saving state). When the special symbol variation is executed while the value of the time-saving counter 223da is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the time-saving counter 223da becomes "0", it is determined that a transition has been made to a low probability state of normal symbols. In addition, the detailed period during the high probability state of normal symbols is determined based on the value of the time-saving counter 223da.

The time-saving lottery count counter 223db is a counter for measuring the number of second special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the normal state, among the second special symbol lotteries executed during the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state, second probability variable state), i.e., the number of second special symbol lotteries that can win the time-saving lottery, and its value is set based on the number of reserved special symbols 2 acquired when the probability state of the normal symbol shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state, and the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) that is set when the normal symbol shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Specifically, when a state command is received indicating a transition from a high probability state (high probability state, time-saving state) of a normal pattern to a normal state (S9102: No in FIG. 264), or when a state command is received indicating a transition from a high probability state to a second high probability state (S9402: Yes in FIG. 267), the number of times that the second special pattern lottery will be performed (or may be performed) during the normal state is specified based on the acquired reserved special pattern 2, and the value indicating the specified number is set as the value of the time-saving lottery counter 223db. The value is then referenced when selecting the mode type of the pullback mode by referring to the pullback mode selection table 222da.

In addition, when the second special pattern lottery is executed during the pull-back mode, the value of the time-saving lottery counter 223db is read out, and if it is determined that a value greater than 1 is set, the value is decremented by 1 each time the second special pattern lottery is executed (see S9607 in FIG. 269).

In other words, in this fifth control example, when the special symbol 2 reserved acquired during the high probability state of the normal symbol is executed after the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the same type of presentation is executed regardless of the set game state. In other words, the game state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set is the normal state in which a special symbol lottery that may result in a time-saving win is executed, and the second probability state in which a special symbol lottery that may not result in a time-saving win is executed, so that it is difficult for the player to easily determine whether or not the game state is in which a time-saving win may be displayed as the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery being executed. By configuring in this way, even if the second probability state in which a special symbol lottery that may not result in a time-saving win is executed is set, the player can play while hoping for a time-saving win.

Furthermore, the number of times a special symbol lottery that may actually win the time-saving feature is executed is determined, and the mode type of the pull-back mode can be selected based on the determination result. By configuring it in this way, while the same type (pull-back mode) of presentation is executed in the normal state where a special symbol lottery that may win the time-saving feature is executed and the second probability variable state where a special symbol lottery that may not win the time-saving feature is executed, it is possible to provide an element (mode type) that allows the player to predict which game state is set, so that a player who wants to quickly determine whether the currently set game state is one that may win the time-saving feature can focus on the content of the presentation being executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

The mode type storage area 223dc is a storage area for storing the mode type selected by referring to the pull-back mode selection table 222da. The information (mode type) stored in this mode type storage area 223dc is read out when determining the presentation mode of the variation presentation corresponding to the second special pattern variation executed during the pull-back mode. Then, when the pull-back mode ends, the stored information is cleared.

The long time-saving flag 223dd is a flag for indicating that a long-term (10,000 times of special pattern fluctuation) time-saving state has been set, and is set to ON when a long-term time-saving state (time-saving type "time-saving A") is set, and is set to OFF when the time-saving state ends. The setting status of this long time-saving flag 223dd is referenced when determining the display mode for indicating the remaining number of time-savings (remaining period of the high probability state of normal patterns). Specifically, when determining the special pattern 2 performance mode corresponding to the second special pattern fluctuation executed during the time-saving state (S9613 in FIG. 269: Yes), it is determined whether the long time-saving flag 223dd is set to ON (S9615 in FIG. 269), and if the long time-saving flag 223dd is not set to ON (S9615 in FIG. 269: No), a display command is set to subtract and display the remaining number of times displayed in the small display area Dm7 of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (S9614 in FIG. 269).

On the other hand, if the long time-saving flag 223dd is set to on (S9615 in FIG. 269: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is less than 150 (S9616 in FIG. 269). If it is determined that the value is not less than 150 (S9616 in FIG. 269: No), then as shown in FIG. 238(a), "infinite" is displayed in the small display area Dm7, and the process of subtracting and displaying the remaining number of time-saving plays is skipped. If it is determined that the value is less than 150 (S9616 in FIG. 269: Yes), the presentation mode for switching the display mode of the small display area Dm7 from "infinite" to "149" is determined (S9617 in FIG. 269).

The initial setting flag 223de is a flag for indicating that the first second special pattern drawing has been performed among the second special pattern drawing performed during the pull-back mode, and is set on after the special pattern 2 presentation mode corresponding to the first second special pattern change performed during the pull-back mode has been determined (see S9605 in FIG. 269). It is referenced when setting the special pattern 2 presentation mode corresponding to the second special pattern change performed during the pull-back mode, and if it is determined that the initial setting flag 223de is set on (S9602 in FIG. 269: Yes), the process for setting the first special pattern 2 presentation mode (S9603, S9604 in FIG. 269) is skipped.

<Regarding the control process in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example>
Next, the contents of various control processes in the pachinko machine 10 of this fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 252 to Fig. 270. This fifth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned first control example in that a part of the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed, but the rest is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to Fig. 252 to Fig. 261, the control process executed by the main control device 110 in this fifth control example will be described. In this fifth control example, in comparison with the first control example described above, instead of the special symbol change process (see S104 in Fig. 157), the special symbol change process 5 (see S251 in Fig. 253) is performed instead of the special symbol big win determination process (S208 in Fig. 158), instead of the special symbol change pattern selection process (S209 in Fig. 159), the special symbol change pattern selection process 5 (S252 in Fig. 255), instead of the update process (S221 in Fig. 160), the update process 5 (S253 in Fig. 256), instead of the start winning process (S105 in Fig. 161), the start winning process 5 (S195 in Fig. 258). The difference is that pre-reading process 5 (S653 in FIG. 259) is executed instead of pre-reading process (S613 in FIG. 162), jackpot control process 5 (see S1894 in FIG. 260) is executed instead of jackpot control process (S1804 in FIG. 168), and jackpot end process 5 (see S8403 in FIG. 261) is executed instead of jackpot end process (see S1910 in FIG. 170), but otherwise it is the same. Detailed explanations of the same processing contents will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of special pattern change process 5 (S104 in FIG. 252) will be described with reference to FIG. 252. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special pattern change process 5 (S104). This special pattern change process 5 (S104) differs from the above-mentioned special pattern change process (see S104 in FIG. 157) in that part of the processing executed when starting the special pattern change and part of the processing executed when the change time for the special pattern change has elapsed have been changed.

Specifically, when special symbol variation process 5 (S104) is executed, the same processes of S201 to S207 and S210 to S213 as those of the special symbol variation process described above (see S104 in FIG. 157) are executed. Then, when the process of S207 or the process of S213 is completed, special symbol determination process 5 (S251) is executed, and then special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252) is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, if it is determined that the time for the special symbol change has elapsed (S214: Yes), the process of S216 to S220 is executed, which is the same as the special symbol change process described above (see S104 in FIG. 157), and this process is terminated. In addition, if it is determined in the process of S217 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S217: No), update process 5 is executed (S253), and then time-saving setting process 5 is executed (S254), and the process proceeds to S220.

Next, the processing contents of special pattern determination process 5 (S251) will be explained with reference to FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special pattern determination process 5 (S251). This special pattern determination process 5 (S251) is executed in place of the special pattern jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158) of the first control example described above, and in addition to determining the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, a determination of whether or not a time-saving win has occurred (time-saving lottery process 5) is executed.

When the special symbol determination process 5 (S251) is executed, first, data on the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is obtained (S8001), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number 5 table 202da (S8002), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S8003: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a jackpot (S8004), and the jackpot symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (S8005), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (S8003: No), the time-saving lottery process 5 is executed (S8006), and this process ends.

Here, time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006) is a process for executing a judgment of whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won in the current special pattern lottery. In other words, in this fifth control example, in the special pattern lottery, a judgment of whether or not the jackpot has been won is first executed (S8003), and if a jackpot has been won, the special pattern lottery is ended without executing a judgment of whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won, and the judgment of whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won is executed only if a jackpot has not been won. By configuring it in this way, multiple benefits (a jackpot win for a special pattern, a time-saving lottery win) are not awarded to a player in one special pattern lottery, so it is possible to prevent the player from being given an overly advantageous game.

Next, the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006) will be described with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006). In this time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006), it is determined whether the current game situation is a game situation in which a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) can be executed, and if it is determined that it can be executed, a process is performed to execute the time-saving winning judgment.

When the time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006) is executed, it is first determined whether the current target (lottery target) is special symbol 2 (second special symbol) (S8101). If it is determined that it is special symbol 2 (S8101; Yes), the current game status stored in the game status storage area is read (S8102), and it is determined whether the game status read is the normal status (S8103).

In the process of S8103, if it is determined that the state is normal (S8103: Yes), the lottery result (time-saving win determination result) is obtained based on the time-saving win random number 5 table 202de (S8104), and it is determined whether or not the time-saving win has occurred (S8105). If it is determined that the time-saving win has occurred (S8105: Yes), the time-saving pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained win type counter (first win type counter C2) (S8106), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8101 that the current target is not Special Pattern 2 (it is the first special pattern) (S8101: No), if it is determined in the process of S8103 that the current game state is not the normal state (S8103: No), or if it is determined in the process of S8105 that the time-saving win has not been won (S8105: No), the losing pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (S8107), and this process ends.

In other words, in this fifth control example, the execution conditions for executing a time-saving winning determination in a special pattern lottery are that the special pattern lottery has not resulted in a jackpot win, that it is the second special pattern lottery, and that the normal state is set. In this way, by setting conditions for executing a time-saving winning determination, it is possible to create cases where only a jackpot determination is executed, and cases where both a jackpot determination and a time-saving winning determination are executed, depending on the execution status of the special pattern lottery. Therefore, it is possible to vary the probability that a player will be granted a special benefit (jackpot or time-saving) in one special pattern lottery depending on the situation.

In addition, in this fifth control example, a game state such as a high probability state or a time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, is configured to end and transition to the normal state when the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 60 times). In other words, when the special pattern lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot, it is possible to make it easier to meet the execution conditions for the time-saving winning judgment. Therefore, when the special pattern lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot, it is possible to increase the probability that a player will be granted a privilege (jackpot or time-saving) in one special pattern lottery compared to before the predetermined number of times it was executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an extreme decrease in the motivation of players who have not won a jackpot for a predetermined period of time.

Next, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252) will be described with reference to FIG. 255. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252). In this special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252), first, in the special symbol determination process 5 (S251 in FIG. 253), it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether a jackpot of the special symbol is set (S8201). In the processing of S8201, if it is determined that a jackpot of the special symbol is set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd and the value of the acquired first jackpot type counter C2 (S8202). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special pattern execution area is obtained (S8203), and the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db corresponding to the current game state (normal state, second probability variable state, probability variable state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read (S8204).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S8203 and the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db read in the process of S8204 (S8205), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205 (S8206). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the stopping pattern of the special symbol is set (S8207), the start of the special symbol fluctuation is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S8208), a value indicating the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is set to the value of a special symbol fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S8209), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of stopping pattern indicating the result of this special symbol fluctuation, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not result in a reach, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by external output processing of the main processing of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss (S8201: No), then it is determined whether the time-saving lottery result (time-saving winning determination result) is a time-saving winning (S8209), and if it is determined that the time-saving winning is a win (S8209: Yes), the time-saving type is determined by referring to the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df (S8210), and the process proceeds to S8203. Also, if it is determined in the process of S8209 that the time-saving winning is not a win (S8209: No), the process skips S8210 and proceeds to S8203.

Next, the processing contents of update process 5 (S253) will be described with reference to FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of update process 5 (S253). In this update process 5 (S253), the same processing as the update process described above (see S221 in FIG. 160) is executed, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 5 (S254) will be described with reference to FIG. 257. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 5 (S254). In this time-saving setting process 5 (S254), a process for setting the time-saving state when the time-saving winning decision is made is executed. When the time-saving setting process 5 (S254) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a time-saving winning (S8351), and if it is determined that the time-saving winning is made (S8351: Yes), a value corresponding to the determined time-saving type is set in the time-saving counter 203h (S8352), the time-saving state is set in the game state storage area (S8353), and a state command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the time-saving type game state (information indicating the time-saving state and information indicating the set time-saving type) is set (S8354), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8351 that the time-saving option has not been won (S8351: No), this process ends.

In other words, in this fifth control example, the time-saving state is set at different times depending on the time-saving winning trigger. If the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set when the special pattern stops changing, and if the time-saving state is set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set when the jackpot game ends, not when the special pattern stops changing.

By configuring it in this way, the timing at which the time-saving state is set can be varied, providing players with a game that they will not tire of.

Next, the processing contents of start winning process 5 (S195) will be explained with reference to FIG. 258. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of start winning process 5 (S195). This start winning process 5 (S195) differs from the start winning process described above (see S105 in FIG. 161) only in that the value of time-saving type selection counter CC1 is added to the types of counter values stored in each special pattern reserved ball storage area (S651, S652) and in that pre-read process 5 (S653) is executed; the processing contents are otherwise the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, the processing contents of pre-reading process 5 (S653) will be explained with reference to FIG. 259. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of pre-reading process 5 (S653). When this pre-reading process 5 (S653) is executed, first, the various counter values, namely the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the time-saving type selection counter CC1, are read from the storage area newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b (S750). Then, the read data is stored in the empty storage area in the pre-reading reserved storage area with the smallest winning order (S702).

Next, the result of the hit/miss judgment is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the read-ahead reserved memory area. Note that here, both the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a low probability state and the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a high probability state are determined. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) and the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information, making it difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special pattern) that will be set at the time when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot or not (S703). If it is determined that the result is a jackpot (S703: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the jackpot type and fluctuation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S751), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S703 is that it is not a jackpot (S703: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a time-saving win (S752), and if it is determined that it is not a time-saving win (S752: No), a winning command is set that includes information that can identify a miss win and a fluctuation pattern based on the various counter values that have been read (S705), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S752 that a time-saving win has been made (S752: Yes), it is determined whether the pending fluctuation is in a normal state (S753), and if it is determined that it is in a normal state (S753: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the time-saving win and the fluctuation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S754), and this processing ends.

The winning command set in the processing of S704, S705, or S754 is set to include, in addition to the information indicating the winning/losing judgment result described above (information that has a different meaning depending on the winning/losing judgment result), information indicating the various counter values read out by the processing of S701 as common information. The winning command set in this processing is then output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S1801) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 167).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, it can execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which it changes the display mode of the reserved balls (for example, by changing the color of the reserved balls to a color different from normal) based on various information contained in the winning command, or it displays a preview pattern or the like before the change starts to suggest to the player the result of the winning/losing judgment (whether or not they have won the jackpot or the time-saving winning option).

In this control example, since there is only one probability state for the special pattern (low probability state for the special pattern), the information to be set in the winning command (win/lose judgment result) can be set regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine that has multiple probability states for the special pattern (high probability state for the special pattern, low probability state for the special pattern), the winning/lose judgment result for the high probability state of the special pattern and the winning/lose judgment result for the low probability state of the special pattern can be distinguished, and the winning command can be set based on the results of each judgment. Alternatively, a judgment value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that is judged to be a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state can be specified, and the winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern can be set only when that judgment value is read.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot or time-saving win is output to the voice lamp control device 113 only if it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot or time-saving win has occurred, so it is possible to create a sense of anticipation of a jackpot win even with special pattern changes that do not involve a pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, the game state when the lottery for the special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be accurately determined, and a win/lose judgment may be performed based on the game state. In this case, the determination is possible by configuring the selection of the fluctuation pattern to be selected to be constant regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation, rather than varying the selection of the fluctuation pattern depending on the number of reserved balls. When performing a look-ahead, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the order of fluctuation until the reserved balls start to fluctuate based on the reserved and memorized information.

In addition, in this control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, a read-ahead process is executed based on the winning information, and a win/lose judgment is predicted in advance during the read-ahead process. However, without being limited to this, in the read-ahead process of the main control unit 110, information indicating the contents (counter values) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be set as a winning command, and the winning/lose judgment result may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control unit 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and if it is determined that a look-ahead performance should be executed, to analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control device 110 (prediction of the winning/losing determination result). As a result, if the look-ahead performance is not executed, specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the winning/losing determination result) is not executed, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary control from being executed in the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the results of a look-ahead process that was executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 260, the processing contents of the jackpot control process 5 (S1894) will be described. FIG. 260 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the jackpot control process 5 (S1894). This jackpot control process 5 (S1894) differs from the above-mentioned jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168) in that when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes), the process to be executed is to set the opening of a specific winning port (S8401) and set a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started (S8402), and when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (S1909: Yes), jackpot end process 5 (S8403) is executed. Since the rest of the process is the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 261, the processing contents of the jackpot end processing 5 (S8403) executed in the jackpot control processing 5 (see S1894 in FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the jackpot end processing 5 (S8403). When this jackpot end processing 5 (S8403) is executed, the currently executing jackpot type is identified (S8501), the value (time-saving end condition) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the special counter 203i and the time-saving counter 203h (S8502), the game status corresponding to the value of the special counter 203i and the time-saving counter 203h is set in the game status storage area (S8503), the value of the special counter 203i that has been set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and the state command indicating the game status are set (S8504), the jackpot flag is set to OFF (S8505), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to Fig. 262 to Fig. 270, the control process contents executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be described. In this fifth control example, the difference from the first control example described above is that the command determination process (see S4112 in Fig. 175) is replaced by a command determination process 5 (S4182 in Fig. 262), the state command reception process (see S4202 in Fig. 176) is replaced by a state command reception process 5 (S4282 in Fig. 263), the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (see S4903 in Fig. 183) is replaced by a special chart 2 performance mode setting process (see S4907 in Fig. 184), and the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in Fig. 269) is executed instead of the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (see S4983 in Fig. 268), and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

Figure 262 is a flowchart showing command determination process 5 (S4182 in Figure 262). As shown in Figure 262, command determination process 5 (S4182 in Figure 262) differs from the command determination process described above (see S4112 in Figure 175) in that it replaces status command reception process with status command reception process 5 (S4282), but is otherwise the same.

Figure 263 is a flowchart showing status command reception process 5 (S4282). As shown in Figure 263, in this status command reception process 5 (S4282), a process is executed to determine the newly set game state based on the status command received from the main control device 110, and to set various effects based on the determination result.

In state command reception process 5 (S4282), it is first determined whether there has been a change in the game state (S9001). If it is determined that there has been no change in the game state (S9001: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9001 that there has been a change in the game state (S9001: Yes), the information set in the slave state setting area 223g is shifted, and the game state corresponding to the command currently received from the master control device 110 is set in the slave state setting area 223g (S9002).

Next, it is determined whether the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003). If it is determined that the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003: Yes), a normal state presentation setting process is executed (S9004), and this process ends. A detailed explanation of the normal state presentation setting process (S9004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 264. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9003 that the currently received command is not a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003: No), the process proceeds to S9005.

In the process of S9005, it is determined whether the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the time-saving state (S9005). If it is determined that the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the time-saving state (S9005: Yes), the time-saving state presentation setting process is executed (S906), and this process ends. A detailed explanation of the time-saving state presentation setting process (S9006) will be described later with reference to FIG. 266. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9005 that the currently received command is not a command indicating a change to the time-saving state (S9005: No), the process proceeds to S9007.

In the process of S9007, it is determined whether the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the second high probability state (S9007). If it is determined that the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the second high probability state (S9007: Yes), the second high probability state presentation setting process is executed (S9008), and this process ends. A detailed explanation of the second high probability state presentation setting process (S9008) will be described later with reference to FIG. 267. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9007 that the currently received command is not a command indicating a change to the second high probability state (S9007: No), the process proceeds to S9009.

In the process of S9009, it is determined whether the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the high probability state (S9009). If it is determined that the command indicates a change to the high probability state (S9009: Yes), the number of time-saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the time-saving counter 203da (S9010), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9009 that the currently received command is not a command indicating a change to the high probability state (S9009: No), this process ends as it is.

Figure 264 is a flow chart showing the normal state presentation setting process (S9004). This normal state presentation setting process (S9004) is executed when a state command indicating the normal state is received in state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in Figure 263). In this normal state presentation setting process (S9004), as shown in Figure 264, different presentation modes are set depending on whether the game state before the normal state was set was the second high probability state or not. If the game state is not the second high probability state, that is, if it is determined that the game state has transitioned from the high probability state or the time-saving state to the normal state, a pull-back mode setting process is executed to set the presentation mode corresponding to the pull-back mode (pull-back zone).

In the normal state presentation setting process (S9004), first, the game state before the change is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9101). Next, it is determined whether the game state before the change read in the process of S9101 is the second high probability state (S9102). If it is determined that the game state before the change is the second high probability state (S9102: Yes), a display command for the presentation mode corresponding to the first normal mode is set (S9103), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9102 that the game state before the change read is not the second high probability state (S9104: No), the pullback mode setting process is executed (S9104), and this process is terminated. A detailed explanation of the pullback mode setting process (S9104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 265.

Figure 265 is a flowchart showing the pull-back mode setting process (S9104). In this pull-back mode setting process (S9104), as shown in Figure 265, various processes are executed to set display commands for showing the display mode (presentation mode) related to the presentation screen shown in Figure 237.

In the pullback mode setting process (S9104), first, the game state before the change is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9201). Next, it is determined whether there is a reserved ball for the second special symbol (S9202). If it is determined that there is a reserved ball for the second special symbol (S9202: Yes), the number of times the second special symbol will be drawn during the normal state is identified (S9203). Next, the value of the number of times the second special symbol will be drawn during the normal state identified in the process of S9203 is set in the time-saving lottery count counter 223db (S9204).

Next, using the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol, the value of the time-saving lottery counter 223db, and the reserved special symbol 2 information, the mode type is determined by referring to the pullback mode selection table 222da (see FIG. 250) (S9205), the mode type determined in the process of S9205 is stored in the mode type storage area 223dc (S9206), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9202 that there are no reserved balls for the second special symbol (S9202: No), a display command for the presentation mode corresponding to the first normal mode is set (S9207), and this process ends.

Fig. 266 is a flow chart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process (S9006). This time-saving state presentation setting process (S9006) is executed when a state command indicating the time-saving state is received in state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in Fig. 263). In this time-saving state presentation setting process (S9006), as shown in Fig. 266, if the game state before the time-saving state is set is a special state, a process is executed to set the display mode (presentation mode) corresponding to the preparation time (see Fig. 239), and if it is a normal state, a process is executed to set the display mode to indicate that the time-saving state has been entered or the display mode (presentation mode) corresponding to the extended time corresponding to the long time-saving state (see Fig. 238).

In the time-saving state presentation setting process (S9006), first, the game state before the change is executed from the slave state setting area 223g (S9301). Next, it is determined whether the game state before the change read in the process of S9301 is a high probability state (S9302). If it is determined that the game state before the change is a high probability state (S9302: Yes), a display command is set to show the corresponding presentation mode during the preparation time (S9303), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state before the change read in the processing of S9301 is not a special state (S9302: No), it is determined whether the game state before the change is a normal state (S9304). If it is determined that the game state before the change is not a normal state (S9304: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state before the change is a normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of time-saving times included in the received command is set as the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S9305), and it is determined whether the type of time-saving time set this time is time-saving A (S9306).

In the process of S9306, if it is determined that the time-saving type to be set this time is time-saving A (S9306: Yes), the long time-saving flag 223dd is set to ON (S9307), a command is set to indicate the presentation mode corresponding to the extended time (S9308), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving type to be set this time is not time-saving A (S9306: No), this process ends.

Figure 267 is a flowchart showing the second high probability state presentation setting process (S9008). This second high probability state presentation setting process (S9008) is executed when a state command indicating the second high probability state is received in state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in Figure 263). In this second high probability state presentation setting process (S9008), as shown in Figure 267, different presentation modes are set depending on whether the game state before the second high probability state is set is a high probability state or not, and if it is a high probability state, a pull-back mode setting process is executed to set a presentation mode corresponding to the pull-back mode (pull-back zone).

In the second probability variable state presentation setting process (S9008), first, the game state before the change is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9401). Next, it is determined whether the game state before the change read in the process of S9401 is a probability variable state (S9402). If it is determined that the game state before the change is a probability variable state (S9402: Yes), the pullback mode setting process (see S9104 in FIG. 265) is executed (S9403), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9402 that the game state before the change is not a probability variable state (S9402: No), this process is terminated.

Figure 268 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5 (S4983). In this special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5 (S4983), a process is executed to set the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol variation to be executed.

In the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 5 (S4983), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223da is decremented by 1 (S9502), a display command is set to indicate the value of the time-saving counter 223da after the decrement (S9503), and the process proceeds to S9504. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9501 that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is not greater than 0 (S9501: No), the processes of S9502 to S9503 are skipped and the process proceeds to S9504. In the process of S9504, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S9504), and this process ends.

Figure 269 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 5 (S4987). In this special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 5 (S4987), as shown in Figure 269, processing is executed to set various presentation modes depending on the game state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed.

In the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 5 (S4987), first, it is determined whether the current game state is normal or the second special symbol state (S9601). If it is determined that the current game state is normal or the second special symbol state (S9601: Yes), it is determined whether the initial setting flag 223de is on (S9602). If it is determined that the initial setting flag 223de is not on (S9602: No), the number of times the second special symbol will be drawn during the pullback zone is determined based on the value of the time-saving drawing count counter 223db (S9603), and the presentation mode corresponding to the determined number of times the second special symbol will be drawn is determined (S9604).

Next, the initial setting flag 223de is set to ON (S9605), and the process proceeds to S9606. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9602 that the initial setting flag 223de is ON (S9602: Yes), the process skips the processes of S9603 to S9605 and proceeds to S9606.

In the process of S9606, the suggested mode is determined by referring to the suggested mode selection table 222db (see FIG. 251) (S9606). Next, the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db is decremented by 1 (S9607), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db after the decrement is 0 (S9608). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db after the decrement is 0 (S9608: Yes), the presentation mode corresponding to the final fluctuation of the pullback zone is determined (S9609), and the initial setting flag 223de is set to OFF (S9610). Then, a display command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S9611), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9608 that the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db after subtraction is not 0 (S9608: No), the processes of S9609 to S9610 are skipped, the process of S9611 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9601 that the game is not in the normal state or the second probability bonus state (S9601: No), the value of the time-saving counter 223da is decremented by 1 (S9612). Next, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (S9613). If it is determined that the current game state is not in the time-saving state, that is, if it is in the probability bonus state (S9613: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the value of the time-saving counter 223da after the decrement (S9614), a chance time performance setting process is executed (S9619), the process of S9611 described above is executed, and this process is terminated. A detailed explanation of the chance time performance setting process (S9619) will be described later with reference to FIG. 270.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9613 that the time-saving state is in effect (S9613: Yes), it is determined whether the long time-saving flag 223dd is on (S9615). If it is determined that the long time-saving flag 223dd is not on (S9615: No), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S9614. On the other hand, if it is determined that the long time-saving flag 223dd is on (S9615: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is less than 150 (S9616).

If it is determined in the process of S9616 that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is less than 150 (S9616: Yes), the presentation mode for indicating the remaining number of time-saving times is determined (S9617), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S9614. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9616 that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is not less than 150 (S9616: No), a display command is set indicating that the time-saving state will continue until the next big win (S9618), and the process proceeds to the chance time presentation setting process (S9619).

Figure 270 is a flowchart showing the chance time performance setting process (S9619). This chance time performance setting process (S9619) is a process for setting the performance mode of the variable performance executed when a high probability state for normal symbols is set in the special symbol 2 performance mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in Figure 269), and as shown in Figure 270, a process for updating the display mode of the remaining period display is executed.

In the chance time performance setting process (S9619), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da subtracted in the process of S9612 of the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) is 0 (S9701). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da after subtraction is 0 (S9701: Yes), a performance mode including a guidance mode for accumulating special chart 2 reserves is determined (S9702), and then it is determined whether the long time-saving flag 223dd is on (S9703).

If it is determined in the process of S9703 that the long time-saving flag 223dd is on (S9703: Yes), the long time-saving flag 223dd is set to off (S9704), the presentation mode corresponding to the variable pattern command is determined (S9705), and this process ends. On the other hand, if in the process of S9701 the value of the time-saving counter 223da after subtraction is not 0 (S9701: No), or in the process of S9703 it is determined that the long time-saving flag 223db is not on (S9703: No), the process of S9705 described above is executed, and this process ends.

<First Modification of Fifth Control Example>
Next, the first modified example of the fifth control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. 271 to FIG. 277. In the fifth control example described above, the time-saving winning is possible only in the second special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set. In contrast, the first modified example is different in that the time-saving winning is possible even in the first special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set. The other configurations are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same contents will be omitted.

In the fifth control example described above, a game is played in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where a high probability state (high probability state, time-saving state) for normal symbols is set, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reservation) can be acquired during the high probability state for normal symbols. Then, when the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation acquired during the high probability state for normal symbols is executed in the normal state where a low probability state for normal symbols is set, in addition to the jackpot lottery, the time-saving lottery is also executed. This makes it possible for a player who has experienced a game during a high probability state for normal symbols (advantageous game) that is advantageous to the player to execute a game (pull-back game) that is more likely to return to advantageous game after the advantageous game ends.

However, in the fifth control example described above, unless a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) executed in the normal state and a game (advantageous game) in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set is executed, the player cannot benefit from the time-saving lottery, resulting in a problem that the player may become bored with the game without benefiting from the time-saving lottery.

In contrast, this first variant is configured so that it is possible to win the time-saving lottery even in the first special pattern lottery that is executed in the normal state, making it easier for players to benefit from the time-saving lottery.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols that is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special symbol lottery is configured to tend to have a longer period during which the high probability state for normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period) than the high probability state (probable bonus state, time-saving state) for normal symbols that is set based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In other words, when the time-saving state is won in the special symbol lottery, the player is configured to be granted a privilege that makes it easier for the normal symbol high probability period to continue until the next jackpot is won.

In contrast to this, in this first modified example, if a time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a short-term time-saving state (for example, one time of time-saving) can be set, and during the period in which this short-term time-saving state is set (normal symbol high probability period), a game can be played to acquire the right to play the second special symbol lottery. In other words, in this first modified example, the pull-back game in the fifth control example described above is configured to be played without winning a jackpot. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily play the second special symbol lottery in the normal state without winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery that is played in the normal state.

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, in this first modified example, multiple variation times can be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state. In this first modified example, when the time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first special symbol is displayed frozen in a display mode (time-saving symbol) for indicating a time-saving win after a predetermined variation time has passed, and then the time-saving state (one time of time-saving) is set, and the time-saving state continues until the special symbol variation executed next is displayed frozen.

In other words, the length of time that the time-saving state lasts is determined according to the time that the special symbol changes during the time-saving state. Therefore, the longer the time that the special symbol changes during the time-saving state, the easier it is to acquire many reserved special symbols 2 during the time-saving state, making it a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

<About the performance content of the first modified example of the fifth control example>
With reference to Figures 271 to 273, we will explain the characteristic presentation content executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the fifth control example.

First, in the fifth control example described above, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues after the end of the jackpot game (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues (normal symbol high probability period) are set for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the 60th special symbol change stops after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has changed 60 times), and during the normal symbol high probability period, it is possible to acquire the right to draw the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved). When the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period end and the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, the time-saving judgment is executed only if the result of the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 lottery) executed based on the special symbol 2 reserved acquired during the normal symbol high probability period is not a jackpot win, and if the time-saving judgment results in a win in the time-saving state, the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set.

Note that special symbol 2 reservation means that when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is already changing, the right to select the second special symbol is reserved, and up to a maximum of four selection rights are reserved (reserved memory).

In the fifth control example, when the normal state is set, the probability of winning a normal symbol is low, so it is more difficult to win the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) compared to the time-saving state, and it is difficult to play a normal symbol winning game (normal symbol winning game) in which the electric device 640a is in the open state, so it is configured to be difficult to get a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. In the normal state, the special symbol 2 lottery is only executed if, as described above, a special symbol 2 reservation is obtained during the normal symbol high probability period set after the end of the jackpot game, and the normal state is set after the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period end, and a special symbol 2 reservation exists.

Therefore, in order to set a state (e.g., time-saving state) that is more favorable than the normal state, a player must win the jackpot at least once. A player who does not win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery), which is executed when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64, will end up playing in the unfavorable normal state for a long period of time, which could reduce the player's motivation to play.

In contrast, in the first variant of the fifth control example, in the normal state, a time-saving judgment is performed even if the result of the special symbol 1 lottery is not a jackpot win, and if a time-saving win is found, the time-saving state is set for a predetermined period (for example, the period from when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes once until the special symbol stops changing), and it is possible to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 during the time-saving state; in other words, it is configured so that it is possible to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 even if the jackpot win is not won, which is different from the fifth control example.

Specifically, if the result of the special symbol 1 lottery is not a big win, a time-saving judgment is executed, and the probability of winning the time-saving in this case is set to a lower probability than the probability of winning the time-saving with the second special symbol (for example, the probability of winning the time-saving with the second special symbol is 1/6, and the probability of winning the time-saving with the first special symbol is 1/200). In addition, the number of time-saving times granted when the time-saving with the first special symbol is won (the period during which the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) continues) is set to a number less than when the time-saving with the second special symbol is won (for example, when the time-saving with the second special symbol is won, the period during which the special symbol changes 10,000 times and the 10,000th time the special symbol changes and stops, and when the time-saving with the first special symbol is won, the period during which the special symbol changes once and the special symbol changes and stops changing).

Here, if the probability of winning the time-saving lottery in the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) during the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) is, for example, 1/200, even if the lottery right for the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved) is acquired up to the upper limit number (up to 4 in the embodiment) during the normal pattern high probability period, the probability of winning the time-saving lottery at least once in four special pattern 2 lotteries is about 2%, and when the special pattern high probability period and normal pattern high probability period end and the normal state is set, the player hardly expects that the advantageous state will be set again by winning the time-saving lottery in the special pattern 2 lottery based on the special pattern 2 reserved, so it is difficult to make the player think that the special pattern 2 lottery during the normal state is a special period, and there is a risk that the player will not play with enthusiasm to win the special pattern 2 reserved until the last moment when the normal pattern high probability period ends.

Therefore, it is desirable that the probability of winning the time-saving special drawing 2 lottery during the normal state is set to a probability (for example, 1/6) that can be fully expected to win the time-saving special drawing 2 lottery based on the acquired special drawing 2 reserves when the maximum number of special drawing 2 reserves (up to 4 in this embodiment) are acquired during the normal drawing high probability period. By configuring it in this way, the probability of winning the time-saving special drawing 2 lottery at least once in four special drawing 2 lotteries is about 50%, and even if the special drawing high probability period and normal drawing high probability period end and the normal state is set, it is possible to make the player expect that the advantageous state will be set again by winning the time-saving special drawing 2 lottery based on the special drawing 2 reserves, and by making the player think that the special drawing 2 lottery during the normal state is a special period, the player can be motivated to play in order to win as many special drawing 2 reserves as possible until the last moment when the normal drawing high probability period ends.

In contrast, if the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the first special symbol drawing (special symbol 1 drawing) during the normal state is set to the same probability as the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the special symbol 2 drawing during the normal state, or set to a higher probability than the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the special symbol 2 drawing, there is a risk that the time-saving feature will be won frequently in the normal state, making it easier for the time-saving feature to be set, which may give an excessive advantage to the player.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the special drawing 1 during the normal state is set lower than the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the special drawing 2 during the normal state.

Moreover, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the time-saving feature is selected in the special pattern 1 lottery, the time-saving feature is set to one time, i.e., the special pattern is changed once, and the time-saving feature is set for the period until the special pattern stops changing.

For example, if the time-saving number of times is granted two or more times, if the player plays correctly, it is possible to obtain the maximum number of reserved special charts 2. However, in this configuration, if the time-saving number is won in the special chart 1 lottery, the player can obtain the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 every time. Therefore, the ease of winning the time-saving number is always constant, and there is a risk that the play during the time-saving state, which is set based on winning the time-saving number in the special chart 1 lottery, will become monotonous, in which the player simply obtains the maximum number of reserved special charts 2.

In contrast, if the number of time-saving turns granted when the time-saving turn is won in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is 1, it is possible to vary the number of lottery rights for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) that a player can obtain during the time-saving state by combining the special symbol change time when the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the normal symbol change time, or the opening pattern of the electric roler 640a that is opened as a bonus for winning the normal symbol lottery. This makes it possible to vary the ease of winning the time-saving turn without varying the probability of winning the time-saving turn depending on the number of special symbol 2 reserved turns that can be obtained, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this way, the time-saving judgment is also performed for the special symbol 1 lottery during the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and if the time-saving state is won, the time-saving state in which the special symbol 2 reserved can be acquired is set, so that even if the player is unable to win a jackpot for an extended period of time, they will have the opportunity to acquire the special symbol 2 reserved, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the normal state continuing for an extended period of time that is unfavorable to the player.

As described above, in the first variant of the fifth control example, a time-saving determination is also performed during the special chart 1 lottery during the normal state, and since the game state is changed after the time-saving win, the player's playing method also changes, so it is necessary to inform the player that they have won the time-saving win in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, the game content differs between the time-saving state set when the time-saving win is won in the special symbol 1 lottery during the normal state and the time-saving state set when the time-saving win is won in the second special pattern lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) during the normal state (in the time-saving state set by winning the time-saving win in the special symbol 1 lottery, the player acquires many special symbol 2 reserves and aims to win the time-saving win in the special symbol 2 lottery during the normal state, which is executed based on the acquired special symbol 2 reserves, while in the time-saving state set when the time-saving win is won in the special symbol 2 lottery, the player aims to win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery), so that players do not get confused. It is necessary to make the display mode during the time-saving state different so that players can easily understand which special symbol lottery the time-saving win is based on.

Based on the above, we will explain a performance example in the first variant of this fifth control example with reference to Figures 271 to 273.

Figure 271 (a) is an example of a variable display screen when the result of the special chart 1 lottery in the normal state is a jackpot win or a time-saving win. As shown in Figure 271 (a), when the result of the special chart 1 lottery in the normal state is a jackpot win or a time-saving win, a rabbit character 801 and a treasure chest 810e are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the secondary display area Ds displays "If a 'V' comes out of the treasure chest, you've won! If a 'time' comes out, you've got the time-saving win! Open the treasure chest." In other words, when Figure 271 (a) is displayed, the player is not able to tell whether they have won a jackpot or a time-saving win.

By configuring it in this way, when the treasure chest 810e is displayed, it is possible to make the player expect that he or she will win either the jackpot or the time-saving win, and by having the player predict whether he or she will win the jackpot or the time-saving win during the period until the treasure chest 810e opens, it is possible to increase the excitement of the game.

Figure 271 (b) is an example of a display screen when the result of the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is a time-saving win. In the main display area Dm, the treasure chest 810e shown in Figure 271 (a) opens, and a ball tm1 with "Time x 1" written on it appears, and the secondary display area Ds displays "GET 1 time time-saving" to notify the player that they have won the time-saving win.

If the result of the special chart 1 lottery is a jackpot win, a treasure chest 810e opens in the main display area Dm in FIG. 271(b), and a ball with the letter "V" appears from inside. The secondary display area displays "Congratulations! Jackpot!" to notify the player that they have won the jackpot.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand whether the game state that is set after the changing first special symbol stops is a jackpot game state or a time-saving state (a low probability state for special symbols, a high probability state for normal symbols).

In the embodiment, the effects in Fig. 271(a) and (b) are executed when a jackpot or time-saving win is won, but the effects in Fig. 271(a) and (b) may be executed in some cases when the result of the special drawing 1 is a miss in either case, in which case a display mode indicating a miss is displayed in Fig. 271(b) (for example, the treasure chest 810e is empty and "Sorry" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds).

In this case, the display mode of the treasure chest 810e displayed in FIG. 271(a) may be changed to indicate the likelihood of winning the jackpot or the time-saving prize (for example, when a blue treasure chest 810e is displayed, it indicates a high probability of a miss win, and when a gold treasure chest 810e is displayed, it indicates a high probability of winning either of these).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the results of the special chart 1 lottery continue to be a miss in any judgment for a long period of time, and the player becomes bored with the game because the performance is not executed.

Although details will be described later, the small display area Dm10 is a display area for displaying the number of lottery rights (special chart 1 reserve) for the first special pattern that have been acquired, and in FIG. 271(b), reserves h5 and h6 are displayed in black, and reserves h7 and h8 are displayed in white, indicating that there are special chart 1 reserves corresponding to the number of reserves displayed in black (FIG. 271(b) indicates that there are two special chart 1 reserves). In other words, the embodiment is an example of a performance that is executed when a time-saving win is won in the special chart 1 lottery during the normal state when a special chart 1 reserve exists.

Here, gaming machines are generally configured such that when an advantageous state (e.g., time-saving state) is set, a shorter fluctuation time is likely to be set for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. By configuring it in this way, the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is primarily executed when an advantageous state (e.g., time-saving state) is set, and by shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the lottery result is a miss, it is possible to prevent play in an advantageous state from becoming protracted, allowing the player to play comfortably.

However, in the first variant of this fifth control example, when there is no reserved special symbol 1 and a time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) during the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), when the time-saving win is notified as shown in Figure 271 (b), since the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the player begins a game (right-hand hit game) in which he fires a game ball toward the second ball entrance 640 in the right area of the game machine's panel, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the second special symbol begins to change. In other words, when the time-saving state is set, the second special symbol, which is likely to have a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol, will begin to fluctuate, and when the second special symbol stops fluctuating, the time-saving state will end, making it highly likely that the player will not be able to acquire the maximum number of lottery rights for the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2), which puts the player at a disadvantage.

In addition, if the configuration is such that a longer variation time is likely to be set for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol in the time-saving state, and the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving win in the special symbol 1 lottery, it becomes easier to acquire the upper limit of special symbol 2 reserves by varying the second special symbol, so there is a risk that a player may engage in dishonest play by firing game balls one at a time during play in the normal state so as not to acquire the lottery right for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserve).

Therefore, if the time-saving win is won in the special chart 1 lottery when there is no special chart 1 reserved, the change in the first special pattern that won the time-saving win may be stopped without announcing that the time-saving win has been won (for example, a display may be displayed indicating that the treasure chest 810e is empty), and the next time the change in the special pattern begins based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the large second ball entrance 640, a performance during the time-saving state (see FIG. 272(a)) may be executed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the time-saving feature is won in the special chart 1 lottery when there is no special chart 1 reserved, the player will not know whether or not he or she has won the time-saving feature, and will continue playing by putting the game ball into the first ball entry port 64 (left-handed play), making it easier to execute a change due to the first special symbol during the time-saving feature state that is set based on the time-saving feature being won in the special chart 1 lottery.

In addition, in order to change the first special symbol during the time-saving state that is set based on winning the time-saving lottery in the special symbol 1 drawing, a starting hole that can change the first special symbol may be provided above the second ball entry hole 640 in the right area of the face of the game machine.

Referring to Figures 272(a) and (b), we will explain the effects that are executed when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special chart 1 lottery during the normal state.

Details will be given later, but in the first variant of the fifth control example, if a time-saving win occurs in the special symbol 1 lottery during normal mode, the time-saving mode is set for the period from when the fluctuation of the first special symbol that won the time-saving win stops until the fluctuation of the next special symbol 1 that is executed ends.

As mentioned above, when the time-saving state is set, the probability of winning a normal symbol increases, and compared to the normal state, it is easier to play a normal symbol winning game in which the electric device 640a is in the open state, so it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the player can obtain the special symbol 2 reservation.

The number of reserved special symbols 2 that a player can obtain during the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be varied by the combination of the change time of the special symbols, the change time of the normal symbols, and the opening pattern of the electric device 640a when a normal symbol is hit.

For example, when the time-saving state is set, the change time of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds, the change time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds, and the electric device 640a opens 1 second x 2 times as a normal symbol win, so the electric device 640a will open a maximum of 12 times, allowing the player to acquire the right to draw the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) up to the maximum number of reserved memorization times (4 times in this embodiment).

On the other hand, when the time-saving state is set, the change time of the first special symbol is set to 5 seconds, the change time of the normal symbol is 4 seconds, and the electric device 640a opens once per second for a normal symbol, the game ball can only enter the second ball entrance 640 once at most, so the player can only obtain one reserved special symbol 2.

Then, when the special symbols stop changing and the time-saving state ends, a second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is executed based on the reserved special symbol 2 that the player acquired during the time-saving state.

In the embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving bonus for the second special symbol in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is higher than the probability of winning the time-saving bonus for the first special symbol (1/6 in the embodiment), and the number of time-saving bonuses granted when the time-saving bonus is won is also higher (10,000 in the embodiment).

In other words, the more reserved special symbols 2 that are acquired during the time-saving mode, the more times the player can receive the special symbol 2 lottery, so the longer the special symbol fluctuation time when the time-saving mode is set, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, when the time-saving state is set, the time for the special symbol to change, the time for the normal symbol to change, or the opening pattern of the electric device 640a when a normal symbol is hit may be set to a fixed value.

Figure 272 (a) shows the display screen during the time-saving mode when the first special symbol that won the time-saving mode in the normal mode stops, and the change time of the next first special symbol to be executed is set to 30 seconds, the change time of the normal symbol is set to 2 seconds, and the opening pattern of the electric role device 640a is set to 1 second x 1 time.

The first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the small display area Dm1, and a display indicating that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner in the small display area Dm8 makes it easy for the player to understand which special symbol is changing.

In response to the time-saving state being set, the small display area Dm4 displays "Hit right" to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the second ball entrance 640 in the right area of the game machine's face, and the secondary display area Ds displays "Hit right to accumulate reserved balls!", allowing even first-time players to play in a way that suits the game state.

In the main display area Dm, the message "Collect capsules within the time limit while charging!" is displayed in the center, and an effect (charge effect) is executed in which the rabbit character 801 acquires a capsule.

The capsule is a display to notify that a game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640. When a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the reserved symbol in the small display area Dm9 lights up in black, one capsule is displayed. Here, the small display area Dm9 is a display area to show the number of reserved special symbols 2 that the player has acquired by having the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640. If there is no lottery right for the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2), reserved symbols h1 to h4 are displayed in white. If the player has acquired a reserved special symbol 2, the reserved symbols h1 to h4 are lit up in black order, starting from the youngest symbol, and when the reserved memory reaches the upper limit, all reserved symbols h1 to h4 are lit up in black.

The small display area Dm10 is a display area for showing the number of lottery rights (special symbol 1 reserve) for the first special symbol that the player has acquired by inserting a game ball into the first ball entrance 64. If there is no special symbol 1 reserve, reserves h5 to h8 are displayed in white. If the player acquires a special symbol 1 reserve, reserves h5 to h8 are lit in black in ascending order, starting with reserve h5. When the player acquires the maximum number of special symbol 1 reserves (four in this embodiment), all reserves h5 to h8 are lit in black.

In other words, the example shown in FIG. 272(a) shows that one reserved special symbol 1 and one reserved special symbol 2 have been acquired. This configuration makes it easier for the player to understand the upper limit of the reserved number of each special symbol and the current reserved acquisition status of the special symbols, and when the reserved number of each special symbol has been acquired up to the upper limit, the lottery right for each special symbol is not reserved even if the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, so that the player can easily decide whether or not to continue playing to get the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 depending on the reserved acquisition status.

When reserved balls h1 to h3 are displayed in black in the small display area Dm9 and reserved ball h4 is displayed in black due to a game ball entering the second ball entrance 640, in other words, when the maximum number of reserved special balls 2, 4, is stored, the main display area Dm displays "MAX Acquisition Completed!" to inform the player that the maximum number of reserved special balls 2 has been acquired. This configuration makes it easy for the player to understand that the maximum number of reserved special balls 2 has been acquired, which reassures the player.

The small display area Dm5 displays the remaining time until the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), that is, the remaining time of the changing special symbols, and the small display area Dm11 displays "Capsule upper limit acquisition expectation MAX". The content displayed in the small display area Dm11 corresponds to the number of reserved special symbols 2 that can be acquired during the time-saving state. In the example shown in FIG. 272(a), the change time of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds, the change time of the normal symbol is set to 2 seconds, and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a is set to 1 second x 1 time, so as described above, the reserved special symbols 2 can be acquired up to the upper limit of 4, and therefore "Capsule upper limit acquisition expectation MAX" is displayed. In contrast, if the change time of the first special symbol is set to 5 seconds, the change time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds, and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a is set to 1 second x 2 times, only one reserved special symbol 2 can be acquired at most, so "Capsule upper limit acquisition expectation LOW" is displayed.

This configuration allows the player to enjoy predicting the number of reserved special symbols 2 that they can obtain during the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) from the display contents of the small display area Dm11, and when a short change time is set as the change time for special symbols, it becomes possible to have the player quickly launch the game ball, preventing the player from missing out on playing in the time-saving state due to a delayed launch of the game ball even though the time-saving state has been set.

The display of the capsule upper limit expectation level may be any display that indicates whether it is high or low; for example, the expectation level may be indicated by the number of stars.

In the embodiment, when the time-saving win is won in the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) during the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), the lottery right for the first special pattern (special pattern 1 reservation) exists, and the change of the first special pattern is executed based on the special pattern 1 reservation during the time-saving state. However, if the special pattern 1 reservation does not exist at the time of the time-saving win, the charge performance starts when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 next time and the change of either the first special pattern or the second special pattern starts. The time-saving state is set when the change of the first special pattern that won the time-saving win stops, regardless of whether the special pattern 1 reservation exists or not.

Figure 272 (b) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when the special pattern stops changing and the time-saving state ends.

The first special symbol is displayed in a static manner in the small display area Dm1, and "0 seconds remaining" is displayed in the small display area Dm5, indicating that the time-saving period has ended.

In the small display area Dm9, reserved symbols h1 to h4 are lit up in black, and the words "Total 4 GET" and capsules cp1 to cp4 are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, informing the player that they have acquired four lottery rights for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved). Capsules cp1 to cp4 correspond to reserved symbols 1 to 4, respectively, and for example, as a result of determining in advance the reserved symbol information for reserved symbol h2 (the second reserved symbol 2 acquired during the charge performance) (pre-reading result), if there is a high expectation of winning the time-saving feature, capsule cp2 is displayed in a different manner (black capsule) from the other capsules.

This can heighten the player's sense of anticipation that there is a reserve within the special chart 2 reserve that has a high possibility of winning the time-saving feature, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the central part of the main display area Dm displays "Charge ended, promotion chance zone entered!", and the secondary display area Ds displays "Chance to get "Time" during promotion chance zone!", indicating that the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) will be held after the time-saving state ends.

In addition, if you do not get a capsule during the above-mentioned charge performance, i.e. if you do not get any Special Chart 2 reserved, after the charge performance ends, you will not enter the promotion chance zone and will transition to normal mode.

In the embodiment, in the small display area Dm9 and the small display area Dm10, even if there is no special pattern 1 reserve or special pattern 2 reserve, reserves h1 to h8 are displayed in white, indicating that up to four items can be reserved in each case. However, this is not limited to this, and if there is no special pattern 1 reserve or special pattern 2 reserve, nothing may be displayed in the small display area Dm9 or the small display area Dm10, and the reserved pattern may be displayed when a special pattern reserve is obtained.

This configuration makes it difficult for players to know how many lottery rights for each special symbol they can reserve, and even if they have acquired the maximum number of reserved rights, they can continue firing game balls without realizing that they have acquired the maximum number of reserved rights.

In the embodiment, the display screen of FIG. 272(b) is displayed when the variation of the special pattern that is set to the time-saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) stops, but it is not limited to this, and the display screen of FIG. 272(b) may be displayed when the lottery right for the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved) is acquired up to the upper limit when there is remaining time left until the variation of the special pattern stops. In this case, the display mode of the capsule changes when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and the expected probability of winning the jackpot of the special pattern 2 reserved or the expected probability of winning the time-saving state may be indicated.

By configuring it in this way, a player who has acquired the maximum number of reserved special symbols 2 while there is still a lot of time left for the special symbols to change can be made to expect that if they put a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, the display state of the capsule may change, making it possible for the player to continue playing by putting a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 until the last moment when the special symbols stop changing.

In the embodiment, the capsules cp1 to cp4 corresponding to reserves h1 to h4 are displayed, respectively. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one capsule may be displayed whether one or four special symbol 2 reserves are acquired. In other words, in the promotion chance zone described below, the result of the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) based on reserves 1 to 4 is notified by opening one capsule. By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to know how many special symbol 2 reserves they have acquired during the charge performance, and the player can enjoy the promotion chance zone performance without worrying about the number of special symbol 2 reserves they have acquired.

When configured in this way, it is desirable to prevent the player from knowing that they have acquired a special reserved figure 2 during the charge performance when they have acquired a special reserved figure 2. For example, when a special reserved figure 2 is acquired, the capsule is not displayed, and the small display area Dm9 is not displayed, making it impossible for the player to know the acquisition status of the special reserved figure 2. Only when the maximum number of special reserved figures 2 has been acquired, can the main display area Dm be configured to display "MAX acquisition completed."

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult to understand the acquisition status of the reserved special chart 2, which reduces the player's dissatisfaction due to not being able to acquire the reserved special chart 2 as desired during the charge performance.

Figure 273 is an example of a display screen that is displayed when you win the time-saving special drawing lottery based on the special drawing 2 reservation during the promotion chance zone.

The small display area Dm1 shows a display indicating that the first special symbol is not changing, and the small display area Dm8 shows a display indicating that the second special symbol has won the time-saving bonus.

In addition, because the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, the "Hit to the left" display is displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the first ball entrance 64, preventing the player from playing in the wrong way.

In the center of the main display area Dm, there is displayed a capsule cp1 marked "Completed" indicating that it has already been opened, a diamond dy1 marked "Time x 10000" indicating that the result of the special pattern 2 lottery based on the lottery right for the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved) was a time-saving win, an opened capsule cp2, and capsules cp3 and cp4 that have not yet been opened.

In the example of Figure 273, out of the four Special Pattern 2 reserves acquired during the charge performance, the second special pattern lottery (Special Pattern 2 lottery) based on the first Special Pattern 2 reserve acquired did not result in a jackpot or time-saving bonus, but the Special Pattern 2 lottery based on the second Special Pattern 2 reserve acquired resulted in a time-saving bonus.

The small display area Dm5 displays "3 more times", indicating that there are 3 more times the second special pattern will change based on the reserved special pattern 2, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated when the display of the changes in the second special pattern begins. For example, when the display of the changes in the second special pattern based on the first reserved special pattern 2 begins, "4 more times" is displayed, and when the display of the changes based on the second reserved special pattern 2 begins, "3 more times" is displayed.

In addition, when a new variation of the second special pattern is started based on the reserved special pattern 2, the display in the small display area Dm9 changes from black to white for the reserved display h1, and if reserved h2 is black, that is, if there is another reserved special pattern 2, the display shifts to reserved h1, which becomes black, and reserved h2 becomes white. At that time, if reserved h3 and reserved h4 are black, they are shifted to reserved h2 and reserved h3, respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 273, the variation of the second special pattern based on the reserved special pattern 2 has been executed twice, so the two reserved h3 and reserved h4 are displayed in white.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand how many more times the second special pattern will change based on the reserved special pattern 2.

In addition, FIG. 273 describes an example of a presentation when a time-saving win is made in a Special Chart 2 lottery based on a Special Chart 2 reservation. However, when a jackpot is won in a Special Chart 2 lottery based on a Special Chart 2 reservation, the contents of the capsule may be displayed in a different manner (for example, a ball marked "V") to notify the player of the jackpot win, or the capsule itself may be displayed in a different manner (for example, a red capsule).

In addition, if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery based on the reserved special drawing 2 is a miss in either case, the capsule may be configured to be empty when opened, or a display indicating a miss (for example, a piece of paper with the word "unfortunate" written on it) may be displayed inside the capsule.

In the embodiment, when the result of determining in advance the reserved information of the special chart 2 reserved (pre-reading result) indicates that there is a high possibility of winning the time-saving feature, the capsule corresponding to the special chart 2 reserved which has a high possibility of winning the time-saving feature is displayed in a different display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, if the result of pre-reading the reserved information of the third acquired Special Chart 2 reserved indicates a high possibility of winning the time-saving feature, a piece of paper with "Big Chance Next Time!" written on it may appear from inside the capsule during the capsule opening performance based on the second acquired Special Chart 2 reserved, suggesting to the player that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot or winning the time-saving feature in the Special Chart 2 drawing based on the next lottery right for the second special pattern (Special Chart 2 reserved) (i.e., the third acquired Special Chart 2 reserved); alternatively, the display mode of the capsule with "Done" written on it that is displayed after the capsule opening performance based on the second acquired Special Chart 2 reserved has ended may be a different display mode (for example, a capsule with "Big Chance Next Time" written on it).

By configuring it in this way, when a capsule with a different display mode is displayed in the promotion chance zone, it is possible to create anticipation that information regarding the next special symbol 2 reserve to be executed will be displayed in the variation of the second special symbol based on the special symbol 2 reserve executed before the special symbol 2 reserve corresponding to that capsule, and it is possible to create interest in the opening performance of a capsule displayed in the normal display mode.

In the promotion chance zone, the special symbol 2 reserves are consumed in the order they were acquired (starting from h1, starting from the youngest), and the capsules corresponding to the consumed special symbol 2 reserves are opened in order (starting from capsule CP1, starting from the youngest). However, this is not limited to this, and the consumed special symbol 2 reserves and the opened capsules may not correspond to each other. For example, if the result of the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) based on the first acquired special symbol 2 reserve is a time-saving win, if capsule CP4 is selected instead of capsule CP1, it is possible to make the player interested in not only the display mode of the capsules but also the order in which the capsules are opened, further increasing the fun of the game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 274. In this first modified example, the difference from the above-mentioned fifth control example is that the time-saving type can be won in the first special symbol lottery, and that the time-saving type set when the time-saving type is won in the first special symbol lottery is different from the time-saving type set when the time-saving type is won in the second special symbol lottery. Also, the difference is that the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state is different. The other configurations are the same, and the same contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

Figure 274 (a) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 5a table 202dae. As shown in Figure 274 (a), the time-saving random number 5a table 202dae differs from the time-saving random number 5 table 202de of the fifth control example described above in that it stipulates the judgment value for the time-saving win in the normal state (low probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns) even for the first special pattern, but is otherwise the same.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol and the set game state is a low probability state (normal state) of special symbols and normal symbols, the hit determination value for the acquired first hit random number counter C1 to be in the range of "51 to 54" for the time-saving win is stipulated.

In other words, since the range of possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 is 900, the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is 4/900.

Next, the contents of the time-saving type selection 5a table 202daf will be explained with reference to FIG. 274(b). FIG. 274(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving type selection 5a table 202daf. The time-saving type selection 5a table 202daf differs from the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df in the fifth control example described above in that it adds a time-saving type that is set when a time-saving type is won in the first special pattern lottery, but is otherwise the same. A detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, when the special symbol type (special symbol type) is the first special symbol, the time-saving type "Time-saving C" is specified regardless of the value of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. When this time-saving C is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 1. In other words, a time-saving state in which the time-saving count is 1 is set.

<Regarding the control process in the first modified example of the fifth control example>
Next, the processing contents of the control processing in this first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 275 to Fig. 277. This first modified example differs from the above-mentioned fifth control example in that a part of the processing contents executed by the main control device 110 and a part of the processing contents executed by the voice lamp control device 113 are changed, and the rest is the same. Here, the differences from the above-mentioned fifth control example will be described.

Figure 275 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving lottery process 5a (S8021). In this time-saving lottery process 5a (S8021), the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) are different from those of the time-saving lottery process 5 (S8001) of the fifth control example described above. In other words, in the fifth control example described above, the control process was executed so that the condition for executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment can be established only when the type of the special pattern lottery being executed is the second special pattern (see S8101), whereas in this first modified example, the condition for executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment can be established regardless of the special pattern type. In other words, it is different from the time-saving lottery process 5 (S8001) of the fifth control example described above in that the processing of S8101 is deleted. The other processing contents are the same. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment even in the first special pattern lottery.

Fig. 276 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving state presentation setting process 5a (S9026). This time-saving state presentation setting process 5a (S9026) differs from the time-saving state presentation setting process 5 of the above-mentioned fifth control example (see S9006 in Fig. 266) in that the processing contents (S9321, S9322) for when the time-saving type (time-saving C) that is set when the time-saving is won in the first special symbol lottery is set are added, but the rest are the same and therefore will not be described.

When the time-saving state presentation setting process 5a (S9026) is executed, the same processes of S9301 to S9308 as the time-saving state presentation setting process 5 of the fifth control example described above (see S9006 in FIG. 266) are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9306 that the time-saving type is not time-saving A (S9306: No), it is next determined whether the time-saving type is time-saving C (S9321), and if it is determined that it is time-saving C (S9321: Yes), a display command is set (S9322) to show the presentation mode corresponding to the charge time (see FIG. 272), and this process ends.

Figure 277 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5a (S4993). This special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5a (S4993) differs from special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5 (S4983 in Figure 268) in the above-mentioned fifth control example in that the process for setting the performance mode when the time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery is different from the process for setting the performance mode of the first special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state.

When the special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5a (S4993) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223da is decremented by 1 (S9502), the time-saving type is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9521), it is determined whether the read time-saving type is time-saving C (S9522), and if it is time-saving C, the time-saving performance mode corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time of this special symbol is determined (S9523), a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S9524), and this process ends.

In other words, the display mode that informs the player of the remaining time-saving period displayed in the small display area Dm5 shown in FIG. 272(a) is displayed according to the time-saving presentation mode determined in S9523. This makes it possible to inform the player of the remaining time for which the time-saving state will continue in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S9522 that the time-saving type is not C (S9522: No), this is a case where the first special pattern variation is executed with another time-saving type set, so a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db after subtraction (S9525), and processing proceeds to S9524.

On the other hand, in the process of S9501, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db is 0, that is, if it is determined that the current state is not the time-saving state (S9501: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a time-saving winning change (S9526), and if it is determined that there is a time-saving winning change (S9526: Yes), the presentation mode for indicating the time-saving winning is determined (S9527), and processing proceeds to S9524. Here, the presentation mode determined in the process of S9527 is used to execute the time-saving winning change presentation shown in FIG. 271(b).

<Second modified example of the fifth control example>
A second modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 278 to Fig. 282. In the fifth control example described above, a high probability state (first time reduction) of a normal pattern can be set based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery, and a high probability state (second time reduction) of a normal pattern can be set based on winning a time reduction in a special pattern lottery. This makes it possible to set a high probability state of a normal pattern with multiple triggers, and by increasing the variety of games, it is possible to improve the interest of players in the game.

In this second modified example, in order to further increase interest, the contents of the bonus granted when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery executed when a high probability state for normal patterns is set are configured to differ depending on the trigger (first time reduction or second time reduction) that set the high probability state for normal patterns. In other words, the contents of the bonus granted when the same jackpot type is set is different for when a jackpot is won during the first time reduction and when a jackpot is won during the second time reduction. By configuring it in this way, when a high probability state (time reduction state) for normal patterns is set, it is possible to make the player interested in what trigger set the time reduction state, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this second modified example, a jackpot game with a small number of rounds and a short play time per round (2R jackpot) can be executed as the jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving state is set after the 2R jackpot game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice the difference in the content of the game executed between when the time-saving state is set based on winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, i.e., when the first time-saving state is set, and when the time-saving state is set without executing a jackpot game, i.e., when the second time-saving state is set.

In addition, in this second modified example, the change presentation executed in the process of setting the first time reduction and the change presentation executed in the process of setting the second time reduction are configured to be executed in the same presentation mode. Specifically, the first period from when the special pattern change to indicate that a jackpot win (a 2R jackpot win) for which the first time reduction is set starts until the special pattern change is stopped and the 2R jackpot game ends, and the second period, which is the change time of the special pattern change to indicate that a time reduction win for which the second time reduction is set has been set, are set to be approximately the same period, and the presentation is executed in a common presentation mode using the periods.

By configuring it in this way, when the first time-saving state is set and when the second time-saving state is set, a common presentation style can be executed in the period from when the special pattern variation starts to when the time-saving state is set, making it difficult for the player to understand which trigger set the time-saving state.

<Regarding the content of the performance in the second modified example of the fifth control example>
With reference to Figures 278 and 279, the characteristic presentation content executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the fifth control example will be described.

In the fifth control example described above, although there is a difference between the number of time-saving times granted after the end of a jackpot game (the number of times that special pattern lotteries can be executed during a high probability state for normal patterns) and the number of time-saving times granted by winning a time-saving game, if the type of jackpot is the same, the bonus granted (for example, the number of time-saving times granted after the end of a jackpot game) is the same when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery during a time-saving state set based on winning a jackpot (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) and when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery during a time-saving state set based on winning a time-saving game.

As a result, regardless of whether the time-saving mode was set as a result of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving mode, there was no difference in the ratio of jackpot types when a jackpot was won during the time-saving mode, or in the bonuses awarded even for the same jackpot type, which could result in monotonous gameplay.

In contrast, the second variant of the fifth control example differs from the fifth control example in that the ratio of jackpot types and the bonuses awarded are different even for the same jackpot type when a jackpot is won during a time-saving state that is set based on a jackpot win and when a jackpot is won during a time-saving state that is set based on a jackpot win.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the proportion of jackpot types that grant advantageous benefits to players (for example, jackpots with a large number of rounds of jackpot play) depending on the trigger that sets the time-saving state, and to vary the benefits granted even for the same jackpot type, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Specifically, in the second modified example of the fifth control example, in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a jackpot determination and a time-saving determination are executed in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) and the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery), and it is possible to set the first time-saving state based on winning a jackpot, and to set the second time-saving state based on winning a time-saving state. And, for example, if jackpot A is won when the first time-saving state is set, a maximum of 100 time-saving times are granted after the jackpot game ends, but if jackpot A is won when the second time-saving state is set, a maximum of 10,000 time-saving times are granted after the jackpot game ends.

In this way, the benefits given to the player when a jackpot is won differ depending on whether the game state set when a jackpot is won is the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state. When the second time-saving state is set, it is easier to receive advantageous benefits based on winning a jackpot (for example, a greater number of time-saving periods awarded after the end of a jackpot game) than when the first time-saving state is set, so players will play in the hope that the second time-saving state will be set rather than the first time-saving state.

As will be described later, in the second modified example of the fifth control example, there are a 16R sure-variant jackpot in which prize balls can be acquired during the jackpot game and a sure-variant state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, and a 2R time-limited jackpot in which it is difficult to acquire prize balls during the jackpot game and a first time-limited state is set after the jackpot game ends.

For this reason, if the jackpot type selected upon winning the jackpot is a 2R time-saving jackpot, the player will not be able to obtain any prize balls despite winning the jackpot, and the first time-saving state, which is less favorable than the second time-saving state, will be set, which may reduce the player's motivation to play if they win the 2R jackpot.

Therefore, in the second variant of the fifth control example, the presentation executed when a 2R time-saving big win that sets the first time-saving state is won is the same as when a time-saving win that sets the second time-saving state is won, making it difficult for the player to distinguish whether a 2R time-saving big win or a time-saving win has been won.

By configuring it in this way, even if a player wins a 2R time-saving jackpot, which is less favorable than a 16R guaranteed jackpot, it is possible to make the player hope that it is a time-saving jackpot, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play when winning a 2R time-saving jackpot.

Figure 278(a) is an example of a chance time acquisition effect that is executed when a jackpot that grants the first time-saving state is won in the first special pattern drawing (special pattern 1 drawing) during the normal state.

Two number "2"s are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, with a symbol saying "Chance Time" between them, and the sub-display area Ds displays "GET CHANCE TIME!!", indicating that the game will move on to Chance Time.

Here, Chance Time refers to the presentation mode that is displayed during the period from when the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set until the time-saving state ends. Note that regardless of whether the first or second time-saving state is set, the presentation mode displayed will be Chance Time. Therefore, the configuration is such that the player cannot tell which time-saving state is currently set from the presentation mode displayed.

The effect executed during chance time may be used to suggest the time-saving state that has been set. For example, multiple background images may be prepared to be displayed during chance time, and a specific background image may be more likely to be set when the second time-saving state is set than when the first time-saving state is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to get the player to pay attention to the display mode during chance time in order to guess the type of time-saving state, thereby increasing the interest of the game during chance time.

The small display area Dm1 shows a display mode indicating that the first special symbol has won the 2R time-saving big win. Here, in FIG. 278(a), the display in the small display area Dm1 is large enough for the player to see, but it is preferable to configure it so that it is not visible to the player (for example, not displaying the small display area Dm1), and configuring it so that it is not visible to the player makes it even more difficult for the player to tell whether they have won the 2R time-saving big win or the time-saving win.

Then, since the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the first special symbol has won the 2R time-saving jackpot, the small display area Dm4 displays "Right Hit" to inform the player that the jackpot game is in progress, in which the game ball is shot toward a specific winning hole 65a in the right area of the game board of the gaming machine.

Here, if a 2R time-saving jackpot is won, the opening and closing plate 65b will open and close twice at high speed during the jackpot period in the jackpot game. On the other hand, if a time-saving jackpot is won, the jackpot game is not executed and the opening and closing plate 65b will remain closed. In other words, the player can tell whether a 2R time-saving jackpot or a time-saving jackpot has been won by checking the operation status of the opening and closing plate 65b. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent this, the screen is made to glow brightly during the chance time acquisition performance, so that the player focuses on the third pattern display device 81 and does not focus on the opening and closing plate 65b.

In the embodiment, the screen is brightly illuminated to distract the player from the opening and closing panel 65b, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the player is drawn to the button by implementing an effect that causes the player to operate a button, or to have a small variable winning device that operates only when a jackpot game based on a 2R time-saving jackpot is played, placed in a position that is less noticeable than the variable winning device 65.

Figure 278 (b) is an example of a chance time acquisition effect that is executed when the time-saving feature is won with the first special symbol in the normal state.

The difference from when you win the 2R time-saving big win is that a display mode is displayed in the small display area Dm1 to indicate that you have won the time-saving win, but the rest of the display is the same as the display screen that appears when you win the 2R time-saving big win.

In addition, even if the first special symbol that has won the time-saving feature stops changing, the small display area Dm4 displays "Hit to the right." This is because the time-saving feature is set, and the display is intended to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the second ball entrance 640 in the right area of the game machine's panel.

In this way, by making the display format for the chance time acquisition performance when a 2R time-saving big win is won and when a time-saving big win is won the same, making it difficult for the player to tell which one they have won, it is possible to make the player expect that they have won the time-saving big win even if they win the 2R time-saving big win, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play if the result of the special pattern lottery is a 2R time-saving big win.

Here, if a 2R time-saving jackpot is won, the jackpot game is executed during the chance time acquisition effect, but if a time-saving jackpot is won, the jackpot game is not executed. Therefore, if the special pattern stops changing at the same timing, the period from when the chance time acquisition effect is displayed to when the chance time starts will be longer for a 2R time-saving jackpot than for a time-saving jackpot, by the period during which the jackpot game is executed, and there is a risk that the player will be able to tell whether they have won a 2R time-saving jackpot or a time-saving jackpot based on the length of time the chance time acquisition effect is displayed.

Therefore, in the second variation of the fifth control example, the period (determined period) from when the chance time acquisition effect starts to when the special symbol actually stops changing is different depending on whether a 2R time-saving jackpot is won or when a time-saving jackpot is won.

Referring to Figure 279, we will explain the change patterns of the special symbols when a jackpot is won and when a time-saving bonus is won.

As shown in Fig. 279(a) and (b), the presentation mode from the start of the special symbol variation to the end of the chance time acquisition presentation is the same. However, in Fig. 279(a), the special symbol variation stops one second after the chance time acquisition presentation starts, and a four-second jackpot game is played, whereas in Fig. 279(b), the special symbol variation stops about five seconds after the chance time acquisition presentation starts.

In this way, by setting the period (determined period) from when the chance time winning effect starts until the special pattern actually stops changing when a time-saving jackpot is won longer than when a 2R time-saving jackpot is won, the display time of the chance time winning effect does not change between when a jackpot game is played while the chance time winning effect is displayed and when a jackpot game is not played while the chance time winning effect is displayed, making it difficult for a player to tell whether they have won a 2R time-saving jackpot or a time-saving jackpot based on the length of time the chance time winning effect is displayed.

In the embodiment, different confirmation periods are set for when the 2R time-saving big win is won and when the time-saving win is won, and the display time of the chance time acquisition effect is set to the same, but this is not limited to the above.

For example, the confirmation period can be the same for winning the 2R time-saving jackpot and for winning the time-saving jackpot, and when the time-saving jackpot is won, a waiting period can be set in which the special symbols stop changing and the next special symbols do not start changing for a certain period of time, making the display time for the chance time winning effect the same.

In the embodiment, the configuration is such that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between winning the 2R time-saving jackpot and winning the time-saving jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the special symbol that won the time-saving jackpot is changing, if there is a lottery right for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved), and the result of a prior judgment based on the reserved information of the special symbol 1 reserved (pre-read result) is a jackpot, the display mode of the chance time acquisition effect executed on the changing special symbol may be a special display mode (for example, the "chance time" symbol is displayed in rainbow colors), suggesting to the player that he will win the jackpot after winning the time-saving jackpot.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second modified example of the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 280 and Fig. 281. Fig. 280(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 5b table 202dbe. As shown in Fig. 280(a), the time-saving random number 5b table 202dbe is different from the time-saving random number 5 table 202de of the fifth control example described above in that it sets a prescribed value that is determined to be a time-saving winning in the first special pattern lottery, and is otherwise the same.

Figure 280 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot 5b table 202dbd1. As shown in Figure 280 (b), the jackpot 5b table 202dbd1 specifies the contents of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd in the fifth control example described above to be commonly referenced for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and specifies the jackpot type and the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the probability change counter 203i corresponding to each jackpot type according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2.

As described above, in this second modified example, a high probability state (first time reduction) for normal symbols can be set based on winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and a high probability state (second time reduction) for normal symbols can be set based on winning the time reduction in the special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 280(b), in the jackpot 5b table 202dbd1, the number of time reductions (value set in the time reduction counter 203h) set after the end of a jackpot game is different depending on whether the first time reduction is set as the type of high probability state for normal symbols or the second time reduction is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 280(b), in this second modified example, the jackpot type that is selected when a jackpot is won can be selected as jackpot B5b, which involves two rounds of jackpot play and a time-saving play state that is set after the jackpot play ends. Here, when jackpot B5b is selected as the jackpot type, the effects described above with reference to FIG. 278 and FIG. 279 are executed, that is, a specific effect that makes it difficult for the player to tell whether the first time-saving play or the second time-saving play has been set.

In other words, it is possible to set the same game state (time-saving state) as when the second time-saving mode is set, and it is also possible to execute a jackpot game with a short jackpot game period. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the first time-saving mode or the second time-saving mode has been set.

Figure 281 shows the contents of the time-saving type selection 5b table 202dbf. The time-saving type selection 5b table 202dbf differs from the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df in the fifth control example described above in that the time-saving type specified in accordance with the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 is different, but is otherwise the same.

As shown in FIG. 281, in this second modified example, the time-saving end condition when the second time-saving is set (the value set in the time-saving counter 203h) is configured to be the same as the time-saving end condition when the first time-saving is set (see FIG. 280(b)). Specifically, the time-saving type is configured to be selected so that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to one of "50", "200", or "10000".

By configuring it in this way, for example, if a high probability state for normal symbols is set after a specific performance is executed, and the number of times the special symbols change reaches 50 times, causing the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols to transition to a low probability state (normal state), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state was set up until that point.

<Regarding the control process in the second modified example of the fifth control example>
Next, the control process contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 282. FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 5b (S9056). In this time-saving state presentation setting process 5b (S9056), the time-saving state presentation setting process (see S9006 in FIG. 266) in the above-mentioned fifth control example is different in that the control process contents executed when it is determined that the game state has transitioned from the normal state to the time-saving state are different. Specifically, at the time when it is determined that the time-saving state has been won, it is determined in advance whether there is a jackpot win in the special chart 2 reservation (S9352), and when it is determined that there is a special chart 2 reservation including a jackpot win, the special time-saving mode is executed.

In the time-saving state presentation setting process 5b (S9056), first, the game state before the change is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9301). Next, it is determined whether the game state before the change read in the process of S9301 is a high probability state (S9302). If it is determined that the game state before the change is a high probability state (S9302: Yes), a display command is set to show the corresponding presentation mode during the preparation time (S9303), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S9302, if it is determined that the game state before the change was not a special state (S9302: No), then it is determined whether the game state before the change was a normal state (S9303). If it is determined that the game state before the change was a normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of time-saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S9305). Then, it is determined whether the time-saving state set this time is a time-saving state that was set as a result of winning a time-saving win (S9351).

In the process of S9351, if it is determined that the time-saving state is set due to a time-saving winning event (S9351: Yes), it is then determined whether there is a winning jackpot among the reserved symbols of the second special pattern (S9352). If it is determined that there is a winning jackpot among the reserved symbols (S9352: Yes), a display command is set to show the presentation mode corresponding to the special time-saving mode (S9353), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9351 that the time-saving mode has not been won in this lottery (S9351: No), or if it is determined in the process of S9352 that there is no winning jackpot among the reserved symbols of the second special pattern (S9352: No), a display command is set to show the presentation mode corresponding to the time-saving mode (S9354), and this process ends.

<Sixth control example>
Next, the sixth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 283 to Fig. 293. In the fifth control example and each modified example described above, the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set is configured to be able to win the time-saving lottery. In contrast, the sixth control example is significantly different in that it is configured to be able to win the time-saving lottery in the special symbol lottery even in the state where a game state other than the normal state is set.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if a new time-saving win occurs while the time-saving state is set, it is possible to update the remaining period for which the time-saving state will continue. This makes it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state will continue.

In addition, when updating the remaining period for which the time-saving state will continue, it is configured so that the period for which the time-saving state will continue can be updated to be longer than the current remaining period (favorable update) or shorter (unfavorable update). In other words, depending on the timing of winning the time-saving state in the time-saving lottery and the number of time-saving times (length of time period) that is set when the time-saving state is won, winning the time-saving state can be a favorable benefit to the player or an unfavorable benefit. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide innovative gameplay that combines gameplay in which a time-saving state is expected to be won and gameplay in which a time-saving state is not expected to be won.

Furthermore, in this sixth control example, the more consecutive time-saving wins without winning the jackpot, the easier it becomes for the player to be set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Specifically, multiple time-saving types that differ in the degree of advantage to the player are defined, and the more time-saving wins are made during the time-saving state, the easier it becomes to set an advantageous time-saving type. By configuring it in this way, the longer the period without winning the jackpot, the easier it becomes to grant a player an advantageous bonus.

In addition, when the most advantageous time-saving type for the player is set, it is configured so that it is easier for the player to transition to a time-saving type that is less advantageous than when a time-saving type that is less advantageous than the most advantageous time-saving type is set. In other words, there are multiple stages of time-saving types with different degrees of advantageousness, and time-saving types with gradually increasing degrees of advantageousness are set based on the time-saving win, so that when the highest stage of time-saving type is reached, it is easier for the player to fall down to the lowest stage of time-saving type. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a time-saving type that is advantageous for the player from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

<About the content of the sixth control example>
Here, the characteristic performance contents in this sixth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 283 and Fig. 284. Fig. 283(a) is a diagram showing a display screen when a time-saving prize is won in a normal state and time-saving A is set as the time-saving type, and Fig. 283(b) is a diagram showing a display screen when a time-saving prize is won in a state where time-saving A is set and time-saving B is set.

Figure 284 (a) shows an example of a display screen when a time-saving option is won during the time-saving state and the number of remaining time-saving options (short period of time remaining) increases, and Figure 284 (b) shows an example of a display screen when a time-saving option is won during the time-saving state and the number of remaining time-saving options (short period of time remaining) decreases.

As shown in FIG. 283, in this sixth control example, the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is also configured to be able to execute the time-saving winning judgment, so an effect to show the result of the special symbol lottery during the time-saving state (an effect in which an icon showing the lottery result appears from the bag 863) is executed. In this case, for example, the current remaining number of time-saving times during the time-saving state and the newly won type of time-saving time are distinguished, and if the number of time-saving times set corresponding to the newly won type of time-saving time is greater than the current remaining number of time-saving times (see Dm7), an effect is executed to show that the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving state increases, as shown in FIG. 284(a), and if the number of time-saving times set corresponding to the newly won type of time-saving time is less than the current remaining number of time-saving times (see Dm7), an effect is executed to show that the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving state decreases, as shown in FIG. 284(b).

In addition, in this sixth control example, if a time-saving win is won during the time-saving state, a time-saving state (time-saving B) in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be met is set more easily (more easily set than when a time-saving win is won in the normal state). And, if a time-saving win is also won while time-saving B is set, it is configured so that an advantageous time-saving state in which the time-saving state continues until the next big win is won (the number of time-saving wins is set to 10,000) is more likely to be granted.

When time-saving mode B is set, as shown in FIG. 283(b), a display mode that can inform the player that the time-saving mode is set is displayed in a different display mode from the state when time-saving mode A is set.

<Game flow in the sixth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 285, the game flow in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 285 is a diagram showing the game flow in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 285, the sixth control example is different from the fifth control example in that the time-saving winning judgment can be executed in a game state other than the normal state, the time-saving winning probability is made different depending on the game state in which the time-saving winning judgment is executed, and a plurality of time-saving types (time-saving A, time-saving B) are provided as time-saving states, which have different degrees of advantage of the bonus when the jackpot is won.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
Fig. 286(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 6 table 202ee. As shown in Fig. 286(a), the time-saving random number 6 table 202ee differs from the time-saving random number 5 table 202de of the above-mentioned fifth control example in that it prescribes a judgment value for determining a time-saving winning in the first special pattern lottery, prescribes a judgment value for a time-saving winning in a game state other than the normal state, and makes the range for determining a time-saving winning (time-saving winning probability) different depending on the game state.

By configuring it in this way, the probability of winning the time-saving feature can be made to differ depending on the game state that is set and the type of special pattern lottery that is executed.

Figure 286 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving type selection 6 table 202ef. As shown in Figure 286 (b), the time-saving type selection 6 table 202ef specifies, in comparison with the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df described above, that the value of the time-saving counter 203h, i.e., the number of time-saving times, set for each time-saving type is different depending on the game state at the time of winning.

This configuration can make the player curious about which game state is set.

Figure 287 is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot 6 table 202ed. As shown in Figure 287, the jackpot 6 table 202ed specifies that the value of the time-saving counter 203h set for each time-saving type, i.e., the number of time-saving times, is different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, compared to the jackpot 5 table 202dd described above. Specifically, the number of time-saving times set after the jackpot game ends is different between the case where the time-saving B, which is the same game state (time-saving state), is set and the case where the time-saving A is set, and it is configured so that the time-saving state with a larger number of time-saving times is more likely to be set when the time-saving B is set, that is, when a time-saving state that is likely to be set when a time-saving win is won during a time-saving state is set. In this sixth control example, the value of the time-saving counter 203h set for each time-saving type, i.e., the number of time-saving times, is different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, but this is not limited to this, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed may be configured to be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Figure 288 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. As shown in Figure 288, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example differs from the fifth control example in that a time-saving mode storage area 223ea has been added, but is otherwise the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

The time-saving mode storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the set time-saving mode, and stores the time-saving mode set in the time-saving state presentation setting process 6 (see S9076 in FIG. 290) (S9372 in FIG. 290). This is then referenced when setting the presentation mode of the special pattern variation executed during the time-saving state, and the variation presentation is executed in the presentation mode corresponding to the read-out time-saving mode.

<Regarding the control process in the sixth control example>
Next, the control process contents executed in this sixth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 289 to Fig. 293. Fig. 289 is a flow chart showing the process contents of the time-saving lottery process 6 (S8056). This time-saving lottery process 6 (S8056) is different from the above-mentioned time-saving lottery process 5 (S8016) in that the process for determining whether the execution condition of the time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) is established or not has been changed. In other words, as shown in Fig. 289, the time-saving winning or losing is executed in most of the special pattern lotteries executed.

In the time-saving lottery process 6 (S8056), first, the lottery result is obtained based on the time-saving random number 6 table 202ee (see FIG. 286(a)) (S8154). Next, it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a time-saving win (S8105). If it is determined that the obtained lottery result is a time-saving win (S8105: Yes), the time-saving special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the obtained value of the time-saving type counter CC1 (S8106), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8105 that the obtained lottery result is not a time-saving win (S8105: No), the special losing pattern is set on the first pattern display device 37 (S8107), and this process ends.

Next, FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the contents of time-saving state presentation setting process 6 (S9076). This time-saving state presentation setting process 6 (S9076) differs from time-saving state presentation setting process 5 (S9056 in FIG. 282) in the fifth control example described above in that a process is executed to store the time-saving type included in the currently received state command in the time-saving mode storage area 223ea, but is otherwise the same, so a detailed description will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 6 (S4997). This special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 6 (S4997) is a process for setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol variation, and differs from the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) in the fifth control example described above in that it executes a mode-specific presentation setting process (S9651) for determining the presentation mode during the time-saving state, but is otherwise the same, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the mode-specific performance setting process (S9651) will be explained with reference to FIG. 292. FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the mode-specific performance setting process (S9651). In this mode-specific performance setting process (S9651), processing is executed to determine the performance aspects of the various performances described above with reference to FIG. 283 and FIG. 284.

In the mode-specific performance setting process (S9651), first, the current time-saving mode is read from the time-saving mode storage area 223ea (S9801). Next, it is determined whether the current time-saving mode read from the time-saving mode storage area 223ea is time-saving A (S9802). If it is determined that the current time-saving mode is time-saving A (S9802: Yes), it is determined whether the current lottery is a lottery for winning the time-saving mode (S9803).

If it is determined that the lottery is for a win in the time-saving option (S9803: Yes), a difference is calculated based on the number of time-saving options awarded based on this lottery and the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S9804). Next, it is determined whether the remaining number of time-saving options will decrease based on the calculated difference (S9805). If it is determined that the number of time-saving options will not decrease, i.e., that the number of time-saving options will increase (S9805: No), a display command is set to indicate that the remaining number of time-saving options will increase (S9806), and the process proceeds to S9809.

On the other hand, in the process of S9805, if it is determined that the remaining number of time-saving options will be reduced based on the difference (S9805: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the remaining number of time-saving options will be reduced (S9807), and the process proceeds to S9809. On the other hand, in the process of S9803, if it is determined that the current lottery is not a lottery for winning the time-saving option (S9803: No), the processes of S9804 to S9807 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S9809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9802 that the current time-saving mode read out is not time-saving mode A (S9802: No), the process for setting the effect during time-saving mode B is executed (S9808). A detailed explanation of the process for setting the effect during time-saving mode B (S9808) will be described later with reference to FIG. 293. Next, a comparison is executed between the current time-saving mode read out and the game state set based on the lottery result (S9809), and it is determined whether or not the time-saving mode has been switched (S9810). If it is determined that the time-saving mode has been switched out (S9810: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the time-saving mode switch is determined (S9811), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9810 that the time-saving mode has not been switched out (S9810: No), the process of S9811 is skipped, and this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the processing contents of the time-saving B effect setting process (S9808) will be explained with reference to FIG. 293. FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving B effect setting process (S9808). As shown in FIG. 293, the time-saving B effect setting process (S9808) determines the type of time-saving effect that is set when a time-saving effect is won during time-saving B, and if a type other than time-saving B, i.e. time-saving A, is set, a process is executed to set the effect mode to indicate that the time-saving state will end immediately (S9853).

In the process of setting the effects during time-saving B (S9808), first, it is determined whether the current drawing is a drawing that will result in a time-saving win (S9851). If it is determined that the drawing is a drawing that will result in a time-saving win (S9851: Yes), it is determined whether the drawing is a drawing that will result in a time-saving win B (S9852). If it is determined that the drawing is not a drawing that will result in a time-saving win B (S9852: No), a presentation mode to indicate the end of the time-saving win is determined (S9853), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the drawing is a drawing that will result in a time-saving win B (S9852: Yes), a presentation mode that corresponds to the continuation of the time-saving win until the next big win is determined (S9855), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9851 that the current lottery is not a lottery for winning the time-saving feature (S9851: No), it is determined whether the lottery is a lottery for winning the jackpot (S9854). If it is determined that the lottery is a lottery for winning the jackpot (S9854: Yes), the process of S9855 described above is executed and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery is not a lottery for winning the jackpot (S9854: No), this process ends as it is.

<Seventh control example>
Next, the contents of the seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 294 to Fig. 328. The seventh control example is different from the fifth control example described above in that it is configured to be able to win a small prize in some cases where the result of the special symbol lottery is not a big prize (is a miss), and it is configured to be able to play a big prize game by making a game ball enter a specific area during a small prize game that is executed based on the small prize winning.

In addition, the fifth control example described above was configured to determine whether or not a time-saving win has occurred only if the jackpot has not been won in the special pattern drawing, whereas the seventh control example is configured to allow for both a jackpot win and a time-saving win to be determined in a single special pattern drawing.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won is made before the determination of whether or not a time-saving win has been made, and if a time-saving win has been made, the time-saving state is set at the timing when the special pattern variation that has won the time-saving win is stopped and displayed. In contrast, in the seventh control example, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won is made before the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won is made in the special pattern lottery, and with the time-saving state set, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery is made, and the time-saving state can be ended at the timing when the special pattern variation that shows the result of the special pattern lottery is executed.

Specifically, when the time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, as described above, the time-saving state is set for a short period including the timing when the jackpot determination is executed in the special symbol lottery. In other words, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a function (time-saving period setting function) that allows the time-saving win in the special symbol lottery is set in order to play a game (a game that is easy to execute the special symbol lottery) that is advantageous to the player toward the next jackpot win for a predetermined period (up to 10,000 times) without going through the jackpot game, whereas in this seventh control example, in addition to the above-mentioned time-saving period setting function, a function (special lottery function) is set that allows the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery in the time-saving state to be executed during the game (left-handed play) executed in the normal state by configuring the timing when the jackpot determination is executed by the special symbol lottery to be in the time-saving state without making it easy to execute the special symbol lottery in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the jackpot determination for the special pattern lottery during the time-saving state while making it difficult for the player to realize that they have won the time-saving special pattern lottery, so it is possible to notify the player of the unexpected lottery result as the result of the special pattern lottery.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the bonus granted when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery is different between when a jackpot is won in the normal state and when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state, and it is configured so that a bonus that is more advantageous to the player is granted when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state than in the normal state (for example, a jackpot game with more rounds). In other words, in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, when a player wins both the time-saving state and the jackpot, a bonus that is more advantageous is granted than when a player wins only a jackpot.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the presentation mode of the variable presentation for showing the result of the special pattern lottery can be set to a suggestion mode (announcement mode) that can indicate whether or not a time-saving win has been won, and a suggestion mode (announcement mode) that can indicate whether or not a jackpot has been won.

In other words, by grasping the presentation mode of the variable presentation being executed, it is possible to allow the player to predict the result of the jackpot determination executed for the currently executing special pattern lottery and the result of the time-saving winning determination. Furthermore, as a variable presentation, the timing of notifying the presence or absence of a time-saving winning is configured to be different from the timing of notifying the presence or absence of a jackpot winning. By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a determination to grant multiple different benefits for one special pattern lottery, it is possible to grasp the suggestion mode for suggesting other judgment results while grasping (predicting) at least one judgment result.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the result of the effect (time-saving effect) including a suggestive aspect that can suggest whether or not the time-saving effect will be won is an effect result including a suggestive aspect that suggests that the time-saving effect will not be won, than when the time-saving effect is not executed. In this way, in a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which multiple bonuses with different awarding judgments can be awarded in one special pattern lottery, when a judgment result suggestive effect that can suggest the result of the awarding judgment for one bonus is executed, the result of the judgment result suggestive effect suggests that one bonus will not be awarded, so that the expectation of awarding another bonus is higher than when the judgment result suggestive effect is not executed. This makes it possible to notify the player that a bonus is more likely to be awarded at the time the judgment result suggestive effect is executed, compared to when the judgment result suggestive effect is not executed.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of this seventh control example, but the same reference numerals will be used to designate the same contents as the above-mentioned control examples, and detailed descriptions will be omitted.

First, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 294 to Fig. 299. Fig. 294 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, Fig. 295 is an enlarged view of the lower right area of the game board 13 in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, and Figs. 296 to 299 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example.

294, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first ball winning port 64, a second ball winning port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., to a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first ball winning port 64, the second ball winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61, also made of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62, is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 242) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of FIG. 294) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of FIG. 294) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of Fig. 294), the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 242), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In the seventh control example, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the first pattern display device 37a is activated, while when the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640, the first pattern display device 37b is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in time-saving or normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbols correspond to a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which the time-saving mode is set as the game mode after the jackpot game ends) or a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal mode is set as the game mode after the jackpot game ends) or a miss, and indicate the number of reserved balls by their lighting states. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can suggest various game modes of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery), and if it judges that a jackpot has been won, it also judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that are judged here include a 15R time-saving jackpot (15R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 15 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, a 5R time-saving jackpot (5R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 5 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, and a 5R normal jackpot (5R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 5 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended.

In addition, in some cases where the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a miss rather than a jackpot as described above, a small prize is prepared which gives the player fewer benefits than the jackpot described above (for example, a benefit of opening the V winning device 650 for only one round). The first pattern display device 37a, 37b not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not (or whether it is a small prize or not) as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but if it is a jackpot, a pattern according to the type of jackpot is displayed.

Here, a "15R time-saving jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "5R time-saving jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5. Also, a "5R normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a normal state without transitioning to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5.

In other words, this pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide one of the following jackpot games when a special symbol jackpot is won: a "15R time-saving jackpot" that can provide the player with the most bonuses, a "5R time-saving jackpot" that can provide the next most bonuses, and a "5R normal jackpot" that can provide the player with the fewest bonuses of all jackpot games. This allows the player to play in the hope that, even if a jackpot is won in the lottery for a special symbol, the jackpot game that provides the most bonuses will be provided out of the jackpot games that have different bonuses that can be provided.

In the seventh control example, the size of the bonus given to the player is defined according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends, but this is not limited to this, and the size of the bonus given to the player may be defined using conditions other than those mentioned above, or the content of the jackpot game may simply be changed so that different bonuses are given without defining the size of the bonus.

The "time-saving state" is a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is the same as in the normal state, but the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, as an added value (benefit) given to the player after the jackpot ends. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in the seventh control example, the change time of the second symbol is made shorter than in the normal state, and the operation mode of the electric device 640a that is operated when the lottery result of the second symbol is a hit is set so that the period during which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. Note that other configurations may be used to set a game state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and only a part of the above-mentioned settings may be used, or the hit probability of the second symbol may be set higher than in the normal state in addition to the above-mentioned contents.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the first special pattern lottery, which may be triggered when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern lottery, which may be triggered when a gaming ball enters the second ball entrance 640, are configured to be capable of winning the time-saving feature in addition to winning the big prize and small prize described above. Specifically, the seventh control example is configured to determine whether or not a time-saving feature has been won in the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery) that is executed when the normal state (low probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns) is set.

Here, if the time-saving is won, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set before the big win determination is performed in the special symbol lottery, and a process (update process 7) is executed to determine whether or not to end the time-saving state at the timing when the special symbol variation to show the result of the special symbol lottery starts. For example, in the case of a time-saving state where the number of time-saving times is set to 1 (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1), the remaining number of time-saving times (the value of the time-saving counter 203h) is updated (decremented) in update process 7 executed at the timing when the special symbol variation to show the result of the special symbol lottery in which the time-saving is won starts, and it is determined that the time-saving state is to be ended. On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving state where a value of multiple times (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of time-saving times, the time-saving state continues until the time-saving end condition is met based on the result of the update of the remaining number of time-saving times executed by update process 7.

In other words, by using the timing for setting the time-saving state and the timing for ending the time-saving state used in this seventh control example, it is possible to set the time-saving state only for the jackpot determination timing of the special pattern lottery (excluding the special pattern change period), or to set the time-saving state including the special pattern change period, depending on the number of time-saving times that are set.

In addition, as a method of achieving the same effect, a different processing timing may be set. For example, as in the fifth control example described above, the time-saving state may be set at the timing when the special symbol variation that has won the time-saving state is stopped, and the time-saving state update process (processing to determine whether or not to end the time-saving state) may be executed before the next special symbol variation begins. Even in this case, by varying the number of time-saving times that are set, it is possible to set the time-saving state so that it includes the special symbol variation period, or to set the time-saving state so that it does not include the special symbol variation period. In this case, if the special symbol variation with the time-saving state set is stopped and the next special symbol lottery does not begin with the time-saving state set, the time-saving state will continue because the time-saving end condition cannot be met.

In this case, it is advisable to determine whether the player has acquired the right to execute the next special pattern lottery (special pattern reserve) by the time the special pattern variation that won the time-saving feature is stopped (before the time-saving feature is set), and to notify the player that the time-saving feature has been won only if it is determined that the special pattern reserve has been acquired, that is, if the next special pattern variation will start immediately after the time-saving feature is set and the time-saving feature can end. By configuring the player in this way, it is possible to prevent a player who knows that they have won the time-saving feature from playing right-handed and causing the second special pattern lottery to be executed without causing the first special pattern lottery to be executed.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the seventh control example, the condition for terminating the "time-saving state" is configured such that, for the time-saving state granted based on winning the big prize in the special symbol lottery, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state when either of the following termination conditions is met: the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol have changed (the total number of times they have changed) reaches a first predetermined number (100 times) (first termination condition), or the number of times the small prize has been won (the small prize game has been executed) in the special symbol lottery reaches a second predetermined number (for example, 1 time) (second termination condition). In this way, by providing multiple termination conditions for transitioning the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state and transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal state when any of the multiple termination conditions is met, it becomes possible to set multiple timings for the time-saving state to end, and the player can play while feeling excited about how long the time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, will continue.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, multiple small prize types (e.g., small prize A, B) are prepared as small prizes that can be won in the special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery), and the number of times the second ending condition is met is set differently for each small prize type. By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult to predict whether the time-saving state will end based only on the number of small prizes won during the time-saving state, so the player can be made to feel tense at all times while playing the time-saving game.

On the other hand, in this seventh control example, when a time-saving state (second time-saving state) is set based on winning the special pattern lottery, an end condition is set that is different from when a time-saving state (first time-saving state) is set based on winning the jackpot, and specifically, the number of time-saving states is set to "1." In other words, the first time-saving state that is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special pattern lottery utilizes the time-saving state as a special lottery function for executing only the jackpot determination of the special pattern lottery in the time-saving state.

In the seventh control example, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during a small win game, and a big win (so-called two-type win) is determined when the ball passes through the specific area during a small win game (when the V switch 650e3 provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, which is the specific area, detects the ball) (see FIG. 298). In addition, although details will be described later, the expectation of the ball passing through the specific area during a small win game (V winning expectation) is configured to differ depending on the type of small win that is won. And, the number of times the second end condition set for each small win type is met (number of small wins) is configured to be less for the small win type in which a small win game with a high V winning expectation is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to associate the expectation of winning a V to obtain a two-type win when a small win is won during time-saving play with the anxiety that the time-saving mode may end, making the player more motivated to play.

In the seventh control example, the number of times the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change is set to the first predetermined number (100 times) as described above as the end condition (first end condition), but other end conditions may be set for the number of times the special symbols change. For example, the end condition for the time-saving state may be established when the number of times only the first special symbol changes reaches a third predetermined number (e.g., 50 times) or when the number of times only the second special symbol changes reaches a fourth predetermined number (e.g., 80 times). Also, only some of the many end conditions described above may be used, or they may be combined as appropriate.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 63. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 (start winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball into the normal pattern start hole (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 242), so that, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed (see FIG. 122). Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of the seventh control example performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, while the display of the game state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b.

In other words, the third pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the third pattern display device 81 in correspondence with the period (dynamic display period) during which the first pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode according to the lottery result of the special pattern in correspondence with the timing at which the first pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the lottery result of the special pattern on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b.

In other words, when the discrimination condition (a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) is met, the discrimination means discriminates (a lottery for a special symbol is executed), and the identification information (third symbol) is dynamically displayed (variably displayed) until a predetermined dynamic display period has elapsed, after which the identification information (third symbol) is displayed stationary in a display mode (combination of symbols) that indicates the discrimination result of the discrimination means (the lottery result for the special symbol). This allows the player to understand the lottery result for the special symbol by understanding the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

The third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may have a display mode corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery, and may be a display mode corresponding to a part of the special pattern lottery result (for example, only the result of the win/loss judgment such as a big win or a miss, or a time-saving win), or may be a display mode corresponding to the details of the special pattern lottery result (for example, the type of big win that was won). In addition, if there are four types of lottery results (for example, a big win, a small win, a miss, or a time-saving win) as the lottery result of the special pattern, the display mode of the third pattern may be a display mode indicating that the lottery result of the special pattern is one of two specific types (for example, a big win or a small win) out of the three types of lottery results described above. In addition, if a double win is won by a judgment that allows double wins (for example, a stable big win, a time-saving judgment), a display mode for indicating a double win may be used, and if the content of the game executed based on the double win is the same as the content of the game executed based only on the big win, the same display mode may be used.

In addition, instead of the display device used in the seventh control example, the third pattern display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel, or multiple display devices may be provided on the pachinko machine 10.

In this seventh control example, when the second pattern (normal pattern) is won during the time-saving state, the period during which the electric device 640a is operated (the period during which the electric device 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is longer than when the second pattern (normal pattern) is won during the normal state. This makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state.

The configuration for making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state is not limited to the above, and may be configured to increase the probability of winning the second symbol, or to increase the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win. In addition, if the time-saving state is made easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the operating pattern of the electric device 640a, the time it takes for the second symbol to change may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change is set shorter during the time-saving state than during normal play, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, in the case where the time required for the second symbol to be displayed is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and number of times of the electric role 640a are varied, the time for displaying the second symbol to be displayed may be determined according to the game state set at the time when the display of the second symbol to be displayed is started, and the opening time and number of times of the electric role 640a may be determined according to the game state set at the time when the display of the second symbol to be displayed is stopped and the second symbol indicating a win is displayed (the winning game of the second symbol, i.e., the timing when the electric role 640a is operated). By configuring in this way, for example, when the second symbol that started to be displayed during the time-saving state is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a win during the normal state, the electric role 640a can be operated with the operation pattern corresponding to the normal state. Therefore, the set game state and the operation pattern of the electric role to be executed can be more accurately associated.

The relationship between the game state, the time the second symbol changes, and the operation pattern of the electric device 640a may be specified other than as described above. For example, if it is determined that the time-saving state is set as the game state at either the timing when the second symbol starts changing or the timing when the electric device 640a starts operating, the operation pattern of the electric device 640a may be configured to set an operation pattern that is advantageous to the player (an operation pattern executed during the time-saving state).

A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 294, nails are planted on the game board 13 so that the first ball entry port 64 is easier to enter in a game in which the ball flows down the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called left-handed game) than in a game in which the ball flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed to enter the ball into the first ball entry port 64.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided to the right of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37b.

The first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are also each one of the winning holes through which five balls are paid out when a ball enters the hole. In the seventh control example, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is the same as the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. However, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be different, for example, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

In addition, in the seventh control example, switches (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) that detect the ball that triggers the lottery for the special pattern (lottery trigger for the big win) are provided in the ball entrance, so that the lottery trigger for the special pattern can be obtained and prize balls can be obtained. However, other configurations may be used, for example, an area (gate) through which the ball can pass may be provided, and when a switch (detection means) that detects the ball passing through the area (gate) detects the passage of the ball, the lottery trigger for the special pattern may be obtained. In this case, it is preferable to provide a ball entrance that allows at least a portion of the balls that pass through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery for the special pattern to enter, and that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, five) when the ball enters. By configuring in this way, the number of times the lottery trigger for the special pattern is obtained and the number of times the prize balls are obtained can be made different, so that a variety of playability can be provided.

The second ball entrance 640 is provided with an electric device 640a. This electric device 640a is configured to be variable between a protruding state (permitted state) protruding from the game board 13 toward the player (the player in front of the game board 13 in FIG. 294) and a waiting state (restricted state) waiting on the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not selected), the electric device 640a is in the waiting state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the second symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is triggered by the ball passing through the normal symbol starter hole (through gate) 67, that is, when the second symbol is selected as a winning symbol, the electric device 640a is in the protruding state (permitted state), making it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be explained. In the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 294, the variable display unit 80 is disposed in the approximate center of the play area of the play board 13, and the play area is divided into the left side (left-hitting area) and the right side (right-hitting area) of the variable display unit 80, and the player can adjust the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 to direct the shot ball to either the right-hitting area or the left-hitting area. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operating handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-hitting area of the play area will be referred to as a left-hitting game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-hitting area will be referred to as a right-hitting game.

In the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 294, the second ball entrance 640, the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 that triggers the lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric device 640a are arranged in the right-hand hitting area, and the game is configured so that right-hand hitting is performed when the time-saving state is set as the game state.

To prevent the ball shot in left-handed play from entering the second ball entrance 640, a nail is planted under the variable display unit 80, and the ball is configured to not enter the second ball entrance 640 during left-handed play. By configuring it in this way, a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 to change the first special pattern can be played in left-handed play, and a game in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 to change the second special pattern can be played in right-handed play, and different playability can be appropriately provided depending on the playing method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 294, a V winning device 650 is disposed in the right hitting area, the upper surface of which is inclined downward to the left (the lower left direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 294), and the various mechanisms are disposed so that the ball that flows down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric role 640a.

When the electric device 640a is in a standby state, the ball passes through the standby electric device 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when the electric device 640a is in a protruding state, the ball that reaches the electric device 640a flows down toward the lower right (lower right direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 2). When the ball reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the second ball entry port 640, and when the electric device 640a is changed to the standby state before it reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the general winning port 63 arranged below the electric device 640a.

Furthermore, this pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 to cover the above-mentioned electric device 640a, second ball entrance 640, and general winning entrance 63. This cover member 655 has a cut processing on the surface to diffusely reflect the incident light. By providing this cover member 655, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the inside of the cover member 655 during play due to various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of playing right-handed by timing the operation of the electric device 640a.

In addition, when no game is being played (when the gaming machine is powered off), the amount of light incident on the cover member is reduced, making it easy to see inside the cover member 655 and facilitating maintenance of the pachinko machine 10. When using a configuration in which the visibility of the interior is variable using the cover member 655 in this way, the light emitting means can be shared by making the light emitting means that emits light for decorative purposes available as described above, and the number of parts that make up the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, but a dedicated light emitting means for making the interior of the cover member 655 difficult to see may also be provided.

In addition, it is sufficient to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see for a predetermined period of time including the period during which the electric role 640a is operating. For example, when it is determined that the electric role 640a will be operated (i.e. when a winning normal symbol is selected by lottery), the light emitting means may be controlled so that text (e.g., "Open") informing that the electric role 640a will be operating is displayed on the surface of the cover member 655, and the displayed text may make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. This allows the player to know that the electric role 640a will be operating, while making it difficult for him or her to know the detailed timing of the operation.

Now, referring to FIG. 295, the configuration of the right-hitting area of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 295, of the balls shot by right-hitting play, those that pass through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric device 640a is arranged. To explain more specifically, the electric device 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-like member whose upper surface allows the balls to flow down, and is arranged on the game board 13 so that it slopes downward toward the lower right (the lower right direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 295). Then, the ball that passes through the through gate 67 flows down into area a (see FIG. 295) which is within a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a.

When the ball reaches area a, if the electric device 640a is in the waiting state, it passes through the electric device 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, if the electric device 640a is in the protruding position, the ball flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a toward the right end position. Then, when the ball reaches area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a) and the electric device 640a is changed to the waiting state, the ball is configured to flow down toward the general winning port 63 provided below the electric device 640a. Finally, when the ball reaches area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric device 640a), the ball is configured to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the period during which the electric device 640a operates continuously in the game state (normal symbol probability state) is different. When the electric device 640a operates in the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) set as the game state, the electric device 640a changes to a waiting state before the ball flowing down on the electric device 640a in the protruding state reaches area b (see FIG. 295). When the time-saving state is set, the electric device 640a is configured to be in the protruding position for a period sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric device 640a to reach area c (see FIG. 295).

Specifically, the operating period of the electric role 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in the protruding state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the time-saving state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. The electric role 640a is configured so that the flow period for the ball to flow down the area shown in FIG. 295 (the range from area a to area c) is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds (0.8 seconds in the seventh control example). By configuring it in this way, even if a right-handed play is performed during the normal state, a normal pattern is won, and the ball flows down the top surface of the electric role 640a in operation, the operation of the electric role 640a ends before the ball flowing down the top surface of the electric role 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, so it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery for the second special pattern from being drawn in the normal state.

In addition, during the time-saving state, the electric device 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) it takes for a ball to flow down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reach the second ball entrance 640, making it easier for the ball that flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a, which is in the induction state (protruding state), to reach the second ball entrance 640, and making it easier to draw the second special pattern.

Furthermore, during the time-saving state, for example, a ball that reaches the electric device 640a 1.5 seconds after the electric device 640a is activated flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a, and the operation of the electric device 640a ends when the ball reaches area b (2 seconds have passed since the electric device 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 3, such a ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric device 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed play is performed during the time-saving state, the ball can be guided to a different ball entry hole (the second ball entry hole 640 or the general winning hole 63) depending on the timing of the operation of the electric device 640a and the timing of the ball arriving at the electric device 640a, so that the player can continue to play right-handed games during the time-saving state.

As described above, the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the general winning port 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the second winning port 640 is 5. Therefore, if a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be drawn, a ball entering the second winning port 640 can give a player a more advantageous bonus (i.e., a lottery for special symbol 2 and 5 prize balls) than a ball entering the general winning port 63. If a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) cannot be drawn (special symbol changing), a ball entering the general winning port 63 can give a player a more advantageous bonus (i.e., 10 prize balls) than a ball entering the second winning port 640.

This allows the ball entry port into which the player wishes to enter (the ball entry port through which many bonuses can be obtained) to be changed depending on the game situation (whether or not the special symbol changes), allowing the player to enjoy right-hand play during the time-saving state. Also, in order to have balls enter both the second ball entry port 640 and the general winning port 63 during one operation of the electric device 640a, right-hand play must be continued, which increases the operation of the game.

In the seventh control example, the operation period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state is set to a period (2 seconds) sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640, so that the ball can be surely inserted into the second ball entrance 640 when the electric device 640a operates. In addition, for example, the operation period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state may be set to a period (e.g., 0.9 seconds) slightly longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the action of stopping the ball from being shot after the ball passes through the through gate 67 during the time-saving state, and starting the ball from being shot again after confirming that the electric device 640a has operated (so-called stop shot), so that the right-handed play can be continued during the time-saving state, improving the operation of the game.

Returning to Figure 294, we will continue with the explanation. As described above with reference to Figure 295, the ball released by right-handed play first reaches the V winning device 650. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be explained. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win, and is configured to be variable to an open state in which the ball can win at a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a by operating the opening/closing door 650f1 when the lottery result of the second special pattern is a "small win."

In addition, in some cases where a "big win" of a special pattern is won, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 may be configured to operate in the same way as when a "small win" is won as described above. This makes it difficult to know whether a "big win" or a "small win" of a special pattern has been won when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates.

Now, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 295 to 299. First, as shown in Fig. 295, when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in a closed state closing the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, the ball is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 in the closed state, and a ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is in a closed state flows down the opening and closing door 650f1 toward the lower left side (the lower left side when viewed from the front in Fig. 295) and is discharged toward the through gate 67. On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is in an open state (i.e., during a small win game), the ball enters the V winning device 650.

In the seventh control example, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during a small winning game is configured to be 0.1 seconds x 12 times, and the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens enters the V winning device 650. The ball that enters the V winning device 650 is configured to flow down in an aligned manner toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 298 (a)) while flowing down the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652. By configuring in this way, the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 can be made to flow down smoothly regardless of the position of the opening and closing door 650f1 from which the ball enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650.

In the seventh control example, the period during which the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously open is set to 0.1 seconds, but any other period may be set as long as the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 during the opening period of the opening and closing door 650f1 can win the V winning device 650. Also, in the seventh control example, the number of times that the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small win game is set to 12 times, but any other number of times may be set.

Details will be described later, but in the seventh control example, the period from when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once to when it is opened again (interval between openings) is set to 5 seconds after the fifth and tenth openings during a small win game, and is set to 0.5 seconds at other times. This is to make it easier for a ball to enter the V winning device 650 during a small win game. Specifically, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the time the fifth opening operation is completed during a small win game, a game guide display that emphasizes right-hand play and encourages the player to play during the interval between openings after the fifth opening operation is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The interval between openings is set longer than usual so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650 even when right-hand play is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The same control process is also executed when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the end of the 10th opening operation during a small winning game.

This configuration makes it easier for players who are not playing appropriately during small win games (players who are not playing with the right hand) to play appropriately. In this way, during a specific game (small win game) in which multiple opening actions are performed, some inter-opening interval periods are set longer than others, and if it is determined that the player is not playing appropriately, a game guide display can be displayed to encourage proper gameplay, allowing players who are playing incorrectly to play with peace of mind.

In the seventh control example, a longer special inter-open interval period is set after the fifth and tenth opening operations during a small win game. In this way, by providing multiple times for the player to display the game guide display during one small win game, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play appropriately. In addition, when providing multiple times for the game guide display, it is recommended to set at least the notification timing for the second transition to a timing that a player playing normally cannot reach. That is, although details will be described later, in the seventh control example, by continuously playing right-hand during a small win game, at least one ball can enter in one opening operation of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Therefore, if a normal game (continuous right-hand play) is played, the number of winning balls (10 balls) that is the end condition of the small win game will be reached during the tenth opening operation, and the small win game will end.

In other words, the inter-open interval period that is executed after the 10th opening action during a small win game is a timing that cannot be reached if the player is playing normally (continuous right-hitting game). Therefore, by using this timing to set the timing for displaying the game guide display, an unnecessarily long special inter-open interval period will not be executed for a player playing normally (continuous right-hitting game), and the small win game can be played smoothly.

In addition, when the first special inter-opening interval period is set to the timing (after the end of the fifth opening operation) that is reached even if normal play (continuous right-hand play) is performed as in the seventh control example, it is preferable to determine whether the V switch 650e3 detects a ball at the timing when the first special inter-opening interval period starts (the timing when the fifth opening operation ends) or at the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the first special inter-opening interval period (the timing when the period required for the ball that entered during the fifth opening operation to be discharged from the V winning device 650 has elapsed), and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball, a notification effect to notify that effect is displayed during the first special inter-opening interval period, and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect a ball, a game guide display is displayed as described above. This allows the special inter-opening interval period set during small winning play to be used effectively according to the game content.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to configure the game guide display to be displayed even if the V switch 650e3 has already detected a ball. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the small win game ends without a predetermined number (10 balls) of balls entering the V winning device 650 during the small win game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 296, the V winning device 650 includes an opening forming member 650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, a base member 650c combined with the back side of the opening forming member 650b to screw the V winning device 650 to the game board 13, an LED board 650d arranged on the back side of the base member 650c and having a plurality of LEDs arranged thereon to light up the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a back cover body 650e that holds the LED board 650d between the base member 650c, and an opening/closing door 650f1 for opening and closing a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. It is composed of an opening and closing unit 650f, a flow path cover body 650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, a switching member 650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that engages with the switching member 650h, a back cover body 650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 650g, a flow path solenoid 650k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 650j and operates the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m that covers the flow path solenoid 650k from the back side and fixes it to the back cover body 650j with a screw.

Figure 297 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. Figure 297 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and Figure 297 (b) is a Lb-Lb cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. As shown in Figure 297 (b), the V winning device 650 has a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning port (V winning port) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and has a bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that passes through the opening is guided to the left direction of Figure 297 (b). At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the entry of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that passes through this detection port 650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the rear cover body 650e shown in Figure 297 (a).

As shown in FIG. 297(b), the opening of the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a can be changed between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter (it is difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 650f1 made of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll over the top of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to be retreated to the inside of the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) and retreated from within the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a.

By configuring it this way, right-hand play can be continued during time-saving play, big win play, and small win play, reducing the effort required to change the play method depending on the game status. This makes it easier to play.

In addition, when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so the game ball can be efficiently made to win inside the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. This makes it possible to shorten the time required for a small win game, and improve the efficiency of the game.

Figure 297(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in Figure 297(b). As shown in Figure 297(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the sorting flow path side of the rear cover body 650e.

Next, referring to FIG. 298, we will explain the configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the rear cover body 650e are distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2 described below.

Figure 298 (a) is a rear view of the rear cover body 650e showing the state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game balls are sorted to the special discharge flow path 650e2. As shown in Figure 298 (a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 that guides the game balls, and is pivotally supported on the flow path cover body 650g from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover body 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and is configured so that the guide piece 650h can be rotatably positioned in the sorting flow path from the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g.

As shown in FIG. 298(a), the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 650e2. The game ball that passes through the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by the V switch 650e3, which is composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball and is provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, and is discharged outside the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, when the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 described above during the small win game, the big win game is set after the small win game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting the big win game. In addition, the switching member 650h is configured to connect either the flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) through which the ball that entered the V winning device 650 during the small win can pass through the V switch 650e3, or the flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) that cannot (is difficult to pass through) the V switch 650e3, and by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to on, the flow path is switched so that the ball that entered the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 (see FIG. 298(b)).

The pachinko machine 10 used in the seventh control example is configured such that the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off during normal play, and balls that have won the V winning device 650 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. When a small jackpot is won, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to on according to the contents of the opening scenario table 202g described later with reference to FIG. 25, so that the balls that have won the V winning device 650 can flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide a state that is maintained for a long period of time, that is, a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained so that balls that have won the V winning device 650 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 (see FIG. 298(a)), thereby reducing the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, the game state set after the small win game is changed depending on the flow route of the game ball that entered the V winning device 650 during the small win game, so the player's interest can be increased even during the small win game. The time required for the ball to pass from the opening (specific winning port) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is configured to be at least 1 second. By configuring it in this way, even if the ball flow route is switched by the switching member 650h after detecting that the opening and closing door 650f1 is opened even if the small win has not been won, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2.

In addition, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 consisting of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball is provided. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, if all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have not been discharged at the end timing of the small win game (the timing when the small win ending period executed after the end condition of the small win game (when a predetermined number (10) of wins have been made in the V winning device 650, or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 has ended) has elapsed), it is preferable to determine that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and to notify the outside of the abnormality or to stop the game so that the big win game or normal game does not start. This makes it possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10, causing a secondary abnormality to occur.

In this way, the game ball that enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on that, prize balls (10 prize balls for one winning ball in the seventh control example) can be paid out as a bonus to the player. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to determine whether or not it passes through the V switch 650e3, and it is possible to determine whether or not a jackpot game is executed after the small jackpot game ends. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, a small win game is executed in which the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON for different periods and timings depending on the small win type (small win A, B) that is set when a small win is won. By configuring in this way, the expectation of the ball passing through the V switch 650e3 during a small win game (V winning expectation) can be made to differ depending on the content of the small win game executed when a small win is won. Therefore, the player can play while expecting not only to win a small win, but also to play a small win game with a high V winning expectation.

Next, referring to FIG. 299, the structure of the ball flow underside of the opening and closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 299(a) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the opening and closing door 650f1 closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 299(a), the opening and closing door 650f1 of the seventh control example is configured so that a ball that reaches the upper surface of the V winning device 650 flows from the right upper surface 650y1 of the V winning device 650 through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 along the slope of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 294), down the left upper surface 650y2, and flows out toward the variable winning device 65.

The upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is provided with a first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc as delay members for delaying the flow of the balls, and is configured so that the flow period during which the balls flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is 0.6 seconds. This flow period (0.6 seconds) is configured to be longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by small win play. By configuring it in this way, it is configured so that the balls flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 will definitely win when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is opened by small win play.

In the state shown in FIG. 299(a), when a small winning game is executed and the opening and closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shown in FIG. 299(b) is transitioned to. FIG. 299(b) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 299(b), when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, it moves to retreat inside the game board 13, and the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is in an open state so that the ball flowing down the upper right surface 650y1 can win in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 also wins in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a because the opening and closing door 650f1 is positioned in the retreat position.

In addition, the V winning device 650 is provided with a first restricting member 651 and a second restricting member 652 for smoothing the flow of the balls after winning, regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a (see FIG. 294). The balls that enter the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a on the upper upstream side of the opening and closing door 650f1 are aligned in a row via the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652, and then flow down toward the detection port 650a1, which is the passage width of one ball. By providing the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652 in this way, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided below the first restricting member, it is possible to prevent the ball that enters the opening and closing door 650f1 with force from directly colliding with the detection port 650a1, and therefore it is possible to suppress the failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, a flow path (a flow path that flows down over the first and second restricting members 651 and 652) can be secured to align the balls before they pass through the detection port 650a1, which has a passage width for one ball, preventing balls from clogging the V winning device 650 and causing problems during play.

As explained above, in the seventh control example, the flow period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the interval between openings (0.5 seconds) of the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) that operates in the bonus game (small prize game) that is awarded when the discrimination result of the discrimination means (the result of the lottery for the special symbol) is a predetermined discrimination result (small prize), so that the ball flowing down the variable member during the interval between openings (the timing when the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed) during the small prize game can be reliably made to win the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing.

In addition, the number of opening operations (12) in one small win game is set to be greater than the number of winning balls (10 balls) required to end the small win game, so that a predetermined number (10 balls) can be won during a small win game even if only the balls flowing down the variable member enter the V winning device 650 during the small win game. Therefore, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short, a sufficient number of winning balls can be secured. In addition, by setting one opening period long, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of balls from entering the V winning device 650 during a small win game.

<About the content of the performance in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example>
With reference to Figures 300 to 302, the characteristic presentation contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described.

In the fifth control example described above, if the lottery (special pattern lottery) executed when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 results in a miss in the jackpot determination (jackpot lottery), a time-saving win determination (time-saving lottery) is executed to set a high probability state for normal patterns, so that if a jackpot is won, the time-saving win will not occur.

In contrast, the seventh control example differs from the fifth control example in that the special pattern lottery is configured so that a jackpot win and a time-saving win can overlap.

Specifically, in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving lottery is executed before the jackpot lottery is executed in the first special symbol lottery, and if the time-saving lottery is won, the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the jackpot lottery is executed during the period in which the time-saving state is set, and the time-saving state ends when the jackpot lottery ends and the first special symbol starts to change. In other words, the period in which the time-saving state is set due to the time-saving lottery being won is only the period in which the jackpot lottery is executed.

The ratio of the jackpot type that is determined when a jackpot is won differs between when the normal state is set and when the time-saving state is set; for example, when a jackpot is won during a period when the normal state is set, the ratio of a 15R jackpot (a jackpot with a maximum of 15 rounds) being determined is 10%, whereas when a jackpot is won during a period when the time-saving state is set, the ratio of a 15R jackpot being determined is 50%. In other words, when a jackpot is won during a period when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving state, the probability of a 15R jackpot being determined is higher than when a jackpot is won during a period when the normal state is set, so it is advantageous for the player when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap.

In this embodiment, the time-saving state that is set when the time-saving win is won lasts only for a short period of time from when the time-saving win is won until the first special symbol next starts to change, so the player cannot play a game in which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (right-hand play). However, in the time-saving state that is set based on the big win, the player can play a right-hand play.

If a player is informed that they have won the time-saving mode when they have not won the jackpot, the player may become confused as to whether the game state that is set for the player after the changing special symbol stops is the normal state or the time-saving mode, and the player may mistakenly believe that the time-saving mode is set and erroneously play with the right hand.

On the other hand, if a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, even if the player is confused as to whether the normal state or the time-saving state will be set after the changing special pattern stops due to the notification that the time-saving win has been won, the player can be made to recognize that a jackpot game will be executed after the special pattern stops, by being notified that a jackpot has been won.

Therefore, in the seventh control example, if a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap in the special pattern lottery, the player is notified or suggested to have won the time-saving win, but if a time-saving win occurs but the jackpot does not occur, the player is not notified or suggested to have won the time-saving win.

By configuring it this way, if a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, it becomes possible for the player to determine which game state was set when the jackpot was won. On the other hand, if a time-saving win is won but the jackpot is not won, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the game state that is set after the changing special pattern stops, which can lead to the player playing in the wrong way.

Referring to Figures 300 and 301, we will explain the display screen when the time-saving lottery result is indicated while the first special pattern is changing.

Figure 300 (a) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when a time-saving lottery result suggestion effect (an effect to suggest the result of the time-saving lottery) is executed while the first special symbol is changing. In this embodiment, when the result of the time-saving lottery executed in the special symbol lottery is to be notified to the player, a "fortune-telling time effect" is executed. The fortune-telling time effect is an effect that suggests to the player whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won, depending on the contents of the capsule cp5 displayed in the main display area Dm. In the main display area Dm, the closed capsule cp5 is displayed with the message "Does this change mean the time-saving lottery has been won?", allowing the player to recognize that the fortune-telling time effect is an effect that suggests whether or not the first special symbol that is changing has won the time-saving lottery, depending on the contents of the capsule cp5.

Here, the fortune time effect is not executed every time the first special symbol changes, and the fortune time effect may not be executed even if the time-saving feature is won. In other words, if the fortune time effect is not executed, the player cannot tell whether the changing first special symbol has won the time-saving feature or not, but if the fortune time effect is executed, the player can tell whether the changing first special symbol has won the time-saving feature or not.

Figure 300 (b) is an example of a display screen indicating that a time-saving win has been won while the first special pattern is changing. In the main display area Dm, a capsule cp5 is opened, and an effect is executed in which a piece of paper k1 with a "circle" written on it appears from inside. The piece of paper k1 is a display mode for indicating that the first special pattern that is changing has won the time-saving win, allowing the player to recognize that they have won the time-saving win.

In addition, during the fluctuation of the first special pattern in the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), the player is only suggested to have won the time-saving feature if the time-saving feature and the jackpot are both won. If the result of the jackpot lottery (the judgment of whether or not there is a jackpot executed in the special pattern lottery) is a miss, the player is not suggested to have won the time-saving feature even if there is a time-saving feature (i.e., the fortune-telling time performance is not executed). Therefore, when paper k1 is displayed during the fortune-telling time performance, indicating that the time-saving feature has been won, the player can recognize that the jackpot has been won before the third pattern, which is displayed in a manner indicating that the jackpot has been won, is displayed.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, the percentage of jackpot types when a jackpot is won differs between when the normal state is set and when the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set; when a jackpot is won during the normal state, the percentage of 15R jackpots (jackpots with a maximum of 15 rounds) is determined is 10%, whereas when a jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the percentage of 15R jackpots is determined is 50%.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when paper k1 is displayed during the fortune time performance, indicating that a time-saving win has been won, a "Super chance arrival performance" is executed in which the main display area Dm displays "Super chance arrival! If you win with this change, you have a great chance of winning a 15R jackpot!", suggesting to the player that there is a high possibility that the first special pattern that is changing will win a 15R jackpot, and making the player hopeful that he or she will win a 15R jackpot during the period from when the fortune time performance ends until the results of the jackpot lottery are announced, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Figure 301 (a) is an example of a display screen when suggesting that the time-saving feature was not won while the first special symbol was changing. Unlike when the time-saving feature was won, an effect is executed in which paper k2 with an "X" written on it appears from capsule CP5 during the fortune-telling time effect. Paper k2 is a display mode for indicating that the time-saving feature was not won by the first special symbol that is changing, and this allows the player to recognize that the time-saving feature was not won.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, the player is only informed that he or she has not won the time-saving feature if the player wins jackpot A (a 15R time-saving jackpot) or if the jackpot lottery result is a miss.

Here, in this embodiment, three jackpot types are defined as the jackpot type of the first special symbol in the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), and "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 15 rounds and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game ends, "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 5 rounds and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 5 rounds and a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. In other words, jackpot A is the most advantageous jackpot type because it is given to the player more rounds of jackpot play than jackpots B and C, and unlike jackpot C, it is set to a time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state after the jackpot game ends.

Therefore, when paper k2 is displayed during the fortune time performance, indicating that the player has not won the time-saving feature, an "all or nothing performance" is executed in which the main display area Dm displays "All or nothing! Jackpot A? or no?", suggesting to the player that there is a high possibility that the most favorable jackpot A has been won, and making the player more interested in the game by making the player hopeful that he or she has won jackpot A during the period from the end of the fortune time performance to the announcement of the result of the jackpot lottery (the jackpot win or loss determination executed in the special pattern lottery).

Figure 301 (b) is an example of a jackpot winning notification screen when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap. In the small display area Dm1, the first special symbol is displayed stationary in a display mode indicating that a jackpot has been won, and in the main display area Dm, a rabbit character 801 opens a treasure chest 810f, and an effect is executed in which a ball tm2 with the letter "V" written on it appears from inside the treasure chest 810f. The ball tm2 is a display mode for notifying the player that the first special symbol has won a jackpot, and the display of the ball tm2 allows the player to recognize that he or she has won a jackpot.

In addition, the main display area Dm continues to display the super chance arrival effect shown in FIG. 300(b), which reads "Super chance arrival! If you hit this fluctuation, you have a great chance of a 15R jackpot!" even when the result of the jackpot lottery is announced.

If the player does not win the time-saving bonus but wins jackpot B or C, the rabbit character 801 opens the treasure chest 810f and ball tm2 appears in a state where neither the Super Chance Arrival effect nor the All or Nothing effect is displayed in the main display area Dm of FIG. 301(b). On the other hand, if the player does not win the time-saving bonus but wins jackpot A and the All or Nothing effect is executed during the fortune time effect described above, the All or Nothing effect continues to be displayed in the main display area Dm on the jackpot winning notification screen of FIG. 301(b), and the player can recognize that he or she has won jackpot A by seeing ball tm2.

After the jackpot winning notification screen of FIG. 301(b) is displayed, a presentation is executed to notify the determined jackpot type (not shown).

If the first special symbol that is changing does not win the time-saving feature and does not win the jackpot, the fortune time effect is executed, and if an all or nothing effect is executed in the fortune time effect, in which "All or nothing! Jackpot A? or Miss?" is displayed in the main display area Dm, the all or nothing effect continues to be displayed in the main display area Dm in FIG. 301(b). In this case, an effect is executed in which a ball with "Too bad" written on it appears from the treasure chest 810f, informing the player that the jackpot was not won.

In the embodiment, the fortune time effect is configured to suggest the result of the time-saving lottery (determining whether or not the time-saving lottery will be won in order to set a high probability state for normal symbols in the special symbol lottery), but this is not limited to this, and the player may be able to recognize the result of the time-saving lottery by displaying a specific character or background image.

In addition, for example, in the super chance arrival presentation shown in FIG. 300(a), the main display area Dm may be configured to display "Super chance arrival! If the jackpot pattern stops during the super chance display, there is a great chance of a 15R jackpot!", and if the super chance arrival presentation continues to be displayed until the jackpot winning notification screen appears, a 15R jackpot is confirmed, and if the super chance arrival presentation ends before the jackpot winning notification screen is displayed, in other words, if the super chance arrival presentation is not displayed in FIG. 301(b), the player may be informed that the possibility of a 15R jackpot is low.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player play while expecting the Super Chance Arrival effect to continue to be displayed during the period from when the Super Chance Arrival effect is executed to when the jackpot winning notification screen is displayed, which increases the player's interest in the game and also prevents the player from feeling distrustful if a jackpot win is notified while the Super Chance Arrival effect is displayed, but the jackpot type is not a 15R jackpot.

In FIG. 301(b), the type of jackpot may be indicated by the display mode of ball tm2. For example, if the color of ball tm2 is rainbow colored, it may indicate jackpot A (15R jackpot with time reduction), and if it is blue, it may indicate jackpot C (5R jackpot without time reduction).

Next, with reference to FIG. 302, the notification patterns when the time-saving lottery and the jackpot lottery are won will be described. FIG. 302 is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern when the time-saving lottery (a determination of whether or not a time-saving lottery has been won to set a high probability state for normal symbols executed in the special symbol lottery) or the jackpot lottery (a determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won executed in the special symbol lottery) is won.

Figure 302 (a) is an example of a notification pattern when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, where during the pre-reach performance period, a fortune-telling time performance (see Figure 300 (a)) is executed, and the player is informed that they have won the time-saving win by displaying paper k1 (see Figure 300 (b)), which is a display mode for suggesting that they have won the time-saving win, and the "super chance arrival performance" (see Figure 300 (b)), which is a display mode for suggesting that they have won the time-saving win, is displayed, and after the reach performance period, a jackpot win notification screen is displayed, thereby notifying the player that they have won the jackpot. Therefore, when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, the player will be able to recognize that they have won the time-saving win and the jackpot win.

Figure 302(b) is an example of a notification pattern when the time-saving lottery is won but the jackpot is not won; in this case, unlike the case of Figure 302(a), the fortune-telling time performance (see Figure 300(a)) is not executed during the pre-reach performance period, so the player is unable to know the results of the time-saving lottery, and the player is notified that he or she has not won the jackpot by the third symbol being displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has not been won after the reach performance. Therefore, if the time-saving lottery is won but the jackpot is not won, the player is unable to know the results of the time-saving lottery and can only recognize that he or she has not won the jackpot.

Figure 302(c) shows the notification pattern when the player does not win the time-saving feature but wins the jackpot. As mentioned above, except for some cases when jackpot A is won, the fortune time effect (Figure 300(a)) is not executed during the pre-reach performance period, so as with 302(b), the player is not informed of the result of the time-saving lottery, and is only notified that the player has won the jackpot when the third symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won after the reach performance. Therefore, if the player wins the jackpot but does not win the time-saving feature, the player is not informed of the result of the time-saving lottery and can only recognize that he or she has won the jackpot.

By configuring it this way, if a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, it becomes possible for the player to determine which game state was set when the jackpot was won. On the other hand, if a time-saving win is won but the jackpot is not won, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the game state that is set after the changing special pattern stops, which can lead to the player playing in the wrong way.

In the embodiment, the effect suggesting a win in the time-saving feature is executed during the pre-reach performance period, but this is not limited to this. For example, the effect suggesting a win in the time-saving feature (the effect to suggest that a win in the time-saving feature has been won) may be executed during the reach performance period, or the effect suggesting a win in the time-saving feature may be executed during the period when the jackpot winning notification screen is displayed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the time-saving winning indication effect does not occur during the pre-reach performance period, there is a possibility that the time-saving winning indication effect will be executed on the screen that notifies the player that a jackpot has been won. Therefore, even if the time-saving winning indication effect does not appear during the pre-reach performance period, the player can enjoy the changing display of the first special pattern while hoping for a time-saving winning without being disappointed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the embodiment, if the player wins the time-saving feature but does not win the jackpot, the player is not notified of the time-saving feature win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player may be notified of the time-saving feature win even if the player wins the time-saving feature but does not win the jackpot. For example, in the embodiment, the super chance arrival performance (see FIG. 300(b)) is executed only when the time-saving feature win and the jackpot win overlap, so the player knows that the jackpot win has been won before the jackpot win is announced when the super chance arrival performance (see FIG. 300(b)) occurs. However, by executing the super chance arrival performance (see FIG. 300(b)) in some cases where the player wins the time-saving feature but does not win the jackpot, the player is not confirmed to have won the jackpot even when the super chance arrival performance (see FIG. 300(b)) occurs, and the player can enjoy predicting the result of the jackpot lottery until the last moment when the result of the jackpot lottery is announced, which can improve the interest of the game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example>
Next, the counters of the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 303. Note that the counters used in the above control examples differ in that the update range of the counters is partially different, but the basic configuration is the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first win random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 999) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). In particular, when the first win random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first win random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the seventh control example), for example, and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the first winning random number 7 table 202fa stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number 7 table 202fa, it is determined that a jackpot for the special pattern has occurred.

The first winning random number 7 table 202fa is provided with two types: a first special pattern random number 7 table 202fa1 for the first special pattern, and a second special pattern random number 7 table 202fa2 for the second special pattern. The number of random numbers that will result in a big win is the same, but the number of random numbers that will result in a small win is set to be different (see FIG. 305). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that will result in a small win different, the player's expectation of receiving a special prize (a big win or a small win) can be made different between the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern. The first special pattern random number 7 table 202fa1 and the second special pattern random number 7 table 202fa2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Now, referring to FIG. 305, the first winning random number 7 table 202fa will be described. FIG. 305(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 7 table 202fa, FIG. 305(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first special pattern random number 7 table 202fa1, and FIG. 305(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the second special pattern random number 7 table 202fa2. This first winning random number 7 table 202fa is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a big win and a random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a small win are set in the drawing of the first special pattern or the second special pattern.

Specifically, when a lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 is referenced. As shown in FIG. 305(b), the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 specifies that the values of the random number counter C1 between "0 and 4" are the jackpot determination values, and other values are specified as non-jackpot determination values (i.e., misses). Then, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any of "0 to 4," it is determined to be a jackpot.

When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 is referenced. As shown in FIG. 305(c), the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 specifies that the value of the random number counter C1 is "0 to 4" as the jackpot determination value, "5 to 144" as the small jackpot determination value, and "145 to 999" as the other value (i.e., miss). Then, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a jackpot, and if the value is any of "5 to 144", it is determined to be a small jackpot.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is reached, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the seventh control example), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. In addition, in a state where the lottery (change) of the special symbol can be executed (i.e., a state other than during the change of the special symbol and during the big win game or small win game), the value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area is not a random number that is determined to be a big win or small win for a special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that is determined to be a miss for a special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a miss for a special pattern.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area is a random number that results in a jackpot with a special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a jackpot with a special pattern. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of 0 to 999. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn, there are five random number values that result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 4" are stored in the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 and the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 of the first winning random number 7 table 202fa, as described above. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 5 out of a total of 1000, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/200".

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the seventh control example, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to refer to the first win type selection table 202b to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb will be explained with reference to FIG. 306.

Figure 306 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb. As shown in Figure 306 (a), the seventh control example has a special jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used when determining the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired at the time of drawing the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and a special jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used when determining the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired at the time of drawing the second special pattern (special pattern 2). As a result, the jackpot type when a jackpot is won by drawing the special pattern 1 can be made different from the jackpot type when a jackpot is won by drawing the special pattern 2, or the ratio at which each of the multiple types of jackpot types is selected can be made different, so that a game using the first special pattern (special pattern 1) and a game using the second special pattern (special pattern 2) can be provided to the player with different playability, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 306(b), the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used when drawing the first special symbol (special symbol 1) will be explained. FIG. 306(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 306(b), when the normal state is set as the game state, the jackpot type in the first jackpot type counter C2 is "jackpot A" if the random number value is any of "0 to 9", "jackpot B" if the random number value is any of "10 to 49", and "jackpot C" if the random number value is any of "50 to 99". When the time-saving state is set as the game state, if the random number value in the first winning type counter C2 is any of "0-9", the jackpot type is "jackpot D", if it is any of "10-49", the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and if it is any of "50-99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B".

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 15 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. In addition to the large number of rounds, the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, so "Jackpot A" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, there are 10 random number values that select "Jackpot A", so the probability that "Jackpot A" will be selected when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 10%.

"Jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 5 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Although the number of rounds is fewer than the above-mentioned "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, since the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, 40 random number values are used to select "Jackpot B," so the probability that "Jackpot B" will be selected when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 40%.

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 5, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state (non-time-saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the jackpot, "Jackpot C" is a disadvantageous jackpot type for players. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, 50 random number values will select "Jackpot C", so the probability that "Jackpot C" will be selected when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 50%.

"Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 15 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. In addition to the large number of rounds, the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, so "Jackpot D" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Furthermore, compared to the above-mentioned "Jackpot A," "Jackpot D" is configured to set a time-saving state that is difficult to end. Therefore, it is a more advantageous jackpot type for the player than "Jackpot A," in which the same jackpot game is executed and the same game state is set after the jackpot game ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) which is set to the normal state, there is a 10% chance that a 15-round jackpot game will be selected, and a 90% chance that a 5-round jackpot game will be selected. In addition, there is a 50% chance that a jackpot will be selected in which the game state after the jackpot game ends will transition to a time-saving state.

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) executed while the time-saving state is set, 15 rounds of jackpot play are selected 50% of the time, and 5 rounds of jackpot play are selected 50% of the time. Also, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot play executed based on the winning jackpot.

In other words, winning a jackpot in the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than winning a jackpot in the normal state in terms of the content of the jackpot game and the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, as for the game state at the time of winning a jackpot, the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 306(c), the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used when drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2) will be explained. FIG. 306(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 306(c), when the random number value in the first jackpot type counter C2 is any value between "0 and 99," the jackpot type becomes "jackpot D." In other words, when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the jackpot type "jackpot D," which is the most advantageous for the player, is always selected.

In the seventh control example, the number of types of jackpots is four, but it is not limited to this, and it may be one type, or five or more types. Also, it may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol even if the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is the same. By configuring in this way, for example, when a jackpot is hit with the second special symbol, by setting a jackpot type that is executed more rounds, it is possible to make the player more excited about a hit with the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make a hit in a high probability game state more advantageous for the player, and to improve the entertainment value of the game during the high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to strongly motivate the player to move to the high probability state, and to make the player play for a longer period of time.

Also, the types of jackpot types selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (allocation rate) of each jackpot type may be the same, and only the range of the first jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type may be different. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts of obtaining the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 by targeting a specific counter value from being carried out with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The small win type counter C5 determines the type of small win when a special pattern small win occurs and determines the display mode of the first pattern display device 37. It is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small win type counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the seventh control example), and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and is stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in a state in which the lottery (change) of the special pattern can be executed (i.e., a state other than during the change of the special pattern and during the big win game or small win game).

The value of the small win type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. If the result of the big win lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, a small win type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) for determining the type of small win to be executed is set in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the contents of the small win type selection 7 table 202ff will be explained with reference to FIG. 307. FIG. 307 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the small win type selection 7 table 202ff. As shown in FIG. 307, the small win type selection 7 table 202ff stipulates that two types of small wins, A and B, are selected as the small win types of the second special pattern according to the value of the small win type counter C5. Specifically, when the acquired value of the small win type counter C5 is "0 to 89", the small win type is "small win A (jackpot A when V passes)", and when it is any of "90 to 99", the small win type is "small win B (jackpot B when V passes)".

Here, for each small win type (small win A, B), when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 during the small win game, the type of the big win game that is executed after the small win game ends is set. In the case of small win A, the big win A (15R time-saving big win) is set, and after the small win A is executed, the big win in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state is executed, and then the time-saving state (the period until the special pattern changes 100 times, or until the small win A is won once, or until the small win B is won three times) is set. In addition, in the case of small win B, the big win B (5R time-saving big win) is set, and after the small win B is executed, the big win in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then the time-saving state (the period until the special pattern changes 100 times, or until the small win A is won once, or until the small win B is won three times) is set.

In this way, the content of the big win game that is executed after the small win game ends and the game state that is set after the big win game can be changed depending on the type of small win selected. Specifically, small win A is set as the most advantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is large (15R) and a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the big win game ends, while small win B is set as the number of rounds executed in the big win game is small (5R) and is less advantageous than the above-mentioned small win A, but a time-saving state is set after the big win game.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the seventh control example, the time-saving state can be ended with a time-saving end condition that is established based on the result of the second special pattern lottery (such as the number of times small prize A is won or the number of times small prize B is won), or a time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the special patterns (first special pattern and second special pattern) change. By configuring it in this way, if a jackpot is won with one or more reserved balls for the first special pattern and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the time-saving state will not end even if the first special pattern (special pattern 1) changes after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) changes and a small win (small win A, small win B) that can execute a big win game is won, the time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times the special symbol changes, and the time-saving state can be ended before the time-saving end condition is met, so that it is possible to suppress the repeated execution of a game in which the game ball is not allowed to pass through a specific area during a small win game until a favorable small win (small win A) is won during the time-saving state until the second end condition is met.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd will be explained with reference to FIG. 308(a). FIG. 308(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. As shown in FIG. 308(a), the variation pattern 7 table 202fd defines the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and the time-saving variation pattern 7 table 202fd2 used when the time-saving state is set. Details will be described later, but in the seventh control example, the data table used to select the variation pattern is different depending on the game state, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected depending on the game state can be different.

Figure 308 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1 provided in the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. As shown in Figure 308 (b), the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1 defines the pattern type, lottery result, and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 in association with the variation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 308(b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is "miss", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified to correspond to a short miss with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds in the range of "0 to 139", to correspond to a false miss with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds in the range of "140 to 149", to correspond to various normal reaches with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds in the range of "150 to 179", and to correspond to a super reach a with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds in the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is "jackpot", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", various normal reaches with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are associated with it, the range of "30 to 189" is associated with it, super reaches with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds are associated with it, and the range of "190 to 198" is associated with it, special reaches with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds are associated with it.

Next, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is set to a long miss with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds, and if the lottery result is a "big win or small win," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is set to a long miss with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds.

In this way, depending on the result of the lottery for the special pattern, one of the change patterns with a change time between 7 seconds and 180 seconds is set, and by sending a command indicating this change pattern to the voice lamp control device 113, a change performance corresponding to the change time is executed by the third pattern display device 81.

Here, in the seventh control example, as described above, when a right-hand hit game is performed in a state in which the normal state is set as the game state, the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, a game in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, that is, a game in which a lottery for a first special symbol is performed, is performed. In the normal state configured in this way, a lottery for a second special symbol is performed when a player illegally enters a ball into the second ball entrance 640, so a variation pattern having a long variation time is selected for the variation of the second special symbol in the normal state. This makes it possible to suppress a situation in which a lottery for a second special symbol is illegally performed in a short period of time. In addition, when it is determined that a lottery (variation) for a second special symbol has been performed during the normal state, it may be configured to notify the outside that a lottery (variation) for a second special symbol has been illegally performed using the period (180 seconds) until the lottery result is displayed. In addition, if the second special symbol is drawn (varied) illegally, the system may be configured to forcibly create and display a losing drawing (variation) result as the result of the illegally drawn (varied) second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 308(b), the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected in the normal fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd1 is specified so that when the pattern type is special pattern 1 and the lottery result is a miss, the order of most likely to be selected is 7 seconds (selection rate of about 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), 80 seconds (selection rate of about 10%), and 20 seconds (selection rate of about 5%). Also, when the lottery result is a jackpot, the order of most likely to be selected is 80 seconds (selection rate of about 80%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), and 140 seconds (selection rate of about 5%).

In this way, there is a correlation between the lottery result of the special symbol and the selected fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), and the ratio of fluctuation times (fluctuation patterns) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the ratio of fluctuation times (fluctuation patterns) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot when a specific fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is selected. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict whether or not they will win a jackpot based on the selected fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern).

In the seventh control example, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the type of jackpot that is won, but this is not limited to the above, and different variation pattern tables may be used when the jackpot type indicates a jackpot that is advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot A) and when the jackpot type indicates other jackpots (jackpot B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is won so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating other jackpots is won. This makes it possible to get the player interested in the variation time of the special symbol, since the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern that is executed, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to be for the player.

Also, the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating a normal jackpot is won may be configured to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time more easily than the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating a guaranteed jackpot is won. This makes it possible to provide the player with an unexpected game result when a jackpot is won with a short variation time, and keeps the player excited until the end even when a short variation time is selected.

Next, the contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd2 provided in the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd will be explained with reference to FIG. 309. FIG. 309 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd2. As shown in FIG. 309, the time-saving fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd2 defines the symbol type, the number of fluctuations, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in association with the fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations is 1-4, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a short miss with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified for the entire range, and when the lottery result is a "jackpot," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a short win with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified for the entire range. When the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 or more, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a miss with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the entire range, and when the lottery result is a "jackpot," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a win with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the entire range. In addition, if the pattern type is the second special pattern (special pattern 2), the number of fluctuations is 1 or more, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is set to a medium miss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds; if the lottery result is a "small win," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 160," a short and small win with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and a range of "161 to 198," a medium and small win with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds; and if the lottery result is a "jackpot," a medium and large win with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set.

Returning to FIG. 303, the explanation continues. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 239). Also, when the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In the seventh control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the second pattern reserved ball execution area of RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by the second winning random number 7 table 202fc stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning set by the second winning random number 7 table 202fc, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. Note that in the seventh control example, the probability of winning a normal symbol is configured to always be constant regardless of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.

For example, the second winning random number 7 table 202fc may be provided with two types: one for when the probability of a normal pattern is low (the period when the normal pattern is in its normal state), and one for when the probability of a normal pattern winning is higher than the low probability (the period when the normal pattern is in its time-saving state). In this case, the number of winning random numbers contained in each is set to be different. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of a win can be changed between when the normal pattern has a low probability and when the normal pattern has a high probability.

When the ball passes through the normal start hole 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained and it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state. If the game state is in the time-saving state, the second pattern display device 83 displays a variable normal pattern for three seconds. On the other hand, if the game state is not in the time-saving state, the second pattern display device 83 displays a variable normal pattern for 30 seconds.

If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "○" pattern is displayed as the stopped pattern (second pattern). Then, it is determined whether the game state at the time when the second pattern is displayed (determined display) as a stopped pattern is in a time-saving state, and if the time when the second pattern is displayed (determined display) as a stopped pattern is in a time-saving state and the time when the variable start of the second pattern is also in a time-saving state, the operation of the electric role 640a is controlled (long opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the operation of the electric role 640a is controlled (short opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The opening time and number of times of the second ball entrance 640 may be set arbitrarily.

In this way, the normal symbol variation time and the operation of the electric device 640a when a winning combination is selected (opening period and number of times the second ball entrance 640 is opened) are configured to be variable depending on the set game state. When the game state when the normal symbol starts to vary is in the time-saving state, the time of the variation display becomes very short (30 seconds → 3 seconds) compared to the normal state. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second symbol that starts to vary during the time-saving state is a win and the time-saving state is also set at the time when the electric device 640a starts to operate, the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long (0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times) compared to other cases, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. A table (not shown) that stores random numbers that determine whether the normal symbol is a win or not from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202.

In the seventh control example, the time for the second symbol to change and the operation of the electric device 640a are set differently depending on the game state when the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to change and the game state when the electric device 640a starts to operate based on the winning of the normal symbol. However, other configurations may be used. For example, a discrimination means may be provided that determines that the time-saving state is continuously set from the time when the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to change to the time when the electric device 640a starts to operate, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means may be used to set the time for the second symbol to change and the operation of the electric device 640a.

As described above, in the seventh control example, in order to execute the operation (long opening) of the electric role 640a that is advantageous to the player, the time-saving state must be set at both the start of the normal pattern change and the start of the operation of the electric role 640a. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that started changing at the timing when the normal state was set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating a win at the timing when the time-saving state was set, or when the second pattern that started changing at the timing when the time-saving state was set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating a win at the timing when the normal state was set, the change of the second pattern executed based on the lottery of one second pattern and the operation of the electric role 640a span multiple game states, it is possible to suppress the execution of the operation control (long opening) of the electric role 640a that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of main process 7 (see Figure 325).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Next, referring to FIG. 304(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 304(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least the first win random number 7 table 202fa, the big win type selection 7 table 202fb, the second win random number 7 table 202fc, the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd, the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe, the small win type selection 7 table 202ff, the release scenario 7 table 202fg, the time-saving win random number 7 table 202fh, and the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi as part of the fixed value data.

Incidentally, among the fixed value data stored in ROM 202, the first win random number 7 table 202fa, the big win type selection 7 table 202fb, the second win random number 7 table 202fc, the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd, and the small win type selection 7 table 202ff have already been explained in detail, so explanations will be omitted.

The time-saving granting 7 table 202fe is a data table that is referenced when multiple time-saving end conditions that end the time-saving state are set differently for each type of jackpot that has been won. It is referenced when the jackpot game ends (the ending period of the jackpot game ends) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 326), and different times of time-saving (time-saving end conditions) are set depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time-saving 7 table 202fe will be explained with reference to FIG. 306(d). FIG. 306(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving 7 table 202fe. The seventh control example has jackpot types (jackpot A, B, D) in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and a jackpot type (jackpot C) in which a time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (a normal state is set), and as shown in FIG. 306(d), multiple time-saving end conditions are stipulated corresponding to each jackpot type.

The seventh control example has a first time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the special pattern changes, a second time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the small prize A is won in the special pattern lottery, and a third time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the small prize B is won in the special pattern lottery.

As shown in FIG. 306(d), the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe specifies values to be set in various counters corresponding to each of a number of time-saving end conditions, and the value set as the first time-saving end condition described above is set in the time-saving counter 203h, the value set as the second time-saving end condition is set in the small win A counter 203fg, and the value set as the third time-saving end condition is set in the small win B counter 203fh.

Specifically, in the case of jackpot types A and B, the time-saving end condition is stipulated to be set to "100" in the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition), "1" in the small win A counter 203fg, and "3" in the small win B counter 203fh. In the case of jackpot D, the time-saving end condition is stipulated to be set to "100" in the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition), "2" in the small win A counter 203fg, and "10" in the small win B counter 203fh.

As described above, in the seventh control example, when the jackpot type is jackpot C, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so the values to be set for the various counters described above are not specified for jackpot C in the time-saving granting 7 table 202fe. In this way, by making the end conditions of the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends different for each jackpot type won, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the specific time-saving content even if the player is notified in advance that the time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends, so that the player can play with heightened motivation to play until the end (until the time-saving state ends).

In the seventh control example, the time-saving state is configured to end when a jackpot with a special symbol is won in addition to the time-saving end state set using the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe. The time-saving end condition established based on winning the jackpot does not differ depending on the type of jackpot set, so it is omitted from the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe. However, the time-saving end condition described above (the time-saving end condition established based on winning the jackpot with a special symbol) may also be configured to specify a value in the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the time-saving state (second time-saving) is set even if the time-saving prize is won in the special pattern lottery, but the time-saving end condition set for the second time-saving will be explained with reference to the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi described later. Note that in this seventh control example, the time-saving end condition for the time-saving state (second time-saving) that is set based on the time-saving prize being won is set with reference to the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi, not the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving end condition corresponding to the second time-saving prize may be specified in the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe.

In addition, in the seventh control example, a configuration having the above-mentioned first to third time-saving end conditions is used as the multiple time-saving end conditions, but other conditions may be set as the time-saving end conditions. For example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the first special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 80 times), or a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the V winning device has been activated due to a small win (the sum of the values of the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times) may be set.

Furthermore, it is also possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established based on other factors, rather than on the number of times the special symbol changes or the lottery results. For example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the normal symbol changes or the number of times the normal symbol has been won (the number of times the electric device 640a has been activated) reaches a predetermined number, or a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of balls that have entered a specific ball entry port (for example, the general winning port 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 balls), etc., may be set in advance.

As described above, by setting multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and configuring the time-saving state to end when any of the time-saving end conditions is set, it becomes difficult for the player to know in advance how long the time-saving state will continue, and this makes it possible to prevent monotonous gameplay.

In addition, the seventh control example uses control that ends the time-saving state when any one of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, but it may also be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined number (e.g., two) of multiple time-saving end conditions are satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a number-of-time-saving end conditions satisfaction determination means that determines the number of satisfied time-saving end conditions, and a condition-achievement determination means that determines whether the number of satisfied conditions determined by the number-of-time-saving end conditions satisfaction determination means has reached a predetermined number (e.g., two), and to end the time-saving state (set the normal state) when it is determined by the condition-achievement determination means that the number of satisfied conditions has reached the predetermined number (e.g., two).

In addition, a content discrimination means may be provided that discriminates the content of the time-saving end condition that is first established, and a discrimination criterion number variable means may be provided that varies a predetermined number (e.g., two) that serves as the discrimination criterion for the condition achievement discrimination means based on the discrimination result of the content discrimination means. This makes it possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is first established, so that the player can be motivated to play even after the time-saving state has been set.

In addition to the above, a predetermined period measurement means for measuring a predetermined period after the time-saving state is set (for example, until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10) and a result determination means for determining the measurement result of the predetermined period measurement means may be provided, and if the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, a time-saving end delay means for delaying the end of the time-saving state until the predetermined period has elapsed even if the above-mentioned time-saving end condition is established may be provided, or an end condition invalidation means for invalidating the established time-saving end condition when the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period may be provided. Also, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is established or updating (subtracting) the values of various counters set corresponding to each time-saving end condition may not be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the time-saving state from ending immediately after it is set, and the timing for ending the time-saving state can be set in a complex manner. In addition, when using a process for ending the time-saving state based on the establishment of multiple time-saving end conditions as described above, it is preferable to set multiple time-saving end conditions as a priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 times) and a non-priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of small wins reaches 3 times), and to configure the time-saving state to end immediately when the priority time-saving end condition is established, and to end the time-saving state when only multiple non-priority time-saving end conditions are established. By setting the priority time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessive time-saving state.

The opening scenario 7 table 202fg is a data table that stores opening scenarios that are scenarios for the opening patterns (patterns that operate the various solenoids provided in each winning device) of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 in a winning game (jackpot game, small winning game) that is executed when a jackpot or small winning is won by a lottery of special patterns, and the contents of the opening scenario are specified according to the jackpot type set for the jackpot won or the small winning type set for the small winning.

In this way, by varying the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) that opens depending on the winning result (big win or small win) and the type of win (big win type, small win type) and the content of the opening operation (opening scenario), the degree of advantage of the bonus game can be set in multiple stages, so that even after winning a big win or small win, the player can enjoy wondering which type of win he or she won.

In the opening scenario 7 table 202fg, the start interval period during the winning game (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device) corresponding to the winning type (big win type, small win type), the opening operation mode of the winning device (the type of winning device that is opened, the number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), the round interval period (the period during which the winning device is closed between round games), the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period until the start of a new special pattern variation is allowed)), and the on/off switching operation mode of the flow path solenoid 650k for switching the flow path so that the ball that has won the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 or the special discharge flow path 650e2 are respectively specified.

Specifically, the winning type corresponds to jackpot A, and the start interval period is set to "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the winning device is set to "15 rounds", the opening operation mode of the "variable winning device 65" is set to "continuously open for 29 seconds" as one round play, the round interval period is set to "1 second", and the end interval period is set to "4 seconds". Therefore, when a jackpot type of jackpot A is won, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, a time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends, is set, so that jackpot A is a jackpot that grants the most advantageous privilege to the player.

Next, for the winning types corresponding to jackpots B and C, the start interval period is set to "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the winning device is set to "5 rounds", the opening operation mode of the "variable winning device 65" is set to "continuously open for 29 seconds" as one round play, the round interval period is set to "1 second", and the end interval period is set to "4 seconds". Therefore, if a jackpot type corresponding to jackpots B and C is won, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds is executed, and the player is paid out about 1/3 of the prize balls in the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot A. In addition, in the case of jackpot type B, a time-saving state is set, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends, and in the case of jackpot C, a time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so that jackpot B is a jackpot that is less advantageous than jackpot A and gives a more advantageous bonus than jackpot C.

The winning type corresponds to the big win D, and the start interval period is "1 second", the opening operation mode of the winning device is "V winning device 650" opening in the "1st round" and "variable winning device 65" opening in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round of play, the first round is "opened 12 times at 0.1 seconds with an interval of 0.5 seconds between each opening", and the 2nd to 15th rounds are "opened continuously for 29 seconds", the round interval period is "10 seconds" after the end of the 1st round and "1 second" otherwise, and the end interval period is "4 seconds".

In other words, the contents stipulated for the start interval period of the big win D and the period until the second round is executed (the round game content of the first round (opening/closing operation mode), and the round interval period after the end of the first round) are configured to be the same as the contents stipulated for the small win game described below. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the winning game being executed this time is a big win game or a small win game until the timing when the first round ends (or until the timing when the small win game ends in the case of a small win game). This makes it possible to provide an unexpected winning game to a player who has won a small win and thought that a small win game is being executed.

In the seventh control example, the jackpot D is the jackpot type that is always selected when the jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and the lottery for the second special symbol is set so that most of the time a small jackpot is won (see FIG. 305(c)). Therefore, a time-saving state is set as the game state, and during the period when the second special symbol mainly changes, some kind of winning game starts after the special symbol changes are stopped. In this case, whether a jackpot or a small jackpot is won, the winning game starts with the same opening action, making it difficult for the player to know which win (jackpot or small jackpot) he or she has won.

In addition, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to be lower than that of winning a small jackpot, and a time-saving state is set to be granted after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot D. Therefore, since a player who wins a jackpot will not be provided with a less favorable benefit than if they had won a small jackpot, it is possible to make a surprising game (a jackpot game corresponding to jackpot D) an advantageous game for the player, which can excite the player even more.

When the big win D is won and when various small wins are won, the same presentation mode is executed as the variable display (variable presentation) displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and in order to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the lottery result from the display mode of the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b that show the lottery result of the special pattern, the timing of the stop display of the special pattern and the timing of the stop display of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may be made different, or the timing of the stop display of the special pattern and the timing of the stop display of the third pattern may be synchronized, but the display mode or display area may be changed to make it more difficult for the player to distinguish the display of the third pattern at or around that stop display timing than during other periods, or the pattern for presentation displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 may be switched from the third pattern to a normal pattern for presentation corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern at the timing of the stop display of the special pattern.

In addition, the winning device (V winning device 650) that opens when a winning game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b can be arranged separately, and an effect display can be executed on the third symbol display device 81 to draw the player's attention to the V winning device 650 at the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed (the timing when the player is notified that he or she has won one of the winning symbols), or, as in the seventh control example, the display area of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b can be made smaller than that of the third symbol display device 81, making it harder to see the first symbol than the third symbol. This makes it difficult to distinguish whether the lottery result for this special symbol is a big win or a small win based on the stopped display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, and allows the player to continue to expect that they have won a big win even during a winning game.

The contents stipulated for the win types corresponding to small win A and B include not only the small win game (1 round game), but also the opening scenario of the big win game (2 to 15 round game) that continues after the small win game ends when the V switch 650e3 detects a ball during the small win game. This makes it possible to reliably match the small win game content of the selected small win type with the big win game content that can be executed after the small win game ends, so that appropriate play can be provided.

Specifically, for the small win type A, the start interval period is set to "1 second" for the small win game, the opening operation mode of the winning device "V winning device 650" is opened "1 round", one round game is "12 times of 0.1 second opening", and the interval period between openings is "0.5 seconds except after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 1), and 5 seconds after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 2)".

The "variable winning device 65" opens in the "2nd to 15th rounds" as a big win game that can be executed after the small win game has ended, and one round of play is "continuously open for 29 seconds." The interval between rounds is "10 seconds" after the first round has ended, and "1 second" otherwise, with a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval of "8 seconds."

In addition, for the small win type B, the start interval period is set to "1 second" for the small win game, the opening operation mode of the winning device "V winning device 650" is opened "1 round", one round game is "12 times of 0.1 second opening", and the interval period between openings is "0.5 seconds except after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 1), and 5 seconds after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 2)".

The "variable winning device 65" opens in the "second to fifth rounds" as a big win game that can be executed after the small win game has ended, and one round of play is "continuously open for 29 seconds." The interval between rounds is "10 seconds" after the first round has ended, and "1 second" otherwise, with a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval of "8 seconds."

In other words, the big win game that can be executed after the small win game corresponding to small win B is completed is set to have fewer rounds than the big win game corresponding to small win A described above. Also, when the small win type is small win B, a time-saving state that is an advantageous game state for the player is set after the corresponding big win game is completed, so small win B is a small win that confers a less advantageous benefit than small win A.

Time-saving random number 7 table 202fh is a data table in which the value (judgment value) of the first winning random number counter C1, which is judged to be a time-saving win in the lottery for the first special pattern or the second special pattern, is specified in correspondence with the game state. Here, the contents of time-saving random number 7 table 202fh will be explained with reference to FIG. 310(a). FIG. 310(a) is a diagram showing the contents specified in time-saving random number 7 table 202fh.

Specifically, regardless of the type of special symbol, when the game state is normal (low probability state for special symbols and normal symbols), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is set to a range of "3, 4, 140 to 287" as the judgment value for a time-saving win, and for other game states, no judgment value for a time-saving win is set.

Here, in this seventh control example, the jackpot winning judgment and the time-saving winning judgment can be executed in a single special pattern lottery. Also, the small prize winning judgment and the time-saving winning judgment can be executed in a overlapping manner. Therefore, for example, if the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "3, 4", a jackpot is judged in the jackpot judgment executed using the first winning random number 7 table 202fa (see FIG. 305(a)), and a time-saving winning judgment is judged in the time-saving winning judgment executed using the time-saving random number 7 table 202fh (see FIG. 310(a)), so that a jackpot and a time-saving winning are won in a overlapping manner. Similarly, if the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "140 to 144," a small win is determined in the small win determination performed using the special pattern 2 random number 7 table 202fa2 (see FIG. 305(c)), and a time-saving win is determined in the time-saving win determination performed using the time-saving win random number 7 table 202fh (see FIG. 310(a)), resulting in a double win of both the small win and the time-saving win.

As described above, in the seventh control example, the jackpot (small jackpot) determination is performed after the time-saving winning determination is performed, so in the case of a double win, the jackpot (small jackpot) is won in the time-saving state. Therefore, a more advantageous bonus can be awarded to the player compared to winning the jackpot (small jackpot) without winning the time-saving state.

In this seventh control example, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in one special pattern lottery is used to determine whether or not there is a big win (small win) and whether or not there is a time-saving win, and if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained is the winning determination value in either determination, a double win is possible; however, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the right to execute a special pattern lottery is acquired, the value of the random number counter for determining a big win (small win) and the value of the random number counter for determining a time-saving win may be obtained separately, and the obtained values may be used to determine whether or not there is a big win (small win) and whether or not there is a time-saving win.

The time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi is a data table that is referenced when setting the time-saving end conditions for the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set when the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving type is specified in accordance with the value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1.

Here, the contents of the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi will be explained with reference to FIG. 310(b). FIG. 310(b) is a diagram showing the contents specified in the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi. As shown in FIG. 310(b), the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi specifies a time-saving type corresponding to the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1, and specifies a time-saving end condition corresponding to the specified time-saving type.

Specifically, time-saving A is specified as the time-saving type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. Then, a time-saving end condition is specified in which "1" is set to the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition) as the time-saving end condition corresponding to time-saving A. In other words, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is set when the process of updating the value of the special pattern time-saving counter 203h is executed once. Therefore, if the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set at the time of winning the time-saving state, and then a jackpot determination is performed in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving state is set until the special pattern variation to show the result of the special pattern lottery begins.

In other words, if the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, it is possible to set a time-saving feature only for the purpose of making the jackpot determination in the special pattern lottery during the time-saving feature (making a special lottery) during the time-saving feature. Therefore, if the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, it is possible for only the jackpot determination to be made during the time-saving feature without the player realizing that they have won the time-saving feature, so that if the player wins the jackpot, an unexpected bonus (the jackpot gameplay content, the time-saving feature after the jackpot game ends) can be given to the player.

As shown in FIG. 310(b), in this seventh control example, when a time-saving prize is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving prize type A is always set as the time-saving prize type, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, a time-saving prize type different from time-saving prize A may be selectable depending on the value of the acquired time-saving prize type selection counter CC1. In this case, for example, the time-saving prize type A is specified as the time-saving prize type for the range of the acquired time-saving prize type selection counter CC1 from "0 to 94", and the time-saving prize type Z different from time-saving prize A is specified as the time-saving prize type for the range of "95 to 99", and a time-saving prize end condition for setting the time-saving prize counter 203h (first time-saving prize end condition) to "100" is specified as the time-saving prize end condition corresponding to time-saving prize Z.

By configuring it in this way, in some cases where a time-saving win is made in the special symbol lottery, it is possible to set a time-saving state for continuing to execute the second special symbol lottery, rather than a time-saving state for executing a special lottery, providing players with a more unexpected experience.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 304(b). Fig. 304(b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 304(b), the RAM 203 in the seventh control example has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game status storage area 203g, a time-saving counter 203h, a big win start flag 203j, a big win in progress flag 203k, a small win type storage area 203fa, a small win start flag 203fb, a small win in progress flag 203fc, a V-pass big win type storage area 203fd, a V flag 203fe, a V-pass flag 203ff, a small win A counter 203fg, a small win B counter 203fh, and other memory areas 203z.

In other words, the difference is that a small win type storage area 203fa, a small win start flag 203fb, a small win mid-game flag 203fc, a V-pass big win type storage area 203fd, a V flag 203fe, a V-pass flag 203ff, a small win A counter 203fg, and a small win B counter 203fh have been added to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 244(b)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above, but otherwise it is the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The small win type storage area 203fa is a storage area for temporarily storing the small win type set for the small win that has been won. When it is determined that a small win has been won (S10306 in FIG. 317: Yes), the acquired small win type is temporarily stored (S10310 in FIG. 317). Then, when the number of V winning devices 650 opened during the small win game reaches a predetermined number (S11707 in FIG. 327: Yes) and it is determined that the V flag 203fe is not set to on (S11708 in FIG. 327: No), the stored small win type is referenced (S11709 in FIG. 327), and an instruction command corresponding to the referenced small win type is set. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the information (information for indicating the small win type) stored in the small win type storage area 203fa is configured to be cleared when the small win game ends.

The small win start flag 203fb is a flag that indicates that it is the start timing of a small win game. It is set to ON when the variation of the special symbol that is determined to be a small win is stopped (S10404 in FIG. 320). When it is determined that the small win start flag 203fb is ON and it is identified that it is the start timing of a small win game, it is set to OFF (S11703 in FIG. 327). This small win start flag 203fb is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be maintained in the event of a power outage or the like by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like.

The small win in progress flag 203fc is a flag that indicates that a small win is in progress. It is set to ON when the variation of the special symbol that is determined to be a small win is stopped (S10404 in FIG. 320). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end time of the small win (when it is determined that the play of the set number of rounds of the small win has ended), it is set to OFF (S11720 in FIG. 327). This small win in progress flag 203fc is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be maintained in the event of a power outage or the like by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like.

The V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is a storage area in which data is stored for determining the jackpot type that is set when a ball that has entered the V winning device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 during a small win game. When the variation of the special pattern that is determined to be a small win stops, the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd stores a data value corresponding to the jackpot type that corresponds to the determined small win type (S10402 in FIG. 320). When a ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag 203fe corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is set to ON. At the end of the small win game, the data value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is cleared. This V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is a flag that is set to off in the initial state, such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be retained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage, etc., if a power outage occurs.

When a ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during a small win game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag 203fe is set to ON, which corresponds to the type of big win corresponding to the type of small win game being played. At the end of the small win game, it is determined whether this V flag 203fe is ON (S11716 in FIG. 327), and if it is determined that the V flag 203fe is ON (S11716 in FIG. 327: Yes), the type of big win to be played is determined from the flag that is set to ON, and the start of the corresponding big win game is set (S11718 in FIG. 327). This V flag 203fe is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is configured to be maintained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage, etc., in the event of a power outage, etc.

The V passing flag 203ff is a flag used to determine whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON during a small win game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203fe is set to ON. In the seventh control example, most of the balls that enter the V winning device 650 during a small win game are configured to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2, and the V passing flag 203ff is set to ON in the V passing process (see FIG. 323) corresponding to the ball that first enters the special discharge flow path 650e2 (S11207 in FIG. 323).

Then, in the V passing process (see FIG. 323), it is determined whether the V passing flag 203ff is set to on (S11201 in FIG. 323), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S11201 in FIG. 323: Yes), the process of S11202 to S11208 of the V passing process (see FIG. 323) is skipped. As a result, even if the V switch 650e3 detects multiple balls during one small win game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. This simplifies the process executed during the small win game, and prevents the V passing command from being sent multiple times to the voice lamp control device 113, which causes V passing management on the voice lamp control device 113 side to become complicated.

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for measuring the number of times the special pattern changes until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met, and when it is determined in the jackpot control process (S11504 in FIG. 326) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the jackpot) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes), the value (100) specified in the time-saving granting 7 table 202fe is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

Then, the counter value is referred to in the update process 7 (S8253 in FIG. 319) executed in the special pattern change process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) (S10601 in FIG. 319), and if it is determined that the counter value is greater than 0 (S10601 in FIG. 319: Yes), the counter value is decremented by 1. If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203k after the decrement is 0 (S10604 in FIG. 319: Yes), the time-saving end condition is met, and the normal state is set as the game state (S10605 in FIG. 319). In addition, in the seventh control example, multiple time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is met (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of small wins is met), the counter value is set (reset) to 0 (S10505 in FIG. 321). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (first time-saving end condition) that references the value of the time-saving counter 203h is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of decrementing the value of the time-saving counter 203h continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

The small win A counter 203fg is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win with small win A set as the small win type is won until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met. When it is determined in the big win control process 7 (S11504 in FIG. 326) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the big win) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes), the value (1) specified in the time-saving granting 7 table 202fe is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

And, when the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405 in FIG. 321) executed in the small win start setting process (S10223 in FIG. 320) of the special symbol change process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) determines that the small win type of the small win won this time is small win A (S10502 in FIG. 321: Yes), the counter value is decremented by 1. When the value of the small win A counter 203fg after decrement is determined to be 0 (S10504 in FIG. 321: Yes), the time-saving end condition is established, and the normal state is set as the game state (S10507 in FIG. 321). In addition, in the seventh control example, multiple time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is established (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of special symbol changes is established), the counter value is set to 0 (reset) (S10606 in FIG. 319). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) that references the value of the small win A counter 203m is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the small win A counter 203m is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of decrementing the value of the small win A counter 203m continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

The small win B counter 203fh is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win with small win B set as the small win type is won until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met. When it is determined in the big win control process (S11504 in FIG. 326) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the big win) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes), the value (3) specified in the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

And, when it is determined that the type of the small win that was won this time is small win B in the small win time-saving update process (S10405 in FIG. 321) executed in the small win start setting process (S10223 in FIG. 320) of the special pattern change process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) (S10510 in FIG. 321: Yes), the counter value is decremented by 1. When it is determined that the value of the small win B counter 203fh after decrement is 0 (S10512 in FIG. 321: Yes), the time-saving end condition is established, and the normal state is set as the game state (S10507 in FIG. 321). In addition, in the seventh control example, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is established (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of special pattern changes is established), the counter value is set to 0 (reset) (S10606 in FIG. 319). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (third time-saving end condition) that references the value of the small win B counter 203fh is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the small win B counter 203fh is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of decrementing the value of the small win B counter 203fh continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

Next, referring to FIG. 311(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this seventh control example will be described. FIG. 311(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 311(a), the ROM 222 of this seventh control example differs from the ROM 222 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(a)) in that the pullback mode selection table 222da and the suggestion mode selection table 222db have been deleted and a lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa has been added. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

The lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is a data table referenced when determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed in response to the variation time of the special pattern variation, and one mode is selected from multiple modes as a mode for suggesting (informing) the result of the special pattern lottery (the judgment result of the jackpot judgment and the judgment result of the time-saving win judgment). This lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is referenced in the special pattern 1 presentation mode setting process 7 (see S14893 in FIG. 328) for setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation (special pattern 1 variable presentation) for showing the result of the first special pattern lottery (see S19502 in FIG. 328).

Now, referring to FIG. 312, the contents defined in the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa will be explained. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents defined in the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 312, the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa defines different lottery result notification modes corresponding to the game state at the time of the jackpot determination, the jackpot determination result, and the acquired value of the presentation counter 223f, and the presentation mode for showing the result of the special pattern lottery is set using the selected notification mode.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of the jackpot determination is the normal state, that is, when the time-saving win determination in the special symbol lottery does not result in a win in the time-saving win determination, and the jackpot determination result is "jackpot A (15R jackpot)", "time-saving win suggestion + jackpot win notification" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 64", "time-saving non-win suggestion + jackpot non-win notification" is specified for the range of "65 to 79", and "jackpot win notification" is specified for the range of "80 to 99". Also, when the jackpot determination result is "jackpot B, C (5R jackpot)", "time-saving win suggestion + jackpot win notification" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 4", and "jackpot win notification" is specified for the range of "5 to 99". If the jackpot determination result is a "miss," a "jackpot non-winning notification" is specified for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "0 to 98," and a "time-saving non-winning suggestion + jackpot non-winning notification" is specified for a value of "99."

On the other hand, when the game state at the time of the jackpot determination is the time-saving state, that is, when the time-saving win is won in the time-saving win determination in the special pattern lottery, and the jackpot determination result is "jackpot A, D (15R jackpot)", "time-saving win suggestion + jackpot win notification" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 89", and "jackpot win notification" is specified for the range of "90 to 99". Also, when the jackpot determination result is "jackpot B, C (5R jackpot)", "time-saving win suggestion + jackpot win notification" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 79", and "jackpot win notification" is specified for the range of "80 to 99". When the jackpot determination result is "miss", "time-saving win suggestion + jackpot non-win notification" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 9", and "jackpot non-win notification" is specified for the value of "10 to 99".

Next, referring to FIG. 311(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 311(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a performance counter 223e, a game status storage area 223f, a time-saving information update area 223g, a provisional win determination flag 223h, a provisional time-saving information update area 223i, a provisional time-saving end flag 223j, a time-saving lower limit flag 223k, a quasi-end condition flag 223m, a fluctuation flag before the end of the time-saving 223n, a status performance counter 223o, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of the reserved balls before the fluctuation begins. When the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the winning information based on the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 is stored in this winning information storage area 223a in order from the first area. Note that the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 is set when the pre-read process 5 (S653 in FIG. 259) of the main control device 110 is executed, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S11501 in FIG. 325) executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) of the main control device 110.

Each piece of winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted one by one (the winning information stored in the second area is moved to the first area) (see S4904, S4908 in FIG. 182) each time the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to reliably know when the special pattern variation corresponding to the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 will be executed.

In addition, since the winning information (special symbol pre-reading information) sent by the winning information command can be shifted to the execution area (the area corresponding to the special symbol change currently being executed), for example, when executing an effect (so-called pre-reading continuous effect) that uses the period from the start of the next special symbol change to the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information command based on the reception of the winning information command, the winning information corresponding to the winning information command can be held until the above-mentioned pre-reading continuous effect ends.

In the seventh control example, the winning information storage area 223a is configured to have the first to fourth areas in addition to the execution area, since it is configured to be able to hold and store up to four pieces of winning information (information that can be obtained when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64). However, if, for example, it is also configured to be able to hold and store up to four pieces of winning information (winning information related to the second special pattern) that can be obtained when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the winning information storage area 223a can be configured to have four areas (holding information areas) for the first special pattern and four areas (holding information areas) for the second special pattern in addition to the execution area.

The first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b, like the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable performance (variable display) performed by the first pattern display device 37 (and the third pattern display device 81) that is reserved in the main control unit 110. In other words, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special pattern is set based on the reserved ball count command output from the main control unit 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern with the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is increased by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the variable display of a special pattern is executed in the main control unit 110 and the number of reserved balls is decreased, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d after the increase or decrease is sent to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command and stores it in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b (see S4182 in FIG. 262). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that it can update the value in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110.

The value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball count pattern on the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b, and transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of an image so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, i.e., the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

The information contained in the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device may be information indicating the actual number of reserved balls, i.e., the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203a, or information indicating that the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1. When sending information indicating that the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1 as the reserved ball count command, a calculation means may be provided that calculates and manages the current number of reserved balls based on the information contained in the reserved ball count command received by the voice lamp control device 113.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S4204 in FIG. 262), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set (see S4902, S4906 in FIG. 182). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the external output process (S11501 in FIG. 325) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 221. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern variation display device 81 displays the third pattern variation in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command sent from the main control unit 110 is received (see S4207 in FIG. 262), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S4910 in FIG. 182). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type for display is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) (S4911 in FIG. 182).

The performance counter 223e is a counter used in a lottery to determine the performance contents of various performances executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and although not shown in the figure, it is updated each time main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. In the seventh control example, the performance counter 223e has multiple loop counters (for example, counters that are repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99), and is configured to update the values of each counter without synchronization.

Specifically, for example, multiple counters are provided with different values that are updated each time main process 7 (see FIG. 325) is executed, and the updated values of each counter are not synchronized. Furthermore, a different value may be calculated by calculating the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as a value to be used in a lottery to determine the content of various effects.

The game status storage area 223f is an area for storing the game status corresponding to a status command when the status command regarding the game status is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game status) stored in this game status storage area 223f, the current game status can be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In the seventh control example, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 erases data when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and therefore, when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the information indicating the current game state stored in the game state storage area 223f is also erased. However, in the seventh control example, a state command is set in the start-up process (main control device) 7 (see FIG. 324) of the main control device 110 executed after the power supply is turned on (S11412 in FIG. 324), so that information indicating the game state set before the power supply is cut off is stored in the game state storage area 223f immediately after the power supply is restored. Therefore, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the game state can always be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Also, when the game state is variably set in the main control device 110, a state command indicating the game state after the variably set is set (S10509 in FIG. 321, S10607 in FIG. 319, S11616 in FIG. 326, etc.).

The time-saving information update area 223g is a data area for storing the end conditions of the time-saving state and the progress status for each end condition (the number of times the events subject to the end conditions (for example, the change of the special pattern, the winning of a small win, or the winning of a big win) have been executed). The state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is selected based on the information stored in this time-saving information update area 223a (the end conditions of the time-saving state and the progress status). This time-saving information update area 223g sets the end conditions for terminating the current time-saving state when it receives a time-saving related command including time-saving setting information from the main control device 110, that is, a time-saving setting information command that is determined to be the end timing of the ending performance (S11612 in FIG. 326) in the big win control process 7 (S11504 in FIG. 326) of the main control device 110 and is set when the end conditions of the time-saving state are set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

Then, in the time-saving update process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2216 in FIG. 60), if it is determined that update information for updating the time-saving information (variation information indicating that a special pattern variation has been performed, or small win information indicating that a small win has been won) has been received (S2604 in FIG. 60: Yes, S2615 in FIG. 60: Yes), the current time-saving status is updated to correspond to the received update information.

To explain the data area in the time-saving information update area 223g in detail, the time-saving information update area 223g is configured to temporarily store information corresponding to each item that can be a condition for ending the time-saving state (for example, the number of times the first special pattern changes, the number of times the second special pattern changes, the total number of changes obtained by adding up the number of times the first special pattern changes and the number of times the second special pattern changes, the number of wins for each small win type (small win A, B) (the number of times the V winning device 600 starts operating), the number of small wins (the total number of wins obtained by adding up the number of wins for each small win type), etc.), and is configured to store, for each item, time-saving setting information (the number of times the condition for ending the time-saving state is met) and update information for each item during the period in which the time-saving state is continuously set (information indicating the number of times it was actually executed).

In the seventh control example, the information stored in this time-saving information update area 223g is used to determine which of a plurality of termination conditions is more likely to be met than the other termination conditions, and to determine the number of remaining executions until each termination condition is met. Furthermore, the time-saving setting information and update information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g may be used to calculate, for example, the ratio of the value indicated by the update information to the value indicating the termination condition of each item included in the time-saving setting information, and the degree of time-saving progress may be displayed as a numerical value (for example, a percentage).

In the seventh control example, the information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g is configured to store update information (information indicating the number of times already performed (number of variations, number of wins)), but without being limited to this, it is also possible to calculate the number of times remaining until the end condition of the time-saving state is met, and store information indicating the calculated remaining number of times in the time-saving information update area 223g.

As described above, in the seventh control example, the time-saving setting information and the update information are stored separately, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the information stored as the time-saving setting information may be directly updated. By configuring in this way, the capacity of the time-saving information update area 223g can be reduced.

The provisional win determination flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the winning information (winning information stored in reserve) before the lottery (variation) of the special pattern is executed includes winning information for winning the jackpot, and by being set to on, it indicates that the winning information stored in reserve includes winning information for winning the jackpot. This provisional win determination flag 223h is set to on when it is determined that the winning information of the winning information command received from the main control unit 110 contains winning information in the winning information related process executed when the winning information command acquired in the pre-reading process 5 of the main control unit 110 is received by the voice lamp control unit 113. Then, it is configured to be referenced in the winning information related process, and if it is determined that it is set to on, various determination processes for the winning information command received thereafter are skipped. It is also referenced in the performance setting process executed in the variable display setting process, and if it is determined that it is set to on, it is configured to skip the process for setting the display status display command indicating the status display mode.

As explained above, if the winning information contained in the received winning information command or the winning information reserved and stored at the end of the jackpot includes winning information for a jackpot, the system is configured not to determine whether the winning information included in the winning information command newly received thereafter includes winning information for a jackpot, or to determine whether the currently set game state end condition is met. In other words, if it is determined that the time-saving state will end due to a jackpot win, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time-saving state will end based on winning information acquired thereafter, so the system is configured to skip this unnecessary process. This reduces the processing load of the process executed by the voice lamp control device 113.

In the seventh control example, the system is configured to execute a process to determine the contents of the winning information when a new winning information command is received and when the big win game ends. However, at other times, for example, after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power outage or the like, the start-up process (main control device) 7 (see FIG. 324) of the main control device 110 may be configured to set a return time winning information command to indicate each piece of winning information stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, and send all of them to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the return time winning information command, it may execute a process to determine the contents of the winning information described above.

In the seventh control example, when a new winning information command is received or when the jackpot game ends, the process of determining the contents of the winning information is always executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the contents of the winning information may not be determined when a predetermined prohibition condition is met. In this case, the predetermined prohibition condition may be, for example, a performance mode prohibition condition that is met when the pachinko machine 10 has multiple performance modes and one of the performance modes is set, a stuck-in prohibition condition that is met when a non-jackpot (miss) is consecutively obtained a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) as a result of the special pattern lottery, a continuous performance prohibition condition that is met while a continuous performance that is executed across multiple special pattern variations is being executed based on the jackpot lottery result (win/lose judgment result) included in the winning information, or a multiple-occurrence prohibition condition that is met during a predetermined period after the continuous performance ends (for example, the period until the special pattern variation is executed twice).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set periods during which an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) according to the contents determined in advance based on the winning information can be executed and periods during which it cannot be executed, so that the player can maintain their sense of anticipation of a big win even if the look-ahead effect is not executed. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that the frequency with which the contents of the winning information are determined is reduced when the above-mentioned prohibition conditions are met, and to configure the system so that the frequency with which the contents of the winning information are determined is increased rather than necessarily determining the contents of the winning information when the prohibition conditions are not met. Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the system so that the player cannot know whether the above-mentioned prohibition conditions are met or not.

The provisional time-saving information update area 223i is a data area for temporarily storing time-saving information (provisional time-saving information) that has been updated in advance in accordance with the winning information included in the winning information command. In the seventh control example, the provisional time-saving information stored in the provisional time-saving information update area 223i is referenced to make it possible to determine in advance the timing at which the time-saving state will end.

As explained above, when the time-saving end condition is met based on the winning information contained in the received winning information command, the system is configured not to determine whether the winning information contained in the winning information command newly received thereafter contains winning information for winning a jackpot, or to determine whether the currently set game state end condition is met. In other words, when it is determined that the time-saving state will end due to winning a jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time-saving state will end based on the winning information acquired thereafter, so the system is configured to skip this unnecessary process. This reduces the processing load of the process executed by the voice lamp control device 113.

The time-saving lower limit flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the number of times the special pattern changes has reached a predetermined number, for an end condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern changes, and by being set to on, indicates that the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state has reached a predetermined number.

In this way, by providing a flag that is set to ON depending on the progress until the time-saving end condition is met, and configuring the presentation style to vary depending on the setting status of the flag, it becomes possible for the player to predict the timing when the time-saving end condition will be met. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect of the presentation that suggests the timing when the time-saving state will end.

In the seventh control example, the progress until the time-saving end condition is met is determined in two stages, but more stages may be provided. In this case, for example, a flag (counter) that can identify the state every time the special pattern is changed 10 times while the time-saving state is set is provided, and the presentation mode can be changed according to the flag (counter).

The semi-end condition flag 223m is a flag that indicates that the number of times the special pattern has changed has reached a predetermined number, for the end condition that is established based on winning a small prize by drawing a special pattern, and by being set to on, indicates that the number of times the special pattern has changed during the time-saving state has reached a predetermined number.

The fluctuation flag 223n before the time-saving end is a flag for indicating that a fluctuation before the time-saving state ends (the time-saving end condition is satisfied) will be executed, and by being set to on, it indicates that the fluctuation immediately before the time-saving state ends will be executed. Specifically, it is set to on when there is only one period (number of fluctuations) remaining until the time-saving end condition, which is set based on the number of times the special pattern fluctuates, is satisfied among the multiple time-saving state end conditions that are set. By executing the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 182) while this fluctuation flag 223n before the time-saving end is set to on, it becomes possible to determine that the fluctuation is the final fluctuation of the time-saving state, and a performance corresponding to the final fluctuation of the time-saving state can be executed.

In the seventh control example, the time-saving end before change flag 223n is set to determine whether the change before the time-saving end is completed (executed). In addition, for example, a configuration is provided that can reserve and store the winning information of the second special pattern, and a pre-reading process 5 (see FIG. 259) is executed for the reserved and stored winning information, a winning command indicating the result of the pre-reading process is received, and the winning information of the second special pattern that wins the small prize is determined in advance based on the winning command received. Then, based on the result of the pre-determination, a configuration may be added in which the time-saving end before change flag 223n is turned on when a change before the special pattern change that wins the small prize that establishes the end condition of the time-saving state is executed. This makes it possible to reliably determine the special pattern change that is one before the time-saving end condition is established in a gaming machine that has multiple time-saving end conditions.

The status effect counter 223o is a counter used for various lotteries that are used when setting the effect modes of various effects executed by the voice lamp control device 113, and although not shown in the figure, it is updated by one each time the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The status effect counter 223o is composed of the same loop counter as the effect counter 223e described above. Note that detailed configuration is omitted as it is the same as the effect counter 223e described above.

In this way, when a specific display mode is selected according to a specific regularity (win/lose determination result, setting status of various flags), the display mode selected based on a randomly updated value (value of state presentation counter 223o) can be further divided into more detailed categories, thereby diversifying the display modes and preventing the player from easily understanding the current game state (update status of the time-saving state) based on the selected display mode (display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, referring to FIG. 313, the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 313 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 313, in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, as described above, in the normal state (normal state), a left-handed play is performed and a special 1 (special pattern 1) game is performed, aiming at the first ball entrance 64. Here, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the first special pattern lottery is executed, a judgment is first made as to whether or not the time-saving win has been made. Then, if it is judged that the time-saving win has not been made in the judgment of the time-saving win, a jackpot judgment is made for the first special pattern lottery while the game state remains in the normal state. Then, when a jackpot of the first special pattern is won in the normal state, a different game state is entered after the jackpot ends depending on the type of jackpot that has been won.

Specifically, if the type of jackpot won is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state will be set again after the jackpot ends, and if the type of jackpot won is jackpot A or jackpot B, the game will transition to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640 to execute the lottery for the second special symbol, and if a jackpot is won, the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. As described above with reference to FIG. 295, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured so that a ball does not (is difficult to) enter the second ball entrance 640 even if a right-hand hit game is performed during the normal state (normal game), so the act of executing the lottery for the second special symbol in the normal state is considered as a fraudulent act, and this is a measure to prevent a player who has committed a fraudulent act from playing an advantageous game. As will be described later, in the seventh control example, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to allow a player to play a lottery (game) that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol during the time-saving state, so there was a risk of a player committing a fraudulent act and drawing the second special symbol. Therefore, by taking the measures described above, it is possible to prevent fraudulent attempts to draw the second special symbol.

Furthermore, the seventh control example does not have a configuration for retaining and storing winning information for the second special symbol (winning information obtained when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640), so, for example, during the time-saving state (when the electric device 640a is likely to be operated to the protruding position), the winning information for the second special symbol is not retained and stored, and a lottery (variation) for the second special symbol is not executed during the normal state based on the retained winning information. This makes it possible to reliably prevent a lottery (variation) for the second special symbol from being executed when the normal state is set as the game state during normal play.

On the other hand, if the time-saving feature is selected in the first special symbol lottery that is executed while the normal state is set (if the time-saving feature is selected as the result of the time-saving feature selection judgment), the jackpot determination is executed in the time-saving feature. If the jackpot is selected in the jackpot determination executed in this state, the time-saving feature is set at 100% after the jackpot play ends. Also, if the time-saving feature is selected as the result of the time-saving feature selection executed in the first special symbol lottery, the time-saving feature ends when the first special symbol variation that indicates the result of the first special symbol lottery begins, and the normal state is set, so play in the normal state (left-handed play) continues.

When the time-saving state is set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set so that it continues for the period during which the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 by the opening (protruding) action of the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, so that a right-hand hit game is played and a special 2 game is executed, aiming for the second ball entrance 640.

Here, if the second special symbol is selected to win a small prize (140/1000 chance of winning), the V winning device 650 is opened for the small prize game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (the ball passes through a specific area), starting the big prize game. In the seventh control example, if a big prize game is set (executed) via a small prize game, the game state is always set to a time-saving state after the big prize game ends. This configuration makes it possible to eliminate discomfort for players who win a big prize via a small prize game.

In the seventh control example, the small prize type (small prize A, B) that is set when a small prize is won by drawing the second special pattern is set so that a small prize game is executed in which the probability that the ball will pass through a specific area during the small prize game (the probability that the V switch 650e3 will detect the ball) differs.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the end conditions (time-saving end conditions) for terminating the time-saving state set based on winning the big prize are set as follows: a fluctuation count end condition (first time-saving end condition) that is met when the number of fluctuations (number of draws) of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) reaches a specified number of fluctuations (100 times), and an operation count end condition (second time-saving end condition) that is met when the number of wins of the small prize (the number of operations of the V winning device 650 operated based on winning the small prize) as a result of the drawing of the special pattern (second special pattern) reaches a specified number of operations.

The second time-saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the type of small win (the small win game to be executed) that is set when a small win is won.

In addition, in a state (situation) in which the time-saving state is set, if a player wins a jackpot lottery for a special symbol (wins a single type) or wins a small jackpot in a special symbol lottery and, during a small jackpot game (small jackpot game according to the type of small jackpot) corresponding to the small jackpot won, the ball passes through a specific area and a jackpot is won (wins a double type) before the first time-saving end condition or the second time-saving end condition described above is met, the time-saving state will be set repeatedly.

On the other hand, in a state (situation) in which the time-saving state is set, if either the first time-saving end condition (end condition according to the number of times the special pattern changes) or the second time-saving end condition (end condition according to winning a small prize (operation of the V winning device 650)) described above is met before winning one type or two types of prizes, the game state will transition (set) from the time-saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example configured in this way can provide the player with both the possibility of ending the time-saving state (possibility of the second time-saving end condition being met) and the possibility of winning a double prize, if a small prize is won in the lottery for the second special symbol that is executed when the time-saving state is set. This can increase the player's interest in the game that is executed during the time-saving state (the lottery for the second special symbol), and improve the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 313, when the time-saving state is set and a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving a result that is disadvantageous to the player in the "first special symbol fluctuation (lottery) during the time-saving state" that can be executed when the normal state is set as the game state, that is, when left-handed play is being performed and the number of reserved balls (reserved memory number) for the first special symbol is the upper limit (4), a jackpot is won, and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, even if the jackpot is won.

<Regarding control processing executed by main control device 110 in the seventh control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Fig. 314 to Fig. 327. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process 7 that is executed after the start-up process, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in the seventh control example), and an NMI interrupt process that is started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be explained first, and then the start-up process (main control device) 7 and the main process 7 will be explained. Note that, among the control processes executed by the main control device 110 in this seventh control example, the same process contents as those of the fifth control process described above will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Figure 314 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S10101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S10102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in the seventh control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the seventh control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the values (not shown) of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second win random number counter C4, the small win type counter C5, and the time-saving type selection counter CC1 are updated (S10103). Specifically, the values (not shown) of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second win random number counter C4, the small win type counter C5, and the time-saving type selection counter CC1 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, 99, 239, and 99, respectively, in the seventh control example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 and CC1 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, the special pattern change process 7 is executed (S10104), which is a process for displaying on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b and also sets the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81. After that, the start winning process associated with a win (start winning) in the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S10105). Details of the special pattern change process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 315.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal pattern change process, which is a process for displaying on the second pattern display device 83, is executed (S10106), and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start opening (through gate) 67 is executed (S10107). The details of the start winning process (S10105), the normal pattern change process (S10106), and the through gate passing process (S10107) are the same as the start winning process, the normal pattern change process, and the through gate passing process in the fifth control example described above, so detailed explanations are omitted. After the through gate passing process (S10107), the V entrance passing process associated with the ball entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S10108). Then, the V passing process associated with the entry into the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is executed (S10109). Details of the V inlet passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to Figures 322 and 323.

Then, the launch control process is executed (S10110), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S10111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch has not been operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 315, the special pattern change process 7 (S10104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change process 7 (S10104). This special pattern change process 7 (S10104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is a process for controlling the change display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, and the change display of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process 7 (S10104), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S10201). The special symbol jackpot period includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and includes the period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), the period during which the jackpot game is in progress (round game period), and the grace period (ending period) until the round game period ends and the next lottery (variation) of a new special symbol begins.

To determine whether or not a jackpot is currently being won, specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON. If it is determined that a jackpot with a special symbol is currently being won (the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON) (S10201: Yes), this process ends.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot, i.e., if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not set to on (set to off) (S10201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S10202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is not changing (S10202: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e are obtained (S10203).

Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (S10204). If the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S10204: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the second special pattern that starts the fluctuation (lottery) is secured, the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted (S10205), and a reserved ball number command (special pattern 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S10206). After the special pattern 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S10207). After that, the time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208), the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209), and the special symbol change pattern selection process 7 (S10210) are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S10204: No), then since there are currently no reserved balls of the second special pattern that would initiate the fluctuation (lottery), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10211).

If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is 0 (S10211: No), this process for executing the special pattern variation is terminated since there are currently no reserved balls of the first special pattern that would initiate the variation (lottery).

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S10211: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the first special symbol that starts the variation (lottery) is secured, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted (S10212), and a reserved ball number command (special symbol 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10213). After the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10213, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10214). After that, the processes of the time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208), the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209), and the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S10202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is changing (S10202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b has elapsed (S10211). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S10215: No), that is, if the current time is during the change period of the special pattern, the display of the first pattern display device is updated (S10216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10215, if the change time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S10215: Yes), a display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b is set (S10217). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (S10252) described later with reference to FIG. 318. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the seventh control example, the stop display set in the process of S10217 is configured to be displayed on the first pattern display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). By continuously displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stopped pattern for a predetermined period in this way, unlike when the changing pattern is displayed for an instant, the player can be sure to recognize the content of the first pattern that is stopped and displayed.

In the seventh control example, the predetermined period (fixed period) during which the stopped state of the first pattern is displayed is set to 0.5 seconds, but other configurations may be used. For example, if a flashing display is performed in which the lit state and the off state are repeated to indicate that the first pattern is changing, then the fixed period can be set to a period longer than the period of one lit display when the flashing display is performed (for example, 0.2 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether the first pattern is changing or stopped (fixed).

After the process of S10217 is completed, when the variable display of the special symbol being executed in the first symbol display device 37a, 37b starts, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol (the current determination result) performed by the special symbol determination process 7 (see S10209 in FIG. 317) is a jackpot for the special symbol (S10218). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot for the special symbol (S10218: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j and the jackpot in progress flag 203k are set to ON (S10219), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S10220), and the process proceeds to S10221. In the process of S10221, a special symbol determination command is set (S10221), and the process ends.

In other words, in the seventh control example, as explained in the process of S10220, when a special symbol is won as a jackpot, the time-saving state is configured to end at a timing between the end of the variation of the special symbol (the end of the final display of the first symbol) and the start of the jackpot game. The timing for ending the time-saving state based on the winning of a special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and as in the seventh control example described above, the time-saving state may end at the start of the variation of the special symbol that won the jackpot, or at the timing when the special symbol is displayed stationary (the timing when the final display starts). In addition, the time-saving state may end at the start of the jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot, or a predetermined period after the start of the jackpot game (for example, the start of the round game when the variable winning device 65 is opened), or at the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, the timing for ending the time-saving state based on winning a jackpot with a special symbol (the timing for establishing the time-saving end condition that is established when a jackpot with a special symbol is won) may be configured to be preset to only one of the multiple timings mentioned above, or the time-saving state may be configured to end at a different timing depending on the type of jackpot won.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the time-saving state is ended when the special symbol starts to change, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the time-saving state has ended (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes has reached a specified number (100 times)) and the normal state has been set, or whether the time-saving state has ended because a jackpot was won during the time-saving state. This allows the player to focus on the content of the presentation display (changing display) of the third symbol that corresponds to the special symbol change that is executed when the time-saving state ends, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, by setting different times for the time-saving end conditions to be met for each of the multiple jackpot types (time to end the time-saving state when a jackpot is won), it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol based on the time-saving state end timing. Note that, as part of the times for the time-saving end conditions to be met that are set for each of the multiple jackpot types, a time-saving end timing dedicated to the jackpot may be set that notifies the player that the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol this time is a jackpot when the player identifies the time when the time-saving state has ended, in other words, the time-saving state ends only when the time-saving end condition that is met due to winning a jackpot is met.

By configuring it in this way, you can know when the time-saving state ends and quickly find out that you've won the jackpot, lengthening the period during which you can feel superior. To further enhance this effect, it's a good idea to configure the end of the time-saving state for the jackpot described above to be set in the first half of the fluctuation period from when the special pattern fluctuation is executed to when the special pattern fluctuation ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10218 that the current lottery result is not a big win (S10218: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S10222). If it is determined in the process of S10222 that the current lottery result is a small win (S10222: Yes), the small win start setting process 7 is executed (S10223) and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10222 that the current lottery result is not a small win (S10222: No), the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is skipped and this process ends.

As explained above, the special symbol change process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) of the seventh control example is configured to determine whether the selection (change) conditions for the second special symbol are met (processing of S10204 in FIG. 315) in priority over whether the selection (change) conditions for the first special symbol are met. This is because the second special symbol, which is a special symbol advantageous to the player, is changeable (easy to change) when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and is non-changeable (hard to change) when the normal state is set, making it a special symbol that is more difficult to change (draw) than the first special symbol.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, if the conditions for selecting (changing) the first special pattern and the conditions for selecting (changing) the second special pattern are met simultaneously (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) of the main control unit 110), the first special pattern will begin to change in preference to the second special pattern, which is more difficult to change (select), causing discomfort to the player. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, the lottery (variation) for the second special symbol is configured to make it easier for the player to win a lottery result that is favorable to the player (to make it easier to win a small prize) than the lottery (variation) for the first special symbol. Therefore, if the lottery (variation) conditions for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) conditions for the second special symbol are met simultaneously (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) of the main control device 110), the first special symbol will start to change in preference to the second special symbol, which is less likely to change (draw), causing a problem of greater discomfort.

In contrast, in the seventh control example, when executing the process to start the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the selection (variation) conditions of the special symbol (the second special symbol in the seventh control example) that has a higher added value for the player (the probability of winning a small prize is higher than that of the first special symbol, and it is difficult to actually execute the selection (variation)) are determined with priority (first), so the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem can be prevented.

Next, the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208) will be described with reference to FIG. 316. FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208). As shown in FIG. 316, time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208) differs from time-saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) in the fifth control example described above in that the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery and the data table referenced when determining the lottery result of the time-saving lottery (whether or not a time-saving lottery has been won) are different, but otherwise it is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is normal (S18103), and if it is determined that it is not normal (time-saving state) (S18103: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is normal (S18103: Yes), the lottery result (time-saving winning judgment result) is obtained based on the time-saving random number 7 table 202fh (S18104), and it is determined whether the time-saving win has been won (S18105). If it is determined that the time-saving win has been won (S18105: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 1 based on the contents specified in the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi (S18106), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined that the time-saving win has not been won in the process of S18105 (S18105: No), this process is terminated.

As explained above, in this seventh control example, the condition for executing the time-saving winning judgment is that the special pattern lottery is executed in the normal state, regardless of the type of special pattern. The pachinko machine 10 in this seventh control example is configured to be able to set two game states: the normal state and the time-saving state. In other words, in the seventh control example, the system is configured so that the time-saving winning judgment is executed in all special pattern lotteries that are executed when the time-saving state is not set. This allows the player to play while always having the possibility of the time-saving state being set.

As mentioned above, in this seventh control example, if a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state that is set based on the time-saving win is set only during the period in which the jackpot determination is performed in the special pattern lottery. This makes it difficult for the player to know whether or not they have won the time-saving win unless they win the jackpot.

Next, the processing contents of special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) will be explained with reference to FIG. 317. FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special symbol determination process 7 (S10209). Special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) is a process executed after time-saving lottery process 7 (see S10208 in FIG. 316) is executed in the above-mentioned special symbol change process 7 (see S10104 in FIG. 315), and a process for determining a big win (small win) in the special symbol lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 317, this special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) differs from special symbol determination process 5 (see S251 in FIG. 253) in the fifth control example described above in that it adds a process that is executed when a small win is determined, but is otherwise identical. Detailed explanations of the same content will be omitted. Note that in FIG. 317, for ease of explanation, different symbols are used for the same processing content as the special symbol determination process 5 described above (see S251 in FIG. 253), but the processing content is the same for processes with the same description.

When the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) is executed, first, data on the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is obtained (S10301), the lottery result (jackpot (small jackpot) determination result) is obtained based on the first winning random number 7 table 202fh (S10302), and it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a jackpot win (S10303). If it is determined that it is a jackpot win (S10303: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a jackpot win (S10304), and the jackpot pattern of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (S10305), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10303 that the big prize has not been won (S10303: No), then it is determined whether a small prize has been won (S10306). If it is determined that a small prize has been won (S10306: Yes), the result of the special pattern lottery is set to a small prize (S10307), and the small prize pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired prize type counter (first prize type counter C2) (S10308), and this process ends.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the process of S10305 and the process of S10308 are configured to set different winning patterns depending on whether or not the time-saving feature has been won in the special pattern lottery. In other words, the first pattern display device 37 is configured to be able to set a display mode that combines the presence or absence of a time-saving feature win and a winning feature (a big win or a small win) as the display mode of the special pattern to show the lottery result of the special pattern lottery.

Next, referring to FIG. 318, the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (S10210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (S10210). As shown in FIG. 318, the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (S10210) is configured to execute the update process 7 (S8253) before setting the start of the special pattern change. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to end the time-saving state before the special pattern change starts.

Furthermore, in this seventh control example, update process 7 (S8253) is configured to be executed between the selection of the special pattern variation pattern to show the result of the special pattern lottery and the actual start of the special pattern variation. Therefore, since the special pattern variation pattern to show the result of the special pattern lottery can be selected in accordance with the game state at the time the special pattern lottery is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the current game state based on the executed special pattern variation pattern, even if the game state changes as a result of execution of update process 7 (S8253).

In addition, even if a special pattern change is executed after the time-saving state ends, if a special pattern lottery corresponding to that special pattern change is executed during the time-saving state, the change pattern of the special pattern change can be determined using a data table referenced during the time-saving state. Therefore, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 that has a bonus that can only be granted based on a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, a special effect to indicate that the bonus will be granted can be smoothly executed simply by defining a special effect corresponding to the change pattern of the special pattern change selected during the time-saving state.

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to execute update process 7 (S8253) before the process of S8252 in FIG. 318 is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to end the time-saving state before the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, so for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select different variation patterns for the normal state and the time-saving state, it is possible to prevent a determination as to whether or not a jackpot determination for a special symbol lottery has been executed during the time-saving state based on the selected variation pattern.

When the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210) is executed, it is first determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, i.e., whether a special symbol jackpot has been set (S8201). If it is determined in the process of S8201 that a special symbol jackpot has been set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb (see FIG. 306(a)) (S8251), and the process proceeds to S8203.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is not a big win (S8201: No), it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a small win, i.e., whether or not a small win for the special symbol is set (S8209). If it is determined in the process of S8209 that a small win for the special symbol is set (S8209: Yes), the type of small win is determined by referring to the small win type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) (S8254), and the process proceeds to S8203.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S8209 that a small win of the special symbol is not set, that is, a miss of the special symbol is set (S8209), the process of S8254 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8203.

In the process of S8203, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special pattern execution area is obtained (S8203). Next, the current game state (normal state, time-saving state) is identified based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, and the data table corresponding to the identified game state is read from the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (S8252).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S8203 and the data table contained in the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 308(a)) read in the process of S8252 (S8205), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205 (S8206). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the special symbol stop pattern is set (S8207), and update process 7 is executed (S8253). A detailed explanation of update process 7 (S8253) will be described later with reference to FIG. 319. Then, the start of the special symbol fluctuation is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S8208), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of the stopping pattern indicating the result of this special symbol fluctuation, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

Next, referring to FIG. 319, the processing contents of update process 7 (S8253) executed in special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (see S10210 in FIG. 318) will be explained. FIG. 319 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of update process 7 (S8253). In this update process 7 (S8253), similar to update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 256) in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a process for updating information relating to the termination condition for terminating the gaming state (time-saving state), a process for determining whether the updated information satisfies the termination condition, and a process for terminating the gaming state (time-saving state) when it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied are executed.

As shown in FIG. 319, in this seventh control example, the game state can be set to either a normal state or a time-saving state, so in update process 7 (S8253), information relating to the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is updated, and processing based on the updated information is executed. In other words, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented, a determination is made as to whether the time-saving end condition has been met, and a process is executed to end the time-saving state based on the determination result (a process to clear the values of various counters referenced when determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met).

This update process 7 (S8253) is executed within the special pattern change process 7 (see FIG. 315) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is a process for updating the number of time-saving cycles and setting the game status to the normal status.

When update process 7 (S8253) is executed, first it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether the time-saving period is currently in progress (S10601). In the process of S10601, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0), i.e., the time-saving period is not in progress (S10601: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., the time-saving period is in progress (S10601: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S10602), and the process proceeds to S10603.

In the process of S10603, a remaining time-saving count command is set indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h changed by the calculation (subtracted by 1) (S10603). The remaining time-saving count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) described later.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S10605), and the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh are set to 0 (S10606). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S10607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S10604 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (S10604: No), this processing is terminated and the process returns to the special pattern change processing 7 (see FIG. 315).

As explained above, in the seventh control example, the existence of the time-saving end condition (change count end condition) based on the number of times the special pattern changes is determined by the update process 7 (see FIG. 319), and the existence of the time-saving end condition (win count end condition) based on the number of times the special pattern has been small won is determined by the small win time-saving update process 7 (see FIG. 321). In any of the processes, if any of the multiple time-saving end conditions set in the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters for indicating the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to the other time-saving end conditions are all set to a value (0) for indicating the state in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, regardless of which time-saving end condition is satisfied, the processing contents for terminating the time-saving state can be unified.

In the seventh control example, in order to indicate the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to each time-saving end condition, various counters are set to values indicating each time-saving end condition when the time-saving state is set, and when the time-saving information corresponding to each time-saving end condition is determined, the values of the various counters are subtracted, and when the subtracted value becomes 0, it is determined that the corresponding time-saving end condition is established. However, it is also possible to set the values of various counters to 0 when the time-saving state is set, and when the corresponding time-saving information is determined, the counter value is incremented by 1, and when it is determined that the counter value after the increment is a value indicating the time-saving end condition, the time-saving state is terminated. In other words, it is sufficient to provide a configuration that includes a means for determining whether the time-saving end condition is established and an update means for updating the time-saving information corresponding to each time-saving end condition (such as the number of times the special pattern changes or the number of times a small jackpot is won) when the time-saving state is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 320, the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing the small win start setting process 7 (S10223). This small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is a process executed within the special pattern change process 7 (see FIG. 315) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and sets the start of the small win game based on the small win type (small win A, B), and executes a process for updating the time-saving information according to the small win that has been won (update process for the win count end condition).

When the small win game starts, this pachinko machine 10 changes the V winning device 650 to an open state where a ball can (easily) win a prize, and when the ball that wins the V winning device 650 passes through a specific area (V winning switch (V switch) 650e3), the big win game is executed (set) after the small win game ends.

In other words, the game state in which the small win game is executed is configured to be an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and an advantageous state in which the possibility of executing a big win game is higher than in the normal game state. Note that, as will be described in detail later, in the seventh control example, a different small win game is executed according to the small win type (small win A, B) that is set when a small win is won, and the possibility of the ball passing through a specific area during a small win game differs depending on each small win type.

By configuring it in this way, the possibility (expectation) of a big win game (two types of win) being played (set) can be changed depending on the small win game that is played, so players can be interested not only in whether or not they will win a small win, but also in the type of small win they win, which can increase the excitement of the game.

When the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is executed, first, an opening scenario corresponding to the small win type is set (S10401). After that, a jackpot type corresponding to the small win type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd (S10402). More specifically, based on the small win type and the small win type selection table 202ff, the V-passing jackpot type (a jackpot game that is set (executed) when the ball passes through a specific area during a small win game) is determined. As described above, if the small win type is A, it is determined to be a jackpot A (a jackpot with 15 rounds of time reduction), and if the small win type is B, it is determined to be a jackpot B (a jackpot with 5 rounds of time reduction) (see FIG. 307). In other words, in the seventh control example, the content of the jackpot (two types) that is set (executed) when the ball passes through a specific area during a small jackpot game, and the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot (one type) is won by drawing a special pattern, are the same jackpot game, so that when a two types jackpot is won (when the ball passes through a specific area), the jackpot type (jackpot A or B) that is set for the one type jackpot is set according to the type of small jackpot that was executed.

In this way, when a 2-kind win is obtained, a jackpot type is set and a process is executed to start the jackpot game based on the set jackpot type. This makes it possible to standardize the process related to the jackpot game when a 1-kind win is obtained and when a 2-kind win is obtained, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control unit 110.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the seventh control example, it may be possible to set a jackpot game that can be executed only when a 1-type jackpot is won, or only when a 2-type jackpot is won, or it may be configured to execute different jackpot game processes for a 1-type jackpot and a 2-type jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 320, the explanation will be continued. After the process of S10402 is completed, the start of the small win is set based on the small win type (S10403), and the small win start flag 203fb and the small win in progress flag 203fc are set to ON (S10404). After that, the small win time-saving update process 7 is executed (S10405), and this process ends. This small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405) is for executing a process for updating the time-saving information corresponding to the winning count end condition, which is the end condition of the time-saving state that can be established when a small win is won, and a process for transitioning the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state when the winning count end condition is established by updating the time-saving information, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 321.

Now, referring to FIG. 321, we will explain the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 321 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405). This small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405) is a process executed in the small win start setting process 7 (see FIG. 320) of the special pattern change process 7 (see FIG. 315) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is a process that updates the time-saving information based on the small win that has been won, and updates the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state when the time-saving end condition is met.

In the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S10501). That is, it is determined whether the current state is the time-saving state. In the process of S10501, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S10501: No), since the small win has been won in a game state other than the time-saving state, this process is skipped in its entirety to update the time-saving information, and this process is terminated. In addition, since the seventh control example is configured so that the small win cannot be won (the lottery (variation) of the second special pattern is not executed) except in a state in which the time-saving state is set, if it is determined in the process of S10501 that the time-saving state is not set, an error command for executing an error notification (abnormal notification) may be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S10501, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, that the time-saving state is set (S10501: Yes), it is next determined whether the small win type of the small win that has been won this time is "small win A" (S10502). Here, in the process of S10502, the small win type stored in the small win type storage area 203fa in the process of S10310 of the special pattern determination process 7 (see FIG. 317) is read out and determined.

In the process of S10502, if it is determined that the type of the current small win is "small win A" (S10502: Yes), the value of the small win A counter 203fg is decremented by 1 (S10503), and it is determined whether the value of the small win A counter 203fg after the decrement is 0 (S10504). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S10504: Yes), this means that the time-saving end condition (the win count end condition corresponding to small win A) has been met with the current small win, so the value of the time-saving counter 203h, which measured the period until the variable count end condition is met, is set to 0 (S10505), and the values of the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh, which measured the various win count end conditions, are each set to 0 (S10506), and the game state is set to the normal state (S10507).

By executing the above-mentioned processes of S10505 to S10507, when one of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of the counters for measuring the period until the other time-saving end conditions are satisfied can be set to values indicating that the time-saving end conditions have been satisfied. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the execution of processes for updating the time-saving information (processes for updating the values of the small win A counter 203fg, the small win B counter 203fh, and the time-saving counter 203h) after the time-saving end condition is satisfied (after the normal state is set as the game state). This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary processes from being executed, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control device 110.

In the seventh control example, when any of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters for updating the time-saving information corresponding to each of the multiple time-saving end conditions are simply set to 0 (a value indicating that the time-saving end condition is satisfied). Therefore, after the time-saving state ends, it is not possible to determine which time-saving end condition was satisfied to end the previous time-saving state. However, for example, a storage means capable of storing the satisfied time-saving end conditions may be provided, and the type of time-saving end condition satisfied in the past and the number of times it was satisfied may be determined.

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to determine the time-saving end condition that is likely to be met based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of times it is met, and to suggest (notify) the player of the time-saving end condition that is likely to be met based on the determined content. Furthermore, it is possible to configure it so that the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to other time-saving end conditions when one time-saving end condition is met (for example, the values of the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh at the time when the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0) can be stored, and the time-saving end condition that is most difficult to meet, that is, the time-saving end condition that has the largest value of time-saving information at the time when one time-saving end condition is met among the multiple time-saving end conditions, can be determined.

After completing the processing of S10507, a remaining time-saving count command corresponding to the subtracted value of each small win counter is set (S10508), a status command indicating the current game status is set (S10509), and this processing ends. Here, the commands set in S10508 and S10509 are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S11501) of main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) described below. The voice lamp control device 113 manages time-saving information based on the received remaining time-saving count command, and sets a status display mode to indicate (indicate) the time-saving status (the period until the time-saving status ends). It also grasps the current game status based on the received status command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10504 that the value of the small win A counter 203fg is not 0 (S10504: No), the time-saving state will not end due to the current small win, so the process skips the processes of S10505 to S10507 for ending the time-saving state and moves to the process of S10508.

Returning to the above-mentioned process of S10502, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S10502, if it is determined that the type of the small prize won this time is not "small prize A" (it is "small prize B") (S10502: No), it is then determined whether the type of the small prize won this time is "small prize B" (S10510). If it is determined that it is "small prize B" (S10510: Yes), the value of the small prize B counter 203fh is decremented by 1 (S10511), and then it is determined whether the decremented value of the small prize B counter 203fh is 0 (S10512).

If it is determined in the process of S10512 that the value of the small win B counter 203fh is 0 (S10512: Yes), this means that the time-saving end condition (the win count end condition corresponding to the small win B) has been met with the current small win, so the process proceeds to the process of S10505 described above, and the process for ending the time-saving state is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10512 that the value of the small win B counter 203fh is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S10512: No), the time-saving state will not end due to the current small win, so the process skips the processes of S10505 to S10507 for ending the time-saving state and moves to the process of S10508.

In the process of S10510, if the type of the small win that has been won this time is not "small win B" (S10510: No), the process skips the processes of S10505 to S10507 for ending the time-saving state and moves to the process of S10508, since the time-saving state will not end due to the small win this time.

As explained above, in the seventh control example, when the variation time of the special symbol that won the small win has elapsed, the counter value corresponding to the small win is subtracted, and it is determined whether or not the time-saving end condition (win count end condition) that is established based on the small win is established. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to end the time-saving state based on the win count end condition before the small win game is played. Therefore, regardless of whether the time-saving end condition, the variation count end condition or the win count end condition, is established, it is possible to prevent a large difference in the timing to end the time-saving state.

Specifically, in the seventh control example, if the fluctuation count end condition, i.e., the time-saving end condition based on the number of times the special pattern fluctuates, is met, the time-saving state is configured to end at the timing when the final display of the special pattern (first pattern) ends, and if the winning count end condition, i.e., the time-saving end condition based on the number of times a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, is met, the time-saving state is configured to end at the set start timing of the small prize game after the final display of the special pattern (first pattern).

In other words, regardless of which time-saving end condition is met, the time-saving state ends immediately after the corresponding special symbol stops changing. This makes it difficult for the player to tell which time-saving end condition was met to end the currently set time-saving state. In order for the player to determine whether the time-saving state has ended, for example, it is necessary to identify the length of the normal symbol (second symbol) change time and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a. However, by setting the time-saving state to end when the small win start is set (just before the small win game starts) as in the seventh control example, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time-saving state has ended immediately after the small win game starts.

In the seventh control example, the time-saving state is configured to end at approximately the same timing (a concept including a time difference that is difficult for a player to distinguish) when either the variable count end condition or the winning count end condition is met among the multiple time-saving end conditions. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the time-saving state may be ended immediately after the special pattern (first pattern) is confirmed and displayed when the variable count end condition is met, and the time-saving state may be ended after the small win game that is executed after the special pattern (first pattern) is confirmed and displayed when the winning count end condition is met. By configuring in this way, the time-saving state can be set for the period during which the small win game is being played.

Therefore, during the small win game, the player cannot determine whether the time-saving state has ended due to the current small win win, and it is difficult to know whether the time-saving state has ended until the small win game ends (until the game result of whether or not a 2-type win has been won is announced). Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 having a gameplay that allows a 2-type win to be won during a small win game, as in the 7th control example, by configuring the machine to notify the player whether or not the time-saving state has ended after the small win game ends, the player will play while predicting whether the current small win game is based on a small win that ends the time-saving state, and this makes it possible to always aim for a 2-type win in the small win game that is executed during the time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 322, the V entrance passing process (S10108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passing process (S10108) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

In the V entrance passage process (S10108), first it is determined whether the ball passage sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S11101). If it is determined in the process of S11101 that the ball passage sensor 650c1 is not on (S11101: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11101 that the ball passage sensor 650c1 is on (S11101: Yes), it is determined whether the V winning entrance 650a is in an open period (S11102).

If it is determined in the process of S11102 that the V winning port 650a is open (S11102: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S11103) and this process is terminated. The V entrance passage command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the balls that have passed through the V entrance and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute a performance based on the V entrance passage. This makes it possible to execute a performance during a small win game based on a ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 313).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning port 650a is not open (S11102: No), this means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small win game, so an error command is set (S11104). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to ON (S11105), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 323, the V passing process (S10109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S10109). This V passing process (S10109) is a process executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

In the V passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the V passing flag 203ff is on (S11201). If it is determined in the process of S11201 that the V passing flag 203ff is on (S11201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11201 that the V passing flag 203ff is not on (S11201: No), it is determined whether or not there has been a V passing (S11202). In other words, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650. If it is determined in the process of S11202 that there has been no V passing (S11202: No), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of S11202 that a V pass has occurred (S11202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V pass valid period is in progress (S11203). If it is determined that the V pass valid period is in progress (S11203: Yes), the V pass jackpot type value stored in the V pass jackpot type storage area 203fd is obtained (S11204), and the V flag 203fe indicating the obtained V pass jackpot type is set to on (S11205). Then, a V pass command is set (S11206).

Next, the V passing flag 203ff is set to ON (S11207). After that, the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 (S11208), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11203 that the V-pass valid period is not in progress (S11203: No), an error command is set (S11209) and this processing is terminated. If the game ball passes through the V-entry switch (V switch) 650e3 when the V-pass valid period is not in progress, this is considered to be an instance where the ball has illegally entered the V-entry switch 650e3. In this case, an error command is set in the processing of S11209, and an error output is executed, making it possible to discover any illegal activity.

Next, referring to FIG. 324, the start-up process (main control device) 7 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing this start-up process (main control device) 7. This start-up process (main control device) 7 is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial settings associated with power-on are executed (S11401). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in the seventh control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S11402). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S11403).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S11404), and if it is turned on (S11404: Yes), processing proceeds to S11415. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S11404: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S11405), and if it is not stored (S11405: No), there is a possibility that processing at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, and in this case too, processing proceeds to S11415.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S11405: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S11406). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S11407: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, processing also proceeds to S11415. Note that, as will be described later in the processing of S11515 in FIG. 325, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 has been saved correctly.

In the processing of S11415, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S11415). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S11416, S11417).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S11416, S11417) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S11416, S11417) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (S11416, S11417), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S11416), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S11417). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to S11410.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S11404: No), power outage information is stored (S11405: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S11407: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S11408) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power was cut off (S11409), and processing proceeds to S11410. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S11410, a performance permission command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various performances. Next, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is read (S11411), and a state command based on the read value is set (S11412). Then, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to off (S11413). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S11414), and the process proceeds to main process 7, which will be described later.

Next, referring to FIG. 325, we will explain main processing 7, which is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up processing (main control device) 7. FIG. 325 is a flowchart showing this main processing 7. In this main processing 7, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, each process from S11501 to S11508 is executed as a regular process with a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update processes of S11511 and S11512 are executed in the remaining time.

In the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S11501). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S10101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number command set in the special pattern variation process 7 (see FIG. 315) or the start winning process (see FIG. 161) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process (S11501), a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the third pattern display device 81 to display the variation of the third pattern are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command (S11602), the number of rounds command (S11607), and the ending command set in the big win control process 7 (Fig. 326, S11504) are sent to the sound lamp control device 113 (S11611). In addition, when a ball is to be launched, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S11502). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (198 in the seventh control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

After updating the variable type counter CS1 (S11502), the prize ball counting signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S11503), and then, if a jackpot state of a special pattern is reached, a jackpot control process is executed to execute a jackpot performance and to open or close the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) (S11504). In the jackpot control process 7 (S11504), the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650). Then, when any of these conditions is met, the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. Note that in the seventh control example, the big win control process 7 (S11504) is executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

Next, when the special symbol is in the small win state, various effects according to the small win are executed, and the small win control process 7 is executed to open or close the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) (S11505). In the small win control process 7 (S11505), the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed or whether the specified number of balls have entered the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650). When any of these conditions are met, the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. In the seventh control example, the small win control process 7 (S11505) is executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (S11506). In the electric role opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric role is set by the process of S822 in the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the opening/closing control of the electric role is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric role continues until the opening time and the number of openings set by the process of S821 or the process of S823 in the normal pattern change process are completed.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) (S11507). In the first pattern display update process (S11507), when a change pattern is set by the process of S8206 of the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (see FIG. 318), the change display according to the change pattern is started in the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b. In the seventh control example, for example, if the currently lit LED of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that main process 7 (see Figure 325) is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process (S11507), when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the process of S8206 of the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (see FIG. 318) has ended, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b (see FIG. 294) is terminated, and the stopped pattern (first pattern) is displayed as stopped (lit up) on the first pattern display device 37a, 37b in the display mode set by the process of S10305 or S10308 of the special pattern determination process 7 (see FIG. 317).

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device 83 (S11508). In the second pattern display update process (S11508), when the second pattern change time is set by the process of S815 or S816 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), a change display is started in the second pattern display device 83. As a result, the second pattern display device 83 performs a change display in which a "○" pattern and an "X" pattern are alternately lit as the second pattern. In addition, in the second pattern display update process (S11508), when a stopped display is set on the second pattern display device 83 by the process of S818 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the change display being performed on the second pattern display device 83 is terminated, and the stopped pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stopped pattern (illuminated display) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S812 or S813 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163).

Then, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S11509). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S11509: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not cut off. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process 7 has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the seventh control example) has elapsed since the start of this main process 7 (S11510). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S11510: Yes), the process proceeds to S11501, and each process from S11501 onwards described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process 7 (S11510: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated until the specified time has elapsed, i.e., within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process 7 (S11511, S11512).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S11511). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when each counter value reaches its maximum value (999, 239 in the seventh control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated using the same method as the processing of S11502 (S11512).

Here, the execution time of each process from S11501 to S11508 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next execution timing of main process 7 is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time (S11511), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S11509 (S11509: Yes), the power is interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 165 is executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S11513 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S11513), and a power off command indicating that the power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S11514). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S11515), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S11516), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of S11509 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in S11501 to S11508, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S11511 and S11512 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from a power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of S11501 after the start-up processing (main control unit) 7 is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S11501, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up processing (main control unit) 7. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (S11401), so that the processing can be started from S11501. This reduces the control burden on the main control device 110 and allows the main control device 110 to perform accurate control without malfunctioning or going out of control.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 326, the jackpot control process 7 (S11504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 326 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 7 (S11504). This jackpot control process 7 (S11504) is executed within the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process 7 (Fig. 326, S11504), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start a jackpot with a special symbol (S11601). Specifically, this is determined by analyzing the setting status of the jackpot start flag 203j. This jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S10216) when the start of a jackpot is set by the processing of S10215 of the special symbol variation process 7 (see Fig. 315). In the processing of S11601, if it is determined that it is the timing to start a jackpot (if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is ON) (S11601: Yes), an opening command is set (S11602), and then the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF (S11603), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11601 that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF) (S11601: No), then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is in progress (S11604). The special symbol jackpot includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the period during which the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON after the special symbol jackpot game ends, and corresponds to this period. If it is determined in the process of S11604 that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is OFF) (S11604: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11604 that a special symbol jackpot is occurring (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON) (S11604: Yes), a determination process (S11605 to S11612) is executed to determine whether it is time to execute various processes that are executed at multiple times during the jackpot.

If it is determined in the process of S11604 that a jackpot is currently being played (S11604: Yes), it is then determined whether it is time to start a new round (S11605). In this process of S11605, it is determined whether the current timing is the start timing of a new round based on the opening scenario set corresponding to the current jackpot game. If it is determined in the process of S11605 that it is time to start a new round (S11605: Yes), the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202fg (S11606), and a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S11607). After the round number command is set, this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sends a display round number command corresponding to the number of rounds to the display control device 114. When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round presentation is started in the third pattern display device 81.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the jackpot continues (for example, when the number of special pattern variations (number of lotteries) between the execution of multiple jackpot games is less than 50 times, or during a period in which a time-saving state is set repeatedly between jackpot games), the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to accumulate and display the number of rounds of the jackpot games that are continuously executed. In other words, the voice lamp control device 113 has a period setting means for setting a period (consecutive win period) during which it is determined that the jackpot is continuously executed based on the state command or variation pattern command sent from the main control device 110, a round number accumulation means for adding the number of rounds (number of rounds) of the new jackpot game to the number of rounds (number of rounds) of the previously executed jackpot game when a new jackpot game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, and a round number accumulation display control means for transmitting a display round number command corresponding to the accumulated round number accumulated by the round number accumulation means to the display control device 114 and displaying it on the third pattern display device 81 during the jackpot game. This allows the player to recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, which increases the player's interest.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11605 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S11605: No), then it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of V winning device 650) has been met (S11608). Specifically, it is determined that the closing condition has been met when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of V winning device 650) was opened, or when a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 10 balls in total) have entered the variable winning device 65 or V winning device 650.

In the process of S11608, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning port (specific winning port 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning port 650a of V winning device 650) is met (S11608: Yes), the corresponding winning port (specific winning port 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning port 650a of V winning device 650) is closed (S11609), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning port (specific winning port 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning port 650a of V winning device 650) is not met (S11608: No), it is next determined whether the current timing is the start timing of the ending performance (S11610). The timing to start the ending performance is determined when 15 rounds (the final round of play that is preset for this jackpot game) have ended, the opening and closing door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (3 seconds in the seventh control example), which is the ball discharge time, has elapsed.

If it is determined in the processing of S11610 that it is the timing to start the ending performance (S11610: Yes), an ending command is set (S11611) and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S11501) of main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the ending performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11610 that it is not the timing to start the ending performance (S11610: No), then in the process of S11612, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending performance (S11612). If it is determined in the process of S11612 that it is not the timing to end the ending performance (S11612: No), then this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S11612 that it is time for the ending presentation to end (S11612: Yes), it is then determined whether the jackpot type currently being executed is jackpot A to jackpot D (S11613). In the process of S11613, the jackpot type stored in a storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores the jackpot type to be set is read out.

Next, based on the read jackpot type, the time-saving end condition is set using the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe (S11614). Specifically, if the jackpot type is jackpot A (15R time-saving jackpot) or jackpot B (5R time-saving jackpot), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, the small jackpot A counter 203fg is set to 1, and the small jackpot B counter 203fh is set to 3. Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot D (15R time-saving jackpot), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, the small jackpot A counter 203fg is set to 2, and the small jackpot B counter 203fh is set to 10.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (5R non-time-saving jackpot), the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends, so the time-saving counter 203h, small win A counter 203fg, and small win B counter 203fh are not set to any value (time-saving end condition). After the above-mentioned processing of S11614 is completed, a time-saving setting information command is set to indicate information corresponding to the values of the various counters indicating the time-saving end condition set in the processing of S11614 (S11615).

The time-saving setting information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the time-saving setting information command, it sets time-saving information indicating the time-saving end conditions of the current time-saving state in the time-saving information update area 223g and the temporary time-saving information update area 223i. Based on the time-saving information set here and the update information of the time-saving state that is updated based on the fluctuation (lottery) of the special pattern, it determines the remaining number of times (remaining conditions) of the time-saving state, and various performance modes are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the remaining number of times.

After completing the processing of S11615, the system next sets a state command corresponding to the game state that will be set after the jackpot (S11616), sets the end of the jackpot (S11617), sets the jackpot in progress flag 203k to off (S11618), and ends this processing.

As explained above, the seventh control example is configured so that the end conditions for the time-saving state can be set differently depending on the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot is won. Furthermore, the seventh control example is configured so that a time-saving end condition that is less likely to be established as the end condition for the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) is set when a jackpot is won by drawing a lottery for the second special symbol compared to when a jackpot is won by drawing a lottery for the first special symbol.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide added value to the player when they win one type instead of two types during right-hand play while the time-saving state is set.

In the seventh control example, the same time-saving end condition is set for the jackpot type (jackpot A, B) that is set when a jackpot is won by drawing the first special pattern, but this is not limited thereto. For example, it may be configured to set a time-saving end condition that is more difficult to achieve when the jackpot type is jackpot A. Also, some of the multiple time-saving end conditions may be set to be more easily achieved when the jackpot is A, and the others may be set to be more easily achieved when the jackpot is B.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 306(d), in the seventh control example, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is configured to set a fluctuation count end condition related to the number of times the special pattern fluctuates (an end condition based on the value of the time-saving counter 203h) and a winning count end condition related to the number of times a small prize has been won as a result of the special pattern lottery (an end condition based on the value of each small prize counter).

In addition, the system is configured so that the winning count end conditions are set to end conditions corresponding to multiple small win types that are set when a small win is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which small win type the small win game will be played and how much time is left until the time-saving state ends before the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (100 times).

In the seventh control example, only the number of times the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) change is set to "100 times" as the change count end condition, but a different change count end condition may be set depending on the type of big win. In addition, as the change count end condition, a first special symbol change measurement means may be provided that measures only the number of times the first special symbol changes, and a first special symbol change end condition that is established when the measurement result of the first special symbol change measurement means becomes a predetermined result, or a second special symbol change measurement means may be provided that measures only the number of times the second special symbol changes, and a second special symbol change end condition that is established when the measurement result of the second special symbol change measurement means becomes a predetermined result may be set.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, the end condition is set based on the measurement results of the counters (small win A counter 203fg, small win B counter 203fh) corresponding to each small win type as the winning count end condition, but this is not limited to this, and the time-saving end condition may be set based simply on the total number of times a small win has been won, or a means may be provided that totals and measures the number of times a small win game with a predetermined number (two) of small win types set out of multiple (three or more) small win types has been played, and the end condition may be set based on the measurement results of that means.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the time-saving end condition is set for all small win types that can be set when a small win is won, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to set small win type Z as a small win type for which the time-saving end condition cannot be met no matter how many times it is set when a small win is won. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the time-saving state is approaching its end due to the current small win, even if the player knows that he or she has won a small win during the time-saving state.

In addition, when the above-mentioned small win type Z is set, it is preferable to configure it so that a small win game with the same content as the small win game for which the winning count end condition is set is executed. By configuring it in this way, even if the game content of the small win game executed during the time-saving state is identified, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time-saving state is approaching the end due to the current small win game.

In this way, by determining that a small prize has been won, or by determining the game content of the small prize game that is executed based on the small prize being won, in other words, by determining the game content of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to make the player very interested in the presentation that suggests (informs) the progress of the time-saving state (whether it is approaching the end or not), by making it difficult to grasp the progress. Note that the control content of the presentation executed by the third pattern display device 81 in the seventh control example will be explained in detail in the explanation of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later.

Next, the small win control process 7 (S11505) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 327. FIG. 327 is a flowchart showing this small win control process 7 (S11505). This small win control process 7 (S11505) is executed within the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), and is a process for executing various effects according to the small win and opening or closing the corresponding winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) when the pachinko machine 10 is in a small win state with a special pattern.

In the small win control process 7 (Fig. 327, S11505), first, it is determined whether a small win of a special pattern will start (S11701). Specifically, if the small win start flag 203fb is set to ON by the process of S10404 of the small win start setting process 7 (see Fig. 320), it is determined that a small win of a special pattern will start. In the process of S11701, if a small win of a special pattern will start (S11701: Yes), an opening command is set (S11702). Then, the small win start flag 203fb is set to OFF (S11703), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S11701, if a small win of a special pattern has not started (S11701: No), it is determined whether or not a small win of a special pattern is in progress (S11704). The period during which a small win of a special pattern is in progress includes the period during which the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 display a small win of a special pattern (including during play of a small win of a special pattern) and during a specified time after play of a small win of a special pattern ends. The determination in S11704 is made by analyzing whether the small win flag 303fc is set to on. In the process of S11704, if it is determined that a small win of a special pattern is not in progress (S11704: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11704 that a small win of a special pattern is occurring (S11704: Yes), the process of S11705 is executed. In the process of S11705, it is determined whether it is the timing to open the V winning hole (S11705). If it is determined in the process of S11705 that it is the timing to open the V winning hole (S11705: Yes), the corresponding winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202fg (S11706), and it is determined whether this is the 5th or 10th opening timing (S11707).

If it is determined in the process of S11707 that this is not the fifth or tenth opening timing (S11707: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11707 that this is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S11707: Yes), then in the process of S11708, it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S11708), and if it is determined that it is not ON (OFF) (S11708: No), the small win type stored in the small win type storage area 203fa is read (S11709), and then an instruction command corresponding to the read small win type is set (S11710).

The instruction command set in the processing of S11710 is, for example, an instruction command for changing the display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 depending on the type of small win, that is, a small win in which the ball is likely to pass through a specific area during small win play (e.g., small win A) and a small win in which the ball is unlikely to pass through a specific area during small win play (e.g., small win B).

Returning to FIG. 327, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S11705, if it is determined that it is not the time to open the V winning opening 650a (S11705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the V winning opening 650a has been met, i.e., whether it is the time to close the V winning opening 650a (S11711). If it is determined that it is the time to close the V winning opening 650a (S11711: Yes), the V winning opening 650a is closed (S11712), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11711 that the current timing is not the closing timing of the V winning port 650a (S11711: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending performance (S11713). If it is determined in the process of S11713 that it is the timing to start the ending performance (S11713: Yes), an ending command is set (S11714) and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S11501) of the main process (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11713 that it is not the timing to start the ending performance (S11713: No), then in the process of S11715, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending performance (S11715). If it is determined in the process of S11715 that it is not the timing to end the ending performance (S11715: No), then this process is terminated.

In the processing of S11715, if it is determined that it is the timing for the ending presentation to end (S11715: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set on (S11716), and if it is determined that it is set on (S11716: Yes), an opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203fe is set (S11717), the jackpot start flag 203j and the jackpot mid-flag 203k are set on (S11718), the V flag 203fe is set off (S11719), the V pass flag 203ff is set off (S11720), the small jackpot mid-flag 203fc is set off (S11721), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 328, the control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this seventh control example will be described. FIG. 328 is a flow chart showing the process of special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 7 (S14983). In this special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 7 (S14983), a process is executed (see S19502) that uses the performance mode determined by referring to the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa in order to set the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol lottery during the time-saving state.

When the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 7 (S14983) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (S19501). If it is determined that the current game state is in the time-saving state (S19501: Yes), the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa (see FIG. 312) is referenced to determine the notification mode (S19502). Then, a display variation pattern command indicating the performance mode determined in the process of S19502 is set (S19503), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S19501 that the current game state is not in the time-saving state (S19501: No), the process of S19502 is skipped, the process of S19503 described above is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this seventh control example, in one special pattern lottery, it is possible to judge whether a jackpot has been won and whether the time-saving feature has been won, and in the event that both a jackpot and a time-saving feature are won, it is possible to grant a special benefit that is advantageous to the player, and this technical idea differs from the other control examples in that it is configured to be able to do so. However, the technical idea unique to this seventh control example may also be applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in the other control examples. In addition, it may also be configured to be able to judge whether a time-saving feature has been won even when a game state other than the normal state is set.

In addition, in this seventh control example, when processing related to the special pattern lottery is executed, a process for determining whether a time-saving win has been won can be executed before the process for determining whether a jackpot has been won, and when a time-saving win has been won, the time-saving state is set before the determination of whether a jackpot has been won is executed, and the time-saving state is terminated between the determination of whether a jackpot has been won and the start of the special pattern variation to show the result of that determination. In other words, the time-saving state can be set only for the purpose of changing the game state when the determination of whether a jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery is executed.

By configuring it in this way, the time-saving state can be used for purposes other than those set for the purpose of making it easier to execute special symbol lotteries, as is the case with conventional pachinko machines 10, and a variety of games can be offered to players.

In addition, as a configuration that allows the time-saving state to be set solely for the purpose of changing the game state when the jackpot winning judgment is made in the special pattern lottery, a configuration other than that described in this seventh control example may be used. For example, the time-saving state may be set at the timing when the special pattern fluctuation that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, and the time-saving state may be ended after the jackpot winning judgment is made in the next special pattern lottery.

In this case, if the right to execute the special pattern lottery (special pattern reserved) has been acquired, the period during which the time-saving state is set will be instantaneous, so similar to the seventh control example, it will be possible to set the time-saving state for the purpose of changing the game state when the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery is made. On the other hand, if the special pattern reserved has not been acquired, the time-saving state will continue until the next special pattern lottery is executed, so it will be possible to set a period during which it is easy to execute the special pattern lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to execute the next special pattern lottery only for players who are unable to execute the special pattern lottery smoothly.

In addition, in this seventh control example, it is configured so that a jackpot and a time-saving win can be won in a single special pattern drawing, and if a double win occurs, a bonus that is more advantageous to the player can be given than if there were no double wins. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure so that if a double win occurs, a bonus that is less advantageous to the player can be given than if there were no double wins.

In addition, as a judgment for the possibility of multiple wins, not only a judgment for a jackpot win or a judgment for a time-saving win, but also a judgment for the establishment of a time-saving end condition or a judgment for a drop-out lottery win may be used. In other words, multiple types of judgments can be made executable based on the establishment of a specific execution trigger, and when the combination of the results of the multiple types of judgments becomes a predetermined combination, a different bonus can be awarded than when the combination becomes a different combination.

<Modification of the game board configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, a modified example of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 329. In the fifth to seventh control examples described above, the game board 13 has a left-hand hit game that allows the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 in the normal state, and a right-hand hit game that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, which is easier to enter when the time-saving state is set. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has a playability that switches between a game that allows the first special symbol lottery to be executed and a game that allows the second special symbol lottery to be executed depending on the game state.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 329, in the normal state, a left-hand hit game is performed to cause the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, making it possible to execute a first special pattern lottery, and a right-hand hit game is performed to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 1641, making it possible to execute a second special pattern lottery. With this configuration, when the same game state is set, the player can select a game method (left-hand hit game, right-hand hit game) (by adjusting the firing strength by operating the operating handle 21) to execute a special pattern lottery for any special pattern type, thereby increasing the player's motivation to participate in the game.

Next, we will explain the innovative gameplay that uses the game board 13 shown in Figure 329.

<Gameplay 1>
In the pachinko machine 10 having the playability used in the seventh control example described above, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to select the jackpot at the same selection rate, and in addition, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be capable of determining whether or not a time-saving win has been won in addition to a jackpot win, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to be capable of determining whether or not a small win has been won in addition to a jackpot win. When a time-saving state is set based on a time-saving win, the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640, and a right-hitting game is executed, and a game in which a small win leads to a jackpot game is executed is configured to be executable.

By configuring it in this way, in the normal state, it becomes possible for the player to select between a game (first game) in which the aim is to set a time-saving state by winning a jackpot with the first special symbol, or a game (second game) in which the aim is to set a time-saving state by winning a jackpot with the second special symbol, or a game (second game) in which the aim is to set a time-saving state by winning a jackpot with the second special symbol, or a game (second game) in which the aim is to set a time-saving state by winning a small jackpot with the second special symbol, by playing with the right hand.

In this case, for example, the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set when the time-saving state is won is configured to make it easier for the time-saving end condition to be met, and in about 50% of cases when the second time-saving state is set, a big win game is played via a small win during the second time-saving state, and the probability of winning the time-saving state in the first special pattern lottery is configured to be higher than the probability of winning the small win in the second special pattern lottery.

By configuring it in this way, the player can select whether to play the first game or the second game to execute a game process in which a jackpot game is executed via winning a small jackpot in the second special pattern lottery, according to his/her preference. In this case, it is advisable to specify the rate at which game balls enter each ball entry port, the probability of winning the time-saving feature, the probability of winning a small jackpot, and the probability of executing a jackpot game when a small jackpot is won, so that the ratio of the number of winning prize balls when a specified number of game balls are fired is equal when playing left-handed game in normal mode and when playing right-handed game. This makes it possible to provide a fair game to the player regardless of which game is played.

Furthermore, in this case, it is advisable to configure the time required for the ratio of the number of winning balls obtained when a specified number of game balls are released to become equal between the first game and the second game, or to configure the deviation of the number of winning balls obtained to be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that suits the tastes of the player.

<Other gameplay features: Depending on the type of time-saving feature, you can set a time-saving state that is more unfavorable than the normal state or a time-saving state that is more favorable than the normal state>
As in the fifth control example described above, a time-saving state (first time-saving) that is set via winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, and a time-saving state (second time-saving) that is set via winning a time-saving state (second time-saving) can be set, and when the second time-saving state is won, a second time-saving state A that is advantageous to the player and a second time-saving state B that is disadvantageous to the player can be set as the type of time-saving state that is set.

When the second time-saving A is set, as in the fifth control example described above, a time-saving state is set in which the electric device 640 opens so that the special symbol lottery is more likely to be performed than in the normal state. On the other hand, when the second time-saving B is set, the electric device 640 is controlled to open so that game balls can only enter the second ball entrance 640 at the same ball entrance rate as in the normal state.

When the second time-saving B is set, that is, in a game state other than the normal state, the time-saving winning judgment is not executed. By configuring in this way, when the normal state is set, a game is played in which a jackpot winning judgment and a time-saving winning judgment are executed in the special pattern lottery, and when the second time-saving B is set, a game is played in which only a jackpot winning judgment is executed in the special pattern lottery. In other words, since the time-saving winning judgment is not executed in the normal state, the game is played in a way that is disadvantageous to the player in the second time-saving B.

Then, a different number of times to select special symbols (for example, 10 times, 50 times, 100 times) can be set as a time-saving end condition for the second time-saving B.

Furthermore, the selection ratios of the lottery results in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state are set to a 1/200 probability of winning the jackpot and a 199/200 probability of winning the time-saving option. If the time-saving option is won, the ratio of the second time-saving option A being selected is set to 10%, and the ratio of the second time-saving option B being selected is set to 90%. In other words, when the special pattern lottery is executed in the normal state, if the lottery result is anything other than a jackpot, the time-saving option will always be selected.

By configuring it in this way, the timing for the special symbol lottery to be executed in the normal state is when the conditions for ending the second time-saving B are met after the big win and the normal state is set, i.e., the special symbol lottery executed in a specific cycle. This makes it possible to execute a special symbol lottery (a special symbol lottery in the normal state) that is advantageous to the player periodically (each time the conditions for ending the second time-saving B are met).

In addition, by configuring the second time-saving B to end under different conditions, the number of times that the special symbol selections are to be performed can be set, and the period during which the special symbol selections that are advantageous to the player are performed can be varied, providing the player with an element of surprise.

In this case, when using a pachinko machine 10 that can execute both the first and second special pattern lotteries in the normal state, such as the configuration of the game board 13 described above with reference to Figure 329, it is advisable to configure the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery in the normal state so that the probability of winning the time-saving feature is different, the selection ratio of the time-saving feature type that is set when the time-saving feature is won is different, or the content of the time-saving feature end condition when the second time-saving feature B is set is different.

By configuring it in this way, the probability that the second time-saving A advantageous to the player will be set can be varied depending on which type of special pattern is used in the periodically executed special pattern lottery advantageous to the player (special pattern lottery in the normal state).

In addition, the time-saving end condition for the second time-saving B may be set to be established when the result of the special pattern lottery is a specific judgment result (for example, a small win) rather than based on the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed, and the result of the special pattern lottery may be a small win that is different from a big win or a time-saving win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which, when the second time-saving B is set, the second time-saving B is ended as soon as possible so that the special pattern lottery can be executed in the normal state, aiming to win a small win.

<Gameplay 2: Combination of simultaneous fluctuation gaming machine and time-saving winning>
In a gaming machine configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) draw a first special pattern and draw a second special pattern, and when both special patterns win a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed based on the drawing result of the special pattern on the side where the special pattern variation has stopped first (determined display of special pattern), and at the point where the special pattern variation has stopped first (determined display of special pattern), depending on the type of jackpot, the other special pattern variation is forcibly displayed as stopped in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a miss, the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a time-saving winning judgment in both the first special pattern drawing and the second special pattern drawing.

Then, as in the fifth control example described above, a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) is executed before the start of each special symbol change, and if the time-saving winning is selected, the time-saving state is set when the special symbol change stops. In this case, if the time-saving winning is selected in the first special symbol lottery, the time-saving state that becomes the first benefit is set, and if the time-saving winning is selected in the second special symbol lottery, the time-saving state that becomes the second benefit different from the first benefit is set.

Furthermore, in the case where the second special symbol drawing is executed while the first special symbol is changing and the time-saving feature is winning, a time-saving state can be set in which a third benefit that is more advantageous than the first and second benefits is awarded if the time-saving feature is won. By configuring in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to draw the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), it is possible to set a time-saving state in which different benefits are awarded depending on the timing of the time-saving feature being won in each special symbol drawing.

The bonus that is awarded may be, for example, a third bonus in which the time-saving end condition is more difficult to achieve than the first or second bonus, or a third bonus in which the special pattern lottery is easier to execute than the first or second bonus.

Furthermore, the timing at which the time-saving state of the third bonus is set may be the timing at which the first special pattern change is stopped among the special pattern changes being executed in parallel, or the timing at which the last special pattern change is stopped. Also, regardless of whether it is before or after the timing of the stop display, it may be the timing at which the first special pattern change is stopped, or the timing at which the last special pattern change is stopped. It may also be the timing at which a specific special pattern type is stopped.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that can simultaneously (parallelly) draw multiple types of special symbols, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player wins a jackpot in each of the special symbol draws and is simultaneously awarded excessive bonuses (jackpot games).

Furthermore, even if a player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player in one special pattern lottery, it is possible for the player to win a jackpot that is advantageous to the player in the other special pattern lottery by the time the winning result is frozen (confirmed) display. In this case, it is advisable to execute a variable presentation that suggests to the player that he or she has won an unfavorable jackpot, using the variable time until the special pattern lottery result is frozen and displayed. This makes the player think that he or she has won an unfavorable jackpot, which can motivate the player to execute the other special pattern lottery during that variable time.

In addition, the reel may be configured so that a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be set when a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won than when a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won. This allows a favorable win to be won in the lottery for the other special symbol while one of the special symbols that has won an unfavorable win is fluctuating, and the winning result can be displayed as a stop (confirmed display) before the winning result of the unfavorable win.

<About gaming machines that can set the number of time-saving times (the number of times that the special symbol lottery can be executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol) to infinite>
In the first to fourth control examples described above, in some cases where a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, a high probability state for normal patterns (time-saving state) can be set for the period until 100 special pattern lotteries have been executed after the end of the jackpot game. However, the period for which the time-saving state continues may not be limited to until 100 special pattern lotteries have been executed, but may be until 100 or more special pattern lotteries have been executed, or may be indefinite (until the next jackpot is won).

For example, in the first control example described above, the special pattern change count is set as the end condition for ending the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, and one special pattern change count can be set from a plurality of change counts including at least a first change count and a second change count different from the first change count, with the first change count being 100, the second change count being 200, the third change count being 300, the fourth change count being 500, and the fifth change count being 10,000 (effectively until the next jackpot is won).

The presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is that "100 times remaining" is displayed regardless of which ending condition is set at the time the time-saving state is set, and if a number of fluctuations of 100 or more (e.g., the fourth number of fluctuations) is set, a presentation is executed in which a predetermined number is added to the value of the remaining number of fluctuations displayed at a predetermined timing (e.g., "+30 times").

By configuring it in this way, even if the super chance mode (a limited-time special symbol high probability state (probability change state) until 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed) is not set after the end of the jackpot game, if the period until 10,000 special symbol variations are performed is set as the period for which the time-saving state will continue, the state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot 640 will continue for a longer period of time than if the probability change state was set. Although the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is low, it is possible to perform more jackpot lotteries for special symbols while maintaining the number of game balls acquired, and the possibility of winning a jackpot will increase. Therefore, even if the chance mode (time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play by making the player expect a long-term time-saving state to be set, and it is possible to make the player interested in how long the time-saving state will continue, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the game ball passes through a specific area during a jackpot game, a special probability state is set, and if the ball does not pass through a specific area, a time-saving state is set. This allows the player to choose whether to play in a special probability state in which the time-saving count is 100 times, during which a high probability state for special symbols is set but the high probability state for normal symbols continues, or in a time-saving state in which a low probability state for special symbols is set but the high probability state for normal symbols continues, with the possibility of a maximum of 10,000 time-saving counts being awarded.

<Regarding gaming machines with a configuration (so-called ST specification) in which a high probability state (high probability state) of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game until the end condition is met>
In a gaming machine configured such that when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, a special probability state (high probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the number of times the special patterns change after the special probability state is set reaches a specific number (for example, 100 times), the end condition for the special probability state is met (so-called ST specification), multiple end conditions may be specified and one of them may be set.

For example, the special pattern change count that is set as the end condition for ending the special variable state that is set after the end of a jackpot game can be set to one of a plurality of change counts that includes at least a first change count and a second change count that is different from the first change count, with the first change count being 100, the second change count being 200, the third change count being 300, the fourth change count being 500, and the fifth change count being 10,000 (effectively until the next jackpot is won).

Then, the presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is that "100 times remaining" is displayed regardless of which end condition is set at the time the special state is set, and if the number of fluctuations is set to 100 or more (for example, the fourth number of fluctuations) as the end condition, a presentation is executed in which a predetermined number is added to the value of the remaining number of fluctuations displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, "+30 times").

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to know how long the special state will continue, so even if the remaining time (remaining number of changes of the special pattern) until the displayed special state ends is short, it is possible to make the player expect an additional effect to occur, and the player can play while feeling a sense of expectation that the special state may continue until the very last moment when it ends.

The above-mentioned configuration may also be applied to gaming machines (so-called type 1 and type 2 mixed machines) that award a jackpot when a special pattern is selected as a jackpot or when a gaming ball enters a specific area.

<Regarding gaming machines with a function (limit function) that sets an upper limit on the period during which high probability states can be set consecutively>
In addition, the above-mentioned configuration that allows the setting of an infinite number of time-saving times may also be applied to a gaming machine that has a function (limit function) that sets an upper limit on the period during which a high probability state can be set continuously.

The limit function here refers to a threshold value that executes a process to set a low probability state (low probability state) of a special or normal symbol after the end of a jackpot game, even if a jackpot of a type in which a high probability state (high probability state) of a special or normal symbol can be set after the end of a jackpot game is won.

For example, if a player wins a type of jackpot (high probability jackpot) that sets a high probability state (high probability state) for a special symbol after the end of a jackpot game in a low probability state, and the high probability limit is set to three times, if the player wins high probability jackpots three times in a row after the high probability state is set, the high probability limit will be reached with the third high probability jackpot win, and a low probability state for the special symbol will be set after the end of the jackpot game.

The probability variable limit count is a value that is set when a jackpot is won in a low probability state for a special symbol, and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game played based on that jackpot ends. In the probability variable state, a jackpot that sets the probability variable state is won after the jackpot game ends, and the value is updated at the end of the jackpot game played based on that jackpot, and the updated value is used to determine whether the probability variable limit has been reached.

In a conventional gaming machine with a special symbol limit, for example, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the distribution of jackpot types is 90% for special symbol jackpots and 10% for normal jackpots, and the special symbol limit is set to three times, if a special symbol jackpot is won in a low probability state, and the special symbol state is set after the jackpot play ends, and then three consecutive special symbol jackpots are won, the special symbol limit is reached with the third special symbol jackpot, and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 100 special symbol lottery draws have been performed) after the third jackpot play ends, and if the predetermined period has passed without a special symbol jackpot being won, the state transitions to the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols).

In addition, even if a regular jackpot is won before the special jackpot limit is reached, a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set for a predetermined period of time after the jackpot play ends (for example, until 100 special symbol lotteries have been performed), and if the predetermined period has passed without a special symbol being won, the state will transition to the normal state. Note that if a special jackpot is won in the time-saving state, a new special jackpot limit of 3 times is set.

In other words, in conventional gaming machines with a special chance limit, if a player wins a normal jackpot, the special chance limit is released, but if the player does not win a special chance within a limited period of time (for example, the period until 100 special chance lottery draws have been performed), the game will return to the normal state. Therefore, from the player's perspective, a normal jackpot is a less favorable jackpot than a special chance jackpot, and if there are two consecutive special chance jackpots after the special chance state is set, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the same regardless of whether the next jackpot is a special chance jackpot or a normal jackpot. This could lead to a decrease in the player's motivation to play in the special chance state when there is only one chance remaining until the special chance limit is reached.

In response to this, by setting a normal jackpot that grants an infinite number of time-saving attempts (until the next jackpot is won), a low probability state of a special pattern is set in which the special jackpot limit is released when a normal jackpot is won after the special jackpot state is set, but since the time-saving state continues until the next jackpot, in a special jackpot state where there is only one attempt left until the special jackpot limit is reached, it is more advantageous for the player to win a normal jackpot than a special jackpot, and by making the player hope for a normal jackpot even in a special jackpot state where there is only one attempt left until the special jackpot limit is reached, a decrease in motivation to play can be prevented and interest in the game can be increased.

When a normal jackpot that grants an infinite number of time-saving plays is won is won, a special effect different from that when a special jackpot is won (for example, an effect in which the number of remaining plays until the displayed special limit is reached is rewound) may be executed.

<About the configuration capable of executing a double jackpot loop in a gaming machine that does not have a configuration capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol (so-called simultaneous variable method)>
In gaming machines that do not have a configuration capable of simultaneously (in parallel) executing a varying display based on the drawing of a first special pattern and a varying display based on the drawing of a second special pattern (so-called simultaneous variation method), gaming machines that have two types of jackpots (so-called variable probability loop machines) are commonly known: a variable probability jackpot in which a high probability state (variable probability state) for special and normal patterns is set after the end of a jackpot game until the next jackpot is won, and a normal jackpot in which a low probability state for special patterns and a high probability state (time-saving state) for normal patterns is set for a predetermined period after the end of a jackpot game (for example, until the special pattern drawing is performed 100 times).

In conventional probability loop machines, if a probability jackpot is won, the probability jackpot state is set after the jackpot game ends, and one more jackpot is guaranteed. However, if a normal jackpot is won after a probability jackpot is won, the normal state is set unless a jackpot is won during the time-saving state that is set for a specified period, so it is not possible to guarantee two more jackpot wins without changing the probability jackpot rate.

However, by configuring the game so that the aforementioned number of time-saving times can be set to an infinite number (until the next jackpot is won), it is possible to guarantee two more jackpot wins if a jackpot with a special jackpot is won without changing the probability of winning a special jackpot.

Specifically, if a regular jackpot is won while the special state is set, a time-saving state with an infinite number of times (until the next jackpot is won) is set, and if a regular jackpot is won while the normal state or time-saving state is set, a time-saving state with a period shorter than the infinite number of times (for example, until the special pattern lottery is performed 20 times) is set.

By configuring it in this way, if the probability variable state is set after the end of a jackpot game, one more jackpot is guaranteed regardless of the type of jackpot the next jackpot won, so winning one probability variable jackpot guarantees two more jackpots. Therefore, winning a probability variable jackpot allows the player to obtain many prize balls, which makes it possible for the player to play with enthusiasm in the hope of winning a probability variable jackpot.

<About the configuration that does not reset the time-saving state even if you win the jackpot when the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) is set>
In conventional gaming machines, a typical configuration is to set a time-saving state for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 100 special pattern lotteries have been performed) after a jackpot game ends, and if a jackpot game starts based on a jackpot being won during the time-saving state, the set time-saving state ends, and a new time-saving state for a predetermined period of time is set after the jackpot game ends (the time-saving state is reset).

To further increase interest in gaming machines with this configuration, if the time-saving mode is set, the time-saving mode is not reset even if a jackpot is won. This allows players to enjoy seeing how many jackpots they can win within a specified period of time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won (first win) in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the number of special symbol changes set as the end condition for ending the time-saving state is configured to be able to set one of a number of change numbers including at least a first change number and a second change number different from the first change number, with the first change number being 100, the second change number being 300, the third change number being 500, and the fourth change number being 10,000 (effectively until the next jackpot is won).

For example, if the third number of changes is set as the end condition, and a jackpot is won with the special pattern change executed for the 20th time, the time-saving state will not end (will not be reset) when the jackpot play begins, so the number of remaining changes until the end condition for the time-saving state is met after the jackpot play ends will be 480.

In this way, the time-saving state set based on the first win does not end when a jackpot is won during the time-saving state, and the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the first win continues even after the newly executed jackpot game ends. This makes it possible to vary the number of jackpot wins that a player can obtain during the time-saving state depending on the number of fluctuations, which is the end condition of the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the first win, and provides an innovative gameplay.

The conditions for terminating the time-saving state include when the number of fluctuations set as the termination condition becomes 0 (i.e., when a specified number of special pattern fluctuations are executed during the time-saving state) and when the number of jackpot wins during the time-saving state reaches a specific number. For example, if the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game and a third jackpot is won after the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state may be terminated at the start of a jackpot game and a new time-saving state may be set after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which players aim for consecutive wins in order to maintain a state that is more advantageous than the normal state (for example, a time-saving state), further increasing the interest of the game.

<Regarding gaming machines with a configuration in which the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set to be more advantageous to the player than the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols)>
At least four game states can be set: a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), a first special probability state, and a second special probability state.In a gaming machine configured such that the second special probability state is at least more advantageous to the player than the first special probability state in terms of the degree of advantage to the player in each game state, a time-saving lottery (a determination as to whether or not to set a time-saving state in the special symbol lottery) may be executed in the above-mentioned special symbol lottery.

Specifically, the difference in the probability of winning a jackpot between the low probability state and the high probability state of the special pattern is set small (for example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability state of the special pattern is 1/50.1, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability state is 1/50), and when a jackpot is won with the first special pattern, the probability of the first special jackpot (a type of jackpot in which the first special jackpot state is set after the jackpot play ends) is set to 95%, and the probability of the time-saving jackpot (a type of jackpot in which the time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends) is set to 5%, and prize balls cannot be obtained during the jackpot play.

The first special symbol drawing is primarily performed in the normal state, time-saving state, and first special probability state, and the second special symbol drawing is performed only in the second special probability state.

Then, only if the big jackpot is not won in the second special pattern lottery, a small jackpot lottery (determining whether or not a small jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery) is held, and if a small jackpot is won, the player can win prize balls through the small jackpot game that is held.

If the special symbol lottery does not result in a big win in the normal state, a time-saving lottery will be held, and if the time-saving lottery is won, the time-saving state will be set for a specified period of time (for example, the period until the special symbol variation is performed 20 times).

In addition, if the first special jackpot is won in the normal state, the first special jackpot state is set after the jackpot game ends. Here, in the first special jackpot state, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot is won, but the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to a low probability state when the end condition is met, and the number of special symbol changes set as the end condition is configured to be able to set one of multiple change numbers including at least the first change number and a second change number different from the first change number, for example, the first change number is 1, the second change number is 50, the third change number is 100, the fourth change number is 200, and the fifth change number is 300.

By configuring it in this way, if the conditions for ending the high probability state of normal symbols are met in the first high probability state, a high probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of normal symbols, in other words, a second high probability state that is advantageous to the player, is set, so that the player can be offered an innovative game in which the aim is for the high probability state of normal symbols to end without winning a jackpot in the first high probability state.

When a jackpot is won with the second special symbol, the probability of a second special jackpot (a jackpot in which the second special jackpot state is set after the jackpot game ends) is 95%, and the probability of a time-saving jackpot is 5%.

If the time-saving state is set and the first special symbol wins the jackpot, the second probability bonus state will be set 100%.

It is also possible to set an upper limit to the period during which the high probability state of normal symbols can be set consecutively (time-saving limit). For example, the time-saving limit is set to 10 times, and by winning the first special jackpot 10 times, the second special jackpot state is set after the end of the 10th jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game in which a more advantageous game state is set by winning consecutive jackpots, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

The first special symbol lottery may also be configured to execute a small prize lottery, and when a small prize is won, the small prize type may be determined from among a number of small prize types, including a small prize type in which the second probability variable state is set at least after the end of the small prize game. By configuring it in this way, the opportunities to transition to the second probability variable state increase, further increasing the interest of the game.

When the first probability variable state is set, a presentation may be executed that indicates to the player the number of times the special symbol will remain to change until the end condition of the high probability state of the normal symbol that has been set is met. For example, when the fifth number of changes (300 changes) is set as the end condition, the third symbol display device 81 may display "Collect 300 points," and one point may be accumulated for each change of the special symbol, and when 300 points have been accumulated, the second probability variable state may be set. In this case, if a jackpot is won in the first probability variable state, the points acquired are reset (i.e., returned to 0).

In addition, even if the first number of changes (one change) is set as the end condition, the third pattern display device 81 may display "Collect 300 points" and 300 points may be acquired when one change of the special pattern is completed, or the number of points awarded for one change of the special pattern may be varied depending on the number of changes of the end condition that is set.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which number of changes is set as the end condition for the high probability state of the normal pattern, so the player can have fun predicting which number of changes is set from the number of points awarded, which increases the interest of the game.

<Summary of technical concepts>
Next, each technical idea described in each of the above-mentioned control examples will be briefly explained. First, regarding the technical idea that the probability of obtaining an advantageous privilege by the special drawing lottery increases when the number of times the special drawing lottery using the special drawing lottery reserved acquired during the time reduction exceeds a predetermined number of times, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned fifth control example, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it has a means for acquiring the execution right of the second special pattern lottery (acquisition means capable of acquiring information) and has a means for reserving and storing the execution right of the second special pattern lottery (special drawing lottery reserved) up to the upper limit number (4 pieces) (storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means). Then, based on the execution right of the second special pattern lottery (special drawing lottery reserved) that is reserved and stored, the second special pattern lottery is executed (discrimination means capable of executing a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means). Then, a jackpot game (specific game) is executed based on the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery being a jackpot win (first discrimination result). Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern, which makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, continues until the end condition (time-saving end condition) for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is established. In addition, in the second special pattern lottery, a time-saving winning judgment can be executed separately from the jackpot winning judgment, and if it is determined that the time-saving winning has been won in the time-saving winning judgment (if it is determined that the second judgment result is true), the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern can be set without executing the jackpot game. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a plurality of game states are configured to be set, but among them, the time-saving winning judgment can be executed only in the state in which the normal state (specific period) is set.

By configuring it in this way, when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set based on winning a jackpot in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state for a normal pattern is set at the end of the jackpot game, not when the special pattern variation stops, and when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set based on winning a time-saving game in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state for a normal pattern is set at the stop of the special pattern variation. Thus, the timing at which the high probability state for a normal pattern is set can be made to differ depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state.

In addition, since it is possible to provide a period during which the time-saving winning judgment can be performed (period during which the normal state is set) and a period during which it cannot be performed (period during which the normal state is not set), it is possible to make the player interested in the period during which the special pattern lottery is performed. Note that in the fifth control example described above, it is configured so that the time-saving winning judgment is performed only in the normal state, but it is sufficient to provide a period during which the time-saving winning judgment can be performed and a period during which it is not performed. For example, it is also possible to configure so that the time-saving winning judgment can be performed in a game state in which a low probability state of a normal pattern is set (normal state, second probability state), and not to perform the time-saving winning judgment in a game state in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set (time-saving state, probability state).

Furthermore, rather than switching whether or not to execute the time-saving win judgment depending on the set game state, the probability of winning the time-saving win judgment may be made to differ depending on the game state. For example, when the normal state is set, the time-saving win judgment has a 1/6 probability of winning the time-saving win, and in other game states, the probability of winning the time-saving win may be configured to be 1/200. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set game states in which it is easy to win the time-saving win and game states in which it is difficult to win the time-saving win, so that, similar to the technical idea described above, it is possible to get the player interested in the effect, i.e., the period during which the special pattern lottery is executed.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, a first ball entry port 64 (a first ball entry means through which a game ball can enter) through which a game ball can enter and trigger the execution of a first special symbol lottery is provided, and a second ball entry port 640 (a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means) through which a game ball can enter and trigger the execution of a second special symbol lottery is provided, and the time-saving winning determination is configured to be possible only in the second special symbol lottery.

In other words, in the first special pattern lottery, no time-saving winning judgment is performed regardless of the game state set, and in the second special pattern lottery, the time-saving winning judgment can be performed during a specific period (normal state). By configuring it in this way, the amount of value that is later granted to the player can be significantly different between the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, and further between the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640.

In the fifth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery does not execute the time-saving winning judgment, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to execute the time-saving winning judgment during a specific period (normal state). However, without being limited to this, for example, the time-saving winning judgment may be executed only for the second special symbol lottery during the first specific period (normal state), and the time-saving winning judgment may be executed only for the first special symbol lottery during a second specific period (second probability change state) different from the first specific period. By configuring in this way, depending on the set period, it is possible to create a situation in which the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 is more likely to give a player a more advantageous value than the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and a situation in which the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is more likely to give a player a more advantageous value than the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, it is possible to make the player eager to play a game in which a more advantageous value is more likely to be given.

Furthermore, in this case, as in the modified example shown in FIG. 329, it is advisable to configure the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 so that the rate at which game balls enter the first ball entrance 64 is similar to the rate at which game balls enter the second ball entrance 640, regardless of which game state is set. By configuring it in this way, the player can select which ball entrance to enter the game ball at his/her discretion, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as described in each control example, the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set based on winning the time-saving state by the time-saving state winning judgment (first time-saving state) is more likely to be set as a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, i.e., a time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be established, than the time-saving state (first time-saving state) that is set based on winning the jackpot. In other words, the system is configured to vary the degree of advantage of the set time-saving state depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state. This makes it possible to vary the period (time-saving end condition) during which the time-saving state (specific setting) is set depending on the determined judgment result (setting trigger), which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing interest.

In this case, it is advisable to provide a case where the second time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state, depending on the game state before the time-saving state is set, and a case where the first time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the situation under which the time-saving state is set.

More specifically, for example, the system may be configured so that a more advantageous time-saving state is more likely to occur when the number of times special symbol lotteries have been executed since the end of the previous big win game (number of times they have been stuck) exceeds a predetermined number, compared to when this number has not been exceeded.

Next, in the seventh control example described above, it is configured so that a jackpot win and a time-saving win can be won in one special pattern lottery (see FIG. 315). This allows a jackpot win (first discrimination result) and a time-saving win (second discrimination result) to be discriminated in a overlapping manner, so that various lottery results can be expected in one special pattern lottery, such as a jackpot win, a time-saving win, or both a jackpot win and a time-saving win. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player is executed than when there are no overlapping wins (see FIG. 306(b)). Therefore, since it is easy to execute a specific type of game that is advantageous to the player by discriminating in overlapping, there is an effect that the game can be diversified by granting the player a bonus corresponding to various discrimination results.

In addition, a configuration other than that of the seventh control example described above may be used to provide a more advantageous benefit to the player in the case of a duplicate win than in the case of no duplicate wins. For example, the game state set after the jackpot game ends may be configured so that a more advantageous game state (e.g., a special bonus state, a time-saving state, etc.) can be set in the case of a duplicate win than in the case of no duplicate wins.

In addition, in the seventh control example described above, after a time-saving winning judgment (a judgment as to whether or not the result is the second judgment result) is made, a jackpot judgment (a judgment as to whether or not the result is the first judgment result) is made, and if a time-saving winning is made in one special pattern lottery, the jackpot judgment in that special pattern lottery can be made in the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the degree of advantage of the bonus game that is executed when there is a double win different from the degree of advantage of the bonus game that is executed when there is no double win.

Next, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, the type of bonus (the number of time-saving times granted after the end of the jackpot game) granted to the player when the jackpot is won in the high probability state of the normal pattern (first time-saving) set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery and the high probability state of the normal pattern (second time-saving) set based on winning the time-saving in the special pattern lottery is different (see FIG. 280 (b)). Therefore, since the selection ratio (the content of the jackpot game and the number of time-saving times granted) in the type of bonus game is variable according to the setting type (first time-saving, second time-saving), the bonus granted to the player can be different even in the high probability state of the same normal pattern (second game state), and there is an effect that the game can be diversified without setting many game states, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, the number of time-saving periods granted differs depending on the setting type (first time-saving period and second time-saving period), but this is not limited to this, and the content of the jackpot game to be executed (for example, the number of rounds played) may be configured to differ.

Furthermore, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, when the second time reduction is set rather than the first time reduction, that is, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set without a jackpot game being played, it is configured so that the high probability state for normal symbols, in which the end condition is less likely to be established, is more likely to be set. In other words, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set without winning a prize ball during a jackpot game, that is, when the second time reduction, which provides fewer benefits before the high probability state for normal symbols is set than the first time reduction, can prolong the high probability state for normal symbols, which has the effect of allowing benefits to be awarded fairly to players.

Furthermore, in the second variant of the fifth control example described above, similar to the fifth control example and the first variant of the fifth control example described above, the time-saving winning judgment (determination of the second discrimination result) is configured to be executable only in the normal state. In other words, the execution of the time-saving winning judgment is restricted in states other than the normal state. Therefore, since the time-saving winning judgment is not executed according to the game state, there is an effect of making the player more interested in the game state that has been set, and making the player look forward to the game state being set in which the second discrimination result can be determined.

In addition, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, a presentation mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery can be set so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the first or second time reduction has been set (see Figs. 278 and 279). In other words, when the first time reduction is set, a specific presentation (see Fig. 278(a)) is executed for the first period which is the sum of the special symbol change time and the subsequent jackpot game period, and when the second time reduction is set, a specific presentation (see Fig. 278(b)) is executed for the second period which is the special symbol change time (including the fixed time).

More specifically, the variable time and the jackpot game period are predefined in accordance with each special symbol lottery result so that the first period and the second period described above are approximately the same, and the performance periods of the specific effects are the same. By configuring in this way, as the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a performance indicating a high probability state of a normal symbol is executed after a specific effect with the same performance period and performance mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is watching the effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to determine which setting trigger set the high probability state of a normal symbol.

Next, in the sixth control example described above, the system is configured so that the time-saving winning judgment can be executed even during the time-saving state (second game state), and if a time-saving winning occurs during the time-saving state (second game state), it is possible to set a time-saving state (second game state) of a time-saving type in which the time-saving ending condition is unlikely to be met (the number of time-saving events is large or the probability of winning the time-saving event is high).

As a result, the longer the period for which the time-saving state is set, the more likely it is that a time-saving state of a type for which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be met will be set, making it easier to play bonus games.

In the sixth control example described above, as shown in FIG. 286(a), the probability of winning the time-saving bonus is different depending on the set game state, but the probability of winning the time-saving bonus may be set to the same. In addition, although the probability of winning the time-saving bonus is different depending on the game state, the probability of winning the time-saving bonus may also be different depending on the number of special pattern draws since the previous big win game was played. In this case, it is preferable to configure the probability of winning the time-saving bonus to be higher when the number of special pattern draws since the previous big win game is played exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 200 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grant a special bonus of winning the time-saving bonus, which is different from the big win game, to a player who has not won a big win in a special pattern draw for a long time. It goes without saying that this technical concept can be applied to other control examples.

The gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 329 includes a first discrimination means (first special symbol lottery) capable of executing a first discrimination, a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit (a big win game) based on the result of the first discrimination executed by the first discrimination means being a first discrimination result (a big win), and a second benefit (a high probability state of a normal symbol) based on the result of the first discrimination being a second discrimination result (a time-saving win) different from the first discrimination result, a second discrimination means (second special symbol lottery) capable of executing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination, and and a second benefit granting means for granting a first benefit based on the result of the second discrimination performed by the first discrimination means being a third discrimination result (winning a big win), and a third benefit (playing a small win) different from the first benefit and the second benefit based on the result of the second discrimination being a fourth discrimination result (winning a small win) different from the third discrimination result, so that the third benefit is not granted based on the first discrimination performed by the first discrimination means, and the second benefit is not granted based on the second discrimination performed by the second discrimination means.

As a result, different benefits can be awarded when the first judgment is made and when the second judgment is made, which has the effect of encouraging the player to play in order to make different judgments, and preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine relating to the above-mentioned <Gameplayability 2>, the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and if both special patterns result in a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed based on the drawing result of the special pattern on the side whose special pattern variation stopped first (determined display of special pattern), and at the point when the special pattern variation stops first (determined display of special pattern), depending on the type of jackpot, the other special pattern variation is forcibly displayed as stopped in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a miss, and the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a time-saving winning judgment in both the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern. Then, between the time when the first discrimination means determines that the first condition is met (a time-saving win has been won) and the time when the first state setting means sets the first advantageous state (a time-saving state for the first benefit), a third advantageous state (a time-saving state for the third benefit) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state can be set based on the fact that the second discrimination means determines that the second condition is met (a time-saving win has been won). Thus, in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to simultaneously (concurrently) draw the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to set a time-saving state in which a different benefit is awarded depending on the timing of the time-saving win in each special symbol draw.

In the above-mentioned <Other game characteristics>, in a gaming machine having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a first discrimination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, the game state setting means determines whether or not the result of discrimination by the discrimination means (special symbol lottery) executed in a state in which the first game state (normal state) is set is the first discrimination result. A second game state (second time-saving B) can be set based on a second discrimination result (winning second time-saving B) different from the first game state, a first game state can be set based on an end condition (time-saving end condition) being established in a state in which the second game state is set, and a third game state (second time-saving A) that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state can be set based on a result of discrimination by the discrimination means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a third discrimination result (winning second time-saving A) different from the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result. Also, the discrimination means can execute discrimination so that the probability of the discrimination result being the third discrimination result (selection rate 10%) is lower than the probability of the discrimination result being the second discrimination result (selection rate 90%).

Furthermore, as the termination condition (second time-saving termination condition of second time-saving B), at least a first termination condition can be set that can be established based on the number of determinations (number of special symbol selections) made by the determination means when the second game state is set reaching a predetermined number. In addition, a second termination condition can be set that can be established based on the result of the determination made by the determination means being a specific determination result (a small jackpot win).

In this case, the type setting means is capable of setting at least a first setting (normal time-saving state) that can set the second game state after the bonus game execution means ends, and a second setting that can set the second game state (time-saving state) without executing the bonus game based on the result of the judgment executed by the judgment means being a second judgment result (winning second time-saving B) that is different from the first judgment result, as the setting type for setting the second game state by the game state setting means, and the game state setting means is capable of setting an advantageous second game state (normal time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the first game state (normal state) and an unfavorable second game state (second time-saving B) that is less advantageous than the first game state, according to the setting type (time-saving type) set by the type setting means.

<Eighth control example>
Next, the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 330 to FIG. 335. The fifth control example described above was configured to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during a low probability state (normal state) of a normal pattern, and to make it easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance means 640 during a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal pattern. Furthermore, it was configured to execute a judgment of a time-saving winning (time-saving lottery) in the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state. In addition, it was configured to be possible to store (reserve) the lottery right of the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reservation) up to a predetermined number (4 pieces) as an upper limit.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example configured in this manner, when the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols ends while the reserved special symbol 2 is stored in the reserved memory, and a low probability state (normal state) for normal symbols is set, the second special symbol lottery based on the reserved special symbol 2 stored in the reserved memory is executed in the low probability state (normal state) for normal symbols, and if the time-saving state is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during that normal state, the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols is set again.

In other words, by configuring the period from when the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols ends and the low probability state (normal state) for normal symbols is set until a predetermined period (the period during which the second special symbol lottery based on the reserved special symbol 2 is being executed) has elapsed as a period (pull-back period) during which the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols is likely to be set, it is possible to encourage players to play with enthusiasm even after the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols has ended.

In contrast, the eighth control example is configured to be able to execute a time-saving winning judgment (time-saving lottery) in both the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, is configured to have a high probability of winning the time-saving lottery (most of the time-saving winnings are negative), and differs in that the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set based on the time-saving winning is configured to be a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the game board 13 is configured to make it easier for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery to be executed alternately, and the end condition for the second time reduction described above is set to be established when one type of special symbol lottery is executed consecutively.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this eighth control example configured in this way, if the special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set does not result in a jackpot win (jackpot probability 1/300), the second time-saving period is set by winning the time-saving period with a high probability (298/300). Then, the special symbol lottery is executed in the second time-saving period until the condition for ending the second time-saving period is met.

In addition, the second time-saving end condition is configured to be set as a first time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of special pattern lotteries executed during the second time-saving period reaches a specific number (100 times), and a second time-saving end condition that is established when the special pattern lotteries are executed in a predetermined order, and the second time-saving end condition is configured to be established before the first time-saving end condition is established.

Therefore, when the second time-saving period is set, the player can be motivated to play in order to achieve the second time-saving end condition in order to end the second time-saving period as soon as possible.

In addition, the degree of advantage given to the player is varied depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, so that it is easier to set an advantageous gaming state after the end of the jackpot game if the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state than if the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of special pattern lottery that will be held after the second time-saving period ends.

Now, with reference to Figure 331, the configuration of sorting unit 1064 will be described. Figures 331(a)-(b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of sorting unit 1064. In reality, a cover body is placed on the front side of this, and this cover body is made of a material whose interior is visible, and the surface of the spiral pattern is colored in a way that makes it difficult or impossible to see inside, making it difficult to see inside.

At the top of the distribution unit 1064, a pass-through opening 1064b through which game balls can enter is provided, and a transparent ball entry sensor 1064a is disposed to detect when a game ball has passed through the pass-through opening 1064b. Game balls that pass through the pass-through opening 1064b are alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entry opening 64a and the second ball entry opening 1641 disposed below.

The sorting member 900 receives the game ball that has entered the passage opening in the storage section 900a or 900c of the sorting member 900. When the game ball is received in the storage section 900a, the weight of the game ball causes the sorting member 900 to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 331(a)), and guides the game ball to the first ball entrance opening 64a. Here, the sorting member 900 is configured to be able to rotate approximately 90 degrees left and right, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the storage sections 900a and 900b.

A base-side magnet 901 is disposed on the base body provided on the rear side of the sorting unit 1064 at a position on the center line of the passage opening where the magnet 901b of the sorting member 900 passes. The magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have mutually repelling polarities. In detail, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (south pole or north pole) is generated at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed and fixed so that the tip faces the sorting member 900 side.

The magnet 900b is also a rod-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that its tip faces the base-side magnet 901. When the sorting member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the storage sections 900a and 900b is directly above (on the center line of the gap between the passage openings that allows approximately one game ball to enter), the base-side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (with their tips facing each other). Here, the magnets are arranged so that they have the same polarity (for example, north and north poles), so they repel each other and the sorting member 900 does not stop in a position where the boundary wall faces directly above, but rather remains in a position rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b is positioned on the center line of the passage opening (upper position), the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other, causing the sorting member 900 to rotate to the left or right, so that either the storage section 900a or the storage section 900b faces the side that receives the game balls entering the sorting unit 640 (the upper side of the gaming machine). This prevents the entering game ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the storage sections 900a and 900b, causing ball clogging.

In addition, the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 can prevent the sorting member 900 from rotating to the right (the storage unit 900a facing upward) after the storage unit 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first ball entrance 64a. As a result, after guiding the game ball to the first ball entrance 64a, the storage unit 900b faces upward, and the next game ball that enters the sorting unit 640 is received by the storage unit 900b, and the sorting member 900 rotates about 90 degrees to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the second ball entrance 1641. In this way, the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the game ball that enters the sorting unit 640 to the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 1641. Therefore, game balls can be evenly distributed between the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 1641, and a lottery game resulting from a win through the first ball entrance 64a (hereinafter, the first lottery game) and a lottery game resulting from a win through the second ball entrance 1641 (hereinafter, the second lottery game), which will be described later, can be efficiently executed.

The right-side second ball entrance 1640 is an entrance that, like the second ball entrance 1641, starts the lottery for the second special symbol when a game ball enters it. The second special symbol has four reserved balls in total between the second ball entrance 1641 and the right-side second ball entrance 1640.

The passing opening 1064b (large enough for one game ball to pass through) of the sorting unit 1064 can accept game balls that have passed through the right side of the variable display unit 80 as well as game balls that have passed through the left side, while the second right-side ball entrance 1640 is configured to only accept game balls that have passed through the right side.

Here, FIG. 331(a) shows a case where the sorting member 900 is rotated to a position where the storage section 900a faces upward and is stopped. In this case, when a game ball passes through the passage opening 1064b, the game ball is stored in the storage section 900a, and the weight of the game ball rotates the sorting member 900 counterclockwise, and the game ball is guided to the first ball entrance 64a while being guided to the guide section 900z1.

After the game balls are distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entrance 64a, the distribution member 900 is stopped at a position where the storage section 900c faces upward, as shown in FIG. 331(b). After that, when the game ball passes through the passage opening 1064b, it is stored in the storage section 900c and the game ball is distributed to the second ball entrance 1641. Thus, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 1641.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 331(b), among the game balls that enter through the passage port 1061b of the sorting unit 1064, those that cannot be properly guided by the sorting member 900 to the first ball inlet 64a or the second ball inlet 1641 flow down the ball discharge path formed between the outer wall portion of the sorting unit 1064 and each ball inlet, and are discharged to the outside of the sorting unit 1064.

By configuring it in this manner, even if, for example, a game ball that flows forcefully into the passage port 1061b of the sorting unit 1064 collides with the sorting member 900 and flows down inside the sorting unit 1064 without being guided by the guiding sections 900z1 and 900z2, it is possible to prevent balls from becoming clogged inside the sorting unit 1064.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the position (rotational state) of the sorting member 900 is configured to be identifiable by a rotation sensor (not shown). Specifically, a rotation sensor capable of detecting the amount of rotation of the rotation shaft 900d of the sorting member 900 is provided, and the position of the sorting member 900 can be identified based on the detection result of the rotation sensor. Based on the position of the sorting member 900 identified based on the detection result of the rotation sensor, it is then possible to determine which ball entry port (first ball entry port 64a, second ball entry port 1061) the game ball that enters the passage port 1061b will be guided to next.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute notification effects to inform the player whether or not it is possible to consecutively acquire the same type of reserved special chart, and guidance effects to allow the player to consecutively acquire the same type of reserved special chart, making it easy for the player to play in order to achieve the second time-saving end condition.

In the fifth control example, the position of the sorting member 900 is determined using a rotation sensor, but the position of the sorting member 900 may be determined each time based on the ball-entering port through which the ball entered. Specifically, the sorting member 900 is determined to have the storage section 900c facing upwards based on the ball entering the first ball-entering port 64a, and the sorting member 900 is determined to have the storage section 900a facing upwards based on the ball entering the second ball-entering port 1641. By configuring in this way, the position of the sorting member 900 can be determined without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. Even if the sorting member 900 rotates due to vibration or the like, the position of the sorting member 900 can be correctly determined by updating and determining the position each time a ball enters the ball-entering port.

As described above with reference to FIG. 331, in the fifth control example, under normal circumstances, the game balls that flow into the distribution unit 1064 are alternately guided to the first ball inlet 64a and the second ball inlet 1641. When a new special chart reservation cannot be obtained based on the game balls entering each inlet, the same type of special chart reservation can be continuously obtained by changing the position of the distribution member 900 without obtaining a special chart reservation by having the game ball enter the distribution unit 1064. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, some of the game balls that flow into the distribution unit 1064 may be configured to enter the first ball inlet 64a or the second ball inlet 2164 without being accommodated in the distribution member 900.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to acquire the special symbol reserve (special symbol 1 reserve) corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserve) alternately using the sorting member 900, and to acquire the special symbol reserve without using the sorting member 900, and to acquire the special symbol reserve in an irregular order using the special symbol reserve and the special symbol reserve. This makes it easier to establish the second time-saving end condition.

Returning to FIG. 330, the explanation will continue. In the right area of the game board 13, there is provided a right second ball entrance 1640 and an electric device 1640a as a variable means that can be changed between an open state where a game ball can be inserted into the right second ball entrance 1640 and a closed state where it is more difficult to insert the game ball than in the open state.

This electric device 1640a, like the electric device 640a in the fifth control example described above, is configured to be variable from a closed state to an open state according to a predetermined variable pattern by a winning game (normal winning game) that is executed when a winning symbol is obtained in a normal symbol lottery that is executed based on the game ball passing through the through gate 67. Note that the technology related to the normal symbol lottery and the content of the control process for the electric device 1640a that is executed based on a winning symbol in the normal symbol lottery are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example used in the fifth control example described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In other words, in this eighth control example, similar to the first control example described above, when a normal symbol lottery is won, a normal symbol winning game (long opening winning game) in which it is easier to get the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640, and a normal symbol winning game (normal opening winning game) in which it is more difficult to get the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640 than the long opening winning game, can be executed. In either the game state in which a low probability state for normal symbols is set, or the game state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set, a long opening winning game can be executed.

By configuring it in this way, when an unfavorable time-saving state that is unfavorable to the player is set as the game state among the time-saving states, a normal symbol lottery is won and a long opening winning game is executed, making it possible to cause multiple game balls to enter the right second ball entrance 1640. As a result, in this eighth embodiment in which a special symbol lottery is executed according to the order in which the game balls enter, it becomes possible to execute the same type of special symbol (second special symbol) consecutively, making it easier to establish the time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) for ending the unfavorable time-saving state.

Therefore, by winning the normal pattern lottery and playing the long opening winning game, the player can be given the privilege of efficiently executing the special game pattern lottery, as well as the privilege of ending the disadvantageous time-saving state, which makes it possible for the player to become interested in the results of the normal pattern lottery.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this eighth control example, the time-saving state is configured to be executable in two states: a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player (advantageous time-saving state), and a time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player (unfavorable time-saving state). In terms of the efficiency of execution of the special symbol lottery, the advantageous time-saving state is configured to be executed more efficiently than the unfavorable time-saving state. More specifically, when the unfavorable time-saving state is set, the expectation of being able to get the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640 during a normal winning game that is executed based on a winning normal symbol lottery is configured to be about the same as in the normal state.

Furthermore, in terms of the bonuses granted in the event of a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery (the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends), the system is configured so that a bonus more favorable to the player is granted (is more likely to be granted) in the advantageous time-saving state than in the unfavorable time-saving state. More specifically, the bonus granted in the event of a jackpot win during an unfavorable time-saving state is configured so that a bonus more unfavorable to the player is granted (is more likely to be granted) than in the event of a jackpot win during the normal state.

Therefore, of the three game states, the normal state, the advantageous time-saving state, and the unfavorable time-saving state, the advantageous time-saving state is the game state that is most advantageous to the player, followed by the normal state, which is the game state that is most advantageous to the player, and the unfavorable time-saving state which is the game state that is most disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the contents of the time-saving end condition for ending the advantageous time-saving state (advantageous time-saving end condition) are different from the contents of the time-saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving end condition). Specifically, for both the advantageous time-saving end condition and the disadvantageous time-saving end condition, a first time-saving end condition is specified that is established based on the number of special pattern lotteries executed after the time-saving state is set, and for the disadvantageous time-saving end condition, a second time-saving end condition is specified that is established based on the execution order of the special pattern lotteries executed during the time-saving state.

As described above, in the eighth control example, the allocation unit 1064 is configured to make it easier for game balls to enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 1641 alternately, so that the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are normally performed alternately. Here, for example, if a long opening winning game is performed based on a winning normal symbol lottery, a game is performed by hitting the right side to cause the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640, so that it is possible to create an event in which the second special symbol lottery is performed consecutively.

In the eighth control example, the second time-saving end condition that is established based on the execution order of the special symbol lotteries executed during the time-saving state can be set to a second time-saving end condition that is established based on the same type of special symbol lottery being executed consecutively. Therefore, a player in an unfavorable time-saving state can be made to play in the hope of executing a long opening winning game in order to establish the second time-saving end condition.

In addition, in order to continuously draw the same type of special symbol, it is possible to play a game in which game balls flow into the allocation unit 1064 without playing a long opening winning game, for example, in a state in which new reserved special symbols cannot be acquired, that is, in a state in which the upper limit of reserved special symbols has been reserved and stored. For example, it is possible to play a game in which the position of the allocation member 900 is changed by further flowing game balls into the allocation unit 1064 in a state in which it is difficult to execute a new special symbol change, for example, in a state in which a left-hand hit game is played during a big winning game and the upper limit of reserved special symbols 1 and 2 has been acquired.

In the eighth control example, during a jackpot game, the position of the sorting member 900 is identified, and a guide effect (see FIG. 333(b)) can be executed to create a state in which special reserved symbols corresponding to the same type of special symbol can be consecutively acquired based on the acquisition status (acquisition order) of the reserved special symbols 1 and 2. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which, during a jackpot game in which a right-hand play is executed, a left-hand play can be executed based on the content of the guide effect that is executed, allowing the player to execute an advantageous game.

<About the performance content in the eighth control example>
Here, with reference to Figures 332 to 333, the content of the presentation executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this eighth control example will be described.

In this eighth control example, the game states can be set to a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and a chance state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols).Furthermore, the time-saving states can be set to an advantageous time-saving state (a time-saving state set after the end of a jackpot game, and a time-saving state set with a low probability when a time-saving win is won) and an unfavorable time-saving state (a time-saving state set with a high probability when a time-saving win is won).

The unfavorable time-saving state is actually a state of high probability of normal symbols, but is configured to make it more difficult for game balls to enter the right second ball entrance 1640 compared to the favorable time-saving state, and is a time-saving state in which game balls can only enter the right second ball entrance 1640 to the same extent as in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols). Therefore, even if a time-saving state is set, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, it is configured so that a game in which game balls flow into the distribution unit 1064 by playing left-handed, rather than playing right-handed to enter the right second ball entrance 1640, as in the case of the normal state.

When a special symbol jackpot is won in the normal state, a more advantageous bonus (for example, more rounds of jackpot play) is awarded than when a special symbol jackpot is won in the unfavorable time-saving state. Therefore, the unfavorable time-saving state is a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state. On the other hand, the favorable time-saving state is configured so that a normal symbol jackpot game is executed so that it is relatively easy to get the game ball into the right second ball entrance 1640, and right-hitting play is configured to be advantageous to the player. Therefore, the game states that are most advantageous to the player are the unfavorable time-saving state, the normal state, and the favorable time-saving state, in that order.

Although details will be described later, the disadvantageous time-saving state is a game state that can be set after the variable display ends when the time-saving lottery executed in the special pattern lottery wins the time-saving lottery, and in this eighth control example, the time-saving lottery is configured to win with a high probability (299/300). The condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state differs depending on the type of special pattern that won the disadvantageous time-saving lottery, and when the disadvantageous time-saving lottery is won with the first special pattern, the disadvantageous time-saving state ends when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed once (i.e., when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed consecutively), or when the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern are executed a total of 100 times. On the other hand, if the disadvantageous time-saving effect is won with the second special symbol, the disadvantageous time-saving effect is ended when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once (i.e., when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed consecutively), or when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed a total of 100 times.

As described above, in the gaming machine 13 in this control example, the game ball that enters the distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 330) is alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) to the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) and the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331) located below it, and if the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) is won, a lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and if the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331) is won, a lottery for the second special symbol is executed. The lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game balls entered the corresponding ball entrances. For example, if the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) and then the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331) are won in that order, the first special symbol drawing will be performed, followed by the second special symbol drawing. In this way, it is configured so that it is difficult for either the variable display for showing the drawing result of the first special symbol or the variable display for showing the drawing result of the second special symbol to be performed consecutively.

Here, an example of a case where the variable display of any special symbol type is executed consecutively in this control example will be described. As described above, in the gaming machine 13, the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) distributes the gaming balls to the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) and the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331), and up to four pieces of winning information for each special symbol are reserved. Then, when the number of reserved special symbols has reached the upper limit (four in this control example), if a gaming ball newly enters the corresponding ball entrance, the winning information is not reserved (hereinafter referred to as an overflow winning). Then, when the number of reserved special symbols for both symbols reaches the upper limit (in this control example, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are 8 in total), if a game ball enters the distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 330), the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) distributes the game ball to an entrance different from the entrance corresponding to the special symbol type of the 8th reserved symbol, but the winning information is not reserved because it is an overflow winning. Note that the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) changes its position by distributing the game ball, so it is possible to distribute the game ball that enters the next distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 331) to the entrance corresponding to the special symbol type of the 8th reserved symbol, and it is possible to continuously execute the variable display of the same special symbol type as the 8th reserved symbol, thereby ending the disadvantageous time-saving state. This configuration can motivate players to shoot game balls in order to accumulate reserves in order to end the unfavorable time-saving state.

In this control example, the winning information of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is configured to reserve up to four balls, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four and may be set to three or less (e.g., two) or five or more reserved balls (e.g., eight). Also, instead of displaying the reserved patterns in the small display area Dm19, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as numbers in part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be displayed in different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls. Also, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls.

Figure 332 (a) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when the second special symbol reservation is consecutively obtained by overflow winning in the disadvantageous time-saving state. When the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, the number of remaining changes until the chance change is displayed in the small display area Dm12, and is updated by subtracting one each time the change display of each special symbol is executed. Note that the chance change in this control example refers to the change display of the special symbol to show the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. In this way, the configuration allows the player to determine whether the current game state is the normal state or the disadvantageous time-saving state, making it easier for the player to decide whether to continue playing or not depending on the number of remaining changes until the chance change.

The first special symbol is displayed stationary in the small display area Dm1, and the second special symbol is displayed in a changing state in the small display area Dm2, allowing the player to easily tell which special symbol is changing.

The reserved special symbols are displayed in the small display area Dm19, with a circle filled with diagonal lines indicating the reserved first special symbol and a circle filled with black indicating the reserved second special symbol. The display screen shown in FIG. 332(a) indicates that the reserved number of first special symbols is three and the reserved number of second special symbols is four, and reserved symbols hr6 and hr7 are reserved symbols indicating the winning information of the second special symbol, so the variable display of the second special symbol is executed continuously. As described above, when the variable display of one special symbol is executed continuously, the disadvantageous time-saving state ends, and the disadvantageous time-saving state ends due to the stop of the variation of the special symbol based on reserved symbol hr7, and after the variation of the special symbol based on reserved symbol hr7 stops, the variable display of the special symbol executed next is a chance variation.

Here, if the display shown in the small display area Dm12 is subtracted by 1 each time a special pattern change display is executed, when a special pattern change display based on the reserved pattern hr7 is executed, "73 more chance changes" will be displayed, and the number of remaining changes until the chance change is actually executed will not match the number of remaining changes displayed in the small display area Dm12, which may cause the player to distrust the game information.

In this control example, the system predicts that the conditions for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state as shown in FIG. 332(a) will be met, and when the number of remaining changes until the chance change displayed in the small display area Dm12 does not match the number of remaining changes until the chance change is executed (i.e., the normal state is set), a presentation is executed in the small display area Dm17 that shortens the number of remaining changes until the chance change displayed in the small display area Dm12, thereby matching the number of remaining changes until the chance change is actually executed with the number of remaining changes displayed in the small display area Dm12, and providing correct game information.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 332(a), the word "Lucky" is displayed above the reserved symbols hr6 and hr7 to give the player advance notice that the conditions for ending the unfavorable time-saving state will be met. This configuration makes it easier for the player to recognize which reserved symbols will cause a chance fluctuation, making it easier for the player to understand which fluctuations they should pay attention to.

In this control example, the number of remaining variations until the chance variation is displayed in the small display area Dm12, and is subtracted by one each time a special pattern variation display is executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration in which points are accumulated and a chance variation is executed when a specific number of points (e.g., 100 points) is accumulated may be used. In this case, one point is added each time a special pattern variation display is executed, and if the same type of special pattern variation display is executed consecutively, the points can be accumulated up to the MAX, creating a presentation that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In this control example, the disadvantageous time-saving state ends after the variable display of the same special pattern is executed consecutively, and the variable display of the next special pattern executed is a chance change, but this is not limited to this. When the variable display of the same special pattern is executed consecutively, the disadvantageous time-saving state may end at the start of the variable display of the next special pattern executed, and a chance change may be executed.

Figure 332 (b) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when a normal symbol is won and the electric device 1640a (see Figure 330) associated with the right-side second ball entrance 1640 (see Figure 330) is long open for the normal symbol winning game. The small display area Dm11 displays a display mode indicating that a normal symbol has been won, and when the normal symbol winning game is executed, the small display area Dm4 displays "Hit right" to guide the player on how to play the normal symbol winning game, the small display area dm18 displays a display indicating that the electric device 1640a (see Figure 330) associated with the right-side second ball entrance 1640 (see Figure 330) is open, and the sub-display area Ds displays "Hit right and aim for the electric chute." This allows the player to easily understand that the game involves firing the game ball toward the second ball entrance 1640 on the right side (see FIG. 330), and allows the player to play in a way that suits the game situation.

Here, when the game ball enters the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), the winning information of the second special symbol is reserved. In the case of FIG. 332(b), the last reserved symbol hr5 displayed in the small display area Dm19 is the reserved symbol of the second special symbol, so when the game ball enters the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed continuously, and the disadvantageous time-saving state can be ended. Therefore, in order to inform the player that it is advantageous to have the game ball enter the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), "Chance to get chance variation" is displayed in the main display area Dm. By configuring in this way, it is possible to strongly encourage the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), and it is possible to make the player eager to play.

In addition, if three reserved second special symbols are already stored and the last reserved symbol displayed in the small display area Dm19 (for example, reserved symbol hr6) is a reserved symbol of the first special symbol, even if multiple game balls enter the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), only one winning information of the second special symbol is reserved, so the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be executed continuously. Therefore, if the end condition of the disadvantageous time-saving state cannot be established even if a game ball enters the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), a different display mode (for example, a display such as "Chance to save reserved symbols") may be displayed in the main display area Dm. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide appropriate game information to the player, and the reliability of the game information can be increased.

Figure 333 (a) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when suggesting that the disadvantageous time-saving state will end. The main display area Dm12 displays "3 more chances until chance change", indicating that the first special pattern and the second special pattern have been displayed a total of 98 times since the disadvantageous time-saving state was set. In other words, when the display of the special pattern based on the reserved pattern hr2 ends, the display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern will be displayed a total of 100 times, and the condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state is met. In this case, the drawing of the special pattern based on the reserved pattern hr3 will be performed in the normal state, so in order to suggest that the drawing of the special pattern will be performed in the normal state, the reserved pattern hr3 is displayed in a different display mode (a reserved pattern with a star pattern displayed in a white circle) from the reserved pattern corresponding to the winning information of the first special pattern and the reserved pattern corresponding to the winning information of the second special pattern, and "Attention" is displayed above the reserved pattern hr3. By configuring it in this way, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display of the special pattern based on the reserved pattern hr3 is a chance variation, and the player's sense of anticipation for the variable display of the special pattern executed based on the reserved pattern hr3 can be increased during the period until the variable display based on the reserved pattern hr3 is executed.

The main display area Dm also displays "This chance variation may be a lucky variation," which suggests the result of a pre-read of the winning information for reserved pattern hr3, and in this case suggests that there is a high possibility that the lottery result for the special pattern based on reserved pattern hr3 will be a big win. This can further heighten the player's sense of anticipation for the variation display of the special pattern executed based on reserved pattern hr3.

In this control example, the main display area Dm indicates the results of the foreseeing of the reserved pattern hr3, and the display mode of the reserved pattern hr3 displayed in the small display area Dm19 indicates that a lottery for a special pattern based on the reserved pattern hr3 will be executed in the normal state, but this is not limited to the above. The display mode of the reserved pattern hr3 may also indicate the results of the foreseeing, and for example, the color of the reserved pattern may be changed to notify the likelihood of winning the jackpot.

Figure 333 (b) is an example of a display screen that is displayed during the ending period of a jackpot game based on winning a regular jackpot. A display mode indicating that a regular jackpot has been won is displayed in the small display area Dm, and the word "Ending" is displayed in the small display area Dm5 to inform the player that the jackpot game is in the ending period.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, it is configured so that winning the jackpot with the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player than winning the jackpot with the second special symbol. Then, when the jackpot game following a normal jackpot win ends, the first special symbol lottery after the jackpot game ends is executed in the normal state. Therefore, by displaying "Lucky, normal variation starts with special symbol 1" in the sub-display area Ds, the player is notified in advance that the first special symbol lottery to be executed after the jackpot game ends will be executed with the first special symbol that is advantageous to the player, and the player can also be interested in the display of the special symbol variation after the jackpot game ends. Note that if the first special symbol lottery after the jackpot game ends is executed with the second special symbol, a different display mode (for example, a display mode that does not display "Lucky") is displayed.

During a jackpot game, the display of special symbols is not changed, so it is a period during which players can easily accumulate reserved balls. As described above, when the reserved number of each special symbol reaches the upper limit and a game ball enters the distribution unit 1640 (see FIG. 330), the winning information is not reserved, but the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) can be changed. In this control example, the position of the distribution member 900 is configured to be identifiable by a rotation sensor 990 (not shown). Therefore, in this control example, the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol hr8 and the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) are identified, and the player is notified of whether it would be advantageous to change the position of the distribution member due to an overflow winning.

Specifically, when the next winning information becomes available for reservation, if the winning information of the same special symbol type as the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 is not available for reservation, that is, if the winning information of the same special symbol type can be made available for reservation by changing the position of the distribution member 900 due to an overflow winning, as shown in FIG. 333(b), "Get a big chance if you put one ball in the navel before the big win ends" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a schematic diagram corresponding to the current position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) is displayed in the small display area Dm18, thereby executing an effect that encourages the player to put a game ball into the distribution unit 1640 (see FIG. 330). By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy a game in which game balls are fired even during the ending period of the big win.

When the next winning information becomes available for reservation, if the winning information of the same special pattern type as the special pattern type corresponding to the reserved pattern displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 is available for reservation, the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) will change due to the overflow winning, and the winning information of the same special pattern type will no longer be available for reservation, so the message "Get a big chance if you land a ball in the center before the big win ends" will not be displayed in the center of the main display area Dm.

When the next winning information becomes available for reservation, if the winning information of the same special pattern type as the special pattern type corresponding to the reserved pattern displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 is available for reservation, a display mode that notifies the player that an overflow winning is unfavorable may be displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. This configuration makes it easier for the player to determine whether an overflow winning is favorable or unfavorable.

In this control example, the rotation sensor 990 is used to determine the position of the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331), but the position of the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) may be determined each time based on the ball-entering opening through which the ball enters. Specifically, the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) is determined to be in a state in which the storage section 900c (see FIG. 331) faces upwards based on the ball entering the first ball-entering opening 64a (see FIG. 331). By configuring in this way, the position of the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) can be determined without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. Even if the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) rotates due to vibration or the like, the position of the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) can be correctly determined by updating and determining the position each time a ball enters the ball-entering opening.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth control example>
Next, the contents of the electrical configuration in this eighth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 334 to Fig. 338. This eighth control example differs from the above-mentioned fifth control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed. Note that detailed description of the same contents as those in the above-mentioned fifth control example will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 334(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this eighth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this eighth control example differs from the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned fifth control example (see FIG. 244(a)) in that it has a fluctuation pattern selection 8 table 202gb instead of the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 202db, a jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd instead of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd, a time-saving random number 8 table 202ge instead of the time-saving random number 5 table 202de, and a time-saving type selection 8 table 202gf instead of the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df.

The jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd is a data table that is referenced when selecting the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, similar to the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd described above. In the above-mentioned fifth control example, there was the special pattern 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, and the special pattern 2 jackpot 5 table 202dd2 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery. However, in this eighth control example, the jackpot type is selected with the same allocation content regardless of the special pattern type, so the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd is referenced when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery.

Here, the detailed contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd will be explained with reference to FIG. 335(a). FIG. 335(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd in a schematic manner. As shown in FIG. 335(a), the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd specifies the jackpot type (jackpot A8, jackpot B8) in association with the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is normal (regular state), "jackpot A8" is defined for the range of the acquired first win type counter C2 value of "0 to 94", and "jackpot B8" is defined for the range of "95 to 99". Also, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than normal (regular state), that is, in the time-saving state or the probability variable state, "jackpot A8" is defined for the range of the acquired first win type counter C2 value of "0 to 49", and "jackpot B8" is defined for the range of "50 to 99".

The jackpot type "jackpot A8" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 16, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "60" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "60" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the random number value (counter value) associated with "jackpot A8" is 95 (0-94) in the normal state, so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, the probability that "jackpot A8" will be determined is 95% (95/100). On the other hand, the number is 50 (0-49) in other than the normal state, so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in a game state other than the normal state, the probability that "jackpot A8" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

The jackpot type "jackpot B8" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 6, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "60" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "60" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the random number value (counter value) associated with "jackpot B8" is 5 (95-99) in the normal state, so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, the probability that "jackpot B8" will be determined is 5% (5/100). On the other hand, the number is 50 (50-99) in other than the normal state, so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in a game state other than the normal state, the probability that "jackpot B8" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

In other words, in this eighth control example, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the selection ratio of the jackpot type set according to the set game state is varied, and it is configured so that when a jackpot is won during a normal state, the jackpot type (jackpot A8) that is advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected than when a jackpot is won outside the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, players can play in the hope that many special symbol lotteries will be executed during the normal state.

Next, the time-saving random number 8 table 202ge will be explained. This time-saving random number 8 table 202ge is a data table that is referenced in the time-saving judgment that is executed when the result of the special pattern lottery is other than a jackpot win (miss), and is used to determine whether or not a time-saving win has occurred.

Now, referring to FIG. 335(b), the contents of the time-saving random number 8 table 202ge will be explained. FIG. 335(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 8 table 202ge. As shown in FIG. 335(b), the time-saving random number 8 table 202ge stipulates the value (range) of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a time-saving win in correspondence with the special symbol type (special symbol type) and the game state.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol lottery and the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the range of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 value of "3 to 899" is specified as the judgment value of the time-saving winning. Also, when the game state is other than the normal state, the judgment value of the time-saving winning is not specified (shown as "-" in the figure). Similarly, when the special symbol type is the second special symbol lottery and the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the range of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 value of "3 to 899" is specified as the judgment value of the time-saving winning. Also, when the game state is other than the normal state, the judgment value of the time-saving winning is not specified (shown as "-" in the figure).

Here, in this eighth control example, the determination of whether or not a time-saving win has been made in the special pattern lottery (time-saving lottery) is made to be executed if the jackpot has not been won in the special pattern lottery, i.e., if the jackpot has been won but not won in the jackpot lottery, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1, which is determined to have won a jackpot in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, is set to a range of "0 to 2" (see first winning random number 5 table 202da), the system is configured to always win the time-saving win if the jackpot has not been won in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state.

As described above, in this eighth control example, the contents of the time-saving random number 8 table 202ge are regulated so that if a loser wins in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, a time-saving win is always won. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the range of the judgment value for the time-saving win to be regulated so that it is part of the loser wins in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the special pattern lotteries continuously without winning the time-saving win.

In addition, in this eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 335(b), the judgment value for winning the time-saving mode is the same regardless of the special pattern type, but this is not limited to this, and different judgment values may be specified depending on the special pattern type. For example, it may be configured so that it is more difficult to win the time-saving mode when the first special pattern lottery is executed during the normal state than when the second special pattern lottery is executed. In this way, by making the probability of winning the time-saving mode different depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed during the normal state, it is possible to easily make the number of special pattern lotteries executed consecutively during the normal state different depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed, so that the player can be interested in which special pattern type of special pattern lottery was executed (will be executed) during the normal state.

When the probability of winning the time-saving feature is made different depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed during the normal state, it is preferable to configure the special pattern type (for example, the first special pattern) for which a special pattern lottery advantageous to the player is executed during the normal state (which is more likely to grant a beneficial bonus to the player when a jackpot is won) to be less likely to win the time-saving feature among multiple special pattern types. By configuring it in this way, the first special pattern lottery is executed during the normal state, so that if the lottery result is a jackpot, a beneficial bonus to the player is more likely to be granted, and if the result is not a jackpot, it is easier to execute the special pattern lottery again in the normal state, making it possible to select a special pattern type that is more advantageous to the player.

In addition, as in the eighth control example, when the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are basically configured to be easily executed alternately, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed so that the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is more difficult to win the time-saving lottery than the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, it may be configured so that the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is more difficult to win the time-saving lottery than the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. By configuring in this way, even if the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to make it easier to execute the first special symbol lottery while continuing the normal state. By configuring in this way, for example, when the disadvantageous time-saving state is ended and the normal state that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by setting the disadvantageous time-saving state again just by executing the second special symbol lottery that is disadvantageous to the player once.

Also, as shown in FIG. 335(b), in this eighth control example, the determination of whether or not a time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) is performed only when the normal state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of whether or not a time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) may be performed even when another game state is set.

For example, it is possible to configure the system so that even when an unfavorable time-saving state (a time-saving state that is set when a time-saving win is won for a specific type of time-saving win) that is disadvantageous to the player is set, the system can be configured so that a time-saving win judgment (time-saving lottery) can be executed, and when a time-saving win is won during an unfavorable time-saving state, a shortened time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is immediately met can be set. By configuring the system in this way, a player playing during an unfavorable time-saving state can be made to play in parallel with a game that aims to meet the time-saving end condition and a game that aims to win a time-saving win in order to end the unfavorable time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving win is won during an unfavorable time-saving state, the game may be configured to transition to a time-saving state (favorable time-saving state) that is set after the end of a big win game, or the game may be configured to be able to determine whether a time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) during a favorable time-saving state, and to transition to an unfavorable time-saving state if a time-saving win is won during a favorable time-saving state.

In this way, by configuring it so that it is possible to judge whether a time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) when a time-saving state has already been set, and by configuring it so that if a time-saving win has been made, it is possible to transition to a time-saving state with a different degree of advantage from the set time-saving state, it is possible to set a period during which it is better to win a time-saving win (a period during which an unfavorable time-saving state is set) and a period during which it is better not to win a time-saving win (a period during which an advantageous time-saving state is set). Note that in this eighth control example, since it is configured so that winning a time-saving win during a normal state makes it easier to set an unfavorable time-saving state than an advantageous time-saving state, the period during which the normal state is set is a period during which it is better not to win a time-saving win.

In this case, for example, the content of the presentation to suggest to the player the result of the time-saving winning can be configured to differ depending on the set game state in addition to the result of the time-saving winning; if the time-saving winning occurs during a period in which it is better to win the time-saving winning (a period in which an unfavorable time-saving winning state is set), a presentation mode that congratulates the player can be set, and if the time-saving winning occurs during a period in which it is better not to win the time-saving winning state (a period in which an advantageous time-saving winning state is set), a presentation mode that disappoints the player can be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the presentation in a presentation mode that corresponds to the degree of advantage of the player for the same time-saving winning result, and it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

Returning to Fig. 334(a), the explanation will continue. The variation pattern selection 8 table 202gb is a data table in which the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed to show the result of the special symbol lottery is specified, similar to the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db in the fifth control example described above, and differs in that the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gb for special symbol variation and time-saving 8 (see Fig. 336(a)) is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db2 for special symbol variation and time-saving 8 (see Fig. 248(a)) as the data table to be referenced when the special symbol variation or time-saving mode is set as the gaming mode, but is otherwise the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the detailed contents of the 8 tables 202db2 for special bonuses and time-saving will be explained with reference to FIG. 336(a). FIG. 336(a) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the 8 tables 202db2 for special bonuses and time-saving. As shown in FIG. 336(a), the 8 tables 202db2 for special bonuses and time-saving differ in that different patterns of fluctuation of the fluctuation time are stipulated according to the number of reserved special charts (number of reserved special charts 1, number of reserved special charts 2).

As shown in FIG. 336(a), in this eighth control example, as in each of the control examples described above, different fluctuation patterns of fluctuation time are defined according to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, but the illustration of the fluctuation patterns defined for each range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is omitted.

Specifically, when the time-saving type is "time-saving after jackpot (high probability state of normal symbols set after jackpot play ends)," various variation patterns are defined in accordance with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved number (0-4), the special symbol 2 reserved number (0-4), and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, and the special symbol variation is executed with a variation time of "5-90 seconds" according to the selected variation pattern. Although detailed explanations are omitted, as with each of the control examples described above, various variation patterns are defined in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the result of the special symbol lottery so that a variation pattern corresponding to a longer variation time (90 seconds) is more likely to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win than when the result is not a jackpot win.

In addition, various fluctuation patterns are defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the value of the number of reserved special drawings so that a fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a shorter fluctuation time (e.g., 5 seconds) is more likely to be selected when the number of reserved special drawings is large than when the number is small.

Next, when the time-saving type is "Time-saving A8", if the number of reserved special charts 1 is "0-2" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "0-2", various fluctuation patterns corresponding to fluctuation times of "5-90 seconds" are specified, and if the number of reserved special charts 1 is "0-2" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3, 4", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to fluctuation times of "5-60 seconds" are specified. Also, if the number of reserved special charts 1 is "3" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "0-2", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to fluctuation times of "5-60 seconds" are specified, and if the number of reserved special charts 1 is "3" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3, 4", a short fluctuation pattern corresponding to a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is specified.

Furthermore, when the number of reserved special charts 1 is "4" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "0 to 2", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to a fluctuation time of "5 to 60 seconds" are specified, and when the number of reserved special charts 1 is "3" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3, 4", a short fluctuation pattern corresponding to a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is specified.

Here, in this eighth control example, the special pattern lottery is executed in accordance with the order in which the game balls enter the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 1641, and the right second ball entrance 1640 (winning order), and the variation pattern is selected based on the number of reserved special charts 1 and 2 that have been acquired, so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected when the number of reserved special charts is large than when the number is small. By configuring it in this way, it is easier to execute the special pattern lottery with a short variation time when a large number of reserved special charts have been acquired, making it less likely that a situation will occur in which the number of reserved special charts 1 and 2 both reach their upper limit.

By configuring it in this way, game balls are allowed to flow into the distribution unit 1064 when both the number of reserved special charts 1 and the number of reserved special charts 2 have reached their upper limit, and by varying the position of the distribution member 900, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which the same type of reserved special chart is obtained consecutively.

In addition, even if the number of reserved special charts is close to the upper limit, a variation pattern with a low probability (e.g., 1/100) and a relatively long variation time may be selectable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a period during which it is easy for game balls to flow into the allocation unit 1064 when the number of reserved special charts has temporarily reached the upper limit.

Next, when the time-saving type is "Time-saving B8", various fluctuation patterns are defined in accordance with the values of the number of reserved special symbols 1 (0-4), the number of reserved special symbols 2 (0-4), and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the special symbol fluctuation is executed with a fluctuation time of "5-60 seconds" according to the selected fluctuation pattern. Although detailed explanations are omitted, as with each of the control examples described above, various short fluctuation patterns are defined in accordance with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special symbol lottery so that a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a longer fluctuation time (90 seconds) is more likely to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win than when the result is not a jackpot win.

The time-saving type selection 8 table 202gf is a data table that is referenced when selecting the type of time-saving to be set when a time-saving prize is awarded, and is provided in place of the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df (see FIG. 248(b)) in the fifth control example described above.

Here, the detailed contents of the time-saving type selection 8 table 202gf will be explained with reference to FIG. 336(b). FIG. 336(b) shows the contents defined in the time-saving type selection 8 table 202gf.

As shown in Figure 336 (b), this eighth control example is configured so that the time-saving option can be won in either the first or second special pattern lottery (see Figure 335 (a)), and the selection ratio for the time-saving option type is configured to be different when the time-saving option is won in the first special pattern lottery and when the time-saving option is won in the second special pattern lottery.

Specifically, when the pattern type is "Special pattern 1 (first special pattern)," the time-saving type "Time-saving A8a" is specified for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in the range of "0 to 95," and the time-saving type "Time-saving B8" is specified for the range of "96 to 99." When the pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)," the time-saving type "Time-saving A8b" is specified for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in the range of "0 to 98," and the time-saving type "Time-saving B8" is specified for the value of "99."

Here, in this eighth control example, when "time-saving A8 (time-saving A8a, time-saving A8b)" is set as the time-saving type, an unfavorable time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state is set, and when "time-saving B8" is set, an advantageous time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set. Note that the various control contents in the unfavorable time-saving state, that is, the control contents for executing the game in the high probability state of the normal pattern so as to be more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state, will not be described in detail because the various technologies described in each control example above are adopted. For example, the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery is higher than in the normal state, but the opening pattern of the normal pattern winning game to be executed is executed in an opening pattern that makes it difficult to ball the game ball into the right second ball entrance 1640, or the normal pattern fluctuation time is configured to be longer than in the normal state.

In addition, the definition of an unfavorable time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state includes not only the technical idea of making the special symbol lottery more difficult to execute than the normal state, which is disadvantageous to the player, but also the technical idea of making the bonus granted based on the executed special symbol lottery disadvantageous to the player, even if the ease of executing the special symbol lottery is the same or even if it is slightly more difficult in the normal state.

When "Time-saving A8a" is set, that is, 95% of the time when the time-saving is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, an unfavorable time-saving state is set. Then, as the end conditions of the unfavorable time-saving state, a first time-saving end condition is set that is met when the number of special pattern drawings executed during the time-saving state reaches 100, and a second time-saving end condition is set that is met when the special pattern drawing executed after the time-saving state is set is a special drawing 1 lottery. In other words, it is configured so that the second time-saving end condition is met when two special drawing 1 reservations are obtained in succession, that is, when the special drawing 1 lottery is executed in succession.

By configuring it in this way, if the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern 1 drawing and an unfavorable time-saving state is set, if the type of special pattern drawing to be executed after the special pattern 1 drawing that won the time-saving feature is the special pattern 1 drawing, the unfavorable time-saving state can be ended by the first special pattern drawing executed during the unfavorable time-saving state, and the normal state can be set. Therefore, the player can play with the aim of achieving the second time-saving end condition before the first time-saving end condition is achieved.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the second time-saving end condition is configured to be met depending on the type of the first special symbol lottery executed during the disadvantageous time-saving state, but other contents may be specified as the second time-saving end condition as long as they can be met depending on the execution order of the special symbol lottery executed before the first time-saving end condition is met.

For example, a second time-saving end condition may be specified that is met when multiple special symbol draws are executed according to a predetermined rule during the disadvantageous time-saving state, or a second time-saving end condition may be specified that is met when the results of multiple consecutive special symbol draws or each variation pattern of special symbol variations showing the results of multiple consecutive special symbol draws meet a predetermined rule. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the second time-saving end condition is met and the disadvantageous time-saving state ends.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 336(b), in this eighth control example, it is configured so that if the time-saving effect is won in the lottery for special symbol 1 (first special symbol), it is easier to set a favorable time-saving state that is advantageous to the player (it is easier to select time-saving effect B8) than if the time-saving effect is won in the lottery for special symbol 2 (second special symbol). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to get the player interested in the types of special symbol lotteries that are executed in the normal state.

Figure 334(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this eighth control example. As shown in Figure 334(b), it differs from the RAM 203 in the fifth control example described above (see Figure 244(b)) in that a change execution flag 203ga, a change order storage area 203gb, and a time-saving reduction flag 203gc have been added. Everything else is the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The change execution flag 203ga is a flag that indicates whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed with priority. This flag is an area that is backed up even in the event of a power outage, and in the initial state after the RAM is cleared, etc., the first special symbol is set with priority.

The variable order storage area 203gb is an area that stores the winning order for each reserved data (reserved patterns) stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. Eight memory areas are set in this variable order storage area 203gb, and the order is stored in the previous memory area in the order in which they were won. The memory areas are also shifted based on the start of the special pattern variation.

The time-saving reduction flag 203gc is a flag for indicating that it is a period in which it is possible to shorten an unfavorable time-saving state (a time-saving state in which the time-saving type "time-saving A8" is set), which is a time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player, and is set to ON when it is a period in which it is possible to shorten an unfavorable time-saving state. While this time-saving reduction flag 203gc is set to ON, processing is executed to determine whether or not a condition for shortening the unfavorable time-saving state (a second time-saving end condition) is met.

Next, referring to Figures 337 and 338, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the fifth control example described above. Note that detailed descriptions of the same contents as the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 337(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described. FIG. 337(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic configuration defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 337(a), the ROM 222 in this eighth control example differs from the ROM 222 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(a)) in that a read-ahead hold mode selection table 222ga has been added.

The look-ahead reserved mode selection table 222ga is a data table that is referenced when selecting the display mode of the reserved pattern in the look-ahead reserved performance (see FIG. 333(a)) that is executed as a performance (look-ahead performance) to show the look-ahead result for the acquired special reserved pattern. In this eighth control example, by executing the look-ahead process, it is configured to be possible to identify the special reserved pattern that corresponds to the special pattern lottery that is executed during the normal state, and it is configured to be possible to execute the look-ahead reserved performance for that special reserved pattern.

Here, the detailed contents of the pre-reading reserved mode selection table 222ga will be explained with reference to FIG. 338. FIG. 338 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the pre-reading reserved mode selection table 222ga. As shown in FIG. 338, the pre-reading reserved mode selection table 222ga defines parameters so that the display mode of the reserved pattern is determined based on the special pattern type corresponding to the special pattern reservation that is the target of the pre-reading reserved performance, the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) corresponding to that special pattern reservation, and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the pre-read result is "Big win", the display mode of the reserved symbol is specified as "2 stars" for the range of "0 to 79" of the acquired performance counter 223f, and "3 stars" for the range of "80 to 99". If the pre-read result is "Time-saving B8", the display mode of the reserved symbol is specified as "2 stars" for the range of "0 to 49" of the acquired performance counter 223f, and "1 star" for the range of "50 to 99". If the pre-read result is "Time-saving A8a" or "Miss", the display mode of the reserved symbol is specified as "1 star" for the range of "0 to 99" of the acquired performance counter 223f.

In other words, the display mode of the reserved symbols that are the subject of the look-ahead reserved effect is configured so that the more stars are displayed, the more likely it is that a look-ahead reserved effect will be executed that suggests to the player that a special symbol lottery that will be advantageous to the player will be executed in the normal state.

In the eighth control example, the display command is set so that the display mode selected using the look-ahead reserved mode selection table 222ga becomes the display mode of the reserved pattern to be read as is, and the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed from the normal display mode to the display mode showing the performance result of the look-ahead reserved performance. However, without being limited to this, the display mode selected with reference to FIG. 338 may be temporarily stored as the final performance result of the look-ahead reserved performance, and the look-ahead reserved performance may be configured to gradually change the display mode of the special reserved pattern to be read as the final performance result stored as the look-ahead reserved performance. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the display mode of the special reserved pattern to be read as the ...

This configuration makes it possible to motivate players to always play in an attempt to acquire as many reserved special figures as possible. In addition, since it is possible to easily vary the results of the pre-reading reserved performance based on the number of reserved special figures that have been acquired at the time the pre-reading reserved performance is executed, it is possible to easily execute a wide variety of pre-reading reserved performances without, for example, determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading reserved performance depending on the number of reserved special figures that have been acquired, or varying the content of the performance results of the pre-reading reserved performance.

When the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the pre-read result is "Big win", "2 stars" is specified as the display mode of the reserved symbol for the range of "0 to 99" of the acquired performance counter 223f, when the pre-read result is "Time-saving B8", "2 stars" is specified as the display mode of the reserved symbol for the range of "0 to 29" of the acquired performance counter 223f, and "1 star" is specified as the display mode of the reserved symbol for the range of "30 to 99" of the acquired performance counter 223f, and when the pre-read result is "Time-saving A8b" or "Miss", "1 star" is specified as the display mode of the reserved symbol for the range of "0 to 99" of the acquired performance counter 223f.

In this eighth control example, as described above with reference to Figures 335(a) and 336(b), of the special pattern lotteries executed in the normal state, the first special pattern lottery is configured to be a special pattern lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery, and as shown in Figure 338, the pre-reading reserved performance is also configured to be more likely to result in a performance result that is more advantageous to the player (a display mode with a larger number of stars) when the target special pattern reserve is special pattern 1 reserve than when it is special pattern 2 reserve.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to predict the results of the pre-reading hold performance in more detail by referring to the performance results of the pre-reading hold performance and the type of special reserved drawing that is the target of the performance.

In the eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 333, the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 reserve and the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserve are displayed in different display modes so that the player can understand the type of the reserved special pattern that has been acquired. However, without being limited to this, the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 reserve and the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserve may be displayed in the same display mode, or in a display mode with a difference that is difficult for the player to see. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the second time-saving end condition will be established, and to make it difficult for the player to predict the result of the pre-reading based on the display mode of the pre-reading reserve performance. Therefore, the player can continue to be interested in the game until the special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved special pattern that is the target of the pre-reading reserve performance is actually executed.

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, the pre-reading hold effect can be executed only for the special reserved symbol corresponding to the special pattern lottery executed during the normal state, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to execute an effect equivalent to the pre-reading hold effect (pseudo pre-reading hold effect) for the special reserved symbol corresponding to the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state).

When this pseudo-preview reserved performance is executed, the display mode is determined for the specific reserved pattern in the same way as the preview reserved performance, and as shown in FIG. 333(a), a pseudo-preview reserved performance is executed in which the display mode of the specific reserved pattern is changed. Then, when a special pattern lottery corresponding to the specific reserved pattern that is the target of the pseudo-preview reserved performance is executed, it is preferable to configure it so that the performance result of the pseudo-preview reserved performance is displayed as the performance executed during the special pattern change period to inform the player that the pseudo-preview reserved performance has been executed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the disadvantageous time-saving state continues for a long time, it is possible to provide the player with an enjoyable game by executing a pseudo look-ahead hold effect equivalent to the look-ahead hold effect. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that the reserved pattern corresponding to the special reserved pattern whose look-ahead result is a jackpot win is more likely to be the target of the pseudo look-ahead hold effect than the reserved pattern corresponding to the special reserved pattern whose look-ahead result is not a jackpot win. This increases the possibility of winning the jackpot even when the result of the pseudo look-ahead hold effect is displayed to notify the player that the pseudo look-ahead hold effect has been executed, thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing significantly.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 337(b). FIG. 337(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this eighth control example.

As shown in FIG. 337(b), the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this eighth control example differs from the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(b)) in that an allocation status storage area 223ga, a reserved status storage area 223gb, and an unfavorable time-saving flag 223gc have been added. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The distribution state storage area 223ga is a storage area that stores information indicating the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 provided in the distribution unit 1064. This distribution state storage area 223ga stores information for specifying whether the next game ball that flows into the distribution unit 1064 will enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1641.

In this eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 331(a), a ball entry sensor 1064a is provided as a detection means for detecting game balls that have passed through the passage opening 1064b of the distribution unit 1064, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to distinguish the detection result of the ball entry sensor 1064a. Then, based on the winning command output from the main control device 110 and the detection result of the ball entry sensor 1064a, the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 is configured to be able to be identified, and an image icon corresponding to the identification result is configured to be able to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 (see display area Dm18 in FIG. 333(b)).

This makes it easier for the player to understand which ball inlet (first ball inlet 64, second ball inlet 1641) the game ball will be guided to the next time it flows into the distribution unit 1064.

Therefore, for example, by executing a left-handed play during a jackpot game to cause multiple game balls to flow into the distribution unit 1064, and determining which ball entry port (first ball entry port 64, second ball entry port 1641) the game ball that next flows into the distribution unit 1064 will enter from the state of the image icon displayed according to the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900, it is possible to easily create a distribution state in which the game ball is guided to a ball entry port that can acquire the right to draw for the same special pattern type as the special pattern type corresponding to the last special pattern reservation that has already been acquired (the special pattern reservation whose winning information is stored in the eighth memory area of the winning information storage area 223b).

In this eighth control example, the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 can be determined based on the detection result of the ball entry sensor 1064a and the information included in the winning command, but this is not limited to this, and a detection means can be provided that can directly detect the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900.

The reserved status storage area 223gb is a storage area for temporarily storing the reserved status set by the pre-read reserved performance, and the reserved status (display status) selected by referring to the pre-read reserved status selection table 222ga is stored together with information for identifying the corresponding special reserved status. The stored information is then read out in the reserved number display update process (see S4106 in FIG. 346) executed in the main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, the system is configured to restrict the execution of new pre-reading reserved effects during the period when information is stored in the reserved state storage area 223gb. In other words, during the period when the pre-reading reserved effect is being executed, the time-saving state will end and the normal state will be set before all the acquired reserved special figures are consumed. Therefore, if it is predicted that the game state will change based on the special figure lottery to be executed thereafter, the pre-reading result and the actual game state change will likely differ, making it difficult to execute a highly reliable performance for the player. Therefore, during the execution of the pre-reading reserved effect, the system is configured not to execute the process of identifying the transition content of the game state based on the pre-reading result of the reserved special figures after the reserved special figure that is the target of the pre-reading reserved effect being executed. This reduces the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113.

The disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is a flag for indicating that an unfavorable time-saving state is set among the time-saving states, and is set to ON when the time-saving type "time-saving A8a" or "time-saving A8b" is set. Then, in the winning command processing 8 (see S4292 in FIG. 351), when a winning information command for normal figures indicating that a long-opening winning game is to be executed is received, the setting status of the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is determined (S4451 in FIG. 351), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4451 in FIG. 351: Yes), a display command corresponding to the performance for suggesting that a normal long-opening winning game (electric chute long opening) will be executed is set (S4405 in FIG. 351). As a result, as shown in FIG. 332, it is possible to easily inform the player that the second time-saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state is likely to be established. Then, if it is determined that a state command indicating that the disadvantageous time-saving state has ended has been received (S9051 in FIG. 348: Yes), it is set to OFF (S9052 in FIG. 348).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eighth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 339 to Fig. 345, the control process contents of the main control device 110 in this eighth control example will be described, focusing on the points that are different from the above-mentioned fifth control example. The pachinko machine 10 of this eighth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned fifth control example in the contents of the process that determines the execution order of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the process that judges whether or not the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is established, and the process that is executed when the game ball starts winning.

Specifically, the difference is that special symbol change process 8 (see S10154 in FIG. 339) is executed instead of special symbol change process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252), and start winning process 8 (see S10195 in FIG. 344) is executed instead of start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258). All other processing contents are the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of special pattern change process 8 (S10154) will be explained with reference to FIG. 339. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special pattern change process 8 (S10154). As shown in FIG. 339, special pattern change process 8 (S10154) differs from the above-mentioned special pattern change process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) in that the processing contents executed to start a new special pattern change are different from the processing contents executed when an ongoing special pattern change is stopped, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations are omitted.

When special symbol change process 8 (S10154) is executed, first, the same processes S201 to S203 as those of special symbol change process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) described above are executed. Then, change execution determination process 8 (S10251) is executed. Details of this change execution determination process 8 (S10251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 340, but a process is executed to determine the type of special symbol change to be newly executed.

After completing the processing of S10251, it is next determined whether the type of special pattern change to be newly executed is special pattern 2 (second special pattern) (S10252), and if it is determined that it is special pattern 2 (S10252: Yes), the same processing of S205 to S207, S251, and S252 as in the above-mentioned special pattern change processing 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10252 that it is not special pattern 2 (S10252: No), then it is determined whether the type of the newly executed special pattern change is special pattern 1 (first special pattern) (S10253), and if it is determined that it is special pattern 1 (S10253: Yes), the same processes of S211 to S213, S251, S252 as those of the above-mentioned special pattern change process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) are executed, and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S10253 that it is not special pattern 1 (S10253: No), this process ends as it is.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S202 that the pattern is changing (S202: Yes), the processing is the same as the special pattern change processing 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) described above, but instead of update processing 5 (S253 in FIG. 252), update processing 8 (S10254) is executed, and instead of time-saving setting processing 5 (S254 in FIG. 252), time-saving setting processing 8 (S10255) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 340, a detailed explanation will be given of the change execution determination process 8 (S10251) executed in the special pattern change process 8 (see S10154 in FIG. 339). FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the change execution determination process 8 (S10251). This change execution determination process 8 (S10251) is a process for determining whether the special pattern change performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 is to be executed based on the values of various counters stored in either the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b.

In the change execution determination process 8 (S10251), first, the change execution flag 203ga is set to 0 to perform initialization (S10271), and data in the change order storage area 203gb is obtained (S10272). After that, the data in the change order storage area 203gb is shifted (S10273). In the process of S310273, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the change order storage area 203gb is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → reserved third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → fifth area, seventh area → reserved sixth area, eighth area → reserved seventh area, and so on. After the data is shifted, it is determined whether the data in the execution area is special chart 1 (1) (S10274).

If it is determined in the processing of S10274 that the data in the execution area is special pattern 1 (1) (S10274: Yes), the change execution flag 203ga is set to change execution (1) in special pattern 1 (S10275), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the special pattern change processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is not special pattern 1 (1) (S10274: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is special pattern 2 (2) (S10276). If it is determined in the processing of S10276 that the data in the execution area is special pattern 2 (2) (S10276: Yes), the change execution flag 203gb is set to change execution in special pattern 2 (S10277), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the special pattern change processing.

If it is determined in the processing of S10276 that the data in the execution area is not special symbol 2 (2) (S10276: No), since there are no reserved balls to execute the change, the change execution flag 203gb remains in the initial state, this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

As described above, by executing the change execution determination process 8 (S10251), the various reserved memories (special reserved patterns) stored in the change order storage area 203gb can be changed to special patterns in the order in which they were stored.

Next, the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076) will be explained with reference to FIG. 341. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076). This time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076) is executed in place of time-saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) executed in special pattern determination process 5 (see S251 in FIG. 253) of special pattern change process 8 (see S10154 in FIG. 339), and differs in that the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving lottery has been won) are changed to correspond to the game specifications.

Specifically, when time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076) is executed, regardless of the type of special pattern change executed this time (without executing the process of S8101 for determining the type of special pattern change executed in time-saving lottery process 5 (see FIG. 254)), the same processes of S8103 to S8106 as those of the above-mentioned time-saving lottery process 5 (see S8101 in FIG. 254) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In other words, as described above with reference to FIG. 335(b), this eighth control example is configured to execute a time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving win has been made) when the normal state is set, regardless of the type of special pattern, so in time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076), regardless of the type of special pattern variation that is newly executed, only the game state at the time of the newly executed special pattern variation is determined to determine whether or not to execute a time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving win has been made).

In this way, time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076) is configured to execute a process for determining whether the execution conditions (time-saving lottery execution conditions) for the time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving lottery has been won) are met, and a process for executing the time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving lottery has been won) if the time-saving lottery execution conditions are met. However, the content of the process for determining whether the time-saving lottery execution conditions are met can be changed as appropriate depending on the gaming specifications of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the time-saving lottery is configured to be executed not only in the normal state but also when a specific gaming state (such as an unfavorable time-saving state) is set, a process for determining whether the unfavorable time-saving flag 223gc is set to on can be added to the process of S8103.

Next, the processing contents of update process 8 (S273) will be explained with reference to FIG. 342. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of update process 8 (S273). This update process 8 (S273) differs from update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 256) in the fifth control example described above in that a new process has been added as a process for determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met.

Specifically, when update process 8 (S273) is executed, first, it is determined whether the time-saving reduction flag 203gc is set to ON (S8351), and if it is determined that the time-saving reduction flag 203gc is set to ON (S8351: Yes), the time-saving reduction flag 203gc is set to OFF (S8352), and then it is determined whether the time-saving end condition is met (S8353), and if it is determined that the time-saving end condition is met (S8353: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is reset to 0 (S8354), and a command indicating time-saving reduction is determined (S8355), and then the same processes of S8301 to S8306 as those of update process 5 described above (see S253 in FIG. 342) are executed, and the values of the special probability counter 203i and the time-saving counter 203h, the game state after updating the various values, and a state command indicating whether or not time-saving reduction is performed are set (S8356), and this process is terminated.

In addition, if the time-saving flag 203gc is not set to on in the process of S8351 (S8351: No), or if it is determined in the process of S8353 that the time-saving end condition is not met (S8353: No), the process proceeds directly to the process of S8301, and the processes of S8301 to S8306, which are the same as the above-mentioned update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 342), are executed, and the values of the special chance counter 203i and the time-saving counter 203h, the game status after updating the various values, and a status command indicating whether or not the time-saving has been shortened are set (S8356), and this process ends.

As shown in update process 8 (S273), in this eighth control example, when the time-saving reduction flag 203gc is set to on, that is, when an unfavorable time-saving state in which the time-saving type "time-saving A8" is set is set, a special time-saving end condition can be satisfied only for a predetermined period of time after the unfavorable time-saving state is set, and it is possible to determine whether or not a time-saving end condition that can be satisfied within that limited period of time has been satisfied.

Specifically, when a time-saving lottery is won and an unfavorable time-saving state is set, the time-saving end condition is met when a special pattern variation of the same type as the special pattern type that won the time-saving lottery is executed as the first special pattern variation since the time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) was set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to shorten and end the unfavorable time-saving state, which makes it more motivating for the player to play.

Next, the processing contents of time-saving setting process 8 (S10255) will be explained with reference to FIG. 343. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving setting process 8 (S10255). This time-saving setting process 8 (S10255) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving setting process 5 (see S254 in FIG. 257) in that a process (S8371) of setting the time-saving flag 203gc to ON when a time-saving lottery is won is added, but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their explanation will be omitted.

Specifically, after executing the processes of S8351 and S8352, which are the same as the time-saving setting process 5 described above (see S254 in FIG. 257), the time-saving flag 203gc is set to ON (S8371), and then the processes of S8353 and S8354 are executed, and this process is terminated.

By configuring it in this way, the time-saving flag 203gc is set to on only when the time-saving state is set and only when the player wins the time-saving lottery (only when the player wins the time-saving lottery), so it is possible to prevent the process of determining whether or not the time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) for shortening the time-saving state in update process 8 (see S273 in FIG. 342) has been met (which is executed during the time-saving state (play time-saving state) that is set based on winning the jackpot and in which the time-saving type "time-saving A8" is not set).

As shown in FIG. 343, in this eighth control example, the time-saving reduction flag 203gc is always set to ON when a time-saving selection is made, but this is not limited thereto, and the time-saving reduction flag 203gc may be set to ON when it is determined that an unfavorable time-saving state (time-saving type "time-saving A8") has been set and an unfavorable time-saving state (time-saving type "time-saving A8") has been set.

Next, the processing contents of start entry process 8 (S10195) will be explained with reference to FIG. 344. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of start entry process 8 (S10195). This start entry process 8 (S10195) differs from the above-mentioned start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258) in that a process for storing information in the variable order storage area 203gb has been added, and the processing contents of the look-ahead process have been changed. All other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations will be omitted.

Specifically, when the start winning process 8 (S10195) is executed, the same processes as S601 to S651 as those of the start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258) described above are executed, and after the process of S651 is completed, the special symbol 1 (1) is set in the first area of the variable order storage area 203gb (S671), and the process proceeds to S607. In addition, in the process of S671, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referenced, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is set as the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is set as the first area. By determining the value set in this change order storage area 203gb using the change execution determination process 8 (S10251) described above, even if there are two types of changes at the start port, one that changes the first special pattern and one that changes the second special pattern, as in this eighth control example, the changes can be started in the order in which the winning symbols enter the start port.

Next, the same processes of S607 to S652 as those of the start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258) are executed. After the process of S652 is completed, the special symbol 2 (2) is set in the first area of the variable order storage area 203gb (S672), the pre-reading process 8 is executed (S673), and this process is terminated. In the process of S672, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referenced, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is set as the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is set as the first area. By determining the value set in this change order storage area 203gb using the change execution determination process 8 (S10251) described above, even if there are two types of changes at the start port, one that changes the first special pattern and one that changes the second special pattern, as in this eighth control example, the changes can be started in the order in which the winning symbols enter the start port.

Next, the processing contents of pre-reading process 8 (S673) will be explained with reference to FIG. 345. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of pre-reading process 8 (S673). This pre-reading process 8 (S673) differs from pre-reading process 5 (see S653 in FIG. 259) in the fifth control example described above in that it is configured to identify the game state when a special pattern lottery corresponding to the pre-read winning information is executed, and to set a winning command including the identified information (information indicating the game state at the time of the pending change); otherwise, it is the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, referring to Figs. 346 to 355, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described. This eighth control example differs from the above-mentioned fifth control example in that the processes executed in the main processing (see Fig. 346) of the voice lamp control device 113 are LCD performance execution management processing 8 (S4181 in Fig. 354), advance winning detection processing 8 (S4182 in Fig. 355), command determination processing 8 (S4183 in Fig. 347), and variable display setting processing 8. The rest of the processing contents are the same, and detailed explanations of the same processing contents will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 346, the processing contents of the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be explained. FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the main processing. As shown in FIG. 346, in this tenth control example, processing is executed that is different from the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned fifth control example in that liquid crystal performance execution management processing 8 (S4181 in FIG. 354), advance winning detection processing 8 (S4182 in FIG. 355), command determination processing 8 (see S4183 in FIG. 347), and variable display setting processing 8 are executed. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 347, the processing contents of command determination process 8 (S4183) will be described. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of command determination process 8 (S4183). In this command determination process 8 (S4183), the command determination process 5 (see S4182 in FIG. 262) of the fifth control example described above is different in that state command reception process 8 (see S4291 in FIG. 348) is executed instead of state command reception process 5 (S4282), winning command process 8 (see S4292 in FIG. 351) is executed instead of winning command process (S4212), and big win related process 8 (S4293) is executed instead of big win related process (S4218), but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

Next, the processing contents of the status command reception process 8 (S4291) will be described with reference to FIG. 348. FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the status command reception process 8 (S4291). As shown in FIG. 348, the status command reception process 8 (S4291) differs from the status command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above in that the processing contents executed when it is determined that the game state has been changed to the normal state based on the information included in the status command received from the main control device 110 (S9003: Yes) are different from the processing contents executed when it is determined that the game state has been changed to the time-shortened state based on the information included in the status command received from the main control device 110 (S9005: Yes). The other processing contents are the same, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the state command receiving process 8 (S4291) is executed, the same processes as the state command receiving process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above are executed from S9001 to S9003. Then, in the process of S9003, if it is determined that the game state has been changed to the normal state (S9003: Yes), it is next determined whether the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is set to on (S9051), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S9051: Yes), the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is set to off (S9052), the normal state presentation setting process 8 is executed (S9053), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9051, if it is determined that the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is not set to on (S9051: No), the process of S9052 is skipped and this process is terminated. The details of normal state presentation setting process 8 (S9053) will be described later with reference to FIG. 349.

If it is determined in the process of S9003 that the game state has not been changed to the normal state (S9003: No), then it is determined whether the game state has been changed to the time-saving state (S9005). If it is determined that the game state has not been changed (S9005: No), the process of S9007 to S9010 is executed, which is the same as the state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9005 that the state has been changed to the time-saving state, the time-saving state presentation setting process 8 is executed (S9054), and then this process ends. The contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 8 (S9054) will be described later with reference to FIG. 350.

Next, referring to FIG. 349, the processing contents of normal state presentation setting processing 8 (S9053) executed in state command receiving processing 8 (S4291 in FIG. 348) will be explained. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of normal state presentation setting processing 8 (S9053). This normal state presentation setting processing 8 (S9053) differs from the above-mentioned normal state presentation setting processing (S9004 in FIG. 264) in that processing contents for when a disadvantageous time-saving state is transitioned to the normal state are added, but the processing contents are otherwise the same. Identical processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the normal state presentation setting process 8 (S9053) is executed, first, the game state set before the currently set game state (the game state before the change) is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9101), and it is determined whether the game state before the change is an unfavorable time-saving state (S9151). If it is determined in the process of S9151 that it is an unfavorable time-saving state (S9151: Yes), a display command for the presentation mode corresponding to the chance variation is set (S9152), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9151 that it is not an unfavorable time-saving state (S9151: No), the same processes of S9102 to S9104 as those in the normal state presentation setting process described above (see S9004 in FIG. 264) are executed, and this process is terminated.

By setting a display command for the presentation mode in the processing of S9152, the background image of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the normal state has been set based on the fact that the conditions for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state have been met. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that the next special pattern change to be executed is a special pattern change (lottery) executed in the normal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 350, the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting processing 8 (S9054) executed in the state command receiving processing 8 (S4291 in FIG. 348) will be explained. FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting processing 8 (S9054). This time-saving state presentation setting processing 8 (S9054) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving state presentation setting processing (see S900 in FIG. 266) in that the processing contents when transitioning from the normal state to the time-saving state are changed, but the processing contents are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the time-saving state presentation setting process 8 (S9054) is executed, first, the same processes of S9301 to S9304 as the time-saving state presentation setting process (see S900 in FIG. 266) are executed. Then, in the process of S9304, if it is determined that the game state before the change is a normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of time-saving times included in the command received this time is set to the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S9305), and then it is determined whether the time-saving type of the time-saving state set this time is time-saving A8 (S9381), and if it is determined that it is time-saving A8 (S9381: Yes), the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is set to ON (S9382), a display command is set to show the presentation mode corresponding to the disadvantageous time-saving state (S9383), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9381 that the time-saving type of the currently set time-saving state is not time-saving A8 (S9382: Yes), the processes of S9382 and S9383 are skipped and this process ends.

Next, the processing contents of winning command processing 8 (S4292) will be explained with reference to FIG. 351. FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of winning command processing 8 (S4292). This winning command processing 8 (S4292) differs from the above-mentioned winning command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 177) in that the processing contents when a regular winning information command is received and the processing contents when a special winning information command is received have been changed. The processing contents other than that are the same, and a detailed explanation of the contents will be omitted.

When the winning command process 8 (S4292) is executed, first, the processes S4401 to S4403 are executed, which are the same as the winning command process described above (see S4212 in FIG. 177). Then, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that there is winning information, that is, if it is determined that the winning information command for normal symbols received this time contains winning information indicating that a winning will occur in the normal symbol lottery (S4403; Yes), it is next determined whether the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is set to ON (S4451), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4451: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the opening of the long electric chute (S4405).

In other words, in this eighth control example, if the winning information for normal symbols acquired while the disadvantageous time-saving state is set includes information indicating that a normal long-open winning game will be played (specific normal winning information), an effect is executed to suggest to the player that a normal long-open winning game (long electric chute opening) will occur. By configuring in this way, a player playing in the disadvantageous time-saving state can be notified of the arrival of an opportunity to play consecutive games in which it is possible to play the same type of special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) before the normal long-open winning game is actually played, so that the player can play while hoping that the disadvantageous time-saving state will end (be shortened).

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is configured to differentiate between the game method (left-hand play) executed when an unfavorable time-saving state is set and the game method (right-hand play) executed during a normal long-open hit game, as in the eighth control example, it is possible to notify the player that a normal long-open hit game will be executed before the normal long-open hit game is actually executed, thereby setting a grace period for the player to change the game method, making it easier for the player to execute a game corresponding to the normal long-open hit game.

In addition, in this eighth control example, a performance is executed to suggest a normal long opening win (long electric chute opening) based on receiving a winning information command related to a normal pattern. In other words, it is configured to be possible to suggest to the player that a normal long opening win game will be executed before the normal pattern lottery that will win the normal long opening win is executed, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure it to be possible to suggest to the player that a normal long opening win game will be executed by using the period from when the normal pattern lottery that will win the normal long opening win is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed (normal winning period).

Furthermore, each time a winning information command for a normal symbol is received, it is determined whether the command contains information indicating that a normal long opening win game will be played. If it is determined that the command contains information indicating that a normal long opening win game will be played, a calculation means capable of calculating the period until the normal long opening win game is played may be provided, and the period during which a performance is played to indicate to the player that a normal long opening win game will be played may be determined based on the period calculated by the calculation means. In this case, for example, if the normal winning period is shorter than a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds), the performance may be configured to be executable from a stage before the normal winning variation is played, for example, from the stage at which a winning information command for a normal symbol indicating that a normal long opening win game will be played is received.

Next, referring to FIG. 352, the processing contents of special symbol winning information command processing 8 (S4451) executed in winning command processing 8 (see S4292 in FIG. 351) will be described. FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special symbol winning information command processing 8 (S4451). This special symbol winning information command processing 8 (S4451) is processing that is executed when a winning information command related to a special symbol is received, and based on information included in the winning information command, for example information indicating a win, processing is executed to set the presentation mode of a presentation (pre-reading presentation) that suggests to the player the information included in the winning information command before the special symbol lottery corresponding to that winning information is executed.

In this eighth control example, by executing this special symbol winning information command process 8 (S4451), it is possible to change the display mode of the reserved symbol in response to information for indicating a win, which is included in the winning information command, or to change the display mode of the reserved symbol in response to information for indicating the type of special symbol, which is included in the winning information command.

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, in order to enable the player to know which special reserved symbol corresponds to the special symbol lottery executed in a specific game state (normal state), when a winning information command related to a special symbol is received, the game state when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the received winning information command is executed can be determined in advance.

By configuring it in this way, the player can check the display mode of the reserved special symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, allowing the player to predict the game state when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved special symbol is executed.

Specifically, when special winning information command processing 8 (S4451) is executed, first, the current game status is extracted (identified) based on the information set in the slave status setting area 223g (S4501), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S4551). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S4551: Yes), it is then determined whether the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is set to on (S4552). If it is determined that it is set to on (S4552: Yes), that is, if the currently received winning information command is a winning information command received during an disadvantageous time-saving state, it predicts whether the time-saving end condition for terminating the disadvantageous time-saving state is met (S4553), and based on the result of whether the time-saving end condition is met predicted in the processing of S4553, it is determined whether the time-saving end condition is met (whether the special pattern lottery corresponding to the currently received winning information command is a special pattern lottery executed in normal state) (S4554).

If it is determined in the process of S4554 that the special symbol lottery is to be executed in the normal state (S4554: Yes), the display mode (number of stars) of the corresponding reserved symbol is determined by referring to the pre-read reserved symbol selection table 222ga (S4555), and information for indicating the determined reserved symbol (display mode of the reserved symbol) is stored in the reserved symbol storage area 223gb (S4556). Then, a display command (including a display command for indicating the display mode determined in the process of S4555) is set based on the information contained in the received special symbol winning information command (S4507), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4551 that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is not greater than 0 (S4551: No), if it is determined in the process of S4552 that the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is not set to on (S4552: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4554 that the time-saving end condition is not met (S4554: No), the process proceeds directly to the process of S4507.

Next, the jackpot-related process 8 (S4293) executed in the command determination process 8 (see S4183 in FIG. 347) will be described. This jackpot-related process 8 (S4293) differs from the jackpot-related process described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180) in that ending process 8 (S4293) is executed instead of the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 180) that is executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4714: Yes in FIG. 180); otherwise, the same process is executed. Here, the process contents executed in ending process 8 (S4293) will be described with reference to FIG. 353. FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing the process contents of ending process 8 (S4293).

Ending process 8 (S4293) differs from the above-mentioned ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) in that a process is added to set the presentation mode of the next variable special symbol type notification presentation to notify the player of the type of special symbol lottery to be executed for the first time after the end of the big win game (after the end of the small win game).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 353, when Ending Process 8 (S4293) is executed, the same processes of S4801 to S4803 as those of the Ending Process described above (see S4715 in FIG. 181) are executed, and then the special symbol type (special pattern type) for the next variation is read out based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S4851), and a display command is set to show the read out special symbol type (S4852). Then, the execution of the ending display is set (S4804), and this process ends.

By setting a display command for indicating the special symbol type read out in the process of S4852, it is possible to display a display mode for indicating to the player the special symbol type of the special symbol lottery executed for the first time after the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 333(b). Also, if it is determined in the process of S4851 that no information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a, that is, if no special symbol reserve has been obtained, the special symbol type of the special symbol lottery executed for the first time after the end of the jackpot game cannot be notified to the player based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, so the process for displaying the display mode for indicating to the player the special symbol type of the special symbol lottery executed for the first time after the end of the jackpot game on the ending screen is skipped.

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to predict the special symbol type of the next special symbol lottery to be executed based on the processing result of advance winning detection process 8 (see S4182 in FIG. 355) described later, and set a display command to display the display mode based on the prediction result.

Next, the processing contents of LCD performance execution management process 8 (S4181) will be explained with reference to FIG. 354. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of LCD performance execution management process 8 (S4181). In this LCD performance execution management process 8 (S4181), a process is executed to update the value of a variable time counter (not shown) in which a value synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110 is set, and a process is executed to determine the performance mode corresponding to the updated value.

When LCD performance execution management process 8 (S4181) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the variable time counter is greater than 0 (S55401). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S55401: Yes), the value of the variable time counter is updated (S5402), the performance mode corresponding to the updated counter value is set (determined) (S55402), other update processes related to the performance are executed (S5407), a display command is set to show the performance mode based on the update result (S5408), and this process is terminated.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a suggestive effect to inform the player of the current game state) when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the special pattern change has been executed. In this case, it is preferable to configure the trigger for executing the suggestive effect so that it can be set regardless of the currently set change time of the special pattern change, and to configure the suggestive effect to be executed only if the currently set change time of the special pattern change is longer than the elapsed time that triggers the execution of the suggestive effect. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not a suggestive effect will be executed depending on the change pattern that has been set.

Furthermore, the display area in which the suggestive effect is executed may be configured to overlap with the display area in which the variable effect is executed, so that a situation in which the content of the suggestive effect is visible to the player and a situation in which it is difficult to see (not visible) can be created depending on the presentation mode of the variable effect being executed at the time when the trigger for executing the suggestive effect is established and the suggestive effect is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to determine whether or not a suggestive effect visible to the player will be executed depending on the change time of the special pattern change being executed and the content of the variable effect being executed.

In addition, FIG. 354 shows the processing contents of LCD performance execution management process 8 (S4181) as updating the value of a fluctuation time counter set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation, and setting (determining) the performance mode corresponding to the updated value, but it is also possible to provide a counter that can be set to a value corresponding to the passage of time other than the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation, and to configure it so that the performance mode corresponding to the updated content of the counter can be set (determined).

For example, a process may be executed to update the value of a counter capable of measuring the elapsed time since the start of a jackpot game, or a process to update the value of a counter capable of measuring the elapsed time since a specific presentation is executed, and a process may be executed to set (determine) the presentation mode corresponding to the update result. Also, the LCD presentation execution management process 8 (S4181) may be configured to update the values of various counters, determine whether the update result satisfies the execution conditions, and execute only the process of setting a flag to ON to indicate that the execution conditions have been met if the execution conditions have been met, and to be able to execute a process to execute a specific presentation in other processes (for example, a variable display setting process) on the condition that the flag to indicate that the execution conditions have been met is set to ON.

Next, referring to FIG. 355, the processing contents of the advance winning detection process 8 (S4182) will be described. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the advance winning detection process 8 (S4182). This advance winning detection process 8 (S4182) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, when a ball is detected by the ball sensor 1064a, a process is executed to predict whether the ball entrance into which the detected game ball can enter is the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 1641, and a process is executed to identify the state (position) of the distribution member 900 to indicate which ball entrance the game ball that will enter the distribution device 1064 next can enter if the ball actually enters either ball entrance.

In the advance winning detection process 8 (S4182), first, the ball entrance sensor 1064a determines whether the ball has entered the distribution device 1064 (S9901). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the distribution device 1064 (S9901: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has entered the distribution device 1064 (S9901: Yes), it predicts whether the game ball will enter the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 1641 (S9902). As a method of predicting the ball entrance destination, a sensor (not shown) that detects the inclination mounted on the axis of the distribution member 900 is used to calculate the direction of the distribution member 900 from the inclination. Note that the detection of the direction of the distribution member 900 for predicting the ball entrance destination does not have to be done by a sensor that detects the inclination, and may be done by using, for example, a magnet and a hall sensor. In addition, as described above, since the orientation of the sorting member 900 alternates between left and right, the prize destination can be predicted based on the number of prizes won, in which case a sensor may not be required.

Next, it is determined whether the ball is predicted to enter the first ball entrance 64 by the processing of S9902 (S9903), and if it is predicted that the ball will not enter the first ball entrance 64 (S9903: No), the processing proceeds to S9905. On the other hand, if the ball is predicted to enter the first ball entrance 64 (S9903: Yes), second ball entrance side information indicating that the next game ball that enters the allocation device 1064 may (is highly likely to) enter the second ball entrance 1641 is stored in the allocation status storage area 223ga (S9904), and the processing proceeds to S9905.

In the process of S9905, it is determined whether or not the process of S9902 predicted that the ball would enter the second ball entrance 1641 (S9905), and if it predicted that the ball would not enter the second ball entrance 1641 (S9905: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it predicted that the ball would enter the second ball entrance 1641 (S9902: Yes), first ball entrance side information indicating that the next game ball that enters the allocation device 1064 may (is highly likely to) enter the first ball entrance 64 is stored in the allocation status storage area 223ga (S9906), and this process ends.

As explained above, in this eighth control example, the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state determines whether or not a time-saving win will occur, and is configured to provide a high probability of winning the time-saving win. This provides a novel gameplay experience in which the special symbol lottery is less likely to be executed in the normal state.

In addition, when the time-saving win is determined, either an unfavorable time-saving state that is less favorable than the normal state or a favorable time-saving state that is more favorable than the normal state is set. When an unfavorable time-saving state is set, the special symbol lottery for the normal state is not executed until the time-saving end condition is met. The time-saving end condition can be set to a time-saving end condition that is met when the special symbol lottery is executed in a specific order, and a time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed reaches a predetermined number.

Therefore, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, the more special pattern lotteries are executed, the easier it becomes for the time-saving end conditions to be met, making it easier for players playing during an unfavorable time-saving state to continue playing.

In this eighth control example, the variable count end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed reaches 100 times can be set as the time-saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state. However, without being limited to this, for example, the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed (time-saving number of times) that is set as the variable count end condition can be configured to differ depending on the type of time-saving that is set.

In this case, for example, the time-saving type can be set to time-saving AA8, time-saving BB8, or time-saving CC8, and the time-saving number of times "100 times" can be set as the variable count end condition for time-saving AA8, and the time-saving number of times "200 times" can be set as the variable count end condition for time-saving BB8. It is better to set the time-saving number of times "300 times" as the variable count end condition for time-saving CC8. By configuring in this way, the duration of the disadvantageous time-saving state can be made different depending on the time-saving type that is set.

In this case, the remaining number of time-saving times displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be configured to initially display the remaining number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving times set to "100," and the display of the remaining number of time-saving times can be increased according to the progress of play in the disadvantageous time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine when the disadvantageous time-saving state will end.

In this eighth control example, if an unfavorable time-saving effect is won in the second special pattern lottery, a special pattern lottery that is less favorable than the normal state is executed in the first special pattern lottery until the unfavorable time-saving state ends. In other words, it is configured so that a penalty can be imposed on other special pattern lotteries depending on the result of one special pattern lottery.

<Ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to Figs. 356 to 375. The pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example, like the fifth control example described above, is configured to execute a jackpot game when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol, and to set a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends by a game ball entering (passing) a specific area (V-gate) provided in a game area (an area in a variable winning device (attacker) 3650 that is opened during a jackpot game). Also, like the fifth control example described above, it is configured to be able to execute a judgment of a winning time-saving symbol when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is a miss.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example, when a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery in the normal state, the most advantageous game state for the player (second time-saving state) is set. By configuring in this way, a game in which a player playing in the normal state wins a jackpot in the special pattern lottery and aims to transition to a probability-changing state that is more advantageous than the normal state while winning prize balls from the jackpot game, and a game in which a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery in the normal state and aims to set the most advantageous game state for the player (second time-saving state) can be executed in parallel, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, the trigger for transitioning to the game state that is most advantageous to the player (the second time-saving state) is set only when the player wins the time-saving state, and the determination of whether or not a time-saving state has been won (the time-saving lottery) is performed only in the normal state. Therefore, if a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set, the game state cannot be transitioned from the special state to the second time-saving state.

In addition, in this ninth control example, in order to make the second time-saving state a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the high probability state, the type of special pattern lottery that is likely to be executed during the high probability state is configured to be different from the type of special pattern lottery that is likely to be executed during the time-saving state.

Specifically, during the probability variation state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery. Also, during the time-saving state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery. And, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed as a special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set the high probability state and the time-saving state as game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and furthermore, it is possible to set a second time-saving state as a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the high probability state.

The pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above in that the configuration of the game board 13 has been changed, that part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed, that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed, and that the content of various control processes has been changed. Note that a description of the same content as in the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

<Regarding the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to Figures 356 to 361. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example is significantly different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above in that various non-electrically operated ports are provided inside the normal electric role 3071 (the game area where the game ball can flow down (it is easy to flow down) when the normal electric role 3071 is in the open state), various non-electrically operated devices are provided that are operated by the game ball that entered the various non-electrically operated ports, and a ball entry port that allows the ball to enter by the operation of various non-electrically operated devices is provided.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 356, but the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example is provided with a non-electric device (non-electric special symbol 1 device 3064a) associated with the ball entry means (first ball entry port 3064 on the right) that can acquire the right to play the first special symbol lottery (reserved special symbol 1), and a non-electric device (non-electric device 3065a) associated with the ball entry means (second ball entry port 3065) that can acquire the right to play the second special symbol lottery (reserved special symbol 2), and each non-electric device is configured to operate when a game ball enters the corresponding non-electric operating port (non-electric special symbol 1 port 3073a, non-electric special symbol 2 port 3073b) provided inside the normal electric device 3071.

Then, depending on the type of normal winning game that is likely to be executed when the game state is set to a high probability state (time-saving state, probability-changing state) for normal patterns, it is possible to execute a first normal winning game in which the game ball that flows into the inside of the normal electric device 3071 during a normal winning game is likely to enter the special pattern 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a, and a second normal winning game in which the game ball is likely to enter the special pattern 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, it is configured so that when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, it is easier to execute a normal symbol winning game (it is easier to get the game ball to enter the inside of the normal electric device 3071 during a normal symbol winning game) than when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, and as a normal symbol winning game to be executed when a normal symbol lottery is won, a time-saving state (first time-saving state) in which a first normal symbol winning game is more likely to be executed than a second normal symbol winning game, and a time-saving state (second time-saving state) in which a second normal symbol winning game is more likely to be executed than a first normal symbol winning game can be determined according to the game state set when a normal symbol winning game is won.

By configuring it in this way, the type of special pattern lottery that is likely to be executed during the high probability state of the normal pattern can be made different depending on the type of game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set.

In addition, in this ninth control example, the lottery is configured so that when the second special pattern lottery is executed, the lottery is more advantageous to the player than when the first special pattern lottery is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute games with different degrees of advantage for the player depending on the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so that the player can be interested not only in whether or not the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, but also in the type of game state that has been set.

In addition, in this ninth control example, when the time-saving state is set as the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the second special pattern lottery is likely to be executed, and when the probability variable state is set, the first special pattern lottery is likely to be executed. And, in some cases in which the time-saving state is set (when the second time-saving state is set), a condition that is difficult to be established (time-saving count 10,000 times) is set as the time-saving end condition for terminating the second time-saving state. In other words, when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is essentially configured to continue until the next jackpot game is executed. Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, which is likely to be executed during the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state is configured to be set after the jackpot game ends with a high probability (90%).

By configuring it in this way, even in the time-saving state where the probability of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery is lower than in the high probability state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play aiming for the next jackpot without ending the current game state, and it is also possible to make the bonus awarded to the player when a jackpot is won more advantageously than in the high probability state.

Now, with reference to FIG. 356, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 356 is a front view showing a schematic of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 356, the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 234) in that the configuration of the lower area and the right side area of the game board 13 are different. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same components are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 356, the lower area of the game board 13 formed below the variable display unit 80 is provided with a first ball entrance 64 through which the right to play the first special symbol lottery can be acquired. The right area of the game board 13 formed to the right of the variable display unit 80 is provided with an operating device 3070, a non-electric special symbol 1 device 3064a, a non-electric special symbol 2 device 3065a, and a through gate 67.

The operating device 3070 has a flow path formed therein through which game balls can flow down, and has a special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a and a special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening 3073b through which game balls that have flowed down the flow path can enter. A normal electric device 3071 is attached to the opening for allowing game balls to flow into the inside of the operating device 3070.

The normal electric device 3071 is opened by a normal winning game that is executed when a normal symbol lottery (a lottery executed based on the game ball passing through the through gate 67) is won. Note that the contents of the opening control process for the normal electric device 3071 based on the normal symbol lottery and the normal winning game are the same as the contents of the opening control process for the normal electric device 640a in the fifth control example described above, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

The non-electrically operated opening 3073a is connected to the non-electrically operated device 3064a by an operating mechanism (not shown). When a game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening 3073a while the non-electrically operated device 3064a is closed, the weight of the game ball activates the operating mechanism, and the non-electrically operated device 3064a is mechanically opened. In other words, the non-electrically operated opening 3073a is a means for opening the non-electrically operated device 3064a.

Similarly, the non-electrically operated opening 3073b is connected to the non-electrically operated device 3065a by an operating mechanism (not shown). When a game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening 3073b while the non-electrically operated device 3065a is closed, the weight of the game ball activates the operating mechanism, and the non-electrically operated device 3065a is mechanically opened. In other words, the non-electrically operated opening 3073b is a means for opening the non-electrically operated device 3065a.

A detailed explanation of the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a and special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a, which can be operated based on the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070, will be given later with reference to Figures 357 to 359.

As mentioned above, the non-electrical parts (special figure 1 non-electrical part 3064a and special figure 2 non-electrical part 3065a) are configured to open and close by mechanical action based on the weight of the game ball, not by electrical control. Therefore, unlike electrical parts that are electrically controlled to open and close (for example, normal electrical part 3071 and opening and closing door 3650f of variable winning device 3650), the opening and closing control is not performed by main control device 110 of pachinko machine 10, and the opening and closing status is not managed by main control device 110, etc.

Therefore, in this ninth control example, a detection sensor (not shown) is provided to detect the actual operating status of each non-electrical device (non-electrical device 3064a in special drawing 1, non-electrical device 3065a in special drawing 2), and the operating status (open/closed status) of each non-electrical device (non-electrical device 3064a in special drawing 1, non-electrical device 3065a in special drawing 2) is configured to be detectable.

Then, based on the detection result of the detection sensor, the player is notified by the special figure 1 non-electrical notification lamp 3064b or the special figure 2 non-electrical notification lamp 3065b that the special figure 1 non-electrical device 3064a is operating (open) or that the special figure 2 non-electrical device 3065a is operating (open). This makes it possible to notify the player of the operating status of each non-electrical device in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the ninth control example, the special pattern 1 non-electrical notification lamp 3064b and the special pattern 2 non-electrical notification lamp 3065b are configured to notify the player whether the corresponding non-electric role is operating (open), but notification means capable of notifying other situations may be provided, for example, notification means capable of notifying (suggesting) the player whether the situation is such that the special pattern 1 non-electrical role 3064a or the special pattern 2 non-electrical role 3065a is likely to operate. In this case, for example, based on the normal pattern winning type set when a winning normal pattern lottery is won, it is good to provide a notification means for notifying (suggesting) the player which non-electric role is likely to be activated (which non-electrical operating hole is likely to receive the game ball) in the normal pattern winning game to be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the type of non-electric device to be activated (released) at a timing before the special non-electric device is actually activated, for example, during the first period from when the normal pattern lottery is executed to when the result of the normal winning lottery is stopped and displayed, the second period from when the result of the normal winning lottery is stopped and displayed to when the normal winning game is executed, the third period from when the normal winning game is executed to when the game ball flows into the operating device 3070, the fourth period from when the normal winning game is executed to when the game ball enters the non-electric operating port, the fifth period from when the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 to when the game ball enters the non-electric operating port, and the sixth period from when the game ball enters the non-electric operating port to when the non-electric device is activated, or during a combined period in which multiple periods are selected and combined. Therefore, based on the content suggested by the notification means, the player can understand (predict) the content of the game to be executed later, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when an alert is issued by the alert means during any period (corresponding to the first, second, or third period described above) from when the winning lottery is executed until the game balls flow into the operating device 3070, the player can choose whether or not to allow the game balls to flow into the operating device 3070 based on the content of the alert from the alert means. In other words, when a favorable game state (e.g., time-saving state) that makes it easy to open a non-electric role is set, if a game ball is inserted into a ball-entry means (e.g., the right first ball-entry opening 3064) that allows ball entry when any one of the non-electric roles (e.g., the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a) is in operation (when the first special pattern lottery is executed), the favorable game state ends, but if a game ball is inserted into a ball-entry means (the second ball-entry opening 3065) that allows ball entry when another non-electric role (e.g., the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a) is in operation (when the second special pattern lottery is executed), the favorable game state does not end, and by configuring the above-mentioned notification means to be able to notify, it becomes possible to allow the player to select whether or not to continue the favorable game state. In other words, by allowing the player to select a game method (whether or not to launch a game ball), the result of the game that is executed later can be greatly different. This can increase players' motivation to play in order to achieve more advantageous gameplay.

Furthermore, in this case, when the game ball enters one ball entry means, a game that is more advantageous to the player is executed than when the game ball enters another ball entry means, but it becomes easier to end the advantageous game state, and when the game ball enters another ball entry means, a game that is less advantageous to the player is executed than when the game ball enters one ball entry means, but it becomes harder to end the advantageous game state. It is advisable to predetermine the contents of the privilege (e.g., a special pattern lottery) that is granted when the game ball enters each ball entry means and the conditions for ending the advantageous game state.

Here, a specific explanation of the detection sensors for detecting the operating status of each non-electric device is given. Detection means (proximity sensors) are provided at locations where it can detect that the operating mechanism (operating mechanism for Special Figure 1 3074, operating mechanism for Special Figure 2 3075), which is activated when a game ball enters the non-electric operating port (non-electric operating port for Special Figure 1 3073a, non-electric operating port for Special Figure 2 3073b) and comes into contact with it, is in the operating position (the position where the non-electric device is activated (released)). When the detection means detects that the operating mechanism is in the operating position (when the discrimination means discriminates based on the detection signal output from the detection means), it is possible to identify that the non-electric device is released.

In addition, as a method for managing the operating status of each non-electric role, a method other than the method of detecting the operating status of the actual non-electric role 3065a as described above may be used. For example, a detection means for detecting the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game may be provided, and based on the detection result by the detection means and the normal winning type, it may be determined which non-electric operating port (special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b) the game ball entered, and the operating status of each non-electric role may be specified based on the determination result. In this case, it is preferable to configure the device to specify the operating status of each non-electric role by determining whether the closing condition of each non-electric role is established based on the specified operating status of the non-electric role and the acquired winning information. By configuring in this way, it is no longer necessary to provide a dedicated detection means just for managing the operating status of the non-electric role, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In this case, it is advisable to provide a management process that detects the entry of a game ball into a ball entry means that is different in ease of entry when the non-electric device is operating and when it is not, compares the detection result with the contents specified as the operating status of the non-electric device, and determines whether the specified contents are normal or not.

Next, with reference to Figures 357 to 359, the detailed contents of the various components formed in the right area of the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example will be described. Figure 357 (a) is an enlarged view of the right area of the game board 13 shown in Figure 356. As shown in Figure 357 (a), a game ball flow path is formed in the vertical direction in the right area of the game board 13, and game balls launched toward the right area (game balls launched by right-handed play) flow down the game ball flow path and ultimately into the outlet 66.

A number of nails are planted vertically (up and down from the viewpoint of FIG. 357) in this game ball flow path, and these planted nails divide the game ball flow path into a left side flow path (a flow path formed between the nails and the variable display unit 80) and a right side flow path (a flow path formed to the right of the nails).

As shown in FIG. 357(a), the nails dividing the ball flow path into a left flow path and a right flow path are planted to form a passing area through which the ball can pass, so that the ball flowing down the left flow path can flow into the right flow path, and the ball flowing down the right flow path can flow into the left flow path.

The actuator 3070 is provided on the left side of the game ball flow path, i.e., at a position where game balls flowing down the left side flow path are easier to flow into than game balls flowing down the right side flow path, and the non-electric device 3064a of special figure 1 and the non-electric device 3065a of special figure 2 are provided on the right side of the game ball flow path, i.e., at a position where game balls flowing down the right side flow path are easier to flow into than game balls flowing down the left side flow path.

By forming a left flow path and a right flow path in this way, multiple paths can be created for the game balls launched by right-handed play to flow down. For example, when multiple devices (operating device 3070, special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a, etc.) installed in the right area are in a state where balls can enter (open state), game balls will only enter the devices installed upstream of the right area, making it difficult for game balls to enter the devices installed downstream, thereby preventing a situation in which game progress is delayed.

Here, the detailed configuration of the operating device 3070 will be explained. When a normal symbol lottery is won (when a normal symbol winning game is executed), the operating device 3070 becomes ready for a game ball to enter (i.e., the normal electric device 3071 is opened), and when a game ball enters one of the two non-electric operating ports (special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b) provided inside the operating device 3070, the corresponding non-electric device (special symbol 1 non-electric device 3064a, special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a) opens.

The game ball that flows into the inside of the operating device 3070 flows down the first flow path 3070a and reaches the movable piece 3072. This movable piece 3072 is variably controlled in a predetermined opening and closing pattern when a normal winning game is being played, and is configured to be variable between an open position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path 3070a can flow into the second flow path 3070b, and a closed position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path 300a can be received and flowed down toward the third flow path 3070c. Note that when a normal winning game is not being played (non-normal winning game state), the movable piece 3072 is configured to be in the closed position.

In other words, this movable piece 3072 is a means for allowing the inflow of game balls into the second flow path 3070b when a predetermined condition is met (when a normal winning game is executed). In this ninth control example, the opening operation content of the normal electric device 3071 in the normal winning game executed when a winning normal symbol lottery is won is configured to be different depending on the type of normal winning symbol. Specifically, the length of the period (opening period) from when the normal winning game is executed to when the normal electric device 3071 is opened is made different. Meanwhile, the movable piece 3072 is configured to be variably controlled in a predetermined variable pattern after the normal winning game is executed, regardless of the type of normal winning symbol.

The length of the opening period is varied depending on the type of normal winning, and the length of time required from when a normal winning game is executed until the game ball reaches the movable piece 3072 is varied, making it possible to play a normal winning game in which the game ball that reaches the movable piece 3072 is likely to be guided to the second flow path 3070b, and a normal winning game in which the game ball that reaches the movable piece 3072 is likely to be guided to the third flow path 3070c.

The second flow path 8070b is provided downstream with a special non-electrically operated port 3073a, and all game balls that flow down the second flow path 8070b enter the special non-electrically operated port 3073a. The special non-electrically operated port 3073a is connected to the special non-electrically operated device 3064a via a special non-electrically operated mechanism 3074, and when a game ball enters the special non-electrically operated port 3073a, the game ball comes into contact with the operating mechanism 3074, and the weight of the game ball activates the operating mechanism 3074, changing the special non-electrically operated device 3064a from the closed state to the open state.

When the non-electric special feature 3064a is in the open state, the operating mechanism 3074 is operated in the open state, so that the game ball that enters the non-electric special feature 3064a does not come into contact with the operating mechanism 3074. In other words, the non-electric special feature 3064a is a means for changing the non-electric special feature 3064a from the closed state to the open state, and is a means for changing the non-electric special feature 3064a without using an electrical drive source.

The special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is a non-electric device attached to the right first ball entrance 3064, and is configured to be variable between an open state in which a game ball can be inserted into the right first ball entrance 3064, and a closed state in which it is more difficult to insert a game ball than in the open state. This special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is changed from the closed state to the open state by the operation of the operating mechanism 3074 based on the entry of a game ball into the special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a. Then, after being changed to the open state, it is changed from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of two game balls into the right first ball entrance 3064.

Specifically, a holding means (not shown) capable of temporarily holding a ball that enters the right first ball entrance 3064 is provided inside the right first ball entrance 3064, and when two game balls are held in the holding means, the held game balls flow out due to their own weight into a discharge path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the gaming machine, and a closing mechanism (not shown) is provided so that the game balls discharged into the discharge path come into contact with it.

When the game ball comes into contact with this closing mechanism, the closing mechanism is activated, and the non-electric device 3064a in the special drawing 1, which was in the open state, is changed to the closed state.

As explained above, the non-electric device 3064a in Special Figure 1 is configured to change mechanically using the weight of the game balls flowing downstream, without using electrical control, whether it is changed from a closed state to an open state or from an open state to a closed state.

A special figure 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b is provided downstream of the third flow path 3070c, and all game balls that flow down the third flow path 8070c are configured to enter the special figure 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b. The special figure 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b is connected to the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a via the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075, and when a game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b, the game ball that entered contacts the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075, and the weight of the game ball activates the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075, changing the special figure 2 non-electrically operated device 3065a, which is in a closed state, to an open state.

When the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a is in the open state, the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075 is operating in the open state, so that the game ball that enters the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b does not come into contact with the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075. In other words, the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b is a means for changing the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a, which is in the closed state, to the open state, and is a means for changing the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a without using an electrical drive source.

The special figure 2 non-electric device 3064b is a non-electric device attached to the second ball entrance 3065, and is configured to be variable between an open state in which a game ball can be inserted into the second ball entrance 3065, and a closed state in which it is more difficult to insert a game ball than in the open state. This special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a is changed from the closed state to the open state by the operation of the special figure 2 operation mechanism 3075 based on the entry of a game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric operation port 3073b. Then, after being changed to the open state, it is changed from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of two game balls into the second ball entrance 3065.

Specifically, a holding means (not shown) capable of temporarily holding balls that enter the second ball entrance 3065 is provided inside the second ball entrance 3065, and when two game balls are held in the holding means, the held game balls flow out due to their own weight into a discharge path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the gaming machine, and a closing mechanism (not shown) is provided so that the game balls discharged into the discharge path come into contact with the discharge path.

When the game ball comes into contact with this closing mechanism, the closing mechanism is activated, and the non-electric special device 3065a in the open state is changed to a closed state.

As explained above, the non-electric device 3065a in Special Figure 2 is configured to change mechanically using the weight of the game balls flowing downstream, without using electrical control, whether it is changed from a closed state to an open state or from an open state to a closed state.

Next, referring to FIG. 357(b), the flow of the game ball during a normal winning game will be explained. FIG. 357(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game ball when the game ball enters the special game 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a during a normal winning game.

As shown in FIG. 357(b), when a normal winning game is executed, the normal electric device 3071 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. Then, when the normal electric device 3071 is changed to the open state, the game ball guided by the open normal electric device 3071 (see FIG. 357(b)) passes through the movable piece 3072 located in the open position and enters the special device 1 non-electric operation port 3073a. When the game ball enters the special device 1 non-electric operation port 3073a, the special device 1 operation mechanism 3074 is activated, and the special device 1 non-electric device 3064a becomes open (see the solid line in FIG. 357(b)).

When the special non-electric device 3064a is changed to the open state, the special non-electric device 3064a is changed to a position that blocks the right-side flow path, so that most of the game balls that are launched by right-handed play and flow down the right-side flow path 3060 enter the right first ball entrance 3064.

As shown in FIG. 357(b), in this ninth control example, the normal electric device 3071 is provided on the left flow path, and the special 1 non-electric device 3064a is provided on the right flow path. Furthermore, since the normal electric device 3071 is provided upstream of the special 1 non-electric device 3064a, the rate at which game balls flow into the normal electric device 3071 does not change depending on the variable state of the special 1 non-electric device 3064a. Therefore, by changing the special 1 non-electric device 3064a to the open state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which game balls during a normal hit cannot flow into the operating device 3070 and the game cannot proceed smoothly.

In addition, even if a normal winning game that allows the game ball to enter the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b is executed while the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is changed to the open state, the game ball can be reliably entered into the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b because the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a does not restrict the game ball from entering the operating device 3070.

In addition, in this ninth control example, since the game balls flowing down the right area 3060 are configured to flow down two paths (left path and right path), even if the normal electric device 3071 installed upstream is in an open state, the game balls flowing down the right path can be easily made to reach the special electric device 3064a installed downstream. In other words, when both the normal electric device 3071 and the special electric device 3064a are in an open state, the game balls flowing down the right area 3060 can be easily made to reach either device for a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which the game balls flow down one path.

When two game balls enter the non-electric device 3064a of Special Figure 1, which is in the open state, the closing condition of the non-electric device 3064a is met, as shown in Figure 358 (a), and the non-electric device 3064a is changed from the open state to the closed state.

As described above, in the ninth control example, even when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in an open state, the game ball can be inserted into the operating device 3070. For example, a game ball may enter the special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a while the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in an open state. In this case, even if a game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a continues to be in an open state because the special figure 1 operating mechanism 3074 is not activated by the entered game ball. In addition, the value of the number of balls that is the closing condition of the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a in the open state also continues as it is. In other words, even if a new game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a while the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in an open state, no special privilege is given to the player.

By configuring it in this way, when the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is changed to the open state, the player can be motivated to try to get a specified number of game balls (2 balls) into the right first ball entry port 3064 to which the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is attached until the next game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric operation port 3073a.

As described above, in the ninth control example, when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed to the open state, the game ball can be inserted into the operating device 3070. However, without being limited to this, for example, the operating device 3070 (normal electric role 3071) may be arranged downstream of the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and in a position that is more difficult to reach when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in the open state than when it is in the closed state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that enter the operating device 3070 during the period when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in the open state compared to the period when it is not in the open state.

Next, referring to FIG. 358(a), the ball flow of the game ball launched by right-hand play when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in the open state will be explained. FIG. 358(a) is a diagram that shows the flow when the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a in the open state. As shown in FIG. 358(a), when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed (operated) to the open state, the game ball is easily entered into the right first ball entrance 3064, and when the game ball enters the right first ball entrance 3064, a closing mechanism (not shown) connected to the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is activated, and the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed (operated) to the closed state.

Next, referring to FIG. 358(b), the operation of the various mechanisms when a game ball enters the special chart 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b will be explained. FIG. 358(b) is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when a game ball enters the special chart 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b during a normal winning game.

As shown in FIG. 358(b), when a normal winning game is executed, the normal electric device 3071 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. Then, when the normal electric device 3071 is changed to the open state, the game ball guided by the open normal electric device 3071 (see FIG. 358(b)) flows down the upper surface of the movable piece 3072 located in the closed position, flows down the third flow path 3070c, and enters the special device 2 non-electric operation port 3073b. When the game ball enters the special device 2 non-electric operation port 3073b, the special device 2 operation mechanism 3075 is activated, and the special device 2 non-electric device 3065a becomes open (see the solid line in FIG. 358(b)).

When the special non-electric device 3065a is changed to the open state, the special non-electric device 3065a is changed to a position that blocks the right-side flow path, so that most of the game balls that are launched by right-handed play and flow down the right-side area 3060 flow down the right-side flow path enter the second ball entrance 3065.

As shown in FIG. 358(b), in this ninth control example, the normal electric device 3071 is provided on the left flow path, and the special 2 non-electric device 3065a is provided on the right flow path. Furthermore, since the normal electric device 3071 is provided upstream of the special 2 non-electric device 3065a, the rate at which game balls flow into the normal electric device 3071 does not change depending on the variable state of the special 2 non-electric device 3065a. Therefore, by changing the special 2 non-electric device 3065a to the open state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which game balls during a normal hit cannot flow into the operating device 3070 and the game cannot proceed smoothly.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is disposed above the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a, so that, for example, when the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a is in the open state and the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is changed (activated) to the open state, the game ball released by right-handed play is preferentially introduced into the right first ball entrance 3064 rather than the second ball entrance 3065.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress excessive execution of the second special pattern lottery, in which a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery is executed, that is, excessive entry of game balls into the second ball entrance 3065. Furthermore, as long as the right first ball entrance 3064 is in an open state, it is possible to make it difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entrance 3065, so that the open state of the special pattern 2 non-electric device 3065a can be easily continued for a long period of time. For example, when the special pattern 2 non-electric device 3065a is changed (activated) to an open state just before the time-saving state ends, the game is played so that the special pattern 1 non-electric device 3064a is in an open state before the game ball enters the second ball entrance 3065, and the special pattern 1 non-electric device 3064a is changed (activated) to an open state, so that the open state of the special pattern 2 non-electric device 3065a can be maintained even after the time-saving state ends.

This allows the player to play with enthusiasm in order to make the game situation (the opening and closing status of the non-electric device 3065a in Special Figure 2) favorable to the player when the time-saving state ends.

Next, the game content of the normal winning game in this ninth control example will be explained with reference to Fig. 360 and Fig. 361. Fig. 360 is a diagram showing the flow of the normal winning game when normal winning opening pattern A (an opening pattern that is likely to be set during the first time-saving state) is set, and Fig. 361 is a diagram showing the flow of the normal winning game when normal winning opening pattern B (an opening pattern that is likely to be set during the second time-saving state) is set.

In this ninth control example, the operation content of the normal symbol winning game is changed according to the normal symbol winning type (game state at the time of winning) that is set when the normal symbol lottery is won, so that the timing of the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 during the normal symbol winning game is changed. Then, according to the timing of the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070, a normal symbol winning game (a normal symbol winning game with a normal symbol winning opening pattern A set) in which the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 is more likely to enter the special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a than the special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, and a normal symbol winning game (a normal symbol winning game with a normal symbol winning opening pattern B set) in which the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 is more likely to enter the special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b than the special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a are configured to be executable.

Furthermore, when the time-saving state is set as the game state, the normal winning type can be set to a time-saving type (first time-saving state) in which normal winning opening pattern A is more likely to be set than normal winning opening pattern B, and a time-saving type (second time-saving state) in which normal winning opening pattern B is more likely to be set than normal winning opening pattern A.

By configuring in this way, when a time-saving state is set that can make it easier for the game ball to enter the operating device 3070 than in the normal state (the period during which the normal electric device 3071 is in the open state during normal play per unit time can be made longer than in the normal state), it is possible to set a first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, and a second time-saving state (favorable time-saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery.

The normal winning game is composed of the period from when the normal winning game is executed until the normal electric role 3071 is changed to the open state (opening period), the period when the normal electric role 3071 is in the open state (opening period), and the period when the end condition for ending the open state of the normal electric role 3071 is met and the change from the open state to the closed state is made until the normal winning game is ended (ending period). A predetermined time (predetermined condition) is determined and specified for each period, and the opening operation of the normal electric role 3071 is executed according to the specified content. Furthermore, the movable control is executed to move the movable piece 3072 (see FIG. 780) provided in the operating device 3070 in a predetermined moving pattern.

First, referring to FIG. 360, the flow of the normal map winning game that is executed when normal map winning opening pattern A is set will be explained. Specifically, in the normal map winning game that is executed when normal map winning opening pattern A is set, as shown in FIG. 360, a normal map winning game with an opening period (OP period) of 3 seconds, an opening period of 2.5 seconds, and an ending period (ED period) of 1 second is executed as the normal map winning game. Then, for the movable piece 3072, after the open period in which the movable piece 3072 is in an open state has elapsed for 0.5 seconds, a movable control is executed in which the movable piece 3072 is in a closed state for 1.5 seconds.

In other words, in a normal winning game of the normal winning opening pattern A, the opening period of the normal electric device 3071 is set after a period (a period between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds after the normal winning game is executed) during which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can be guided to the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b (the movable piece 3072 is in a closed state) has elapsed. Therefore, when a normal winning game of the normal winning opening pattern A is executed, all (almost all) of the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 during the opening period in which the normal electric device 3071 is in an open state will pass through the open movable piece 3072 and enter the special winning 1 non-electric operating port 3073a. When a game ball enters the special symbol 1 non-electric operation port 3073a, the special symbol 1 non-electric device 3064a operates to the open state, so the normal symbol winning game of the normal symbol winning opening pattern A becomes a normal symbol winning game that makes it easy to execute the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, in this ninth control example, as a termination condition for terminating the open state of the normal electric role 3071, in addition to the time termination condition that is established when a predetermined time (2.5 seconds) has elapsed, a ball entry termination condition that is established when the number of game balls that have flowed into the operating device 3070 (game balls that have passed through the normal electric role 3071 in the open state) exceeds two is also set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent many game balls from flowing into the operating device 3070 during one normal game, so that it is possible to prevent, for example, game balls from clogging the operating device 3070 or the movable piece 3072 from becoming more susceptible to malfunction (breakage) due to an increase in the number of game balls that collide with the movable piece 3072.

Furthermore, when game balls are continuously shot, a maximum of 100 game balls can be shot in 60 seconds. Therefore, by continuously playing right-hand shots during normal winning games, the ball entry end condition is more likely to be met before the time end condition. Therefore, when right-hand shots that continuously shoot game balls are played, it is possible to end the normal winning game earlier. Therefore, for example, in a time-saving state in which a time-saving type (time-saving B) that is more likely to be executed in a normal winning game with normal winning opening pattern A than in a normal winning game with normal winning opening pattern B described later, more normal pattern lotteries are executed before the time-saving end condition for terminating the time-saving state is met, and game balls can be continuously shot to the player in order to execute the second special pattern lottery as many times as possible, thereby improving the operation of the game.

In addition, if the special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a is activated to the open state immediately before the time-saving end condition is met, it is possible to make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery after the time-saving end condition is met and the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state, so that the player can play until just before the time-saving end condition is met in the hope that a normal symbol winning game of the normal symbol winning opening pattern B will be executed, which makes it possible to enter the game ball into the second non-electric operating port 3073b in order to activate the special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a to the open state.

Next, the flow of the normal map winning game that is executed when the normal map winning opening pattern B is set will be explained. Specifically, in the normal map winning game that is executed when the normal map winning opening pattern B is set, as shown in FIG. 361, a normal map winning game is executed with an opening period (OP period) of 0.5 seconds, an opening period of 2.5 seconds, and an ending period (ED period) of 1 second. Then, for the movable piece 3072, after the opening period in which the movable piece 3072 is in an open state has elapsed for 0.5 seconds, a movable control is executed in which the movable piece 3072 is in a closed state for 1.5 seconds.

In other words, in a normal winning game of the normal winning opening pattern B, the opening period of the normal electric device 3071 is set during the period (the period between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds after the normal winning game is executed) during which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can be guided to the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b (the movable piece 3072 is in a closed state). Therefore, when a normal winning game of the normal winning opening pattern B is executed and the normal electric device 3071 is in an open state, all (almost all) of the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 during the opening period flow down the upper surface of the movable piece 3072 in the closed state and enter the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b. When a game ball enters the special symbol 2 non-electric operation port 3073b, the special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a operates to the open state, so the normal symbol winning game of the normal symbol winning opening pattern B becomes a normal symbol winning game that makes it easy to execute the second special symbol lottery.

As explained above, in this ninth control example, the length of the opening period in the normal winning game is varied according to the type of normal winning game, so that the type of special non-electric operating port into which the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 during the normal winning game can enter (is easy to enter) is varied. In this case, even if the content of the normal winning game other than the length of the opening period of the normal winning game is made common to the type of normal winning game, it is possible to reliably vary the type of special non-electric operating port into which the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 during the normal winning game can enter (is easy to enter), so that when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to easily execute a lottery for different types of special patterns, and this novel gameplay can be achieved while reducing the processing load of the pachinko machine 10.

The configuration for realizing the innovative gameplay of making it easier to execute different types of special pattern lotteries when the time-saving state is set is not limited to this. For example, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3071 in a normal winning game can be changed depending on the type of normal winning, so that the type of special non-electric operating port into which the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 can enter (is easy to enter) can be changed, or the moving pattern of the movable piece 3072 can be changed depending on the type of normal winning, so that the type of special non-electric operating port into which the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 can enter (is easy to enter) can be changed.

In addition, in this ninth control example, the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 are configured to enter one of the special non-electric operating ports, but this is not limited to this, and for example, a discharge port may be provided to discharge the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 back into the game area, or a prize opening may be provided from which a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) are paid out when a game ball enters the operating device 3070, and some of the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 enter the prize opening without entering the special non-electric operating port.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a pattern in which none of the special non-electric devices are activated to the open state even if a game ball flows into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given a certain relationship in which any of the special non-electric devices are activated to the open state when a normal winning game is played, and therefore prevents the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

As mentioned above, due to the nature of the non-electric device, there is no effect if a game ball enters the non-electric special device when the non-electric special device is in the open state. This may cause players to lose interest in playing the normal winning game when the non-electric special device is in the open state. However, by providing the above-mentioned winning port and a flow path that can allow game balls to enter the winning port inside the operating device 3070, the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 not only operates (changes) the non-electric special device to the open state, but also has the potential to award prize balls, so that players can become interested in playing the normal winning game when the non-electric special device is in the open state.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the special non-electric device so that it is easier for the game ball that can enter the corresponding special non-electric operating port to enter the above-mentioned winning port when the special non-electric device is open than when the special non-electric device is closed. For example, the special non-electric operating port is configured so that the game ball can pass through (for example, a gear configuration), and when the special non-electric device is closed, the game ball that entered the special non-electric operating port abuts against the operating mechanism, activating the operating mechanism, and the game ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. When the special non-electric device is open, the game ball that entered the special non-electric operating port flows down toward the winning port without abutting against the operating mechanism. By configuring it in this way, it is easier to win more prize balls during a normal game when the special non-electric device is open than when the special non-electric device is closed.

As a result, the normal winning game when the special non-electric device is open can be made an advantageous game for the player in terms of winning balls, so that the player can play in the hope that the normal winning game will be executed regardless of the open/closed state of the special non-electric device, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

First, the contents of normal winning opening pattern A will be explained with reference to FIG. 360. As shown in FIG. 360, when a normal winning game is executed, measurement of the opening period begins and the scenario for variably controlling the movable piece 3072 is updated.

The variable control of the movable piece 3072 is always constant regardless of the type of normal win, and a scenario is specified in which the movable piece 3072 is positioned in the closed position for 1.5 seconds after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the normal win game. In other words, the scenario is specified so that the 1.5-second closed period is set to a predetermined timing (0.5 seconds after the normal win game is executed) each time a normal win game is executed.

And for the normal map winning opening pattern A, the period from when the normal map winning game is executed until the normal electric role 3071 is changed to the open state (opening period) is 3 seconds, then the period during which the normal electric role 3071 is changed to the open state (opening period) is 2.5 seconds, and the period from when the opening period has elapsed until the normal map winning game ends (ending period) is 1 second. In other words, when the normal map winning opening pattern A is set, the scenario for the normal map winning game is specified so that the game period for the normal map winning game is a maximum of 6.5 seconds.

The above-mentioned open period (2.5 seconds) in the normal game is configured to be able to end under conditions other than the passage of time. Specifically, when the number of game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 during the open period reaches a predetermined number (2 balls) (when the winning number ending condition is met), the open period is configured to end without waiting for the time of the open period to elapse. In other words, when a normal game is played, the number of game balls flowing into the area (inside the operating device 3070) where game balls are more likely to enter than when a normal game is not played (the number of balls entering) reaches a predetermined number, so that the normal game can be ended. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an upper limit on the amount of bonuses that can be given to a player for one normal game, and it is possible to prevent excessive bonuses from being given to a player.

In addition, by ending the normal symbol game by satisfying the winning number ending condition, the game period of the normal symbol game can be made shorter than when the normal symbol game is ended based on the passage of time, and as a result, it is possible to increase the number of times that the normal symbol is drawn per unit time. Therefore, for example, in a time-saving state in which the normal symbol opening pattern A that allows the game ball to enter the special symbol 1 non-electric operation port 3073a is likely to be set, the player can continue playing with the aim of executing the second special symbol lottery as many times as possible (executing a normal symbol game that allows the game ball to enter the special symbol 2 non-electric operation port 3073b) before the time-saving state ends, which makes it easier to improve the operation of the game.

In particular, in the time-saving state where the normal winning opening pattern A is likely to be set, when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol (reserved special symbol 1) has reached the upper limit (4), that is, when no more game balls are inserted into the right first ball entrance 3064, a new reserved special symbol 1 cannot be acquired (stored), so that no more game balls are wasted. In this state, however, the action of temporarily interrupting the game of firing game balls (right-hitting game) is generally performed in order to prevent the firing of unnecessary game balls, but in the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example, the player can be made to select the action of continuing to play in order to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2). Therefore, a novel gameplay can be provided in which the player can select between a game in which game balls are not used wastefully and a game in which game balls are used wastefully in order to be granted an advantageous privilege.

As shown in FIG. 360, when the normal winning opening pattern A is set, the opening period is set to 3 seconds, so the closing period of the movable piece 3072 ends before the opening period has elapsed. Therefore, when a normal winning game with the normal winning opening pattern A set is played, the normal electric device 3071 is opened, and the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 flows down the first flow path 3070a and the second flow path 3070b and enters the special 1 non-electric operating port 3073a (see FIG. 357(b)).

Next, referring to FIG. 361, the flow of the normal winning game when normal winning opening pattern B is set will be explained. In this ninth control example, the only thing that differs between normal winning opening pattern A and normal winning opening pattern B is the length of the opening period of the normal winning game, and otherwise the same normal winning game is played. A detailed explanation of the same content will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 361, the normal winning opening pattern B has a 0.5 second opening period for the normal winning game, so that the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 during the period when the movable piece 3072 is in the closed position can reach the movable piece 3072.

As explained above, in this ninth control example, the lottery is configured to be executed so that the second special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery, and the non-electrically operated opening (non-electrically operated opening for special pattern 1 3073a, non-electrically operated opening for special pattern 2 3073b) into which the game ball is more likely to enter during a normal winning game is configured to be different depending on the normal winning type that is set when a normal winning game is won.

The game is configured so that the play period of the regular winning game (regular winning game in which regular winning opening pattern B is set) in which the game ball can enter the special winning 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b, which is the execution machine for the second special pattern lottery advantageous to the player, is shorter.

By configuring it in this way, when the time-saving state type B, which is a time-saving state type that makes it easier to get the game ball into the special chart 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b, is set as the type of time-saving state, it is possible to efficiently play a regular winning game, allowing the player to smoothly play during the time-saving state.

On the other hand, when the type of time-saving state is set to time-saving A, which makes it easier to play a normal winning game (a normal winning game in which a normal winning opening pattern A is set) in which the game ball can enter the special winning game 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a, which is the execution machine for the first special pattern lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, the opening period of the normal winning game becomes longer, and the period required for one normal winning game becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the number of times that a normal winning game is played (the number of times that a normal pattern lottery is played) during the time-saving state.

In addition, when the normal winning opening pattern A is set, the normal winning electric device 3071 is configured to open after the period during which the game ball can enter the special winning opening 3073b has elapsed, so that it is possible to prevent a game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game with the normal winning opening pattern A from entering the special winning opening 3073b.

In other words, by varying the degree of overlap between the period during which game balls can flow into the operating device 3070 (open period of the normal electric device 3071) and the period during which the movable piece 3072 is in the closed position (closed period of the movable piece 3072) according to the set normal winning opening pattern, a method is possible to set a normal winning game (advantageous normal winning game) in which it is possible to get the game ball to enter the special chart 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, and a normal winning game (unfavorable normal winning game) in which it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the special chart 2 non-electric operating port 3073b. In addition to the method used in the ninth control example, that is, the method of varying the length of the opening period of a normal winning game depending on the type of normal winning game, with a normal winning game with a short opening period set being a favorable normal winning game and a normal winning game with a long opening period set being an unfavorable normal winning game, it may be configured so that a normal winning game with a short opening period set is an unfavorable normal winning game and a normal winning game with a long opening period set is an advantageous normal winning game.

However, in this case, the movable piece 3072 will be positioned in the closed position at a timing chronologically later than the timing at which game balls flow into the operating device 3070 due to a win on the non-favourable figure. For example, if a game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 during a win on the non-favourable figure remains in the play area within the operating device 3070, there is a risk that the game ball will reach the movable piece 3072 after it has been positioned in the closed position.

In contrast, in the method used in the ninth control example, the closed period during which the movable piece 3072 is in the closed position ends before the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 due to a win on the non-favourable figure, so even if the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 due to a win on the non-favourable figure remains in the play area within the operating device 3070, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to carry out fraudulent acts such as intentionally causing game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 due to a win on the non-favourable figure to remain in the operating device 3070.

As described above with reference to Figures 360 and 361, in this ninth control example, a normal winning opening pattern A in which the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game cannot reliably enter the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, and a normal winning opening pattern B in which the game ball reliably enters the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b can be set. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the same normal winning opening pattern is set, the game ball can or cannot enter the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b depending on the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 and the time it takes for the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 to reach the movable piece 3072.

In this case, for example, when a game ball is caused to flow into the operating device 3070 during a part of the opening period (2.5 seconds) of the normal electric role 3071 during a normal winning game (the first 0.5 seconds or the last 0.5 seconds), the game ball can be configured to reach the movable piece 3072 located in the closed position. By configuring it in this way, whether or not the game ball enters the special game 2 non-electric operating port 3073b is determined depending on the timing of the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070, so the player can be interested in the timing at which the game ball will enter the operating device 3070.

In addition, as another configuration, for example, a plurality of flow paths through which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can flow down may be formed inside the operating device 3070, and the time required for the game ball to reach the movable piece 3072 may be varied depending on the flow path through which the game ball flows down, so that the game ball can reach the movable piece 3072 located in the closed position if the time required for the game ball to reach the movable piece 3072 after flowing into the operating device 3070 is within a predetermined period, or the game ball can reach the movable piece 3072 located in the closed position if the time required for the game ball to reach the movable piece 3072 after flowing into the operating device 3070 is equal to or longer than a predetermined period. By configuring in this way, the player can be interested in the behavior of the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 until it reaches the movable piece 3072.

As described above, in this ninth control example, the type of special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed is configured to differ depending on the type of game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. However, without being limited to this, the type of special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed may be configured to differ depending on the type of normal symbol win that is set when a normal symbol win occurs during the high probability state of the normal symbol (time-saving state).

In addition, in this ninth control example, the type of non-electrically operated opening into which the game ball can enter is determined in accordance with the opening pattern of the normal winning game being executed, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the type of non-electrically operated opening into which the game ball can easily enter to be different depending on the opening pattern of the normal winning game being executed. In other words, it is possible to configure it so that the game ball can enter any non-electrically operated opening regardless of the opening pattern in which the normal winning game is executed, and to configure the ease of entry into each non-electrically operated opening to be variable in accordance with the opening pattern of the normal winning game.

<Regarding transition of game state in the ninth control example>
Next, the transition of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 362. Fig. 362 is a game flow showing the transition of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example.

In this ninth control example, three game states can be set: a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and a probability-changing state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols).Furthermore, depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state (time-saving setting trigger), a first time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is relatively easy to be met, and a second time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is relatively difficult to be met can be set.Specifically, the second time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player, is more likely to be set when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving state in the time-saving state winning judgment (time-saving lottery) than when the time-saving state is set based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

This allows players to be interested not only in whether or not the time-saving state is set, but also in what time-saving setting trigger the time-saving state is set based on.

First, the game content in the normal state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 362, the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example has a first ball entrance 64 provided in a position where a game ball that has flowed down the game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 can enter the game area (left hitting area) where a game ball launched by left hitting game can flow down, and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first special symbol lottery is executed. On the other hand, even if a right hitting game is performed in the normal state, in the normal state where a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is low (1/240), and it is difficult to cause the game ball to flow into the operating device 3070, so it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the right first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065. Therefore, in the normal state, left hitting game is an advantageous game for the player.

In the first special symbol lottery, a jackpot lottery (jackpot winning judgment) is executed with a probability of winning the jackpot at 27/8192, and a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) is executed with a probability of winning the time-saving lottery at 1/8192. Here, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, jackpot A or jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, and when jackpot A (selection rate 70%) is set, a special state (space mode) is set after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, when jackpot B (selection rate 30%) is set, a first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the probability change state (space mode), a high probability state for normal symbols is set, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240), so it is easy to play a game in which the game ball flows into the actuator 3070 by playing from the right, and the game ball enters one of the non-electrically operated ports, resulting in the game being entered into the right first ball entry port 3064 or the second ball entry port 3065. Therefore, during the probability change state (space mode), playing from the right is an advantageous game for the player.

During the high probability state (space mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to easily enter the special pattern 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, so the first special pattern lottery is basically executed. If a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, as described above, the jackpot type is set to jackpot A or jackpot B, so if jackpot A (selection rate 70%) is set, the high probability state (space mode) is set again after the jackpot game ends, and if jackpot B (selection rate 30%) is set, the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the first time-saving state (challenge mode), a high probability state for normal symbols is set, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240), so similar to the special probability state described above, it becomes a state in which it is easy to execute a game in which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 by playing from the right, and the game ball enters one of the non-electric operating ports, thereby entering the right first ball entry port 3064 or the second ball entry port 3065. Therefore, during the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), right-hitting play is an advantageous game for the player.

During the first time-saving state (challenge mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to easily enter the special pattern 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, so the second special symbol lottery is basically executed. If a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is set to jackpot A or jackpot C, and if jackpot A (selection rate 10%) is set, the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if jackpot C (selection rate 90%) is set, the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the second time-saving state (heaven mode), a high probability state for normal symbols is set, similar to the first time-saving state (challenge mode) described above, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240). As a result, similar to the above-mentioned probability-changing state, it becomes a state in which it is easy to execute a game in which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 by right-hand hitting and enters one of the non-electric operating ports, thereby entering the right first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065. Therefore, during the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), right-hand hitting is an advantageous game for the player.

During the second time-saving state (heaven mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to easily enter the special pattern 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, so the second special symbol lottery is basically executed. If a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is set to jackpot A or jackpot C, and if jackpot A (selection rate 10%) is set, the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if jackpot C (selection rate 90%) is set, the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

Here, in this ninth control example, the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are configured to differ in the ease with which the time-saving end condition is met, and the first time-saving state is configured to be more easily met than the second time-saving state. Specifically, the first time-saving state is configured to have a time-saving end condition that is met when the total number of lotteries, which is the sum of the number of times the first special pattern lottery is performed and the number of times the second special pattern lottery is performed, reaches 10, as the time-saving end condition for terminating the time-saving state, and if the time-saving end condition is met without a jackpot game being performed, the game state transitions to the normal state.

On the other hand, the second time-saving state has a time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of draws, which is the sum of the number of times the first special pattern draw is performed and the number of times the second special pattern draw is performed, reaches 10,000, and if the time-saving end condition is established without a jackpot game being played, the game state transitions to the normal state. In this eighth control example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special pattern draw is configured to be approximately 27/8192, so when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state will essentially continue until the next jackpot is won.

<About the performance content in the 9th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 363 and Fig. 364, among various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this ninth control example, characteristic effects will be described. Specifically, the contents of the time-saving winning effect for indicating the time-saving winning during the normal state and the contents of the effect mode screen corresponding to each game state will be described. Note that the same elements as those in each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 363(a), the content of the presentation when the time-saving symbol is hit (time-saving win) in the normal state will be explained. FIG. 363(a) is a diagram showing an example of what is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time-saving symbol is hit (time-saving win) in the normal state.

In this ninth control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed only during the normal state. Specifically, if the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the normal state is not a jackpot (is a miss), it is possible to determine whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won, and the time-saving lottery is won with a low probability of 1/8192 when the special pattern lottery is executed. If the time-saving lottery is won, the time-saving state (second time-saving state) is set after the special pattern fluctuation is stopped to show the result of the target special pattern lottery. Here, in this ninth control example, the second time-saving state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player, so that a player playing during the normal state can aim to win the time-saving lottery while also aiming to win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery.

If the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, an image of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 going black is displayed, as shown in FIG. 363(a). In this eighth control example, as in each of the control examples described above, the presence or absence of a time-saving feature win is not taken into consideration when determining (selecting) the variation pattern of the special pattern variation. Specifically, the variation pattern is determined so that the result of the special pattern lottery corresponds to a miss, regardless of whether or not the time-saving feature is won.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for players to predict whether or not they will win the time-saving feature based on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that is executed. Also, as with each of the control examples described above, if the result of the special symbol lottery in the normal state is a miss, a variation pattern with a different variation time is selected, so that the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that wins the time-saving feature will also be set to a different variation time.

Furthermore, as in this ninth control example, by configuring the display to continue to display a specific image (blackout image) as a variation effect corresponding to the special pattern variation indicating that a time-saving win has been won until a command to stop the special pattern is received, even if a variation pattern with a different variation time is selected, the process of determining the variation effect corresponding to the time-saving win as the variation effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified.

In this ninth control example, the display screen shown in FIG. 363(a) is always displayed as the variable effect corresponding to the time-saving win (the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the special pattern is changing), thereby reducing the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113. However, without being limited to this, for example, as the variable effect corresponding to the time-saving win, a variable effect (variable effect to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss) based on a variable pattern command (variable pattern command indicating a miss win) output from the main control device 110 may be set, and a blackout image may be displayed from a specific timing during the execution period of the set variable effect (for example, the timing when 5 seconds have passed since the variable effect was executed, the timing when the performance mode of the variable effect progresses (reach display timing), or the timing when the third pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a miss).

By configuring it in this way, while the variable presentation is being executed to indicate that the special pattern lottery result is a miss, that is, during the period when the player's motivation to play is likely to decrease, the player can be notified that he or she will be granted the most advantageous benefit (a time-saving win). This makes it possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing even while the variable presentation is being executed, which is likely to result in a miss in the special pattern lottery result.

In addition, as a method of inserting an effect indicating a time-saving win during the execution of a normal variable effect, other than the method of inserting an effect indicating a time-saving win at a specific, predetermined timing as described above, for example, when an operation effect is executed that has the player operate the frame button 22, an effect indicating a time-saving win may be inserted as part of the result of that operation effect. By configuring it in this way, an effect can be executed to notify the player of whether or not a time-saving win has been won based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22), making it possible to motivate the player to operate the operation means.

Next, the content of the presentation during the second time-saving state (heaven mode) will be explained with reference to FIG. 363(b). FIG. 363(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the second time-saving state (heaven mode).

As shown in FIG. 363(b), when the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set, a background image of heaven is displayed as the background image of the main display area Dm. Then, in the small display area Dm31, the words "Continuation rate 90%" are displayed as a guide to indicate the probability (continuation rate) that the second time-saving state (heaven mode) will be set again if a jackpot is won. Then, in the sub-display area, the comment "Even if it ends, you'll end up in space" is displayed as a guide to explain the game content if the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is not set (does not continue) after a jackpot is won.

In addition, in the small display area Dm32 formed to the left of the main display area Dm, the presentation modes (heaven, space, normal) corresponding to each game state are displayed in an order corresponding to the degree of advantage to the player. In this ninth control example, the more advantageous the game state is to the player, the farther from the ground (higher altitude) the background of the presentation mode is configured to be, and the heaven mode is configured to be set for the most advantageous game state to the player (second time-saving state), and the space mode is configured to be set for the next most advantageous game state to the player (high probability state).

In this way, by associating the appearance of multiple presentation modes with the degree of advantage to the player, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually determine whether the presentation mode displayed to the player is advantageous or not. In addition, the guidance appearance displayed in the small display area Dm32 makes it easier for the player to visually grasp the full range of presentation modes that can be set (switched to), the currently set presentation mode, and the degree of advantage of each presentation mode, so that the player can easily determine whether it is better to continue with the currently set presentation mode or to switch to a more advantageous presentation mode, making it easier to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

As shown in FIG. 363(b), during the second time-saving state (heaven mode), the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, and in reality, the condition for ending the time-saving time is met when 10,000 special pattern lotteries have been performed without a jackpot being won in the special pattern lottery, and the game is configured to transition to the normal state. However, since the rate at which 10,000 special pattern lotteries are performed without a jackpot being won in the special pattern lottery is very small, the number of times special pattern lotteries will be performed (remaining number of time-saving times) until the condition for ending the time-saving time is met is not displayed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to believe that the second time-saving state (heaven mode) will continue until the next big win is won. Furthermore, in the unlikely event that the number of remaining time-saving times in the second time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to configure it so that a warning effect is executed that displays a warning image to inform the player that there is a risk that the second time-saving state will end, and the number of remaining time-saving times. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the second time-saving state from ending without any warning, causing confusion to the player.

Next, the contents of the display screen during the high probability state (space mode) will be explained with reference to FIG. 364(a). FIG. 364(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed on the display screen during the high probability state (space mode). As shown in FIG. 364(a), during the high probability state, the system is configured so that the first special symbol lottery is easily executed by right-hitting play, and therefore a display mode (shown by three arrows in the figure) is displayed in the small display area Dm1 to indicate that the first special symbol variation is being executed. A background image that imitates space is displayed as the background image of the main display area Dm, and the words "space mode" are displayed as a guide mode to indicate the current presentation mode.

Then, in the small display area Dm31, the characters "Continuation rate 70%" are displayed as a guide mode to indicate the probability (continuation rate) that the probability of the special symbol lottery being set again after the big win game ends. In addition, in the small display area Dm32, a display mode is displayed to inform the player that the current game state is a probability of the special symbol lottery in an easy-to-understand manner. The game state in which the space mode is set, that is, the probability of the special symbol lottery being set, is configured so that the probability of the special symbol lottery being set is high (1/60), and the probability of the special symbol lottery being set continues until the next big win is won. In other words, when the probability of the special symbol lottery being set (space mode) is set, a game advantageous to the player (a game in which it is easy to execute the special symbol lottery) will continue to be executed until the next big win game is executed, as in the case where the second time-saving state (heaven mode) described above is set, so that the game state is advantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 364(b), the content of the presentation executed when the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set will be described. FIG. 364(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the first time-saving state (challenge mode). As shown in FIG. 364(b), when the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set, a presentation is executed to gradually increase the altitude (altitude) using the rocket 1851. Then, a display mode is displayed in the small display area Dm8 to indicate the remaining number of times for the second special symbol lottery (10 times) executed during the first time-saving state, and the comment "Deliver it to heaven" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and a presentation corresponding to a game aimed at winning a jackpot is executed by the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state.

In other words, during the first time-saving state, a variation effect is executed in which the degree of ascent of the rocket 1851 is varied based on the result of the second special symbol lottery, and if a jackpot is won, an effect is executed in which the rocket 1851 reaches heaven. Then, if the lottery result of the second special symbol variation that satisfies the condition for ending the time-saving state of the first time-saving state, i.e., the final time-saving variation, is a miss, an effect is executed in which the rocket 1851 breaks down and falls to the normal background (for example, the ground), and the player is informed that the normal state will be set after the first time-saving state ends.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol drawing executed during the first time-saving state, an effect is executed in which the rocket 1851 wanders through space and transitions to space mode. By configuring it in this way, during challenge mode, the effect can be continuously executed for a period spanning the period in which multiple special symbol drawing are executed, so that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 365 to Fig. 375. The ninth control example differs from the pachinko machine of the fifth control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 have been changed, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to Figs. 365 to 367. Fig. 365(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this ninth control example. As shown in Fig. 365(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in this ninth control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth control example described above (see Fig. 244(a)) in that the first win random number 9 table 202ha is provided instead of the first win random number 5 table 202da, the big win type selection 9 table 202hb is provided instead of the first win type selection 5 table 202db, and the normal win type selection 9 table 202hf and the time-saving win random number table 202he are added.

The normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf is a data table that is referenced to determine the normal winning type when a winning (normal winning) occurs in the lottery for a normal symbol. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 367(b), but when a winning occurs in the lottery for a normal symbol, this normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf is referenced to determine the game state at the time of the winning and the normal winning type that corresponds to the value of the acquired normal winning type counter C6. The contents specified in this normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf will be described later with reference to FIG. 367.

Here, the regular winning type counter C6 is a counter whose value is periodically updated by the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, just like other counters (such as the first winning random number counter C1). Specifically, each time the timer interrupt process is executed, the value of the regular winning type counter C6 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (99 in this embodiment), it is cleared to the minimum value of 0. In other words, the value of the regular winning type counter C6 is updated while looping through the range of "0 to 99". The updated value is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. When a regular winning is won, the regular winning type counter C6 stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203 is read out and referenced when determining the regular winning type.

Next, the first win random number 9 table 202ha in this ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 365(b). FIG. 365(b) shows the contents of the first win random number 9 table 202ha in this ninth control example.

As shown in FIG. 365(b), the first win random number 9 table 202ha differs from the above-mentioned first win random number 5 table 202da (see FIG. 245(a)) in that the range of values of the first win random number counter C1 that are determined to be a jackpot win is different. In addition, in this ninth control example, the range of possible values of the first win random number counter C1 is different. Specifically, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, the range of possible values of the first win random number counter C1 is specified as 900 values from "0 to 899", but in this ninth control example, it is specified as 8192 values from "0 to 8191". By configuring in this manner, it is possible to specify a lower probability of judgment result in various judgments that are determined by referring to the value of the first win random number counter C1. In this ninth control example, only the range of possible values of the first win random number counter C1 is different, and the process for updating the value of the first win random number counter C1 and the configuration for storing the updated value are the same, so detailed explanations are omitted.

Specifically, when the probability state of the special symbol is "low probability," the lottery result is defined as "jackpot" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1 in the range of "0 to 26," and as "miss" for the range of "27 to 8191." When the probability state of the special symbol is "high probability," the lottery result is defined as "jackpot" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1 in the range of "0 to 136," and as "miss" for the range of "137 to 8191."

In other words, when the probability state of the special symbol is "low probability," the first random win counter C1 has 8192 possible values, of which 27 are determined to be jackpots, so the probability of winning the jackpot is 27/8192 (approximately 1/300). On the other hand, when the probability state of the special symbol is "high probability," the first random win counter C1 has 8192 possible values, of which 137 are determined to be jackpots, so the probability of winning the jackpot is 137/8192 (approximately 1/60).

Next, referring to FIG. 366(a), the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 366(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb. As shown in FIG. 366(a), the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb has two types of jackpot types, A9 and B9, corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and two types of jackpot types, A9 and C9, corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2).

As shown in FIG. 366(a), for the type of special symbol, Special Symbol 1 (first special symbol), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 69" is associated with "jackpot A9", which is specified. This "jackpot A9" is a jackpot type (9-round winning jackpot) with 9 rounds and a winning state set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 70 are "jackpot A9", so the probability of "jackpot A9" being determined when a jackpot is drawn for the first special symbol is 70% (70/100).

As shown in FIG. 366(a), for the first special symbol, the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from 70 to 99 is specified as corresponding to "jackpot B9". This "jackpot B9" is a jackpot type (9-round first time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 and the first time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 30 counter values that become "jackpot B9", so the probability that "jackpot B9" will be determined when a jackpot is drawn for the first special symbol is 30% (30/100).

In addition, for the special pattern type, special pattern 2 (second special pattern), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is associated with "jackpot A9", which is specified. This "jackpot A9" is a jackpot type (9-round guaranteed jackpot) with 9 rounds and a guaranteed jackpot state set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 10 counter values that are "jackpot A9", so the probability that "jackpot A9" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special pattern is 10% (10/100).

As shown in FIG. 366(a), for the second special symbol, the value range of the first winning type counter C2 from 10 to 99 is associated with "jackpot C9", which is stipulated. This "jackpot C9" is a jackpot type (9-round second time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 and the second time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 90 are "jackpot C9", so the probability that "jackpot C9" will be determined when a jackpot is drawn for the second special symbol is 90% (90/100).

Next, the detailed contents of the time-saving random number 9 table 202he will be explained with reference to FIG. 366(b). FIG. 366(b) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 9 table 202he. This time-saving random number 9 table 202he differs from the time-saving random number 5 table 202ge in the fifth control example described above in that it has a different value for the first winning random number counter C1 that can win the time-saving prize, and it stipulates a value for the first winning random number counter C1 that can also win the time-saving prize in the second special pattern lottery, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

Specifically, when the normal state is set, a judgment value is specified for judging a time-saving win when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "8192" in both the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery. In other words, in this ninth control example, the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state is configured to have a probability of 1/8192 for a time-saving win. Note that when a time-saving win is won, the second time-saving type (time-saving B) is always set, so after a time-saving win is won, the state transitions to the second time-saving state (heaven mode).

Next, the details of the normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf will be explained with reference to FIG. 367. FIG. 367 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf. This normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf is a data table that is referenced when determining the normal winning type that is set when a winning normal symbol lottery is won, and different normal winning types (normal winning A, normal winning B) are defined in correspondence with the set game state and the acquired value of the normal winning type counter C6.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 367, when the game state is "high probability" or "first time reduction" and the acquired value of the normal winning type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 99", "normal winning type A" is determined as the normal winning type, and when the game state is "second time reduction" and the acquired value of the normal winning type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 99", "normal winning type B" is determined as the normal winning type.

Now, the details of the normal winning type will be explained. In this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3071 in a normal winning game is different when a low probability state of a normal pattern is set and when a high probability state of a normal pattern is set, and the period during which the normal electric device 3071 is in an open state in one normal winning game is shorter when a low probability state of a normal pattern is set than when a high probability state of a normal pattern is set. This makes it easier to get a game ball into the operating device 3070 in a high probability state of a normal pattern than in a low probability state of a normal pattern.

As described above, the inside of the operating device 3070 is provided with the special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a for operating the special symbol 1 non-electric device 3064a associated with the right first ball entrance 3064 from a closed state to an open state, and the special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b for operating the special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a associated with the second ball entrance 3065 from a closed state to an open state. Therefore, a state in which it is easy for game balls to flow into the operating device 3070 (high probability state of normal symbols) is a game state in which it is easier to execute the lottery for special symbols than a state in which it is difficult for game balls to flow into the operating device 3070 (low probability state of normal symbols), resulting in a game state that is advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, in the time-saving state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, different time-saving types can be set, and the selection ratio of the normal symbol winning type, which is determined when a normal symbol lottery is won, is configured to differ depending on the time-saving type that has been set. In this ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 367(b), "Normal symbol winning A" and "Normal symbol winning B" are selectable as normal symbol winning types.

The length of the period (opening period) from when a normal winning game is executed to when the normal electric device 3071 opens is made different between when "normal winning A" is determined as the normal winning type and when "normal winning B" is determined. This is done without changing the length of the period during which the normal electric device 3071 opens during one normal winning game. In other words, regardless of which normal winning type is determined, a normal winning game that is easier to cause game balls to flow into the operating device 3070 is executed than a normal winning game executed in the normal state (low probability state of normal patterns), but the timing of the game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 is configured to be different depending on the determined normal winning type. By varying the inflow timing, it is possible to execute a normal winning game in which the game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 are more likely to enter the special pattern 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, and a normal winning game in which the game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 are more likely to enter the special pattern 2 non-electric operating port 3073b.

Specifically, when "normal hit A" is set as the normal hit type, the opening period of the normal hit game is set so that the movable piece 3072 is likely to be in an open state during the period in which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072, and when "normal hit B" is set, the opening period of the normal hit game is set so that the movable piece 3072 is likely to be in a closed state during the period in which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072.

In addition, in this ninth control example, as described above with reference to Figures 360 and 361, as a normal winning game, a normal winning game (normal winning game of normal winning A) in which a game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 enters the special chart 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, and a normal winning game (normal winning game of normal winning B) in which a game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 enters the special chart 2 non-electric operating port 3073b are configured to be executable, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, a normal winning game During the opening period in which the normal electric device 3071 is in the open state, if the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 during the first period, the game ball can enter the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, and if the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 during a second period different from the first period, the game ball can enter the special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a. A normal winning game (for example, a normal winning type "normal winning C") may be executed.

By configuring it in this way, the non-electrically operated port (specially 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a, specially 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b) into which the game ball can enter is not determined according to the set normal winning type, but rather the non-electrically operated port (specially 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a, specially 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b) into which the game ball can enter is determined according to the flow-down situation of the game ball (the timing of the game ball entering the operating device 3070, the flow-down speed and flow-down path within the operating device 3070, etc.), making it difficult for the player to understand which special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery) is more likely to be executed until the game ball enters which non-electrically operated port (specially 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a, specially 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b).

In this ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 367, the contents of the normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf are stipulated so that the normal winning type is reliably different depending on the set game state, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the normal winning type B to be selectable even when the second time-saving state is not set, to the extent that the normal winning type B is more likely to be selected when the second time-saving state is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which the second special pattern lottery is suddenly executed in a high probability state of normal patterns in which the first special pattern lottery is mainly executed, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with an element of surprise in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 368, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 368 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 368, the configuration of the RAM 203 in this ninth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 244(b)) in that a special chart 2 variation count counter 203pa has been added. The rest of the configuration is the same as the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth control example described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The jackpot type storage area 203eb is a memory area for temporarily storing data indicating the type of jackpot that has been won when a jackpot has been won. When a jackpot is won by drawing a special pattern, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in this jackpot type storage area 203eb. The data stored in this jackpot type storage area 203eb is retained until the end of the jackpot that has been won, and is used to set the game state after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. Note that the detailed contents of the jackpot type storage area 203eb are the same as those described above in the ninth embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 369(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 369(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 369(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in this ninth control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth control example described above only in that an expectation selection table 222pa is added. This expectation selection table 222pa is a data table referenced to determine the presentation mode (expectation suggested by the presentation) of the mode type suggestion presentation (see FIG. 791(b)) for suggesting to the player whether the "time-saving A1" in which the second special symbol selection is relatively difficult to perform or the "time-saving A2" in which the second special symbol selection is relatively easy to perform is set in the time-saving type "time-saving A", that is, in the state in which the time-saving state in which the first special symbol selection is mainly performed is set.

As described above, in this ninth control example, "time-saving A" can be set as a time-saving state in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery. Furthermore, as "time-saving A", either "time-saving A1" in which the second special symbol lottery is relatively difficult to execute, or "time-saving A2" in which it is relatively easy to execute, can be set. When "time-saving A" is set, a common mode presentation (time-saving A mode) is executed regardless of which time-saving type (time-saving A1, time-saving A2) is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a player who has had the time-saving A mode presentation executed with the fun of predicting whether the set time-saving type is "time-saving A1" or "time-saving A2." In addition, because the mode suggestion presentation is configured to be executable while the time-saving A mode presentation is being executed, it is possible to provide the player with an element for predicting the time-saving type (time-saving A1, time-saving A2) that is actually set while the time-saving A mode presentation is being executed.

Here, the details of the expectation selection table 222pa will be described with reference to FIG. 369(b). FIG. 369(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the expectation selection table 222pa. As shown in FIG. 369(b), the expectation selection table 222pa specifies the type of expectation (the expectation for which the time-saving type A2 is set) and the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223ea in correspondence with each other for each time-saving type. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 369(b), for the time-saving type "time-saving A1" (a time-saving type among time-saving A with a relatively low probability of executing the second special symbol selection), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is specified in the range of "0 to 4" in correspondence with a performance mode for high expectation, in the range of "5 to 49" in correspondence with a performance mode for medium expectation, and in the range of "50 to 99" in correspondence with a performance mode for low expectation.

The performance selection counter 223ea can take 100 values from 0 to 99, so when the time-saving type is A1, the probability that the performance modes for high expectation, medium expectation, and low expectation are determined is 5% (5/100), 45% (45/100), and 50% (50/100), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 369(b), for the time-saving type "Time-saving A2" (a time-saving type among time-saving A types with a relatively high probability of executing the second special symbol lottery), a high expectation level presentation mode is defined in association with the value of the performance lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 19", a medium expectation level presentation mode (not shown) is defined in association with the range of "20 to 79", and a low expectation level presentation mode is defined in association with the range of "80 to 99".

The performance selection counter 223eka can take 100 values from "0 to 99", so the percentages at which the performance modes for high expectation, medium expectation, and low expectation are determined when the time-saving A2 is selected are 20% (20/100), 60% (60/100), and 20% (20/100), respectively. From these provisions, it can be said that the performance modes for high expectation are more likely to be selected when the time-saving A2 is set, but are more difficult to select when the time-saving A1 is set. In addition, the performance modes for medium expectation are selected at a relatively high rate when either the time-saving A1 or the time-saving A2 is set, and the performance modes for low expectation are less likely to be selected when the time-saving A2 is set, but are more likely to be selected when the time-saving A1 is selected. Therefore, when a high expectation performance mode is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time-saving type is likely to be time-saving A2, while when a low expectation performance mode is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time-saving type is likely to be time-saving A1. Also, when a medium expectation performance mode is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time-saving type may be either time-saving A1 or time-saving A2. This allows the player to predict the expectation of the second special symbol lottery being executed during the time-saving state according to the expectation level suggested by the performance mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 370, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 370 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 370, the RAM 223 in this ninth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifth control example described above in that a performance selection counter 223ha, a remaining time reduction counter 223hb, a special chart 1 non-electrical open flag 223hc, a special chart 2 non-electrical open flag 223hd, and an initial fluctuation standby flag 223he have been added.

The performance selection counter 223ha is a counter used to select one performance mode (expectation level type) from the expectation level selection table 222pa described above. The value of this performance selection counter 223ha is updated within the range of "0 to 99". When selecting a performance mode (expectation level type) for a special small win performance, a random number value (counter value) specified in the expectation level selection table 222pa is compared with the value of this performance selection counter 223ha, and one corresponding performance mode (expectation level type) is selected. This performance selection counter 223ha is updated every 1 ms, for example, in the main process 17 (see FIG. 807).

The remaining time-saving count counter 223hb is a counter for measuring the number of remaining time-saving times during the time-saving state.

The special chart 1 non-electric open flag 223hc is a flag for indicating that the special chart 1 non-electric device 3064a is in operation. It is a flag that is set to on when the special chart 1 non-electric device 3064a is in the open state (operating), and is set to off when the special chart 1 non-electric device 3064a is in the closed state (not operating).

The special chart 2 non-electric open flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that the special chart 2 non-electric device 3065a is in operation. It is a flag that is set to on when the special chart 2 non-electric device 3065a is in the open state (operating) and is set to off when the special chart 2 non-electric device 3065a is in the closed state (not operating).

The initial change waiting flag 223he is a flag for indicating the period from the end of the jackpot game until the first special pattern change is executed, and is set to ON when the jackpot game ends. Then, it is set to OFF when the first special pattern change is executed after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, it is a flag that is set to ON from the end of the jackpot game until the first special pattern change is executed.

This initial change waiting flag 223he is referenced when determining the period for which the game instruction screen displayed at the end of a jackpot game will continue to be displayed.

In this control example, the initial change standby flag 223he is set to OFF when the first special pattern lottery is executed after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the type of special pattern executed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the time-saving type of the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is "time-saving A", the period during which the initial change standby flag 223he is set to ON may be set to the period until the first first special pattern change is executed, and if the time-saving type is "time-saving B", the period during which the initial change standby flag 223he is set to ON may be set to the period until the first second special pattern change is executed. In other words, the special pattern change type for setting the initial change standby flag 223he to OFF may be configured to be different depending on the time-saving type of the time-saving state to be set, and the initial change standby flag 223he may be configured to be set to ON until the special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern type mainly executed depending on the time-saving type to be set is executed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 371 to Fig. 375, characteristic contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this ninth control example will be described. Note that detailed description of the same contents as the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above will be omitted. Also, among the control processing that is the same as the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above, some control processing is given different symbols for convenience of explanation, but detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Figure 371 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 9 (S54112). This command determination process 9 (S54112) differs from the command determination process described above in that if it is determined that a status command has been received (S4309: Yes), then status command process 9 is executed (S54301), and if it is determined that a time-saving related command has been received (54303: Yes), then time-saving related process 9 is executed (S54304). All other aspects are the same.

Now, the contents of status command processing 9 (S54301) will be explained with reference to FIG. 372. FIG. 372 is a flowchart showing the contents of status command processing 9 (S54301). This status command processing 9 (S54301) is processing that is executed when a status command is included in the commands received from the main control device 110, and it executes processing for setting the presentation mode based on the game state set by the main control device 110, and processing for setting the remaining number of time-saving operations (time-saving end conditions) when a time-saving state is set.

When the state command process 9 (S54301) is executed, first, it is determined whether a command indicating the game state has been received (S54351), and if it is determined that it has been received (S54351: Yes), the game state update process 9 is executed (S54352), and the process proceeds to S54353. Also, if it is determined that it has not been received (S54351: No), next, it is determined whether a command indicating the setting of the number of time-saving times has been received (S54353), and if it is determined that it has been received (S54353: Yes), the time-saving type stored in the game state storage area 223i is read (S54354), and it is determined whether the read time-saving type is "time-saving A" (S54355), and if it is determined that it is "time-saving A" (S54355: Yes), the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223pa is set to "10000", and the process proceeds to S54358. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time reduction is not "time reduction A" (it is "time reduction B") (S54355: No), the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb is set to 10 (S54357), and the process proceeds to S54358.

In other words, the remaining number of time-saving times (time-saving end condition) corresponding to the time-saving type is set in the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223hb (S54356, S54357). Here, the set value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223hb is displayed as the remaining number of time-saving times in the small area Dm6 displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 when the time-saving state is set. Note that in this ninth control example, the remaining time-saving number counter 223hb is configured to be set to a value of "10000" as the time-saving end condition for the second time-saving state. In other words, the time-saving end condition is configured to be set when no jackpot is won in 10,000 special pattern lotteries.

In this case, the special pattern lottery in the time-saving state has a probability of 27/8192 for winning the jackpot, so in effect, the jackpot will almost certainly be won before the time-saving end condition is met. Therefore, when the second time-saving state is set, the process of updating and displaying the remaining number of time-saving times on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is not executed until the value of the remaining time-saving times counter 223hb reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 100), and instead the character "∞" is continuously displayed.

By configuring it in this way, during periods when the player is not interested in the number of remaining time-saving times in the time-saving state (periods when many time-saving times remain), it is possible to eliminate the need to execute a process to update the display mode indicating the number of remaining time-saving times each time a special pattern lottery is executed, thereby reducing the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113.

In this case, after a jackpot is won, the number of times the special symbol lottery was performed in the current second time-saving state may be displayed to the player as part of the result display. This configuration makes it easier for the player to analyze the game they actually performed.

In this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that can set a high probability state for normal symbols by varying the type of special symbol lottery that is mainly executed, by configuring the element for achieving the time-saving end condition that is mainly likely to be achieved to be set to the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223hb, the process for updating and displaying the remaining number of times of time-saving can be performed based on the update content for the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223hb, and the process for updating the display mode indicating the remaining number of times of time-saving can be simplified.

In the processing of S54358, processing corresponding to other information contained in the status command is executed (S54358), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of game status update process 9 (S54352) will be explained with reference to FIG. 373. FIG. 373 is a flowchart showing the contents of game status update process 9 (S54352). This game status update process 9 (S54352) is executed when a command indicating a game status is received in state command process 9 (see S54301 in FIG. 372), and processing is executed based on the game status before the transition and the game status after the transition.

When game status update process 9 (S54352) is executed, first, information indicating the current game status is stored in the game status storage area 223i based on the currently received status command (S4401), and it is determined whether a transition to the normal status has occurred (S54401). In the process of S54401, if it is determined that a transition to the normal status has occurred, i.e., if it is determined that the currently received status command contains a command indicating the normal status (S54401: Yes), the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb is cleared to 0 (S54402).

Next, it is determined whether there is a reserved special pattern 2 (reserved memory of the second special pattern) (S54404), and if it is determined that there is no reserved special pattern 2 (S54404: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S54404 that there is a reserved special chart 2 (S54404: Yes), a display command is set to show the number of pullback effects corresponding to the number of reserved special charts 2 (S54405), and this processing ends.

In other words, in the processing from S54404 to S54405, if special symbol 2 reservation has been acquired at the end of "Time-saving A (Time-saving A mode)", in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, processing is executed to execute a special effect (pull-back effect) for the second special symbol lottery, which is executed with priority after the transition to the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that a special state is occurring while the pull-back effect is being performed.

If it is determined in the process of S54401 that the transition is not to the normal state (S54401: No), then it is determined whether the transition is to the time-saving state (S54406), and if it is determined that the transition is not to the time-saving state (S54406: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the transition is to a time-saving state (S54406: Yes), the initial fluctuation standby flag 223he is set to on (S54407), a display command corresponding to the time-saving type is set (S54408), and this process ends.

In other words, in the above-mentioned processing of S54407 and S54408, when the jackpot game ends and the time-saving state is set, processing is executed to continue displaying the game explanation screen that was displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game even after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the contents of time-saving related process 9 (S54304) will be explained with reference to FIG. 374. FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing the contents of time-saving related process 9 (S54304). In this time-saving related process 9 (S54304), a process is executed to determine the presentation mode based on a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state.

When time-saving related process 9 (S54304) is executed, first, the current time-saving type is read from the game status storage area 223i (S54601). Next, it is determined whether the current time-saving type is "Time-saving A" (S54602), and if it is determined that the current time-saving type is "Time-saving A" (S54602: Yes), it is determined whether the received command is a command related to special pattern 2 variation (related to the execution of the second special pattern variation) (S54603).

If it is determined in the process of S54603 that the change is related to the special chart 2 change (S54603: Yes), then the value of the subordinate special chart 2 change count counter 223pb is incremented by 1 (S54604), and it is determined whether the value of the subordinate special chart 2 change count counter 203pb after the increment is greater than 5 (S54605). If it is determined in the process of S54505 that the value is greater than 5 (S545605: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the number of special chart 2 changes has exceeded the upper limit (S54606), and the process proceeds to S54609.

When a display command is set in the processing of S54606, a display mode is set to celebrate the fact that more second special pattern lotteries have been performed in a time-saving state in which time-saving A, in which it is difficult to perform a second special pattern lottery, has been set than the time-saving end condition set for time-saving B, which is "five times the second special pattern lottery has been performed."

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S54602 that the time-saving type read this time is not "Time-saving A" (S54602: No), this process ends.

In the process of S54609, the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb is updated based on the received information (S54609), a display command is set to show the updated value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb (S54610), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the non-electric status management process (S54102) will be explained with reference to FIG. 375. FIG. 375 is a flowchart showing the contents of the non-electric status management process (S54102). In this non-electric status management process (S54102), a process is executed to manage the operating status of the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a based on a detection signal output from a detection means provided in the pachinko machine 10.

Conventionally, there has been a pachinko machine that is provided with a ball entry means that can execute a lottery (for example, a special symbol lottery) when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and a variable means (for example, a normal electric device) that can be changed between a first position (open state) where the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a second position (closed state) where it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first position, and that is configured to execute a game of entering the ball into the ball entry means by varying the variable means in response to a winning game (for example, a normal symbol winning game that is executed when a winning game is won in the normal symbol lottery).

Furthermore, there are pachinko machines that are configured to be able to set advantageous game states in which a winning game is likely to be executed or the period during which the variable means is likely to be positioned at the first position during one winning game is likely to be long, that is, advantageous game states (e.g., time-saving states) that make it easier for game balls to enter the ball entry means.

In conventional pachinko machines configured in this way, when a favorable game state is set, it is easier to get the game ball to enter the ball entry means compared to when a game state other than the favorable game state (for example, the normal state) is set, so the player can be motivated to play while hoping that a favorable game state will be set.

However, in conventional pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the ball entry means, only one type of lottery is executed. If the contents of the lottery are excessively advantageous to the player, the player will be provided with an excessively advantageous game when an advantageous game state is set. On the other hand, if the contents of the lottery are not very advantageous to the player, it becomes difficult for the player to play with enthusiasm in the hope of setting an advantageous game state.

It is also possible to set the lottery content to be more advantageous to the player and to use specifications that lower the frequency with which an advantageous game state is set, i.e., the frequency with which a game state is set that allows the player to easily get the game ball into the ball entry means, but in this case, the playing period required until the advantageous game state is set becomes longer, and there is a problem that players who are playing in a game state other than the advantageous game state become bored with the game before the advantageous game state is set.

In contrast to this, in the present ninth control example, when a game ball enters a ball entry means that has become easier for the game ball to enter due to the setting of an advantageous game state, multiple types of lotteries are more likely to be executed. The degree of advantage to the player is made different for the multiple types of lotteries that are more likely to be executed.

More specifically, it is configured so that depending on the behavior (flow result) of the game ball that entered the ball entry means, it is possible to execute (make it easier to execute) a first special pattern lottery with a low degree of advantage, or a second special pattern lottery with a high degree of advantage. By configuring it in this way, a favorable game state (time-saving state) is set to provide a player with a predetermined period of time during which it is easier to execute a special pattern lottery, but by switching the type of special pattern lottery that is executed (made easier to execute) during that period, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage of the bonus granted to the player during the favorable game state (time-saving state), and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an overly advantageous game.

Furthermore, as described above in detail with reference to FIG. 356, in this ninth control example, within an area (within the operating device 3070) where game balls are likely to enter during a normal winning game that is executed when a winning normal symbol lottery is won, there are provided a special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a which triggers the operation of the special symbol 1 non-electric device 3064a, and a special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b which triggers the operation of the special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a, and the game ball is configured to be distributed to either the special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a or the special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b according to the operation pattern of the normal winning game.

When the game ball enters the special pattern 1 non-electric operation port 3073a, the special pattern 1 non-electric device 3064a is activated, making it easier for the game ball to enter the right first ball entrance 3064, which is the trigger for the execution of the first special pattern lottery, and when the game ball enters the special pattern 2 non-electric operation port 3073b, the special pattern 2 non-electric device 3065a is activated, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 3065, which is the trigger for the execution of the second special pattern lottery. Furthermore, it is configured so that the second special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery, and it is configured so that when both the special pattern 1 non-electric device 3064a and the special pattern 2 non-electric device 3065a are activated, it becomes difficult for the game ball to reach the second ball entrance 3065.

Specifically, the non-electric special device 3064a in operation is configured to block the flow path through which the game ball can reach the second ball entrance 3065. Therefore, when the non-electric special device 3064a in operation and the non-electric special device 3065a in operation, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entrance 3064 than the second ball entrance 3065.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, a termination condition for terminating the advantageous gaming state is set to be satisfied when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed during the advantageous gaming state reaches a predetermined number. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a game in which only the second special symbol lottery is executed during the advantageous gaming state.

In addition, in this ninth control example, the through gate 67, the normal electric device 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a, and the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a are arranged in the right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, so that, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to launch a game ball toward the through gate 67 and the normal electric device 3071 without the game ball reaching each non-electric device. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game by preventing the game ball from entering the right first ball entrance 3064 until a state is reached in which the game ball can enter the second ball entrance 3065 where a lottery advantageous to the player is executed (a state in which the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a is operating).

In other words, when a game ball is shot toward any of the devices among the through gate 67, the normal electric device 3071, the special device 1 non-electric device 3064a, and the special device 2 non-electric device 3065a, the game ball can enter the other devices. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from performing a game in which the game ball enters only a specific device.

In this ninth control example, the through gate 67, the normal electric device 3071, the special 1 non-electric device 3064a, and the special 2 non-electric device 3065a are all located in the right area of the game board 13, but this is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that at least a plurality of the above-mentioned various devices are arranged in a position where the game ball that has flowed down the same flow path can enter.

<Tenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 376 to Fig. 395. As with the seventh control example described above, the tenth control example is configured to allow a small prize to be won in some cases where the result of the special symbol lottery is not a big prize (miss), and has a gameplay (so-called one-type two-type type) in which a big prize game can be played by making a game ball enter a specific area during a small prize game that is executed based on the small prize winning. And, when a time-saving state is set, a time-saving state in which it is easy to acquire a reserved memory of the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2) and a time-saving state in which it is difficult to acquire the reserved memory are configured to be set.

The pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above in that it is configured to be able to store a predetermined number (four) of reserved special charts 2 up to an upper limit, and in that the game state that is set after a jackpot game is executed based on a jackpot win in each game state, or after a jackpot game is executed based on a small jackpot win, is different. It also differs in that the content of the presentation executed during the time-saving state is changed. Below, the differences between this tenth control example and the seventh control example described above will be mainly explained. Note that detailed explanations of the same content as the seventh control example described above will be omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example (including each of the modified examples) described above is configured to be able to set at least the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) as game states, and is configured to open the electric role 640a by the normal symbol winning game (winning game executed when a winning symbol is selected in the normal symbol lottery) executed during the time-saving state, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640.

If the special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery), which is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entry port (winning port) 640, results in a lottery result other than a big win (for example, a small win), a small win game is executed, and if the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game (if information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area is stored at the end of the small win game), a big win game is executed. In addition, by configuring the chance of selecting the second special symbol to be reserved and stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4), the chance of selecting the second special symbol is reserved and stored during the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), so that the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed even after the high probability state of normal symbols ends (even after transition to the low probability state of normal symbols). Therefore, for example, even when the time-saving state ends and the game state transitions to the normal state, it is possible to allow the player to play in the normal state (the normal state in which the chance of selecting the second special symbol is reserved and stored), which is more advantageous than normal. Therefore, for a player whose time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, has ended, a state in which the possibility of executing a jackpot game can be increased more than usual can be maintained, and a significant decrease in the player's motivation to play can be suppressed.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 in each of the control examples described above, in order to end the time-saving state for a player who is playing normally during the time-saving state with the player having acquired a chance to select the second special symbol, the probability of winning a normal symbol during the time-saving state is increased and a game with a normal symbol is played with a longer period during which the variable means is opened. Therefore, when the time-saving state ends, the number of chances to select the second special symbol that have already been acquired (number of reserved special symbols 2) always remains the same, which creates a problem in that it is not possible to provide the player with an element of surprise in the game.

In addition, in cases where the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired is always the same when the time-saving state ends, in order to prevent the player from playing a game that is excessively advantageous to the player, it is necessary to pre-set the rate at which the time-saving state is set low, including the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed after the time-saving state ends, or to pre-set the probability of winning a small jackpot in the second special symbol lottery low. This makes it difficult for players to play during the time-saving state, which causes a problem of players losing their motivation to play.

In contrast to this, in the tenth control example, the time-saving state can be set to a time-saving state in which it is easy to obtain a reserved special chart 2 (advantageous time-saving state), and a time-saving state in which it is difficult to obtain a reserved special chart 2 (unfavorable time-saving state). By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily vary the number of reserved special charts 2 at the time when the time-saving state ends depending on the type of the set time-saving state. Therefore, even if the rate at which the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game is increased, it is possible to prevent the player from playing an excessively advantageous game, making it easier for the player to play during the time-saving state, and increasing the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, in this tenth control example, if a jackpot game is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery, an unfavorable time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and if a jackpot game is executed based on winning a small jackpot in a special pattern lottery, an advantageous time-saving state can be set after the jackpot game ends.

In other words, the advantageous degree of the time-saving state that is set after the end of a jackpot game is set to differ depending on the trigger for the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which trigger caused the jackpot game to be executed.

In the tenth control example, as described above, the setting ratio between the advantageous time-saving state and the disadvantageous time-saving state is configured to be different depending on the effective trigger of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, the setting ratio between the advantageous time-saving state and the disadvantageous time-saving state may be configured to be different depending on the game state at the time when the jackpot game is executed (the game state at the time of winning the jackpot). In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure so that the ratio of the advantageous time-saving state being set is higher when the jackpot game is executed in a state where the time-saving state is set than when the jackpot game is executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state. As a result, in the game state that is most disadvantageous to the player, even if the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the disadvantageous time-saving state is likely to be set, so the time-saving state is likely to end. However, if the jackpot game is executed during the time-saving state and the time-saving state is set again, the advantageous time-saving state is likely to be set, so it is possible to make it easier to loop the time-saving state through the jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, the player can be allowed to play games with different degrees of advantage in stages, so that the player can be motivated to play the game with the highest degree of advantage. In the tenth control example, as in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the second special pattern lottery is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery, so that the time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that is likely to end when the special pattern 2 reservation is acquired is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) that is likely to end when the special pattern 2 reservation is not acquired. However, without being limited to this, for example, the first special pattern lottery may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery, and the time-saving state that is likely to end when the special pattern 2 reservation is not acquired may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state that is likely to end when the special pattern 2 reservation is acquired.

In the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-mentioned control examples, the number of special symbol variations that ends the time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, can be set to a different number depending on the type of jackpot, making it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state will continue. This allows the player to play while hoping that the time-saving state will continue for a longer period of time.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-mentioned control examples, the time-saving state is terminated at the timing when the special pattern change (the special pattern change that satisfies the time-saving end condition) stops during the special pattern change that ends the time-saving state.

In contrast, in the tenth control example, when the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is satisfied, the time-saving state is ended at the start timing of the corresponding special pattern change. Furthermore, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, a time-saving end condition that is satisfied by executing the second special pattern change once can be set. In other words, when the time-saving end condition that is satisfied by executing the second special pattern change once is set, the time-saving state continues until the first second special pattern change is executed during the time-saving state, and when the first second special pattern change is executed, for example, when the time-saving state is set in a state where the player does not have the right to draw the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved), the time-saving state is ended when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state and the second special pattern lottery is executed.

By configuring it in this way, when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to reliably execute the second special symbol lottery, and to shorten the period for acquiring the reserved special symbol 2 during the time-saving state. In other words, in this tenth control example, the time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is set to be established by executing the second special symbol variation once becomes an unfavorable time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in this tenth control example, a time-saving end condition that is established by the second special symbol variation being executed twice can also be set as a time-saving end condition for terminating the time-saving state. In this case, it is possible to continue the time-saving state until the second second special symbol variation is started, so the period during which the first second special symbol variation occurs is a period in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. In other words, in this tenth control example, the time-saving state in which a time-saving end condition that is established by the second special symbol variation being executed twice is set becomes an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

As described above, in the tenth control example, the time-saving state is ended at the start timing of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, and the time-saving end condition that can be satisfied at the first special pattern change during the time-saving state is set, making it possible to set a time-saving state in which it is difficult to obtain the special pattern 2 reservation (unfavorable time-saving state). However, without being limited to this, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to end the time-saving state at the stop timing of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, as in each of the control examples described above, a short change pattern in which a short change time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) is set and a long change pattern in which a long change time (e.g., 60 seconds) is set may be selected as the change pattern of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to switch between an advantageous time-saving state and an unfavorable time-saving state depending on the selected fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the same time-saving end condition is set as the time-saving end condition of the time-saving state, the ease of acquiring the special chart 2 reservation can be varied depending on the set fluctuation pattern.

Furthermore, in this case, different types of time-saving states can be set according to the game state at the time of winning the big win (or small win), and the selection ratio between the above-mentioned short fluctuation pattern and long fluctuation pattern can be varied depending on the type of time-saving state that is set, or a period during which the short fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected and a period during which the long fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected can be set based on the number of special pattern lotteries that have been executed since the end of the previous big win game.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to switch between an advantageous time-saving state and an unfavorable time-saving state during the period from when one time-saving state is set until the time-saving state ends, so that the player can play while expecting to play in the advantageous time-saving state until the very last moment when the time-saving state ends.

In addition, by combining the technology of this tenth control example with the technology of each of the control examples described above, it may be possible to configure it so that it is possible to end the time-saving state at various times, such as the start timing or stop timing of the special pattern variation executed in the time-saving state. In this way, by configuring it so that the timing of actually ending the time-saving state can be varied when the time-saving end condition is met, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know when the time-saving state will end, thereby providing an element of surprise in the game.

<Configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth control example>
First, referring to Figures 376 to 380, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example differs from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example (see Figure 294) in the following points: the arrangement position and structure of the V winning device 650 that is opened during a small winning game, the arrangement positions of the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640, the structure of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13. The rest are the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 376, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) and a windmill for guiding balls, as well as rails 61, 62, a general ball entry port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., to a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion of the board is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display device 37 displays according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In this control example, the first pattern display device 37 is configured to operate when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (wins). In other words, the first pattern display device 37 is a display means for displaying the lottery result of the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64. The first pattern display device 37 is also configured to operate when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (wins). In other words, the first pattern display device 37 is also a display means for displaying the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. In this control example, a pachinko machine 10 with two types of special symbols is used, but this is not limited to this, and a pachinko machine 10 with one type of special symbol may also be used.

The first symbol display device 37 also uses LEDs to indicate the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, normal state, time-saving state, etc.) by the lighting state, whether the special symbol (first symbol) is changing (dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols to show the lottery result) by the lighting state, whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a win that is advantageous to the player, a symbol corresponding to a win that is unfavorable to the player, or a miss symbol by the lighting state, and indicates the number of reserved balls by the lighting state, and displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors using a 7-segment display device. It is also configured to be able to indicate by the lighting state that the change of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted). The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light emission colors (for example, red, green, blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the light emission colors. In this embodiment, the light emitting means (7-segment display device) is configured to indicate various game states by combining light emitting colors, but any configuration that allows the player to distinguish various game states will suffice. For example, the light emitting means may be configured to indicate various game states by varying the length of the period when it is lit and the period when it is off (blinking pattern).

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for a special symbol) is held when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (a prize is won). In the lottery for the special symbol, a win/lose determination is made as to whether or not a small prize has been won (a winning lottery). If it is determined that a small prize has been won, a small prize game, which is a special game advantageous to the player, is executed.

During the small win game, the V winning device 650 is opened according to a predetermined content (scenario), providing a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the V winning device 650. If a ball that entered the V winning device 650 during this small win game enters a specific area (V winning port 1650) described below, the big win game is executed after the small win game ends. During this big win game, the variable winning device 65 is opened according to a predetermined content (scenario), providing a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the variable winning device 65.

In this control example, the system is configured so that the total number of prize balls that a player can acquire during a jackpot game is greater than that during a small jackpot game. In other words, in terms of the number of prize balls acquired by the player, a jackpot game is a bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than a small jackpot game. Note that the system may also be configured so that the total number of prize balls that a player can acquire during a small jackpot game is greater than that during a jackpot game. In this way, by configuring the system so that bonuses with different degrees of advantage can be awarded depending on the bonus game being executed, the player can enjoy playing the game while wondering which bonus game will be executed.

In addition, in this control example, when a jackpot game is executed, a game state (e.g., a normal state) different from the game state before the jackpot game is executed is set, and after the jackpot game ends, a new game state can be set based on information related to the executed jackpot game (e.g., the small win type (jackpot type) and the game state at the time of winning (small win)). On the other hand, when a small win game is executed, the game state before the small win game is executed continues during the small win game and continues after the small win game ends. In other words, during a jackpot game that is highly advantageous to the player (large number of winning balls), the normal state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, is set to prevent the player from receiving excessive benefits during the jackpot game, whereas when a small win game that is less advantageous than the jackpot game is executed, the game state is not changed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game state from being changed when a small win game with a low degree of advantage is executed. Note that, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure it so that a game state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set during a small win game, as in the case of a big win game, or to determine the game state after the end of a small win game based on the type of small win won. Also, the game state to be set after the winning game is completed may be determined based on the game results during the winning game (during the big win game, during the small win game). In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 (variable ball entry means), which makes it easier to enter the ball during the winning game (bonus game), passed through a specific area provided in the variable ball entry means, and to vary the type of game state to be set after the winning game is completed based on the result of the determination. For example, it is preferable to set a game state that is more advantageous to the player when the ball passes through a specific area than when the ball does not pass through the specific area, or to set a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player when the ball passes through a specific area than when the ball does not pass through the specific area. This makes it possible to play during the winning game with the aim of setting a favorable game state after the winning game is completed, and to allow the player to play with enthusiasm.

In addition, if a winning game is executed in a state where a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set, and an event in which a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set continues a predetermined number of times (e.g., five times) after the winning game ends, a game state disadvantageous to the player (normal state) may be forcibly set after the winning game ends. This can prevent a situation in which a game state advantageous to the player continues excessively.

When a jackpot game is played, the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is in an open state, making it easy for balls to enter the specific winning port 65a, and a game is played in which many prize balls can be won in a short period of time by entering the specific winning port 65a. This jackpot game is played (if) after the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed (confirmed) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds), and a jackpot game period is set consisting of an opening period of a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) (a period in which a closed state is set to make it difficult for balls to enter the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65), a round game period in which the open state is set, an interval period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) until the next round game starts after one round game period has ended, and an ending period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) after the last round game period has ended.

In this way, by setting the opening period to coincide with the start of the jackpot game, preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction in time with the timing at which the specific winning port 65a opens during the jackpot game, allowing the jackpot game to be played smoothly. In addition, this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, providing an easy-to-understand game experience.

In addition, by setting an ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a new lottery for a special symbol from being held immediately after the last round of play ends, so that preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction for the game to be played after the jackpot game ends, allowing for a smooth switch between games.

In this control example, a jackpot game can be executed after a small win game ends based on the ball entering a specific area (V winning port 1650) during the small win game. Therefore, by setting an ending period as the final period of the small win game, a preparation period can be set to switch from the game executed during the small win game (left-hand hit game) to the game executed during the jackpot game (right-hand hit game), allowing the player to smoothly switch games.

The length of each period of the jackpot game (opening period, round period, ending period) may be set to a different length depending on the game state set at the time of the special symbol lottery (when a small jackpot is won), the timing when the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, the start of the small jackpot game, the end of the small jackpot game, the start of the jackpot game, or the end of the jackpot game, or the type of jackpot won. For example, if a jackpot is won in which the game content (play method) to be executed after the jackpot game ends is set to a different game content (play method) from the game content (play method) before the jackpot game, the ending period of that jackpot game (e.g., 10 seconds) can be set to be longer than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds), and a performance can be configured to be executed in which the game content to be executed after the jackpot game ends is notified to the player during the ending period in advance. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, when a jackpot game is executed in which the game content (play method) before the start of the jackpot game is the same as the game content (play method) executed after the jackpot game ends, it is advisable to configure the ending period of that jackpot game (e.g., 1 second) to be shorter than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds). This allows the player to play efficiently.

In addition, without using a configuration that actually distinguishes between the game content (play method) before the jackpot game and the game content (play method) executed after the jackpot game ends, for example, the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends can be predefined based on the type of jackpot game that is executed (small jackpot type) and the game state that is set before the jackpot game, and the length of the ending period of each jackpot game can be set according to the predefined content.

In this tenth control example, the game state is configured to be set to either the "normal state" or the "time-saving state." The normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is a game state in which the jackpot probability for special symbols is set to (30/1000) and the hit probability for normal symbols is set to a low probability (3/300), while the time-saving state is a game state in which the jackpot probability for special symbols is set to (30/1000) and the hit probability for normal symbols is set to a high probability (150/300).

In this control example, after the time-saving state is set, if a specific end condition (time-saving end condition) is met, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state, and the number of time-saving times described above indicates the time-saving end condition. In other words, one time of time-saving indicates that the time-saving end condition is met when a special pattern lottery is executed once without a jackpot game being executed after the time-saving state is set.

Furthermore, in this tenth control example, it is configured to be possible to determine whether the time-saving end condition is met at the timing when the special pattern variation starts. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine how long the time-saving state will continue.

In this embodiment, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is set as a condition related to the number of times the special pattern is drawn during the time-saving state (time-saving count). However, other configurations may be used as the time-saving end condition. For example, a time-saving end condition may be set that is met when the number of times the special pattern draw results in a specific draw result (specific miss) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3 times), that is met when a predetermined time (e.g., 100 seconds) has elapsed since the time-saving state was set, or that is met when the number of balls that enter a specific ball entry port (e.g., general ball entry port 63a) during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 5 balls).

The timing for determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met may be different from the timing for terminating the time-saving state. For example, at the timing for starting the special pattern variation, it may be determined whether the time-saving end condition has been met by the current special pattern variation, and if it is determined that the time-saving end condition has been met, the time-saving state may be terminated before the special pattern variation begins, or the time-saving state may be terminated at a predetermined timing within the period from when the special pattern variation begins to when it stops (including the timing when the special pattern variation stops), depending on whether a specific condition is met. This makes it possible to unify the timing for executing the process for determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met, thereby simplifying the control process for terminating the time-saving state.

The above-mentioned specific condition (factor for determining the timing to end the time-saving state when the time-saving end condition is met) can be set based on the type of game state (normal state or time-saving state) set at the time when the special pattern lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game (the special pattern lottery that won the small jackpot) was executed, the set small jackpot type, or the type of jackpot game. For example, even if the same small jackpot type (jackpot type) is set when the game state at the time of the small jackpot win is the normal state and when it is the time-saving state, and the same time-saving end condition is set, the timing to end the time-saving state can be configured to be different.

The pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example, like the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above, is configured so that when the variable display in the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a "circle" symbol), a winning game (a normal symbol winning game) is executed in which the electric device 640a attached to the normal electric winning device 640 is in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change and be displayed (regular symbol change time) is set to different lengths depending on the probability state of the regular symbol (low probability state, high probability state), and is configured so that in the low probability state of the regular symbol, a regular symbol change time of 10 seconds is set, and in the high probability state of the regular symbol, a regular symbol change time of 1 second is set. This makes it possible to prevent regular symbol winning games from being played frequently during the low probability state of the regular symbol (normal state).

Note that a configuration different from the tenth control example may be used, and for example, the same normal symbol variation time (for example, 1 second) may always be set regardless of the probability state of the normal symbol. By configuring in this way, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that the time required for the normal symbol variation display (normal symbol variation time) is longer during the normal state than during the time-saving state in order to make it difficult to execute a normal symbol winning game during a low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state), when the game state transitions from the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) in which a winning game of the normal symbol (a winning game of the normal symbol) is difficult to execute to the time-saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) in which a winning game of the normal symbol is easy to execute, it is possible to prevent the transition to the time-saving state during the execution of a long-term normal symbol variation (a winning game of the normal symbol that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state) executed during the normal state, and the period during which the normal symbol lottery is not executed during the time-saving state being set for a long time, even though the time-saving state is set.

In this case, since the normal symbol lottery will be executed at most once per second during the low probability state of normal symbols, it will be easier to win a normal symbol during the low probability state of normal symbols (normal state), so the probability of winning a normal symbol during the low probability state of normal symbols (normal state) can be set low.

In this control example, the game content (opening operation pattern of the electric device 640a) of the normal winning game is configured to be different between the normal state and the time-saving state. In other words, the normal winning game executed during the time-saving state is configured to be a more advantageous game for the player, that is, to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, than the normal winning game executed during the normal state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, a normal winning game (normal normal winning game) with a 0.1 second opening period is executed after a 4.1 second opening period (closing period of the electric device 640a), and when the time-saving state is set, a normal winning game (time-saving normal winning game) with a 3 second opening period is executed after a 1 second opening period (closing period of the electric device 640a).

Next, the configuration of the electric role 640a will be described with reference to FIG. 376. The electric role 640a in this tenth control example is configured to be able to be displaced between an embedded state (restricted state) where it is embedded in the game board 13, and a protruding state (guiding state) where it protrudes from the game board 13, and is configured to be in the embedded state (closed state) when a normal winning game is not being played. Then, when a normal winning game is played, it is displaced to the protruding state (guiding state) for a predetermined period (maximum of 3 seconds) based on a predetermined variable pattern.

Here, we will explain the terminology used to refer to the displacement state of the electric device 640a. The closed state of the electric device 640a is a term used to indicate a state in which the flow path (flow path formed on the electric device 640a) for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 is closed, i.e., the electric device 640a is embedded in the game board 13. As a functional expression, the term restricted state (a state in which the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640 is restricted) may also be used.

The open state of the electric device 640a is a term used to indicate a state in which the flow path (the flow path formed on the electric device 640a) for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 is open, i.e., the electric device 640a protrudes from the game board 13. As a functional expression, the term "guiding state" (a state in which the ball can be guided to the second ball entrance 640) is sometimes used.

As shown in FIG. 376, when the electric device 640a is in the guided state, the electric device 640a is arranged so that most of the balls launched by left-handed play flow into the flow path formed on the upper surface of the electric device 640a in the guided state. The flow path formed on the upper surface of the electric device 640a has a ball flow lower surface that slopes downward toward the second ball entrance 640, and balls that reach the upper surface of the electric device 640a flow down to the second ball entrance 640.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, the game with a normal ball is ended when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during a normal ball game. Therefore, the maximum number of balls that can enter the second ball entrance 640 during one normal ball game is one.

As described above with reference to FIG. 376, this control example is configured so that the playing method that is advantageous to the player is the same (left-hand play) whether the game state is set to the normal state or the time-saving state. In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the lottery trigger for the normal symbol is established even in the normal state (the ball passes through the through gate 67), and the lottery for the normal symbol is executed. Then, if the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a winning win, the electric device 640a installed in the playing area that the ball shot by the left-hand play can reach is controlled to open, so there is a risk that the ball will enter the second ball entrance 640 during the execution of the normal winning game.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that even if a normal winning game is executed during the normal state, the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 during the normal winning game. Specifically, it is configured so that it takes about 1 second for the ball to flow down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reach the second ball entrance 640, while the period during which the electric device 640a is in an induction state due to a normal winning game during the normal state is configured so that it is 0.2 seconds.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that has a configuration in which the game is played in the same way in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) and in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), that is, in a pachinko machine 10 in which it is possible to win a normal symbol game even in the normal state, it is possible to prevent a ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 during the normal state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to the game board 13 in the area to the left (left area) of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow most (approximately 100%) of the balls that are launched onto the game board and flow down the left area of the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a lottery is held to determine whether the second symbol will win. After this lottery to determine whether the second symbol will win, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery results in a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the lottery results in a miss, a "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reserved lamp 84 described above. There is one second symbol reserved lamp 84 for each of the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 376, the explanation will continue. To the left of the variable display unit 80 (to the left from the viewpoint of FIG. 376), a V winning device 650 is provided so that a ball shot by left-handed play and flowing down the left area can win a prize. Here, referring to FIG. 377 to FIG. 380, the specific configuration of the V winning device 650 and the flow of balls that win in the V winning device 650 will be explained. In this control example, when a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, a small prize game is executed in which the V winning device 650 is opened. Then, a big prize game (V big prize game) is executed by a ball winning the V winning port 1650 provided in the V winning device 650.

This control example is configured so that a jackpot game is executed based on the ball passing (winning) a specific area (V winning port 1650) during a small jackpot game that is executed when a small jackpot is won without winning a jackpot through the special pattern lottery. In this way, by gradually achieving the first condition (winning a small jackpot) and the second condition (passing through the specific area), a bonus game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player is executed, providing the player with a game that they will never tire of.

In addition, the system may be configured so that a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol. In this case, in addition to the trigger for playing a jackpot game (special symbol jackpot game) that occurs when a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol, there will be a trigger for playing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) that occurs when a ball enters a specific winning hole (V winning hole 1650). In this way, by providing multiple triggers for playing a jackpot game, it is possible to provide players with a game that they will never tire of.

First, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 377. The V winning device 650 is provided with an opening/closing door 650a that can be changed between an open state in which it is easier for a ball to win inside the V winning device 650, and a closed state in which it is more difficult for a ball to win than in the open state. This opening/closing door 650a is provided in a position (see FIG. 376) that can be reached by a ball flowing down the left side area of the game board 13, and is changed to the open state when a small win game is executed.

In the V winning device 650, a first flow path 650b through which the ball that has passed through the open/close door 650a flows down is formed in the space between the first partition 650k1 and the second partition 650k2, and a storage valve 660a is provided at a position where the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 650b (flow period 0.5 seconds) reaches. A storage section capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of this storage valve 660a, and the ball that first wins the V winning device 650 during a small win game is temporarily stored in the storage section. In addition, a storage sensor 650s is provided above the storage valve 660a, and is configured to be able to detect that a ball is stored in the storage section. Furthermore, a ball detection sensor 650s2 for detecting balls that have entered the V winning device 650 is provided upstream of the first flow path 650b, and based on the detection of a ball by the ball detection sensor 650s2, the number of balls that have entered the V winning device 650 during the small win game is counted, and prize ball payout control for the winning balls is executed. In this way, by providing the ball detection sensor 650s2 at a position where the ball that entered the V winning device 650 flows down immediately after it enters, it is possible to prevent a situation in which more than the specified number of balls enter the V winning device 650, and to immediately award prize balls during the small win game to the player.

In addition, a second flow path 650c is formed to communicate with the first flow path 650b, and a first outlet 1163a is provided downstream of the second flow path 650c. As shown in FIG. 377, the second flow path 650c is configured so that the balls that flow down the first flow path 650b do not flow directly into the second flow path 650c, but rather, when the balls are stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a, the subsequent balls that flow down the first flow path 650b come into contact with the balls stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a and are guided to the second flow path 650c. The first outlet 1163a, located downstream of the second flow path 650c, is a ball inlet for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The ball flows down the second flow path 650c (flow period 0.1 seconds), and the ball that enters the first outlet 1163a flows down a ball discharge path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the storage valve 660a is configured to be variably operated between a storage state in which balls can be stored and a release state in which it is more difficult to store balls than in the storage state, depending on the progress of the small win game (corresponding to the operation scenario in which the small win game is executed). When this storage valve 660a is in the release state, the first flow path 650b and the third flow path 650d are connected, and balls that have flowed down the first flow path 650b or balls that have been stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a flow down the third flow path 650d. This third flow path 650d is a flow path formed in a straight line in the vertical direction with a width of about 15 mm, formed in the space between the lower end side of the first partition wall 650k1 and the third partition wall 650k3.

A first movable valve 660b is disposed at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 650d. This first movable valve 660b is configured to be movable in a predetermined movable pattern when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 between a guide position (protruding position) where it can receive a ball that has flowed down the third flow path 650d and a passing position (submerged position) where it cannot receive a ball that has flowed down the third flow path 650d. Specifically, it is configured to be movable in response to the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d, which is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110 and is driven and controlled by the main control device 110. When the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to on (when electricity is applied), the first movable valve 660b moves to a passing position (a position buried in the game board 13) in which it retreats from within the V winning device 650, and when the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to off (when electricity is cut off), the first movable valve 660b moves to a guide position (a position protruding from the game board 13) in which it protrudes into the V winning device 650.

The first movable valve 660b located in the induction position (protruding position) is configured so that a ball can flow down its upper surface, and as shown in FIG. 377, the downstream end side of the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b is configured to be inclined downward toward the fourth flow path 650e. Therefore, when the first movable valve 660b is located in the induction position (protruding position), a ball that flows down the third flow path 65d (flowing down period 0.2 seconds) flows down the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b toward the fourth flow path 650e. A second outlet 1163b is provided downstream of the fourth flow path 650e, and the ball that flows down the fourth flow path 650e (flowing down period 0.2 seconds) enters the second outlet 1163b. This second outlet 1163b, like the first outlet 1163a described above, is a ball inlet for discharging balls that enter the slot to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and balls that enter the second outlet 1163b flow down a ball discharge path (not shown) and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, when the first movable valve 660b is in the passing position, the third flow path 650d and the fifth flow path 650f are connected, and the ball that flows down the third flow path 650d (flowing down period 0.2 seconds) flows into the fifth flow path 650f (flowing down period 0.1 seconds). And, the V winning hole 1650 is provided downstream of the fifth flow path 650f. The V winning hole 1650 is a winning hole that can be a trigger for executing a jackpot game, and when a ball enters the V winning hole 1650 while a jackpot game is not being executed, the winning information is stored (the right to execute the jackpot game is acquired), and the jackpot game is executed after the small jackpot game being executed ends.

As shown in FIG. 377, the first outlet 1163a and the second outlet 1163b are provided in the V winning device 650. By configuring in this manner, when the storage valve 660a is in a storage state, the ball that has won the V winning device 650 can be reliably prevented from flowing into the flow paths (the third flow path 650d, the fourth flow path 650e, and the fifth flow path 650f) through which the ball can pass when the storage valve 660a is in a release state. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, for example, the first outlet 1163a may be eliminated, the second flow path 650c and the fourth flow path 650e may be connected, and the storage valve 660a may be in a storage state, and the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 650c may enter the second outlet 1163b. In this case, the third partition 650k3, which is provided vertically in a straight line in Fig. 377, can be tilted downward and to the right as viewed from the perspective of Fig. 377 from the upper end side to the lower end side, that is, the extension line of the partition 650k3 toward the lower end side is to the right of the fourth partition 650k4 (the right side as viewed from the perspective of Fig. 377). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the balls that flow down the second flow path 650c from flowing into the fifth flow path 650f.

In this way, in this control example, a jackpot game is executed when the ball enters the V winning port 1650 during a small jackpot game. Hereinafter, when explaining jackpot games by dividing the execution triggers, the jackpot game executed when the ball enters the V winning port 1650 is also referred to as a V jackpot game.

As described above, the V winning device 650 of this control example is configured so that when a small jackpot game is played, it becomes an open state in which a ball can win a prize, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d, and whether or not the ball will win in the V winning port 1650 is determined depending on the operating status of the first movable valve 660b when the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 650d reaches the first movable valve 660b.

In the tenth control example, the first movable valve 660b is configured to operate so that the game ball can reliably enter the V entry port 1650 by entering the V entry device 650 during a small win game, but the present invention is not limited to this. The movable content of the first movable valve 660b may be specified so that when a game ball is entered into the V entry device 650 during a small win game, the game ball may enter the V entry port 1650 in some cases and may not enter the V entry port 1650 in other cases. For example, the first movable valve 660b may be configured to be constantly movable in a movable pattern in which the time at the induction position (the time when the ball cannot enter the V entry port 1650) is 6 seconds, and the time at the passing position (the time when the ball can enter the V entry port 1650) is 1 second. As a result, the ratio of balls that flow down the third flow path 650d entering the V entry port 1650 can be approximately 1/6.

Next, referring to FIG. 378 to FIG. 380, the contents of the ball flow that has won the V winning device 650 during the execution of the small winning game in the modified example that is configured to be able to execute a small winning game in which the game ball can enter the V winning port 1650 and a small winning game in which the game ball cannot enter the V winning port 1650, unlike the present tenth control example, will be explained. In the following explanation, even if multiple balls are entered into the V winning device 650 in one small winning game, the operation of the storage valve 660a is controlled so that the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 650d is one. First, referring to FIG. 378, the ball flow during the first half period of the small winning game (the period when the storage valve 660a is in a storage state) will be explained. FIG. 378 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow in the V winning device 650 when the storage valve 660a is in a storage state during the small winning game. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the storage valve 660a is configured to be controlled so that it is in a storage state from the time the small win game is executed until the V winning device 650 is closed. Then, when multiple balls enter the V winning device 650 while the storage valve 660a is in a storage state, the first winning ball P1 is stored in a storage section formed in the storage valve 660a, and the second winning ball P2 comes into contact with the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 660a, flows down the second flow path 650c, and enters the outlet 1163a.

In this way, when the storage valve 660a is in a storage state, all winning balls (e.g., ball P2) other than ball P1 stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a are configured to enter the outlet 1163a, so multiple balls do not remain inside the V winning device 650. Also, the storage state of the storage valve 660a is released after the V opening and closing door 650a of the V winning device 650 is closed (after operational control is executed to close the door), so it is possible to ensure that the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 650d during one play per device is limited to one.

By configuring it in this way, the ease with which the ball can enter the V winning port 1650 does not change depending on the timing of the ball entering the V winning device 650 during small win play or the number of wins, so fair play can be provided to all players.

In addition, without being limited to this, the ease of balls entering the V winning port 1650 may be variable depending on the number of winning balls entering the V winning device 650 during small prize play. For example, six storage sections capable of storing balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are provided, and a distribution member (such as a crane) is provided that distributes the balls that have entered the V winning device 650 to one of the six storage sections. Then, of the six storage sections, only balls stored in a specific storage section can enter the V winning port 1650 when the storage state of the storage section is released, and balls stored in storage sections other than the specific storage section (up to five balls) are configured to enter the second outlet 1163b when the storage state of each storage section is released. In addition, when the next ball is sorted by the sorting member toward a storage section in which balls are already stored, a flow path is provided that connects each storage section so that the next ball collides with the ball already stored there and is stored in another adjacent storage section.

By configuring it in this way, the winning ratio into the V winning port 1650 can be varied depending on the number of winning balls that enter the V winning device 650 during small win play, which makes it possible for the player to play with enthusiasm.

Even with this configuration, the actual winning ratio for the V winning port 1650 can be varied by varying the number of times the storage state of the storage section that allows the balls to flow down to the outlet during one small win game is released depending on the type of small win.

Next, referring to FIG. 379, the ball flow (later period of the game with a winning combination) when the storage valve 660a transitions from the storage state to the release state will be described. FIG. 379 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the storage valve 660a transitions from the storage state to the release state during a small winning game. As shown in FIG. 379, after the V opening and closing door 650a is closed and a new ball cannot enter the V winning device 650, when the storage valve 660a transitions to the release state (shown by a dotted line in the figure), the ball P1 (see FIG. 378) stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d. In the state shown in FIG. 379, the first movable valve 660b is in the induction position, so the ball P1 rolls down the downward slope formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b, flows down the fourth flow path 650e, and enters the second outlet 1163b.

On the other hand, the ball flow when the ball P1 (see FIG. 378) stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d and reaches the first movable valve 660b, and the first movable valve 660b is in the passing position, will be explained with reference to FIG. 380. FIG. 380 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the storage valve 660a transitions from the storage state to the release state during a small winning game. As shown in FIG. 380, if the first movable valve 660b is in the passing position when the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 650d reaches the first movable valve 660b, the ball flows down the fifth flow path 660f and enters the V winning hole 1650.

In addition, in this tenth control example, as described above with reference to Figures 376 to 380, the player is configured to play left-handed games both in the game for getting the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 in the normal state and in the game for getting the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the time-saving state, and further, the player is configured to play left-handed games even during small win games and to play right-handed games only during big win games, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the player to play in different ways in the normal state and the time-saving state, as in each of the control examples described above.

<About the content of the performance in the tenth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 381 to Fig. 383, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example will be described. In this tenth control example, when the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired during the time-saving state reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), the number of times that the player can play a jackpot game (a jackpot game based on a small jackpot win) can be notified to the player based on the information indicating the result of the pre-reading for the reserved special figures 2.

Specifically, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, it is stipulated that a big win or a small win will always be won, and it is configured so that the game ball can be passed reliably into the specific area by playing normally during the small win game that is executed based on the small win being won.

In other words, in this tenth control example, a game that acquires the right to play a jackpot game is executed for the number of reserved special figures 2 that have already been acquired. For example, if four reserved special figures 2 have been acquired, four more jackpot games can be played. In addition, in this tenth control example, the game state that is set after the end of the jackpot game can be set to a normal state or a time-saving state, and further, the time-saving state can be set to an unfavorable time-saving state in which it is difficult to acquire reserved special figures 2, and an advantageous time-saving state in which it is easier to acquire reserved special figures 2 than in the unfavorable time-saving state.

When a predetermined condition (the number of reserved special symbols 2 reaches the upper limit) is met during the time-saving state, the system determines whether or not a favorable time-saving state will be set after the end of the jackpot game based on the results of a look-ahead of the reserved special symbols 2 that have already been acquired, and is configured to notify the player of the number of rights available to play the jackpot game based on the results of this determination.

In this way, by predicting the game state that will be set after the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery that corresponds to the acquired special pattern 2 reserve in addition to the number of reserved special patterns 2 that have been acquired, and configuring it so that the number of times that a jackpot game can be executed (number of possible jackpots) can be notified, it becomes possible to notify the number of possible jackpots that is greater than the number of reserved special patterns 2 that have been acquired.

Furthermore, in this tenth control example, the number of times that the player is notified as the number of times a jackpot can be executed is configured to vary based on the game state at the time when the special chart 2 reserve reaches the upper limit and the results of the look-ahead. In other words, it is possible to notify the player of a number of times other than the maximum number as the number of times a jackpot can be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from completely understanding the content of the game that will be executed later based on the notified number of times a jackpot can be executed, which can reduce the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in this tenth control example, during the final fluctuation period of the time-saving state in which the special chart 2 reserve can be acquired, even if the maximum number of special chart 2 reserves has not been acquired, the presentation mode of the guidance presentation for acquiring the special chart 2 reserve can be changed based on the lottery results of the final fluctuation and the results of the advance reading of the special chart 2 reserves that have already been acquired, and a presentation different from the guidance presentation can be executed.

Here, among conventional pachinko machines 10, there are pachinko machines 10 that have the same gameplay as the tenth control example, in the final variation period of the special pattern in the time-saving state in which it is easy to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 (final variation period of the time-saving state), a guide effect is executed to guide the player to obtain the upper limit of the reserved special symbol 2, thereby allowing the player to play in a way that makes the most of the benefit given to the player during the time-saving state (a benefit that makes it easier to obtain the reserved special symbol 2).

However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10 described above, for example, the guidance presentation is executed regardless of the result of the lottery for the final time-saving fluctuation or the result of the second special pattern lottery executed after the final time-saving fluctuation (the second special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved special pattern 2 executed during the normal state). Therefore, even if the number of reserved special patterns 2 is not acquired up to the upper limit during this final time-saving fluctuation period, a time-saving state in which the reserved special pattern 2 can be acquired again may be set based on the result of the second special pattern lottery executed thereafter. In such a case, the player is forced to play a game that unnecessarily fires game balls, and the player is not guided to the appropriate game.

In contrast to this, in the tenth control example, when determining the presentation mode to be executed during the final time-saving fluctuation period, a determination is made as to whether or not a time-saving state in which the reserved special symbol 2 can be acquired again after the final time-saving fluctuation period has elapsed is made based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the final time-saving fluctuation period and the pre-reading result corresponding to the reserved special symbol 2 that has already been acquired, and whether or not a guidance presentation is executed is determined based on the result of this determination.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to implement guidance presentations that prevent players from playing games that unnecessarily reach the upper limit for the number of reserved special charts 2.

In addition, in this tenth control example, the presentation mode of the guidance presentation is configured to be variable depending on the content of the game that can be executed after the time-saving final variation period has elapsed (the difficulty of acquiring the reserved special chart 2). For example, when the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is a small prize win and the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the small prize win, the guidance presentation is configured to emphasize the guidance mode for acquiring the reserved special chart 2 to the player, rather than when the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is a small prize win and the time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the small prize win in which it is difficult to acquire the reserved special chart 2.

In this way, by configuring the guidance display to vary in strength during the final time-saving fluctuation period, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game that is disadvantageous to the player if the player does not obtain the reserved special chart 2 during a period in which it would be disadvantageous to the player if the reserved special chart 2 were not obtained, and the period ends without the player obtaining the reserved special chart 2, compared to when a monotonous guidance display is always executed.

In this tenth control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to set a time-saving state in which it is difficult to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 (unfavorable time-saving state), or a time-saving state in which it is easy to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 (favorable time-saving state).

Specifically, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is configured to end at the timing when the first second special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state starts, and when a favorable time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is configured to end at the timing when the second second special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state starts. By configuring in this way, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, a time-saving state is set in which the second special symbol lottery is executed only once without obtaining the special symbol 2 reservation, and when a favorable time-saving state is set, a time-saving state in which the maximum number of special symbol 2 reservations can be obtained is set.

First, referring to FIG. 381(a), the content of the presentation when a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game will be described. FIG. 381(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the first second special pattern change in the time-saving state (first win state) that is set after winning a jackpot in the special pattern 1 lottery. As shown in FIG. 381(a), a time-saving presentation is executed to show whether the lottery result of the second special pattern change being executed is a lottery result in which an unfavorable time-saving state is set (unfavorable lottery result) or a lottery result in which an advantageous time-saving state is set (favorable lottery result).

In the example shown in FIG. 381(a), icon 1800a imitating a "V" is displayed as a display mode corresponding to an unfavorable lottery result, and icon 1800b imitating "V x 5" is displayed as a display mode corresponding to a favorable lottery result. When icon 1800b is selected, "Super Chance Mode" is displayed as a notification mode to notify the player that they will move to the Super Chance Mode, and the comment "5 consecutive wins for V x 5" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a notification mode to notify the player that they will acquire five jackpot play rights (5 consecutive wins possible) when icon 1800b is selected.

Next, the content of the presentation during a jackpot game that is executed based on the results of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state will be explained with reference to FIG. 381(b). FIG. 381(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed during a special symbol 2 jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 381(b), a notification presentation is executed on the ending screen of the jackpot game to notify the player in advance of the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 382(a), the contents of the presentation during the advantageous time-saving state will be explained. FIG. 382(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the super chance mode, which indicates that the advantageous time-saving state is in place. As shown in FIG. 382(a), the super chance mode is configured so that the time-saving state continues until multiple second special symbol variations are executed, and so that the special symbol 2 reservation can be acquired during the variation period of the second special symbol variation. Therefore, the secondary display area Ds displays a comment saying "Hit to the right to collect Vs" to indicate that the current situation is such that the special symbol 2 reservation can be easily acquired, and to encourage the player to acquire the special symbol 2 reservation.

Then, in the small display area Dm9, V icons are displayed that increase or decrease according to the number of reserved special charts 2 that have already been acquired. These V icons are configured to be able to display up to the same number as the reserved special charts 2, and each time a reserved special chart 2 is acquired, the first V icon hr1 to the fourth V icon hr4 are displayed in that order. In the example shown in FIG. 382(a), two reserved special charts 2 have been acquired, so the first V icon hr1 and the second V icon hr2 are displayed.

After that, when the player acquires the maximum number of reserved special charts 2, as shown in FIG. 382(b), an icon hx resembling "MAX" is displayed in the information in the small display area Dm9 as an upper limit notification mode to indicate that the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 has been acquired, and an effect in which a treasure chest 1810 appears in the center of the main display area Dm is executed, and the words "Treasure chest appears" are displayed. Then, the words "What's inside?" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a guide mode to explain to the player the progress of the effect currently being executed. This makes it possible to clearly notify the player that an effect in which a treasure chest 1810 is opened will be executed next.

Next, as shown in FIG. 383(a), when the treasure chest 1810 is opened, an effect is executed in which contents 1810a appear from within the treasure chest 1810, and the display manner of the contents 1810a indicates the number of rights to play a jackpot game that the player has currently acquired. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 383(a), the result of the pre-reading of the fourth special symbol 2 reservation is a small jackpot win in which a favorable time-saving state is set, so the contents 1810a are displayed in the display mode "V x 10" to notify that the right to play 10 jackpot games has been acquired, including a jackpot game (1 time) based on the result of the second special symbol lottery currently being executed, a jackpot game (4 times) based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the acquired special symbol 2 reservation, a jackpot game (1 time) based on the result of the second special symbol lottery executed after the end of the jackpot game based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the fourth special symbol 2 reservation, and a jackpot game (4 times) corresponding to the special symbol 2 reservation that can be acquired during the fluctuation.

By configuring in this manner, in this tenth control example, it is possible to predict not only the number of jackpot play rights that have already been acquired, but also the game content after the end of the jackpot play that can be executed based on the acquired jackpot play rights, and then notify the player of information regarding the jackpot play rights that can be acquired, so it is possible to notify the player in advance of the number of jackpot play rights that are greater than the number of reserved special chart 2s (4) that can be reserved and stored at one time. This makes it difficult for the player to predict how the right to play a jackpot game will arise (whether it can be acquired), and provides an exciting game.

In addition, in this tenth control example, if a proper play (right-hand play) is performed during a small win game, it is possible to execute a jackpot game, so it is possible to provide the player with the same number of jackpot games as the number of jackpot play rights notified to the player in advance. However, if, for example, a proper play (right-hand play) is not performed during a small win game, and the game ball cannot enter a specific area during the small win game, and a jackpot game is not executed, it is preferable to configure the system to execute an effect that reduces the number of jackpot play rights notified in advance.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily notify the player that the number of jackpot games to be played has been reduced depending on the content of the game played. In this case, it is advisable to configure it so that information can be notified to allow the player to understand how the number of rights to play jackpot games has been reduced (the rights to play have been lost). This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the number of rights to play jackpot games is reduced again when there are still rights to play jackpot games remaining.

In this tenth control example, if a proper play (right-hit play) is performed during a small win game, it is possible to execute a jackpot game in almost all cases, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with the same number of jackpot play rights as the number of jackpot play rights notified to the player in advance. Therefore, the system is configured to notify the player in advance of all of the calculated number of jackpot play rights, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to predict not only the number of jackpot play rights already acquired, but also the game content after the end of the jackpot game that can be executed based on the acquired jackpot play rights, and then calculate the number of jackpot play rights that the player can acquire, and notify the player in advance of part of the calculation result.

As a result, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that a jackpot game is executed with approximately half the probability of a small jackpot game being executed, if the machine is configured to notify the player in advance of half the number calculated as the number of jackpot game execution rights that the player may obtain, it is possible to execute an update process to increase or decrease the pre-notified number of jackpot game execution rights based on the number of small jackpot games and the number of jackpot games actually executed, making it easier for the player to predict the number of jackpot games that may be executed and increasing the reliability of the information used in the prediction.

Returning to FIG. 383(b), the explanation will be continued. FIG. 383(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the final variation period of the second special pattern in the super chance mode, which indicates that the advantageous time-saving state is in effect. In this tenth control example, the period in which the advantageous time-saving state is set is configured to make it easier to make the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 than the period in which the advantageous time-saving state is not set. During the second special pattern variation period (final variation period) in which the end condition of the advantageous time-saving state is established, as shown in FIG. 382(a), a guide announcement is configured to be executable to encourage the player to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. However, when the special pattern variation that is the final variation period is executed, if there is a special pattern 2 reservation corresponding to a winning that sets the advantageous time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game among the special pattern 2 reservations that have already been acquired, the above-mentioned guide announcement is not executed, and a performance mode for congratulating the player is set as shown in FIG. 383(b).

In other words, during the special pattern variation period when the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is met, if the specific condition is met even if the maximum number of reserved special 2 symbols has not been acquired, a notification to encourage the player to acquire the maximum number of reserved special 2 symbols is not executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from playing games that are unnecessarily aimed at acquiring the maximum number of reserved special 2 symbols.

<Regarding transition of game state in the tenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 384, the transition contents of the game state in this tenth control example will be described. FIG. 384 is a game flow showing the transition contents of the game state. As shown in FIG. 384, in this tenth control example, as in the seventh control example described above, the game state can be set to a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and even if any game state is set, the player can execute a left-handed game.

The initial state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a normal state (first normal state) in which neither the reserved special symbol 1 nor the reserved special symbol 2 has been acquired. In this first normal state, a game is played by hitting the ball from the left to make the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64. In this first normal state, a low probability state for the special symbol is set, so a first special symbol lottery is executed, which has a probability of winning the jackpot of 30/1000.

If a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is set to "jackpot A." After the jackpot game in which the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set ends, a time-saving state is set.

In the tenth control example, the time-saving state can be set to provide different degrees of play for the player, and a second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) can be set. More specifically, the degree of play in the time-saving state is varied by varying the ease of acquiring the special chart 2 reservation during the period in which the time-saving state is set, and when the second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, it is configured to be easy to insert multiple game balls into the second ball entrance 640 during that short period. On the other hand, when the first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) is set, it is configured to be difficult to insert multiple game balls into the second ball entrance 640 during that short period.

In other words, when the first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) is set and when the second time-saving state (favorable time-saving state) is set, the ease of acquiring the reserved balls in the special chart 2 during the time-saving state is set is changed to change the degree of advantage to the player.

The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to set the game state to a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). Since the normal state is set to a low probability state for normal symbols, it is difficult to win a normal symbol, and even if a normal symbol is won, the operation period of the electric role 640a is short, making it difficult (or impossible) to make the ball enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, the game is mainly played by hitting the ball into the first ball entrance 64 by hitting it from the left and executing the first special symbol lottery.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is executed, which has a probability of winning a jackpot at 30/1000. If a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, the jackpot type is set to jackpot A, and the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the contents of the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of this tenth control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 384, this control example is configured so that a first time-saving state and a second time-saving state can be set as the time-saving state. Here, the difference between the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state will be explained. Both the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are time-saving states in which a low probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols are set, and the probability of winning the special symbol lottery and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery are the same. Furthermore, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery is also the same.

The only difference is the timing at which the time-saving state ends (transitions to the normal state); in the first time-saving state, if the second special pattern lottery is performed once, the time-saving state ends at the start of the second special pattern variation, and in the second time-saving state, if the second special pattern lottery is performed twice, the time-saving state ends at the start of the second special pattern variation.

In other words, the second time-saving state can be set longer by the period of the second special symbol variation than the first time-saving state, so it can be said to be a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in this control example, the number of balls that can enter the second ball entrance 640 during one play per normal symbol is configured to be one, and the time-saving end condition is established when the second special symbol variation is executed once. Therefore, when the first time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is more likely to end without acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2). On the other hand, when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state continues during the period of the second special symbol variation, so it is more likely to end with the reserved memory of the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2). In other words, even in terms of the acquisition status of reserved special symbol 2 at the time when the time-saving state ends, the second time-saving state can be said to be a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state.

The details will be described later, but if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the first time-saving state, a small prize game that can set the second time-saving state at a rate of 5% is selected. That is, in the normal state, it is easier to transition to the first time-saving state than the second time-saving state, and in the first time-saving state, it is easier to transition to the second time-saving state with a higher probability than in the normal state. Therefore, for a player playing in the normal state, it is possible to gradually transition between game states (normal state, first time-saving state) with different transition rates to the second time-saving state that are most advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the second time-saving state is set. In addition, when a game state that is easier to transition to the second time-saving state than the normal state is transitioned to, it is difficult to stop playing, so it is easy to improve the operation of the game.

In the first time-saving state, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 by left-handed play, a normal pattern lottery is executed, and a game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 during a normal pattern winning game is executed. Then, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second special pattern lottery is executed, which wins a small prize with a probability of 970/1000 and a big prize with a probability of 30/1000. During this first time-saving state, the time-saving end condition is established based on the second special pattern lottery being executed once, and the time-saving state is configured to end at the start of the special pattern change (second special pattern change) to show the result of the second special pattern lottery in which the time-saving end condition is established. As a result, it becomes easier for the time-saving state to end without acquiring the special pattern 2 reservation, so after the time-saving state is set, the game state becomes one in which the second special pattern lottery can be executed only once.

In this tenth control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving state, it is configured to always result in a big win or a small win, and when a small win game is executed, if the game is executed normally, it is possible to reliably acquire the right to play a big win game (entry of a game ball into the V winning port 1650). In other words, the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed and the number of times the big win game is executed can be the same. Therefore, the game is played with the aim of setting the second time-saving state in which it is possible to acquire a special symbol 2 reservation rather than the first time-saving state.

When a small prize is won in the special chart 2 lottery during the time-saving state, the small prize types that are set have different selection rates, with the selection rate of small prize A, which sets the first time-saving state after the big win game ends, being 80%, the selection rate of small prize B, which sets the normal state after the big win game ends, being 15%, and the selection rate of small prize C, which sets the second time-saving state after the big win game ends, being 5%.

In other words, when the first time-saving state is set, the game that executes the second special symbol lottery can be continued until the small win B, which sets the normal state after the big win game ends, is selected.

In addition, if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the first time-saving state, a small prize game that can set the second time-saving state at a rate of 5% is selected. In other words, in the normal state, it is easier to transition to the first time-saving state than the second time-saving state, and in the first time-saving state, it is easier to transition to the second time-saving state with a higher probability than in the normal state. Therefore, for a player playing in the normal state, it is possible to gradually transition between game states (normal state, first time-saving state) with different transition rates to the second time-saving state that are most advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the second time-saving state is set. In addition, when a game state that is easier to transition to the second time-saving state than the normal state is transitioned to, it is difficult to stop playing, so it is easy to improve the operation of the game.

During the second time-saving state, when the second lottery for the second special symbol is executed for the first time-saving state described above, the time-saving end condition is met, and the time-saving state ends at the start timing of the second special symbol change when the time-saving end condition is met. In other words, since the time-saving state can be set during the period of the second special symbol change until the time-saving end condition is met, it is possible to acquire the special symbol 2 reservation during that period of change, and it is possible to easily end the time-saving state when the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired. Therefore, the second time-saving state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state.

The game state transition based on the results of the second special symbol lottery executed during the second time-saving state is the same as the first time-saving state described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Then, when the second time-saving state ends, that is, when the second special symbol variation is stopped and the time-saving end condition is met, if the special symbol 2 reservation has not been acquired, the game state will transition to the first normal state, just like when the first time-saving state described above ends.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol variation is stopped and the time-saving end condition is met, if the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired, the game transitions to the second normal state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed while the normal state is set as the game state. In this second normal state, the super chance mode is continuously set.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, a special symbol lottery is executed with the same probability (970/1000) of winning a small prize as during the time-saving state. The small prize type is selected at the same selection rate as the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state. In other words, if many special symbol 2 reserves have been acquired, it is possible to easily return to the time-saving state with a high probability, even if the normal state is set after the end of the big win game.

In the tenth control example, the selection ratio of the small win type in the normal state and the selection ratio of the small win type in the time-saving state are set to be the same, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that a small win type that is more advantageous to the player is more easily selected in one game state than in the other game state. For example, it is preferable to configure so that a small win type (small win C) that is more advantageous to the player is more easily selected when the normal state is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the second special pattern lottery performed during the normal state more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery performed during the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of ending the time-saving state when the special pattern 2 reservation is obtained, and it is possible to easily increase the difference in the degree of advantage between the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the tenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 385 to Fig. 390. The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example described above in that the ROM 202 and part of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the ROM 222 and part of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed, but otherwise are the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 385, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in this tenth control example will be described. FIG. 385(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 385(a), the ROM 202 of this control example differs from the ROM 202 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(a)) in that the first win random number 10 table 202ia is provided instead of the first win random number 7 table 202fa, the small win type selection 10 table 202if is provided instead of the small win type selection 7 table 202ff, the time-saving grant 10 table 202ie is provided instead of the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe, and the small win scenario 10 table 202ii is newly added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted. For ease of explanation, some of the various configurations shown in the ROM 202 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(a)) are omitted from FIG. 385(a), except for configurations that are difficult to apply.

The first random winning number 10 table 202ia differs from the first random winning number 7 table 202fa (see FIG. 305(a)) described above in that the specified value for determining a big win and the specified value for determining a small win are different, but otherwise they are the same. A detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the contents stipulated in the first winning random number 10 table 202ia will be explained with reference to FIG. 386. FIG. 386(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number 10 table 202ia. As shown in FIG. 386(a), the first winning random number 10 table 202ia has a special pattern 1 random number 10 table 202ia1 that is referenced when drawing a winning lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and a special pattern 2 random number 10 table 202ia2 that is referenced when drawing a winning lottery for the second special pattern (special pattern 2).

Next, the contents defined in the special pattern 1 random number 10 table 202ia1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 386(b). FIG. 386(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special pattern 1 random number 10 table 202ia1. As shown in FIG. 386(b), a "jackpot" is defined for the range of "0 to 29" out of the possible range of "0 to 999" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1. That is, in this tenth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot in the lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 3/100 (30/1000).

Next, the contents defined in the special pattern 2 random number 10 table 202ia2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 386(c). FIG. 386(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special pattern 2 random number 10 table 202ia2. As shown in FIG. 386(c), out of the possible range of "0-999" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1, a "big win" is defined for the range "0-29", and a "small win" is defined for the value "30-999". That is, in this tenth control example, the probability of winning a big win in the lottery for special pattern 2 is approximately 3/100 (30/1000), and the probability of winning a small win is 97/100 (970/1000).

In this tenth control example, the type and number of judgment values that are judged to be a small prize winner are fixed regardless of the game state, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure it so that a high probability state (high probability state of special pattern) in which the probability of winning a small prize is high and a low probability state (low probability state of special pattern) in which the probability is low are set according to the game state. Also, in this tenth control example, it is configured so that only the second special pattern lottery can be judged to be a small prize winner, but the contents of the special pattern 1 random number 10 table 202ia1 can be specified so that the first special pattern lottery can also be a small prize winner, and in this case, the probability of winning a small prize in the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery can be the same or different.

The small prize type selection 10 table 202if is a data table that is referenced when selecting the type of small prize that will be set if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery). This small prize type selection 10 table 202if differs from the small prize type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) of the seventh control example described above in that the content of the small prize type that is specified has been changed, but is otherwise the same. A detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 387, the small win type selection 10 table 202if will be explained. FIG. 387 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 10 table 202if. In this tenth control example, the advantageous degree of the time-saving state after the end of a big win game that is executed based on the establishment of an execution condition during a small win game is varied depending on the small win type that is set. More specifically, it is configured so that an advantageous time-saving state or an unfavorable time-saving state can be set depending on the small win type that is set.

Specifically, the small win type of the first special symbol is set to be selected from the three types of small win A, small win B, and small win C described above depending on the value of the small win type counter C5, and for the acquired small win type counter C5 value range of "0 to 79", "small win A (5R jackpot A when V passes)" is specified, for the range of "80 to 94", "small win B (5R jackpot B when V passes)" is specified, and for the range of "95 to 99", "small win C (5R jackpot C without time reduction when V passes)" is specified.

Here, for each small win type, a type of big win game (big win type) is set that will be executed after the game ball enters the V winning port 1650 during the small win game. For "small win A", "big win A" is set as the big win type, for "small win B", "big win B" is set, and for "small win C", "big win C" is set.

In this tenth control example, regardless of whether any of the jackpot types "jackpot A" to "jackpot C" is set, a jackpot game (five rounds) is executed in which five rounds of play in which the variable winning device 65 is opened are executed as the jackpot game, and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 388, but the system is configured so that different time-saving end conditions are set as the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state depending on the jackpot type that is set.

In other words, it is configured to provide bonus games (jackpot games, games during the time-saving state) with different conditions for ending the time-saving mode depending on the type of small jackpot that is set when a small jackpot is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of jackpot based on the content of the jackpot game executed based on the winning of a small jackpot, and thus preventing the player from predicting in advance whether the time-saving state that will be set later will be a favorable or unfavorable time-saving state.

In this tenth control example, the content of the jackpot game executed based on a small jackpot win is configured to be the same (5 round (R) jackpot game) regardless of the small jackpot type, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to be possible to execute a jackpot game with different content depending on the small jackpot type. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that a jackpot game with the same jackpot game content is executed for at least some of the jackpot types in which an unfavorable time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player is set and for at least some of the jackpot types in which an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a jackpot game that makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends is a favorable time-saving state or an unfavorable time-saving state while the jackpot game is being played, and a jackpot game that makes it easy for the player to determine while the jackpot game is being played that the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends is a favorable time-saving state (a jackpot game that can only be executed for a jackpot type in which a favorable time-saving state is set), which makes it possible to arouse the player's interest in what kind of jackpot game will be played.

The time-saving 10 table 202ie is a data table in which the end conditions (time-saving end conditions) of the time-saving state to be set at the end of a jackpot game are predefined, and the time-saving grant contents (time-saving end conditions) corresponding to each jackpot type are defined. This time-saving 10 table 202ie is a data table referenced when setting multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, and is referenced when a jackpot game ends (the ending period of a jackpot game ends), and different times of time-saving (time-saving end conditions) are set depending on the jackpot type.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time-saving 10 table 202ie will be explained with reference to FIG. 388. FIG. 388 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving 10 table 202ie. In this control example, it is possible to set a first time-saving end condition (a value set in the time-saving counter 203h) that is established based on the combined number of first and second special pattern variations, and a second time-saving end condition (a value set in the special pattern 2 variation count counter) that is established based on the number of second special pattern variations.

Specifically, for "Big Win A" which is set when a big win is won in the special pattern lottery or when the small win type "small win A" is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10" as the first time-saving end condition, and the value of the special pattern 2 change count counter 203ia is set to "1" as the second time-saving end condition. In other words, when the time-saving state corresponding to "Big Win A" is set, the first time-saving end condition is established when the total number of times the first special pattern change is performed and the second special pattern change is performed reaches 10 times, and the time-saving state in which the second time-saving end condition is established is set when the number of times the second special pattern change is performed reaches 1 time. As described above, in this tenth control example, since the time-saving state is configured to end at the start timing of the special pattern change at which the time-saving end condition is established, when the time-saving state corresponding to "Big Win A" is set, the time-saving state ends at the start timing of the first second special pattern change after the time-saving state is set. This results in an unfavorable time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the tenth control example, a second time-saving end condition that can be satisfied first when playing normally during the time-saving state, and a first time-saving end condition that is more difficult to satisfy than the second time-saving end condition are set. The value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10" as the first time-saving end condition. This value of "10" is specified to be a value greater than the upper limit of the special pattern 1 reservation "4". Therefore, even if the time-saving state is set with the upper limit of the special pattern 1 reservation stored, and all the special pattern 1 reservations are consumed before the second special pattern variation is performed, the time-saving state will not end. In addition, if an action of only performing the first special pattern lottery is performed during the time-saving state, the time-saving state can be ended when the number of times of the first special pattern variation reaches 10, so that it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of abnormal play. In this control example, the same value is set as the first time-saving end condition for all jackpot types for which the time-saving state is set, but this is not limited to this and different values may be set.

For the "Big Win B" that is set when the small win type "Small Win B" is set, the first time-saving end condition is set to "0" in the time-saving counter 203h, and the second time-saving end condition is set to "0" in the special symbol 2 variation counter 203ia. In other words, when "Big Win B" is set, the normal state is set after the big win game ends. As mentioned above, in this tenth control example, the time-saving state is set to make it easier for the player to play a game (second special symbol lottery) that is advantageous to the player than when the normal state is set, so "Big Win B" is the big win type that is most disadvantageous to the player.

For the "big win C" that is set when the small win type "small win C" is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10" as the first time-saving end condition, and the value of the special pattern 2 variation counter 203ia is set to "2" as the second time-saving end condition. In other words, when the time-saving state corresponding to "big win C" is set, the first time-saving end condition is established when the total number of times the first special pattern variation is executed and the second special pattern variation is executed reaches 10 times, and the time-saving state in which the second time-saving end condition is established is set when the number of times the second special pattern variation is executed reaches 2 times. As described above, in this tenth control example, since the time-saving state is configured to end at the start timing of the special pattern variation that establishes the time-saving end condition, when the time-saving state corresponding to "big win C" is set, the time-saving state ends at the start timing of the second special pattern variation after the time-saving state is set. In other words, the time-saving state continues for the duration of the first second special symbol change after the time-saving state is set, and this is a period in which it becomes easier to get the game ball into the second ball entry port 640 by hitting a normal symbol. This creates an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this control example, a configuration having the above-mentioned first time-saving end condition and second time-saving end condition is used as the multiple time-saving end conditions, but other conditions may be set as the time-saving end condition. For example, a time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times the first special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), a time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times the second special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 80 times), or a time-saving end condition that is met when a small jackpot is won and the number of times the V winning device 650 is activated reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times) may be set.

Furthermore, it is also possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established based on other factors, rather than on the number of times the special symbol changes or the lottery results. For example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the normal symbol changes or the number of times the normal symbol has been won (the number of times the electric device 640a has been activated) reaches a predetermined number, or a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of balls that have entered a specific ball entry port (for example, the general winning port 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 balls), etc., may be set in advance.

As described above, by setting multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and configuring the time-saving state to end when any of the time-saving end conditions is set, it becomes difficult for the player to know in advance how long the time-saving state will continue, and this makes it possible to prevent monotonous gameplay.

Furthermore, the time-saving end condition may be configured to be established when a predetermined number (e.g., two) of multiple time-saving end conditions are established. In this case, it is preferable to provide a number-of-established determination means for determining the number of established time-saving end conditions, and a condition-attainment determination means for determining whether the number of established conditions determined by the number-of-established determination means has reached a predetermined number (e.g., two), and to end the time-saving state (set to the normal state) when it is determined by the condition-attainment determination means that the number of established conditions has reached the predetermined number (e.g., two).

In addition, a content discrimination means may be provided that discriminates the content of the time-saving end condition that is first established, and a discrimination criterion number variable means may be provided that varies a predetermined number (e.g., two) that serves as the discrimination criterion for the condition achievement discrimination means based on the discrimination result of the content discrimination means. This makes it possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is first established, so that the player can be motivated to play even after the time-saving state has been set.

In addition to the above, a predetermined period measurement means for measuring a predetermined period after the time-saving state is set (for example, until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10) and a result determination means for determining the measurement result of the predetermined period measurement means may be provided, and if the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, a time-saving end delay means for delaying the end of the time-saving state until the predetermined period has elapsed even if the above-mentioned time-saving end condition is established may be provided, or an end condition invalidation means for invalidating the established time-saving end condition when the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period may be provided. Also, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is established or updating (subtracting) the values of various counters set corresponding to each time-saving end condition may not be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the time-saving state from ending immediately after it is set, and the timing for ending the time-saving state can be set in a complex manner. In addition, when using a process for ending the time-saving state based on the establishment of multiple time-saving end conditions as described above, it is preferable to set multiple time-saving end conditions as a priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 times) and a non-priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of small wins reaches 3 times), and to configure the time-saving state to end immediately when the priority time-saving end condition is established, and to end the time-saving state when only multiple non-priority time-saving end conditions are established. By setting the priority time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessive time-saving state.

Returning to FIG. 385(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 possessed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example will be explained. FIG. 385(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 possessed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 385(b), this tenth control example differs from the RAM 203 in the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(b)) in that a special chart 2 variation count counter 203ia has been added, but otherwise is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The game status storage area 203g is a memory area in which information indicating the game status contained in the status command received from the main control device 110 is stored, as in each of the control examples described above, and is configured to be able to determine not only the set game status (normal status, time-saving status) based on the information stored in the game status storage area 203g, but also the type of game status (unfavorable time-saving status (first time-saving status), favorable time-saving status (second time-saving status)).

The special pattern 2 variation counter 203ia is a counter that is referenced when determining whether the number of variations of the second special pattern variation executed during the time-saving state satisfies the second time-saving end condition, and a value corresponding to the second time-saving end condition is set when the time-saving state is set. Then, each time a control process is executed to start the second special pattern variation during the time-saving state, the value is subtracted, and it is determined whether the value after subtraction satisfies the second time-saving end condition (is 0).

By configuring it in this way, even if the content of the second time-saving end condition is made different depending on the type of time-saving state to be set, it is only necessary to change the content of the value to be set in the special chart 2 variation count counter 203ia when setting the time-saving state, and the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 389(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example will be described. FIG. 389(a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 389(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example differs from the ROM 222 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 311(a)) in that the lottery result notification mode selection table 202fa has been deleted and that a final variable performance selection table 222ia and a notification target selection table 222ib have been provided. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same contents are denoted with the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

The final variation effect selection table 222ia is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the variation effect (final variation effect) that is executed during the final variation of the second special pattern variation executed during the time-saving state (special pattern 2 time-saving final variation), and is referenced when determining the variation effect pattern of the special pattern 2 variation that is one before the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is met.

As described above, in this tenth control example, the timing for ending the time-saving state is the timing for starting the special pattern change, so the period of special pattern change just before the time-saving end condition is met is the player's last chance to acquire the reserved special pattern 2. Therefore, in this tenth control example, the period of special pattern change just before the time-saving end condition is met is the final time-saving change period, and the final change performance is executed during that final time-saving change period.

Specifically, the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the value of the special chart 2 variation count counter 203ia are updated by the update process 10 (see FIG. 393) executed by the main control unit 110, and a remaining time-saving count command indicating the updated value of the special chart 2 variation count counter 203ia is set (see S10603 in FIG. 393). The remaining time-saving count command output from the main control unit 110 is then received by the voice lamp control unit 113, so that the remaining information (remaining time-saving count) until the time-saving end condition is met for the time-saving state currently set on the voice lamp control unit 113 side can be specified.

Here, if it is determined that the remaining number of time-saving times is 1, that is, that the time-saving end condition will be met by the special pattern change that is executed next to the special pattern change that corresponds to the currently received remaining time-saving number command, specifically, if information indicating "1" is received as the remaining time-saving number command as the value of the time-saving counter 203h or the value of the special pattern 2 change number counter 203ia, the change period of the corresponding special pattern change (final time-saving change) is identified as the final time-saving change period, and the presentation mode of the final time-saving change presentation is determined for that final time-saving change period.

By configuring it in this way, even if the process to end the time-saving state is executed at the start of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is met, it is easier to ensure a period of time to execute an effect (reservation acquisition effect) that encourages the player to acquire the special pattern 2 reservation.

In addition, in this tenth control example, the time-saving state is ended at the start timing of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, during the period of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the game state (normal state) is entered in which it is difficult to obtain the special pattern 2 reservation. Therefore, the time-saving final change presentation is executed during the special pattern change period immediately before the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied. However, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 in which the stop timing of the special pattern change is specified as the timing for ending the time-saving state, the period of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied is specified as the time-saving final change period, and the presentation mode of the time-saving final change presentation can be determined for that period of the special pattern change.

The presentation period of the time-saving final change presentation only needs to overlap with at least a portion of the period corresponding to the above-mentioned time-saving final change period. The time-saving final change presentation may be configured to have a presentation period that is only a portion of the time-saving final change period, or the time-saving final change presentation may be configured to span a portion of the time-saving final change period and a period that is different from the time-saving final change period.

Here, the contents stipulated in the final variation performance selection table 222ia will be explained with reference to FIG. 390. FIG. 390 is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the final variation performance selection table 222ia. In this tenth control example, as shown in FIG. 382(a) or FIG. 383(b), a performance mode that can give different information to the player as the time-saving final variation performance is configurable. For example, during the period when the time-saving final variation performance is being executed, a performance mode corresponding to a reserved acquisition performance (see FIG. 382(a)) that encourages the acquisition of a special chart 2 reserved, and a performance mode corresponding to a congratulatory performance (see FIG. 383(b)) that notifies the player that the acquired special chart 2 reserved contains information that can give the player an advantageous privilege are configurable.

As shown in FIG. 390(a), in this final variation effect selection table 222ia, the performance mode of the final variation effect is specified in correspondence with the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the special pattern variation that executes the time-saving final variation effect, the number of reserved special patterns 2 (the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b1) when determining the variation effect of the special pattern variation that executes the time-saving final variation effect, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223e.

Specifically, if the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the special pattern change that executes the time-saving final change performance is a "big win" or a "small win C," and the special pattern 2 reserved number (the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b1) when determining the special pattern change performance that executes the time-saving final change performance is "1 to 3," the value of the acquired performance counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 69," and the performance mode is "goal" (see FIG. 383 (b)) in the range of "70 to 99." "Save Weak" (see FIG. 382(a)) is specified as the mode, and when the special symbol 2 reserved number (value of special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b1) is "0" when determining the special symbol variation in which the time-saving final variation performance is executed, "Save Weak" (see FIG. 382(a)) is specified as the performance mode for the acquired performance counter 223e value in the range of "0 to 69", and "Goal" (see FIG. 383(b)) is specified as the performance mode for the range of "70 to 99".

In addition, if the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the special pattern change that executes the time-saving final change performance is "small win A" and the special pattern 2 reserved number (value of special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b1) when determining the special pattern change performance that executes the time-saving final change performance is "0 to 3", the performance mode is specified as "weak save" (see Figure 382 (a)) for the range of the acquired performance counter 223e value "0 to 69", and as "strong save" for the range of "70 to 99".

Furthermore, if the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the special pattern change that executes the time-saving final change performance is "small win B" and the special pattern 2 reserved number (value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b1) when determining the special pattern change that executes the time-saving final change performance is "1 to 3", the performance mode is "Strong Save" for the range of the acquired performance counter 223e value "0 to 69", and the performance mode is "Weak Save" for the range of "70 to 99" (see FIG. 382(a)). If the special pattern 2 reserved number (value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b1) when determining the special pattern change that executes the time-saving final change performance is "0", the performance mode is "Strong Save" for the range of the acquired performance counter 223e value "0 to 99".

Here, in this tenth control example, when "small win C" is set as the small win type, the second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) is set after the end of the big win game that is executed based on the small win. In other words, when "small win C" is won, a time-saving state having a period during which the special chart 2 reservation can be acquired is set later. Therefore, as the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation presentation, a presentation mode corresponding to a congratulatory presentation ("goal") that does not prompt the player to acquire the special chart 2 reservation during the presentation period of the time-saving final variation presentation can be set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent players from being encouraged to unnecessarily fire game balls in an attempt to acquire a reserved special chart 2 during the final time-saving fluctuation period, which indicates the end of the time-saving state. Furthermore, the ratio at which the presentation mode corresponding to the congratulatory presentation ("goal") is set is varied according to the number of reserved special charts 2 that have already been acquired, so that the presentation mode corresponding to the congratulatory presentation ("goal") is more likely to be set when the number of reserved special charts 2 that have already been acquired is large than when it is small.

In other words, when a game ball is released to acquire a reserved special chart 2 during the final variation performance period, the player is configured to be less likely to receive the reserved award when there are fewer bonuses available to the player (when there are fewer reserved special charts 2 that can be newly acquired). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to further prevent players from being encouraged to play games that involve unnecessary release of game balls in order to acquire reserved special charts 2.

Furthermore, in this tenth control example, even if there is a high possibility that the advantageous time-saving state will be set again (a state in which small win C has been won), the reserved acquisition effect is executed with a low probability, so it is possible to prevent the player from reliably understanding the future game content due to the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation effect.

On the other hand, in this tenth control example, when "small win B" is set as the small win type, the time-saving state is not set (the normal state is set) after the end of the big win game that is executed based on the small win. In other words, when "small win B" is won, a period in which the special chart 2 reservation can be acquired later is not set. Therefore, as the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation presentation, a presentation mode that encourages the player to acquire the special chart 2 reservation during the presentation period of the time-saving final variation presentation can be set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to reliably acquire the special 2 reserved figure during the last period in which the special 2 reserved figure can be acquired. In addition, in this tenth control example, as the presentation mode of the reserved acquisition presentation to encourage the player to acquire the special 2 reserved figure, a weak presentation mode ("Weak Save") that encourages the acquisition of the special 2 reserved figure and a strong presentation mode ("Strong Save") that strongly encourages the acquisition of the special 2 reserved figure more than the weak presentation mode can be set, and the proportion of the strong presentation mode set as the presentation mode of the reserved acquisition presentation is configured to differ between when an unfavorable time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (when a small prize A is won) and when a normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game (when a small prize B is won).

In other words, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, it is difficult to acquire a new reserved special symbol 2, but for example, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set without acquiring any reserved special symbol 2, a new second special symbol lottery can be executed once. In other words, when the normal state is set after the end of a big win game, and when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, both are game states in which it is difficult to acquire a new reserved special symbol 2, but the unfavorable time-saving state is a game state in which it is easier to execute a new second special symbol lottery. And since a new second special symbol lottery is executed, there is a possibility that a favorable time-saving state will be set based on the lottery result, and therefore, the "small win C" in which the unfavorable time-saving state is set is more likely to later be set as a favorable time-saving state than the "small win B" in which the normal state is set.

Therefore, in this tenth control example, the configuration is such that it is easier to set a presentation mode (Strong Save) that strongly encourages the player to acquire the reserved special chart 2 when small prize B is won than when small prize A is won.

Here, in conventional pachinko machines 10, in the final period during which it is possible to acquire the reserved special symbol 2 in the time-saving state (final time-saving fluctuation period), a performance (reservation acquisition performance) is executed that unconditionally encourages the player to acquire the reserved special symbol 2. However, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the final time-saving fluctuation period, there are cases where there is no merit to acquiring the reserved special symbol 2 during the final time-saving fluctuation period, and only the demerit of needlessly firing game balls occurs.

The same reserved symbol acquisition effect is executed in both situations where it would be better to actually acquire the reserved special symbol 2 (for example, the time-saving state ends as it is, making it impossible to acquire a new reserved special symbol 2) and situations where there is little benefit to acquiring the reserved special symbol 2 (for example, a situation where the ongoing special symbol lottery results in a big jackpot (or a small jackpot), and after the big jackpot game based on the lottery result ends, a time-saving state is set in which it is easy to acquire the reserved special symbol 2 again). This could lead to a problem whereby players' motivation to acquire a new reserved special symbol 2 gradually decreases when the reserved symbol acquisition effect is executed.

In response to this, in the tenth control example, the presentation mode for the reserve acquisition presentation can be set to different presentation modes that vary the degree to which the player is encouraged to acquire the special chart 2 reserve, and is configured so that in situations where it would be better to actually acquire the special chart 2 reserve (for example, a situation where the time-saving state ends as it is and it becomes impossible to acquire a new special chart 2 reserve), it is easy to set a presentation mode that strongly encourages the player to acquire the special chart 2 reserve (Strong Save).

By configuring it in this way, players who see the reserved acquisition performance, which is performed in a different presentation mode from the normally executed reserved acquisition performance and in a presentation mode that strongly encourages the acquisition of the special reserved chart 2, can be motivated to play in order to acquire the special reserved chart 2.

As an example of a presentation mode that strongly encourages the player to acquire the special chart 2 reservation, the display area of the small display area Dm4 may be enlarged to display the word "Hit left" in a larger size, or the comment displayed in the secondary display area Ds may be changed from "Hit left to collect V" to "Make sure to hit left" to strongly encourage the player to release the game ball. In other words, the display mode of the information provided to the player in the normal reserve acquisition presentation may be changed to strongly encourage the player to release the game ball. Alternatively, a presentation mode may be set in which new information that is not provided to the player on the display screen shown in FIG. 382(a) (the display screen for the normal reserve acquisition presentation) (for example, information indicating that when the current special chart variation period ends, no period will be set in which the special chart 2 reservation can be acquired) can be provided to the player. In addition, the game may be configured to clearly inform the player that it would be better to actually acquire the special chart 2 reservation (for example, the time-saving state will end and the player will not be able to newly acquire the special chart 2 reservation) by executing additional effects using sounds output from the pachinko machine 10 or light-emitting means (LEDs, etc.) provided on the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this tenth control example, as shown in FIG. 390(a), the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation presentation is determined based on the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the special pattern variation that executes the time-saving final variation presentation and the number of special pattern 2 reserved that has been acquired, but the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation presentation may be determined based on other information, for example, the presentation mode may be determined based on information regarding the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) for the special pattern 2 reserved that has been acquired.

In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not a favorable time-saving state will be set later based on the result of the special symbol lottery (win/lose judgment result) and the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) for the reserved special symbol 2 that has already been acquired, and to determine the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation presentation based on the judgment result. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a time-saving final variation presentation with higher accuracy.

The notification target selection table 222ib is a data table referenced when determining the presentation mode (number of notifications) of the notification effect (see FIG. 383(a)) for notifying the player of the number of jackpot play rights that have been acquired (including the number of jackpot play rights that will be acquired), and is referenced when the conditions for executing the notification effect are met and information for determining the presentation mode of the notification effect is identified (see S20108 in FIG. 394).

Here, the contents defined in the notification target selection table 222ib will be explained with reference to FIG. 390(b). FIG. 390(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the notification target selection table 222ib. As shown in FIG. 390(b), the notification target selection table 222ib specifies different reserved memory information to be the target of the notification performance (notification target) based on the result of reading the reserved memory information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (the position (memory area) where the reserved memory information corresponding to the small win type "small win C" for which an advantageous time-saving state is set is stored, and the number of reserved memory information corresponding to "small win C").

As described above, the winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first area to fourth area) for the special symbols, and each of these areas is configured to store the winning information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 as reserved memory information in order starting from the first area. In other words, the winning information storage area 223a is configured to store reserved memory information in the order in which the second special symbol lottery is executed as reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbol.

Therefore, by reading out the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is possible to determine the number of reserved memory information that will win the small prize C and the order in which the lottery for the second special pattern based on the reserved memory information that will win the small prize C will be executed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the first area (area 1) of the winning information storage area 223a stores reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbol lottery to be executed next, followed by the second area (area 2), the third area (area 3), and the fourth area (area 4) in that order. In this tenth control example, the special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in the order in which the winning information was acquired, so that the reserved memory information stored in the first area (area 1) is the first reserved memory information stored, and the reserved memory information stored in the fourth area (area 2) is the last reserved memory information stored.

As shown in FIG. 390(b), the notification target selection table 222ib is configured to determine the small win C reservation to be notified in association with the final small win C reservation storage position and the number of small win C reservations in the reservation. The final small win C reservation storage position is determined by identifying the reservation memory information that wins the small win C among the reservation memory information corresponding to the multiple second special patterns stored in the winning information storage area 223a, and indicating the reservation area (first area to fourth area) in which the reservation memory information that was stored most recently among the identified reservation memory information is stored.

In other words, when the final small prize C reserved storage position is "1", it indicates that reserved memory information (small prize C reserved) for winning the small prize C is stored only in the first area (area 1) of the reserved areas of the winning information storage area 223a, and when the final small prize C reserved storage position is "2", it indicates that the area in which the small prize C reserved was last stored is the second area (area 2) of the reserved areas of the winning information storage area 223a. Note that the final small prize C reserved storage position only specifies the position of the last small prize C reserved stored, and when the final small prize C reserved storage position is "2", there are cases where the small prize C reserved is stored in the first area (area 1) and cases where it is not stored.

Similarly, when the final small win C reserved storage position is "3", it indicates that the area in the winning information storage area 223a where the small win C reserved was last stored is the third area (area 3). Note that the final small win C reserved storage position only specifies the position of the last small win C reserved stored, and when the final small win C reserved storage position is "3", there are cases where the small win C reserved is stored in the first area (area 1) or the second area (area 2), and cases where it is not stored.

In addition, when the final small prize C reserved storage position is "4", it indicates that the area in which the small prize C reserved was last stored among the reserved areas in the winning information storage area 223a is the fourth area (area 4). Note that the final small prize C reserved storage position only specifies the position of the last small prize C reserved stored, and when the final small prize C reserved storage position is "4", there are cases where a small prize C reserved is stored in each of the first area (area 1), second area (area 2), and third area (area 3), and cases where it is not stored.

As described above, the final small prize C reserved storage position only specifies the position of the last stored small prize C reserved, and does not specify the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired (the total number of reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a). Therefore, whether the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired is "1" or "4," if the small prize C reserved is stored only in the first area (area 1) of the reserved area, the final small prize C reserved storage position is specified as "1."

The reserved small prize C number indicates the number of reserved memory information corresponding to the reserved small prize C (reserved memory information that wins the small prize C) among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a. When the reserved small prize C number is "1", there is one reserved memory information corresponding to the reserved small prize C among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a. When the reserved small prize C number is "2", there are two reserved memory information corresponding to the reserved small prize C among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a. When the reserved small prize C number is "3", there are three reserved memory information corresponding to the reserved small prize C among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a. When the reserved small prize C number is "4", there are four reserved memory information corresponding to the reserved small prize C among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 390(b), the contents stipulated in the notification target selection table 222ib will be specifically explained. As shown in FIG. 390(b), when the final small win C reserve storage position is "1", "area 1 (first area)" is stipulated as the small win C reserve to be notified without specifying the number of small win C reserves in the reserve. In other words, when the final small win C reserve storage position is "1", since there are no other small win C reserves, the small win C reserve stored in "area 1 (first area)" is determined to be the one to be notified by the notification performance.

In addition, when the final small win C reserved storage location is "2" and the number of reserved small win Cs in the reserve is "1", that is, when the small win C reserve is stored only in the "second area (area 2)" of the reserve areas, "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the small win C reserve to be notified. In this case, since no small win C reserve is stored in "area 1 (first area)", the number of rights to play a big win game calculated based on the reserved memory information stored in "area 1 (first area)" is determined as the number of notifications for the notification effect, rather than the number of rights to play a big win game that is based on the assumption that a small win C will be won.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a notification effect that deviates between the number of rights to play a jackpot game notified by the notification effect and the number of rights to play a jackpot game that has actually been acquired (including the number of rights to play a jackpot game that is expected to be acquired), providing the player with an unexpected effect.

When the number of reserved small win Cs in the reserve is "2", "Area 2 (second area)" is specified as the reserved small win C to be notified. In this case, since the reserved small win Cs are stored in "Area 2 (second area)", it is possible to set the maximum number of rights to play the current big win game as the number to be notified in the notification effect.

Next, for a final small win C reserved storage location of "3", if the number of reserved small win Cs in the reserve is "1", i.e., if the small win C reserve is stored only in the "third area (area 3)" of the reserve areas, "area 3 (third area)" is specified as the small win C reserve to be notified. In this case, since the last stored small win C reserve is stored in "area 3 (third area)", it is possible to set the current maximum number of rights to play big win games as the announcement number for the announcement effect.

In addition, when the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "2", "area 2 (second area)" is specified as the reserved small prize C to be notified. In this case, there are cases where a reserved small prize C is not stored in "area 2 (second area)" and cases where a reserved small prize C is stored. To explain in detail, since the last reserved small prize C storage position is "3", it is confirmed that a reserved small prize C is stored in "area 3 (third area)" of the reserved areas. And, since the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "2", the reserved small prize C is stored in either "area 2 (second area)" where reserved memory information is stored before "area 3 (third area)" or "area 1 (first area)".

Here, when the small win C reservation is stored in "area 2 (second area)", the small win C reservation is stored in "area 2 (second area)" that is the target of the notification, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 2 (second area)" (the notification number including the number of rights to play the big win game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. On the other hand, when the small win C reservation is stored in "area 1 (first area)", the small win C reservation is not stored in "area 2 (second area)" that is the target of the notification, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information (small win A, small win B, or big win) stored in "area 2 (second area)" is set as the notification number of the notification effect.

In addition, when the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "3", "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the reserved small prize C to be notified. In this case, the reserved small prize C is definitely stored in "area 1 (first area)". To explain in detail, since the final reserved small prize C storage position is "3", it is confirmed that the reserved small prize C is stored in "area 3 (third area)" among the reserved areas. And, since the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "3", only the state where two reserved small prize Cs are stored in "area 2 (second area)" or "area 1 (first area)" where reserved memory information is stored before "area 3 (third area)" applies, so the reserved small prize C is definitely stored in "area 1 (first area)". In this case, since the small win C reservation is stored in the "area 1 (first area)" to be notified, the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 1 (first area)" (the notification number including the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. In this case, the small win C reservation is stored in an area after "area 1 (first area)", and the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 3 (third area)" is the maximum number of execution rights of the jackpot game that can be notified by the notification effect at the current time. In this way, by configuring the notification effect to be able to notify a number different from the maximum number that can be notified as the number of execution rights of the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the number of jackpot games that will actually be executed (the number of consecutive wins).

Similarly, when the last small win C reserved storage location is "4" and the number of reserved small win Cs is "1", that is, when small win C reserveds are stored only in the "fourth area (area 4)" of the reserved areas, "area 4 (fourth area)" is specified as the small win C reserved to be notified. In this case, since the last stored small win C reserved is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)", it is possible to set the current maximum number of rights to play big win games as the notification number for the notification effect.

In addition, when the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "2", "area 3 (third area)" is specified as the reserved small prize C to be notified. In this case, there are cases where a reserved small prize C is not stored in "area 3 (third area)" and cases where a reserved small prize C is stored. To explain in detail, since the last reserved small prize C storage position is "4", it is determined that a reserved small prize C is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" among the reserved areas. And, since the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "2", the reserved small prize C is stored in either "area 3 (third area)", "area 2 (second area)", or "area 1 (first area)", which has reserved memory information stored before "area 4 (fourth area)".

Here, if the small win C reservation is stored in "Area 3 (third area)", the small win C reservation is stored in "Area 3 (third area)" to be notified, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "Area 3 (third area)" (the notification number including the number of rights to play the big win game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. On the other hand, if the small win C reservation is stored in "Area 1 (first area)" or "Area 2 (second area)", the small win C reservation is not stored in "Area 3 (third area)" to be notified, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information (small win A, small win B, or big win) stored in "Area 3 (third area)" is set as the notification number of the notification effect.

When the number of reserved small win Cs in the reserve is "3", "area 2 (second area)" is specified as the reserved small win C to be notified. In this case, there are cases where a reserved small win C is not stored in "area 2 (second area)" and cases where a reserved small win C is stored. To explain in detail, since the last reserved small win C storage position is "4", it is determined that a reserved small win C is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" among the reserved areas. And, since the number of reserved small win Cs in the reserve is "3", it means that a reserved small win C is stored in two areas out of "area 3 (third area)", "area 2 (second area)" and "area 1 (first area)" where reserved memory information is stored before "area 4 (fourth area)".

Here, if the small win C reservation is at least stored in "Area 2 (second area)", the small win C reservation is stored in "Area 2 (second area)" to be notified, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "Area 2 (second area)" (the notification number including the number of execution rights to play the big win game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. On the other hand, if the small win C reservation is stored in "Area 1 (first area)" and "Area 3 (third area)", the small win C reservation is not stored in "Area 2 (second area)" to be notified, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information (small win A, small win B, or big win) stored in "Area 2 (second area)" is set as the notification number of the notification effect.

In addition, when the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "4", "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the reserved small prize C to be notified. In this case, the reserved small prize C is definitely stored in "area 1 (first area)". To explain in detail, since the final reserved small prize C storage position is "4", it is confirmed that the reserved small prize C is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" among the reserved areas. And, since the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "4", only the state where three reserved small prize Cs are stored in "area 3 (third area)", "area 2 (second area)", and "area 1 (first area)", which have reserved memory information stored before "area 4 (fourth area)", applies, so the reserved small prize C is definitely stored in "area 1 (first area)". In this case, since the small win C reservation is stored in the "area 1 (first area)" to be notified, the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 1 (first area)" (the notification number including the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. In this case, the small win C reservation is stored in an area after "area 1 (first area)", and the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" is the maximum number of execution rights of the jackpot game that can be notified by the notification effect at the current time. In this way, by configuring the notification effect to be able to notify a number different from the maximum number that can be notified as the number of execution rights of the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the number of jackpot games that will actually be executed (the number of consecutive wins).

Next, referring to FIG. 389(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example will be described. FIG. 389(b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 389(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example differs from the RAM 223 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 311(b)) in that it is provided with a status storage area 223ia, a time-saving final fluctuation flag 223ib, and an execution flag 223ic. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same contents are given the same symbols and their description will be omitted.

The tenth control example is also different from the seventh control example in that the types of information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are increased. Specifically, the tenth control example is configured to be able to execute a notification effect for notifying the player of at least a portion of the number of rights to play a jackpot game that has already been acquired, and is configured to notify the number of rights to play a jackpot game based on reserved memory information determined by referring to the notification target selection table 222ia. The winning information storage area 223a is configured to store information indicating that the reserved memory information determined by referring to the notification target selection table 222ia is the subject of notification.

By configuring it in this way, even if the second special pattern lottery is executed and the storage area of the reserved memory information stored in the winning information storage area 223a shifts, it is possible to easily determine which reserved memory information is the subject of notification.

In this tenth control example, when a notification effect is executed to notify the player of the number of rights to play a jackpot game, a new notification effect is not executed until a special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved special pattern 2 that is the subject of the notification effect is executed, so that the player believes that all of the rights to play a jackpot game that have already been acquired (including those to be acquired) have been notified by the notification effect.

In this way, in order to control so that a new notification effect is not executed until a special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved special pattern 2 that is the target of the notification effect is executed, the system is configured to determine whether the reserved memory information stored in the winning information storage area 223a contains information indicating the target of the notification effect. This makes it easy to determine the end timing of the notification effect.

In addition, in this tenth control example, the system is configured to restrict the execution of a new notification effect during the execution period of the notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to allow a new notification effect to be executed. In this case, for example, when the number of execution rights for a jackpot game that have already been acquired (including those to be acquired) and that have not been notified by a notification effect exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), it is determined that an additional execution condition has been met, and a new notification effect can be executed regardless of whether a notification effect is being executed or not.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the number of execution rights for jackpot games that are not notified by the notification effect from increasing, which can cause the player to lose interest in the notification effect and reduce the effect of the presentation. In addition to the condition that is met based on the number of execution rights for jackpot games that have been acquired (including those to be acquired) that have not been notified by the notification effect, the additional execution condition may be, for example, a condition that is met when it is determined that the information contained in the reserved memory information contains a predetermined number (e.g., two pieces) of specific information (e.g., information indicating that a jackpot game advantageous to the player will be executed, or information indicating that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game will be a game state advantageous to the player).

Furthermore, the notification mode for notifying the player of the number of rights to play the jackpot game that has been acquired (including those to be acquired) through the notification effect can be selected by the player. For example, when the player selects the first notification mode, all of the rights to play the jackpot game that has been acquired (including those to be acquired) are notified to the player. When the player selects the second notification mode, as in the tenth control example, a portion of the number of rights to play is randomly selected and notified to the player. When the player selects the third notification mode, only the minimum number of rights to play, that is, the result of whether or not the player has the number of rights to play the jackpot game that has been acquired (including those to be acquired), may be notified to the player. In this case, when the first notification mode is selected, a new notification effect is executed so that the number of rights to play the jackpot game that has been acquired (including those to be acquired) that is notified through the notification effect increases by acquiring a new special chart 2 reservation.

The state storage area 223ia is a storage area for temporarily storing information included in the state command output from the main control device 110. By reading out the information stored in this information storage area 223a, the currently set game state and its type (advantageous time-saving state, unfavorable time-saving state) can be specified on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Furthermore, the information storage area 223a is provided with a storage area capable of storing information on the currently set game state and a past storage area capable of storing information on game states previously set. The past storage area has a storage area (first past storage area to third past storage area) capable of storing information on up to three previous game states, and when a state command indicating a change in the game state is received from the main control device 110, information corresponding to the received state command is stored in the storage area, information previously stored in the storage area is shifted to the first past storage area, information stored in the first past storage area is shifted to the second past storage area, information stored in the second past storage area is shifted to the third past storage area, and information stored in the third past storage area is erased.

In this way, by configuring the game state that was previously set to be temporarily stored, it is possible to execute effects that correspond to the transitions between game states multiple times, or effects that correspond to game states that were previously set, so a wide variety of effects can be provided to the player.

The time-saving final change flag 223ib is a flag for indicating the special pattern change period for executing the time-saving final change performance, and is set to on when a special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern change period for executing the time-saving final change performance is executed.

In this tenth control example, the time-saving state is configured to end at the start timing of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is met, so during the period of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is met, the game state (normal state) is one in which it is difficult to obtain the special pattern 2 reservation, so the time-saving final change flag 223ib is set to ON when the special pattern change immediately before the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is met is executed, and is set to OFF when the special pattern change immediately before the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is met is stopped and displayed.

The executed flag 223ic is a flag to indicate that a notification effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the notification effect is executed. It is set to OFF when a special pattern change corresponding to the pending memory information that is the subject of the notification effect is executed (when a corresponding special pattern change change effect is set). In this tenth control example, it is configured so that a new notification effect is not executed while the executed flag 223ic is set to ON.

<Regarding control process of main control device 110 in tenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 391 to FIG. 393, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this tenth control example will be described. In this tenth control example, the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 315) is replaced with a special symbol variation process 10 (see FIG. 391), the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (see FIG. 318) is replaced with a special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (see FIG. 392), and the update process 7 (see FIG. 319) is replaced with an update process 10 (see FIG. 393), but the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted. Note that, for the parts where detailed description of the same elements as those described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment is omitted, the contents described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment are applied. Furthermore, the technical ideas described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and in each embodiment naturally apply to this tenth control example, and the modified examples and additional examples described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and in each embodiment naturally apply to this tenth control example.

First, referring to FIG. 391, the special pattern change process 10 (S10154) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change process 10 (S10154). This special pattern change process 10 (S10154) is executed during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 314), and is a process for controlling the change display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the change display of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process 10 (S10154), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S10201). The special symbol jackpot period includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and includes the period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), the period during which the jackpot game is in progress (round game period), and the grace period (ending period) until the round game period ends and the next lottery (variation) of a new special symbol begins.

To determine whether or not a jackpot is currently being won, specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON. If it is determined that a jackpot with a special symbol is currently being won (the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON) (S10201: Yes), this process ends.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot, i.e., if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not set to on (set to off) (S10201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S10202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is not changing (S10202: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e are obtained (S10203).

Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (S10204). If the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S10204: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the second special pattern that starts the fluctuation (lottery) is secured, the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted (S10205), and a reserved ball number command (special pattern 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S10206). After the special pattern 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S10207). After that, the time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208), the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209), and the special symbol change pattern selection process 10 (S10251) are executed, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S10204: No), then since there are currently no reserved balls of the second special pattern that would initiate the fluctuation (lottery), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10211).

If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is 0 (S10211: No), this process for executing the special pattern variation is terminated since there are currently no reserved balls of the first special pattern that would initiate the variation (lottery).

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S10211: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the first special symbol that starts the fluctuation (lottery) is secured, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted (S10212), and a reserved ball number command (special symbol 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10213). After the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10213, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10214). After that, the process of the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) and the process of the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 10 (S10251) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S10202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is changing (S10202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b has elapsed (S10211). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S10215: No), that is, if the current time is during the change period of the special pattern, the display of the first pattern display device is updated (S10216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10215, if the change time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S10215: Yes), a display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is set (S10217). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (S10252) described later with reference to FIG. 392. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the tenth control example, the stop display set in the process of S10217 is configured to be displayed on the first pattern display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). By continuously displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stopped pattern for a predetermined period in this way, unlike when the changing pattern is displayed for an instant, the player can be sure to recognize the content of the first pattern that is stopped and displayed.

In the tenth control example, 0.5 seconds is set as the predetermined period (fixed period) during which the stopped state of the first pattern described above is displayed, but other configurations may be used. For example, if a flashing display is performed in which the lit state and the off state are repeated to indicate that the first pattern is changing, then a period longer than the period of one lit display when the flashing display is performed (for example, 0.2 seconds) can be set as the fixed period described above. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to easily determine whether the first pattern is changing or stopped (fixed).

After the process of S10217 is completed, when the variable display of the special symbol being executed in the first symbol display device 37a, 37b starts, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol (the current determination result) performed by the special symbol determination process 7 (see S10209 in FIG. 317) is a jackpot for the special symbol (S10218). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot for the special symbol (S10218: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j and the jackpot in progress flag 203k are set to ON (S10219), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S10220), and the process proceeds to S10221. In the process of S10221, a special symbol determination command is set (S10221), and the process ends.

In other words, in the tenth control example, as explained in the process of S10220, when a special symbol is won as a jackpot, the time-saving state is configured to end at a timing between the end of the variation of the special symbol (the end of the final display of the first symbol) and the start of the jackpot game. The timing for ending the time-saving state based on the winning of a special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and as in the tenth control example described above, the time-saving state may end, for example, at the start of the variation of the special symbol that won the jackpot, other than after the final display of the special symbol (first symbol), or at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing when the final display starts). In addition, the time-saving state may end at the start of the jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot, or a predetermined period after the start of the jackpot game (for example, the start of the round game when the variable winning device 65 is opened), or at the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, the timing for ending the time-saving state based on winning a jackpot with a special symbol (the timing for establishing the time-saving end condition that is established when a jackpot with a special symbol is won) may be configured to be preset to only one of the multiple timings mentioned above, or the time-saving state may be configured to end at a different timing depending on the type of jackpot won.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the time-saving state is ended when the special symbol starts to change, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the time-saving state has ended (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes has reached a specified number (100 times)) and the normal state has been set, or whether the time-saving state has ended because a jackpot was won during the time-saving state. This allows the player to focus on the content of the presentation display (changing display) of the third symbol that corresponds to the special symbol change that is executed when the time-saving state ends, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, by setting different times for the time-saving end conditions to be met for each of the multiple jackpot types (time to end the time-saving state when a jackpot is won), it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol based on the time-saving state end timing. Note that, as part of the times for the time-saving end conditions to be met that are set for each of the multiple jackpot types, a time-saving end timing dedicated to the jackpot may be set that notifies the player that the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol this time is a jackpot when the player identifies the time when the time-saving state has ended, in other words, the time-saving state ends only when the time-saving end condition that is met due to winning a jackpot is met.

By configuring it in this way, you can know when the time-saving state ends and quickly find out that you've won the jackpot, lengthening the period during which you can feel superior. To further enhance this effect, it's a good idea to configure the end of the time-saving state for the jackpot described above to be set in the first half of the fluctuation period from when the special pattern fluctuation is executed to when the special pattern fluctuation ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10218 that the current lottery result is not a big win (S10218: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S10222). If it is determined in the process of S10222 that the current lottery result is a small win (S10222: Yes), the small win start setting process 7 is executed (S10223) and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10222 that the current lottery result is not a small win (S10222: No), the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is skipped and this process ends.

As explained above, the special symbol variation process 10 (S10104 in FIG. 391) of the tenth control example is configured to determine whether the selection (variation) conditions for the second special symbol are met (processing of S10204 in FIG. 391) in priority over whether the selection (variation) conditions for the first special symbol are met. This is because the second special symbol, which is a special symbol advantageous to the player, is variable (easy to vary) when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and is non-variable (hard to vary) when the normal state is set, making the second special symbol more difficult to vary (draw) than the first special symbol.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, if the conditions for selecting (changing) the first special pattern and the conditions for selecting (changing) the second special pattern are met simultaneously (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) of the main control unit 110), the first special pattern will begin to change in preference to the second special pattern, which is more difficult to change (select), causing discomfort to the player. Furthermore, in the tenth control example, the lottery (variation) for the second special symbol is configured to make it easier for the player to win a lottery result that is favorable to the player (to make it easier to win a small prize) than the lottery (variation) for the first special symbol. Therefore, if the lottery (variation) conditions for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) conditions for the second special symbol are met simultaneously (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) of the main control device 110), the first special symbol begins to vary in preference to the second special symbol, which is less likely to vary (draw), causing a problem of greater discomfort.

In contrast, in the tenth control example, when executing the process to start the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the selection (variation) conditions of the special symbol (the second special symbol in the tenth control example) that has a higher added value for the player (the probability of winning a small prize is higher than that of the first special symbol, and it is difficult to actually execute the selection (variation)) are determined with priority (first), so the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem can be prevented.

Next, referring to FIG. 392, the special pattern change pattern selection process 10 (S10251) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special pattern change pattern selection process 10 (S10251). As shown in FIG. 392, the special pattern change pattern selection process 10 (S10251) is configured to execute the update process 10 (S8272) before setting the start of the special pattern change. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to end the time-saving state before the special pattern change starts.

When the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (S10251) is executed, it is first determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, i.e., whether a special symbol jackpot has been set (S8201). If it is determined in the process of S8201 that a special symbol jackpot has been set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot A (S8271), and the process proceeds to S8203.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is not a big win (S8201: No), it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a small win, i.e., whether a small win for the special symbol is set (S8209). If it is determined in the process of S8209 that a small win for the special symbol is set (S8209: Yes), the type of small win is determined by referring to the small win type selection 10 table 202if (see FIG. 387) (S8273), and the process proceeds to S8203.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S8209 that a small win of the special pattern is not set, i.e., a miss of the special pattern is set (S8209: No), the process of S8273 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8203.

In the process of S8203, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special pattern execution area is obtained (S8203). Next, the current game state is identified based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, and the data table corresponding to the identified game state is read from the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (S8252).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S8203 and the data table contained in the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 308(a)) read in the process of S8252 (S8205), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205 (S8206). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the special symbol stop pattern is set (S8207), and update process 10 is executed (S8272). A detailed explanation of update process 10 (S8272) will be described later with reference to FIG. 393. Then, the start of the special symbol change is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S8208), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of the stop pattern indicating the result of this special symbol change, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to execute update process 10 (S8272) before the process of S8252 in FIG. 392 is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to end the time-saving state before the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, so for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select different variation patterns for the normal state and the time-saving state, it is possible to prevent a determination as to whether or not a jackpot determination for the special symbol lottery has been executed during the time-saving state based on the selected variation pattern.

Figure 319 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of update process 10 (S8272). In this update process 10 (S8272), as shown in Figure 319, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted, a determination is made as to whether the time-saving end condition has been met, and a process is executed to end the time-saving state based on the determination result (a process to clear the values of various counters referenced when determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met).

When update process 10 (S8272) is executed, first it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether the time-saving period is currently in progress (S10601). In the process of S10601, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0), i.e., the time-saving period is not in progress (S10601: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., the time-saving period is in progress (S10601: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S10602), and the process proceeds to S10603.

In the process of S10603, a remaining time-saving count command is set (S10603) indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h changed by the calculation (subtracted by 1). The remaining time-saving count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604: Yes), the game status is set to the normal status (S10605), and then a status command indicating that the current game status is the normal status is set (S10607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S10604 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (S10604: No), this processing is terminated and the process returns to the special symbol variation pattern selection processing 10 (see FIG. 392).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 394 to FIG. 395, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example will be described. This tenth control example is different from the seventh control example described above in that the reserved ball number command process 10 (see FIG. 394) and the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 10 (see FIG. 395) are executed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted. In addition, for the parts where the detailed description of the same elements as those described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment is omitted, the contents described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment are applied. In addition, the technical ideas described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment are naturally applied to this tenth control example, and the modified examples and additional examples described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment are also naturally applied to this tenth control example.

First, referring to FIG. 394, the reserved ball number command process 10 (S20101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be explained. FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved ball number command process 10 (S20101).

When the reserved ball count command process 10 (S20101) is executed, it is first determined whether the executed flag 223ic is on (S20102). If it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is on (S20102: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is not on (S20102: No), the reserved information is extracted from the command currently received from the main control device 110, and the corresponding value is stored in the corresponding special pattern reserved ball count counter (special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b or special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203b1) (S20103).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b1 is 4 (S20104). If it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b1 is not 4 (S20104: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b1 is 4 (S20104: Yes), the reserved memory information of the second special pattern is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S20105). Then, it is determined whether the reserved memory information that has been read out contains reserved memory information corresponding to the small win C (S20106). If it is determined that the reserved memory information that has been read out does not contain information corresponding to the small win C (S20106: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S20106, if it is determined that there is information corresponding to a small win C from the reserved memory information read in the process of S20105 (S20106: Yes), it is determined whether the current game state is in the second time-saving state (S20107). If it is determined that the current game state is in the second time-saving state (S20107: Yes), the reserved small win C to be notified is determined from the notification target selection table 222ib (see FIG. 390(b)) (S20108), and the process proceeds to S20109. On the other hand, in the process of S20107, if it is determined that the current game state is not in the second probability change state (S20107: No), the last obtained reserved small win C is determined to be the target for notification (S20112), and the process proceeds to S20109.

In the process of S20109, the display mode showing the consecutive win count corresponding to the storage position of the reserved small win C determined in the process of S20108 or S20112 is determined (S20109), and the notification target information is added to the winning information storage area 223a (S20110). Then, the execution completion flag 223ic is set to ON (S20111), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 395, the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 10 (S14994) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 10 (S14994).

When the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 10 (S14994) is executed, it is first determined whether the game state is in the time-saving state (S19551). If it is determined that the game state is not in the time-saving state (S19551: No), the processes of S19552 to S19555 are skipped and the process moves to S19556. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is in the time-saving state (S19551: Yes), it is determined whether the current change is the final change in the time-saving state (S19552). If it is determined that the current change is not the final change in the time-saving state (S19552: No), the processes of S19553 to S19555 are skipped and the process moves to S19556.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S19552 that the current change is the final change of the time-saving state (S19552: Yes), the time-saving state is read from the state storage area 223ia (S19554). Then, it is determined whether the read time-saving state is the second time-saving state (S19554). The effect mode is determined by referring to the read final change effect selection table (see FIG. 390(a)) (S19555), and the processing proceeds to S19556. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read game state is not the second time-saving state (S19554: No), the processing of S19555 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S19556.

Next, it is determined whether the executed flag 223ic is on (S19556). If it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is on (S19556: Yes), it is determined whether the current target variation is subject to notification (S19557). If it is determined that the current target variation is subject to notification (S19557: Yes), the executed flag 223ic is set to off (S19558), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S19559), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S19556 that the execution flag 223ic is not on (S19556: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S19557 that the current target change is not subject to notification (S19557: No), the processing of S19559 described above is executed and this processing ends.

<Eleventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 396 to Fig. 405. The pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example is configured to be able to win a small prize in some cases where the result of the special symbol lottery is not a big prize (is a miss), as in the above-mentioned seventh control example, and has a playability (so-called one-type two-type) in which a big prize game can be executed by making a game ball enter a specific area during a small prize game executed based on the small prize winning.

The pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example is significantly different from the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above in that the player is allowed to choose between a game (left-hand play) for executing a first special symbol lottery and a game (right-hand play) for executing a second special symbol lottery in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and that the playability of the time-saving state is different between when the time-saving state is set based on the result of the first special symbol lottery and when the time-saving state is set based on the result of the second special symbol lottery.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above, the game board 13 is configured so that the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery during the normal state, so that the left-handed play aiming to get the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, which triggers the execution of the first special symbol lottery, is the most advantageous play method for the player during the normal state. When the time-saving state is set, the game board 13 is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery during the time-saving state, so that the right-handed play aiming to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol lottery, is the most advantageous play method for the player.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above is configured so that a game method that is advantageous to the player is predefined according to the set game state, and the player plays in accordance with that game method. This configuration makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game, but there is a problem in that the player becomes bored with the game because the player is forced to play in a predefined game method.

In response to this, the pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example is configured so that, when the normal state is set, the player can select between a game aiming to execute the first special symbol lottery (left-hand play) and a game aiming to execute the second special symbol lottery (right-hand play). By configuring it in this way, the player can be allowed to select the game method, making it possible to play in a variety of game methods. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In addition, in this eleventh control example, when a left-handed play is performed in a normal state, which causes a first special symbol lottery to be executed, and when a right-handed play is performed in a normal state, which causes a second special symbol lottery to be executed, the expected value of the number of game balls (number of prize balls) that can be acquired is approximately the same, but the process of acquiring the number of game balls (number of prize balls) equal to that expected value is different. To put it simply, when a left-handed play is executed, it is relatively difficult to set a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, but once a time-saving state is set, it becomes easier for that time-saving state to continue, and when a right-handed play is executed, it becomes easier to set a time-saving state and harder for that time-saving state to continue than when a left-handed play is executed.

This configuration allows the player to choose the game that suits his/her convenience, which helps prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

First, referring to FIG. 396, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 396 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 396, the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example differs from the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 294) in that the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 (the area to the right of the variable display unit 80 where the game ball launched by right-hand play flows down) is different, and an indicator (display mode) for showing the player the game method is attached to the upper side of the game area formed on the game board 13. Note that the same components as those in the seventh control example described above are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 396, the upper area (above the variable display unit 80) of the game area (area through which the launched game ball can pass) formed on the game board 13 is marked with a turtle-like pattern k1 and a shark-like pattern k2, which correspond to the game methods (left-hand play and right-hand play). Pattern k1 corresponds to left-hand play, and is marked in the upper left position of the variable display unit 80, which allows the player to play left-hand play by launching the game ball aiming at pattern k1.

On the other hand, mode k2 corresponds to right-hand play, and is located in the upper right corner of the variable display unit 80, which allows the player to play right-hand play by shooting the game ball aiming at mode k2. This configuration allows the player to adjust the playing method by following the trajectory of the actual game ball that is shot, rather than by the operation content (amount of rotation) of the operating handle 22, and therefore provides the player with an easy-to-understand game.

It is also possible to use other methods for informing the player of the game method being played. For example, a detection means capable of detecting a game ball may be provided in the left side area (the game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) of the game areas formed on the game board 13, where a game ball launched by a left-handed game can flow down, and a notification means may be provided that notifies the player that a left-handed game is being played based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Alternatively, a detection means capable of detecting a game ball may be provided in the right side area (the game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) where a game ball launched by a right-handed game can flow down, and a notification means may be provided that notifies the player that a right-handed game is being played based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.

Next, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 396. In this eleventh control example, a second ball entry port 1640 and a right second ball entry port 1641 are provided in the right area of the game board 13 as ball entry ports (starting ball entry ports) for executing the second special symbol lottery.

The second ball entrance 1640 is provided with an electric device 1640a that opens and closes in a winning game (normal winning game) that is executed based on a winning normal symbol lottery, and is configured to be able to create a state where it is easy to enter the game ball (high probability state of normal symbol) and a state where it is difficult to enter the game ball (low probability state of normal symbol) depending on the set game state. Note that the contents of the normal symbol lottery and the operation control contents of the electric device 1640a that opens and closes in a winning game (normal winning game) that is executed based on a winning normal symbol lottery are the same as the contents of the electric device control explained in each control example above, so detailed explanations are omitted.

On the other hand, the right second ball entrance 1641 is arranged so that game balls shot by right-handed play can enter at a constant rate regardless of the set game state, and in this eleventh control example, the right second ball entrance 1641 is arranged so that the rate at which game balls shot by left-handed play enter the first ball entrance 64 is approximately the same. By configuring it in this way, the first special pattern lottery performed by left-handed play in the normal state and the second special pattern lottery performed by right-handed play can be performed at approximately the same frequency, so that no matter which game method the player selects, the player can play without feeling uncomfortable.

When the time-saving state is set, right-hand play is used to make it easier to get the ball into the second ball entrance 1640 by playing right-hand, and a normal symbol lottery based on the high probability state of the normal symbol and a normal symbol winning game that opens and closes the electric device 1640a are executed, so that right-hand play is an advantageous playing method for the player during the time-saving state. Note that the details of the normal symbol lottery based on the high probability state of the normal symbol and the normal symbol winning game that opens and closes the electric device 1640a are the same as those in the seventh control example described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Furthermore, in the lower right area of the game board 13, there are disposed a V winning device 1650 which opens during a small win game, and a variable winning device 1065 which opens during a big win game. This V winning device 1650 has the same contents as the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 294) in the seventh control example described above, and the variable winning device 1650 has the same contents as the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 294) in the seventh control example described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in eleventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example will be described with reference to Figures 398 to 401. The pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above in that the ROM 202 and part of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the ROM 222 and part of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed, but otherwise is the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 398, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in this eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 398(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 395(a), the ROM 202 of this control example differs from the ROM 202 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(a)) in that the 1st win random number 7 table 202fa is replaced by the 1st win random number 11 table 202ja, the small win type selection 7 table 202ff is replaced by the small win type selection 11 table 202jf, the time-saving random number 7 table 202fh is replaced by the time-saving random number 11 table 202jh, and the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi is replaced by the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ii, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. For ease of explanation, some of the various configurations shown in the ROM 202 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(a)) are omitted in FIG. 385(a), but the illustration is omitted except for configurations that are difficult to apply.

The first winning random number 11 table 202ja differs from the first winning random number 7 table 202fa (see FIG. 305(a)) described above in that it has a special pattern 2 random number 11 table 202ja2 instead of the special pattern 2 random number 7 table 202fa2 that is referenced when the second special pattern is selected, but is otherwise identical. A detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the contents stipulated in the special pattern 2 random number 11 table 202ja2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 399(a). FIG. 399(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 11 table 202ja2. As shown in FIG. 399(a), the special pattern 2 random number 11 table 202ja2 is a data table that is referenced when a winning lottery for the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is performed.

Specifically, of the possible range of the value of the first winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 999", a "big win" is defined for the range "0 to 4", and a "small win" is defined for the value "5 to 54". In other words, in this 11th control example, the probability of winning a big win in the lottery for special chart 2 is approximately 1/200 (5/1000), and the probability of winning a small win is 1/20 (50/1000).

The small prize type selection 11 table 202jf is a data table that is referenced when selecting the type of small prize that will be set if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery). This small prize type selection 11 table 202jf differs from the small prize type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) of the seventh control example described above in that the selection ratio of the specified small prize type has been changed, but is otherwise the same. A detailed explanation of the same elements will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 399(b), the small win type selection 11 table 202jf will be explained. FIG. 399(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 11 table 202jf. For the acquired small win type counter C5 value in the range of "0 to 4", "small win A (jackpot A when V passes)" is specified, and for the range of "5 to 99", "small win B (jackpot B when V passes)" is specified.

Time-saving random number 11 table 202jh is a data table referenced in the time-saving winning judgment (time-saving lottery) executed in the special pattern lottery, and differs from the above-mentioned time-saving random number 7 table 202fh (see FIG. 310(a)) in that the judgment value corresponding to the time-saving winning is different, but otherwise it is the same. Explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 11 table 202jh will be explained with reference to FIG. 400. FIG. 400 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 11 table 202jh. As shown in FIG. 400(a), the time-saving random number 11 table 202jh stipulates the judgment value for the time-saving winning judgment only for the normal game state (low probability state of special and normal patterns), and the judgment value for the time-saving winning is stipulated for the range of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 from "900 to 949". In other words, since the number of judgment values that are judged to be time-saving winnings is 50 for the 1000 possible values of the first winning random number counter C1, the probability of winning the time-saving winning during the normal state is 1/20 (50/1000). Note that, as shown in FIG. 400(a), time-saving winning is not possible in game states other than the normal state. However, without being limited to this, the game may be configured so that the time-saving feature can be won with a low probability (for example, 1/1000) even in game states other than the normal state.

The time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji is a data table that is referenced when setting the time-saving end conditions for the time-saving state that is set when the time-saving is won in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving type is specified in correspondence with the value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1. In this 11th control example, it is configured so that different time-saving types are selected when the time-saving is won in the first special pattern lottery and when the time-saving is won in the second special pattern lottery.

Here, the contents of the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji will be explained with reference to FIG. 400(b). FIG. 400(b) is a diagram showing the contents specified in the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji. As shown in FIG. 400(b), the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji specifies the type of special pattern that won the time-saving and the value of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1, and specifies the time-saving end condition corresponding to the specified time-saving type, and whether or not a time-saving limit is set.

Specifically, if the time-saving type is won in the first special symbol lottery, time-saving A11 is specified as the time-saving type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. Then, as the time-saving end condition corresponding to time-saving A, the time-saving end condition is specified in which the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition) is set to "200" and the time-saving limit is set to "none." In other words, the time-saving end condition is set to end the time-saving state when the process of updating the value of the special symbol time-saving counter 203h has been executed 200 times.

On the other hand, if the time-saving type is won in the second special symbol lottery, time-saving B11 is specified as the time-saving type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. Then, as a time-saving end condition corresponding to time-saving B, a time-saving end condition is specified in which the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition) is set to "200" and the time-saving limit is set to "Yes." In other words, the time-saving end condition is set to end the time-saving state when the process of updating the value of the special symbol time-saving counter 203h is executed 200 times, and when the number of times the time-saving state is set consecutively reaches a predetermined number (10 times), the time-saving limit is reached and the normal state is set.

Therefore, if the time-saving lottery is won in the special pattern lottery, the first special pattern lottery, which does not have a time-saving limit set, is configured to be able to set a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery. This makes it difficult for the player to choose between playing left-handed to execute a jackpot lottery and a time-saving lottery that is advantageous to the player, or playing right-handed to execute a jackpot lottery, a small jackpot lottery, and a time-saving lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, providing the player with the fun of choosing a play method.

Returning to FIG. 398(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 possessed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example will be explained. FIG. 398(b) is a diagram that shows a schematic of the contents defined in the RAM 203 possessed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 398(b), this eleventh control example is the same as the RAM 203 in the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(b)) except that a time-saving limit count counter 203ja has been added. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The time-saving limit counter 203ja is a counter for measuring the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern is set in succession. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example is configured to be able to measure the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern is set in succession (the number of normal consecutive settings) without setting the low probability state of the normal pattern except during a jackpot game, and is configured to be able to execute a process (time-saving limit process) that forcibly sets the low probability state of the normal pattern even if the condition for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established when the number of normal consecutive settings reaches a predetermined number (10 times) (when the time-saving limit is reached), thereby suppressing the excessive consecutive setting of a game state (first probability change state) that is advantageous to the player.

When the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is selected by the second special pattern lottery while the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the initial value is set to "10" (see S18182 in FIG. 402). The counter value is decremented each time the normal consecutive count is updated (see S13104 in FIG. 405), and the counter value after decrement is referenced in the process of determining whether the time-saving limit has been reached (see S13107 in FIG. 405). When the time-saving limit is reached or the type of jackpot currently being executed is one that sets the low probability state of the normal pattern, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is cleared to 0.

The information indicating the value of this time-saving limit counter 203ja is set as a status command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 during the jackpot end process.

As described above, in this eleventh control example, the value of the time-saving limit counter 203ja for measuring the number of normal consecutive settings is set to the number of normal consecutive settings until the time-saving limit is reached, and the counter value is subtracted each time the normal consecutive setting number is subtracted. However, without being limited to this, the value of the time-saving limit counter 203ja may be set to "1" when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, and thereafter, the value of the time-saving limit counter 203ja may be incremented by 1 each time the normal consecutive setting number is updated, and it may be determined whether the value of the time-saving limit counter 203ja after the increment is a value indicating that the time-saving limit has been reached (for example, 10), and if the result of this determination indicates that the time-saving limit has been reached, the time-saving limit process may be executed.

When configured in this way, for example, even if the condition for establishing (reaching) the time-saving limit is changed when a second special condition (e.g., winning a jackpot of a specific jackpot type) is established within a period during which a high probability state of a special pattern is continuously set, it is possible to determine whether the time-saving limit has been reached simply by comparing the established condition (reaching condition) after the change with the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja.

When the special condition in the above example is established, the condition for the time-saving limit may be changed to be more difficult to establish than before the change, or may be changed to be easier to establish than before the change. In addition, when the condition for the time-saving limit is changed, it may be configured to immediately determine whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja satisfies the condition for the time-saving limit. Even if the condition for the time-saving limit is changed, it may be configured to determine whether the condition for the time-saving limit count counter 203ja satisfies the condition for the time-saving limit. In particular, in the latter case, the high probability state of the normal pattern is prevented from immediately ending when the condition for the time-saving limit is changed, and the special pattern lottery is guaranteed to win the jackpot at least once during the period when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so that the player's motivation to play can be prevented from decreasing.

In this eleventh control example, as the trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern, a trigger for setting a value in the time-saving limit count counter 203ja (a trigger for setting the time-saving limit) and a trigger for not setting it (a trigger for not setting the time-saving limit) are provided. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in what trigger sets the time-saving state.

Furthermore, in this eleventh control example, even if a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal pattern is set after the end of a jackpot game, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is updated (decremented) or not updated (decremented) depending on the trigger of the jackpot game. Specifically, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is not updated even if a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game played based on the jackpot win, and when a small jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is updated (decremented) when a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game played based on the small jackpot win.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it more disadvantageous to the player when an opportunity that is difficult to achieve as an opportunity to execute a jackpot game (winning a jackpot) is more disadvantageous to the player than an opportunity that is easy to achieve (winning a small jackpot). This makes it possible to make the player eager to play while aiming to win a jackpot during the time-saving state in which a small jackpot is more likely to be won. It is also possible to provide the player with a novel gameplay experience in which the player aims to achieve an opportunity to execute a jackpot game that is difficult to achieve during the period until an opportunity to execute a jackpot game that is easy to achieve has been executed a predetermined number of times (10 times), and ultimately hopes that an opportunity to execute a jackpot game that is easy to achieve will not be achieved.

In this eleventh control example, a bonus is given in the event that an unlikely opportunity for triggering a jackpot game (winning a jackpot) occurs, in which the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is not updated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an unlikely opportunity for triggering a jackpot game (winning a jackpot) occurs, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja may be increased or reset to its initial value.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 401. FIG. 401 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 401, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eleventh control example differs from the RAM 223 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 311 (b)) in that it is provided with a remaining time reduction counter 223ja and a time reduction limit flag 223jb. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

The remaining time-saving count counter 223ja is a counter that is set to a value corresponding to the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja set in the main control device 110, and is intended to indicate the period until the time-saving limit is reached (the remaining number of times that the normal high probability state can be set consecutively).

This remaining time reduction counter 223ja is set to a value (10) corresponding to a command that includes information about the type of time reduction that sets the time reduction limit in the limit information update process that is executed when a limit-related command is received in the status command process executed in the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the already set value is decremented by 1 when a time reduction limit count command is received.

The value of this remaining time reduction counter 223ja is referenced when executing the process to determine the presentation mode for each game state. Then, in the state command process of the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined that a command indicating that a low probability state for normal patterns has been set has been received in the game state update process executed when a game state command is received, the value is cleared (set) to 0.

The time-saving limit flag 223jb is a flag for indicating that the time-saving limit has been reached, and is set to on when a time-saving limit reached command is received in the limit information update process, which is executed when a limit-related command is received in the status command process executed in the command determination process, to indicate that the time-saving limit has been reached.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eleventh control example>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this eleventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 402 to Fig. 405. This eleventh control example is significantly different from the seventh control example described above in that it is configured to be able to set an upper limit to the period during which a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player continues across big win games.

First, the contents of time-saving lottery process 11 (S10288) will be described with reference to FIG. 402. FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 11 (S10288). As shown in FIG. 402, time-saving lottery process 11 (S10288) adds a process to time-saving lottery process 7 (see S10208 in FIG. 316) described above, in which if it is determined that a time-saving win has been made (S18105: Yes), it determines whether the current time-saving win is a time-saving win in the second special pattern lottery (S18181), and if it is determined that the time-saving win is a time-saving win in the second special pattern lottery (S18181: Yes), it sets the value of time-saving limit count counter 203ja to "10" (S18182).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set the time-saving limit only when the time-saving lottery is won in the normal state and the special pattern type that wins the time-saving lottery is the second special pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 403, the processing contents of the jackpot control process 11 (S11574) will be explained. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the jackpot control process 11 (S11574). This jackpot control process 11 (S11574) differs from the jackpot control process in each of the control examples described above in that jackpot end process 11 (S11651) is executed at the end timing of the ending performance, but otherwise is the same, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 404, the processing contents of jackpot end process 11 (S11651) will be explained. FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of jackpot end process 11 (S11651). This jackpot end process 11 (S11651) is executed when the jackpot game ends, and executes processing for updating the time-saving limit, and processing for determining the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends and setting the game state according to the determined contents.

When the jackpot end process 11 (S11651) is executed, first, the time-saving limit update process is executed (S13001). The details of this time-saving limit update process (S13001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 405. Next, information indicating the game state to be set after the jackpot end is stored in the game state storage area (S13002), the number of time-saving times corresponding to the type of jackpot being executed is determined (S13003), the determined number of time-saving times is set in the time-saving counter 203h (S13004), a time-saving setting information command corresponding to the setting contents is set (S13005), a state command corresponding to the game state after the jackpot and the value of the time-saving limit number counter 203ja is set (S13006), and this process ends.

Next, the details of the time-saving limit update process (S13001), which is one process within the jackpot end 11 process (see S11651 in FIG. 404), will be described. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving limit update process (S13001). In this time-saving limit update process (S13001), a process is executed to set a high probability state for normal symbols based on the type of jackpot or time-saving type that has been won, and a process is executed to set an upper limit value for which a high probability state for normal symbols can be set consecutively, and to update the remaining number of times for the set upper limit value.

In the time-saving limit update process (S13001), first, the jackpot type of the currently active special symbol is read (S13101). Next, it is determined whether the currently active jackpot type read in the process of S13101 is a jackpot type in which a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot ends (S13102). If it is determined that the jackpot type is a jackpot type in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot ends (S13102: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot game is a jackpot game based on a small jackpot win (S13103).

In the process of S13103, the trigger for executing a jackpot game is determined by information based on the past game status stored in the game status storage area 203g. If the process of S13103 determines that the jackpot game is based on a small jackpot win (S13103: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S13104). If the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is not greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the probability state of the normal pattern at the time of the jackpot win is a low probability state (S13104: No), the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203 is not set to a value that can consecutively set the high probability state of the normal pattern, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S13104, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S13104: Yes), the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is decremented by 1 (S13106), and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after the decrement is 0 or not (S13107). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after the decrement is 0 (S13107: Yes), the upper limit value that can be set for the high probability state of consecutive normal patterns has been reached, so the time-saving limit reaching flag is set to ON (S13108), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S13107, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after the decrement is not 0 (S13107: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As explained above, in this eleventh control example, when the normal state is set, the player is allowed to select between a game aiming to execute a first special symbol lottery (left-hand play) and a game aiming to execute a second special symbol lottery (right-hand play). By configuring in this way, the player can be allowed to select the game method, making it possible to play in a variety of game methods. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In addition, in this eleventh control example, when a left-handed play is performed in a normal state, which causes a first special symbol lottery to be executed, and when a right-handed play is performed in a normal state, which causes a second special symbol lottery to be executed, the expected value of the number of game balls (number of prize balls) that can be acquired is approximately the same, but the process of acquiring the number of game balls (number of prize balls) equal to that expected value is different. To put it simply, when a left-handed play is executed, it is relatively difficult to set a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, but once a time-saving state is set, it becomes easier for that time-saving state to continue, and when a right-handed play is executed, it becomes easier to set a time-saving state and harder for that time-saving state to continue than when a left-handed play is executed.

This configuration allows the player to choose the game that suits his/her convenience, which helps prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Furthermore, in this eleventh control example, when left-hand play is performed in the normal state, the player is allowed to play a game aiming to win a jackpot in the special pattern lottery and a game aiming to win the time-saving feature, and when right-hand play is performed, the player is allowed to play a game aiming to win a jackpot, a small jackpot, or a time-saving feature in the special pattern lottery. In other words, in terms of ease of playing a jackpot game, right-hand play is configured to make it easier for the player to play a jackpot game than left-hand play. On the other hand, it is configured to be possible to set a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player when the time-saving feature is won in the first special pattern lottery performed by left-hand play than when the time-saving feature is won in the second special pattern lottery performed by right-hand play. By configuring in this way, the player can be provided with the fun of choosing a play method.

In this eleventh control example, an upper limit (time-saving limit) can be set on the number of times the high probability state of normal symbols is set in succession. This makes it possible to prevent excessive succession of game states advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in this eleventh control example, a determination is made as to whether or not to set a time-saving limit depending on the trigger for setting the high probability state of normal symbols. In other words, it is possible to create cases where a time-saving limit is set and cases where it is not set, depending on the trigger for setting the high probability state of normal symbols. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play in the hope that a time-saving state will be set without a time-saving limit being set.

In addition, even when the time-saving limit is set, it is possible to create cases where the number of times the high probability state of normal symbols is set consecutively is updated or not updated depending on the trigger for executing a jackpot game. This allows the player to play in the hope that a jackpot game will be executed without updating the number of times remaining until the time-saving limit is reached.

In this eleventh control example, a configuration is used that allows an upper limit (time-saving limit) to be set on the number of times that a high probability state of a normal pattern is set consecutively, but a different configuration may be used as a function to prevent a game state advantageous to the player from being set consecutively. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is capable of setting a high probability state of a special pattern, it may be configured to allow an upper limit (probability limit) to be set on the number of times that a high probability state of a special pattern is set consecutively.

Furthermore, the upper limit for the number of times the "high probability state of special symbols" is set in succession (number of times of consecutive special symbol settings) and the upper limit for the number of times the "high probability state of normal symbols" is set in succession (number of times of consecutive regular symbol settings) may be configured to be updated and managed separately. For example, in a state in which it has been decided that the "first probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols)" which is a game state advantageous to the player will be set, if the number of consecutive special symbol settings reaches the upper limit (if the probability limit is reached), a "time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols)" in which the "high probability state of special symbols" is changed to a "low probability state of special symbols" may be set, and if the number of consecutive regular symbol settings reaches the upper limit (if the time-saving limit is reached), a "second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols)" in which the "high probability state of normal symbols" is changed to a "low probability state of normal symbols" may be set.

Furthermore, the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol can be set consecutively (number of times of consecutive special symbol settings) is configured to be greater than the number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set consecutively (number of times of consecutive normal symbol settings). In addition, during the special symbol high probability period during which the high probability state of the special symbol is set consecutively, the system may be configured so that more prize balls can be awarded to the player in the first period during which the first probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set than in the second period during which the second probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set.

By configuring it in this way, if a jackpot is won while the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set and the first probability state is set, the first period will first be set until the time-saving limit is reached, and then the second period will be set.

As a result, it is possible to execute a first game, which can award many prize balls to a player, for a first period, and then execute a second game, which is difficult to award prize balls to, for a second period. This makes it possible to prevent the first game from being executed excessively in succession, resulting in an excessive number of prize balls being awarded to a player.

Furthermore, the length of the first period during which the first game can be played can be the period from when the first probability variable state is set until the time-saving limit is reached (until the second probability variable state is set) (10 jackpot wins), and the length of the second period during which the second game can be played can be the period from when the second probability variable state is set until the probability variable limit is reached (30 jackpot wins). In this way, by configuring the lengths of the first period and second period set within the special probability period to be configurable based on the number of jackpot wins, it becomes possible to manage the length of the period during which the special probability period is set.

More specifically, during the first period in which the first probability variable state is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery that is mainly executed is always constant (1 second) regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery, and the content of the jackpot game (number of rounds) executed when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery is always constant (10 rounds). In other words, the length of the first period may be configured not to differ depending on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation executed or the content of the jackpot game executed.

By configuring it in this way, the first period can be set to a length that corresponds to the period until 10 jackpot wins (number of times the special pattern changes) occur in a state with a high probability of a special pattern (jackpot probability of 30/1000).

In addition, during the second period in which the second probability variable state is set, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol lottery that is primarily executed is always constant (0.1 seconds) regardless of the result of the first special symbol lottery, and the content of the jackpot game (number of rounds played) that is executed when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is always constant (2 rounds). In other words, the length of the second period may be configured not to differ depending on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation that is executed or the content of the jackpot game that is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set the second period to a length corresponding to the period until 30 jackpot wins (number of times the special pattern changes) occur when the special pattern has a high probability of occurring (jackpot probability of 30/1000).

Furthermore, the system may be configured so that the number of balls dispensed is increased by allowing a player to be awarded many prize balls during a first period, which is a portion of the special high probability period, and the number of balls dispensed is reduced during a second period, which is the other period of the special high probability period, thereby suppressing the increase or decrease in the number of balls dispensed.

By configuring in this way, even if the appropriate increase in ball output that can be awarded during the specific period in which the special chart high probability period is set is configured to be biased toward the first period, in other words, even if an excessively large number of balls are awarded to the player when only the first period is considered, the increase in ball output during the entire special chart high probability period can be considered to be an appropriate increase in ball output, so that it is possible to perform a surprising ball output increase game for the player while preventing excessive balls from being awarded to the player as a result.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), the first probability state is more likely to be set after the jackpot game ends than if a jackpot is won in the second probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). In other words, it may be possible to set a game state in which it is difficult to win a jackpot, but which is likely to transition to the first game state that is most advantageous to the player if a jackpot is won, and a game state in which it is easy to win a jackpot, but which is unlikely to transition to the first game state that is most advantageous to the player if a jackpot is won.

By configuring it in this way, the game objectives that the player is expected to aim for can be varied depending on the game state that is set, which makes it easier to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

When the first probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game may be configured to be different depending on whether the probability limit is reached first, the time-saving limit is reached first, or the probability limit and time-saving limit are reached simultaneously.

By configuring it in this way, even if the same type of jackpot (for example, a first special jackpot that sets the first special state) is won, different game states can be set depending on the status of each limit being reached, making it easier to provide players with a variety of games.

In addition, by using the above-mentioned configuration, even if the rate at which the same game state (e.g., the first special probability state) is set after the end of a jackpot game is increased (will always be set) when none of the limits have been reached, it is possible to prevent a game state with a high set rate (e.g., the first special probability state) from being set continuously for a long period of time, making the game monotonous and reducing motivation to play.

Furthermore, it may be configured so that a special state (special mode) advantageous to the player can be set when the probability variable limit and the time-saving limit are reached simultaneously. In other words, in the first probability variable state in which the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are set, if the normal state is set based on the probability variable limit and the time-saving limit being reached simultaneously, a normal state (special normal state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set. By configuring in this way, even if a trigger (each limit) that forcibly shifts the probability state of each symbol from a high probability state to a low probability state is established, if a special condition is established, it is possible to transition to a game state advantageous to the player.

This allows the player to simultaneously play a game in which the player hopes that the probability-changing limit or time-saving limit will not be reached and a game in which the player hopes that the limit will be reached at the same time, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As mentioned above, when there are elements (limits) other than the jackpot type that was won that determine the game state (game situation) that will be set after the jackpot game ends, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to know in advance which of the various game states will be set after the jackpot game ends after the jackpot game of the same jackpot type is played.

In response to this, the presentation may be configured to differ based on the set game state, the number of remaining turns (remaining number of jackpots) until the special limit is reached, and the number of remaining turns (remaining number of jackpots) until the time-saving limit is reached.

This configuration makes it possible to predict future gameplay based on the content of the effects being executed, making it easier to provide players with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

In addition, in some cases where a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, which is mainly executed when the second probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, the first probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot play ends, but without being limited to this, it may be configured so that if a jackpot is won when the second probability variable state is set, the second probability variable state is always set after the jackpot play ends.

By configuring it in this way, if the second probability variable state is set during the special pattern high probability period when the high probability state of the special pattern is continuously set, that is, if a jackpot type is set in which the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot play ends when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, or if the time-saving limit is reached due to the first probability variable state being set consecutively and the second probability variable state is forcibly set after the jackpot play ends (if the second probability variable state is set by the probability variable limit processing), the period until the probability variable limit is reached can be reliably set to the second probability variable state. Therefore, after a favorable play state (first probability variable state) that is favorable to the player is set, it is possible to easily and reliably set an unfavorable play state (second probability variable state) for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, in this case, the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot is won during the second high probability state may be configured to differ depending on the trigger for setting the second high probability state. For example, it may be configured so that when the second high probability state is set by high probability limit processing, it is easier to set a jackpot type that sets the second high probability state after the jackpot game ends than when the second high probability state is set based on the jackpot type.

By configuring it in this way, if a jackpot is won while the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, and a high probability state for special symbols is set after the jackpot play ends, the first probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), which is an advantageous play state that is advantageous to the player, will not be set until the probability limit is reached, and an excessively disadvantageous play to the player can be prevented from being played.

Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, a high probability state for the special symbol is always set after the jackpot game ends, but this is not limited to this, and a low probability state for the special symbol may be set in some cases when a jackpot is won. Also, in this first embodiment, a plurality of game states are settable, and games with different degrees of advantage can be played depending on the set game state. Specifically, the game states are configured so that the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is the game state that is most advantageous to the player, followed by the normal state in which a special state (special mode) is set (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and the normal state. However, this is not limited to this, and the game content executed in each game state may be different to vary the degree of advantage given to the player in each game state.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 12th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 406 to Fig. 438. In the above-mentioned 11th control example, during the period when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the jackpot lottery for the other special symbol is not executed. In contrast, the 12th control example is different in that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variable specification).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute lottery games with more special symbols within a given time, and the probability that the player will be awarded a jackpot within the given time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play efficiently.

In addition, in the 11th control example described above, the time-saving lottery was executed only in the first special symbol lottery, but in this 12th control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and the player is granted a more advantageous benefit if one of the special symbols wins the time-saving lottery during the period from when the time-saving lottery is won for the first special symbol or the second special symbol until the variable display of that special symbol stops, compared to when only one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the time-saving lottery.

Details will be given later, but in this twelfth control example, if the first or second special symbol wins the time-saving bonus in the normal state, the time-saving A state is set. On the other hand, if the first special symbol wins the time-saving bonus in the normal state, a long (300 seconds) fluctuation time is set (time-saving winning fluctuation state), and if the second special symbol wins the time-saving bonus within the period until the fluctuation of the first special symbol ends (i.e., until the first special symbol, which indicates a time-saving bonus, is displayed stationary), the time-saving B state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state, is set.

By configuring it in this way, if one special symbol wins the time-saving feature, the other special symbol will also win the time-saving feature, giving the player a special advantage. Therefore, when one special symbol wins the time-saving feature and the special symbol changes to indicate that a time-saving feature has been won, the player will be made to want to win the other special symbol as well, which makes it possible to motivate the player to play and increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even if a jackpot of a jackpot type that can set a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot play ends, the system is configured to execute a process to set the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot play ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage by continuing a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player for a long period of time, and to prevent the player's gambling spirit from increasing.

In addition, in a gaming machine with simultaneous variation specifications, when a jackpot (or small jackpot) is won in one of the special symbol lotteries, the specification is generally such that only one of the following is executed: the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily stopped (interrupted); however, in this twelfth control example, the configuration is such that whether the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped is determined depending on the jackpot type (or small jackpot type). In other words, a jackpot type that forcibly stops (discards) the variable display of the other special symbol and a jackpot type that temporarily stops (interrupts) the variable display of the other special symbol are specified.

By configuring it in this way, when a game state advantageous to the player is set, and a game state disadvantageous to the player may be set by the stopped display of one special symbol, it is possible to prevent the setting of an unfavorable game state when a jackpot of a jackpot type that allows the variation of the other special symbols to be discarded, but if a jackpot of a jackpot type that interrupts the other special symbols is won, the situation in which an unfavorable game state may be set continues. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the variation of the other special symbols could be discarded, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

Here, an overview of the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example will be described. The probability of a big win for the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example is 1/50, which is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The probability of winning the time-saving mode is also 1/50, which is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The probability of a small win is also 1/50, but the small win lottery is only held for the second special symbol.

The details will be described later, but the jackpot type determined when a jackpot is won is determined by different tables (see Figures 410 and 411) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a jackpot is won with the first special symbol, a 100% jackpot A (5R time-saving A jackpot) is determined regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won with the second special symbol, the jackpot type is determined according to the game state, as shown in Figure 411. As shown in Figure 411, when a jackpot is won with the second special symbol in the normal state, a 100% jackpot A is set. In other words, in the normal state, the jackpot type determined when a jackpot is won with the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same.

In addition, a small prize lottery is also held for the second special symbol, and if the small prize is won and the game ball enters the specific area 1650 during the small prize game, it will result in a big prize B or C, which are more advantageous than a big prize A, so it can be said that the second special symbol is a special symbol that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the change time of the first special symbol and the change time of the second special symbol are different in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbol) and the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbol), and in the normal state, the change time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the change time of the second special symbol, so the first special symbol is more likely to stop first. In the time-saving state, the change time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the change time of the first special symbol, so the second special symbol is more likely to stop first.

By configuring it in this way, in the normal state, the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed is reduced, preventing the player from gaining an excessive advantage, and in the time-saving state, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol from stopping before the second special symbol, which would put the player in a relatively disadvantageous gaming state, making it possible to provide a well-balanced game experience.

In addition, in the normal state, the change time of the second special symbol may be set to be shorter than the change time of the first special symbol, and in the time-saving state, the change time of the first special symbol may be set to be shorter than the change time of the second special symbol.

Here, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example will be described. In this twelfth control example, a normal state (a state with a low probability of normal symbols) and a time-saving state (a state with a high probability of normal symbols) can be set as game states. There are two types of time-saving states: a time-saving state A, which ends when the special symbols have changed five times since the time-saving state was set, and a time-saving state B, which ends when the special symbols have changed 10,000 times since the time-saving state was set. When the time-saving state A is set, the probability of winning a big win (probability of winning a big win: 1/50) or a small win (probability of winning a small win: 1/50) in five special symbol lotteries is low at about 18%, while when the time-saving state B is set, the chance of winning a big win or a small win is almost 100%, so the time-saving state B is a more advantageous type of time-saving state for players than the time-saving state A.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, when the first or second special symbol wins the jackpot in the normal state, the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends is only the time-saving A state. Also, when only the first or second special symbol wins the time-saving, the game state that is set is only the time-saving A state, and the time-saving B state is not set.

In this twelfth control example, as shown in FIG. 414, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving winning state in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (300 seconds). Then, as shown in FIG. 416, during the long-time fluctuation of the first special symbol (time-saving winning fluctuation state), an extremely short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. This makes it possible to execute the second special symbol lottery more often in the time-saving winning fluctuation state compared to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 411, if the second special symbol wins the jackpot during the time-saving winning variable state, a 100% jackpot B (10R time-saving B jackpot) is determined, and the time-saving B state is set after the jackpot game ends. Also, if the second special symbol wins the time-saving winning variable state, the time-saving B state is set.

By configuring it in this way, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature, as many second special symbol lotteries as possible are executed within the period until the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, making it possible to motivate the player to play in order to set the time-saving B state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the time-saving winning variable state, if the time-saving B state is set due to a big win (or small win) of the second special symbol or a time-saving winning, the variable display of the first special symbol that won the time-saving will continue, and if the first special symbol is displayed stationary, the set time-saving B state will be discarded and a new time-saving A state will be set. In other words, the time-saving B state will only continue for the period until the first special symbol is displayed stationary.

On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol that has won the time-saving mode can be discarded, it becomes possible to play in the time-saving mode B until the time-saving limit described below is reached, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained. Note that the time-saving limit refers to a threshold value that causes the execution of a process to set a non-time-saving mode after the jackpot play ends, even if a jackpot of a type that can set a time-saving mode after the jackpot play ends is won.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, even in the same time-saving B state, it is possible to provide the player with different gameplay aspects, namely a game aiming to discard the first special symbol and a game aiming to win a large number of prize balls by making consecutive wins until the time-saving limit is reached, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the time-saving winning change state is set when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win, but this is not limited to the above, and the time-saving winning change state may also be set when the second special symbol wins the time-saving win. In this case, by configuring the time-saving winning change to vary depending on the type of special symbol, it is possible to provide a relatively advantageous time-saving winning change state and a relatively disadvantageous time-saving winning change state for the player depending on the type of special symbol, which can increase the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the type of time-saving state that is set when only one of the first and second special symbols wins the time-saving feature is the time-saving A state, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set different types of time-saving states when only the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature and when only the second special symbol wins the time-saving feature. For example, when the second special symbol wins the time-saving feature, it is also possible to set the time-saving C state (for example, the number of time-saving times is 100), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state but less advantageous to the player than the time-saving B state.

Next, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 406. FIG. 406 is a front view showing a schematic of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 406, the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth control example has the same configuration as the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned eleventh control example (see FIG. 396), and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the twelfth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this twelfth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 407 to Fig. 416. This twelfth control example differs from the above-mentioned eleventh control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is changed. The rest is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 407, the ROM 202 possessed by the main control device 110 in this 12th control example is different from the ROM 202 possessed by the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the 1st win random number 11 table 202ja is replaced with the 1st win random number 12 table 202ka, the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb is replaced with the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb, the 2nd win random number 7 table 202fc is replaced with the 2nd win random number 12 table 202kc, and the 2nd win random number 12 table 202kc is replaced with the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd. The difference is that the round 12 table 202kd is replaced with the small win type selection 11 table 202jf, the small win type selection 12 table 202kf is replaced with the time-saving random number 11 table 202jh, the time-saving star random number 12 table 202kh is replaced with the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji and the time-saving type selection 12 table 202ki is used, the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe and the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji have been deleted, and the small win random number 12 table 202ke has been added, but otherwise it is the same. The same components are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 408. FIG. 408 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. It differs from the above-mentioned eleventh control example in that it adds a special chart 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka, a special chart 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb, a special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203kc, a special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203kd, a special chart 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke, a special chart 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf, a time-saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg, and a time-saving limit reached flag 203kh. The rest of the configuration is the same as the above-mentioned eleventh control example, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol 1 change time timer 203ka and the special symbol 2 change time timer 203kb are timers for timing the change time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. When the change pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is selected, the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern is set. Whether or not the change time of each special symbol has ended is determined based on the timing results of the special symbol 1 change time timer 203ka and the special symbol 2 change time timer 203kb (see Y701 in FIG. 424 and Y901 in FIG. 433).

The special chart 1 temporary stop flag 2030kc is a flag that indicates the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of special chart 1 is stopped. When it is set to on, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, and when it is set from the on state to the off state, the update (subtraction) of the variable time that was stopped is resumed.

This special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON when the variation of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) whose lottery result is a jackpot other than the jackpot D is stopped (Y903 in FIG. 433), and is referred to in the first special pattern variation execution process 12 (see FIG. 235) and the first special pattern variation stop process 12 (see FIG. 424, Y708). If it is set to ON as a result of the reference, a process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display device corresponding to the special pattern 1 in the same way as during variation. In other words, while the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variation time is stopped, but the first pattern display device is in a state where the variation display is continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to notify that the variation of the special pattern 1 has not been forcibly stopped by setting the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc to ON. Then, if it is determined that the flag is set to ON in the first special symbol change execution process 12 (see FIG. 423) (Y2801 in FIG. 423: Yes), the flag is set to OFF (Y2803 in FIG. 423). Although detailed explanations and illustrations are omitted, the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON by executing the same process as in the case of a big win even when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is a small win.

The special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is a flag that indicates the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special chart 2 is stopped. When it is set to on, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, and when it is set from the on state to the off state, the update (subtraction) of the variable time that was stopped is resumed.

This special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON when the variation of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) that is the winning lottery result is stopped (Y703 in FIG. 424), and is referenced in the second special pattern variation in progress process 12 (see FIG. 432) and the second special pattern variation stop process 12 (see FIG. 43). Note that the contents referenced in this process are the same as the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, if it is determined that it is set to ON in the second special pattern variation in progress process 12 (see FIG. 432) (Y2901 in FIG. 432: Yes), it is set to OFF (Y2903 in FIG. 432).

The special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the first special symbol that is changing. This special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is set to ON when the change of the big win D or small win B is stopped for the second special symbol (see Y905 in FIG. 433 and Y932 in FIG. 435). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is ON while the first special symbol is changing, it is set to OFF (see Y722 in FIG. 425). This makes it possible to forcibly stop the first special symbol in accordance with the timing when the change of the big win D or small win B of the second special symbol stops first.

The special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is a flag that indicates that it is time to forcibly stop the second special pattern that is changing. This special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is set to ON when the first special pattern wins the time-saving feature and the change display starts (Y405 in FIG. 421). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when it is determined that the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is ON while the second special pattern is changing (Y632 in FIG. 434). This makes it possible to forcibly stop the second special pattern in line with the timing when the first special pattern wins the time-saving feature and the change starts.

The time-saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is a flag indicating that the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning mode is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (i.e., the time-saving winning fluctuation state is in a fluctuating manner). This time-saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is set to ON when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a time-saving winning mode (see Y403 in FIG. 421). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning mode is displayed in a stopped manner and the time-saving A state is set (see Y8352 in FIG. 426), or when the second special symbol wins the big win D or small win B and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is canceled (see Y726 in FIG. 425). This allows the time-saving winning fluctuation state to be set in the period from when the first special symbol wins the time-saving winning mode to when the fluctuation of the first special symbol ends.

The time-saving limit reached flag 203kh is a flag for indicating that the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern has been set consecutively (number of consecutive normal pattern settings) has reached an upper limit, and is set to on when the number of consecutive normal pattern settings has reached an upper limit and the high probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly changed to a low probability state.

Next, the contents stipulated in the 1st winning random number 12 table 202ka will be explained with reference to FIG. 409(a). FIG. 409(a) is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents stipulated in the 1st winning random number 12 table 202ka. In this 12th control example, as shown in FIG. 409(a), the probability of winning the jackpot is the same for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 18/900 (i.e., 1/50).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the jackpot probability is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this is not limited to this, and the jackpot probability may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the jackpot probability is not variable in any game state, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to set a high probability state of a special pattern (so-called high probability state) after the jackpot game ends when a specific jackpot type is determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 409(b), the contents of the second winning random number 12 table 202kc defined in the ROM 202 will be described. FIG. 409(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number 12 table 202kc in a schematic manner. The second winning random number 12 table 202kc is a data table in which the winning judgment value of the normal pattern is stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal pattern, "0 to 2" is specified as the judgment value for the winning of the normal pattern. Also, in the high probability state of the normal pattern, "0 to 149" is specified as the judgment value for the winning of the normal pattern. In the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number 12 table 202kc are referenced to determine whether or not the normal pattern is a winning pattern.

Now, referring to FIG. 406, in the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, when a winning normal symbol lottery is won, the electric device 1640a arranged in the right area of the game board 13 opens, allowing the ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640.

Therefore, when the high probability state (time-saving state) of the normal pattern is set, the electric device 1640a opens more easily, and the game ball enters the right second ball entrance 1640 more easily, so the second special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state.

Next, the contents of the time-saving random number 12 table 202kh will be explained with reference to FIG. 409(c). FIG. 409(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 12 table 202kh. As shown in FIG. 409(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the time-saving lottery is executed for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The probability of winning the time-saving lottery for each special symbol is the same, and is 18/900 (1/50). Note that the time-saving lottery is executed only in the normal state, and is configured not to be executed in the time-saving state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have the same probability of winning the time-saving feature, but this is not limited to this, and the second special symbol may be configured to have a higher or lower probability of winning the time-saving feature than the first special symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the time-saving lottery is executed only in the normal state, but this is not limited thereto, and the time-saving lottery may be executed even in the time-saving state.

Next, the contents of the small prize random number 12 table 202ke will be described with reference to 409(d). Fig. 409(d) is a diagram showing the contents of the small prize random number 12 table 202ke. As shown in Fig. 409(d), in the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, the small prize lottery is executed only for the second special symbol. The probability of winning the small prize is 18/900 (1/50).

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth control example is configured to execute a small prize lottery for the second special symbol, but this is not limited to this, and the small prize lottery may also be executed for the first special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot, the probability of winning the time-saving mode, and the probability of winning the small jackpot are all 1/50, but this is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the jackpot, the probability of winning the time-saving mode, and the probability of winning the small jackpot may all be configured to be different probabilities. For example, the probability of winning the jackpot may be 1/300, the probability of winning the time-saving mode 1/30, and the probability of winning the small jackpot 1/100.

Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb will be explained with reference to FIG. 410(a). FIG. 410(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb. The jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb specifies the 12 table 202kb1 for special chart 1 jackpots and the 12 table 202kb2 for special chart 2 jackpots.

Figure 410(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 jackpot 12 table 202kb1 defined in the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb. As shown in Figure 410(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, when the first special symbol wins the jackpot, 100% jackpot A is selected. Jackpot A is a jackpot type in which 5 rounds of jackpot play are executed and the time-saving A state is set after the jackpot play ends. After the jackpot play of jackpot A ends, the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 5 times.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the jackpot type for the first special symbol is one type, but this is not limited to this, and multiple types of jackpot types may be set. Also, the jackpot type selected may be different depending on the game state.

Figure 411 is a diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 jackpot 12 table 202kb2 defined in the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb. When a jackpot is won with the second special symbol, the jackpot type is selected according to the game state set at the time of the jackpot win, the number of times the second special symbol has changed since the game state was changed, and the value of the first jackpot type counter CS2. The count of the number of changes is also reset, for example, when a jackpot is won in the time-saving B state and the time-saving B state is set again after the jackpot play ends.

First, when the game state is in the normal state, there are a non-time-saving winning change state and a time-saving winning change state. The non-time-saving winning change state is a state in which the time-saving winning change state flag 20kg is off, that is, the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning is not displayed. The time-saving winning change state is a state in which the time-saving winning change state flag 203kg is on, that is, the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning is being displayed. In the normal non-time-saving winning change state, regardless of the number of times the second special symbol changes, a 100% jackpot A (5R time-saving A jackpot) is selected, and the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 5 after the jackpot game ends. In the normal time-saving winning change state, regardless of the number of times the second special symbol changes, a 100% jackpot B (10R time-saving B jackpot) is selected, and the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 10000 after the jackpot game ends.

In this way, in the normal state, the bonus given to the player differs depending on whether the time-saving winning variable state flag 203kg is on when the jackpot is won, preventing players who play games that only involve the second special symbol lottery from gaining an excessive advantage.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, in the normal state, regardless of the number of times the second special symbol changes, the jackpot A (or jackpot B) is selected 100%. However, this is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be selected from among multiple jackpot types according to the number of times the jackpot changes. For example, in the normal state, non-time-saving winning change state, either jackpot A or jackpot B may be selected, and from the 0th to 50th spins, jackpot A is more likely to be selected than jackpot B, and from the 51st spin onwards, jackpot B is more likely to be selected than jackpot A. By configuring in this way, even if a losing win continues in the normal state, the jackpot type advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected, so that a decrease in the player's motivation to play can be suppressed.

Also, the type of jackpot that is likely to be selected during a specific period may be variable, such as jackpot A being more likely to be selected than jackpot B from 0 to 50 spins, jackpot B being more likely to be selected than jackpot A from 51 to 100 spins, and jackpot A being more likely to be selected than jackpot B from 101 to 150 spins. By configuring it in this way, periods that are advantageous to the player are periodically created, making it possible for the player to be interested in the number of times the second special symbol changes, and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Next, there are time-saving states A and B, and in time-saving state A, regardless of the number of times the second special symbol changes, there is a 50% chance that jackpot B (10R time-saving B jackpot) will be selected, and a 50% chance that jackpot C (5R time-saving B jackpot) will be selected. In time-saving state B, the type of jackpot selected varies depending on the number of times the second special symbol changes, and from spin 0 to spin 50, a 100% chance that a jackpot (10R time-saving B jackpot) will be selected, and from spin 51 onwards, there is a 50% chance that a jackpot B (10R time-saving B jackpot) will be selected, and a 50% chance that a jackpot D (10R time-saving B jackpot) will be selected. Both jackpot B and jackpot D are types of jackpots that involve 10 rounds of jackpot play and a time-saving B state after the jackpot play ends, but they are different jackpot types in that if jackpot B is won, a process is executed to temporarily stop (interrupt) the first special symbol that is changing, and if jackpot D is won, a process is executed to forcibly stop (discard) the first special symbol that is changing. In other words, if the second special symbol is won a certain number of times, it becomes easier to discard the changing display of the first special symbol.

By configuring it in this way, even if the second special symbol continues to win but not win while the first special symbol that has been selected for the time-saving feature is being displayed in a changing state and there is little time left for the first special symbol to change, it becomes more likely that the change in the first special symbol can be discarded, which can increase the player's motivation to play when the second special symbol continues to win but not win.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the type of jackpot likely to be selected is variable depending on the number of times the second special symbol changes only in the time-saving B state, but this is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot likely to be selected may also be variable depending on the number of times the second special symbol changes in the time-saving A state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the jackpot B is selected 100% of the time from 0 to 50 spins, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured so that different jackpot types can be won even from 0 to 50 spins. For example, the jackpot B may be selected 80% of the time and the jackpot D may be selected 20% of the time. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player play while expecting that he or she may win the jackpot D and cancel the variable display of the first special pattern even during the period when the time-saving B state has just been set, and the fun of playing the game can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the type of jackpot that is likely to be selected is switched between "0 to 50 spins" and "51 spins and after." However, this is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot that is likely to be selected in a specific period may be changed, such as, for example, jackpot B is more likely to be selected than jackpot D from 0 to 50 spins, jackpot D is more likely to be selected than jackpot B from 51 to 100 spins, and jackpot B is more likely to be selected than jackpot D from 101 to 150 spins. By configuring in this way, periods that are advantageous to the player are periodically generated, making it possible for the player to be interested in the number of times the second special symbol changes, and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Next, the contents of the small win type selection 12 table 202kf will be explained with reference to FIG. 412. FIG. 412 is a diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 12 table 202kf. As shown in FIG. 412, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, two types of small win types are specified. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the small win lottery is executed only for the second special pattern.

Small win A is a type of small win that is selected 80% of the time when a small win is won, and if the specific area 1650a is passed (V passing) during a small win game, a big win C (5R time-saving B big win) is awarded. Details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, depending on the type of small win, the display of the first special symbol changes during execution may be forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily stopped (interrupted), and when a small win A is executed, a process of temporarily stopping (interrupting) the display of the first special symbol changes during execution is performed.

On the other hand, small win B is a type of small win that is selected 20% of the time when a small win is won, and if a V is passed during a small win game, a big win B (10R time-saving B big win) is awarded. When small win B is executed, a process is executed to forcibly stop (discard) the fluctuation of the first special pattern that is being executed. Note that, although there are two types of small wins in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, this is not limited to this, and three or more types of small wins may be provided.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd will be explained with reference to FIG. 413. FIG. 413 is a diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd. The fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd specifies a normal state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd1, a time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2, and a time-saving winning fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd3, and each fluctuation pattern table is referenced according to the game state.

Figure 414 is a diagram showing the contents of the normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1, which is defined in the variation pattern 12 table 202kd. In the normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1, the variation pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, for a pattern type of "first special pattern," if the win/loss judgment result is "miss," a "short miss" with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds (7,000 milliseconds) is specified when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 139," a "false miss" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20,000 milliseconds) is specified when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "140 to 149," "various normal reaches" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds (40,000 milliseconds) are specified when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "150 to 179," and a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds) is specified when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "180 to 189." In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a "win," a "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds (40,000 milliseconds) is specified in the range of "0 to 29" for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds) is specified in the range of "30 to 189" for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a "special reach" with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds (140,000 milliseconds) is specified in the range of "190 to 198" for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a "time-saving win," a "long time-saving win" with a fluctuation time of 300 seconds is specified in the range of "0 to 198" for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

On the other hand, for the pattern type "second special pattern", if the result of the win/loss judgment is "miss", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set in the range of "0 to 198" and a "long miss" with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (600,000 milliseconds) is specified, if the result of the win/loss judgment is "time-saving win", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set in the range of "0 to 198" and a "time-saving win" with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (600,000 milliseconds) is specified, and if the result of the win/loss judgment is "big win, small win", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set in the range of "0 to 198" and a "long win" with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (600,000 milliseconds) is specified.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example is configured so that in the normal state, a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be set for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. This is because the small prize lottery is executed only for the second special symbol, and when a small prize is won, the time-saving B state, which is the most advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, by lengthening the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the game efficiency is reduced, and it is prevented that players who play in a game in which only the second special symbol lottery is executed are excessively advantageous.

In addition, if the result of the lottery for the first special symbol is a "time-saving win", a "long time-saving win" is set. During the long time-saving win fluctuation, the time-saving win fluctuation state is reached, and until the first special symbol for which the long time-saving win is set is stopped (or discarded), the time-saving win fluctuation state pattern table 202kd3 is referenced, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol becomes a short fluctuation (0.5 seconds), so multiple second special symbol lotteries can be executed. Note that even if a big win (or a small win) is won during the long time-saving win fluctuation (during the time-saving win fluctuation state), and the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving win, the time-saving win fluctuation state pattern table 202kd3 is referenced for the period during which the long time-saving win fluctuation continues.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win, a 100% "long time-saving win" is set, but this is not limited to the above, and a selection may be made from a number of variation patterns based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. For example, a "long time-saving win" with a variation time of 300 seconds may be selected at 50%, a "short time-saving win" with a variation time of 200 seconds may be selected at 30%, and a "super time-saving win" with a variation time of 500 seconds may be selected at 20%. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the time-saving win variation state depending on the variation time of the selected first special symbol, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the time-saving winning variable state is set only when the first special symbol is selected for the time-saving win, but this is not limited to the above, and the time-saving winning variable state may also be set when the second special symbol is selected for the time-saving win. In this case, by configuring the variable time when the time-saving win is selected to differ depending on the type of special symbol (for example, the variable time is 300 seconds for the first special symbol and 600 seconds for the second special symbol), it becomes possible to set a time-saving winning variable state that is favorable to the player and a time-saving winning variable state that is relatively unfavorable to the player depending on which special symbol is selected for the time-saving win, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Figure 415 is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2, which is defined in the fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd. In the time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2, the fluctuation pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

The time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2 is a fluctuation pattern 12 table that is referenced when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and is common to the time-saving A state and the time-saving B state. As described above, when a long time-saving winning fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, the time-saving winning fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd3 is referenced, not the time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2.

As shown in FIG. 415, in the time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2, the first special symbol is a long fluctuation (600 seconds), and the second special symbol is a short fluctuation (3 to 5 seconds). As described above, if the first special symbol wins a jackpot while the time-saving state B is set, the time-saving state A, which is less favorable to the player than the time-saving state B, is set. Therefore, by configuring the fluctuation of the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed first, it is made easier to continuously set the time-saving state B, which is more favorable to the player.

Figure 416 is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving winning variable state 12 variable pattern table 202kd3, which is defined in the variable pattern 12 table 202kd. In the time-saving winning variable state 12 variable pattern table 202kd3, the variable pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variable type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 416, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, when the time-saving winning variation state is set, a short variation (0.5 seconds) is set regardless of the result of the lottery for the second special symbol. In the time-saving winning variation state, the game ends when the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning is displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, in order to increase the game efficiency in the time-saving winning variation state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and it is configured to be possible to execute many lotteries for the second special symbol.

In addition, in the time-saving winning change state, the first special symbol is already changing, and when the change of the first special symbol ends, the time-saving winning change state also ends, so the change pattern of the first special symbol is not set in the time-saving winning change state. Therefore, the time-saving winning change state change pattern 12 table 202kd3 is configured to select only the change pattern of the second special symbol.

As mentioned above, even if the game state is normal or time-saving, when the first special symbol is in a long time-saving winning fluctuation state (when the time-saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is set to on), the time-saving winning fluctuation state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd3 is referenced when selecting a fluctuation pattern.

<Regarding control process of main control device in twelfth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 12th control example will be described with reference to Figs. 416 to 437. The control process of the main control device 110 in this 12th control example differs from the control process of the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned 5th control example in that the special symbol variation process 5 (see Fig. 252) is replaced with the special symbol variation process 12 (see Fig. 416), the game state update process 12 (see Fig. 422) is replaced with the update process 5 (see Fig. 256), and the big win control process 5 (see Fig. 260) is replaced with the big win control process 12 (see Fig. 435), and the other processes are the same. Note that the same processes are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

As described above, the twelfth control example is significantly different from the fifth control example described above in that the first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as special pattern 1) and the second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as special pattern 2) are configured to be able to be changed simultaneously (in parallel).

First, referring to FIG. 417, the contents of the special symbol variation process 12 (Y104) in this 12th control example will be described. FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 12 (Y104). When the special symbol variation process 12 (Y104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current situation is a big win or a small win (Y231). If it is determined that the current situation is a big win or a small win (Y231: Yes), it is next determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on (Y232). In this Y232 process, it is determined whether the subtraction of the special symbol variation time of the other special symbol that is currently varying is suspended due to one special symbol being stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win. In the process of Y232, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on (Y232: Yes), the display of the first pattern display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special pattern is updated (Y233), that is, a process is executed to continue the change display of the first pattern display device 37 for the special pattern for which the subtraction of the change time has been interrupted, and this process is terminated. This makes it possible to inform the player that the special pattern change has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of Y231, if it is determined that a big win or a small win is currently occurring (Y231: No), it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 1 change time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (i.e., whether the special pattern 1 is changing) (Y234), and if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 1 change time timer 203ka is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y234: No), the same process as the first special pattern change start process 12 (Y237) is executed, and then it proceeds to Y238, which executes change processing related to the special pattern 2.

If it is determined in the process of Y234 that the value of the special pattern 1 change time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (Y234: Yes), the first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235) is executed. This first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235) executes the process during the special pattern 1 change, and a detailed explanation of this will be given later with reference to FIG. 422.

When the first special symbol change in progress process 12 (Y235) is completed, the first special symbol change stop process 12 (Y236) is then executed, and then the process proceeds to Y238.

In the processing of Y238 to Y241, the same processing as Y234 to Y237 executed for special pattern 1 is executed. When the processing of Y238 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (i.e., whether the special pattern 2 is changing) (Y238), and if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y238: No), the second special pattern change start processing 12 (Y239) is executed, and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y238, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (Y238: Yes), the second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240) is executed. This second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240) executes the process during the special pattern 2 change, and a detailed explanation of this will be given later with reference to FIG. 431.

After the second special symbol change execution process 12 (Y240) is completed, the second special symbol change stop process 12 (Y241) is then executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 418, we will explain the first special symbol change start process 12 (Y237), which is one process of the special symbol change process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104). FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change start process 12 (Y237).

In the first special symbol variation start process 12 (Fig. 417, Y237), it is first determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is on (Y301). In the process of Y301, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag is on (Y301: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y301, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag is not on (Y301: No), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is obtained (Y302), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter is greater than 0 (Y303). In the process of Y303, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (Y303: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (Y304), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d after the decrement is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 (Y305).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c in the RAM 230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c according to the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d in the main control device 110.

When the process of Y305 is completed, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (Y306). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on.

After the process of Y306 is completed, the first special symbol determination process 12 is then executed (Y307). This first special symbol determination process 12 (Fig. 418, Y307) will be described in detail later, but it is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot has been won, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that has been shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and based on the set game state. Note that the game state update process 12 (Y309) may be executed before the process of Y307, and by configuring it in this way, the special symbol lottery will be executed after the game state is updated.

When the process of Y307 is completed, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 is then executed (Fig. 420, Y308). Details will be described later, but this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y308) is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y308) is completed, the game status update process 12 is then executed (Y309). This game status update process 12 (Fig. 421, Y309), the details of which will be described later, is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the values of various counters (time-saving counter 203h) that indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10. When the process of Y309 is completed, the special symbol 1 standby flag 2030i is set to OFF, and a special symbol 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y310), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y303, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d is 0 (Y303: No), it is determined whether the special symbol 1 standby flag 2030i is on (Y311), and if it is determined that it is on (Y311: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of Y311, if it is determined that it is off (i.e., not on) (Y311: No), the special symbol 1 standby flag 2030i is set to on (Y312), a special symbol 1 standby command indicating on is set (Y313), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of the first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307) will be explained with reference to FIG. 419. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307). This first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307) is executed in place of the special symbol determination process 5 (S251 in FIG. 253) of the fifth control example described above, and in addition to determining the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, a determination of whether or not a time-saving win has occurred (special symbol 1 time-saving lottery process 12) is executed.

When the first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307) is executed, first, data of the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area is obtained (Y8001), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number 12 table 202ka (Y8002), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (Y8003: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (Y8004), the jackpot pattern of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y8005), a value indicating the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area (Y8006), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (Y8003: No), the special symbol 1 time-saving lottery process 12 is executed (Y8007), and this process is terminated.

Here, the special symbol 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007) is a process for executing a judgment of whether or not a time-saving win has been made in the current special symbol lottery. In other words, in this 12th control example, in the first special symbol lottery, a judgment of whether or not a jackpot has been won is first executed (Y8003), and if a jackpot has been won, the special symbol lottery is terminated without executing a judgment of whether or not a time-saving win has been made, and the judgment of whether or not a time-saving win has been made is executed only if a jackpot has not been won. By configuring it in this way, multiple benefits (a jackpot win for a special symbol, a time-saving win) are not given to the player in one special symbol lottery, so it is possible to prevent the player from being given an overly advantageous game.

Next, referring to FIG. 420, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y308), which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (FIG. 418, Y237), will be described. FIG. 420 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y308).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Fig. 420, Y308), first, in the first special symbol determination process 12 (Fig. 419, Y307), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot, i.e., whether a jackpot for the first special symbol has been set (Y501).

If it is determined in the process of Y501 that a jackpot for the first special symbol has been set (Y501: Yes), the jackpot type is determined (Y502) from the special symbol 1 jackpot 12 table 202kb (see FIG. 410(b)) based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of Y8005 in the above-mentioned first special symbol determination process 12 (see FIG. 419), and the process proceeds to Y503.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y501 that the lottery result for the first special symbol is a miss (Y501: No), the process of Y502 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y503.

In the process of Y503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (Y503). Next, a variation pattern selection table (see Figures 413 to 416) according to the game status is read (Y504), and the process proceeds to Y505. The game status is determined based on the value of the time-saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game status storage area 203g. In the process of Y505, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (Y505), and then a special symbol 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (Y506).

When the process of Y506 is completed, a special pattern 1 stop type command indicating the stop pattern is set (Y507). Next, the start of the variation of the first special pattern is set in the first pattern display device 37 (Y508), and this process is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007) will be explained with reference to FIG. 421. FIG. 421 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007).

When the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007) is executed, first, the lottery result (time-saving winning judgment result) is obtained based on the time-saving random number 12 table 202kh (Y401), and it is determined whether or not a time-saving winning has been won (Y402). If it is determined that a time-saving winning has been won (Y402: Yes), the time-saving winning fluctuation status flag 203kg is set to on (Y403), time-saving A is set as the time-saving pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y404), the special chart 2 fluctuation stop flag kf is set to on (Y8105), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y402 that the time-saving win has not been made (Y402: No), the losing special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y406), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of game status update process 12 (Y309) will be explained with reference to FIG. 422. FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing the contents of game status update process 12 (Y309).

When the game status update process 12 (Y309) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y601), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y601: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (Y602), and a remaining time-saving count command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set (Y603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (Y604), and if it is determined that the value is 0 (Y604: Yes), the time-saving game is not granted (i.e., the normal state), so a state command indicating the normal state is set (Y605), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y604 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (Y604: No), the process of Y605 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 423, the contents of the first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235) executed in the special pattern change process 12 (see Y104 in FIG. 417) will be explained. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235). In this first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235), a process for resuming the subtraction of the change time of special pattern 1 if the subtraction has been suspended, and a process for subtracting the change time are executed.

When the first special symbol change execution process 12 (Y235) is executed, it is first determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to on (Y2801). Here, we will briefly explain the case where this process is executed with the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc set to on. The special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to on when the special symbol 1 is changing and the special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific win (big win A to C, or small win A). Then, when the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set on, the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set on during the process, so the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds by the main control device 110 loops, and the next time the special pattern change process 12 (Fig. 417) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set on), it is determined that a jackpot is in progress in the process of Y231, so the first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235) is not executed. Then, the jackpot game (or small jackpot game) ends, and the first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235) is executed because it is determined that a jackpot is not in progress (or a small jackpot) in the process of Y231. By configuring it in this way, the state in which the first special pattern variation in progress process 12 (Y235) is executed while the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON is configured to be the timing when the big win (or small win) game ends and the deduction of the variation time of the special pattern variation, which had been suspended, is resumed.

Returning to FIG. 423, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Y2801, if it is determined that the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to on (Y2801: Yes), then the special chart 1 fluctuation resume command is set (Y2802), the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to off (Y2803), and the process proceeds to Y2804. On the other hand, in the processing of Y2801, if it is determined that the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is not set to on (it is set to off) (Y2801: No), the processing of Y2802 and Y2803 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y2804.

In the processing of Y2804, the special pattern 1 variable time timer 203ka is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2804), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (Y2805), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 424, we will explain the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 12 (Y236), which is one process of the special symbol fluctuation process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104). FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol fluctuation stop process 12 (Y236).

In the first special symbol change stop process 12 (Fig. 424, Y236), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the change based on the first special symbol that is being executed (Y701). In the process of Y701, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the change based on the first special symbol that is being executed (Y701: Yes), it is determined whether a jackpot of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is set (Y702). If it is determined that a jackpot of the first special symbol is set (Y702: Yes), the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on (Y703). Although not shown in the figure, when the process of Y703 is executed, a special symbol 2 change stop command is set, indicating that the special symbol 2 change stop flag 203kd has been turned on.

After completing the process of Y703, a special symbol 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (Y704). Then, a jackpot scenario based on the selected jackpot type is set (Y705). After that, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol (Y706). Then, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 (Y707), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y702, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is not set (Y702: No), it is determined whether or not a time-saving win of the first special symbol is set (Y710). In the process of Y710, if it is determined that a time-saving win is set (Y710: Yes), the time-saving setting process 12 (Y711) is executed, and the process proceeds to Y706. In this time-saving setting process 12 (Y711), a process is executed for setting the time-saving state corresponding to the time-saving type that has been won. The time-saving setting process 12 (Y711) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 426.

On the other hand, in the process of Y701, if it is determined that the timing for the end of the fluctuation based on the first special pattern being executed has not arrived (Y701: No), then it is determined whether the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special pattern 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is on (Y708). In the process of Y708, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special pattern 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is off (Y708: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y708 that the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special symbol 1 variation stop flag 203ke is on (Y708: Yes), this means that the second special symbol has stopped due to a big win or a small win, so in order to stop (temporarily stop) the variation based on the first special symbol that is currently being executed, the special symbol 1 forced stop processing 12 is executed (Y709). Details of this special symbol 1 forced stop processing 12 will be described later with reference to FIG. 425.

In this way, in the first special symbol stop process 12 (Y236), when the specified change time of the first special symbol during the change display has elapsed (Y701: Yes), a process (Y703 to Y707 or Y711) is executed to stop the change display with the symbol indicating the judgment result of the first lottery game. Also, when the second special symbol is stopped changing with the symbol indicating a big win (or a small win) and a big win game (or a small win game) of the second lottery game is executed (Y708: Yes), a process (Y709) is executed to forcibly stop the first special symbol during the change display. Note that when the first special symbol is stopped changing with the symbol indicating a big win (or a small win) (Y702: Yes), the change of the second special symbol during the change display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped).

Next, referring to FIG. 425, we will explain the special symbol 1 forced stop process 12 (Y709), which is one process of the first special symbol change stop process 12 (FIG. 424, Y236). FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 forced stop process 12 (Y709).

In the special symbol 1 forced stop process 12 (Fig. 425, Y709), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is on (Y721). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is on (Y721: Yes), the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is set to off (Y722), and then a special symbol 1 change stop command indicating that the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is off is set (Y723). Then, the change type of the first special symbol is set to miss (Y724), and it is determined whether the time-saving winning change state flag 203kg is on (Y725). Although not shown, before the process of Y725, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped from changing with a miss symbol, and a special symbol 1 confirmation command for the first special symbol is set.

In the process of Y725, if it is determined that the time-saving winning status change flag 203kg is on (i.e., the result of the first special pattern drawing is a time-saving winning) (Y725: Yes), the time-saving winning status change flag 203kg is set to off (Y726), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y725, if the time-saving winning status change flag 203kg is not on (i.e., the result of the first special pattern drawing is not a time-saving winning) (Y725: No), Y726 is skipped, and this process is terminated.

...

On the other hand, in the processing of Y721, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 change time flag 203ke is not on (Y721: No), this means that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is on, so a command to temporarily stop (interrupt) the change of the first special pattern is set (Y729), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, when the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is turned on (the timing when the change that results in a big win or small win with the second special symbol stops), the change is forcibly interrupted even if the change time of the first special symbol has not yet elapsed, or is forcibly stopped as a result of a miss determination. As a result, even if the lottery results are displayed in a changing manner simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is only necessary to execute a small win or big win for only one of the lottery results, which reduces the gambling nature of the game. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this twelfth control example, depending on the type of big win or small win of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol may be forcibly stopped as a miss or temporarily stopped (interrupted).

As described above, in this twelfth control example, time-saving A and time-saving B can be set as types of time-saving states. Time-saving A has a time-saving count of 5 times (see FIG. 411), and the probability that the second special symbol will win a big win (1/50 chance of winning) or a small win (1/50 chance of winning) with 5 time-saving times is a low probability of about 18%, so winning a big win or a small win with the second special symbol during time-saving A state is almost impossible. On the other hand, time-saving B has a time-saving count of 10,000 times (see FIG. 411), so when time-saving B is set, there is a high probability of winning the next big win or a small win. Therefore, it can be said that time-saving B state is a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than time-saving A state.

Here, if the second special symbol wins the time-saving bonus and the time-saving bonus B state is set due to a big win, a small win, or a time-saving bonus during the period from when the first special symbol wins the time-saving bonus until the first special symbol indicating the time-saving bonus is stopped (i.e., when the time-saving bonus winning variable state is set), if the first special symbol cannot be forcibly stopped as a miss symbol and the first special symbol indicating the time-saving bonus is stopped, the set time-saving bonus B state is discarded and a new time-saving bonus A state is set. In other words, in this case, the time-saving bonus B state will only continue until the variable time of the first special symbol that won the time-saving bonus (300 seconds in this twelfth control example) has elapsed, and there is a high possibility that the time-saving bonus state will end before the time-saving bonus limit is reached.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol wins the time-saving feature and the time-saving B state is set because the second special symbol wins a big win, a small win, or a time-saving feature during the period until the first special symbol indicating the time-saving feature has been won (i.e., when the time-saving feature change state is set), if a specific big win (big win D) or small win (small win B) is won and the change in the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped as a missing pattern, it is possible to continue the time-saving B state until the time-saving feature limit is reached, and the player can win a large number of prize balls.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, if the second special symbol wins a big jackpot, a small jackpot, or a time-saving win during the period until the first special symbol indicating the time-saving win is stopped and displayed (i.e., when a time-saving win variable state is set) when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win, and time-saving B state is set, the first special symbol that is being displayed as a variable can be forcibly stopped (discarded) as a miss, providing the player with new gameplay that allows the player to continue the advantageous time-saving state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 426, the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 12 (Y711) will be described. FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 12 (Y711). In this time-saving setting process 12 (Y711), a process for setting the time-saving state when the time-saving winning decision is made is executed. When the time-saving setting process 12 (Y711) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time-saving type is time-saving A (Y8351), and if it is determined that it is time-saving A (Y8351: Yes), the time-saving winning variable state flag 203kg is set to OFF (Y8352), a value corresponding to the determined time-saving type is set in the time-saving counter 203h (Y8353), the time-saving state is set in the game state storage area (Y8354), the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and a state command indicating the time-saving type game state (information indicating the time-saving state and information indicating the set time-saving type) are set (Y8355), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y8351 that the time-saving type is not A (i.e., if the time-saving type is B) (Y8351: No), the process of Y8352 is skipped and the process of Y8353 is performed. Although not shown, in the process of Y8353, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is cleared and a new value corresponding to the determined type of time-saving type is set. Therefore, when the time-saving state A is set based on winning the time-saving state, if the time-saving counter 203h already has a value corresponding to time-saving type B (e.g., 10,000 times), the value corresponding to time-saving type B is discarded and the value corresponding to time-saving type A (5 times) is set.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, the time-saving state is set at different times depending on the time-saving winning trigger. If the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set when the special pattern stops changing, and if the time-saving state is set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set when the jackpot game ends, not when the special pattern stops changing.

By configuring it in this way, the timing at which the time-saving state is set can be varied, providing players with a game that they will not tire of.

Next, referring to FIG. 427, we will explain the second special symbol change start process 12 (Y239), which is one process of the special symbol change process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104). FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol change start process 12 (Y239).

In the second special symbol variation start process 12 (Fig. 427, Y239), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is on (Y831). In the process of Y831, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is on (Y831: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y831, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is not on (Y831: No), the value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is obtained (Y832), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833). In the process of Y833, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833: Yes), the value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (Y834), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e after the subtraction is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command (Y835).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223d in the RAM 230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223d according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e of the main control device 110.

When the process of Y835 is completed, the data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is then shifted to the previous data (Y836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 -> execution area, reserved area 2 -> reserved area 1, reserved area 3 -> reserved area 2, reserved area 4 -> reserved area 3, and so on.

When the process of Y836 is completed, the second special symbol determination process 12 is then executed (Y837). This second special symbol determination process 12 (Fig. 428, Y837) will be described in detail later, but it is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 that has been shifted to the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and based on the set game state.

When the process of Y837 is completed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 is then executed (Fig. 431, Y838). Details will be described later, but this second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y838) is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y838) is completed, the game status update process 12 is then executed (Y839 (Y309)). This game status update process 12 (Fig. 421, Y839 (Y309)) is the same process as that executed for the first special symbol, and the details are explained with reference to Fig. 422, so detailed explanations are omitted. When the process of Y839 is completed, the special symbol 2 standby flag is set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y840), and this process is terminated. Note that the game status update process 12 (Y839) may be executed before the process of Y837. By configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery is executed after the game status is updated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y833, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e is 0 (Y833: No), it is determined whether the special symbol 2 standby flag is on (Y841), and if it is determined that it is on (Y841: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of Y841, if it is determined that it is off (i.e., not on) (Y841: No), the special symbol 2 standby flag is set to on (Y842), a special symbol 2 standby command indicating on is set (Y843), and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 428, the processing contents of the second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837) will be explained. FIG. 428 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837). Unlike the above-mentioned first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307 in FIG. 419), in this second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837), when a miss is determined in the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery, a determination of whether a small jackpot has been won (small jackpot lottery process 12) is made in addition to a determination of whether a time-saving win has been won (special symbol 2 time-saving lottery process 12).

When the second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837) is executed, first, data of the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (Y8101), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number 12 table 202ka (Y8102), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (Y8103: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a jackpot (Y8104), the jackpot symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y8105), a value indicating the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area (Y8107), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (Y8103: No), the special symbol 2 time-saving lottery process 12 is executed (Y8106), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, if the big win lottery for the second special symbol does not result in a big win, a time-saving lottery and a small win lottery are executed, so there are more opportunities set for a state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player compared to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol can be said to be a more advantageous special symbol than the first special symbol. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is set to a long period (600 seconds), so that the playing efficiency of a player who tries to execute only the second special symbol lottery in the normal state is reduced.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8106), unlike the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007 in FIG. 421), when a time-saving win is won, the type of time-saving to be set is determined depending on whether the time-saving winning change state flag 203kg is on or not. Specifically, the time-saving B state is set only when the time-saving winning change state flag 203kg is on. In other words, the time-saving B state is set only when the second special pattern wins the time-saving during the change display of the first special pattern indicating that a time-saving win has been won, and the time-saving A state is set in other cases. By configuring in this way, even if the second special pattern wins the time-saving win when there is no time-saving winning change state, the time-saving B state, which is the time-saving state advantageous to the player, is not set, so that it is possible to prevent a player who only executes the second special pattern lottery without changing the first special pattern from being excessively advantageous.

Next, the processing contents of the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8107) will be explained with reference to FIG. 429. FIG. 429 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8107).

When the special pattern 2 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8107) is executed, first, the lottery result (time-saving winning judgment result) is obtained based on the time-saving winning random number 12 table 202kh (Y8201), and it is determined whether or not a time-saving winning has been won (Y8202). If it is determined that a time-saving winning has been won (Y8202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the time-saving winning change status flag 203kg is on (Y8203). If it is determined that the time-saving winning change status flag 203kg is on (Y8203: Yes), time-saving B is set as the time-saving pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y8205), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of Y8202 that the time-saving win has not been obtained (Y8202: No), the losing special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y8206), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of Y8203 that the time-saving winning variable state flag 203kg is off (Y8203: No), time-saving A is set as the time-saving special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y8204), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, the time-saving B state is set when the second special symbol wins the time-saving mode only when the time-saving winning variable state flag kg is on (i.e., when the first special symbol wins the time-saving mode and the variable display of the first special symbol indicating the time-saving winning mode is being executed). By configuring in this way, the time-saving B state, which is the time-saving state advantageous to the player, is not set even if the second special symbol wins the time-saving mode when the time-saving winning variable state is not in effect, so it is possible to prevent a player who only executes the second special symbol lottery without varying the first special symbol from being excessively advantageous. In addition, a new gameplay feature of aiming to win the time-saving mode with the second special symbol within the period from when the first special symbol wins the time-saving mode and until the first special symbol indicating the time-saving mode win is stopped and displayed can be provided to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 430, we will explain the small prize lottery process 12 (Y8108), which is one process of the second special symbol determination process 12 (FIG. 428, Y837). FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing this small prize lottery process 12 (Y8108).

In the small prize lottery process 12 (Fig. 430, Y8108), first, it is determined whether the lottery result for the second special pattern is determined to be a time-saving win, that is, whether a time-saving win for the second special pattern is set (Y8301).

If it is determined in the processing of Y8301 that the time-saving win for the second special symbol is set (Y8301: Yes), this processing ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of Y8301, if it is determined that the time-saving winning of the second special pattern is not set (Y8301: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the small prize random number 12 table (Y8302), and if it is determined that a small prize has been won (Y8304: Yes), the value of the small prize type counter C5 is obtained, a small prize type is selected from the small prize type selection 12 table 202kf, and the small prize pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device is set (Y8305). On the other hand, in the process of Y8304, if it is determined that a small prize has not been won (Y8304: No), the process of Y8305 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, the jackpot, time-saving prize, and small prize winnings are not overlapped in one second special pattern drawing, preventing the player from being awarded multiple benefits and preventing the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

It is also possible for a jackpot or small jackpot to overlap with a time-saving win. In this case, for example, if a jackpot and a time-saving win overlap, a more favorable time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends than if only a jackpot was won. This makes it possible to provide variety to the game state after the jackpot game ends depending on whether or not a time-saving win was won, even if two jackpots of the same type are won, and increases the excitement of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 431, we will explain the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y838), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (FIG. 427, Y239). FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y838).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Fig. 431, Y838), first, in the second special symbol determination process 12 (Fig. 428, Y8103), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot, i.e., whether a jackpot for the second special symbol has been set (Y921).

If it is determined in the processing of Y921 that a jackpot for the second special symbol has been set (Y921: Yes), the jackpot type is determined (Y922) from the special symbol 2 jackpot 12 table 202kb2 (see FIG. 411) based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the processing of Y8105 in the above-mentioned second special symbol determination processing 12 (see FIG. 428), and the processing proceeds to Y923.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y921 that the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss (Y921: No), the process of Y922 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y923.

In the process of Y923, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (Y923). Next, a variation pattern table (see Figs. 413-416) corresponding to the game status is read (Y924), and the process proceeds to Y925. The game status is determined based on the value of the time-saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game status storage area 203g. In the process of Y925, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (Y925), and then a special symbol 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (Y926).

When the process of Y926 is completed, a special symbol 2 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (Y927). Next, the first symbol display device 37 is set to start changing the second special symbol (Y928), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 432, the contents of the second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240) executed in the special pattern change process 12 (see Y104 in FIG. 417) will be described. FIG. 432 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240). In this second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240), a process is executed to resume the subtraction of the second special pattern change time if the subtraction has been suspended, and a process to subtract the change time.

When the second special pattern change execution process (Y240) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on (Y2901). Here, a brief explanation will be given of the case where this process is executed with the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd set to on. As described above, the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on when the special pattern 1 is stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating a win (jackpot) while the special pattern 2 is changing. Then, when the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on, the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to on within that process, so that the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds by the main control device 110 loops, and when the special pattern change process 12 (Fig. 417, Y104) is executed next time (2 milliseconds after the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on), it is determined that the jackpot is being won in the process of Y231, so the second special pattern change execution process 12 (Y240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and it is determined in the process of Y231 that the jackpot is not in progress, the second special symbol variation execution process 12 (Y240) is executed. By configuring it in this way, the state in which the second special symbol variation execution process 12 (Y240) is executed with the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd set to on is configured to be the timing when the jackpot game ends and the subtraction of the special symbol variation time that was suspended is resumed.

Returning to FIG. 432, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Y2901, if it is determined that the special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on (Y2901: Yes), then the special chart 2 fluctuation resume command is set (Y2902), the special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to off (Y2903), and the process proceeds to Y2904. On the other hand, in the processing of Y2901, if it is determined that the special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is not set to on (it is set to off) (Y2901: No), the processing of Y2902 and Y2903 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y2904.

In the processing of Y2904, the special pattern 2 variable time timer 203kb is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2904), the display of the first pattern display device is updated (Y2905), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the second special symbol change stop process 12 (Y241) will be described with reference to FIG. 433. FIG. 433 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change stop process 12 (Y241). This second special symbol change stop process 12 (Y241) executes processing when stopping the change of special symbol 2, and differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 424) in that, in addition to a configuration for interrupting the change of special symbol 1 (interrupting the subtraction of the change time) when the lottery result of special symbol 2 is a jackpot, a configuration for forcibly stopping the change of special symbol 1 is provided when the lottery result of special symbol 2 is a specific jackpot type (jackpot D), and a process to be executed when the lottery result of special symbol 2 is a small jackpot is added.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 12 (Y241) is executed, it is first determined whether the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has ended (Y901). Whether the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has ended is determined by whether the counter value of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is 0 or not.

If it is determined in the process of Y901 that the fluctuation time has ended (Y901: Yes), it is determined whether the result of the drawing of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is a big win (Y902), and if it is determined that it is not a big win (a miss) (Y902: No), it is then determined whether the result of the drawing of special pattern 2 is a small win (Y912). If it is determined in the process of Y910 that it is not a small win (Y912: No), it is then determined whether the result of the drawing of special pattern 2 is a time-saving win (Y914). If it is determined that it is not a time-saving win, a confirmation command for the second special pattern is set (Y908), the fluctuation of the second special pattern on the first pattern display device is stopped (Y909), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of Y914 that the time-saving winning has occurred (Y914: Yes), the time-saving setting process 12 is executed (Y915), and then the process of Y908 is executed. Note that the time-saving setting process 12 is the same process as the time-saving setting process 12 (Y711) executed as one process of the first special pattern variation stop process 12 (Fig. 424, Y236) described above, and therefore a detailed explanation is omitted.

If it is determined in the process of Y912 that a small win has been won (Y912: Yes), the special chart 2 small win stop process 12 is executed (Y913), and then the process of Y908 is executed. The special chart 2 small win stop process 12 (Y913) executes a process to set whether to forcibly stop (discard) or temporarily stop (interrupt) the variable display of the first special pattern depending on the type of small win of the won small win, and a detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 435.

In the process of Y902, if it is determined that there is a jackpot (Y902: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot D (Y903), and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot D (Y903: No), the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to on (Y904), the special chart 2 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (Y906), the jackpot scenario is set (Y907), and then the processes of Y908 and Y909 are performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y903 that it is a jackpot D, the special chart 1 variation stop flag ke is set to on (Y905), and the processing of Y906 to Y909 is executed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, when the jackpot type is jackpot D, the special pattern 1 variation stop flag ke is set to ON, and when the jackpot type is other than this, the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON, so that it is possible to vary the variation of the first special pattern between being forcibly stopped (discarded) and being temporarily stopped (interrupted) depending on the jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 411, the type of jackpot determined when the second special symbol is a jackpot varies depending on the number of times the second special symbol is changed, and jackpot D is configured to be more likely to be determined when a jackpot is won on or after the 51st spin. By configuring it in this way, even if the player fails to win a jackpot with the second special symbol and continues to win misses (a so-called "stuck"), a jackpot type that is favorable to the player is more likely to be determined, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play when they are stuck.

If it is determined in the process of Y901 that the timing for the end of the fluctuation based on the second special pattern being executed has not arrived (Y901: No), then it is determined whether the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special pattern 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is on (Y910). If it is determined in the process of Y910 that the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special pattern 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is off (Y910: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y910 that the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special symbol 2 change stop flag 203kf is on (Y910: Yes), this means that the first special symbol has stopped due to a jackpot or a time-saving win, so in order to stop (temporarily stop) the change based on the second special symbol that is currently being executed, the special symbol 2 forced stop processing 12 is executed (Y911). Details of this special symbol 2 forced stop processing 12 will be described later with reference to FIG. 434.

In this way, in the second special symbol stop process 12 (Y241), when the specified change time of the second special symbol being changed has elapsed (Y901: Yes), a process is executed to stop the change display at the symbol that indicates the result of the second special symbol lottery game. Also, when the first special symbol is stopped at the symbol that indicates a jackpot and a jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed, or when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win change state is set (Y910: Yes), a process is executed (Y911) to forcibly stop the second special symbol being changed.

Next, referring to FIG. 434, we will explain the special symbol 2 forced stop process 12 (Y911), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stop process 12 (FIG. 433, Y241). FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 forced stop process 12 (Y911).

In the special pattern 2 forced stop process 12 (Fig. 434, Y911), first, it is determined whether the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is on (Y631). If it is determined that the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is on (Y631: Yes), the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is set to off (Y632), and then a special pattern 2 change stop command indicating that the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is off is set (Y633). Then, the change type of the second special pattern is set to miss (Y634). Although not shown, after the processing of Y634, the second special pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is stopped from changing with a miss pattern, and a special pattern 2 confirmation command for the second special pattern is set.

On the other hand, in the process of Y631, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 variation stop flag 203kf is not on (Y631: No), this means that the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is on, so a command to temporarily stop (interrupt) the variation of the second special pattern is set (Y635), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, when the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is turned on (the timing when the fluctuation that results in a jackpot with the first special symbol stops), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is forcibly interrupted and stopped even if the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has not yet elapsed. As a result, even if the lottery results are displayed in a fluctuating manner simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is only necessary to execute a jackpot game for only one of the lottery results, which makes it possible to suppress gambling. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be increased.

In addition, in this twelfth control example, when the first special symbol starts to change when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win, the second special symbol change stop flag kf is turned on. As described above, in this twelfth control example, in the normal state, the change time of the second special symbol is set to a long time (600 seconds). Therefore, if the change display of the second special symbol has already started when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win and the change display of the second special symbol continues, the set time-saving win change state will end before the stop display of the second special symbol that is changing, and a malfunction may occur in which the player cannot execute the lottery for the second special symbol in the time-saving win change state.

Here, by configuring the stop flag kf for the second special pattern to be turned on when the first special pattern starts to change when the first special pattern wins the time-saving feature, when the change of the first special pattern that won the time-saving feature starts, the change of the second special pattern that is currently changing is discarded, so that a new drawing for the second special pattern can be held in the time-saving feature winning change state, and a problem in which the player cannot draw for the second special pattern in the time-saving feature winning change state can be prevented.

Next, referring to FIG. 435, we will explain the special pattern 2 small win stop process 12 (Y913), which is one process of the second special pattern change stop process 12 (FIG. 433, y241). FIG. 435 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special pattern 2 small win stop process 12 (Y913).

In the special chart 2 small win stop process 12 (Fig. 435, Y913), first, it is determined whether the small win type is small win B (Y931), and if it is determined to be small win B (Y931: Yes), the special chart 1 fluctuation stop flag ke is set to on (Y932), and a special chart 1 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special chart 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is on is set (Y933). Then, a small win scenario corresponding to the selected small win type is set (Y934), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y931 that the win is not a small win B (Y931: No), the special chart 1 temporary stop flag kc is set to on (Y937), a special chart 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special chart 1 temporary stop flag kc is on is set (Y938), and processing of Y934 is performed.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, it is configured to be possible to discard the first special symbol that is changing not only for a specific big win type, but also for a specific small win type. This makes it possible to get the player interested in the small win type as well, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the special symbol 1 change stop flag is set to ON when the second special symbol indicating a small win B win stops changing, but this is not limited to this, and the special symbol 1 change stop flag may be set to ON when the second special symbol that won the small win B starts changing. Also, the first special symbol may be discarded at the start of the small win game, or at the end of the small win game.

Next, referring to FIG. 436, the contents of the jackpot control process 12 (Y1004) executed in the main process will be explained. FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 12 (Y1004). This jackpot control process 12 (Y1004) differs only in that it executes jackpot end process 12 (Y11613) instead of jackpot end process 11 (S11651) of the jackpot control process 11 (see FIG. 403) in the 11th control example described above, and the other processes are the same as those in the 11th control example, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 437, the contents of the jackpot end process 12 (Y11613) will be described. FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 12 (Y11613). When the jackpot end process 12 is executed, the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701) is executed first. A detailed explanation of the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701) will be described later with reference to FIG. 438, but it executes processing to set the upper limit value at which a high probability state of consecutive normal patterns can be set in the time-saving limit count counter 203ja, and to update (subtract) the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja that has already been set.

Now, referring to FIG. 438, we will explain the details of the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), which is one process within the jackpot end process 12 (see Y11613 in FIG. 437). FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701). In this time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), a process is executed to set an upper limit value for which a high probability state of consecutive normal patterns can be set, and to update the remaining number of times for the set upper limit value.

In the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is greater than 0 (Y3001). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is not greater than 0, that is, that the probability state of the normal pattern at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state (Y3001: No), the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is not set to a value that can consecutively set the high probability state of the normal pattern, so the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is set to 10 (Y3005) and the time-saving flag is set to ON (Y3006). Then, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Y3001, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is greater than 0 (Y3001: Yes), the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 (Y3002), and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after subtraction is 0 or not (Y3003). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after subtraction is 0 (Y3003: Yes), the upper limit value at which the high probability state of consecutive normal patterns can be set has been reached, so the time-saving limit reaching flag 203kh is set to ON (Y3004), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y3004, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after subtraction is not 0 (Y3004: No), this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the time-saving limit is set to 10 times, but this is not limited to this and may be set to one of multiple settings, such as 20 times or 30 times.

Returning to FIG. 437, the explanation will be continued. After executing the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), it is determined whether the time-saving limit reached flag 203kh is on (Y2702), and if it is determined that the time-saving limit reached flag 203kh is on (Y2702: Yes), information indicating the normal state (low probability state of normal patterns) as the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is stored in the game state storage area 203g (Y2703), a state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set (Y2707), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y2702, if it is determined that the time-saving limit reaching flag 203kh is not on (Y2702: No), information indicating a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) as the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is stored in the game state storage area 203g (Y2704), the number of time-saving times corresponding to the jackpot type being executed is set as the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h based on the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb shown in Figures 410 and 411 (Y2705), a time-saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content is set (Y2706), and the process of Y2707 is performed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) can be set consecutively after the end of a jackpot game, and the number of times that a state advantageous to the player can be set consecutively is limited, thereby preventing the player from getting excessive prize balls and encouraging his or her gambling urge.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the configuration is such that the high probability state (high probability state) of the special pattern is not set after the end of the jackpot game, but this is not limited thereto, and the configuration may be such that the high probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

Although not shown, the content of the presentation executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example will be described below. In conventional pachinko machines, the corresponding game state is generally set when a special symbol (e.g., a jackpot symbol) for indicating a specific result is displayed in a stopped state. For example, when a special symbol wins a jackpot, the player predicts that a jackpot has been won due to the presentation during the variable display of the special symbol indicating that a jackpot has been won, and the player can recognize that a jackpot has been won by the display of the special symbol and the display mode indicating that a jackpot has been won. In this case, the player can predict in advance that a different game state will be set after the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, and can smoothly respond to the change in game state.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, as described above, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win and the variation of the first special symbol starts, the time-saving win variation state is set. As shown in FIG. 406, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the first ball entrance 64, which is the trigger for starting the first special symbol lottery, is located at a position where the ball can enter whether the game ball flows down the left area or the right area of the board, but the second ball entrance 1641, which is the trigger for starting the second special symbol, is located at a position where the ball can enter only when the game ball flows down the right area of the board.

As a result, for example, if a player who is playing a game in which the game ball flows down the left area of the board and enters the first ball entrance 64 (so-called left-hand play) wins the time-saving win, if the player continues to play left-hand play even though the time-saving win change state has been set, a malfunction may occur in which the time-saving win change state ends without the second special pattern lottery being executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature, the time-saving feature win occurs before the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, and a presentation is executed to notify the player that the time-saving feature is in a changing state.

Specifically, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature, the display of the first special symbol begins to change, and after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., after 10 seconds have elapsed), the pseudo symbol stops and a display mode is displayed indicating that the time-saving feature change state has been set (e.g., "Entering the time-saving feature change zone"), and "hit right" is displayed to prompt the player to aim for the second ball entrance 1641 and fire the game ball.

By displaying in this manner, the player recognizes that the time-saving winning variable state has been set, and can play in a manner appropriate to the game state. Additionally, it is advisable to display a notice to the player that the time-saving B state will be set if the second special symbol wins a big win (or small win) or a time-saving win during the time-saving winning variable state.

In addition, when it is determined by pre-reading the winning information that there is winning information for a time-saving winning among the winning information for the first special pattern reserved in the normal state (reserved special pattern 1), a configuration may be added in which a notification is made that a time-saving winning change state is set in the next change of the first special pattern on the stopped display screen of the first special pattern executed immediately before the change of the first special pattern that wins the time-saving winning. In other words, when there is a reserved special pattern 1, a notification is made that the next change is a time-saving winning change state in the change of the first special pattern immediately before the time-saving winning change state is set, and when there is no reserved special pattern 1, a notification is made that a time-saving winning change state is set after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change of the first special pattern in which the time-saving winning change state is set.

In this way, when there is no reserved special chart 1, there is a loss of time from when the time-saving winning change starts until it is announced that the time-saving winning change state is in effect. However, when there is a reserved special chart 1, it is announced in advance that the time-saving winning change state will be set, so there is no loss of time from when the time-saving winning change starts until it is announced that the time-saving winning change state is in effect. Therefore, by making the player want to keep the reserved state saved at all times in order to eliminate the loss of time during the time-saving winning change state, it is possible to motivate the player to play.

The player may also be informed of the time it takes for the first special symbol to change during the time-saving winning change state in an easily understandable manner.

As explained above, this twelfth control example is configured to be able to execute the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern simultaneously (in parallel), and if both special patterns result in a jackpot, execute a jackpot game based on the drawing result of the special pattern on the side whose special pattern variation stopped first (determined special pattern display), and at the point when the special pattern variation stops first (determined special pattern display), depending on the type of jackpot, the other special pattern variation is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a miss, and is configured to be able to execute a time-saving winning judgment in both the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern.

As in the fifth control example described above, a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) is executed before the start of each special symbol variation, and if the time-saving winning is selected, the time-saving state is set when the special symbol variation stops. In this case, if only the first special symbol or only the second special symbol is selected, the time-saving state that will be the first benefit is set. Note that if the time-saving winning is selected in the first special symbol lottery, the time-saving state (time-saving state A) that will be the first benefit is set, and if the time-saving winning is selected in the second special symbol lottery, the time-saving state (time-saving state C) that will be the second benefit different from the first benefit is set.

Furthermore, in the case where the time-saving feature is won in the second special symbol drawing executed during the first special symbol variation in which the time-saving feature is won, it is possible to set a time-saving state (time-saving state B) in which a third benefit that is more advantageous than the first and second benefits is awarded. By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) draw the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to set a time-saving state in which different benefits are awarded depending on the timing of the time-saving feature win in each special symbol drawing.

The bonus that is awarded may be, for example, a third bonus in which the time-saving end condition is more difficult to achieve than the first or second bonus, or a third bonus in which the special pattern lottery is easier to execute than the first or second bonus.

Furthermore, the timing at which the time-saving state of the third bonus is set may be the timing at which the first special pattern change is stopped among the special pattern changes being executed in parallel, or the timing at which the last special pattern change is stopped. Also, regardless of whether it is before or after the timing of the stop display, it may be the timing at which the first special pattern change is stopped, or the timing at which the last special pattern change is stopped. It may also be the timing at which a specific special pattern type is stopped.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that can simultaneously (parallelly) draw multiple types of special symbols, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player wins a jackpot in each of the special symbol draws and is simultaneously awarded excessive bonuses (jackpot games).

Furthermore, even if a player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player in one special pattern lottery, it is possible for the player to win a jackpot that is advantageous to the player in the other special pattern lottery by the time the winning result is frozen (confirmed) display. In this case, it is advisable to execute a variable presentation that suggests to the player that he or she has won an unfavorable jackpot, using the variable time until the special pattern lottery result is frozen and displayed. This makes the player think that he or she has won an unfavorable jackpot, which can motivate the player to execute the other special pattern lottery during that variable time.

In addition, the reel may be configured so that a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be set when a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won than when a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won. This allows a favorable win to be won in the lottery for the other special symbol while one of the special symbols that has won an unfavorable win is fluctuating, and the winning result can be displayed as a stop (confirmed display) before the winning result of the unfavorable win.

In this twelfth control example, the special symbol that wins the time-saving win is changed for a long time, and the time-saving win change state is set, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the special symbol that wins the jackpot is changed for a long time, and the jackpot win change state is set, and during the jackpot win change state, the other special symbol is changed for a short time, making it possible to win prize balls through small win play.

<Summary of technical concepts>
Next, each technical concept described in each of the above control examples will be briefly explained. First, in the fifth control example, a trigger other than the big win of the special pattern lottery is provided as a trigger for shifting the probability state of the normal pattern from a low probability state to a high probability state, and the trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established in some of the lottery results (misses) in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is different from the big win.

In other words, even players who do not win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery can be given a bonus that is different from the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, in one special pattern lottery, the lottery result in which the jackpot game is executed and the lottery result in which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) is set can be provided to the player separately, making it easier to diversify the types of lottery results that are advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in this fifth control example, the ease with which a trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is established varies depending on the game state that is set. Specifically, when the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the game state, it is configured to be possible to determine whether or not a time-saving win (whether or not a trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is established) in addition to whether or not a jackpot has been won when a special symbol lottery is executed, and when a game state other than the normal state is set, it is configured to be possible to determine only whether or not a jackpot has been won when a special symbol lottery is executed.

In this way, when the normal state is set, a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery or a time-saving win can be established as an opportunity for setting a high probability state for normal patterns, and when playing in a game state other than the normal state, a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery can be established as an opportunity for setting a high probability state for normal patterns. In other words, the normal state, in which the presence or absence of a time-saving win can be determined, is configured to be more likely to establish an opportunity for setting a high probability state for normal patterns than a game state other than the normal state. Therefore, the normal state, in which each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) is set to a low probability state and is the game state in which it is most difficult to win in each pattern lottery (a game state that is disadvantageous to the player), can make it easier to set a high probability state for normal patterns than other game states, and can increase the motivation of players playing in the normal state.

In addition, in this fifth control example, the game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set is configured to make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery than the game state (normal state, second high probability state) in which a low probability state for normal symbols is set, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved) is configured to be memorizable (reserved and memorizable) up to a predetermined number (4). And, the game is configured to make it easier to win the time-saving lottery in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery.

In other words, when the game state transitions from any game state (probability bonus state, time-saving state) in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set to the normal state (when the game state transitions from an advantageous to an unfavorable game state for the player), the game is configured to make it easier to win the time-saving state if a second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state after the transition based on the execution right for the second special symbol lottery that was reserved and stored during the high probability state for normal symbols before the transition.

By configuring it in this way, even if the game state has shifted from favorable to unfavorable to the player, the player can be made to execute a special symbol lottery for a predetermined period of time that makes it easier for the player to return to a favorable game state, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing significantly when the normal state, which is a game state that is unfavorable to the player, is set. Also, in order to execute more second special symbol lotteries during the normal state, it is possible to motivate the player to play to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 until the last moment when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends, in order to end the high probability state of the normal symbol when the upper limit (4) of the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (reserved special symbol 2) has been acquired.

In the fifth control example, in addition to winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the high probability state of the normal pattern can be set when the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, and the ease of achieving the end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is different between the high probability state of the normal pattern (first time-saving feature) that is set based on winning the jackpot and the high probability state of the normal pattern (second time-saving feature) that is set based on winning the time-saving feature.

Specifically, the number of time-saving times set as the end condition for the second time-saving is configured to be more likely to be greater than the number of time-saving times set as the end condition for the first time-saving. In this way, when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set, it is possible to set a high probability state for a normal pattern with a different degree of advantage depending on the setting trigger (the trigger for setting the high probability state for a normal pattern). This makes it possible to interest the player not only in whether or not a high probability state for a normal pattern is set, but also in the game process of what trigger sets the high probability state for a normal pattern, making it easier for the player to continue playing.

In the fifth control example, the ease of achieving the time-saving end condition (number of time-saving times) is varied to vary the degree of advantage of the bonus given to the player in the high probability state of normal patterns, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to vary the ease of obtaining the reserved memory for the second special pattern lottery (opening pattern of the electric role 640a) between when the first time-saving is set and when the second time-saving is set, or to vary the degree of advantage of the bonus given when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery during the high probability state of normal patterns (for example, the number of prize balls given during jackpot play or the type of game state set after the jackpot play ends).

Next, the first modified example of the fifth control example will be explained. In the fifth control example described above, it was configured so that the time-saving win could only be won in the second special symbol lottery that is executed when the normal state is set. In contrast, this first modified example differs in that it is configured so that the time-saving win could also be won in the first special symbol lottery that is executed when the normal state is set.

In the fifth control example described above, a game is played in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where a high probability state (high probability state, time-saving state) for normal symbols is set, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reservation) can be acquired during the high probability state for normal symbols. Then, when the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation acquired during the high probability state for normal symbols is executed in the normal state where a low probability state for normal symbols is set, in addition to the jackpot lottery, the time-saving lottery is also executed. This makes it possible for a player who has experienced a game during a high probability state for normal symbols (advantageous game) that is advantageous to the player to execute a game (pull-back game) that is more likely to return to advantageous game after the advantageous game ends.

However, in the fifth control example described above, unless a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) executed in the normal state and a game (advantageous game) in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set is executed, the player cannot benefit from the time-saving lottery, resulting in a problem that the player may become bored with the game without benefiting from the time-saving lottery.

In contrast, this first variant is configured so that it is possible to win the time-saving lottery even in the first special pattern lottery that is executed in the normal state, making it easier for players to benefit from the time-saving lottery.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols that is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special symbol lottery is configured to tend to have a longer period during which the high probability state for normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period) than the high probability state (probable bonus state, time-saving state) for normal symbols that is set based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In other words, when the time-saving state is won in the special symbol lottery, the player is configured to be granted a privilege that makes it easier for the normal symbol high probability period to continue until the next jackpot is won.

In contrast to this, in this first modified example, if a time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a short-term time-saving state (for example, one time of time-saving) can be set, and during the period in which this short-term time-saving state is set (normal symbol high probability period), a game can be played to acquire the right to play the second special symbol lottery. In other words, in this first modified example, the pull-back game in the fifth control example described above is configured to be played without winning a jackpot. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily play the second special symbol lottery in the normal state without winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery that is played in the normal state.

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, in this first modified example, multiple variation times can be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state. In this first modified example, when the time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first special symbol is displayed frozen in a display mode (time-saving symbol) for indicating the time-saving win after a predetermined variation time has changed, and then the time-saving state (one time of time-saving) is set, and the time-saving state continues until the special symbol variation executed next is displayed frozen.

In other words, the length of time that the time-saving state lasts is determined according to the time that the special symbol changes during the time-saving state. Therefore, the longer the time that the special symbol changes during the time-saving state, the easier it is to acquire many reserved special symbols 2 during the time-saving state, making it a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

Next, a second variation of the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example described above, a high probability state (first time reduction) for normal symbols can be set based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and a high probability state (second time reduction) for normal symbols can be set based on winning the time reduction in the special symbol lottery. This makes it possible to set a high probability state for normal symbols based on multiple triggers, and increases the variety of play, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In this second modified example, in order to further increase interest, the contents of the bonus granted when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery executed when a high probability state for normal patterns is set are configured to differ depending on the trigger (first time reduction or second time reduction) that set the high probability state for normal patterns. In other words, the contents of the bonus granted when the same jackpot type is set is different for when a jackpot is won during the first time reduction and when a jackpot is won during the second time reduction. By configuring it in this way, when a high probability state (time reduction state) for normal patterns is set, it is possible to make the player interested in what trigger set the time reduction state, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this second modified example, a jackpot game with a small number of rounds and a short play time per round (2R jackpot) can be executed as the jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving state is set after the 2R jackpot game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice the difference in the content of the game executed between when the time-saving state is set based on winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, i.e., when the first time-saving state is set, and when the time-saving state is set without executing a jackpot game, i.e., when the second time-saving state is set.

In addition, in this second modified example, the change presentation executed in the process of setting the first time reduction and the change presentation executed in the process of setting the second time reduction are configured to be executed in the same presentation mode. Specifically, the first period from when the special pattern change to indicate that a jackpot win (a 2R jackpot win) for which the first time reduction is set starts until the special pattern change is stopped and the 2R jackpot game ends, and the second period, which is the change time of the special pattern change to indicate that a time reduction win for which the second time reduction is set has been set, are set to be approximately the same period, and the presentation is executed in a common presentation mode using the periods.

By configuring it in this way, when the first time-saving state is set and when the second time-saving state is set, a common presentation style can be executed in the period from when the special pattern variation starts to when the time-saving state is set, making it difficult for the player to understand which triggered the time-saving state.

Next, the sixth control example will be explained. In the fifth control example and each of the modified examples described above, it was configured so that it was possible to win the time-saving bonus in the special pattern lottery that is executed when the normal state is set. In contrast, the sixth control example is significantly different in that it is configured so that it is possible to win the time-saving bonus in the special pattern lottery even when a game state other than the normal state is set.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if a new time-saving win occurs while the time-saving state is set, it is possible to update the remaining period for which the time-saving state will continue. This makes it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state will continue.

In addition, when updating the remaining period for which the time-saving state will continue, it is configured so that the period for which the time-saving state will continue can be updated to be longer than the current remaining period (favorable update) or shorter (unfavorable update). In other words, depending on the timing of winning the time-saving state in the time-saving lottery and the number of time-saving times (length of time period) that is set when the time-saving state is won, winning the time-saving state can be a favorable benefit to the player or an unfavorable benefit. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide innovative gameplay that combines gameplay in which a time-saving state is expected to be won and gameplay in which a time-saving state is not expected to be won.

Furthermore, in this sixth control example, the more consecutive time-saving wins without winning the jackpot, the easier it becomes for the player to be set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Specifically, multiple time-saving types that differ in the degree of advantage to the player are defined, and the more time-saving wins are made during the time-saving state, the easier it becomes to set an advantageous time-saving type. By configuring it in this way, the longer the period without winning the jackpot, the easier it becomes to grant a player an advantageous bonus.

In addition, when the most advantageous time-saving type for the player is set, it is configured so that it is easier for the player to transition to a time-saving type that is less advantageous than when a time-saving type that is less advantageous than the most advantageous time-saving type is set. In other words, there are multiple stages of time-saving types with different degrees of advantageousness, and time-saving types with gradually increasing degrees of advantageousness are set based on the time-saving win, so that when the highest stage of time-saving type is reached, it is easier for the player to fall down to the lowest stage of time-saving type. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a time-saving type that is advantageous for the player from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

Next, the contents of the seventh control example will be explained. This seventh control example differs from the fifth control example described above in that it is configured so that in some cases where the result of the special pattern lottery is not a big win (is a miss), a small win can be won, and a big win game can be executed by having the game ball enter a specific area during a small win game that is executed based on the small win being won.

In addition, the fifth control example described above was configured to determine whether or not a time-saving win has occurred only if the jackpot has not been won in the special pattern drawing, whereas the seventh control example is configured to allow for both a jackpot win and a time-saving win to be determined in a single special pattern drawing.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won is made before the determination of whether or not a time-saving win has been made, and if a time-saving win has been made, the time-saving state is set at the timing when the special pattern variation that has won the time-saving win is stopped and displayed. In contrast, in the seventh control example, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won is made before the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won is made in the special pattern lottery, and with the time-saving state set, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery is made, and the time-saving state can be ended at the timing when the special pattern variation that shows the result of the special pattern lottery is executed.

Specifically, when the time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, as described above, the time-saving state is set for a short period including the timing when the jackpot determination is executed in the special symbol lottery. In other words, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a function (time-saving period setting function) that allows the time-saving win in the special symbol lottery is set in order to play a game (a game that is easy to execute the special symbol lottery) that is advantageous to the player toward the next jackpot win for a predetermined period (up to 10,000 times) without going through the jackpot game, whereas in this seventh control example, in addition to the above-mentioned time-saving period setting function, a function (special lottery function) is set that allows the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery in the time-saving state to be executed during the game (left-handed play) executed in the normal state by configuring the timing when the jackpot determination is executed by the special symbol lottery to be in the time-saving state without making it easy to execute the special symbol lottery in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the jackpot determination for the special pattern lottery during the time-saving state while making it difficult for the player to realize that they have won the time-saving special pattern lottery, so it is possible to notify the player of the unexpected lottery result as the result of the special pattern lottery.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the bonus granted when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery is different between when a jackpot is won in the normal state and when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state, and it is configured so that a bonus that is more advantageous to the player is granted when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state than in the normal state (for example, a jackpot game with more rounds). In other words, in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, when a player wins both the time-saving state and the jackpot, a bonus that is more advantageous is granted than when a player wins only a jackpot.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the presentation mode of the variable presentation for showing the result of the special pattern lottery can be set to a suggestion mode (announcement mode) that can indicate whether or not a time-saving win has been won, and a suggestion mode (announcement mode) that can indicate whether or not a jackpot has been won.

In other words, by grasping the presentation mode of the variable presentation being executed, it is possible to allow the player to predict the result of the jackpot determination executed for the currently executing special pattern lottery and the result of the time-saving winning determination. Furthermore, as a variable presentation, the timing of notifying the presence or absence of a time-saving winning is configured to be different from the timing of notifying the presence or absence of a jackpot winning. By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a determination to grant multiple different benefits for one special pattern lottery, it is possible to grasp the suggestion mode for suggesting other judgment results while grasping (predicting) at least one judgment result.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the result of the effect (time-saving effect) including a suggestive aspect that can suggest whether or not the time-saving effect will be won is an effect result including a suggestive aspect that suggests that the time-saving effect will not be won, than when the time-saving effect is not executed. In this way, in a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which multiple bonuses with different awarding judgments can be awarded in one special pattern lottery, when a judgment result suggestive effect that can suggest the result of the awarding judgment for one bonus is executed, the result of the judgment result suggestive effect suggests that one bonus will not be awarded, so that the expectation of awarding another bonus is higher than when the judgment result suggestive effect is not executed. This makes it possible to notify the player that a bonus is more likely to be awarded at the time the judgment result suggestive effect is executed, compared to when the judgment result suggestive effect is not executed.

Next, the eighth control example will be explained. The fifth control example described above was configured to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during a low probability state (normal state) of a normal pattern, and to make it easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance means 640 during a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal pattern. Furthermore, it was configured to execute a judgment of a time-saving win (time-saving lottery) in the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state. Also, it was configured to be possible to store (reserve) the lottery right for the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved) up to a predetermined number (4).

In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example configured in this manner, when the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols ends while the reserved special symbol 2 is stored in the reserved memory, and a low probability state (normal state) for normal symbols is set, the second special symbol lottery based on the reserved special symbol 2 stored in the reserved memory is executed in the low probability state (normal state) for normal symbols, and if the time-saving state is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during that normal state, the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols is set again.

In other words, by configuring the period from when the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols ends and the low probability state (normal state) for normal symbols is set until a predetermined period (the period during which the second special symbol lottery based on the reserved special symbol 2 is being executed) has elapsed to when the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols is likely to be set (pull-back period), it is possible to encourage players to play with enthusiasm even after the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols has ended.

In contrast, the eighth control example is configured to be able to execute a time-saving winning judgment (time-saving lottery) in both the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, is configured to have a high probability of winning the time-saving lottery (most of the time-saving winnings are negative), and differs in that the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set based on the time-saving winning is configured to be a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the game board 13 is configured to make it easier for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery to be executed alternately, and the end condition for the second time reduction described above is set to be established when one type of special symbol lottery is executed consecutively.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this eighth control example configured in this way, if the special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set does not result in a jackpot win (jackpot probability 1/300), the second time-saving period is set by winning the time-saving period with a high probability (298/300). Then, the special symbol lottery is executed in the second time-saving period until the condition for ending the second time-saving period is met.

In addition, the second time-saving end condition is configured to be set as a first time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of special pattern lotteries executed during the second time-saving period reaches a specific number (100 times), and a second time-saving end condition that is established when the special pattern lotteries are executed in a predetermined order, and the second time-saving end condition is configured to be established before the first time-saving end condition is established.

Therefore, when the second time-saving period is set, the player can be motivated to play in order to achieve the second time-saving period ending condition in order to end the second time-saving period as soon as possible.

In addition, the degree of advantage given to the player is varied depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, so that it is easier to set an advantageous gaming state after the end of the jackpot game if the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state than if the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of special pattern lottery that will be held after the second time-saving period ends.

In the eighth control example described above, if the type of special pattern lottery executed immediately after the time-saving state is set satisfies a specific condition (the same type as the special pattern for which the time-saving state is set), the special pattern lottery executed immediately thereafter is configured to establish the time-saving end condition (establish the shortened time-saving end condition). However, the configuration for establishing the shortened time-saving end condition is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be able to execute the time-saving lottery even when the time-saving state is set, and if a time-saving win is made during the time-saving state, a new time-saving state with the content of the time-saving win may be set.

In this eighth control example, if an unfavorable time-saving effect is won in the second special pattern lottery, a special pattern lottery that is less favorable than the normal state is executed in the first special pattern lottery until the unfavorable time-saving state ends. In other words, it is configured so that a penalty can be imposed on other special pattern lotteries depending on the result of one special pattern lottery.

As a gaming method for imposing such a penalty, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to simultaneously (in parallel) display the varying display of the first special symbol and the varying display of the second special symbol (so-called simultaneous variation specification) as in the 12th control example described above, when the second special symbol lottery is executed by executing an inappropriate game in a specific gaming state (normal state), an unfavorable time-saving state is set, and while the unfavorable time-saving state is set, a special symbol lottery that is more disadvantageous to the player than in the normal state is executed in the first special symbol lottery.

Next, the twelfth control example will be described. In the eleventh control example described above, while one of the first and second special symbols is displayed in a variable manner, the jackpot lottery for the other special symbol is not executed. In contrast, the twelfth control example differs in that it is configured so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variable specification).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute lottery games with more special symbols within a given time, and the probability that the player will be awarded a jackpot within the given time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play efficiently.

In addition, in the 11th control example described above, the time-saving lottery was executed only in the first special symbol lottery, but in this 12th control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and the player is granted a more advantageous benefit if one of the special symbols wins the time-saving lottery during the period from when the time-saving lottery is won for the first special symbol or the second special symbol until the variable display of that special symbol stops, compared to when only one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the time-saving lottery.

Details will be given later, but in this twelfth control example, if the first or second special symbol wins the time-saving bonus in the normal state, the time-saving A state is set. On the other hand, if the first special symbol wins the time-saving bonus in the normal state, a long (300 seconds) fluctuation time is set (time-saving winning fluctuation state), and if the second special symbol wins the time-saving bonus within the period until the fluctuation of the first special symbol ends (i.e., until the first special symbol, which indicates a time-saving bonus, is displayed stationary), the time-saving B state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state, is set.

By configuring it in this way, if one special symbol wins the time-saving feature, the other special symbol will also win the time-saving feature, giving the player a special advantage. Therefore, when one special symbol wins the time-saving feature and the special symbol changes to indicate that a time-saving feature has been won, the player will be made to want to win the other special symbol as well, which makes it possible to motivate the player to play and increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even if a jackpot of a jackpot type that can set a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot play ends, the system is configured to execute a process to set the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot play ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage by continuing a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player for a long period of time, and to prevent the player's gambling spirit from increasing.

In addition, in a gaming machine with simultaneous variation specifications, when a big win (or small win) is won in one of the special pattern lotteries, the specification is generally such that only one of the following is executed: the variable display of the other special pattern is forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily stopped (interrupted); however, in this twelfth control example, the configuration is such that whether the variable display of the other special pattern is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped is determined depending on the big win type (or small win type). In other words, a big win type that forcibly stops (discards) the variable display of the other special pattern and a big win type that temporarily stops (interrupts) the variable display of the other special pattern are specified.

By configuring it in this way, when a game state advantageous to the player is set, and a game state disadvantageous to the player may be set by the stopped display of one special symbol, it is possible to prevent the setting of an unfavorable game state when a jackpot of a jackpot type that allows the variation of the other special symbols to be discarded, but if a jackpot of a jackpot type that interrupts the other special symbols is won, the situation in which an unfavorable game state may be set continues. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the variation of the other special symbols could be discarded, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

<Summary of technical concepts>
Next, each technical idea described in each of the above-mentioned control examples will be briefly explained. First, regarding the technical idea that the probability of obtaining an advantageous privilege by the special drawing lottery increases when the number of times the special drawing lottery using the special drawing lottery reserved acquired during the time reduction exceeds a predetermined number of times, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned fifth control example, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it has a means for acquiring the execution right of the second special pattern lottery (acquisition means capable of acquiring information) and has a means for reserving and storing the execution right of the second special pattern lottery (special drawing lottery reserved) up to the upper limit number (4 pieces) (storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means). Then, based on the execution right of the second special pattern lottery (special drawing lottery reserved) that is reserved and stored, the second special pattern lottery is executed (discrimination means capable of executing a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means). Then, a jackpot game (specific game) is executed based on the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery being a jackpot win (first discrimination result). Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern, which makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, continues until the end condition (time-saving end condition) for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is established. In addition, in the second special pattern lottery, a time-saving winning judgment can be executed separately from the jackpot winning judgment, and if it is determined that the time-saving winning has been won in the time-saving winning judgment (if it is determined that the second judgment result is true), the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern can be set without executing the jackpot game. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a plurality of game states are configured to be set, but among them, the time-saving winning judgment can be executed only in the state in which the normal state (specific period) is set.

By configuring it in this way, when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set based on winning a jackpot in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state for a normal pattern is set at the end of the jackpot game, not when the special pattern variation stops, and when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set based on winning a time-saving game in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state for a normal pattern is set at the stop of the special pattern variation. Thus, the timing at which the high probability state for a normal pattern is set can be made to differ depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state.

In addition, since it is possible to provide a period during which the time-saving winning judgment can be performed (period during which the normal state is set) and a period during which it cannot be performed (period during which the normal state is not set), it is possible to make the player interested in the period during which the special pattern lottery is performed. Note that in the fifth control example described above, it is configured so that the time-saving winning judgment is performed only in the normal state, but it is sufficient to provide a period during which the time-saving winning judgment can be performed and a period during which it is not performed. For example, it is also possible to configure so that the time-saving winning judgment can be performed in a game state in which a low probability state of a normal pattern is set (normal state, second probability state), and not to perform the time-saving winning judgment in a game state in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set (time-saving state, probability state).

Furthermore, rather than switching whether or not to execute the time-saving win judgment depending on the set game state, the probability of winning the time-saving win judgment may be made to differ depending on the game state. For example, when the normal state is set, the time-saving win judgment has a 1/6 probability of winning the time-saving win, and in other game states, the probability of winning the time-saving win may be configured to be 1/200. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set game states in which it is easy to win the time-saving win and game states in which it is difficult to win the time-saving win, so that, similar to the technical idea described above, it is possible to get the player interested in the effect, i.e., the period during which the special pattern lottery is executed.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, a first ball entry port 64 (a first ball entry means through which a game ball can enter) through which a game ball can enter and trigger the execution of a first special symbol lottery is provided, and a second ball entry port 640 (a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means) through which a game ball can enter and trigger the execution of a second special symbol lottery is provided, and the time-saving winning determination is configured to be possible only in the second special symbol lottery.

In other words, in the first special pattern lottery, no time-saving winning judgment is performed regardless of the game state set, and in the second special pattern lottery, the time-saving winning judgment can be performed during a specific period (normal state). By configuring it in this way, the amount of value that is later granted to the player can be significantly different between the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, and further between the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640.

In the fifth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery does not execute the time-saving winning judgment, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to execute the time-saving winning judgment during a specific period (normal state). However, without being limited to this, for example, the time-saving winning judgment may be executed only for the second special symbol lottery during the first specific period (normal state), and the time-saving winning judgment may be executed only for the first special symbol lottery during a second specific period (second probability change state) different from the first specific period. By configuring in this way, depending on the set period, it is possible to create a situation in which the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 is more likely to give a player a more advantageous value than the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and a situation in which the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is more likely to give a player a more advantageous value than the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, it is possible to make the player eager to play a game in which a more advantageous value is more likely to be given.

Furthermore, in this case, as in the modified example shown in FIG. 329, it is advisable to configure the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 so that the rate at which game balls enter the first ball entrance 64 is similar to the rate at which game balls enter the second ball entrance 640, regardless of which game state is set. By configuring it in this way, the player can select which ball entrance to enter the game ball at his/her discretion, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as described in each control example, the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set based on winning the time-saving state by the time-saving state winning judgment (first time-saving state) is more likely to be set as a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, i.e., a time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be established, than the time-saving state (first time-saving state) that is set based on winning the jackpot. In other words, the system is configured to vary the degree of advantage of the set time-saving state depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state. This makes it possible to vary the period (time-saving end condition) during which the time-saving state (specific setting) is set depending on the determined judgment result (setting trigger), which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing interest.

In this case, it is advisable to provide a case where the second time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state, depending on the game state before the time-saving state is set, and a case where the first time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the situation under which the time-saving state is set.

More specifically, for example, the system may be configured so that a more advantageous time-saving state is more likely to occur when the number of times special symbol lotteries have been executed since the end of the previous big win game (number of times they have been stuck) exceeds a predetermined number, compared to when this number has not been exceeded.

Next, in the seventh control example described above, it is configured so that a jackpot win and a time-saving win can be won in one special pattern lottery (see FIG. 315). This allows a jackpot win (first discrimination result) and a time-saving win (second discrimination result) to be discriminated in a overlapping manner, so that various lottery results can be expected in one special pattern lottery, such as a jackpot win, a time-saving win, or both a jackpot win and a time-saving win. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player is executed than when there are no overlapping wins (see FIG. 306(b)). Therefore, since it is easy to execute a specific type of game that is advantageous to the player by discriminating in overlapping, there is an effect that the game can be diversified by granting the player a bonus corresponding to various discrimination results.

In addition, a configuration other than that of the seventh control example described above may be used to provide a more advantageous benefit to the player in the case of a duplicate win than in the case of no duplicate wins. For example, the game state set after the jackpot game ends may be configured so that a more advantageous game state (e.g., a special bonus state, a time-saving state, etc.) can be set in the case of a duplicate win than in the case of no duplicate wins.

In addition, in the seventh control example described above, after a time-saving winning judgment (a judgment as to whether or not the result is the second judgment result) is made, a jackpot judgment (a judgment as to whether or not the result is the first judgment result) is made, and if a time-saving winning is made in one special pattern lottery, the jackpot judgment in that special pattern lottery can be made in the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the degree of advantage of the bonus game that is executed when there is a double win different from the degree of advantage of the bonus game that is executed when there is no double win.

Next, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, the type of bonus (the number of time-saving times granted after the end of the jackpot game) granted to the player when the jackpot is won in the high probability state of the normal pattern (first time-saving) set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery and the high probability state of the normal pattern (second time-saving) set based on winning the time-saving in the special pattern lottery is different (see FIG. 280 (b)). Therefore, since the selection ratio (the content of the jackpot game and the number of time-saving times granted) in the type of bonus game is variable according to the setting type (first time-saving, second time-saving), the bonus granted to the player can be different even in the high probability state of the same normal pattern (second game state), and there is an effect that the game can be diversified without setting many game states, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, the number of time-saving periods granted differs depending on the setting type (first time-saving period and second time-saving period), but this is not limited to this, and the content of the jackpot game to be executed (for example, the number of rounds played) may be configured to differ.

Furthermore, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, when the second time reduction is set rather than the first time reduction, that is, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set without a jackpot game being played, it is configured so that the high probability state for normal symbols, in which the end condition is less likely to be established, is more likely to be set. In other words, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set without winning a prize ball during a jackpot game, that is, when the second time reduction, which provides fewer benefits before the high probability state for normal symbols is set than the first time reduction, can prolong the high probability state for normal symbols, which has the effect of allowing benefits to be awarded fairly to players.

Furthermore, in the second variant of the fifth control example described above, similar to the fifth control example and the first variant of the fifth control example described above, the time-saving winning judgment (determination of the second discrimination result) is configured to be executable only in the normal state. In other words, the execution of the time-saving winning judgment is restricted in states other than the normal state. Therefore, since the time-saving winning judgment is not executed according to the game state, there is an effect of making the player more interested in the game state that has been set, and making the player look forward to the game state being set in which the second discrimination result can be determined.

In addition, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, a presentation mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery can be set so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the first or second time reduction has been set (see Figs. 278 and 279). In other words, when the first time reduction is set, a specific presentation (see Fig. 278(a)) is executed for the first period which is the sum of the special symbol change time and the subsequent jackpot game period, and when the second time reduction is set, a specific presentation (see Fig. 278(b)) is executed for the second period which is the special symbol change time (including the fixed time).

More specifically, the variable time and the jackpot game period are predefined in accordance with each special symbol lottery result so that the first period and the second period described above are approximately the same, and the performance periods of the specific effects are the same. By configuring in this way, as the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a performance indicating a high probability state of a normal symbol is executed after a specific effect with the same performance period and performance mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is watching the effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to determine which setting trigger set the high probability state of a normal symbol.

Next, in the sixth control example described above, the system is configured so that the time-saving winning judgment can be executed even during the time-saving state (second game state), and if a time-saving winning occurs during the time-saving state (second game state), it is possible to set a time-saving state (second game state) of a time-saving type in which the time-saving ending condition is unlikely to be met (the number of time-saving events is large or the probability of winning the time-saving event is high).

As a result, the longer the period for which the time-saving state is set, the more likely it is that a time-saving state of a type for which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be met will be set, making it easier to play bonus games.

In the sixth control example described above, as shown in FIG. 286(a), the probability of winning the time-saving bonus is different depending on the set game state, but the probability of winning the time-saving bonus may be set to the same. In addition, although the probability of winning the time-saving bonus is different depending on the game state, the probability of winning the time-saving bonus may also be different depending on the number of special pattern draws since the previous big win game was played. In this case, it is preferable to configure the probability of winning the time-saving bonus to be higher when the number of special pattern draws since the previous big win game is played exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 200 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grant a special bonus of winning the time-saving bonus, which is different from the big win game, to a player who has not won a big win in a special pattern draw for a long time. It goes without saying that this technical concept can be applied to other control examples.

The gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 329 includes a first discrimination means (first special symbol lottery) capable of executing a first discrimination, a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit (a big win game) based on the result of the first discrimination executed by the first discrimination means being a first discrimination result (a big win), and a second benefit (a high probability state of a normal symbol) based on the result of the first discrimination being a second discrimination result (a time-saving win) different from the first discrimination result, a second discrimination means (second special symbol lottery) capable of executing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination, and and a second benefit granting means for granting a first benefit based on the result of the second discrimination performed by the first discrimination means being a third discrimination result (winning a big win), and a third benefit (playing a small win) different from the first benefit and the second benefit based on the result of the second discrimination being a fourth discrimination result (winning a small win) different from the third discrimination result, so that the third benefit is not granted based on the first discrimination performed by the first discrimination means, and the second benefit is not granted based on the second discrimination performed by the second discrimination means.

As a result, different benefits can be awarded when the first judgment is made and when the second judgment is made, which has the effect of encouraging the player to play in order to make different judgments, and preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine relating to the above-mentioned <Gameplayability 2>, the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern are configured to be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and if both special patterns result in a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed based on the drawing result of the special pattern on the side whose special pattern variation stopped first (determined display of special pattern), and at the point when the special pattern variation stops first (determined display of special pattern), depending on the type of jackpot, the other special pattern variation is forcibly displayed as stopped in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a miss, and the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a time-saving winning judgment in both the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern. Then, between the time when the first discrimination means determines that the first condition is met (a time-saving win has been won) and the time when the first state setting means sets the first advantageous state (a time-saving state for the first benefit), a third advantageous state (a time-saving state for the third benefit) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state can be set based on the fact that the second discrimination means determines that the second condition is met (a time-saving win has been won). Thus, in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to simultaneously (concurrently) draw the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to set a time-saving state in which a different benefit is awarded depending on the timing of the time-saving win in each special symbol draw.

In the above-mentioned <Other game characteristics>, in a gaming machine having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a first discrimination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, the game state setting means determines whether or not the result of discrimination by the discrimination means (special symbol lottery) executed in a state in which the first game state (normal state) is set is the first discrimination result. A second game state (second time-saving B) can be set based on a second discrimination result (winning second time-saving B) different from the first game state, a first game state can be set based on an end condition (time-saving end condition) being established in a state in which the second game state is set, and a third game state (second time-saving A) that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state can be set based on a result of discrimination by the discrimination means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a third discrimination result (winning second time-saving A) different from the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result. Also, the discrimination means can execute discrimination so that the probability of the discrimination result being the third discrimination result (selection rate 10%) is lower than the probability of the discrimination result being the second discrimination result (selection rate 90%).

Furthermore, as an end condition (a time-saving end condition of the second time-saving B), at least a first end condition can be set that can be established based on the number of determinations (number of special symbol selections) made by the determination means when the second game state is set reaching a predetermined number. In addition, a second end condition can be set that can be established based on the result of the determination made by the determination means being a specific determination result (a small jackpot win).

In this case, the type setting means is capable of setting at least a first setting (normal time-saving state) that can set the second game state after the bonus game execution means ends, and a second setting that can set the second game state (time-saving state) without executing the bonus game based on the result of the judgment executed by the judgment means being a second judgment result (winning second time-saving B) that is different from the first judgment result, as the setting type for setting the second game state by the game state setting means, and the game state setting means is capable of setting an advantageous second game state (normal time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the first game state (normal state) and an unfavorable second game state (second time-saving B) that is less advantageous than the first game state, according to the setting type (time-saving type) set by the type setting means.

The following configuration may be used as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in each of the embodiments described above.

<About the configuration of high probability states of normal symbols>
In each of the above-described embodiments, in some cases where a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, a high probability state for a normal pattern can be set after the jackpot game ends. However, a setting trigger other than a jackpot win in a special pattern lottery may be provided as a setting trigger for setting a high probability state for a normal pattern. For example, a setting trigger for setting a high probability state for a normal pattern may be established when the number of times that a special pattern variation is executed without winning a jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, twice the denominator value of the probability of winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery executed in a low probability state for a special pattern).

By configuring it in this way, when a situation occurs in which special symbol lotteries (variations) that do not result in a jackpot are repeatedly performed, i.e., a situation in which the player's motivation to play is likely to decrease, it is possible to provide the player with a special bonus (a high probability state for normal symbols), thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing significantly.

In addition, the number of times the special symbol variation, which is an element for realizing the above-mentioned setting opportunity, is executed may be configured to be variable depending on the game situation. For example, the number of times the special symbol variation that realizes the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol may be configured to differ depending on the game state that is set. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the number of times the special symbol variation that realizes the setting opportunity is executed to differ depending on the type of game state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, that is, when the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set and when the second probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. By configuring in this way, the expectation that the high probability state of the normal symbol will be set can be made different depending on the game state that is set.

In this case, since the second probability variable state in which a high probability state of the special symbol is set makes it easier to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery than the normal state in which a low probability state of the special symbol is set (because the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is higher), it is preferable to configure the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol to be established with fewer special symbol fluctuations when the second probability variable state is set than when the normal state is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier to establish the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol regardless of which game state is set.

On the other hand, the configuration may be such that when the normal state is set, the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established with fewer executions of the special pattern variation than when the second probability variable state is set. In other words, in the normal state (the most unfavorable game state for the player) in which the probability state of the special pattern is also set to a low probability state that is unfavorable to the player, the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern can be made more likely to be established, making it difficult for the player to play an excessively unfavorable game. Also, since the high probability state of the normal pattern is more likely to be set based on the setting trigger that is established when the number of executions of the special pattern variation reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to easily provide the player with a surprising game in which a high probability state of the normal pattern is set without winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, when the setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern is configured to differ depending on the set game state, a game state in which the setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern cannot (is difficult to) be established may be provided in some of the set game states. For example, a configuration may be made in which multiple types (e.g., normal AA, normal AB) can be set as normal states (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), and the setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern is more likely to be established when the game state of normal AB is set than when the game state of normal AA is set.

By configuring it in this way, a player playing on a gaming machine in which the normal state is set can play while predicting when the high probability state of the normal pattern will be set, or whether the game state is one in which a setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern can be established, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early on. In this case, it is preferable to configure the device to be capable of executing a presentation that allows the player to predict whether the currently set game state (game state for each type) is a game state in which a setting trigger for the high probability state of the normal pattern is likely to be established.

Furthermore, in gaming machines with game specifications in which the bonus (the jackpot game content and the game state set at the end of the jackpot game) given to the player when he wins the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is more likely to be favorable to the player in a game state in which a high probability state of normal patterns is set than in a game state in which a low probability state of normal patterns is set, it is preferable to configure the machine so that it is possible to execute a presentation in which the presentation mode is changed based on information indicating the remaining period (remaining number of special pattern changes) until the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of normal patterns is realized and information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery (or information indicating the advance determination result (pre-reading result) that has determined the lottery result of the special pattern lottery in advance).

For example, when determining the presentation mode of an effect (e.g., a reach effect) that is more likely to be executed when a jackpot has been won in a special pattern lottery than when a jackpot has not been won, the remaining period (remaining number of special pattern changes) until the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is realized is referenced, and different presentation modes are determined when the remaining number of special pattern changes is small, i.e., a first situation in which the high probability state of the normal pattern will soon be set, and when the remaining number of special pattern changes is large, i.e., a second situation in which the high probability state of the normal pattern will not be set for some time. The presentation mode of the reach effect can be determined so that a reach effect is more likely to be executed in a presentation mode that can inform the player that the first situation is more advantageous than the second situation.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute reach effects with different presentation modes depending on the timing when the reach effect suggesting a jackpot win is executed and the timing when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so that the reach effects can be executed in various presentation modes, enhancing the presentation effect. In addition, it is possible to allow the player to understand the degree of advantage of the timing when the reach effect is executed (whether it is immediately before the high probability state of the normal pattern is set or not) based on the presentation mode of the reach effect executed, so it is possible to provide a novel presentation that makes the player hope that the presentation result of the currently executed reach effect will be a miss (a presentation result indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a miss).

In addition, in a case where a high probability state for normal symbols is set when a special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot while a low probability state for normal symbols is set, and the high probability state for normal symbols is more likely to be set after the end of a jackpot game if a jackpot is won during a high probability state for normal symbols than if a jackpot is won during a low probability state for normal symbols, a specific variable performance for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed when a jackpot is won in a different symbol lottery than when a jackpot is not won. It may be configured to be able to execute a performance (for example, a reach performance), and to determine the performance mode of the specific performance between a first performance mode suggesting that a jackpot has been won in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set after the end of a jackpot game, and a second performance mode simply suggesting that a jackpot has been won, and to fix the frequency with which the specific performance of the first performance mode is executed regardless of the remaining number of times that special symbols will fluctuate until the high probability state of normal symbols is set, and to lower the frequency with which the specific performance of the second performance mode is executed as the remaining number of times that special symbols will fluctuate until the high probability state of normal symbols is set decreases.

By configuring it in this way, the selection rate of the first presentation mode when a specific presentation is executed can be increased as the number of special pattern changes approaches the number of times that sets the high probability state of the normal pattern. Therefore, even if a specific presentation is executed in a state close to the number of special pattern changes that sets the high probability state of the normal pattern (for example, the number of special pattern changes since the end of the previous jackpot game is between 90 and 99 times), the player can be interested in the presentation result of the specific presentation without being disappointed.

In addition, a number of times lottery means may be provided to determine the number of times that a special pattern variation will be performed to establish a setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern, and the number of times that a special pattern variation will be performed to establish the setting trigger may be determined based on the results of the lottery by the number of times lottery means. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the number of times that a special pattern variation will be performed to be "0" as the number of times that is most likely to establish the setting trigger, within the range of the number of times that can be determined by the number of times lottery means.

By configuring it in this way, even if a jackpot type that sets a low probability state for normal symbols is set, it is possible to set a game state that is essentially the same as when a high probability state for normal symbols is set.

In other words, even when the same game state is set and the same jackpot type (a jackpot type in which a low probability state of a normal pattern is set) is set, the game state (probability state of a normal pattern) that is set after the jackpot game ends (until the first special pattern variation is executed) can be made different based on the lottery result of the number of times lottery means.

This makes it difficult for players to predict the game state that will be set after the big win game ends, and provides players with an element of surprise.

The timing for executing the above-mentioned number of times lottery means may be set appropriately, and may be, for example, the timing when the big win game ends, or the number of times lottery means may be configured to be executable each time the special pattern variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). In this case, if the number of times the special pattern variation has been executed determined as the lottery result of the number of times lottery means, the high probability state of the normal pattern may be set immediately after the lottery by the number of times lottery means is executed.

In this way, by configuring the number of times lottery means to be executable every time the special pattern variation is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times), it is possible to vary the contents of the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern (the number of special pattern variations that establish the setting trigger) during the period in which the special pattern variation is performed multiple times without winning a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the high probability state of the normal pattern will be set. In this case, it is preferable to vary the range of the number of times the special pattern variation is performed, which is determined by lottery, based on the number of times the number of times lottery is performed by the number of times lottery means from the end of the jackpot game to the winning of the next jackpot. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the system so that the more the number of times lottery is performed, the easier it is to set the high probability state of the normal pattern. By configuring in this way, the more the number of special pattern variations performed between jackpots increases, the easier it is to set the high probability state of the normal pattern, so that it is possible to suppress a significant decrease in the player's desire to play.

In addition, the above-mentioned number of times selection means executes a selection to determine the number of times the special pattern will change to establish a setting trigger for setting a high probability state of the normal pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the contents of the number of times selection means may be configured to determine the number of times the special pattern will change required from the execution of the number of times selection means until the high probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine configured to execute a frequency selection means each time a special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), that is, configured to be able to execute the frequency selection means when a predetermined selection condition is established based on the execution of a special symbol variation, a normal symbol high probability selection means may be provided in place of the frequency selection means described above, and configured to set a high probability state for the normal symbol when this normal symbol high probability selection means is won.

In addition, a different setting trigger may be provided as a setting trigger for the high probability state of the normal pattern. For example, a measuring means may be provided that measures the number of times the result of the special pattern lottery is a specific lottery result other than a big win (for example, a small win), and when the measurement result of the measuring means is a predetermined measurement result, a setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established. Alternatively, when the game result (increase or decrease in the number of balls dispensed) since the end of the previous big win game exceeds a predetermined range (for example, when the rate of decrease in the number of balls dispensed is extremely drastic), a setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern may be established.

Furthermore, the degree to which the setting trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is established (ease of establishment) may be varied depending on past game results. For example, if past winning jackpots have been biased toward jackpots that are disadvantageous to the player, that is, if a game that is disadvantageous to the player has continued for a predetermined period of time, the setting trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols may be configured to be established more easily, or if a game that is advantageous to the player has continued for a predetermined period of time, the setting trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols may be configured to be established less easily. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent players who play for long periods of time from continuing to play excessively disadvantageous or excessively advantageous games.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, if a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set and a time-saving end condition is established, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set. Then, as a time-saving end condition, a time-saving end condition that is established when the special symbol variation count is executed (is executed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is set.

The time-saving end condition is not limited to this, and different time-saving end conditions may be set depending on the type of special symbol, for example. Specifically, the time-saving end condition may be established when the first special symbol has changed a first number of times, when the second special symbol has changed a second number of times, or when the combined number of times the first special symbol has changed and the second special symbol has changed a third number of times, etc.

In addition, when setting a time-saving end condition based on the number of times that the special pattern changes are performed, various numbers may be set as the number of times that the special pattern changes at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied. As shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the time-saving end condition may be satisfied when the special pattern changes are performed more than 100 times (e.g., 200 times) other than when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 times, or when the time-saving end condition is performed less than 100 times (e.g., 50 times). Furthermore, the content of the time-saving end condition may be different depending on the setting trigger (jackpot type, number of special pattern changes, etc.) that is established to set the time-saving state, and it is preferable to configure the number of times that the special pattern changes at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied to be reduced so that the time-saving end condition is more likely to be established when another setting trigger is established than when one setting trigger is established. By configuring it in this way, when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time-saving state will end, and it is possible to make the player interested in which setting trigger was met to set the time-saving state.

In addition, factors other than the number of times the special pattern variation is performed may be used as factors for establishing the time-saving end condition. For example, the time-saving end condition may be established when the number of times the special pattern lottery results in a specific lottery result (small win) reaches a predetermined number.

The timing for ending the time-saving state based on the satisfaction of the time-saving end condition may be the start timing of the corresponding special symbol change (lottery), the stop timing of the corresponding special symbol change, or a specific timing until the next special symbol lottery after the corresponding special symbol change is executed. Furthermore, the time-saving state may be ended at the start or end timing of a winning game (big win game, small win game), or the start or stop timing of a normal symbol change, or the start or end timing of a normal winning game.

In this case, the time-saving state may be configured to end at the same timing regardless of which time-saving end condition is met, or the time-saving state may be configured to end at different timings depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is met. For example, if a time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times a special pattern change is performed, the time-saving state may be ended at a predetermined timing related to the special pattern change, and if a time-saving end condition is met based on the result of a special pattern lottery (such as winning a small jackpot), the time-saving state may be ended at a predetermined timing related to a winning game (small jackpot game, big jackpot game) that is executed based on the lottery result. By configuring in this way, the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be made different depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is met, making it more difficult to tell how long the time-saving state will continue.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, the game is executed with a gameplay that allows the ball output to be increased without winning a jackpot (a gameplay that allows the ball output to be increased by frequently occurring small jackpots), but it may be configured so that the ball output can be increased even when another game state is set by using a different gameplay as a gameplay that allows the ball output to be increased without winning a jackpot.

For example, by setting a large number of prize balls as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters an entrance (e.g., the first right entrance 64b2) that is easier for the ball to enter when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, it may be possible to increase the number of balls paid out without winning a jackpot when a high probability state for normal symbols is set. By configuring in this way, the player can simultaneously play a game aiming to win a jackpot with a special symbol and a game aiming to win a jackpot with a normal symbol, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the length of the normal pattern change time may be made different between the first game state (time-saving state) in which a high probability state of normal patterns is set and the second game state (probability change state) in order to make the number of balls dispensed per unit time different, or the length of the period in which it is actually possible to insert the ball into the right first ball entrance 64b2 during the normal pattern winning game period that is executed when a normal pattern is won may be made different, and the first game state may be configured to make it possible to obtain more balls dispensed per unit time than the second game state.

For gaming machines that have the ability to increase the number of balls dispensed without winning a jackpot when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, it is a good idea to provide the above-mentioned setting trigger (a setting trigger established based on the number of times the special symbol changes) as a setting trigger for setting the high probability state for normal symbols. This makes it possible to set a high probability state for normal symbols and allow a player who has been experiencing special symbol changes (lottery) for a long period of time without winning a jackpot in the normal state, which is a low probability state for normal symbols, to play a game that increases the number of balls dispensed (rescue game). This makes it possible to prevent the execution of games that result in excessively disadvantageous game results for the player.

As described above, a configuration that can increase the number of balls dispensed by playing without winning a jackpot in a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be configured, for example, so that the number of prize balls paid out is equal to or slightly (in the range of about 1 to 1.2 times the number of balls fired) greater than the number of balls continuously fired during the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, even in gaming machines with game specifications that tend to prolong play during the time-saving state (for example, game specifications with a low probability of winning a jackpot for special symbols, or game specifications with a relatively long change time set as the change pattern for the special symbol change executed during the time-saving state), it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play during long-lasting time-saving games.

The above describes the configuration related to the high probability state of normal symbols, but the same content may be applied as the configuration related to the high probability state of special symbols. In this case, a configuration in which the elements corresponding to the normal symbols in the above content are changed to special symbols may be applied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for players to understand at what timing the probability state of the special symbols (low probability state, high probability state) is set, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, the configuration with the above content may be used for both normal and special symbols.

<About the configuration of the high probability state of special symbols>
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a configuration is used in which the same ratio is pre-defined for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol as the ratio at which a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of a jackpot game according to the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. However, without being limited thereto, for example, in a state in which a jackpot type that can set a high probability state of the special symbol after the end of a jackpot game is set (a state in which the right to set a high probability state of the special symbol has been acquired), a configuration may be used in which a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of a jackpot game by passing a ball through a specific area during a jackpot game, and a configuration may be made in which the execution ratio of an advantageous jackpot game in which it is possible to pass a ball through a specific area during a jackpot game and an unfavorable jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass a ball through a specific area during a jackpot game differs between a jackpot game executed based on a jackpot win in the first special symbol lottery and a jackpot game executed based on a jackpot win in the second special symbol lottery.

By configuring it in this way, even if the same percentage is pre-defined for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern as the percentage at which the high probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to make the percentage at which the high probability state of the special pattern is actually set different between when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery.

However, other configurations may be used, for example, the ratio at which the high probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game may be different between the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern, and may be predefined. In this case, the ratio at which the high probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game may be different for the same special pattern type depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot win (game state at the time of win).

Also, a predetermined setting lottery may be configured to be executable, and information may be provided to determine whether or not a high probability state of the special symbol is set for each jackpot type of special symbol after the jackpot game ends based on the result of the setting lottery. In other words, the type of game state set when a predetermined jackpot type is set may be configured to differ depending on the game situation. In this case, the game situation may be, for example, the jackpot winning situation within a predetermined period, the number of special symbol changes performed between jackpot games, the amount of balls won by the player, etc., and it is preferable to configure the game situation so that the high probability state of the special symbol is more likely to be set when the judgment result of the game situation is unfavorable to the player than when the judgment result is favorable to the player. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a game that results in an excessively unfavorable game result for the player.

Similarly, if a jackpot is won when a high probability state for a special symbol is set, the above-mentioned contents may also be applied to the rate at which a low probability state for a special symbol is set after the jackpot play ends.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the same ratio is predefined for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol as the ratio at which the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, according to the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in a state where a high probability state of the special symbol is set. However, without being limited to this, for example, in a state where a jackpot type that can set a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends is set (a state where the right to set a high probability state of the special symbol is acquired), a low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends because the ball did not pass through a specific area during the jackpot game, and the execution ratio of the advantageous jackpot game in which the ball can pass through a specific area during the jackpot game and the disadvantageous jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass the ball through a specific area during the jackpot game may be different between the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot win of the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot win of the second special symbol lottery.

By configuring it in this way, even if the same rate is pre-specified for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern as the rate at which the low probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to make the rate at which the low probability state of the special pattern is actually set different between when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery.

However, other configurations may also be used. For example, the ratio at which a low probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of a jackpot game in which a jackpot win during a high probability state of the special pattern is won may be different between the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern, and may be predefined. In this case, the ratio at which a low probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of a jackpot game in which a jackpot win is won during a high probability state of the special pattern may also be predefined to be different for the same special pattern type, depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot win (game state at the time of winning).

Also, a predetermined setting lottery may be configured to be executable, and information may be provided to determine whether or not a low probability state of the special symbol is set for each jackpot type of special symbol after the jackpot game ends based on the result of the setting lottery. In other words, the type of game state set when a predetermined jackpot type is set may be configured to differ depending on the game situation. In this case, the game situation may be, for example, the jackpot winning situation within a predetermined period, the number of special symbol changes performed between jackpot games, the amount of balls won by the player, etc., and it is preferable to configure the game situation so that the low probability state of the special symbol is more likely to be set when the judgment result of the game situation is favorable to the player than when the judgment result is unfavorable to the player. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a game that results in an excessively favorable game result for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, an end condition based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery can be set as an end condition for ending the high probability state of the special pattern, and when the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the high probability state of the special pattern continues until the next jackpot is won. However, other end conditions may be set, and the configuration used as the time-saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern in each of the above-mentioned embodiments may be used as an end condition for ending the high probability state of the special pattern.

Specifically, the system may be configured so that the end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern changes after the high probability state of the special pattern is set reaches a specific number (e.g., 150 times). This makes it possible to end the high probability state of the special pattern, which has a high probability of winning a jackpot, without winning a jackpot, so that a player playing in a game state in which the high probability state of the special pattern is set can be motivated to play in order to win a jackpot before the end condition is met.

The gaming machine may be configured to have both the above-mentioned end condition and the time-saving end condition. In this case, it is preferable to configure the number of times the special pattern variation is executed, which is set as the end condition, to be different from the number of times the special pattern variation is executed, which is set as the time-saving end condition. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to switch the game state each time each end condition is met, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that they will never tire of.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the number of times the special symbol changes as the end condition can be set to one from a number of times including at least a first number of times of changes and a second number of times of changes different from the first number of times of changes. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the end condition is met.

In addition, when configuring an end condition related to the number of special pattern variations to be set for a gaming machine configured to be able to vary the number of special pattern variations set as an end condition, it is preferable to configure the first number of special pattern variations among the numbers of special pattern variations that can be set as an end condition to be a number of variations less than the number of special pattern variations at which the time-saving end condition is established, and the second number of variations different from the first number of variations to be a number of variations greater than the number of special pattern variations at which the time-saving end condition is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to differentiate between the end condition and the time-saving end condition, whichever is established first, depending on the end condition that is set.

Therefore, for example, in a situation where the first probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the next game state to be set can be either the second probability variable state) (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) or the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) depending on the content of the set end condition, so that the player can be made to play a game that allows him to predict the next game state to be set while keeping him interested in the content of the set end condition, thereby increasing his interest in the game.

In this way, in a gaming machine configured to allow different contents to be set as the end condition or the time-saving end condition, it is preferable to configure it so that a notification effect can be executed that can notify the player of information indicating the contents of each currently set condition. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with information that allows him to predict the timing when each condition may be fulfilled and the contents of each set condition, thereby making the player interested in the notification effect that is executed and improving the presentation effect.

The above describes an end condition for ending the high probability state of the special pattern that is established based on the number of times the special pattern variation is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a lottery (falling lottery) for transitioning the high probability state of the special pattern to a low probability state may be configured to be executable separately from the special pattern jackpot lottery (special pattern lottery), and the end condition may be established when the falling lottery is won. Even in this case, the probability of winning the falling lottery or the number of times the falling lottery is executed during the period in which one special pattern lottery is executed may be configured to be different, thereby varying the ease with which the end condition is established during the high probability state of the special pattern. This makes it difficult for the player to tell when the end condition is established after the high probability state of the special pattern is set.

<About the function that sets an upper limit on the period during which a high probability state can be continuously set (limit function)>
In a gaming machine in which high and low probability states can be set as probability states for special patterns, and high and low probability states can be set as probability states for normal patterns, and in which game states of different degrees of advantage can be set depending on the probability state that is set, an upper limit is set on the number of times that a probability state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a high probability state) can be set in succession, and a function (limit function) is provided that, when the upper limit is reached, forcibly sets the probability state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a high probability state) to a probability state that is less advantageous than that probability state (e.g., a low probability state), thereby preventing game states that are excessively advantageous to the player from being set and preventing the player from playing a game that is excessively advantageous to the player.

In a gaming machine with such a limit function, the activation conditions of the limit function may be configured to be different depending on the limit setting conditions that are met. Specifically, based on the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot is won, one of a first activation condition that makes the limit function more likely to be activated and a second activation condition that is less likely to be activated than the first activation condition may be selected and set.

Specifically, in a gaming machine with a probability limit function that sets an upper limit on the number of times a high probability state of a special symbol is set in succession and forcibly sets a low probability state of the special symbol when the upper limit is reached, it is preferable to configure the upper limit value until the probability limit function is activated to be different depending on the type of jackpot, and to configure the activation condition to be configurable so that the upper limit is "5 times" when a first jackpot type is set, and the upper limit is "3 times" when a second jackpot type different from the first jackpot type is set.

By configuring it in this way, the length of the advantageous play period during which the player can continue playing in an advantageous play state can be varied based on the type of jackpot that is set, depending on the value set as the activation condition.

In the above example, the limit function for the high probability state of special symbols (probability change limit function) was explained, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above contents may be applied to the limit function for the high probability state of normal symbols (time-saving limit function), or a combination of the above contents may be applied to each limit. Furthermore, for gaming machines with gaming specifications in which a low probability state is more advantageous to the player than a high probability state as a probability state for a symbol type, a limit function may be provided that sets an upper limit on the number of times the low probability state is set in succession, and forcibly sets the high probability state when the upper limit is reached.

In addition, in the above example, the limit function is used for the purpose of preventing the execution of games that are excessively advantageous to the player, but the limit function may also be used for other purposes. For example, a limit may be set on the number of times that a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (low probability state) is consecutively set, and when the limit is reached, a limit function may be set that forcibly sets a game state that is advantageous to the player (high probability state). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent games that are excessively disadvantageous to the player from being executed.

<Configuration that allows winning games to be played based on the ball passing through a specific area>
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, a jackpot game can be executed. A different execution trigger may be provided as an execution trigger for a jackpot game advantageous to a player. For example, a game machine (so-called two-type specification) may be configured to have a ball-entering means through which a ball can enter, a variable means that opens in a variable pattern that can be changed to a first state and a second state different from the first state when an operating condition is established based on the ball entering the ball-entering means, a second ball-entering means that is easier for the ball to enter when the variable means is changed to the first state than when the variable means is changed to the second state, a specific area through which the ball that entered the second ball-entering means can pass, and a jackpot game execution means that can execute a jackpot game based on the ball passing through the specific area, i.e., a jackpot game execution trigger is established based on the ball passing through the specific area. With this configuration, whether or not a big win game will be executed is determined by the behavior of the ball that has entered the second ball entry means, allowing the player to enjoy the behavior of the ball.

In addition, in such a gaming machine with two types of specifications, the operating conditions may be established based on the ball entering the ball entry means described above, or an operation lottery is executed based on the ball entering the ball entry means, and the operating conditions are established if the operation lottery is won. In the former case, the operating conditions are always established when the ball enters the ball entry means, making it easier for players to become interested in the behavior of the ball. On the other hand, in the latter case, the operating conditions are not established unless the operation lottery is won, even if the ball enters the ball entry means, so the frequency of balls entering the ball entry means can be increased.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine with the above-mentioned two types of specifications, a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path that can pass through a specific area and a second flow path that has more difficulty passing through the specific area than the first flow path are provided as flow paths for balls that have entered the second ball entry means, and a distribution means is provided that can distribute balls that have entered the second ball entry means to one of the plurality of flow paths, and the proportion of balls that have entered the second ball entry means that pass through the specific area can be varied depending on the distribution status of the distribution means.

By configuring it in this way, the probability of a jackpot game being triggered can be varied depending on the distribution status of the distribution means, making it interesting to see when the ball that entered the second ball entry means will reach the distribution means.

As described above, in a gaming machine having a configuration that can vary the degree to which a jackpot game execution trigger is realized depending on the distribution status of the distribution means, the distribution operation content of the distribution means may be configured to always execute a certain operation after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, or may be configured to always execute a certain operation based on either the entry of a ball into the ball entry means, the establishment of an operating condition, or the entry of a ball into the second ball entry means.

Furthermore, the distribution operation contents of the distribution means may be varied depending on the conditions to be met. For example, depending on the type of winning in the operation lottery, the distribution means may be configured to determine one of a plurality of distribution operation contents including at least a first distribution operation content that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area and a second distribution operation content that makes it harder for the ball to pass through the specific area than the first distribution operation content, and operate the distribution means.

Also, in a gaming machine (so-called type 1/type 2 mixed specification) that is configured so that the trigger for the execution of a jackpot game can be established in either case of winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery or when the ball passes through a specific area, the execution period of the jackpot game in progress can be extended by the ball passing through a specific area during the jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery. In other words, the execution period of the jackpot game in progress can be extended by the ball passing through a specific area during the jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery. In other words, the execution period of the jackpot game in progress can be extended (forced to end) if the ball does not pass through a specific area during the jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery.

This configuration makes it possible for players to become interested in both the results of the special pattern lottery and the behavior of the ball as it flows down toward the specific area.

<About the structure for changing the falling direction of the ball>
As a configuration for changing the flow direction (falling direction) of the ball flowing down the play area formed on the play board 13 configured in the pachinko machine 10, in addition to the nail members used in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, i.e., members capable of changing the flow direction of the ball within a range that does not go against the direction of gravity, a means for moving the ball in a direction different from the direction of gravity (e.g., an upward direction) may be provided. For example, a moving means for moving (e.g., lifting) the ball in a direction different from the direction of gravity (e.g., an upward direction) may be provided by using an electric drive source or by using the moving energy of another ball.

By configuring it in this way, the direction of movement of the ball flowing down the play area can be various, including directions different from the direction of gravity, providing players who are closely watching the ball's behavior with an unexpected movement of the ball. In addition, it is possible to move (rise) a ball that has reached the lowest point of the play area, i.e., a ball that has not entered the ball entry port that would grant the player a special privilege, toward the upstream side of the play area, keeping the player excited about the behavior of one ball until the very end.

Furthermore, for example, in a gaming machine in which a gate member through which a ball can pass is provided in the gaming area and a predetermined bonus can be awarded when a ball passes through the gate member, a moving means can be provided in the area that the ball can reach after passing through the gate member, and the moving means can be configured to eject the ball above the gate member. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which multiple bonuses can be awarded to a player with a single ball.

The above-mentioned moving means may also be provided in an area where the ball is more likely to enter during a winning game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) (for example, an internal area of the winning device that opens during a winning game). This configuration makes it possible to raise the ball inside the winning device, so that, for example, in a gaming machine that is configured to be able to award a player an advantageous benefit by having a ball pass through a specific area during a specific round of a jackpot game, it is possible to configure a ball that entered the winning device in a round prior to the specific round to be held there for a predetermined period of time by being raised by the moving means, and to be able to pass through the specific area during the specific round depending on the timing at which the held ball is discharged.

In this way, a moving means may be used to keep the ball within the specific area for a predetermined period of time. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the ball will be ejected from within the specific area.

<Configuration that acts on the entry of a ball into one entry hole to open another entry hole>
The machine is provided with a first operating port through which game balls can enter, and a first operating member which, in response to a game ball entering the first operating port, operates to a first state in which game balls can enter the first operating port more easily, and is configured such that, in response to a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., two) entering the first operating port, the first operating member operates to a second state in which game balls can enter the first operating port more difficultly than in the first state.

A second operating member is provided that operates in response to a game ball that has entered the first operating port entering a specific area, to a third state in which game balls can enter a second operating port different from the first operating port. This second operating member is configured to operate in a fourth state in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter the second operating port than in the third state when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., one) enter the second operating port.

With this configuration, when a game ball enters the first operating port, the second operating member operates to the third state, making it possible to allow a game ball to enter the second operating port, and in that state, by allowing one game ball to enter the second operating port, the second operating member operates to the fourth state. Then, by allowing the first operating member to again enter a game ball into the first operating port, which is in the first state, the second operating member is again operated to the third state, making it possible to allow a game ball to enter the second operating port.

More specifically, when a game ball is inserted into the first operating port while the first operating member is in the second state, up to four balls can be inserted into the operating ports (first operating port, second operating port). Furthermore, a first winning/losing lottery (lottery for a first normal symbol) is executed based on the game ball that entered the second operating port entering the second specific area, and when the result of the first winning/losing lottery is a winning (probability of winning is about 1/2), the first normal electric device that can restrict the game ball from entering the first variable ball entry means is opened (changed to a state that allows the game ball to enter the first variable ball entry means) until a first closing condition (for example, 5.8 seconds have passed or four balls have entered) is met. Then, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the first variable ball entry means has entered a third specific area where entry is possible, a second win/lose lottery (second normal pattern lottery) is executed, and if the result of the second win/lose lottery is a win (probability of winning approximately 1/1), a second normal electric device that can restrict the game ball from entering the second variable ball entry means is opened (changed to a state that allows the game ball to enter the second variable ball entry means) until a second closing condition (for example, 5.8 seconds have passed or four balls have entered) is met. Then, based on the game ball that entered the second variable ball entry means entering a fourth specific area where balls can enter, a third winning/losing lottery (third normal symbol lottery) is executed, and if the result of the third winning/losing lottery is a winning (probability of winning is approximately 1/1), the third normal electric device that can restrict the game ball from entering the third variable ball entry means is configured to open (change to a state that allows the game ball to enter the third variable ball entry means) until a third closing condition (for example, 5.8 seconds have passed or 10 balls have entered) is met.

In this case, the maximum number of winning balls that can be entered into each operating port based on the entry (winning) of a game ball into the first operating port may be calculated as "4" by adding "2", which is the maximum number of winning balls into the first operating port, to "2", which is the product of the maximum number of winning balls into the first operating port (2) multiplied by the maximum number of winning balls into the second operating port (1) that can be entered each time a game ball enters the first operating port, or by calculating the winning game (a winning game using multiple ordinary electric devices) that is executed based on the entry (winning) of a game ball into the first operating port. The number of game balls that can enter each operating port during the period until the game is executed may be calculated as the maximum number of winning entries, that is, the number of winning entries required to execute one winning game ("2" obtained by adding the number of balls that enter the first operating port "1" to the number of balls that enter the second operating port "1"). Alternatively, the maximum number of winning entries may be calculated by adding the maximum number of winning entries into the first operating port to the value obtained by dividing the maximum number of winning entries into the first operating port by the maximum number of winning entries into the second operating port that can be won each time a game ball enters the first operating port.

The winning game may be configured to end when the maximum number of winnings reaches a predetermined limit, and the value of the maximum number of winnings calculated when determining whether the limit has been reached based on the establishment of a switching condition may be switched from values (maximum number of winnings) calculated using the various calculation formulas described above for reference. If the switched value has not reached the limit, the winning game may be configured to be extended until the maximum number of winnings after the switch reaches the limit.

In other words, using various calculation formulas that can vary the calculated value, the maximum number of winning entries for each operating port is specified so that the number of game balls that can win into multiple operating ports in a series of games when a game ball wins into the first operating port is a limited number, and the calculation formula for determining the maximum number of winning entries is specified differently depending on the conditions, and a winning game is executed based on the maximum number of winning entries for each operating port specified corresponding to the specified calculation formula.

By configuring it in this way, the content of the winning game (the total number of winnings for each operating port and each variable ball entry means) can be varied depending on the specified calculation formula.

The value of the maximum winning number may be changed according to the conditions. For example, when a first condition is met, the maximum winning number for the first operating port may be changed from "2" to "3", and when a second condition different from the first condition is met, the maximum winning number for the first operating port may be changed from "2" to "1". By configuring in this way, the content of the winning game (a game in which a game ball is made to enter each operating port and the variable ball entry means) that is executed when a game ball enters the first operating port may be changed according to the condition that is met, so that the player can play the game while expecting that a favorable condition for the advantageous establishment (a condition in which the total number of prize balls awarded during the winning game is set to be large) that is favorable to the player will be established, and that the winning game will be executed when the favorable condition is established.

<Regarding gaming machines that allow multiple setting levels>
It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine in which multiple combinations of probabilities (commonly known as settings) for jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed by the gaming parlor.

A representative example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings is one that allows the combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a high probability state) to be set to one of multiple levels (e.g., six levels), but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine may be implemented that allows the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) that is determined in the event of a jackpot to be changed according to the setting. That is, the ratio of a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player to be determined according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player to be determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. Also, for example, the rate at which a jackpot that gives a large number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 times) after the jackpot is finished may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that gives a small number of time-saving times (e.g., 0 times) is determined may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to a favorable game state (e.g., a probability change state) after the jackpot is finished may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to an unfavorable game state (e.g., a normal state) may be varied according to the setting. Also, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type that is determined at a significantly higher rate only in a specific setting (almost never determined in other settings) is provided. Specifically, for example, the setting may be configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most favorable setting may be set to setting 6. Then, in setting 6, a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot occurs, while a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01% in other settings. By configuring in this way, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 being the most likely to occur when the jackpot ends after six rounds is extremely high, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time-saving times are given after the jackpot ends may be higher than in other settings. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Also, instead of or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot entry port (or the role inside the jackpot entry port) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be more likely to be determined in a specific setting (the ratio of being determined is higher). Also, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in a probability variable state, the more disadvantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability may be. This configuration is particularly effective in gaming machines of a type in which the more times the special symbols are drawn in the probability variable state, the easier it is to increase the number of balls held (the more prize balls are paid out than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot is won, and by applying this to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability variable state has a high probability of resulting in a small jackpot, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. In other words, if the probability of a jackpot is low in the probability variable state, the number of draws until the next jackpot tends to be large, and there are also more opportunities to win small jackpots and win prize balls. Therefore, when the probability variable state is reached, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in a pachinko machine having multiple setting values, a configuration other than the configuration that changes the probability of winning (winning a big prize, winning a small prize, etc.) by the special symbol lottery by changing the set setting value may be used. For example, in a gaming machine that can set a first gaming state (low probability state of special symbols) in which a first probability is set as the probability of winning a special symbol lottery, and a second gaming state (high probability state of special symbols) in which a second probability higher than the first probability is set, the length of the specific period may be changed depending on the set value when a specific period is set as the period during which the second gaming state continues, for example, a period until the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed reaches a specified number, or a period until a specified ending lottery (so-called fall lottery) is won. For example, the specific period during which the second gaming state continues may be longer when a set value advantageous to the player is set than when a set value disadvantageous to the player is set.

By configuring it in this way, even without using a configuration that changes the probability of winning the special pattern lottery according to a set value, the frequency of winning the special pattern lottery can be varied according to the set value by varying the length that the second gaming state continues.

In the above example, a pachinko machine having multiple setting values is configured to be able to set setting values that are advantageous to the player and setting values that are disadvantageous to the player regardless of the game situation, but the present invention is not limited to this. In at least one of the various game situations (for example, a game situation in which a specific game situation is set among multiple types of game situations set by a combination of the probability state of a special symbol and the probability state of a normal symbol, a game situation in which a big win game is being played, and a game situation in which a small win game is being played) that are set in the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be able to set setting values that are advantageous to the player and setting values that are disadvantageous to the player, or the game content that is set corresponding to each setting value may be specified so that a specific setting value is more advantageous to the player in a specific game situation than a specific setting value other than the specific setting value, and a specific setting value other than the specific setting value is more advantageous to the player in a specific game situation other than the specific game situation than a specific setting value.

By configuring it in this way, absolute advantages and disadvantages are eliminated for the set setting values, and it is possible to switch the relative degree of advantage of each setting value depending on the game situation being played, so that players can be motivated to play no matter what setting value is set.

In addition, players who understand the set setting value can be made to play in a game situation where the set setting value is relatively more advantageous than other setting values. In other words, it is possible to set different game situations as the game situation desired by the player depending on the set setting value. This makes it possible to provide a game that the player will not quickly become bored of.

In the above example, a configuration was described that aims to vary the degree of advantage given to the player according to the set value, but it may be configured to provide multiple levels of set values for other purposes. For example, it may be configured so that the game process up to when the player is granted the bonus corresponding to the degree of advantage varies according to the set value, without changing the degree of advantage given to the player. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the probability of winning a jackpot for a special symbol varies according to the set value, the probability (expectation) of winning a jackpot within a specified period does not vary according to the set value ( The length of the specified period may be varied according to the set value so that the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is not significantly different from the set value. For example, when a set value of "1" is set, a game in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is 1/10 during a specific period until the 10th special pattern lottery has been performed (the probability of winning the jackpot during the specific period is approximately 65%) may be played, and when a set value of "6" is set, a game in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is 1/9 during a specific period until the 9th special pattern lottery has been performed (the probability of winning the jackpot during the specific period is approximately 65%) may be played.

By configuring it in this way, even if the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is changed according to each setting value, it is possible to change only the game content without significantly changing the degree of advantage given to the player. This allows players to play a variety of games.

It is also advisable to configure the above-mentioned multiple setting values so that they can be set (changed) as part of the process (initial setting process) that is performed when the pachinko machine is powered on. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting values from being changed while the pachinko machine is powered on, making it more difficult for players to commit fraud by, for example, manipulating the setting values while playing.

Note that other timings may be used as the timing at which the setting value can be set (changed). For example, the currently set value may be changed to a different setting value (a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player) based on the fact that the number of balls paid out (the number of balls paid out from the pachinko machine minus the number of balls used in playing the pachinko machine) is equal to or greater than the upper limit as a result of playing with the pachinko machine, or the currently set value may be changed to a different setting value (a setting value that is advantageous to the player) based on the fact that the number of balls paid out (the number of balls paid out from the pachinko machine minus the number of balls used in playing the pachinko machine) is less than the lower limit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent games that are excessively advantageous or disadvantageous to the player from being played.

In the above embodiments, the case where the reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value (AN) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is updated in the main control device 110 (i.e., when it increases or decreases, respectively) has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (AN) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203b increases in the main control device 110. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. This can reduce the number of times the main control device 110 sends reserved number commands to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives reserved number commands, respectively, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the above embodiments, the first ball entrance 64 is configured to allow a maximum of four balls to enter the ball entrance and the through gate 67 is configured to allow a maximum of four balls to pass through the through gate 67, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this and may be set to three or less, or five or more (e.g., eight). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed as a variable display based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as a number, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls. Alternatively, a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting element.

As shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be performed by moving and displaying the pattern vertically or along a predetermined path such as an AL shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern. In addition, the display mode of the dynamic display of the third pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative pattern for indicating the lottery result of the normal pattern may be configured to be set using common image data held by the display control device 114, for example, so that the player cannot easily distinguish between them.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third pattern display for showing the player the lottery results for each pattern is performed by one display means (third pattern display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main pattern that is highlighted to the player among the third patterns, and for displaying the secondary patterns. Furthermore, the display means may be configured as a configuration other than a liquid crystal display.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the targeted area (play area) of the game board 13 is configured to differ depending on the game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that a left-hand hit game that targets the left-hand area of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Also, a left-hand hit game may be executed during the time-saving state, and a right-hand hit game may be executed during the normal state.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation means that can be operated by the player is a frame button 22 that is pressed by the player to determine that the operation means has been operated, but other configurations may also be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can be determined to have been operated by the player tilting it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor-type operation means that can be determined to have been operated by the player contacting or approaching it, or a wireless operation means that can be determined to have been operated by emitting a specified radio wave. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used as a performance operation means for varying the performance mode of the performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation, but it is sufficient if the performance mode of various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 can be varied based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 may be electrically connected to the display control device 114, or a control device may be provided that can input an output signal from the operation means (frame button 22) and generate a performance setting signal that can be output to the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. By configuring in this way, even if multiple performance operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the multiple performance operation means can be centrally managed, so that the performance mode can be smoothly set in response to the player's operation of the performance operation means.

The numerical values (probabilities) related to the game specifications, such as the distribution (ratio) of the jackpot types, the number of time-saving times and the number of chance-changing times (ASAT times) after the jackpot ends, the probability of a jackpot or a small win, the probability of winning a normal pattern, the number of prize balls for winning each winning slot, and the number of chance-changing times limit, are not limited to the numerical values in each of the above embodiments, and can be changed freely within the scope of the embodiment without changing the purpose of the embodiment. The degree of advantage for the player can be further increased by increasing the ratio of the advantageous jackpot types, increasing the number of time-saving times and the ASAT times, increasing the probability of a jackpot or a small win, increasing the number of prize balls, or increasing the number of chance-changing times limit. Conversely, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly advantageous by decreasing the ratio of the advantageous jackpot types, decreasing the number of time-saving times and the ASAT times, decreasing the probability of a jackpot or a small win, decreasing the number of prize balls, or decreasing the number of chance-changing times limit.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine that is different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value by making the ball enter a predetermined area as a necessary condition after the jackpot pattern is displayed. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as an AV zone, and the special game state is entered as a necessary condition by making the ball enter the special area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a combination of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) related to the jackpot lottery in multiple stages, and is configured so that the settings can be changed by the gaming parlor. In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that combine so-called pachinko machines and slot machines.

A representative example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings is one that allows the combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a high probability state) to be set to one of multiple levels (e.g., six levels), but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine may be implemented that allows the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) that is determined in the event of a jackpot to be changed according to the setting. That is, the ratio of a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player to be determined according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player to be determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. Also, for example, the rate at which a jackpot that gives a large number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 times) after the jackpot is finished may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that gives a small number of time-saving times (e.g., 0 times) is determined may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to a favorable game state (e.g., a probability change state) after the jackpot is finished may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to an unfavorable game state (e.g., a normal state) may be varied according to the setting. Also, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type that is determined at a significantly higher rate only in a specific setting (almost never determined in other settings) is provided. Specifically, for example, the setting may be configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most favorable setting may be set to setting 6. Then, in setting 6, a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot occurs, while a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01% in other settings. By configuring in this way, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 being the most likely to occur when the jackpot ends after six rounds is extremely high, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time-saving times are given after the jackpot ends may be higher than in other settings. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Also, instead of or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot entry port (or the role inside the jackpot entry port) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be more likely to be determined in a specific setting (the ratio of being determined is higher). Also, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in a probability variable state, the more disadvantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability may be. This configuration is particularly effective in gaming machines of a type in which the more times the special symbols are drawn in the probability variable state, the easier it is to increase the number of balls held (the more prize balls are paid out than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot is won, and by applying this to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability variable state has a high probability of resulting in a small jackpot, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. In other words, if the probability of a jackpot is low in the probability variable state, the number of draws until the next jackpot tends to be large, and there are also more opportunities to win small jackpots and win prize balls. Therefore, when the probability variable state is reached, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 that can be set to multiple settings, it is preferable to configure it so that, based on the set value, the type of variation pattern selection table 202b referenced when selecting a variation pattern in the main control device 110 is changed, the type of variation pattern selection table 222a referenced when selecting the variation pattern (variation performance) of the third symbol in the sound lamp control device 113 is changed, or the type of various selection tables referenced when selecting a detailed performance mode to be executed as a variation performance is changed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 depending on the content of the variation performance to be executed, so that a variation performance that interests the player can be executed.

In addition, if the data table referenced when selecting the presentation mode of the operation presentation is made different based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to define the presentation mode of the operation presentation as a "setting suggestion" presentation mode for suggesting the set setting value so that the selection ratio is the same for each data table used for each setting value, and configure the presentation content of the operation presentation executed in the "setting suggestion" presentation mode to differ depending on each setting value, and configure the selection ratio of other presentation modes to vary depending on the setting value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 by comprehensively grasping the presentation content when the "setting suggestion" operation presentation that directly suggests the setting value is executed, and the selection ratio of each presentation mode when other operation presentations are executed, so that it is possible to get the player interested in the various operation presentations that are executed.

Furthermore, as described above, the selection ratio of each presentation mode in the operation presentation is configured to differ depending on the game state that is set. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 that allows the setting value to be set in six stages from setting "1" that is disadvantageous to the player to setting "6" that is advantageous to the player, the selection ratio of the operation presentation that is selected when settings "1" to "3" are set and the first game state (high probability state) that is advantageous to the player is set is made the same as the selection ratio of the operation presentation that is selected when settings "4" to "6" are set and the second game state (time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state is set. This makes it possible to make a player playing a pachinko machine 10 with a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player believe that a setting value that is advantageous to the player has been set.

In this way, by configuring the selection ratio of the presentation mode to be variable based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game conditions (jackpot lottery result, set game state, selected variation pattern (variation time)), it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

The above-mentioned embodiments may be configured in whole or in part.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<The point at which the ball passing through the path forming means conceals the passed means>
A gaming machine A1 comprising a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, wherein the path forming means comprises a displaceable means that can be positioned in a position that overlaps with at least a portion of a first gaming ball flowing down the path forming means, on the upstream side of the passed means and in front of the first gaming ball, when viewed in a predetermined direction.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and are configured so that the area around the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to recognize due to a decorative plate 302 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the decorative plate 302 always makes it difficult to recognize the ball detection hole 431, so it is not possible to respond to a game mode in which the ball entering the ball detection hole 431 is confirmed to continue or stop the launch of the game ball, and there is a possibility that the player will feel dissatisfied. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the parts related to the game ball launch operation.

In contrast, according to gaming machine A1, the means for reducing the visibility of the first gaming ball in the path configuration means is a predetermined displaceable means, so it is possible to configure a state in which the first gaming ball is easily visible. Therefore, in a state in which the first gaming ball is easily visible, it is easy to confirm the flow of the first gaming ball and to decide whether to continue or stop the operation of launching the gaming ball, which allows for improvements in areas related to the operation of launching the gaming ball.

The form of the specified displaceable means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be another game ball, or it may be a decorative member that is configured to be displaceable between the flow path of the game ball and the glass unit.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to the drawing of a pattern (e.g., a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which game balls can pass.

Gaming machine A2 is characterized in that in gaming machine A1, the displacement means is a second gaming ball that flows downstream upstream of the first gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 can change the visibility of the first gaming ball by using the gaming ball guided toward the passing means, which reduces material costs and design costs compared to when other decorative members are used as the displaceable means.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the path configuration means in gaming machine A2 has a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length that allows a second gaming ball to be placed in front of the first gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 has a forward/backward path that allows a second gaming ball to be positioned in front of the first gaming ball, so that the second gaming ball can hide at least a portion of the first gaming ball when viewed from the front.

In the gaming machine A3, the forward/rearward path is configured such that when the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball flow down the path configuration means at the launch interval set in the launch device, the second gaming ball hides at least a portion of the first gaming ball. Gaming machine A4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A3, gaming machine A4 can also provide the effect of making it difficult to recognize a first gaming ball as a second gaming ball when multiple gaming balls flow down the path configuration means with the launch intervals unchanged. This makes it possible to create a difficult-to-recognize situation even under normal circumstances.

Gaming machine A5 is characterized in that, in gaming machines A3 and A4, the front-rear direction path is arranged such that the front side component is located closer to the center of the gaming area than the rear side component.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A3 and A4, gaming machine A5 can configure a forward/backward path that is inclined along the line of sight of the player looking at the passing means, making it easier for the first gaming ball to be hidden by the second gaming ball. In other words, the blindfolding effect can be improved.

Gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A5, the front side component is positioned in the line of sight of the player who is looking at the passing means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine A5, gaming machine A6 can produce a similar blindfolding effect regardless of the length of the distance between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball placed on the forward/backward path.

In other words, it is usually believed that the closer the first and second game balls are to each other, the greater the concealment effect, but if the first and second game balls are positioned in the line of sight, the effect of the distance between them can be eliminated.

A gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the path configuration means in any of the gaming machines A2 to A6 includes a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length that allows a second gaming ball to be placed in front of the first gaming ball, and a left-right direction path formed with a left-right width that allows the gaming ball to flow down in the left-right direction upstream of the front-rear direction path.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A2 to A6, gaming machine A7 can also block the player's line of sight with gaming balls flowing down a left-right path, so a concealing effect can be created not only when the player views the passed-through means with a line of sight that does not shift left or right relative to the passed-through means, but also when the player shifts left or right and peers at the passed-through means. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the passed-through means, regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a concealing effect can be created in all directions).

This effect is more pronounced when one side of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction is sealed with a wall. In other words, when one side is sealed with a wall, the wall acts as a screen on the left or right side, making it easier to create a state in which the passing means is not visible.

A gaming machine A8 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the path configuration means includes a first flow path through which the gaming ball passes through the passing means in a first manner, and a second flow path through which the gaming ball passes in a second manner, and is configured so that the first gaming ball is at least partially covered by the predetermined displaceable means and can be seen, regardless of which flow path of the path configuration means the first gaming ball flows down.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, gaming machine A8 can make it difficult to recognize the flow pattern of the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means, regardless of whether or not the gaming ball passes through the passing means, thereby increasing the attention to the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means.

The first and second aspects are not limited in any way. For example, the direction in which the ball flows down may be different, or the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

A gaming machine A9 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a branching means is provided on the upstream side of the passing means for dividing the flow direction of the gaming ball, the branching means is provided with a switching means for switching the flow direction of the received gaming ball, and the path configuration means is configured so that gaming balls whose flow paths are divided by the branching means and that reach the switching means flow down the same path for a predetermined section.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the gaming machine A9 makes it more difficult to grasp the flow of the gaming ball, since the gaming ball that reaches the switching means flows down the same path for a certain section, compared to when the gaming ball that reaches the switching means immediately flows down a path that corresponds to the subsequent flow path. This makes it possible to improve the player's ability to focus on the gaming ball.

In the gaming machine A9, the path configuration means has a protruding portion that protrudes toward the gaming balls flowing down, and the protruding portion acts to branch the gaming balls in the branching means. A10.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A9, gaming machine A10 can use the protruding portion to branch the game balls, improving the durability of the structure compared to, for example, a case in which branching is caused by the movement of a valve body.

In the gaming machine A10, the protruding portion includes a first protruding portion that extends in a predetermined direction and a second protruding portion that extends in a direction different from the first protruding portion, and the protruding amount of the first protruding portion and the protruding amount of the second protruding portion are configured to be different. Gaming machine A11.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A10, gaming machine A11 can differentiate the effect of the first protrusion on the gaming ball from the effect of the second protrusion on the gaming ball depending on the way the gaming ball flows down. This makes it possible to use the fixed first and second protrusions to cause the gaming ball to branch according to a predetermined rule depending on the way the gaming ball flows down.

<Points that appeal to the introduction of a ball passing through a route forming means into a passed means>
A gaming machine B1 comprising a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, wherein the path forming means has a specified portion that constitutes the upstream side of the passed means, the specified portion being positioned on a more conspicuous side than the passed means, and configured to be able to guide gaming balls to the passed means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and the area around the ball detection hole 431 is configured to be difficult to identify by the decorative plate 302, and depending on the state of the big prize component 300, the game ball may flow down a position outside the decorative plate 302 or may flow down in a manner that is hidden behind the decorative plate 302 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, highly visible gaming balls that fall off the decorative plate 302 and flow down are configured to miss the ball detection hole 431, and some of the gaming balls that flow down so as to be hidden behind the decorative plate 302 are guided to the ball detection hole 431. This means that the visibility of the gaming ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, and the player may feel dissatisfied because paying attention to the gaming ball is likely to be wasted. In other words, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in terms of making the way the gaming ball flows down after attracting attention worth paying attention to.

In response to this, gaming machine B1 is configured so that a gaming ball that has flowed down a specified section arranged on the more conspicuous side can be guided to the passing means, and so the degree of improvement in attention to the gaming ball can be associated with the gaming ball passing through the passing means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the likelihood that a gaming ball that has flowed down a specified section will pass through the passing means, leading to an improvement in terms of the significance of paying attention to the gaming ball after it has attracted attention.

In addition, this configuration makes it easier to guide the player's gaze to the game ball flowing down the specified area, reducing the possibility that the player will miss the game ball heading toward the passing means.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to the drawing of a pattern (e.g., a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which game balls can pass.

The conspicuous side is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the display device side that easily attracts the player's attention, the winning hole side or the starting hole side, the front side (nearby side) that is easy for the player to see, the stage side (mainly the part where the game ball is temporarily held at the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame) where the gaze is likely to be focused as the probability of the ball entering a specific ball entry hole is remarkably high, the V-winning hole side that directly leads to winning a jackpot, the ball dispensing device side as an object of operation, the performance operation button side, the area where the game ball that has strayed from the ball entry hole flows down (the area where the player will inevitably follow it with his eyes out of frustration), the bright side as a light-emitting means switches between light and dark, or any other side. Also, it is possible to intentionally form a less conspicuous side to make it stand out in comparison.

Gaming machine B2 is characterized in that in gaming machine B1, the path configuration means has a second predetermined portion that makes a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means less noticeable than when the ball entered, and the predetermined portion is positioned on a more noticeable side than the second predetermined portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 reduces the attention of the gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means at the second specified section before it flows down the specified section, thereby making it possible to highlight the attention of the gaming ball as it flows down the specified section.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the predetermined portion of gaming machine B1 or B2 has sections where the flow speed of gaming balls differs.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B3 can improve the effect of attracting the player's attention compared to when there is no difference in the flow speed of the gaming balls.

Gaming machine B4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B3, the second flow speed of gaming balls flowing down the second specified portion is configured to be faster than the first flow speed of gaming balls flowing down the specified portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B3, gaming machine B4 can shorten the time it takes for a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means to reach a specified section.

Gaming machine B5 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B4, characterized in that the specified section has a section in which the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction differs.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B4, gaming machine B5 can create sections in which the apparent displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction is different, regardless of the actual speed at which the gaming ball flows down. By reducing the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction at any specified location, the player's gaze can be easily focused on a specified location and distracted from other areas.

The manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is made different is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a difference between displacement on a straight line arranged on a plane perpendicular to the front-to-rear direction when viewed from the front and displacement on a straight line having a front-to-rear component, a difference between displacement on a straight line and displacement in a curved or serpentine shape, or some other difference.

Gaming machine B6 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B5, and is characterized in that it is equipped with an introduction means configured to be able to introduce gaming balls into the path configuration means, and the predetermined portion is disposed outside the introduction means when viewed in a predetermined direction.

Gaming machine B6 can ensure the visibility of the introduction means in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B5. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the introduction means while also increasing the attention to gaming balls that are likely to pass through the passing means.

A gaming machine B7 is any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, and is characterized by having an avoidance means configured to cause gaming balls on the front side of the path configuration means to flow down so as to avoid the line of sight toward the passing means or the specified part.

Gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B6, is configured so that gaming balls can flow down the front side of the path configuration means, and is equipped with an avoidance means for ensuring that the flow path of the gaming balls avoids line of sight toward the passing means, so that it is possible to ensure both the size of the gaming area and the visibility of the gaming balls toward the passing means.

The manner in which the game ball affected by the avoidance means flows down is not limited in any way. For example, it may flow down avoiding a position directly in front of the passing means, it may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the passing means and the player's eye position, it may flow down avoiding a position directly in front of the last position at which the player can see the game ball heading towards the passing means, it may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the last position mentioned above and the player's eye position, or it may be something else.

In gaming machine B7, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state in which the game ball flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball cannot be accepted, and the acceptance state change means is configured to be able to guide the game ball that has reached the acceptance state change means in the acceptance state to the path configuration means side when the state changes from the acceptance state to the non-acceptance state.

In addition to the effects of game machine B7, game machine B8 can prevent game balls that reach the receiving state change means and then flow down like a bridge from blocking the line of sight toward the passing means.

Gaming machine B9 is characterized in that it is provided with a partitioning means that is arranged above the passing means in a front view of gaming machine B7 or B8 and that partitioning means partitions the gaming area, and that the partitioning means is configured to allow gaming balls to flow down the left and right outer sides.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B7 and B8, gaming machine B9 uses a partitioning means to prevent gaming balls from flowing down in front of the passing means, making it easier to ensure visibility toward the passing means.

The partitioning means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a plate-shaped portion that forms the flow surface of the game balls, or it may be a ball entry port forming means through which the game balls can enter. The partitioning means may be a means with a fixed shape (appearance) or a means with a variable shape (appearance).

In the gaming machine B9, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state where the game balls flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state where the game balls cannot be accepted, and the part of the partition means on the acceptance state change means side is configured to easily guide the game balls to the acceptance state change means side. A gaming machine B10.

In addition to the effects of game machine B9, game machine B10 can be configured to accept a game ball that is in the process of being accepted by the acceptance state change means by pushing it into the acceptance state change means using the partition means. This makes it easier to prevent a game ball that slides sideways while being accepted from escaping from the acceptance state change means and falling down the front side of the passing means.

For example, the receiving state changing means is assumed to be a special winning device equipped with an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces on a left-right axis, and the partitioning means is assumed to be a first winning port located above the special winning port of the special winning device. A game ball that reaches the special winning port just before the opening/closing plate is closed is often pinched between the pivoting tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening that is covered by the opening/closing plate, and slides sideways in the direction of the edge (the direction of the pivoting axis of the opening/closing plate).

Since the game ball after sliding can reach any position within the range of the pivot tip of the opening and closing plate, if at least a part of the opening and closing plate is positioned above the passing means, the game ball after sliding may fall to the front side and then pass in front of the passing means, and the game ball after sliding should not be allowed to fall to the front side.

If it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front after sliding sideways, it will be necessary to position the opening and closing plate so as to avoid the position of the passing means when viewed from the front, which reduces the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

In contrast, gaming machine B10 makes it easier to prevent the game ball from falling onto the front side of the opening and closing plate after sliding sideways, improving the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

Gaming machine B11 is any one of gaming machines B7 to B10, characterized in that gaming balls flowing down the path configuration means and gaming balls flowing down the front side of the path configuration means are configured to flow down in a similar manner.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B7 to B10, gaming machine B11 makes it difficult to distinguish between gaming balls that flow down the path forming means and may pass through the passed means and gaming balls that flow down the front side of the path forming means and do not pass through the passed means, making it difficult to determine the number of gaming balls flowing down the path forming means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between cases where it is easy and difficult for game balls to enter the path forming means from game balls flowing down near the path forming means.

A gaming machine B12 is any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, and is characterized by having a light-emitting means that irradiates light from behind the ball flowing down the specified portion.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, gaming machine B12 makes it easier to avoid the front of the ball flowing down a specified area reflecting light, making it difficult to see.

<Points to ensure the path length to the V-hole while saving space>
A gaming machine C1 comprising: a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down; a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through; and a state switching means configured to switch between a first state in which the gaming balls can flow down to the passed means and a second state different from the first state, wherein the path forming means comprises a delay means which delays the vertical displacement of the gaming balls, and the delay means configures the gaming machine C1 to allow the gaming balls to flow down towards the passed means.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, a distribution unit 75 that is configured to be movable left and right is arranged in the flow path of the gaming ball that entered the second large winning opening 12, and the flow direction of the gaming ball can be changed by the positioning of the distribution unit 75 (see, for example, JP 2014-155538 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, it is essential for the distribution unit 75 to operate for a short period of time to prevent erroneous entry into the specific area 73 or balls being caught by the distribution unit 75, and some players may feel suspicious of the behavior of the distribution unit 75 and be unable to continue playing with confidence.

One example of a solution to this problem is to lengthen the flow path length from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75. For example, by changing the position of the distribution section 75 from directly below the second large prize opening 12 to a position near the center of the left and right of the play area (near the first large prize opening 10), it is possible to ensure a long flow path length from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75. This is thought to reduce the possibility of an erroneous prize entry into the specific area 73.

On the other hand, when this method is implemented, it becomes necessary to ensure the visibility of the flow path of the game ball over a wide area from the second large prize opening 12 to the first large prize opening 10, and the design freedom of the game area is limited in this area. In other words, there is a problem in that the design freedom of the game area is limited over a wide area in order to prevent erroneous winning into the specific area 73.

In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of preventing game balls from entering the game area by mistake while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

In contrast, according to gaming machine C1, the path configuration means is equipped with a predetermined delay means, so even if the vertical length of the path configuration means in a front view is shortened to save space, it is possible to ensure that a long time passes before a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means passes through the passing means.

Therefore, the timing at which it becomes necessary to operate the state switching means to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the passing means can be set to a predetermined time after the game ball enters the path configuration means, so that erroneous winning can be avoided without operating the opening/closing device that switches whether or not the game ball can enter the path configuration means for a short period of time. This makes it possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating hastily. This makes it possible to avoid erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

The form of the delay means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a form in which a protrusion for deceleration is formed in the flow path, or a form in which a predetermined flow path is provided that causes the game ball to flow down a flow path having a forward/rearward component.

In gaming machine C1, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the acceleration of the game ball flowing down the flow path toward the front side is greater than that of the flow path toward the back side. Gaming machine C2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 can ensure a longer period during which the player can see the gaming ball flowing down a specified flow path.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the inclination of the specified flow path relative to the horizontal plane, or the design of the surface shape on the game ball side of the specified flow path.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the delay means in gaming machines C1 or C2 has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the acceleration of the gaming ball flowing down is greater in a flow path toward the front side than in a flow path in which the gaming ball flows down while maintaining its front-to-rear position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C1 and C2, gaming machine C3 can ensure a longer period during which the player can see the gaming balls flowing in front of them. This makes it easier to increase the player's attention to the gaming balls flowing down a specified flow path.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the inclination of the specified flow path relative to the horizontal plane, or the design of the surface shape on the game ball side of the specified flow path.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines C1 to C3, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the gaming ball passes through a position located in front of the passing means when viewed in the predetermined direction.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, gaming machine C4 can reduce the visibility of the area near the passed means when the gaming ball is placed in the front position. This can increase the attention to the area near the passed means.

Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C4, the front position can be configured in multiple places.

According to gaming machine C5, by arranging game balls at multiple front positions, the game balls at the front can hide at least a portion of the game ball at the back. Since the passing means is arranged behind the game ball at the back, the field of view toward the passing means can be blocked by the multiple game balls, and the visibility of the passing means can be reduced.

In this case, if the interval between balls entering a specified flow path is short, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is always positioned at one of the front positions, making it possible to create a state in which the passing means is not visible.

Gaming machine C6 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C5, characterized in that the path configuration means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a spiral pattern when viewed from above.

Gaming machine C6 has the same effect as any of gaming machines C1 to C5, and in addition, it can shorten the vertical width required to install a path configuration means of the same length.

In addition, compared to when a turn-around path is formed, there is no need to make the path walls thinner, which improves the strength of the flow path, and reduces the possibility of ball clogging, etc., compared to a turn-around path that turns 180 degrees.

Gaming machine C7 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C6, characterized in that the path configuration means includes a front-rear flow path section extending in the front-rear direction.

Gaming machine C7 has the same effect as any of gaming machines C1 to C6, but also reduces the width of the path configuration means, so that a pair of path configuration means can be configured symmetrically with a reduced width.

Gaming machine C8 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C7, characterized in that the passing means is positioned diagonally downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of the path configuration means.

Gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C1 to C7, makes it easier for the passing means and the ball receiving portion of the path forming means to be within the field of view of a player looking from the front side.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C8, gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the path configuration means includes a first receiving means configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and a second receiving means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and is configured so that the profits obtained by the player change depending on the receiving mode of the gaming balls of the first receiving means and the second receiving means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C1 to C8, gaming machine C9 has a first receiving means and a second receiving means that are configured to be able to receive gaming balls at all times, and furthermore, the benefits obtained by the player change depending on the receiving mode of the gaming balls by the first receiving means and the second receiving means, thereby improving the player's attention to the gaming balls.

The manner in which the game balls are received is not limited in any way. For example, the game balls may be received only by the first receiving means, or only by the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the first receiving means and a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the second receiving means. Also, the frequency with which balls enter each receiving means may differ, or the balls may enter at different positions.

In gaming machine C9, the profits obtained by the player change depending on whether gaming balls are received by only the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or whether gaming balls are received by both the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Gaming machine C10.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine C9, gaming machine C10 makes it easier for players to shoot game balls in a predetermined launch pattern by setting the amount of profit the player can obtain.

The benefits that the player can obtain are not limited in any way. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the game balls flowing down, or it may be a benefit related to the game obtained by the game balls flowing down (payout of prize balls, winning a jackpot, the game state changing to a special state after the jackpot ends, the game state changing to a normal state (falling down), etc.).

Gaming machine C11 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C9 or C10, the path configuration means is configured symmetrically from the first receiving means and second receiving means to the passed means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C9 and C10, gaming machine C11 can reduce the possibility of a player suffering a disadvantage regardless of whether the game ball is mainly shot from the left or right side.

In any of gaming machines C9 to C11, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state in which the game ball flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball cannot be accepted, and the acceptance state changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state change means or the state change state. Gaming machine C12 is characterized in that.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C9 to C11, gaming machine C12 changes the receiving state depending on the shape of the receiving state changing means or the state change mode, so that it is possible to reduce the impact of the player's skill in firing the game ball on the profits that the player can obtain.

A gaming machine C13 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C12, the state change mode of the receiving state change means is configured in a plurality of types.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine C12, gaming machine C13 can change the reception mode of the gaming balls to the first reception means and the second reception means even when the gaming balls are launched in a certain launch mode. This makes it possible to adjust the profits that the player can obtain from the mode of state change of the reception state change means.

<Important points regarding the opening and closing member that moves parallel to the direction in which the ball flows>
Gaming machine XA1 comprises a path forming means configured to allow game balls to flow down, a passing means configured to allow game balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the path forming means and a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path forming means, wherein the state switching means is configured so that the direction of displacement occurring during the state change is along the direction in which the game ball flows down.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the flow direction of the game balls and the opening and closing direction of the opening and closing plate of the big prize component 300 are approximately perpendicular, and the opening and closing operation is completed without being involved in the rolling of the game balls, so there was a problem that there was room for improvement in the role of the opening and closing plate (state switching means).

In contrast, according to the gaming machine XA1, the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to follow the direction in which the gaming ball flows downward, so that by displacing the state switching means when the gaming ball is in close proximity to or in contact with the state switching means, it is possible to affect a change in the rolling pattern of the gaming ball. This makes it possible to improve the role of the state switching means.

For example, when a gaming ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means can be slid to the right with the gaming ball on top of it, applying a load to the gaming ball that rotates it in the forward direction of the rolling rotation, thereby accelerating the gaming ball.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means can be slid leftward with the game ball on top of it, applying a load to the game ball that rotates it in the opposite direction to the rolling rotation, thereby slowing down the rotation of the game ball.

In addition, when the state switching means slides so as to graze the bottom end of the rolling game ball, a load can be applied to the game ball not only in the rolling direction of the game ball, but also in a direction perpendicular to the rolling direction, causing complex and irregular changes in the way the game ball flows down.

These effects on the way the game ball flows down can be varied in various ways when the state switching means is opened and closed, allowing players who are watching the game balls to concentrate on the game without getting bored.

In addition, the positional relationship between the opening and closing operation of the state switching means and the gaming ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be positioned so that it rubs against the side of the gaming ball, or it may be positioned so that it collides with the gaming ball in the direction opposite to the flow of the gaming ball.

In the state switching means that is displaced in a manner that collides with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to perform a closing operation in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball, so that the game ball can be bounced back, or it may be configured to perform a closing operation in the same direction as the flow direction of the game ball, so that the introduction of the game ball thereafter can be restricted with little resistance.

Gaming machine XA2 is characterized in that in gaming machine XA1, the state change of the state switching means is configured to be executable while the state switching means and the gaming ball are in contact with each other.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XA1, gaming machine XA2 can cause the gaming ball to spin by changing the state of the state switching means.

Gaming machine XA3 is characterized in that the state switching means in gaming machine XA1 or XA2 is equipped with a change means that changes the direction of the load in a direction intersecting the direction of the displacement.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines XA1 and XA2, gaming machine XA3 can release the load applied from the gaming ball during the displacement of the state switching means, thereby reducing the load applied to the state switching means.

<Important points regarding the opening and closing member that allows balls to flow in a first direction when open and in a second direction when closed>
Gaming machine XB1 comprises a path forming means configured to allow game balls to flow down, a passed means configured to allow game balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the passed means and a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the passed means, wherein the state switching means is configured to be able to guide the game ball in a first direction in the introduction state, and to be able to guide the game ball in a second direction in the non-introduction state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it is extended forward, but when it is retracted to the rear, it does not come into contact with the game ball and it falls freely, so it does not guide it. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, when it is retracted to the rear, it is necessary to prepare a part (frame part, etc.) other than the lower movable body 371 to guide the game ball flowing down, and there was a problem that there was room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members) for guiding the game ball flowing down.

In contrast, with the gaming machine XB1, the state switching means is configured to guide the gaming ball in different directions depending on whether it is in the introduced state or not, making it unnecessary to use a dedicated component for guiding the flow path of the gaming ball, thereby reducing the number of components required. This makes it possible to diversify the flow direction of the gaming ball in a limited space.

The relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited in any way. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set left and right with respect to the game ball flowing down in the front-to-back direction. In this case, it is possible to maximize the difference in direction after guidance by the state switching means begins, while only slight displacement of the game ball is discernible when viewed from the front before it is guided by the state switching means.

The arrangement of the guide section that produces the guiding effect of the state switching means is not limited in any way. For example, the guide section may be disposed on a movable member of the state switching means, or the guide section may be disposed on a non-movable section in the periphery of the state switching means, and may be configured so that the state is switched to one in which the game ball is likely to approach or come into contact with the guide section by the operation of the movable member.

When the guide is provided on a movable member, it is preferable that the design not only provides guidance after switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also takes into consideration the effect on the game ball during the state switching operation.

For example, if the state switching means is equipped with a movable member that displaces in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball, providing a wall portion with a surface (flat, curved, etc.) that is inclined with respect to the flow direction, rather than providing a wall portion with a flat shape perpendicular to the flow direction, makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball becomes large in a direction that causes the game ball to flow backwards. This makes it easier to avoid the game ball flowing backwards.

Gaming machine XB2 is characterized in that in gaming machine XB1, the state change of the state switching means occurs due to a displacement in a third direction, and the third direction is perpendicular to the first direction and the second direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XB1, gaming machine XB2 can reduce the possibility of malfunction of the state switching means due to the load applied by the guided gaming ball.

Gaming machine XB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the path configuration means has a pair of left and right paths, the state switching means has a pair of guide sections capable of receiving gaming balls from the pair of left and right paths, and the first direction and the second direction are configured symmetrically in the pair of guide sections.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines XB1 and XB2, gaming machine XB3 can complicate the path along which the gaming ball flows. Also, since the first direction and the second direction of the pair of guide sections are configured symmetrically on the left and right, the displacement that the state switching means receives due to the load that the pair of guide sections receive from the gaming ball can be symmetrical on the left and right.

This makes it easier to uniformly position the state switching means, for example, when gaming balls are placed into a pair of left and right paths in approximately equal numbers, depending on the load that the guide section receives from the gaming balls.

Gaming machine XB4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XB3, the state switching means has a protruding portion formed to protrude in a direction intersecting the third direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XB3, gaming machine XB4 can reduce the contact area with other components by using the protruding portion, thereby reducing the displacement resistance of the state switching means.

The gaming machine XB5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine XB3 or XB4, it is provided with an abutment means configured to be able to abut when the state switching means is in the introduced state or the unintroduced state, and is configured to be able to correct the left-right displacement of the state switching means by abutting against the abutment means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines XB3 and XB4, gaming machine XB5 can receive load from the gaming ball from either the left or right direction, so the displacement of the state switching means, which tends to become disorderly, can be returned to an orderly state by the action of the abutment means.

<Separation, inversion, combination, and rotation are all part of the same movement>
A gaming machine D1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable so as to change the visible surface, the displacement means comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and configured such that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced relative to each other in a predetermined manner of displacement.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, the rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of the base arm 220 is configured to be able to rotate multiple times (see, for example, JP 2016-116782 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, although the rotating base 214 is rotationally displaced, the surface visible to the player is the same, which creates the problem that it is difficult to maintain attention to the displacement means.

In contrast, gaming machine D1 is configured so that the visible surface of the displacement means can be changed in response to the displacement, allowing attention to be maintained on the displacement means.

In addition, the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member relative to each other, thereby increasing the attention to the displacement means.

In the gaming machine D1, the predetermined displacement includes at least a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move toward or away from each other based on a collection section where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are collected and arranged, and a second displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member rotate based on the collection section. In the gaming machine D2, the predetermined displacement includes at least a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move toward or away from each other based on a collection section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, gaming machine D2 can easily dynamically cause relative movement between the first and second displacement members. That is, with only the first displacement as a displacement based on the assembly part, the displacement between the first and second displacement members is likely to be reduced at the terminal part where the distance from the assembly part is the shortest or longest, and the first and second displacement members may appear to be stationary, which may reduce the presentation effect. However, by mixing in the second displacement, it is possible to cause a rotational displacement even at the terminal part, improving the presentation effect.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the predetermined displacement in gaming machine D1 or D2 includes at least a third displacement in which the visible surface of the displacement means is inverted.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 and D2, gaming machine D3 inverts the surface that is visible due to the third displacement, making it possible to significantly change the decorations that are visible to the player before and after the third displacement.

A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixed by suction or adhesion, and the load related to the fixing acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machine D4 has a load related to the fixing that acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first and second displacement members, so the displacement of the first and second displacement members can be designed taking into account the load related to the fixing.

For example, in the case of driving force transmission by gears, if deformation of the shape is not taken into account, mechanical displacement will occur. However, if the load related to fixing is taken into account, the elastic change of the component due to the load will become apparent, causing a delay in the timing of the displacement of the component.

The degree of fixation may also be configured to vary depending on the visible surfaces of the first and second displacement members.

In this case, the effect of fixation differs depending on the surface being viewed, so the degree of fixation can be varied on the side the player can see.

This allows, for example, inverted surfaces of the same displacement means to be easily viewed as one surface tightly joined together and integrated, while the other surface can be easily viewed as loosely joined together and easily displaced relative to one another.

In addition, for example, by configuring the degree of adhesion of the first displacement member and the second displacement member to differ for each fixed position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member differs.

The manner in which the magnet can be attached is not limited in any way. For example, the magnet can be attached with an adhesive tape, or the magnet can utilize the adhesive force between the magnet and the metal part. The first and second inverted members can also be designed to use, for example, fixing screws or bolts as the metal part that is attached to the magnet.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in the forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, displaces in the forward direction in a first displacement mode, and displaces in the reverse direction in a second displacement mode different from the first displacement mode, and the second displacement mode is configured to displace in the first displacement mode after displacing in the predetermined mode.

According to gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is configured as a displacement mode in which a predetermined mode is added before the first displacement mode, so that the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means can be reduced. This reduces the attention to the displacement means when retracting, and relatively increases the attention to the displacement means that displaces at the presentation position.

In conventional machines, the rotation pattern was the same in both forward and reverse directions, so after extending the display to the performance position (the position in front of the LCD display area), it was necessary to rotate again in the opposite direction multiple times before retreating to the retracted position (the position outside the LCD display area). In this case, there was a possibility that the viewer's gaze would be drawn to the part retreating from the performance position, which could be seen as a problem.

The type of displacement is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a rotational displacement or a linear displacement. The displacement may be on a plane, may span multiple planes, or may be three-dimensional.

Gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the displacement means in gaming machine D5 is equipped with a release means configured to release the load transmission when the operating resistance becomes greater than a predetermined amount.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D5, gaming machine D6 can change the displacement mode of the displacement means by varying the magnitude of the operating resistance of the internal structure of the displacement means.

Gaming machine D7 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D6, and is provided with a light emitting means for irradiating light toward the displacement means, the displacement means including the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be able to change the visible state of the light from the light emitting means depending on whether the visible surface is one side or the other side.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D6, gaming machine D7 can change the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means in accordance with the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

For example, it is possible to change between a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are perceived as emitting light individually and a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are perceived as emitting light together.

Gaming machine D8 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D7, and is provided with a detection means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to detect whether the displacement of the displacement means is in an acceptable state or not.

According to gaming machine D8, in any of gaming machines D1 to D7, the detection means can detect a state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permissible, so that the displacement means can be prevented from colliding with surrounding structural parts during displacement.

In addition, since the detection means can detect the section in which the displacement means can be displaced while the displacement means is being displaced, by controlling the displacement to occur in a displacement mode that includes zooming in and out after a certain amount of displacement from the performance position toward the evacuation position, it is possible to suppress an increase in attention to the displacement means compared to when the displacement from the performance position to the evacuation position occurs in a displacement mode that includes zooming in and out from the start of the displacement.

Gaming machine D9 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D7, and is characterized in that it is equipped with a detection means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect two or more types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 to D7, gaming machine D9 can reduce the number of detection means. Various types of values for the displacement of the displacement means are exemplified. For example, they may be values for the respective positions and attitudes of different movable members, or they may be values related to the change in the operating mode when the operating mode changes at a predetermined timing.

The arrangement of the detection means is not limited in any way. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure that detects the arrangement and attitude of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip end side of the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the displacement means comprises the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be reversible between a position in which the surface facing the player is one side and a position in which the surface is the other side, and when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are distinguishable, whereas when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are indistinguishable. Gaming machine D10.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, gaming machine D10 can maintain high expectations from the player that a reversal action will occur, regardless of the state of the first and second displacement members when one side is facing the player.

<Points for changing the easily visible surface by arranging the displacement means having a plurality of visible surfaces>
A gaming machine E1 is provided with a displacement means having a first visible surface and a second visible surface configured to be visible, and the displacement means is configured to be switchable between a first state in which the first visible surface is easy to see and a second state in which the second visible surface is easy to see depending on the arrangement.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a reversible reversing unit 71, and are configured to change the appearance seen by the player by changing the surface seen (see, for example, JP 2016-153095 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the reversing unit 71 is turned over while remaining in a fixed position, so the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the surface seen. In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

In contrast, with gaming machine E1, the displacement means can switch between a state in which the first visible surface is easily visible and a state in which the second visible surface is easily visible depending on the position, so that the line of sight of a player who wishes to see the first visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner that follows the path of the change in position of the displacement means.

A gaming machine E2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1, an opening portion is provided that opens so that the displacement means can be viewed, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening portion side is easily visible.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E1, gaming machine E2 allows a player looking through the opening to the rear side to easily see the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

Gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the displacement means in gaming machine E2 is positioned closer to the rear side when placed on the edge of the opening than when placed in the center of the opening.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E2, gaming machine E3 makes it possible to make the displacement means visible from the front when it is placed in the center of the open section, while reducing the amount of eye movement required when viewing the displacement means when it is placed on the edge of the open section. This makes it possible to achieve both good visibility of the displacement means and reduced fatigue for the player who follows the displacement means with their eyes.

Gaming machine E4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement means has a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and when the first visible surface and the second visible surface of one set are visible, the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the other set are difficult to see.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E3, gaming machine E4 has different letters and figures for each set on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, allowing players viewing the displacement means to see different letters and figures, and by configuring the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the set that are not intended to be visible to be difficult to see, it is possible to avoid the appearance of the displacement means being unsightly.

For example, if the first set displays characters or figures on the first and second visible surfaces indicating that there is a low expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot, and the second set displays characters or figures on the first and second visible surfaces indicating that there is a high expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot, the level of expectation of a jackpot can be confirmed through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. In this case, the display of the expectation of a jackpot by the displacement means can be maintained even after the displacement means is retracted from the front side of the display area of the display device, so that the display of the expectation of a jackpot can continue to be visible even to a player who has taken their eyes off the liquid crystal display device.

The manner in which the display is made difficult to see is not limited in any way. For example, it may be arranged on a surface on a side other than the player's side (the rear side, the left or right outer surface, etc.), or it may be configured to reduce visibility by being shielded with a shielding means.

Gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface that are visible in gaming machine E4 is configured so that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during the operation.

According to gaming machine E5, it is possible to easily avoid predicting the pair of first and second visible surfaces that will be displayed to the player during the action of switching (before confirmation) the pair of first and second visible surfaces that are visible in gaming machine E4. This makes it possible to improve attention to the displacement means.

The manner in which the first visible surface and the second visible surface are configured to be difficult to recognize during the above-mentioned switching operation is not limited in any way. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make them difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) may be configured to be separable from the other parts and operated in a separated state to make them difficult to recognize, or a light-emitting means may be used to set the brightness to create a relatively dark part to make it difficult to recognize.

In this case, the manner in which the separation occurs is not limited in any way. For example, during the above-mentioned switching operation, the device may be configured to operate facing backward so that only one of the part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part is visible, and the other part is not visible, or the device may be configured to operate in a state in which the part and the other part are simultaneously visible but out of alignment.

Gaming machine E6 is characterized in that it has an opening section in which the displacement means is open so as to be visible in gaming machine E5, and the switching operation is performed in a state in which the displacement means is positioned in the center of the opening section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E5, gaming machine E6 makes it easier for players to see the switching action, improving attention to the switching action.

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E5 or E6, during the switching operation, one of the part of the first visible surface and the other part faces the front side, and the other faces a side different from the front side.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E5 and E6, gaming machine E7 makes it difficult to recognize the first visible surface during operation by making a portion of the first visible surface visible and the entire surface invisible during operation.

Gaming machine E8 is any one of gaming machines E1 to E7, and is provided with a second displacement means configured to be capable of blocking at least a portion of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to be switchable to a third state for making the first visible surface visible together with the second displacement means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E7, gaming machine E8 can improve the design freedom of the presentation position of the displacement means by making at least a portion of the second visible surface difficult to see using the second displacement means.

Gaming machine E9 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement means is configured to change the surface visible when viewed in a specified direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface as the displacement occurs.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E8, gaming machine E9 changes the surface that is visible when viewed in a specified direction between the first visible surface and the second visible surface, so the surface that is easily visible can be changed at will, regardless of the amount of change in the player's line of sight.

A gaming machine E10, which is a gaming machine E9, characterized in that the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E9, gaming machine E10 can increase the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state by changing the posture of the displacement means.

Gaming machine E11 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E9 or E10, it has an auxiliary means configured to be arranged close to the displacement means, and in the first state, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means is arranged away from the auxiliary means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E9 and E10, gaming machine E11 can arrange the auxiliary means close to the displacement means so that they can be viewed as one unit, and can also arrange the auxiliary means and the displacement means so that they can be viewed separately, allowing the displacement means to give multiple different impressions to the player.

The type of the auxiliary means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a means whose arrangement is fixed, or it may be a movable means.

Gaming machine E12 is characterized in that in gaming machine E11, the auxiliary means is configured to be switchable between a state in which it is viewed integrally with the displacement means and a state in which it is viewed separately from the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E11, gaming machine E12 can switch between viewing the displacement means and the auxiliary means as a single unit or separately, thereby increasing the variety of visible patterns relative to the number of components.

<Points at which the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means to the displacement amount of the installation means at the same time differs in each section>
A gaming machine F1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable, an arrangement means for arranging a first part on the displacement means, and a support means for supporting a second part of the arrangement means, wherein the support means is configured to be capable of controlling the arrangement of the second part relative to the first part during the displacement of the displacement means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that is equipped with a tiltable base arm 220, a rotating part 211 rotatably attached to the tilt tip side of the base arm 220, and a drive motor 222 that generates a driving force for rotating the rotating part 211, and is configured to rotate the rotating part 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (see, for example, JP 2016-116782 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the rotating part 211 is prone to wobbling at the tip of the base arm 220, and rotating the rotating part 211 while the base arm 220 is tilting and displacing may cause a malfunction in the mechanism. As a result, the rotational displacement of the rotating part 211 is assumed to be performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, and the degree of freedom of displacement is low.

In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of increasing the design freedom for the displacement of the displaceable parts.

In contrast, according to gaming machine F1, the placement means is supported at at least two points by the displacement means and the support means, and the two support points are configured to displace relative to one another during the displacement of the displacement means. The support means makes it possible to control the placement of the second part based on the first part, so that the placement means can be displaced during the displacement of the displacement means while being stably supported. This allows for greater design freedom in the displacement of the placement means (displaceable part).

The manner of the support means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be supported in a manner that restricts displacement in a guide groove formed in a fixed base means, or it may be connected to a displaceable second displacement means and supported. Furthermore, control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but also includes mechanical control, such as restricting (guiding) the displacement of the second part with a wall portion.

A gaming machine F2, characterized in that in the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace a first section and a second section, the support means has a first range in which the second part is supported when the displacement means displaces the first section, and a second range in which the second part is supported when the displacement means displaces the second section, and the direction in which the second part is displaced in the first range is different from the direction in which the second part is displaced in the second range.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F1, gaming machine F2 allows the displacement speed of the arrangement means to be varied even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, and the support means is configured to allow changes in the displacement direction of the second portion, so that the displacement of the arrangement means can be made smooth even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly.

Gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the support means in gaming machine F1 or F2 is equipped with a limiting portion that limits the displacement of the second portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F1 and F2, gaming machine F3 can limit the displacement of the second part at the boundary position (limiting part) between the first and second ranges, so that when the second part is displaced from the side with larger displacement to the side with smaller displacement, it is easier to stop the second part at the boundary position (limiting part) between the first and second ranges.

The type of load required to displace the second part relative to the first part is not limited in any way. For example, the second part may be pulled, or the second part may be pushed.

The type of the limiting section is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a type that sets an increase or decrease in the displacement resistance of the second section, or a type that switches the displacement direction of the second section.

A gaming machine F4, in which the first section is arranged closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means in the second section with respect to the displacement means as a reference is smaller than the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means in the first section with respect to the displacement means as a reference.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F2 and F3, gaming machine F4 can create a section where the relative amount of displacement of the arrangement means based on the displacement means becomes smaller at a mid-displacement position of the displacement means, so that in addition to the end position of the displacement of the displacement means, positions can be provided where the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily viewed as one unit. As a result, the number of positions where the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily viewed as one unit can be increased.

A gaming machine F5 is one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, characterized in that the displacement speed (ratio) of the second part based on the displacement speed of the first part is configured to be variable.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, gaming machine F5 can change the displacement speed of the second part of the arrangement means on the support means side even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, so that a motion presentation can be created in which the displacement speed of the arrangement means is variable through simple drive control of the drive means (constant speed drive).

Gaming machine F6 is any one of gaming machines F1 to F5, characterized in that the support means is configured to reduce the displacement speed at the displacement end of the second portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F1 to F5, gaming machine F6 can prevent the second part from bouncing back, making it easier to stop the placement means early at the end of the displacement.

The method for preventing the second part from bouncing back is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to reduce the displacement speed of the second part at the end of the displacement (e.g., the amount of displacement of the second part when the first part displaces a predetermined unit length), or it may be configured to restrict the displacement of the second part by a geometric design such as erecting a wall in the direction of displacement of the second part when the first part is stopped.

In addition, the method is not limited to reducing the amount of displacement of the second portion, and the displacement resistance of the second portion may be increased. For example, a load may be applied to the displacement end of the second portion by magnetic force or the like to increase the displacement resistance of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be increased by the biasing force of a coil spring or the like.

Gaming machine F7, characterized in that the support means in the gaming machine F6 is configured so that the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part intersects with the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part when the first part stops at the displacement end.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F6, gaming machine F7 has a support means that has the function of guiding the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part, thereby reducing the return displacement (bound) of the second part when the first part stops.

A gaming machine F8 is any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, and is characterized in that it is provided with a supported means that is displaceably supported by the arrangement means, and the supported means is configured to displace by an amount of displacement that corresponds to the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, gaming machine F8 can also produce complex effects using the supported means that displace in conjunction with the placement means.

The manner in which the supported means is displaced is not limited in any way. For example, the supported means may be displaced so as to move parallel to the disposition means on a predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced, or the supported means may be displaced in a manner different from the manner in which the disposition means is displaced (for example, a sliding displacement on a predetermined plane) (for example, a rotational displacement about a predetermined axis) at a position away from the predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced.

The manner in which the displacing means is displaced with respect to the amount of displacement of the displacing means is not limited in any way. For example, the displacing means may be a change in posture, or may be a displacement while maintaining the posture.

A gaming machine F9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F8, while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second portion has a section in which it can move back and forth in a direction intersecting the displacement trajectory of the first portion.

Gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F8, can achieve a displacement mode in which the amount of relative displacement of the second part with respect to the first part returns and changes (for example, increases and then decreases) while the first part is displaced, thereby realizing a displacement mode in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while the position of the second part is maintained.

A gaming machine F10, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine F8 or F9, the (relative) rotational displacement speed of the supported means with respect to the placement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F8 and F9, gaming machine F10 can make the displacement mode of the supported means the same as that of the displacement means, sandwiching the placement means. This gives the player the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own drive means.

Gaming machine F11 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines F1 to F10, the placement means includes a posture change means that changes its posture to switch the side facing the player between the first side and the second side as the position change means itself is displaced, and the posture change means is configured so that when the second portion is positioned at the end of the displacement, the first side or the second side is in a posture facing the player.

In addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, gaming machine F11 faces the first or second surface of the position change means toward the player, allowing the player to understand that the second portion has reached the end of the displacement, making it possible to easily understand the end of the presentation action by the displacement means.

A gaming machine F12 is any one of the gaming machines F1 to F11, and is configured so that electrical wiring is inserted into the arrangement means through the second part, and is provided with an arrangement means in which the electrical wiring is arranged inside and fixed to the second part, the arrangement means having an opening through which the electrical wiring can be inserted, and the opening is configured to be displaceable so as to avoid contact of the electrical wiring with the surrounding parts formed around it.

Gaming machine F12 has the same effects as any of gaming machines F1 to F11, and also prevents electrical wiring from coming into contact with surrounding areas.

The positioning means may be configured as a means for combining multiple components when the second part is composed of multiple components, or as a means for preventing a separate component from falling off the second part when a separate component is disposed in the second part.

<Characteristics AA Group>
a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means, a first dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, a second information acquisition means capable of acquiring second information based on the establishment of a second information acquisition condition, a second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and a second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means. a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means; a second dynamic display mode determination means for determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when a first identification information for indicating a specific first discrimination result or a second identification information for indicating a specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and a presentation mode execution means for executing a presentation mode during the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and a presentation mode selection means for selecting the presentation mode to be executed by the presentation mode execution means, wherein the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to gaming machine AA1, the presentation mode executed during the period when the second identification information is dynamically displayed varies depending on the number of pieces of second information stored, so that it is possible to execute a presentation that corresponds to the number of times that the second identification information can be dynamically displayed thereafter. Even if the second identification information for indicating a specific second judgment result is not displayed, the player's interest in the game thereafter can be maintained, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine AA2, characterized in that in the gaming machine AA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed in priority to the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the presentation mode execution means executes the presentation mode when a specific second dynamic display mode is being executed.

According to gaming machine AA2, the specific second dynamic display mode is executed, which has the effect of making the player motivated to store the second information, thereby increasing the player's interest.

A gaming machine AA3, in which the presentation mode is set for a period spanning the next dynamic display of the second identification information that is executed consecutively after the period of the second dynamic display mode that is executed corresponding to the number of stored second information ends, in the gaming machine AA1 or AA2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AA1 and AA2, gaming machine AA3 has the effect of increasing interest by making the multiple second dynamic display modes appear as a single dynamic display, since the presentation mode is configured to be executable across the dynamic display period of the second identification information that is executed multiple times in succession.

A gaming machine AA4, which is any one of gaming machines AA1 to AA3, has a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first state, a variable control means that changes the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established, and a pre-determination means that can determine in advance whether the specific condition is established before the specific condition is established, and the presentation mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific presentation mode based at least on the result of the pre-determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AA1 to AA3, gaming machine AA4 has the effect of creating anticipation for obtaining the second information because a specific presentation mode is selected based on the results of a prior determination of the establishment of a specific condition that will trigger the second information to be more easily obtained.

<Features AB group> (Performance can be changed depending on the number of reserved special charts 2 during the execution of the variable pattern)
a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means, a first dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, a second information acquisition means capable of acquiring second information based on the establishment of a second information acquisition condition, a second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and a second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means. a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means; a second dynamic display mode determination means for determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when a first identification information for indicating a specific first discrimination result or a second identification information for indicating a specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the gaming machine AB1 further comprising: a presentation mode execution means for executing a presentation mode during the dynamic display period of the first identification information; and a presentation mode selection means for selecting the presentation mode to be executed by the presentation mode execution means, the presentation mode selection means selecting the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is a presentation to show the result of a lottery held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the presentation mode that has been determined (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to gaming machine AB1, the presentation mode to be executed during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the number of stored second information, so that not only the result of the first discrimination but also information regarding the possibility of executing the second discrimination can be determined from the presentation mode, which has the effect of preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine AB2, characterized in that in the gaming machine AB1, the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information and the dynamic display mode of the dynamically displayed first identification information.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine AB1, gaming machine AB2 has the effect of being able to execute a variety of presentation modes, since the presentation mode is selected based on the first dynamic display mode being executed and the number of pieces of second information stored during that execution.

Gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the presentation mode is one in which a presentation related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information that is executed thereafter is executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AB1 and AB2, gaming machine AB3 has the effect that, when second information is stored, dynamic display of second identification information is started after the first identification information being executed is finished, and the presentation mode related to the second dynamic display mode can be executed before the dynamic display of the second identification information starts, so that the player can be made aware at an early stage that the dynamic display of the second identification information, which is executed with priority, is about to start.

A gaming machine AB4, which is any one of gaming machines AB1 to AB3, has a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first state, a variable control means that changes the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established, and a pre-determination means that can determine in advance whether the specific condition is established before the specific condition is established, and the presentation mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific presentation mode based at least on the result of the pre-determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AB1 to AB3, gaming machine AB4 has the effect of creating anticipation for obtaining the second information, since a specific presentation mode is selected based on the results of a prior determination of the establishment of a specific condition that will trigger the second information to be easily obtained.

<Characteristic AC group> (Uses special chart 1 change performance as a pseudo performance of special chart 2 change)
a first bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the first determination means becoming a predetermined first determination result; a second bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming a predetermined second determination result; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination based on the first determination being executed; and a second effect execution means for executing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination based on the second determination being executed, wherein the second effect execution means is configured to be capable of executing the second effect of a presentation pattern including at least a specific presentation pattern that is likely to be executed during a presentation period of the first effect when at least a predetermined specific condition is established.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to the gaming machine AC1, the first effect can be executed as an effect for indicating the result of the second determination, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine AC2, in which the second effect execution means in the gaming machine AC1 is capable of executing the second effect in an effect mode that includes at least a display mode showing the result of the first determination as the effect mode of the first effect.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1, the gaming machine AC2 can execute a second presentation using a display mode that shows the result of the first judgment, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AC2, the second performance execution means executes a second performance mode for indicating the result of the second discrimination within one performance indicating the result of the second discrimination, and the performance mode. A gaming machine AC3.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC2, the gaming machine AC3 has the effect of being able to produce more unexpected effects.

<Feature AD group> (Double display including probability change even for normal hits)
a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of first discrimination symbols on a display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then statically displaying them in a combination to show a first discrimination result by the first discrimination means, a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination, a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of second discrimination symbols on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then statically displaying them in a combination to show a second discrimination result by the second discrimination means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the first discrimination symbols are statically displayed on the display means in a specific combination to show a specific first discrimination result or when the second discrimination symbols are statically displayed on the display means in a specific combination to show a specific second discrimination result, The gaming machine AD1 is configured such that a first benefit can be awarded as the benefit when a combination of identification patterns corresponding to a first specific combination is stopped and a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit can be awarded when a combination of identification patterns corresponding to a second specific combination different from the first specific combination is stopped and displayed, the gaming machine has a determination means for determining the type of benefit to be awarded by the benefit awarding means, and the first dynamic display means, when a specific period is set, displays a multiple reach display mode in which one first identification pattern is dynamically displayed and the remaining identification patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be either of the first specific combination and the second specific combination, and then displays the first identification patterns in the specific combination.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by announcing the results of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot using a combination of multiple symbols, and then awarding different prizes depending on the type of symbol displayed (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, some of the symbols that make up a combination that does not award a lower bonus than the bonus desired by the player are displayed statically, which causes the player to lose interest in the game before the result is announced.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players.

According to gaming machine AD1, when identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination during a specific period, the specific combination is displayed after passing through multiple reach display modes, so that it is possible to prolong the expectation that both the combination corresponding to the first special benefit and the combination corresponding to the second special benefit will be displayed, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine AD2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine AD1, the determination means determines the first benefit when the specific first judgment result occurs during the specific period.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine AD1, gaming machine AD2 has the effect of making it easier to have expectations that the second benefit will be awarded even if the first judgment is made during the specific period, since a specific combination is displayed through a multiple reach display mode, even during the specific period when the first benefit is determined by the determination means.

In the gaming machine AD2, the determination means determines the second benefit when the specific second discrimination result is obtained during the specific period, and the second dynamic display means, when a specific period is set, displays a special multiple reach display mode in which one second discrimination pattern is dynamically displayed and the remaining discrimination patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be any one of two or more different second specific combinations, and then displays the second discrimination patterns in the specific combination. A gaming machine AD3 characterized in that.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AD2, gaming machine AD3 has the effect of allowing a player to recognize early on that a second benefit advantageous to the player will be granted without fail if a specific second judgment result is obtained during the specific period.

<Feature AE group> (Break ED control when hitting a certain probability)
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result; a bonus game type determination means for determining the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means from a plurality of types; a specific area through which a game ball can pass when the specific bonus game is executed, and a setting means for setting a favorable game state that is more favorable to the player than a normal game state as a game state that is set after the execution of the bonus game when the game ball passes through the specific area until an end condition is established; and a suggestion mode execution means for executing a suggestion mode that can suggest the game state that will be set after the execution of the bonus game when the bonus game ends, wherein the suggestion mode is configured by combining a first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode, and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the normal game state and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the favorable game state are configured in the same period.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game is decided by a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and different winning games are played depending on the type of winning game. During a specific type of winning game, a variable ball entry area that can be changed between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult to enter is changed to a state where the ball can enter, and when the game ball enters the area, the game state after the winning game becomes a game state favorable to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Gazette No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, even when a specific type of winning game is executed, there are cases where the game ball does not enter the variable ball entry area, which causes an increase in the control load in the notification control.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that can reduce the control load.

According to the gaming machine AE1, by setting the second suggestive mode to the same period, it is possible to suppress the variation of the period for displaying the suggestive mode, while setting the mode suggested by the ball entry state in a specific area, which has the effect of facilitating the notification control of the suggestive mode at the end of the bonus game and reducing the control load.

The gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that it has a suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode to be executed by the suggestion mode execution means in response to the type of bonus game to be executed when the bonus game is executed in the gaming machine AE1, and a switching means capable of switching the second suggestion mode, which is set when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the specific bonus game, to a second suggestion mode corresponding to a game other than the specific bonus game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AE1, gaming machine AE2 has the effect of suppressing the control load and executing the correct suggestion, because even if the suggestion mode is set at the start of bonus play to suppress the concentration of control load at the end of the bonus play, the suggestion mode can be switched to a suggestion mode corresponding to the normal play state without changing the period for displaying the suggestion mode.

<Feature AF group> (Setting different lengths of ED period depending on the type of jackpot)
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; a bonus game type determination means for determining the type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means from a plurality of types; and a period setting means for setting a period of a length corresponding to the type of the bonus game being executed as a period for indicating the end of the bonus game based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition during the execution of the bonus game.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

The gaming machine AF1 can set different periods depending on the type of bonus game, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine AF2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AF1, it is provided with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect using the period set by the period setting means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AF1, gaming machine AF2 can execute specific effects at different periods set according to the type of bonus game, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine AF3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a period switching means that can switch the length of the period set by the period setting means to a different length when a variable condition is established during the execution of the bonus game in the gaming machine AF1 or AF2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AF1 and AF2, gaming machine AF3 can also vary the length of the period when a variable condition is met during bonus play, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

<Feature AG group> (ED period varies depending on whether or not V is won)
a specific area through which a gaming ball can pass while the bonus game is being executed; a game state setting means for setting an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player while the bonus game is being executed, based on the gaming ball passing through the specific area while the bonus game is being executed; and a specific period setting means for setting a specific period to indicate the end of the bonus game while a predetermined end condition is established while the bonus game is being executed, wherein the specific period setting means is configured to be able to set the specific period of different lengths depending on whether the gaming ball has passed through the specific area while the bonus game is being executed or not.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to gaming machine AG1, it is possible to set specific periods of different lengths depending on whether or not the gaming ball has passed through a specific area during bonus play, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine AG2 is characterized in that the gaming machine AG1 has a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance during the specific period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AG1, gaming machine AG2 can execute specific effects within a specific period of time, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that the specific presentation in gaming machine AG2 includes at least a notification mode for notifying the player of the passage of the gaming ball into the specific area during the bonus game.

With gaming machine AG3, the specific effects include a notification mode, which has the effect of providing players with a game that is easy to understand.

<Feature AH Group> (Limitation control of button operation)
A gaming machine AH1 having a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine AH1 being characterized by having an operation means that can be operated by a player, a setting execution means that can execute a setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means, and a restriction means that restricts the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operation means when a specific condition is established during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

Traditionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, many machines are configured to notify (stop display) the lottery result via a specified special symbol changing period, and use the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped display (special symbol changing period) to execute various effects (changing effects) so that players do not quickly become bored with the game. Among these, there are machines that are configured to prepare multiple presentation modes in advance, and to differ the manner of the changing effects executed during the special symbol changing period for each presentation mode.

In a gaming machine configured in this way, different variable presentations can be provided to the player by switching presentation modes, which prevents the player from becoming bored early on with the game due to the same variable presentations being provided all the time. Furthermore, there are gaming machines that allow the player to switch presentation modes at will by operating an operating means that the player can operate (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-249877 A). In such a gaming machine, the player can select the presentation mode that he or she is most interested in from among multiple presentation modes, which prevents the player from becoming bored early on with the game due to a variable presentation that he or she is less interested in being executed. Furthermore, the player's interest in the game can be improved because he or she needs to operate the operating means to switch presentation modes.

However, as mentioned above, if the player is allowed to switch the presentation mode at any time by operating the operating means, for example, just before the result of the special pattern lottery is frozen and displayed, or when a short period of change is set as the special pattern change period, the switching of the presentation mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery, resulting in a problem of reduced motivation to operate the operating means.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase players' motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine AH1, if a specific condition is met during the dynamic display period of the identification information, it is possible to restrict the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means, thereby preventing malfunctions caused by the operation of the operating means.

A gaming machine AH2, characterized in that in the gaming machine AH1, a dynamic display period determination means determines a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a gaming state setting means is capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is satisfied, and the specific condition is set as at least one of the conditions for satisfaction that the short gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AH1, gaming machine AH2 can regulate the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means during a short game state, and can prevent the player from having difficulty understanding the determination result of the determination means due to the execution of the setting execution means. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine AH3 is characterized in that it has a presentation mode setting means capable of setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode based on the setting executed by the setting execution means in the gaming machine AH1 or AH2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AH1 and AH2, gaming machine AH3 can set different presentation modes based on the operation of the operating means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

AH4 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3 has a specific setting means capable of executing a specific setting, and the regulating means is configured to be capable of executing the specific setting by the specific setting means without causing the setting execution means to execute the setting based on the operation of the operating means when the specific condition is set.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AH1 to AH3, gaming machine AH4 has the effect of making the operation of the operating means a meaningful act by providing the player who operated the operating means with an action resulting from the operation of the operating means, since the specific setting is executed even when the execution of the setting is restricted by operating the operating means during a period when a specific condition is met.

A gaming machine AH4 is characterized in that it has a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect that can suggest information about the identification information that is displayed before the identification information is displayed in a stopped state based on the specific setting. A gaming machine AH5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AH4, gaming machine AH5 has the effect that, when a specific condition is met, the information of the identification information displayed in a stopped state can be identified by a suggestive effect before the stopped state is displayed, and when a specific condition is met, a variety of effects can be executed by operating the device, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored.

<Feature AI group> (Notification of advantageous periods spanning multiple game states)
a game machine having a determination means capable of executing a determination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state, a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and is different from the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting the second game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is ended, a third gaming state can be set when a first setting condition is established while a skill state is set, and the first gaming state can be set when a second setting condition different from the first setting condition is established while the third gaming state is set, and when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming machine AI1 is characterized in having an advantageous period determination means for determining an advantageous period based on the period until the second setting condition is established, and an informing means for informing of the advantageous period determined by the advantageous period determination means.

Conventionally, when a favorable game state (for example, a time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, there are devices that notify the player of the period during which that favorable game state will continue (number of times the special pattern will change). Specifically, there are devices that display "100 times" as the remaining period display mode indicating the period during which the favorable game state will continue, and subtract one from the value of the remaining period display mode each time a special pattern lottery is executed. This allows the player to easily grasp how many more times the special pattern lottery can be executed during the currently set favorable game state.

In addition, some recent gaming machines are capable of setting multiple types of advantageous game states that are advantageous to the player, and some of these advantageous game states can be set to a first advantageous game state (e.g., a time-saving state) and a second advantageous game state that is even more advantageous than the first advantageous game state (e.g., a special state).

In a gaming machine configured in this way, for example, when a first advantageous gaming state (e.g., a time-saving state) is set, it is possible to inform the player of the period (remaining period) during which the first advantageous gaming state will continue, but there is a problem in that it is not possible to inform the player of which gaming state will be set after the first advantageous gaming state ends. In other words, when the first advantageous gaming state ends, the player cannot know whether a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state will be set, or whether a gaming state that is less advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state will be set, making it difficult for the player to know what they should aim for during the first advantageous gaming state, which reduces their motivation to play.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game by increasing the player's motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine AI1, when a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set, the notification means notifies the player of the advantageous period determined based on the period until the first gaming state is set again. Therefore, even in a gaming machine that has multiple gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the player can know the period during which the gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine AI2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AI1, a suggestion effect execution means is provided that is capable of executing a suggestion effect for suggesting the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means when the notification means has notified that the advantageous period is in progress.

The gaming machine AI2 can notify the player of the advantageous period until the first gaming state is set, while also suggesting the currently set gaming state, which has the effect of making the player interested in the content of the suggestive performance that is executed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AI2, the suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a past suggestion effect to suggest the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means when the advantageous period is notified by the notification means. Gaming machine AI3.

According to the gaming machine AI3, the suggestion effect execution means can suggest to the player the game state that was set in the past. Therefore, it is possible to predict the current game state based on the contents of the past suggestion effects, and to analyze the past game contents during the advantageous period, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine AI4, characterized in that in gaming machine AI2 or AI3, the notification means is capable of displaying a remaining period display mode on the display means to indicate the remaining period of the advantageous period, and the suggestion performance execution means is capable of suggesting the currently set gaming state or a gaming state that was set in the past by varying the remaining period display mode.

According to the gaming machine AI4, by varying the remaining period display mode for showing the remaining advantageous period, a suggestive presentation regarding the game status is executed, so that the suggestive presentation can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for a player who is closely watching the remaining advantageous period, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine AI5 is any one of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, and is characterized by having a second suggestion presentation means capable of suggesting the timing when the first set condition may be met when the notification means has notified the player that the advantageous period is in progress.

The gaming machine AI5 allows the player to predict the timing when the game state will change during the advantageous period, which has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too quickly during the advantageous period.

A gaming machine AI6 is any one of the gaming machines AI1 to AI5, characterized in that it has an advantageous notification means capable of notifying the player of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player between the second gaming state and the third gaming state.

The gaming machine AI6 allows the player to grasp the relative merits of multiple game states that are set during the advantageous period, which can generate interest by predicting which game state is currently set.

<Feature AJ Group> (Variably display one pattern row with multiple pattern display control)
A gaming machine AJ1 having a display means for displaying suggestive information that can suggest a discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the suggestive information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when a specific display mode for indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, wherein the suggestive information is set to at least a first pattern row composed of a pattern row composed of a plurality of patterns, and a second pattern row composed of a pattern row composed of a plurality of patterns different from the first pattern row, and the dynamic display means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the second pattern row in a second direction different from the first direction during a period in which the first pattern row is dynamically displayed in a first direction.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a third symbol in a variable manner as identification information for indicating the result of a special symbol lottery (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417). In addition, there have been machines that execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, and allow the player to play while expecting a jackpot win. In addition, in general gaming machines, one symbol row is composed of multiple third symbols (for example, third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and a variable pattern display is executed using multiple (for example, three) of the symbol rows, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, an effect (for example, a reach effect) that increases the expectation of a jackpot win is executed. In this way, by using multiple symbol rows to change the third symbol and perform a change effect to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot, the player's expectations of winning the jackpot can be gradually increased, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the order of the symbols that make up the symbol string is not changed, and the third symbol is simply displayed in a variable manner for each symbol string. This means that the only variations available are, for example, changing the speed at which each symbol string is displayed, changing the direction in which each symbol string is displayed, or changing the size at which each symbol string is displayed. This creates a problem in that there is a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game by improving the effect of the variable presentation using the variable display of the symbol string.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

According to gaming machine AJ1, the first and second symbol rows are dynamically displayed in different directions, making it easier to distinguish between the first and second symbol rows, and the result of the distinction can be more easily determined from the suggestive information.

A gaming machine AJ2 is characterized in that it has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed in the gaming machine AJ1, the first symbol row is configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction based on the start of the dynamic display period, and the second symbol row is dynamically displayed in the second direction based on the establishment of a specific condition at a position where the symbols dynamically displayed in the first symbol row and the symbols constituting the second symbol row at least partially overlap with each other.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AJ1, gaming machine AJ2 has the effect of dynamically displaying the first and second symbol rows at overlapping positions, making it possible to perform effects that make effective use of the display area.

A gaming machine AJ3 is characterized in that it has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed in the gaming machine AJ2, and the first and second pattern rows are configured to be dynamically displayed in the first and second directions, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AJ2, gaming machine AJ3 has the effect of increasing the interest in the game because the first and second pattern rows are dynamically displayed in the first and second directions, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period.

A gaming machine AJ4 is any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3, and has a display control means capable of controlling the display of the suggestion information, and the display control means is capable of controlling the display of the first pattern row so as to display the discrimination result according to the display mode of the first pattern row.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine AJ3, gaming machine AJ4 displays the discrimination result using the display mode of the first symbol row, so the display mode of the dynamic display of the first symbol row can be controlled based on the discrimination result, and the display mode of the dynamic display of the second symbol row can be freely set. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect in the dynamic display of the suggestive information, and increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine AJ4 has a first display image layer capable of dynamically displaying the first symbol row and a second display image layer capable of dynamically displaying the second symbol row, and the gaming machine is configured such that at least a portion of a first display area in the first display image layer and a second display area in the second display image layer overlap, and in the area where the first display area and the second display area overlap, the first symbol row can be displayed so as to be visible to a player in priority to the second symbol row. A gaming machine AJ5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AJ4, gaming machine AJ5 displays the first symbol row so that it is more visible to the player when the first symbol row and the second symbol row overlap. This has the effect of making effective use of the display area while still displaying the display mode showing the determination result in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

A gaming machine AJ6, in which the display control means in the gaming machine AJ4 or AJ5 is capable of displaying and controlling the first and second symbol rows so that the multiple symbols constituting the first and second symbol rows are arranged in a predetermined order to form a combined symbol row.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AJ4 and AJ5, gaming machine AJ6 can dynamically display the first and second symbol rows as a combined symbol row, making the player believe that a combined symbol row is formed. Among these, the first and second symbol rows can be dynamically displayed in the opposite direction, providing the player with a surprising presentation, which has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine AJ6, the display control means is capable of display control so that it is easier to dynamically display the first and second pattern rows as the combined pattern row when the discrimination result is other than the specific discrimination result than when the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine AJ7.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine AJ6, gaming machine AJ7 makes it more difficult to dynamically display the first and second symbol strings as the combined symbol string when the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first and second symbol strings is in a different form from the dynamic display of the second symbol string, it is possible to heighten the expectation for a specific discrimination result, and it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

<Feature AK group> (Velo control of the V-sure machine is performed based on the number of balls entered by the attacker)
a first detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the first specific area; a second detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second specific area; a guide path for guiding a game ball that has passed through the first specific area to the second specific area; and a variable means for varying the second specific area between an allowable state in which a game ball can pass and a restricted state in which it is difficult to pass, the variable means being configured to vary the second specific area from the restricted state to the allowable state based on the detection of a predetermined number of game balls by the first detection means until a variable condition is met.

Conventionally, there have been gaming machines (so-called V-guaranteed machines) that provide a specific area within an attacker that is opened during a jackpot game, and when a gaming ball passes through the specific area during a jackpot game, set a high probability state after the jackpot game ends (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2015-119807 A). In such gaming machines, the percentage at which the high probability state is set can be specified in advance by setting a first state in which the gaming ball is likely to pass through the specific area for a predetermined period based on the elapsed time since the start of the jackpot game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the first state is set based on the time that has elapsed since a jackpot game was played. For example, if a malfunction of the gaming machine occurs during a jackpot game that prevents the gaming ball from entering the attacker, the predetermined period during which the first state is set may pass, causing a problem that reduces the player's motivation to play.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game by increasing the player's motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine AK1, the variable means is changed to an allowable state based on the measurement results of the gaming balls that have entered the variable ball entry means, so it is possible to pass the gaming balls into the second specific area depending on the number of balls that have entered the variable ball entry means, which has the effect of making the player interested in the number of balls that have entered the variable ball entry means and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine AK2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine AK1, the variable means is changed to the permissible state during a period in which the gaming ball that is the predetermined number of times in the first specific area can reach the variable means in a state changed to the permissible state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AK1, gaming machine AK2 has the effect of making it possible to cause a predetermined number of gaming balls that have passed through a first specific area to enter a second specific area, and by controlling gaming balls that pass through the second specific area, it is possible to limit the number of balls that enter the second specific area.

A gaming machine AK3 is characterized in that it has a period discrimination means capable of discriminating the period from when the predetermined number of gaming balls pass through the first specific area until the gaming ball is detected by the second detection means, and an abnormality processing means capable of executing an abnormality processing based on the discrimination result of the period discrimination means, in the gaming machine AK1 or AK2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AK1 and AK2, gaming machine AK3 has the effect of being able to detect malfunctions early on, such as when a gaming ball remains stuck on the guideway despite having passed a predetermined number of gaming balls through the first specific area.

A gaming machine AK4 is characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines AK1 to AK3, the termination condition is set to be met when a period of time that is shorter than the period of time it takes for the next gaming ball to reach the variable means has elapsed after the predetermined number of gaming balls have been detected by the second detection means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK3, the gaming machine AK4 has the effect of being able to reliably cause the predetermined number of gaming balls to enter the second specific area.

A gaming machine AK5 is any one of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, characterized in that it has a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus that is advantageous to the player based on the detection of a gaming ball by the second detection means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, gaming machine AK5 has the effect of making the player motivated to land the gaming ball in the second specific area even when a bonus game is played, thereby preventing the bonus game from becoming boring.

<Feature AL group> (By changing the pattern row, some of the patterns in the pattern row are switched)
a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification pattern; a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification pattern indicating a specific identification result is displayed after the identification pattern is dynamically displayed; and a bonus type determination means for determining a bonus type to be awarded by the bonus awarding means, wherein the gaming machine has a determination means for determining a dynamic display period including at least a period during which the identification pattern is dynamically displayed; and a setting means for setting the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means so that during a first period, a first identification pattern is displayed as the identification pattern indicating a first result, and during a second period, at least a second identification pattern different from the first identification pattern is displayed to indicate a second result different from the first result.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a third symbol in a variable manner as identification information to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery. In addition, there have been machines that execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while expecting a jackpot win. In addition, in general gaming machines, one symbol row is formed by multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and a pattern variable display is executed using multiple (e.g., three) of the symbol rows, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, a performance (e.g., a reach performance) that increases the expectation of a jackpot win is executed. In this way, by executing a variable performance to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win or not while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectation of a jackpot win can be gradually increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This causes a problem in that players get bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players by suppressing the decline in their desire to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

According to the gaming machine AL1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed in the second period during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, so that the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine AL2 is characterized in that in gaming machine AL1, the dynamic display means is capable of displaying the first identification symbol in a static manner at the end of the first period, and the second period is a period at least after the first period has elapsed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AL1, gaming machine AL2 can notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the first period has ended and the second period has begun, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine AL3 is characterized in that in gaming machine AL2, the dynamic display means is capable of displaying, as the first result, the first identification pattern to indicate that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AL2, gaming machine AL3 can notify the player of the determination result of the determination means before the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed, so that players who wish to quickly understand the determination result of the determination means can focus on the dynamic display of the identification pattern executed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine AL4 is characterized in that in gaming machine AL3, the dynamic display means is capable of displaying the second identification pattern to indicate the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means as the second result.

Gaming machine AL4 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine AL3. That is, after the end of the second period, an identification pattern for indicating the bonus type can be displayed. In other words, after displaying the discrimination result of the discrimination means, the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means can be displayed. Therefore, after notifying the player that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means can be notified to the player, which has the effect of enabling the dynamic display of the second period to be executed with at least a sense of security that bonus play will be executed.

In the gaming machine AL4, the bonus type determination means determines one of a plurality of bonus types including at least a first bonus type and a second bonus type that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus type, and the second identification pattern is displayed in a display mode that includes at least information for indicating the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means. In the gaming machine AL5,

In addition to the effect of gaming machine AL4, gaming machine AL5 has the effect of allowing the player to predict the determined bonus means even during the period when the second identification pattern is dynamically displayed, since the display mode of the second identification pattern indicates the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine AL6, which has a pattern row setting means capable of setting a pattern row in which the multiple identification patterns dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are displayed in a predetermined order, the dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying the identification patterns based on the pattern row set by the pattern row setting means, and the pattern row setting means is capable of setting a second pattern row in which the first identification pattern forming at least a part of the first pattern row set during a first period is switched to the second identification pattern.

According to gaming machine AL6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine AL5, a second pattern row is set in which the first identification pattern forming at least a part of the first pattern row is switched to the second identification pattern, so the number of identification patterns in the first pattern row and the number of identification patterns in the second pattern row can be made the same. Therefore, there is no need to vary the dynamic display mode of the identification patterns executed by the dynamic display means according to the type of pattern row to be set, which has the effect of reducing the processing load for dynamically displaying the identification patterns.

A gaming machine AL7, characterized in that in the gaming machine AL6, the symbol row setting means can form the first symbol row by overlapping first identification symbols to indicate the same discrimination result of the discrimination means, and when setting the second symbol row, one of the overlapping first identification symbols can be switched to the second identification symbol.

According to the gaming machine AL7, the first identification symbols that are overlapping in the first symbol string are switched to the second identification symbols, so that even during the second period, it is possible to confirm each of the first identification symbols that were displayed in the dynamic display executed during the first period. This has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Feature AM group> (Release the restriction by another operation while the button operation is being restricted)
A gaming machine AM1 having a display means for displaying an identification information indicating a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine AM1 having an operable operation means, an operation discrimination means capable of discriminating at least a first operation and a second operation different from the first operation as types of operation for the operation means, a setting execution means capable of executing a setting based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, and a restriction means for restricting the setting execution means from executing the first setting when the operation discrimination means discriminates the first operation, and the setting execution means is capable of executing the first setting when the operation discrimination means discriminates the second operation during the restriction by the restriction means.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, many machines are configured to notify (stop display) the lottery result through a specified special symbol changing period, and various effects (changing effects) are executed during the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped display (special symbol changing period), in order to prevent players from quickly becoming bored with the game. Among these, there are machines that are configured to prepare multiple performance modes in advance, and to vary the manner of the changing effects executed during the special symbol changing period for each performance mode (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-249877 A).

In a gaming machine configured in this way, different variable presentations can be provided to the player by switching presentation modes, which prevents the player from becoming bored early on with the game due to the same variable presentations being provided all the time. Furthermore, some gaming machines allow the player to switch presentation modes at will by operating an operating means that the player can operate. In such gaming machines, the player can select the presentation mode that interests him/her most from among multiple presentation modes, which prevents the player from becoming bored early on with the game due to a variable presentation that he/she finds less interesting being executed. Furthermore, the player's interest in the game can be improved because he/she needs to operate the operating means to switch presentation modes.

However, as mentioned above, if the player is allowed to switch the presentation mode at any time by operating the operating means, for example, just before the result of the special pattern lottery is frozen and displayed, or when a short period of change is set as the special pattern change period, the switching of the presentation mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery, resulting in a problem of reduced motivation to operate the operating means.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase players' motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine AM1, even if the first setting based on the first operation is restricted, the first setting can be executed by executing the second operation. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means in an attempt to execute various operations.

A gaming machine AM1, the setting execution means is capable of executing a second setting different from the first setting when the operation determination means determines that the first operation is performed during the regulation by the regulation means. A gaming machine AM2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AM1, gaming machine AM2 executes the second setting when the first operation is executed during regulation, which makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the setting execution means does not execute anything even though the first operation is executed. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operation means.

A gaming machine AM3, which is characterized in that it has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means in the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is satisfied, and the restricting means is capable of restricting the execution of the first setting by the setting execution means when the short gaming state is set and the operation determining means has determined that the first operation has been performed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AM1 and AM2, gaming machine AM3 can regulate the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means during a short game state, which prevents the player from having difficulty understanding the determination result of the determination means due to the execution of the setting execution means. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine AM3 is characterized in that it has a presentation mode setting means capable of setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode based on the setting executed by the setting execution means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AM3, gaming machine AM4 can set different presentation modes based on the operation of the operating means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

Among any of the gaming machines AM1 to AM4, the operation means is characterized in that it has a first operation section for executing the first operation, and a second operation section different from the first operation section for executing the second operation. Am5 is a gaming machine characterized in that it has a first operation section for executing the first operation, and a second operation section different from the first operation section for executing the second operation.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AM1 to AM4, gaming machine AM5 has the advantage that, when performing the first operation and when performing the second operation, different operation parts are used, which prevents the player from mistakenly performing the first operation and the second operation. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine AM5, characterized in that the second operation unit is located in a location that is more difficult for a player to operate during a game than the first operation unit. A gaming machine AM6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AM5, gaming machine AM6 can vary the ease of operation of each operation unit, making it possible to set a first operation using a first operation unit as a normal operation and a second operation using a second operation unit as an emergency operation. This has the effect of preventing the player from worrying about which operation to perform.

<Feature AN group> (Perform different operations by operating during button operation restriction control)
A gaming machine AN1 having a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine AN1 having an operation means that can be operated by a player, a first setting execution means that can execute a first setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means, a restriction means that restricts the execution of the first setting based on the operation of the operation means, and a second setting execution means that executes a second setting different from the first setting when the operation means is operated while the execution of the first setting is restricted by the restriction means.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a third symbol in a variable manner as identification information to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery. In addition, there have been machines that execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while expecting a jackpot win. In addition, in general gaming machines, one symbol row is formed by multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and a pattern variable display is executed using multiple (e.g., three) of the symbol rows, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, a performance (e.g., a reach performance) that increases the expectation of a jackpot win is executed. In this way, by executing a variable performance to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win or not while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectation of a jackpot win can be gradually increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This causes a problem in that players get bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players by suppressing the decline in their desire to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

According to the gaming machine AL1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed in the second period during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, so that the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine AN1, if the operating means is operated while the first setting is restricted, the second setting is executed, which makes it possible to prevent a situation in which nothing is executed despite the operation of the operating means. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means.

A gaming machine AN2 in which the regulating means is capable of regulating the execution of the first setting when a specific condition is met during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AN1, gaming machine AN2 has the effect of preventing the player from having difficulty understanding the results of the dynamic display of the identification information due to the execution of the first setting being restricted by the restricting means while the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed.

A gaming machine AN3 having a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is satisfied, and the restriction means is capable of restricting the setting execution means from executing the first setting when the short game state is set and the operation determination means has determined that the first operation has been performed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AN1 and AN2, gaming machine AN3 can regulate the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means during a short game state, which prevents the player from having difficulty understanding the determination result of the determination means due to the execution of the setting execution means. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine AN4 is characterized in that it has a presentation mode setting means capable of setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode based on the first setting executed by the setting execution means in the gaming machine AN3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AN3, gaming machine AN4 can set different presentation modes based on the operation of the operating means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

Among any of the gaming machines AN1 to AN4, the operation means is characterized in that it has a first operation section for performing a first operation, and a second operation section different from the first operation section for performing a second operation different from the first operation. Am5 is a gaming machine characterized in that it has a first operation section for performing a first operation, and a second operation section different from the first operation.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AN1 to AN4, gaming machine AN5 has the advantage that, when performing the first operation and when performing the second operation, different operation units are used, which prevents the player from mistakenly performing the first operation and the second operation. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

Gaming machine AN6 is characterized in that in gaming machine AN5, the second operation unit is located in a location that is more difficult for a player to operate during a game than the first operation unit.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AN5, gaming machine AN6 makes it possible to set the ease of operation of each operation unit to be different, so that a first operation using a first operation unit is a normal operation and a second operation using a second operation unit is an emergency operation. This has the effect of preventing the player from worrying about which operation to perform.

<Characteristic AO group> (If you change stages when it is difficult to do so, it is your chance)
A gaming machine AO1 having a display means for displaying identification information showing a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine having an operation means operable by a player, a presentation mode setting means for setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode as presentation modes based on the operation of the operation means, and a period setting means for setting a first period during which setting of the presentation mode by the presentation mode setting means can be executed, and a second period during which setting of the presentation mode is more difficult to execute than the first period, and the gaming machine is characterized in that when the presentation mode is set during the second period, more advantageous information can be provided to the player than when it is set during the first period.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a third symbol in a variable manner as identification information to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery. In addition, there have been machines that execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while expecting a jackpot win. In addition, in general gaming machines, one symbol row is formed by multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and a pattern variable display is executed using multiple (e.g., three) of the symbol rows, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, a performance (e.g., a reach performance) that increases the expectation of a jackpot win is executed. In this way, by executing a variable performance to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win or not while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectation of a jackpot win can be gradually increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This causes a problem in that players get bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players by suppressing the decline in their desire to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

According to the gaming machine AL1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed in the second period during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, so that the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine AO1, when a presentation mode is set during the second period in which it is difficult to set a presentation mode, advantageous information can be provided to the player, so that the player can play the game while hoping that the presentation mode will be set during the second period. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means and increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine AO2, characterized in that in the gaming machine AO1, the presentation mode setting means is capable of setting a third presentation mode different from the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode when executing the setting of the presentation mode during the second period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AO1, gaming machine AO2 has the effect of providing the player with an easily understandable presentation by setting the third presentation mode, which can inform the player that a presentation mode has been set during the second period.

A gaming machine AO4, which is any one of the gaming machines AO1 to AO3, has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is satisfied, and the period setting means is capable of setting the second period when the short gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AO1 to AO3, the gaming machine AO4 makes it difficult for the presentation mode to be set during a short game state, which prevents the player from having difficulty understanding the discrimination result of the discrimination means due to the presentation mode being set. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine AO5 is any one of the gaming machines AO1 to AO4, characterized in that it has a notification means capable of notifying a player that the second period will be set by the period setting means before the second period is set.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AO1 to AO4, the gaming machine AO5 allows the player to know in advance that the second period will be set, and therefore allows the second period to be set with the desired presentation mode set. This has the effect of preventing the second period from being set in a presentation mode that the player does not want, which would reduce the player's motivation to play.

<Feature AP group> (Advance stage change easiness by predicting ahead)
a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means, an identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result is statically displayed on the display means. A gaming machine AP1 having information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an information acquisition condition, information storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, a determination means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine AP1 further comprising: a pre-determination means for pre-determining the information stored in the information storage means before the determination by the determination means based on the information is executed; and a switching means for switching the presentation mode from a first presentation mode to a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode when a switching condition is established, the switching condition being more likely to be established when the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means is a second pre-determination result different from the first pre-determination result than when the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means is a first pre-determination result.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a third symbol in a variable manner as identification information to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery. In addition, there have been machines that execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while expecting a jackpot win. In addition, in general gaming machines, one symbol row is formed by multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and a pattern variable display is executed using multiple (e.g., three) of the symbol rows, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, a performance (e.g., a reach performance) that increases the expectation of a jackpot win is executed. In this way, by executing a variable performance to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win or not while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectation of a jackpot win can be gradually increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This causes a problem in that players get bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players by suppressing the decline in their desire to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

According to the gaming machine AL1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed in the second period during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, so that the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine AP1, the ease with which the switching condition is met can be varied depending on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means, so that the player can predict the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means when the presentation mode is switched, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine AP2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AP1, it has an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation discrimination means that can discriminate the operation on the operation means, and the switching condition can be established when the operation is discriminated by the operation discrimination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AP1, gaming machine AP2 can also satisfy the switching condition when the player operates the operating means, which has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means and preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

A gaming machine AP3, characterized in that in the gaming machine AP2, the switching means is capable of switching from the first presentation mode to a third presentation mode different from the second presentation mode when the result of the determination by the pre-determination means is the second pre-determination result.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine AP2, gaming machine AP3 has a third presentation mode, which makes it possible to inform the player that the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means is the second pre-determination result. This has the effect of providing the player with a presentation that is easy to understand.

Any of the gaming machines AP1 to AP3, the gaming machine AP4 has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is established, and the switching condition is more difficult to establish when the short gaming state is set than when the short gaming state is not set.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AP1 to AP3, the gaming machine AP4 can make it difficult to switch presentation modes during a short game state, which prevents the player from having difficulty understanding the results of the discrimination means due to the presentation mode being set. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine AP5 is any one of the gaming machines AP1 to AP4, characterized in that it has a notification means capable of notifying a player that the short game state will be set by the game state setting means before the short game state is set.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AP1 to AP4, gaming machine AP5 allows the player to know in advance that a short play state will be set, so that the player is motivated to operate the operating means to achieve the switching condition before the short play state is set. This makes it easier to set the short play state with the desired presentation mode set, and has the effect of preventing the short play state from being set in a presentation mode that the player does not want, which would reduce the player's motivation to play.

<5066 Series>
<Feature A group> (When the number of times the special chart 2 lottery is performed using the special chart 2 reservation acquired during the time reduction exceeds a certain number of times, the probability of receiving a favorable bonus by the special chart 2 lottery increases)
a setting control means for causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that the specific game is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating the second discrimination result when a specific period is set.

According to gaming machine A1, when a specific period is set, it is possible to determine that the result is the second judgment, and therefore when a specific period is set, the result is determined to be the second judgment, and the specific setting is set, so that the specific setting is set at a timing different from normal times, and this has the effect of increasing interest in the game by not only executing a specific game, but also increasing the expectation for the period in which the specific period is set.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine A2 is characterized in that it has a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, the acquisition means is capable of acquiring first information as the information based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, and is capable of acquiring second information as the information based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means, and the discrimination means is configured to be able to discriminate the second discrimination result based on the second information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 is configured so that the second judgment result can be determined by having the ball enter the second ball entry means, so that the value of the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means can be varied, and when a specific period is set, the game can be played as if the second information was stored, and there is an effect of increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the game.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the specific setting set based on the second discrimination result being determined in gaming machine A1 or A2 is configured to be set for a longer period than the specific setting set after the specific game is played.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A1 and A2, gaming machine A3 makes it possible to vary the period during which a specific setting is set depending on the results of the determination, which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing interest.

<Feature B Group> (If you win both the jackpot and the time-saving bonus in one special drawing, you will receive more special bonuses than if you won only one of them)
a setting control means for causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is obtained, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating between the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result; a setting control means for causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is obtained, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating between the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result in a redundant manner.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine B1 is configured to be able to discriminate between the first and second discrimination results in a redundant manner, so that a specific setting can be set even when the specific condition is not met, and this has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the timing at which the specific setting is set.

A gaming machine B2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1, a type of specific game that is advantageous to the player is made easier to execute based on the fact that the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result are discriminated as overlapping by the discrimination means, compared to a case where the specific game is not discriminated as overlapping.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 has the effect of diversifying games by granting players benefits corresponding to various discrimination results, since specific types of games that are advantageous to the player are likely to be executed by overlapping discrimination results.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that in gaming machine B1 or B2, the setting control means is configured to be able to set the specific setting during the period in which the discrimination means discriminates whether the result is the first discrimination result after discriminating that the result is the second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B3 has the effect of making a specific setting during the period in which, when the second discrimination result is determined, it is determined whether the result is the first discrimination result, and therefore it is possible to determine whether the result is the first discrimination result in a state in which the specific setting has been made, and thus making it possible to make discriminations in a variety of states.

<Feature C Group> (The degree of advantage when winning the time-saving jackpot during the time-saving state is varied depending on the time-saving trigger)
a first determination result obtained by the determination means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means being a specific first determination result; and a game state setting means for setting a second game state in which the determination by the determination means is more likely to be performed than in a first game state, the game state setting means being capable of executing at least a first setting for setting the second game state after the bonus game execution means is terminated, and a second setting for setting the second game state without executing the bonus game based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means being a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the gaming machine being capable of varying a selection ratio of the type of bonus game to be executed based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means during the second game state being the first determination result according to the setting type.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, when an advantageous state is set, although there is an effect that the game win/loss lottery is more likely to be held, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because the same benefit is always awarded if the game win/loss lottery results in a win during the advantageous state. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to gaming machine C1, the selection ratio for the type of bonus game is variable depending on the set type, so even the same second game state can be made different, which has the effect of diversifying the game and increasing interest in the game without having to set many game states.

In gaming machine C1, the second game state is set to continue until a termination condition is met, and gaming machine C2 is characterized in that, when the bonus game is executed while the second setting is set, it is easy to set it so that the period until the termination condition is met after the bonus game is executed is extended.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 has the effect of lengthening the period during which the second gaming state is set by making the second setting, which creates an increased interest in the period until the end condition is set when a bonus game is executed in the second gaming state.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that in gaming machine C1 or C2, the discrimination means regulates the discrimination of the second discrimination result depending on the gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C1 and C2, gaming machine C3 has the effect of increasing interest in the set gaming state and creating anticipation that a gaming state in which the second discrimination result can be discerned will be set, since the second discrimination result is not determined by the gaming state.

<Feature D group> (The more you get into it, the easier it is to set advantageous time-saving when time-saving is established)
a game state setting means for setting the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition when the second game state is set, and the gaming machine has setting information discrimination means for discriminating setting information that can be set when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, and is capable of setting the second game state in which the end condition is less likely to be established after the bonus game is ended when the setting information discrimination means discriminates second setting information that is set later than the first setting information,

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to gaming machine D1, the longer the period during which the second game state is set, the more difficult it becomes for the end condition to be met when a bonus game is played. This makes it possible to alternate between setting a period during which the player expects a bonus game to be played and a period during which the player does not expect a bonus game to be played, which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine D2, which is characterized in that it has a setting information setting means capable of setting the setting information based on the fact that the discrimination means has determined that a specific second discrimination result different from the specific first discrimination result in the gaming machine D1, and the setting information setting means is configured to be capable of setting setting information corresponding to the type of setting information that has been set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, gaming machine D2 has the effect of being able to regularly vary the setting information set according to the history of the setting information, making it easy to determine the period during which the second gaming state is set.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that in gaming machine D1 or D2, the discrimination means regulates the discrimination of the second discrimination result depending on the gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 and D2, gaming machine D3 has the effect of making the player more interested in the set gaming state and anticipating the setting of a gaming state in which the second discrimination result can be discerned, since the second discrimination result is not determined by the gaming state.

<Feature E group> (Special chart 1 that can execute the big win lottery + time-saving lottery, and special chart 2 that can execute the big win lottery + small win lottery)
a first benefit granting means for granting a first benefit when a result of the first benefit executed by the first benefit execution means is a first benefit result, and a second benefit different from the first benefit when the result of the first benefit execution is a second benefit result different from the first benefit result; a second benefit granting means for granting a second benefit when the result of the second benefit execution by the second benefit execution means is a third benefit result, and a third benefit different from the first benefit and the second benefit when the result of the second benefit execution is a fourth benefit result different from the third benefit result;

In the past, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a ball into a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special benefit that is advantageous to the player is awarded. A configuration has been proposed that can execute a first lottery and a second lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the bonus awarded if a player wins is the same whether the first lottery is held or the second lottery is held, which can lead to the game becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine E1 is configured to be able to award different benefits when the first judgment is made and when the second judgment is made, which has the effect of encouraging the player to play in order to make different judgments, and preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Feature F group> (If a second advantageous condition is established between the establishment of a first advantageous condition and the establishment of the first advantageous state, a specific advantageous state can be set)
A gaming machine having a first judgment means capable of performing a first judgment to determine that a first condition has been established, a first state setting means capable of setting a first advantageous state based on the first judgment means determining that the first condition has been established, a second judgment means capable of performing a second judgment to determine that a second condition different from the first condition has been established, and a second state setting means capable of setting a second advantageous state based on the second judgment means determining that the second condition has been established, characterized in that the gaming machine F1 has a third state setting means capable of setting a third advantageous state that is more advantageous to a player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state based on the second judgment means determining that the second condition has been established between the time when the first judgment means determines that the first condition has been established and the time when the first state setting means sets the first advantageous state.

In the past, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a ball into a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special benefit that is advantageous to the player is awarded. A configuration has been proposed that can execute a first lottery and a second lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, whether the first lottery is executed or the second lottery is executed, if the lottery result is one in which a bonus is awarded, the corresponding bonus is simply awarded, creating the problem that gameplay can become monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent gameplay from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine F1, a first advantageous state is set based on the first condition being met, and a second advantageous state is set based on the second condition being met. Then, if the second condition is met between the time the first condition is met and the time the first advantageous state is set, a third advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set. This has the effect of keeping the player interested in the timing at which the first condition is met and the timing at which the second condition is met, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Feature Group G> (Advantageous lottery is executed at specific intervals)
a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting the second game state based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a second judgment result different from the first judgment result, the game state setting means being capable of setting the first game state based on the establishment of a termination condition in a state in which the second game state is set, and being capable of setting a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a third judgment result different from the first judgment result and the second judgment result.

In the past, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the same winning/losing lottery is always executed, which can lead to monotony in gameplay. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent gameplay from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine G1, while the second gaming state is set, it is difficult to set the third gaming state, so that the player aims to play a game in which the third gaming state is set during the period in which the first gaming state is set. This has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous, since it is possible to execute a game with a different degree of advantage depending on the gaming situation.

A gaming machine G2, characterized in that in the gaming machine G1, the discrimination means is capable of executing the discrimination so that the probability that the result of the discrimination will be the third discrimination result is lower than the probability that the result of the discrimination will be the second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G1, gaming machine G2 has a higher probability of obtaining the second determination result than the third determination result, and therefore allows the player to play with the aim of obtaining the third gaming state, while avoiding the game state transitioning to the second gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain the third gaming state, as a result of the determination means determining the second determination result. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine G3 is characterized in that it has a termination condition setting means capable of setting, as the termination condition, at least a first termination condition that can be established based on the number of times the determination by the determination means executed in a state in which the second gaming state is set has reached a predetermined number of times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines G1 and G2, gaming machine G3 provides the following effect. That is, since the second gaming state can be ended when the number of determinations made during the second gaming state reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to perform determination by the determination means in the first gaming state at least at a specific period. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine G4, characterized in that in the gaming machine G3, the end condition setting means is capable of setting a second end condition that can be established based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means being a specific judgment result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G3, gaming machine G4 has the effect of providing the player with an unexpected gameplay by ending the second game state at an interval shorter than the specific period when the second ending condition is met.

Gaming machine G5 is characterized in that in any of gaming machines G1 to G4, the discrimination means is capable of executing the discrimination such that the probability that the result of the discrimination executed during the second gaming state will be the third discrimination result is lower than the probability that the result of the discrimination executed during the first gaming state will be the third discrimination result.

Gaming machine G5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines G1 to G4. That is, since the third gaming state is more likely to be set in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state, it has the effect of allowing the player to play in the hope that a determination will be made in a situation where the second gaming state is not set.

<Feature H group> (You can set time-savings that are better to finish and time-savings that are better not to finish)
a type setting means for setting, as setting types for setting the second game state by the game state setting means, at least a first setting for setting the second game state after the bonus game execution means is terminated, and a second setting for setting the second game state without executing the bonus game based on the result of the judgment executed by the judgment means being a second judgment result different from the first judgment result; and

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the advantageous state is simply set after the bonus game is executed, which creates the problem of the game becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine H1 makes it possible to set a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state and a gaming state that is less advantageous than the first gaming state, which has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Technical Concept of 5068>
<Feature A group> (If the number of times the special chart 2 lottery is performed using the special chart 2 reservation acquired during the time reduction exceeds a certain number of times, the probability of receiving a favorable bonus by the special chart 2 lottery increases)
a setting control means for causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that the specific game is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating the second discrimination result when a specific period is set.

According to gaming machine A1, when a specific period is set, it is possible to determine that the result is the second judgment, and therefore when a specific period is set, the result is determined to be the second judgment, and the specific setting is set, so that the specific setting is set at a timing different from normal times, and this has the effect of increasing interest in the game by not only executing a specific game, but also increasing the expectation for the period in which the specific period is set.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine A2 is characterized in that it has a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, the acquisition means is capable of acquiring first information as the information based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, and is capable of acquiring second information as the information based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means, and the discrimination means is configured to be able to discriminate the second discrimination result based on the second information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 is configured so that the second judgment result can be determined by having the ball enter the second ball entry means, so that the value of the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means can be varied, and when a specific period is set, the game can be played as if the second information was stored, and there is an effect of increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the game.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the specific setting set based on the second discrimination result being determined in gaming machine A1 or A2 is configured to be set for a longer period than the specific setting set after the specific game is played.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A1 and A2, gaming machine A3 makes it possible to vary the period during which a specific setting is set depending on the results of the determination, which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing interest.

<Feature B group> (If you win both the jackpot and the time-saving bonus in one special drawing, you will receive more special bonuses than if you won only one of them)
a setting control means for causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is obtained, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating between the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result; a setting control means for causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is obtained, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating between the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result in a redundant manner.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine B1 is configured to be able to discriminate between the first and second discrimination results in a redundant manner, so that a specific setting can be set even when the specific condition is not met, and this has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the timing at which the specific setting is set.

A gaming machine B2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1, a type of specific game that is advantageous to the player is made easier to execute based on the fact that the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result are discriminated as overlapping by the discrimination means, compared to a case where the specific game is not discriminated as overlapping.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 has the effect of diversifying games by granting players benefits corresponding to various discrimination results, since specific types of games that are advantageous to the player are likely to be executed by overlapping discrimination results.

Gaming machine B4 is characterized in that in gaming machine B1 or B2, the setting control means is configured to be able to set the specific setting during the period in which the discrimination means discriminates whether the result is the first discrimination result after discriminating that the result is the second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B4 has the effect of making a specific setting during the period in which, when the second discrimination result is determined, it is determined whether the result is the first discrimination result, and therefore it is possible to determine whether the result is the first discrimination result in a state in which the specific setting has been made, and thus making it possible to make discriminations in a variety of states.

<Feature C Group> (The degree of advantage when winning the time-saving jackpot during the time-saving state is varied depending on the time-saving trigger)
a first determination result obtained by the determination means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means being a specific first determination result; and a game state setting means for setting a second game state in which the determination by the determination means is more likely to be performed than in a first game state, the game state setting means being capable of executing at least a first setting for setting the second game state after the bonus game execution means is terminated, and a second setting for setting the second game state without executing the bonus game based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means being a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the gaming machine being capable of varying a selection ratio of the type of bonus game to be executed based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means during the second game state being the first determination result according to the setting type.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, when an advantageous state is set, although there is an effect that the game win/loss lottery is more likely to be held, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because the same benefit is always awarded if the game win/loss lottery results in a win during the advantageous state. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to gaming machine C1, the selection ratio for the type of bonus game is variable depending on the set type, so even the same second game state can be made different, which has the effect of diversifying the game and increasing interest in the game without having to set many game states.

In gaming machine C1, the second game state is set to continue until a termination condition is met, and gaming machine C2 is characterized in that, when the bonus game is executed while the second setting is set, it is easy to set it so that the period until the termination condition is met after the bonus game is executed is extended.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 has the effect of lengthening the period during which the second gaming state is set by making the second setting, which creates an increased interest in the period until the end condition is set when a bonus game is executed in the second gaming state.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that in gaming machine C1 or C2, the discrimination means regulates the discrimination of the second discrimination result depending on the gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C1 and C2, gaming machine C3 has the effect of increasing interest in the set gaming state and creating anticipation that a gaming state in which the second discrimination result can be discerned will be set, since the second discrimination result is not determined by the gaming state.

<Feature D group> (The more you get into it, the easier it is to set advantageous time-saving when time-saving is established)
a game state setting means for setting the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition when the second game state is set, and the gaming machine has setting information discrimination means for discriminating setting information that can be set when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, and is capable of setting the second game state in which the end condition is less likely to be established after the bonus game is ended when the setting information discrimination means discriminates second setting information that is set later than the first setting information,

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to gaming machine D1, the longer the period during which the second game state is set, the more difficult it becomes for the end condition to be met when a bonus game is played. This makes it possible to alternate between setting a period during which the player expects a bonus game to be played and a period during which the player does not expect a bonus game to be played, which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine D2, which is characterized in that it has a setting information setting means capable of setting the setting information based on the fact that the discrimination means has determined that a specific second discrimination result different from the specific first discrimination result in the gaming machine D1, and the setting information setting means is configured to be capable of setting setting information corresponding to the type of setting information that has been set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, gaming machine D2 has the effect of being able to regularly vary the setting information set according to the history of the setting information, making it easy to determine the period during which the second gaming state is set.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that in gaming machine D1 or D2, the discrimination means regulates the discrimination of the second discrimination result depending on the gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 and D2, gaming machine D3 has the effect of making the player more interested in the set gaming state and anticipating the setting of a gaming state in which the second discrimination result can be discerned, since the second discrimination result is not determined by the gaming state.

<Feature E group> (Special chart 1 that can execute the big win lottery + time-saving lottery, and special chart 2 that can execute the big win lottery + small win lottery)
a first benefit granting means for granting a first benefit when a result of the first benefit executed by the first benefit execution means is a first benefit result, and a second benefit granting means for granting a second benefit different from the first benefit when the result of the first benefit execution is a second benefit result, the gaming machine further comprising: second benefit granting means for granting a second benefit different from the first benefit when the result of the second benefit execution by the second benefit execution means is a specific second benefit result, and a third benefit different from the first benefit and the second benefit when the result of the second benefit execution is a fourth benefit result different from the third benefit result, the gaming machine being configured such that the third benefit is not granted based on the first benefit execution by the first benefit execution means, and the second benefit is not granted based on the second benefit execution by the second benefit execution means.

In the past, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a ball into a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special benefit that is advantageous to the player is awarded. A configuration has been proposed that can execute a first lottery and a second lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the bonus awarded if a player wins is the same whether the first lottery is held or the second lottery is held, which can lead to the game becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine E1 is configured to be able to award different benefits when the first judgment is made and when the second judgment is made, which has the effect of encouraging the player to play in order to make different judgments, and preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Feature F group> (If a second advantageous condition is established between the establishment of a first advantageous condition and the establishment of the first advantageous state, a specific advantageous state can be set)
a display means for displaying first identification information showing a result of the first determination made by the first determination means; a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and then statically displaying the first identification information in a manner showing the first determination result; a second determination means for performing a second determination; and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information showing a result of the second determination made by the second determination means and then statically displaying the second identification information in a manner showing the second determination result. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the gaming machine F1 is configured such that when the dynamic display of the first identification information is started, a specific gaming state is set when an advantageous gaming state that can be advantageous to a player is set, and when the specific gaming state is set, the second determination means makes it easy to determine the second determination result that is advantageous to the player.

In the past, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a ball into a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special benefit that is advantageous to the player is awarded. A configuration has been proposed that can execute a first lottery and a second lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, whether the first lottery is executed or the second lottery is executed, if the lottery result is such that a bonus is awarded, the corresponding bonus is simply awarded, which creates a problem of gameplay becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents gameplay from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine F1, a first advantageous state is set based on the first condition being met, and a second advantageous state is set based on the second condition being met. Then, if the second condition is met between the time the first condition is met and the time the first advantageous state is set, a third advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set. This has the effect of keeping the player interested in the timing at which the first condition is met and the timing at which the second condition is met, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine F1, in the dynamic display of the first identification information in which the advantageous gaming state is set, the dynamic display mode is controlled to be selected from a group of dynamic display modes in which a dynamic display of a period longer than the period in which the dynamic display of the second identification information executed in the specific gaming state can be executed multiple times is likely to be selected, and when the specific gaming state is set, a dynamic display mode is selected as the dynamic display of the second identification information from a group of dynamic display modes in which a dynamic display mode configured with a dynamic display period shorter than the normal gaming state is likely to be selected. Gaming machine F2 characterized in that.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F1, gaming machine F2 has the effect of selecting a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of the first identification information, thereby allowing a specific gaming state to be set long, and in that specific gaming state, the dynamic display period of the second identification information is set short, thereby executing the dynamic display of the second identification information multiple times, which makes it easier to motivate the player to execute the dynamic display of the second identification information more frequently, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine F3 is characterized in that, when the specific gaming state is set in gaming machine F1 or F2, a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous gaming state can be set based on the specific second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F1 and F2, gaming machine F3 has the effect of diversifying play, because a gaming state that is more advantageous than the advantageous gaming state is set in the specific gaming state when the second identification information becomes a specific second discrimination result, making it possible to vary the benefits given to the player depending on the remaining period of the specific gaming state.

A gaming machine F4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines F1 to F3, the dynamic display of the second identification information is displayed in a frozen state, and the dynamic display of the first identification information that is displayed dynamically when a specific condition is met can be forcibly frozen so that the advantageous gaming state is not set.

According to gaming machine F4, in any of gaming machines F1 to F3, the advantageous gaming state that would be established by the dynamic display of the second identification information can be forcibly discarded, which has the effect of diversifying the game.

Gaming machine F5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines F1 to F4, when the special game state is set and the dynamic display of the second identification information ends to execute a bonus game, the dynamic display period of the dynamically displayed first identification information is interrupted, and is resumed after the bonus game ends, so that the dynamic display can be executed.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines F1 to F4, gaming machine F5 has the effect that during a bonus game, the dynamic display of the first identification information is suspended and then resumed after the bonus game ends, so that the bonus game is executed, reducing expectations for a favorable gaming state and suppressing defects that reduce the value of the bonus game.

Gaming machine F6 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines F1 to F5, the advantageous gaming state can be set based on at least a first setting condition that is set when the first identification information is dynamically displayed so that a bonus game is executed after the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and a second setting condition that is set when the first identification information is dynamically displayed so that the bonus game is not executed.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, gaming machine F6 is configured so that an advantageous gaming state is set even if a bonus game is not executed, making it difficult to predict the timing at which the advantageous gaming state is set, which has the effect of adding a sense of novelty to the game.

<Feature Group G> (Advantageous lottery is executed at specific intervals)
a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting the second game state based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a second judgment result different from the first judgment result, the game state setting means being capable of setting the first game state based on the establishment of a termination condition in a state in which the second game state is set, and being capable of setting a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a third judgment result different from the first judgment result and the second judgment result.

In the past, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the same winning/losing lottery is always executed, which can lead to monotony in gameplay. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent gameplay from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine G1, while the second gaming state is set, it is difficult to set the third gaming state, so that the player aims to play a game in which the third gaming state is set during the period in which the first gaming state is set. This has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous, since it is possible to execute a game with a different degree of advantage depending on the gaming situation.

A gaming machine G2, characterized in that in the gaming machine G1, the discrimination means is capable of executing the discrimination so that the probability that the result of the discrimination will be the third discrimination result is lower than the probability that the result of the discrimination will be the second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G1, gaming machine G2 has a higher probability of obtaining the second determination result than the third determination result, and therefore allows the player to play with the aim of obtaining the third gaming state, while avoiding the game state transitioning to the second gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain the third gaming state, as a result of the determination means determining the second determination result. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine G3 is characterized in that it has a termination condition setting means capable of setting, as the termination condition, at least a first termination condition that can be established based on the number of times the determination by the determination means executed in a state in which the second gaming state is set has reached a predetermined number of times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines G1 and G2, gaming machine G3 provides the following effect. That is, since the second gaming state can be ended when the number of determinations made during the second gaming state reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to perform determination by the determination means in the first gaming state at least at a specific period. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine G4, characterized in that in the gaming machine G3, the end condition setting means is capable of setting a second end condition that can be established based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means being a specific judgment result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G3, gaming machine G4 has the effect of providing the player with an unexpected gameplay by ending the second game state at an interval shorter than the specific period when the second ending condition is met.

Gaming machine G5 is characterized in that in any of gaming machines G1 to G4, the discrimination means is capable of executing the discrimination such that the probability that the result of the discrimination executed during the second gaming state will be the third discrimination result is lower than the probability that the result of the discrimination executed during the first gaming state will be the third discrimination result.

Gaming machine G5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines G1 to G4. That is, since the third gaming state is more likely to be set in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state, it has the effect of allowing the player to play in the hope that a determination will be made in a situation where the second gaming state is not set.

<Feature H group> (You can set time-savings that are better to finish and time-savings that are better not to finish)
A gaming machine H1 having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the identification information showing that a specific discrimination result is displayed, and a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, characterized in that the gaming machine H1 has a state setting means for setting a first state in which a game state advantageous to the player is set when a termination condition for terminating the setting of the second game state is satisfied, and a second state in which a game state which is more playable than a case in which the game ends when the termination condition is not satisfied is set.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the advantageous state is simply set after the bonus game is executed, which creates the problem of the game becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine H1, when the second gaming state is set, the expectation of the completion condition being met can be varied by setting the first and second states, which has the effect of varying the interest due to the end of the second gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine H2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H1, when the first state is set, the first gaming state is set by the completion of the termination condition, and the second state is set based on the second gaming state being set from the state in which the first gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H1, gaming machine H2 sets a second gaming state in which a first state is set, then the first gaming state is set, and then the second state is set. This has the effect of making it easier to continue playing while gradually increasing expectations, as advantageous gaming states are set depending on the order in which the gaming states are set.

Gaming machine H3 is characterized in that in gaming machine H1 or H2, the second gaming state is configured to be set based on a first condition that can be set when the identification information is dynamically displayed so that the bonus game is executed, and a second condition that can be set when the identification information is dynamically displayed so that the bonus game is not executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines H1 and H2, gaming machine H3 has the effect of diversifying the timing at which the second gaming state is set, providing a fresh gaming experience.

<Feature I group> (When the special drawing 2 is performed under normal circumstances, a penalty is also imposed on the special drawing 1 for a specified period of time)
A gaming machine I1 having a first discrimination means capable of performing a first discrimination and a second discrimination means capable of performing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination, characterized in that the gaming machine I1 has a setting means capable of setting a first setting that can be set when the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means are discriminated in a first order, and a second setting that can be set when the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means are discriminated in a second order different from the first order.

In the past, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which multiple triggers are used to determine whether a player has won or not, in a predetermined order, and the player is notified based on the results of the determination, and a special bonus is awarded to the player when a specific notification such as a win is made (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, even if the order in which hit and other determinations are made is different, games are played based on the results of each determination, and changing the order does not result in games with different playability being played, which can lead to the problem of the game becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent games from becoming monotonous.

With gaming machine I1, different settings are made depending on the order in which the first and second judgments are performed, which has the effect of making the player interested in the order in which the judgments are performed and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine I2 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state in gaming machine I1, and the gaming state setting means is capable of setting the second gaming state based on the first determination being made, and is capable of setting the first gaming state based on the first determination being made next.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I1, gaming machine I2 makes it possible to set the first gaming state periodically, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by varying the gaming state at regular intervals.

Gaming machine I3 is characterized in that in gaming machine I2, the gaming state setting means can set the second gaming state based on the second determination being made, and can set the first gaming state based on the second determination being made next.

By alternately executing the first and second judgments, it is possible to continuously set the first game state, which has the effect of making the order of judgments interesting and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine I4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines I1 to I3, in the first setting, a first bonus game is executed based on the specific first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result, and in the second setting, a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game is executed based on the specific first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, gaming machine I4 has the effect of giving an advantage to the player by setting a second setting, and of varying the interest of the game depending on the order of judgment.

Gaming machine I5 is characterized in that in any of gaming machines I2 to I4, when the second judgment is made following the first judgment that triggered the setting of the second gaming state, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting the first gaming state based on the establishment of a setting condition that can be established by at least making the first judgment multiple times.

<Feature J group> (Three game states can be set: normal state, advantageous state, and super advantageous state, and it is possible to transition from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the super advantageous state, but it is difficult to transition from the advantageous state to the super advantageous state)
a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including a second game state which is more advantageous to a player than a first game state and a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting the second game state after the bonus game ends, and ... third game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, the discrimination means is capable of determining the second discrimination result more easily when the discrimination is performed in a state where the first game state is set than when the discrimination is performed in a state where the second game state is set, and the gaming machine is configured such that the third game state is more easily set when the discrimination is performed in a state where the first game state is set than when the discrimination is performed in a state where the second game state is set.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines that allows players to switch between multiple game states by setting multiple game states and switching between the game states when certain conditions such as a win are met, thereby increasing motivation to play (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

Furthermore, some machines are configured to be able to set multiple game states with different degrees of advantage to the player, and by gradually switching from a game state with a low degree of advantage to a game state with a high degree of advantage, the player is encouraged to aim to switch to a game state that is even more advantageous than the current one, thereby maintaining a high desire to play.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, if the gaming state was switched periodically, the player would not quickly become bored with the game and could maintain a high desire to play. However, if the gaming state did not switch and a gaming state with a low degree of advantage continued for a long period of time, the player's desire to play would drop significantly, which was an issue. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

According to gaming machine J1, a determination is made that the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state, is more likely to set the third gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, than the second gaming state. Therefore, for a player in the first gaming state, a game aiming to set the second gaming state after a bonus game is executed and a game aiming to set the third gaming state can be executed in parallel, which has the effect of providing a gaming machine in which the player does not quickly become bored with the game.

In addition, by continuing the first gaming state for a long period of time without switching to the second gaming state, the possibility of the gaming state switching to the third gaming state can be increased, which has the effect of preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing even if the first gaming state, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues.

Gaming machine J2 is characterized in that in gaming machine J1, the discrimination means can execute a first discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and can execute a second discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the establishment of the second discrimination condition is restricted, and in the third gaming state, a setting is executable in which the establishment of the second discrimination condition is permitted.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine J1, gaming machine J2 has the effect of varying the gameplay method and adding a new element of novelty to the gameplay, since the ease with which the discrimination conditions are met varies for each type depending on the game state.

Gaming machine J3 is characterized in that in gaming machine J1 or J2, the gaming state setting means is configured to be capable of setting the second gaming state when the second determination determines that a specific determination result has been obtained when the third gaming state has been set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines J1 and J2, gaming machine J3 has the effect of being able to transition to the second gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state, even after the third gaming state, allowing the player to continue in an advantageous state for a longer period of time.

<Feature K group> (The performance mode of the "Save reserved" performance during time-saving is changed based on the reserved pre-reading result)
a first game state and a second game state that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first game state, based on a condition that can be established based on the information; and a specific effect execution means configured to execute a specific effect that is not executed in the first game state when the second game state is set, based on a first condition that is established based on a result of the pre-determination means by the pre-determination means.

In the past, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which information such as random numbers is obtained when a gaming ball enters a starting hole or the like, and a lottery is run based on the random numbers to determine whether or not to award a beneficial bonus to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

Furthermore, a configuration was proposed that allows the acquired information to be stored up to a predetermined number, and allows the game state to be set to a first game state in which it is difficult to get the game ball into the starting hole, etc., and a second game state in which it is easier to get the game ball into the starting hole, etc., than in the first game state.

In such conventional gaming machines, the most advantageous play for the player is likely to be to end the second gaming state with as much information stored as possible, so players play in the second gaming state in a way that allows them to get as many gaming balls into the starting hole or the like.

However, depending on the content of the lottery based on already acquired information, it may be possible to acquire the right to set the second gaming state again even after the currently set second gaming state has ended, which may lead to the player playing a game that unnecessarily puts many gaming balls into the starting hole, etc. There is also the problem that the game becomes monotonous just before the end of the second gaming state, reducing interest in the game. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest in the game.

According to gaming machine K1, it is possible to quickly identify that the first condition has been met by executing a specific effect based on the results of a pre-determination during the second gaming state, which has the effect of increasing the value of the second gaming state being set and improving the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine K2, in which a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are arranged as the ball entry means in the gaming machine K1, the discrimination means executes a first discrimination based on the ball entering the first ball entry means, and is capable of executing a second discrimination that is more favorable than the first discrimination based on the ball entering the second ball entry means, and the second gaming state makes it easier to change the variable means from the first state to the second state.

In addition to the effects of game machine K1, game machine K2 has the effect of increasing the frequency with which the ball is scored into the second ball scoring means in the second game state, thereby enhancing the player's interest.

Gaming machine K3 is characterized in that in gaming machine K1 or K2, a first end condition and a second end condition that is more advantageous to the player than the first end condition can be set as end conditions for the second gaming state, and the first condition can be established based on the fact that the second end condition is determined to be established by the advance determination.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines K1 and K2, gaming machine K3 has the effect of allowing more information to be stored and more advantageous second judgments to be made by satisfying the first condition, so that the execution of a specific presentation makes it possible to determine early on that the second judgment will be made more frequently, thereby raising expectations for the game in advance.

Among the gaming machines described above, gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the necessary condition being that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the gaming medium include coins, medals, etc.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which is operated to launch a ball into a predetermined gaming area, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. Also, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) according to the number of winning balls is given.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fusion gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop being a specific identification information as a necessary condition, using balls as a gaming medium, requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-217766 A).
However, there is a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a discrimination means capable of making a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a first discrimination result, and a setting means capable of setting a specific setting until an end condition is satisfied based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied after the specific game is executed, and has a setting control means capable of causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that the second discrimination result is different from the first discrimination result, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating between the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result in a redundant manner.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1, in which a type of specific game that is more advantageous to the player is made easier to execute based on the fact that the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result are discriminated as overlapping by the discrimination means, compared to a case in which the overlapping is not discriminated as the specific game.
A gaming machine of technical idea 3 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, in which the setting control means is configured to be able to set the specific setting during a period of time during which the discrimination means discriminates whether the result is the first discrimination result after discriminating the second discrimination result.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the gaming machine has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a discrimination means capable of making a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a first discrimination result, and a setting means capable of setting a specific setting until an end condition is satisfied based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied after the specific game is executed, and has a setting control means capable of causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that the second discrimination result is different from the first discrimination result, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating between the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result in a redundant manner.
This has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 1, the following effect is achieved: That is, based on the fact that the first determination result and the second determination result are determined to be overlapping by the determination means, a type of specific game that is more advantageous to the player is made easier to execute than in the case where the overlapping is not determined as the specific game.
This has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.
The gaming machine according to Technical Concept 3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to Technical Concept 1 or 2. That is, the setting control means is configured to be capable of setting the specific setting during a period during which the determination means determines whether the result is the first determination result after determining that the result is the second determination result.
This has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
S11506 Part of the first specific control execution means, part of the second specific control execution means
Y402 first discrimination means
Y8202 second discrimination means

Claims (1)

a first determination means capable of performing a first determination for determining whether a first condition is satisfied;
a first specific control execution means for executing a first specific control indicating that a predetermined game advantageous to a player is likely to be executed in response to the first determination means determining that the first condition is established, after a predetermined period of time set in accordance with the first condition being established has elapsed;
a second determination means capable of performing a second determination for determining that a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied;
and a second specific control execution means for executing a second specific control which is different from the first specific control and indicates that the predetermined game advantageous to a player is likely to be executed in response to the second determination means determining that the second condition is established,
The gaming machine includes:
In a situation where the first condition and the second condition are not satisfied, if the second condition is satisfied for the first time within the specified period set in response to the first condition that is satisfied, the degree of advantage of the predetermined game executed in accordance with the satisfied first condition and the satisfied second condition is likely to be higher than if the first condition is satisfied after the first second condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the second judgment multiple times within the specified period .

Images